Skip to main content

Full text of "Proceedings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales"

See other formats 


Lid Perey rt 
eri chabehel etal seiejadeaeh aysh2030-40a) oP eh shoboheho leu sichehonetonoioiahel 
ater Fee eer ucheicdatebeie? Tee ee eee aoa ehohoiebed cabt each cieheiodebed Tiana hahah Gheholeiahededahebaiaiobebeiehes 
ee eee errr av at re deal Cl ehshabehstehelaiiahaiel APPLE re rk tre ye 


jah ei 
necator sapere eth eR LR eR ar eRe a 
at Pure bru ranb ee rer) siehahadehobeted sok bbe obebeieiot: ea a a db cdch koh bedehehebhod cided 


Futebol Se Tee he aahobebadallebnisimdoiadeaabebedellaiel i i de he btn tee hen! | al 
eit i pepetebededehaleieheiapeiedaislal=pallsbanes i ahsbabshehchenedehon. 


Lyd ert 


svibetbolhalbsiapel a\) LLU RED eet hha 

teper sit veh eh si i *i ihe tHe bur ye MM poet aad aisdededshrc stsiirbaievat: sbsiall spel A ettet tat Det Bet ait at ene eisiclabenabsieiebebebebsisielabehedeheh elieiphereh 
heaegapetlal sia ob hai atiah rere ruben ST eer eta sidaiabetelibeeballt PULP Ure hapopeuri arbre. LaLa Lk eur ate il pln ae 

Pe T Nee eee er el chats ol alah ehahahshehtbaieiedsheheiel veh thai) 


ohtiehota { ion! hs epeneiavebeisirsisnt 
‘ Gehsieiaie ah ath toe TO ee ashejen oy emerald shal PE a eee licbehehadedehebebates 
ratatisatish spettaabalat heheiels papoperts ictboiadetha Pree err rh hee Uin-eeebn rhbarerte Dainese ser ner ifr es NE a eee eee ee east ahsishedeiehehehebelsheis iPerererentye 6 
* jeladepetots sitetial att tt eee cna eiiohedahedenadepell bol pati -liehabedel) stil ada a isi pa TT ee eee esiohaledecsdeben astohabadapabwhabenehahadehegal 

poheneitei) anedaibotatiaimyaiarel stated te eee e eee ee lishetebehedshallebaiensbalepel eieial 


AehchaheLsiabehe) ‘ 
jriehanairdabehaiei shabbat foal atei t= Cad Halednday abansiaiad-ab silo sry reek are 
alah sh st se38 ott hehehe a) pi alien strata ete rey a eaededadenepeheichehoiedshepsiel eri ehedehbbchehohchshnhadabiehohelebenen. 


reburbe 


r) har hb drt Ljedabopaiabslaneitaie Ta o() | "| tf 
* anes Neer ee eee ee sch eheioiinewiaiels pee ett DRT eee ee dsdakehebadebehaiejeioieiais LIT Lr et Lt ena nidbel frig 
Hehe beharab stint vps stead a poised a4 Seta iaiahessieds sie dish ba Dallsibst shebelieiebedallrindeis abst at eT ee er eee ree seisleiatshatetebsiorst saan sihateiy 
; icbsbodsiedabeibaleh ibid nat Bee eT eee iat edi oiebehalshetenel tare PTAA Bary abraded at ge Ug drier WAP SEU. Meer rr dunurk bdeerth 
hurmnunenyrur ee hodahoh oketiel CEO eee ee gahehsheiadeieladalsiaieneiais Jhb ea nearer brn bare sunray UII Phd ra Laneeyatn iat 
j>)= rho drbaly ade et Pere eae A TT Te ee eet dD abelebehaleisieiehedehebelshelobelaik Peau erent elt roe ncn aL 
Pohshiaped ei stele loh a rte eye er i esetedarchshwhedshabsiehabeliehshehehal aojabeneimnelionsial treabotelsictnted st ciel staley sy rele 
- ME ee ee eee icant ohahenelpisheieleieleiel LER EbEheHEaeh Chol ebodolwhenehel Hahohan-apallef LeU brett rtpneyat 
bh aibep st Lune hy Pe a eer sasu-abeberei|oiatedabelbotlaijelel arcade Elrurea rear ed bh LL or eat gk pt 2EPUrL ein thre rb nun rit rere 
i is pou npeihai stellate Tet aT ee ee ee caea anata onehebetoieneliehel beibsiialteteieietetel sete et rier a ahsienahalanahoiehahaiedalensies 
aiotintet siete ste tee rere i A cisiehededehebabehehasaiehaberate hel Lee Pe UP LMU urc ha etihy 


Teak 
oh =i UV sisieieli bata ren avada (runnin Luar Mui bred 

fait Selyetha') joieteitshalabs) 9yiebel apoiaisi aie aitatiticisatisiaiovedphcaaioiaisistebeiskrhebababal iets PUMP LPG rn redseatec ret 

sivishetelstehsieiatiatal sir) te eer iehe) TUR Curran Lh rbd gare Lubes iiniitarebn pire eer ere etaea ts aU hshetedohadehedehesedehadecbehoreheietsbetabenabctet 
bolts ren un Pbnishaelsiaiabelsattiesuneashetsiehsisistctsnal ined ai abelbctetaboh tat Cert nents seeaat chan shatadehshatenageieialedeioneleheleiadeteies 
; aiefe ni) atiof alts ah bs doemiela tahiti sisgalesdisdnb stead puree Wat sella t Date et Me ith eh tishatehobeneteiisteiajsieleinhohsiel atehapaietseatsbelatiabapey 
Hodey whe nell \ inner ysnncre mnt purr Uprenenp jobaisiabshepsh stebansy bel si sUabaN Osea ee tr eae it istedalshebetesepah ebehsh -b-mtaQcinb~a(ahedahotehebaisieiatepelh itive 
atanrtbel eyelet meth age Ser Le Lnurenunurerinanert Teeter ro ioiahedad ebeiei ee eT Tee Te thehahebebebeien es atell el eI era ach aibeba tices shader ated 4 eu <3 Prete Peper FOU LrurLeun alert hp 
dada) ato8 -heuei tet e Peahas 49) shot shore isin tet bahahitatgetabaunsietetthel tol sdaDat tT ere eee eich eheHsnen sl abeietsheiaiaiel NO ee a ere es ahah ubgletee ob abedeheraiehehebebabelesataieiial 
vibepa pale { vb ahah alia? jal sbeltebaiielst = a treet ohsiatelanebeeianel oh sits b= tT Te ee re snihehebshatehoieiehehehatelopeleh eaeasdeechaeheaetehahededehebosedenehodebabahs 
oar unanbb eT Te Nee cichedaboiabataieiaiatelaietiohetolabaienel paneer sete eee eet Bh ebadeacheheloheheierehsbeheieiedeiellaiaieiel 

atitatstnentatucerabehsiered stersbeyapedabels(eiraistintstebsietstisin) sie ababohetadchaitabalatet 

Hua rs re RL yr tat re AL meus rr Lapeer 


ih eiehshatsiatat apes kete at tT ee eee lanekohed siadeseiahallshaieiedenel ohare 
se sates ispeucichsnehrhedohebeneisbeishaispe0 ous 
obayarail ahs put jee geiel caehahehehats Ce ae ee eet aeiahehebohenapehelt eel te Tee eee es casi snedabalsbeirioieialiehehaielah=pahelelensieit nr 
Vahsies LAURE rurenunntryrveinn nen ty Pee eT Tr eer a ae heheheh ehoieneneh sieieiepeiednls 
sa bibed ee ee ebehehateteiehepet olerertneay nape jaipnifnb alle inhiatiai Teeter Te eee tb chaheheleheiedehes Tere h bebehehoiaietabalsiehell els SI Pd eid baa Dr et 25 Fob 
° SOLU reinurinenprvnaiannaie etry Safesaied intel sieiolini=itaistsia tales p a eT eran Laehaheneiobeteraietntel 
purr er Sep burah oper Pe eT yee hadahsivielshersiehelabadeiaiahebobelel 
ya Aur Renee lara al etinte lb siohehaheraistebel eiehel babel) PEE? 
m siiotto aise eer eee e li eishehahedrianeiedebedsderetenabelspebsheiebsbahetel) 


pyr ra nk Jen 
P jae afel niedapetadatatisl lies batho si i iene tren edenehtholsiehenehehelad 
Lee PPLRL ALP yEr Uri ieuruLrunLeLh rurenb rerun durin biioiehedsiehabad UU rer het rh air be 

niishahedsbeiehatstistelle te ee Rieti a esohsbavebenagepaiaieiebenaiebrhelshadsbahahehejapaiehel) 


renee 


yerbarerts 
pare 

ceatatbeya laa 
chr 


Tht Re een ee eishepedeiadaiehen st 
ttt latinitas SHincrustnpnerer-ruinaurtnurl burke nit 
what obeioed sf 9h is nibaihs He lte( alata ile Tt ea eee sdehehepoteledebehehehenapel 
dei epagapepedet =) Ay ei eneisenha adel jaiatietianai sitaitichsiteh Snap ryeret atta ri paisa) sttabelaperslisbabeHebet sonatas joi et el ot tht ee pe ee aaa elactersheast es stebedohodepsnseshebs joists: 
H A I sha el ett eer odeiiahaieleleheljaiaialeiaieils Tee acaniahehadeheseieh il Fei el) ee eT eee i ieiobetosaiedebeiaieheteiahehel mbohosaisjepaie 
Hopetelbshene tet No er eee oneganeiphokebaieleiehshelbedseebetsheseres 


af sy-oped ot 
sthoges thasseenods 
spat admyetaped op ot 
orohyt rer 
rebar (ag ejobal 
ahabrfeedeata sHeH 


Sokol onal 
Pek epi rl renprerere ry Me , 
i f PT eee Lh adedabaheboteliaiaial Tee ee eee riehabalialeiabniell 
erates pais jais(sibes dab sie) ishaieh atten’ ichabetetiobellshsvehaparedstsistsiiatalataied o/s slsltl att tit te ST apedeiel issisteinis inten) aheperei pier ates taiehetebepetobatal)atets: 
jo0' wr nas cheilapajsiadel siehailetanatatela i as Ur Lr nt ern eee belatepeiedstoialsieiatsiorehstaisitiist tet tee ee ee ee lafedehaionedaiadspalalepeiebetsieledapeliad atoll pepoweres 
>) =i ihe))s 4 r sisiirintaisheteihshnd siciatatsiountctabrintabaltstatititati ap patesedavelshehaeeebedetabebebsbelahnlsisbetey aeAahehamebenehanehed clasubenes 
fa tire ty rigdehehebatejedsieiate senate dese? Cee ee reese ahedabohsioiabaisisiaiaieienels et ALPE ELIOT Lert 
rr ies ih obehehaheieholel Lb unbtan rere it bubs beeurbet-bet ie ibn Tee TT itd eh cdehebed ebeieiadedebelel ARO rete Meists pepsitaiel 
" 


Se eee tyapensiadeiehen=lit=t=ti tt te er Te eee ee eee odanadenafaiedeiiait ~iatistahenadedatshehsiiststel baht ty et chalabessienenelaleneiebeieeesaiegieaapelsiahajetrial 
eee hu cdodatedahelletehelebel rte eet eerie Beeb aieheteledobatehehebodeboncieiaiebeieisteled 


" aad 
eenabintyeee rurale sicbededadpaadehalet ei ntti TA LeL LPL LA rbeer br lnunirbinninudnubsy ety 
eve TALC Ue Uhuru nL burn eunbitieiaduannbe ie bn ietiy poretarririserececerecrsecuatevovevaurrove’ werre: 


spagotnha Brat 
yeuiienebcerneatyey cihehoiel fl 
peer oyehel 1" i Heth te a eT erase ieialanenenaney aieienetnl 
\ nt Hob mt ihe ititaeitien rt nf “fue eed arenes ee a atiatabat ca datana st ebterea alata taeatieieisatehe ede bo iciceciai teat ein tne ae pe ETE LUL UATE a oe ced Seheabshoboieieione 
bub : jihad abebettel sith ai =) a a4 baihans(beieed ai shale Fe ee erie ioianeierenansiansienagel isbeheiobcisiisiel sist stalls tata Pre Tee ease iadedeienshedsiedehshelatetaieiateiabedeianedadetial 
sea tpt wert MH SMM MURLEL PLLA ALLO ULAR dart ren bribiirt( piavelehatolal sistebsteiolstel sist stay ae tt eee ee cinhateiedebnieheherehstepoioleleiel 
het oth rf Te ea iiedshaheihebobeheliohobehehehehahedeieiahebeiely PU Ered perro 


Se eee ere eee es deseneh chebehebsheneheteled 


LS pelintabeh bra aeand bene tran bg ( 
te beeeet nity sist eee Tei ialdadaieisieneiohenetoleietaraisiels 

i ths i tith it dpieiiataiaistetel tatat PH rurcrieun purser ar nbn robin ue hunrihlabbidil nh aden snehevetenaigiandergs’ 

et I 


arte fal nh n jap ied aieihs i 
vi abe i shel oie poi of In Weheunenunierentrte Hieieiehaiedsisteioleted TURP brethren Pur R recent 
i vi isiedanetadaion shel ojel-h al HU LeLoLe aor errr PLP PU PLS rr hUburubtrubtnehibiie murruririhd ere 


ae 
une 
) h se ic CET ee eee ichabslchedehshapeishaiedaiedeieietel 
bviretapatisist stats hel ia} apaladeh el jaisileintedspetts| Miniciate rtsdeiai sfallehelsl yt et trie gedehsdabohaisenienetapabereler eee er eitaeneheiehedencaehederslepedetedahsdsiobeieshedel 
paietey jeiey sta HE re ee t4cd dakshohel el ehehaihs Petey te eer iobeiedesshadshotedaheleleiciaiehbeiene epeteiateseiats 


rpahaiatiolep apelin mi npesed et Lier aurLrinunLnbheei rent 
ohpeyaihe et eT Teh heponeiaisieielatet ‘ Nahr ren rere tanta pohatistats beiheibeietis tel tel te ea eT et Dee pcdsdebeseneianenereien jehedehstotaialelei-dtey obeieiel spatatetelolaps 
Le eee jelsiniatetclainiats potrhatel ohetsirarit ele) Teatrbrcrint hier rpnenbire cheba {rij oiisheted jai) 90801 0a ee ieee e i iehehaheneneheiensvaneyedes PE HELL DUS Or HULL ML ALb ors dae btenlb 
pafyatiits he isis od ahaizh ade) aiatelsdel sleds eee ee ier apehaiadanela estan enriet) iaieinneesgedetatote pailaielatistieishaieitenetall sh aieiel tate t eT nt ee ae ete e ee iehehaishabanedeieneneteheds 

4 tf ey Hp vans The hae tothe eorlbubb hubinLbachraaaree nhebebahapellepetibebaienebsusierepaist al sisladei let tere eta pete iehebsisheiohehebesatetens 
. jolt jenahniedapel shsiistatat teh aly eT tT ete ea aAriohsebalebalelstarersdeneieiedsiered=| DALAT SE EEE EEL e te ret 

shorataiied siedovetsiresiatedspevenavoneveveperer ity s: 


rishabodniholataienelatiinial dana toantetittaneasbeabsheteh rises! 
aehurea-n inners atiou nt 3 ey) 194 Hehellshaiieite| i H bial shaha eee te dace tells nhaibefaliadniai si sist ate Te ey ee iehebehedchenshehenotensiapetaieiesel 
taihatiad oii) ere ena DLN et eT er ee iedeliastieiaiieie) eeheintiel thre ay yetiod airid=ia i oiiatls tefl sisi sibstteb si ata eee ee eee sivheladaiarinnaieialedatsiebeteialeiaieteletes 
Arey tet Pein rn rk Dd En Fe TN eel ip Ldshedlehaheienenaradshelell TOTAAL ALLOER EL eh hl ETE EEE EET bd big rath 
Fee ert ocd siaiebeliebeichobederadsiebelebels Feet eee ee eerie nededt benenadesapedehebebeiedalbepetons 


rere Pe ei eitpersisiatsirhal 
NO a eto t eae lake errr 
sei Sishmiabaar tere jetski iad dishaliniaisiaisieneh abate Laititjaispsiodshetseisi 
Keble ren brunt pbb anit Ba eee ee baheheieiateleliaheiellpiaiaiaieteiel eT Tee ere tenth ehedabensiopenabeietebelietaiebaied 
Larter Lit mers py pete APELPLEEALE IL IL LEE 


Ma ieieleiahe 
PabeLrurunbrerr rt eae ihebed 
sin ganodenneabatel airy ab palind stab aishaladst sisiaiah jsieletaiabaiaiahaisihianalahcHatslt te aahmisiehedehedelal stelslanapahebaay otal. rerbiel airert 
Malseae tel) alisi al)adehaltailaiteiel Frororirureneni diner paiiedeleiahsiiaisl ates ee eee eee shaheiahshensieleysieishedeheiebehahevere BOP Rete te eae eee cgehehatahod shobebebel ebaiaherede 
banathoi hes ove pahieiellevaieial| aiet' Me tT ehtiabeledeieleih HO Meurer hprrrh-eLrleeLruhUurLeLieuaLnrLrerenepnirie preterit php etedoporepeb ad svorsiss pravetsesynrenrsren 
lnbetrUnuriblenk be bpndnp: ayer Wah) bre dbase en bp gad dren sof sil sem AUP einen naa a rer he ee ee Tee Poe chadaboded chebehehahonaieteteds 
iatistintiatiet =tntisitatielal shalt) mtisH sll ate eT tet a eee sahshadedadededalaieheteialiedahobriapaboheiahe) a! 
Sp oree aren on certo erea te tres taneee, 


Lau aruba tet leschehols 


Hos 
send seh pehahones oh ahatielmpaliat 


obate pelsiie 


REET ee Teer rere ea dchehehahahsiebatoheiehenaiesanaiedel 
sfeitalteiallsisie see ee eee eee ciaistavebsteiededaiedaieniohsbebebeiateieta habs tates 


nvneereenpelribeninbrt Snir 
| 2 


rhe(tai) sj apedeyal ci uiee peda’ , 
( rumen cetaba! 

Srumetrerervts , pape jeha¥oi aifobhetiaia TRU purULhue rule renee ur k rt artisan 

Pombval a htataeashedeie the Pie jainted si alsieiaindnts " pret Hae ete ist abebsdebaberst shal ihstetataiehatahaieiet aishai eles siapeleh dete a ee ye ie a ee osehehohshobe)epabetetsbeteteiei=tet 

| n avribete betel f mH Had statohebel seed TTT  aichehehehapanelielieierapeiahenel eh Heth et sel ioe Te eet eer ee iehabshehedeiebehabaiadbedeterel 

pellevenen eis dundee ei etehah: Pee Ashabohoheiataiabel bai jiabofonaed Shep atabetish Pelt ea eee a TT etre eee ehaheheiaheiel<tetenets eee eats hea shch ea Landadatebelia 

oppreinayy heer Spun eer eee rieniantin enn PADD Larabee Unum at tera d Oe Pda e POPE EEE r treet abet es abet 

puerta errr males rhe dine unr Lab Leer ee LEE OE er ek ie re eek hn 

bovotsitadenev ered opera nenrataroecnuertostese tte. 


ealicheie 


Le abanehon abated sais LunLgnterHe ree 
a) nieiiay anohiah she bk hay. apaiaoiai 243 jo aiepatiel a dadndahehsinhstehetebebeieheleiela Lr eee pee 

att eee aiaieieiiel sispniedshsbel sells FainhaneiegeinistakatsbHe(aloh Helttrtnonthinte ish beh sd state et yet sieiehedatedebeiabebsbotersts 
sae eee iehaibeiohenateisibebel sinh failaijausyslinial TE aed chahuhedetadsieiniehalslshelel 1D aT yee ee hahshejahadahelhadepelehadehatspebel ebotelesel 

Fe ee oi steialelehe TET et shemidahelles Teer au AL Als CL GhahoHodeh eles Beet eee ee ecdehehohadehetaiiaialaberebehabest Pere Prt rt aee 

ay fbn by siitaaatat) rater blr biunerehetabedeistededeietepai=h iopehebaiteisllt ats ee Te ee enehebeerdedcheneesirfohaheders 

4 areal ria ieiieh wiles! cee jrhnipeiraihyl be Sh erhvrbhLarenbrbnsyer tart i 1 TET eee eet raiedejatesstoied-bedebehep ener obreepedereted 
( baliet wa iyatten " opsiey ovens Tevet iTE i inetitibtetshebevepensjaneyetssey rtebelss-)=% 

+ 


Pee eee eu shebalels 
pura ‘a siteibebay 
yet. Aeivepabapenaietiat: prety 


aren pha Hal 
jai) i |aihaheh ch Areinnerss pyeearaer 


Madete 


bnebians 
od sha i int tf 2 iat Satellalt al at ettalt I ’ 
Seta aa bate ah dpi tetertahlrspabs ui bg bd tieietieseteneseateea 

ry } acternirty 


wsdaitod ah eG Ag hah a 
herb ireb| et it 
TF 


att 


sag yah 


Hf 
aie 
Math ; 


inte 


neat sneer Say Cl i Sacanaishal auaiieas 

vip peh ahelradbapabo evap mg agate 9-teti/ 72 veneer 4 bcs wider ates Ho be 2 

Orbea Car PL bith Sys ao baited phigh ed aa Hobart 
qisrer erie rit wiht tps hy eh meats! 


Shoes aiigard ahey 
iy $e otay spon 


} 
B pega 49% 
vrata 
tein 
ree run aed Ty 
Cate 4 


sev pabebatehenatial » 


meaiparyete) 


oa} od et wh all> 


Sei an ela gebanelt 


dai alhaflalts 
Hee: 


shaadi eaage 
ebatlalalhniey 


nbiesat 
ag }oie 

poise steta ded hl >) e401 | 
ae ste ee Hh 


atin 


Hieys 
iene at alte 
i 


choi riod ete ari} sh» 
Lied eiatlard aioe pty 
aha hating ong othe ( 24 ob tag y 
wbebepede beh) +94 
sii apse abot y 
sehewaienedrhcerhs (nd 
ha ab ohaedorebrgol : 
pak rips fotebe bode) 


singed ee ad 


y ; 
430 babel 
A ebadsieda da ebaieri ctr sl 
4 Hal) othe hag are 


ia spel ed pracy 
waned dibed at stiyeen nes 


vid abs 


apeere pet MEET 
ea lishadensieletiatie 

asain og 
nial enatiai® 


behaved epi 


siedybeidade | <ifet 3 
Siteldt aya tonabe bapa) adeee in 
jalechobaretadaiaiinhan eledtada vanes ay 

{ fell agaianeds 


eT f 
soil Hehe 


japesvdotvdeneilaes 
fab aiadane ta! 
rasdeheeiadaned 


Aiivatahe panied aang vba ryan ed 3009 
oh nil eb eh aiipity 


sh ate 

whale f 4) 934, 

Aah aed ash Heatl adagay aiae¢. 
Qi aibaia lls 


alyn4 ai 

paint 
pets 
fr 


1 O2AR THREE SARS PAP 
Sip vbeg a ey ae vl a 


J adaan nits ipa al 
wh ath adn) sf 8 


heya. 
sheaettalt 
yas , 


POET UTC rece ieee DRE 
fs spall 


“ins 


jeitadehabetaead sd ts 
shehadsegpepain stat 
a rpadenesagueauad et 
dried day A riaied 
i vdwcai} aib vt hae d aN EAM IPL R 

HalaG suai apallaiied 
foi al) agacagad iaeeban tied ahepatiad 
sb obadeg ntad a ehaleaagar 


an nipeah oy apa atebe’ 
dap rhed afadebouainny ai) o7eyr 49) 
yall etethetbapeipek boli ell tdrt” 
paiiehen ‘ 
ait 
oh) 


i 


High iat 
Won 


{abhpebied 


Arial 
fe n-agopsies) 
ne 


olbat slieisald Uy 
Hsia poll ® 


Laboeaitehadadate 
Hiden ad eiage 
ei sgee sHalate 


sya ode ny ad 


Ma r 
nih bug aiheaiye ated) 


aiatatidegatial aianen ei 


5 jabaitoiak alheiap eh 

teh sahybegidaiayaiiad? 

nipehalisl ah ebay feu aiirds 
wie wit 


salsa vial 
pipaieg ed renee nnn 
Haatad 

My 


+h wie aitar 


ure 
Ayidogen 
24 


aHabepaltel et 


elinitads 
nth eth ett of 
poiiaheu er aire 


Hyak) 964) 


3 fala xy Af 
feria agen 


m ! 
oft nto 4) 

burirarieies siatehojei ' 
Shahadatoteindei a7 pete aths 9 ret 
i aie elj aie ah ahe F709 0K ft rhepalaiaiia 
dig beta Meurved 44 5 ahem adedotyiadayeds f Uabehaiate 

) riprie deen ysis fall fiviays alagan a4 ad i aula nha ty Th 
isiae /Abeh iin abrasion l 


Mya) efiathen athena 
ay aad Manabay 
ai atvipa te rf 


Hal) 


ate pafiahe a enlists yal} 
nipaipordniadh rif athay 9 ip ol] aio 
aliniod afapet valpm fi olheda faa! i 

Agent odad e! aay atabedan 
anh epallaitetattelh sty whabelan : 


{ayo} etabaeeedy 
ah V4.4 Hee 
Joy ata peball xj eben oded: 


} ihe Purl ‘i h 

irene e ae saan lj of sihaha nits iw hah atreitn 

psi mesnnorer hn 

Halbert Mi bphti pabyh 

tii Natianast si ainsi rts Neel an uhhh 

! aibapehaalleiieta aails Aye ba ejcsdatbsitag ndnihia] ad ribet ne fH 

Shep akedall soled aad 
jaisyonariigapea yaa 


ipa 
vats ihsr 

iit bt vin 
aif) slhet tel ai ad siya 
ia) ah aha oteml atieted aa 
emeoieh f{ i 


pellet 


fhastait 


sil agelield aia peaamaita 
1468 34h 94 bpd wiped 


fh 4) bay naga 


sited sai eiatat 


Nethas ' 
Jol ela thai) phi adethatefl 
ppaifadad eh aiprh alell=\t 

sation ald idatiord 
Hind ep baipe gia 


pibahibasteris eh aiid vit aya Ob a ait saw y # 
‘ pala sje (sl 


jotbath ei) st ile pele 


thf pl 


pays bed alee PHPae 
yoahy 


sagerd ot 


Lsih a j-nb-oitethefp 


baiedohadet 
albohayadall ede fait an? 
pry 15 
ih-aiiet etlel) abae-al 
alien 


apnea apie 


saaiheth4 it 
wht) efavipe na eye thas 
M 


fads 


liatniated 


ahah ela rb ahr ; ! 

Lah altayoeaheh edie rare oy i seats 
ii i DW sie adepalaitel ; 

j nit Pak ail ‘it 

4 Nalebavaraisa edad ede) seat enaarlineaiaik 

shi sted vile bates fe) jad seh ey 


Taya atbaby nadie seat ath pale sora 
Gahada de!) sanity opera nee aa eae 
Sp Ree ead eyesR reat 


sib alba yates f 
pobsdayel oj Mibeted wi iRae 
wivexdally abd 


THE 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF THE 


LINNEA SCClat 


OF 


NEw o@uat, VW AEs 


FOR THE YEAR 


1930 


VOL. LY. 


With one Portrait, one coloured Plate, forty Plates 
and 268 Text-figures. 


SYDNEY: 
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY 


THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO., LUD., 
Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, 


and 


SOLD BY THE SOCIETY. 
1930-1931. 


CONTENTS OF PROCEEDINGS, 1930. 


PART I (No. 227). 


(Issued 15th April, 1930.) 


Pages. 
Presidential Address, delivered at the Fifty-fifth Annual Meeting, 
26th March, 1930, by H. S. Halcro Wardlaw, D.Sc. .. i-xXxV 
Elections ; Mint yee : PEt ESET ete Naa ae XXV 
Balance-sheets for Aine year Aa 31st es kker: VO 2, OI eos aA tet ny iN clval st eROXGV Me ORG VALU 
PART II (No. 228). 
(Issued 15th May, 1930.) 
Revision of Australian Oenochromidae (Lepidoptera). ii. By A. Jefferis 
Turner, M.D., F.E.S. ; 1— 40 
A Revision of the Australian melons (ieteeneteek. PEAee dpoidean. 
By Alan P. Dodd StU, Redlticn NPR Sa Lan eae if 280 evar Re as eos 41- 91 
Notes on Australian Diptera. xxiii. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated 
by I. M. Mackerras.) (Thirty Text-figures.) : 92-135 
Notes on the Genus Apistomyia (Diptera) and Description of a iNew 
Species. By A. L. Tonnoir. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) 
(Fourteen Text-figures. ) SEY Masa eaten pote c erent ees =a 
The Geology of the South Coast of Noo South Ryales: Part ii. Devonian 
and Older Palaeozoic Rocks. By Ida A. Brown, B.Sc., Linnean 
Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology. (Palaeontological Notes 
by W. S. Dun.) (Plates i-ii and two Text-figures.) ie 145-158 
Australian Rust Studies. ii. Biometrical Studies of the MOE pHOlOES of 
Spore Forms. By W. L. Waterhouse, D.Se.Agr. (Plate iii.) 159-178 
Australian Coleoptera. Notes and New Species. vii. By H. J. Carter, 
B.A., F.H.S. (Plate iv and one Text-figure.) 179-190 
PART III (No. 229). 
(Issued 15th July, 1930.) 
Revision of Australian Oenochromidae (Lepidoptera). iii. By A. Jefferis 
Turner, M.D., F.E.S. : SU cue Ti Nsom eu ete Qik 2 () 
Observations on the Dipterous eae pane nenidee By Charles P. 
Alexander. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) (Plates v-—vi, one 
Text-figure. ) 221-230 


iv. CONTENTS. 


Pages. 
The Genus Micromonospora Orskoy, a little known Group of Soil Micro- 
organisms. By H. L. Jensen, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. 
Gla tery ite sea betray ae Se GSS heya) Meum aaa anion iene a Rn re SLED As 
Fifth Contribution towards a new Classification of Australian Asilidae. 
By (Goth Hardy aaq ted) Veit chasis Sea ketue veo: wieie t | Gkoaw. Acsae irae aes ee 4026.0) 
The Mosses of Fiji. By H. N. Dixon, M.A., F.1.S., and William 
(Chrasrnsool, Ilys (VES Whbabs)) 06 oe ocovoo oo 06 05 oo Ael=BOL 
Notes on Australian Diptera. xxiv. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated 
oy) Pie Mackerras.)  (horty-toun Rext-fisunres)))) 2... sa ea ee no Oomoas 
PART IV (No. 230). 
(Issued 15th October, 1930.) 
Joseph Henry Maiden. (Memorial Series, No. 3.) (With Portrait.) .. 355--370 


The Origin of Endemism in the Angiosperm Flora of Australia. By the 

late Professor A. Anstruther Lawson, D.Sc., F.R.S.E. (Communicated 

oy Dr J. Mebuckie.) (Plates! x=xi.) 52 25 a: No) be) oo BUH Be 
Goulburn—a Vital Point on the New South Wales Highlands. By F. A. 

Craft, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geography. 

CRwor ext fie iures: yee eas a aS oie, ewcuele\ cy) acyl ulioaee ie fs aR SLE eh ey 
On Grevillea Gaudichaudii R. Br., a Supposed Natural Hybrid between 

Grevillea laurifolia Sieb. and G. acanthifolia A.C. Part i. Analysis 

of the Hybrid. By J. McLuckie, D.Sc., M.A. (Plates xii-xv; and 

nineteen Text-figures.) .. .. .. . 3886-412 
Notes on the Autumn Orchids of the South Maitland Soest N.S.W., 

with Description of a New Species of Pterostylis. By the Rev. 

181, WWE 18, Rb boo, BAG (“UMaueerey Usp sieheeS)) 56 55. 50) oo on) oo) HIB RCHIG 
The Topography and Water Supply of Cox’s River, N.S.W. By F. A. 

Craft, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geography. 


(Four! Text-ficuress)) 420 sen eae caer ene Bn ey aE SN ReeT ER ASE aS 
Notes on Australian Diptera. xxv. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by 

Dr. G. A. Waterhouse.) (Highteen Text-figures.) .. .. .. .. .. 429-450 
Descriptions of New Species of Australian Coleoptera. xxi. By Arthur 

Mis Sea NS cis cies relate oie sues Gated @eicel Cares On asiellay: eet pen aL OL Ot 
Notes on Gall-making Coccids with Descriptions of New Species. ii. By 

Walter W. Froggatt, F.L.S. (Plates xvi-xvii.) .. .. .. .. .. 468-474 
An Abnormal Xanthium Burr. By J. Calvert, M.Se., F.L.S. (Communi- 

cated by Dr B: Tf. Dickson.) (One Next-ficure)) 2.) 4. 24 252. 475=476 


Trichopterygidae of Australia and Tasmania. Descriptions of Six New 
Genera and Eleven New Species. By Cedric Deane, A.M.I.E.Aust. 
(Ewenty-two: Next-fe ures.) y jis Mah Mey veusucin) (evpauencpewTunees wie Men ah oy iron pein AiG Sil 


Notes on Australian Diptera. xxvi. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated 
by Dr. G. A. Waterhouse.) (Three Text-figures.) .. .. .. .. .. 488-492 


CONTENTS. Vv. 
PART V (No. 281). 
(Issued 15th December, 19350.) 
Pages. 
Notes on the Australian Species of the Genus Atriplex. By R. H. 
Anderson, B.Se.(Agr.). (Plate xviii.) 493-505 
The Uterine Cycle of Pregnancy and Pseudo-Pregnancy as it is in the 
Diprotodont Marsupial Bettongia cuniculus, with Notes on other 
Reproductive Phenomena in this Marsupial. By T. Thomson Flynn, 
D.Se. (Plates xix-xxi and three Text-figures.) 506-531 
New Guinea and Australian Coleoptera. Notes and New Species. By 
H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. (Thirteen Text-figures. ) 532-549 
On Placentation in Reptiles. ii. By H. Claire Weekes, D.Sc. (Plates 
xxii-xxviii and ten Text-figures.) 550-576 
Xerophytes and Xerophily, with Special Reference to Protead Distribu- 
tion. By Oswald H. Sargent. (Communicated by A. G. Hamilton.) 577-586 
Additions to the Flora of New England, N.S.W. By W. F. Blakely and 
Rey. EH. N. McKie, B.A. (Plates xxix—xxx.) 587-593 
Another New Species of Hucalyptus from New England. By W. F. 
Blakely. (Plate xxxi.) 594-595 
Australian Rust Studies. iii. Initial Results of Breeding for Rust 
Resistance. By W. L. Waterhouse, D.Sc.(Agr.). (Plates xxxii-— 
XXxXiv.) 596-636 
The Geology of the South Coast of New South Wales. Part iii. The 
Monzonitic Complex of the Mount Dromedary District. By Ida A. 
Brown, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology. 
(Plates xxxv—xxxix and three Text-figures.) 637-698 
Notes on a Cellulose-decomposing Soil Fungus of an unusual Character. 
By H. L. Jensen, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. (Plate xl.) 699-707 
The Leaf-buds of some Woody Perennials in the New South Wales Flora. 
By Gladys Carey, B.Se. (Seventy-five Text-figures.) 708-737 
Fletcher Memorial Lecture, 1930. Joseph James Fletcher, an Idealist 
Secretary. By A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sc. 738-750 
PART VI (No. 232). 
(Issued 16th February, 1931.) 
Abstract of Proceedings Se Oa ey 7 5 Me Ob eo) 
IDOMAGIOME, AiaGl IDMNENEIS ba oo 566 of a6 oo no oo Bom coo od) epodbeakiatl 
ILAS{e’ iE WIG poM SS eon ea Gio Mae Aes Manes | ee eM athe bet 


Index 610s OM =Olel GON Oe IG Me Mae ind. Shan, AMM Mm Sct bl b:o-o-¢ 


Vi. 


CONTENTS. 


TRIBE, GENERA, AND SUBGENUS DESCRIBED AS NEW IN THIS VOLUME 


Achosia (Trichopterygidae) 
Acucera (Tachinidae) 
Aenigmetopia (Metopiinae) 
Anatropomyia (Tachinidae) 
Apalpostoma (Tachinidae) 
Apilia (Tachinidae) 

Aterpogon (Asilidae) 
Austrodexia (Tachinidae) 
Austrometopia (Metopiinae) 
Axiagasta (Oenochromidae) 
Bradyctena (Oenochromidae) .. 
Calopygidia (Tachinidae) 
Chaetometopia (Metopiinae) 
Cnemadozia (Trichopterygidae) 
Cochliarion (Trichopterygidae) 
Delta (Tachinidae) 
Enchocrana (Oenochromidae) 
Epoptia (Trichopterygidae) 
Eupholocis (Curculionidae) 
Geraldia (Tachinidae) 
Hobartia (Tachinidae) 
Lasiocalypter (Tachinidae) 
Lasiocalyptrina (Tachinidae) .. 


(1930). 

Page. 
481 Leaduadicus (Trichopterygidae) 
328 Macroctenia (Oenochromidae) 
447 Macropia (Tachinidae) 
126 Neoamenia (Tachinidae) .. 
134 Neotheca (Cnodaloninae) 
345. Nesogenocis (Curculionidae) 
254 Peliocis (Curculionidae) 
122 Philagarica (Trichopterygidae) 
438 Phorocerostoma (Tachinidae) 
209 Phrizxocomes (Oenochromidae) 
1 Pilimyia (Tachinidae) 
349 Platynotocis (Curculionidae) 
443 Prosenina (Tachinidae) 
486 Pygidia (Tachinidae) 
484 Rhamphella (EKmpidinae) 
332 Stichopogonini (Asilidae) 
34 Symphylistis (Oenochromidae) 
482 Tararactia (Actia) 
464 Tayloria (Tachinidae) 
327 Vespivora (Tachinidae) 
127 ~=Viticis (Curculionidae) 
119 Voriella (Tachinidae) 
122 Vorina (Tachinidae) .. 


Page. 
480 
38 
322 
103 
540 


CONTENTS. vii. 


LIST OF PLATES. 
PROCEEDINGS, 1930. 


ji—Outcrops of Devonian Rocks, South Coast of New South Wales. 

ii—Upper Devonian Fossils, South Coast of New South Wales. 

iii—Uredospores of Puccinia spp. 

iv.—Australian Coleoptera. 

v—-vi.—Larva and pupa of Protoplasa fitchii. 

vii.—Strains of Micromonospora. 

viii-ix.—Mosses of Fiji. 

x.—Mature pollen-grains of Proteaceae. 

xi—Mature pollen-grains of Myrtaceae. 

xii-xv.—Seedling and leaves of Grevillea Hybrids. 

xvi-xvii.—Species of Apiomorpha. 

xvili—Fruiting bracteoles of species of Atriplex. 

xix—xxi—Stages in the uterine cycles of pregnancy in Bettongia cuniculus. 

xxii-xxviii.—Stages in Placentation in species of Hgernia, Tiliqua and Lygosoma. 

xxix.—Grevillea sarmentosa, n. sp., and Hucalyptus codonocarpa, n. sp. 

xxx.—Hucalyptus Youmani, n. sp., and H. tinghaensis, n. sp. 

xxxi.—Hucalyptus McKieana, n. sp. 

xxxii—Wheat plants—‘Federation” seedlings. 

xxxiii-xxxiv.—Crosses between vulgare wheats and “Khapli’ emmer. 

xxxv.—Geological map of Mount Dromedary District, N.S.W. 

xxxvi.—Panoramic views in Mount Dromedary District. 

xxxviad.—Transparency indicating distribution of rock outcrops on Plate xxxvi. 

xxxvii—Outcrops on Montague Island and the coast near Mount Dromedary. 

XXXVili-xxxix.—Microphotographs of rock-types from the Mount Dromedary 
District. 

xl.—A_ cellulose-decomposing soil fungus. 

Portrait (facing p. 335).—J. H. Maiden. 

Coloured Supplement (following Plate ix).—#Hpacris longiflora. 


CORRIGENDA. 


Page 131, line 20, for atripes, n. sp. read nigripes, n. sp. 

Pages 137-139, for Apistomyia indica read Apistomyia trilineata 

Page 349, line 21, for Winthemia albicens read Winthemia albiceps 

Page 364, line —, the work on the History of the Botanic Gardens mentioned was 
read before the Royal Australian Historical Society in October, 1927, by 
R. H. Cambage, and published in the Proceedings of that Society, Vol. xiv, 
Part 1. 

Page 499, line 24, for Atriplex acutivaluum read Atriplex acutibractum 

Page 715, line 34, and Page 716, Text-figure 24, for Pultenaea ellipticum read 
Pultenaea elliptica . 

Page 724, line 37, for Angophora lanceolatus read Angophora lanceolata 

Page 727, line 4 from bottom of page, for Banksia ericifolium read Banksia 
ericifolia 


inals 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF THE 


PINMEAN SOCIETY 


OF 


New Soutu WaLEs 


ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING. 
WEDNESDAY, 26th Marcn, 1930. 


The Fifty-fifth Annual General Meeting was held at Macleay House, 16, College 
Street, Sydney, on Wednesday evening, 26th March, 1930. 


Dr. H. S. Halero Wardlaw, President, in the Chair. 


The minutes of the preceding Annual General Meeting (27th March, 1929) were 
read and confirmed. 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


The notable feature of the past year has been the successful conclusion of the 
negotiations for the erection of a Science House, to which reference has been made 
in the annual addresses of my predecessors. The steps leading to this may be 
summarized briefly for the information of members. In 1925 there began a series 
of conferences between representatives of this Society, the Royal Society of New 
South Wales and the Institution of Engineers, Australia, to consider the possi- 
bility of erecting jointly a Science House which might house most, if not all, 
of the scientific societies and bodies of Sydney. 

After some preliminary discussions it was resolved to approach the Govern- 
ment of New South Wales to ask if the Government would be willing to grant a 
piece of land for the purpose. This was done and the Government immediately 
expressed its sympathy and instituted inquiries as to the possibility of complying 
- with the request. The result was entirely satisfactory and finally three sites offered 
were inspected by representatives of the three Societies. Preference was expressed 
for the site at the corner of Essex and Gloucester Streets. Before this site could 
be granted to the Societies it was necessary for the Government to pass an enabling 
Act, and accordingly an “‘Act to enable the Crown to grant certain land situate in 
Gloucester and Essex Streets, Sydney, to the Royal Society of New South Wales, 
the Linnean Society of New South Wales, and the Institution of Engineers, Aus- 
tralia, for the purpose of erecting a Science House; and for purposes connected 
therewith” was placed before Parliament and passed by both Houses in May and 
June, 1928. It then became necessary for the three Societies and the Government 


il. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


to agree on a form in which the Grant would be acceptable to all. Unforeseen 
difficulties cropped up and caused delay, but agreement was finally arrived at and 
the deed of grant was drawn up and completed. 


Meanwhile the three Societies had promoted an architectural competition for 
the design of the proposed building, mainly with the object of securing an architect, 
one of the provisions of the competition being that the successful competitor should 
be employed to carry out the work unless the adjudicators and promoters were 
satisfied that there was some valid objection to his employment. The competition 
attracted considerable notice and of the thirty-three designs submitted, the adjudi- 
cators (Messrs. G. J. Oakeshott, Howard Joseland and J. L. Berry) placed as the 
first three those submitted by the following: i, Messrs. Peddle, Thorp and Walker; 
ii, Mr. Leith C. McCredie; iii, Mr. John Crust. Subsequent examination of the 
financial aspect of the scheme resulted in the adoption of some modification of the 
original plans. . 

Further difficulties were met when the representatives of the three Societies 
came to the task of drawing up for submission to the Councils an Agreement 
embodying the conditions under which Science House was to be built and admin- 
istered. These difficulties were ultimately overcome and an Agreement was drawn 
up and accepted by the three bodies concerned. 


The negotiations have occupied a long period during which there have been 
times when it appeared as if it might be impossible for final agreement to be 
reached by the three Societies. The difficulties that arose from time to time caused 
your Council much anxious thought and also called for tactful action by your 
representatives on the Joint Committees, which have conducted much of the 
negotiation. The final Agreement has only been achieved after exhaustive dis- 
cussions during the course of which each of the three Councils has from time to 
time agreed to make concessions for the purpose of attaining the desired objective. 
The task of drawing up the Agreement between the three Societies made consider- | 
able demands upon the time and the tact of your representatives on the Provisional 
Management Committee which was appointed in December, 1928. In the delibera- 
tions of that Committee during the period of many difficulties, much valuable 
service was rendered this Society by Mr. Cheel and Dr. Walkom. The Agreement 
having been completed, tenders for the erection of the building were called and 
of fourteen tenders received the successful one was that of Messrs. John Grant and 
Sons for the erection of a building of six storeys at a cost of £38,750. The con- 
tract has been finalized and it provides for the completion of the building within 
thirty-nine weeks, so Science House should be ready for occupation about the 
end of 1930. 

On the Joint Management Committee, which will control and administer the 
building on behalf of the three Societies, your Council has appointed Dr. G. A. 
Waterhouse and Dr. A. B. Walkom as representatives of the Linnean Society. 

It is very gratifying to note the successful work accomplished by the Austra- 
lian Expedition to the Antarctic under the leadership of Sir Douglas Mawson. In 
January I joined with the Presidents of the Australian National Research Council, 
the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science and the Royal Society 
of New South Wales in sending the following message by radio to the leader of the 
Expedition: f 

“We, Sir Thomas Lyle, President Australian National Research Council, 
Andrews, President Australasian Association Advancement of Science, Professor 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. iii. 


Cotton, President Royal Society New South Wales, Doctor Wardlaw, President 
Linnean Society of New South Wales congratulate you and Captain Davis and all 
on Discovery on success already achieved. We have high hopes for your future. 
We admire your splendid efforts for Science and wish you all God speed and safe 
return.” 


This was in due course acknowledged in the following radio message from 
the leader of the Expedition: ‘Self and staff greatly appreciated your stimulating 
message which arrived duly. Mawson.” 


The fact that we receive regular news from the Expedition by wireless makes 
us inclined to discount the dangers and discomforts to which members of the 
Expedition are subject, but we should not thus overlook the hardships endured 
by the Expedition in pursuit of the advancement of Science. 

The British Scientific Expedition to the Great Barrier Reef completed its 
year’s work about the end of July last, and the scientific results are expected to 
be highly satisfactory. The programme of work originally drawn up was prac- 
tically completed and it was found possible for some of it to be carried out in 
greater detail than was anticipated. In addition there were some important 
extensions of the original proposals, chief amongst them being researches on the 
effect of sediment on corals, and the making of a series of hand bores in various 
parts of the reef, showing the substratum to be soft mud. The range of work 
was a very wide one and the published results, when available, will form an 
important addition to the literature of coral reefs and life in tropical seas. The 
purely scientific work included observations on plankton; hydrography; ecology 
of the coral reefs; breeding, development and growth of corals and other reef 
organisms; and feeding, digestion, respiration, and significance of symbiotic algae 
in corals and in clams. In addition considerable geographical work was done in 
the reef area and on adjacent coasts. 

Besides the pure scientific work, much attention was given to economic prob- 
lems associated with the reef—including work on Trochus, Pearl shell, 
Beche-de-mer, Oysters, Fish, Turtles and Sponges—resulting in the accumulation 
of a considerable amount of interesting and valuable information as to the 
possibilities of taking advantage of these assets. 

One of the most gratifying results of the success of the Expedition is the 
determination of the Queensland Government to carry on much of the marine 
biological work initiated by the Expedition and to maintain the station at Low 
Island where the Expedition had its headquarters. 

When the Council decided to institute an annual lecture as a memorial to the 
late J. J. Fletcher, it invited Sir Baldwin Spencer, as one of Mr. Fletcher’s oldest 
and closest friends, to deliver the first lecture of the series. Sir Baldwin accepted 
the invitation, but his death in Patagonia during last year has deprived members 
of the opportunity of hearing him speak of our late Secretary and President. 
The Council had, therefore, to select another lecturer. Their choice fell on Mr. 
A. H. §S. Lucas, who has accepted the invitation to deliver the first Fletcher 
Memorial Lecture during 1930. 

The second number of the Memorial Series containing an appreciation of the 
late J. J. Fletcher, written by the late Sir Baldwin Spencer, has been issued. 

With the object of making available to the public accurate representations in 
colour of species of the native flora, your Council has agreed to a scheme for the 
publication from time to time of coloured plates depicting selected species of 


iv. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


Australian wild flowers. These plates will appear as supplements to the Proceed- 
ings and it is hoped to issue two or more each year. It is the intention to print 
extra copies, not only of the plates themselves, but also on post cards, both 
plates and post cards being made available for sale. 


The occurrence of vacancies on the National Park Trust during 1929 gave an 
opportunity for the scientific societies to move for the appointment of representa- 
tives on the Trust. A deputation met the Minister for Lands and put the views of 
the Societies before him and as a result Professor T. G. B. Osborn was appointed 
a member of the Trust. 


It is pleasing to be able to report that in June last the Government again 
extended for a further period of one year protection to species of native plants 
which have been threatened with extinction by indiscriminate picking. It is 
apparent that this wise measure of protection is having a beneficial effect in the 
preservation of some of the most striking and beautiful of our native flowers. 


Dr. Walkom was granted leave of absence to enable him to accept an invitation 
to attend the meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of Science 
in South Africa during July and August last. The meetings were held in Cape 
Town and Johannesburg, and visiting members were given ample opportunity 
of seeing various parts of the country. On his return Dr. Walkom gave a short 
account of some of his impressions and particularly of the Kirstenbosch National 
Botanic Garden at Cape Town. This garden is claimed to be the only one in the 
world maintained wholly for the cultivation and study of the native flora. 

Following on this it was resolved by this Society “that the State Government 
be urged to set apart an area of Crown land for the purpose of cultivating, 
preserving and exhibiting the native flora’. A Committee has been elected by 
the Council to further the objects of the resolution, and the matter has been placed 
before the Government. This Committee has drawn up a scheme in connection 
with this matter, involving for the present the reservation of a single area only, 
and this will be placed before the authorities at an early date. 

The concluding part of Volume liv of the Society’s PROCEEDINGS was issued 
in February. The complete volume (694 plus xevi pages, thirty plates and 211 
text-figures) contains thirty-seven papers from twenty-seven authors. In addition 
to the usual variety of papers, the volume included the completion of the address 
prepared by the late J. J. Fletcher on “The Society’s Heritage from the Macleays”’. 
Mr. Fletcher did not actually complete the preparation of this before his death, 
but his accumulated notes were handed over to the Society by Mrs. Fletcher and 
these were prepared for publication by Dr. Walkom. 

I take this opportunity of paying the Society’s tribute to the late Doctor 
Henry William Armit who, for some years, has been responsible for the high 
standard of printing attained in the ProckEpINGsS, and whose sudden death on 
12th March last came as a great shock to us. 

Exchange relations with scientific societies and institutions continue to be 
satisfactory. The receipts for the year total 2,084, as compared with 1,777, 2,540 
and 1,821 for previous sessions. During the year the following institutions have 
been added to the exchange list which now numbers 219: Entomological Depart- 
ment of the National Museum, Prague; Faculté des Sciences de l'Université 
Masaryk, Brno, Czechoslovakia; Laboratorio di Entomologia, R. Instituto Superiore 
Agrario, Bologna; Nasionale Museum, Bloemfontein; and University of Lund, Lund, 
Sweden. 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Wo 


The vacancy on the Council caused by the resignation of Dr. I. M. Mackerras 
on account of his removal to Canberra, was filled by the election of Professor 
W. J. Dakin, D.Sc. A further vacancy has now resulted from Dr. Nicholscn’s 
transfer to Canberra and will be filled by the Council at its next meeting. 


Since the last Annual Meeting, thirteen Ordinary Members have been elected, 
four have resigned and we have lost by death one Ordinary Member and one 
Corresponding Member. The names of three members have been removed from the 
list on account of arrears of subscription. 


WALTER BALDWIN SPENCER, born at Stretford, Lancashire, in 1860, died at 
Ushuaia, Patagonia, on July 14, 1929. His death removes one who has taken a 
leading part in the advance of Biology and Anthropology in Australia during the 
last forty years. He came to Victoria as Professor of Biology in 1887 and from 
the time of his arrival he exercised a marked influence on the development of 
scientific activities in Australia. His own researches covered a wide field, first 
in biology and later in anthropology, and he was an artist of no mean ability. 
He accompanied the Horn Expedition to Central Australia in 1894; he acted in 
1912 as Special Commissioner and Chief Protector of Aborigines in the Northern 
Territory, furnishing a valuable report to the Government as a result of his 
year’s observations. He was perhaps most widely known for his works on the 
Australian aboriginals—The Native Tribes of Central Australia (1899), The 
Northern Tribes of Central Australia (1904), Across Australia (1912), The Native 
Tribes of the Northern Territory, The Arunta (1927) and Wanderings in Wild 
Australia (1928)—most of which were accomplished in collaboration with the late 
F. J. Gillen. 


He was knighted in 1916, and on his retirement from active University work 
in Melbourne, was appointed Emeritus Professor. He was elected a Corresponding 
Member of this Society in 1893, having contributed to the Macleay Memorial 
Volume. 

For nearly half a century Sir Baldwin Spencer has been an inspiring figure 
in the scientific life of Australia. His death, perhaps, is even more inspiring than 
his life. At an age when he might have been taking his well earned rest, he 
set out to engage in active anthropological research under conditions which might 
have given pause to the most vigorous man, and which indeed proved too 
severe. 

ARTHUR ANDREW HAMILTON, born at Liverpool, England, on 9th September, 
1855, died at his home at Croydon on 23rd April, 1929, in his seventy-fourth year. 
Before coming to Australia he was for some years engaged in the emigration 
traffic from England to Canada, and he travelled extensively in the northern and 


western parts of Canada, as well as in southern United States and Mexico. He 
arrived in Melbourne in 1880 and proceeded to New Zealand, where he was 


employed on a station in the Waikato district. Whilst he was there a rush took 
place to the Thames goldfields at Te Aroha, in which he joined. Later, in 1887, 
he came to Sydney and obtained employment during the formation of portion of 
Centennial Park. On the completion of this he was appointed to a permanent 
position in the Botanic Gardens, and when the late Mr. Maiden took control, Mr. 
Hamilton was afforded an opportunity of conducting experimental work in the 
cultivation of Australian plants, of which between six and seven hundred 
were grown. In 1911 he was appointed Botanical Assistant in the National 
Herbarium. After his retirement in 1920 he was for a time Secretary to the 


vi. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


Chamber of Agriculture and Metropolitan Branch of the Agricultural Bureau. He 
joined this Society in 1899 and had almost completed thirty years’ membership 
at the time of his death. He was also a member of the Royal Society of New 
South Wales for a number of years, had filled the offices of President and Honorary 
Secretary of the Naturalists’ Society, and was an active member of the 
Horticultural Association. 

From the time of his election to membership till 1923 he was a regular and 
interested attendant at the meetings of this Society, and he contributed in no 
small measure to the success of the meetings by his frequent exhibition of interest- 
ing botanical specimens during the years 1900-1923. He also contributed seven 
papers to the PROCEEDINGS, mostly on ecological and taxonomic botany, between 
1910 and 1920, the most notable being those on the flora of the Blue Mountains 
(1915) and the Saltmarsh Vegetation of the Port Jackson District (1919). He also 
published papers in the Journal of the Royal Society of New South Wales, as well 
as numerous notes in more popular journals and magazines. 


The year’s work of the Society’s research staff may be summarized thus: 


Mr. H. L. Jensen, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society, arrived in Sydney 
on 19th September, 1929, and was welcomed at the September monthly meeting 
of the Society. 

Before his arrival the Council had approached the Senate of the University 
with the object of obtaining laboratory accommodation for the Bacteriologist at 
the University and satisfactory arrangements were made for him to carry on his 
research work in the Department of Agriculture of the University. Mr. Jensen took 
up his duties without delay and, as the whole of the Bacteriologist’s equipment 
had been placed in store after the death of Dr. Greig Smith, the first task was 
to release this and to fit up his laboratory ready for work. This done, he was 
able to commence his research, and he thought at first to study bacteria which 
decompose heterocyclic N-compounds, especially purine derivatives, but the diffi- 
culty of procuring these chemicals led to the abandonment of this plan for the 
time. In its place a study of the microbiology of arid and irrigated soils was com- 
menced. Examination of soils from typical ‘dry-farming”’ areas confirmed the 
statement of American soil bacteriologists that the microflora of such soils is 
characterized by a particular abundance in actinomycetes. About sixty strains of 
actinomycetes have been isolated and are being kept under observation; the 
majority apparently represent new and undescribed forms. It is proposed to con- 
tinue the study of these organisms with the object of discovering whether they are 
capable of decomposing lignins and humic matter—-no single organism in pure 
culture having yet been shown definitely to be capable of this decomposition. An 
interesting group of organisms, evidently belonging to the genus Micromonospora 
Oerskov, has been isolated and it is hoped to publish an account of the morphology 
and physiology of the group in the near future. 

Miss H. Claire Weekes, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Zoology, was 
awarded a fellowship by the Rockefeller Foundation and asked the Council’s per- 
mission to resign her Linnean Macleay Fellowship at the end of July. Her request 
was granted and she left for England during August and is now working under 
Professor J. P. Hill, an Honorary Member of the Society, at University College, 
London. She occupied the months during which she held her Fellowship in 
studying placentation in six species of viviparous lizards which she had collected 
in Tasmania. This paper was practically complete at the time of her resignation, 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. * vil. 


but she has taken advantage of the opportunity to submit it to Professor J. P. Hill 
before handing it in for publication. 

Miss Ida A. Brown, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology, spent 
the first portion of the year in the preparation for publication of two papers which 
appeared in the ProcrEpiInes for 1929—‘“‘Preliminary Note on Monzonitic and 
Nepheline-bearing Rocks of Mount Dromedary, N.S.W.” and “A Garnet-bearing 
Dyke near Moruya, N.S.W.”. 5 

She was granted leave by the Council to attend the Fourth Pacific Science 
Congress in Java in May. Her attendance at the geological and vulcanological 
meetings and excursions at this Congress and the personal association with 
geologists from many countries round the Pacific should be of the greatest value in 
her future geological work. On her return she completed the preparation of a 
paper on the Devonian and Older Palaeozoic Rocks of the South Coast. Further 
work has been done on the geology of the Mount Dromedary district, particularly 
in the examination and chemical analysis of some of the peculiar rock types 
mentioned in the preliminary note already published. Advantage was taken of an 
opportunity which offered, to examine in the field the Tertiary Marine sediments 
in the Gippsland Lake district, and in other areas along the coast of Victoria 
and South Australia. This should materially aid in her description of the 
Tertiary sediments near Lake Corunna, N.S.W., the most northerly extensions 
known of the southern Tertiary beds. 


During the coming year Miss Brown proposes to continue investigations on 
the geology of the South Coast of New South Wales, dealing with problems of 
the geological age, conditions of sedimentation, mutual relationships and subse- 
quent tectonic history of the sedimentary rocks, and the _ relationships, 
petrogenesis and correlation of the associated igneous rocks. 


Two applications for Linnean Macleay Fellowships, 1930-31, were received in 
response to the Council’s invitation of 25th September, 1929. I have pleasure in 
reminding you that the Council reappointed Miss Ida Alison Brown, B.Sc., to a 
Fellowship in Geology and appointed Mr. Frank Alfred Craft. B.Sc., to a Fellow- 
ship in Geography for one year from 1st March, 1930, and in wishing them a 
successful year’s research. 


Mr. Frank Alfred Craft, B.Se., is the first Linnean Macleay Fellow 
in Geography. He graduated in Science at the University of Sydney with First 
Class Honours and University Medal in Geography in March, 1927. He was 
awarded a Government Research Scholarship for 1927. The results of his work 
during this period are contained in two papers in the Procrepines for 1928, 
describing the physiography of the basins of the Cox and Wollondilly Rivers. 
During 1928 and 1929 Mr. Craft has been teaching geography at the Maitland 
Boys’ High School and has continued reading in connection with his proposed 
research work. He proposes to devote his year’s tenure of a Fellowship to an 
extension of his previous work to include the valley of the Shoalhaven River, an 
area including the Gourock, Currockbilly and Sassafras Ranges and the valley of 
the Shoalhaven from the source of the river through Braidwood and Nerriga to 
Tallong, where it would link up with his previous work. He hopes to compile 
form line maps of areas at Tallong and Nerriga in an attempt to decide the question 
of suggested stream capture between the Wollondilly and Shoalhaven Rivers. Mr. 
Craft’s earlier papers, and the difficult field work which they involved, have 
provided ample evidence of his enthusiasm and ability to carry out the work 


Vili. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


he proposes and we look forward to a series of valuable and interesting results 
from his work as a Fellow. 


SomE ASPECTS OF THE ADAPTATION OF LivING ORGANISMS TO THEIR HNVIRONMENT. 


Our interests as members of this Society lead us to consider the relation of 
living things to their environment from many points of view. We are on the 
whole, perhaps, more usually concerned with the morphological aspects of this 
“relation, but in this portion of my address I wish to direct attention to certain 
chemical relationships which subsist between the living organism and its sur- 
roundings. After all, the chemical constitution of bodies may be regarded merely 
as a more intimate expression of their morphology, as an expression involving 
smaller units than those which are commonly studied by visual examination. And 
in considering the material relationships between a living organism and its 
environment we cannot ignore the relationships involving exchanges of energy. 
The conditions of the former are to some extent determined by the -require- 
ments of the latter. A survey of this kind would involve the discussion of a 
wide range of questions. I wish to refer only to one or two of these upon 
which biochemical information appears to have thrown light, and to discuss one 
or two examples where adaptations have more obviously been brought about by 
chemical adjustments. f 

The thesis which I wish to submit to you may be expressed in two statements: 
that the changes which living organisms have undergone in adapting themselves 
to their environment have had as their object the maintenance unchanged of 
certain essential characters, and that the organism which has most successfully 
adapted itself to its surroundings is that which has acquired, to the greatest 
extent, the power of adapting its environment to its needs. 

The most bewildering diversity of forms is met with among living things. 
All these variations of structure may, no doubt, be regarded as adaptations of 
one kind or another to the various environments in which the different organisms 
are to be found. It will be as well, therefore, to make clear at the outset what 
I wish to be understood by my use of the phrase “adaptation to environment”, 
and then to go on to see whether any common factor can be found for the 
superficially diverse means by which the living organism seeks to attain this 
adaptation, before discussing any particular examples of adaptive mechanisms. 

By the term environment I mean that portion of its surroundings with which 
an organism can enter into exchanges of matter and energy. The limits of the 
environment may be hard to define, and will depend upon the particular exchanges 
which are being considered. In the more complex organisms one part may 
be the environment of the rest. 

I shall use the term adaptation as implying broadly any means by which 
an organism is enabled to survive in its surroundings, not as an individual 
but as a species. The term so understood means not merely the ability to 
survive, but the ability to survive without alteration of certain characters. 
A moment’s reflection will show that, by this criterion, we have no 
convincing evidence that any living organism has yet proved itself to be 
completely adapted to its environment. On every hand evidence is daily being 
brought to light of species which have become extinct, and yet the members of 
every living species must have descended, in unbroken succession, from individuals 
of one or other of those extinct species. Those transient species were obviously 
not completely adapted to their surroundings, but there was within the living 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. ix. 


matter of the individuals which composed them, some more effective type of 
adaptation which has enabled it to survive the impermanence of its external form. 


The extinction of so many species has been due, not so much, perhaps, 
to their inability to adapt themselves to their surroundings, as to their inability 
to make their adaptations quickly enough to keep pace with their changing 
environment. For, during the ages which have passed since living forms first 
made their appearance, the nature of their environment has, no doubt, altered 
as profoundly as have the living organisms themselves. 


Even the simplest living organism seems to be much more complex than any 
inanimate system of which we have detailed knowledge. But there is no valid 
reason for supposing that processes other than those which are described as 
physical or chemical play any part in their fundamental reactions. We may, 
therefore, expect the behaviour of the living organism to show many similarities 
and analogies to that of inanimate systems in their relation to their environment. 
On the other hand, there are what at present seem to be rather characteristic 
differences between the two types of system, although, on close analysis, these 
distinctions become hard to draw. 


A general property of inanimate physical systems is their tendency to reach 
a state of equilibrium, that is, they tend to reach a state in which exchanges of 
matter and energy between the various parts of the system, and between the 
system and its surroundings are no longer apparent. It is true that it may be 
possible to demonstrate that fluctuations in the state of different parts have not 
entirely ceased in a system which has reached this condition, but these changes 
which still continue do not lead to any gross or permanent redistribution of matter 
or energy. 

The same property which makes any physical system tend to reach a state 
of equilibrium, will also resist any agency which tends to disturb this state. If 
an attempt is made to change such a system in any way the system will react 
so that the change produced is not as great as it would have been if such a 
reaction had not taken place. For example, if a volume of gas be heated at 
constant pressure it will expand, and in expanding it will cool, so that the total 
rise of temperature will not be as great as it would have been had the gas 
not expanded. This system resists the rise of temperature due to heating. Again, 
many substances, when they are dissolved in water, cause the temperature of 
the resulting solution to fall. But these substances are less soluble in the colder 
water, so that less will dissolve than would have if the temperature had not 
fallen. The system resists the change of concentration caused by the substance 
going into solution. This behaviour is known as the principle of Le Chatelier. 


The reaction of a living organism to changes of its environment is not, 
however, limited to that which would take place according to the principle 
of Le Chatelier. In the first place a living organism is continually expending 
energy, and so prevents itself from ever attaining a state of equilibrium with its 
surroundings. Further, it is provided with regulatory mechanisms which not 
merely resist changes due to alterations of environment, but which are able to 
neutralize, even to reverse, their effects. 


Some of these regulating mechanisms are remarkably efficient. Their object 
is to maintain unchanged any system of which they are a part. But no such 
mechanism, however perfect it may be, can render an organism completely 
independent of external changes. Some response to these changes, however 

B 


XxX. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


small that response may be, is necessary to set the adjusting mechanism in action, 
and this mechanism, once set in motion, will not cease to act until the condition 
aimed at is overshot, no matter how slightly. Such an effect is common to all 
governing mechanisms. - All that they can do is to ensure that the variations 
imposed upon the organism by a changing environment shall be restricted within 
certain limits. The more effective the mechanism is, the closer together will 
these limits be. 


Broadly speaking, we may say that the living organism first protects itself 
against the variations of its surroundings by placing barriers between itself and 
its environment. The process of encystment and the formation of spores are what 
appear to be simple examples of this type of reaction which are shown by very 
simple organisms. Even more highly developed organisms make use of devices 
of this kind at some stage of their life histories, as in the formation of seeds by 
plants. 


There is no doubt about the effectiveness of such a mechanism for protecting 
an organism against unfavourable changes of its environment. The extreme 
difficulty with which the spores of certain microorganisms are destroyed, even 
by the most drastic treatment, is well known. The tenacity with which the 
seeds of certain plants retain their viability has been demonstrated by Cambage 
(1928) who showed that seeds of Acacia melanoxylon were capable of germination 
after ten years’ soaking in sea water. In its simplest form, however, a protective 
mechanism of this kind imposes severe restrictions upon the organism using it. 
At times such an organism must purchase its survival by an almost complete 
suspension of its vital activities. The mechanism can do no more than protect 
the organism from destruction by extremes of variation in its environment, and 
appears to display the phenomenon of adaptation in its crudest form. It is a 
regulatory mechanism which permits of wide variation in the rate at which the 
organism is able to carry on its activities. Except for this power of passive 
resistance, an organism limited to this kind of adaptive mechanism is still very 
largely at the mercy of its environment. 


Another way in which an organism may place a barrier between itself and 
certain parts of its surroundings is by removing itself from those parts. It is 
able to do this when possessed of the property of motility which is shown even 
by some of the most primitive forms of life. As an adaptive mechanism, motility 
in many ways is a distinct advance beyond processes similar to encystment. The 
motile organism is able to make use of one part of its environment to protect 
itself against another. Instead of erecting about itself, when conditions become 
unfavourable, barriers composed of its own substance, it is able to place parts of 
its environment between itself and those conditions. 


It is evident that the freedom of an organism possessing motility must be 
much greater than that of similar organisms without this mechanism. Its effect 
is to render unnecessary many of the variations of activity to which the non-motile 
organism must be subject, by avoiding many of the occasions on which those 
variations would occur. It is an adaptive mechanism which avoids many adaptive 
modifications on the part of the organism. In addition it is capable of being 
much more selective in action than a mechanism which withdraws the organism 
from a condition of interchange with its environment. The working of this 
mechanism is seen most clearly perhaps in the tropisms which many of the more 
primitive living forms display. The movements of the more complex organisms 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Xi. 


do not always bear such an evident relation to the effects of environment as do 
those of the simpler. They are complicated as a rule by the simultaneous action 
of many other adaptive mechanisms. The large scale movements, however, even 
of the higher animals, such as migrations, are sufficiently analogous to tropisms 
to suggest that they may be the results of some common underlying mechanism. 


An organism possessed of the property of motility is considerably more 
independent of its surroundings than an organism limited to the type of adaptive 
mechanism first discussed, but its chances of survival are not necessarily 
greater. While it does survive, however, its vital activities are likely to be much 
less subject to variation than those of an organism whose only protection is 
quiescence. 


Although this mechanism shows a great advance over that previously 
discussed, its effectiveness is still decidedly limited. It is, no doubt, adequate 
for those simple organisms whose normal environment is not subject to much 
simultaneous variation in several components. Such a mechanism is likely to 
break down, if not assisted by other regulatory devices, when the organism is 
faced with concurrent changes of different factors of its environment. Removal 
of the organism from a portion of its environment unfavourable in one respect 
may deprive it of conditions which may be favourable in other respects. An 
organism restricted to this type of adaptive mechanism, or even possessing it 
in addition to the power of becoming encysted, would often find itself in a dilemma. 


Primitive relations between organism and environment. 


The action of all of the mechanisms which regulate the chemical relations 
of the organism is essentially to control the exchange of material which 
takes place between the organism and its surroundings. In its crudest form this 
mechanism acts simply by abolishing interchange between organism and environ- 
ment when the characters of the latter become unsuitable. As these mechanisms 
develop in effectiveness, and, incidentally, in complexity, so do they increase 
in selectivity. They become able to control independently the exchange of a wide 
variety of substances with the outside world, and so to regulate the concentrations 
of these substances in contact with the living matter that the organism may 
carry on its activities with a minimum of adventitious disturbance. 


The fact that the living organisms of today have evolved from more primitive 
forms seems to involve the assumption that the mechanisms which have enabled 
living matter to survive have done so because of their ability to preserve at 
least some of its primitive characters. It will be interesting, therefore, to cite 
evidence which has been adduced in support of the hypothesis that living organisms 
tend to retain some of the properties which they may have possessed at very early 
stages of their evolution, no matter how complex they have eventually become. 


Conjectures as to the series of reactions which may have led to the appearance 
of organic matter out of which the first living organisms were formed need not 
concern us. We are more concerned at the moment with the conditions of 
environment which may have existed when living forms were in the early stages 
of their evolution. It may be mentioned, however, that investigations such as 
those of Moore (1914) and of Baly (1927) and their co-workers have indicated 
the possibility of the synthesis of naturally occurring organic compounds from 
water, carbon dioxide and inorganic salts under the influence of radiant energy 
and in the presence of inorganic catalysts. 


Xil. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


No matter what the conditions may have been under which living matter 
first arose, they were obviously favourable to its appearance. Conversely, since 
the first living organism may be assumed to have been a direct product of its 
environment, there can be no doubt but that it was eminently well adapted to 
its surroundings. In the meantime, the conditions surrounding the living organism 
have undergone tremendous changes. As far as we know, none of the living 
organisms of the present day can be regarded as direct products of their 
environment. 

When the composition of one of the higher forms of animal life is compared 
with that of its surroundings, the differences which are observed are much more 
obvious than the resemblances. Out of some eighty elements around it, the 
organism chooses four from which to build up about ninety-five parts out of every 
hundred of its substance. When, however, certain parts of an organism are 
compared with certain kinds of environment, a much closer correspondence can 
sometimes be seen, and there are indications that more intimate relations may 
once have prevailed between the two than can now be shown. 

There must have been something fundamentally essential in the conditions 
under which life began. The enormous development of complexity which has 
taken place in some of the living organisms of the present day can be traced 
largely to the series of modifications which seem to have had for their object, 
the maintenance, in the immediate vicinity of living matter, of conditions 
resembling those of its primitive state. From this point of view the whole 
story of evolution is one of adaptation to environment. It is a history of the 
mechanisms developed, of the subterfuges resorted to, of the changes undergone 
by living matter to maintain essential characters unchanged in a changing world. 

There seems to be a general agreement among biologists that living forms 
originated in the sea. The chemical examination of organisms supports this view. 
All the reactions of living matter take place in aqueous solution. The ultimate 
units of structure, the cells, even of the most highly developed land forms, 
still live in a medium which bears certain striking resemblances to sea water. 

We have no direct means of knowing what was the composition of the aqueous 
medium in which living matter first made its appearance. It must, however, 
have been a dilute salt solution, but of a composition differing materially from the 
sea water of the present time with respect both to the concentrations of and the 
proportions between the various ions present. The water which first condensed 
on the cooling surface of the earth would, in its course downwards to the lower 
levels, begin to leach out the soluble materials with which it came into contact. 
The more soluble materials would dissolve more readily than the less soluble. 
As this leaching action continued, the available supplies of the more soluble 
materials would diminish more rapidly than the available supplies of the less 
soluble substances. It may be assumed, then, that the earlier river waters, and 
the seas which they fed, were relatively richer in these more soluble materials 
than the waters of later periods. 

During the period of their evolution in the waters of the seas, living organisms 
have thus been exposed to a medium of continuously, if slowly, altering com- 
position. Does the ‘study of the chemical composition of the living organism of 
the present afford any evidence that it has passed through these conditions? The 
individuals of the more highly evolved species during their ontogeny pass through 
a series of modifications of structure which summarize, as it were, the stages 
through which the present form of the species has been reached during the 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. xiii. 


course of evolution. Macallum (1926) has shown that there is reason to believe 
that just as the complex organism acquired certain structures at definite stages of 
its evolution, so it has perpetuated certain of its chemical properties from 
remote phases of the history of its forerunners. — 


Chemical and morphological characters. 


At present the ontogeny of the chemical characters of organisms is not 
known with anything like the detail which is available with regard to their 
morphological development. A similar state of affairs exists with regard to 
our knowledge of the chemical phylogeny of living forms. The palaeontologist 
has access in the sedimentary rocks to records of extinct species from which he 
can reconstruct at least some of their morphology. But as a rule the chemical 
‘characters of extinct organisms do not leave any direct record in the rocks. 
The information which we have as to the composition of extinct organisms is. 
largely based on analogies drawn from our knowledge of the composition of 
existing structures homologous with those observed in fossil remains, or from 
the persistence of structures which were mainly composed of inorganic material. 


Fortunately this rule is not entirely without exceptions. In one or two 
rare instances there is reason to believe that organic compounds present in 
long extinct organisms have been preserved from the remote past. It is a 
matter of pride to us to know that the latest of these rare discoveries has 
been made by a distinguished member of this Society, our esteemed past 
president, Sir Edgeworth David. In the course of the examinations made in 
connection with his discovery of structures of living origin in Pre-Cambrian 
strata, David (1928) observed that some of these structures consist of organic 
matter which is apparently the original chitin of which the skeletons of these 
animal (annelids) were largely composed. 


Direct glimpses like this into what has been termed the palaeochemistry of 
living things are of great importance. They give direct support to the otherwise 
very indirect evidence upon which is based our belief in the stability of some 
of the chemical characters of living organisms. 

The paucity of our knowledge of the detailed composition of living things 
does not permit us to classify them in such small subdivisions as are made 
possible by our more detailed knowledge of their morphology. In this connection, 
however, the pioneering work of Smith and Baker (1920) must receive due 
mention. These investigators in their now classical researches followed out the 
relation between certain of the chemical constituents and the structure of a group 
of Australian plants. 

Investigations of this kind, however, relate rather to the association which 
is to be found between highly specialized structures and compounds in living 
things. They bring out the changes which have taken place during the evolution 
of the chemical characters of living things rather than emphasize the relative 
permanence of some of the more primitive of these characters. 

When we wish to consider the more fundamental chemical characters of 
the living organism, we must examine the less highly specialized tissues, and the 
wider divisions of morphological differentiation. We must study the distribution 
of relatively simple inorganic compounds, rather than that of the highly complex 
organic substances. Only when comparisons are made on the basis of such broad 
distinctions of form as that between organisms having a closed circulatory system 


xiv. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


and those without it, are correspondingly fundamental differences of chemical 
properties to be discerned. 


The proportions of certain constituents of the organism and its environment. 


There is no doubt that the unicellular organisms represent an earlier stage 
in the evolution of living things than do the metazoan or metaphytan forms. 
They probably flourished in the primordial oceans for long periods before multi- 
cellular organisms made their appearance. They must have been much more 
closely related to the medium from which they had been produced than the later 
forms. In particular, their inorganic constituents are likely to have corresponded 
fairly closely with those of the medium which bathed their cells. The differ- 
entiation between the medium and its product had not proceeded as far as it has 
reached in more complex forms of life. 


It has been pointed out, however, that the inorganic composition of these 
primitive oceans must have been changing all the time. The effect of regulatory 
mechanisms in the cell would be to hinder, if not entirely to prevent, the changes 
from reaching the interior of the cell itself. By the time that living organisms 
had reached the state of complexity of the primitive multicellular structure, we 
may imagine them as groups of cells permeated by a solution which showed 
distinct differences in inorganic composition from that of the solution which 
bathed them. At first the surrounding medium would have free access to the cells 
of such a simple organism. But, as the complexity of the organism developed, 
access would become restricted to certain channels forming a primitive open 
circulatory system. The next stage in complexity would be the closure of these 
channels against the free ingress and egress of the surrounding medium, and 
the development of a closed circulatory system. 


At this stage of evolution, the first barrier controlling the exchanges which 
take place between the cell and its environment would no longer be situated 
on the surface of the cell itself. Any changes which reached the liquid actually 
surrounding the cells would first be subject to the regulatory mechanisms in the 
outer surface of the organism and in the circulating fluid. The cell would be 
provided with an immediate environment to some extent under the control of 
the organism itself. 


During all the period necessary for these developments, the change of com- 
position of the surrounding medium would be still in progress. But once the 
action of a closed circulatory system became effective, the changes in composition 
of the medium bathing the cells would not proceed so rapidly. Although the 
composition of the external medium might continue to change, the changes would 
only reach the circulating fluid, the internal environment of the cells, in a modified . 
form. The organism would tend to preserve the composition of the fluid with 
which it had been bathed while a closed circulatory system was being evolved. 


Such an organism would be capable of very considerable independence of its 
external medium, an independence which would increase as its external regulatory 
mechanisms grew in perfection. Not until living organisms had reached this 
stage of complexity would they become able to emerge from the medium in 
which they had evolved, and their appearance as land forms of multicellular 
organisms become possible. 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XV. 


It is well known that the inorganic composition of the cells of various tissues 
of an organism differs materially from the inorganic composition of the 
circulatory fluid. According to the hypothesis outlined above, the inorganic 
constituents of the cells ought to correspond to those of sea water at an early 
stage in the evolution of living things. The composition of the circulating fluid 
ought, on the other hand, to correspond, with regard to its inorganic constituents, 
to the composition of sea water of a much later period. 

Macallum (1926) has collected a good deal of evidence in developing this 
hypothesis. The most striking difference between the inorganic constituents 
present in the cells and those in the circulating fluids of one of the higher 
animals is the relative abundance of salts of potassium in the former and of 
salts of sodium in the latter. There is a remarkably close correspondence 
between the proportions of these two elements in the circulating fluid of the most 
highly organized living forms which have so far been developed and in the sea 
water of the present day. If the comparison could be made with the composition 
of the sea water during the period in which the vertebrates first appeared, 
the correspondence would perhaps be still closer, owing to the slightly greater 
proportion of potassium in the sea water of that period. 


The difficulties in the way of forming an accurate estimate of the com- 
position of sea water during the comparatively recent geological epoch in which 
vertebrates appeared are great enough. Much greater are those difficulties in 
the way of an attempt to form a similar estimate of the composition of the sea 
water of the remote age during which unicellular organisms were evolving. Even 
though no attempt has been made to fix the proportion within narrow limits, 
it seems likely that the proportion of potassium to sodium must have been 
many times as great as it is at present. With respect to these elements, the 
composition of those primaeval seas must have been considerably closer to that 
of the cell contents of the present day than to that of the circulating fluid. 


Even when such diverse cellular tissues as human muscle and herring ova 
are examined, the difference between the relative proportions of sodium and 
potassium is not very marked. A general similarity of the proportions of these 
elements in cellular tissues is apparent. These considerations have been used 
to support the hypothesis that the living organism has retained with remarkable 
tenacity certain of the chemical characters imposed upon it at remote periods 
of its evolution. 


The concentration of the environment of cells. 


So far only the proportions between certain elements in living tissue have been 
considered. It may now be asked whether the actual concentrations of chemical 
substances present also show any relation to those of the medium within which 
‘living organisms evolved during a considerable period of their history. 

The most convenient single measure of the total concentration of materials 
dissolved in a liquid is the osmotic pressure. The data which have been collected 
by Botazzi (1908) show that the osmotic pressures of the body fluids of the most 
highly developed groups of terrestrial living forms, vary only between remarkably 
narrow limits. When different forms of sea life are examined, however, a very. 
different state of affairs is found. Even if the examination be restricted to 
vertebrate forms, wide ranges of osmotic pressure of the body fluids are met 
with. In the elasmobranchs, for example, the osmotic pressure of the body fluids 


Xvi. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


is practically that of the sea water in which they live. In the teleosts, on the 
other hand, the osmotic pressure of the body fluids differs widely from that of 
the sea water, and approaches the values found for mammalian fluids. 

Dakin (1908) has shown that the differences observable among different 
species of fish are due to the fact that they pessess adjusting mechanisms of 
different degrees of efficiency and not the maintenance of specifically distinct levels 
of osmotic pressure. Specimens of plaice taken in a brackish portion of the 
North Sea gave values for the osmotic pressure of their blood 20% lower than 
that of specimens taken where the osmotic pressure of the sea water was about 
74% higher. The osmotic pressure of the blood of cod on the other hand showed 
a variation of only about 3%, while the variations of osmotic pressure in the 
localities from which they were taken covered as wide a range as 64%. 

The same data which have been used to show that the proportions between 
some of the elements in the bodies of living organisms are perpetuations of the 
proportions to which these organisms were exposed at certain stages of their 
development, have been used to show that the osmotic pressure of the body 
fluids of the higher animals may also be a perpetuation of the conditions of an 
early stage of their development. The sea water at the time.when these animals 
were developing closed circulations must have been much more dilute than it 
is to-day: its osmotic pressure has been assessed at a value only about one-third 
of what it is at present. Such a value would be very close to the osmotic pressure 
of the body fluids of the higher animals. 


Exchange of material between organism and environment. 


The mechanism for the control of the proportions between certain of the 
constituents of the living organism must be of considerably more ancient origin 
than the mechanism for the control of the total concentrations of these con- 
stituents. Even the simplest unicellular organisms must be possessed to some 
extent of the former mechanism. The means for controlling the concentration of 
materials, as expressed by their osmotic pressure, has, on the other hand, only 
been developed in the most complex metazoa. 

It has already been indicated that the action of the former mechanism 
is a result of the control which the barriers between the cell and its environment 
are able to exert over the passage of materials into and out of the interior of 
the cell. It will also be dependent to some extent upon what may for the 
moment be termed the “affinity” of the cell contents for certain of these materials. 

Very little is yet known about the conditions governing the passage of different 
substances across the cell membrane into the body of the cell. The properties 
of the surface presented by the cells to their immediate environment must be 
the most important factors in the process. These properties are determined 
largely by the degree of dispersion of protein and phospholipide colloids of which 
the cell membrane largely consists. The proportions of the ions adsorbed to these 
colloids exercise an important influence on their condition. In particular, they 
affect the distribution of the dispersant medium (water) between their sol and 
gel phases, and so can vary the area of the portion of the surface through which 
water soluble substances would be able to pass. 

The importance of maintaining the correct balance between the proportions 
of the ions in contact with living tissue was fully recognized by Ringer (1884). 
In his classical series of papers he investigated in some detail the effect of 
variations of these proportions on the properties of living matter. These 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Xvil. 


investigations have been the starting point of much of the later work. Hamburgher 
(1921), who made use of a rather highly specialized type of cell for his experi- 
ments, was the first to study directly this effect on the permeability of the cell. 
wall. He was able to demonstrate clearly that variations of the proportions of 
the ions in the fluid to which these cells were exposed were able markedly to 
alter their permeability towards different materials. 


Comparative studies have not so far been made to show how the power of 
the organism to regulate the relative proportions of the different elements, or more 
particularly ions, in its substance has developed during the course of evolution. 
A great deal of attention has been paid within recent years to the study of the 
proportions between the hydrogen and hydroxyl ions which are derived from the 
medium in which all the vital reactions take place. It seems, however, that the 
power of regulating the proportion between these ions must be of later develop- 
ment than the ability to preserve certain ratios between various other ions. Among 
the lower organisms considerable variation of the concentration of hydrogen ions 
may be survived by some forms. In the highest forms of life, however, the 
concentration of those ions is kept extraordinarily constant. It is allowed to vary 
between narrower limits even than the osmotic pressure. The proportions between 
certain inorganic substances in solutions, such as those in the neighbourhood of 
and within living cells, determine what shall be the proportions between the ions 
of the solvent water. Indeed, even in the higher organisms, the occurrence of 
rapid variations in the proportions of these ions is prevented by the concentrations 
of certain other substances which are present. These are known as buffer 
substances. Among the inorganic salts which exercise this controlling action the 
more important are the sodium salts of carbonic and phosphoric acids. 


The control of the permeability of the living cells must thus largely depend 
on the composition of the medium with which they are in contact, and on the 
presence of certain substances in the cells themselves. 

The mechanism controlling the total concentration or osmotic pressure of the 
medium bathing the cells of an organism, on the other hand, must also be actuated 
by the composition of this medium, but in a manner different from that by 
which it influences the permeability of the tissues. It is true that the exchange 
of material between an organism with a closed circulatory system and its environ- 
ment is limited to certain areas of its surface, for example, to the areas covered 
by the epithelium of the alimentary and respiratory tracts. By these epithelia 
some selective action is, no doubt, exercised over the materials entering the 
organism. Their situation alone is such as to prevent access to them of any 
but selected parts of the environment. But as a characteristic feature of organisms 
possessing this mechanism is the freedom rather than the restriction of its 
exchanges with the outside world, the main regulatory mechanism must be sought 
elsewhere. 


All organisms which have the power of regulating the osmotic pressure of 
their body fluids are provided with an excretory organ corresponding to a kidney. 
This mechanism exercises its control over the composition of the circulating fluid 
by eliminating from the organisms those constituents passing through it which 
are present in excess. It contributes to the independence of the organism of its 
environment, or in other words to its adaptation thereto, by placing another 
means at its disposal for keeping within suitable limits the immediate environment 
of its cells. 


Xviii. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


Even in those vertebrates in which the osmotic pressure of the body fluids is 
close to that of the ‘surrounding medium there is a considerable degree of 
control exercised over the proportions of the various materials present. While 
the proportions between the various ions may be close to that of the sea water, 
their total concentration may be only a fraction of this. The remainder of the 
osmotic pressure in these cases is contributed by excretory products, principally 
urea, which are allowed to reach relatively high concentrations. This fact has 
been taken as evidence that the primary function of the kidney is not to excrete 
end-products of metabolism, but to adjust the composition of the immediate 
environment of the cells. 

The possession of such a mechanism enables the organism to undertake more 
active measures to adapt itself te its environment, and in some degree to adapt 
its environment to its needs. The environment of such an organism has already 
been modified before it gains access to any but specialized portions of the living 
substance. While, then, the cells of the organism are enabled to continue their 
existence under more or less primitive conditions, the organism as a whole is 
able to carry on its activities but little affected by the vicissitudes of a changing 
environment. 


Control of environment by organism. 
(a). Food supply. 

In discussing the means taken by certain primitive organisms to adapt them- 
selves to their surroundings, reference was made to the process of encystment 
and the performance of tropic movements. It was pointed out that in protecting 
the organism against unfavourable conditions, these two classes of mechanism had 
at least one feature in common. They owe their effectiveness to the fact that 
barriers are placed between the organism and unfavourable conditions. In the 
first instance cited, the barrier is composed of the substance of the organism. 
The surface of contact between the organism and its environment is rather sharply 
defined. In the second instance, the barrier is composed of a part of the environ- 
ment, which the organism places between itself and the unfavourable conditions. 
The change which takes place is not in the organism, but in the distribution of 
its environment about it. In neither instance, however, does the environment itself 
undergo any perceptible modification, nor does the organism itself appear to 
undergo further change. 

As our definition of the term adaptation is the power to remain essentially 
unchanged in spite of external changes, it might be supposed that, as adaptive 
mechanisms increased in efficiency, they would bring about an ever sharper dif- 
ferentiation between the organism and its environment. An examination of the 
relevant data shows that what actually happens is just the reverse of this. Far 
from tending to isolate themselves more completely from their surroundings, the 
most perfectly adapted organisms are those in which the freest interchange is 
allowed with the environment. 

Although the effect of each increase in the complexity of the mechanism of 
adaptation is to place additional barriers between the essential living unit, at 
the same time it extends further the range over which the organism is able to 
modify or, as it were, overlap its environment. Each adaptation, by increasing 
the intimacy of the relations between the organism as a whole and its external 
surroundings, protects the cell itself still more effectively from variations in 
the medium in which it lives. 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Xix. 


One of the most important factors in the environment of an organism is the 
supply of available food materials which it contains. The ability favourably to 
control this supply must therefore be of great assistance to an organism to 
maintain itself in that uniform state which we have conceived as one of the 
principal aims of adaptive processes. This ability is possessed by man in an 
outstanding degree. But many organisms possess this power to a greater or 
less extent. It is seen more especially in the provision which they make for the 
nutrition of their young. 


In oviparous animals and in many plants the young organism, when it leaves 
the body of its parent, is enclosed in a more or less impervious membrane which 
contains a supply of food material. By this means the young organism is able 
to pass through certain stages of its development in an environment which is 
entirely independent of outside fluctuations of food supply. In organisms of this 
kind, direct association between the parent and its offspring ceases at a compara- 
tively early stage of the development of the latter. This does not mean that 
the parent ceases to have any influence over the environment of its offspring as 
soon as the direct association between the two ceases. One need only refer 
to the elaborate precautions taken by birds to preserve a suitable environment 
about their young after hatching. 


The direct association between parent and offspring persists in viviparous 
animals until a much later stage in the development of the latter. In these 
organisms, as in the former class, the environment of the young during the period 
of gestation is furnished by the circulating fluid of the body of its parent. The 
variations of this fluid are kept within certain limits by the regulatory mechanisms 
of the parent. The “young organism is thus provided with a medium of 
constant properties while its own regulatory mechanisms are developing. In some 
viviparous animals the association between parent and offspring ceases almost 
completely at birth, and the young organism, having been provided with its own 
adjusting mechanisms, as efficient as those of its parent, is left to adapt itself 
to its new surroundings. 


Like most of their adaptive mechanisms, the devices of mammals for the 
eare of their young are more complex and effective than those of other forms of 
life. In addition to the protective measures to which allusion has been made, 
the mammals provide for their offspring a special food, milk, during part of their 
extra-uterine life. The period for which this provision is made varies widely 
among different species. In man it extends, under natural conditions, over the 
greater part of a year, in some races much longer. 


This mechanism for the adaptation of one factor of the environment to the 
needs of the organism, represents one of the last stages in adaptation by modifica- 
tions of bodily structure and function. It is interesting to observe how closely, in 
this latest adaptive mechanism, certain properties of the environment are adjusted 
to the needs of the organism. 


It should be remarked at the outset, however, that one of the most striking 
properties of milk has probably no significance in relation to its use as a food 
by the young organism. This is the fact that the osmotic pressure of milk 
has a value very close to that of the body fluids of the animal by which it is 
consumed. Milk probably owes this property to the manner of its secretion from 
the body fluids of the maternal organism. Before the milk is absorbed by 


XX. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


the young animal, certain of its constituents must undergo a process of digestion 
or hydrolysis. The sum of the osmotic pressures of the products of digestion is 
considerably greater than that of the original milk, so that the osmotic pressure 
of the solution actually absorbed differs materially from that of the body 
fluids of the young animal. 


When the composition of milk is examined, it is found that although the 
proportions of the various constituents show considerable variations among 
different animals, and even among individuals of the same species (Wardlaw, 1915, 
1917, 1926), the same constituents are present in each. The concentration of each 
constituent appears to be adapted to the needs of each species. It will be remembered 
that in considering the relation of the most primitive living organisms to their 
environment, some of the evidence was mentioned which seemed to point to a 
close relation between the proportions of certain elements of inorganic compounds 
present in the surrounding medium, and the proportions of these elements in the 
body of the organism itself. 

A comparison between the proportions of the various elements in the inorganic, 
or more strictly speaking, the incombustible portions of milk and the proportions 
of the same elements in the bodies of the young organisms which consume the 
milk, also shows a remarkable correspondence. These proportions are not those 
of the circulating fluids of the animals. An explanation of this correspondence 
is not to be sought, therefore, like that between the osmotic pressure of milk 
and body fluids, in an incidental transference of certain properties from the 
circulating fluid of the maternal organism to its offspring. The correspondence 
seems to be due to a definite adaptation of this part of the environment to the 
needs of the young animal. 


A similar correspondence between those organic constituents of the milk, 
which are used as building materials, and the composition of the young organism 
has not been found. This is partly, no doubt, because it would be a matter 
of very great difficulty to estimate separately the various units into which the 
proteins of milk are broken up in the course of digestion. But may it not 
be due, in part, to that more primitive and intimate relation between the 
inorganic constituents of a living organism and its nutrient medium to which 
the evidence discussed earlier seems to point? The most primitive living things 
must have had practically no relation to organic compounds in their inorganic 
environment. The organic compounds of their own cells they synthesized them- 
selves. The relation between the organic constituents of the organism and those 
ot its environment can only have become of importance at a much later stage in 
the development of living things, and is likely to be less intimate than that 
with the inorganic constituents. If this be so, it gives further support to the 
supposition that certain of the fundamental properties of living matter of today 
are perpetuations of conditions which existed when life was at its beginning. 


It must not be thought, however, that numerous adaptations of the organic 
portions of milk to the needs of the young animal cannot be shown. The organic 
constituents of milk may be divided into those which can only be used as fuel and 
those which furnish material for the construction of the body of the young animal. 
If we compare the milks of animals whose young grow at different rates, for 
example, we find that there is a definite relation between the concentration of 
the organic building materials and the rate of growth, the concentrations being 
greater in the milk of the more rapidly growing animals. A similar relation, 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XE 


incidentally, is to be seen between the rate of growth and the total concentration 
of the inorganic constituents. ; 

Even the constituents of the milk, which serve only as fuels, although they 
play no part in the contribution of material for building up the body of the 
young animal, show adaptations to the various needs, not merely of different 
species, but even of different individuals. 

The young of warm-blooded animals living in cold climates are, for example, 
exposed to greater losses of heat than those of animals living in warmer regions. 
We find a correspondingly higher concentration of the fuel, fat, in the milk of 
the animals indigenous to cold regions. Again, other things being equal, small 
animals tend to consume relatively greater quantities of energy per day than 
larger animals. The milk of small animals is, in general, richer in fat than the 
milk of larger animals. This relation can not only be seen among different 
species of mammals varying widely in size, but even in individuals of the same 
species. The small Jersey cow, for example, yields a milk richer in fat than 
larger breeds. 

The range of variation of size among human individuals is much smaller. 
The correspondences between the composition of the milk and the needs of the 
human infant are, therefore, much less obvious. They require a _ closer 
scrutiny for their discovery. But it may be shown, by suitable methods, that 
there is a definite correlation between relatively slight variations of the physical 
characters of healthy infants and the composition of the milk with which they 
are supplied by their mothers (unpublished observations). This is surely a 
striking example of the length to which the adaptation of the immediate environ- 


ment to the needs of the organism is carried by the most highly organized of all 
animals. 


(bo). Exchanges of energy. 

None of the devices to which the living organism resorts for the control 
of the composition of its immediate environment can exert its full effectiveness 
if the temperature of this environment is allowed to vary unrestricted. Still 
less, under these circumstances, can the organism attain that freedom from 
external variation of the rate of its activities which seems to be one of the 
principal objects of adaptive mechanisms. . The rates of chemical reactions vary 
rapidly with the temperature at which they take place. The effect of these 
variations upon the activities of organisms without a temperature-regulating 
mechanism is so striking and so familiar as to require no further reference. 

The effect of variation of temperature on the composition of living tissues 
and of their immediate environment is not so obvious, but is none the less 
important. Variations of temperature alter the equilibrium constants of chemical 
reactions. In this way they alter the proportions between the reacting materials 
which will exist under given conditions. For example, the proportions between 
the ions in the circulating fluids and cells will not be the same at different 
temperatures. We have seen the permeability of the living cell is largely 
controlled by the proportions of the ions present in its immediate vicinity. 
As it is this permeability which determines many of the fundamental properties 
of living matter, these properties must be modified by changes of temperature, 
quite apart from any changes in the rate of the vital activities which they may 
bring about. 


Xxil. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


The temperature-regulating mechanisms of all the warm-blooded animals are 
by no means equally effective. In the higher mammals this mechanism continues 
to function as long as the external conditions of temperature remain within limits 
compatible with the life of the animal. In other species, however, the mechanism 
goes out of action if the temperature of the surroundings falls below certain levels 
which the animal can still survive. At these lower temperatures the animals 
behave like cold-blooded animals and have body temperatures close to those 
of their external environment. This is the phenomenon of hibernation. The 
ease with which this mechanism is thrown out of action by a fall of temperature 
differs among different species. It is interesting to observe that in Hchidna 
which, on morphological grounds, is regarded as the most primitive of mammals, 
the action of the heat-regulating mechanism is peculiarly susceptible to disturb- 
ance. It ceases to function at external temperatures several degrees higher than 
those at which an effect is to be seen in other hibernating animals (Wardlaw, 
1915, 1921). 


It is well known also that the effectiveness of the mechanism for the 
regulation of body temperature of warm-blooded animals is much less efficient in 
the immature individuals than in the adults. Even in normal infants, for example, 
the fluctuations of body temperature are much greater than those of adults, while 
in premature infants this mechanism is so ineffective that survival is often impos- 
sible without the aid of artificial means for keeping its body temperature within 
suitable limits. ; 


The advantage of a mechanism to free the organism from the effects of 
still another variable of its environment need not be further stressed. In analogy 
with the possible connection between certain of the chemical characters of the 
living organism and the composition of the medium in which it lived at different 
stages of its development, it might be suggested that the constant temperature 
of warm-blooded animals is also a perpetuation of conditions which prevailed while 
this mechanism was being developed. But even such scanty data as those on 
which the previously mentioned suppositions have been based are in this case 
lacking. 

The living organism is constantly liberating energy, part of which appears 
as heat. To preserve a constant body temperature it must, therefore, maintain 
a balance between the rates at which heat is lost and produced. This balance can 
be maintained by the exercise of a control over one or both of these rates. As 
one of the principal objects of adaptive mechanisms seems to be to protect the 
organism against adventitious variations of the rate of its activities, it might be 
expected that the control of temperature would be effected by regulation of the 
rate of heat loss, rather than by variation of the rate of heat production. This 
expectation has, to a considerable extent, been realized in the warm-blooded 
animals which have been studied from this point of view in sufficient detail, 
the dog, and man. 


It has been found that when these animals are examined under 
comparable states of activity, the rate at which they produce heat is 
affected only to a minor extent, even by considerable variations of the 
temperature of their surroundings. Not only is the organism of these 
animals able to restrict the loss of heat from their bodies when the external 
temperature falls, but they are also able to continue to lose heat to their sur- 
roundings, even when the external temperature is above that of their bodies. 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XXili. 


There are, of course, limits beyond which this mechanism becomes ineffective. 
If the external temperature rises too high, or if the conditions of humidity are 
such as to restrict unduly the loss of heat by evaporation, then heat production 
will exceed heat loss, and the body temperature will rise. The organism is 
incapable of decreasing its production of heat below a certain value even under 
these circumstances. 

If the external temperature falls to a low enough level, the mechanism for 
regulating body temperature by controlling the heat loss also becomes ineffective. 
The body under these circumstances, however, does not lose its power of main- 
taining a constant temperature, because it is able to increase its heat production 
until its heat loss is again balanced. The object of the constant body temperature, 
the maintenance of a constant rate of metabolic activity under given conditions, 
is certainly nullified to some extent by this adjustment. The organism is 
outside of the range of perfect adaptation to the temperature of its environment. 
But, on the other hand, such conditions, even when the external temperature is 
extremely low, can be survived indefinitely without apparent detriment to the 
organism. On the whole, therefore, the organism can adapt itself to temperatures 
below that of its body better than it can to higher temperatures. 


Rate of adaptive change. 


As the range and the scope of the mechanisms by which the organism is able 
to modify its environment increase, the necessity for adaptive changes on the 
part of the organism itself must correspondingly decrease. Thus we are led back 
to our original postulate that the more effective any adaptive mechanism is, the 
better does it enable the living organism to persist unchanged in a changing 
environment. We should, therefore, expect evolutionary changes of structure and 
function to become progressively slower as we pass to more and more complex 
organisms, and the mechanisms which were at first developed to preserve the 
primitive characters of the cell itself, eventually to become so effective as to be able 
to preserve the characters of the whole organism. 

The organism which possesses, in an outstanding degree, the ability to modify 
its environment is, of course, man. He controls his food supply by the hunting 
and rearing of food animals, by the gathering and planting of edible plants. He 
modifies certain of his external conditions by the wearing of clothes and the 
erection and use of houses. He adds to the effectiveness of his hands by the use 
of tools. He increases the speed and the range of his movements by travelling 
in vehicles. By means of various instruments he adds to the acuity of his 
sense organs. All these external aids to his natural powers may be classed 
as tools. It is his ability to devise tools which has extended his ability to adapt 
his environment to his needs so immeasurably beyond the similar power of any 
other animal. 

One of the most striking features of this type of adaptive mechanism is the 
extraordinary rapidity with which it has been developed, as compared with the 
evolutionary modifications of bodily structure. 

The conjectures which have been made as to the period which has elapsed 
since the appearance of living forms run into hundreds of millions of years. The 
period for which records can be obtained of the existence of man is measured 
on the other hand by hundreds of thousands of years. However vague those 
estimates may be, there seems to be little doubt that the enormous development 


XXiv. PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 


of complexity which some living forms have undergone has occurred within a 
small fraction of the time during which living organisms have been in existence. 
The development of the power of man to modify his surroundings as a result 
of the development of his mental faculties is a still more rapid and recent 
growth, and is to be measured in centuries. Indeed it may be claimed that man 
has expanded his powers in this direction more during the last century than 
during the whole of his previous history. 

We have in man, then, the most perfect adaptation to environment shown by 
any form of life. So great is his power of modifying his surroundings, and so 
rapidly is this power increasing, that it would seem that further adaptation of 
his physical structures has become unnecessary. It has even been suggested 
that his increasing use of artificial mechanisms may bring about a degeneration 
of some of his bodily powers, and that any further evolutionary development in 
man may be restricted to the growth of his mental faculties. The past history of 
the evolutionary adaptation of living organisms to their environment would, how- 
ever, lead us to expect that any changes which may take place in the organism of 
man will not be such as would adversely affect the conditions of life of the essential 
units of his structure. In so far as the changes which have taken place in his 
habits of life are really adaptations to his environment, we may expect that their 
effect will be to establish more securely the primitive conditions of his cells. 


Summary. 

A characteristic feature of living organisms is the possession of mechanisms 
which protect them against the effects of changes of their environment. 

These mechanisms in the earlier forms exert their action by restricting the 
interchange which they allow between the organism and its surroundings. As 
they develop in efficiency, they become more selective in action, and are able 
to preserve the essential characters of the organism while allowing a free inter- 
’ change with its environment. They have preserved, even in the higher organisms, 
some of the conditions of cell lite which probably existed at very early stages 
of their evolution. 

When sufficiently broad distinctions of form are considered they are found 
to possess equally distinct chemical features, for example in the proportions of 
some of the elements which they contain. 

As the complexity of organisms has increased, they have rendered them- 
selves more independent of their external environment by providing their cells 
with an immediate environment of their own. By this means external changes 
are only allowed to reach the cells in a modified form. The possession of this 
internal environment enables the organism to obtain the advantages of a freer 
interchange with its surroundings without endangering the stability of its essential 
living matter. 

The evolutionary development of the adaptive mechanisms of the organism 
has continually extended the range and scope of its control over its environment. 
Examples of the most highly specialized forms of this control are the maintenance 
of a constant body temperature by homoiothermal animals, and the provision of a 
special food supply for their young by mammals. 

As the effectiveness of the mechanisms for the adaptation of the environment 
to its needs has increased, the need for further adaptive modification of the 
organism itself has correspondingly diminished. 


PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. XXV. 


References. 


Baty, E. C. C., et al., 1927, 1928.—Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond., 1164, 1927, 197, 212, 219; 1164, 
1928, 398. 

Baker, R. T., and H. G. SmirH, 1920.—A Research on the Eucalypts, especially in regard 
to their Essential Oils. 2nd edition, Sydney, 1920. 

Bortazzi, F., 1908.—Hrgeb. d. Physiol., 7, 1908, 161. 

CAMBAGE, R. H., 1928.—Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 62, 1928, 152. 

DAKIN, W. J., 1908.—Biochem. Journ., 3, 1907-8, 473. 

Davin, T. W. E., Trans. Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 52, 1928, 191. 

HAMBURGHER, H. J., 1923.—Johns Hopkins Hosp. Bull., 34, 1923, 226, 266. 

Macauuum, A. B., 1926.—Physiol. Rev., vi, 1926, 316. 

Moore, B., and T. A. WessTeER, 1914.—Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond., 87B, 1914, 163. 

RINGER, S., 1880-1886.—Journ. Physiol., iii, 1880-2, 380; v, 1884-5, 98; vii, 1886, 118. 

WARDLAW, H. S. H., 1915.—Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xlix, 1915, 169. 

, 1915.—PrRoc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xl, 1915, 231. 

, 1917.—PrRoc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xlii, 1917, 815. 

, 1918.—Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xliii, 1918, 844. 

, 1926.— Aust. Journ. Hup. Biol. Med. Sci., iii, 1926, 130. 


Mr. E. Cheel, Honorary Treasurer, presented the balance sheets for the year 
1929, duly signed by the Auditor, Mr. F. H. Rayment, F.C.P.A., Chartered 
Accountant (Aust.); and he moved that they be received and adopted, which 
was carried unanimously. 


No nominations of other Candidates having been received, the Chairman 
declared the following elections for the ensuing Session to be duly made:— 

President: EH. Cheel. 

Members of Council: C. Anderson, M.A., D.Sc., Professor A. N. St. G. H. 
Burkitt, M.B., B.Sc., H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S., Professor W. J. Dakin, D.Sc., 
G. M. Goldfinch and A. G@. Hamilton. 

Auditor: KF. H. Rayment, F.C.P.A. 

A cordial vote of thanks to the retiring President was carried by acclamation. 


XXVi. 


‘0861 ‘Aaenuer IPT ‘O86 ‘Arenaqgey W399 ‘Aoupss 


“LOJIPNY 
‘IOINSBOLL, “WOR ‘(Cysny) JUeJUNODY poeloWeYyO ‘INAWAVY “H ‘WwW 
‘TWWHHO NIM ‘peonpoid serytino0egG "091100 punoy pue pourwMmexa 
T TE 668°S3 T TL 66883 
@ | 0€6T 0} souRleg “ 
O20 00K SS SMMC SolouesulJUOD :Uolyeladoiddy “ 
Gf, Gi Sites Sse “7  '* Sulpurqyoog pue Areaiqry “ 
6 9T LOT So 
0 6 iad oe 0-0 oe oe oe oe ee sauredey “ce 
. pi; eT I oe oe oe oe. oe sosuodxy yueg iad 
OMe REE eCberior suc eULOouk Sua roletes)) o/y sdtysmoTfoq “ 0 0 OL lag aa anne ieee SOTMOON GL SUIT[OACL I], “ 
OL 0 602 eve ex: (SoTeM ®t 9 a eine ee a souepue}}Vy “ 
YyynogG MoN JO JUuSeUTUABAOY AQ poseyoind 8 8L TIE ig Ee eee a a sara es O00 sosuedxym “ 
S8UIP9900I1g Jo soIdod Q0T sUIpnpoUr) seleg “ 6 OL 92 Se tate aes OO BIEN pue sulyulig “ 
@ eL GIs ee ee ee ee *% oe oe oe oe oe syUNyY ee 0 L 2, ae oe oe oe JIpny ins 
 @ Gist 82 89 Sh 959 sel 68) 8b ne Gb “bo aa enG OL Z 62 <a es 
0 8 8 oe ee oe ee ee OD oe ee Soo oouBIIUA “ce 6 e 9% eo. 0-0 oe oe oe ee ysep A1190q “ce 
0 GI GI oe oe oe se oe oa o-. SUOT]JGIIOSqnS oyIT “ce I 61 ZG 0-0 oe o- OO ee ee oe 93B1S0g ee 
0 ¢ OLT 5 a See aR 8 IT 8&3 2 SUERTE [NUS CEMERST 
0 F PF erin svUBAPY UT G6 LI 6L6 a Sa Re 
0 81 ST ee oO oe SIBVIIIV P el POL oe ee oe o- ee oe SUOT}CIISNII[T oe 
OR SOS peer ee ce 6261 :SUOT}dIIOSqng “ OL g§ gg8 "* ** ** ** suoT}eoTIqnd suljulIg “ 
G «PL PST Songs oa ees 8261 Wooly sourleg Aq 0 OT 6FI'T sy tt ss ss SOSVM PUB SOTIBTVS OL 
[Qe aay pS ¢ As 65 sDopes ened, 
‘626 ‘4aquisc9q 3sLg Ppapuy weaA “LNNODOV AWOONI 
G PI Seo‘ Tes G FI S80‘ Tes 
Bo Hein Ye ae oe Wal ‘foupsG Jo “AOD Bulyueg [elo1owmuU0D 
Ce Gaui (BG me = ‘  ** 6367 ‘dequisveqd 4sTg je 9/Y smOOUT 
0 0 OT sie aoe poe eines hy eee UE YI 0 LI & “* 6661 ploeutooe as ISTE 7e puny [BIIOWs], 19 JOT H 
G € 39 a2 yueg SZUIABG JUSUIUIDAOY :YSBVO 0 0 OOOTT °° = ‘“* 9ATOSeY SolouesuTJUOD 
OE eG | <== —— 03205 0000 
0 0 0099 °° oases 1OJ. UO SUBOT 0 0 0009 TITM StU AC Beuiuenbou| wns 19q}IN YY 
0 0 OLF = Soinjusqed “M’'S'N QO O Moe = 8" oulr} 
0 IL &6S°ZT ° eSUE OA EMBO) SJUSULJSOATT -oJI] SITY SULINp AvOTOR], UITIIM 
0 0 O00‘TT : “' + ppoyeedq s8,A}Ja1I00g IG WOdIJ poedAtooot junowy :yeyidep 
‘Pp ‘8 j= 2B 8 3 ‘p's 3 ‘p's 3 
‘SLHSSV ‘SSHILITIGVI'T 


626) ‘49qui990q 3SLE #2 JOOYS 9OURIeEq “LNNOOOV IWHANAD 


SafeA\ YING May] jo AyaIo0g  ueauUry] 


XXVI1i. 


“LIINSCILT, “MOR 


‘TaqHO NIMAG 


‘OS6T ‘Arenuee IPT 
“1OVIPNY 


‘Cysny) JUBJUNODIDY poelezIeYyO 


‘0861 ‘Areniqey 439 ‘AoupAg 


‘INGWAVY “H “Wh 
‘poonpoid SelqlaMoeg 4091100 pUuNOJ puUv poTIWeXxG 


oD 


D 


dageesct 


sNOoon 


$9605 


TS8°LS 


9T 

OOL‘LE 

0€¢ 

GOT‘6 
By 


“‘py] ‘Aoupsg jo ‘AOD Sulyueg [elo1emU10Dg 


‘SLHSSV 


€ & £9665 

SL Les 0/V [eleuey “ 

y ST 996 es ras o/V jTeydeo “ 

Oe nS Slap Om SeIpIsqng ,SMOT[Aq “ 
Bs yso.10}Uy AG 8 9 889 “7 ts ++ SMOTIAH ABOPORY, UROUUTT JO Solreleg oF 

DiS s, 


"626L ‘daquiacsq 3S,g¢ papuy see2A “LNNODOV AWOONI 


jor = Gk ESSeLirS, 


| 


o3e3}10]. WO SuUBvOT 
pe Sean ode FAW SIN) ye i NOSicis es 


peziyelides suroouy snjdung 


suevoy yWeeMuUomMWMOD | 9 0 O0D‘'GE °° ABOTOBIN WIRITTIM IIS Aq peyyeenbsq JUNOWY 


DS F 


| ‘SHLLITIAVI'T 


"6c6L “Haqwiec9q ISLE 38@ LAAHS AONV IVE 
“LNNODDV SdIHSMO1144d AVATOVW NVANNID 


XXViii. 


‘Og6T ‘Atenuer YIFT ‘OS6T ‘Arenuqoay 49 ‘AoupsS 
“LOJVIPNY 
“IOINSvAITT, UO ‘(ysny) JURvJUNODDYV peileqeYyO 
‘THHHO NIA ‘INGUWAVY HOW 
‘poonpoid setytanoeG “4yoolu00 puNnoy pue pouUlMex 


6 TL LL8s 6 T L185 
T T CPG oO ao oa o. O06 no a o-0 ee OS6L on) ooUuRlT eg ee 
OJAI 1s! SSS 
0 0 SL a SOsSmOaxnp Skul TOA a Tee 
0 LI T oe oe o. eo. ee oe STBOTPOLIOg “ec 
0 0 T o- ee oe ee oe ar Cay ee oe oe punjoy oe 0 0 G) oe oe Cay a aSBIIVO pue ase101S (a3 
9 P L6L ee oe O-0 ee ee we ee oO ee ae 4s0.190}UT 6c 0 LT ey oe ee oe sTeolmoug pue snieieddy “c“ 
¢ LI gp ee ee ee on cary 0:6 ‘alee! ee SZ6I UlOdJ douvled Ag 8 9 89T oe ee ee ee ote! O90 oe Aleles OL 
DoS 8} D We 1 sh =e 


"6261 ‘Maquiaceq SLE P9puy 4W29A “LNNODVDV AWOONI 


Ie BizS Oey IT T sPs'9Ts 
1S 7h] ee 

00 9 ee DURE UT, 

OL Tsk Yue SSUIACS JUSUIUIAAOY TE EL eng 72 sy ss: ©6626) “tequieceg@ ISTSs 18 07 Vy eulODUT 

€ 61 GST AuvdulogD Sulyueg [vldIoMUIOD : seo 0 0 008‘g Sve senha Pater 1 ee pozljyeyideo euloouy peeTNUNdIV 
0 0 008°ST SSSR Se ace cm ae suBvOT YI[VOMUOTIUIOD 0-0 00084 =e ABIPRI VIRITIIM JIS Aq peyjeonbeq JUNOUYy 
p's 3 Pp 8 ¢§ “Dien Seeeny 

‘SLASSV SHILVIIGVIT 


"626L “A9QUIa99q ISLE 3X LAAHS SONV IVE 
“LNNGOOV ADOTOIWALOVE 


ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. 


ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 
26th Marcu, 1930. 
Mr. E. Cheel, President, in the Chair. 


A letter was received from Dr. R. Broom, Corresponding Member, returning 
thanks for congratulations. 


The President offered congratulations on behalf of members to Dr. W. L. 
Waterhouse, on having obtained the degree of Doctor of Science in Agriculture 
in the University of Sydney. 

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting 
(27th November, 1929) amounting to 45 Voiumes, 440 Parts or Numbers, 36 
Bulletins, 12 Reports and 8 Pamphlets, received from 169 Societies and Institutions 
and 4 private donors, were laid upon the table. 


PAPERS READ. 

1. Revision of Australian Oenochromidae (Lepidoptera). ii. By A. Jefferis 
Turner, M.D., F.E:S. 

2. A Revision of the Australian Teleasinae (Hymenoptera, Proctotrypoidea). 
By A. P. Dodd. 

3. Notes on Australian Diptera. xxiii. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated 
by I. M. Mackerras.) 


ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 
30th Apri, 1930. 
Mr. E. Cheel, President, in the Chair. 


Mr. William M. P. Cochran, Rabaul, New Guinea; Professor H. W. Davies, 
The University, Sydney; Miss Kathleen M. I. English, Yass, N.S.W.; and Miss 
Mary E. Fuller, Canberra, F.C.T., were elected Ordinary Members of the Society. 


The President announced that the Council had elected Messrs. A. F. Basset Hull 
and H. J. Carter and Drs. W. R. Browne and H. S. H. Wardlaw to be Vice- 
Presidents, and Dr. G. A. Waterhouse to be Honorary Treasurer for the current 
Session. 


The President also announced that the Council had elected Dr. W. L. 
Waterhouse to fill the vacancy on the Council caused by the resignation of 
Dr. A. J. Nicholson. 


A letter was read from Mrs. and Miss Armit, returning thanks for sympathy 
in the death of Dr. H. W. Armit. 


A letter was read from Dr. W. L. Waterhouse, expressing his thanks for 
congratulations on his attaining the Doctorate of Science in Agriculture of the 
University of Sydney. 

B 


XXX. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. 


The President expressed the congratulations of members to Dr. H. Claire 
Weekes, on attaining the degree of D.Sc., in the University of Sydney; also to 
Miss Doris Selby, on attaining the degree of M.Sc., in the University of Sydney. 

The President called attention to concession fares offered by the Common- 
wealth Railways to scientific parties wishing to visit areas traversed by the 
Commonwealth Railways. 

The President also called attention to the publication of the “Catalogue of 
Scientific and Technical Periodicals in the Libraries of Australia’, published by 
the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, 314 Albert Street, East Mel- 
bourne, C.2. 

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting 
(26th March, 1930) amounting to 17 Volumes, 101 Parts or Numbers, 10 Bulletins, 
4 Reports and 3 Pamphlets, received from 67 Societies and Institutions and 1 
private donor, were laid upon the table. 


PAPERS READ. 


1. The Geology of the South Coast of New South Wales. Part ii. Devonian 
and Older Palaeozoic Rocks. By Ida A. Brown, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of 
the Society in Geology. 

2. Notes on the Genus Apistomyia (Diptera) and Description of a New 
Species. By A. L. Tonnoir. (Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) 

3. Australian Coleoptera. Notes and New Species. vii. By H. J. Carter, 
B.A., F.E.S. 

4. Australian Rust Studies. ii. Biometrical Studies of the Morphology of 
Spore Forms. By W. L. Waterhouse, D.Sc.Agr. 


NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 

Mr. Frank A. Craft exhibited an aboriginal stone axe from Bumballa Estate, 
Wingello, N.S.W. The specimen measures 8 inches x 5 inches x 14 inches thick, 
and the cutting edge has been finely ground and polished. The axe is of dense 
black basalt of a doleritic nature, the sides showing considerable weathering. 

Mr. Craft also showed lantern slides illustrating the upland valleys and 
gorges about the Shoalhaven River near Tallong. The recent migration of the 
river in an entrenched meander was shown, and the remarkably level skyline of 
the tableland. The slides illustrated recent erosion and the present land forms 
in the Tallong area. 


ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 
21st May, 1930. 


Mr. E. Cheel, President, in the Chair. 


The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting 
(30th April, 1930) amounting to 18 Volumes, 52 Parts or Numbers, 4 Bulletins, 
3 Reports and 4 Pamphlets, received from 52 Societies and Institutions and 1 
private donor, were laid upon the table. 


PAPERS READ. 


1. Observations on the Dipterous Family Tanyderidae. By C. P. Alexander. 
(Communicated by Dr. I. M. Mackerras.) 


ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Xxxi. 


2. The Genus Micromonospora @rskov, a little known Group of Soil Micro- 
organisms. By H. L. Jensen, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. 

8. Revision of Australian Oenochromidae (Lepidoptera). Part iii. By 
A. Jefferis Turner, M.D., F.E.S. 


NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 

Dr. W. L. Waterhouse exhibited specimens of Hordeum maritimum With. 
which showed genetic variation. Plants had been collected at Cowra, N.S.W., for 
use in the cereal rust investigations. In the work, bulk sowings of the grass seed 
revealed a proportion of albino seedlings. Further investigations showed that 
some single plant progenies produced only normal seedlings, whereas in other 
pure lines a ratio of 3 normals : 1 albino seedling was found. In Nature, plants 
heterozygous for albino production occur, genetically different from the normal 
type. A series of crosses has been planned to give further information on the 
happening. 

The President gave a short account of the progress that had been made in the 
attempt to have an area set aside in the National Park for the cultivation and 
exhibition of the native flora of New South Wales. 


ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 
25th JuNE, 1930. 
Mr. E. Cheel, President, in the Chair. 


Dr. G. Heydon, School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, The University, 
Sydney; Professor J. Macdonald Holmes, The University, Sydney; and Mr. 
F. H. Taylor, School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, The University, 
Sydney, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society. 


The President offered the congratulations of members to Professor J. P. Hill 
on the award to him by the Linnean Society of London of a Linnean Gold Medal 
for 1930. 


The President reported that satisfactory progress had been made with the 
building of Science House, and that the Foundation Stone had been set on 
24th June, 1930, by His Excellency Sir Philip Game, Governor of New South 
Wales. 


The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting 
(21st May, 1930) amounting to 43 Volumes, 180 Parts or Numbers, 18 Bulletins, 
5 Reports and 61 Pamphlets, received from 98 Societies and Institutions and 4 
private donors, were laid upon the table. 


PAPERS READ. 

1. Notes on Australian Diptera. xxiv. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated 
by I. M. Mackerras.) 

2. Fifth Contribution towards a new Classification of Australian Asilidae. 
By G. H. Hardy. 

3. The Mosses of Fiji. By H. N. Dixon, M.A., and W. Greenwood, F.L.S. 


NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 
Mr. David G. Stead exhibited an example of the egg of the Chimaeroid shark, 
Callorhynchus tasmanius Richardson, known as the Elephant Fish. The specimen 


XXxii. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. 


had been taken by means of an oyster dredge by himself in Ralph’s Bay, near 
Hobart, Tasmania. This fish is quite abundant in Tasmanian waters and even 
penetrates the estuaries of the larger rivers, having been taken as high up as 
Launceston, on the Tamar, and well up the Huon at Hobart. The eggs are 
deposited in the autumn or late summer apparently, and lie for an undetermined 
period before hatching, in several fathoms of water. The egg is somewhat boat- 
shaped, is slightly keeled and is strongly convex underneath. This causes the 
egg to lie easily on its keel and so that it will swing round with any movements 
of the tide. Such a construction also ensures the maximum of oxygenation for 
the developing embryo and prevents the egg from being covered by silt. 


Mr. W. W. Froggatt exhibited a piece of red wood from the side of the door 
of the Government Residence at Rabaul, New Guinea, which had been riddled 
with holes by leaf cutting bees, Megachile sp.; he also exhibited a specimen of 
the bee. 


Mr. L. L. Hall exhibited a mass of rolled Kurrajong leaves from Goulburn. 
This is caused by the caterpillars of the moth, Notarcha plycalis Walker. 


Mr. J. R. Kinghorn exhibited a specimen (the holotype) and a skull of his 
new genus of EHlapine snake, Oxyuranus maclennani, described in the Records of 
the Australian Museum a few years ago. The species is of renewed interest on 
account of the ,research on snake venom being carried out by Dr. C. H. Kellaway 
of the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute of Research, Melbourne. its affinities and 
general characteristics were explained. The skull of a Death Adder, Acanthophis 
antarcticus, was exhibited for comparative purposes. 


Mr. Gilbert P. Whitley exhibited illustrations of some Queensland Fishes and 
made remarks upon them. 


Dr. W. L. Waterhouse exhibited seedlings of rye showing marked albinism. 
As a result of selfing, races are showing great variation in the amount of 
chlorophyll produced. The extreme types show entire lack of this pigment and 
die as soon as the reserve food in the grain is exhausted. Another exhibit 
illustrated the occurrence in the seedling stage of cross-bred wheats of the dwarfing 
character often termed ‘‘grass-tuft”. These arose in Fl plants derived as a result 
of crossing two normal varieties. In no case has it been possible to bring such 
F1 grass-tuft plants to maturity. Several instances of the occurrence of double 


embryos in cereals were illustrated. These included wheat, barley, rye and 
maize. 


Mr. A. S. Le Souef exhibited a specimen of a mouse from Hast Sisters Island, 
Bass Straits. This mouse, in a very isolated locality, is apparently the common 
house mouse, Mus musculus, but it has a white-tipped tail. One would not expect 
to find a variant established on an isolated island. He also exhibited a specimen 
of a tree Kangaroo from New Guinea. This species has a beautiful fur which 
may prove of commercial value to the country. 

Mr. HE. G. Jacobs exhibited twenty-two plants of various species from 
Middlesex, British Honduras, Central America. Most of the plants are from 
the forest regions of the lower highlands and are characteristic rain forest types. 

Miss I. Brown exhibited specimens of well preserved leaves from rocks of 
Tertiary age between Bundanoon and Penrose. 


Dr. A. B. Walkom exhibited specimens of a fossil fern, apparently new, from 
the roof of the Bulli Coal’Seam in the Excelsior Colliery, Illawarra District. 


ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. >-Oro-ghirly 


ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 
30th JuLy, 1930. 

Mr. E. Cheel, President, in the Chair. 

Sir George Julius, Sydney; Miss Gladys Carey, Epping; Miss Lilian R. 
Fraser, Pennant Hills; Miss Joyce W. Vickery, Homebush; and Miss Jessie A. 
Webster, Stanmore, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society. 

The President offered the congratulations of members to Dr. G. A. Waterhouse 
on his election as President of the Board of Trustees of the Australian Museum. 

A letter was read from Miss Doris Selby, thanking the President and members 
for congratulations on attaining her M.Sc. degree. 

The President referred with pleasure to the proclamation issued by the 
Government extending the existing protection to certain species of wild flowers 
for a further period of twelve months. 

The President and members offered a very hearty welcome to Professor 
J. T. Wilson, who expressed his pleasure at being present and also conveyed a 
message of greeting to members from Professor J. P. Hill. 

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting 
(25th June, 1930) amounting to 18 Volumes, 168 Parts or Numbers, 2 Bulletins, 
9 Reports and 39 Pamphlets, received from 84 Societies and Institutions and 2 
private donors, were laid upon the table. 


PAPERS READ. 
1. Notes on Australian Diptera. xxv. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by 
Dr. G. A. Waterhouse.) 


2. Notes on the Autumn Orchids of the South Maitland Coalfields. By 
Rey. H. M. R. Rupp, B.A. 


3. The Origin of Hndemism in the Angiosperm Flora of Australia. By the 
late Professor A. A. Lawson, D.Sc., F.R.S.E. 


NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 

Mr. David G. Stead exhibited a drawing (made by Mr. M. Lynch of the 
Lands Department, Fiji) of a “sea monster” cast up on a mud bank, two miles 
inside the mouth of the Dreketi River, Labasa, Vanua Levu, Fiji, and seen by 
Mr. Lynch on 17th November, 1928. The animal was fourteen feet in total length 
(tail appears to have been mutilated), four feet across at the shoulders and 
eighteen inches across the narrowest part of the tail. Head and neck together 
measured three feet in length, the neck being two and a half feet thick. Distance 
from end of snout to widest part of shoulders was four feet. Though a number 
of the characters mentioned were difficult to reconcile with each other, Mr. Stead 
stated that there appeared to be no doubt that the animal was a Dugong (Halicore). 
Further enquiries were being made. 


Mr. W. W. Froggatt exhibited some “Blood Wood Apples’. These are the 
large galls of Cystococcus pomiformis Froggatt, one of the most remarkable galls 
in the world. They are found in North Queensland, Central and North-western 
Australia, growing upon the branchlets of Eucalyptus terminalis. The gall starts 
as a small round marble on the branchlet and becomes as large as a small apple. 
The blacks eat the coccids in the galls. The gall has thin walls with a large 
gall chamber; at the base in the centre is a circular depression; at the summit a 
rounded funnel just beneath the apical opening. The female coccid stands on 


XXXiV. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. 


her head which forms a circular plate, fitting into the circular depression, with 
the tip of the abdomen, which is smooth and rounded, fitting into the funnel on 
the roof of the chamber. She has no mouth, antennae or legs, but four spiracles. 
The male coccids hatch out inside the gall-chamber, and go through the whole 
of their development into two-winged slender-bodied coccids within the gall, 
emerging when adult through the apical orifice. Mr. Froggatt also exhibited two 
Hymenopterous galls: (1) leaf of tropical jungle plant from Cairns, N. Queensland, 
covered with minute Chalcid galls, (2) Hucalypt branchlet with mass of long 
spindle-shaped galls of Tepperella eucalypti, from the South Coast of New South 
Wales. — 

The President exhibited a flowering plant of ‘“‘soft-leaved Wattle” (Acacia 
pubescens) taken from a sucker growth near Bankstown two years ago, and 
cultivated as a pot-plant. This species has a limited distribution and may become 
extinct, as it rarely matures its pods and seeds. It is noteworthy on account of 
the leaflets not folding in sleep at night as is the case with most species of the 
Mimosae. He also exhibited live plants of “Australian Lime” (Microcitrus 
australis) and “Finger Lime’ (Microcitrus australasica) together with a series 
of fruits showing considerable variation in shape, size and colour. Three 
hybrids (“Faustrimon,”’ “Faustrimedin”’, and “Faustrime’’) were also exhibited 
produced as the result of crossing the “finger lime’ (M. australasica) with 
three cultivated citrus varieties. Seedling plants of ““Bangalow Palm” (Archonto- 
phoenix Cunninghamii) and the “Curly Palm” or “Belmore Palm” (Howea 
belmoreana) were shown and attention drawn to the suitability of the “Bangalow 
Palm” for certain decorative effects which it was contended were superior to 
that of the “Curly Palm”. 

Seedling plants of several species of Hucalyptus were also exhibited to show 
the distinctive characteristics of the juvenile stage of development in comparison 
with the adult stage and to demonstrate the easy method of propagating them 
from seeds and transferring the seedlings from the seed beds to thumb pots for 
transport purposes. 

Mr. H. J. Carter called attention to the very early flowering of Pittosporum 
undulatum following the mild winter experienced this year. 


ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 
27th August, 1930. 


Mr. E. Cheel, President, in the Chair. 


The President announced that the first Fletcher Memorial Lecture would be 
delivered in the Lecture Theatre of the Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney, 
on Monday, 15th September, 1930, at 8 p.m., by Mr. A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sce., 
the subject being—‘“Joseph James Fletcher, an Idealist Secretary.” A cordial 
invitation to be present was extended to all. 


The President announced that applications for grants to scientific research 
workers should be made to the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, 
314 Albert Street, East Melbourne, C.2, not later than lst November, 1930. 

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting 
(30th July, 1930) amounting to 16 Volumes, 116 Parts or Numbers, 6 Bulletins, 
2 Reports and 5 Pamphlets, received from 79 Societies and Institutions, were laid 
upon the table. 


ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXV. 


PAPERS READ. 
1. On Grevillea Gaudichaudii, a supposed natural Hybrid between Grevillea 
laurifolia and G. acanthifolia. By J. McLuckie, M.A., D.Sc. 
2. The Topography and Water Supply of Cox’s River, N.S.W. By Frank A. 
Craft, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geography. 
3. Goulburn—a vital Point on the New South Wales Highlands. By Frank A. 
Craft, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geography. 


NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 

Mr. David G. Stead reported that a large Humpback Whale, Megaptera nodosa, 
had found its way into Port Jackson on August 12 and had penetrated so far up 
the harbour as to pass under the newly joined arch of the Sydney Harbour Bridge. 
It moved about the harbour all that day and the next morning returned to the 
ocean. It remained in Watson’s Bay for an hour and a half after daylight before 
going to sea. From close personal observations Mr. Stead estimated this whale to 
be about 45 feet in length. 

It is of interest to note that only two days before, a whale estimated to be 
about the same size, was observed swimming backwards and forwards all day 
long off Tuggerah Lakes entrance in a kind of small bay formed by a slightly 
submerged bank, covered by light surf. Although apparently able to escape, the 
whale would move a few lengths in one direction and then back again, as though 
in hiding from its foes, keeping to its small basin. This observation was made by 
Miss Rachel Davis, of The Entrance. 


Miss Lilian Fraser exhibited root-nodules of Casuarina glauca which resemble 
those of C. Cunninghamiana, but are on the average rather larger, being up to two 
inches in diameter, and the individual roots are rather more swollen. The nodule 
arises as a lateral root which becomes modified by bacterial infection and branches 
profusely, forming a coralloid structure. It becomes covered with cork except 
at the growing tips and is a perennial structure. The nodules exhibited were 
found at Church Point, Pittwater, August, 1930. Root-nodules of Casuarina 
Cunninghamiana have been described (Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1923) by Dr. J. 
McLuckie and, so far as the exhibitor knows, have not been reported for any 
other species. 

The President (Mr. EH. Cheel) exhibited a series of specimens of the following 
species of Hucalyptus: E. capitellata, H. eugenioides, LE. agglomerata, EF. laevopinea, 
E. Muelleriana, E. macrorrhyncha, and E. macrorrhyncha var. brachycorys. Baron 
von Mueller suggested many years ago that the var. brachycorys was worthy of 
specific rank, a statement with which the exhibitor was entirely in accord. 
Attention was drawn to the extremely variable character of the leaves of seed- 
lings, as well as those of the reversionary shoots or so-called sucker or coppice 
growths, together with the shape and size of the fruits taken from sapling trees 
and compared with those of older trees. It was suggested that the whole group 
of Stringybark forms of Eucalypts should be carefully examined in the field and 
an exhaustive study made in connection with the literature dealing with these 
before proposing any more new species. 

Specimens of Callistemon lanceolatus and C. pachyphyllus were also exhibited 
for comparison with the Hucalyptus spp., to show the relative size of the fruits of 
last season’s flowers to those of three-year old capsules on the same branch, the 
valves of which had not yet opened to shed their seeds. 


XXXvVi. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. 


ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 
24th SEPTEMBER, 1930. 


Mr. E. Cheel, President, in the Chair. 

The President announced that the Council is prepared to receive applications 
for four Linnean Macleay Fellowships tenable for one year from 1st March, 1931, 
from qualified candidates. Applications should be lodged with the Secretary, who 
will afford all necessary information to intending candidates, not later than 
Wednesday, 5th November, 1930. 

The President announced that a large majority of the members who had 
replied to the questionnaire regarding the hour of meeting, which had been 
circulated to members in the metropolitan district, had expressed a preference 
for the hour at which meetings are now held; it was therefore proposed to take 
no further action regarding the suggestion that some hour other than 7.30 p.m. 
might be more convenient for members. 

The President, on behalf of members, expressed appreciation of the Fletcher 
Memorial Lecture delivered by Mr. A. H. S. Lucas on Monday, 15th inst. 

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting 
(27th August, 1930) amounting to 7 Volumes, 71 Parts or Numbers, 4 Bulletins, 
1 Report and 3 Pamphlets, received from 51 Societies and Institutions and 1 
private donor, were laid upon the table. 


PAPERS READ. 


1. Notes on Australian Diptera. xxvi. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated by 
Dr. G. A. Waterhouse.) 


2. Descriptions of New Species of Australian Coleoptera. xxi. By A. M. Lea, 
F.E.S. 


3. An Abnormal Xanthium Burr. By J. Calvert, M.Sc., F.L.8S. (Communicated 
by Dr. B. T. Dickson.) 


4. Notes on Gall-making Coccids, with Descriptions of New Species. ii. By 
W. W. Froggatt, F.L.S. 

5. Trichopterygidae of Australia and Tasmania. Descriptions of New Genera 
and Species. By C. Deane. 


NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 

Dr. W. L. Waterhouse exhibited specimens showing variegation of the leaves 
of wheat and rye plants. The former arose from grain of a normal green plant 
of “Alberta Red’, and the latter as a result of two generations of selfing a normal 
plant of “March” rye. This rye family already appears to be homozygous for the 
variegated character. 

The President (Mr. HE. Cheel) exhibited live plants of Darwinia tazifolia var. 
intermedia Cheel (D. intermedia A. Cunn.) which is comparatively rare in the 
Botany Swamps, and Dendrobium Beckleri F.v.M., from the Williams River near 
the foot of the Barrington Tops Range. He also exhibited (i) for comparison 
with D. intermedia, plants of Darwinia fascicularis which had been grown in 
pots for the purpose of forming plantations to exploit the species for its valuable 
essential oil, and (ii) fresh flowering plants of Dendrobium gracilicaule which 
were noted as being fairly plentiful on various trees along the Williams River 
where they were collected recently. 


ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXVii. 


ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 
29th OcToBErR, 1930. 


Mr. E. Cheel, President, in the Chair. 


Miss Muriel G. Holdsworth, B.Sc., Stanmore, and Miss Germaine A. Joplin, 
B.Sc., Eastwood, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society. 


Candidates for Linnean Macleay Fellowships, 1931-32, were reminded that 
Wednesday next, 5th November, is the last day for receiving applications. 


A letter was read from Dr. H. Claire Weekes, returning thanks for 
congratulations. 

The President expressed the sympathy of members with Professor L. A. Cotton 
on the death of his wife. 


The President called the attention of members to the fact that there will be 
professional offices available for letting in Science House. 


The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting 
(24th September, 1930) amounting to 7 Volumes, 101 Parts or Numbers, 4 Bulletins, 
3 Reports and 3 Pamphlets, received from 64 Societies and Institutions and 1 
private donor, were laid upon the table. 


PAPERS READ. 

1. Notes on the Australian Species of the Genus Atriplex. By R. H. Anderson, 
B.Sc.Agr. 

2. On Placentation in Reptiles. ii. By H. Claire Weekes, D.Sc. 

3. The Uterine Cycle of Pregnancy and Pseudo-Pregnancy as it is in the 
Diprotodont Marsupial Bettongia cuniculus. By Professor T. Thomson Flynn, 
D.Sc. 

4. Additions to the Flora of New England. By W. F. Blakely and Rey. EH. N. 
McKie, B.A. 

5. A New Species of Eucalyptus from New England. By W. F. Blakely. 


NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 

The President (Mr. E. Cheel) exhibited fresh flowering specimens of 
Callistemon linearifolia, C. lilacina, C. lilacina var. carmina and a hybrid, C. 
acuminatus x C. lanceolatus; and specimens of Leptospermum emarginata Wendl., 
which is united with L. flavescens by Bentham and other workers. Specimens of 
L. flavescens var. leptophylla were exhibited for comparison. Foliage of a stringy- 
bark LHucalyptus, raised from seed obtained from Wyndham and which has an 
aromatic oil identical with the original parent, was also exhibited. 

Mr. W. F. Blakely gave an interesting chat, illustrated with lantern slides, 
on Stringybarks. In it he dealt with the early use of some of the vernacular 
names of the Hucalypts, which could be traced to some of the first explorers and 
surveyors, and pointed out that the name “Stringybark” was in common use in 
1798, ten years after the colony was founded. He also gave an outline of the 
classification of the Eucalypts by their barks, and a detailed description of the 
morphological characters of the Stringybark Series, together with an explanation 
of their range, size, habit and economic uses, and their utility to the aboriginals 
and also to the early settlers. He also explained that the first Hucalypt known to 
science was a Stringybark, H. obliqua, and that it held the unique position of 
being the type of the genus Eucalyptus. Another distinction claimed for the 


XXXVIii. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. 


Stringybarks was that one of its members, HE. regnans, is the largest tree in 
Australia and the second largest tree in the world. 


Mr. Blakely concluded by stating that he did not know of a more useful tree 
in the Commonwealth or one that has played a more important part in the 
development of this country than the Stringybark. 


ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING. 
26th NovEMBER, 1930. 


Mr. E. Cheel, President, in the Chair. 

Mr. Allen N. Colefax, B.Sc., Kogarah, Miss Enid M. Edmonds, B.Sc., Rose Bay, 
and Mr. Erik Munch-Petersen, Ph.B., M.Sc., M.I.F., North Sydney, were elected 
Ordinary Members of the Society. 

The President announced that the Council had re-appointed Miss Ida A. Brown, 
B.Se., and Mr. Frank A. Craft, B.Sc., to Linnean Macleay Fellowships in Geology 
and Geography respectively for a period of one year from 1st March, 1931. 

The President announced that Science House is expected to be completed by 
the end of January, 1931, and that, therefore, this meeting would be the last 
monthly meeting of the Society to be held at Macleay House. 

Detailed drawings made by the Architects (Messrs. Peddle, Thorp and Walker) 
in connection with the building of Science House were exhibited. 

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting 
(29th October, 1930) amounting to 34 Volumes, 128 Parts or Numbers, 9 Bulletins, 
1 Report and 53 Pamphlets, received from 70 Societies and Institutions, were laid 
upon the table. 


PAPERS READ. 


1. Xerophytes and Xerophily, with Special Reference to Protead Distribution. 
By O. H. Sargent. (Communicated by A. G. Hamilton.) 

2. Australian Rust Studies. iii. Initial Results of Breeding for Rust 
Resistance. By W. L. Waterhouse, D.Sc.Agr. 

3. New Guinea and Australian Coleoptera. Notes and Descriptions of New 
Species. By H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. 

4. The Geology of the South Coast of New South Wales. iii. The Monzonitic 
Complex of the Mount Dromedary District. By Ida A. Brown, B.Sc., Linnean 
Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology. 

5. The Leaf-Buds of some Woody Perennials in the New South Wales Flora. 
By Gladys Carey, B.Sc. 

6. Notes on a Cellulose-decomposing Soil-fungus of an unusual Character. By 
H. L. Jensen, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. 


NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 


Mr. W. W. Froggatt exhibited two specimens of the larva of the Geebung 
Hawk Moth (Coequosia triangularis) from Gosford, showing the two varieties of 
coloration, green and yellow. 


The President (Mr. E. Cheel) exhibited specimens of Helichrysum leuconsidum 
DC., and Boronia oppositifolia (Pers.) Cheel (see Journ. and Proc. Roy. Soc. 
N.S.W., 1927, 408) from Hill Top, between Picton and Mittagong, thus establishing a 
definite locality near Sydney for these two species which are quite common in 
Victoria and Tasmania. He also exhibited a specimen of a stemless thistle, 


ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXxXix. 


Onopordon acaulum Linn., from Balranald, collected by Stock Inspector Chanter, 
who reports that it is spreading rapidly in that district. It is recorded for 
South Australia but has not previously been recorded for this State. 


Dr. G. A. Waterhouse exhibited both sexes of Ogyris zosine arazes, including 
an interesting aberration of the male, all reared from pupae found near Penrith, 
N.S.W. He gave a short account of the habits of the larvae and their attendant 
ants. He also exhibited a pair of Ogyris olane from the same locality; this is a 
new record for this species of butterfly from the County of Cumberland. 


Note on Sterility in the Proteaceae. 
Mr. A. G. Hamilton contributed the following note: 


In a valuable posthumous paper on The Origin of Endemism in the Angiosperm 
Flora of Australia (These PROCEEDINGS, lv, 1930, 371), the late Professor A. A. 
Lawson gives certain criteria from which hybridism may be deduced. With one 
exception they all appear to be cogent. The exception is sterility. He instances 
the infertility of the Proteaceae. From my observations of the plants, I am 
inclined to think that the sterility is accidental and not constitutional, i.e., that it 
arises from the failure of the pollinating agent to visit the flowers. In most of 
the Proteaceae, the official pollinators are birds—the honey-eaters mainly. 


My experience of the failure of Proteads to produce seeds was even more 
striking than Professor Lawson’s. I observed one small tree of Banksia serrata in 
Centennial Park. There were on it 53 heads of flowers, all dead. Forty-five had 
no follicles at all. The remainder had between them 30 follicles. 


The average number of flowers in each head was 460, giving a total of 24,380. 
There was therefore 0:12% which developed fruits. On the other hand, I have 
seen trees, every head of which bore a few, and some 20 or 30 follicles, and now 
and then one finds a head completely covered with fruits, so closely packed that 
there is no room for another follicle. Doubtless, in such cases, many pollinated 
flowers are crushed so that no fruit can form. 


Again, I once saw a New Holland honey-eater visit a flower head of Banksia 
ericifolia. It worked on it for a considerable time, so I marked the head, and 
returning some months afterward found a large number of follicles. It is worthy 
of note that the bird did not visit any of the neighbouring heads, but flew off 
to another tree. The conclusion I came to was that it is only at a certain stage 
that the flowers produce nectar in large quantities, and if that stage is neglected 
by the birds, no fruits are produced. The aborigines knew of the nectar-producing 
powers of this plant, and collected the sweet fluid by placing a number of heads 
on a sheet of bark, and it is recorded that they suffered from severe headaches 
after a feed. 


On a visit to Albany, W.A., in 1904, I found Banksia occidentalis trees had 
every head with a large number of fruits, some so crowded that \there was not 
room for one more. I was told that the little marsupial, Tarsipes, was very 
plentiful all through the bush. As it feeds on the honey of the Banksia flowers 
(and, incidentally, on the insects frequenting them), there can be no doubt but 
that it is an efficient pollinator, and that it was responsible for the plentiful 
fruiting of the Banksias. 


Some years ago I was walking through a glade behind Mt. Kembla where 
there were very many Waratahs in blossom, and saw a spinebill (a very efficient 


xl. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. 


pollinator) alight on a Waratah stem just below the flower head. The jar shook 
the plant, and a shower of drops of nectar flew in all directions. The bird worked 
at the head for over ten minutes. I marked the head, and coming back after a 
couple of months, I found 23 fruits developed. 


This instance again suggests that it is only at a certain stage of flowering that 
nectar is produced in sufficient quantities to attract the pollinators. 


Two species of Isopogon mentioned by Professor Lawson in his tables have 
50 and 85% of sterile pollen, yet my experience is that in both, every head 
produces quantities of fruits. Lomatia silaifolia has 70% of sterile pollen and 
yet it is quite common to see 20 to 30 fruits on a stalk. 


I think, therefore, that a good’ case has been made for the theory that the 
sterility of the Proteaceae is caused, to a great extent, by the failure of the 
pollinators to visit the flowers, and that it is not due to any inherent infertility. 


DONATIONS AND EXCHANGHS. 


Received during the period 28th November, 1929, to 26th November, 1930. 


(From the respective Societies, etc., unless otherwise mentioned.) 


ABERYSTWYTH. 

Welsh Plant Breeding Station, University College of Wales.—Bulletin, Series H, 

Nos. 10-11 (1930); “The Welsh Journal of Agriculture”, vi (1930). 
ACCRA. 

Geological Survey of the Gold Coast.—Buliletin, No. 2 (1928); Memoir No. 1 
(1929) ; Report of the Director for the Financial Year 1928-1929 (1929); “The 
Utility of Geological Surveys to Colonies and Protectorates of the British 
Empire’, by A. E. Kitson (Brit. Assen. Adv. Sci. South Africa, 1929, Section 
C—Geology) (1929). 

ADELAIDE. 

Department of Mines: Geological Survey of South Australia—Bulletin No. 14 
(1930); Mining Review for the Half-Year ended December 31st, 1929 (No. 
iL) GIORO)). 

Field Naturalists’ Section of the Royal Society of South Australia and South 
Australian Aquarium Society—‘The South Australian Naturalist’; xi, 1-4 
(1929-1930). 

Public Library, Museum and Art Gallery of South Australia—Forty-sixth 
Annual Report of the Board of Governors, 1929-30 (1930); Records of the 
South Australian Museum, iv, 2 (1930). 

Royal Society of South Australia.——Transactions and Proceedings, liii (1929). 

South Australian Ornithological Association—‘The South Australian Orni- 
thologist’”’, x, 5-8 (1930). 

University of Adelaide-—“The Australian Journal of Experimental Biology and 
Medical Science’, vi, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); vii, 1-3 (1930); 14 Reprints from 
Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust. lii-liv (1928-1930); 3 Reprints from Rept. Aust. 
Asscn. Adv. Sci. xviii (1926); 1 Reprint from Med. Journ. Aust., July 6, 
1929, pp. 1-8 (1929). 

Woods and Forests Department.—Annual Report for the Year ended June 30th, 
1929 (1929). f 

ALBANY. 

New York State Library, University of the State of New York.—New York State 
Museum Bulletin, Nos. 281-283 (1929). 

ALGER. ! 

Institut Pasteur @ Algérie Archives, vi, 1, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1928); vii, 1 (1929). 

Société d'Histoire Naturelle de VAfrique du Nord—Bulletin, xx, 1929, 6-9 
(T.p. & c.) (1929); xxi, 1930, 1-5 (1930). 

AMSTERDAM. 

Nederlandsche Entomologische Vereeniging.—Entomologische  Berichten, 
T.p. & c. for vii (Nos. 145-168) (1929); viii, 169-174 (1929-1930); Tijdschrift 
voor Entomologie, Ixxii, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); Ixxiii, 1-2 (1930). 


>-d bing DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 


ANN ARBOR. 

University of Michigan.—Contributions from the Museum of Palaeontology, iii, 
5-7 (1929-1930); Occasional Papers of the Museum of Zoology, T.p. & c. for 
Nos. 153-171 (Vol. vii) (1929); Nos. 200-214 (1929-1930); Papers of the 
Michigan Academy of Science, Arts and Letters, xi-xii, 1929 (1930). 

AUCKLAND. 

Auckland Institute and Museum.—Annual Report, 1929-30 (1930); Records, i, 1 
(1930); “Guide to the Josiah Wedgwood Bicentenary Exhibition, May 14th 
to 31st, 1930”, by Gilbert Archey (1930); “The Tertiary (Waitematan) 
Molluscan Fauna of Oneroa, Waiheke Island”, by A. W. B. Powell and 
J. A. Bartrum (from Trans. N.Z. Inst., 1x, 395, 1929). 

BALTIMORE. 

Johns Hopkins University—University Circular, N.S. 1928, 11 (1928); 1929, 

1-11 (1929); 1930, 1-9 (1930). 
BANDOENG. 

Anthropological Laboratory of Java.—‘Somatical Investigation of the Javanese, 
1929”, by Dr. D. J. H. Nyessen (1929). 

Opsporingsdienst Dienst van den Mijnbouww in Nederlandsch.—Indie-—Bulletin 
of the Netherlands East Indian Volcanological Survey, Nos. 24-28 (1929- 
1930); T.p. & c. for Nos. 1-28 (1927-1930); Nos. 29-34 (1930); Vulkano- 
logische en Seismologische Mededeelingen, No. 11 (1930); Wetenschappelijke 
Mededeelingen, Nos. 13-14 (1930). 

BARCELONA. 

Real Academiu de Ciencias y Artes de Barcelona.—Boletin, vi, 1 (1930); 
Memorias, xxi, 17-24 (T.p. & ec.) (1929-1930); xxii, 1 (1930); Nomina del 
Personal Academico, 1929-1930 (1929). 

BASEL. 

Naturforschende Geselilschaft—Verhandlungen, xl, 1928-1929, 1-2 (complete) 

(1929). 
BERGEN. 

Bergens Museuwm.—Arbok, 1929, 2 (T.p. & c.) (1930); 1930, 1 (1929); Arsberet- 

ning, 1928-1929 (1929). 
BERKELEY. 

University of California—Publications, Botany, xi, 16-18 (1930); T.p. & ec. for 
xiv (1927-1929); xvi, 3 (1929); Entomology, T.p. & c. for iv (1926-1928) ; 
v, 4-8 (1930); Geology, xviii, 14-15 (1929); xix, 1-11 (1929-1930); Physiology, 
vii, 9-13 (1929-1930); Zoology, T.p. & c. for xxx (1930); xxxii, 5-7 (1930); 
xxxiii, 7-20 (1929-1930); xxxiv (complete) (1929); xxxv (complete) (1930). 

BERLIN. : 

Botanische Garten und Museum.—Notizblatt, x, 98-100 (T.p. & c.) (1929-1930). 

Deutsche Entomologische Gesellschaft, E.V.m—Deutsche Entomologische Zeit- 
schrift, T.p. & c. for 1929, 5 (1930); 1930, 1 (1930); Mitteilungen, i, 1-6 
(1930). 

Notgemeinschaft der Deutsche Wissenschaft—‘Flora”’, Neue Folge, xxiv, 2-4 
(T.p. & c.) (1929-1930). 

Zoologische Museum.—Mitteilungen, xv, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929-1930); xvi, 1-2 
(1930). 

BERN. 

Naturforschende Gesellschaft.—Mitteilungen a.d. Jahre 1929 (1930); Verhand- 

lungen, 110. Jahresversammlung (1929). 


DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. xliii. 


BIRMINGHAM. 
Birmingham Natural History and Philosophical Society.—List of Members, 
1930, and Annual Report, 1929; Proceedings, xvi, 1 (1930). 
BLOEMFONTEIN. 
Nationale Museum.—Paleontologiese Navorsing, i, 1 (1929); ii, 1-2 (1930). 


BoLoGNa. 
Laboratorio di Entomologia del R. Instituto Superiore Agrario di Bologna.— 
Bollettino, ii (1929). 
BomBayY. 
Bombay Natural History Society.—Journal, T.p. & c. for xxxiii, Pts. 1-2 (1929) ; 
xxxiii, 4 (1929); T.p. & c. for xxxiii, Pts. 3-4 (1930); xxxiv, 1-2 (1930). 
Haffkine Institute—Report for the Year 1928 (1929). 
BONN. 
Naturhistorische Verein der Preussische Rheinlande und Westfalens.—Sitzungs- 
berichte, 1928; Verhandlungen, Ixxxv, 1928 (1929). 
Boston. 
American Academy of Arts and Sciences——Proceedings, Ixiv, 1-6 (1929-1930). 
Boston Society of Natural History.—Proceedings, xxxix, 5 (1929). 
BRISBANE. 
Department of Mines: Geological Survey of Queensland.—Publication, No. 278 
(1930). 
Institutes of Surveyors in the States of the Australian Commonwealth. ‘The 
Australian Surveyor”, i, 1-8 (Index) (1928-1929); ii, 1 (1930). 
“Queensland Government Mining Journal’ (from the Editor) —xxx, Dec., 1929 
(T.p. & c.) (1929); xxxi, Jan.-Nov., 1930 (1930). 
Queensland Museum.—Memoirs, x, 1 (1930). 
Queensland Naturalists’ Club and Nature-Lovers’ League.—“‘The Queensland 
Naturalist”, vii, 4-5 (1930). 
Royal Geographical Society of Australasia (Queensland Branch) —Queensland 
Geographical Journal, N.S. xlii-xliv (in one), 42nd-44th Sessions (1926-1929). 
Royal Society of Queensland.—Proceedings, xli, 1929 (1930). 
Brno. 
Prirodovedecka Fakulta, Masarykovy University.—Spisy . (Publications) 
(Botanical Only), Cis. 5, 12, 16, 27, 35, 49, 52, 53, 55, 56, 59, 70, 74, 76, 101, 
102, 105, 110, 111, 116 (1921-1929). 
BROOKLYN. 
Botanical Society of America.—‘American Journal of Botany’, xvi, 9-10 
(T.p. & c.) (1929); xvii, 1-7 (1930). 
BRUSSELS. ‘ 
Académie Royale des Sciences, des Lettres et des Beaux-Arts de Belgique.— 
Annuaire, 96e Année (1930); Bulletin de la Classe des Sciences, 1929, 5-12 
(T.p. & c.) (1929); 1930, 1-2 (1930). 
Musée Royal d Histoire Naturelle de Belgique.——Bulletin, vi, 1-4 (1930); 
Mémoires, Nos. 38-40 (1929). 
Société Entomologique de Belgique.—Bulletin and Annales, lxix, 8-12 (Index) 
(1929); Ixx, 1-8 (1930); Mémoires, xxiii, 2-3 (1930). 
Société Royale de Botanique de Belgique—Bulletin, |xi, 1-2 (T.p. & c.) (1928- 
1929); Ixii, 1-2 (T.p. & c.) (1929-1930). 
Société Royale Zoologique de Belgique.—Annales, lix, 1928 (1929). 


xliv. DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 


BUDAPEST. 
Musée National Hongrois.—Annales, xxv, 1928 (Contents, Vols. i-xxv) (1928). 
BUENOS AIRES. 

Sociedad Argentina de Ciencias Naturales.—Revista “Physis”’, ix, 34 (T.p. & c.) 

(1929). 
BUITENZORG. 

Department van Landbouw, Nijverheid en Handel—Bulletin du Jardin 
Botanique, Série iii, x, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929-1930); xi, 1 (1930); Supplément, 
Vol. i (1930); Vol. ii, 1-2 (1930); ‘‘Treubia’, vii, Supplément, Livr. 4-6 
(1929-1930); xi, 2-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929-1930); xii, 1-2 (1930). 

Natuurwetenschappelijke Raad voor Nederlandsch.Indie te Batavia.—P ubli- 
cation No. 3 (Mei, 1930). 

CAEN. 

Société Linnéenne de Normandie—Bulletin, 7e Série, x, 1927 (1928); 

Mémoires, xxi, 1 (1904); Nouvelle Série—Section Botanique, i, 2-3 (1928). 
CALCUTTA. 

Geological Survey of India.—Memoirs, liv (complete) (1929); lv, 1 (1930); 
Memoirs, Palaeontologia Indica, N.S. xvi (1930); Records, lxii, 4 (T.p. & c.) 
(1930) ; Ixiii, 1-2 (1930). ? 

Indian Museum.—Memoirs, ix, 3-4 (1929); x (complete) (1929); Records, xxx, 
Appendix; xiii, 2-4; xxxii, 1 (1929-1930); Report of the Zoological Survey 
of India for the Years 1926-1929 (1929). 

CAMBRIDGE, England. 

Cambridge Philosophical Society.—Biological Reviews and Biological Proceed- 

ings, iv, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); v, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (19380). 
CAMBRIDGE, Mass. 

Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College—Annual Report of the 
Director for 1928-1929 (1929); Bulletin, lxix, 11-15 (T.p. & c.) (1929); Ixx, 
ies) (Abo, 3(085)) (GOED). 

CANBERRA. 

Commonwealth Bureau of Census and Statistics —Official Year Book, No. 22, 
1929 (1929). 

Commonwealth Forestry Bureau.—Third British Empire Forestry Conference, 
Australia and New Zealand, 1928, Proceedings (no date). 

Council for Scientific and Industrial Research.—Third Annual Report for Year 
ended 30th June, 1929 (1929). 

CANTON. 

Geological Survey of Kwangtung and Kwangsi—Annual Report, i, 1927-1928 

(1928) ; ii, 1, 1928-1929 (1929); Special Publication, Nos. 1-4 (1929). 
CaPE Town. 

Royal Society of South Africa—Transactions, xviii, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929-1930). 

South African Museum.—Annals, xxii, 3 (T.p. & c.) (1928); xxviii, 2-3 (1930); 
Report for Year ended 31st December, 1929 (1930). 

CHERBOURG. 

Société Nationale des Sciences Naturelles et Mathématiques de Cherbourg.— 

Mémoires, xl (General Index to xxxi-xl) (1924-1929). 
CHICAGO. 

Field Museum of Natural History—Geology, Memoirs, i, 1 (1930); Leaflet, 
Botany, 14 (1930); Geology, 11-12 (1929); Zoology, 12 (1930); Publica- 
tions, Botanical Series, iv, 6-9 (1929); vii, 1 (1930); Geological Series, v, 2 


DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. xlv. 


(1929) ; Report Series, T.p. & c. for vii (1926-1928) ; viii, 1 (1930) ; Zoological 
Series) xii, 19) (Cp. & e¢:)) G'930))\ > xiii, 6 (Gi929)) 3 xv, 1 @'923)); xvii, 2-6 
(1929-1930); xviii, 1 (1930). 
John Crerar Library.—xxxyv-th Annual Report for the Year 1929 (1930). 
CHRISTCHURCH. 
Canterbury Museum.—Records, iii, 4-5 (1930). 
Philosophical Institute of Canterbury.—tTransactions and Proceedings of the 
New Zealand Institute, lx, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929-1930); lxi, 1-2 (1930). 
CLUJ. 
Gradina Botanica.—Bulletin, ix, Appendix 1-2 (1929). 
COIMBRA. 
Universidade de Coimbra: Museu Zoologico—Memorias e Hstudios, Serie i 
No. 1, Fase. 4; No. 29, Fasc. 1; Nos. 30-37 (1928-1929). 
CoLtp Spring Harsor. 
Department of Genetics: Carnegie Institution of Washington.—Annual Report 
of the Director, 1928-1929 (Extracted from Year Book No. 28, 1928-29) (1929). 
COLOMBO. 
Colombo Museuwm.—Spolia Zeylanica (Ceylon Journal of Science, Section B— 
Zoology and Geology), T.p. & ec. for xv (1929); xvi, 1 (1930). 


COLUMBUS. 

American Chemical Society.—Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, xxi, 11-12 
(T.p. & c.) (1929); xxii, 1-10 (1930); Analytical Edition, ii, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) 
(1930); News Edition, vii, 21-24 (Index) (1929); viii, 1-20 (1930). 

Ohio Academy of Science.——‘Ohio Journal of Science’, xxix, 5-6 (T.p. & c.) 
(1929); xxx, 1-4 (19380). 

Ohio Biological Survey.—Bulletin 6, 11, 13, 21, 22 (1916, 1921, 1926, 1929, 1929). 

Ohio State University —Bulletin, xxxiv, 10 (1930). 

CoPpENHAGEN. 

Det Kgl. Danske Videnskabernes Selskab.—Biologiske Meddelelser, viii, 1, 4-8 
(T.p. & c.) (1929-1930); ix, 1-2 (19380). 

Zoological Museum of the University.—Publications, Nos. 60-68 (1929-1930) ; 
The Danish Ingolf-Expedition, iv, 7 (1930). 

DUBLIN. 

Royal Dublin Society—EHconomic Proceedings, ii, 26; Scientific Proceedings, 
N.S. xix, 29-39 (1930). 

Royal Irish Academy.—Proceedings, xxxviii, Section B, 15 (T.p. & c.); xxxix, 
1-15 (1929-1930). 

DURBAN. 

Durban Museum.—Annals, iii, 3 (1930). 

Natal Herbarium.—Two separates—‘The Genus Psoralea Linn.’ by Helena 
M. L. Forbes; “A Drying Cabinet for the Preparation of Plant Specimens for 
the Herbarium’, by A. P. D. McClean and H. H. Storey (From “Bothalia’, 
iii, 1930). 

Hasr LANSING. 

Michigan State College of Agriculture and Applied Sciences —Chlorine 
Resistance of Colon bacilli and Streptococci in a Swimming Pool’, by W. L. 
Mallmann and A. G. Gelpi, Jr. (Bull. No. 27, Michigan Engineering Experi- 
ment Station) (Jan., 1930); Agricultural Experiment Station, Technical 
Bulletin No. 103 (1929). 


xlvi. DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 


EDINBURGH. 
Royal Botanic Garden.—Transactions and Proceedings of the Botanical Society 
of Edinburgh, xxx, 2, Session 1928-29 (1929); Notes, xvii, 81-85 (T.p. & c.) 
(1929-1930). 
Royal Society of Edinburgh.—Proceedings, xlix, 4 (T.p. & c.), Session 1928-29 
(1929); 1, 1-2, Session 1929-30 (1930); Transactions, lvi, 2 (1930). 
FRANKFURT a. M. 
Senckenbergische Naturforschende Gesellschaft——Abhandlungen, xlii, 1-2 
(1930); Natur und Museum, lix, 6-12 (T.p. & c.) (1929); lx, 1-8 (1930). 
FREIBURG i Br. 
Naturforschende Gesellschaft.—Berichte, xxix, 1-2 (T.p. & c.) (1929); xxx, 1-2 
(T.p. & ce.) (1930). 
GENEVA. 
Société de Physique et d'Histoire Natwrelle—Compte Rendu des Séances, xlvi, 3 
(T.p. & c.) (1929); xlvii, 1-2 (1930); Mémoires, xl, 4 (T.p. & ec.) (1930). 


GENOVA. 

Societa Entomologica Italiana.—Bollettino, lx, 9-10 (Title page) (1928); Ixi, 1-2 
(1929); Suppl. to No. 1 (Memorie, vi, 1927, 2, Index (1928) ); 9-10 (T.p. & c.) 
(1929); Supplements to Nos. 8 and 9 (Memorie, vii, 1928, and Memorie, viii, 
1929, Fasc. 1 (1929) ); Ilxii, 1-7; Suppl. to No. 5 (Memorie, ix, 1930, 1) 
(1930); “Insetti Dannosi alla Barbabietola”, by Carlo Menozzi (1930). 

Museo Civico di Storia Naturale —Annali, lii-liii (1925/28-1928/30). 


GRANVILLE. 

Denison University—Journal of the Scientific Laboratories, xxiv, pp. 115-264, 

265-427 (T.p. & c.) (1929); xxv, pp. 1-164 (1930). 
GRAZ. 

Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein fur Steiermark.—Mitteilungen, Ixiv-lxv; Ixvi 

(1929). 
HALIFAX. 

Nova Scotian Institute of Science——Proceedings and Transactions, xvii, 3, 

Session 1928-29 (1930). 
HALLE. 

Kaiserliche Leopoldinische deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher zu Halle.— 

Leopoldina, v-vi (1929-1930). 
HAMBURG. 

Naturwissenschaftlicher Verein.—Abhandlungen, xxii, 1-2 (1928-1929); Verhand- 
lungen, Vierte Folge, iii, 3-4, 1927 (1927); “Zur Geschichte der Exakten 
Naturwissenschaften in Hamburg” (1928). 

HARLEM. 

Société Hollandaise des Sciences.——Archives Néerlandaises des Sciences exactes 
et naturelles, Series IIIB (Sciences naturelles), v, 2 (1930);; Series IIIC 
(Archives Néerlandaises de Physiologie de lhomme et des animaux), xiv, 
3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); xv, 1-3.(1930); Archives Néerlandaises de Phonetique 
experimentale (Organ officielle de la Société internationale de Phonetique 
experimentale), v (1930). 


HELSINGFORS. 


Societas pro Fauna et Flora Fennica.—Acta, lv (1924-1929); Acta Zoologica 
Fennica, vi-ix (1928-1930). 


DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. xl vii. 


Societas Scientiarum Fennica.—Arsbok-Vuosikirja, vii, 1928-1929 (1929); Bidrag 
till Kannedom af Finlands Natur och Folk, Ixxxiii, 1-5 (1929-1930); Com- 
mentationes Physico-Mathematicae, iv, 13-25 (T.p. & c.) (1928-1929). 

Societas Zoolog-botanica Fennica Vanamo.—Annales, viii-ix (1929). 


HoBART. 
Royal Society of Tasmania.—Papers and Proceedings for the Year 1929 (1930). 


HONOLULU. 

Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum.—Bulletins 66-73 (1929-1930); Memoirs, xi, 1-3 
(1929-1930) ; Special Publication 15 (1929). 

Pan-Pacific Union.—Bulletin, N.S. Nos. 117-125, 128 (1929-1930); “Journal of 
the Pan-Pacific Research Institution’, v, 1-4 (1930). 

INDIANAPOLIS. 
Indiana Academy of Science.—Proceedings, xxxviii, 1928 (1929). 
ITHACA. 

Cornell University—48 Separates (Nos. 781-783, 785-818, 820-823, 827-832, 834) 
(1927-1930); The George Fisher Baker Non-Resident Lectureship in 
Chemistry, Vols. i-v (1926-1930). 

JAMAICA PLAIN. 
Arnold Arboretum.—Journal, x, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); xi, 1-3 (1930). 


JOHANNESBURG. 
South African Association for the Advancement of Science.——South African 
Journal of Science, xxvi (1929). 


KURASHIKI. 
Ohara Institute for Agricultural Research.—Berichte, iv, 2-3 (1929-1930). 


KyYoro. 
Kyoto Imperial University—Memoirs of the College of Science, Series B, v, 
1-3 (19380). 
La JOLLA. 
Scripps Institution of Oceanography of the University of California.—Bulletin, 
Technical Series, T.p. & ec. for Vol. i (1927-1928); ii, 4-5, 7-9 (1929-1930) ; 
Bulletin, Non-technical, No. 16 (1930). 


La PLATA. 

Museo de La Plata.—Revista, xxxii (1930). 
LEIDEN. 

Rijks Herbarium.—Mededeelingen, Nos. 57-58 (1929). 
LENINGRAD. 


Académie des Sciences de VU.R.S.S.—Annuaire du Musée Zoologique, xxix, 1928 
(1929); xxx, 3-4 (1929-1930); Bulletin, Série vii, 1928, 8-10 (T.p. & c.) 
(1929); 1929, 410 (T.p. & c.) (1929); 1930, 1-6 (1930); Bulletin de 
V’Académie Imperiale des Sciences de St. Petersbourg, Série v, xxi, 5 
(T.p. & c.) (1904); Musée Zoologique—Fauna de I’U.R.S.S. et des Pays 
Limitrophes. Pantopodes. (Pantopoda). Livr. 1 (1929); Tableaux 
Analytiques de la Faune de 1’U.R.S.S. No. 2 (1929). 

Geological and Prospecting Service, U.S.S.R. (formerly Comité Géologique) .— 
Bulletin, xlviii, 1929, 3-6 (1929); xlix, 1930, 1-5 (1930); Explorations 
géologiques dans les régions auriféres de la Siberie. Carte géologique de la 
région aurifére de la Lena. Description des feuilles iv-4 et v-4; vi-1 et vi-2 
(1929); Matériaux pour la géologie générale et appliquée, Livr. 89, 96, 125- 


xlviii. DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 


127, 131, 134, 136-140, 142-144, 146-148, 150-152 (1929-1930); Mémoires, N.S. 
Livr. 173, pt. 2; 187 (1929); Statistical Summary on the Mineral Industry 
of the U.S.S.R., for 1926/27 (1929); Transactions, Fase. 4, 6 (1930). ! 

Lenin Academy of Agricultural Sciences in U.S.S.R.: Institute of Applied 
Botany and New Cultures (formerly Institut de Botanique appliquée et 
adAmélioration des Plantes).—Bulletin of Applied Botany, of Genetics and 
Plant-Breeding, xx (complete) (1929); xxii, 1-5 (Index) (1929); xxiii, 2-3 
(1930); “Rye in U.S.S.R. and in the Adjoining Countries’, by V. and V. 
Antropov (36th Supplement to the Bulletin) (1929); “Wild and Cultivated 
Oats (Sectio Huavena Griseb.)” by A. I. Malzew (388th Supplement to the 
Bulletin) (1930); ‘Lentils of the U.S.S.R. and of other Countries”, by 
Helena Barulina (40th Supplement to the Bulletin) (1930). 

Société Entomologique de Russie—Revue Russe d’Entomologie, xxiii, 1929, 1-4 
(1929). 

Société Russe de Minéralogie—Mémoires, 2me Série, lviii, 1-2 (T.p. & c.) 
(1929). 

State Institute of Experimental Agronomy, Bureau of Applied Entomology.— 
Reports on Applied Entomology, iv, 1 (1929); Reprints Nos. 10-11 (1929); 
“Recent Attainments and Perspectives in Agronomy” (1929); Works on 
Applied Entomology, xiii, 5 (1930). 

LIEGE. 
Sociéte Royale des Sciences de Liége-—Mémoires, 3me Série, xiv (1928). 
LIVERPOOL. 

Liverpool School of Tropical Medicine—Annals of Tropical Medicine and 

Parasitology, xxiii, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); xxiv, 1-2 (19380). 
LONDON. 

British Museum (Natural History) —A Monograph of the Recent Cephalopoda. 
Pt. 1. Octopodinae. By G. C. Robson (1929); Diptera of Patagonia and 
South Chile. Pt. 1. By C. P. Alexander; Pt. 2, Fasc. 1, by A. L. Tonnoir; 
Pt. 2, Fase. 2, by F. W. Edwards (1929); Index Animalium, 2nd Section, 
Pts. xvii-xix (1928-1929); Insects of Samoa and other Samoan Terrestrial 
Arthropoda: Pt. i, Fase. 2; Pt. iv, Fase. 3-4; Pt. vi, Fase. 3-4; Pt. viii, Fasc. 2 
(1929). 

Entomological Society of London.—Proceedings, iv, 2-3 (T.p. & c.) (1929-1930) ; 
v, 1 (1930); Transactions, Ixxvii, 2 (T.p. & ce.) (1929); Ixxviii, 1 (1930). 
Geological Society.—Quarterly Journal, Ixxxy, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); Ixxxvi, 

1-2 (19380). 

Linnean Society.—Journal, Botany, xlviii, 323 (1930); Zoology, xxxvii, 250- 
251 (1930); List, 1929-1930 (1929); Proceedings, 141st Session, 1928-1929 
(1930). 

Ministry of Agriculture and Fisheries.—Journal, xxxvi, 8-12 (T.p. & c.) (1929- 
1930); xxxvii, 1-7 (1930). 
Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew.—Bulletin of Miscellaneous Information, 1929 

(1929). 

Royal Microscopical Society.—Journal, Series iii, xlix, 1929, 4 (T.p. &c.) (1929); 
1, 1930, 1-3 (1930); List of Fellows (Sept., 1930) (19380). 

Royal Society—Philosophical Transactions, Series B, ccxvii, No. B 449 
(T.p. & ec.) (1929); eexviii, Nos. B 450-460 (1929-1930) ; Proceedings, Series B, 
cv, Nos. B 738-740 (T.p. & c.) (1929-1930); evi, Nos. B 741-747 (T.p. & c.) 
(1930); cvii, Nos. B 748-749 (1930). 


DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. xlix. 


Zoological Society.—Index to Proceedings, 1921-1928 (19380); Proceedings, 1929, 
2 (T.p. & c. for pp. 1-364) (1929); 3-4 (T.p. & c. for pp. 365-770) (1930); 
1930, 1-2 (T.p. & c. for pp. 1-548 (1930); Reports of the Council and Auditors 
for the Year 1929 (1930); Transactions, xxi, 2 (1930). 

Los Banos. 

University of the Philippines: College of Agriculture—‘‘The Philippine Agri- 

culturist”, T.p. & c. for xvii (1930); xviii, 6-10 (1929-1930); xix, 1-6 (1930). 
LUND. 

K. Universitets i Lund.—Lunds Universitets Arsskrift (Acta Universitatis 
Lundensis), Ny Foljd, Avd. 2, xv-xxv (1919-1929); “Wichtige ztige in der 
Biologie der Stisswassergastropoden”, by Gustaf Alsterberg (Lund, 1930). 

LYON. 
Société Linnéenne de Lyon.—Annales, Nouvelle Série, Ixxiv, 1928 (1929). 
MapIson. 

Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters—Transactions, ii, 1873-74 

(1874); xxiv (1929). 
MADRID. 

Junta para Ampliacion de Estudios e Investigaciones Cientificas—Memoria 
correspondiente a los Cursos 1926-7 y 1927-8 (1929). 

Real Sociedad Espanola de Historia Natural.—Boletin, xxix, 7-10 (T-.p. & c.) 
(1929); xxx, 1-3 (1930); Memorias, xv, Fasc. 1-2 (complete) (1929). 

MANCHESTER. 

Conchological Society of Great Britain and Ireland.—“Journal of Conchology”, 
Xviii, 12 (T.p. & c.) (1929); xix, 1-2 (1930). 

Manchester Literary and Philosophical Society~—Memoirs and Proceedings, 
Ixxiii, 1928-29 (1929). 

Manchester Museum.—Museum Publication 97 (1929). 

MANILA. 

Bureau of Science of the Government of the Philippine Islands.—‘Philippine 
Journal of Science”, xl, 3-4 (T.p. & ec.) (1929); xli, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (19380); 
xlii, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1930); xliii, 1-3 (1930). 

MARSEILLE. 

Faculté des Sciences de Marseille—Annales, xxvi, 2 (1929); 2me Série, iv, 1 
(1929). 

Musée @ Histoire Naturelle de Marseille—Annales, xxi (1927); xxii, 1-2 (1929). 

MELBOURNE. 

“Australasian Journal of Pharmacy’, N.S. x, 119-120 (Index) (1929); xi, 121- 
130 (1930). (From the Publisher.) 

Council for Scientific and Industrial Research.—Bulletin, Nos. 44-45 (19380) ; 
Journal, ii, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); iii, 1-3 (1930); Pamphlets, Nos. 14-17 
(1929-1930); ‘Australian Rain-Forest Trees, excluding the Species confined 
to the Tropics”, by W. D. Francis (1929); “Catalogue of the Scientific and 
Technical Periodicals in the Libraries of Australia’, edited by E. R. Pitt, 
B.A. (Melbourne, 1930); “The Dairy Industry of the Commonwealth in 
relation to Possible Activities of the Council for Scientific and Industrial 
Research”, by Prof. S. M. Wadham (Melbourne, 1930); “The Progress of 
Biological Control of Prickly-Pear in Australia’, by Alan P. Dodd (Brisbane, 
October, 1929). 

Department of Agriculture in Victoria—Journal, xxvii, 11 (T.p. & c.) (1929); 
XXvViii, 1-10 (1930). 


1. DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 


Field Naturalists’ Club of Victoria—‘The Victorian Naturalist”, xlvi, 8-12 
(T.p. & c.) (1929-1930); xlvii, 1-7 (1930). 
Public Library, Museums and National Gallery of Victoria. Report of the 
Trustees for 1929 (1930). 
Royal Australasian Ornithologists’ Union.—‘The Emu”, xxix, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) 
(1929-1930) 3 xxx, 1-2 (1930). 
Royal Society of Victoria.—Proceedings, N.S. xlii, 1-2 (T.p. & ec.) (1929-1930) ; 
>ditbi, Ib. IQR). 
University of Melbourne.—Calendar, 1930 (1929). 
MILWAUKEE. ‘ 
Public Museum.—Year Book, viii, 1928, 1-2 (1929-1930). 
Monaco. 
Institut Océanographique de Monaco.—Bulletin, Nos. 541-547 (T.p. & ec. for 
Nos. 531-547) (1929); 548-560 (1930). 
MONTEVIDEO. 
Museo de Historia Natural de Montevideo—dAnales, Série ii, T.p. & ec. for ii 
(1926-1928) ; iii, 1 (1929). 
MONTREAL. 
Laboratoire de Botanique de lUUniversité de Montreal.—Contributions, Nos. 
14-15 (1929). 
Moscow. 
Biologische Station zu Kossino.—Arbeiten, Lieferung 1-4 (1924-1926); 10 (1929). 
MUNCHEN. 
Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften.—Abhandlungen, Neue Folge, 1929, 
5-6 (1930); Suppl.-Bd. 11-14 Abhandlung (1929); Sitzungsberichte, 1929, 2-3 
(ania, 2 @)) (IOZD) 3s WS), 1 CLORO). 
NANKING. 
Science Society of China—Contributions from the Biological Laboratory, iv, 1, 
3-5 (1928); v, 1, 3-5 (1929); vi, 1-8 (1930). 
NANTES. 
Société des Sciences Naturelles de VOuest de la France.—Bulletin, 4me Série, 
vii, 1927, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1927-28); viii, 1928, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929). 
NAPLES. 
Museo Zoologico della R. Universita di NapolimAnnuario, Nuova Serie, T.p. & c. 
for iv (1909-1915); v, 12-23 (T.p. & c.) (1925-1929); Supplemento (Fauna 
degli Astroni) Fasc. 1-2 (Nos. 1-12) (1915-1928). 
Stazione Zoologica di Napoli.—Pubblicazioni, ix, 3 (T.p. & ec.) (1929); x, 1-2 
(1930). 
NEw HAveEN. 
Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences——Transactions, xxx, pp. 159-355; 
357-510 (19380). 
NEw York. 
American Geographical Society—‘‘Geographical Review”, T.p. & ec. for xix 
(1929); xx}. 1-4 (1930). 
American Museum of Natural History. ‘Natural History”, xxix, 6 (T.p. & c.) 
(GLS2 9) exexexee IES G93 0) 
New York Academy of Sciences.—Annals, xxxi, pp. 1-30; 31-80; 81-120; 121-186 
(1929). 


DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. li. 


IDAROS. 
Det Kongelige Norske Videnskabers Selskab.—Forhandlinger, ii, 1929 (1930) ; 
Skrifter, 1929 (1929); Museet: Arsberetning, 1928 (1929); Oldsaksamlingens 
Tilvekst, 1928 (1929); “M. Foslie—Contribution to a Monograph of the 
Lithothamnia”’, after the author’s death collected and edited by Henrik 
Printz (1929). 
NISHIGAHARA, Tokyo. 
Imperial Agricultural Experiment Station in Japan.—Bulletin, ii, 2 (1919) ; iii, 
2 (1928); Journal, i, 1-3 (1929-1930). 
OMSK. 
Siberian Institute of Agriculture and Forestry.——Trudi (Transactions), x, 1-6 
@i928) a exig G9 29) exile 3 929) is xan (L929) 
OSLo. 
Det Norske Videnskaps-Akademi i Oslo—Arbok, 1929; Avhandlinger, I. Mat.- 
Naturv. Klasse, 1929; Skrifter, I. Mat.-Naturv. Klasse, 1929 (3 vols.) (1930). 


OTTAWA. 

Department of Agriculture.—Bulletin, N.S. Nos. 118, 114; Circular, No. 72 
(1929); Pamphlet, N.S. No. 108 (1930); Report of the Minister of Agri- 
culture for Year ended March 31, 1929 (1929); Reports of the Superinten- 
dents of Experimental Stations at Charlottetown and Farnham for the Year 
1928 (1929). 

Department of Mines: Geological Survey of Canada.—Bulletin, No. 56 
(National Museum Annual Report for 1927); 62 (National Museum Annual 
Report for 1928) (1929); Economic Geology Series, No. 6 (1929); Memoirs, 
155, 157-162 (1929-1930); Report of the Department of Mines for Fiscal Year 
ending March 31, 1929 (1929); Summary Reports, 1928, pts. A and B (1929). 

Royal Society of Canada.—Transactions, Third Series, xxiii, Section 1-2; 
Section 3, pt. 2; Section 4, pts. 1-2; Section 5, pt. 2 (1929); xxiv, List of 
Officers, ete. (1930). 

Pato ALTO. 

Stanford University.—Contributions from the Dudley Herbarium, i, 3 (1929); 
Stanford University Publications, University Series, Biological Sciences, v, 
Sead ah (GWA )e 

Paris. 9 

“Journal de Conchyliologie”’, \xxiii, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929-1930) ; Ixxiv, 1-2 (1930). 
(From the Publisher.) 

Muséum National Wd Histoire Naturelle—Archives, 6me Série, iv (1929); 
Bulletin, 1928, 1-6 (T.p. & c.) (1928); 2e Série, i, 1-6 (T.p. & ce.) (1929). 

Société Entomologique de France.—Annales, xcviii, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); 
xeix, 1-3 (1930); Bulletin, 1929, 15-21 (T.p. & c.) (1929); 1930, 3-6 and 
Supplément, 7-14 (1930). 

PEKING. 

Academia Sinica.— ‘Academia Sinica with its Research Institutes” (1929). 

Fan Memorial Institute of Biology.—Bulletin, i, 1-9 (1929-1930). 

Metropolitan Library.—Third Annual Report for the Year ending June, 1929 
(1929). 

National Geological Survey of China.—‘‘Interim Report on the Skull of 
Sinanthropus”, by Davidson Black (From Bull. Geol. Soc. China, ix, 1, 1930); 
“Preliminary Notice of the Discovery of an Adult Sinanthropus Skull at 


lii. DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 


Chou Kou Tien”, by Davidson Black; “An Account of the Discovery of an 
Adult Sinanthropus Skull in the Chou Kou Tien Deposit”, by W. C. Pei; 
“Preliminary Report on the Chou Kou Tien Fossiliferous Deposit”, by P. T. 
de Chardin and C. C. Young (Reprints from Bull. Geol. Soc. China, viii, 3, 
1929). 

Peking Society of Natural History.—Bulletin, iv, 1-4 (1929-1930) ; Index to Vols. 
i-iv (1926-1930); v, 1 (1930). : 


PERM. 
Institut des Recherches Biologiques a VUniversité de Perm.—Bulletin, vi, 10 
(T.p. & c.) (1929); vii, 1-3 (1930); Travaux, ii, 4, pts. 1-2 (1930). 


PERTH. 

Department of Agriculture of Western Australia.—Journal, 2nd Series, vi, 4 
(Index) (1929); vii, 1-2 and Supplement, 3 (1930). 

Geological Survey of Western Australia—Annual Progress Reports for the 
Years 1928 (1929); 1929 (1930); Bulletin 94 (Text and Maps and Sections) 
(1929). 

Government Statistician, Western Australia— Quarterly Statistical Abstract, 
Nos. 255-258 (1929-1930). 

Royal Society of Western Australia.—Journal, xi, 1924-1925 (1925); xv, 1928- 
1929 (1929). 


PHILADELPHIA. 

American Philosophical Society.—Proceedings, Ixviii, 2-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); 
lxix, 15 (1930); Transactions, N.S. xxiii, 1 (1929). 

University of Pennsylvania.—Contributions from the Zoological Laboratory, 
xxvii, 1928-1929 (1929). 

Wistar Institute of Anatomy and Biology— ‘The Journal of Experimental 
Zoology”, liv, 2-3 (T.p. & ec.) (1929); lv (complete) (1930); lvi, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) 
(S30) eMlviiy el SS OE 

Zoological Society of Philadelphia.—lviii-th Annual Report of the Board of 
Directors (1930); Report of the Laboratory and Museum of Comparative 
Pathology in conjunction with the lviii-th Annual Report of the Society 
(1930). 


PLYMOUTH. 
Marine Biological Association of the United Kingdom.—Journal, N.S. Xvi, 2-3 
(T.p. & c.) (1929-1930); xvii, 1 (19380). 


PORTICI. 
Laboratorio di Zoologia Generale e Agraria della R. Scuola Superiore 
d Agricoltura.—Bollettino, xxiii (1930). 


PRAG. 

Deutsche Naturwissenschaftlich-medizinische Verein fur Bohmen “Lotos’ in 
Prag.—Naturwissenschaftliche Zeitschrift ‘“Lotos”’, Ixxi-lxxv (complete) 
(1923-1927) ; Ixxvi, 8-12 (T.p. & ec.) (1928); Ixxvii, 1-12 (T.p. & c.) (1929). 

Societas Entomologica Cechosloveniae.—Acta, xxv, 1928, 1-6 (T.p. & c.) (1928) ; 
2O-Gvily IVA, ale (ao, ts 5) (GALO28))- 

PUSA. 
Agricultural Research Institute-—Catalogue of Indian Insects, Pt. xix (1930); 


Memoirs of the Department of Agriculture in India, Botanical Series, xvii, 
3-4 (1929-1930); xviii, 2-4, 6 (1929-1930); Scientific Reports, 1928-29 (1930). 


DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. liii. 


RENNES. 

Société Géologique et Minéralogique de Bretagne.—Bulletin, vii, 1926, 3-4, 

Fascicule Spécial (1928-1929); viii, 1927, 1-4 (1930). 
RICHMOND. 

Hawkesbury Agricultural College—H.A.C. Journal, xxvi, 11-12 (T.p. & c.) 

(1929); xxvii, 1-10 (1930). 
RIGA. 

Latvijas Biologijas Biedriba (Societas Biologiae Latviae)—Raksti (Acta), i 
(1929). 

Naturforscher Verein zu Riga.—Korrespondenzblatt, lix-Ix (1927, 1930). 

R10 DE JANEIRO. 

Instituto Oswaldo Cruz—Memorias, xxii, 1929, (complete) (1929); xxiii, 
1930, 1-5 (Index) (1930); Supplemento das Memorias, Nos. 11-12 (1929). 

Jardim Botanico.—Archivos, v (1930). 

RIVERSIDE. 

University of California: Graduate School of Tropical Agriculture and Citrus 
Experiment Station.—Papers, Nos. 152, 166, 179, 180, 184-186, 188-206 (1927- 
1929). 

San DIEGO. 

San Diego Society of Natural History—Transactions, v, 16-20 (T.p. &'c.) 

(1929); vi, 1-3 (1930). 
SAN FRANCISCO. 
California Academy of Sciences.—Proceedings, Fourth Series, xvii, 11-12; xviii, 
4-16 (1929). 
SARATOV. 
Naturforschergesellschaft.—Berichte, iii, 1 (1929). 
SEATTLE. 
‘Puget Sound Biological Station.—Publications, vii, pp. 1-168; 169-288 (1929- 
1930). 
SENDAI. 

Tohoku Imperial University.—Science Reports, 2nd Series, xiii, 3; xiv, 1 (1930); 
3rd Series, iii, 3 (T.p. & c.) (1929); 4th Series, iv, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); 
v, 1-2 (1930). 

SHANGHAI. 

Institute of Geology, National Research Institute of China—Memoir, No. 8 

(1929). 
SHARON. 
Cushman Laboratory for Foraminiferal Research.—Contributions, v, 4; Index to 
Vols. i-v (1929); vi, 1-3 (1930). 
SOFIA. 
Société Botanique de Bulgarie.—Bulletin, iii (1929). 
Société Bulgare des Sciences Naturelles—Travaux, Nos. 2-12 (1904-1926). 
Str. Louis. 
Missouri Botanical Garden.—Annals, xvi, 3-4 (T.p. & ce.) (1929); xvii, 1-2 (1930). 
STOCKHOLM. 

Centralanstaltens Entomologiska Avdelning Experimentalfaltet.—Flygblad, Nos. 
135, 148, 144, 147, 148 (1928-1930); Meddelanden, Nos. 341-343, 345, 349, 350, 
354-357, 361, 362, 372-375 (1928-1930). 


liv. 


DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 


K. Svenska Vetenskapsakademien.—Arkiy for Botanik, xxii, 2-4 (T.p. & c.) 
(1929); Arkiv for Matematik, Astronomi och Fysik, xxi, 2-4 (T.p. & c.) 
(1929); Arkiv for Kemi, Mineralogi och Geologi, x, 1-2 (1929-1930); Arkiv 
for Zoologi, xx, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); xxi, 1-2 (1929-1930); Arsbok, 1929 
(1929); Handlingar, Tredje Serien, vi, 1-8 (T.p. & c.) (1928-1929); vii, 1-4 
(T.p. & c.) (1930); viii, 1 (1929); Skrifter i Naturskyddsarenden, Nos. 
10-14 (1929-1930); “Kristinebergs Zoologiska Station, 1877-1927” (1930). 


SYDNEY. 


Australasian Antarctic Hapedition, 1911-14.—Scientific Reports, Series ©, vi, 7 
(1930). 

Australian Musewm.—Annual Report of the Trustees for Year ended 30th June, 
1929 (1930); Australian Museum Magazine, T.p. & ec. for iii (1927-1929) ; iv, 
1-4 (19380); Memoirs, v, 3-4 (T.p. & ec.) (1929-1930); Records, xvi, 8 
(T.p. & c.) (1929); xvii, 6-9 (1929-1930) ; xviii, 1 (1930). 

Australian National Research Council.—‘Australian Science Abstracts’, ix, 1-4 
(1930). 

Australian Veterinary Association.—‘Australian Veterinary Journal’, v, 4 
(AOA) s Aap ess G13). 

Botanic Gardens.—‘A Critical Revision of the Genus Hucalyptus’’, viii, 3-4 
(1929-1930), by the late J. H. Maiden, lately Govt. Botanist and Director 
of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. 

Department of Agriculture, N.S.W.— ‘Agricultural Gazette of N.S.W.”, xl, 12 
(T.p. & ce.) (1929); xli, 1-11 (1930); Veterinary Research Report, 1927-28, 
No. 5 (1929) (sent by Veterinary Research Station, Glenfield, N.S.W.). 

Department of Mines—Annual Report for Year 1929 (1930); Geological Survey: 
Mineral Resources, No. 35 (1930). 

Department of Public Health.—Report of the Director-General of Public Health 
for the Year 1928 (1930). 

Education Department—‘Education Gazette”, xxiii, 12 (T.p. & c.) (1929); xxiv, 
1-11 (19380). 

Forestry Commission of N.S.W.—Report for the Year ended 31st December, 
1929 (1930); “The Australian Forestry Journal’, xii, 4 (1929); xiii, 1-3 
(1930). 

Government Statistician—Quarterly Statistical Bulletin, Nos. 214-216 (1929- 
W980) 

Institution of Engineers, Australia—Journal, ii, 3-4, 7-9 (1930). 

Naturalists’ Society of New South Wales.—‘The Australian Naturalist”, 
T.p. & c. for Vols. v and vi (1922/25-1926/27) ; viii, 1-4 (1930). 

Public Library of New South Wales.—Annual Report of the Trustees for the 
Year ended 30th June, 1929 (1929). 

Royal Society of New South Wales.—Journal and Proceedings, Ixiii, 1929 (1930). 

Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales—“The Australian Zoologist’, 
vi, 2-3 (1930). 

State Fisheries, Chief Secretary's Department.—Annual Report of the Fisheries 
of N.S.W. for the Year 1928 (1929). 

Technological Museum.—Bulletin, Nos. 13-15 (1929); Five reprints from Journ. 
Roy. Soc. N.S.W., lxiii (1929-1930). 

“The Medical Journal of Australia’, 1929, ii, 22-26 (T.p. & c.) (1929); 1930, i, 
1-26 (T.p. & c.) (1930); 1930, ii, 1-21 (1930). (From the Editor.) 


DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. lv. 


University of Sydney—Calendar for the Year 1930 (1930); Journal of the 
Cancer Research Committee, i, 4; ii, 1-3 (1930). 


TASHKENT. 

Université de VAsie Centrale—Acta Universitatis Asiae Mediae, Ser. ia, 1; ib, 
1; ii, 1-2; iiia, 2; iva, 1; va, 2; viia, 13-16; viiia, 6-10; viiib, 4-9; ix, 13-14; 
x, 1; xi, 1-3; xiia, 2, 4-8; xiib, 2 (1929). 

ToKYOo. 

Imperial University of Tokyo.—Journal of the Faculty of Science, T.p. & c. for 
Section i, Vol. i (1925-1929); Section iii, Botany, ii, 3-5 (1930); Section iv, 
Zoology, ii, 2 (1929). 

National Research Council of Japan.—Japanese Journal of Botany, iv, 4 
(T.p. & ce.) (1929); Japanese Journal of Geology and Geography, vii, 1-4 
(T.p. & ec.) (1929-1930); Japanese Journal of Zoology, ii, 4 (T.p. & ce.) (1929) ; 
iii, 1-2 (1930); Report, Nos. 1, Mar., 1922; 2-3, Apr. 1922—Mar. 1924 (1930). 


TORONTO. 
Royal Canadian Institute —Transactions, xvii, 1 (1929). 


TOULOUSE. 
Société d'Histoire Naturelle de Toulouse.—Bulletin, xlix, 1921, 1-3 (1921); 
1, 1922, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1922); li, 1923, 1 (1923); lvi, 1927, 4 (Index) (1927); 
Ivii, 1928, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1928-1929) ; lviii, 1929, 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929). 


TRING. 
Zoological Museum.—Novitates Zoologicae, xxxv, 3-4 (T.p. & ec.) (1930). 


TUNIS. 
Institut Pasteur de Tunis.—Archives, xviii, 3-4 (T.p. & ¢c.) (1929); xix, 1-2 
(1930). 
UPPSALA. 
University of Upsala.—Bulletin of the Geological Institution, xxii (1939). 


URBANA. 
American Microscopical Society—Transactions, xlviii, 4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); 
xlix, 1-3 (1930). 
University of Illinois.—lIllinois Biological Monographs, xi, 4 (1927); xii, 1 
(1929). 
VIENNA. 
Naturhistorische Museum in Wien.—Annalen, xliii, 1929 (1929). 
Zoologisch-botanische Gesellschaft in Wien.—Verhandlungen, Ixxix, 1929, 1 
(1929). 
WARSAW. 
Panstwowe Muzeum Zoologiczne (Polish Museum of Zoology).—Annales Musei 
Zoologici Polonici, vii, 2-4 (T.p. & ec.) (1928); viii, 1-2 (1929); ix, 1-5 (1929); 
Fragmenta Faunistica, i, 1-7 (1930). 
Societas Botanica Poloniae.—Acta, vi, 2-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); vii, 1 (1930). 


whe 


WASHINGTON. 
Bureau of American Ethnology.—Bulletins 89, 90, 91, 93, 95, 96 (1929-1930). 
Carnegie Institution of Washington—Publications, Nos. 390, Vols. i-ii; 395, 
398, 399, 405 (1929-1930); “Reports of the Conferences on Cycles” (1929); 
Year Book No. 28 (1929). 


lvi. 


DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 


National Academy of Sciences——Proceedings, xv, 11-12 (T.p. & c.) (1929); xvi, 


1-10 (1930). 


National Research Council.—Organization and Members, 1929-1930 (1929). 
Smithsonian Institution—Annual Report of the Board of Regents for the Year 


ending June 30, 1928 (1929). 


U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey: Department of Commerce.—Special Publica- 


tion 159 (1930). 


U.S. Department of Agriculture—Year Book, 1930 (1930); Library: Biblio- 


graphical Contributions, No. 20 (Jan., 1930); Bureau of Entomology: 
Circular, Nos. 106, 109, 109 (Corrected Edition), 116, 117, 123, 130 (1930); 
Farmers’ Bulletins, Nos. 1483 (revised), 1624, 1627 (1929-1930); Miscel- 
laneous Publication No. 74 (1930); Technical Bulletins, Nos. 86, 112, 135, 
137, 138, 149, 152, 157, 161, 178, 183, 188, 190, 195, 198 (1929-1930); Seven 
reprints from Journal of Agricultural Research, xl, 4, 6-8, 11 (1930). 


U.S. Geological Survey.—Fiftieth Annual Report of the Director for Fiscal Year 


ended June 30, 1929 (1929); Bulletins, T.p. & c. for 788 (1928), 799, 800, 
804, 808, 809, 810B-C, 811A-E (T.p. & c.), 812A-D (T.p. & c.), 813B-C, 816, 
822B (1929-1930); Professional Papers, 154A, 156, 158A-I (T.p. & c.), 165A-B 
(1929-1930); Water Supply Papers, 578, 597C, E (T.p. & c.), 598-619, 621-624, 
627, 629, 632, 636B-F (T.p. & c.), 687A (1929-1930). 


U.S. National Museum.—Bulletins, 76, pt. 3; 100, Vols. lx, x; 104, pts. vi, vil; 


147-153 (1929-1930); Proceedings, T.p. & ec. for Vol. Ixxiv; Ixxyv, 19 (No. 
2790) (T.p. & ce.) (1929); Ixxvi, 5-26 (Nos. 2802-2823) (T.p. & c.) (1929-1930) ; 
Ixxvii, 1-4, 7-11 (Nos. 2824-2827, 2830-2834) (1929-1930); Report for the Year 
ended June 30, 1929 (1929). 


WELLINGTON. 


Department of Scientific and Industrial Research: Geological Survey Branch.— 


xxili-trd and xxiv-th Annual Reports (N.S.), 1928-29, 1929-30 (1929-1930) ; 
Bulletin, No. 33 (N.S.) (1929). 


Dominion Museum.—Bulletin, No. 12 (1929); “New Zealand Journal of Science 


and Technology”, xi, 4-6 (T.p. & ¢.) (1929-1930); xii, 1 (1930). 


New Zealand Institute—Transactions and Proceedings, Ix, 3-4 (T.p. & e¢.) 


(1929-1930); Ixi, 1-2 (1980). 


WELTEVREDEN. 


Centraal Militair Geneeskundig Laboratorium.—Dracunculus medinensis in the 


Dutch East Indies’, by S. L. Brug (From Meded. Dienst Volks. in Ned.- 
Indie, Pt. i, 1930); “Wilariasis in Ned.-Indie. ii’, by S. L. Brug and H. de 
Rook; “Scabies crustosa s. Norvegica”’, by S. L. Brug, J. Haga, R. P. A. C. 
van Joost and J. A. M. Verbunt (From Over. Genees. Tijd. Ned.-Indie, 1xx, 
5 and 6, 1930); ‘Filaria malayi, n. sp., parasitic in Man in the Malay 
Archipelago’, by S. L. Brug (From Vol. iii, Trans. of F.H.A.T.M. Seventh 
Congress, held in India, Dec., 1927) (1929). 


Koninklijke Natuurkundige Vereeniging in Nederl.-Indie—Natuurkundig 


Tijdschrift, Ixxxix, 3 (T.p. & c.) (1929); xe, 1-2 (1930). 


Woops Hote. 


Marine Biological Laboratory.—Biological Bulletin, lvii, 1-6 (T.p. & c.) (1929); 


lviil; 4-39 Giep &ice)GL930) elie nGl930)) 2 


WoRMLEY. 


The Hill Museum.—Bulletin, iii, 3-4 (T.p. & c.) (1929); iv, 1 (1930). 


DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. lvii. 


Private Donors (and authors, unless otherwise stated). 


Brewster, Miss A. A., and Dymock’s Book Arcade, Ltd., Sydney (donors) .— 
“Botany for Australian Secondary Schools’, by Agnes A. Brewster (Sydney, 
1929). 

Carnegie Corporation Visitors’ Grants Committee, Pretoria, South Africa (donor) .— 
“Museums and Art Galleries as Educational Agents’, by EH. C. Chubb (1929). 


FLETCHER, W. Horner, Sydney (donor).—From among the books of the late J. J. 
Fletcher—Journal of Sir William Macleay (58 pp., 1875); ‘‘Notices of Insects 
that are known to form the Bases of Fungoid Parasites’, by G. R. G. (privately 
printed, 1858); “On the Birds in the Imperial Collection at Vienna, etc.”’, by 
A. von Pelzeln (From ‘‘The Ibis’, Jan., 1873); “Specimen Zoologicum, etc.”’, by 
P. J. I. de Fremery (1819); “The Stereoscopic Magazine’, No. xiv (Aug., 
1859); Bulletin No. 235, Agric. Exp. Station, Univ. of California (Berkeley, 
1912); “The Tasmanian Journal of Natural Science, ete.’, i, 1 (1841); ‘“Cata- 
logue of Mammalia, etc.”, by G. Krefft (1864); and 27 Pamphlets, reprints, 
catalogues, ete. 


Froccatr, W. W., F.L.S., Sydney (donor).—Hight Pamphlets published by Depart- 
ment of Interior, Ottawa, Canada—‘‘The Lake Erie Cross’; “Guide to Fort 
Anne’; “Guide to Fort Chambly” (1922); “Traffic and Motor Regulations for 
Canadian National Parks” (1921); “Guide to the Geology of the Canadian 
National Parks” (1914); “Handbook of the Rock Mountains Park Museum” 
(1914); “The Banff-Windermere Highway” (1923); “Just a Sprig of Mountain 
Heather” (1914). 


JENSEN, H. L., Sydney.—‘Decomposition of Keratin by Soil Micro-Organisms” 
(From Journ. Agric. Sci., xx, 3, July, 1930); “On the Influence of the Carbon: 
Nitrogen Ratios of Organic Material on the Mineralisation of Nitrogen” (From 
Journ. Agric. Sci., xix, 1, Jan., 1929). 

PostHuMus, Dr. O., Buitenzorg, Java.— “On Palaeobotanical Investigations in the 
Dutch East Indies and Adjacent Regions” (From Bull. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, 
Ser. iii, x, 3, 1929). 

REYCHLER, LUCIEN, Saint-Nicolas (Waes), Belgium (donor).—‘“Complement to the 
Album Mutation with Orchids”, by L. Reychler (1930); French Association for 
the Promotion of Science, Address, Congress of La Rochelle (1928), by E. 
Rabaud and ‘“Utriusque labore’, etc., by L. Reychler (1930); “The Embryo of 
a Collection of Orchids to be preserved to Science’, by L. Reychler and 
“Fecundation by Traumatism, etc.”’, by Z. Kamerling (1930). 

Shell Company of Australia, Sydney (donor)—‘“Wild Flowers of Australia’ 
(Sydney, no date). 


SmirH, Dr. G. P. DARNELL, Sydney.—Australian Tobacco Investigation, Bulletin 
No. 1 (no date). 


SteaD, David G., Sydney (donor).—U.S. Department of the Interior: National 
Park Service—“Glimpses of our National Parks”; “Glimpses of our National 
Monuments”; 14 Circulars of General Information regarding the National 
Parks (1929). 


TADGELL, A. J., Melbourne, Victoria (donor).—‘“The Victorian Naturalist”, Vol. 
xlvi, No. 12 (1930). 


TowLg, C. C., B.A., Eastwood, Sydney.—“Certain Stone Implements of the Scraper 
Family found along the Coast of New South Wales” (Sydney, 1930). 


LIST OF MEMBERS, 1930. 


ORDINARY MEMBERS. 


1927 *Albert, Michel Francois, ““Boomerang’’, Elizabeth Bay, Sydney. 


1929 
1905 
1906 
1922 
1899 
1929 


1927 
1912 


1913 


1888 
1925 


1G )aly) 


1907 


1920 
1929 
1923 
1926 
1912 
1927 
1912 
1923 
1921 
1924 
ila 
1928 


1920 


1921 
1910 
1910 
1926 


1901 
1927 
1930 
1905 


1890 
1903 
1899 
1924 
1901 


Allan, Miss Catherine Mabel Joyce, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. 

Allen, Edmund, c/o Chief Engineer for Railways. Brisbane, Q. 

Anderson, Charles, M.A., D.Sc., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. 

Anderson, Robert Henry, B.Sc.Agr., Botanic Gardens, Sydney. 

Andrews, Ernest Clayton, B.A., F.G.S., 32 Benelong Crescent, Bellevue Hill. 

Angell, Herbert Raleigh, Ph.D., Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, 
Canberra, F.C.T. 

Armstrong, Jack Walter French, ‘‘Callubri’, Nyngan, N.S.W. 

Aurousseau, Marcel, B.Sc. 


Badham, Charles, M.B., Ch.M., B.Sc., Bureau of. Microbiology, 93 Macquarie Street, 
Sydney. 

Baker, Richard Thomas, The Crescent, Cheltenham. F 

Barnard, Colin, M.Se., Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, Division of 
Plant Industry, Box 109, Canberra, F.C.T. 

Barnett, Marcus Stanley, c/o Colonial Sugar Refining Co., Ltd., O’Connell Street, 
Sydney. 

Benson, Professor William Noel, B.A., D.Sc., F.G.S., University of Otago, Dunedin, 
N.Z. 

Blakely, William Faris, Botanic Gardens, Sydney. 

Boardman, William, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. 

Bone, Walter Henry, 6 Deans Place, Sydney. 

Branch, Kenneth James Fergus, B.Sc., 99 North Steyne, Manly. 

Breakwell, Ernest, B.A., B.Se., Department of Education, Box 33A, G.P.O., Sydney. 

Bredero, William Adrien Lewis, Box 127, Post Office, Orange, N.S.W. 

Brewster, Miss Agnes A., 481 Alfred Street, North Sydney. 

Brough, Patrick, M.A., B.Sc., B.Se.Agr., “Kinross’’, Billyard Avenue, Wahroonga. 

Brown, Horace William, 871 Hay Street, Perth, W.A. 

Brown, Miss Ida Alison, B.Se., Geology, Department, The University, Sydney. 

Browne, William Rowan, D.Sc., Geology Department, The University, Sydney. 

Burgmann, Rev. Ernest Henry, M.A., St. John’s Theological College, Morpeth, 
N.S. W. 

Burkitt, Professor Arthur Neville St. George Handcock, M.B., B.Sc., Medical School, 
The University, Sydney. 

Burns, Alexander Noble, Sugar Experiment Station, Mackay, N. Queensland. 

Burrell, Harry, 19 Doncaster Avenue, Kensington. 

Burrell, Mrs. Harry, 19 Doncaster Avenue, Kensington. 

Buzacott, James Hardie, Meringa (private bag), via Cairns, North Queensland. 


Campbell, John Honeyford, I.8.0., M.B.E., Royal Mint, Ottawa, Canada. 
Campbell, Thomas Graham, “Burrandong’’, 101 Lauderdale Avenue, Manly. 
Carey, Miss Gladys, B.Sc., 32 Rawson Street, Epping. 

Carne, Walter Mervyn, Senior Plant Pathologist, Division of Economic Botany, 
Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, c/o Department of Agriculture, 
Perth, W.A. 

Carson, Duncan, c/o Winchcombe, Carson, Ltd., Bridge Street, Sydney. 

Carter, Herbert James, B.A., F.E.S., “Garrawillah’”’, Kintore Street, Wahroonga. 

Cheel, Edwin, Botanic Gardens, Sydney. 

Chisholm, Edwin Claud, M.B., Ch.M., Comboyne, N.S.W. 

Cleland, Professor John Burton, M.D., Ch.M., The University, Adelaide, S.A. 


* Life Member. 


1930 
1908 


1928 
1900 
1925 


1929 
1885 


1929 
1925 
1928 


1881 
1927 
1921 
1926 


1928 
1920 


1930 
1914 


1908 


1927 
1930 
ibs)ial 
1886 
1930 


1912 
1911 


1910 
1901 


1911 
1925 
1909 
1919 
1897 
1885 
1928 
1922 


Uae 
1911 
1930 


1913 


LIST OF MEMBERS. Thiexe 


Cochran, William Manning Patrick, B.A., c/o Messrs. W. R. Carpenter & Co., Ltd., 
Rabaul, New Guinea. 

Cotton, Professor Leo Arthur, M.A., D.Sc., Geology Department, The University, 
Sydney. 

Craft, Frank Alfred, B.Se., “Kyla”, 24 Fourth Street, Ashbury. 

Crago, William Henry, M.D., 185 Macquarie Street, Sydney. 

Cunningham, Gordon Herriot, Department of Agriculture, Fields Division, Plant 
Research Station, P.O. Box 240, Palmerston North, N.Z. 


Dakin, Professor William John, D.Sc., Department of Zoology, The University, 
Sydney. 

David, Sir Tannatt William Edgeworth, K.B.E., C.M.G., D.S.O., M.A., D.Se., F.R.S., 
Burdett Street, Hornsby. 

Deane, Cedric, A.M.I.H.Aust., “Cloyne’’, 9 State Street, Malvern, Victoria. 

de Beuzeville, Wilfred Alexander Watt, J.P., ‘““Melamere,’ Welham Street, Beecroft. 

Dickson, Bertram Thomas, B.A., Ph.D., Council for Scientific and Industrial 
Research, Division of Plant Industry, Box 109, Canberra, F.C.T. 

Dixson, Thomas Storie, M.B., Ch.M., 215 Macquarie Street, Sydney. 

*Dixson, William, ‘‘Merridong’’, Gordon Road, Killara. 

Dodd, Alan Parkhurst, Prickly Pear Laboratory, Sherwood, Brisbane, Q. 

Dumigan, Edward Jarrett, Boys’ State School, Toowoomba North, Toowoomba, 
Queensland. 

Durrell, Miss Hileen Leys, B.Se., 345 Bridge Street, Drummoyne. 

Dwyer, Rt. Rev. Joseph Wilfrid, Bishop of Wagga, Wagga Wagga, N.S.W. 


English, Miss Kathleen Mary Isabel, B.Sc., March Street, Yass, N.S.W. 
Enright, Walter John, B.A., West Maitland, N.S.W. 


Flynn, Professor Theodore Thomson, D.Sc., University of Tasmania, Hobart, 
Tasmania. 

Francis, William Douglas, Botanic Gardens, Brisbane, Queensland. 

Fraser, Miss Lilian Ross, B.Sc., “Hopetoun,’’ Bellamy Street, Pennant Hills. 

Froggatt, John Lewis, B.Sc., Department of Agriculture, Rabaul, New Guinea. 

Froggatt, Walter Wilson, F.L.S., Young Street, Croydon. 

Fuller, Miss Mary Ellen, B.Sc., Council for Scientific and Industrial. Research, 
Box 109, Canberra, F.C.T. 


Goldfinch, Gilbert M., ‘‘Lyndhurst’’, Salisbury Road, Rose Bay. 

Greenwood, William Frederick Neville, F.L.S., F.E.S., c/o Colonial Sugar Refining 
Co., Ltd., Lautoka, Fiji. 

Griffiths, Edward, B.Sc., Department of Agriculture, Raphael Street, Sydney. 

Gurney, William Butler, B.Se., F.E.S., Department of Agriculture, Raphael Street, 
Sydney. 


Hacker, Henry, F.H.S., Queensland Museum, Bowen Park, Brisbane, Q. 

Hale, Herbert Matthew, South Australian Museum, Adelaide, S.A. 

Hall, Edwin Cuthbert, M.D., Ch.M., George Street, Parramatta. 

Hall, Leslie Lionel, ‘‘Haldor’, Drumalbyn Road, Bellevue Hill. 

Halligan, Gerald H., F.G.S., ‘Uplands’, Station Street, Pymble. 

Hamilton, Alexander Greenlaw, “Tanandra’’, Hercules Street, Chatswood. 

Hamilton, Edgar Alexander, 16 Hercules Street, Chatswood. \ 

Hardwick, Frederick George, B.D.S., D.D.Sc., ‘““Wyoming”’, 175 Macquarie Street, 
Sydney. 

Hardy, G. H. Hurlstone, The University, Brisbane, Q. 

Haviland, The Venerable Archdeacon F. E., St. Stephen’s Rectory, Portland, N.S.W. 

Heydon, George Aloysius Makinson, M.B., Ch.M., School of Public Health and 
Tropical Medicine, The University, Sydney. 

Hill, Gerald F., Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, Division of 
Economie Entomology, No. 12, Melbourne Buildings, Canberra, F.C.T. 


* Life Member. 


1927 
1910 


LIST OF MEMBERS. 


Holmes, Professor James Macdonald, B.Sc., F.R.G.S., Department of Geography, 
The University, Sydney. 

Hull, Arthur Francis Basset, Box 704, G.P.O., Sydney. 

Hynes, Miss Sarah, B.A., “Isis”, Soudan Street, Randwick. 


Irby, Llewellyn George, Forestry Department, Hobart, Tasmania. 


Jacobs, Ernest Godfried, ‘“‘“Cambria’’, 106 Bland Street, Ashfield. 

Jensen, Hans Laurits, Department of Agriculture, The University, Sydney. 

Johnston, Professor Thomas Harvey, M.A., D.Se., F.L.S., The University, Adelaide, 
S.A. Ti 

Joplin, Miss Germaine Anne, B.Sc., ‘“Huyton’’, Wentworth Street, Eastwood. 

Julius, Sir George Alfred, B.Sc., B.E., M.I.Mech.E., M.1.H.Aust., 67 Castlereagh 
Street, Sydney. 


Kendall, Mrs. W. M., M.Se. (née Williams), 5 Queen Victoria Street, Drummoyne. 
Kinghorn, James Roy, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. 


Lawson, Augustus Albert, 9 Wilmot Street, Sydney. 

Lea, Arthur M., F.E.S., 241 Young Street, Unley, Adelaide, S.A. 

Le Souef, Albert Sherbourne, C.M.Z.S., Zoological Gardens, Taronga Park, Mosman. 

Lindergren, Gustaf Mauritz, Secretary, Swedish Chamber of Commerce, Pacific 
House, 249 George Street, Sydney. 

Lucas, Arthur Henry Shakespeare, M.A., B.Se., ‘“‘Girrahween’”’, William Street, 
Roseville. 


Mackerras, Ian Murray, M.B., Ch.M., B.Sc., Box 109, Canberra, F.C.T. 

Mackinnon, Ewen, B.Se., Commonwealth Department of Health, Civic Centre, 
Canberra, F.C.T. 

Mann, John, Commonwealth Prickly Pear Board, Field Station, Box 49, Post 
Office, Chinchilla, Queensland. 

Martin, Miss Bertha Mary, B.Sc., 371 Mowbray Road, Chatswood. 

Mawson, Sir Douglas, D.Sc., B.E., F.R.S., The University, Adelaide, S.A. 

McCarthy, Timothy, Department of Agriculture, Raphael Street, Sydney. 

McDonnough, Thomas, L. S., “‘Iluka’’, Hamilton Street, Randwick. 

McHugh, Miss Mary Virgilius, St. Vincent’s College, Potts Point, Sydney. 

McKeown, Keith Collingwood, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. 

McKie, Rev. Ernest Norman, B.A., The Manse, Guyra, N.S.W. © 

McLuckie, John, M.A., D.Sc., Botany Department, The University, Sydney. 

McNeill, Francis Alexander, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. 

Mitchell, Miss Dora Enid, B.Se., ‘“‘Wilga’’, Bradley Street, Goulburn. 

Munch-Petersen, Erik, Ph.B., M.Se. (Haunensis), M.I.F., 31 Lytton Street, North 
Sydney. 

Mungomery, Reginald William, c/o Sugar Experiment Station, Bundaberg, Queens- 
land. ‘ 

Murray, Patrick Desmond Fitzgerald, D.Sc., Zoology Department, The University, 
Sydney. 

Musgrave, Anthony, F.E.S., Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. 


Newman, Ivor Vickery, M.Sc., “Tip Tree’, Kingsland Road, Strathfield. 

Newman, Leslie John William, F.E.S., ‘‘Walthamstowe’’, 5 Bernard Street, Clare- 
mont, W.A. 

Nicholson, Alexander John, D.Se., F.E.S., Council for Scientific and Industrial 
Research, Box 109, Canberra, F.C.T. 

Noble, Robert Jackson, B.Se.Agr., Ph.D., Department of Agriculture, Raphael 
Street, Sydney. 

North, David Sutherland, c/o Colonial Sugar Refining Co., Ltd., Broadwater Mill, 
Richmond River, N.S.W. 


O’Dwyer, Margaret Helena, B.Se., Ph.D., Dyson-Perrins Laboratory, South Parks 
Road, Oxford, England. ; 

Oke, Charles George, 56 Chaucer Street, St. Kilda, Victoria. 

Oliver, Walter Reginald Brook, F.L.S., F.Z.S., Dominion Museum, Wellington, N.Z. 


LIST OF MEMBERS. xa 


Osborn, Professor Theodore George Bentley, D.Se., F.L.S., Department of Botany, 
The University, Sydney. 


Osborne, George Davenport, D.Sc., Geology Department, The University, Sydney. 


Perkins, Frederick Athol, B.Sc.Agr., Biology Department, University of Queensland, 
Brisbane, Q. 

Phillips, Montagu Austin, F.L.S., F.E.S., 57 St. George’s Square, London, S.W., 
England. 

Pincombe, Torrington Hawke, B.A., ‘‘Mulyan’’, Beta Street, Lane Cove, Sydney. 

Priestley, Professor Henry, M.D., Ch.M., B.Sc., Medical School, The University, 
Sydney. 

Pritchard, Denis Adrian, M.B., Ch.M., B.Sc., Royal Australian Naval College, 
Jervis Bay, N.S.W. 

Pulleine, Robert Henry, M.B., Ch.M., 163 North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 


Raggatt, Harold George, B.Se., Geological Survey, Department of Mines, Sydney. 

Roberts, Frederick Hugh Sherston, M.Se., Department of Agriculture and Stock, 
Brisbane, Queensland. 

Roughley, Theodore Cleveland, Technological Museum, Harris Street, Sydney. 

Rupp, Rev. Herman Montagu Rucker, B.A., St. Mary’s Rectory, Weston, N.S.W. 


*Scammell, George Vance, B.Sc., ‘““Melrose’’, 28 Middle Head Road, Mosman. 

Selby, Miss Doris Adeline, M.Sc., ‘““Marley’’, John Street, Gordon. 

Shaw, Alfred Eland, M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., F.E.S., 13 Harbour Street, Mosman. 

Sherrard, Mrs. Kathleen Margaret, M.Sc., Bromley Avenue, Cremorne. 

Shiels, Mrs. N. L., M.Se., F.L.S. (née Collins), Norwood Avenue, Lindfield. 

Sloane, Thomas G., F.E.S., Moorilla, Young, N.S.W. 

Smith, G. P. Darnell, D.Se., F.I.C., F.C.S., Botanic Gardens, Sydney. 

Smith, Jacob Harold, M.Sc., N.D.A., Court House, Cairns, N. Queensland. 

Smith, Thomas Hodge, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. 

Smith, Miss Vera Irwin, B.Sc., F.L.S., ‘‘Coree’’, Wisdom Road, Greenwich. 

Stanley, George Arthur Vickers, B.Sc., “Clelands’, Battery Street, Randwick. 

Stead, David G., ‘““Boongarre’’, Pacific Street, Watson’s Bay. 

Steel, Miss Jessie Keeble, B.Sc., ““Helensburgh’”’, Marion Street, Killara. 

Stokes, Edward Sutherland, M.B., Ch.M., Metropolitan Water, Sewerage and 
Drainage Board, 341 Pitt Street, Sydney. 

*Sulman, Miss Florence, ‘‘Burrangong’’, McMahon’s Point. 

Sussmilch, C. A., F.G.S., Hast Sydney Technical School, Darlinghurst, Sydney. 


Taylor, Frank Henry, School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, The 
University, Sydney. 

Tillyard, Robin John, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.E.S., C.M.Z.S., Chief Common- 
wealth Entomologist, Canberra, F.C.T. 

*Troughton, Hillis Le Geyt, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. 

Turner, A. Jefferis, M.D., F.E.S., Wickham Terrace, Brisbane, Q. 

Turner, Rowland E., F.Z.S., F.E.S., c/o Standard Bank of South Africa, Adderley 
Street, Cape Town, South Africa. 


Veitch, Robert, B.Sc., F.E.S., Department of Agriculture, Brisbane, Queensland. 
Vickery, Miss Joyce Winifred, 6 Coventry Road, Homebush. 


Walker, Commander John James, M.A., F.L.S., F.H.S., R.N., “Aorangi’’, Lonsdale 
Road, Summertown, Oxford, England. 

Walkom, Arthur Bache, D.Se., Science House, Gloucester and TIS. Str eets, Sydney. 

Ward, Melbourne, “Bellevue Gardens’, Wylde Street, Potts Point, Sydney. 

Wardlaw, Henry Sloane Halcro, D.Sec., Physiology Department, The University, 
Sydney. 

Waterer, Arthur S., “Cisco”, 6 Everton Street, Hamilton, Newcastle, N.S.W. 

*Waterhouse, G. Athol, D.Sc., B.E., F.E.S., 10 Bull’s Chambers, Martin Place, Sydney. 

Waterhouse, Lionel Lawry, B.E., ‘Rarotonga’, 42 Archer Street, Chatswood. 

Waterhouse, Walter Lawry, D.Se.Agr., ‘““Hazelmere’’, Chelmsford Avenue, Roseville. 


* Life Member. 


Ixii. 


US) 
1924 
1930 
1926 
1922 
1916 
1926 
1926 


1903 
1925 
1929 
1910 


1923 


1923 


1888 
1902 
1902 
1902 


LIST OF MEMBERS. 


Watt, Professor Robert Dickie, M.A., B.Se., University of Sydney. 

Wearne, Walter Loutit, “Telarah’’, Collingwood Street,- Drummoyne. 

Webster, Miss Jessie Alice, B.Sc., ‘“‘Chesterfield’’, 49 Bruce Street, Stanmore. 

Weekes, Miss Hazel Claire, D.Sc., ‘““Omar’’, Vivian Street, Bellevue Hill. 

Welch, Marcus Baldwin, B.Sc., A.I.C., Technological Museum, Harris Street, Sydney. 

White, Cyril Tenison, F.L.S., Botanic Gardens, Brisbane, Q. 

*Whitley, Gilbert Percy, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney. 

Willings, Mrs. H., B.A. (née Wood), Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, 
Box 109, Canberra, F.C.T. 

Woolnough, Walter George, D.Sc., F.G.S., Park Avenue, Gordon. 

Wright, Fred, c/o Messrs. Elliott Bros., Ltd., O’Connell Street, Sydney. 

Wright, George Henry, H.D.A., Public School, Barellan, N.S.W. 

Wymark, Frederick, 89 Castlereagh Street, Sydney. 


HONORARY MEMBERS. 


Hill, Professor J. P., Institute of Anatomy, University of London, University 
College, Gower Streef, London, W.C.1, England. 

Wilson, Professor J. T., LL.D., M.B., Ch.M., F.R.S., Department of Anatomy, the 
New Museums, Cambridge, England. 


CORRESPONDING MEMBERS. 
Bale, W. M., F.R.M.S., 63 Walpole Street, Kew, Melbourne, Victoria. 
Broom, Robert, M.D., D.Sc., F.R.S., 38 Somerset Street, Grahamstown, South Africa. 
McAlpine, D., c/o Bank of New South Wales, Leitchville, Victoria. 
Meyrick, Edward, B.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S., Thornhanger, Marlborough, Wilts, England. 


* Life Member. 


INDEX. 


(1930.) 


(a) GENERAL INDEX. 


Address, Presidential, i. 

Alexander, C. P., Observations on the 
Dipterous Family Tanyderidae, 221. 
Anderson, R. H., Note on the Australian 
Species of the Genus Atriplex, 493. 
Apistomyia (Diptera), Notes on _ the 
Genus, and Description of a New 

Species, 136. 

Armit, Dr. H. W., reference to death, iv— 
Mrs. and Miss, letter from, returning 
thanks for sympathy, xxix. 

Asilidae, Australian, Fifth Contribution 
towards a New Classification of, 249. 
Atriplex, Note on the Australian Species 

of the Genus, 493. 

Australian, Asilidae, Fifth Contribution 
towards a New Classification of, 249— 
Coleoptera, Descriptions of New 
Species, No. xxi, 451—Coleoptera. Notes 
and New Species, No. vii, 179— 
Coleoptera, and New Guinea. Notes 
and New Species, 532—Diptera, Notes 
on, 92, 303, 429, 488—Expedition to the 
Antarctic under leadership of Sir 
Douglas Mawson, ii—Oenochromidae, 
Revision, 1, 191—Rust Studies, 159, 596 
—Teleasinae (Hymenoptera: Procto- 
trypoidea), Revision, 41. 


Balance Sheets, 1929, xxvi-xxviii. 

Bettongia cuniculus, the Uterine Cycle of 
Pregnancy and Pseudo-Pregnancy as 
it is in the Diprotodont Marsupial, 
with Notes on other Reproductive 
Phenomena in this Marsupial, 506. 

Blakely, W. F., Another New Species of 
Hucalyptus from New England, 594— 
Stringybarks, xxxvii. 

Blakely, W. F., and Rev. E. N. McKie, 
Additions to the Flora of New England, 
N.S.W., 587. 

British Scientific Expedition to the Great 
Barrier Reef, iii. 

Broom, R., letter from, returning thanks 
for congratulations, xxix. 

Brown, Ida A., Linnean Macleay Fellow in 
Geology, The Geology of the South 
Coast of New South Wales, ii— 
Devonian and Older Palaeozoic Rocks 
(Palaeontological Notes by W. S. Dun), 


145—iii. The Monzonitic Complex of 
the Mount Dromedary District, 637— 
Summary of year’s work, leave of 
absence and reappointment, 1930-31, vii 
—reappointed, 1931-32,  xxxviii—see 
Exhibits. 

Browne, W. R., elected a Vice-President, 
XOXGLXS 


Calvert, J.. An Abnormal Xanthium Burr, 
475. 

Carey, Gladys, elected a member, xxxiii— 
The Leaf-buds of some Woody Peren- 
nials in the New South Wales Flora, 
708. 

Carter, H. J., elected a Vice-President, 
xxix—Attention called to very early 
flowering of Pittosporum undulatum by, 
xxxiv—Australian Coleoptera. Notes 
and New Species. No. vii, 179—New 
Guinea and Australian Coleoptera. 
Notes and New Species, 532. 


“Catalogue of Scientific and Technical 
Periodicals in the Libraries of Aus- 
tralia,” attention called to publication 
OL Xexexe. 

Cheel, E., A short Account of the Progress 
made in the Attempt to have an Area 
set aside in the National Park for the 
Cultivation and Exhibition of the 
Native Flora of N.S.W., xxxi—elected 
President, xxv—see Exhibits. 

Coccids, Notes on Gall-making, 
Descriptions of New Species, 468. 


Cochran, W. M. P., elected a member, 
OIDG 

Colefax, A. N., elected a member, xxxviii. 

Coleoptera, Australian, Descriptions of 
New Species, 451—Australian, Notes 
and New Species, 179—New Guinea and 
Australian. Notes and New Species, 
532. 

Coloured Plates, Publication of, as Supple- 
ments to the Proceedings, iii. 

Concession fares offered by Common- 
wealth Railways, attention called to, 
TOO:e, 

Cotton, L. A., sympathy of members 
expressed with, xxxvii. 


with 


Ixiv. 


Cox’s: River, N.S.W., Topography and 
Water Supply of, 417. 

Craft, Frank A., appointed Linnean 
Macleay Fellow in Geography, 1930-31, 
vii—reappointed, 1931-32, xxxviii—Goul- 
burn—a Vital Point on the New South 
Wales Highlands, 381—Topography and 
Water Supply of Cox’s River, N.S.W., 
417—see Exhibits. 


Detain, — We doy 
Council, v. 

Davies, H. W., elected a member, xxix. 

Deane, C., Trichopterygidae of Australia 
and Tasmania. Descriptions of six New 
Genera and eleven New Species, 477. 

Diptera, Notes:on Australian, 92, 303, 429, 
488. 

Dixon, H. N., and William Greenwood, 
The Mosses of Fiji, 261. 

Dodd, A. P., A Revision of the Australian 


elected a member of 


Teleasinae (Hymenoptera: Proctotry- 
poidea), 41. 
Donations and Exchanges, xxix-xxxi, 


XXXili, XxxXiv, XXXVi-XxXXVili. 
Dun, W. S., Palaeontological 
Paper by Ida A. Brown, 155. 


Notes to 


Edmonds, Enid M., 

XXXVIii. 

Hlections, xxv, xxix, xxxi, xxxiii, xxxvii, 

XXXVIii. 

Endemism, Origin of, in 
Flora of Australia, 371. 
English, Kathleen M. I., elected a member, 

YO. 

Eucalyptus, Another New Species of, from 

New England, 594. 

Exchange relations, iv. 
Exhibits :— 

Brown, Ida A., Specimens of well pre- 
served leaves from rocks of Tertiary 
age between Bundanoon and Penrose, 
N.S.W., xXxxii. 

Cheel, E., a flowering plant of “soft- 
leaved Wattle’ (Acacia pubescens), 


elected a member, 


Angiosperm 


xxxiv—Live plants of “Australian 
Lime” (Microcitrus australis) and 
“Ringer Lime” (WMicrocitrus aus- 


tralasica), together with a series of 
fruits, showing considerable varia- 
tion in shape, size and colour, xxxiv— 
Three hybrids (“Faustrimon”, ““Faus- 
trimedin” and “‘Faustrime’”’), xxxiv— 
Seedling plants of “Bangalow Palm” 
(Archontophoeniz Cunninghamii) and 
the “Curly Palm” or “Belmore Palm” 


(Howea belmoreana), xxxiv—Seed- 
ling plants of several species of 
Eucalyptus, xxxiv—A _ series of 


specimens of the following species 
of Hucalyptus: H. capitellata, LE. 
eugenioides, EH. agglomerata, E, laevo- 
pinea, EH. Muelleriana, LE. macrorrhyn- 


INDEX. 


Exhibits (Contd.): 

cha and #. macrorrhyncha var. 
brachycorys, Xxxv—Specimens of Cal- 
listemon lanceolatus and C. pachy- 
phyllus for comparison with the 
Eucalyptus spp., xxxv—Live plants 
of Darwinia taxifolia var. intermedia 
Cheel (D. intermedia A. Cunn.) and 
Dendrobium Beckleri F.v.M., xxxvi— 
For comparison with D. intermedia, 
plants of Darwinia fascicularis; and 
fresh flowering plants of Dendrobium 
gracilicaule, xxxvi—Fresh flowering 
specimens of Callistemon linearifolia, 
C. lilacina, C. lilacina var. carmina 
and a hybrid, C. acuminatus x C. 
lanceolatus, xxxvii—Specimens of 
Leptospermum emarginata Wendl... 
xxxvii—For comparison, specimens of 
L. flavescens var. leptophylla, xxxvii 
—Foliage of a stringybark Hucalyp- 
tus, xXxxvii—Specimens of Helichry- 
sum leucopsidum DC., and Boronia 
oppositifolia (Pers.) Cheel from Hill 
Top, xxxvili— Specimen of a stemless 
thistle, Onopordon acaulum Linn., 
from Balranald, xxxviii. 

Craft, F. A., Aboriginal stone axe from 
Wingello, N.S.W., xxx—lantern slides 
illustrating the upland valleys and 
gorges about the Shoalhaven River 
near Tallong, xxx. 


Fraser, Lilian R., Root-nodules' of 
Casuarina glauca, which resemble 
those of C. Cunninghamiana, xxxy. 


Froggatt, W. W., A piece of red wood 
from the side of the door of the 
Government Residence at Rabaul, 
New Guinea, riddled with holes by 
leaf cutting bees, Megachile  sp., 
and a specimen of the bee, xxxii— 
Some “Blood Wood Apples”, which 
are the large galls of Cystococcus 
pomiformis Froggatt, xxxiii—Two 
Hymenopterous galls: (i) leaf of 
tropical jungle plant from Cairns, N. 
Queensland, covered with minute 
Chaleid galls and (ii) Hucalypt 
branchlet with mass of long spindle- 
shaped galls of Jepperella eucalypti, 
from the South Coast of N.S.W., 
Xxxiv—Two specimens of the larva 
of the Geebung Hawk Moth 
(Coequosia triangularis) from Gos- 
ford, xxxvili. i 

Hall, L. L., A mass of rolled Kurra- 
jong leaves from Goulburn, caused by 
the caterpillars of the Moth, Notarcha 
plycalis Walker, xxxii. 

Jacobs, E. G., Twenty-two plants of 
various species from Middlesex, 
British Honduras, Central America, 
SXOXONGT Te 


INDEX. Ixv. 


Exhibits (Contd.): 

Kinghorn, J. R., A specimen (the holo- 
type) and a skull of Ozyuranus 
maclennani, described in Rec. Aust. 
Mus., a few years ago, xxxii—skull 
of a Death Adder, Acanthophis 
antarcticus, for comparative pur- 
poses, Xxxii. 

Le Souef, A. S., A specimen of a mouse 
from East Sisters Island, Bass 
Straits, xxxii. ; 

Stead, D. G., An example of the egg 
of the Chimaeroid shark, Callorhyn- 
chus tasmanius Richardson, known as 
the Elephant Fish, xxxi—A drawing 
of a “sea monster” cast up on a mud 
bank, two miles inside the mouth of 
the Dreketi River, Labasa, Vanua 
Levu, Fiji, xxxiii—Report that a 
large Humpback Whale, Megaptera 
nodosa, had found its way into Port 
Jackson, XXXvV. 

Walkom, A. B., Specimens of a fossil 
fern, apparently new, from the roof 
of the Bulli Coal Seam in the Ex- 
celsior Colliery, Illawarra District, 
XXXil. 

Waterhouse, G. A., Both sexes of 
Ogyris zosine araxes, including an 
interesting aberration of the male, 
xxxix—A short account of the habits 
of the larvae and their attendant 
ants, xxxix—A pair of Ogyris olane, 
from Penrith, N.S.W., xxxix. 

Waterhouse, W. L., Specimens of 
Hordeum maritinum With., which 
showed genetic variation, xxxi—Seed- 
lings of rye showing marked 
albinism, xxxii—Specimens showing 
variegation of the leaves of wheat 
and rye plants, xxxvi. 

Whitley, G. P., Illustrations of some 
Queensland Fishes and remarks upon 
them, xxxii. 

Fletcher, Joseph James, an _ Idealist 
Secretary, 738. 

Fletcher, Joseph James (Memorial Series 
No. 2) issued, iii. 

Fletcher Memorial Lecture, acceptance of 
invitation of Council by A. H. S. Lucas 
to deliver the _ First, iii—First, 
announcement of delivery of, xxxiv— 


First, delivered by A. H. S. Lucas, 
appreciation expressed, xxxvi. 

Fletcher Memorial Lecture, 1930. 
Joseph James Fletcher, an Idealist 


Secretary, 738. 

Flora, Angiosperm, of Australia, Origin 
of Endemism in, 371—Native, Resolu- 
tion re setting apart an area of Crown 
Land for the eultivation, preservation 
and exhibition of, iv. 


Flynn, T. T., The Uterine Cycle of Preg- 
nancy and Pseudo-pregnancy as it is in 
the Diprotodont Marsupial Bettongia 
cuniculus, with Notes on other Repro- 
ductive Phenomena in this Marsupial, 
506. 

Fraser, Lilian R., elected a member, 
xxxiii—see Exhibits. 

Froggatt, W. W., Notes on Gall-making 
Coccids with Descriptions of New 
Species. No. ii. 468—see Exhibits. 

Fuller, Mary E., elected a member, xxix. 

Fungus, Soil, Notes on a  Cellulose- 
decomposing, of an unusual Character, 
699. 


Geolegy of the South 
South Wales. Pt. ii. Devonian and 
Older Palaeozoic Rocks, 145—Pt. iii. 
The Monzonitic Complex of the Mount 
Dromedary District, 637. 

Goulburn—a Vital Point on the New 
South Wales Highlands, 381. 

Grants to scientific research workers, 
applications for, xxxiv. 

Greenwood, William, see under Dixon, 
13h ING 

Grevillea Gaudichaudii R. Br., a supposed 
Natural Hybrid between. Grevillea 
laurifolia Sieb., and G. acanthifolia 
A.C. Pt. i. Analysis of the Hybrid, 386. 


Hall, L. L., see Exhibits. 

Hamilton,.A. A., obituary notice, v. 

Hamilton, A. G., Note on Sterility in the 
Proteaceae, xxxix. 

Hardy, G. H., Fifth Contribution towards 
a New Classification of Australian 
Asilidae, 249. 

Heydon, G., elected a member, xxxi. 

Hill, Prof. J. P., congratulations to, xxxi 
—message of greeting from, xxxiii. 

Holdsworth, Muriel G., elected a member, 
XXXvVii. 

Holmes, J. Macdonald, elected a member, 
XGXEXG 

Hour of Ordinary Monthly Meeting of the 
Society, result of questionnaire circu- 
lated to members in metropolitan 
district regarding, xxxvi. 

Hull, A. F. B., elected a Vice-President, 
SXSXGIEXG 


Jacobs, E. G., see Exhibits. 

Jensen, H. L., Macleay \Bacteriologist, 
arrival in Sydney, welcome and com- 
mencement of duties, vi—Notes on a 
Cellulose-decomposing Soil Fungus of 
an. Unusual Character, 699—The Genus 
Micromonospora Orskov, a little known 
Group of Soil Microorganisms, 231. 

Joplin, Germaine A., elected a member, 
XXXVii. 

Mule, Sie Ge AG 
XXXiii. 


Coast of New 


elected a member, 


lxvi. 


Kinghorn, J. R., see Exhibits. 


Lawson, late A. Anstruther, Origin of 
Endemism in the Angiosperm Flora of 
Australia, 371. 

Lea, A. M., Descriptions of New Species 
of Australian Coleoptera, No. xxi, 451. 

Leaf-buds of some Woody Perennials in 
the New South Wales Flora, 708. 

Le Souef, A. S., see Exhibits. 


Linnean Macleay Fellowships, reappoint- 
ment and appointment, 1930-31, vii— 
Applications invited; 1931-32, xxxvi, 
xxxvii—reappointments, 1931-32, xxxvili. 

Lucas, A. H. S., Acceptance of invitation 


of ‘Council to deliver the First 
Fletcher Memorial Lecture, iii— 
Fletcher Memorial Lecture, 1930. 
Joseph James Fletcher, an _ Idealist 


Secretary, 738. 


Maiden, Joseph Henry (Memorial Series 
No. 3), 355. 

Malloch, J. R., Notes on Australian 
IDeA, INO, so-clhl, GAS sesh, BOBS Zong 
429; xxvi, 488. 

Mawson, Sir D., Australian Expedition to 
the Antarctic, ii. 

McKie, Rev. E.:N., see Blakely, W. F., 
and Rev. E. N. McKie. 

McLuckie, J., On Grevillea Gaudichaudii 
R. Br., a supposed Natural Hybrid 
between Grevillea laurifolia Sieb., and 
G. acanthifolia A.C. Pt. i. Analysis 
of the Hybrid, 386. 

Meeting, Ordinary Monthly, last to be 
held in Macleay House, xxxviii. 

Memorial Series No. 2 (J. J. Fletcher) 
issued, iii—No. 3 (J. H. Maiden), 355. 

Micromonospora Mrskov, a little known 
Group of Soil Microorganisms, 231. 

Mosses of Fiji, 261. 

Munch-Petersen, E., 
XXXViil. 


elected a member, 


Native Flora of N.S.W., account of pro- 
gress made in the attempt to have 
an area set aside in the National Park 
for the cultivation and exhibition of, 


BxOXOXGl 2 
New England, N.S.W., Another New 
Species of Hucalyptus from, 594— 


Additions to the Flora of, 587. 
New Guinea Coleoptera. Notes and New 
Species, 532. 


Obituary Notices, Sir W. 
Spencer, v—A. A. Hamilton, v. 

Oenochromidae (Lepidoptera), Australian, 
Revision of, 1, 191. 

Orchids, Autumn, of the South Maitland 
Coalfields, N.S.W., with Description of 
a New Species of Pterostylis, 413. 


Baldwin 


INDEX, 


Organisms, Living, some aspects of the 
Adaptation of, to their environment, 
viii. 

Osborn) erot Le 1G Be appoimbeduaa 
member of National Park Trust, iv. 


Perennials, Woody, in the New South 
Wales Flora, the leaf-buds of, 708. 

Pittosporum undulatum, very early 
flowering of, xxxiv. 

Presidential Address, i. 

Proteaceae, Note on Sterility in the, 
BXEXOXGIEXG 


Protection of native plants extended for 
further period, iv. 


Reptiles, On Placentation in, 550. 

Revision of Australian Oenochromidae 
(Lepidoptera), 1, 191. 

Revision of the Australian Teleasinae 
(Hymenoptera: Proctotrypoidea), 41. 

Rupp, Rev. H. M. R., Notes on the 
Autumn Orchids of the South Maitland 
Coalfields, N.S.W., with Deseription of a 
New Species of Pterostylis, 413. 

Rust Studies, Australian. Pt. ii, 
Part iii, 596. 


159; 


Sargent, O. H., Xerophytes and Xerophily, 
with Special Reference to Protead Dis- 
tribution, 577. 

Science House, Successful conclusion of 
negotiations for the erection of, and 
summary of steps leading to this, i— 
Announcement that professional offices 
will be available for letting in, xxxvii— 
Detailed drawings of, made by the 
Architects, exhibited, xxxviii—Expected 
to be completed by end of January, 
XxXxviii—Progress made with the build- 
ing of, and Foundation Stone set, xxxi. 

Selby, Doris, congratulations to, xxx— 
letter from, returning thanks, xxxiii. 

Soil Microorganisms, the Genus Micro- 
monospora Orskoyv, a _ little known 
Group of, 231. 

Some Aspects of the Adaptation of 
Living Organisms to their Environ- 
ment, viii. 

South Coast of New South Wales, Geology 
Of, M4563. 

South Maitland Coalfields, 
Autumn Orchids of, 4138. 

Spencer, Sir W. Baldwin, obituary notice, 


N.S.W., 


Vv. 

Stead, D. G., see Exhibits. 

Stringybarks, illustrated 
slides, xxxvii. 


with lantern 


Tanyderidae, Observations on the Dip- 
terous Family, 221. 

Taylor, F. H., elected a member, xXxxi. 

Teleasinae (Hymenoptera: Proctotry- 
poidea), Australian, revision of, 41. 


INDEX. 


Tonnoir, A. L., Notes on the Genus 
Apistomyia (Diptera) and Description 
of a New Species, 136. 

Trichopterygidae of Australia and Tas- 
mania. Descriptions of six new Genera 
and eleven new Species, 477. 


lxvii. 


Waterhouse, W. L., congratulations to, 
xxix—elected member of Council, xxix 
—letter from, returning thanks for con- 
gratulations, xxix—Australian Rust 
Studies. Pt. ii. Biometrical Studies of 
the Morphology of Spore Forms, 159— 


Turner, A. J., Revision of Australian Pt. iii. Initial Results of Breeding for 
Oenochromidae (Lepidoptera). Pt. ii, Rust Resistance, 596—see Exhibits. 
le IPE abbl, UY) Webster, Jessie A., elected a member, 
XXX1ii. 
Vickery, Joyce W., elected a member, Weekes, H. Claire, Linnean Macleay 
SROXOXT THT Fellow in Zoology, summary of work, 


Walkom, A. B., Appointed representative 
of Society on Joint Management Com- 
mittee of Science House, ii—visit to 
South Africa to attend British Associa- 
tion for the Advancement of Science 
Meeting, iv—see Exhibits. 

Wardlaw, H. S. H., elected a _ Vice- 
President, xxix—Presidential Address, i. 

Waterhouse, G. A., Appointed representa- 
tive of Society on Joint Management 
Committee of Science House, ii—con- 
gratulations to, xxxiii—elected Hon. 
Treasurer, XXix. 


resignation of Fellowship and departure 
vi—congratulations to, 
thanks, 
in Reptiles, 


for England, 
xxx—letter from, returning 
xxxvii—On Placentation 
Pt 50: 
Whitley, G. P., see Exhibits. 
Wild Flowers, proclamation 


announced, xxxiii. 


Wilson, Prof. J. T., welcome to, xxxiii. 


Xanthium Burr, an Abnormal, 475. 


Xerophytes and Xerophily, with Special 
Reference to Protead Distribution, 577. 


issued by 
Government extending protection of, 


Absidia cylindrospora .. 705 Acrotriche aggregata . 736 Adeixis 24 
Acacia .. . 371-2, 579-80 Acthosus pascoei A Oiher siselay: AK griseata .. 24 
celastrifolia var. myrti- Actia 3038, 306-7 inostentata 24 
folia . IDSs ARGENTIFRONS 304, 309-310 insignata ae 24 

? Chalkeri . 149 BALDWINI . 303,306 ARNIGMETOPIA i 437, 447 

? decora .. . 149 BREVIS . 304, 309 FERGUSONI . 447 
decurrens Se PN fill darwini .. 304, 308-9 Aequia 56: 010) GD 

~ decurrens var. mollis 731 eucosmae 304, 307-8 | Aerobryopsis . 265, 285 
discolor .. Hoee gay ouk fergusoni 303-5 longissima 285 
elata 721, 731-2 hyalinata a 5 Bul) vitiana bo ASI) 
linearis 6 a0 SOO INVALIDA . 303, 305 Aesculus a Secs 
longifolia 724, 726, 732, 746 LATA 304, 307-8 Hippocastanum sa LAS 
juniperina ao ax monticola : . 809 Agonis flexuosa so) OG) 
melanoxylon a x, 746 NIGRITULA .. 304,309 Agropyron scabrum . 616 
myrtifolia 724, 726, 732, 746 norma 5 VOUS 30a ASrOLis! inconecilale eye aes e 
pubescens : XXXiv PARVISETA .. 304,308 Allecula og DEST 
Acanthophis antarcticus xxxli PLEBEIA . 304, 310 papuensis AD 
Acaulium nigrum” . 705 selangor a o0ke Aims se 5 
Acemyia eS SD, oc . 305 Alophora so 
Acephana 5 BBS, Bae) valida. So SUH Alternaria citri. go UE) 
ACHOSIA 481-2, 487 Actinomyces 231, 241, 245, 247 Spee peep OO 
FEMORALIS . 482 alni seueZiog Amaryemus_ aeneus SAL 
LANIGERA Sine Meera O's griseus 240-3 alienus ; .. 543 
Acianthus exser ‘tus .. 413, 416 maculatus so DBZ convexiusculus oo Hee 
fornicatus 5 Als} monosporeus . 232 cuprarius bee DAT 
Acidalia schistacearia 6 salmonicolor . 232 cupreus ne DAT 
Ackama Muelleri 3) U3, viridochromogenus 240-3 curvipes gio Be} 
Acrometopia .. .. 488 -Actinopteryx j sib lucene gol foveoseriatus 30 Het 
Acroporium . 265,298 ACUCERA E 326, 328, 337, 339 foveostriatus ee DA 
brevicuspidatum .. . 298 MONTANA 328 HOSSFELDI .. 543 


(b) BIOLOGICAL INDEX, 


New names are printed in SMALL CAPITALS. 


1xviii. 


Amarygmus inornatus .. 547 
INSIGNIS .. . es 542-3 
morio 532, 542-3, 547 
mutabilis 5. eET 
niger . BAT 
picipes nD AT 
ruficrurus fee DAY 
tasmanicus . 543, 547 
uniformis AG 

Amblyopone obscura . 487 

Amblyostegium serpens.. 291 
byssoideum eet cs 42 Oil 

Amenia . 101, 103 
chrysame 101-2 
dubitalis 56 stil 
imperialis ao. alii 
leonina a 101-2 
nigromaculata . 102 
parva atch, Vin een aaisy te Mec ede] LO b 

Amphibolosia 310-1 
flavipennis paola 

Amphiclasta on PAIL) 
lygaea oo) call) 

Amplipilis 347-8 
versicolor . 3848 


Anacamptomyia africana 119 


ANATROPOMYIA .. | LAG Bar 
FLAVICORNIS .. 50 ALAT 
Angophora BY Mla 372, 376, 746 
cordifolia a a Ugs(7AD, es 
lanceolata . 377, 720, 
724, 727, 735 
Anguis fragilis 56 BOND) 
Anoectangium .. 262, 264, 278 
tapes 4 PATS) 
Antictenia so ale 
punctiunculis . 198 
Antocha . 226 
Aotus mollis . 588 
SUBGLAUCA 587-8 
subglauca var.  FILI- 
FORMIS 587-8 
APALPOSTOMA . 134 
CINEREA ed: 
APILIA . 345 
CILIFERA 345-6 
Apiomorpha .. 468 
ANNULATA .. 469 
dipsaciformis serves 
DUMOSA . 468 
duplex 471 
excupula AT1- 2 
fletcheri .. MATT, 
FUSIFORMIS 470-1 
LONGMANI .. 469 
pharatrata aaa 
rosaeformis so US 
SPINIFER .. .. 470 
thorntoni a Galles 
urnalis ; 473 
Apistomyia "136- Gl. 139- 144 
collini mas 137-9 
elegans "186-7, 139, 141 
MACKERRASI 137-9, 143-4 


INDEX. 


Apistomyia tonnoiri 136-9, 141 
trilineata 137-9 
Archontophoenix Cunning- 


hamii XXXiV 
Arctophyto bio) vos exo) 
Arctotis oo Ate, Zalal 
Arhodia 200-1 

lasiocamparia .. 200 

? lutosaria . 206 

modesta .. Bed Ve 

orthotoma bo Allies 
porphyropa 49) FAL 

retractaria . 200 

semirosea Be 22200 
Armillaria mellea 5 COS 
Arrhodia ? illidgei .. . 205 
Arthrocormus dentatus .. 269 
Aspergillus .. 104 

fumigatus pio CS) 

niger BOD 

oryzae Seen aie 705 

Spetige Sa seh i Ge), 705 

terricola 66 OS) 
Aspidoptera ambiens 5 AIS 
Aspilates chordota .. .. 218 
ATERPOGON .. 250-2, 254 

CYRTOPOGONOIDES . 254 
Atherix 5) 
Atriplex . 493 

ACUTIBRACTUM . 499, 500 

angulatum 497-8, 500 

campanulatum . 497 

campanulatum var. IN- 

APPENDICULATUM . 497 

cinereum 502-3 

conduplicatum : 503-4 

crassipes . 494, 497 

elacophyllum.. 494-5, 501 

fissivalve 495-7 

halimoides 503-4 

halimoides var. condu- 

plicatum 5 BOS 

holocarpum . 504 

hymenothecum . 501 

inflatum 50° BES 

INTERMEDIUM 497-500 

isatidea .. ; .. 502 

leptocarpum .. 498-500 

leptocarpum forma 

MINOR .. .. .. 499 
leptocarpum forma "TUR: 

BINATUM 498-9 
leptocarpum var. acu- 

minatum 499-500 
lobativalve 5 ey 

Morrisit .. 504 

Muelleri 494- 5, 500-1 

nitens . 500 

paludosum 5 OY 

paludosum. var. appen- 
diculatum .. . 502 

Quinii D0 

rhagodioides 502-3 

rosea 5 lal 


Atriplex roseum var. 
stipitatum ach dee DOM! 
semibaccatum 495-7, 501 

semibaccatum forma 
tenuis .. 495 
SPINIBRACTUM 496-7 
spongiosum . 504 
varia 494-5 
vesicarium 493, 501-3 
Atrypa (?) reticularis .. 154 
AUSTRODEXIA 5 ILS, Lz 
COMMUNIS LZ Se 25 
MIXTA 5 laa, AG 
PALLIDIHIRTA 5 LAR. WAG 
pictipennis 123-4 
rubricarinata 123-4 
SETIGERA : 122-4 
SETIVENTRIS 5 a, AG 
UNIPUNCTA 5 WA, LAG 
Austrolimnius luridus .. 190 
luridus var. SUFFUSUS 190 
politus eo dlyt) 
AUSTROMETOPIA 437-8 
BURNSI : . 438 
Austrophorocera toe 
biserialis . 344 


Avicennia officinalis 720-1, UBT 


? Aviculopecten Rey 
AXIAGASTA . 209 
RHODOBAPHES 5 ZAl®) 
Axymyia furcata 5 
Bacillus influenzae .. 234, 246 
mycoides o ZAI 
Backhousia LEE TO 
myrtifolia 5 OU Us as 
? Bacterium typhi .. . 246 
Baeckea STAG 
brevifolia ‘oo CED 
linifolia .. 5 URS 
Balliace vetustaria .. 5 al¥}7/ 
Banksia 372-3 
ericifolia SXGXSXGDNG 
718, 727-8, 733 
integrifolia 5 Ole AAS) 
littoralis Po Ae IS 
marginata . 374, 728 
occidentalis .. »,0:0.b< 


serrata xxxix, 374, 580, 
715, 718, 728 


spinulosa, . 374, 728 
Barbula S264 2rK 
inflexa 5 AUS 
javanica 277-8 
LEUCOBASIS ao Cut 
louisiadum pan CALE 
mauiensis ae UU 
Bassia 2 493 
Bathypogon 250-1, 253, 255 
Bauera rubioides 718, 127, 731 
Beplegenes seals 
LACHRYMOSA .. tet emilee 
Bescherellea . 265, 282 
eryphaeoides 2282) 


Bettongia .. 506-7, 509-11, 
514, 516-9, 524-30 
cuniculus 506-7, 509 
Billardiera scandens 50 Casl 
Bipalium kewense .. ...742 
Blepharocera . 141,143 
Boronia PAD Ciara is ese to 
macrophylla ss 4. 2. woo 
oppositifolia .. XXXVili 
pinnata Mia aioe 
TROSSIAGD- 4d Nea wemmoul 
heterophylla .. .: .. 732 
microphylla .. ioe 
Botryosporium .. 699, 700, 706 
Botrytis 234, 700-1 
cinerea .. sib pon COS 

Brachychiton ‘populneus 
150, 734 

Brachyloma daphnoides 
var. LATIUSCULUM 587-8 
Brachymenium . 263, 279 
DMGUCUMI Gs.) er ae a. eg 

indicum var.  corru- 
gatum Sellen MearaEer ats) 
Brachyrrhopala es. DOS 
bella aoe) ey ma em 5: 
limbipennis .. .. .. 254 
maculata Se ee Ea ies 
MUNCIE Goo 258 


nitidus var. dissimilans 259 
nitidus var. dissimilis 259 


IRRVADYAOUNOINEN 7 Go bo de 1 
tmychnoptilla s. 5.) 2. 1 
Bradymerus crenatus .. 547 
granaticollis FeO a 
raucipennis .. .. .. 547 
SGICTENGUIY So Ga) Ge oo eel 
Breynia BA nih epi yac ule MOnt 
oblongifolia 121-2, 733 
Bryum ool lota Mele MeO cay) 
chrysoneuron .. 261, 279 
‘Decaisnei ea EAS) 
erythrocarpoides.. .. 279 
gedeanum nn DAM rs se eae) 
GREEN WOODII Sie ees) 
pachytheca .. .. .. 279 
sullivani PD Vesna OOO) 
truncorum .. .. .. 280 
VITIANUM Se Braise Mdopanir crLEG, 
Bursaria spinosa .. 731 
Byallius ANDERSONI .. igs 5 
punctatus Nc ae rineet 8 ipsa) 
Callicoma serratifolia 724, 731 
Callicostella . 264, 289 
obloneitolian sa) 425 ee 289 
papillata Ot WORE sa Nokomey Fone) 
vesiculata A penitent Zoo 
Callistemon 5 BUAy BUG 

acuminatus x C. lanceo- 
latus XXXV1i 

lanceolatus XXXv, 377, 
710, 735 


INDEX. 


Callistemon lilacina.. xxxvii 
lilacina var. carmina xxxvii 


linearifolia XXXVii 
linearis .. 5s) URE EOI L: 
pachyphyllus XXXV 
punifolius PE leech aU ey BOT ACE 
Callorhynchus tasmanius xxxi 
Calcacerwa hee ero. 0 
Calcageria we) Sete roLlg 
CALOPYGIDIA BE arn D ey 
ARUN GIS 56 ot ew) () 
Calymperes ; 263, 274, 276 
ALBO-LIMBATUM  ... .. 274 
chamaeleontum ..... 274 
denticulatum 275-6 
Dozyanum .. .. .. 274 
Geppiiteere Wan sec. orate 
linearifolium Ripon HEA Teo 
longifollum .. .. .. 276 
lorifolium WATE ieee riven’ eretlO 
MARGINATUM .. 274-5 
molluccense 274-5 
obliquatum .. ..... 274 
orientale 275-6 
samoanum 95. 92.) 2. 274 
serratum RR ee Be OO 
tahitense 275-6 
tahitense var. TRUN- 
CATUM Sena oar ALAD) 
tenerum a 274-5 
tuberculosum -. 261, 276 
Calyptothecium .. 265, 285 
Urvilleanum .. .. .. 285 
Camptochaete .. 266, 287 
porotrichoides een is PAO 
Campylodontium .. 265, 287 
flavescens ao PADIS PASI 
Campylopodium .. 264, 267 
integrum Gren) eon ror GTi 
Campylopus So) oo RR BO? 
Richardii rites 267 
Carima basisparsata oo ALY 
Carthiaealmey ermine) os LOD 
saturnioides .... 199 
Castiarina AERATICOLLIS 182 
APICHNODTATAG = ns. ha Doo 
Y aweenoollhiSs b5. 56 oo. dlenl 
IOGUAMIEN 956! ob. 66 oo wax! 
DRYADULA pte) cag sia § Syae DOO 
gebhardti Stee ae TT Peey ie kee 
IMITATOR craberabheparreltoO 
TOSGWAGHPA Sc) 66) oo oo altel 
moribunday . ss)... Lei 
OITA, oo oo 06 oo dlfenl 
WLAGROAYONRUN “55 155) 50 Wan) 
QUADRIPLAGIATA .. 535 
suberata var. discoflava 533 
Casuarina .. .. Bs ens Bi 
Cunninghamiana . XXXV 
glauca XXXV, 578 
IBlingEaiene, 55 9 oo oo woul 
Celerena .. .. 5 PADS), AALaL 
divisa MRS lence 0) oe gan Mae, (9 


lxix. 


Celerena griseofusa e209 
Celmisia .. Bee Bo Behe 
Ceratodus forsteri dee! AS 
Ceratopetalum .. .. 723-4 
apetalum 6 UALS UAB Ue 
gummiferum a 731 
Ceratopogon SAN eee ea, ACAD 
Cernia A EROE shit oko th aOke) 
amyclaria dat ale arey Senet (16 
Ceropria bifasciata 50. et 
janthinipennis He rere Ae 
maculata 2 bl See cad 
peregrinus .. .. .. 547% 
quadriplagiata .. .. 547 
valga AU error niescha | ita ath 
Cestrinus aspersus .. 183 
brevis Aeneas " 182- 3 
CARBO sya Ny STEIN ROS ELOY 
trivialis Roan Cott sciatica al bes 
Chaetoliga AIRES Se ESAS 
Chaetolyga A Pa OLS 
CHAETOMETOPIA .. 437, 443 
CINERD AW ate ch, a an 4S 
Chaetomitrium ». 265, 289 
depressum .. .. .. 289 
rugifolium’ >. .5 .%. 289 
Chaetophlepsis A Leo 
tarsalis .. a0 BUY 
Chaetophthalmus “sn, 310-1 
BISERIATUS Dela eee att LL! 
brevigaster....) 5.) se ou 
Chalcidesteawe eee OS 
ocellatus . 551,570, 574 
tridactylus 551, 570, 572-3 
Chaleopterus affinis .. 544 
eatenulatus .. .. .. 544 
clypealis Pia ig etre Bushy aes 
meyricki ie a Sak Aa 
NIT Sw ee ee eee ae Oe 
perforans SN ma AL AIA IE a) 
purpureus Fy Aad 
lucidus ss face ee reese 
SDALSUSHiaew die ened 4 
Chamaemyia .. .. 488, 491 
Chariotheca cupripennis 547 
impressicollis TAPS ANG 
Oblon saya ne Oa 
planicollis SAGE ert soa ema V4 AP 
punctiventris Renee Ute ye fi 
Cheilanthes tenuifolia .. 581 
Chilma flagrantaria .. 204 
Chiloglottis Sey eet cASTG 
Tenexaes te (aes) Wie o 
Chiroleptes te eee 44 
Chromomoea major 56 ALY 
METALLICA eee aie 5. als 
OGWAIE, 60 (o5 oo oo IST 
SUTURALIS Be ea ars pl Be 
WIATCONOP 65 5 oo oo LSS 
ViOIACeaiie wae ak 187 
Chrvseutria  250- 2 
Chrysopasta 105-6 


elevanSi =. saree ne Od 


oxox 


Chrysopasta zabrina .. 106 
Chrysopila Bee cc) PONG 
Cidaria metaxanthata .. ii 
Circopetes .. 26, 203 
obtusata We ECE eae O13 
Citromyces UE RS 4: 
SD Aaen site Asura heures ¢ MLR 7K () 5 
Claopodium . 264, 291 
AMBLYSTEGIOIDES .. .. 291 
assurgens Bye Lee ae ee OL: 
hawaiiense .. .. .. 291 
leuconeuron .. «=. =. 297 
nervosum PAO Ae oil E 
prionophyllum .. .. 291 
Clastobryella = 2652910 
cuculligera . 261, 297 
Clerodendron tomentosum 737 
(ClhNINEVOWNG, <50 9 560, 06 oo» AUS 
Climacograptus sp... .. 153 
Clinopogon . 251, 260 
CNEMADOXIA 482, 486-7 
OKEI aa a eS AST 


Coccospora agricola (2) 705 


CocHLIARION 484-5 
WIKCMOMODINISIH 56 oe oo CEOS 
Coequosia triangularis xxxvili 
Cohnistreptothrix 231-2, 
240, 242, 247 
Colobochlia ?personalis 20 
Colpochila AS ia raniy cul Aiy S 
setosa ons aes 
Coniophora cerebella Pe i0S 
Conospermum longifolium 
715, 728 
Coptocercus SCRIPTICOLLIS 548 
NACA S'S FP Soe oe ee eS 
Correa Aenea ee ta RS OTILe 
alba PSA ene Le DIPS 7a 
speciosa Bry Bee eRe Pie 
Corynebacterium .. .. 231 
Cristularia Ae ats er eet U0 8 
Crowea REE nae ieee LL ae M74 
Cryphaea . 265, 281 
SACHS. Gigul) eis bese eae ea orl 
Schleinitziana POL Me Raa L 
Cryptocarya obovata 50 Wel) 
patentinervis (?) OU, 
Cryptochaetum 488-90 
Cryptocladocera 50. oo SADE) 
Cryptopogon 250-1, 260 
Cucullothorax eee Os: 
Culicoides .. a PAPAS PPA) 
Cunderdinia SETISTRIATA 454 
variabilis ie SRE ee ea 
Cup HOCEEA Na a oo 
EMMESIA 55 ILO, Stilts} 
PILOSA so CLG, Biles 
SETIGERA Ho og GUL, Bil 
SP eeereke ayers) Tecan AS SHES 
(CUUPIN OH: 55 oe oo oo. llélZ! 
Cyclodictyon .. .. 264,289 
Blumeanum .. .. .. 289 
Cylindromyia 4 OILY, BiaI7 


INDEX. 
Cylindromyia ATRATULA 
312, 314-5 
BRUNNEA 312, 315-6 
flavifrons 312, 315-6 
NIGRICOSTA 312, 314-5 
SYDNEYENSIS .. 5 Buz, asl! 
TRICOLOR .. 6 BULA, Sls 
tristis Hynes sais Aelia Gaetan tly 
Cyrtopogon ; 250; 253 
(CAIPHOIOUIS 6s) oa bo po 
? eryphaeoides A ate AS 
Cystococcus pomiformis xxxili 
- Daedalia confragosa SA OB 
Daldinia concentrica oo OS 
SDicweet Sige meter (0)5) 
vernicosa Assets ith ANS) 
Dampiera .. .. .. BU 
Darwinia , 372, 376 
fascicularis xxxvi, 724, 
UU 5 UaxD 
intermedia XXXVi 
taxifolia var. inter- 
media XXXVI 
Dascillus brevicornis 5 a DAY) 
OBLONGUS PMSA sige LY) 
serraticornis Dy ad ea ROO), 
Dasypogon analis .. .. 257 
australis Pre nee kcigh Za: 
carbo ere EO es PATO) 
festinans Sas ae pe OO) 
gamarus So oe oo DY 
Gareth). » sg oie, Be eo AD6 
? limbinervis Nae) ,6 
limbipennis .. .. .. 254 
luctuosus acarntas e 256 
nitidus  958- 9 
sergius 258-9 
suavis.. Poulet cian Gbiae CANE 
Daviesia ulicina 5 trie five: Feat 
Dasyuris tridenta .. . 9 
Dasyurus 507, 510-1, 514, 
519, 526-7 
ID SIAN, 5 6 5 BO) BBD, B17 
AUSTRALIENSIS 332-4 
GRISEA 332-3 
WATOR oo oo CO Bay sot 
OPACA . 382) 304 
SCUTELLATA .. . 332, 334 
Demoticus 129-30 
Dendrobium Beckleri xxxvi 
egracilicaule XXXV1 
Denisonia superba .. 551, 
554, 573-4 
suta ae 551, 554, 573-4 
Derambila .. .. ah IL Sal 
catherina 215-6 
IDIOSCELES NERA relies Meta 
LIOSCELES 215-6 
permensata 215-6 
punctisignata A stabi epee iy 
Derispia coccinelloides .. 537 
IDO 66° oo. 00. bo ZaU 
australis UES, Baer Mey ae OL 


Diaclina immaculata .. 547 
nitida 3 An 
Diamuna gastropacharia 194 
Diaporthe Sojae 705 
Dicellograptus sp. 5 la 
Diceratucha © Semen ez le! 
Dichromodes 12, 2A 
AESTA 5 3h oe 
ainaria 2,4, 1, 8 
albitacta Beery?) 
anelictis 33) JL 
angasi i 3, ILI 
aristadelpha .. 3. 12 
atrosignata 4, 17, al 2a 
berthoudi By. 2433 
cirrhoplaca eens i) 
confluaria 5 ISS ING 
consignata 4, 22 
compsotis 35 1K) 
DENTICULATA .. Bi IL 
diffusaria ay, 113%. 14! 
disputata By, 17 
diasemaria Uy Ue 
divergentaria qf 
EMPLECTA 335 15) 
estigmaria BSH 
euprepes 3, 9,10 
euscia 4, 20 
exocha 5 ld 
explanata 4,16 
exsignata 4,16, 23 
fulvida 9 
GALACTICA 3,6 
haematopa 3, 8 
ICELODES .. 3, 20 
indicataria 4, 20-1 
ioneura 35 Y)5 WD) 
ischnota . 3,9 
LAETABILIS 3, 7 
LEPTOGRAMMA 4,18 
LEPTOZONA 4,19 
LIMOSA 4,19 
LISSOPHRICA 4,16 
liospoda .. 4,18 
LYGRODES 4,18 
mesogonia 3, 14 
mesozona UA, ILS 
molybdaria 3; D 
MESODONTA 4, 22 
nexistriga ee 2 
obtusata 4,11,16 
obtusata var. longidens 11 
odontias 1, 13} 
ophiucha 4, 20 
orectis AS. 
ORIPHOETES 3, 12 
ornata ; 5, 9823 
orthogramma P23 
orthotis .. 3, 10 
orthozona 3, 10 
paratacta ay 3, 1 
partitaria 5 By iQ, al 
perinipha 5 8H © 


Dichromodes  personalis 

4, 20, 22 
phaeostropha pela! 
poecilotis 3519, 0) 
DEVOMACKAM a.) | se 2 
raynori Bi 4, 21 
TIM OSAWEe ee. ak 522 
ROSTRATA he 4,15 
UMA eee 2 oy EH ats On S 
scothima eRe RMCA OR TK 
semicanescens St 4,17 
sigmata .. 6 25s alal Ske 
steropias 2 


steropias ab. nexistriga 24 


stilbiata 4, 22 
strophiodes! 2.0.2) y. 13 
SUMO AVA ss so aralree 7 

? triglypta RMN) PRA ONLS 
triparata 2 4545 2 
ey Chmoptilayery | ean use. iL 
uniformis parca c-a6 ie co rue 
usurpatrix 0d, 23 
Dicksonia antarctica .. 452 
IDICMEMOS THe oe ee Oe eeeZio 
PUSOSHS col ea e657 oa ZOU 
Dicranella . 264, 266 
flaccidula Hon een eo OO 
pycnoglossa .. .. .. 266 
imichophylilay a. 2298. 3267 
Dicranum oceanicum .. 267 
Didelphys .. 507, 514, 527-8 
aurita atomae Bay oro PAS 
Wiese, ' 56° eo oo Bet 
Dietysus .. Paw se A 
Dillwynia ericifolia bo UBe 
Dinophalus a 26, 34 
cyanorrhaea .. 2. 26-7 
dilutaria 20 
drakei Mg Bil 
eremaea .. ae . 27-8 
_IDIOCRANA ety amen eee 
LECHRIOMITA .. 27, 29 
macrophyes Pilly Py) 
postmarginata 27, 30 
pygmaea .. 21-8 
serpentaria 27-8, 30 
Dioctria tasmanica no Pas 
Diogmites .. 250, 252-3, 257 
Diphucephala angusticeps 453 
caerulea bg basa tn Co Ras 
GCAMUCIIE MN aca’, hon MUSE UMA DO 
CONCINNA peer tesa De 
erebra 453-4 

a (Gienloehermouls 65 oo oo Cede 
DICISOMIUND 55) so 65 Col 
GIPAB RACE eon cere (ul Vets eA Da: 
IMNTADTOES oo loo bo oo Cent 
MONTANA BOREDOM, Mes. 
nitens Br tiursyteun tog) Gs cued yi 
MONChOOHTE cd ‘os (o. 454 
parviceps Smite Sea erie 2 Us) 
pulchella Takin a ee Oe 
pulcherrima .. .. 451 
purpureitarsis 453- 4 


INDEX. 
Diphucephala quadrati- 
DOTA ks hy OMe 4S 
richmondia 451-2 
THU CSas estes Ae eee DIS. 
SOLdidagas iy sc eae ADS 
UBNOSEUNIS Go los Cals | on CEOS 
Diphyrrhyncus apicalis.. 547 
MUCOMATUGU Sines een een ail 
Diphyscium : 263, 301 
submarginatum .. .. 301 
Diplograptus foliaceus .. 153 
Dirce .. planner alles 
Discophyllum flavescens 288 
Distichophyllum . 264, 288 
flavescens Hawn ther fennel Avuiieves 
Graeffeanum Molla ee PAS is 
limibatwlum) >> 8. 3 288 
TORQUATIFOLIUM .. .. 288 
VON oo bo Tab eee ASS 
vitianum Gey ls Wo UNI Poy 
Doddiana 340-2 
australis 340-1 
FLAVIFRONS 341-2 
pallens es Aiea 340-2 
PARVISETA CLO A Vee 
Dodonaea we anu Oe 
triquetra . 120, 734 
Doliema (?) nitidula .. 547 
spinicollis SEO AA Ber ety t BAEY ANG, 
Doryanthes a6 Sy Reactors 
Doryphora teeta oo Cad) 
Drosera She Min oii esdaten & 
longifolia 372-3, 387 
ovata Sree eadh oa 3872 
rotundifolia : 372, 387 
Drosophila melanogaster 378 
IDIVANACIED og) de 5 6 6b) BUS 
floribunda re et oh ad eM a TC 
Dysarchus BROWNI 183-4 
PERCOSMALRWS! wanes ie ToS 
Ebenolus ARUENSIS .... 545 
papuensis yt he aie ENA 
papuensis var. anthra- 
GIMNWS oe Mao Ss So Bas 
plicicollis Pais Pate ee gio ae) 
sculptipennis fe pil BYE) 
SERRATICOLLIS Bee 544 
wollastoni var. anthr: a- 
Goats) 6, eet) oe ey, ALY 
Hehidna Pee Mies Lil hicipsilioinnic pa ROC 
Hehinomyia Her Wa DEAN OO 
Ketropothecium 262, 266, 293 
adnatum Sie SPREE le A RAS YE 
Callodietyonwee ee eo 4: 
cyathothecium AS Oi a a en) A 
incubans Dr Atala VEE MILO O 
incubans var. scaberu- 
lum ie HSMM Ae Ps By eS 
AKON OVERDO G5 Bae oe, ZANE! 
MOLLE Benin. iE OA 
pacificum A SNE tee 24253 


percomplanatum 20 2408 


Lxsxcil 


Ectropothecium percom- 
planatum var. FAL- 
CATUM Shins VaR OAS 

malacoblastum Sane OF! 
sandwichense Te athe SP 4 
SCAbDerALIUIM Ee eee ne 
SOdaleie ware S 
tutuilum pe) SEARO 
vitianum hy Meet ae DOA 

Edwardsina 5 dz, ats) 

Heernia 5 ; 557-8, 560 

cunninghami 550-3, 555, 
557, 559-60, 568-70, 574 
kingii BP wean Aas hata! Aaa KD) 
stokei Bigs 93) MRA Mea 5) 

striolata .. 550-3, 556-7, 
559-60, 568-70, 574 

whitei 550-3, 556-7, 
559-60, 568-70, 574 
Hidamia catenulata eto (05) 
WAUPIOIEROGINEY de 55 150 KOS 

Elaeocarpus holopetalus 734 

reticulatus 5 UAL, ese: 

Elaeodendron australe .. 734 

MINCGHOCRANAN oe ere ios 

THA CSAS eae (es anese re bunt 
Eneryphia .. di 212-3 
argillina Oe Wee eo: 
frontisignata a es eee 
Endothia parasitica 50 (AUS) 
Endotrichella . 266, 282 
(GhrEeSHSE NN, 956 oo 60 CAI 
IDM CWOy 55 SH oo CABDS ZOTl 
Hillebrandii .. . 262, 287 
RUNGE 5S°° Gol oo 50 AAST 
Solanderi oe EE A Ol! 
Hoacemyia etd See PEERS 
Epacris nisl Seca nS GEE RAM OTIC! 
mucrophyllay sa. een oemloO 
pulchella Pen eee aii ts (88) 
Epidesmia ophiosema .. 20 
ONE 6 6 b'5 aon 00) CULES 
EXPOPTIA 482-3 
ROMWINIDIAN anes 5 a5. 333 
Hriocera 209- Bi, 45) 
gaspensis Puig on ie neon 2.3 
longicornise) eee eee 

Eriochilus cucullatus .. 413 

Eriococcus sp. .. 489-90 

Eriostemon Deh Se Meer: 

crowei .. hi PCO ROO 


Erysiphe eraminis oo te), 
609, 622, 633 


Erythropogon 251-2, 254 
australis 5 PIL, ZAsyES 
limbipennis ... .. .. 254 
maculinevris se abil, 254 

Eubolia indicataria oa rAd) 
linda AP ie A NE OAS a nae iter b 
partitaria Sa Dea ee aD) 


Eucalyptus xxxiv, xxxvii, 
371-2, 376, 746 
ACMENTOIeSIyee ee roo 
agglomerata .. XXXV 


ixexai® 


Eucalyptus Andrewsi .. 595 
approximans so) oo wet) 
Basten meester wish beckon to 
biCOlOTs eee 
calophylla Stays hy hide pionio 
GINWCOEOME, oa “oo. oo 2083 
Camfieldi Spider a srecacie 
Cannonives) yee 591 
capitellata XXXV, 591 
CODONOCARPA .. . 587, 589 
conglomerata Bis ey eos 
coriacea .. erties 
corymbosa 376, 724, M2 M35 
GRD ay ee aes SEG 
elaecophorayy yee eee: 
eugenioides Xxxv, 376, 471 
Ko cktonaleymi sen lee) oO 
rao! o> 66 oo o5 2083 
haemastoma .. Soo, Aa 
Hemiphlioiawies es onside 
globulus Ge ee eae ates MOT AS 
laevopinea XxXXV 
TN ACEOCATD Agere alo 
macrorrhyncha SXEXGXGV 
591,595 

macrorrhyncha var. 
brachycorys 3 XXXV 
McKigaNa . 592, 594 
nO, G5 oo oo “783 
Muelleriana XXXV 
IWHEMNON 56 256 se no fos 
nigra aie octaet ik acarae eg eae 
nitens Sih PAS cle AOS 
obliqua tt XXXVii 
OCGIdentalisie) eel: 
paniculata 0 CA, CdD 

PADCLEATAT Dh mas) CEL Men OO 
pilligaensis » 474, 473 
pilularis 5 UB, ALB} 
piperita .. . 376, 471 
quadrangulata So) ae DO 
regnans .. . XXXVili 
TUDIda Os tee ie ee ATS 
saligna 5) UO, 4871 
Santvalitoliaeey een ono 
Sidenophloila ec eae G 
sideroxylon .. teak Oe anto: 
sp. pie 468, 471, 473 
spathulata Maco WPA RRAT OS 
stellulata ica, SERS eo lO 
stricta . 589, 590 
tereticornis OOM Ania 
terminalis 5 PA XXXiii 
TINGHAENSIS .. 5 Hails Beil 
WOOlISTanay an eee, 
YOUMANI 587, 590-1 

Eucamptodon .. .. 264, 267 
piliferus Ah Rae Gri 

Eumelea ae . 207, 209 
australiensis Sika rere OS 
duponchelii : 207-8 
obliquifascia 56. oo ADS 
rosalia 207-9 


INDEX. 
Eumelea rosalia form 
stipata he ire see DS 
Saneuinaitay eee eee Od 


sanguinata australiensis 207 


STIPATA 207-8 
Euphasia 50. 00, GAG, Bart 
picta ek See O'2 O 
EUPHOLOCIS .. 464, 466 
DENTIPES Bete nega eee ees) 
MEAG 64 do oo CXi5) 
Euprosopia 5 dp Sera 4g) 
biarmata nee 430-1 
conjuncta . 429, 430 
macrotegularia 430-1 
maculipennis eeeipa A SAIRYD) 
miliaria ye Ue ee tO 
punctifacies .. .. .. 480 
SCATOPH AGA 430-1 
separata eZ 9-3: 
tenuicornise sa. see ese4o0 
Huptychium ~ 2663-282 
assimile .. we 282-3 
cuspidatumyy >.) 2 seco 
Gunnii 261, 282-3 
pungens al ete EROS 
robustum DUPE urs tow ROS 
setigerum Ses NE Ge OO 
VITIENSE FORM AM a8 5 < ANS 
Eustacomyia 133-4, 326, 337-8 
breviseta 133-4 
HIRTA 56 eile oi dless 
Eutelia undulifera Mei aeat RICKS 
Eutermes westaustralien- 
sis Boe lsat clan aera OO 
Eutinophaea 463-4, 466 
bicristata 459-60 
GiSMaiee ere fo: Ate oz 
HASCICUMATAY 6 | eee) a4 459 
IMISWRATING AUG ey lh) soos cee ie LOM 
nana Be ket 23 ot est Reale 4 O'S 
PAPUENSIS te) bane Ole 
SETISTRIATA .. . 459, 461 
SUBVIRIDIS PUM ce. hoe 5 AMD) 
SUTURALIS Bete creas LAD) 
variegata Aly Alt cee ome LO 
VITIENSIS at eG] 
Hxechopaipus!) 2. 3: “=. 130 
IATRDPHGHEAR SE lsc! ns) somo 
DUBITALIS 131-2 
FULVIPES af 131-2 
IMGT 55} bo 6a bo dH 
RUFIFEMUR Sed 131-2 
rufipalpis ay 5 BO, 12 
Exocarpus SDiCrei te. Seo 
Exodictyon sleet By 269 
Spo W AOL “1g-gh. e crate ears 269 
dentatum ie se ENR AE Ae) 
scabrum et OU 
scolopendrium Bre eee OU, 
Fagus COP as 708 
Moorei oA 710, 728 
Favosites . 146, 150 


Ficus 


rubizinosa 
stephanocarpa 
Fidonia squalidata 


Fissidens 


abbreviatus 


ALTISETUS 


OUSPIDIFERUS 
DIVERSIRETIS 


fissicaulis 


daltoniaefolius 
GLOSSO-BRYOIDES 


lagenarius 


LAUTOKENSIS 
mangarevensis 
mangarevensis 
peracutae 
mangarevensis 
PERACUTUS .. 
mangarevensis 
taitensis 
naho-bryoides 
PERACUMINATUS 
PEROBTUSUS 
pungens .. 
philonotulus 


samoanus 
VITIENSIS 
Zollingeri 


Floribundaria .. 
aeruginosa 


floribunda 


pseudo-floribunda 
Fomes roseus 
Forcipomyia 


Formosia 
atribasis 
CINGULATA 


frontosa .. 
QUADRIPUNCTATA 
smaragdina 
speciosa .. 
Froggattimyia .. 


Frontina 
Fusarium 


avenacearum 


coeruleum 
culmorum 
bullatum 


faleatum (?) 


herbarum 


moniliforme .. 
oxysporium 


orthoceras 
sp. 


Galanageia quadrigramma 


50 ASD, 
: . 282 


Garovaglia 
setigera . 
Weberi 

Gastrophora 
henricaria 


qasintceran Ne 


peas) bay) 
. 124, 


728 


na (4 
5 alla 


. 262, 


269 


5 Apfat 
5 ATA 
eee ciiels 
269-70 
oo ZARA 
269-70 
. 269 
. 272. 
ea 
272-3 


var. 


var. 


Fo. og AUS: 
Var. 
. 272 


a AUS 
oo UY 
56) lle 
a Call 

. 269 


271 


272-3 
5 PAUL 
. 269 


ZOOS 


284 


284-5 
.. 284 
284-5 


705 


"| 226 
etoe 
A085 


Jas; 


109 


sep Os 
. 104 
eS 
elOd 
. 328 


Ss 


347 


.. 104 
se Od 
50 US 
a5. OS 
s6 (KDE) 
co, UDR 
so TADS 
y05 
go (US 
5.) (ADS) 
ao. (D5) 

. 705 


197 
282 


“. 282 
“| 200 
- 200 


Gaultheria hispida Poo 
Geoplana .. 143 
eaerulea pio UE 
coxil : 50 4ka3 
purpurascens | .. 143 
rubicunda . 748 
variegata re 743 
GERALDIA A 397, 337 
HIRTICEPS A UUslethamnb Baers) 
Gerusia 38, 201, 2038 
excusata 201-3 
multicolor sh 201-2 
RUBRICOSA . 201, 203 
virescens ae 201 
Gibberella saubinetii . 105 
Glochidion Ferdinandi .. 733 
Gompholobium Beier olle 
Gonocephalum costatum 547 
costipenne wei seney aT 
hispidocostatum . 547 
Goodenia ag le anal mets A371 (020 
Graptopezus costipennis 547 
erenaticollis .. .. .. 547 
Grevillea 372-4, 580, 
727, 746-7 
acanthifolia .. 386, 407, 
411, 728, 747 
aquifolium . 587 
asplenifolia hs Ae ape BoC 
buxifolia . ot 4, 128 
excelsior (7?) ISO) 
laurifolia 373, 386-407, 
411, 747 
lavandulacea 56 OU 
linearis in 720, 728-9 
Gaudichaudii 386-7, 747 
oleoides 1 814, 728 
mucronulata-.. 2. 2. 728 
paradoxa 5 UY) 
punicea a yi ctah Oe: 
robusta  373- 4,580, 728 
SARMENTOSA 5 DOT 
SDC oes oan se LOD 
Spachelavacmunes msc nema 
Gryon Sect eee Le Oh Pure ane alter 
Gryonella 42, 81, 84 
AFFINIS 84-6, 88 
bruesi . 84-8 
crawfordi 84-5, 88 
magnidens 84, 87 
PLATYTHORAX 84, 88 
Gryonoides .. 41-2 
Guava aa 5 AQ 
Gymnosoma Re fy S 
rotundata 93, 97 
Hakea 372-4, 726-7 
dactyloides Ne Seba O) 
eriantha 5 BUD, TA, C29) 
SUNOS, oo oo oo . oo, Breil) 
FanononSneiee 55 oc oo WUD 
pubescens 710-1, 726-7, 
129, 735 


INDEX, 


Hakea pugioniformis .. 
586, 710, 729 


saligna . 126, 729 
suberea . OL: 
trifurcata 580-1, 584 
varia SOS 
Halicore XXXili 
Halmaturus ruficollis a) tales} 
Hapalothrix 50 dat) 
Haplonycha bella 5456 
BREVISETOSA bn) CHO) 
erinita .. 455 
deceptor ao CHS 
electa . 456 
fraterna .. 456 
gagatina "457- 8 
gibbicollis 5.6. AlaNs! 
IMMATURA Fp Petite a a) bE RE NG) 
IRIDEA DS ee Ae BE AREA OTT) 
marginata .. 458 
nigra eee Dy 
pallida 92456 
PILOSICOLLIS ao 454 
PRUINOSA 5 2S) 
PYGIDIALIS aig Cnt 
ruficollis 58 GY 
rustica oo CaN 
rustica var. ~. 458 
setosa oo a EADS 
tarsalis .. 458 
Hedycarya angustifolia, . 730 
Helaeus occidentalis 5 Oey) 
PERLATUS i pa OO 
Heleioporus . 744 
Helianthus 586 


Helichrysum diosmifolium onl 


leucopsidum .. XXXVili 
Helminthosporium sp. .. 621 
Hemiergis decresiensis .. 550 

aquadridigitatum 550-1, 

559-60, 570, 574 
Herpetineuron .. 2 26452911 

MWOCCOROE os bo oo on eel 
Heteralex aspersa .. its 
Heteromeringia . 434 

australiae RP eA RAO 

IMITANS .. 5 AlBxS) 

nigrimana Pie sia MIA Sy 
Hibbertia 5 wry) 
Hieracium Shee 1S NA RONG 
Hillia at Bins Bb NSS 
Himantocladium . 265, 286 

implanum Hee teabehat nasi AShO 
loriforme rhay by BARONE Pere wre pel) 
Hinulia quoyi 551, 553-4, 


556, 559-60, 568-70, 572-4 


HOBARTIA 5 AS BA, Or 
PECULIARIS SO U2T, 
Holocephala : 1, 260 
Homalia .. 265, 286 
exigua .. 261), 286 
Homaliodendron » 265, 286, 
dendroides™ “7.544 22a) 206 
mleoellignean os 566 oo FASO 


1xxiii. 


Homaliodendron gran- 
didens i . 286 
javanicum ; 286 
Homoeotrachelus 466 
Homospora 201 
lymantriodes 201 
procrita .. 201 
rhodoscopa she 201 
Hookeria flabellata 50) PANE 
Graeffeana .. .. .. 289 
oblongifolia 289, 294 
vescoana ee elk cise) 
Hoplogryon = Oe ee eA? 
DICOlOTLRN A Een eee OG 
castaneithorax Apne? Ea hU) 
fuscicoxa OURS Fees | OAM 
howensis ape sees ae eS 
IMAM NVSMAMS S5 oa oa U7 
pulchrithorax Resaerrecane x0) 
punctata TCE cine AONE 
rufithorax a ermhanretn gs ER PLA: 
SOR GHC ag attra, eres 
rugulosa BPs esas.” ri oy5) 
varicornis San deeds eee ONO 
Horaia 144 
Hordeum maritimum Xxxi 
Hovea linearis .. 732 
Howea belmoreana .. XXxiv 
Jaluben@Oles SH, ss 556 55 OB 
Hyalomyia 93, 98 
aureiventris .. 94, 96 
BASALIS 94, 96 
CHRYSIS .. 94-5 
costalis 94-5 
DISCALIS 94-5 
HYALIS 94, 96 
lativentris 94, 97 
lepidofera . 93-8 
nigrihirta 94-5, 97 
nigrisquama .. 93,95 
normalis 93, 95 
sensua ap 95, 98 
Hyalomyodes 5 BAB BAD 
AUSTRALASIAE i 325 
Hyalurgus 50 Be 
lucidus woke 
Hybrenia CLERMONTIA A . 188 
dentipes .. ao IY) 
Hyla he Tee! 
caerulea .. T44 
ewingii ait er ee et Te. 
ISHMNGORUIS ob) oot oo SIO), BBL 
Hymenostomum 5g PASS PANG 
GulemeEmiiiien so se 65 AUG 
Hyophila . 262, 264, 277 
elata snfejt Meh), MRR See LL 
IMGI@OONWAI 55 <e0- bo AY 
Micholitzii var. sterilis 277 
samoana HSS meen Ie eAT AT 
VALLES Pusey Roe L 
Hypnodendron .. .. 265,300 
BONEKONNS 55 oo oo oi) 
Junghuhnianum .. .. 283 


IRyenronwvebelelt| So oe oo aiid) 


xxiv. 


Hypnodendron vitiense.. 


300 


Hypnum complanatulum 289 
Graeffeanum . 300 
molliculum . 295 

Hypographa 31, 35, 201 
aristarcha . 35-6 
atmoscia 33 
bathrosema 33 
cyanorrhoea .. 27 
dilutaria 30 
EPIODES 35 
eremaea .. 28 
hiracopis 33 
pallida : 32 
phlegetonaria BB: 6 
privata ael93 
reflua . 218 
serpentaria Le way see 28 

Hypopterygium 262, 264, 289 
debile » 289 
oceanicum > 289 
semi-marginatum . 289 
struthiopteris .. 289 

Hypostena 5 Boe 

Idiodes loxosticha 5 Als} 

Ipsaphes . 547 

Isopogon : oo Sal, Bees! 
anemonifolius 375, 727, 729 
anethifolius 50) OS 

Isopterygium . 266, 295 
albescens 295-6 
byssicaule 50 
austro-pusillum . 295 
lonchopelma . 295-6 
minutirameum » 295 
minutirameum var. 

VITIENSE ee 95 
molliculum 295-6 
taxirameum .. . 295 

Jacksonia .. 50 HUY 

Kunzea 06 BUS 
corifolia .. 56 UexD 

Lacerta agilis 50 BB) 
vivipara .. 50. BOD 

Lachnostachys .. . 518 
cordifolia 578 

Lambertia .. He °372- 4 
formosa .. . 315, 729 

Lamprogaster ood 
basalis . 434 
elongata 432-3 
FUSCIBASIS oo CBR 
PSEUDELONGATA 432-3 
viola 5 0 Ahase3 
xanthoptera 50) ES 
zelotypa . 432 

Laphystia .. » 2d 260 

LASIOCALYPTER 118-9, 122, 327 
ATRIPES 119, 121-2 


INDEX, 


LLASIOCALYPTER FLAVOHIRTA 


119, 121-2 
HIRTICAUDA 119-21 
NIGRIHIRTA 5 alilS), abeAL 
LASIOCALYPTRINA 118-9, 122 
MODESTA . 2 ea 
Lasiopetalum ferrugineum 
720, 734 
rufum Lae p ee toe 
Lasiopogon . 251, 260 
gamarus . 257 
sergius 5 AD) 
Lathyrus . T46 
LEADUADICUS . 480 
IMPERIALIS 480-1 
TOLERABILIS 480-1 
Leiochrodes octomacula- 
tus . do DAY 
suturalis ao Max 
VARIABILIS ao. Darl 
Lenzites sepiaria 50) US 
Lepidodendron australe 146 
Leptis 5 50 BAU 
Leptogaster BOA asc) a. PARIS, 
Leptospermum .. 102,105, 
107-9, 351, 372, 376 
attenuatum 0 18S 
emarginata XXXVii 
flavescens xxxvii, 710, 735 
flavescens var.  lepto- 
phylla .. XXXVii 
lanigerum 0 VAD, 735) 
parvifolium 50 Cae 
stellatum a BU, Cae 
Leschenaultia 583 
biloba .. 582 
floribunda DIC oO: 
formosa .. no BSS 
laricina . ao BNO 
linarioides no OSB 
tubiflora ao BS 
Leskea glaucina a0 (AZ) 
Leskia : oa wea) 
Leucania labeculis aa . 198 
Leucobryum . 263, 267 
laminatum . 55 AGT 
pentastichum .. 268 
pungens .. .. 268 
’ samoanum eZos 
sanctum bo ZAK 
tahitense Me . 268 
Teysmannianum .. 268 
Leucoloma 5) PAD, 264, 267 
tenuifolium eer Ort 
Leucomium : 262, 266, 297 
debile oo LOY 
Leucopis 488-91 
Leucophanes . 263, 268 
densifolium 268 
pungens . 268 
smaragdinum 7. 268 
vitianum .. 268 
Leucostoma oo BAR 
simplex 5 B28 


Licinoma elata eeDAZ 
OBLONGA Sem Aili 
splendens 55 AY 
TRICOLOR , bAZ 

Limnodes j .. 485 

Limnodynastes affinis , eA! 
dorsalis .. 744-5 
tasmaniensis . 744 

Liodes ? angasi arin eyeregumelin 
stilbiata Pee) Oe 

Liolepisma ive ee EE OS 
entrecasteauxi 550-1, . 

553-4, 561-3, 568-74 
metallicum 550-1, 


560-1, 572, 574 
ocellatum 550-1, 560-1, 572-4 


pretiosum ; 550-1, 
560-1, 572, 574 
weekesae 550-1, 


554, 560-1, 566, 570-4 


Liparetrus distinctus . 458 
melanocephalus . 458 
Liponeura . 141,144 
bischoffi .. 5 LRG 
decipiens o dlak& 
IGhiSSOCRLASDEC aE 
pygmaea int SE OS 
Lissomma .. 26, 31, 38 
AMPYCTERIA . 32-3 
atmoscia . 32-3 
himerata .. dl-2 
hiracopis a2 o2-3 
incongrua po ples 
MACRODONTA 32, 34 
minuta ; . 31-2 
Litsea dealbata 2 US%l 
Lomatia 5 RUBS WAU 
Fraseri ee 4) EERE Z9 
longifolia é 375, 720, 729 
silaifolia dl BD, Uz) 
Lygosoma .. ol fae OS 

entrecasteauxi 550-1, 
553-4, 561-3, 568-74 
decresiensis .. bo Wa) 

metallicum  550- 1, 560- iL. 
572, 574 

ocellatum 550-1, 
560-1, 572-4 

pretiosum 550-1, 
560-1, 572, 574 

quadridigitatum 550-1, 
559-60, 570, 574 

oyi ae 551, 553-4, 
556, 559-60, 568-70, 572-4 

weekesae 550-1, 


554, 560-1, 566, 570-4 


Mabuja multifasciata .. 
550-1, 560, 570, 574 


MACROCTENIA .. . a8 
EPAENETA Je SESS 
Macromitrium . "262-3, 278 
angulatum . 278 


Macromitrium  Beechey- 


anum 278-9 
incurvifolium : 278-9 
involutifolium 278-9, 297 
tongense 278 

MACROPIA 5g) CAA 
RUFIVENTRIS 50 Oe 
Macropus ruficollis 5 AL 
rufus a .. bOI 
Masicera lata . 349 
rubrifrons 339 
Megachile sp. XXXli 
Megaptera nodosa XXXKV 
Meiothecium . 265, 298 
microcarpus .. 298 
SERRULATUM .. be uataw PASS} 
Melaleuca .. 5 372, 376, 416 
ericifolia ake tye 736 
TOCOSE “Sc ale 1 as 377, 736 
raphiophylla 578 
thymifolia 736 
Melobasis AUROCINCTA 179 
PARVULA .. 179 
terminata 3g 180 
Meneristes dentipes 547 
Merulius lacrymans 705 


Mesembrianthemum aequi- 


laterale 730 
Mesembriomintho 110 
compressa aN so 1ILO) 
Metalaphria 250- iL, 253, 255-6 
aurifacies 5/0 LADD 
australis 4 CAB) 
TESSELLATA Bos noeee a) 
Meteorium . 264, 284 
aeruginosum . 284 
intricatum . 284 
Miquelianum . 284 
vitianum bo PAD 
Metopia 439-40 
Microcitrus australasica xxxiv 
australis a XXXi1V 
Micromonospora 231-2, 
240-2, 244-8 
Micropalpus vittatus . 318 
Microstylum 250-1, 253 
Microtropeza .. .. .. 99 
flavitarsis .. 100 
FLAVIVENTRIS 99,101 
INTERMEDIA 99,100 
latimana 99,100 
ochriventris .. .. 100 
sinuata 99-101 
Miltogramma . 487, 440 
NORMALIS . 441, 443 
RECTANGULARIS . 441, 443 
REGINA 441-3 
REX .. 441-2 
Mirbelia erandifiora 5 60 UaHe4 
reticulata so (a4 
Misophrice .. 463 
Mniadelphum De tal 
vitianum 5 Be 


INDEX. 


Mniadelphus Graeffeanus 288 


limbatulus SF leia. rhets) 
Mniobryum . 263,279 
RUBRUM Si Ag) 
tasmanicum .. oo Aly) 
Mniodendron ? 262, 265, 300 
tahiticum sah ee eee oO 
Mnium ayo het 262-3, 280 
rostratum we .. 280 
Monoctenia 37-8, 40 
calladelpha 39-40 
cycnoptera 195 
decora 192 
digglesaria 197 
excusata 202 
eximia 39-40 
falernaria 5 aesinate 38-40 
Prater MAT aye eee eee 40) 
himeroides 203 
hypotaeniaria Bepiene eam be} 
TVUINUGAt ne eee ett) eet eR iD 
niphosema * 218 
obtusata 203 
ochripennata 194 
odontias .. 206 
orthodesma 11083 
ozora 200 
pallidula 192 
phyllomorpha 193 
polyspila Saw aka to! Ob 
DOstcarnrneatayacwieaeese OO 
punctiunculis 198 
punctiunculus Pel IS 
smerintharia AYRE or Og 
subcarnea 193 
subustaria 193 
turneri 196 
vinaria HERA LOD, 
Monoctophora caprina .. 194 
stillans Boeueene 193 
Mortierella sp. .. Te ree D) 
MuUcomtavilSsee, foe. 05 
glomerula 705 
plumbeus 705 
Ramannianus 705 
Mus musculus .. Xxxii 
Mycelium radicis  atro- 
virens - 705 
Mycobacterium 231 
tuberculosum 246 
Mycogone nigra so COS 
SD iiestainens leon PW aun nr QQ 
Myiobia eel 29 
Myoporum 727 
tenuifolium " 720- iL 737 
Myothyria .. 328, 338-9 
ARMATA eee nA yA () 
FERGUSONI ee 4.0) 
Myrtus Hen Meh AN EL hee OOO 
Dwllatae vee eee VPS SG 
obcordata bo Bxats) 
Nearcha 214 
paraptila 214 


xxv. 


Neckera australasica .. 286 
dendroides . 286 
EKugeniae 2285 
Graeffeana . 286 
implana .. . 286 
Lepineana . 285 
loriformis PRE 2S 6 

Neckeropsis . 265, 285 
gracilenta . 285 
Lepineana 2 285 

Nemopalpus 5 Ne 

Nemoraea .. e dlitg) 

NEOAMENIA oo. JhO83 
LONGICORNIS thaknGere lO, 

Neocurupira 9 ALas7/, ale 
hudsoni .. 5 BY 
nicholsoni 5 Ue 

Neocyrtopogon .. 251, 253, 258 
bifasciatus ZS 
maculata sa) iS 

Neodioctria ; 251, 253, 259 
australis 2 259 

Neophasia .. Pe Nae MOLE 

Neopogon 250-1, 260 

Neosaropogon 250-1, 

, 253-4, 258-9 
claripennis 55 ANG 
claripes ee oO 
froggattii "'250- i, 256 
nigrinus ben 2D0 
nitidus 6 60 PANS 
princeps 251, 258-9 
salinator 5 ZANT 
suavis bar esc) Mesee aaY 

Neoscleropogon se 2D 259 

Neotheca FUSCA : 540 

NESOGENOCIS os 
CUCULLUS .. 464 

Neurigona so eke} 

Nigasa subpurpurea 71200 

Nissolia : : . 746 

Noreia. ean ailes 
perdensata so) cule 
vinacea Eee lilies 

Nossidium . 478 

Notaden .. 744 

Notarcha plycalis “Xxxii 

Notechis curtis so HD 

Notelaea longifolia .. 710,737 

Nothofagus So BOO 
Cliffortioides . 386 
fusa as . 386 

Notostrongylium rugosi- 
colle ; 5 BAM 

Nyctozoilus . 547 

Ochromyia flavipennis .. 310 

Ochrus . Slate ence i: Kes 

Ochthiphila . 488, 491 

Octoblepharum . 263, 269 
albidum .. + 269 
densifolium .. 268 
dentatum en OS, 


1xxvi. 


Octoblepharum  scolopen- 
Ghelwarn 26 960 60. o0 ZY) 
smaragdinum Sip eeiaeabs 
Oenochroma .. 37, 39,191, 198 
ALPINA .. 192,196 
artia Deemer Tia | fore doves 
cerasiplaga . 192,194 
cycnoptera 191-2, 195 
decolorata +6 1925195 
GM NOMS so 50 oo NOB 
euttilinea Whageree oo JOD 
infantilis 191- 2, 197 
leucospila Re ars eed Cr tl Lay es) 
lissoscia -. L925 196 
ochripennata . 192,194 
orthodesma . L191, 193 
pallida ‘ igi 191-2 
6 phyllomorpha 5 els ale 
polyspila 191-2, 195 
postcarneata sty RO, 
privata 191, 193-4 
quadrigramma . 192, 197 
GQuaternanialy <a) cee +0 
SiMMpPLEXs ea sc tape LOD) 
subustaria . 191, 194 
turneri 2 1927 196 
vetustaria 192, 197-8 
vinaria BE 191-3 
Oenone fe isp oiShreal Us) 
Oenothera lamarckiana. . 378 
Ogyris olane xxxix 
zosine araxes XXxix 
Olax stricta Pie eae eugene WIC.) 
Olearia SR Ne i ce re TOO 
Ommatius .. . 249, 256 
Ommatophorus Boorps .. 188 
miastersi Serna balc dened Ueto) 
Onopordon acaulum XXXIx: 

Onosterrhus acuticollis .. 
184, 540 
duboulayi BAe Cori OO) 
GRAMTOUAINOIS 56 oo so dey! 
UA CKGH RN tayo lone Ruan OO, 
IMIS co oo. oo oo BAO 
Onychodes A ek asain AeA DS 
fulgurans shoes anata cy ieee 
fulguraus Aa Fes Revie! Moab as 7AAl LCs) 
lutosaria ee (0 
MNWILTCOIOIC, ob oo oo ZO 
? rhodoscopa Fee Winey POOL 
OMiVOOGIES 26 oo oe co ZOE 
lutosaria . 204, 206 
rubra 5 ADA, AOS 
PA OUINEYIANOIEL 55 oo oo ZADA! 
Oospora Citri-aurantii .. 705 
Ophiobolus cariceti oo COS 
Opiioscaplhawe ioe 
Taker a eee eet 
IMACLOD MVS ee eS 
postmarginata beh vonagpeene il) 
OMIA, “oo 40 as oo 400 
Onpisthacanthiaie aie mine 
Opsidiopsis 437, 439-40 
_NUDIBASIS 439-40 


INDEX, 
Opsidiopsis oblata .. .. 439 
Orsonota clelia alate ore! wralltes 
Orthorrhynchium .. 262, 285 
GyAinadiricum\y aero) 
Ospriocerus ne 20, 260 
Ottistira 5 oo EGIL, 4533 
bispinosa eo Me 408 
OCWARIS o5 860 oo oo 4OR 
pulchella Mes pee AO 
sulcicollis seen eA eyes MEER 013 


Oxylobium trilobatum 721, 732 
Oxyuranus maclennani xxxii 


@Z Ol aera emea ren ics! beltouey Paired 
basisparsata Sian es Sealey 
exigua eh eye 217-8 
MMIOCOMENAIE, bo 55 oo AT 

Pachyophthalmus 438-9 
signatus SM eA OO 

via eers, 4, allot aurea tO As 

Paliana Aaa? PM ere io eye 
bAaSQhHSs Ga acd! peu eeo 4D 
TDNECTISEWI BR omlon oo | oo mice) 
intensica Hee ey Oe aes) 

Palpostoma Spun 134-5 
apicalis .. .. ie tee 4 

Panagra Hiroslenata fee oil! 
carbonata Mtns soi LL ea 5 
confluaria Ba Has ce nue iat) heel a) 
@OMBIESTEY 955 bo oo A 
COSUINOUEE, 656 56 o6 6 
dentiseranria senile 
devitatal... see l6 
diffusaria ‘, 2 eee aS 
disputata BRS Sr yy oe etic. al bee 
eSialemania i ee eamee 6 
explanata oh are eee Per © 
exsignata ee ee | mare AL 
TMNOSWSIONEN Too 955 joo Ze 
molybdaria 3 By, Al 
obtusata Ra oe thane I) 
OWTMEN ENA eames Coren Sata aan 
petwlineadta —. sa uee 22 
MWMSTatAy 2 620 Ra wea 
sigmata Even e A eae its) 
triparata Se esa 24k 

IPAMO OWS go bo 65 os AGA 

Palpomyia a3 .. 226 

Papillaria .. : 262, 265, 283 
Aongstroemiana .. .. 284 
crocea mance 283-4 
cuspidifera .. .. =:. 283 
helictophylla Ld ADO 
intricata Bot NEHER das clan eee 
pellucida .. 261, 284 

Paracurupira. g Sr, 4! 

Paragryon 42, 80 
gracilipennis 42, 80 
pedestris aoe Eat GsUeemrey 0] 

Paragyrtis inostentata .. 24 

Paraleucopisi «selene 


IPARODSISM es OEE OD 


Pelekium . 264, 291 
WEAN 55 65 o- 291 
Peleteria\ .. 2). 02ers 
PELIOCIS care Jo42 6G 
SUBCYLINDRICUS aot RSAC 
Penicillium 5. a Meee O04 
digitatum Say eee PROD 
MVC HIN 55 2.5 oc 705 
SDir eae aoe -. 699, 705 
stoloniferum 2 AA EOD 
variabile siaft Qe weRELOD: 
Pentacantha 42, 81 
australica 2a) See 6 
nigrinotum .. 53 
Pentaphyllus bifasciatus 532 
Perameles .. 523-4 
Peripatus =. eae 
leuckartii so, a ees 
oviparus Pare. rica (i 
Peritheates 1137, 14a! 
Persoonia .. 372-4, 746 
‘ Janceolata 2 SOSIEY, atemene OG 
linearis 729-30 
MONA BVUONCIS sco 55 ss SUD 
nutans” 2.0) \. eee sO) 
Dinifolius ne no (axl) 
salicina .. 715, 727, 729-30 
Petrophila .. 372-4 
diversifolia .. . .. 58d 
pulchella 375, 713, 726- 7, 729 
SESSILIS: i » Seo oe 
Pezophenus rutilans anda 
submetallicus cute aay AL, 
pivaillaiciaae Moe rea ee) 
? ochripennata 23 Venpaseepasl OA: 
OD hiWSaizia ie cL 
SOUS, 5, 25 as Oe 
Phanerotis fletcheri . 2 T44 
Phascolarctos .. 507,509, 519 
Phas colomiys eee it 
PHILAGARICA oa 477-8 
AGILIS 478, 479 
EON 55 479 
Philonotis .. 262- 3, 271, 281 
asperitoliay eee on 
Mtessel, 5.5) 3h) a eee 
TN Ts Cay U 
OOwowSwCOl, 55 ce oc Beil 
revolutai::: 22 ape ol 
tenella; 2 “Aaa oul 
Philorus .. ee ie aeOO 
Phlyctinus callosus So ZOU 
Pholiota es Se OD 
IZNOWE, BHO, so. o eet ko 
Phomopsis citri See 005 
Phorocera .. ; 344-5, 347 
biserialis Pe aiiecaeie aaa: 
Phorocerosoma Bee ors PAS 
PHOROCEROSTOM A 2 820, 020 
SELIVENtGI Si eee G 
IPISOMPKOCOMIHS 55 of oc al 
nexistriga REM esc.ctoy kr) 
DiLlomacray ees 


PHRIXOCOMES steropias .. 1-2 
Phthonia 153, 156-7 
eylindrica iG betsy mere Lhe) 
SYD. Big ac teow hc ke) raed ener G30) 
Phyllogonium angusti- 
folium .. sere 285 
Phyllota phylicoides 56 18 
Physetostege 3 212-3 
miranda pee. Nea ian 2b 
miranda rufata .. .. 212 
Physopsis spicata .. .. 578 
PILIMYIA Are 5 BAD Bae 
LASIOPHTHALMA .. .. 329 
Piloecium .. . 265, 299 
pseudo-rufescens .. .. 299 
Pilotrichum rugicalyx .. 283 
Pimelea Se AN ea oe eCity) 
Pinnatella .. .. .. 265, 287 
Kiihliana et RS PORE ED Or 


Pittosporum revolutum .. 731 
undulatum xxxiv, 709-10, 


TAS rally Call 
Plagia 4 Be Voeg au y) 
Plagianthus petulinus .. 386 
Gdivanricatus, 2.55 2.1. 386 
Plagiprospherysa 320-1 
acuminata . 320, 322 
Platydema annamitum .. 547 
detersum AREY i'r cee ARUy: S| 
laticorne BRL AA aL ab 
malaccaum! 925 207s.) b4i7 
Platylobium formosum 
TAP MEY 
PLATYNOTOCIS 465-6 
PYRIFORMIS .. .. .. 466 
lacy pus ce. .. .. 466 
Pleurotus ostreatus eS 
Pogonatum . 263, 301 
Graeffeanum AES 301 
WAUBIGIMRK cio ola. od oo vedlnl 
Pogonortalis ... .. .. 429 
barbatar 4.6 08hs ee e429 
barbifera Aas ico PM AD 
doclea Ae der tb oC) 
Polyporus adustus sot oo. AU) 
radiciperda .. .. .. 705 
versicolor a SeeiO5) 
Pomaderris elliptica SA: 
IE WANIEREYE), 6 | oo oy Coe (ex 
phillyraeoides .. 134 
Porithodes apicalis .. .. 549 
HASCIAUAA EE ee) eNO aD 
ONIN 567 bo. ba oo wee) 
parenthetica .. .. .. 549 
plaisiatay cs seal vas 549 
PUSTULATA " 548- 9 
spinipennis 548-9 
Porotrichum dendroides 286 
elegantissimum .. .. 287 
Potorous tridactylus 507,509 
Prasophyllum acumina- 
CUT eae ts West aie hy AS 
nigricans 2! pee Mery er ATS 


E 


INDEX. 
Propentacantha 42, 81 
australica RiP cica heats hagtoyl U 
MUSTINOCUM! si. sel wee Ou: 
Prophanes aden ee E47, 
Prosacantha nigripes DS 
Prosena 109, 111, 116-8, 121 
argentata 113-4, 116 
bella : 5 Iialas, ala lb) 
doddi seus ye ue RRS aes tend Ley 
dorsalis eee 
INDECISA 113, 115-6 
malayana em ys tea ee, LIL) 
macropus PEEP RANS 2 hea iss cl LOLS) 
nigripes 5 Ta Ne ys abalby, Ta U7/ 
PARVA eo leliSealatesy 
sibirita 113-6 
sibirita var. ? Ae oy eee eal il 83 
sibirita var. CONFUSA .. 115 
SD eed cuneese th eeesh ae whee Teg 
TEN OUSe Meenas 113-4 
Walt Caibeeh ee Oa OAS Fn DAG 
PROSENINA 116-8, 327 
NICHOLSONT +... °°... “5. 1116 
Prostanthera marifolia .. 737 
Protohystriciay a. ees lob2 
ISOMMMOM 55. oo) Go oe oy 
pachyprocta . 352-3 
Protolepidodendron so 1B 


Protomiltogramma 437-8, 443-4 


cincta 444-5 
LATICEPS 445-7 
plebeia ae 445-6 
‘Protoplasa 221-3, 225 
fitchii BUS MATT 221 
Pseudanilara .. . .. 180 
Pseudechis porphyrae 56 1OELt 
Pseudobasipogon .. .. 250 
Pseudochaeta .. .. .. 345 
Pseudochirus cooki .. 5OT 
Pseudodinia Weal ise Rt sod ABS 
Pseudoformosia .. .. 104 
Pseudoholopogon .. 253 
Pseudoleucopis " 488- 9 
BENEFICA 489-90 
fasciventris 489-90 
flavitarsis 489-90 
magnicornis .. 489-90 
Pseudolyprops AUSTRALIAE 538 
CAaLInNICOliISiy eas aetna OOS 
Pseudophryne .. .. .. 745 
australis SSM eh ek et a 1103) 
lonllorrorthh oo) be de ee! es 
Pseudorhacelopus 5 ADB ax0al 
philippinensis . 261,301 
Pseudoterpna diphtherina 206 
Psilocurus Hy DN bade Pere) 2A 0) 
Ptenidium . 480, 483 
Pterineay ey se Plt 
Pterobryella poce 5, 283 
speciosissima Bo oa CRO 
Pterobryum vitianum .. 283 
Pterohelaeus nitidissimus 539 
papuanus Lee Oo), 


xxvii. 


Pterohelaeus WAGNERI .. 538 
IPVEROMICESH A wee oe ele 
Pterostylis Pee Scat h asky i LA; 
acuminata F 413-4 
concinna ats 413-4, 416 
decunvaleae aa eer LLG 
FURCILLATA . 413, 415 
obtusa 413-4, 416 
ophioglossa 413-4, 416 
parviflora 413-5 
TElHexay J ike eae 413-4 
revoluta .. 413-4 
truncata 413-4 
Toveyana ARN Ge rE aioe tine: 3) Ce) 
JPG So) Soe Gal a6 Chee 
Ptilium . 477, 487 
Ptilophyllodromia ae e450 
Ptinella f . 482, 487 
Ptomaphila lachrymosa 186 


Puccinia graminis .. 
160-1, 163, 171, 173, 175, 622 
graminis avenae 161-3, 
168-71, 173, 175-7, 596, 631-3 | 


graminis secalis .. .. 163 

graminis tritici a 
159-67, 171, 173-5, 
177, 603-4, 608, 610, 
612, 614, 620-4, 632-3 

triticina Ales}, SUP, 


UGG S08), Gil, 
614-6, 620-5, 628, 633 


Pugnax pleurodon .. .. 156 
Pultenaea .. ab msn 7 
daphnoides 715, 726- 7, 732-3 
elliptica .. 715, 732-3 
TELUSAE is eae fee 
stipularis SU Ahi Wiese O03 
VAllLOSAmecish cant 733 
PYGIDIA : 330, 338 
RUFOLATERALIS ao bo Sal 
IEAAPEIMOYSIEY, oa) Ble eo wea o uA) 
Quadra . 3842, 349 
DISSIMILIS Raed oy tee tcc cS ac 
OMA, Soh soc 56 OS 
Questopogon 250- 2, 254-5 
Rachiopogon 250-1, 253, 256 
carbo A ANAC AR OOS ee eae Fy 6 
nigrinus JW atoll Meee 516 
rubescens Peas tinrtl ai Wisse sP4oK 8) 
IRGhiMOCIEUIS 55. bo! oo) AIL 
DORRIGENSIS 228-9 
terrae-reginae ene Ru 
Ranhyla aurea ee ERA 
Ranunculus a EN LOG 
Rapanea variabilis .. 718, 
UCL, (e053 (es, (EIT 
Rhacopilum . 264, 290 
convolutaceum .. .. 290 
cuspidigerum eh Va A9O 
pacificum a EN ERE 2 9 0) 
spectabile Ste onee hee 9.0, 


Ixxviii. 


Rhamphidium .. . 264, 276 
purpuratum .. 276 
VEITOCHILI 50 CHU) 

RHAMPHELLA -. 449 
INCONSPICUA .. .. 449 

Rhamphomyia .. .. 449 
ALBIDIPENNIS . 450 
aprilis a 450 

Rhaphidostegium f 265, 299 
contiguum Ae Reyne 6299 

Rhaphidostichum 265, 298-9 
bunodicarpum . 299 
luxurians 5299 
PALLIDIFOLIUM . 298 
theliporum ae 298-9 

Rhinomyiobia 110-1, 129 
australis 129-30 
TRANSVERSALIS 129-30 

Rhizoctonia silvestris . 705 
Solani TRB OS 

Rhizogonium . 263, 201 
setosum .. . 281 
spiniforme f. samoana 281 

Rhodamnia trinervia > CaXo 

Rhodobryum . 263, 280 
Graeffeanum . 280 

Rhynchodemus . 143 

Rhynchonella 152-3 
? cuboides aos ee 
pleurodon 146, 152- 3, 156-7 
primipilaris . Be eu cieite baa) 

Rhynchostegiella . 265, 300 
VITIENSIS : so oo. ah) 

Rhynchostegium. . 265, 300 
selaginellifolium . 300 

Rhyncodexia bg LS, alz474 
longipes 59 dlaly) 

Rhytiphora frenchi . 467 


Ricinocarpus pinifolius .. 

412, 724, 726, 733 
. 491 
. 491 
. 429 
491-2 
491-2 


Rivellia 
connata .. 
doclea 
ISOLATA 
virgo 

Rodwayia 
GRANDIS 
orientalis 

Rosa 

Rutilia 
ALBOCINCTA 
argentifera 
elegans 
flavipes 
formosa .. 
hirticeps 
leucosticta 
leucosticta var. 

SQUAMA 
micans 
nigriceps 
ruficornis 
sp. 


Acs 


485 


485-6 
.. 486 
50 OG) 
oo OG 
Los 
og UDG 
we lO5 
4 09 
.. 108 
.. 109 
een 


FUSCI- 


co JUN 
EeLOS 
so) KO) 
co ly) 
LOG 


INDEX, 


Saccharomyces cerevisiae 705 


Sapromyza no Gays 
alboatra .. no Gers 
brevicornis .. 434 
LICHTWARDTI .. .. 434 
mariage (722 Ms Spee aoe 

Sarcinodes oe POSTS 1380 
carnearia Red event, OG 
compacta urenietee Hel a TON 
holzi SO SUMS BN awe! Reo 
subfulvida A eee SELON 

Sarcophaga 5 GULy 

Sarcophilus ee 5. oo WWE 

Saropogon 251, 253, 256-8 
dispar o) AZ bre: 
gamarus 5 CD ILS PAST 
rubescens . 256 
semirufum Bt ol CAE 
sergius . 256, 259 
suavis : 5 NU 

Sceloporus torquatus 2 55 

Schizactiana co Oe 

Schizoceromyia 303-4 
fergusoni . 304 
INVALIDA = AOS 
SO, Be Vea 2 Ue aS U5 
validal 304-5 


Schizophyllum commune 705 


Schizotachina .. » ao a 
Scleropogon : 250, 254, 259 
Sclerotinia Libertiana .. 705 
Seirotrana ACUTICOLLIS .. 186 
bimetallica so JUST 
JOHNSTONENSIS ba JUS 
‘parallela ELS TG 
tumulosa 186 
Sematophyllum contaeuule 299 
cuculligerum 5 ee 
theliporum . 298 
Semisuturia 340-1 
Senostoma 5 1h) 
flavipes - 109 
hirticeps 4 LOY) 
nigriceps ; 109 
ruficornis 50 JOY) 
Senotainia 437, 443-4 
Sigmatella Powelliana .. 296 
Simsonia DEANEI . 189 
purpurea 2. 1190 
wilsoni .. 190 
Simulium : on ha CARA 
Smerinthus 2? wayii. yea40 
Solanum sodomaeum 5 UST 
xanthocarpum oo Cast 
Solemya : 22 56 
Solmsia inflata. ae Choe 
Sphagnum oo PAA, XIE 
acutifolium 50 UL 
cuspidatum . 301 
Reichhardtii .. 301 
Seemannii na oval 
vitianum oo ait 
Sphenothorax ao Bele 


Spiculaea ciliata FD Oe 
Spiridens . 264, 282 
aristifolius ; 202 
Balfourianus 282, 
flagellosus Ase had 6 PASS 
Spirifer disjuncta .. 150, 
152-3, 155, 157 
elongati . oes 155 
Spirillum rubrum . 246 
Sprengelia 56 UA 
Stachybotrys 221699 
Stenocarpus Rr a(74 
salignus .. 5 BD 
sinuatus 375 
Stenopogon 250- i 253- 4, 259- 60 
elongatus . 259 
fraternus ees oa Ne 
Stereophyllum .. 7 265250 
VITIENSE .. Me 2Sit 
Sterrha mele 
Stetholus elongatus 189, 532 
PAPUANUS 189 
Stichopogon .. 260 
Stigmodera BM soe. aA 
AERATICOLLIS .. Oy 
Anieyoubis oo op 5G ley 
APICENOTATA .. 5 Wa 
ARIEL 56 Das 
atricollis Aig» aye: 
blackburni 55. ORT 
BOGANIA .. eS 4: 
caudata .. sa Ba) 
coeruleipes so Hat 
eydista 56 Da) 
dilatata .. eS 2 
DRYADULA a ae 
humeralis oo 38) 
IMITATOR Aacl80 
insignis .. 56 OB 
INTACTA ,. Ser altel 
MACKAYANA ao Gekn 
obscura Say Ov 
parva ao ey! 
pulchella Pie AG) 
QUADRIPLAGIATA Bo OOH) 
rubriventris .. ~ BSSz 
sagittaria 182 
subgrata var. discoflava 533 
trimaculata bn ORK 
vigilans .. sae UESKD 
Stilbomyia 102-3 
costalis 102-3 
“MINOR Palo 
opulenta 102-3 
Stomatomyia 5. 320 
filipalpis so. aval 
MICROPALPIS bo. Beall 


Streptothrix chalcea 232, 247 


Chalceae 4 PBA 
Strongygaster . 92-3 
globulus .... PGES 9S 
Strongylium angulatum 546 
gravidum . 547 


Strongylium horridum .. 547 


MAME “55 o8 Vea sou) 
keyanum mets) Sel TD AG 
punctithorax ait e546 
PUSILLUM etre tay tania 
tuberipenne var... .. 547 
WAGNERI EAE Ean 1 Ua od OY! A) 
Strongylogaster Bio up sais cee 3 
Sturmia oo oo. BOs BOIL 
SEMIRUFA eat Oenhop: 
Shypielias 25 2. 228 es 3872 
humifusa Bh MEL ERO 
lanceolata 5 Caley, 7W 
richei eine ERCP EH OO 
triflora co oo Malek, 7D 
tubiflora danse ANGLO 
WHPTGIIS: \ Ge tals Weel) Unton COko 
Sumpigaster : 110-1 
fasciatus scien ee an LCD) 
SNNIPERYEISTIS «2 ..- o. 25 
TEBPMOCYMA 2. 2. ©... 26 
Symphysodon 6.0. PAO, ZASC) 
ecylindraceus .. .. .. 283 
rugicalyx SGA oO 
vitianus .. So OBO 
Symphysodontella . 266, 283 
cylindracea .. .. .. 283 
Syncarpia .. 5 oe BUA BUG 
laurifolia 377, 710, 712, 736 
Synoum glandulosum .. 734 
Syrrhopodon 262-3, 273 
albo-vaginatus See ee eae 
CHOCCUS: (ses ee ee 204 
fasciculatus! .. 2. «9 204 
Graeffeanus .. .. .. 273 
laevigatus Saul Wauel a vauatn cates 
luteus Pes Min eae ene M ha cl OA: 
mamillatus o AGA, AUS 
scolopendrium AiG epaicAwe 
_tuberculosus .. .. .. 276 
Tachina ae Sol eis, oH AD 
Tacparia ? frontisignata 214 
TALARACTIA o GkNB}, OD 
BALDWINI BN rie mC naan X11) 
Talarocera ee ee HOOD 
mamManlCleAw re fo oat es 9S 
Tapeigaster ST Bea dig "SD 
annulipes i 435-6 
argyrospila 435-6 
fulva 435-6 
luteipennis 435-6 
marginifrons 435-6 
Tarsipes Ms cae XxXxix 
MAKCOEISH Tile ao ek les poe 
Taxithelium . 265, 296 
Binsteadii Bree hsses 297 
herpetium Seen 4 nes (290 
isocladum Mase uve tk, 
papillatum .. .. .. 296 
POLYANDRUM .. .. .. 296 
TARO 55 Go na AY 
REioMORnbe So) Gy Go aki 
SLIZIMOSUIIM ee ee 296 


INDEX. 


Taxithelium ventrifolium 296 


TVA ORVAW) siete Peer oes oe ROS 
TESTACEA Fee ee tO S 
Teleas 41-2, 84 
Telopea - 012, 374 
speciosissima Bos Yond sey) 
Tephrina punctilineata .. 214 
Tepperella eucalypti XXXiV 
Teremenes ey ye aA, 
Tetratheca ericifolia .. 733 
Thamnium >) 2655 287% 
aneitense oe ea ee een Ol! 
latifolium Rae ict) ca raeH | 
SUBLATIFOLIUM Bae BOON 
Thelairia 109-11 
australis Rac eee Piller tel () 
leucozona Ain Ai erenaed Itt) 
Thereutria 250- 2, 256 
Thermoactinomyces' vul- 
garis te Rckee bt ispse FOO 
Thesilea ~ b4i, 547 
Thrycolyga sorbillans .. 320 
Thrypticus A Beli se on cane MSS 
Thuidium . 264, 291 
biparium Ri ote een Gif 
DYSSoldemme ys ya a 29! 
cymbifolium ZO2293 
erosulum RETO RS 291 
glaucinum Mein eee ue DO 
glaucinoides .. .. .. 292 
Meyenianum Se hee ONL 
plumulosum .. ... .. 292 
ramentosum .. .. 293 
samoanum "299- 3 
tahitense Beh eo OU 
trachypodum et ee ceca Oi 
Thyridium MPMI se LOD 
fasciculatusie. os. 2. 204 
luteus ae Ae OC TUS 
Thysanomitrium See MRE SZ ALOK 
IDEN VEWNKOUDIN 945. 6 | aa VADT 
Powellianum BS dt ese CO 
Richardii Beane re OM 
umbellatum .. .. .. 267 
Tiliqua nigrolutea 550-1, 


557-8, 560, 568-70, 574 


scincoides 550-1, 554, 
557-8, 560, 568, 570, 574 
Torula My cos Unset 
Trachypus od 6 0.6 CLOD, ZROD 
LONCONOP -s5 )o0 Yoo on CAD) 
Trematodon Se 0402.0.0 
SO, oc ee an het 2 OG 
suberectus Re ahi ate OO 
Trichoderma .. .. .. 704 
IOMMNITAS Go oo Go 705 
SDs Sse pee 699, 705 
Trichopteryx AUSTRALICA 483 
VOlANS@) ac ciep ais ) ee AOE 
Trichosteleum .. . 265, 299 
BOSCH nT ne Eno, 
Boschii var. MINUS .. 299 


brachypelma Se eo CaN) 


xxix. 


Trichosteleum fissum .. 299 
hamatum PAE em eLAh 87.9.9) 
Rickerineiieee eee ae 209 
rhinophyllum SEE E299 
Samoanumis ss anatiee ag oO 
ShISMOSUMN eee eee 200 
trachyamphorum 22299 

Trichostomum .. .. 264, 277 
INSUIATS sl a eee eT 
mauiense Rae cereal 

richostylume se ela 

Trichosurus . 507, 509 
vulpecula Cae E sa wrens () 9 

Trimorus . 42-3, 80-2, 89 
ACUTISPINUS .. 44-5, 69 
assimilis 44-5, 56, 59-61 
ATERRIMUS Re RPA IS) 
ATRIPES . 44, 56, 58, 78 
auratus 59, 60 
australicus 44, 56, 78 
australis 45,78 
BICOLORICORNIS 44,57 
BREVIVENTRIS .. 44, 46, 61-2 
castaneithorax 45, 70, 73 
CITREICLAVUS 43, 49 
CONCOLORICORNIS 44, 62-3 
CONDENSUS 45, 75, 83 
CRASSISPINUS 45, 70-1, 73, 76 
DELICATUS 44-5, 67 
fuscicoxa 44, 67 
howensis 43, 46 
IMPRESSUS ; 44, 68 
LATISPINUS 45, 76-7, 83 
LATIVENTRIS 43, 47-9 
leai .. ets : 59-60 
mymaripennis 43, 45, 53 
niger RELI Ae Ge te ae Mee 
nigrellus de so (ul 
nigrinotum 43, 46, 53-4 
NITE OAS o's 9 bo ba OS 
nigriventris 45, 76-7, 83 
nitescens 43,52 
norfolcensis .. .. .. 483 
NOVISPINUS 44, 64 
PALLIDICLAVUS : 43, 51 
? pallidiclavus et ee sai Sy 
PARVIPENNIS 2 43, 49 
PARVULINUS 43, 47, 49 
PILOSICORNIS .. 44-5, 66 
pulcherrimus 46, 79 
pulchrithorax 44, 60, 63 
punctatus . 44, 46, 54, 61-3 
rufithorax 45, 74, 76 
rugulosus .. 44-5, 65 
sordidus .. 44, 56, 58, 60-1 
speciosus 46, 78-9 
STRIATELLUS 44, 63 
STRIATISCUTUM 45, 54 
TANTILLUS 43, 47-8 
TENUIPUNCTATUS 45, 73, 75-6 
TENUISTRIATUS : 43, 46 
TRICOLORICORNIS 43,50, 52 
?tricoloricornis .. .. 45 


1xxx. 


Trimorus VALIDISPINUS 45, 72-3 
varicornis 44, 46, 54, 56, 


58, 62 
Trismegistia . 265, 298 
complanatula el tee N29 8) 
rigida PeRUeeIeg KF EAISN)  1 ch ee) 
Trissacantha 42, 81 
americana ee ttl 
ASPERATA 42, 81 
SIMULATA 42, 81-3 
TRIFURCATA 42, 81-3 
Tristania . d12, 316 
Conftertitoliawse. seer 
laurina . 377, 718, 736 
Triticum dicoccum ajar.. 604 
durum . 599, 607 
sphaerococcum .. .. 630 
vulgare 599, 602-3, 607, 609 
vulgare alborubrum .. 597 
vulgare pseudo - hosti- 
anum .. oto. oa Be 
Trochocarpa laurina Tales; 7asr 
Tropidonotus sirtalis .. 551 
? Tryplasma ea naman ease alt () 
Uloma corpulenta .. .. 547 
Venidium 55 207, hbk 
Vesicularia 5 ee ZADO 2) 
calodictyon .. .. .. 294 
inflectens Be eesti pase UO 4. 
reticulata 294-5 
VAL TeIVAUINGAUe eeedenen iy eri ee OA 


INDEX. 
WASISTEIAUOIUN cog, a oo. wo exe 
NIGRIVENIRISE es | sc eento4it 
Viminaria denudata eS 
VITICIS 463-4 
BIDENTATUS 45.2 22 468 
Vitis Baudiniana 721-2, 734 
hypoglauca .. eeeinod 
Voria : 318- 9, 321-2 
ruralis 319-20 
VORIELLA 5 BOD, BOxs 
ARMICEPS 335-7 
INCONSPICUA .. 335-6 
RECEDENS eres Te etooO 
UNISETA .. 335-7 
VoRINA Renae. yi. eeee ST 
SETIBASIS Lew, AAO at: 
Webera aa ales Neuse ZA) 
submarginata : a6 ail 
Weinmannia rubifolia so Carll 
Westringia rosmarinifor- 
MWS ee ne 5 W245 13 
Winthemia 347-8, 350-1 
ALBICEPS .. 348-9 
GUSDAec. 9 Gc ste emo ee, 
DIVERSA .. Bie stale BYES 
quadripustulata BoP Wissel ays He) 
trichopareia .. 348-9 
Woollsia pungens 5 OLBRS ase 
Xanthium .. 475-6 


pungens)). «. a. 2a. 475 


Xanthorrhoecay eee 
Preissii ..... 44) | ee 
Xenogenes <2. Se 
chrysoplacay sss 
eustrotiodes).. eee 
Xenomerus » BL ARB 42, 89 
Gubius. 12. 40) so. 
ergenna. ..., (ila 
flavicornis 89, 91 
laticeps 89-90 
varipes ee Sc 89-91 
ACN ineey se Bh 55 ao ZAle 
Xenosuma rubra ep ee OF 
Xylomelum A's 372-4 
pyriforme é 375, G12; 730 


Zanclopteryx PT iy 216 


permensata 215-6 
Zeuctophlebia 210-1 
rufipalpis ci<., a RPM ele 
squalidata PMS EE i eral LIL 
tapinodes MMM SIS vet's! PALL 
JASE), SMM 66 se so Tae 
Zita < . 330, 338 
aureopyga 5 ae 330 
Zophophilus J ee ene ey AT 
CUTEICORNISI eo 
TADtOT ) paces 
Zosteromyia 3G. ueatee Mee) 
cingulata Wee 111 


Zy gorhynchus Vuilleminii 705 


z,. 


REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OEHENOCHROMIDAE (LEPIDOPTERA). II.* 
By A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.E.S. 


[Read 26th March, 1930.] 


Genus 11. BRrRADYCTENA, n. gen. 


Bpadvxrevos, with heavy comb. 

Face smooth. Tongue present. Palpi moderate, porrect. Antennae in ¢ 
unipectinate, the pectinations short (1), and almost as broad as long, extreme 
apex simple. Thorax and abdomen slender; thorax not hairy beneath. Femora 
smooth. Tarsi not spinulose. Forewings with tufts of raised scales; 9, 10 
arising from end of cell, connate or even short-stalked with 7 and 8, anastomosing 
with 8 to form the areole from which 8, 9, 10 arise by a common stalk, 11 free. 
Hindwings with 3 nearer 4 than 2 at origin, 6 and 7 connate, 12 approximated to 
cell to about two-thirds, thence diverging. 

A curious modification of the Dichromodes group. It does not seem specially 
allied to Phrizocomes. There is only one species and of that only the type is at 
present known. 


65. BRADYCTENA TRYCHNOPTILA. 
Dichromodes trychnoptila Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 1906, 131. 
Tasmania: Zeehan. 


Genus 12. PHRIXOCOMES, n. gen. 

ppréoxouns, With bristling hair. 

Face smooth. Tongue well-developed. Palpi long or very long, porrect, 
thickened, with loosely appressed hairs. Antennae in ¢@ unipectinate, extreme 
apex simple. Thorax and abdomen slender; the former not hairy beneath. 
Femora smooth. Tarsi not spinulose. Forewings with tufts of raised scales, 
areole present, 8, 9, 10 arising from areole by a common stalk, 11 free. Hindwings 
with 3 arising midway between 2 and 4, 6 and 7 closely approximated at origin 
or connate, 12 closely approximated to cell to about four-fifths, thence diverging. 

Type, P. ptilomacra Low. 

A small genus near Dichromodes, distinguished by the tufts on forewings, 
wide separation of 3 and 4 of hindwings, and long palpi, though the last character 
is shared by some species of the former genus. 


Key to Species. 


1. Forewings with longitudinal sinuate line .......................... neaistriga. 66 
MorewinessShwithoutmMonsitudinalelinemeemr sede eieleceieitie eee iene eae 2 
Ceeealpinte tomonvantennaleepectinatlonsie4) py onic sie acta lee) soe eels steropias. 67 

Palpigietons montennalepectinationsl0ms sia sh le elec a ie eee ptilomacra. 68 


* Continued from these PROCEEDINGS, liv, 1929, 504. 
A 


2 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


66. PHRIXOCOMES NEXISTRIGA. 


Dichromodes steropias ab. nexistriga Warr., Novit. Zool., 1900, 101.— 
Dichromodes nexistriga Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 26. 


Not having seen this I can add nothing to Warren’s brief description. 
According to Prout it is certainly a distinct species. 


North-west Australia: Roeburne. 


67. PHRIXOCOMES STEROPIAS. 
Dichromodes steropias Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1182. This also 


I have not seen. 
Western Australia: Perth, Geraldton. 


68. PHRIXOCOMES PTILOMACRA. 
Dichromodes ptilomacra Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1892, 8. 


6. 28-30 mm. Head and thorax fuscous irrorated with whitish. Palpi 7 to 8; 
whitish-grey irrorated with dark fuscous. Antennae fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 10. 
Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous; posterior pair ochreous-whitish. Forewings 
triangular, rather narrow, costa strongly arched, apex round-pointed, termen 
rounded, slightly oblique; pale fuscous sparsely irrorated with dark fuscous; 
tufts of raised scales beneath costa at one-fourth, and two-fifths, in middle of 
disc, and on cubital vein at one-third; antemedian line from one-fourth costa to 
one-fourth dorsum, slender, dark fuscous, edged anteriorly with white, dentate, 
very acutely angled outwards in middle, its apex reaching fourth tuft; discal dot 
formed by third tuft, dark fuscous edged with white posteriorly; postmedian line 
from four-fifths costa to two-thirds dorsum, slender, dark fuscous, edged posteriorly 
with white, straight, acutely dentate; a finely dentate white subterminal line 
preceded by a dark shade; an interrupted dark fuscous terminal line; cilia 
fuscous, bases barred with white. Hindwings rather elongate, termen rounded; 
grey; cilia grey, apices paler. 

South Australia: Mt. Lofty, Port Victor. 


Genus 13. DICHROMODES. 

Gn., Lep., ix, 320; Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1167; Prout, Gen. 
Insect., Oenochrom., p. 23. 

Type, D. ainaria Gn. 

Face with short projecting tuft of scales. Tongue present. Palpi moderate 
or long, porrect, thickened above and beneath with loosely appressed hairs; 
terminal joint concealed. Antennae of ¢ unipectinate, near apex simple. Thorax 
and abdomen slender; the former not or only slightly hairy beneath. Femora 
smooth. Tarsi not spinulose. Forewings with 11 free but closely approximated 
to areole, 9, 10 anastomosing with 8 to form the single areole, from 
which 8, 9, 10 arise by a common stalk. Hindwings with 6 and 7 separate but 
approximated at origin, 12 closely approximated to cell to three-fourths or meore, 
thence diverging. 

A large genus, some of the species of which are not easy to distinguish. 
Structural points such as the length of the palpi, and of the antennal pectinations 
in the g, must be carefully observed. The genus is distinctively Australian but 
has reached New Zealand, where it is represented by five indigenous species. 


-1 


28. 


29. 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 


Key to Species. 


Palpi whitish-grey or whitish-brown; hind tibiae of co much swollen ...... 2 
Palpi not so; hind tibiae of @ not or only slightly dilated .................. 4 
Palpimwithybase sharply, swhitew sey.) a eialeeio icles c) evcuelele sic Sea itp er stiches ischnota. 
Hp IW LCD aSewn Otanwitelieyycs eter cient she mneiuesea cnet Deloiens letelleellste) aval even avenebellekeapers 3 
Forewings with transverse median band ........................ molybdaria. 
IDOE ALEK Woho ole GacKeXobkeyn lovnoKel GooooocanovomabadcoopoboUdbooouaa estigmaria. 
IEE ON Nid gba obs cennsioeruee uononOto Se IDEN Tce) OTE CREME SRC UCE CTO LANCOlo eC NERE Coc Ie RC eR ICC Gta LRtCy eLicee ig te cietee 5 
al pip lackish Or sfuScOus acres cre retsecta clea Rarer hotel clear ielchaie uencnsnatnelcveloners 6 
Forewings whitish without fuscous irroration or ochreous streaks .. galactica. 
Forewings with fuscous irroration and ochreous streaks ............ perinipha. 
Palpi with white or whitish basal area usually sharply defined ............ 7 
Palpi with at most a few whitish scales towards base ................... 43 
Hindwings orange-yellow ................--5- SSE ADs La ea area nen a Ped eee cha 8 
EN awinessHn Gen OFAN LES EllO Wig rita c scl el cle sucliolens) ouseh ane wees etelesh A heustace Oley cae aigisunceetie 9 
Forewings with basal two-thirds blackish ..........................- scothima. 
Forewings with basal two-thirds not blackish ...................... laetabilis. 
Forewings suffused throughout with reddish .............. 0... eee eee eee 10 
Forewings not suffused throughout with reddish ......................000% 11 
Forewings with pale-centred discal spot ................2.0200000 haematopa. 
Forewings with discal dot not pale-centred .................. 0000 eeaee rufula. 
Forewings with interrupted reddish or ochreous streaks from base to termen 12 
Forewings without such streaks from base to termen ....................-. 15 
Forewings with antemedian line only slightly dentate ..................06... 13 
Forewings with antemedian line with strong acute median tooth .... poecilotis. 
Horewines swith) postmedian wine straicintie cite clase ck ele cele ioneura. 
Forewings with postmedian line not straight .....................00-0200es 14 
Forewings with median band narrow; its edges slenderly whitish ....... aesia. 
Forewings with median band moderately broad, bordered by strongly marked 

DUVETS! terete rues oh teaes VE Cae alee be Uisumiraletactsc i" re cae fala) Oia a area Let compsotis. 
Forewings with two oblique ochreous streaks ...................005. EUprepes. 
Forewings without oblique ochreous streaks .............. 0.0... ce eee eee 16 
Forewings with transverse lines nearly straight, converging on dorsum .... 17 
Forewings with transverse lines dentate, wavy, or not converging .......... 18 
Forewings with grey-whitish median band .......................... orthotis. 
Forewings with median band not grey-whitish .................... orthozona. 
Forewings with grey-whitish terminal band ......................00 000 e eee 19 
Forewings without grey-whitish terminal band .......................-..4- 20 
Forewings with white transverse lines ....................-20+2002- partitaria. 
Forewings without white transverse lines ...................0 cee eeaee angasi. 
Forewings with median band darker. than basal and terminal areas ........ 21 
Forewings with median band not darker than basal and terminal areas ...... 30 
Forewings with postmedian line acutely angled in middle .................. 22 
Forewings with postmedian line not so angled ......................-000- 26 
Forewings with postmedian line denticulate ..........................-002- 23 
Forewings with postmedian line not denticulate .......................... 24 
Forewings with subterminal line angled in middle .............. phaeostropha. 
Forewings with subterminal line not angled in middle .............. anelictis. 
Forewings with subterminal line acutely angled in middle ......... aristadelpha 
Forewings with subterminal line not acutely angled ........................ 25 
Forewings often with ochreous markings; subterminal line edged anteriorly and 

sometimes interrupted by dark-fuscous ......... NE Ra Buena ee be diffusaria. 
Forewings without ochreous markings; subterminal line not edged anteriorly 

MEGA VIS EUS COUS eee arth EAM oon cour Te uesnr lan ya (Unie Co UGA olga Ree ten mesogonia. 
Forewings with margins of median band denticulate ...................... 27 
Forewings with margins of median band not denticulate ................. 29 
EDI NCW eS OCHECOUS = bil eC uMey Hain easy aucel chal eunaUL) Spare Ure Nb oop Aa Naty a oriphoetes. 
TEAC IAS MOE COMeOUeEOiNl Yd sossoubooevuroaaaobobsenoduodeoanadda sks 26 
JEEVION, 2S Eoin joss ihn “ef A Goupadeasooebonuedaahobes denticulata. 
iPeiliol Wess ehaecronneyl yoxoiieniony iim 6 Yo oso onuasooodckappauocddooduns disputata. 
Forewings with a whitish-ochreous costal suffusion beyond postmedian 

Tit Cpetraryesteg Sey cemrcun taney MAME AIR T beh EN ae aur Cad) he emacs EAA Bad UN aR degen paratacta. 


Forewings without postmedian whitish-ochreous suffusion ........... emplecta. 


75 
76 


1 


“1 


-] 
co 


88 
89 
94 


95 


96 


ALO}: 


50. 


ol 


55. 


eo 


REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAL, ii, 


Forewings with a whitish longitudinal streak from base .................. 31 
Forewings without whitish longitudinal streak from base ................ 3 
Forewings with a whitish subcostal streak from base to median line 
AOR Ne ER EP PAV ey ee rinse Pen AE Neer ee EM ne Eon an ad Dav eee ra tego anti atl, LAL has Ve ee confluaria. 
Forewings with a short median longitudinal streak from base ........ rostrata. 
Forewings with postmedian line strongly indented above dorsum explanata. 
Forewings with postmedian line not indented above dorsum ............... 33 
Forewings with postmedian line dentate throughout ..................... 34 
Horewings with postmedian line not dentate w:.....-.5%.4.55..-2 0-42-2424 36 
Forewings with discal spot annular, pale-centred .................. obtusata. 
Forewings with discal spot not so formed ................0. cece cee e et seces 35 
Forewings with antemedian line and a parallel preceding line strongly indented 
Lovey Konia goulc Ko New cup nr mnN ok ci aes aaa tah Ait A ee Pv er eae elm Ian Ger ns foc lissophrica. 
Forewings with antemedian line not indented ...................... exsignata. 
Forewings with discal spot annular, pale-centred ...................... orectis. 
HMorewine swith. discal ispotenotsomhormlediy ssc) -cucie cr cnteieecneiele nei iene ener ienereneeiene 37 
Forewings with costal area suffused with pale ferruginous-ochreous .......... 
LACAN eA ey fea | ne NE Eo IE ate nee Ny EEN Ua eM an oe STR VALUE cc aero senrvicanescens. 
MOE WINS “NOt SOMISULEUIS e Gli iy Wye wets eee Me eee cia edi esac cslalteyray a rent tre yatta cate opteare vem eee eae 38 
Forewings with postmedian line angled in middle ........................- 39 
Forewings with postmedian line not angled in middle ...................... 40 
Forewings with transverse lines edged with blackish ................ sigmata. 
Forewings with transverse lines not edged with blackish ............ lygrodes. 
Forewings uniformly fuscous-grey, lines indistinct ......................... 41 
Forewings not uniformly fuscous-grey, lines distinct ..................... 42 
Forewings with two obscure blackish transverse lines towards base liospoda. 
Forewings without sub-basal blackish lines .................... leptogramma. 
Forewings ochreous-grey-whitish ; palpi 3; antennal pectinations 7 limosa. 
Forewings grey without ochreous tinge; palpi 24; antennal pectinations 5 
Banal akal Mis) aun waa Senet alas: 6 (GG. GA a hie Ons) tate ue ReReR MEEHAN! 3d Sh Olsees SOLS at era ath c/a tenia c leptozona. 
Eindwinesmoranee- Vv ellowanwcerene ied aus nist ene ence isfell seen ichotemain aR onence rene ainaria. 
EMindwihes) NOE NOT ANE C= VellLOwgy tyr sick oe: (cious su stretia foot outed fellerielioilssicus’ ieee eure Bel aches mercl tehenche 44 
Forewings with a broad dark-fuscous subdorsal streak ............. personals. 
Morewines swithoutsubdorsallstiealke nya. ceacuickeeieesienniciciolc erences once ier nen eae 45 
MOGEwiIness  wAthouteLansVeESem LIN Sia icin. se spelen tei cicieleieie eile aoieieieke ophiucha. 
Forewings not wholly without transverse lines ...................-..+.-.- 46 
HMorewines without) antemedianimlinie 4.55.1 c cet cieeicieieeieraer einen EUsCia. 
Morewings) with antemedian: line developed 24.4.5 40 55505 so -lee oe ee cee 47 
Morewiness swith) postmedianghmerdemtate 4. pi cnacieeeenste siete eieiens a iaieneichsneneineae 48 
Morewings with) postmedian line not dentate. i. sae cae eeciae sien clele erences 49 
ISTW I Op ROD EES HM CON Ey CUMS OM AEN Uns Gg orate CaO EMT EMPe DIAS Glain icra ela iars bic: pioarclo indicataria. 
Pal pivoL 4s Ot Ob Hae totale Lie Oba sate car 5 cat, Realist GY 2g a SPE tuk vaenseelousit icelodes. 
Forewings with transverse lines broadly edged with blackish towards dorsum 50 
Forewings with transverse lines not edged with blackish ................... 51 
Palpi of ¢ 4, of @ 5 to 6; forewings with discal spot annular, pale-centred 
PERRO EERE Se S OTe PE ECU CN STE Gico 0! ONC Ter ERR REE PEE os ics REET oatuel cba cy Rec emocsigea O's raynori. 


Palpi 3 to 34; forewings with discal spot dot-like, rarely pale-centred ........ 

Bc stehenie ata taal cetera ba La nay ahaa By aoe at MR anir UCRN aia 200 Seis aa ea mA ato) MRS atrosignata. 2 
Forewings more or less ochreous-tinged with darker median band .............. 

RUSE CN NRO eee eect Us (UI ee eae HAD ae LY cd ent a LE UP Cu aD Da I atrosignata. & 
MOrewinssy Not /OChTEous=tin Seq ser ecices: caion calles any SA een Saar apne a 52 
Forewings with postmedian line angled in middle ........................ 3 
Forewings with postmedian line not angled in middle ..................... 54 
Palpi 34; forewings with narrow median band ..................... triparata. 
Palpi 23; forewings with moderately broad median band .......... mesodonta. 
Forewings with postmedian line white, strongly curved outwards on dorsum 

ose lcatkay Sh wha; Eres, SECS HGaNG yes ce OOS CL Se RRC TEN REEL ETS eT OURO Ee oO UE Tal SCENE Ta Te ee aR ean stilbiata. 
Horewing Ss iawiths postmedilanmlinemnOGaSOnenea edt el eeieiae erie eee ee 55 
Forewings with antemedian line edged on both sides with fuscous ............ 

Ect PRORCMOPHPRERT real cca HOF OLA RAT Sm wid Ch CE RU Sale teysc Mi Serle t <Oi anaBuee) Gust AEN PR Ree Ss cry fos consignata. 


Forewings 


56 


98 
99 
100 


101 


102 
103 
104 


105 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 5 


FAG, LEONE ALOE! \WVilielad Euoucevoavexobehol Ibuays) ChGjnbOe Doougnononooudoaonododobasoanduonos 57 
Forewings with antemedian line obscure, or represented by three fuscous dots 
MR ers sere aca yt HTM sis cr eyo eet ishcnsensa isis wee se cremconeee ayer easek Shi cyeelaneiae sh Suita] alesy au/m) vey anaes ornata. 126 


57. Forewings with antemedian line strongly dentate; antennal pectinations 6 
ES NLT er eee eR Sher oy te area sila el eealab corsisavte ta Pane Mtebar ulation au crak Sore: Glisie hea Grates ete ate rimosa. 123 
Forewings with antemedian line only slightly dentate; antennal pectinations 4 


ole 08 Et PIO O IG EO GIRDLE ONE) OOTON ENG Ie uote ec re Oa a A Hee er AhrGIOetG oC mre 6 58 
58. Palpi 3 to 34; forewings with discal spot pale-centred ............. usurpatrix. 124 
Palpi of ¢ 23; forewings with discal spot not pale-centred .......... berthoudi. 125 


69. DICHROMODES ISCHNOTA. 

Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1189; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., 
JB, IL, it, al; 

6. 18-20 mm. &. 21 mm. Head grey densely irrorated with whitish. Palpi 
24; brownish-fuscous, upper surface and apex white, base sharply white. Antennae 
ochreous-grey-whitish; pectinations in ¢ 7. Thorax grey, densely irrorated with 
whitish. Abdomen ochreous-grey-whitish. Legs pale fuscous irrorated, except 
anterior pair, with whitish; posterior tibiae in ¢ strongly dilated. Forewings 
triangular, costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly 
oblique; grey densely irrorated with whitish and sometimes with a few fuscous 
scales; first line from two-fifths costa to two-fifths dorsum, very obscurely whitish, 
posteriorly edged with some fuscous dots, often obsolete; an obscure, fuscous, 
subcostal, discal dot beyond middle; postmedian line from four-fifths costa to 
two-thirds dorsum, whitish edged anteriorly with fuscous, nearly straight or 
slightly incurved above and below middle with a slight median angle; a very 
obscure, wavy, whitish, subterminal line, sometimes edged anteriorly with fuscous; 
a fine, dark fuscous, interrupted terminal line; cilia whitish mixed with fuscous. 
Hindwings with termen rounded; grey; sometimes a slender, darker, median line; 
cilia grey. 

A very obscure little species easily overlooked, but widely distributed. I 
have seen no Western Australian example. This and the two following species are 
characterized by pale brownish or pale grey palpi and dilated male posterior 
tibiae. 

Queensland: Duaringa, Warra near Dalby. Western Australia: Carnarvon. 


70. .DICHROMODES MOLYBDARIA. 


Panagra molybdaria Gn., Lep., x, 131.—Panagra carbonata W1k., Cat. Brit. 
Mus., xxiii, 1004.—Dichromodes molybdaria Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 
1187. 

6, &. 26-29 mm. Head whitish-grey. Palpi in ¢ 3, in 9 33; greyish-ochreous, 
upper surface and apex white. Antennae ochreous-grey-whitish; pectinations in ¢ 
8. Thorax pale grey. Abdomen whitish-grey. Legs grey; posterior pair whitish; 
posterior tibiae in ¢ strongly dilated. Forewings triangular, rather narrow, costa 
nearly straight, apex pointed, termen nearly straight, moderately oblique; whitish- 
grey often ochreous-tinged, with a few darker scales, costal edge ochreous; a 
faint, median, subcostal, discal dot; a moderate, grey, transverse, median band; 
its anterior edge slightly irregular, from two-fifths costa to two-fifths dorsum; 
posterior edge from three-fourths costa to two-thirds dorsum, finely dentate, bent 
inwards beneath middle, obtusely angled and sometimes with a ferruginous spot 
in middle; sometimes an obscure series of fuscous subterminal dots, that on costa 


6 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, il, 


larger; a dark fuscous interrupted terminal line; cilia whitish-grey. Hindwings 
with termen rounded; grey; some darker irroration on dorsum; cilia grey. 
Queensland: Stanthorpe. New South Wales: Sydney, Jervis Bay. 


71. DICHROMODES ESTIGM ARIA. 


Panagra estigmaria Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiii, 1001.—Panagra costinotata 
WIk., ibid., p. 1001.—Acidalia schistacearia W1k., ibid., xxvi, 1609.—Dichromodes 
estigmaria Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1188. 

North Queensland: Kuranda near Cairns, Stannary Hills near Herberton. 
Queensland: Nambour, Brisbane, Stradbroke Is., Southport, Coolangatta, 
Toowoomba, Stanthorpe. New South Wales: Sydney, Katoomba, Menangle. 
Victoria: Melbourne. 


72: DICHROMODES GALACTICA, N. Sp. 

yaktaxtikos, milk-white. 

6. 26 mm. Head whitish. Palpi 3; whitish. Antennae whitish with fine 
fuscous annulations; pectinations in ¢ 6. Thorax and abdomen whitish. Legs 
whitish; anterior pair irrorated with fuscous. Forewings triangular, costa 
straight except near base and apex, apex rounded, termen slightly rounded, slightly 
oblique; whitish; slight fuscous irroration on costa; markings faint, formed by 
slight fuscous irroration in dots; a dot just beneath mideosta, a second on median 
vein, and a third above dorsum, represent first line; a minute discal dot at three- 
fifths; postmedian represented by a series of indistinct dots from three-fourths 
costa to three-fifths dorsum, sinuate; cilia whitish. Hindwings with termen 
rounded; whitish; cilia whitish. Underside whitish with postmedian discal dots 
on both wings. 

The uniform whitish coloration makes this a very distinct species. 

Western Australia: Busselton in October; two specimens received from Mr. 
G. M. Goldfinch, who has the type. 


73. DICHROMODES PERINIPHA. 
Dichromodes perinipha Low., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1915, 475. 


3d. 28 mm. Head whitish. (Palpi broken off.) Antennae grey; pectinations 
in ¢ 6. Thorax grey-whitish mixed with dark fuscous and ochreous scales. 
Abdomen ochreous-whitish. Forewings triangular, costa straight except near 
base and apex, apex pointed, termen nearly straight, slightly oblique; whitish 
with dark fuscous irroration and markings, costal edge and all veins slenderly 
outlined with ochreous; a subdorsal spot near base; first line at one-fourth, trans- 
verse, coarsely dentate, not reaching margins; a large, quadrate, median, sub- 
costal, discal spot; postmedian line from five-sixths costa to three-fourths dorsum, 
doubly sinuate and finely dentate, edged posteriorly with whitish; both trans- 
verse lines interrupt the ochreous neural streaks; a suffused subterminal line; a 
blackish crenulate terminal line; cilia grey-whitish with some darker points. 
Hindwings with termen nearly straight, crenulate; grey-whitish; cilia whitish. 

Described from a specimen which had been compared with the type by Mr. 
N. B. Tindale. Very distinct by the form of the hindwings, position of post- 
median line, and completely developed ochreous neural streaks on forewings. 
According to Lower’s description the palpi are whitish like the head and thorax. 

New South Wales: Broken Hill. South Australia: Pimaroo. 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. it 


74. DICHROMODES AINARIA. 

Dichromodes ainaria Gn., Lep., ix, p. 321, Pl. 3, f. 5; Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. 
N.S.W., 1889, 1170—Dichromodes divergentaria Gn., Lep., ix, 321.—Dichromodes 
diasemaria Gn., ibid., p. 321—Cidaria metaxanthata Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxvi, 
1734.—_Dichromodes subflava Bastelberger, Berl. Ent. Zeit., 1907, 60. 


This species is variable, but may be recognized by the dark central band of 
the forewings in conjunction with the more or less orange hindwings. Certainly 
diasemaria, as Guenée himself suspected, is merely a local varietal form; in many 
Tasmanian examples the clear orange of the hindwings is replaced by a very 
dusky tawny-fuscous. The median band of forewings varies much in form; 
usually its posterior margin presents a prominent acute tooth in middle, especially 
well-marked in 9, sometimes it is bifid; in the ¢ this tooth is more rounded, some- 
times dentate, sometimes so reduced as to be scarcely perceptible. The underside 
of the forewings is dusky in the dg, in the 2 mostly orange. 

New South Wales: Sydney, Katoomba, Bathurst. Victoria: Melbourne, 
Beaconsfield, Moe, Gisborne, Dunkeld. Tasmania: Hobart, St. Helen’s, Zeehan, 
Strahan. South Australia: Mt. Lofty. 


75. DICHROMODES SCOTHIMA. 

Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 24. 

g. 26-28 mm. Head blackish. Palpi 2%; blackish, base sharply white. 
Antennae dark fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 3. Thorax blackish. Abdomen fuscous. 
Legs fuscous irrorated, and tarsi annulated, with white. Forewings triangular, 
costa straight except near base and apex, apex pointed, termen slightly rounded, 
slightly oblique; basal area and median band blackish, the former sometimes very 
slightly paler, in which case slightly outwardly curved blackish transverse lines 
at one-fourth and one-third may be perceptible, the latter indicating anterior 
margin of median band; posterior margin of band from three-fifths costa to three- 
fourths dorsum, with a slight rounded projection in middle; terminal area very 
pale fuscous with two, equidistant, wavy, whitish, transverse lines; a fine blackish 
terminal line thickened into small spots between veins; cilia pale fuscous, apices, 
and at tornus bases, whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded; orange; a 
moderate fuscous terminal band; a suffused blackish dorsal streak interrupted 
three times by whitish near tornus; terminal line as forewings; cilia fuscous. 
Underside tawny suffused with fuscous especially towards margins; a fuscous 
discal dot on both wings. 

Described from two examples taken by Mr. W. B. Barnard. It is allied 
to D. ainaria but quite distinct. The sharply defined white bases of palpi and 
blackish basal three-fifths of forewings separate it at once. 


Western Australia: Albany, Denmark, in March. 


76. DICHROMODES LAETABILIS, n. Sp. 

laetabilis, cheerful. 

6, 2. 30-32 mm. Head dark fuscous. Palpi in ¢ 3, in 2 33; dark fuscous, 
base sharply white. Antennae fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 24. Thorax dark fuscous. 
Abdomen fuscous. Legs dark fuscous. Forewings triangular, costa straight except 
near base and apex, apex pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; rather 
dark fuscous with darker markings; a line from one-fifth costa to one-third dorsum: 
sometimes a less distinct parallel line from one-third costa; a median subcostal 


8 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


discal dot, elongate transversely; a very slender, finely dentate line from two- 
thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum, nearly straight; usually a similar parallel 
posterior line; sometimes a fine wavy whitish subterminal line; a fine terminal 
line dotted between veins; cilia fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; orange, 
brighter in 9, more tawny in @; a moderate fuscous terminal band, narrowly 
produced along dorsum, in ¢ sometimes suffused; cilia fuscous. Underside of ¢ 
fuscous with darker discal dots in both wings; in 9 hindwings similar, but fore- 
wings orange except on costal and terminal areas, and without discal dot. 

Easily distinguished from D. ainaria by the white bases of the palpi and the 
absence of a median band on forewings. 

Type in Coll. Goldfinch. 

New South Wales: Katoomba, in October and November. Victoria: Mt. St. 
Bernard, in January. Five specimens. 


77. DICHROMODES HAEMATOPA. 
Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1906, 131. 
Characterized by the general reddish colouring, white transverse lines and 
dark fuscous markings of forewings. 
Victoria: Sea Lake. 


78. DICHROMODES RUFULA. 

Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 26. 

6. 30 mm. Head pale ochreous. Palpi 3; fuscous, upper edge whitish, base 
sharply white. Antennae fuscous; pectinations 7. Thorax reddish-ochreous. 
Abdomen whitish-grey. Legs grey irrorated, and tarsi annulated, with whitish; 
posterior pair almost wholly whitish. Forewings triangular, rather narrow, costa 
gently arched, apex round-pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; 
whitish suffused with pale reddish-ochreous; a streak of fuscous irroration along 
costa; transverse lines reddish-ochreous, containing some dark fuscous scales, not 
reaching costa; three wavy transverse lines are contained in basal area; first line 
from beneath one-third costa to one-third dorsum, slightly dentate; median band 
slightly darker, containing a median, subcostal, fuscous, discal dot; postmedian 
from two-thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum, bent inwards below middle, finely 
dentate; a slender line runs parallel to this; a broader subterminal line; a wavy 
fuscous terminal line; cilia whitish with a faint grey median line. Hindwings 
with termen rounded; pale grey; a faintly darker discal dot; traces of whitish 
bars on dorsum towards tornus; cilia whitish. 

9°. 28 mm. Forewings with basal area uniformly reddish-ochreous; median 
band more constricted on costa, anterior edge very strongly dentate, purple-reddish, 
edged posteriorly with whitish; subterminal line purple-reddish, broad, interrupted. 

My two examples are very different, but probably the differences are more 
varietal than sexual. 

Western Australia: Cunderdin, in October and November, two specimens taken 
by Mr. R. Illidge, Geraldton (British Museum type). 


79. DICHROMODES AESIA, N. Sp. 
aic.os, happy, fortunate. 
6d. 30 mm. Head pale ochreous, partly reddish-tinged; face fuscous. Palpi 
2%; fuscous, base white, sharply defined. Antennae fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 23. 
Thorax fuscous; tegulae and a posterior spot reddish-ochreous. Abdomen grey; 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 9 


tuft. grey-whitish. Legs grey. Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight, apex 
pointed, termen gently rounded, slightly oblique; pale ochreous, reddish-tinged; 
a broad fuscous-grey costal and a narrower dorsal streak; a small grey basal 
area containing a reddish-ochreous spot; a narrow median band grey, traversed 
by longitudinal, suffused, reddish-ochreous streaks, subcostal, median, and sub- 
‘dorsal, towards edges partly fuscous, broadest beneath costa, constricted above 
middle, still more constricted above dorsum; its anterior edge very slenderly 
whitish, slightly toothed beneath costa, thence concave; its posterior edge very 
slenderly whitish, strongly bisinuate, incurved above and beneath middle; a sub- 
terminal fuscous-grey fascia, with subcostal median, and subdorsal reddish- 
ochreous suffusion, its anterior edge suffused, posterior edge sharply defined, with 
two small teeth beneath costa, a strong rectangular median projection, thence 
strongly concave to tornus; a terminal series of confluent triangular fuscous 
spots; cilia grey irrorated with whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded, grey; 
cilia grey, apices paler. Underside grey, postmedian area paler; hindwings with 
a fuscous discal dot before middle. 

Nearest D. ioneura, but the median band is very differently formed. In that 
species it has a straight posterior edge. 

Western Australia: Tammin, in August (A. J. Nicholson); one specimen in 
Coll. Goldfinch. 


80. DICHROMODES IONEURA. 


Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc.4N.S.W., 1889, 1182. 

This varies much in the extent of the coloured markings, which may be 
crimson or brownish-ochreous. 

South Australia: Pimaroo. Western Australia: Perth, Waroona, Cunderdin. 


81. DICHROMODES POECILOTIS. 
Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soo. N.S.W., 1889, 1181.—Dasyuris tridenta Swin., Trans. 
Ent. Soc. Lond., 1902, 649. 
Victoria: Dimboola, Daytrap near Sea Lake. Western Australia: Perth, 
Waroona, Kelmscott, Geraldton, Carnarvon. 


82. DICHROMODES EUPREPES. 
Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., 1910, p. 26.—Dichromodes fulvida Low., 
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1915, 475.—Dichromodes cirrhoplaca Low., ibid., p. 476. 


9. 25-28 mm. Head grey-whitish with a few fuscous scales. Palpi 34; fuscous, 
upper surface mixed with grey-whitish, base sharply white. Antennae fuscous. 
Thorax whitish-ochreous mixed with fuscous. Abdomen whitish mixed with 
fuscous or grey. Legs fuscous irrorated, and tarsi annulated, with whitish. 
Forewings triangular, costa straight to near apex, apex obtusely pointed, termen 
slightly rounded, slightly oblique; grey-whitish or whitish-ochreous; broadly 
suffused with grey along costa; a subdorsal, fuscous, basal spot; first line dark 
fuscous, narrow, straight, from one-fourth dorsum, obliquely outwards to beneath 
one-third costa, sometimes ill-defined or interrupted, edged broadly with brownish- 
ochreous anteriorly and with whitish posteriorly; a transversely-oval, dark fuscous, 
pale-centred, median, subcostal, discal spot; sometimes a median and a dorsal 
fuscous bar across median band; postmedian line dark fuscous, slender, from two- 
thirds dorsum obliquely outwards to beneath three-fourths costa, sometimes ill- 
defined, anteriorly narrowly edged with whitish, posteriorly broadly edged with 


10 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


brownish-ochreous; a subterminal fuscous line immediately follows, thickened 
quadrangularly beneath costa, in middle, and on dorsum; a crenulate fuscous 
terminal line, sometimes reduced to dots; cilia grey-whitish sometimes mixed with 
fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded, grey; cilia grey. 

Allied to D. poecilotis, ioneura, and orthozona. Distinguished by the out- 
wardly oblique lines of forewing not reaching costa. 

Victoria: Dimboola. South Australia: Pimaroo. Western Australia: Waroona, 
Cunderdin, Coolgardie. 


83. DICHROMODES COMPSOTIS. 


Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1174. 

I do not know this species, which appears to belong to the ioneura group, 
and to be different from any I have seen. Mr. L. B. Prout kindly examined 
Meyrick’s type for me. 

Western Australia: Perth. 


84. DICHROMODES ORTHOTIS. 


Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1180. 
Western Australia: Perth, Waroona, Collie, Albany, Denmark. 


85. DICHROMODES ORTHOZONA. 


Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1903, 189. 

3d, ¢. 25-30 mm. Head grey-whitish with some fuscous scales. Palpi 3; dark- 
fuscous, upper surface partly grey-whitish, base sharply white. Antennae fuscous; 
pectinations in ¢@ 5. Thorax and abdomen grey-whitish mixed with dark fuscous. 
Legs dark fuscous irrorated, and tarsi annulated, with whitish. Forewings 
triangular, costa straight except near base and apex, apex obtusely pointed, 
termen slightly bowed, slightly oblique; dark fuscous mixed with grey-whitish; a 
short dark fuscous or ferruginous bar from costa near base, not reaching dorsum; 
first line nearly straight, ochreous-whitish, from one-fourth costa to one-third 
dorsum, edged anteriorly with dark ferruginous-fuscous, posteriorly by a narrow 
blackish line with small dentations beneath costa, in middle, and above dorsum; 
a transversely oval, dark fuscous, more or less pale-centred, median, subcostal, 
discal spot; median area crossed by fine blackish streaks; postmedian line from 
three-fourths costa to two-thirds dorsum, very slightly curved outwards, ochreous- 
whitish, anteriorly narrowly edged with blackish, posteriorly with dark 
ferruginous-fuscous; a fine, whitish, irregular, subterminal line with quadrangular 
projections above and below middle; a terminal series of blackish dots; veins in 
costal and terminal areas more or less outlined by fine brownish-ochreous streaks; 
cilia whitish barred with fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey; a 
darker discal dot; terminal dots and cilia as forewings. 

Readily distinguished from D. euwprepes by the lines of forewings converging 
towards dorsum, whereas in that species they are parallel and strongly outwardly 
oblique from dorsum. 

Western Australia: Perth. North-west Australia: Roeburne. 


86. DICHROMODES PARTITARIA. 
Eubolia partitaria Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxxv, 1699.—Dichromodes partitaria 
Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1175. 


BY A, JEFFERIS TURNER. 11 


Mr. Prout suggests that Walker’s type may be the same as D. sigmata Wlk. 
The species described by Meyrick, of which I have seen a small series, is very 
distinct from that species. 


Victoria: Dimboola. Western Australia: Perth, Albany, Northampton. 


87. DICHROMODES ANGASIT. 
Liodes ? angasi Feld., Reise Novara, Pl. 131, f. 13. 


og. 25 mm. Head fuscous irrorated with whitish; face dark fuscous. Palpi 2; 
dark fuscous, base sharply white. Antennae fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 3. Thorax 
fuscous irrorated with whitish. Abdomen whitish irrorated with fuscous. Legs 
fuscous; tarsi annulated with whitish; posterior tibiae whitish with some fuscous 
irroration. Forewings triangular, costa very slightly arched, apex round-pointed, 
termen slightly bowed, slightly oblique; fuscous with some whitish irroration; a 
slender, curved, transverse, fuscous line at one-fifth faintly indicated; first line 
obsolete; discal dot scarcely indicated; postmedian line fuscous, sinuate, very 
indistinct; a conspicuous grey-whitish terminal band, its anterior edge sharply 
defined, very irregular, from costa near apex, at first dentate, deeply excavated 
above and below middle, median projection irregularly quadrangular, ending at 
tornus; a fine, interrupted, dark fuscous, terminal line; cilia pale grey, on costa 
darker. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey; a darker terminal line; cilia 
pale grey. ; j 

Allied to D. partitaria but considerably larger, the forewings without white 
lines, the antennal pectinations considerably longer (barely 2 in partitaria). 
My example closely resembles Felder’s figure. 


Victoria: Sea Lake in March; one specimen received from Mr. D. Goudie. 


88. DICHROMODES PHAEOSTROPHA. 


Dichromodes obtusata var. longidens Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 24.— 
Dichromodes phaeostropha Turn., Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1925, 108. 

A good and distinct species, not very closely related to D. obtusata. Varietal 
names have, I believe, no priority. I might have adopted Prout’s name had I 
known of it when publishing my description. 

Victoria: Frankston near Melbourne, Beaconsfield. Tasmania: Launceston, 
Zeehan, Strahan. South Australia: Mt. Lofty. 


89. DICHROMODES ANELICTIS. 
Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1172. 


6: 24-30 mm. 9. 22-29 mm. Excessively variable; not only may the median 
band be interrupted above dorsum, but the whole of it between dorsum and angle 
may be obliterated by whitish or fuscous suffusion; part of it may be blackish 
between angle and costa; but the very acute posterior angle makes the species 
always easy to recognize. Rarely there is some ferruginous suffusion in terminal 
area. The palpi also, in addition to the white area at base and the upper margin, 
may be mixed throughout with white scales. All these varieties may occur in the 
same locality. 


Victoria: Dimboola, Walpeup, Sea Lake. South Australia: Adelaide, Mt. 
Lofty. Western Australia: Perth, Waroona, Kelmscott, Albany, Geraldton. 


12 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


90. DICHROMODES ORIPHOETES, 0. Sp. 

operpo.rns, Mountain-ranging. 

3, 9. 30-34 mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous irrorated with whitish. 
Palpi in 6 2%, in 9 3; dark fuscous, a few whitish scales on upper surface, base 
sharply white. Antennae fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 5. Abdomen ochreous-whitish 
partly suffused with grey. Legs fuscous irrorated with whitish. Forewings 
triangular, costa gently arched, apex round-pointed, termen slightly rounded, 
searcely oblique; fuscous irrorated with white; a suffused fuscous spot on base 
of costa and another on dorsum near base; a suffused and interrupted fuscous 
transverse line slightly beyond; first line from one-third costa to one-third 
dorsum, white, edged with blackish posteriorly, slightly dentate, slightly out- 
wardly curved; a transverse, median, subcostal, blackish, discal mark; postmedian 
line from two-thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum, white, edged anteriorly with 
blackish, indented above and below middle, with a rather obtuse median angle; 
an irregular white subterminal line, dentate, somewhat projecting in middle; an 
interrupted blackish terminal line preceded by a grey-whitish line; cilia fuscous, 
apices barred with white. Hindwings with termen rounded; pale grey suffused 
with yellowish towards base in dg, in 2 almost wholly and more distinctly 
yellowish; in ¢ two indistinct pale subterminal lines, and a faintly darker discal 
dot; terminal line and cilia as forewings. 


New South Wales: Mt. Kosciusko (5,000 feet) in December; eight specimens 
received from Mr. G. M. Goldfinch, who has the type. 


91. DICHROMODES DENTICULATA, N. Sp. 
denticulatus, finely toothed. 


go. 22 mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous mixed with grey. Palpi 2; dark 
fuscous, base sharply white. Antennae fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 2. Abdomen 
fuscous. Legs: anterior pair dark fuscous, tibiae and tarsi annulated with whitish 
(others missing). Forewings triangular, costa slightly arched, apex round-pointed, 
termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; grey irrorated with fuscous; lines dark 
fuscous; a transverse sub-basal line succeeded by two fine dentate lines; ante- 
median from a spot on two-fifths costa to two-fifths dorsum, slightly outwardly- 
curved, dentate; postmedian from a spot on three-fifths costa to three-fifths dorsum, 
sharply dentate, bent inwards below middle; median band narrow, especially in 
dorsal half, darker than disc, containing a median, subcostal, dark-fuscous trans- 
verse, discal mark; a fine, strongly waved, slightly dentate line from a spot on 
four-fifths costa to four-fifths dorsum; a very slender, wavy, whitish, subterminal 
line; a terminal series of triangular blackish dots; cilia grey-whitish mixed with 
fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey; cilia grey. 

Allied to D. disputata, but the shorter palpi and antennal pectinations are 
sufficient to prove it distinct. 

Western Australia: Perth; one specimen received from Mr. L. J. Newman. 


92. DICHROMODES DISPUTATA. 

Panagra disputata Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiii, 1009—Panagra dentigeraria 
Wik., ibid., xxvi, 1665.—Dichromodes odontias Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 
1889, 1173—Dichromodes disputata Meyr., ibid., 1173—Dichromodes mesozona 
Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 27. 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 13 


Palpi 24. Antennal pectinations 4. Very variable; in some examples the 
whole of the forewings is suffused with reddish scales, in others these are reduced 
to a few scattered scales in dise and cilia, in others they are completely absent. 
The head may be dark fuscous or reddish. There is an example from the 
Grampians in the National Museum, Melbourne, closely agreeing with the 
description of odontias. D. mesozona is probably to be referred here. 


Queensland: Maryborough, Caloundra, Stradbroke Is., Stanthorpe. New 
South Wales: Glen Innes, Sydney, Katoomba, Orange. Victoria: Beechworth, 
Grampians, Dimboola. 


93. DICHROMODES PARATACTA. 
Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1176. 


Palpi 2; fuscous more or less mixed with pale ochreous, towards base 
whitish, but without sharply defined white area. Abdomen fuscous more or less 
mixed with whitish. 


Queensland: Caloundra, Brisbane, Stradbroke Is., Coolangatta. New South 
Wales: Sydney. 


94. DICHROMODES ARISTADELPHA. 


Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 1903, 190. 

6. 24-28 mm. @. 24-25 mm. Head pale grey with a few fuscous scales. 
Palpi 23; fuscous, upper surface irrorated with whitish, base sharply white. 
Antennae fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 24. Thorax pale grey mixed with blackish. 
Abdomen fuscous, some irroration, apices of segments, and tuft ochreous-whitish. 
Legs fuscous irrorated, and tarsi annulated, with whitish. Forewings triangular, 
costa straight, except near base and apex, apex obtusely pointed, termen slightly 
rounded, slightly oblique; pale brownish-ochreous more or less suffused with 
fuscous; a transverse dark fuscous mark on costa near base; sometimes a 
roundish dark fuscous suffusion on dorsum near base; first line from one-third 
costa to beyond one-third dorsum, slender, ochreous-whitish, outwardly-curved but 
indented above dorsum, edged anteriorly by a fuscous line; postmedian line from 
two-thirds costa to three-fourths dorsum, slender, ochreous-whitish, outwardly- 
curved but more or less indented beneath costa and above dorsum; between these 
lines is a dark fuscous, partly blackish, median band, containing a narrow, 
blackish, median, subcostal, discal mark; beyond postmedian line is a brownish- 
ochreous suffused band; subterminal line whitish, slender, strongly indented above 
and below middle, edged anteriorly by a dark fuscous or blackish suffusion, 
posteriorly by a fine fuscous line; terminal area grey-whitish; a fine, blackish, 
crenulate, terminal line; cilia whitish obscurely barred with fuscous. Hindwings 
with termen rounded; pale fuscous; a darker discal dot; a finely dentate, darker, 
postmedian line edged obscurely with whitish posteriorly; sometimes a similar but 
not dentate subterminal line; cilia fuscous, apices paler. 

South Australia: Adelaide in September (Lower’s type). Western Australia: 
Busselton in February, three specimens (W. B. Barnard). 


95. DICHROMODES DIFFUSARIA. 


Panagra diffusaria Gn., Lep., x, 132—Dichromodes strophiodes Low., Trans. 
Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 1893, 155. 


14 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


co. @. 25-28 mm. Head and thorax fuscous with more or less whitish irrora- 
tion. Palpi in ¢ 24, in @ 33; dark fuscous, upper surface irrorated with grey- 
whitish, base sharply white. Antennae fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 4. Abdomen 
fuscous with some whitish irroration; apices of segments whitish. Legs fuscous 
irrorated, and tarsi annulated, with whitish. Forewings triangular, costa gently 
arched, apex obtusely pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; fuscous 
with some whitish irroration; an erect transverse bar from dorsum near base, 
ending in an acute point beneath costa, dark fuscous; a narrow fuscous transverse 
line, sometimes reduced to dots, follows this; first line whitish, suffused, nearly 
straight, from one-fourth costa to one-third dorsum; median band darker, 
containing a median, subcostal, dark fuscous, discal dot; postmedian line whitish, 
suffused, sinuate beneath costa, with an acute, projecting, median angle, thence 
strongly inwardly-curved, from three-fourths costa to three-fourths dorsum; a fine 
fuscous line follows this; a wavy, whitish, subterminal line, more or less marked, 
edged anteriorly and sometimes interrupted by dark fuscous; a wavy, blackish 
terminal line; in some examples there are additional brownish-ochreous markings, 
most commonly a suffused median spot posterior to postmedian line, sometimes 
also a longitudinal streak posterior to that line midway between costa and middle, 
sometimes some suffusion near base and on first line; cilia fuscous barred with 
whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey; two or three whitish bars on 
dorsum above tornus, sometimes prolonged into disc; a darker terminal line; 
cilia grey, bases and apices partly whitish. 


The coloured markings are inconstant and often wholly absent, in which case 
the species has a general resemblance to D. triparata, but may be at once 
distinguished by the white bases of the palpi. 


Queensland: Coolangatta. New South Wales: National Park, Katoomba. 
Victoria: Melbourne, Sale, Grampians. South Australia: Adelaide, Mt. Lofty. 
Western Australia: Perth, Waroona. 


96. DICHROMODES MESOGONTA. 

Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 27. 

6d. 24 mm. Head and thorax fuscous with slight whitish irroration. Palpi 
23; fuscous, upper surface irrorated with whitish, base sharply white. Antennae 
grey; pectinations in ¢ 3. (Abdomen broken off.) Legs fuscous irrorated, and 
tarsi annulated, with whitish. Forewings triangular, costa gently arched, apex 
round-pointed, termen slightly rounded, moderately oblique; fuscous irrorated with 
whitish, median band darker; antemedian line obscure, whitish, nearly straight, 
edged anteriorly and posteriorly with fuscous, from one-third costa to two-fifths, 
dorsum; an obscure, fuscous, median, subcostal, discal dot; postmedian line 
slender, whitish, edged anteriorly with fuscous, from two-thirds costa to three- 
fifths dorsum, slightly angled outwards beneath costa, and again more distinctly 
in middle; an obscure ferruginous spot on angle of this line; an obscure, whitish, 
wayy, subterminal line; a fine, interrupted, dark fuscous, terminal line; cilia 
fuscous with obscure, whitish, basal bars, apices grey mixed with whitish. Hind- 
wings with termen rounded; grey; cilia grey, apices paler. 

Redescribed from the type in the National Museum, Melbourne. Probably 
nearest D. diffusaria, but more closely resembling some forms of D. triparata. 
from which it may be distinguished by the palpi being white at base. 

Victoria: Sea Lake. 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 15 


97. DICHROMODES EMPLECTA, N. SD. 

éumdexros, interwoven. 

do: 9. 25-80 mm. Head dark-fuscous. Palpi 2%; dark-fuscous, some whitish 
irroration on upper surface; base sharply white. Antennae fuscous; pectinations 
in ¢ 3. Thorax fuscous with a few whitish scales. Abdomen fuscous irrorated 
with whitish; tuft greyish-ochreous. Legs fuscous irrorated, and tarsi annulated, 
with whitish. Forewings triangular, costa straight except near base and apex, 
apex obtusely pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; brownish- 
fuscous suffused and irrorated with whitish and blackish; a narrow basal dark 
fuscous fascia; a brown-whitish sub-basal fascia containing some fuscous irroration 
especially on costa; a brownish-fuscous transverse line, becoming blackish on 
costa and dorsum, succeeds this; first line from one-third costa to two-fifths 
dorsum, slender, blackish, strongly but irregularly dentate; a median, subcostal, 
blackish, sometimes pale-centred, transverse, discal mark; second line from three- 
fourths costa to two-thirds dorsum, slender, blackish, finely dentate, not angled, 
its costal half, where it traverses a white suffusion, more or less obsolete; median 
band more or less filled in with blackish; a wavy brownish-fuscous line from four- 
fifths costa to four-fifths dorsum; an irregular whitish subterminal line edged 
anteriorly with blackish, more thickly beneath costa, in middle, and above dorsum; 
a fine, crenulate, blackish, terminal line; cilia fuscous mixed, and apices barred, 
with whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded; fuscous; some whitish irroration 
and two or three blackish bars on dorsum; a darker terminal line; cilia fuscous, 
apices whitish. 

Western Australia: Albany and Denmark in February and March; twelve 
specimens received from Mr. W. B. Barnard, who has the type. 


98. DICHROMODES CONFLUARIA. 
Panagra confiuaria Gn., Lep., x, p. 131, Pl. 7, f. 8—Dichromodes confluaria 
Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1193. 
New South Wales: Jervis Bay, Katoomba. Victoria: Melbourne, Beaconsfield, 
Moe, Gisborne, Dunkeld. Tasmania: Hobart, St. Helen’s, Launceston, Deloraine, 
Zeehan. Western Australia: Perth, Waroona, Albany. 


99. DICHROMODES ROSTRATA, 0. Sp. 


rostratus, having a beak. 

©. 35 mm. Head and thorax whitish mixed with fuscous. Palpi extremely 
long (8); fuscous, upper surface irrorated with whitish, base sharply white. 
Antennae grey. Abdomen whitish mixed with fuscous and ferruginous. Legs 
whitish irrorated with fuscous. Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight, 
slightly sinuate, apex pointed, termen nearly straight, oblique; grey-whitish 
irrorated and partly suffused with dark-fuscous; a broad grey-whitish streak 
along costa from base to apex, giving off from near base a finger-shaped process 
with rounded extremity reaching to two-fifths of disc midway between costa and 
dorsum; a similar streak on dorsum from base to tornus becoming narrower 
posteriorly; a white straight line from beneath five-sixths costa to above three- 
fifths dorsum, preceded by a dark fuscous mark beneath costa, and a large dark 
fuscous suffusion which extends basally on both sides of the finger-shaped process; 
a blackish, subcostal, discal dot beyond middle; a fine, whitish, subterminal line 
commencing near apex, outwardly toothed in middle, and forming a second tooth, 


16 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


on apex, anterior margin shaded, and teeth filled in with dark fuscous; a dark 
fuscous, terminal line edged anteriorly by a white line; cilia fuscous, bases and 
apices whitish. Hindwings with termen only slightly rounded; grey; a darker 
discal dot and terminal line; cilia grey, apices whitish. 

This very distinct species, remarkable for its long palpi, is nearest 
D. confluaria. 

Western Australia: Merredin, one specimen received from Mr. L. J. Newman. 


100. DiICHROMODES EXPLANATA. 


Panagra explanata W1k., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiii, 1009.—Dichromodes explanata 
Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1179: 

New South Wales: Sydney, Bathurst. Victoria: Melbourne, .Sale, Bendigo, 
Grampians. South Australia: Mt. Lofty. Western Australia: Albany. 


101. DICHROMODES OBTUSATA. 


Panagra obtusata Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiii, 1008——Panagra devitata W1k., 
ibid., 1010.—Dichromodes obtusata Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1177. 

Palpi in ¢@ 24, in 9 3. Two males from Western Australia have palpi 2, 
and sub-basal line of forewings more fuscous than ferruginous, but they are not 
separable specifically. 

Queensland: Stradbroke Is., Coolangatta. New South Wales: Sydney, Jervis 
Bay, Katoomba, Bathurst, Mittagong. Victoria: Melbourne, Beaconsfield, Sale, 
Gisborne. South Australia: Adelaide, Mt. Lofty. Western Australia: Bridge- 
town, Cunderdin. 


102. DICHROMODES LISSOPHRICA, Nn. SD. 

Atacopptkos, smoothly rippled. 

36. 28 mm. Head grey. Palpi 2; fuscous, base sharply white. Thorax and 
abdomen grey. Legs fuscous (posterior pair missing). Forewings triangular, 
costa slightly arched, apex obtusely pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly 
oblique; pale grey, markings fuscous; costal edge fuscous to two-thirds; a fuscous 
bar from base of costa half-way across disc; antemedian from one-third costa to 
two-fifths dorsum, sharply angled in disc first outwards, then inwards, then again 
outwards, closely preceded by a similar parallel line; a subcostal, fuscous, discal 
dot well beyond middle; postmedian from two-thirds costa to three-fourths dorsum, 
slightly sinuate, sharply dentate, with two larger posterior teeth below middle; 
two faint indistinct dentate lines beyond this; cilia grey. Hindwings with termen 
only slightly rounded; whitish-grey; cilia whitish-grey. 

Western Australia: Perth in October; one specimen received from Mr. J. 
Clark. 


103. DICHROMODES EXSIGNATA. 


Panagra exsignata Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiii, 1010 (nec Meyr.).—Dichromodes 
diasemaria Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1171; Turn., Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 
1925, 107 (nec Gn.).—Dichromodes uniformis Bastelberger, Berl. Hnt. Zeit., 1907, 
60.—Dichromodes exocha Prout, Novit. Zool., 1916, 1. 

Meyrick and myself have wrongly attributed the name diasemaria to this 
species. Meyrick’s description applied to the 9 only; I have myself described both 
sexes from Tasmanian examples. A 6 from Sydney has the markings better 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. alr 


defined than in Tasmanian specimens of this sex, and the median band is distinctly 
darker. A ¢ from Katoomba resembles the 2 in having the first and postmedian 
line followed by a pale shade. In both the hindwings are dark grey without any 
brownish tinge. In some aberrant examples the median band is darker than 
basal and terminal areas; this should be noted as an exception in my Key. 

New South Wales: Sydney, Katoomba. Tasmania: St. Helen’s, Beaconsfield, 
Cradle Mt. (3,000 feet), Zeehan, Strahan. 

Prout’s type (A. Simmons) is from Kelso near Beaconsfield, Tasmania, not 
from New South Wales. 


104. DICHROMODES ORECTIS. 


Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1183. 

3, 2. 20-22 mm. Head whitish-grey. Palpi 23; fuscous, upper surface whitish- 
grey, base sharply white. Antennae grey; pectinations in ¢ 33. Thorax whitish- 
grey. Abdomen whitish-grey, with a few fuscous scales. Legs fuscous; in 
posterior pair mixed with whitish. Forewings triangular, costa straight except 
near base and apex, apex round-pointed, termen slightly bowed, slightly oblique; 
whitish-grey, markings and some irroration dark fuscous; a short transverse mark 
from base of costa; first line from one-third costa to one-third dorsum, slightly 
wavy, sometimes preceded by a parallel line, sometimes thickened and blackish 
except towards costa; a median, subcostal, round, pale-centred, discal spot; post- 
median line from two-thirds costa or slightly beyond to twe-thirds dorsum, 
sinuate to middle, where it forms an acute angle and is bent and curved inwards, 
sometimes thickened and blackish except towards costa, sometimes interrupted 
into a series of dots, sometimes a ferruginous-ochreous spot at angle; sometimes 
a fuscous parallel line follows this; subterminal very obscure, whitish, anteriorly 
more or less suffused with fuscous; a terminal series of blackish dots; cilia grey, 
apices paler. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey; cilia as forewings. 


At first sight the different forms of this species may be puzzling, but the 
variation is analogous to that in atrosignata. 


Western Australia: Albany and Busselton in February; four specimens 
received from Mr. W. B. Barnard; Geraldton in November and December. 


105. DICHROMODES SEMICANESCENS. 

Prout, Novit. Zool., 1913, 388. 

®. 18 mm. Head fuscous irrorated with grey. Palpi fuscous, base whitish. 
Thorax and abdomen grey. Forewings rather broadly triangular, apex round- 
pointed, termen rounded, slightly oblique; grey; dorsal area, except base, irrorated 
with dark fuscous; costal area suffused with pale ferruginous-ochreous; several 
areas of longitudinal ferruginous-ochreous suffusion in terminal area; a dark 
fuscous terminal band narrowing to a point at tornus; antemedian line slender, 
indistinct, dark fuscous, arising from a blackish spot on costa at one-fourth; 
similar costal spots shortly before and after middle; discal spot blackish, followed 
by some fuscous suffusion; postmedian line scarcely traceable. Hindwings fuscous; 
dorsal margin slightly paler with indications of commencing fuscous transverse 
line. : 

I do not know this species, and have abstracted these details from Prout’s 
description. 

Western Australia: Geraldton. 

B 


18 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


106. DICHROMODES SIGMATA. 


Panagra sigmata Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiii, 1005.—Dichromodes sigmata 
Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1179. 

og. 24 mm. Head and thorax fuscous irrorated with whitish. Palpi 32; dark 
fuscous, upper surface irrorated with grey-whitish, base sharply white. Antennae 
grey; pectinations in ¢ 3. Legs fuscous irrorated, and tarsi annulated, with 
whitish. Forewings triangular, costa gently arched, apex obtusely pointed, termen 
slightly rounded, moderately oblique; fuscous, rather densely irrorated with 
whitish; first line from one-fourth costa to one-third dorsum, at first outwardly 
oblique, bent beneath costa, thence straight, white edged posteriorly with blackish, 
which is thickened in middle and above dorsum; a median, subcostal, dark 
fuscous, discal dot; postmedian line from two-thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum, 
unevenly edged anteriorly with blackish, which is thickened beneath costa, in 
middle, and above dorsum, at first sinuate and transverse, slightly angled out- 
wards in middle, thence incurved; angle of postmedian line edged posteriorly with 
brownish-ochreous; a short longitudinal streak of the same colour posterior to 
this line midway between costa and middle; a suffused whitish terminal band; a 
wavy blackish terminal line; grey obscurely barred with whitish. Hindwings 
with termen rounded; grey; cilia grey. 

Queensland: Stanthorpe; one example in February. New South Wales: Sydney 
(British Museum type). 


107. DICHROMODES LYGRODES, n. sp. 

Avypwdns, gloomy. 

9. 28 mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous with some whitish irroration. 
Palpi 3; dark fuscous, upper edge irrorated with grey-whitish, lower edge slenderly 
grey-whitish towards base. Antennae grey-whitish annulated with blackish. 
Abdomen grey irrorated with fuscous. Legs dark fuscous irrorated, and tarsi 
annulated, with whitish; posterior pair mostly whitish. Forewings triangular, 
costa slightly arched, apex round-pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly 
oblique; dark fuscous irrorated with ochreous-whitish; antemedian line repre- 
sented by two or three ochreous-whitish dots; a median, subcostal, transverse, 
blackish, discal mark; postmedian line formed by a very distinct series of 
ochreous-whitish dots, from two-thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum, with a slight 
posterior prominence below costa and a distinct posterior angle below middle, 
concave above and below angle; an ochreous-whitish wavy subterminal line 
partially developed; a fine, blackish, crenulate, terminal line; cilia fuscous, apices 
mostly ochreous-whitish. Hindwings with termen slightly rounded; pale grey; 
indistinct whitish anteriorly, fuscous-edged postmedian and subterminal lines; 
cilia grey, apices grey-whitish. 

South Australia: Pimaroo; one specimen in Coll. Lower, now in South 
Australian Museum. 

108. DICHROMODES LIOSPODA. 


Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1178. I have not seen this species. 
New South Wales: Sydney, 


109. DICHROMODES LEPTOGRAMMA, N. sp. 
AerTOYpaumos, faintly marked. 
9. 22 mm. Head and thorax grey-whitish irrorated with fuscous. Palpi 22; 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 19 


fuscous, upper surface irrorated with whitish, base sharply white. Antennae grey- 
whitish, towards apex dark grey, towards base; annulated with dark fuscous. 
Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous; posterior pair grey-Wu.'..0 irrorated with fuscous. 
Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight, arched towards apex, apex round- 
pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; grey-whitish irrorated with dark 
fuscous; lines slender, grey-whitish, indistinct; antemedian from one-third costa 
to two-fifths dorsum, nearly straight; postmedian from two-thirds costa to four- 
fifths dorsum, slightly waved; discal dot obsolete; cilia grey-whitish with a 
fuscous median line. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey; cilia grey. 

Very obscure, the markings being scarcely perceptible. It is probable that they 
are more distinct in some examples. 

Western Australia: Perth in October; one specimen received from Mr. J. 
Clark. 


110. DICHROMODES LIMOSA, Nn. SD. 

limosus, muddy. 

6, 2. 23-26 mm. Head and thorax whitish-grey. Palpi 3; pale fuscous, upper 
edge whitish, base narrowly white. Antennae grey-whitish; pectinations in ¢ 7. 
Abdomen and legs ochreous-grey-whitish. Forewings triangular, costa gently - 
arched, apex acute, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; ochreous-grey-whitish 
with some fine fuscous irroration; costal edge more or less ochreous-tinged; first 
line very slender, pale, sometimes indistinct, from two-fifths costa to two-fifths 
dorsum, usually edged posteriorly by minute subcostal, median, and subdorsal 
fuscous dots; a median, subcostal, fuscous, discal dot; postmedian line very 
slender, pale, sometimes indistinct, from four-fifths costa to three-fifths dorsum, 
slightly outwardly-curved beneath costa, thence nearly straight or slightly wavy, 
usually edged anteriorly by a series of fuscous dots; sometimes whole of median 
band, except towards costa, is suffused with fuscous; a fine, pale, dentate or wavy, 
subterminal line; an interrupted blackish terminal line; cilia grey, apices more or 
less ochreous-whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded; pale grey; sometimes 
indications of a fine, pale, transverse, median line; cilia as forewings. 


Variable in the presence or absence of a dark median band. The more 
obscure examples might be confused with D. ornata, but the white base of palpi, 
slight ochreous tinge, and dorsal termination of first line much nearer to post- 
median line than to base, are sufficient distinctions. 


North Queensland: Cape York. Queensland: Yeppoon in October; Rockhamp- 
ton in July; Emerald in September; Bundaberg in June; Brisbane in September 
and March; Warra near Dalby. New South Wales: Lismore in October. Ten 
specimens. 


111. DICHROMODES LEPTOZONA, Nn. sp. 


AerTo~wvos, With slender girdle. 


6, 2. 20-28 mm. Head and thorax grey irrorated with whitish. Palpi 23; 
grey, upper surface whitish, base white. Antennae pale grey; pectinations in ¢ 5. 
Abdomen ochreous-grey-whitish. Legs grey; posterior pair whitish; posterior 
tibiae of ¢ strongly dilated and grooved in-~ distal three-fourths. Forewings 
triangular, costa straight to near apex, apex pointed, termen slightly rounded, 
slightly oblique; grey with dense whitish irroration; a slender grey median band, 


20 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAER, ii, 


sometimes blackish towards dorsum, containing a minute blackish discal dot, 
strongly expanded on costa, less so on dorsum, constricted in middle, anterior 
edge from two-fifths costa to two-fifths dorsum, outwardly curved, posterior edge 
from four-fifths costa to three-fifths dorsum, nearly straight or slightly waved; 
terminal area grey traversed by a slender whitish subterminal line; an interrupted 
blackish terminal line; cilia grey with whitish points, apices grey. Hindwings 
with termen rounded; grey; sometimes a faintly darker transverse line from 
dorsum succeeded by a paler tornal area; a darker terminal line; cilia grey. 
Underside of hindwings whitish irrorated with grey, with grey discal dot and 
postmedian line. 

Western Australia: Kalamunda near Perth in December, ¢ type in Coll. 
Barnard; in September, 2 in Coll. Goldfinch. 


112. DICHROMODES PERSONALIS. 


Colobochila ? personalis Feld., Reise Novara, Pl. 120, f. 20.—Dichromodes 
personalis Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1194—EHpidesmia ophiosema Low., 
Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1901, 64. 

I have seen Lower’s type and can confirm Prout’s identification. The species 
is very distinct and cannot be mistaken. Although the internal groove and tuft 
of the posterior ¢ tibiae are well marked, the tibiae are only slightly dilated. 

Western Australia: Perth, Waroona, Merredin, Mt. Barker, Albany. 


113. DICHROMODES OPHIUCHA. 


Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1186. 

The absence of both transverse lines makes this species easily recognizable. 

Queensland: Toowoomba (W. B. Barnard). New South Wales: Sydney, 
National Park. 


114. DICHROMODES EUSCIA. 
Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1185. 
Distinguished by the absence of the antemedian line. 
New South Wales: Katoomba. Tasmania: Zeehan, Strahan. 


115. DICHROMODES INDICATARTA. 

Eubolia indicataria W1k., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxxv, 1698.—Dichromodes indicataria 
Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1186. 

Variable, but distinguished by the wholly fuscous palpi (except upper edge), 
combined with the finely dentate postmedian line. 

Queensland: Caloundra, Stradbroke Is., Southport, Coolangatta. New South 
Wales: Sydney, Jervis Bay. Victoria: Melbourne, Beaconsfield, Grampians. 
Western Australia: Perth, Kelmscott, Waroona, Bunbury, Geraldton. 


116. DICHROMODES ICELODES, Nn. SD. 

eikeAwons, Similar. 

fg. 22 mm. Head grey with whitish points. Palpi 4; fuscous; upper surface 
grey with whitish points. Antennae fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 3. Thorax grey. 
Abdomen pale grey. Legs fuscous; posterior pair grey. Forewings triangular, 
costa straight except near base and apex, apex pointed, termen slightly bowed, 
searcely oblique; grey with fine whitish irroration; markings fuscous; ante- 
median line from one-third costa to two-fifths dorsum, slender, slightly dentate; 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 21 


discal spot annular, rather large, in centre grey; postmedian from before two- 
thirds costa to mid-dorsum, finely dentate, slender; subterminal line well marked, 
slightly wavy: a fine interrupted terminal line; cilia grey with whitish points on 
basal half. Hindwings with termen gently rounded; grey; a darker discal dot 
before middle: slight indications towards dorsum of a paler subterminal line; 
cilia grey. 

®. 20mm. Palpi5. Forewings with markings broader, blackish, very distinct; 
discal spot fused with postmedian line; cilia with indistinct fuscous bars. 

Very near D. indicataria, but may be distinguished by the longer palpi. 

New South Wales: Mt. Kosciusko (5,000 feet) in November, two specimens in 
Coll. Goldfinch. 


117. DICHROMODES RAYNORI. 

Prout, in Seitz, Indo-Aust. Geometridae, p. 9. 

3, . 20-24 mm. Head grey. Palpiin ¢ 4, in 9 5 to 6; fuscous, some whitish 
irroration on upper surface. Antennae grey; pectinations in ¢ 8. Thorax grey. 
Abdomen grey irrorated with ochreous-whitish. Legs fuscous; posterior pair 
whitish with a few fuscous scales. Forewings triangular, costa slightly arched, 
apex obtusely pointed, termen nearly straight. slightly oblique; pale grey; first line 
from one-third costa to one-third dorsum, broad, straight, blackish, partly or 
wholly obsolete towards costa; a median, subcostal, faintly marked, pale-centred, 
discal spot; postmedian line from two-thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum, broad, 
blackish, angled in middle, curved inwards beneath angle, partly or wholly 
obsolete above angle, posteriorly edged by a whitish line; a very faint, crenulate, 
pale, subterminal line, with dark anterior edge; a terminal series of blackish 
dots; cilia grey, apices paler. Hindwings with termen only slightly rounded; 
grey; traces of darker postmedian and terminal lines; cilia as forewings. 

The sexes are nearly similar. Very like the 2 of D. atrosignata, but the 
palpi are much longer. In the latter species the discal dot of forewing is smaller, 
darker, and very rarely pale-centred. 

Queensland: Stradbroke Island in August, September, and January; seven 
specimens. New South Wales: Sydney. j 


118. DICHROMODES ATROSIGNATA. 

Panagia atrosignata Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiii, 1006—Hubolia linda Butl., 
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), ix, 1882, 96—Dichromodes atrosignata Meyr., Proc. 
Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1184. 

&. 26-34 mm. 9. 25-29 mm. Palpi in ¢ 2% to 3, in 2 8 to 34. Antennal 
pectinations in ¢ 4. The ¢ is variable in colour and in the degree of angulation 
of postmedian line of forewings. The 2 is more constant, but strikingly different 
in the broad blackish suffusions edging the antemedian and postmedian lines 
towards dorsum, and in it the angle of the latter is always acute. 

Queensland: Caloundra, Coolangatta, Toowoomba. New South Wales: Sydney, 
Jervis Bay. Victoria: Melbourne, Beaconsfield, Sale, Dimboola. South Australia: 
Mt. Lofty. 


119. DICHROMODES TRIPARATA. 
Panagra molybdaria Wik., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiii, 995 (nec Gn.).—Panagra 
triparata WIk., ibid., 1005.—Dichromodes triparata Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 
1889, 1190. 


22 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, 1i, 


Queensland: Stradbroke Is., Coolangatta. New South Wales: Lismore, Sydney, 
Katoomba. Victoria: Melbourne, Grampians. Western Australia: Albany. 


120. DICHROMODES MESODONTA, N. Sp. 

ecodovTos, toothed in the middle. 

6d. 23 mm. Head dark fuscous irrorated with whitish; face wholly dark 
fuscous. Palpi 24; dark fuscous, upper surface irrorated with whitish. Antennae 
grey annulated with dark fuscous, towards apex wholly dark fuscous; pectinations 
34. Thorax dark fuscous irrorated with whitish. Abdomen fuscous. Legs fuscous; 
posterior pair grey-whitish. Forewings triangular, costa gently arched, apex 
round-pointed, termen slightly bowed, slightly oblique; grey-whitish densely 
irrorated with blackish and fuscous; antemedian line slender, whitish, edged 
posteriorly with blackish, straight, from one-third costa to one-third dorsum; an 
indistinct, median, subcostal, transverse, blackish, discal mark; postmedian line 
slender, whitish, edged anteriorly with blackish, from two-thirds costa to two- 
thirds dorsum, with a slight median angle, incurved above and beneath angle; 
a faint, whitish subterminal line; cilia grey with a few dark fuscous scales, 
apices partly whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey; cilia grey. 

Q. 22-24 mm. Head, thorax, and antennae wholly dark fuscous. Forewings 
darker; median band much darker, often blackish towards dorsum; discal dot 
more distinct, blackish; lines much better marked; postmedian with angle more 
pronounced and acute; cilia sometimes partly barred with dark fuscous. 

There is considerable sexual dissimilarity. 

Western Australia: Perth in October; four specimens, including one gd, 
received from Mr. J. Clark; Collie in November (one 2 in Coll. Lyell from 
J. K. Ewers). 


121. DICHROMODES STILBIATA. 


Liodes stilbiata Gn., Lep., x, 120.—Panagra plusiata Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., 
xxiii, 1007.—Dichromodes stilbiata Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1192. 

The ¢ posterior tibiae are similar to those of D. personalis. The conspicuous 
white postmedian line, nearly straight, but strongly curved outwards on dorsum, 
is a good distinguishing character. 

Queensland: Brisbane, Stradbroke Is. New South Wales: Glen Innes, Sydney, 
Jervis Bay, Katoomba, Mt. Kosciusko. Victoria: Melbourne, Moe, Gisborne. 
Tasmania: Hobart, Lake Fenton (3,500 feet), Deloraine, Cradle Mt. (3,000 feet), 
Zeehan, Strahan. South Australia: Mt. Lofty, Adelaide. 


122. DICHROMODES CONSIGNATA. 

Panagra consignata Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiii, 1006.—Panagra petrilineata 
Wik., ibid., 1008.—Dichromodes consignata Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 
1191. 

New South Wales: Bathurst. Victoria: Sale, Gisborne, Castlemaine, Dunkeld, 
Grampians. South Australia: Adelaide, Mt. Lofty. Western Australia: Perth. 


123. DICHROMODES RIMOSA. 
Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 27.—Dichromodes albitacta Prout, ibid., 27. 
6. 31-32 mm. Head grey-whitish irrorated with fuscous. Palpi 23; fuscous, 
upper surface irrorated with grey-whitish. Antennae fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 6. 
Thorax fuscous. Abdomen ochreous-whitish irrorated with fuscous. Legs fuscous 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER, 23 


irrorated, and tarsi annulated, with white. Forewings triangular, costa gently 
arched, apex round-pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; grey- 
whitish more or less irrorated or suffused with fuscous; sometimes median band 
except towards costa is almost wholly fuscous; first line from one-fourth costa to 
one-third dorsum, fuscous, edged anteriorly with whitish, strongly dentate; a 
median, subcostal, dark fuscous, transverse, discal mark, sometimes containing a 
few grey-whitish scales; postmedian line from two-thirds costa to two-thirds 
dorsum, sinuate, fuscous, interrupted on veins by a series of whitish dots, some- 
times edged posteriorly with fuscous; a fine, indistinct, whitish, dentate, sub- 
terminal line, anteriorly edged with fuscous suffusion; an interrupted blackish 
terminal line; grey-whitish irrorated with fuscous or grey. Hindwings with 
termen rounded; grey, slight whitish irroration near tornus; terminal line and 
cilia as forewings. Underside of forewings grey, of hindwings whitish irrorated 
with grey; a fuscous discal dot and wavy postmedian line on both wings. 

Described from Prout’s types (kindly loaned by the National Museum and 
Mr. Lyell), which are, I consider, certainly conspecific. It resembles some 
varieties of D. usurpatriz, but the longer antennal pectinations show it to be 
certainly distinct. Minor points are the grey-whitish head and strongly dentate 
first line of forewings. 

Victoria: Nhill near Dimboola in September, Sea Lake in October. 


124. DICHROMODES USURPATRIX. 


Dichromodes exsignata Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1178 (nee W1k.).— 
Dichromodes usurpatriz Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 24. 

Some examples of the male of D. atrosignata are very similar, but this 
species may be distinguished by the pale grey colour and inconspicuous lines of 
the forewings, which are quite free from any brownish tinge or suffusion, and 
from blackish lines. The palpi are also somewhat longer (3 to 34). The sexes 
are quite similar. 

New South Wales: Sydney. Victoria: Melbourne, Beaconsfield, Gisborne. 
South Australia: Mt. Lofty. 


125. DICHROMODES BERTHOUDI. 

Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 27. 

Extremely similar to D. usurpatriz, but the palpi are distinctly shorter (¢ 23), 
the antemedian line of the forewings is more distinctly dentate, the discal dot is 
not pale-centred, and the white spot on costa posterior to the postmedian line is 
more conspicuous. 

Western Australia: Waroona, Collie. 


126. DICHROMODES ORNATA. 


Panagra ornata W1k., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiii, 1004.—Dichromodes ornata Meyr., 
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1189.—Dichromodes orthogramma Low., Trans. Roy. 
Soc. S. Aust., 1894, 81. 

Probably, I think, Walker intended to name this species inornata, but by 
some accident the first syllable was omitted. It is an obscure species, and some 
of its variations are puzzling, and not to be understood without the aid of a good 
series. The palpi vary from rather pale fuscous to grey. The antemedian and 
postmedian pale lines are very faint, and the former may be obsolete. The 


24 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


latter may be rather broadly edged with dark fuscous, or by a very thin line, or 
by minute dots, and may be nearly straight, wavy, or with a distinct median 
angle. The antemedian line has rarely a linear fuscous edge, more often this is 
replaced by dots, and even these may be obsolete. ; 

North Australia: Darwin. North Queensland: Cairns. Queensland: Duaringa, 
Caloundra, Brisbane, Stradbroke Is., Southport, Coolangatta, Toowoomba. New 
South Wales: Sydney, Katoomba. 


Genus 14. ADEIXxIs. 

Warr., Novit. Zool., 1897, 27. 

Face with anterior projecting cone of scales. Palpi moderate, porrect; second 
joint thickened with appressed hairs; terminal joint concealed. Antennae of ¢ 
bipectinate, inner row of pectinations much shorter than outer towards base, but 
becoming equal towards middle, extreme apex simple. Thorax and abdomen 
slender; the former not hairy beneath. Femora smooth. Posterior tibiae of ¢ 
slightly dilated with internal groove and tuft. Tarsi not spinulose. Forewings 
with areole present, 8, 9, 10 stalked from areole, 11 free. Hindwings with 6 and 7 
elosely approximated at origin, 7 from near before angle, 12 approximated to cell 
to about three-fourths. 

Type, A. inostentata W1k. 

There are only two species, the second being A. griseata Huds. from New 
Zealand. The genus is closely allied to Dichromodes, differing only in the 
bipectinate ¢ antennae. 


127. ADEIXIS INOSTENTATA. 

Panagra inostentata Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiii, p. 1012.—Adeixis insignata 
Warr., Novit. Zool., 1897, 27—Paragyrtis inostentata Meyr., Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 
1905, 222. 

g. 20-26 mm. 9. 18-24 mm. Head and thorax whitish-grey. Palpi in ¢ 23 to 
23, in 9 23 to 3; ferruginous-brown. Antennae ochreous-grey-whitish; pectinations 
in g, outer row 33, inner row 13. Abdomen grey-whitish. Legs grey; posterior 
pair whitish. Forewings triangular, costa slightly arched, apex pointed, termen 
slightly rounded, oblique; grey densely irrorated with whitish; costal edge dark 
grey; a minute, fuscous, median, subcostal, discal dot; a grey line or shade from 
mid-dorsum to costa near apex, sometimes thickened towards dorsum, often very 
slender or obsolete, occasionally slightly dentate; a slender fuscous terminal line; 
cilia grey, apices white on costal half. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish 
or whitish-grey; cilia whitish-grey. 

Northern Territory: Melville Is. North Queensland: Herberton. Queensland: 
Yeppoon, Nambour, Caloundra, Brisbane, Stradbroke Is. New South Wales: 
Lismore, Sydney, Katoomba, Jervis Bay. Victoria: Beaconsfield, Gisborne. Tas- 
mania: Hobart, Strakan. South Australia: Mt. Lofty. Western Australia: 
Waroona, Bridgetown. 


Genus 15. XENOGENES. 


Meyrick, in Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 12. 

Face smooth, slightly rounded or flat. Tongue present. Palpi short or 
moderate, porrect or subascending, thickened with appressed scales; terminal 
joint minute. Antennae in ¢ sometimes dentate, moderately or shortly ciliated. 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 25 

Thorax and abdomen slender; the latter not hairy beneath. Femora smooth. 
Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs; in @ somewhat dilated. Tarsi not 
spinulose. Forewings with 2 from three-fourths, 6 from beneath upper angle, a 
rather large and broad areole, from which 7 and 10 arise separately, 11 free, not 
closely approximated to areole. Hindwings with 3 and 4 approximated at base, 
5 from middle of cell, 6 and 7 stalked, 12 approximated to cell from base, 
separating before middle or shortly before end of cell. 

Type, X. chrysoplaca Meyr. 

I have not seen this species, and have been able to examine only X. eustrotiodes. 
There are structural differences between them, but it is doubtful whether they are 
of generic value. 


128. XENOGENES CHRYSOPLACA. 


Meyr., in Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 13. 
Queensland: Duaringa. 


129. XENOGENES EUSTROTIODES. 


Xenogenes ? eustrotiodes, Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 13. 

o. 18-21 mm. Head and thorax fuscous mixed with white and ochreous. 
Palpi 1; fuscous, apex ochreous. Antennae fuscous; in ¢ slightly serrate, minutely 
ciliated. Abdomen ochreous. Legs fuscous; posterior tibiae ochreous-whitish. 
Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen slightly rounded, 
slightly oblique; white with fuscous and grey markings; a short fuscous bar on 
costa from base; a moderately broad fuscous transverse fascia, its anterior margin 
from one-fifth costa to one-third dorsum, outwardly curved and indented in middle, 
posterior from two-fifths costa to mid-dorsum; a fuscous dot on three-fifths costa 
giving rise to an outwardly curved line to half-way across disc, in its concavity a 
large grey spot, midway between this and fascia a short transverse grey line; 
a fuscous fascia from costa before apex, broadest on costa where it is divided by 
a white dot, narrowing to a point in mid-disc, thence connected by an inter- 
rupted grey line with a small grey tornal blotch; fine white subterminal and 
submarginal lines, the former dentate, separated by a broad grey line; an inter- 
rupted fuscous terminal line; cilia white, faintly barred with grey. Hindwings 
with termen rounded; whitish-ochreous; a fuscous median discal mark; a fuscous 
mark on two-thirds dorsum; a fuscous terminal band, sometimes incomplete 
towards tornus; cilia as forewings. 

Western Australia: Perth, Waroona. 


Genus 16. SYMPHYLISTIS, n. gen. 

ovpduristis, of the same race. 

Face smooth, not projecting. Palpi moderate, porrect; second joint thickened, 
with appressed scales; terminal joint minute. Antennae of ¢ bipectinate, extreme 
apex simple, pectinations moderately long. Thorax and abdomen slender; the 
former not hairy beneath. Femora smooth. Tarsi not spinulose. Forewings with 
11 free, 10 and 9 long-stalked from cell, 9 anastomosing immediately after separa- 
tion at a point with 8 to form a long narrow areole, 7 from shortly before end of 
areole, 5 from middle of cell. Hindwings with 3 and 4 separate, 5 from above 
middle of cell (three-fifths), 6 and 7 approximated at origin, 12 closely approxi- 
mated to cell as far as two-thirds, thence diverging. 


26 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


Unfortunately in the single known example both hindlegs are missing, but 
probably the posterior tibiae have two pairs of spurs. The genus appears to be a 
primitive one, very low on the stem from which arises the Dichromodes group, 
and intermediate between this group and Circopetes. The only known species is 
Western Australian. 


130. SYMPHYLISTIS LEPTOCYMA, N. Sp. 
Nerroxumos, Slenderly waved. 


6. 32 mm. Head and thorax grey with fine whitish irroration; face fuscous- 
brown. Palpi 12; fuscous-brown. Antennae grey; pectinations in ¢ 6. Abdomen 
grey; apices of segments narrowly whitish. Legs fuscous; tarsi with fine whitish 
annulations. Forewings triangular, costa straight, apex acute, termen bowed on 
vein 4, crenulate, oblique; grey, with very slender fuscous lines; a fuscous dot on 
one-fourth costa, giving rise to a slender line sharply long-toothed beneath costa, 
shortly toothed in middle, thence oblique to one-sixth dorsum; a median, sub- 
costal, blackish, discal dot; a fuscous mark on three-fourths costa, giving rise to a 
fine line sharply dentate beneath costa, thence oblique and nearly straight to one- 
third dorsum; this is succeeded by three, parallel, slightly waved lines, posteriorly 
edged with whitish from dorsum to termen; a terminal line; cilia brownish-grey. 
Hindwings with termen dentate on veins 4 and 7, wavy elsewhere; as rorewings 
but without first line, and second line not dentate. Underside similar but more 
obscure. 


Type in Coll. Lyell. 


. 


Western Australia: Waroona in July; one specimen (G. F. Berthoud). 


Genus 17. DINOPHALUS. 


Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 46. 

Face with strong conical corneous projection, sometimes terminating in one 
or two sharp corneous processes. Palpi moderately long, porrect or obliquely 
ascending; second joint roughly hairy; terminal joint moderate or short. Tongue 
strongly developed. Antennae in ¢ unipectinate, towards apex simple, pectinations 
long (rarely with a shorter inner row). Thorax and abdomen stout; the former 
densely hairy beneath. Femora hairy. Posterior tibiae without middle spurs. 
Tarsi spinulose. Forewings with 11 anastomosing with or running into 12, 10 and 
9 long-stalked, 9 anastomosing with 8 immediately after origin (sometimes arising 
at point of anastomosis), forming a long narrow areole, 7 from end or near end of 
areole. Hindwings with 5 from middle or above middle of cell, 6 and 7 separate, 
connate or stalked, 12 anastomosing with cell for a considerable distance. 


Type, D. cyanorrhaea Low. 


I include here Ophiographa Prout and Lissocraspeda Prout. The frontal 
armature, which is an adaptation to facilitate the emergence of the imago from 
the pupal shell, is here, I consider, only a specific character. The neurational 
variations occur in nearly related species, and probably further material will 
show that they occur in the same species. In one example I found that 12 of 
forewing separates just before costa. The genus is a natural whole, closely allied 
to Lissomma, but easily separated by the absence of middle spurs. It also has a 
much stronger frontal process, even when this is not terminated by a sharp hook 
or points. 


bo 
| 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 


Key to Species. 


1. Frontal prominence terminating in two sharp points .....................-- 2 
Mrontalaprominencesterminatine ina) sinslespoinite cys cye cue ce ciccceieieieneienciee creienens 5 
Je MContaleprominencenwith terminally Spikesmponrnech:, sme seiide a ae oe iene 3 
Frontal prominence with terminal spikes hook-like and directed downwards .. 4 
3. Forewings with a sinuous fuscous line from one-third dorsum towards apex 
Eee LN acig yop ase en ope R SR sp sersie for als Syrsneytaie: aor, di sayeean See CA ae, lcyanns ay ay Soaliswel sriqesemmnlan cyanorrhaea. 131 
Forewings with oblique, dentate, antemedian line ................... idiocrand. 132 
4. Forewings with transverse, dentate, antemedian line ................. eremaead. 133 
INGO MOS Alou HOO Ibe G4 Lo dosboduduaddboousaconcdeuocboooabud pygmaea. 134 
5. Frontal prominence terminating in a sharp hook directed downwards ...... 6 
Myronital@pronainence with mobtusemaip ex -ms)- lee cielel aces cue sient else evenelensiielelens drakei. 140 
6. Forewings with five blackish transverse lines .................-..- serpentaria. 135 
Forewings with two blackish transverse lines ..............--2.-2-ceeeceeee v4 
7. Forewings with a subterminal series of fuscous blotches edged posteriorly with 
ARMOUR ESD OW 2 PY Ft Se eens ot Ene ania test cl rat) NT as eM ERT ORCS Tol aes IRENE plate Tec macrophyes. 136 
Forewings without subterminal series of blotches ..................0-020000- 8 
8. Forewings with postmedian line from near base of dorsum ........ lechriomita. 137 
Forewings with postmedian line from dorsum well beyond middle .......... 9 
OD IEHbACH ANNEIS EARN THOMA LOIS Gageooonbouccsedcoounngbebodous ho postmarginata, 135 
JEHbooh Abayers), SAME WONWEbAOS lI) EdouoopedooubcodGbuobomoouddUDeooouS dilutaria. 139 


131. DINOPHALUS CYANORRHAEA. 

Hypographa cyanorrhoea Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 19038, 191. 

do. 24 mm. Head whitish with a few fuscous scales; fillet fuscous; face with 
a strong, porrect, flattened, corneous projection, its anterolateral angles prolonged 
into a pair of sharp spikes. Palpi rather long and slender, closely applied to 
frontal projection; whitish mixed with fuscous; second joint long; terminal 
joint very short. Antennae grey; pectinations in ¢@ 5. Thorax fuscous mixed 
with whitish. (Abdomen and hindlegs missing.) Legs grey; anterior pair 
mostly fuscous. Forewings elongate, narrow, costa straight almost to apex, apex 
pointed, termen strongly oblique, irregularly dentate, being toothed on veins 3, 
4 and 6; grey; a suffused fuscous line from one-third dorsum, very oblique 
towards, but not reaching, costa before apex, slightly bisinuate, followed by a 
broad whitish suffusion, bisected by a fine fuscous line from dorsum to costa near 
before apex; a faint parallel line follows this; cilia dark-grey with some whitish 
scales between dentations. Hindwings rather broad, apex obtusely rounded, angled 
and toothed on vein 3; 6 and 7 short-stalked; grey; a suffused, whitish, trans- 
verse, median band, containing a fine transverse grey line; cilia as forewings. 

Described from Lower’s type, which appears to be unique. 

Central Australia: Alice Springs. 


132. DINOPHALUS IDIOCRANA, N. Sp. 

idcoxpavos, With peculiar head. 

do. 26-28 mm. 9°. 30 mm. Head fuscous irrorated with whitish; face with a 
strong, porrect, flattened, corneous projection, its anterolateral angles prolonged 
into a pair of sharp spikes; when the palpi are depressed a short, corneous shelf 
is seen projecting from lower margin of face, and the superior projection is seen 
to be hollowed on each side, with a median ridge. Palpi moderate, porrect; 
fuscous irrorated with whitish. Antennae fuscous irrorated with whitish; pectina- 
tions in ¢ 8, in 9 34, lessening towards base and apex, apical third simple. Thorax 
and abdomen fuscous with whitish irroration. Legs dark-fuscous irrorated with 
whitish; first joint of posterior tarsi in ¢ dilated and deeply excavated on ventral 
surface. Forewings narrow, elongate, triangular, costa nearly straight but slightly 


28 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


sinuate, apex pointed, termen very irregular with rounded projections on veins 3 
and 7; fuscous mixed with whitish, appearing grey; a dark fuscous line from 
midcosta to one-fourth dorsum, strongly dentate, with a posterior tooth above and 
another beneath middle; an irregularly waved dark-fuscous line from costa just 
before apex to three-fourths dorsum, sometimes preceded by a more suffused line; 
a very indistinct whitish subterminal line; cilia dark-fuscous with some whitish 
bars between projections. Hindwings with termen irregularly waved; pale-grey; 
a wavy fuscous postmedian line; cilia as forewings. 

North Queensland: Townsville in January (F. P. Dodd). N.W. Australia: 
Sherlock River (Coll. Lyell). Three specimens. 


133. DrNoPHALUS EREMAEFA. 
Hypographa eremaea (misprinted oea) Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 1907, 


&. 24-30 mm. §. 30-32 mm. Head and thorax grey; face with a long, trun- 
eated, cone-shaped projection ending in two short chitinous hooks directed down- 
wards. Palpi 2; grey. Antennae grey; pectinations in ¢ 10, in 9 3. Abdomen 
whitish-grey; apices of segments fuscous. Legs fuscous; posterior pair paler. 
Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight, apex subrectangular, termen rounded, 
oblique; grey; a suffused, whitish, subcostal, median, discal spot; a blackish line 
from one-third costa to one-third dorsum, with two acute posterior teeth, one above 
and one beneath middle; a similar line from five-sixths costa to two-thirds dorsum, 
irregularly bisinuate; a suffused, dentate, whitish, subterminal line; cilia whitish, 
apices and bars opposite veins fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded, sinuate 
towards tornus; white; two slender, more or less obsolete, transverse, postmedian, 
fuscous lines, sometimes indicated on dorsum only; a terminal fuscous suffusion 
more pronounced towards tornus; cilia white, on tornus fuscous. 

In some examples the two lines are connected by a crossline above dorsum. 

North Australia: Darwin. North Queensland: Cape York, Claudie River, 
Cairns, Townsville. 


134. DINOPHALUS PYGMAEA. 

Lissocraspeda pygmaea Prout, Novit. Zool., 1913, p. 390. 

g. 19 mm. Head fuscous; frons strongly produced in a long truncate scale- 
covered process. Palpi 2; fuscous. Antennae grey; pectinations in ¢ 8. Thorax 
fuscous. Abdomen whitish with grey irroration, apices of segments grey. Legs 
fuscous irrorated, and tarsi annulated, with whitish. Forewings triangular, costa 
straight, apex round-pointed, termen long, bowed, oblique; fuscous without defined 
markings; a dark-fuscous mark on one-third costa; a fine irregular dark-fuscous 
line at three-fourths; cilia fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded, tornus 
slightly produced; white; a fuscous submarginal dot opposite three-fifths dorsum, 
a second linear posterior to this, and a short parallel line before tornus; some 
fuscous suffusion near termen; cilia whitish, on tornus dark-fuscous. Under side 
of forewings grey; of hindwings white with a dark-fuscous terminal line, a few 
dark-fuscous scales towards costa, but no tornal markings except in cilia. 

N.W. Australia: Sherlock River. Described from the British Museum type. 


135. DINOPHALUS SERPENTARIA. 
Hypographa serpentaria Gn., Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., (4) iv, 1864, 16; Hutelia 
undulifera Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxxiii, 1865, 824. 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 29 


3, 2. 34-36 mm. Head and thorax fuscous mixed with whitish; face with 
strong corneous projection ending in a sharp hook directed downwards. Palpi 13; 
fuscous mixed with whitish. Antennae fuscous; in 9 simple; pectinations in ¢ 6. 
Abdomen fuscous mixed with whitish. Legs dark-fuscous; tibiae and tarsi with 
whitish annulations. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight but 
slightly sinuate, apex rounded, termen rounded, oblique, deeply dentate; grey; 
markings blackish partly edged with whitish; a short line from costa near base; 
wavy transverse lines at about one-eighth, one-fourth and three-eighths; a trans- 
verse, subcostal, median, discal lunule; a line from five-eighths costa strongly bent 
inwards beneath discal mark, crossing third line, ending on dorsum between 
second and third lines; a very sharply dentate, posteriorly white-edged iine from 
three-fourths costa to two-thirds dorsum; an irregularly waved, posteriorly white- 
edged, subterminal line; a blackish terminal line; cilia fuscous, apices whitish 
between dentations. Hindwings with termen rounded, dentate; grey; basal third 
white with a grey discal mark near posterior edge; the grey area is edged with a 
fuscous line, and contains two transverse fuscous lines partly edged posteriorly 
with whitish; terminal line and cilia as forewings. 

Victoria: Melbourne, Beaconsfield. 


136. DINOPHALUS MACROPHYES. 
Ophiographa macrophyes Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 48. 


6d. 30 mm. Head fuscous; face with a rather slender, down-curved, acute, 
apical hook. Palpi 2; dark-fuscous. Antennae fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 4. 
Thorax fuscous with some whitish hairs. Abdomen dark-grey; a brown trans- 
verse bar beyond middle, thence paler; under side whitish-grey with some 
ochreous-tinge towards base. Legs densely hairy, whitish mixed with pale-grey; 
anterior pair dark-grey. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight, 
apex obtusely pointed, termen rounded, crenulate, oblique; grey, blotched with 
fuscous; a subbasal transverse series of fuscous blotches; a blackish line from 
one-fifth costa to one-third dorsum, rather irregular, with an acute posterior median 
projection, edged anteriorly, except median tooth, with white; a transverse, 
blackish, antemedian, discal mark; a blackish line, edged posteriorly with white, 
from three-fourths costa to two-thirds dorsum, bent inwardly beneath costa, thence 
outwardly-curved, bent inwardly again above dorsum; this is preceded and 
followed by transverse series of fuscous blotches, of which the second is edged 
posteriorly with whitish; an interrupted blackish terminal line; cilia fuscous, in 
crenulations white. Hindwings with termen slightly rounded, crenulate; grey; a 
suffused, wavy, fuscous, transverse line before middle; a fine, fuscous, posteriorly 
white-edged, transverse line after middle; terminal line and cilia as forewings. 
Under side of forewings grey, with fuscous, white-edged, postmedian line; of hind- 
wings grey-whitish, with broad, dark-fuscous, postmedian band. 

Western Australia: Albany, Kojareena (Waterhouse). 


137. DINOPHALUS LECHRIOMITA, N. Sp. 


Aexploutros, With oblique threads. 

3d. 34 mm. Head and thorax grey with whitish irroration; face with strong 
corneous prominence ending in a sharp median hook directed downwards. Palpi 2; 
grey with whitish irroration. Antennae grey with whitish irroration; in ¢ 
bipectinate to apex, outer pectinations long (8), inner much shorter (24). 


30 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


Abdomen grey with whitish irroration. Legs fuscous, irrorated, and tarsi 
annulated, with whitish. Forewings elongate, suboval, costa straight, apex 
rounded, termen long, rounded, strongly oblique; wavy; grey densely irrorated 
with whitish; two very oblique, fine, wavy, blackish lines; first from base, at first 
longitudinal then curved towards, but not reaching, costa near apex; second from 
dorsum near base to apex, curved; indications of a fuscous line intermediate 
between these; a fine blackish terminal line; cilia grey, apices and bases whitish. 
Hindwings with termen rounded, wavy; whitish; towards termen broadly suffused 
with grey; an interrupted blackish terminal line; cilia whitish. 


Peculiar in antennal structure, but as it agrees with this genus in all other 
respects, separation appears undesirable. Even the specialized structure of the 
face is exactly as in other species of the serpentaria group. The only difference 
is the presence of a short inner row of antennal pectinations. 


Central Australia Museum Expedition, 1916. One specimen in the South 
Australian Museum. 


138. DINOPHALUS POSTMARGINATA. 
Ophiographa postmarginata Prout, Novit. Zool., 1913, 390. 


6, @. 23-24 mm. Head brownish-fuscous; frons strongly projecting, obliquely 
conical, ending in a hook-like, corneous process, which projects downwards between 
palpi. Palpi 143; brownish-fuscous. Antennae pale brownish-fuscous; pectinations 
in ¢ 8. Thorax brownish-fuscous. Abdomen whitish-brown, extreme base in ¢ 
narrowly white. Legs fuscous; posterior pair partly whitish; all tarsi annulated 
with whitish; posterior pair with terminal spurs only in both sexes. Forewings 
triangular, costa straight; apex round-pointed, termen long, bowed, oblique, wavy; 
brownish-fuscous; markings dark-fuscous; a sharply dentate line from one-third 
costa to mid-dorsum; a discal dot beneath midcosta; an irregularly dentate, slightly 
sinuate line from three-fourths costa to three-fourths dorsum, edged posteriorly 
by a pale line, or sometimes obscured by a postmedian fuscous suffusion; an inter- 
rupted terminal line; cilia whitish; at apex and tornus fuscous. Hindwings with 
termen rounded and slightly sinuate beneath apex and before tornus; white; a 
minute median fuscous discal dot; a terminal fuscous band, broader in 9; traces 
of a darker dentate postmedian line; cilia whitish, towards tornus fuscous. Under 
side of forewings grey; of hindwings whitish, with fuscous discal dot, but with- 
out terminal band. 

N.W. Australia: Sherlock River; two specimens, including the type, in the 
British Museum. 


139. DINOPHALUS DILUTARIA. 
Hypographa dilutaria Warr., Novit. Zool., 1903, 260. 


9. 27 mm. Head and thorax fuscous; face with a strong anterior projection 
ending in an acute hook directed downwards. Abdomen whitish. Forewings 
grey; basal and postmedian areas fuscous, but the latter grey towards termen; a 
blackish, curved, slender, transverse line at one-third with five strong posterior 
teeth; a thicker and more suffused line from three-fourths costa to two-thirds 
dorsum, crenulate, edged anteriorly with brownish; an indistinct discal dot; an 
interrupted terminal line; cilia grey with fuscous bars opposite veins. Hindwings 
grey with fuscous terminal band. 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 31 


I have not seen this species. The description is translated from that of 
Warren; the structure of the frontal process is given by Prout. 
N.W. Australia: Roeburne. 


140. DINOPHALUS DRAKEI. 

Ophiographa drakei Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 48. 

3, @. 34-36 mm. Head fuscous finely irrorated with whitish; face with a strong 
corneous projection ending in an obtuse apex somewhat bent downwards. Palpi 
12; fuscous mixed with whitish. Antennae fuscous; in 2 simple; pectinations in 
6, 4. Thorax with rounded anterior and slight posterior crest; fuscous finely 
irrorated with whitish. Abdomen fuscous-grey. Legs fuscous; some irroration, 
and obscure tarsal annulations, whitish. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa 
straight, sometimes sinuate before apex, apex acute, termen rounded, slightly 
oblique, sinuate; grey, sometimes with darker antemedian and postmedian bands; 
a blackish line from one-third costa to two-fifths dorsum; outwardly curved, 
indented above middle, and more deeply above dorsum; an irregularly sinuate 
and dentate blackish line from four-fifths costa to two-thirds dorsum; an obscure, 
dentate, whitish, subterminal line, not always developed; an interrupted blackish 
terminal line; cilia fuscous, bases whitish between dentations. Hindwings with 
termen rounded, dentate; grey, becoming paler towards base; a median discal dot 
and a fine, fuscous, postmedian, transverse line, both faintly marked; an inter- 
rupted blackish terminal line; cilia whitish with a median fuscous line. Under 
side of hindwings with a large blackish terminal blotch. 

New South Wales: Sydney, Jervis Bay, Katoomba. Victoria: Beaconsfield. 
South Australia: Mt. Lofty. 


Genus 18. LISSOMMA. 

Warr., Novit. Zool., 1905, 418; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 49. 

Face densely hairy, sometimes with rounded prominence. Palpi moderately 
long, porrect; second joint densely hairy beneath; terminal joint smooth, 
cylindrical, obtuse. Antennae of ¢ unipectinate, towards apex simple, pectinations 
long; in 2 shortly unipectinate or simple. Thorax stout, more or less crested 
posteriorly; under side densely hairy. Femora hairy. Posterior tibiae of ¢ with 
two pairs of spurs. Tarsi spinulose. Forewings with 11 anastomosing with or 
running into 12, 10 and 9 long-stalked, 9 anastomosing with 8 to form a long 
narrow areole, 7 from end or near end of areole. Hindwings with 5 from above 
middle of cell, 6 and 7 separate, connate, or stalked, 12 anastomosing with cell to 
three-fourths. 

Type, L. himerata Warr. 

Differs from Hypographa in the strong anastomosis of 12 of hindwings with 


cell. 
Key to Species. 
U5 TENGIRENAUOESSS NRA OUTS OV Cop ere ay ball ki se Cheat G Gigha: ig, aka e plein 4 OG eR ERAT Sore eroLe Ie EG eieclotows se tus 2 
MOLeEWwANe Smdank- Lu SCOUS) sO GST EVN eae ciety Ose mcwe ees lay cig Gries eles ey niteihel oo courrier et ure) Rpg 3 
PEL OLE WATTS Sea ws O Ue ep UNM Kea corer lee cac eee oer nk mee a eoceh Ole s nse Sue ep eect ns hemes himerata. 141 
Forewings whitish, towards costa pinkish tinged ..................... minuta. 142 
3. Forewings wholly or partly dark-fuscous, hindwings with defined white basal 
NPSL Soest pve ONG OfO! OMROIO BIER PE OIG OO On TGEOT Gee BIEe DICROIOE EaCECHO Se erent oreo hae oie pinion a amen 4 
Forewings and hindwings grey, the latter without defined white basal area .. 6 
4. Hindwings with dark-fuscous terminal blotch leaving apex white .. incongrua. 143 


Hindwings with grey terminal band including apex ....................... 5 


C3 
Lh) 


REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


5. Forewings grey with dark-fuscous fasciae .............-......-.- ampycteria. 144 
IDOE MINS Chid <sMIoOS Saacodaoaeo dood doangoooucoodomD Ee HO G0 ODD ODS. hiracopis. 145 

6. Forewings with dark-fuscous postmedian fascia, its anterior edge straight and 
Sharply; GeMmede ye ree Aa anc acs tees aremaverter on aireuts tether Wapeein ite caliawre oneerehen eect eee atmoscia. 146 


Forewings posteriorly suffusedly darker with acutely dentate postmedian line 
See ERTL eee EHR TERA TCL eT CRC e ROACH crc ogonen ay.ater CADLe: crea et a orem Ic meni aac macrodonta. 147 


141. LissomMMA HIMERATA. 


Warr., Novit. Zool., 1905, 418. 

9. 35 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen pink. Forewings deep pink; a slightly 
darker, anteriorly pale-edged, slender, straight line from three-fifths costa to mid- 
dorsum; a similar line, posteriorly pale-edged, slightly curved, from costa shortly 
before apex to three-fourths dorsum; cilia pink. Hindwings as forewings but 
without median line, and with costal half of wing whitish. Under side pink; 
the dorsum of forewings narrowly, of hindwings broadly, whitish. 

I have not seen this species. The description is adapted from Warren. 

North Australia: Hureka (Tunney, Feb., 1903). 


142. LissomMMA MINUTA. 


Monoctenia minuta Swin., Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,.(7) ix, 1902, 167.—Hypo- 
grapha pallida Warr., Novit. Zool., 1902, 347.—Lissomma minuta Warr., Novit. 
Zool., 1905, 418. 

9. 27-32 mm. Head and thorax ochreous-whitish; face rounded, prominent. 
Palpi 2; ochreous-whitish, pinkish-tinged. Antennae ochreous-whitish; pectina- 
tions in 2 3. Abdomen ochreous-whitish tinged with pinkish towards base of 
dorsum. Legs ochreous-whitish; anterior pair pinkish. Forewings triangular, 
costa straight, apex pointed, termen rounded, slightly oblique; ochreous-whitish, 
towards costa pinkish-tinged; markings very pale grey; a slender line from one- 
third costa to two-fifths dorsum, outwardly-curved; a transverse discal mark 
beneath midcosta; a slender oblique line, sometimes wavy, from three-fourths costa 
to three-fourths dorsum; cilia concolorous. Hindwings with termen gently 
rounded; whitish, towards termen grey-whitish; a very pale grey transverse line 
at three-fourths; cilia grey-whitish. Under side similar but more obscure. 

Described from a series of six specimens in the British Museum. 

N.W. Australia: Sherlock River. 


143. LissomMA INCONGRUA. 
Agrotis incongrua W1k., Cat. Brit. Mus., x, 3538. 


do, °. 36-40 mm. Head and thorax dark-fuscous; face with moderate rounded 
prominence. Palpi 123; dark-fuscous. Antennae dark-fuscous, in 2? simple; pectina- 
tions in 6 6. Abdomen grey; under side whitish; apical segment and tuft fuscous. 
Legs fuscous; tarsi annulated with whitish. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa 
straight, apex pointed, termen rounded, oblique, crenulate; dark-fuscous; a little 
whitish irroration on base of dorsum; a blackish line from one-third costa to one- 
third dorsum with a few whitish marginal points, a slight posterior tooth above 
middle and another, more prominent, above dorsum; a similar, finely dentate, 
sinuate line from two-thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum; a suffused, blackish, 
sinuate, median line between these; a very fine, doubly sinuate, white sub- 
terminal line, preceded. by short blackish streaks on veins; an interrupted blackish 
terminal line; cilia dark-fuscous. Hindwings with termen slightly rounded, 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 33 


crenulate; white; a large dark-fuscous terminal blotch extending nearly to 
costa, but leaving apex white; cilia dark-fuscous, towards apex white. Under side 
of forewings grey almost without markings; of hindwings like upper side, but 
with some dark-fuscous irroration, and with two dark-fuscous transverse lines 
immediately preceding blotch. 


New South Wales: Jervis Bay (Moss-Robinson). South Australia: Adelaide 
(in South Australian Museum). 


144. LISSOMMA AMPYCTERIA, N. SD. 

dumuxtnptos, banded. 

g. 24 mm. Head with loose hairs projecting forwards between antennae, face 
rounded, prominent, hairy; fuscous with some whitish hairs. Palpi 14; covered 
with long loose fuscous hairs. Antennae fuscous; pectinations in ¢ 5. Thorax 
fuscous with some whitish hairs anteriorly. Abdomen fuscous. Legs grey; tarsi 
fuscous. Forewings elongate-trianguiar, costa straight almost to apex, apex 
rounded, termen rounded, dentate, slightly oblique; grey; markings dark-fuscous; 
median and dorsal short acute streaks from base; a fine antemedian line from 
one-third costa to one-third dorsum, angled outwards beneath costa, inwards above 
middle; a moderate median transverse fascia; a slender postmedian line from 
three-fourths costa to two-thirds dorsum, angled inwards beneath costa and above 
dorsum; following this a subterminal fascia; a terminal line; cilia fuscous, 
toward tornus grey in indentations. Hindwings with termen nearly straight, 
dentate; whitish; a fuscous antemedian discal dot; a broadly suffused fuscous 
terminal band, containing suffused straight blackish postmedian and terminal 
lines; cilia whitish, becoming fuscous near tornus. Under side of forewings 
fuscous; of hindwings whitish with blackish discal dot and large tornal blotch 
connected with costa beyond middle. 


Differs from L. hiracopis in the grey colouring and dark-fuscous fasciae of 
forewings and the differently formed postmedian line; also in the tornal blotch on 
underside of hindwings. 


Western Australia: EHradu, near Geraldton, in September (A. J. Nicholson) ; 
one specimen in Coll. Goldfinch. 


145. LisSOMMA HIRACOPIS. 


Hypographa hiracopis Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1211.—H. bath- 
rosema Prout, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist., (8) viii, 1911, 702. 


I have a ¢ example which corresponds nearly to Meyrick’s description, but 
has in addition a fine, crenulate, whitish, subterminal line, strongly indented 
above middle and again above dorsum. Also a 9 which lacks the whitish irroration 
of the 3g, is much darker, and more closely resembles incongrua. Antennae 
unipectinate in both sexes, pectinations in ¢ 10, in @ 38. ‘These structural 
characters clearly distinguish it from that species. 


South Australia. Western Australia: Perth. 


146. LissOMMA ATMOSCTA. — 
Hypographa atmoscia Meyr., Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1213. 


6. 40 mm. Antennae of ¢ unipectinate, apical third simple, pectinations 5. 
Posterior tibiae of § with two pairs of spurs, outer terminal spur short, inner 
C 


84 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


terminal spur very long, broad, flattened, and obtuse. These particulars are taken 
from an example in the Queensland Museum presented by Mr. G. H. Hardy. 
Western Australia: Perth. 


147. LisSsOMMA MACRODONTA, Nl. SDP. 


fakpodovtos, with long teeth. 

©. 36-42 mm. Head grey mixed with whitish; face with strong rounded 
prominence densely covered with rough hairs. Palpi 2, second joint with long 
spreading hairs beneath; grey, apices of hairs paler. Antennae grey; in 9? 
unipectinate, pectinations 5. Thorax and abdomen fuscous-grey mixed with 
whitish. Legs fuscous-grey irrorated with whitish. Forewings narrow, elongate, 
triangular, costa nearly straight but slightly sinuate, apex acute, termen rounded, 
oblique, dentate; fuscous-grey partly suffused with whitish, absence of this 
suffusion leaves a darker distal and dorsal area, which is variable in degree of 
development; a fine fuscous line from one-third costa to one-third dorsum, with a 
long acute indentation above middle, and another above dorsum; a similar line 
from two-thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum, with numerous, very long, acute 
dentations; fine fuscous streaks on veins in terminal area; an interrupted fuscous 
terminal line; cilia grey mixed with whitish. Hindwings elongate, termen only 
slightly rounded, dentate; grey becoming whitish-grey towards base; an inter- 
rupted fuscous terminal line; cilia white obscurely barred with grey. 


South Australia: Mt. Lofty (Hope Valley) in May, one specimen in South 
Australian Museum. Western Australia: Quairading (L. J. Newman), a more 
sombre example with antemedian line of forewings obsolete and postmedian line 
only just traceable, in my own collection. 


Genus 19. ENCHOCRANA, n. gen. 

eyxXoKpavos, spear-headed. 

Face with a long, porrect, laterally compressed, very sharp, anterior, corneous 
spike. Palpi rather short, porrect; second joint shortly hairy; terminal joint 
minute. Antennae unipectinate in both sexes. Thorax moderate; beneath hairy. 
Femora smooth. Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Tarsi not spinulose. 
Forewings with 11 anastomosing with 12 and 10, areole long and narrow. MHind- 
wings with 3 and 4 widely separate, 5 from well above middle of cell (three-fifths 
or two-thirds), 6 and 7 stalked, 12 very closely applied to cell from one-fourth to 
three-fourths. 

Allied to Dinophalus. Although 12 of hindwings does not actually anastomose 
with the cell, it comes very close to doing so. 


148. HNCHOCRANA LACISTA, N. sp. 


NakioTos, torn. 

©. 30-32 mm. Head grey, with small white tufts at bases of antennae. Palpi 
grey mixed with whitish. Antennae grey; pectinations in 9 13. Thorax, abdomen, 
and legs grey. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa gently and uniformly arched, 
apex acute, termen strongly oblique, sinuate, slightly crenulate; grey with 
slight fuscous irroration; very slender, oblique, darker lines faintly indicated; 
first from one-fourth dorsum towards one-third costa; second from mid-dorsum 
to midcosta; third from three-fourths dorsum to costa before apex, slightly 
dentate; cilia grey obscurely barred with whitish. Hindwings triangular, termen 


BY A, JEFFERIS TURNER. 35 


not rounded, prominent and sharply toothed at apex, with a still longer acute 
median tooth on vein 4; colour, lines, and cilia as forewings, but without first line, 
and with median line obscurely double. Under side with fuscous discal dot and 
large circular subterminal spot on both wings, spot on hindwings connected by a 
subterminal line to dorsum. 

The wing-shape, especially of hindwings, is very peculiar. 

Western Australia: Cunderdin; three specimens received from Mr. R. Illidge. 


Genus 20. HypoGRAPHA, 

Gn., Lep., ix, p. 189; Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1210; Prout, Gen. 
Insect., Oenochrom., p. 49. 

Face not prominent, but with projecting hairs. Palpi moderately long, porrect 
or slightly ascending; second joint densely hairy; terminal joint moderate, 
cylindrical, obtuse. Tongue strongly developed. Antennae of ¢@ unipectinate, 
towards apex simple, pectinations moderate or long. Thorax stout; posteriorly 
more or less crested; beneath densely hairy. Femora hairy. Posterior tibiae with 
two pairs of spurs. Tarsi spinulose. Forewings with 11 anastomosing with 12, 
10 and 9 long-stalked, 9 anastomosing with 8 to form a long narrow areole, 
7 from end or near end of areole. Hindwings with 5 from above middle of cell, 
6 and 7 separate, connate, or stalked, 12 closely appressed to middle of cell. 

Type, H. phlegetonaria Gn. 


1. Forewings with white line from costa near apex to dorsum, twice strongly inecurved 


isis BOLI ty Bike See on Cee eToue nace atm tua ATER eatin Suita Nan a Ml a re RR RR CH ad a ae epiodes. 149 
TENGEN AD OVEASI VANE] AVON DER ISILKG) oly IHUOKSNC nl A ine om Gen Graro cet atte ciated Go GEE AiG Is Bko ool aio Uo foalsioa onic Ole 2 


2. Forewings with strong sinuate dark-fuscous line from two-thirds costa to three- 
HUE SHC OS UTM yeaa cusiaes cual arate telemencwa teiea lite ew AEH) AMA blan,. alssoer erica au eehecdietra cm elee aristarcha. 150 
TORO ALOIS: NMI NO UNE SLKON, bite) 6.516 blo moo Od obas edo 6 ah ObiooIOn obo odbinc phlegetonaria. 151 


149. HyYPpoGRAPHA EPIODES, Nn. Sp. 

ymriwdns, Soft, gentle. 

oS. 28 mm. Head grey. Palpi 14; grey. Antennae grey; pectinations in 
3d 8, ochreous-tinged. Thorax with a bifid posterior crest; pectus reddish-tinged. 
Abdomen grey, apices of segments paler; tuft and under side whitish. Legs grey; 
anterior and middle tibiae irrorated with crimson; posterior pair grey-whitish. 
Forewings short, triangular, costa bisinuate, apex acutely pointed, termen slightly 
rounded, very strongly crenulate or lobulate, scarcely oblique; wWwhitish-grey, 
becoming darker towards costa, with some fuscous strigulae most pronounced on 
costa; a suffused grey-whitish spot on base of dorsum, followed by a small 
fuscous-brown spot in disc; a suffused grey-whitish line from beneath one-fourth 
costa to one-third dorsum, edged posteriorly by fuscous-brown spots above and 
below middle; a slender white line from costa before apex, inwardly oblique to 
three-fourths dorsum, with strong inwardly-curved projections above and below 
middle, edged posteriorly by a dark fuscous-brown line, which is strongly thickened 
to fill in these projections; cilia fuscous, between projecting crenulate lobules 
white. Hindwings with termen slightly rounded, crenulated as forewings; fuscous; 
a fine white transverse line edged anteriorly with blackish from two-thirds dorsum 
to two-thirds costa, toothed posteriorly in middle and at extremities; cilia as fore- 
wings but apices wholly white, on dorsum white. Under side of forewings as 
upper side but more whitish, and without basal markings and first line; of hind- 
wings whitish with a bisinuate, reddish-fuscous, transverse, median line not 


36 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii, 


‘reaching dorsum, and a broad, pale-reddish, subterminal band, containing a large 
oval spot of dark-red mixed with dark-fuscous. 

Type in Coll. Goldfinch. The lobulate termen of both wings is characteristic 
of the genus. 

Western Australia: Kojareena (Waterhouse). 


150. HypoGRAPHA ARISTARCHA. 
Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 50. 


3, 9. 48-52 mm. Head and thorax fuscous mixed with whitish; face not 
prominent but covered with rough hairs. Palpi 14; second joint with loose 
spreading hairs beneath; fuscous mixed with whitish. Antennae fuscous; uni- 
pectinate in both sexes with apical fourth simple, pectinations in ¢ 6, in @ 13. 
Abdomen grey, towards apex mixed with dark-fuscous; terminal fringe of third 
segment and sometimes middle of tuft white; under side with some brownish or 
purple-reddish irroration. Legs fuscous mixed with whitish. Forewings elongate- 
triangular, costa straight to near apex, apex pointed, termen rounded, oblique, 
deeply dentate or lobulate; fuscous; costal edge and a terminal suffusion beneath 
apex sometimes whitish; costa finely strigulated with blackish; markings blackish; 
a costal spot at one-third, with a spot in disc beneath it, and a third above one- 
third dorsum represent antemedian line; a slight, oblique, median, subcostal, discal 
mark; a spot on two-thirds costa giving rise to a rather broad, oblique, sinuate 
line to three-fifths dorsum, not denticulate; this is followed by a more slender 
bisinuate postmedian line, and this again by a similar but less distinct sub- 
terminal line; veins between last three lines dark-fuscous; a fine interrupted 
terminal line; cilia fuscous, between dentations whitish. Hindwings with termen 
rounded, dentate; fuscous, with fine indistinct darker median and postmedian 
lines; cilia fuscous, on apex and between apical dentations whitish. Under side of 
forewings without antemedian line; similar to upper side, but with more white 
suffusion; of hindwings grey, more whitish in median area, profusely strigulated 
with blackish; waved blackish antemedian and postmedian lines; a whitish dentate 
subterminal line interrupted sometimes by a median blackish blotch. 

My material for this description consists of a fine pair, including the type, 
loaned by the National Museum, Melbourne, and a 2 loaned by the South Australian 
Museum. 

Victoria: Beaconsfield. South Australia: Mt. Lofty. 


151. HypoGRAPHA PHLEGETONARIA. 

(Cite) ILGdoy 12% Wo IMO), IEA, al); 3 

3, 9. 38-42 mm. Head and thorax grey; face not prominent; but with seme 
projecting hairs on lower edge. Palpi 14; second joint shortly rough-haired 
beneath; grey. Antennae fuscous; in 2 simple, in ¢ unipectinate, apical fourth 
simple, pectinations 5. Abdomen grey irrorated with fuscous, or fuscous, bases 
of second and third segments whitish. Legs fuscous mixed with whitish. Fore- 
wings triangular, costa straight or slightly sinuate, apex acute, termen rounded, 
slightly oblique, deeply dentate or lobulate; fuscous-grey; markings dark-fuscous; 
a spot on one-fourth costa with faint indications of an antemedian line; a median, 
subcostal, discal spot; very fine dentate postmedian and subterminal lines; an 
interrupted terminal line; a slight reddish irroration on dentations; cilia fuscous, 
between dentations white. Hindwings with termen rounded, dentate: colour and 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. Ol 


cilia as forewings; fine, faintly darker, antemedian and postmedian lines. Under 
side of forewings without antemedian line; as forewings but dentate lines more 
distinct; some white suffusion at apex and beneath middle of termen; of hind- 
wings grey, with a moderate, curved, dark-edged fascia from costa before to 
dorsum beyond middle, and a whitish subterminal line preceded by a dark-fuscous 
suffusion. 

This description is based on two examples. Guenée’s type was from Tasmania 
and appears to have had the markings more distinctly developed. The best proof 
of the distinctness of this species from the preceding lies in the different antennal 
structure. 

New South Wales: Newcastle, Sydney, Katoomba. Tasmania. 


Genus 21. SARCINODES. 


Gn., Lep., ix, p. 188; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 56. 

Face with anterior cone of scales. Palpi moderately long, obliquely ascending; 
second joint thickened with loosely appressed hairs; terminal joint short, stout, 
obtuse, porrect. Antennae of ¢ unipectinate, towards apex simple. Thorax and 
abdomen stout; the former densely hairy beneath. Femora hairy. Tarsi strongly 
spinulose. Forewings with 5 from near upper angle of cell, 9 and 10 long-stalked, 
9 anastomosing with 8, but extreme base of 9 not always developed (see remarks 
under Monoctenia), 11 free. Hindwings with 5 closely approximated, connate, or 
short-stalked with 6 from upper angle of cell, 7 from shortly above angle, 12 
closely approximated to cell to beyond middle, thence diverging. 


A development of Oenochroma, but sharply differentiated by the close 
approximation of 5 at origin to 6, especially in the hindwings. An Indo-Malayan 
genus of about ten species. Type, S. carnearia Gn. from India. It may be 
inferred that the two genera had a common ancestor in Southern Asia before 
the separation of the Australian continent, where it gave rise to Monoctenia, 
Oenochroma, etc. In Asia the more generalized forms died out, leaving only the 
more specialized Sarcinodes, which has invaded Australia from New Guinea in 
recent geological time. 


152. SARCINODES HOLZI. 


Pagenst., Jahrb. nassau. Ver. Naturk., xli, 1888, 167; Sarcinodes subfulvida 
Warr., Novit. Zool., 1896, 280; Sarcinodes compacta Warr., Novit. Zool., 1896, 355. 

9. 60 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen pale-pinkish. Palpi 23; pale pinkish 
with some grey irroration. Antennae pinkish, towards base mixed with dark- 
fuscous. Legs pinkish-grey; anterior pair grey. Forewings rather broadly 
triangular, costa nearly straight but slightly sinuate, apex pointed, slightly 
produced, termen moderately rounded; pale-pink; an interrupted brownish line 
from one-fifth costa to one-sixth dorsum, outwardly curved, dentate; a similar 
line from midcosta obliquely outwards, soon bent inwards and continued to one- 
third dorsum; a straight line of whitish dots on veins from costa just before apex 
to two-thirds dorsum; disc between lines suffused with brownish-ochreous, a 
similar broad suffusion on termen, the two confluent above middle; cilia reddish- 
brown. Hindwings with termen rounded; colour and markings as forewings, but 
without first line; a subterminal series of white dots. Under side paler; post- 
median lines of fuscous dots on both wings; succeeded by more or less brown 
suffusion, especially on hindwings. 


38 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, il, 


I am indebted to Mr. L. B. Prout for identifying this species and giving me 
the references. 
North Queensland: Kuranda, near Cairns, in November and April; two 


specimens received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. Also from New Guinea and Amboyna. 


Genus 22. MaAcrocrentia, n. gen. 

fuaxpokTevios, long-combed. 

Face smooth, rounded, slightly projecting. Palpi moderate, porrect; second 
joint thickened with short, loosely appressed hairs; terminal joint rather long, 
cylindrical, obtuse. Antennae long (three-fourths of forewings); in ¢ unipec- 
tinate, towards apex simple, pectinations long. Thorax stout, under side densely 
hairy. Femora hairy. Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Tarsi spinulose. 
Forewings with 11 free, 10 and 9 long-stalked from cell, 9 anastomosing with 8 
soon after origin, forming a long narrow areole. Hindwings with 3 and 4 connate, 
5 from only slightly above middle of cell, 6 and 7 connate, 12 anastomosing with 
cell from one-third to two-thirds, gradually diverging. 

Similar in neuration to Lissomma, but vein 11 of forewings is free. I do not 
think it is nearly related to that genus, but to Monoctenia, the anastomosis of 12 
of hindwings with cell being independently developed as in Gerusia. The 
unusually long antennae are a peculiar character. 


153. MACROCTENIA EPAENETA, 0. SD. 

éravetos, praiseworthy. 

do. 57 mm. Head and thorax whitish-ochreous. Palpi 13; whitish-ochreous. 
Antennae pale-ochreous; pectinations in 3 8, apical fourth simple. Abdomen 
ochreous-whitish, on dorsum pinkish-tinged. Legs ochreous-whitish; anterior pair 
pinkish-tinged. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight, apex pointed, termen 
slightly sinuate, oblique; whitish-ochreous somewhat brownish-tinged; a very 
slightly curved ochreous line, pale edged anteriorly, from three-fourths dorsum 
towards, but not reaching, apex; a few sparse fuscous strigulae mostly in terminal 
area; cilia ochreous. Hindwings with apex rounded, termen Straight; pink, except 
tornal area which is coloured as forewings; cilia ochreous. 

Type in Coll. Lyell. 

Western Australia: Busselton in April; one specimen received from Mr. 
J. K. Ewers. 


Genus 23. MONOCTENTIA. 

Gn., Lep., ix, p. 183; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 39. 

Face smooth or slightly rough-scaled, flat, or with slight rounded prominence. 
Tongue well developed. Palpi short, porrect; second joint thickened with loosely 
appressed hairs; terminal joint short, stout, obtuse. Antennae of ¢ unipectinate, 
towards apex simple, pectinations long. Thorax densely hairy beneath. Femora 
hairy. Tarsi strongly spinulose. Forewings with 11 arising separately and free, 
10 and 9 long stalked from cell, 9 anastomosing with 8 to form a long narrow 
areole, but sometimes the connection formed by the origin of 9 from 10 fails to 
develop, in this case the areole is lost by separation, and 9 appears to be stalked 
with 7, 8. Hindwings with 5 strongly approximated to 6 at origin (about three 
times as far from 4 as from 6), 6 and 7 separate but approximated at crigin, 12 
approximated to middle part of cell, diverging at about two-thirds. 

Type, M. falernaria Gn. 


BY A, JEFFERIS TURNER. 39 


A small genus readily distinguished from Oenochroma by the origin of 5 of 
hindwings, an important character. The species are nearly allied, the last three 
being extremely similar. 


ll, Jebbach lays) “aloe loyaceyl Ienhe Vows Coguaoouoodooanuodoooododono0 G00 postcarneata. 154 
EGA yyibOS TOIL VOUS LOMMENROIS IDR Ga ddisadoubbsogcoododdoboudnoooneu0cusoo uh 2 

2. Forewings narrow, breadth much less than half length .....................- 3 
Horewings broad, breadth about half) length ye... 2.5.2. eae ee falernaria. 157 

Se INS Suawlthenterimen dentatem tiav. paves avaeb vate mia cee cromel a iis ec Aimee smerintharia. 155 
VANS Sivwichetrenmenmsno ti dentate marc cusrie sevnlaabeweloiayaieusiaieislakelcsl cn abercoauereneie leis eximia. 156 


154. MONOCTENIA POSTCARNEATA. 

Oenochroma postcarneata Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 42. 

9. 29 mm. Head and thorax whitish-ochreous. Palpi 2; whitish irrorated 
with pinkish. Antennae grey-whitish. Abdomen ochreous-whitish, under surface 
sparsely irrorated with fuscous. Legs ochreous-whitish; anterior pair pinkish- 
tinged. Forewings triangular, costa sinuate, apex acute; termen bowed, slightly 
oblique; whitish-ochreous faintly pinkish-tinged; a transverse row of slightly 
darker dots at three-fourths; cilia concolorous. Hindwings with termen gently 
rounded; whitish; a short transverse fuscous line in middle of disc at three-fifths; 
beyond this a broad terminal pinkish suffusion containing a transversely oval 
fuscous blotch in middle; cilia whitish with four or five fuscous bars opposite 
veins. Under side of forewings ochreous-whitish with a few fuscous scales and a 
pinkish suffusion before mid-termen; of hindwings like upper side, but with a 
few fuscous scales, and terminal pinkish suffusion restricted to neighbourhood of 
fuscous blotch. 

Western Australia: Perth. Described from the type in the British Museum. 


155. _MONOCTENIA SMERINTHARIA, 

Feld., Reise Nov., 1875, Pl. 124, f. 18, 19. 

3, 2. 62-66 mm. Head grey or ochreous-grey; face purple-fuscous or reddish- 
fuscous. Palpi 13, subascending; pale-ochreous densely irrorated with fuscous, 
reddish on external surface. Antennae pale-reddish or pale-ochreous; pectinations 
in ¢ 8, pale-ochreous. Thorax grey; pectus purple-reddish. Abdomen grey or 
ochreous-grey; tuft purple-reddish. Legs pale ochreous mixed with purple-reddish. 
Forewings elongate-triangular, rather narrow, costa straight or slightly sinuate, 
apex acute, termen much longer than dorsum, strongly bowed beneath apex, 
dentate; grey-whitish or pale-reddish suffused with purple-grey; a pale-reddish 
sometimes dentate line from beneath costa before apex to dorsum at three-fifths 
or two-thirds, parallel to termen, sometimes preceded by a blackish shade, broad 
towards dorsum, becoming narrower towards costa, and followed by some fuscous 
irroration; cilia reddish, apices between dentations ochreous, darker on dentations. 
Hindwings with apex rounded, termen nearly straight, dentate; pale purple- 
reddish; sometimes a large fuscous suffusion towards tornus; a pale subterminal 
line becoming indistinct towards costa; cilia as forewings. 

Victoria: Melbourne, Mount Korong. There are very few known examples of 
this species. 


156. MONOCTENIA EXIMTA. 
Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. S.-Aust., 1892, 7—Monoctenia calladelpha Low., ibid.. 
Dae 


40 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ii. 


¢. 65 mm. Head, thorax, abdomen, and legs pale-rosy. Palpi 14; pale-rosy. 
Antennae pale-ochreous; pectinations in ¢ 12, apical third simple. Forewings 
narrowly triangular, costa straight, apex obtusely pointed, termen bowed above 
middle, strongly oblique; pale-rosy without markings; cilia rosy-ochreous. MHind- 
wings with termen rounded; colour and cilia as forewings. 

A good and distinct species, much more narrowly winged than /falernaria. 
My description is from an example which had been compared with the type of 
calladelpha by Mr. N. B. Tindale, who informs me that eximia is the same species. 
It appears to be a variety differing only in the presence of a pale costal streak. 

South Australia: Adelaide, Port Lincoln. 


157. MONOCTENIA FALERNARIA. 

Gn., Lep., ix, p. 184; Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1208; Monoctenia 
fraternaria Gn., Lep., p. 184, Pl. 7, f. 3. 

go. 70mm. 9. 76-82 mm. Head pale-rosy; face dark-crimson. Palpi 1; crimson. 
Antennae pale-ochreous; pectinations in ¢ 12. Thorax, abdomen and legs pale- 
rosy, sometimes ochreous-tinged. Forewings broadly triangular, costa nearly 
straight, apex acute, slightly produced, termen sinuate beneath apex, strongly 
bowed above middle, oblique, slightly irregular; pale-rosy, sometimes ochreous- 
tinged; a slightly darker triangular area, sometimes outlined with fuscous, 
extending on costa from middle to four-fifths, and extending to beneath middle of 
disc, sometimes connected by one or more fuscous spots to dorsum beyond middle; 
cilia concolorous or fuscous. Hindwings with termen slightly rounded; colour 
and cilia as forewings; a suffused, pale-fuscous, median, transverse line. 

New South Wales: Bathurst. Victoria: Melbourne, Gisborne, Lorne. 
Tasmania: Hobart. South Australia: Adelaide, Port Lincoln. Western Australia: 
Denmark. 


Genus 24. PHALLARIA. 

Gn., Lep., ix, p. 186; Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1203; Prout, Gen. 
Insect., Oenochrom., p. 43. 

Face with slight rounded prominence, slightly rough-haired. Tongue strongly 
developed. Palpi moderate, porrect; second joint thickened with loosely appressed 
seales above and beneath; terminal joint moderate, cylindrical, obtuse. Antennae 
rather long (more than half), bipectinate to apex in both sexes, pectinations in ¢ 
moderately long, in 2 short. Thorax stout; densely hairy beneath. Femora hairy. 
Tarsi strongly spinulose. Forewings with 11 free, 9 and 10 long-stalked from cell, 
9 anastomosing with 8 to form a long narrow areole, but sometimes the connecting 
portion of 9 between 10 and 8 fails to develop. Hindwings with 3 and 4 widely 
separate, 3 arising from midway between 2 and 4, 5 from middle of cell, 6 and 7 
separate but approximated at origin, 12 approximated to cell from one-fourth to 
three-fourths. ~ 

Allied to Monoctenia, differing in the longer antennae, bipectinated in both 
sexes. Monotypical. 


158. PHALLARITA OPHIUSARTA. 

Gn., Lep., ix, 1858, 186; Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1203.—Oenochroma 
quaternaria H-Sch., Ausser. Schmet., i, 1858, p. 84, Pl. 95, f. 541.—Smerinthus ? 
wayli Tepp., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1882, 29. 

New South Wales: Sydney, Bathurst. Victoria: Geelong, Beaconsfield, 
Narracan, Warragul. South Australia: Mt. Lofty. 


A REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE 
[HYMENOPTERA: PROCTOTRYPOIDEHA],. 


By ALan P. Dopp. 
[Read 26th March, 1930.] 


The subfamily Teleasinae of the family Scelionidae is rich in species, poor 
in genera; Kieffer (Das Tierreich, 1926) listed 230 species under 9 genera. The 
group is a compact one, and the numerous species are very similar in general 
outline. Little is known of their host associations; one North American species 
has been reared from the eggs of a Carabid beetle, and the group may be 
restricted to parasitism of Coleopterous eggs. 

In my experience, the Australian species are found usually in damp situations, 
either among the low shrubs and undergrowth of the coastal heavily-timbered 
country, or among grass growing near streams or swamps. They are particularly 
abundant during the wet season summer months in the mountain scrubs of 
Southern Queensland, where they can be collected in numbers running over the 
surface of leaves within a few feet of the ground; on the other hand they are 
not plentiful in the humid tropical jungles of North Queensland. Their actions 
are rather slow in comparison with the rapid jerky movements and quick short 
flight of the majority of the Scelionidae. 

The chief characters of the subfamily are as follows: Head transverse, the 
vertex thin; ocelli situated close together, the lateral pair far removed from the 
eye margins; frons not depressed or excavated above the antennal insertion. 
Antennae inserted on a small prominence near the mouth; 12-jointed in both 
sexes; in the female with a compact 6-jointed club, the third and fourth funicle 
joints usually short; in the male, filiform, the flagellar joints usually long. Thorax 
stout; pronotum hardly visible from above; scutum with the parapsidal furrows 
either delicate or absent, deep and abbreviated in one genus; scutellum semi- 
circular, in one genus armed with a spine on either side; metanotum usually 
armed with from one to three teeth or spines; propodeum rather short, frequently 
armed with a tooth at the posterior angles, and sometimes with a small tooth 
at the anterior angles. Forewings often abbreviated; marginal vein very long, 
much longer than the stigmal vein, rarely as long as the submarginal, the stigmal 
vein usually short, the postmarginal absent. Abdomen rather short, rarely more 
than twice as long as its greatest width; broadly oval; narrowed at the base; 
lateral margins carinated on the ventral side; segment 1 sub-petiolate, sometimes 
with a basal prominence in the female; segment 3 the longest, except in Gryon 
Haliday; 4-6 short. 


The Genera of the Teleasinae. 


Kieffer recognized nine genera in his 1926 monograph, but he omitted 
Gryonoides Dodd (1919). Teleas Latreille, which occurs in Europe, Asia, and 
D 


42 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASIN AE, 


North America, is replaced in Australia by the allied Gryonella Dodd. Gryon 
Haliday, with three Huropean species, is known to me from description only, 
and its position in the Teleasinae appears doubtful. 

Two characters regarded by Kieffer as of sufficient importance for the separa- 
tion of genera, namely, the presence or absence of parapsidal furrows, and the 
presence Of a basal abdominal prominence in the female, I am unable to accept. 
For example, Hoplogryon Ashmead is distinguished from Trimorus Forster merely 
by the parapsidal furrow character; in the Australian species, the furrows, when 
present, are usually delicate, and in several species are present in the male and 
not discernible in the female. Hence I must regard Hoplogryon as a synonym of 
Trimorus. On the other hand, in the Australian species of Xenomerus Walker, 
the furrows, although abbreviated, are deep and profound. The abdominal 
. prominence may or may not be present in a closely-related group of Australian 
species. Kieffer has used this character to separate Propentacantha Kieffer 
(= Pentacantha Ashmead) from Hoplogryon, whereas Ashmead (1893) gives as an 
additional character ‘“‘postscutellum with three spines.’ Most of the species placed 
by Kieffer in the former genus will no doubt fall more naturally into V’rimorus. 
Propentacantha should fall as a synonym of Trissacantha Ashmead, and it is 
significant that, in writing of the latter, Ashmead (1893) states “it may be the 
opposite sex of Pentacantha but the mesonotum has two distinct furrows.” 

I recognize eight genera in the subfamily, which can be separated by means of 
the following key: 


1. Second abdominal segment longer than the third ................... Gryon Haliday. 
Second abdominaly segment ishorntenschan thescthird seers cic cence cians 2. 
2. Scutellum armed with a spine on either side ..................... Gryonoides Dodd. 
Seutellwm yaar | ys 5 fy sy he ese Ma a esa ewe aie ed ois iaoray aes dev nce Rl ey Spee ae a Blralceyiclhc Meteo ent Bo 
Sumuergsustout.othe femora: thickened arya sons cs ci ia rade SSO oe SEL Ua RE SRNR eee 4, 
Megsislendéry thestemorasnot thickened aa. aon seine Gee cee cielo eee 5 
AL IME NO ETO SARA OME) TOO CP HONE gsaccossccudchocboucuanoocacen Teleas Latreille. 
IMetano tum Mbiden tated yay... ny ae meee Me Chu ny Sips VNC Sa rolls ote eens Gryonella Dodd. 


5. Male antennae with whorls of long hairs; parapsidal furrows deep and abbreviated 
Abe Nill dep Ee Ce IN iene a ticular earn Me nanan! ane Dann yn inane ART DITO ADI. WILT. 


Male antennae merely pubescent; parapsidal furrows absent or delicate ........ 6. 
6.2 Meta no turmmiitmarm Calas fis sce eecdekenere aie cota ian conc teiotet ae eieNoke stenehononeoiets Paragryon Kieffer. 
MetanotumtwithronentoothnoriSpinemrnance ase eee eee Trimorus Forster. 
Metanotum with three teeth or spines ..................... Trissacantha Ashmead. 


There is yet the possibility of the grouping together of the last three genera 
in the above key under one head. In Trimorus, the metanotal tooth is very 
variable in size, and may be minute; in Paragryon gracilipennis Dodd, the 
metanotum is flat and quite unarmed, without even a median carina. The species 
herein described as Jrissacantha asperata might well be placed in Trimorus, yet 
is undoubtedly closely related to Trissacantha trifurcata and T. simulata. The 
three genera, Gryon, Gryonoides, and Teleas, have not been recognized in this 
country, while Gryonella appears purely Australian. 


Trimorus Forster. 
Hym. Stud., 2, 1856, 101, 104—Hoplogryon Ashmead, Bull. U.S. National 
Museum, 45, 1893, 200. 
In this genus I have included species with or without parapsidal furrows, and 
with or without a prominence on the basal abdominal segment of the female. 


BY A. P. DODD. 43 


Trimorus is the dominant genus of the subfamily, and, as in other parts of the 
world, the species are numerous in Australia, forty-three being recognized in this 
revision. 

The sexes may differ markedly in colour and in sculpture; indeed, species 
whose females are readily separated can be distinguished with great difficulty in 
the male sex. Again, in certain forms the parapsidal furrows are evident in the 
male, but cannot be discerned in the female. 

Generally, wing and antennal characters are very similar throughout the 
range of species. The type of sculpture, however, shows great diversity and 
appears to be constant in any species. Other distinguishing points may be found 
in the size and shape of the tooth or spine of the metanotum, and the shape of 
the posterior margin of the propodeum. 

Trimorus norfolcensis Dodd (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 48, 1924, 176), a 
wingless form from Norfolk Island, should be transferred to the genus Opistha- 
cantha Ashmead of the Scelioninae; the normally long vertex of the head, and 
the situation of the lateral ocelli close to the eye margins, show that it cannot 
be included in the Teleasinae. 


Key to the Australian Species of Trimorus Forster. 


ily TENG TaaEY VSI SPE UAE awe tee ch clacdod Cee Simicninae at adts heey Gael AEE TRO DRUR ARI ad! Hoo acute | hoya ee ant 2 
TMI SYS) AG) Be Akan a oe ere geo mE aR ace Oh ASE) Garrick SOREL REE CNet eas Sr Renee ets Toren eet Ln APM ID id aS a 39 
Vine Se abbreviate de om, pLUGiIMenbaryin tec teym came. cosscisiorets Ayevainie: aie cee eM eats Par veue ue: 3 
Wins Sash HAevelOpedieiter: SM seiuesa poke repaints ary bl shic tasytabe tice cee. RUS ngrirreatins Cuaron MAU Sipe vi 

SS CEIMentusPOLabdomentninelyeadenselysMstnia ter weir acm ieia neem creer tenwistriatus 
Serinentwsmoreabdomen tnreticulatemasey yen oieea es bey ee oie cia ele eie eee howensis 
Sesmentyswon abdomen) withoutadistinet Sculpture) x 1.) <a clctcielicrcitel cletebcnelcieie acres 4 
ARID DCEWEEONSH SIN OGLE Nieiah ei Hlpslary age Cera yelah sacs nk slisitekes wral Susie) a ahaa eo nae Lae 5 
WippemstronssdenselyannelivascullptuTRed ire e iy niece ule ie chee eee ae Monee A oneiel coat: 6 

by Segment 3 of abdomen densely pubescent ..:........4h.0. 5c eeeee ones parvulinus 
Sesmentysmofsab domenimot pubescent sien te cca eee ee aeeene te eae tantillus 

6. Forewings not extending beyond posterior margin of thorax; sculpture of scutum 
NUON AIOU OK! een AS oo CREA Dang Oca coi can fate Cecio cay O ian are ea Pee Beene te ee BvogoeeavcaoDe lativentris 
Forewings reaching posterior margin of second abdominal segment; sculpture of 
Sscutumedefinitelya punctater imine c cinco clsniscr cts sea cis oriecione parvipennis 

7. Large species with the apical antennal joints contrasting pale yellow ........ 8 
Small to medium-sized species, the apical antennal joints not contrasting pale 
SOTTO MEN WNT ato ee cue P sae ett tietrs eho bia REED sites Meh Maen alm heus Sus chee ntens Tage cee Sa VCR ier airy Recent 10 

8. Scutellum with a short tooth posteriorly; segment 3 of abdomen coarsely striate 
BFS bhi ace OkBio eee A)'Gh aks eater Tov Coit O70 oi IR Sos GI MERRCE oT en ae ae errean 4 ee itr uns 5 citreiclavus 


Scutellum without a tooth; segment 3 of abdomen punctate or rugose ........ 9 
9. Propodeum without definite teeth or spines; segment 3 of abdomen with a strong 


WAVY aE RUSOSSHSCUMD LUNG: aeptds Aap a ceeh suavai) cactebataiaura ialeus kane cence) oho che dare me ey rewet aye tricoloricornis 
Propodeum with strong teeth latero-posteriorly; segment 3 of abdomen strongly 
Confluentliys PUMCGLAES Rep Aereyeieirsnenoas ysis poseuteleloiaie tess aieiceneuer bie eitnarswemeovanetonewen er pallidiclavus 

10. Scutum smooth; parapsidal furrows forming broad sulci posteriorly .. mnitescens 
Scutum sculptured; parapsidal furrows absent or delicate .................. 11 

11. Forewings narrow, the marginal cilia long; a small black species with dark legs 
SO PR eee ar uaa ud tM unmae mar trabatua) avatieneltaiena tess sae ted a Wal sele lets eer a SV eeiiets RLSM cea RaNG SITE OMI LIU CIVITES, 
Forewings broad or moderately broad, the marginal cilia not particularly long .. 12 

12. Segment 3 of abdomen smooth, at the most striate at base; upper frons not striate, 
except in nigrinotum and striatiscutwm ....... 06. cece eee eee ce ete ee ees 13 
Segment 3 wholly or in part punctate or rugose, or wholly striate; upper frons 
GMCS, ERCOD OC, hel TMHGHOCH? SobocascdduoKaabosUGodDD Ooo b dn oO SOOO DOD SOM ObOE 25 

19, TOA GAnolkhy GOSRNIG .conodcosbaercasotoe gb oobocodo bono Manoo Rg soos as sdoudobuOoS 14 
Wine WRONG WINOWIS HCA GogbanoscoonoondoDUDOHODoDbODDOUCODobadoKDU DODO ODS 15 


14. Basal segment of abdomen with a distinct prominence; metanotal tooth replaced by 
Ame GH UITIPL ATTA ell even ae lerepskoue ato cole ds astelselrssicels eval sier olcuslieraiie) rhensmar Ler palreme bea nigrinotum 


44 


15. 


24. 


bo 
oO 


bo 
fo 


REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


Basal segment of abdomen without a prominence; metanotum with a minute tooth 
ACME NRO DOG CIOs bo Oe Cee I LEO OOO Goon Oro tet PO OnG ore striatiscutum 
Secutum showing a marked contrast in sculpture between the impressed reticulation 
and the posterior strong striae; a black species with dark legs and antennae 


ae aclofiatial iat cyl Reteoe ema Mee toto rie RMR tmive eI R GRAS oy mith om slic moter emer e Uren bn talon See aeons al re teteltaewe te aterrimus 
Seutum uniformly sculptured, or at least not showing a marked contrast between 
Ewouty pes OL SCulptUne tas sicatap ess encase Lwercioeensie Dino leks uote On Die Eric ane 16 
Basal segment of abdomen with a raised prominence ................. australicus 
Basal segment of abdomen without a prominence .......................+..-.-. 17 
Funicle joints yellow, 1 and 2 elongate, 2 longer than 1 ....................... 18 
Funicle joints dark, 1 and 2 rarely elongate, 2 never longer than 1 ............ 19 
Posterior margin of propodeum uniformly gently concave, without lateral teeth; 
EEKUICNS, akorbatus) Si gavel Ch iopoyersye Waveho WACK SosoSéadcudcoescdbondosouses varicornis 


Posterior margin of propodeum gently concave medially, straight laterally, armed 
with strong lateral teeth; funicle joints 3 and 4 wider than long ............ 


POR PL RNC RR Coe Ha tora crCiaiote crcsd Sielate ay saan Aig tee od ees Gicroisra-c, BaniatenG bicoloricornis 
Scutumiawith) somenfine striae: pOSterionlya een ere toes ecieioeiee atripes 
Some KAWOOve GUMS WOSKEIMOAK, pj scbscohoooduoduuanbondobooddbeouucoaoSbObOS 20 
Sculpture of scutum of fine impressed reticulation; spine of metanotum short .. 21 
Sculpture of scutum densely punctate; spine of metanotum usually long ...... 22 
Scutum uniformly reticulate, the parapsidal furrows not evident ........ sordidus 
Reticulation of scutum failing laterally and posteriorly; parapsidal furrows evident 

BISON O RE SeRey LCR SPIRE enti RES Secs), Set nie Oa Ca re CS vk Se rime APB suv assimilis 
Spine of metanotum short; upper frons reticulate ................... pulchrithoraa 
Spine of metanotum long and acute; upper frons smooth or finely punctate .... 23 
Upper frons with dense fine punctures and pubescence; posterior margin of pro- 

DOGEeUIM) Shr aATS IG ehh uc ewevtsyyaltos Poke nciccstooecuen wicclsclis) aes tate aeen areas 1c heal Ree eae amet eee punctatus 
Upper frons smooth, with scattered pin-punctures and pubescence; posterior margin 

(it jONOVoKLoKsybhoal HYOValeEnVNee COMES BoocposduvaoscdgobodopbouudguBOog do DOUSU DOO ES 24 
Abdomen slender, the basal segment not much shorter than its posterior width 

SRE AU MET Er oa attr eerie Ret BL CIRGEC TREE) te (od RE EN Ae ER AP tea concoloricornis 
Abdomen short and broad, the basal segment much shorter than its posterior width 

Bae Se Ure FEM oN aoe SSR TRE Ee Se etre dts hecsue Ne Settee ws vee Sateen EV A Me oT Ace ast Uap Se erste breviventris 
Segment 3 of abdomen uniformly striate, without other sculpture ........ striatellus 
Segment 3 densely punctate or reticulate, if partially striate, other sculpture or 

punctures are present either medially or laterally ...................... 26 


Posterior angles of propodeum armed with an outwardly-curved tooth, in front of 
which is a smaller tooth; segment 3 of abdomen longitudinally rugose-striate 


OEMS Ss cece Petey ters ra betas oa ah eivayre NomPar SUIS) Si ious allay! sin Jaf curs vats  tesatheunape treme oe PeeWee at ane Mite tase ene NOVISpPiNUS 
Posterior angles of propodeum acute or armed with a straight tooth, the smaller 
LOOEMVADSEDE Te Sears e te a Ae Sh CRIN Be IE RRS HC = GNC Son ee eee ae 27 
Seutum with strong longitudinal striae or rugae posteriorly; segment 3 of abdomen 
strongly longitudinally punctate and striate ...............:....::.. rugulosus 
Punctation of scutum reticulate or with a longitudinal tendency, but there are no 
(GUSNGHOUNEY TXOKAC EONS IADISAS OP SMES Gaococsonogdooondoan goods boOuRO UDO SO AOOS 28 
Segment 3 of abdomen with large scattered punctures, shortly foveate-striate at 
base; head abruptly smooth behind the line of the ocelli .......... pilosicornis 
Segment 3 of abdomen not sculptured as above; head rarely smooth behind the 
LIME OL AtHES. OGESTIT: Warsaw of fetse S Sle les fades ee CCS HE POPE Hee ave ele octet echo 29 
Segment 3 of abdomen striate medially, densely punctate laterally ........ fuscicoxa 
Seyiaase 8 HNN SENS EyMCl ToMMOUZNE LFodoodocccDD00G0gGG000000000050000 delicatus 
Segment 3 densely punctate or reticulate, the striae never present medially .. 30 
Sermientas) swith) impressed ereticulationmye stn reictirreriennkeen iercnciertsnat impressus 
Segment 3 with dense punctures or raised reticulation ....................°:. 31 
Sermenta sustronslynpunctatele eicmer acres picks tay mee eet Telia Wei ne iain Rat sme ne neare 32 
Seement 3 tinely, punctatertorsthesereaterspante-pci)-nacicyeyeie neni ncieensasy cnc te neo traas 35 


Metanotal spine narrowly acute, situated high above base of abdomen; posterior 
margin of propodeum straight laterally with strong outwardly-projecting lateral 
LES =e) 6 We Ms is Gees pert HRC aaa ioe canoe Br oMeND CNR RA ICnCn aL Goro ioIal oid.0, 6 q.cidte a acutispinus 
Metanotal spine broad and blunt, not situated high above base of abdomen; posterior 
margin of propodeum regularly concave, the lateral angles acute and hardly 


° 


PLOjectine OWEWALALY. eA eh eal cease oe cre Nae ncleMeMet ei live) a. sire hse ie tiemerte wee Peewee strate fete at 3 


33. 


36. 


(sx) 
~] 


39. 


40. 


48. 


aie). 


BY A. P. DODD. 45 


Segment 2 of abdomen strongly punctate between the striae medially; segment 3 


Smooth ymediallywonsposterion thirds soeiericiie ies onl seen lesen castaneithorax 
Segment 2 without punctures between the striae medially; segment 38 punctate 
Except MaLrrowilymalonsy pOStenlor Mar einucwse kettle choi acne eoreiieneLonensieitcnoiclans 34 
Posterior margin of propodeum lightly concave; base of abdomen without a raised 
PT OMMINE TAC Sy acy erate cc are Reels at Sey oy pe aU ead on ei Tabeeh aU aplak fot sl ayrel erat or eh cion ar el te ePaL EEA ok ate crassispinus 
Posterior margin of propodeum deeply concave to receive base of abdomen which 
HearsvalTAiseds PROMINENCE pas «yess seep seou eee erst S Go. sysuise ah © erecta seeder validispinus 
Segment 3 regularly punctate, without lateral striae, the lateral margins broadly 
STO OEY) Perey eaateer als Rescue ens Uan cary Keen tesuen net cules erat a ofM eae iit WANA PERNP ROR Sa ee Le oa eae 36 
Sesmentero pSthiaterlaverallliysice ey ey ryan wits harle tesa eee otal iiciairel ts avo sl orem oetea aie ee ahisiiel ts teiteiteuet otal Oth 
Size larger; posterior margin of propodeum not regularly concave, the posterior 
aAnelesmproyectin Ss ROuUbWaALdlyaeminme ae aero iene cs cicianeracre tenwuipunctatus 
Size smaller; posterior margin of propodeum regularly concave, the posterior angles 
NOPPROJECIMS 7 LOMEWaAN Gila coin srcucteraia clo Sissies oli aesalel eaehote ailseohonsenete pele cuss. rufithorax 
Segment 1 of abdomen without a raised prominence; funicle 1 no longer than the 
TOSS WGN Lc mel Crea ANS St aes ins Mee ee RCD TUR el UR a wale AN A Re condensus 
Segment 1 with a raised prominence; funicle 1 longer than the pedicel ........ 3 
Segment 1 of abdomen twice as wide posteriorly as basally; funicle joints dark 
Le SMS Lge Ree ORT eTU 8 Ma Ue os Ca EU ge CD FON Vg eR RRC eR i Ae aD Minn ERI Gr ‘...... latispinus 
Segment 1 one-half wider posteriorly than basally; funicle joints yellow .......... 
yah OIA SE ODD OIF CUO OEE COL Silo REC ER Cae catcr er a EEE CIS Siete Bag trials o nigriventris 
Segment 3 of abdomen densely punctate or strongly sculptured; frons striate .. 406 
Segment 3 smooth, at the most very shortly striate at base or with a few punctures; 
LFONSTUSUAallyeNOtEStEnIAtTET A MAAR c Saetiy eh ots) enteral on eaigd ale awake eechetie mueller ns inal ehebes 49 
Size very large; segment 3 of abdomen coarsely sculptured ................/. 41 
Size medium to rather small; segment 3 finely striate or punctate ............ 42 
Serimentes swithwa weawvive LusOSeSCUIDLUTGE Ha trees acieciciicis oer neien ? pallidiclavus 
Segment 3 regularly striate and punctate ........................ ? tricoloricornis 
Scutum with definite striae or rugae posteriorly ................-..2002- rugulosus 
SCucumlawithoOutadefiniterstriae One GUeaewa were) seein cical yet cmenet ch clinic teiceameiiache 43 
Segment 38 with fine impressed striae; vertex smooth behind the eyes .... delicatus 
Seementars, hinelvanp wn tate panies ces acer seeneb suai eh awer suena scare /eclsucoepian cha aa eee Bageay ate cou nee seca te saeyiaits 44 
Posterior margin of propodeum concave medially, almost straight laterally .... 45 
Rosteclon Mmarsin Of PLOpodeum sanifonmilys CONCAVE: ] 4 ae. = Ae cer elaine ealeieie evens 46 
Metanotal tooth short; propodeum not conspicuously pubescent; temples and cheeks 
SMOG Conan earlygeSO yee casein eee eee ce ancey eeenecebecus aeisteemebote eueeenace tenuipunctatus 
Metanotal tooth rather long; propodeum conspicuously pubescent; temples and 
PR ChHee:SHStronelys Stiga, sie nea dense ies ciel se eneveucen nie wom arte e a: aes ears siren) eed acutispinus 
Wiertex. Smooth behingdstheveviesmercce crea cls esis cies eels eeliel =e) Ayes cite aus what uenane condensus 
IWiertexeestria ten behinGdeienerT CyiS ie Pole Aare tare cmt uae fm ieee no: oh See ecceeee Pena e cateet Nae ee 47 
Punctate area of segment 3 of abdomen shorter medially than laterally .......... 
OF ONS Le en Aecho ura Orme Omer anata er eho rer aeateta In-olo te Cid) Ars ee cRO RCO Cia cis Reman en oS cere SU castaneithorax 
Puncitate area of segment 3 not shorter medially than laterally ................. 48 
Municlesjointsreradualilva decreasing imy lemme thw saya a oces al cia sai eee alee nigriventris 
HIT ClEMsy OINESMSUDE GUase atk Set ethane ae aes «SUSE SEA arin rece bans crassispinus 


5) 


Funicle joints with long pubescence; segment 3 of abdomen with definite scattered 
punctures laterally; frons striate; scutum and _ scutellum very coarsely 


TE CI CUA T C= PUT CEA as Negi repre ised cu settee Fen shai ihc ist io Sion ang oy. cus cbisronvenle depewanebroiet fstuenlnenle pilosicornis 
Funicle joints shortly pubescent; segment 38 without definite punctures laterally; 
Sculpture of) scutumy and scutellumunot coarse) 4.045. -s Soe clone ee 50 
Forewings narrow, the longest marginal cilia equal to the greatest’ width of the 
AIVAUAMED | Ae a eG Or GrORO REL GUO Ot GPU SERA NO FOIE Dy Pa eer Trot ECL One aaa ats aie ooturo d mymaripennis 
Forewings broad or moderately broad, the longest marginal cilia much shorter 
Hyrule wwe WA GIENS verens steven cusmereesy nice sions vey ep ay atcas eoeiiel ch @ ei-au oY) Seawelens neeauiens lometewel ces aperase Sl 
SCUTTRA GHEY WORE, oe 1sPCINS MOE SUP “Boot oncocnboooencotcobeecsue australis 
SGUUEUITI WALTON SILC teased | Stas eee eRe pale: eee Uae Pant UR na ce Men ee J Roe RH RL Ce ES 52 
HMuniclewiMotmantennacassomewhatishortenmcnanusi iets selene eee eee ee 53 
Funicle 1 somewhat longer than 3; frons not striate .................... assimilis 
FEO axel Oly ae Lele Kepuernpeteieaei cue ached eae eect cca) ta SRN a Ua na y aupnUP ee Page aati AR BRET IEE Ss 2 54 


AD ONOTHAISS TOW ALIA siXEXOU) cet cial haoelae a ign eure apted i die dia a aad a aie eRe prey Ue Wk St oe Pe Mey aad 55 


46 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


FAVE Grons; WHOllyaStr ia vey cycle ces Nelers Gira naa dolore toe ere ee aaaon tet Perched io auerenere nigrinotum 
WPPETLVONS, MOLTSEMIATEM sre Gore lalate yoilel oes AGN soley a eh an eME Renee ees ols Sem aerial, Ae eA punctatus 

boa Abdomenwblack,, (exceptyait DaSein nies ere ee ale teen Oe arc, eee ee a eee ene 56 
SepmentspZznand weg OSthyanyellowi Shi ete eae eer ere nee 57 

56. Metanotal tooth slender; abdomen slender, twice as long as its greatest width 
OL CRON eT CIE OO DIO MED a Denes Gia Mitta Sto nin err ae proto do oc oloio-c.b varicornis 
Metanotal tooth rather stout; abdomen stout, less than one-half longer than its 
SRCALESED WAG CICS cote me Jester cues ues wast otal Monies wot oTe UE eo eee Pe ce dbreviventris 

57. Scutum black, the punctures dense; antennae twice as long as the body .... speciosus 


Secutum red, the punctures sparse; antennae one-half longer than the body ........ 
Be ea ea Mee geen) aces alten oar wane Arava (oles pomeunlte etter cubated dsr guae Sep aC nd iach Sear oe pulcherrimus 


TRIMORUS TENUISTRIATUS, Nl. Sp. 


°. Length, 0-80 mm. Golden-brown, the abdomen dusky apically, the scutum 
and scutellum faintly dusky; antennae dull yellow-brown, the scape bright yellow; 
legs bright yellow; eyes black. 

Head normal; vertex very finely closely transversely striate; frons with 
similar longitudinal striae, but broadly smooth above the antennal insertion; 
cheeks smooth; a few fine hairs are scattered over the surface. Antennal scape 
long and slender; pedicel slender, fully twice as long as its greatest width; funicle 
1 as wide as and a little shorter than the pedicel, 2 slightly shorter than 1 but 
plainly somewhat longer than wide, 3 and 4 very short and transverse; club 
compact, joints 1-5 transverse. Thorax stout; scutum and scutellum with fine 
impressed reticulation and fine pubescence; metanotum with a very short tooth 
at meson; posterior angles of the propodeum with a minute tooth. Forewings 
vestigial, not extending beyond the posterior margin of the thorax. Abdomen 
stout, not one-half longer than its greatest width; segment 1 transverse; 3 occupy- 
ing most of the surface and not much wider than long; 1 and 2 rather strongly 
striate; 3 very finely closely striate; 4 and 5 short and transverse, minutely 
punctate and with fine pubescence. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat—South Australia: Mt. Lofty; one female collected in moss by R. J. 
Burton. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum. 

A small species with vestigial wings, easily distinguished by the fine striae 
of the head and segment 3 of the abdomen, and the golden-brown colour. 


TRIMORUS HOWENSIS Dodd. 
Hoplogryon howensis Dodd, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 48, 1924, 177. 


9. Length, 1:25 mm. Head dark brown or fuscous; thorax deep reddish- 
brown; abdomen fuscous, the basal segment bright red, its lateral line pale 
yellow; legs yellow-brown, the tarsi clear yellow; antennae dusky-black, the scape 
and pedicel dull yellow. 

Head slightly wider than the thorax, the vertex thin, the frons broad; 
eyes large, bare, wide apart; frons with a short median carina above the antennae; 
frons and vertex with dense close impressed reticulation and scattered short fine 
hairs, the lower face with longitudinal striae; cheeks very narrow dorsally, with 
fine surface reticulation; ocelli very small, the lateral pair somewhat nearer to 
the median ocellus than to the eyes. Antennal scape long and slender, as long as 
the next four joints united; pedicel one-third longer than its greatest width; 
funicle joints as wide as the pedicel, 1 one-half longer than pedicel, twice as 
long as wide, 2-4 gradually shortening, 4 a little longer than wide; club 6-jointed, 


BY A. P. DODD. 47 


rather slender, joint 1 as long as wide, 2-5 rather distinctly wider than long. 
Thorax as wide as long; scutum and scutellum with fine dense surface reticulation 
and fine dense pubescence; parapsidal furrows not indicated; metanotum with a 
small acute tooth medially; propodeum very short, visible as small lateral areas, 
the posterior angles with a small raised tooth. Forewings vestigial, very narrow, 
hardly extending beyond posterior margin of the thorax. Legs slender. Abdomen 
somewhat wider than the thorax, not greatly narrowed at base, broadly rounded 
posteriorly, one-third longer than its greatest width; segment 1 extremely short 
and transverse; 2 much longer than 1; 3 three times as long as 2, almost as long 
as its greatest width; 4-6 short; 1 and base of 2 striate; 2 and 3 with dense 
impressed reticulation and fine scattered pubescence; 4-6 with very fine sculpture 
and pubescence. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat—Lord Howe Island, the type female collected by A. M. Lea. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.14572. 

Readily distinguished from the other wingless species by the reticulate 
third abdominal segment and the longer funicle joints of the antennae. 


TRIMORUS PARVULINUS, Nl. Sp. 


9. Length, 0-75 mm. Head dull brownish-black; thorax dull reddish-brown; 
abdomen black, the base reddish-yellow; legs brown, the tarsi and base and apex 
of femora and tibiae yellowish; antennae piceous, the first two joints dull yellow- 
brown. 

Head somewhat distinctly wider than the thorax, the frons distinctly convex; 
eyes small, wide apart, weakly pubescent; vertex between the ocelli and toward 
the occipital margin coriaceous; frons smooth, with scattered fine hairs, the lower 
face densely finely striate; median carina of frons delicate but complete; cheeks 
smooth with a few fine hairs. Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel one-third 
longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 as wide as and a little shorter than the 
pedicel, a little longer than wide, 2 as wide as long, 3 and 4 small and transverse; 
club compact, the joints much wider than long. Thorax stout; scutum finely 
densely pubescent and densely very finely reticulate-punctate; scutellum densely 
punctate and pubescent at base, smooth posteriorly; metanotum with a _ short 
erect median tooth; propodeum very short, margined posteriorly, the posterior 
margin concave, the posterior angles weakly acute. Forewings vestigial, linear, 
not extending beyond the posterior margin of the second abdominal segment. 
Abdomen short, broad, strongly convex, distinctly wider than the thorax, one- 
fourth longer than its greatest width; segment 1 widening posteriorly, shorter 
than its basal width; 3 fully twice as long as 1 and 2 united; 4-6 very short; 
1 and 2 strongly striate; 3-5 smooth, with numerous scattered pin-punctures 
bearing fine hairs and forming a noticeable pubescence. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat—Victoria: Dandenong Ranges, two females in December, A. P. Dodd; 
Warragul, one female in June, F. E. Wilson. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratypes in the collections of Mr. 
F. HE. Wilson and the author. 

This species differs from Jativentris in the darker colouring of the thorax, 
legs, and basal joints of the antennae, and in the coriaceous sculpture of the 
head being confined to the vertex; it differs from tantillus in the definitely 
pubescent third segment of the abdomen. 


‘LIBRARY 


Mati r 


48 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASIN AE, 


TRIMORUS TANTILLUS, N. sp. 


?. Length, 0:95 mm. Head and abdomen, except the basal segment, black; 
thorax dull reddish-brown; basal segment of abdomen bright yellow; legs, including 
the coxae, golden-yellow; antennal scape yellow, dusky toward apex, the remaining 
joints fuscous. 

Vertex behind the ocelli with fine impressed reticulation and fine pubescence; 
frons smooth, polished, with a median carina, the lower face densely finely striate; 
cheeks smooth. Antennal scape slender, longer than the pedicel and funicle joints 
united; pedicel one-half longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 a little shorter 
than the pedicel, 2 as long as 1, 3 and 4 abruptly shorter and transverse; club- 
compact, the joints transverse. Thorax normal; scutum with fine raised reticula- 
tion and scattered fine pubescence; scutellum smooth, faintly sculptured at base; 
metanotum with a minute'tooth medially; posterior angles of the propodeum each 
with a small blunt tooth. Wings vestigial, not reaching beyond the posterior 
margin of the thorax. Abdomen stout, wider than the thorax, barely one-half 
longer than its greatest width; segment 1 short, transverse; 3 occupying most of 
the surface, slightly wider than long; 1 and 2, except posteriorly, strongly striate, 
the remaining segments smooth; 3 with scattered fine hairs posteriorly, 4 and 5 
with scattered hairs. 

3. Unknown. 

Habitat—Tasmania: Waratah; one female taken in moss and lichens by 
A. M. Lea. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum. 

Resembles lativentris, but in that species the upper frons is sculptured, and 
segment 3 of the abdomen is definitely pubescent and with numerous scattered 
minute punctures. 


TRIMORUS LATIVENTRIS, 0. Sp. 


©. Length, 0-75 mm. Head dull brown, the eyes black; thorax and basal 
segment of abdomen golden-yellow; abdomen black; legs bright golden-yellow; 
antennal scape and pedicel yellow, the funicle and club fuscous. 

Head somewhat wider than the thorax, the frons convex; upper half of frons 
and the vertex finely coriaceous, with fine pubescence; lower frons smooth 
medially, finely pubescent laterally; median carina of frons complete; vertex 
somewhat depressed medially; eyes small, wide apart, shortly pubescent; ccelli 
very minute. Antennal scape moderately short, but fully as long as the next five 
joints united; pedicel slightly longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 and 2 
globose, subequal, as wide as long; 3 and 4 minute, transverse; club compact, the 
joints transverse. Thorax not much longer than its greatest width; scutum and 
scutellum very finely, densely, indefinitely punctate-coriaceous and pubescent; 
metanotum with a minute medial tooth; propodeum very short, its posterior 
margin gently concave, its posterior angles subacute. Wings vestigial, narrow 
flaps that extend as far as the posterior margin of the thorax. Abdomen much 
wider than the thorax, rotund, as wide as long; segment 1 short and transverse; 
2 somewhat longer than 1 but very transverse; 3 almost twice as long as 1 and 2 
united; 4-6 very short, combined not one-third as long as 3; 1 and 2 longitudinally 
striate; remaining segments with a rather conspicuous pubescence of fine hairs 
arising from minute punctures. 

do. Unknown. 


BY A. P. DODD. 49 


Habitat——South Queensland: Mt. Tambourine, 2,000 feet, two females in 
February, A. P. Dodd. 
Holotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratype in the author’s collection. 


TRIMORUS PARVIPENNIS, nN. Sp. 


9. Length, 0°95 mm. Head brownish-black; thorax dull reddish-brown; 
abdomen black, the basal segment bright reddish-yellow; antennae piceous, the 
scape reddish basally; legs dull brown, the tarsi and apex of the femora and 
tibiae yellow. 

Head slightly wider than the thorax, the frons a little convex; eyes feebly 
pubescent; upper frons and vertex to the occiput densely coriaceous-reticulate and 
weakly pubescent; lower half of frons smooth and shining, the median carina 
delicate, one-half complete, not extending into the upper coriaceous area; face 
below the ventral line of the eyes finely densely striate; cheeks smooth, with 
scattered fine punctures. Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel slightly longer 
than its greatest width; funicle 1 fully as wide as the pedicel, a little longer than 
wide, 2 as wide as long, 3 and 4 small and very transverse; club compact, joints 
1-5 much wider than long. Scutum densely finely reticulate-punctate; scutellum 
with similar sculpture but smooth posteriorly at the median line; metanotum with 
a very short tooth medially; propodeum very short, its posterior border margined 
and gently concave, its posterior angles subacute. Forewings abbreviated, reaching 
to the base of segment 3 of the abdomen; slender; venation normal, extending 
almost to the apex. Abdomen somewhat wider than the thorax, one-third longer 
than its greatest width; segment 1 very short, one-half as long as its basal width; 
3 twice as long as 1 and 2 united; 4-6 very short; 1 and 2, except posteriorly, 
striate; 3 with numerous scattered minute punctures bearing fine hairs: 4-6 
densely finely punctate and pubescent. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat—vVictoria: Dandenong Ranges, one female in December, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. 

The wings are longer than in the other abbreviated-winged forms except 
parvulinus; nearest to lativentris but differs in the darker colour of the thorax, 
legs, and antennae, and in the more distinct punctation of the scutum. 


TRIMORUS CITREICLAVUS, Nl. SDP. 


°. Length, 2°60 mm. Black, the thoracic sutures showing reddish, the 
teeth of the propodeum red; legs, including the coxae, bright reddish-yellow; 
antennal scape brown, reddish at base, the next six joints brownish-yellow, the 
five apical joints intense pale yellow; mandibles red, the teeth black. 


Head normal; frons with a complete median carina from the antennal insertion 
to the frontal ocellus; vertex and upper half of frons very densely finely punctate 
and pubescent, the hairs short, fine and whitish; frons laterally with longitudinal 
striae and short whitish pubescence, the striae failing dorsally; cheeks with fine 
-longitudinal striae, fine dense punctures, and fine pubescence; eyes faintly 
pubescent; mandibles large, tridentate, the teeth long and acute. Antennal scape 
long and slender; pedicel one-half longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 some- 
what longer than the pedicel, twice as long as its greatest width, 2 as long as 1, 
3 quadrate, 4 transverse; club compact, the joints transverse. Thorax no longer 
than its greatest width; scutum and scutellum finely very densely reticulate- 


50 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


punctate and with fine pubescence; on either side against the posterior margin of 
the scutum are several irregular longitudinal striae or rugae; scutellum just 
before the posterior margin medially with a small acute tooth; metanotal spine 
very long, slender, curved, longitudinally striate, extending over the basal 
abdominal segment; propodeum short, declivous, coarsely punctate and finely 
pubescent, without carinae, the posterior margin gently concave, armed latero- 
posteriorly on either side with a strong acute projecting tooth or spine. Forewings 
extending a little beyond apex of abdomen; broad, smoky-brown; venation dull 
brown; submarginal vein attaining the costa at one-half the wing length, the 
marginal vein one-third as long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein short. 
Abdomen two-thirds longer than its greatest width; segment 1 one-half wider 
posteriorly than basally, a little shorter than its greatest width; 2 one-half longer 
than 1; 3 twice as long as 2 or as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 very strongly sparsely 
longitudinally striate; 3 more densely striate, the striae straight and regular, 
the surface between smooth; 4 and 5 with fine impressed reticulation and a few 
seattered small punctures; posterior margin of 2-5 narrowly smooth; 3-5 pubescent 
laterally; 4 and 5 with scattered hairs dorsally. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat. Queensland; exact locality unknown; one female taken by A. A. 
Girault. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. 

A large distinct species with pale antennae and strongly striate third segment 
of abdomen; the small tooth on the scutellum can hardly be considered more 
than a good specific character. 


TRIMORUS TRICOLORICORNIS, N. Sp. 


°. Length, 2-5-3:0 mm. Head and abdomen black; thorax dull black laterally 
and ventrally, chestnut-red dorsally, the scutellum and median third of the scutum 
black; coxae blackish, the legs bright reddish-yellow, the posterior tarsi dusky; 
antennal scape deep red, the next seven joints fuscous, the apical four very pale 
yellow. 

Head transverse, the vertex thin; behind the line of the ocelli very densely 
rather finely reticulate-punctate and with fine pubescence; frons rather strongly 
longitudinally striate, finely sculptured between the striae; median carina of 
frons complete; a small smooth area above the antennal prominence; cheeks 
densely punctate above, becoming striate. toward the mouth. Antennal scape 
long and slender; pedicel a little longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 
twice as long as the pedicel; 2 a little shorter than 1; 3 and 4 short, wider than 
long; club compact, joints 1-5 transverse. Thorax stout; scutum and scutellum 
very densely rather strongly reticulate-punctate, with a tendency toward 
longitudinal rugae on the scutum medio-posteriorly; metanotal spine very long, 
rather slender, subacute, its surface rugose; propodeum short, finely rugose- 
punctate and pubescent, its posterior margin concave for its entire length, its 
posterior angles without defined spines and not projecting outward. Forewings 
reaching apex of abdomen; broad; rather deeply smoky; marginal vein somewhat 
less than one-half as long as the submarginal; stigmal vein slender, long for the 
genus; one-fourth as long as the marginal; basal and median veins represented 
by yellow lines. Abdomen a little less than twice as long as its greatest width; 
segment 1 a little longer than its basal width, one-half wider posteriorly than 
basally; 2 one-third longer than 1; 3 one-third longer than 2, almost twice as 


BY A. P. DODD. 51 


wide as long; 4 less than one-half as long as 3; 5 and 6 quite short; 1 and 2 very 
strongly sparsely striate, smooth between the striae; 3 rather strongly longi- 
tudinally rugose-striate, which medially, especially toward base, runs to a curious 
Wavy or zigzag rugose pattern, the lateral margins densely punctate; 4 and 5 
densely punctate and pubescent, the punctures confluent laterally; lateral margins 
of 2 and 3 pubescent; 3-5 each with a smooth posterior path; 4 with a narrow 
smooth basal path. ‘ 


6. See remarks below. 

Habitat—South Queensland: Mt. Tambourine, 2,000 feet, two females in 
February, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratype in the author’s collection. 

A fine large species, distinguished by the pale apical antennal joints, and the 
sculpture of segment 3 of the abdomen. 

A male from the Blackall Range, Qld., has similar sculpture on segment 3, 
but is much larger, 4 mm., and the posterior angles of the propodeum bear short 
stout teeth which project outward. 


TRIMORUS PALLIDICLAVUS, nN. Sp. 


9. Length, 2°75 mm. Black, the thoracic sutures and teeth and the base of 
the abdomen dark red; coxae black, the trochanters and base of the femora bright 
yellow, the rest of the legs dusky-brown, the posterior tibiae and tarsi almost 
black; antennae brownish-black, the scape red at base, the apical five joints pale 
intense yellow; mandibles yellow, the teeth dark. 


Head normal, the vertex thin; vertex behind the line of the ocelli irregularly 
transversely striate, finely densely punctate, and with short pubescence, the striae 
continued down the cheeks, which are densely punctate; frons densely rather 
finely longitudinally striate and with short whitish pubescence, hardly sculptured 
between the striae; median carina of frons complete; eyes large, weakly pubescent; 
mandibles large, tridentate; antennal scape long and slender; pedicel a little 
longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 fully twice as long as the pedicel, rather 
more than twice as long as wide; 2 as long as 1; 3 quadrate; 4 transverse; club 
compact, joints 1-5 wider than long. Scutum and scutellum rather strongly 
reticulate-punctate, the posterior half, except laterally, of the scutum with irregular 
longitudinal rugae; with fine pubescence; spine of metanotum very long, slender, 
pointed, its surface rugose; propodeum short, rugose-punctate and pubescent, its 
posterior margin not carinate, gently concave medially, straight laterally, its 
posterior angles with a stout subacute tooth which projects outwardly. Fere- 
wings reaching apex of abdomen; broad; smoky-black, the basal third sub- 
hyaline; venation dark; marginal vein hardly one-half as long as the submarginal, 
the stigmal vein slender; basal vein faintly marked; hindwings lightly smoky, the 
' base hyaline. Abdomen two-thirds longer than its greatest width; segment 1 
as long as its basal width, one-half wider posteriorly than basally; 2 one-third 
longer than 1; 3 one-third longer than 2, twice as wide as long; 4 one-half as long 
as 3; 5 and 6 very short; 1 and 2 strongly sparsely striate, smooth between the 
striae; lateral margins of 2 strongly punctate; 3 and 4 strongly confluently 
punctate with a longitudinal tendency, against lateral margins with dense 
pubescence; 5 confluently punctate at base; 4 and 5 with scattered long hairs; 
3-5 each with a smooth posterior path. 

3. See remarks below. 


52 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


Habitat—South Queensland: Mt. Tambourine, 2,000 feet, two females in 
February, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratype in the author’s collection. 

A fine large species with very long metanotal spine; as in tricoloricornis, 
the antennae are pale apically, but in that species the sculpture of segment 3 of 
the abdomen is quite different, and the posterior margin of the propodeum is 
concave for its whole length and does not bear lateral spines. 

A male taken by H. Hacker in January at Stanthorpe, Qld., probably belongs to 
this species. It measures 3-5 mm.; the head and abdomen are black; thorax bright 
chestnut-red, black ventrally; coxae black, the legs bright reddish-yellow; antennae 
black, the scape reddish-yellow. Behind the line of the vertex the sculpture is 
densely punctate medially, punctate and irregularly longitudinally striate laterally; 
there are no longitudinal rugae on the scutum; the wings are subhyaline; the 
much finer punctures of segment 3 of the abdomen are divided into longitudinal 
rows by blunt striae. 


TRIMORUS NITESCENS Dodd. 


Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 40, 1916, 29. 

9. Length, 1:40 mm. Shining black; antennae black, the scape reddish at 
extreme base; coxae fuscous, the legs dusky brownish-yellow. 

Head normal, transverse, the frons somewhat convex so that the line of the 
vertex is rounded; frons and vertex smooth and shining with a few fine hairs; 
behind the line of the ocelli is a narrow path of fine impressed reticulation; 
median carina of frons delicate and complete; lower frons longitudinally striate, 
the lateral striae continued for some distance along inner margin of eyes; cheeks 
finely longitudinally striate; eyes large, with scattered short hairs. Antennal 
scape long and slender; pedicel one-third longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 
as long and as wide as the pedicel, 2 slightly shorter than 1, 3 and 4 small and 
transverse; club compact, joints 1-5 each twice as wide as long. Thorax no longer 
than its greatest width; scutum more transverse than usual, smooth and shining, 
with scattered long hairs, the posterior margin of the median lobes with a row of 
punctures; parapsidal furrows consisting of a row of punctures, but widening 
posteriorly to form broad shallow rugose sulci; margins of parapsides foveate; 
scutellum large, smooth, its margins foveate; metanotum with a broadly triangular 
acute tooth or spine which is finely punctate; propodeum rather short, foveate 
along margins, smooth centrally, narrowly divided at meson, the posterior margin 
carinate and uniformly gently concave, the posterior angles acute in the form of 
short teeth. Forewings reaching apex of abdomen; moderately broad; somewhat 
less than the basal half sub-hyaline, the rest rather deeply clouded; marginal 
vein about two-thirds as long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein very snort. 
Abdomen two-thirds longer than its greatest width; segment 1 one-half wider 
posteriorly than basally, a little shorter than its basal width; 2 one-third longer 
than 1; 3 one-half longer than 1 and 2 united, three times as long as 4-6 united, 
three-fourths as long as wide; 1 finely densely striate; 2 striate, smooth laterally 
and posteriorly; 3-5 smooth; scattered fine hairs are present on 4 and 5 and 
lateral margins of 3. 

do. Unknown. 

Habitat—New South Wales: Hawkesbury River, the holotype female taken 
in November by A. A. Girault. 


BY A. P. DODD. 53 


Holotype in the South Australian Museum, [.5429. 
Readily distinguished by the smooth scutum, and the broad rugose sulci at 
the posterior end of the parapsidal furrows. 


TRIMORUS MYMARIPENNIS Dodd. 


Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 38, 1914, 81. 

©. Length, 0-70 mm. Black, the base of the abdomen reddish; legs black, 
reddish at base and apex of femora and tibiae, the tarsi brown; antennae wholly 
black. 

Head normal, transverse; eyes faintly pubescent; smooth, shining, with 
scattered fine hairs, without sculpture except for a narrow path of polygonal 
reticulation immediately behind the ocelli. Antennae short; scape moderately 
long and slender; pedicel one-half longer than its greatest width; funicle joints 
smaller than the pedicel, 1 slightly longer than wide, 2 as wide as long, 3 and 4 
transverse; club compact, joints 1-5 each twice as wide as long. Thorax stout; 
scutum with fine pubescence and fine impressed reticulation; parapsidal furrows 
delicate but complete; scutellum with fine pubescence, smooth, finely sculptured at 
base; metanotum with a subacute, triangular, moderately short tooth; propodeum 
smooth, foveate along margins, the posterior margin gently concave and 
terminating in short subacute lateral angles. Forewings extending well beyond 
apex of abdomen; narrow, the apex sharply rounded, four times as long as their 
greatest width; longest marginal cilia equal to one-half the greatest wing width; 
distinctly brownish; venation terminating at one-half the wing length, the marginal 
vein somewhat shorter than the submarginal. Abdomen stout; one-third longer 
than its greatest width; segment 1 shorter than its basal width; 3 somewhat 
longer than 1 and 2 united; 4-6 short; 1 and 2 striate, the remainder smooth; 
4 and 5, and 2 and 3 laterally, with fine scattered hairs. 

do. Antennae wholly black; somewhat longer than the body; pedicel no 
longer than wide; funicle 1 twice as long as wide; 2 a little longer than 1; 
3 a little longer than 2; 3-9 subequal. Forewings rather more slender than in the 
female, the apex more pointed, the longest marginal cilia equal to the greatest 
wing width. 

Habitat.—North Queensland: Cairns district, one male (type) in May, A. A. 
Girault. New South Wales: Sydney, several females in October, A. P. Dodd. 
Victoria: Dandenong Ranges, one female in December, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.2002. 

A small black species, with very dark legs; distinguished by the slender wings 
with their long marginal cilia. 


TRIMORUS NIGRINOTUM Dodd. 


Pentacantha nigrinotum Dodd, Proc. Roy. Soc. Q'land, 26, 1914, 128. 

2. Length, 1:45-1:65 mm. Dull black; thorax dull red, the scutum and 
scutellum almost black; basal segment of abdomen, except its prominence, deep 
red; legs, including the coxae, golden-yellow; antennae fuscous, the scape reddish 
at base; mandibles yellow. 

Head transverse, the vertex thin; with fine silvery pubescence; vertex finely 
densely coriaceous-reticulate; frons finely densely longitudinally striate, but 
almost smooth above the antennal insertion; cheeks with scattered minute 
punctures; eyes bare; mandibles large, apparently bidentate, the teeth acute. 


54 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASIN AE, 


Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel one-half longer than its greatest width; 
funicle 1 as wide as and slightly longer than the pedicel, almost twice as long 
as wide, 2 slightly shorter than 1, 3 and 4 small and transverse; club compact, 
joints 1-5 each twice as wide as long. Thorax stout; scutum finely densely 
pubescent, shallowly but rather strongly reticulate-punctate, the parapsidal furrows 
absent; scutellum more definitely reticulate-punctate and with less pubescence; 
metanotum medially with a short thin convex lamella in lieu of the usual tooth; 
propodeum densely punctate laterally, its posterior margin deeply concave to its 
base, the delimiting carinae of the margin widely separated at its base, the posterior 
angles subacute but not toothed. Forewings hardly extending beyond apex of 
abdomen; broad; lightly brownish; marginal vein plainly shorter than the sub- 
marginal, the stigmal vein short. Abdomen a little less than twice as long as 
its greatest width; segment 1 plainly longer than its basal width, almost twice as 
wide posteriorly as basally, at base with a suberect horn or prominence that 
projects forward as far as the base of the propodeum; 2 no longer than 1; 3 as 
long as 1 and 2 united, three-fourths as long as wide, twice as long as 4-6 united; 
1 strongly striate, its horn smooth; 2 striate, but rather broadly smooth posteriorly; 
3 smooth, with scattered pubescence laterally; 4-6 with scattered pubescence. 


6. Head and thorax black; abdomen fuscous, the basal segment brownish- 
yellow, 2 light brown except laterally, 3 brown except laterally and posteriorly; 
legs, including the coxae, golden-yellow, the femora and tibiae lightly washed with 
brown, the tarsi dusky; antennae black, the scape fuscous but reddish at base. 


Frons with scattered fine pubescence, wholly regularly and rather strongly 
striate; scaly reticulation confined to the line of the ocelli, the declivous portion 
behind the ocelli to the occiput bearing numerous fine pubescent punctures. 
Punctation of the scutum shallower and less reticulate, the lateral lobes almost 
smooth posteriorly; parapsidal furrows delicate, wide apart, well-marked but 
failing anteriorly; scutellum punctate, smooth posteriorly; metanotum medially 
with a short stout blunt tooth; propodeum short, its posterior margin gently 
concave, the delimiting carinae almost meeting at its base medially. Korewings 
very broad and long, extending well beyond apex of abdomen. Antennae one-half 
longer than the body; scape rather short and stout, no longer than funicle 4; 
pedicel no longer than wide; funicle 1-3 subequal, 4-9 subequal, each about one- 
fourth longer than 3. 

Habitat.—Queensland: Herbert River, one female (type), A. P. Dodd; Brisbane, 
two females, two males, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.11037. 

The male differs considerably from the female and may possibly represent a 
distinct species; as in punctatus and varicornis, the parapsidal furrows are evident 
in the male and absent in the female. The combination of the two characters, a 
striate frons and smooth third segment of abdomen, occurs in nigrinotum and 
striatiscutum only; the latter may be separated from nigrinotum by the absence 
of the basal prominence of the abdomen, the minute metanotal tooth, and the 
presence of striae on the scutum. 


TRIMORUS STRIATISCUTUM, DN. SDP. 


9. Length, 150 mm. Black; antennae wholly black; legs fuscous, the tro- 
chanters, base of tibiae, and the tarsi, clear yellow. 


BY A. P. DODD. 55 


Head normal, transverse, with scattered white hairs; eyes large, faintly 
pubescent; frons wholly, rather strongly, longitudinally striate, the median carina 
not showing; vertex behind the line of the ocelli more finely, subobliquely striate; 
cheeks finely longitudinally striate. Antennal scape moderately long and slender, 
its articulate joint long; pedicel twice as long as its.greatest width; funicle 1 one- 
third longer than the pedicel, 2 plainly shorter than 1 and one-half longer than 
wide, 3 and 4 a little wider than long; club rather slender, not much wider than 
the funicle, joints 1-5 not greatly wider than long. Thorax stout; scutum rather 
strongly, somewhat irregularly, longitudinally striate and with scattered white 
hairs; scutellum striate laterally, smooth medially, with scattered white hairs; 
metanotum broadly smooth medially, with a very small acute tooth; propodeum 
clothed with dense silvery pubescence, divided medially by two straight carinae, 
the posterior margin uniformly concave, the posterior angles rounded and unarmed. 
Forewings reaching somewhat beyond apex of abdomen; moderately broad; smoky- 
brown; marginal vein two-thirds as long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein 
very long for the genus, one-third as long as the marginal vein. Abdomen two- 
thirds longer than its greatest width; segment 1 as long as its basal width, not 
much wider posteriorly than basally; 2 one-half longer than 1; 3 hardly longer 
than 1 and 2 united, less than twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 and base of 2 striate, 
the rest smooth; 4 and 5 and lateral margins of 2 and 3 with scattered white 
hairs. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat—North Queensland: Innisfail, one female in April, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. 

A distinct black species, with dark legs, strongly striate head and scutum, 
very small metanotal tooth, densely pubescent propodeum, and smooth third 
segment of abdomen. 


TRIMORUS ATERRIMUS, Nn. Sp. 


9. Length, 1:20 mm. Black; legs concolorous, the trochanters, knees, and 
tarsi testaceous; antennae biack. 

Head transverse, with a few scattered fine hairs; vertex, upper frons, and 
along eye margins of frons, with scaly reticulation, the middle frons smooth, the 
lower frons striate; cheeks narrow, finely reticulate against the eyes, smooth 
posteriorly and ventrally; median carina of frons complete; frons faintly convex; 
vertex precipitous behind the line of the ocelli; eyes large, bare. Antennal scape 
slender, as long as the next five joints combined; pedicel slender, two and a 
half times as long as its greatest width; funicle 1 as wide as and slightly 
shorter than the pedicel; 2 a little shorter than 1, but plainly longer than wide; 
3 small, as wide as long; 4 wider than long; club rather slender, the joints less 
than twice as wide as long. Thorax as wide as long; parapsidal furrows faintly 
marked; scutum with scattered white hairs, with fine polygonal scaly reticulation, 
the posterior third, except laterally, with short strong longitudinal striae; 
scutellum smooth, with scattered fine hairs, the margins strongly foveate; 
metanotum foveate, very transverse, its posterior margin very broadly triangular 
to form a short acute tooth medially; propodeum short, smooth, foveate along 
its margins, shortly narrowly divided medially, the posterior margin gently con- 
cave, the posterior angles prominent in the form of short acute teeth. Forewings 
reaching well beyond apex of abdomen; moderately broad; distinctly smoky; 
longest marginal cilia equal to one-third the greatest wing-width; venation termin- 


56 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


ating a little beyond middle of costa, the marginal vein somewhat shorter than 
the submarginal. Abdomen almost twice as long as its greatest width; segment 
1 widening posteriorly, a little shorter than its basal width; 2 a little longer 
than 1; 3 a little longer than 1 and 2 united, less than twice as long as 4-6 
united; 1 weakly striate at base and laterally, smooth posteriorly; 2 striate, but 
smooth posteriorly; 3-6 smooth; all segments with a few fine hairs. 

do. Unknown. 

Habitat—New South Wales: Sydney; four females in October, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratypes in the author’s collection. 

A small black species with dark legs, distinguished by the sharp contrast 
between the scaly reticulation and strong striation on the mesoscutum. 


TRIMORUS AUSTRALICUS Dodd. 
Pentacantha australica Dodd, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 38, 1914, 82. 


9. Length, 1:00 mm. Dull black or brownish-black, the base of the abdomen 
yellow; legs, including the coxae, yellow or yellow-brown; antennae wholly dark. 


Head smooth, with scattered fine hairs; a narrow line of polygonal sculpture 
immediately behind the ocelli; lower frons finely striate; frons more strongly 
convex than usual; eyes pubescent, small, not extending to the line of the 
vertex or behind the line of the lateral ocelli, their posterior margin straight. 
Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel one-third longer than its greatest width; 
funicle 1 as long and as wide as the pedicel, 2 a little shorter than 1, 3 and 4 
small and transverse; club joint 1 small and transverse, 2-5 each twice as wide as 
long. Thorax stout; scutum with fine pubescence and shallow confluent punctures, 
on the posterior third with fine longitudinal striae which are obscure on account 
of the punctate sculpture; scutellum smooth, with fine pubescence; metanotum 
with a short acute tooth; propodeum short, punctate laterally, the posterior angles 
slender, subacute, curved a little inwardly. Forewings extending a little beyond 
apex of abdomen; lightly clouded; moderately broad; marginal vein distinctly 
shorter than the submarginal, the stigmal vein short. Abdomen two-thirds longer 
than its greatest width; segment 1 widening a little posteriorly, as long as its 
basal width, at base with a short blunt erect horn; 3 somewhat longer than 1 
and 2 united, twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 striate, the horn smooth; 3 
smooth; 4 and 5 with fine pubescence. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat.—North Queensland: Cairns district; a small series. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.2003. 

A small species related to sordidus, assimilis, and their allies, but at once 
distinguished by the presence of the prominence on the basal abdominal segment; 
the sculpture of the scutum is stronger than in atripes and the striation less 
distinct. 


TRIMORUS VARICORNIS Dodd. 


Hoplogryon varicornis Dodd, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 38, 1914, 75.—H. bicolor 
Dodd, ibid., p. 76. 

9. Length, 1:50-1:75 mm. Dull black, the base of the abdomen deep-red; 
legs, including the coxae, golden-yellow; antennal scape and pedicel fuscous, the 
scape yellowish at base, the next five joints golden-yellow, the apical five joints 
fuscous. 


BY A. P. DODD. 57 


Head normal, transverse; eyes large, shortly pubescent; median carina of 
frons one-half complete from the antennal insertion; lower frons densely striate; 
upper frons, vertex and cheeks smooth, with a noticeable pubescence of fine short 
hairs; a very small coriaceous area on either side of the lateral ocelli. Antennal 
scape long and slender, as long as the next five joints combined; pedicel one- 
half longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 one-half longer than the pedicel; 
2 one-third longer than 1, fully three times as long as wide; 3 slightly more 
than one-half as long as 2; 4 a little longer than wide; club slender, the joints 
not or hardly wider than long. Thorax stout; scutum densely pubescent and 
rather finely confluently punctate; scutellum pubescent and very finely punctate 
at base, smooth posteriorly; spine on metanotum slender, thorn-like, somewhat 
curved, suberect; propodeum moderately long, smooth, its margins foveate, 
narrowly divided medially by parallel carinae, the lateral carinae complete 
and distinct, the posterior margin carinate and uniformly concave, the posterior 
angles acute, but not definitely toothed. Forewings extending somewhat beyond 
apex of abdomen; moderately broad; lightly stained; marginal vein two-thirds as 
long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein very short. Abdomen a little less 
than twice as long as its greatest width; segment 1 one-half wider posteriorly 
than basally, as long as its basal width; 2 one-half longer than 1; 38 a little 
longer than 1 and 2 united, more than twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 and basal 
two-thirds of 2 strongly striate, the rest smooth; 4 and 5, and 2 and 3 laterally, 
with a noticeable fine pubescence. 

6. Differs from the female in the rich chestnut-red colour of the thorax, 
the scutellum and the median lobe of the scutum being black; punctation of the 
scutum somewhat reticulate, the scutellum very narrowly punctate at base; 
parapsidal furrows very delicate but complete. Antennae black; almost twice as 
long as the body; pedicel short and stout; funicle 1 a little shorter than 2. 

.Habitat—North Queensland: Cairns district, a small series. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, [.1988. 

A medium-sized species with smooth head and third segment of abdomen, 
long funicle joints, and slender erect spine on the metanotum. The male, which 
differs markedly in colour, and in the presence of parapsidal furrows, was 
originally described as a distinct species. 


TRIMORUS BICOLORICORNIS, 0. SD. 


®. Length, 1:85 mm. Head and abdomen, except the first segment which is 
reddish, black; thorax dull reddish-brown, the scutum and scutellum dusky; 
antennal scape bright reddish-yellow, the pedicel brown, the funicle joints golden- 
yellow, the club black; legs, including the coxae, golden-yellow. 

Head transverse; smooth and polished, with a pubescence of fine white hairs; 
lower frons longitudinally striate; median carina of frons strong and complete; 
eyes shortly pubescent. Antennal scape long and slender, as long as the next five 
joints combined; pedicel one-half longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 one-third 
longer than the pedicel; 2 a little, yet distinctly, longer than 1, almost three 
times as long as wide; 3 abruptly shorter, as wide as long; 4 wider than long; 
club compact, the joints not greatly wider than long. Thorax stout; scutum 
confluently punctate, the punctures of moderate size, and with some pubescence; 
scutellum with similar sculpture, but narrowly smooth posteriorly; spine on 
metanotum slender, thorn-like, rather long, suberect; propodeum moderately short, 
strongly longitudinally striate and sulcate, its posterior margin gently concave 

E 


58 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


medially, then, at half the distance to the posterior angles, obtusely angled, the 
posterior angles armed with a strong, oblique, suberect tooth. Forewings extending 
somewhat beyond apex of abdomen; moderately broad; lightly yellowish; marginal 
vein two-thirds as long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein short. Abdomen 
twice as long as its greatest width; segment 1 one-half wider posteriorly than 
basally, a little longer than its basal width; 2 a little longer than 1; 3 slightly 
longer than 1 and 2 united, twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 strongly striate, 2 
smooth posteriorly and laterally; 3-5 smooth; 3-5, and 1 and 2 laterally, with 
scattered fine hairs. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat.—Queensland: locality unknown; one female taken by A. A. Girault. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. 

A medium-sized species, with smooth head and third segment of abdomen; as 
in varicornis, funicle 1 is shorter than 2; distinguished from varicornis by the 
shape of the posterior margin of the propodeum with its strong lateral teeth. 


TRIMORUS ATRIPES, n. name. 

Trimorus nigripes Dodd, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 38, 1914, 79 (preoccupied 
by T. nigripes Ashmead = Prosacantha nigripes Ashm., 1893). 

©. Length, 1:20 mm. Dull black, the first abdominal segment reddish; coxae 
fuscous, the legs dusky yellow-brown; antennae black. 

Mandibles broad, tridentate, the teeth subequal and acute. Antennal scape 
slender, longer than the next four joints united; pedicel one-third longer than 
its greatest width; funicle 1 as long and as wide as the pedicel, 2 as wide as long, 
3 and 4 narrower than 2, transverse; club compact, joint 1 small, 2-5 each twice 
as wide as long. Thorax scarcely longer than its greatest width; scutum 
pubescent, with faint delicate parapsidal furrows, the lateral lobes almost smooth, 
the median lobe with fine raised polygonal reticulation and on the posterior third 
with fine longitudinal striae; scutellum smooth, with scattered hairs; metanotum 
armed medially with a short acute tooth; propodeum short, hardly sculptured 
except for the foveate margins, narrowly divided at base, the carinae curving away 
very obliquely to form the strongly margined posterior border which is gently 
concave, the posterior angles strong and acute but not toothed. Forewings lightly 
clouded; moderately broad, the apex rather broadly rounded; marginal vein some- 
what shorter than the submarginal. Abdomen one-half longer than its greatest 
width; segment 1 plainly shorter than its basal width; 2 slightly longer than 1; 
3 one-half longer than 1 and 2 united, three times as long as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 
striate, 3 smooth, 4-6 with fine pubescence. 

3. Unknown. 

Habitat——North Queensland: Cairns district, the type female. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.1997. 

A small dark species related to sordidus from which it differs in the presence 
of fine striae on the scutum posteriorly and in the faint delicate parapsidal 
furrows. 


TRIMORUS SoRDIDUS Dodd. 
Hoplogryon sordida Dodd, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 38, 1914, 76. 
9. Length, 0:90-1:10 mm. Head black; thorax and abdomen brownish-black, 
the first abdominal segment reddish-yellow; legs, including the coxae, testaceous; 
antennae fuscous, the scape yellowish at base. 


BY A. P. DODD. 59 


Head transverse; eyes rather small, shortly pubescent; frons gently convex, 
smooth, with a noticeable fine pubescence; median carina of frons failing to reach 
the anterior ocellus; lower frons shortly striate; extreme line of the vertex finely 
sculptured, the declivous portion smooth and finely pubescent; cheeks smooth 
and not pubescent. Antennal scape moderately long and slender; pedicel a little 
longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 and 2 subequal, hardly longer than wide, 
3 and 4 small and wider than long; club compact, the joints much wider than long. 
Thorax stout; scutum with fine pubescence and fine raised reticulation, the 
parapsidal furrows not showing; scutellum with similar sculpture but smooth 
posteriorly; metanotum with a short acute broadly-triangular tooth; propodeum 
short, finely striate, the posterior margin gently concave, the posterior angles not 
prominent or acute. Forewings extending well beyond apex of abdomen; 
moderately broad; lightly stained; marginal vein a little more than one-half as 
long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein very short. Abdomen one-half longer 
than its greatest width; segment 1 much wider posteriorly than basally, shorter 
than its basal width; 2 somewhat longer than 1; 3 as long as 1 and 2 united, 
more than twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 striate; 2 striate except laterally and 
posteriorly; 3 shortly striate at base, smooth for the rest, with scattered hairs 
laterally; 4 and 5 with scattered hairs. 

d. Unknown. 

Habitat.—North Queensland: Cairns district, four females in May and June. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.1989. 

A small species with smooth head and third segment of abdomen, distinguished 
by the fine raised reticulation of the scutum. 


TRIMORUS ASSIMILIS Dodd. 

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 38, 1914, 79.—T. auratus Dodd, id., 40, 1916, 30.— 
T. leai Dodd, id., 48, 1924, 176. 

2. Length, 1:00-1:20 mm. MHead black; thorax varying from yellow-brown 
to dull black; abdomen black or deep brown, the basal segment bright red or 
yellow; legs rarely clear yellow, generally more or less dusky; antennae black or 
Piceous, the scape usually more or less yellowish. 

Head transverse, slightly wider than the thorax, the frons lightly convex, the 
vertex shortly precipitous from immediately behind the ocelli; smooth and 
polished, with scattered fine hairs; extreme line of the vertex with a narrow trans- 
verse path of very fine polygonal sculpture; median carina of frons fine and 
complete; eyes faintly pubescent; lower frons with striae converging to the 
mouth. Antennal scape long and slender, as long as the next six or seven 
joints united; pedicel two-thirds longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 as long 
as or slightly longer than the pedicel, 2 hardly shorter than 1, 3 and 4 small, 3 as 
wide as long, 4 wider than long; club compact, joints 1-5 almost twice as wide as 
long. Thorax stout; parapsidal furrows delicate but complete; scutum with fine 
dense pubescence and numerous pin-punctures, the median lobe with very fine open 
impressed reticulation which fails posteriorly, the lateral lobes hardly sculptured, 
the sculpture coarser and punctate on the declivous anterior portion of the median 
lobe; scutellum smooth, with scattered fine hairs, with fine sculpture at its 
extreme base; metanotum with a small acute tooth medially; propodeum short, 
smooth except along the foveate margins, faintly concave posteriorly, the carinate 
posterior margin narrowly divided medially and running obliquely to the acute 
posterior angles. Forewings extending well beyond apex of abdomen* moderately 


60 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


broad; marginal cilia short; lightly stained or noticeably brownish; marginal 
vein plainly shorter than the submarginal. Abdomen stout, hardly one-half longer 
than its greatest width; segment 1 widening posteriorly, not as long as its basal 
width; 3 one-half longer than 1 and 2 united, twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 and 
2, except posteriorly, striate; 3 wholly smooth, or shortly striate at base; 4-6 with 
scattered pubescence. 

dg. Scutum densely punctate anteriorly on the median lobe, smooth for the 
rest, except for pin-punctures bearing fine hairs; abdomen more slender, two-thirds 
longer than its greatest width, segment 1 as long as its basal width. Antennae 
not much longer than the body; black, the scape suffused with yellow; funicle 
1 hardly one-half as long as the scape, 1 and 2 subequal, each slightly longer 
than 3, 3-9 subequal. 

Habitat.—Queensland: Cairns district (type); Blackall Range; Brisbane; a 
small series. Norfolk Island, one female, A. M. Lea. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.1996. 

A small species, variable in colour, and to a lesser degree in the size of the 
metanotal tooth, which however is always small, and the stoutness of the abdomen; 
segment 3 of the abdomen may be wholly smooth or shortly striate at base. The 
type is a male from Cairns; auratus is a yellow female from Cairns; Jeai, a female 
from Norfolk Island, does not seem distinct. 

Trimorus assimilis is close to sordidus, but in the latter species the frons 
and eyes are noticeably pubescent, the parapsidal furrows are not marked, and 
the reticulate sculpture of the scutum and scutellum is coarser and raised. 


TRIMORUS PULCHRITHORAX Dodd. 

Hoplogryon pulchrithorax Dodd, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 38, 1914, 78. 

©. Length, 1:00 mm. Head dull black; thorax varying from bright chestnut- 
red with the scutellum and the centre of the scutum blackish to deep dull red; 
abdomen dull brownish-black, the first segment bright reddish-yellow; antennal 
seape yellow or somewhat dusky, the pedicel brown, the funicle and club fuscous. 

Head normal, transverse, the frons gently convex; eyes moderately large, 
bare; upper frons and vertex with fine close reticulation and fine pubescence, 
the middle frons smooth, the lower frons striate; median carina of frons delicate, 
failing to reach the anterior ocellus; cheeks smooth, with a few fine hairs. 
Antennal scape long and slender, as long as the next six joints combined; pedicel 
one-half longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 as long as the pedicel, 2 a little 
shorter than 1, 3 and 4 small, wider than long; club compact, joints 1-5 each twice 
as wide as long. Thorax stout; scutum finely confluently punctate and with fine 
dense pubescence; scutellum with similar sculpture, but smooth posteriorly; 
metanotum with a rather short, subacute, broadly triangular tooth; propodeum 
foveate along its margins, short, the posterior margin gently concave, the posterior 
angles subacute but not truly toothed. Forewings extending well beyond apex of 
abdomen; lightly stained; moderately broad; marginal vein not greatly shorter 
than the submarginal, the stigmal vein short. Abdomen short and broad; one- 
third longer than its greatest width; segment 1 much wider posteriorly than 
basally, much shorter than its basal width; 2 almost twice as long as 1; 3 two- 
thirds longer than 1 and 2 united; 4-6 very short; 1 striate; 2 striate, except 
posteriorly and laterally; 3-5 smooth; 3 with scattered hairs laterally and 
posteriorly; 4 and 5 with fine hairs. 

6. Unknown. 


BY A. P. DODD. 61 


Habitat.—Queensland: Cairns district, one female (type) in September; Bris- 
bane, two females in December; Mt. Tambourine, six females in March. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, I.1994. 

A small species with finely punctate scutum and reticulate upper frons, 
characters which separate it from sordidus and assimilis; very similar to 
breviventris, but in that species the upper frons is smooth and the metanotal spine 
or tooth is much longer. 


TRIMORUS PUNCTATUS Dodd. 

Hoplogryon punctata Dodd, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 38, 1914, 77.—Trimorus 
niger Dodd, ibid., p. 79.—T. nigrellus Dodd, ibid., p. 81. 

©. Length, 1:50-1:'75 mm. Black; legs, including the coxae, golden-yellow, the 
femora and tibiae washed with brown; antennae fuscous, the scape reddish at 
base. 

Head normal, transverse; vertex and upper half of frons densely finely punctate 
and pubescent; immediately behind the ocelli are traces of weak cross-striae; 
against the occiput the surface is smooth and shining; above the antennal 
insertion is a broad smooth area; lower frons with strong striae converging to the 
mouth, the lateral striae being continued on either side of the smooth area; median 
carina of frons strong and complete; cheeks with fine pubescence and sparse fine 
punctures; eyes large, shortly pubescent. Antennal scape long and slender; 
pedicel one-third longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 slightly longer than 
the pedicel, 2 hardly shorter than 1, 3 and 4 small, 3 wider than long, 4 transverse; 
club compact, joints 1-5 each less than twice as wide as long. Thorax stout; 
parapsidal furrows not evident; scutum finely confluently indefinitely punctate 
with a reticulate tendency, and with fine dense pubescence; scutellum with 
similar stronger sculpture, but smooth posteriorly; spine on metanotum long, 
narrowly triangular, acute, horizontal, projecting over basal segment of abdomen; 
propodeum short, densely punctate and with fine pubescence, its posterior margin 
not carinate, almost straight, armed at the posterior angles with a stout tooth 
that projects outwardly. Forewings hardly reaching beyond apex of abdomen; 
broad; subhyaline or lightly brownish; marginal vein a little more than one-half 
as long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein short. Abdomen two-thirds longer 
than its greatest width; segment 1 twice as wide posteriorly as basally, no longer 
than its basal width; 3 one-third longer than 1 and 2 united, twice as long as 
4-6 united; 1 and 2 (except posterior margin) strongly striate; 3 shortly or about 
one-third striate; the rest smooth; 4 and 5, and 3 laterally and posteriorly, with 
seattered hairs. 

6d. Femora, tibiae, and tarsi more dusky than in the female: upper frons 
and vertex with scattered hairs, almost devoid of sculpture except for a small 
area between the lateral ocelli and the eyes; parapsidal furrows complete and 
distinct; sculpture of scutum finer, that of the lateral lobes subobsolete; pro- 
podeum very narrowly divided at meson, the dividing carinae subparallel for a 
short distance, then curving sharply to form the almost straight posterior margin. 
Antennae one-half longer than the body; black, the scape red at base; scape rather 
short, no longer than funicle 3; pedicel as wide as long; funicle 1 and 2 subequal, 
3 one-half longer than 2, 3-9 subequal. 

Habitat. Queensland: Cairns district (type), three females, two males, April- 
November; Westwood, three males in December and June; Brisbane, two females 
in September; Chinchilla, one male in January. 


62 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASIN AB, 


Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.1992. 

As in varicornis, the parapsidal furrows are distinct in the male, obsolete 
in the female. In the specimens from Westwood, Brisbane, and Chinchilla, the 
metanotal spine is more slender and less horizontal, and the propodeum is more 
strongly pubescent. 


TRIMORUS CONCOLORICORNIS, Nn. Sp. 


®. Length, 1:90 mm. Black, the antennae concolorous; legs deep yellow- 
brown, the anterior coxae fuscous. 

Head normal, transverse; eyes large, lightly pubescent; surface smooth, with a 
scattered pubescence of fine white hairs; behind the line of the vertex is a path 
of fine reticulation which is continued behind the eyes; frons above the antennal 
insertion broadly devoid of hairs; lower frons longitudinally striate; median 
carina of frons delicate; cheeks with fine pubescence. Antennal scape long and 
slender; pedicel almost twice as long as its greatest width; funicle 1 one-third 
longer than the pedicel, 2 as long as 1, 3 short, quadrate, 4 wider than iong; club 
compact, joints 1-5 each twice as wide as long. Thorax stout; scutum finely 
confluently punctate and with fine dense pubescence; scutellum with scattered 
long hairs, punctate at base, smooth for the rest; metanotal spine long, slender, 
thorn-like, suberect; propodeum short, foveate along its margins, smooth centrally, 
the posterior margin gently concave or broadly oblique from the median line, the 
posterior angles projecting outwardly in the form of acute teeth. Forewings 
extending a little beyond apex of abdomen; moderately broad; lightly stained; 
marginal vein hardly more than one-half as long as the submarginal, the stigmal 
vein short. Abdomen twice as long as its greatest width; segment 1 not much 
wider posteriorly than basally, as long as its basal width; 2 one-half longer than 
1; 3 as long as 1 and 2 united, almost twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 and basal 
two-thirds of 2 strongly striate, the rest smooth; 4 and 5, lateral and posterior 
margins of 3, and lateral margins of 1 and 2 with fine scattered hairs. 

d. Unknown. : 

Habitat.—Queensland: Brisbane, one female in February, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. 

A medium-sized species with smooth head, slender erect metanotal spine, and 
smooth third segment of abdomen; differs from punciatws in the longer first and 
second funicle joints of the antennae, smooth upper frons, concave posterior 
margin of the propodeum, and segment 1 of abdomen not widening greatly 
posteriorly; differs from breviventris in the longer abdomen and longer first and 
second funicle joints. 


TRIMORUS BREVIVENTRIS, 0. Sp. 


9. Length, 1:35 mm. Black, the thorax showing dull reddish, the basal 
abdominal segment bright reddish-yellow; legs reddish-yellow, the coxae darker; 
antennae piceous, the first two joints washed with brown. 

Head normal; line of the vertex narrowly coriaceous and pubescent, this 
sculpture continued for a short distance behind the eyes; between the coriaceous 
area and the posterior margin is a narrow smooth area; median carina of frons 
complete; frons smooth, shining, the upper frons with a few scattered pubescent 
punctures, the lower frons densely striate from just above the ventral end of the 
eyes to the mouth; cheeks smooth, with a few fine hairs. Antennal scape long 


BY A. P. DODD. 63 


and slender; pedicel one-third longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 as wide as 
the pedicel and plainly longer, twice as long as wide, 2 a little longer than wide, 
3 and 4 small and transverse; club compact, joints 1-5 each twice as wide as long. 
Thorax stout; scutum finely confluently punctate and pubescent, in some lights 
showing faint parapsidal furrows; scutellum finely punctate and pubescent at base, 
smooth posteriorly; metanotal spine rather long, triangular, slender and pointed 
at apex, from lateral aspect horizontal and situated high above the base of the 
abdomen; propodeum very short medially, its posterior border margined and 
rather deeply concave, its posterior angles in the form of subacute teeth that do 
not project outwardly. Forewings somewhat variable in length and width; 
reaching beyond or barely to apex of abdomen; moderately broad or rather narrow; 
marginal cilia rather short; marginal vein one-half as long as the submarginal, 
the stigmal vein short. Abdomen short and broad; one-third longer than its 
greatest width, much narrowed at base; segment 1 short, much wider posteriorly 
than basally, no longer than its basal width; 38 one-half longer than 1 and 2 
united, twice as long as 4-6 united, three-fourths as long as wide; 1 and 2 strongly 
striate, the rest smooth; 4 and 5, and 2 and 3 laterally, with fine scattered hairs. 


6S. Differs from the female as follows: thorax dorsally chestnut-red, the 
scutellum blackish; legs washed with brown, the posterior tibiae and tarsi dusky; 
parapsidal furrows delicate but distinct; lateral lobes of the scutum smooth with 
scattered punctures; scutellum smooth; metanotal tooth shorter, stouter, and 
suberect; propodeum longer, its posterior angles subacute but not toothed; segment 
1 of abdomen one-half wider posteriorly than basally, but no longer than its 
basal width; forewings extending well beyond apex of abdomen. Antennae almost 
twice as long as the body; black, the scape brownish-yellow; funicle 1 and 2 each 
somewhat shorter than 3, which is as long as the scape; 3-9 about subequal. 


Habitat.—South Queensland: Mt. Tambourine, 2,000 feet, four females in 
March and April, A. P. Dodd; Bunya Mountains, 2,500 feet, one male in April, 
A. P. Dodd. Victoria: Dandenong Ranges, four females in December, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype and allotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratypes in the author’s 
collection. 

A medium-sized species, with smooth frons, densely punctate scutum, and 
smooth third segment of abdomen; differs from punctatus and. pulchrithorazr in 
the smooth upper frons; distinguished from concoloricornis in colour and the 
short broad abdomen. 


TRIMORUS STRIATELLUS, Nl. Sp. 
9. Length, 1:00 mm. Deep brown or brownish-black, the basal abdominal 
segment reddish-yellow; antennae piceous, the scape suffused with yellow; legs, 
including the coxae, bright yellow a little suffused with dusky. 


Head normal, the frons somewhat convex; frons very densely finely striate 
and with scattered fine hairs, smooth above the antennal insertion,! the median 
carina delicate but complete; vertex to the posterior margin finely densely 
coriaceous; weak striae occur behind the eyes; cheeks smooth, with a few fine 
hairs. Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel one-third longer than its greatest 
width; funicle 1 as wide as the pedicel and slightly shorter, a little longer than 
wide, 2 as long as wide, 3 and 4 very small and transverse; club compact, joints 
1-5 transverse. Thorax stout; scutum densely finely pubescent, the anterior half 
very finely transversely reticulate, the posterior half finely densely reticulate; 


64 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


scutellum very finely densely reticulate-granulate; metanotal spine moderately 
long, broadly triangular, its apex slender and pointed; propodeum short, its 
posterior margin concave at meson, almost straight for most of its length, the 
posterior angles. armed with a short acute tooth which projects somewhat out- 
wardly. Forewings extending a little beyond apex of abdomen; moderately broad; 
lightly tinted; marginal vein hardly more than one-half as long as the sub- 
marginal, the stigmal vein rather long for the genus. Abdomen short and broad, 
one-half longer than its greatest width; segment 1 much wider posteriorly than 
basally, hardly as long as its basal width; 3 almost twice as long as 1 and 2 
united; 4-6 united not one-half as long as 3; 1 and 2 strongly striate; 3 with fine 
dense striae which fail toward posterior and lateral margins; 4 and 5, and lateral 
margins of 3, with scattered hairs. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat.—South Queensland: Brisbane, two females, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratype in the author’s collection. 

A small species with finely striate frons, dlstine meer by the regular striae 
of segment 3 of the abdomen. 


TRIMORUS NOVISPINUS, N. SD. 

©. Length, 1:25 mm. Head black; thorax fuscous above, blackish laterally, 
the metanotum and its spine bright red; abdomen black, the first segment reddish; 
coxae blackish, the legs bright orange-yellow; antennae fuscous, the scape yellow 
for its basal half, brownish for apical half, the pedicel contrasting clear yellow. 

Head normal, the frons a little convex; frons finely densely longitudinally 
striate and with a noticeable fine pubescence, the upper frons finely sculptured 
between the striae;. above the antennal insertion is a rather small smooth area; 
median carina of frons complete; line of the vertex finely granulate-reticulate, 
this sculpture continued for a short distance behind the eyes; behind the granulate 
sculpture the surface is smooth and shining to the occiput; cheeks smooth, except 
for scattered fine pubescence; eyes very widely separated, small, shortly pubescent. 
Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel one-third longer than its greatest width; 
funicle 1 a little, yet distinctly, longer than the pedicel, two-thirds longer than 
wide; 2 a little shorter than 1; 3 and 4 small, wider than long; club compact, the 
joints transverse. Thorax stout; scutum and scutellum very densely finely 
reticulate-punctate and finely densely pubescent; spine of metanotum long, slender, 
and acute, with a median carina on its basal half, from lateral aspect the spine 
is curved and is situated high above the base of the abdomen; propodeum short, 
strongly reticulate, the posterior margin gently concave, the posterior angles in 
the form of strong acute teeth which curve obliquely outwardly; there is a small 
acute tooth on the lateral margins a little in front of the posterior angles. Fore- 
wings extending well beyond apex of abdomen; broad; lightly brownish; marginal 
vein one-half as long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein moderately short. 
Abdomen one-third longer than its greatest width; segment 1 less than one-half 
as wide basally as posteriorly, shorter than its basal width; 3 one-half longer 
than 1 and 2 united, much longer than 4-6 united, slightly more than one-half 
as long as wide; 1 and 2 strongly striate, polished; 3 finely irregularly 
longitudinally striate and indefinitely punctate, pubescent laterally, the sculpture 
failing medially toward the posterior margin; 4 smooth posteriorly, at base densely 
finely punctate and with long fine pubescence, the punctate area very short 
medially; 5 with a line of dense fine pubescent punctures at base. 

6. Unknown. 


BY A. P. DODD. 65 


Habitat—South Queensland: Mt. Tambourine, 2,000 feet, one female in March, 
A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. 

A species with striate frons, long slender metanotal spine, and densely 
sculptured third segment of abdomen; the additional small tooth on the lateral 
margins of the propodeum, just in advance of the curved posterior-lateral tooth, 
will serve to separate it from similarly sculptured species. 


TRIMORUS RUGULOSUS Dodd. 
Hoplogryon rugulosa Dodd, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 38, 1914, 77. 
Q. Length, 1:50-1:75 mm. 
Head black; thorax deep red, the scutum and scutellum wholly or partly 
blackish, the pleurae sometimes more or less blackish; abdomen black, the basal 
segment red; legs bright reddish-yellow, the coxae fuscous; antennae fuscous or 
dusky-brown, the club sometimes lighter brown. 


Head normal, transverse; eyes moderately large, lightly pubescent; frons 
longitudinally striate except for a smooth central area above the antennal insertion, 
and with fine pubescence, the upper frons indefinitely sculptured between the 
striae, the median carina complete; line of the vertex coriaceous; behind the line 
of the vertex the surface is smooth with fine suboblique striae, which are often 
faint or absent except laterally; cheeks finely striate, smooth between the striae 
dorsally, densely sculptured ventrally; mandibles broad, with three strong sub- 
equal teeth. Antennal scape long and slender, as long as the next six joints 
combined; pedicel one-third longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 somewhat 
longer than the pedicel, twice as long as wide, 2 hardly shorter than 1, 3 and 4 
short, wider than long; club compact, joints 1-5 almost twice as wide as long. 
Thorax stout; scutum with fine pubescence, finely confluently punctate, the 
punctures failing toward the posterior margin and being replaced by rather strong 
somewhat irregular longitudinal striae; scutellum finely confluently punctate and 
pubescent, but smooth medio-posteriorly; spine of metanotum long, rather slender, 
narrowly triangular, acute, from lateral aspect situated high above base of the 
abdomen; propodeum short, shining, with several strong striae or carinae, the 
posterior margin carinate and almost straight, the posterior angles in the form 
of stout acute teeth that hardly project outwardly. Forewings extending well 
beyond apex of abdomen; broad; lightly stained brownish; marginal vein a little 
more than one-half as long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein oblique and 
moderately long for the genus. Abdomen one-third longer than its greatest 
width; segment 1 much wider posteriorly than basally, somewhat shorter than its 
basal width; 2 one-half longer than 1; 3 somewhat longer than 1 and 2 united, 
fully twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 strongly striate, smooth between the 
striae; 3 coarsely longitudinally irregularly striate, rugose-punctate \between the 
striae, the sculpture somewhat variable, the posterior margin narrowly smooth, 
‘the surface with scattered hairs; 4 densely punctate or rugose-punctate and with 
fine pubescence, the posterior margin smooth; 5 narrowly punctate and pubescent 
at base. 

dg. Like the female, but the thorax is mainly bright chestnut-red, the scutum 
and scutellum somewhat blackish; the posterior tibiae and tarsi are dusky; 
sculpture of segment 3 of abdomen much finer, 4 and 5 with fine close impressed 


66 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


reticulation, indefinite punctures and long fine hairs. Antennae almost twice as 
long as the body; black, the scape dusky-brown, red at base, the pedicel reddish; 
scape short and stout, no longer than funicle 3; pedicel no longer than wide; 
funicle 1 and 2 subequal; 3 a little yet distinctly longer than 2; 3-9 subequal. 


Habitat——Queensland: Cairns district (type); Blackall Range; Brisbane; Mt. 
Tambourine; many females, one male. 


Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.1991. 


A medium-sized species with striate frons and coarsely sculptured third 
segment of abdomen; distinguished by the irregular strong striae on the scutum 
posteriorly. 


TRIMORUS PILOSICORNIS, nN. Sp. 


©. Length, 150 mm. Black; thorax deep dull red, the scutum and scutellum 
blackish; basal segment of abdomen reddish; antennae fuscous, the scape reddish- 
yellow; legs dull yellow-brown, the coxae darker. 


Head transverse, the frons gently convex, the vertex convex from eye to eye; 
eyes rather small, very wide apart, sparsely pubescent; frons wholly strongly 
sparsely longitudinally striate and with sparse fine hairs, the median carina 
complete; behind the line of the vertex the surface is smooth and shining, with 
a few fine hairs; cheeks smooth, with a few fine hairs. Antennal scape long and 
slender; pedicel two-thirds longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 as long as 
the pedicel, 2 hardly shorter than 1, 3 and 4 small, wider than long; club compact, 
joints 1-5 much wider than long. Thorax stout; scutum and scutellum coarsely 
reticulate-punctate or rugose-punctate; spine on metanotum long, slender, narrowly 
triangular, acute, from lateral aspect curved and situated high above base of 
abdomen; propodeum short, declivous, smooth with several strong striae or 
carinae, the posterior margin straight, the posterior angles produced in the form 
of strong acute teeth which do not project outwardly. Forewings reaching well 
beyond apex of abdomen; broad; faintly stained; marginal vein two-thirds as long 
as the submarginal, the stigmal vein long for the genus. Abdomen one-third 
longer than its greatest width; segment 1 much wider posteriorly than basally, 
a little shorter than its basal width; 2 a little longer than 1; 3 somewhat longer 
than 1 and 2 united, fully twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 strongly striate; 
3 strongly foveate-striate at base and without punctures for median third, the 
lateral third on either side with numerous moderate-sized punctures bearing fine 
hairs and with traces of impressed striae; 4 and 5 densely punctate and pubescent; 
3-5 each with a smooth posterior path. 


6. Agrees with the female, but the punctures on segment 3 of the abdomen 
are small and scattered, the median striae or foveae very short; segments 4 and 5 
with one row of setigerous punctures at base; segment 1 fully as long as its 
basal width, one-half wider posteriorly than basally. Antennae one-half longer 
than the body; black, the scape and pedicel testaceous; funicle joints with a 
pubescence of rather long hairs without a regular arrangement; scape rather 
short and stout; pedicel no longer than wide; funicle joints subequal, each two- 
thirds as long as the scape. 


Habitat.—Queensland: one female, without further locality, A. A. Girault; 
Cairns district, one male in August, A. P. Dodd. 


Holotype and allotype in the Queensland Museum. 


BY A. P. DODD. 67 


A medium-sized species with striate frons, smooth vertex, coarsely sculptured 
scutum and scutellum, and long slender metanotal spine; the punctation of segment 


3 of the abdomen readily distinguishes it; the long pubescence of the male 
antennae is an unusual feature. 


TRIMORUS FUSCICOxA Dodd. 
Hoplogryon fuscicoxa Dodd, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Auwst., 39, 1915, 450. 


9. Length, 150 mm. Head black; thorax red-brown, blackish on the pleurae, 
the scutum medially, and the scutellum; abdomen black, reddish at base; coxae 
fuscous, the legs reddish-yellow, the tibiae a little dusky apically; antennae wholly 
black. 

Head normal, transverse; vertex and upper frons finely closely reticulate- 
punctate, without pubescence; median carina of frons strong and complete; lower 
half of frons smooth, narrowly striate laterally, densely striate against the mouth; 
cheeks finely densely punctate. Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel one-half 
longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 one-half longer than the pedicel, two and 
a half times as long as its greatest width; 2 as long as 1; 3 one-third as long as 
2, slightly longer than wide; 4 wider than long; club rather slender, the joints 
not greatly wider than long. Thorax stout; scutum and scutellum very densely 
finely reticulate-punctate and with light pubescence, the posterior margin of the 
scutellum narrowly smooth; tooth of metanotum rather long, moderately slender, 
acute, its surface finely sculptured; propodeum finely punctate and pubescent, 
smooth medially, its posterior angles armed with a suberect tooth that projects 
slightly outwardly. Forewings extending well beyond apex of abdomen: broad; 
rather deeply smoky; stigmal vein rather long for the genus. Abdomen stout, 
one-half longer than its greatest width; segment 1 twice as wide posteriorly as 
basally, shorter than its basal width; 3 two-thirds as long as wide; 1 and 2 
strongly striate; 3 densely punctate and pubescent laterally, the median half 
with strong striae which, except at the median line, are convex outwardly, the 
striae failing broadly toward the posterior margin’ which is broadly semi- 
circularly smooth; 4 and 5 densely punctate and pubescent at base, smooth 
posteriorly. 

¢6. Unknown. ) 

Habitat.—North Queensland: Cairns district, 2,500 feet, two females in May, 
A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.5174. 

This species may be recognized by the sculpture of segment 3 of the abdomen, 
in conjunction with the non-striate upper frons. 


TRIMORUS DELICATUS, Nn. Sp. 


©. Length, 1:25 mm. Head and abdomen black, the base of the abdomen 
reddish-yellow; thorax fuscous or dull reddish-brown; legs reddish-yellow, the 
coxae fuscous; antennae dull brown or fuscous, the scape dusky yellow. 

Head normal; frons rather sparsely striate and with scattered pubescence, 
broadly smooth above the antennal insertion, with fine indefinite punctures 
between the striae on the upper frons, the median carina complete; vertex densely 
reticulate-granulate and pubescent, smooth toward the foveate posterior margin; 
cheeks smooth except for a few minute pubescent punctures; eyes very wide apart, 
rather small, sparsely pubescent. Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel one- 


68 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


half longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 as long as the pedicel, 2 a little 
shorter than 1, 3 and 4 very small and transverse; club compact, the joints 
transverse. Thorax stout; scutum and scutellum densely, rather finely, reticulate- 
punctate and pubescent, the sculpture more open and inclined to fail medially 
against the posterior margin of the scutellum; metanotal spine moderately long, 
acute, rather narrowly triangular, its surface rugose, from dorsal surface project- 
ing beyond the posterior margin of the propodeum, from lateral aspect horizontal 
and situated rather well above the base of the abdomen; propodeum short, rugose- 
striate, its posterior margin uniformly rather deeply concave, its posterior angles 
blunt and curved a little inwardly. Forewings extending a little beyond apex 
of abdomen; moderately broad; lightly stained; marginal vein one-half as long 
as the submarginal, the stigmal vein short. Abdomen a little less than twice as 
long as its greatest width; segment 1 one-half as wide basally as posteriorly, 
as long as its basal width; 38 two-thirds as long as wide, a little longer than 
1 and 2 united, twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 strongly striate; 3 with fine 
striae, between which are fine shallow punctures, the sculpture weaker and inclined 
to fail medially, without pubescence except for scattered hairs toward lateral 
margins which are broadly smooth, the posterior margin narrowly smooth, but 
broadly smooth medially; 4 densely finely granulate and with long pubescence, 
smooth along posterior margin and narrowly at meson; 5 at base finely granulate 
and pubescent. 

3g. Like the female, but the legs are suffused brownish, delicate parapsidal 
furrows are evident, and segment 3 of the abdomen is more broadly smooth 
laterally and posteriorly. Antennae black, the scape dusky-yellow; somewhat 
longer than the body; pedicel short and stout; funicle 1 one-half as long as the 
scape; funicle joints, except the last which is distinctly longer, subequal or 
almost so. 

Habitat.—South Queensland: Mt. Tambourine, 2,000 feet, five females, two 
males, in March, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype and allotype.in the Queensland Museum. Paratypes in the author’s 
collection. 

A rather small species with striate frons and rather long metanotal spine; 
distinguished by the sculpture of segment 3 of the abdomen, fine striae between 
which are shallow punctures. 


TRIMORUS IMPRESSUS, Nn. SD. 

oO Length, 1:00 mm. Head black; thorax dull reddish-brown; abdomen 
brownish-black, reddish-yellow at base; antennal scape golden-yellow, the next five 
joints brownish-yellow, the club fuscous; legs golden-yellow, the coxae brown. 

Head transverse, the frons distinctly convex; eyes rather small, widely 
separated, shortly pubescent; frons very finely densely longitudinally striate and 
with scattered fine hairs, broadly smooth above the antennal insertion; median 
carina of frons delicate; vertex narrowly granulate-reticulate, smooth toward the 
occipital margin; cheeks smooth, with a few hairs. Antennal scape long and 
slender; pedicel two-thirds longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 plainly shorter 
than the pedicel, slightly longer than wide, 2 as wide as long, 3 and 4 small and 
transverse; club stout, compact, the joints transverse. Thorax stout; scutum and 
scutellum finely densely reticulate-punctate and with fine pubescence; spine of 
metanotum moderately long, acute, rather narrowly triangular; propodeum short, 
finely sculptured, the posterior margin gently concave, the posterior angles subacute 


BY A. P. DODD. 69 


and not projecting outwardly. Forewings extending slightly beyond apex of 
abdomen; moderately broad; faintly tinted; marginal vein one-half as long as 
the submarginal, the stigmal vein normally short. Abdomen two-thirds longer 
than its greatest width; segment 1 much wider posteriorly than basally, hardly 
as long as its basal width; 3 almost twice as long as 1 and 2 united, three times 
as long as 4-6 united, almost as long as wide; 1 and 2 striate; 3 with a 
network of impressed polygonal reticulation, broadly smooth and with scattered 
hairs laterally, narrowly smooth posteriorly; 4 smooth posteriorly and narrowly 
medially, with fine reticulation and fine hairs at base; 5 with a basal line of 
similar sculpture. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat—South Queensland: Bunya Mountains, 2,500 feet, two females in 
April, A. P. Dodd. 


Holotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratype in the author’s collection. 


A small species with finely striate frons, distinguished by the impressed 
reticulation of segment 3 of the abdomen. 


TRIMORUS ACUTISPINUS, 0. Sp. 


2. Length, 2:00 mm. Head black; thorax deep dusky reddish-brown, the 
scutum more or less bright red around its margins; abdomen black, the basal 
segment reddish; coxae fuscous, the legs bright golden-yellow; antennal scape 
and pedicel dusky-brown, the scape red at base, the funicle joints contrasting 
golden-yellow, the club black. 


Head normal, transverse, the eyes large and faintly pubescent; median 
carina of frons complete; frons rather strongly longitudinally striate, without a 
smooth area above the antennal insertion; between the ocelli the surface is 
rugose-reticulate; behind the line of the vertex to the occipital margin medially 
are irregular transverse striae, but laterally there are strong suboblique striae 
which are continued behind the eyes down the cheeks; cheeks strongly sparsely 
striate; frons, except medially above the antennae, vertex and cheeks with a 
pubescence of very fine short white hairs. Antennal scape long and slender, 
as long as the next six joints combined; pedicel one-half longer than its 
greatest width; funicle 1 one-half longer than the pedicel, more than twice as 
long as its greatest width, 2 slightly shorter than 1, 3 somewhat wider than long, 
4 transverse; club compact, joints 1-5 each twice as wide as long. Thorax stout; 
scutum rather’ finely confluently or reticulately punctate, the sculpture coarser 
against the posterior margin medially, with fine pubescence; scutellum with 
similar punctation and pubescence; metanotal spine subhorizontal, situated high 
above the base of the abdomen, long, rather narrowly triangular, narrowly acute 
at apex; propodeum densely finely pubescent and punctate, the posterior margin 
gently concave at meson, then obtusely angled and straight to the posterior 
angles which are armed with a strong suberect acute tooth which projects 
obliquely outwardly. Forewings extending beyond apex of abdomen; broad; 
lightly brownish; marginal vein one-half as long as the submarginal, the stigmal 
vein perpendicular, long for the genus, one-fourth as long as the marginal. 
Abdomen two-thirds longer than its greatest width; segment 1 almost twice as 
wide posteriorly as basally, no longer than its basal width; 2 one-half longer than 
1; 3 slightly longer than 1 and 2 united, somewhat longer than 4-6 united; 1 and 2 
strongly striate, their extreme lateral margins punctate and pubescent; 3 uniformly 


70 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


strongly confluently punctate with a slight longitudinal tendency, the lateral 
margins densely finely punctate and pubescent, the posterior margin narrowly 
smooth; 4 with similar large confluent punctures but narrowly smooth at the 
median line, smooth posteriorly; 5 with rather large punctures at base; 4 and 5 
with fine pubescence. 

6. Scutum and scutellum bright chestnut-red; posterior tarsi dusky, the 
tibiae dusky toward apex. Surface between and behind the ocelli irregularly 
longitudinally striate and somewhat rugose, but laterally behind the line of the 
vertex the striae are strong, regular, somewhat oblique and continued down the 
cheeks; pubescence of propodeum stronger, white and conspicuous, the teeth at 
the posterior angles shorter than in the female; segment 1 of abdomen one-half 
wider posteriorly than basally; 3 not as long as 1 and 2 united; 1 and 2 striate, 
the latter smooth laterally; 3 for its basal two-thirds medially with small dense or 
confluent punctures, on either side with a few striae, the lateral margins rather 
broadly smooth except for scattered punctures; 4 and 5 with numerous scattered 
setigerous punctures, densely coriaceous and pubescent laterally, smooth 
posteriorly; lateral margins of 1-3 with scattered fine hairs. Antennae very long, 
twice as long as the body; black, the scape and pedicel reddish-yellow; scape 
moderately long and stout, no longer than funicle 1; funicle joints almost sub- 
equal, 2 and 8 slightly the longest. 

Habitat.—South Queensland: Mt. Tambourine, 2,000 feet, one male, three 
females in February, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype and allotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratypes in the author’s 
collection. 

A moderately large species with striate frons and strongly confluently punctate 
segment 3 of the abdomen. The sculpture of segment 3 is similar in crassispinus, 
but in that species the metanotal spine is of a different shape and is not placed 
high above the base of the abdomen, the posterior margin of the propodeum is 
uniformly gently concave and its toothed posterior angles are not suberect, and 
funicle joints 1 and 2 of the antennae are shorter. 


TRIMORUS CASTANEITHORAX Dodd. 
Hoplogryon castaneithorax Dodd, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 39, 1915, 450. 


9. Length, 1:85 mm. Head black; thorax brownish-black, reddish along the 
margins of some of the sclerites; abdomen black; coxae fuscous, the legs reddish- 
yellow, the femora a little dusky; antennae wholly fuscous. 


Head normal, transverse; eyes large, wide apart, shortly pubescent; frons 
striate and with fine scattered hairs, the upper frons definitely punctate between 
the striae; a broad smooth area occurs above the antennal insertion; median carina 
of frons distinct and complete; vertex medially between and behind the ocelli finely 
reticulate-punctate; extending from just behind each lateral ocellus to the eyes 
is a narrow coriaceous-reticulate area; toward the occipital margin the surface 
is smooth with scattered long hairs, but laterally weak oblique striae are continued 
behind the eyes; cheeks smooth with numerous pubescent punctures of moderate 
size. Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel one-half longer than its greatest 
width; funicie 1 somewhat longer than the pedicel, almost twice as long as wide, 
2 a little longer than wide, 3 and 4 small and transverse; club compact, joints 
1-5 each twice as wide as long. Thorax stout; scutum and scutellum rather finely 
confluently reticulate-punctate and with fine pubescence; metanotal tooth strongly 


BY A. P. DODD. Wal 


reticulate, large, stout, blunt at apex, projecting a little over the base of the 
abdomen, from lateral aspect horizontal and not situated high above the base 
of the abdomen; propodeum short, densely punctate and hardly pubescent, the 
posterior border margined, uniformly distinctly but not deeply concave, the posterior 
angles acute in the form of stout teeth which do not project outwardly. Forewings 
extending a little beyond the apex of the abdomen; broad; rather deeply brownish; 
marginal vein one-half as long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein rather long 
and oblique for the genus. Abdomen two-thirds longer than its greatest width; 
segment 1 one-half as wide basally as posteriorly, as long as its basal width, 
slightly raised at base; 2 one-half longer than 1; 3 almost twice as long as 2, 
one-half longer than 4-6 united; 1 strongly striate, with large punctures between 
the striae laterally; 2 irregularly striate and strongly punctate medially, more 
definitely punctate laterally; 3 confluently punctate with a marked tendency toward 
longitudinal arrangement, the punctures moderately large, the median line with 
small punctures but rather broadly smooth on the posterior third, the posterior 
margin narrowly smooth, the lateral margins broadly pubescent; 4 with dense 
moderate-sized punctures bearing long hairs, smooth at the median line and along 
the posterior margin; 5 densely punctate, shortly so medially, and with long 
hairs. 

¢. Thorax dorsally rich chestnut-red, the scutum and scutellum dusky 
medially; first segment of abdomen bright red; antennae black, the scape and 
pedicel brownish-yellow. 

Posterior angles of the propodeum subacute, without teeth; segment 1 of 
abdomen not widening greatly posteriorly, as long as its basal width; 2 wholly 
striate; 3 with rather dense small punctures, broadly smooth medio-posteriorly 
and along the posterior margin, smooth laterally except for scattered punctures. 
Antennae almost twice as long as the body; funicle joints long and subequal, 
each two-thirds as long as the scape. 

Habitat—North Queensland: Cairns district, 2,500 feet, several males, one 
female in April and May, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.5175. 

Very close to crassispinus, but the females differ in several particulars; in 
crassispinus the median carina of the frons is not distinct for its entire length, 
there is no coriaceous area on the vertex, the punctation of the scutum and 
scutellum is coarser, segment 2 of the abdomen is not punctate medially, and 
segment 3 is not smooth medio-posteriorly. 


TRIMORUS CRASSISPINUS, N. SD. 


°. Length, 1:75-2:00 mm. Head black; thorax deep dusky reddish-brown, the 
scutum and scutellum almost black; abdomen black, deep reddish at base; coxae 
fuscous, the legs clear reddish-yellow; antennal scape and pedicel dusky-brown, 
the scape reddish at base, the funicle joints contrasting rather clear yellow, 
the club fuscous. 

Head normal, transverse; eyes large, wide apart, shortly pubescent; frons 
rather strongly striate, smooth between the striae except for fine punctures bearing 
fine hairs; a smooth area is present above the antennal insertion; median carina 
of frons delicate above, not showing on the smooth area; vertex with long fine 
hairs, medially between and behind the eyes reticulate-punctate, laterally the 
surface is smooth with a few oblique striae which are continued behind the eyes; 
cheeks striate and with fine scattered hairs. Antennal scape long and slender; 


72 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


pedicel one-half longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 as wide and a little longer 
than the pedicel, 2 as long as the pedicel, 3 and 4 abruptly short, wider than long; 
club compact, joints 1-5 each twice as wide as long. Thorax stout; scutum and 
scutellum rather strongly confluently reticulate-punctate, with a slight longitudinal 
tendency on the scutum, and with fine pubescence; metanotal tooth strongly 
reticulate, large, stout, blunt at apex; projecting beyond the posterior margin of 
the propodeum, from lateral aspect horizontal and not situated high above the 
base of the abdomen; propodeum short, densely punctate and finely pubescent; its 
posterior margin not carinate, uniformly gently concave, the posterior angles 
in the form of short acute teeth which hardly project outwardly. Forewings 
extending a little beyond apex of abdomen; broad; rather deeply brownish; 
marginal vein one-half as long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein long and 
oblique for the genus, one-fourth as long as the marginal. Abdomen two-thirds 
longer than its greatest width; segment 1 hardly one-half as wide basally as 
posteriorly, as long as its basal width; 2 one-half longer than 1; 3 twice as long as 
2, one-half longer than 4-6 united; 1 and 2 strongly striate, the latter reticulate- 
punctate latero-posteriorly; 3 rather strongly regularly confluently punctate 
with a slight longitudinal tendency, narrowly smooth against the posterior margin, 
and small punctures are present medially against this smooth path; 4 and 5 with 
similar punctures, but the smooth posterior path is relatively longer, 5 being 
very shortly punctate medially; 4 and 5 and lateral margins of 2 and 3 with 
fine pubescence. 

g. Thorax dorsally rich chestnut-red, the scutum and scutellum dusky 
medially; antennae black, the scape and pedicel clear yellow. 

Frons wholly striate, without a smooth area above the antennal insertion, 
the median carina complete; posterior border of propodeum delicately margined, 
the posterior angles subacute but without teeth; forewings extending well beyond 
apex of abdomen; segment 1 of abdomen not greatly wider posteriorly than basally, 
as long as its basal width; 2 wholly striate; 3 with small dense punctures which 
are sometimes divided into longitudinal rows by fine striae, broadly smooth 
laterally and posteriorly, with scattered hairs laterally; 4 and 5 with larger. 
punctures bearing long hairs, smooth posteriorly. Antennae one-half longer than 
the body; funicle joints almost subequal in length, each two-thirds as-long as 
the scape. 

Habitat—South Queensland: Mt. Tambourine, 2,000 feet, a series, December- 
March, A. P. Dodd; Bunya Mountains, 2,500 feet, one female in April, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype and allotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratypes in the author’s 
collection. 

The contrast between the sculpture of segment 3 of the abdomen in the sexes 
is striking. 


TRIMORUS VALIDISPINUS, Nl. SD. 


2. Length, 1:75-2:00 mm. Head black; thorax deep dusky brown, marked 
here and there with dull red; abdomen fuscous, showing reddish at base; coxae 
fuscous, the legs reddish-yellow, the tibiae a little dusky; first six antennal joints 
dusky brown, the scape reddish at base, the club fuscous. 

Head normal, transverse; eyes large, wide apart, shortly pubescent; frons 
rather strongly striate and with scattered hairs, the upper frons definitely 
shallowly punctate between the striae; a rather narrow smooth area occurs 
above the antennal insertion; median carina of frons not evident; vertex between 


BY A. P. DODD. 73 


the ocelli and medially to the occipital margin densely reticulate-punctate and 
with irregular short longitudinal striae, laterally the surface is smooth with oblique 
striae continued behind the eyes; cheeks densely punctate and with some irregular 
striae. Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel one-half longer than its greatest 
width; funicle 1 somewhat longer than the pedicel, almost twice as long as wide, 
2 a little longer than wide, 3 and 4 transverse; club compact, joints 1-5 each twice 
as wide as long. Thorax stout; scutum and scutellum moderately-strongly 
confluently punctate or reticulate-punctate, and with fine pubescence; metanotal 
tooth as in crassispinus and castaneithorax; propodeum densely punctate and 
faintly pubescent, its posterior border lightly margined and deeply concave to 
receive the base of the abdomen, the posterior angles subacute and not projecting 
outwardly. Forewings extending a little beyond apex of abdomen; broad; some- 
what brownish; venation as in crassispinus. Abdomen three-fourths longer than 
its greatest width; segment 1 much wider posteriorly than basally, as long as its 
basal width, with a short suberect horn or prominence at base; 2 somewhat longer 
than 1; 3 twice as long as 2, one-half longer than 4-6 united; 1 strongly striate; 
2 strongly striate medially, strongly shallowly punctate laterally; 3 with moderately 
large confluent punctures with a tendency toward longitudinal arrangement, the 
extreme median line with some small punctures, pubescent toward lateral margin; 
4 and 5 densely strongly punctate and with long hairs, the posterior margin, and 
sometimes the median line of 4, narrowly smooth. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat—South Queensland: Bunya Mountains, 2,500 feet, three females in 
April, A. P. Dodd; Mt. Tambourine, 2,000 feet, one female in February, A. P. Dodd. 
Holotyre in the Queensland Museum. Paratypes in the author’s collection. 

It is doubtful whether this species is distinct from crassispinus which occurs 
in the same localities; the main difference lies in the posterior margin oi the 
propodeum, which is broad and feebly concave in crassispinus, deeply concave in 
validispinus ; the horn or prominence on the base of the abdomen in the latter 
would seem a specific character; the funicle joints of the antennae are dusky- 
brown in validispinus, but in the other species are paler than the scape and 
pedicel. 


TRIMORUS TENUIPUNCTATUS, Nn. Sp. 


9. Length, 1:40 mm. Head black; abdomen black, the first segment red; 
thorax dusky reddish-brown, the margins of the scutum and scutellum, and the 
metanotum, bright reddish; antennae piceous, the scape and pedicel dusky yellow- 
brown; legs bright orange-yellow, the coxae fuscous, the tarsi dusky. 


Head normal; frons regularly striate up to the line of the vertex, and with 
scattered pubescence; between the ocelli the surface is reticulate; vertex behind 
the line of the ocelli obliquely striate, the striae stronger behind the eyes; median 
carina of frons complete and rather strong; a smooth non-striate area\occurs above 
the antennal insertion on either side of the median carina; cheeks smooth, with 
scattered hairs; eyes large, lightly pubescent. Antennal scape long and slender; 
pedicel one-half longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 distinctly longer than 
the pedicel, fully twice as long as wide, 2 a little shorter than 1, 3 as wide as long, 
4 transverse; club compact, joints 1-5 transverse. Thorax stout; scutum and 
scutellum densely rather finely reticulate-punctate and pubescent, the scutellum 


with a small smooth area medially against the posterior margin; spine of 
EF 


74 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


metanotum moderately long, acute, very broadly triangular, plainly shorter than 
its basal width, from lateral aspect suberect; propodeum foveate-striate, very 
short medially, the posterior border margined, gently coneave medially, almost 
straight for its lateral two-thirds, the posterior angles with suberect teeth which 
project outwardly somewhat. Forewings extending beyond apex of abdomen; 
moderately broad; distinctly stained with brown; marginal vein one-half as long 
as the submarginal, the stigmal vein long for the genus. Abdomen one-half longer 
than its greatest width; segment 1 one-half wider posteriorly than basally, no 
longer than its basal width; 3 one-half longer than 1 and 2 united, fully twice as 
long as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 strongly striate, 2 smooth posteriorly; 3 with dense 
fine non-pubescent punctures, broadly smooth and impunctate laterally, more 
narrowly smooth posteriorly; 4 densely finely punctate at base, smooth medially 
and posteriorly; 4 and 5, and lateral margins of 3, with scattered fine hairs. 

6. Like the female except that the femora and tibiae are lightly washed 
with brown; the teeth at the posterior angles of the propodeum are small; 
segment 8 of the abdomen is no longer than 1 and 2 united and is more broadly 
smooth posteriorly. Antennae one-half longer than the body; black, the scape 
and pedicel brownish-yellow; funicle joints subequal, each about two-thirds as long 
as the scape. 

Habitat—South Queensland: Mt. Tambourine, 2,000 feet, five females, two 
males, in February and March, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype and allotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratypes in the author’s 
‘collection. 

A medium-sized species with striate frons and densely finely punctate third 
segment of abdomen; very similar to rujithoraz, but larger, the thorax, coxae, and 
antennal scape darker, the posterior margin of the propodeum not deeply concave, 
its posterior angles with projecting teeth. 


TRIMORUS RUFITHORAX Dodd. 


Hoplogryon rufithorax Dodd, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 38, 1914, 77. 


©. Length, 1:00 mm. Head black; thorax bright orange or brownish-yellow, 
the scutum and scutellum a little dusky; abdomen brownish-black, bright yellow 
at base; antennal scape yellow, the pedicel and funicle dusky-brown, the club 
fuscous; legs, including the coxae, bright golden-yellow. 


Head normal; frons finely longitudinally striate, with scattered short fine 
setae, smooth above the antennal insertion; median carina of frons fine and 
complete; vertex finely reticulate-punctate, behind the eyes showing a few trans- 
verse striae, with scattered pubescence; cheeks smooth, with a few fine short hairs. 
Antennal scape slender, fully as Jong as the next five joints united; pedicel one- 
third longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 a little longer than the pedicel, 2 
slightly shorter than 1, 3 wider than long, 4 transverse; club compact, the joints 
transverse. Thorax stout; scutum and scutellum densely finely reticulate- 
punctate; metanotal tooth short, broadly triangular, finely pointed at apex, its 
surface finely punctate; from lateral aspect the tooth is situated high above the 
base of the abdomen; propodeum very short at meson, its posterior margin 
deeply concave, the posterior angles blunt and not projecting outwardly. Fore- 
wings reaching well beyond apex of abdomen; moderately broad; sub-hyaline; 
marginal vein two-thirds as long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein moderately 
long and somewhat oblique. Abdomen stout, one-half longer than its greatest 


BY A. P. DODD. 75 


width; segment 1 much wider posteriorly than basally, shorter than its basal 
width; 2 somewhat longer than 1; 3 somewhat longer than 1 and 2 united, twice 
as long as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 strongly striate; 3 finely densely punctate, the 
punctures without a reticulate tendency and without pubescence, with a slight 
tendency toward arrangement in longitudinal lines, the posterior and lateral 
margins smooth, with fine hairs laterally; 4 finely sculptured at base and with 
a few fine hairs. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat—North Queensland: Cairns district, four females in April-July, 
A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, J.1993. 

A small species with striate frons and finely punctate third segment of 
abdomen; distinguished from the related species, except tenuwipunctatus, by the 
regular punctation of segment 3 without larger punctures or striae laterally. 


TRIMORUS CONDENSUS, Nt. Sp. 

9. Length, 1:25-1:40 mm. Head black; thorax deep dusky red-brown, blackish 
aorsally; abdomen brownish-black, reddish at base; mandibles red; coxae fuscous, 
the legs golden-yellow; first six antennal joints dusky brown, the scape reddish 
at base, the club fuscous. 

Head transverse, the vertex descending sharply to the occipital margin, the 
frons gently convex; eyes large, shortly pubescent; frons finely densely striate 
and with scattered fine hairs, broadly smooth above the antennal insertion, the 
median carina delicate on the upper frons, absent on the smooth area; vertex 
immediately behind the lateral ocelli with a few fine transverse striae which are 
continued behind and against the eyes; behind these striae the surface is smooth, 
with numerous fine pubescent punctures which are absent laterally; cheeks smooth, 
with scattered fine hairs. Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel one-half 
longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 as long and as wide as the pedicel, 2 a 
little shorter than 1, 3 wider than long, 4 transverse; club compact, joints 1-5 each 
twice as wide as long. Thorax stout; scutum and scutellum finely pubescent, 
rather strongly reticulate-punctate, with a tendency toward longitudinal arrange- 
ment on the scutum; metanotal tooth reticulate, moderately long, broadly tri- 
angular, acute at apex, from lateral aspect horizontal and not situated high 
above the base of the abdomen; propodeum short, finely sculptured, its posterior 
margin rather deeply concave, its posterior angles not toothed and not projecting 
outwardly. Forewings hardly extending beyond apex of abdomen; moderately 
broad; lightly cloudy; marginal vein two-thirds as long as the submarginal, the 
stigmal vein normally short. Abdomen one-half longer than its. greatest width; 
segment 1 twice as wide posteriorly as basally, as long as its basal width; 2 
slightly longer than 1; 8 one-half longer than 1 and 2 united, twice as long as 
4-6 united; 1 and 2 striate; 3 with fine dense non-pubescent punctures which 
give way laterally to fine longitudinal striae between which are shallow pubescent 
punctures, the lateral margins narrowly smooth and pubescent, the posterior 
margin rather broadly smooth; 4 and 5 finely densely punctate and pubescent, 
smooth posteriorly and at the median line. 

6. Metanotum, margins of scutum and scutellum, and segment 1 of abdomen, 
bright chestnut-red; coxae fuscous, the legs brownish-yellow. 

Posterior margin of propodeum gently concave; abdomen two-thirds longer 
than its greatest width; segment 1 one-half wider posteriorly than basally, fully 


76 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAL, 


as long as its basal width; 3 no longer than 1 and 2 united, more broadly smooth 
laterally and posteriorly, the lateral striae fine and faint; forewings extending 
well beyond apex of abdomen. Antennae two-thirds longer than the body; black, 
the scape and pedicel brownish-yellow; funicle 1 two-thirds as long as the scape, 
2 a little shorter than 1, 3 as long as 1, 3-9 subequal. 


Habitat—South Queensland: Mt. Tambourine, 2,000 feet, many females, two 
males, in February and March, A. P. Dodd. 


Holotype and allotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratypes in the author’s 
collection. 


This species may be distinguished from tenuipunctatus and rufithorax by the 
presence of lateral striae on segment 3 of the abdomen, the lateral margins not 
being broadly smooth; from nigriventris it differs in its smaller size, absence of 
a basal prominence on the abdomen, shorter first and second funicle joints, and the 
greater width of segment 1 of the abdomen posteriorly; it differs from latispinus 
in the absence of the basal abdominal hump, in funicle 1 being no longer than the 
pedicel, in the shorter abdomen, and the finer punctures of segment 4 and of 
segment 3 laterally. The male is very similar to nigriventris and crassispinus, but 
differs in the absence of strong striae behind the eyes. 


TRIMORUS LATISPINUS, Nn. Sp. 


©. Length, 1:80 mm. Black; antennae fuscous, the scape reddish at base; 
coxae fuscous, the legs reddish-yellow. 


Head normal, transverse; eyes large, wide apart, lightly pubescent; frons 
and vertex shining and with sparse fine pubescence; frons rather strongly striate, 
indefinitely punctate between the striae on the upper frons, broadly smooth above 
the antennal insertion; median carina of frons delicate on the smooth area, not 
discernible on the upper frons; cheeks with scattered punctures bearing fine hairs, 
with several striae against the eye margins; behind the line of the vertex the 
surface is punctate and with a few fine subcircular striae, laterally are several 
strong striae continued behind the eyes, smooth between the striae; between the 
ocelli the surface is reticulate-punctate. Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel 
one-half longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 distinctly longer than the pedicel, 
twice as long as wide, 2 a little yet distinctly shorter than 1, 3 and 4 short and 
transverse; club compact, joints 1-5 each twice as wide as long. Thorax stout; 
scutum and scutellum rather strongly reticulate-punctate and with fine pubescence; 
metanotal tooth strongly reticulate, large, stout, as long as its basal width, from 
lateral aspect horizontal, projecting over and close to the base of the abdomen; 
propodeum short, finely densely punctate, its posterior margin uniformly rather 
deeply concave to receive the base of the abdomen, the posterior angles finely 
acute and not projecting outwardly. Forewings not extending beyond apex of 
abdomen; moderately broad; lightly clouded; marginal vein one-half as long as 
the submarginal, the stigmal vein rather iong and oblique for the genus. Abdomen 
three-fourths longer than its greatest width; segment 1 twice as wide posteriorly 
as basally, as long as its basal width, with a raised hump at base; 2 one-half 
longer than 1; 3 twice as long as 2 or as 46 united; 1 striate; 2 striate but 
strongly reticulate-punctate laterally; 3 at median third with small close punetures 
which fail on the posterior third medially, on either side with somewhat larger 
punctures separated by fine irregular longitudinal striae, the lateral margins 


BY A. P. DODD. rie 


broadly punctate and pubescent, the posterior margin narrowly smooth; 4 and 5 
with dense moderate-sized pubescent punctures, smooth along the posterior margin. 
6. Unknown. 
Habitat.——Victoria: Dandenong Ranges, two females in December, A. P. Dodd. 
Holotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratype in the author’s collection. 
Close to nigriventris, from which it differs in the colour and shorter length of 
the funicle joints, the less coarse sculpture without a longitudinal arrangement on 
the scutum, and the shorter basal abdominal segment widening greatly posteriorly; 
the metanotal tooth is regularly triangular in latispinus, its lateral margins 
diverging broadly from the apex, whereas in nigriventris the lateral margins are 
hardly divergent from the apex, but suddenly diverge toward its base. 


TRIMORUS NIGRIVENTRIS Dodd. 
Hoplogryon nigriventris Dodd, Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’land, 26, 1914, 127. 


©. Length, 2:00 mm. Head black; thorax deep dusky red-brown, touched with 
red here and there, blackish laterally, the scutum more or less broadly red 
laterally; coxae fuscous, the legs clear reddish-yellow or lightly washed with 
brown; antennal scape and club fuscous, the scape reddish at base, the pedicel 
and funicle joints contrasting clear yellow. 

Head normal, transverse; eyes large, wide apart, sparsely pubescent; frons 
and vertex shining, with scattered fine hairs; median carina of frons present, but 
not stronger than the striae; frons regularly longitudinally striate, without 
sculpture between the striae; between the ocelli the surface is reticulate-punctate:; 
behind the line of the ocelli laterally there are oblique striae continued behind 
the eyes, but medially the surface may be densely punctate with short irregular 
longitudinal striae to the occipital margin, or sparsely punctate with fine trans- 
verse striae; cheeks largely smooth, with a few punctures and traces of fine 
striae. Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel one-half longer than its greatest 
width; funicle 1 very distinctly longer than the pedicel, two and a half times as 
long as wide, 2 a little shorter than 1, 3 abruptly shorter, a little wider than 
long, 4 transverse; club compact, joints 1-5 each twice as wide as long. Thorax 
- stout; scutum and scutellum with fine pubescence; scutum rather strongly 
reticulate-punctate with a pronounced longitudinal arrangement; spine of 
metanotum rather long, stout, reticulate-punctate, blunt at apex, its sides sub- 
parallel, but broadly diverging at base, from lateral aspect horizontal, situated 
close to and projecting over the base of the abdomen; propodeum short, finely 
reticulate and pubescent, the posterior margin regularly moderately deeply concave, 
the posterior angles subacute and curved a little inwardly. Forewings long, but 
hardly extending beyond apex of abdomen; broad; rather deeply clouded; marginal 
vein one-half as long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein normally short. Abdomen 
twice as long as its greatest width; segment 1 one-half wider posteriorly than 
basally. a little longer than its basal width, with a raised prominence or horn at 
base; 2 one-third longer than 1; 3 almost twice as long as 2 or as 4-6 united, three- 
fourths as long as wide; 1 strongly striate, its prominence smooth at apex; 2 
striate, smooth between the striae; 3 with small dense punctures, laterally with 
irregular longitudinal striae, between which are shallow punctures bearing fine 
hairs, the lateral margins smooth, the posterior margin narrowly smooth, but 
more broadly smooth medially; 4 and 5 densely punctate and pubescent, smooth 
posteriorly and narrowly at the median line. 


78 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELHASINAE, 


6. Agreeing with the female, but the metanotum is bright reddish; segment 1 
of abdomen with sub-parallel lateral margins, a little longer than its greatest 
width, without a prominence; 3 more broadly smooth posteriorly, the punctures 
somewhat less dense and separated by fine irregular striae, the lateral striae 
absent, the lateral margins more broadly smooth; punctures on 4 and 5 somewhat 
sparser. Antennae a little longer than the body; black, the scape and pedicel 
clear testaceous; funicle 1 a little more than one-half as long as the scape; 2-9 
very slightly decreasing in length. Nb 

Habitat—New South Wales: Tweed River, the type male in May. South 
Queensland: Mt. Tambourine, three females in December; Bunya Mountains, one 
female in April. 


Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1[.11036. 


TRIMORUS AUSTRALIS Dodd. 


Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 38, 1914, 79. 

6. Length, 1:40 mm. Dull black; antennal scape and the legs, including the 
coxae, dull yellow-brown; first abdominal segment reddish. 

Frons not striate, except against the mouth. Antennae no longer than the 
body; scape moderately long and stout; pedicel short, no longer than wide; funicle 
1 about three times as long as wide, 2 as long as 1, 3 slightly shorter than 2, 4 
a little yet plainly shorter than 3, 4-9 subequal, 10 almost twice as long as 9, one- 
third longer than 1, a little shorter than the scape. Thorax one-third longer than 
its greatest width; parapsidal furrows very delicate, wide apart; median love of 
scutum with fine raised longitudinal striae which give way anteriorly to dense 
fine punctures, the lateral lobes almost smooth; scutellum smooth, except for a 
few hairs and anterior and posterior foveate lines; metanotum very transverse, 
not raised, its posterior margin straight, with short straight delimiting lateral 
carinae, and a short raised median carina in lieu of the usual tooth; propodeum 
moderately long, densely punctate, its posterior border rather deeply concave, 
medially with two delicate well-separated carinae that form obtuse angles with the 
posterior margin, the posterior angles subacute. Forewings broad; lightly 
brownish; marginal vein somewhat shorter than the submarginal, the stigmal 
vein normally short. Abdomen two-thirds longer than its greatest width; segment 
1 one-third wider posteriorly than basally, as long as its posterior width; 2 
slightly longer than 1; 3 as long as 1 and 2 united, somewhat longer than 4-6 
united; 1 and 2 striate; 3 smooth but with faint striae at base; 4-6 with scattered 
hairs. 

©. Unknown. 

Habitat.—North Queensland: Cairns district, several males. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.1995. 

This species may be the male of either australicus Dodd or atripes Dodd, 
which are both from the same locality. 


TRIMORUS SPECIOSUS Dodd. 

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 38, 1914, 80. 

6. Length, 1:75 mm. Head black; thorax rich chestnut-red, the scutum jet 
black; abdomen dusky-black, segment 1, 2 except laterally, and 3 except lateral and 
posterior margins, bright yellow-brown; legs bright orange-yellow; antennae black, 
the scape deep brown. 


BY A. P. DODD. 19 


Mandibles large, tridentate, the middle tooth small, the outer teeth long and 
acute. Antennae twice as long as the body; scape moderately long, one-half 
longer than funicle 1; pedicel no longer than wide; funicle joints very long, 1-4 
gradually lengthening, 4 one-third longer than 1, 4-10 subequal. Thorax stout, 
slightly longer than its greatest width; parapsidal furrows delicate, complete, wide 
apart; median lobe of scutum with dense rather small punctures, posteriorly with 
also a few fine irregular longitudinal striae, the lateral lobes punctate anteriorly, 
smooth posteriorly; scutellum confluently punctate at base, smooth for the rest; 
metanotal tooth rather stout, acutely triangular; propodeum short, finely rugose, 
rather narrowly divided at base, the carinate posterior margin running straight 
and very obliquely from its base medially, the posterior angles not prominent or 
armed. Forewings very broad, as in pulcherrimus. Abdomen three-fourths longer 
than its greatest width; segment 1 widening posteriorly, a little longer than its 
basal width; 2 hardly longer than 1; 3 no longer than 1 and 2 united, two-thirds 
longer than 4-6 united; 1 and 2 striate, the rest smooth; 4-6 and lateral margins of 
38 with scattered pubescence. 

9. Unknown. 

Habitat—North Queensland: Cairns district; the type male in September, 
A. P. Dodd. i 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, [.2000. 

This species is very similar to pulcherrimus, but differs in the black scutum, 
the denser punctures of the scutum, the punctate base of the scutellum, the 
different form of the metanotal tooth, and the longer antennae. No female that 
can be associated with speciosus is known. The head of the unique example is 
mounted on a slide, hence the sculpture could not be ascertained. 


TRIMORUS PULCHERRIMUS Dodd. 

Trans. Roy. Soc, 8S. Aust., 38, 1914, 80. 

6. Length, 1-70 mm. Head black; thorax uniform rich chestnut-red; abdomen 
yellow-brown at base, segments 2 and 3 bright yellow, segments 4-6 and lateral 
margins of 2 and 3 brownish-black; legs bright orange-yellow; antennae black, 
the scape yellow-brown, dusky at apex. 

Mandibles large, tridentate, the middle tooth small, the outer teeth long 
and acute. Antennae one-half longer than the body; scape moderately stout, 
one-half longer than funicle 1; pedicel hardly longer than wide; funicle joints 
elongate, 1-4 gradually increasing in length, 4 one-third longer than 3, 4-10 sub- 
equal. Thorax stout, a little longer than its greatest width; parapsidal furrows 
delicate, complete, wide apart; scutum with light pubescence, with numerous small 
rather scattered punctures, the lateral lobes smooth for their posterior half; 
posteriorly on the median lobe are a few fine irregular longitudinal striae; 
scutellum smooth, polished, with foveate margins; metanotum very transverse, 
rugose, armed medially with an excavated lamella whose posterior margin is 
raised and projects slightly in the form of a very short blunt tooth; propodeum 
short, finely rugose, rather narrowly divided at base, the delimiting carinae 
of the posterior margin straight and running very obliquely from the base medially, 
the posterior angles rounded and unarmed. Forewings long, very broad, two and 
a half times as long as their greatest width; lightly stained yellowish; marginal 
vein plainly shorter than the submarginal, the stigmal vein rather long for the 
genus. Abdomen one-half longer than its greatest width; segment 1 much wider 
posteriorly than basally, almost as long as its basal width; 2 one-half longer than 


80 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


1; 3 a little longer than 1 and 2 united, one-half longer than 4-6 united; 1 and 2, 
except posteriorly, striate, the rest smooth; 4-6 and lateral margins of 3 with 
scattered pubescence. 

9. Unknown. 

Habitat——North Queensland: Cairns district, the type male in September, 
A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.1999. 

The type is unique; no female is known that can be referred to this species. 
As the head of the only specimen is mounted on a slide, its sculpture could not 
be ascertained. 


PARAGRYON Kieffer. 


Ann. Soc. Sci. Brussels, 32, 1908, 199. 

This genus differs from Trimorus Forster only in the fact that the metanotum 
is unarmed; however, as the spine of the metanotum may be reduced to a minute 
tooth, the character would hardly appear of generic significance. Kieffer (1926) 
includes in the genus twelve species, in eight of which the wings are wanting or 
vestigial; the genotype is P. pedestris Kieffer (1908), a wingless insect from 
Europe. In the one Australian species, the wings are well developed; the 
metanotum is quite flat, and without a tooth or even a median carina. 


PARAGRYON GRACILIPENNIS Dodd. 


Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 38, 1914, 838. 

©. Length, 1:00-1:50 mm. Black, the base of the abdomen bright reddish- 
yellow; legs, including the coxae, bright golden-yellow, the posterior tibiae and 
tarsi somewhat dusky; antennal scape yellow at base, dusky toward apex, the 
antennae otherwise black. 

Head normal, transverse, slightly wider than the thorax; smooth and shining, 
with a few scattered fine hairs; on either side between the lateral ocelli and the 
eyes there is a small finely reticulate area; frons without a median carina; mouth 
with a few short converging striae; eyes large, bare, wide apart. Antennal scape 
long and slender, its articulate joint long, one-third as long as the scape; pedicel 
twice as long as its greatest width; funicle 1 one-third longer than the pedicel, 
2 slightly longer than 1, 3 less than one-half as long as 2, but plainly longer 
than wide, 4 quadrate; club slender, joints 1-5 slightly wider than long. Thorax 
stout, from lateral aspect no longer than high, from dorsal aspect a little longer 
than its greatest width; scutum with scattered fine hairs, with fine surface 
reticulation, smooth laterally and posteriorly, foveate along lateral and anterior 
margins; parapsidal furrows absent; scutellum smooth, with a few hairs, its 
margins foveate; metanotum very transverse. not raised or armed, foveate at base, 
smooth posteriorly; propodeum moderately short, with rather dense white 
pubescence, narrowly divided at base medially, the posterior margin gently 
concave, the posterior angles not armed or prominent. Forewings very long, 
projecting far beyond apex of abdomen; slender, four and a half times as long as 
their greatest width, the apex broadly rounded; longest marginal cilia equal to 
one-fourth the greatest wing width; marginal vein somewhat shorter than the 
submarginal, the stigmal vein very oblique for the group. Legs slender, the 
tibiae and tarsi long. Abdomen strongly narrowed at base; three-fifths longer 
than its greatest width, which is somewhat distinctly greater than that of the 


BY A. P. DODD. 81 


thorax; segment 1 shorter than its basal width, not much wider posteriorly than 
basally; 2 one-half longer than 1; 3 twice as long as 2, three-fourths as long as 
wide; 4-6 short, together one-half as long as 8; 1 strongly striate, 2 strongly striate 
but smooth along lateral and posterior margins; 3 shortly striate at base; 
remainder of the abdomen smooth; 4 and 5, and 2 and 3 laterally, with scattered 
fine hairs. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat—Queensland: Cairns district, the holotype female in May, A. P. 
Dodd; Chinchilla, one female in February, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.2004. 

The Chinchilla specimen is smaller than the holotype, but agrees in cther 
characters. 


TRISSACANTHA Ashmead. 


Entom. Americana, 3, 1887, 101.—Pentacantha Ashmead, Canad. Entom., 20, 
1888, 51—Propentacantha Kieffer, Das Tierreich, 1926, 241. 


This genus may be distinguished from Trimorus Forster by the fact that 
the metanotum bears three teeth. As in certain species of Trimorus, it is possible 
that the parapsidal furrows are present in the male and absent in the female of the 
same species; the four species previously included in the genus were described 
from males only. Kieffer (1926) recognized four species, all from North America, 
and twenty-two species of Propentacantha from Europe, Africa, North America, 
and Australia; the two Australian species, P. nigrinotum Dodd and P. australica 
Dodd, are transferred in this paper to Trimorus, and possibly certain other species 
should be similarly treated. The genotype is 7. americana Ashmead (1887). 

My collection contains six specimens, four males and two females, that are 
described herewith as three species. These forms are closely related, but it is to 
be noted that in 7. asperata the lateral teeth of the metanotum are so reduced 
that the species could be included in Trimorus without altering materially the 
limits of that genus. There are minor characters in the three species that are 
not found in the Australian species of Trimorus; thus, the lateral margins of the 
propodeum are oblique and converge distinctly toward the posterior angles, and the 
marginal vein is less than one-half as long as the submarginal; these two characters 
occur in Gryonella, but in Trimorus the propodeum is not greatly wider across the 
anterior angles than at the posterior angles, and the marginal vein is longer. 


Key to the Species. 
1. Lateral teeth of the metanotum hardly developed; segment 3 of abdomen punctate 


forvatwWeastAits Wasal shales Mere on eves pelpageircesace se a crs, ach su/ciee} sure ch ASI Seeley asta asperata 
Lateral teeth of metanotum apparent; segment 38 of abdomen punctate at base 
OTM ae Use eater srs USER SMS Reda eae ay hi 15 1 Noe Su an AhNTED Safonreine sey cl sticilacartsicel a entails, Sulake ARPA W awe iapieh eT SNIEMTE) ce ciemee ete 2 


2. Size larger; scutellum partly sculptured; lateral teeth of metanotum stout .......... 
Seema gos Maus srs yrohe vase cetreh am hear ase ar ot be yoeis va)-cy Sue eS Tone 5 es wh fs Die ive (G&S Oe ee ae ic trifurcata 
Bice ao oad simulata 


TRISSACANTHA ASPERATA, Nl. SD. 

9. Length, 1:60 mm. Head black; thorax reddish-brown, the scutum and 
scutellum dusky-black; abdomen dull reddish-brown, blackish laterally and 
posteriorly, its basal prominence dark; legs, including the coxae, clear testaceous; 
antennal scape and pedicel brownish-yellow, the funicle joints dusky-brown, the 
club fuscous. 


82 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


Head normal, transverse, the frons a little convex; eyes moderately large, very 
wide apart, sparsely pubescent; line of the vertex with a delicate transverse groove 
extending across from the posterior margin of the eyes through the lateral ocelli; 
frons up to the transverse groove strongly longitudinally striate, smooth between 
the striae, with a few fine hairs; median carina of frons complete; between the 
ocelli the surface is reticulate-punctate; vertex behind the transverse groove 
smooth, with scattered hairs; temples and cheeks smooth with scattered hairs. 
Antennal scape moderately long and slender; pedicel one-half longer than its 
greatest width; funicle 1 as long as the pedicel, 2 somewhat shorter and as long 
as wide, 3 and 4 small and transverse; club compact, joints 1-5 each twice 
as wide as long. Thorax stout; scutum and scutellum very strongly reticulate 
and with scattered hairs; metanotum very transverse, rugose, its posterior border 
straight and finely margined, its posterior angles rounded and faintly prominent, 
armed medially with a fine rather short suberect acute tooth which bears a 
median carina; propodeum very short, broad posteriorly, punctate and faintly 
pubescent, the posterior margin gently concave, the posterior angles acute in the 
form of very short teeth. Forewings hardly extending beyond apex of abdomen; 
moderately broad; lightly brownish: marginal vein short for the group, one-third 
as long as the submarginal, the stigmal vein oblique and moderately short. 
Abdomen two-thirds longer than its greatest width; segment 1 twice as wide 
posteriorly as basally, as long as its basal width, with a short suberect blunt 
prominence at base; 2 no longer than 1; 3 three times as long as 2, twice as long 
as 4-6 united, three-fourths as long as wide; 1 closely striate, its prominence 
reticulate, but smooth apically; 2 rather sparsely striate, smooth between the 
striae; 3 with small dense non-pubescent punctures, laterally with a few fine 
longitudinal striae, the lateral margins punctate and pubescent, the posterior 
margin smooth; 4 and 5 densely finely punctate and pubescent, smooth at the 
median line and along the posterior margin. 


3g. Differs from the female as follows: abdomen black, the first two segments 
reddish; sculpture of scutum densely reticulate-punctate, not as coarse as in the 
female, the punctures sparse against the lateral margins; parapsidal furrows 
indicated but obscure; scutellum with confluent punctures on the basal half, 
smooth on the posterior half; forewings extending well beyond apex of abdomen; 
segment 1 of abdomen without a prominence, a little longer than its basal width; 
segment 3 twice as long as 2, punctate for its basal half at the median line, the 
punctate area laterally and the few lateral striae extending for two-thirds its 
length, the lateral margins broadly smooth, except for a few pubescent punctures 
and a small coriaceous area toward the posterior margin; punctures on 4 and 
5 sparser than in the female. Antennae one-half longer than the body; black, the 
scape brownish-yellow; pedicel no longer than wide; funicle joints about subequal, 
each two-thirds as long as the scape. 


Habitat—South Queensland: Brisbane, one female, A. P. Dodd; Mt. 
Tambourine, one female in March, A. P. Dodd; Blackall Range, one male in 
January, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype and allotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratype in the author’s 
collection. 

Distinguished from trifurcata and simulata by the greater extent of the 
punctation of segment 3 of the abdomen, and the non-development of the lateral 
teeth of the metanotum. In the key to the species of Trimorus, this species would 


BY A. P. DODD. 83 


fall near nigriventris, condensus and latispinus, from which it may be dis- 
tinguished by the slender metanotal spine, abruptly smooth head behind the line 
of the vertex, the strongly reticulate scutum, and the shorter marginal vein. 


TRISSACANTHA TRIFURCATA, Tl. SD. 

fg. Length, 2:15 mm. Black, the base of the abdomen showing reddish; coxae 
fuscous, the legs bright reddish-yellow; antennae black, the scape dusky-brown, red 
at base; mandibles red. 

Head slightly wider than the thorax, very transverse; vertex thin, descending 
sharply to the occipital margin; frons hardly convex; eyes moderately large, bare, 
very wide apart; mandibles very large, tridentate, the middle tooth small; frons 
strongly striate and with scattered white hairs, the striae diverging somewhat 
from the delicate median carina; line of the vertex with two or three fine 
transverse striae, behind these striae with numerous scattered punctures bearing 
fine hairs, the punctures smaller laterally; cheeks with scattered pubescent 
punctures and, against the eyes, with fine striae. Antennae one-half longer than 
the body; pedicel no longer than wide; funicle 1 two-thirds as long as the scape, 
a little yet distinctly longer than 2, 2-9 subequal. Thorax stout; scutum very 
strongly reticulate-punctate and with scattered fine hairs, the punctures smaller 
medio-anteriorly; scutellum strongly reticulate-punctate laterally, densely punctate 
at base, smooth medio-posteriorly; metanotum reticulate, transverse, with three 
teeth, the middle tooth slender and moderately long, the lateral teeth stouter, 
shorter and blunt; propodeum short, reticulate, with three short longitudinal 
carinae on either side of the median line, shortly narrowly divided at base, the 
posterior margin carinate and gently concave, terminating at the lateral angles 
in a short acute upturned tooth. Forewings extending well beyond apex of 
abdomen; broad; lightly brownish, more deeply clouded beneath the marginal 
vein; marginal vein two-fifths as long as the submarginal, three times as long 
as the stigmal vein, which is long and oblique for the group. Abdomen a little 
less than one-half longer than its greatest width; segment 1 as long as its basal 
width, almost twice as wide posteriorly as basally; 2 a little longer than 1; 
3 twice as long as 2, or as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 strongly striate, the striae failing 
laterally on 2; 3 broadly smooth laterally, except for a few pubescent punctures, 
shortly punctate and with a few fine striae at base, the punctures small, close, 
and arranged in longitudinal rows, the rest of the segment smooth and shining; 
4 and 5 with numerous punctures bearing fine hairs. 

®. Unknown. 

Habitat—South Queensland: Chinchilla, one male in January, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. 

This species differs from simulata in its larger size, the well-developed 
lateral teeth of the metanotum, the scutum not being smooth laterally, and 
the scutellum being partly sculptured. 


TRISSACANTHA SIMULATA, 0. Sp. 
6d. Length, 155 mm. Black, the metanotum, margins of the pleurae, and base 
of abdomen showing reddish; coxae dusky yellow-brown, the legs bright yellow 
washed with brown, the tarsi dusky; antennae black, the scape and pedicel dusky- 
brown, the former Ped dian at base; mandibles yellow. 
Head transverse, the frons a little convex, the line of the vertex thin, thence 
descending abruptly to the occipital margin; eyes large, with a few scattered 


84 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASIN AE, 


hairs, very wide apart; mandibles very large, tridentate; frons strongly striate 
and with scattered fine hairs, the striae diverging somewhat from the median 
carina which is complete; vertex to the occipital margin smooth, with scattered 
fine hairs, and with traces of fine transverse striae at the line of the lateral 
ocelli; cheeks smooth, with scattered fine hairs. Antennae one-half longer than 
the body; scape moderately long and slender; pedicel no longer than wide; funicle 
joints subequal in length, each two-thirds as long as the scape, with short dense 
pubescence. Thorax stout; scutum with numerous long fine white hairs, and with 
open shallow reticulate punctures or open reticulation, the sculpture closer and 
more definitely punctate anteriorly, absent against the lateral margins; parapsidal 
furrows not evident; scutellum smooth, with scattered indefinite punctures bearing 
long fine hairs, with a few punctures on either side at its base; metanotum trans- 
verse, the posterior angles prominent and obtuse, the posterior margin finely 
carinate and somewhat concave to the slender short median tooth, from lateral 
aspect the posterior angles are raised in the form of blunt teeth; propodeum 
short, pubescent laterally, with several short striae or carinae medially, shortly 
narrowly divided at the median line, the posterior margin gently concave and 
terminating laterally in a short tooth. Forewings extending well beyond apex of 
abdomen; broad; lightly brownish; marginal vein two-fifths as long as the sub- 
marginal, three times as long as the stigmal vein which is rather long and oblique. 
Abdomen stout. one-half longer than its greatest width; segment 1 two-thirds wider 
posteriorly than basally, as long as its basal width; 2 one-fourth longer than 1; 
3 as long as 1 and 2 united, twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 rather finely 
striate, the latter smooth laterally and against its posterior margin; 3 at base 
medially shortly punctate, the punctures small and close, on either side finely 
striate for about one-half its length, otherwise smooth, including the lateral 
margins broadly; 4 and 5, and lateral margins of 2 and 3, with numerous long 
fine white hairs arising from small punctures. 

9. Unknown. 

Habitat.—Queensland: Gogango, 40 miles west of Rockhampton, two males in 
November, A. P. Dodd. i 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. Paratype in the author’s collection. 


GRYONELLA Dodd. 

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 38, 1914, 84. 

This genus differs from Jeleas Latreille in having the metanotum bidentate. 
The large mandibles, swollen posterior femora, and spiny legs distinguish it from 
the other Australian genera. Five species are recognized here; of these, four are 
known in the female sex, and one in the male sex; it is possible, however, that 
G. crawfordi may be the male of either G. bruesi or G. affinis. The genotype is 
G. crawfordi Dodd. 


Key to the Species. 
1. Vertex broadly rounded; scutum and scutellum with fine sculpture; forewings rather 


LORE KONE Fed Bi chet ee es AOL CR SOLEUS Bek SUC CEE eae USM RAE cane Sy ami daenrs ty tal ater. aan mean platythorax 
Vertex sharp; scutum strongly reticulate or with large punctures; forewings broad 

ale lose) in) aale desione islroBietie Leese oe eh ocak MMM SRE PR SMe ayes: isis pis taper oe ny CUT OT TAREE Ren RTT rie aus ee vi eee ee 2 

2. Femora yellow; punctures of scutum not reticulate; metanotal teeth large ........ 
EEC ALL CRee Sem Iey Cts ech oh CRE ORO EN ORG CORREIA G CL OL CROCS e BiG & ONO Ceeerode e magnidens 
Femora dark; punctures of scutum reticulate; metanotal teeth small ........... 3 

ao INOS NoaitiniGhiorMhy See? WAI sooccacbdesdodosovucduaduvoucHbavoode crawfordi 


HONS) transVerseliys striate satenralle sme ey eee mane te te eee eee ea 4 


BY A. P. DODD. 85 


4. Posterior margin of propodeum gently concave; segment 1 of abdomen less than 
twice as wide posteriorly as basally; segment 3 with weak striae at base .... 

SO: OB OU On ON EE ET oN AED aH AUS aR eOR ROC IS Nest RET ROPE RATE Cr CACTUS CENT RES REM Tat ttn eta aie een bruesi 
Posterior margin of propodeum rather deeply concave; segment 1 of abdomen more 
than twice as wide posteriorly as basally; segment 3 with weak punctures at 

[SEEYSTS) ge ste eth aie aos caret can tea a EO Ee en ew gy tet SA ROL ae be Oe SN affinis 


@° 


GRYONELLA CRAWFORDI Dodd. 


Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 38, 1914, 84. 

6. Length, 1:40-1:80 mm. Black; antennae wholly black; coxae black, the 

femora and tibiae dusky-black, the tarsi dusky-yellow, the trochanters and base 
and apex of femora and tibiae bright yellow; mandibles yellowish. 
Head transverse, no wider than the thorax, the vertex thin and descending 
sharply to the occiput, the frons gently convex; ocelli rather large, close together: 
eyes very wide apart, bare; frons rather finely longitudinally striate, the striae 
converging above towards the ocelli; on the lower half of the frons several of 
the inner striae encircle the antennal insertion; line of the vertex with irregular 
transverse striae; behind the ocelli to the occiput the surface is smooth; cheeks 
smooth; head with scattered long fine hairs; mandibles long, bidentate. Antennae 
slightly longer than the body; scape rather short, one-third longer than funicle 1; 
pedicel no longer than wide; funicle 1 slightly longer than 2, 2-9 almost subequal. 
Thorax stout, a little longer than wide; pronotum narrowly visible at the lateral 
angles; scutum with scattered hairs, the parapsidal furrows delicate, complete, wide 
apart, and a little curved; lateral lobes of scutum finely shallowly rugose inwardly, 
almost smooth laterally; median lobe of scutum with an open network of very 
large shallow reticulate punctures, but on the posterior half on either side laterally 
there are two or three irregular striae or rugae parallel with the parapsidal 
furrows; scutellum reticulate at base, smooth for the rest, with scattered hairs; 
metanotum punctate, transverse, its posterior margin concave and bidentate, the 
teeth small and well-separated; propodeum short, hidden medially by the 
metanotum, broad at base and sloping inwardly to the posterior angles, the posterior 
margin uniformly concave, the posterior angles subacute or shortly toothed. 
All femora somewhat swollen; posterior femora much swollen, two and a half 
times as long as their greatest width, their tibiae spinose at apex, their tarsi 
short. Forewings reaching well beyond apex of abdomen; moderately broad, the 
apex broadly rounded; lightly stained brownish; venation dark; marginal vein 
somewhat less than one-half as long as the submarginal, about four times as leng 
as the short stigmal vein. Abdomen hardly wider than the thorax, one-half longer 
than its greatest width; segment 1 narrowed at base, as long as its basal width, 
almost twice as wide posteriorly as basally; 2 no longer than 1; 3 two-thirds as long 
as wide, as long as 1 and 2 united, less than twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 
densely striate, the lateral and posterior margins of 2 smooth; 3 smooth, its basal 
one-third to one-half medially with rather dense short narrow \longitudinal 
punctures; 4-6 smooth, with scattered long fine hairs; similar scattered hairs occur 
on 1-3 laterally and 3 posteriorly. 

9. Unknown. 

Habitat.—Queensland: Proserpine, the type male in October; Westwood, two 
males in November and December. New South Wales: Muswellbrook, four males 
in October. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.2008. 


86 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


GRYONELLA BRUESI Dodd. 

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 38, 1914, 85. 

9. Length, 150 mm. Black; antennae wholly black, the prominence yellow; 
coxae and femora black or fuscous, the tibiae and tarsi clear yellow. 

Head transverse, the vertex thin and descending sharply to the occipital 
margin, the frons somewhat convex; eyes moderately large, very wide apart, 
lightly pubescent; frons transversely striate, the striae curving sharply to become 
longitudinal laterally, dense on the lower frons, on the upper frons sparse and 
with shallow punctures between, bearing fine white hairs; line of the vertex 
with transverse striae, the declivous area behind the ocelli smooth, with scattered 
fine punctures bearing fine white hairs and with traces of fine striae; cheeks 
smooth, with a few hairs; mandibles very long, bidentate. Antennal scape 
moderately long; pedicel one-half longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 a little 
longer than wide, 2 as wide as long, 3 and 4 small and transverse; club six- 
jointed, compact, the joints much wider than long. Thorax hardly longer than 
its greatest width, somewhat convex above; pronotum narrowly visible at the 
lateral angles; scutum with an open network of large reticulate punctures and 
laterally on either side with several irregular longitudinally-oblique striae; 
scutellum with similar reticulate punctures and with irregular longitudinal striae; 
punctures of scutum and scutellum bearing long fine white hairs; metanotum 
reticulate-punctate, transverse, its lateral margins oblique, its posterior margin 
gently concave and shortly bidentate, the teeth well apart; propodeum finely 
sculptured, short, very short medially, the posterior margin gently concave, 
the posterior angles subacute, the lateral margins sloping obliquely inwardly to the 
posterior angles. Posterior femora much swollen, about twice as long as their 
greatest width. Forewings hardly extending beyond apex of abdomen; moderately 
broad, lightly stained brownish; venation distinct, the marginal vein one-third as 
long as the submarginal. Abdomen somewhat wider than the thorax, one-third 
longer than its greatest width; segment 1 almost as long as its basal width, 
less than twice as wide posteriorly as basally; 3 a little longer than 1 and 2 
united, two-thirds as long as wide, twice as long as 4-6 united; 1 and 2 rather 
strongly striate; 3 weakly striate at base; the rest smooth; 4 and 5, 2 and 3 
laterally, and 3 posteriorly, with scattered long fine hairs. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat—North Queensland: Cairns district, the holotype female in January. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.2009. 


GRYONELLA AFFINIS, Nl. SD. 

©. Length, 1:50 mm. Black; antennae wholly black; coxae and femora dusky- 
black, the tibiae and tarsi bright yellow; antennal prominence and the mandibles 
yellow. 

In general appearance and structure very similar to bruesi. Vertex of head 
more rounded than in bruesi and descending less sharply to the occiput; sculpture 
of frons similar; vertex smooth laterally from the ocelli; behind the ocelli to the 
occiput smooth, with scattered minute punctures bearing fine white hairs; cheeks 
smooth with a few hairs. Antennal scape moderately long; pedicel one-half longer 
than its greatest width; funicle 1 a little longer than its greatest width, 2 as wide 
as long, 3 and 4 transverse; club compact, the joints much wider than long. 
Scutum with the reticulate punctures much larger and less numerous than in 
bruesi and with about two irregular oblique striae on either side laterally; 


BY A. P. DODD. 87 


scutellum with large reticulate punctures; scutum and scutellum with sparse long 
fine white hairs; metanotum very transverse, armed posteriorly with two short 
blunt teeth which are widely separated, the posterior margin deeply concave; 
posterior margin of propodeum rather deeply concave, the posterior angles fine 
but not toothed. Forewings hardly extending beyond apex of abdomen; moderately 
broad; lightly brownish; venation thick, deep brown; marginal vein one-third 
as long as the submarginal. Abdomen distinctly wider than the thorax, one-third 
longer than its greatest width; segment 1 as long as its basal width, greatly 
widening posteriorly, where it is more than twice as wide as at base; 2 no longer 
than 1; 38 plainly longer than 1 and 2 united; 1 rather finely densely striate; 
2 finely densely striate, but smooth laterally; 3 at base medially with a number 
oi weak narrow punctures; the rest smooth; 4 and 5, 2 and 3 laterally, and 3 
posteriorly, with scattered long fine hairs. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat.—North-west New South Wales: Moonie River, one female in October, 
A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. 

Differs from bruesi in several minor characters, namely: the smooth area 
between the lateral ocelli and the eyes; the larger less numerous reticulate 
punctures on the scutum; the more deeply concave metanotum with the teeth 
more pronounced; the rather deeply concave posterior margin of the propodeum; 
the greater width of the first abdominal segment posteriorly; and the absence of 
striae at the base of segment 3. 


GRYONELLA MAGNIDENS, N. Sp. 


@. Length, 1:85 mm. Black; antennal scape bright reddish-yellow, the pedicel 
and funicle joints suffused with yellow, the club black; legs bright reddish-yellow, 
the coxae fuscous; mandibles red. 


From lateral aspect the frons is gently convex to the line of the ocelli, the 
vertex precipitous from the ocelli to the occiput; from frontal aspect, the head is 
one-third wider than long, the frons very broad; head shining; lower half of frons 
_ transversely striate, the striae curving laterally to the ventral margin: upper frons 
with broad sub-obsolete transverse striae between which are numerous small 
punctures bearing fine short hairs; behind the line of the vertex the surface bears 
fine transverse striae between which are fine scattered punctures bearing fine hairs; 
cheeks smooth with scattered pubescence; mandibles very large; eyes large, very 
wide apart, with a few hairs. Antennal scape moderately long and stout; pedicel 
one-half longer than its greatest width; funicle 1 somewhat distinctly longer than 
the pedicel, twice as long as its greatest width; 2 shorter than 1, scarcely longer 
than wide; 3 and 4 transverse; club compact, six-jointed, joints 1-5 transverse. 
Thorax as wide as long, its dorsal surface somewhat convex; scutum with numerous 
hairs, medially with large shallow sub-obsolete punctures, which are small, dense, 
and distinct toward the declivous anterior margin, and with a few irregular trans- 
verse striae toward the posterior margin; laterally there are irregular 
longitudinally-oblique striae and shallow punctures, the innermost striae on either 
side almost meeting at the posterior margin; scutellum smooth, with a few 
pubescent punctures; metanotal plate with two stout blunt coarsely-striate teeth, 
the posterior margin rather deeply concave almost to its base; propodeum very 
short, hidden medially by the metanotum, its lateral margins oblique, its posterior 


88 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASIN AE, 


margin uniformly gently concave to the subacute posterior angles, its surface 
finely sculptured. Forewings not extending beyond apex of abdomen; moderately 
broad; lightly brownish; venation fuscous, distinct; marginal vein one-fourth as — 
long as the submarginal. Posterior femora greatly swollen. Abdomen one-third 
longer than its greatest width, a little wider than the thorax; segment 1 broad, 
its basal width almost twice its length and two-thirds its posterior width; 2 no 
longer than 1; 3 one-third longer than 1 and 2 united, two-thirds longer than 
4-6 united, two-thirds as long as wide; 1 strongly densely striate, reticulate at base; 
2 densely striate, smooth posteriorly, with dense pubescence laterally; 3 densely 
minutely punctulate at base medially, smooth for the rest, with scattered short 
fine hairs posteriorly, with longer denser pubescence laterally; 4 and 5 smooth 
basally and posteriorly, in between the smooth areas with dense pubescence and 
fine surface sculpture. 

3. Unknown. 

Habitat.—South Queensland: Bunya Mountains, 2,500 feet, Dalby district, one 
female in April, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. 

Distinguished from crawfordi, bruesi, and affinis, by the yellow femora, non- 
reticulate scutum, large stout metanotal teeth, and the broad base of the abdomen. 


GRYONELLA PLATYTHORAX, DN. SDP. 


°. Length, 1:80 mm. Black; antennal scape black, the remaining joints dusky 
yellow-brown; mandibles red; coxae and femora black, tibiae dusky-brown, 
trochanters, base and apex of tibiae, and the tarsi, bright reddish-yellow. 

Vertex of head rounded, not sloping sharply behind the lateral ocelli; from 
frontal aspect the head is one-half wider than long; frons very gently convex; 
vertex finely densely transversely striate and coriaceous, and with an extremely 
short inconspicuous fine pubescence, the striae failing toward the occipital margin; 
frons densely transverse-circularly striate, coriaceous above, shining on the lower 
half, on either side ventrally with a patch of longer pubescence; cheeks with 
similar fine sculpture to the vertex, but the striation is longitudinal; mandibles 
very long. Antennal scape long and slender; pedicel one-half longer than its 
greatest width; funicle 1 distinctly longer than the pedicel, twice as long as its 
greatest width, 2 slightly longer than wide, 3 and 4 very transverse; club compact, 
six-jointed, joints 1-5 very transverse. Thorax flat dorsally, no longer than its 
greatest width; pronotal angles rounded and prominent; parapsidal furrows 
absent; pronotum, scutum, and scutellum very densely finely reticulate and with a 
number of small scattered punctures, without pubescence; metanotal plate broad, 
projecting, its lateral margins oblique, its posterior margin lightly concave and 
bidentate, its surface densely longitudinally striate; propodeum short, visible 
laterally, finely sculptured, the posterior margin concave, the posterior angles 
acute and tooth-like. Forewings not reaching beyond apex of abdomen; rather 
narrow, three and a half times as long as their greatest width, the apex broadly 
rounded; lightly stained brownish; marginal cilia extremely short; venation deep 
brown, the marginal vein one-fourth as long as the submarginal. Posterior femora 
much swollen. Abdomen no wider than the thorax, one-third longer than its 
greatest width; segment 1 broad at base, one-half wider posteriorly than basally, 
one-half as long as its basal width; 2 one-half longer than 1; 3 one-half as long as 
wide, no longer than 1 and 2 united, one-half longer than 4-6 united; 1 densely, 


BY A. P. DODD. { 89 


rather finely, striate, but finely pubescent laterally; 2 with a median basal area of 
short very strong striae; rest of 2, and 3, smooth, with a rather dense pubescence of 
fine short hairs arising from minute punctures; pubescence longer on 4 and 5. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat Queensland: Gogango, 40 miles west of Rockhampton, one female in 
February, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the Queensland Museum. 

A very distinct species, readily distinguished by the more rounded vertex 
of the head, the flat dorsal surface and fine sculpture of the thorax, and the 
narrower forewings. 


XENOMERUS Walker. 
Entom. Mag., London, 3, 1836, 355. 


Walker erected this genus on the male sex of X. ergenna Walker from 
England; the female of this species has apparently not yet been discovered; the 
genus is unknown outside England and Australia; Xenomerus can be distinguished 
from Trimorus by the pedicellate-nodose flagellar joints of the male antennae, and 
the deep abbreviated parapsidal furrows. The Australian species are closely 
related, and can be separated by means of the following key: 


ll, MOORES lO Sowliohay Sanwa) shoclasucotodoocumuaboessauagenonoeb oe flavicornis 
Thorax black; scutum with impressed reticulation, except posteriorly .......... 2 

2. Head much wider than the thorax; metanotal tooth rather long; funicle 2 in female 
plainly wShHorte ream ep ead che eeiorse esha yaat sha, oaete ot Va ell ogee See tee ay ae Stay a nL laticeps 

Head a little wider than the thorax; metanotal tooth short; funicle 2 in female hardly 
SHO GUE Reta rn pelea Ryle ee Nees opus i pee AN ala yNts oy PCD Sites Jol gaye Aal os AP NNrr el AR AN. varipes 


XENOMERUS VARIPES Dodd. 
Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 38, 1914, 838.—2X. dubius Dodd, ibid., p. 84. 


6. Length, 1:25 mm. Black; coxae fuscous, the legs golden-yellow, the 
posterior tibiae and tarsi dusky; antennal scape and pedicel yellow, the flagellar 
joints fuscous with their stalks pale yellow; mandibles yellow. 


Head somewhat wider than the thorax, very transverse, smooth or nearly so; 
lower half of frons longitudinally striate; eyes large, bare, wide apart; mandibles 
rather long, tridentate. Antennae long and slender, somewhat longer than the 
body; scape long and slender; pedicel a little longer than wide; funicle joints 
pedicellate-nodose, bearing very long hairs which are twice as long as the joints; 
funicle 1 one-half longer than wide, slightly swollen but without a stalk; 2 
twice as long as 1, 2-4 subequal, 5-9 subequal, each a little longer than 2; 2-4 each 
with a slender basal stalk and terminal node; 5 with a shorter stalk at each 
end, the node depressed medially; 6-9 without a basal stalk, with two nodes 
separated by a short stalk and with a long terminal stalk; apical joint no longer 
than the penultimate, a little swollen at its base. Thorax no longer than its 
greatest width, a little longer than high; scutum sharply declivous anteriorly, 
foveate along the lateral margins, its surface with fine impressed reticulation, 
but smooth for the posterior third; parapsidal furrows present on the posterior 
half, as deep abbreviated grooves wide apart; scutellum smooth, foveate along 
anterior and posterior margins; metanotum transverse, armed medially with a 
short acute broadly triangular tooth; propodeum short, unarmed, pubescent, 
narrowly divided medially, the posterior margin gently concave. Legs slender, 

G 


90 REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN TELEASINAE, 


the tibiae and tarsi long. Forewings extending well beyond apex of abdomen; 
broad; hyaline; discal cilia fine and sparse; venation terminating at one-half the 
wing length, the marginal vein somewhat shorter than the submarginal, the 
stigmal vein rather oblique. Abdomen one-third longer than its greatest width, 
no wider than the thorax; segment 1 much wider posteriorly than basally, hardly 
as long as its basal width; 3 one-half longer than 1 and 2 united, twice as long as 
4-6 united; 1 strongly striate; 2 striate at base, smooth laterally and posteriorly; 
3 shortly striate at base; the rest smooth; 4-6, and 2 and 838 laterally, with 
scattered hairs. 


©. Length, 1:35 mm. Posterior tibiae and tarsi clear yellow; discal cilia 
of forewing moderately coarse and dense. First six antennal joints yellow, the club 
black; scape long and slender, as long as the next five joints combined; pedicel 
twice as long as its greatest width; funicle joints a little narrower than the 
pedicel; 1 somewhat shorter than the pedicel, twice as long as its greatest width; 
2 hardly shorter than 1; 3 and 4 abruptly shorter, quadrate; club compact, six- 
jointed, joint 2 the largest, 1 and 2 slightly wider than long, 3-5 each twice as 
wide as long. 

Habitat—North Queensland: Cairns district, one male, two females, in May- 
August, A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, J.2005. 

The sexes were originally described as distinct species. 


XENOMERUS LATICEPS Dodd. 

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 40, 1916, 28. 

©. Length, 1:20 mm. Black, the abdomen reddish at extreme base, the tip 
of the metanotal spine whitish; legs golden-yellow; antennae wholly black. 

Head very transverse, distinctly wider than the thorax, the vertex very thin 
and descending abruptly to the posterior margin; frons smooth and shining, with 
a strong median carina; lower frons with longitudinal striae; behind the line 
of the vertex the surface bears fine scaly reticulation; cheeks smooth. Antennal 
scape long and slender; pedicel two and a half times as long as its greatest 
width; funicle joints’ narrower than the pedicel; 1 two-thirds as long as the 
pedicel; 2 two-thirds as long as 1, one-half longer than wide; 3 and 4 a little 
wider than long; club six-jointed, as in varipes. Thorax stout, as wide as long, 
from lateral aspect somewhat higher than long; parapsidal furrows and sculpture 
' of scutum and scutellum as in varipes; metanotal tooth rather long and acute; 
propodeum short, declivous, densely punctate, without noticeable pubescence. 
Forewings normal; hyaline; discal cilia moderately dense and coarse; venation 
as in varipes. Abdomen one-third longer than its greatest width; segment 1 a 
little shorter than its basal width, much wider posteriorly than basally; 2 slightly 
longer than 1; 3 twice as long as 2; 1 and 2 strongly striate; 3 striate medially 
for about two-thirds its length, smooth laterally and posteriorly; 4 and 5 finely 
reticulate at base. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat—New South Wales. Hawkesbury River, the type female in October, 
A. A. Girault. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.5428. 

Differs from varipes in the wider head, dark antennae, shorter second funicle 
joint, and the longer metanotal tooth. 


BY A. P. DODD. 91 


XENOMERUS FLAVICORNIS Dodd. 


Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 38, 1914, 84. 

9. Length, 1:20 mm. Head black; thorax dusky-brown; abdomen black, the 
basal segment yellow; legs golden-yellow, the coxae fuscous; first six antennal 
joints yellow, the scape and pedicel somewhat dusky, the club black. 

Head smooth, or nearly so, the lower frons with striae converging to the 
mouth. Antennae as in varipes, except that the funicle joints are more distinctly 
narrower and shorter than the pedicel. Scutum and scutellum, according to the 
original description, smooth with a few scattered pin-punctures. Forewings 
hyaline, the discal cilia moderately coarse and dense. Abdomen stout, one-fourth 
longer than its greatest width; segment 1 distinctly shorter than its basal width; 
striation of segments as in varipes. 

6. Unknown. 

Habitat.—North Queensland: Cairns district, the holotype female in September, 
A. P. Dodd. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum, 1.2007. 

The holotype is mounted on a slide; hence the sculpture of the thorax could 
not be re-examined. The species is very close to varipes, but differs apparently 
in the smooth scutum and the colour of the thorax and the base of the abdomen. 


NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. XXIII. 


By J. R. Matnocu. 
(Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) 


(Thirty Text-figures. ) 
[Read 26th March, 1930.] 


Family TACHINIDAE. 

The matter presented in this paper is to be considered as supplementary to 
that in my preceding paper in this series in which I gave a partial revision of the 
Tachinidae of Australia, with generic key, the material upon which it is based 
having been received from Dr. I. M. Mackerras some months after the completion 
of that paper. 

Despite the fact that this additional material greatly increases the number of 
genera and species now known to me, the recorded total in the two papers must 
fall far short of the number actually occurring in Australia and discoverable 
through intensive collecting. 

No dipterous fauna, with the possible exception of that of New Zealand, has 
had as much interest for me as that of Australia, and I regret very much that 
I am unable to devote to it the time necessary for its thorough elucidation, and to 
carry my investigation of it into the field, without which latter course it is not 
possible to form a definite opinion of many of the inter-relationships, and also 
an impossibility to present a proper consideration of the systematics of the family 
now dealt with. 

I do not present in this paper an extended generic synopsis, as it will be 
found necessary to do that later when a larger percentage of the genera are 
known, but in all cases where I record genera either new or previously described 
from other faunal regions and not included in my published key, I add sufficient 
data to permit of their being relegated to their proper place in that key, and in 
the case of those genera with uncarinate face and haired propleura I give a 
synopsis. 

A striking feature of the Australian members of this family is the frequent 
occurrence of hairs on the centre of the propleura, these being found in genera in 
several of the tribes which are evidently quite unrelated to each other, if one is 
to judge relationships by the characters usually employed for this purpose in 
other faunal regions. 

I have just received, in answer to a request of mine, type material of most of 
the species described by Mr. C. H. Curran from Australia, through the generosity of 
Dr. Walther Horn of the Deutsches Entomologisches Museum, Berlin-Dahlem, and 
offer a few notes on them herein. 


Tribe PHASIINI. 
Genus STRONGYGASTER Macquart. 
This genus in its emended form was utilized for the reception of two 
Australian species by Curran, as listed in my catalogue. I have before me para- 
type females of the species. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 93 


The genus Strongygaster was erected by Macquart in 1838, and in it he 
placed but one species, globulus Meigen, but in his next reference to the genus, 
some two years later, he included two other species, all three European. It is 
thus clear that the only originally included species must be accepted as the geno- 
type. In view of this fact, it is of interest to note that globulus Meigen is 
included in the genus Jamiclea Macquart in the Catalogue of Palaearctic Diptera, 
Part 3, page 568. We are, however, not particularly concerned with the peregrina- 
tions of the European species and are rather compelled to discover if possible 
whether the genus name Strongygaster (emend. Strongylogaster Blanch., nec 
Dahlbohm, Hymen.) can be used for the Australian species referred to it. 

Macquart laid particular stress upon the wing venation, using as the dis- 
tinguishing character in his key “Premiére cellule postérieure a petiole trés-court’’, 
and in his figure he shows the petiole much as I figured it for Gymnosoma 
rotundata Meigen in a recent paper in this series, and not at all like that of 
H. lepidofera Malloch. The two species described by Curran have the first 
posterior cell with a long petiole as in lepidofera. I should also hesitate to 
describe the abdomen of either of these species as ““ventre rond’’, Macquart’s stated 
meaning of his generic name. 

In view of these facts I propose to reject the use of Strongygaster for the 
Australian species and retain Hyalomyia. 

I have now a number of additional species of the genus from Australia. 


Genus HyALoMyIA Robineau-Desvoidy. 


The genitalia of the females of this genus present in some cases good structural 
characters for specific distinction, but it is not always an easy matter to relate the 
sexes of the species. I figure the genital segments of some of the species to show 
the peculiar structures referred to, which, incidentally, are quite similar in general 
nature to those of some North American species placed in Alophora. 

I have attempted to work up all of the material now in my hands and to 
include in the key below the two species placed in Strongylogaster by Curran, as 
well as his Australian species placed in Alophora. I expect that there will be 
; many more species of the genus found in Australia. 


Key to the Species. 


1. Apical pair of scutellar bristles well developed and situated at tip ............ 2 
Apical pair of scutellar bristles generally short and fine, much shorter than the. 
lateral sub-basal pair, situated well before tip ............+.....5.256+.--s- 6 


2. Petiole of the first posterior cell of wing at least as long as outer cross-vein, and not 
less than four times as long as the inner cross-vein; bend of fourth vein 
rounded, but the whole presenting the appearance of a hockey stick, the 
longitudinal portion much longer than the forwardly directed portion; species 
not more than 5 mm. in length; lower plate of female genitalia as in Figure 1 
ES Le Ne ats eis eta tire RARE sR URAC UR Coc MBUT IS vc ot RUG ARE ARTEL oe a ties cei ec) ete normalis Curran 

Petiole of first posterior cell of wing not more than two-thirds as long as outer cross- 
vein, and not twice as long as inner cross-vein; bend of fourth vein broadly and 
rather evenly rounded, the apical section forming an almost regular rounded arc; 
SOCOIGS HONE [SSS oN BO scan, hel ems cocobeedoacccduouscoUCC COU oObUOuOODS 3 

Large species, about 10 mm. in length; epistome not at all projecting in profile 
9-0 001000. 810 OrOROH ENG ETOP CHO RSE E TO SR ud COSHEO ROG EOI EIS onS rc leet ar Catamanan Ue tt Men ge Ei nigrisquama Malloch 

Smaller species, not more than 8 mm. in length; epistome quite distinctly projecting 
LIN TOT. © Lill Crewe tare Veasyen aah Maravectessteharet ar ohay Stoiies SLR te rae al cnet nae EKONER a wT ipa Uap ad iis, eevee oeseaes 4 

4. Dorsum of abdomen in male uniformly golden or brassy dusted, without dark marks, 

the incurved ventral portions of the tergites densely pale-grey dusted; wings 


co 


94 


cs 


10. 


Wale 


12. 


NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, Xxiii, 


greyish hyaline, darkened along basal half of costa, most conspicuously so in 
the subcostal cell; thorax with four broad black dorsal vittae, the submedian 
pair extending to about midway between suture and hind margin, and twice as 
wide behind as before the suture, the vittae presuturally separated by conspicuous 
whitish-dusted intervening areas, the postsutural region golden-yellow dusted 
ORLA NOI Cu TL CR CHC at Ratna EA ua Miers Penn a iis Kinin Rigen) iormtal myst Sean a A OT via chrysis, NT. sp. 
Dorsum of abdomen not uniformly dusted, variously marked with black; thorax not 
marked as above, the postsutural area broadly black centrally ............ 5 


Scutellum entirely black, slightly shining; area between the submedian vittae pre- 
suturally black-brown, wing with a fuscous cloud on basal half of the costa 
extending to apex of first vein, and a faint yellowish cloud on region surrounding 
the} innerecrosssveim psi val sel GAs ciel Sete ee eee tien) See ee eee costalis Malloch. 

Scutellum black, slightly shining, with quite distinct yellowish-grey dusting on apical 
margin; area between the submedian vittae presuturaily not much darker than 
those between these and the sublateral vittae; wing with a fuscous cloud on 
costa as in costalis, but with a brown cloud along centre of disc, extending 
broadly on both sides of fourth vein up to outer cross-vein, and a yellowish 
suffusion on apical section of fourth vein ..................... discalis, n. sp. 


Petiole of first posterior cell of wing not nearly as long as outer cross-vein and not 
twicevasmlongwasiinnernCLOSS=iviellamnn iirc cicerecieiniceraiiei eine eEa ne eee 7 
Petiole of first posterior cell of wing about as long as, or longer than, outer cross- 


vein, and at least three times as long as inner cross-vein ................ 8 


Abdomen with the dorsum entirely and densely golden or brassy yellow dusted ; 
wings with a fuscous cloud on costa from base to apex of first vein, otherwise 
eneyishs hyaline. (mailer a hn ey an ca eue em lavtay sitbitel eu cushatienanedomemens chrysis, n. sp. 

Abdomen of male, densely golden dusted dorsally, with a faint dorsocentral vitta, 
and sometimes more or less blackened on the apical two segments; female with 
the abdomen black, second and third tergites with broad interrupted yellow-dusted 
basal fascia, fourth tergite wholly yellow dusted; wings of male blackish, with 
pale streaks in the costal cell, along the third and fifth veins, and in the apical 


cell; female with wings hyaline ........................ aureiventris* Curran. 
dN IED VeYo Teens a eed a A ae can (AOU eel cy eu Re eee eh No ea eR ent Geen Gini Grd.0.g,9 0.0 9-0 9 
LEW sy nakeH Vetere rere RO eNO) eee ay eRe eR On a a REe ner on iaie Chen MEE eoEis GIGI ETOInIcIa co ero 0-06.05.0.0 6 i3 


All the hairs on the mesopleura slender, none of them lanceolate or scale-like, and 
all of them black, but some of those on the lower portion of the humerus yellow 


or fulvous and distinctly widened, scale-like ................. 0.2002 e eee aee 10 
The humeral hairs either all normal, or, if some of them are scale-like, then some 
of those on the mesopleura are similar in form ....................-.+---- 11 


Wings quite conspicuously blackened on basal half costally, the dark colour extending 
from base to beyond inner cross-vein, and from costa to fifth vein; dust on 
dorsal exposure of third and fourth visible tergites of abdomen brassy, and 


rather HCheekKenea ey ee kU ee ROE Se APRN cies RO Leh ane tae Retina tat basalis, nN. sp. 
Wings entirely whitish hyaline; dust on third and fourth visible tergites when seen 
from behind pale grey, and quite regular in distribution .......... hyalis, n. sp. 


Abdomen about as broad as long, almost circular in outline, the fourth visible 
tergite very little longer than third, and about three times as broad at base as 
long ’'in centre; hind tarsi entirely black; wings pale brown; mesonotum with 
four black vittae anteriorly; pleura with normally formed dark hairs .......... 
DALES Sh oer AR he eo 7 AUER ree Cae Ci RAED SEAPORT Cd nN ria td GaSe Ao ee lativentris Malloch. 

Abdomen distinctly longer than broad; fourth visible tergite much longer than the 
third; wings not evenly pale brown; mesonotum not vittate anteriorly .... 12 


Both the lower portion of the humeri and the upper portion of mesopleura with many 
yellow, Scale=Wkewhains rape ise ce crenelecenete erence ence mene teh ne lepidofera Malloch. 
Humeri normally haired, some of the hairs on anterior portion of upper section of 
mesopleura rather flattened and a little paler than the others .............. 
PPA Fares eral aan Ero EMA ad ole i TSA aT Aa os! Ble cl QR EER GR a nigrihirta Malloch. 


*]T have arbitrarily placed this species in the key, basing my action on Curran’s 


description. I have also placed chrysis in both sections because of some possible varia- 
bility in the scutellar bristling. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 95 


13. Ventral plate of genitalia straight, not curved downward at tip ...... sensua Curran. 
Ventral plate of genitalia quite conspicuously curved downward at tip .......... 14 
Map LUNdetarsimentinelivin Dla Chey rcliscensycysvayeu sis sue ouaianetene icra cacraue es letielen ste tone nigrihirta Malloch. 
Hind tarsi with the basal segment largely yellowish ............ lepidofera Malloch. 


HYALOMYIA NORMALIS (Curran). 

This species, of which [ have seen only one female paratype, will not find a 
place in my previous key, being only 4-4-5 mm. in length, and having the apical 
pair of scutellar bristles quite strong, and situated on the margin. The wing 
venation is similar to that of lepidofera, but the discal cell is narrower and 
longer. The facets are but slightly enlarged on the upper half of eye in the 
female. Curran describes the male as having the wings entirely hyaline, which 
character, coupled with the silvery-grey dust on the apical portion of the second 
and all of third and fourth visible tergites of abdomen, readily distinguishes it 
from the other species in this segregate. 

Locality, Palmerston, Qld. 

I figure the female genitalia of this species (Fig. 1). 


HYALOMYIA NIGRISQUAMA Malloch. 


I have seen only the type male of this species. 


HYALOMYIA CHRYSIS, Ni. Sp. 

6. Head black, frons deep black, orbits in front and the parafacials silvery- 
white dusted, face, cheeks, and occiput, densely white dusted; antennae black, palpi 
testaceous yellow, darker at bases; frontal hairs black, lower occipital and genal 
hairs white. Thorax black, with whitish-grey dusting, mesonotum with four deep 
black vittae, the outer one on each side entire, the submedian pair discontinued 
a little behind the suture and twice as broad behind it as before it, the central 
portion of the postsutural area densely golden-yellow dusted; scutellum black, 
grey dusted. Abdomen black, entire dorsal exposure densely golden or brassy- 
yellow dusted, the incurved lateral portions of tergites densely grey dusted, all 
hairs black. Legs black. Wings subfuscous, darker along costa to apex of first 
vein. Calyptrae fuscous, whitish at junction. 

Frons linear above; epistome slightly produced; cheeks as high as length of 
antenna. Thorax much as in costalis Malloch, but the scutellum is shorter and 
has the apical bristles practically undifferentiated, which fact has caused me to 
place the species in two segregates in my key. Abdomen broadly ovate, the 
tergites subequal to fourth visible one, the fifth very short but distinct. Legs as 
in costalis. Wing with the apical section of fourth vein forming an almost regular 
fourth of a circle. 

Length, 7 mm. 

Type, Narrogin, W.A., 30.8.1926 (EK. W. Ferguson). One specimen. | 


HYALOMYIA COSTALIS Malloch. 


I have seen only the type specimen of this species. 


HYALOMYIA DISCALIS, Nn. sp. 
6. Very similar to the preceding species in general appearance, but readily 
distinguished by the characters cited in the key. It has the scutellum more 
elongate and with the apical pair of bristles quite strong and outstanding, the 


96 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


apical section of fourth vein not so regularly rounded, and, though the type 
specimen has the abdomen largely greasy, it shows traces of having the fourth 
visible tergite grey dusted, the others brown anteriorly, quite broadly on first and 
second tergites, and the posterior margins narrowly grey dusted. 

Length, 8 mm. 

Type, Geraldton, W.A., 5.9.1926 (EH. W. Ferguson). One specimen. 

It might be worth mention that the sixth wing vein in this group is not so 
very abruptly discontinued as in the lepidofera group, its apex being usually 
tapered off, while in the other group it is quite blunt-tipped. 


HYALOMYIA AUREIVENTRIS (Curran). 


I have not seen this species, but have no doubt that it belongs here. 


HYALOMYIA BASALIS, Nn. Sp. 


6. This species belongs to the same group as lepidofera, but it has the wings 
quite conspicuously blackened along costal half to the apex of first vein, which is 
quite unique in this section of the genus as far as I am aware. The head is the 
same colour as in lepidofera. Mesonotum seen from in front evenly white dusted 
to beyond the suture, the sides posteriorly not so distinctly dusted and the central 
portion behind suture noticeably yellowish, though by no means as strikingly 
yellow as in lepidofera, no trace of vittae present; pleural hairs biack, only some 
of the lanceolate hairs on anterior lower portion of humeri yellow or fulvous. 
Abdomen very noticeably purple on the hind margins, and to less extent on the 
sides at curves, of the tergites, disc of tergites yellowish dusted, rather checkered, 
and with traces of a central dark vitta; fifth and sixth tergites, and first visible 
one at the curve, greyish dusted. Legs black, basal segment of all tarsi slightly 
yellowish, bases of femora ventrally pale-haired, elsewhere black-haired. Wings 
as described above. Calyptrae white, slightly darkened and shining behind. 
Halteres brownish-yellow. 

Interfrontalia obliterated on a space about as long as third antennal segment; 
facets not greatly enlarged on upper half of eye; epistome produced as in lepidofera. 
Some of the pleural hairs on anterior lower portion of humerus lanceolate and 
yellowish, those on the mesopleura all black, and normal; notopleural region 
rather densely black-haired; scutellum with the apical bristles fine and short, rather 
far from margin. Abdomen narrowly ovate, fourth visible tergite about one and 
a half times as long as third. Legs normal. Longitudinal portion of apical 
section of fourth vein not much longer than the forwardly directed section; discal 
cell at inner cross-vein about as wide as first posterior cell at its widest point; 
petiole of first posterior cell longer than outer cross-vein and more than four-fifths 
as long as penultimate section of fourth vein. 

Length, 5:75 mm. 

Type, Wahroonga, Sydney, N.S.W., 16.11.1926 (E. W. Ferguson). One specimen. 


HYALOMYIA HYALIS, nD. Sp. 


do. Very similar to the preceding species, and possibly only a variety of it. 
In addition to the characters listed in the key the wings are narrower, which 
makes the discal cell appear longer, and the outer cross-vein is not much more 
than one-half of the length of the penultimate section of fourth vein, while in 
basalis it is about four-fifths as long as it. Possibly the genitalia will furnish other 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 97 


characters for the separation of the forms if they are distinct, but I do not desire 
to destroy the unique examples now in my possession in so far as their outward 
appearance is concerned in dissecting them. , 

Length, 5 mm. 

Type, Como, N.S.W., December, 1923, on flowers (H. Peterson). One specimen. 


HyALOMYIA LATIVENTRIS Malloch. 


I have seen only the type male of this species. 


HYALOMYIA LEPIDOFERA Malloch. 


Apparently a common species, as I have a good series from the type locality 
and a number more recently received from Wahroonga, Sydney, N.S.W. 
I figure the genitalia of the female (Fig. 2). 


Fig. 1.—Hyalomyia normalis. Female genitalia; a. 
from below; 6b, from the side. 

Fig. 2.—Hyalomyia lepidofera. Female genitalia; a, — 
from below; b, from the side. 

Fig. 3.—Hyalomyia sensua. Female genitalia; a, 
from below; b, from the side. 

Fig. 4.—Tayloria testacea. Head of male, from the 
side. 


HYALOMYIA NIGRIHIRTA Malloch. 


Through a peculiar error the wing of this species appears as Figure 7 in my 
paper xix of this series (These ProckEEpines. 54, 1929, 111). In sending my 
manuscript I evidently wrongly labelled this figure as this species. instead of 
Gymnosoma rotundata Meigen, and Dr. Mackerras wrote me that the figure of the 
wing of the latter was missing, upon which I sent a second figure, which appears 
properly labelled on the succeeding page. There are thus two figures of the wing 
of Gymnosoma and none of nigrihirta in that paper. The wing of the latter is 
very similar to that of lepidofera. 

I present now characters for the separation of nigrihirta female from the 
others, but the genitalia are as in Figure 2. 


98 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, Xxiii, 


HYALOMYIA SENSUA (Curran). 


Only the female is known of this species, the genitalia (Fig. 3) being figured 
from a paratype sent to me by Dr. Walther Horn. 

The legs are entirely black, the facets on the upper half of eyes are almost as 
large as the anterior ocellus, and the interfrontalia is obliterated on a space more 
than twice as long as third antennal segment. 

Locality, Palmerston, Qld. 


Genus TAYLORIA, n. gen. 


This genus is distinguished from Hyalomyia Robineau-Desvoidy, at least in the 
male, by the following characters: Femora of all legs with two series of short 
spines on the apical half or more of the anteroventral and posteroventral surfaces; 
antennae extending almost to the mouth margin, the latter not projecting, and but 
slightly below vibrissae (Fig. 4); abdomen not flattened above; postscutellum not 
projecting beyond the level of scutellum, evenly rounded. The wing venation is 
similar to that of Hyalomyia lepidofera Malloch, the first posterior cell being long 
petiolate, and the petiole ending in the apex of wing. Other characters may be 
gleaned from the description of the genotype given below. 

The genus will run down to Caption 13 in my published key to the genera, 
and to the first section therein, but, lacking information as to the structure of the 
female, I can only apply the first character in that section of the synopsis to it 
with absolute certainty. To prevent confusion it is necessary therefore to omit 
tentatively all after the first semicolon in using the key; we will then have 
three genera in which there are no strong dorsal bristles on the abdomen. The 
new one will readily separate from Hyalomyia on the character of the femoral 
bristling and the convex dorsum of abdomen, the latter in at least the males of 
Hyalomyia being more or less conspicuously flattened; from Gymnosoma Meigen 
it can be readily distinguished by the shorter second antennal segment, the very 
distinct and functional segmentation of the abdominal dorsum, the more extensive 
femoral armature, and the different wing venation. 

The genus is more closely related to Gymnosoma than to Hyalomyia. 

Genotype, the following species. 


TAYLORIA TESTACEA, 0. SD. 


6. Fulvous testaceous, slightly shining. Frons, upper occiput, third antennal 
segment except base, and bases of aristae, fuscous; frontal orbits, face, cheeks, 
and occiput except upper third, silvery-white dusted; cheeks dark centrally. 
Mesonotum with yellow dust, most dense on a narrow presutural band, and to a 
lesser extent on hind margin. Abdomen sometimes with a faint trace of a dark 
linear dorsocentral vitta, evenly and lightly yellowish-dusted apically; all hairs 
black. Legs concolorous with body, tarsi fuscous, fore and mid pairs paler at 
bases. Calyptrae concolorous with body. Wings brownish hyaline, yellow at 
bases. Halteres fulvous. 

HKyes bare, facets enlarged on central front portion; frons at vertex about one- 
sixth of the head width, orbits on entire length narrower than interfrontalia, 
with fine short incurved bristles along inner margins in front of ocelli; ocellar 
bristles short and fine, proclinate and divergent; inner verticals minute, shorter 
than the short postverticals; profile as in Figure 4; palpi club-shaped, bent, bare 
except for a few microscopic black hairs at apices; arista subnude. Thoracic hairs 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 99 


very short; the following bristles present: one humeral, one pair of prescutellar 
dorsocentrals and acrostichals, two notopleurals, one supra-alar, two postalars, four 
marginal scutellars, two (1:1) sternopleurals, about four mesopleurals, one or two 
propleurals, one stigmatal, one pteropleural, and about eight hypopleurals, the 
presutural bristle minute, almost lacking; prosternum, centre of propleura, postalar 
declivity and the infrasquamal region bare. Abdomen elongate-ovate, slightly 
convex on dorsum, first visible tergite without a concavity in front, fourth slightly 
longer than any of the others, all without apical bristles, and with many short 
stiff black hairs; fifth sternite with a very large broad central excavation, reduced 
to a mere strip on each side which is produced into a short obtuse process at apex. 
Legs rather strong, hind femora stouter than the others, all femora with two series 
of short strong black bristles from before middle to apices; fore and mid tibiae 
without median bristles; hind tibia with one anterodorsal and one posterodorsal 
bristle near middle, both short; claws and pulvilli long. Wings rather narrow; 
inner cross-vein a little more than one-third from apex of discal cell and below apex 
of first vein; outer cross-vein straight, a little nearer inner cross-vein than to outer 
end of bend of fourth; petiole of first posterior cell more than half as long as outer 
cross-vein. Lower calypter large, transverse at apex, straight on outer side. 

Length, 7-5-9 mm. 

Type and one paratype, Mt. Molloy, Qld. (F. H. Taylor). 

The genus is dedicated to the collector. 


Tribe MICROTROPEZINI. 
Genus MICROTROPEZA Macquart. 


I have now before me several additional species of this genus and as the most 
precise manner of presenting information upon their distinguishing characters I 
am now publishing a new specific synopsis. 


Key to the Species. 
1. Second visible abdominal tergite without any outstanding bristles in centre of apical 


TOOK ER GV. 5 vettseeh aucOnE ora ence dic io: CIOIIGESLO An Gore Alc Cle CLOI ATOR Sta) OaciCnCRCeC Ep aEarIG ican ini Ie tre sebsseac closokeo ere 2 
Second visible abdominal tergite with some strong black bristles in centre of apical 
IOOEN CSA al. May eh eteEr ata om BA Sac Oc ORGIES OLR Cha ORS. CCNGLE PCR CREME H SO stot alchc cna, cRencr oko cas 4 


bo 


Abdomen testaceous yellow, with a bluish-black dorsocentral vitta which ceases about 
middle of fourth visible tergite and occupies less than one-third of the dorsal 
exposure; no strong bristles at the lateral curve of first and second visible tergites 
of abdomen; wings greyish hyaline, yellowish at bases; fore tarsi of female 
slender; mesopleura dark haired in centre .................. flaviventris, n. sp. 

Abdomen black, with dense whitish-grey dusted markings; one or more strong bristles 
on lateral curves of first and second visible tergites of abdomen; wings more or 
less distinctly infuscated, bright orange coloured at bases; fore tarsi of female 
TORE OF IES WACEMEG soc ckbcooodooadesoescuosusomoobons SEAS Un alate 3 

Mesopleura with some strong black hairs on centre; presutural area of thoracic 
dorsum inconspicuously vittate, the black vittae linear, and the pale dust greyish 
and not very distinct; fore tarsi of female but slightly widened .. sinwata Don. 

Mesopleura entirely yellow haired; presutural area of dorsum of thorax conspicuously 
vittate, the black vittae rather broad and the intervening spaces densely white 
dusted; fore tarsi of female much widened .................. latimana Malloch 

4. Abdomen glossy blue-black, with dense whitish-grey dusted markings as in sinuata; 
pleural hairs, except those on centre of propleura, black; wings with the veins 
DESH GROGAN en O asa lye eyes cicictecss oto saweu telicigen ees: otek Scie nay ee cee ae NS intermedia, n. sp. 

Abdomen largely yellow, darkened only on a variable proportion of centre of dorsal 
exposure; pleural hairs mostly yellow; wing veins not orange coloured at bases 


(Se) 


100 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


5. Abdomen: with visible tergites 3 and 4 ochreous, when seen from behind with dense 
Wioibxoca CMAs CI Bos aaciodcoodoauuddoosodsvooaanoo 650 ochriventris Malloch 

All visible abdominal tergites, when seen from behind, with dense grey or yellowish 
dusting and a pair of large glossy ochreous or reddish-brown spots on dorsum 

oA RED CaaS rea raret At eLCCR APE Sime noe Reeeet cay ahhh Oval nes Oe ater nans ont A A flavitarsis Malloch 


MICROTROPEZA SINUATA Donovan. 


It would appear to be worth noting that Macquart’s figure of this species does 
not represent the one so named by Brauer and Bergenstamm, and so accepted by 
me in my previous paper. The distinctly marked presutural area of thoracic 
dorsum and the quite evidently dilated fore tarsi indicate that he figured latimana. 
I assume that the two species were mixed in his collection and possibly in most of 
the others then extant. 

Before me there is one additional female specimen from Geraldton, W.A. 
(J. Clark). 


MICROTROPEZA LATIMANA Malloch. 


The new material of this species available is in better condition than that from 
which I described the species, and the specimens all show a very much more 
marked division of colour between the orange-yellow bases of the wings and their 
fuscous apices. The five examples from Eastern Australia are distinctly larger 
than the four from Western Australia, but I can detect no specific distinctions 
between the two groups. 

Localities: Lindfield, 31.10.1925 (Jones); Eccleston, Allyn R., 28.2.1921; 
Orange, N.S.W., 21.4.1923 (Health Dept.); Gisborne, Vict., 5.2.1922, and 16.12.1923 
(G. Lyell), Swan R., W.A. (J. Clark). 


MICROTROPEZA OCHRIVENTRIS Malloch. 


One specimen, Gordon, 23.11.1924 (Harrison). 


MICROTROPEZA FLAVITARSIS Malloch. 


Five specimens, Geraldton, W.A., 5.9.1926 (EH. W. Ferguson), and Kojarena, 
W.A., 6.9.1926 (EK. W. Ferguson). 


MICROTROPEZA INTERMEDIA, Nn. SD. 


dg. Similar in general habitus and coloration to latimana, differing as follows: 
Parafacials and anterior portion of cheeks with dark hairs, third antennal segment 
fuscous except at base; thoracic dorsum with conspicuous, white-dusted presutural 
marks, but the acrostichal area has a broad white central mark, not two on the 
lines of the bristles, and the one on each series of dorsocentral bristles is inter- 
rupted in middle; pleural hairs al! black, with the exception of those on centre 
of propleura; mesonotum and scutellum entirely dark-haired; abdomen marked as 
in sinuata and latimana, but the dark portions are blue-black, and the second 
visible tergite, instead of having two whitish-dusted spots near anterior margin in 
centre, has a similar mark to the third and fourth tergites which is faint and 
greenish in front and grey-dusted only on the narrow posterior central portion; 
wings yellow at bases, but not infuscated apically; tarsi fuscous except at base 
of first segment. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. ; 101 


Structurally quite similar to latimana, but the third antennal segment is 
shorter and broader, and the second visible abdominal tergite has a pair of central 
apical bristles. I have not compared the hypopygia of the two species. 

Length, 15 mm. 

Type, EHidsvold, Qld., 20.4.1924 (Bancroft). One specimen. 


MICROTROPEZA FLAVIVENTRIS, Nl. Sp. 


°. Superficially this species resembles a rather large Chaetophthalmus. Head 
orange-yellow, frontal, parafacial, and anterior genal hairs, dark, other hairs 
yellow, postocular cilia black; antennae and palpi orange-yellow. Thorax orange- 
yellow, with whitish dusting, mesonotum bluish-black except on margins, the dust 
so disposed as to leave four rather faint linear dark vittae; pleural hairs largely 
yellow, mesopleura with strong black hairs centrally; scutellum yellow, with black 
hairs above and pale hairs on sides below. Abdomen coloured as thorax, bases of 
second and third visible tergites whitish dusted, that of fourth yellowish dusted, 
a blue-black dorsocentral vitta occupying about one-third of the dorsal exposure 
extends over the basal three visible tergites, becoming narrow on apex of third, 
and linear or obsolete on fourth. Legs entirely yellow. Wings greyish hyaline, 
veins yellow basally. Calyptrae and halteres orange-yellow. 

Frons at vertex a little less than one-third of the head width; ocellars not 
developed; third antennal segment as long as second. Second visible abdominal 
tergite without apical central bristles, third with a complete apical series, fourth 
with a preapical and apical series, the apex not depressed. Fore tarsi not widened. 
In other respects similar to sinuata. 

Length, 12 mm. 

Type, Narromine, N.S.W., no other data. One specimen. 


Tribe AMENTINI. 
Genus AMENIA Robineau-Desvoidy. 
I append some additional records of the occurrence of species of this genus. 


AMENIA LEONINA Fabricius. 
Twenty-five specimens from the following localities in Queensland and New 
South Wales: Hidsvold, Cairns, Broken Bay, Milson Is., Woy Woy, National Park, 
Barrington Tops, Como, Woodford, Manly, and Loowanna. 


AMENIA IMPERIALIS Robineau-Desvoidy. 


Twenty-nine specimens from the following localities in Queensland and New 
South Wales: Magnetic Island, Hidsvold, Meringa, Broken Bay, Glen Innes, Gordon, 
Chester Hill, National Park, Heathcote, Como, Woy Woy, and Mosman. 


AMENIA DUBITALIS Malloch. 
A specimen which agrees well with the type of this species, except in having 
short but distinct ocellar bristles is from Hidsvold, Qld., 4.4.1924 (Bancroft). 


AMENIA CHRYSAME Walker. 
Amenia parva Schiner will have to fall as a synonym of this species. 
Ten specimens from the following localities: Hidsvold, Qld., December, 1922, 
and 20.4.1924 (Bancroft); Barrington Tops, N.S.W., February, 1925, Allyn Range, 


102 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


on Leptospermum (S.U. Zool. Exped.); Mill, Allyn Range, 18.12.1922, brush 
(Nicholson); Woy Woy, N.S.W., 22.9.1923 (Mackerras) and 4.10.1925 (Nicholson) ; - 
Ararat, Vict. (H. W. Davey). 

In addition to the characters mentioned in my key for the distinction of this 
species from its congeners, it may be worth mention that the second antennal 
segment is fuscous, while in leonina it is yellow. This character is specifically 
mentioned by Walker in his description of chrysame. 


AMENIA NIGROMACULATA Malloch. 


°. This sex agrees in markings and general structure with the male, but the 
frons is about one-fourth of the head width at vertex, gradually widened to antericr 
margin, and each orbit has two or three quite strong forwardly-directed outer 
supraorbital bristles. 

Locality, W. Australia; no other data. 

This specimen should be considered as the allotype. 


Genus StTrtBomy1lA Macquart. 
In my catalogue of Tachinidae of Australia I listed two species of this genus, 


costalis Walker, and opulenta Walker, the latter with a doubt. I have now before 
me two species and endeavour to elucidate them below. 


Key to the Species. 
A. Apex of lower calypter fuscous; fourth visible abdominal tergite without a silvery- 


white dusted spot on each side; central stripe of frons (interfronitalia), antennae, 
and palpi, fuscous; antennal foveae darkened; only the mesopleura with a white 
GUISES AY SP Oty re secs nevew ren eee ras ak oe hie eae iaete ht aaMOe oosee Sage ley okie) MOR ae cetera eee costalis Walker. 


AA. Calyptrae entirely white, lower one with narrow dark rim; fourth visible tergite of 
abdomen with a large silvery-white dusted spot on each side; frons, antennae, 
palpi, and face, orange-yellow ; mesopleura and sternopleura each with a white 
GUSECAMSDO EN saci RE Cet ehace ee ee nae cera ee ORGS AED Iie ea minor, N. sp. 


STILBOMYIA COSTALIS Walker. 

This identification is based upon the example named opulenta Walker in the 
United States National Museum, and accepted as such by me in my previous 
paper on the genus. [f am unable to say who identified the specimen. It agrees 
well with Engel’s redescription of costalis, but in his paper he states that only 
the sternopleura has a white spot, whereas it is the mesopleura which is so marked, 
and he says that the base of the lower calypter is brown, whereas it is the apex 
that is dark. : 

The frons at vertex is hardly more than one-fourth of the head width, each 
orbit at centre is about as wide as the interfrontalia, the postocular orbits are 
entirely golden-yellow dusted, the thoracic dorsum is brilliant metallic blue-green 
and devoid of white dusting even on the humeri, and the abdomen is concolorous 
with it, the sutures a little darker. 

Length, 8 mm. 

Locality, Kuranda, Qld. (F. P. Dodd). One specimen. 


STILBOMYIA MINOR, I. SD. 
°. Similar to the preceding species in general colour, being metallic blue-green, 
with orange-yellow head, black legs, and the wings conspicuously infuscated on 
costa to beyond middle, most broadly so at bases. It differs as stated in the key 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 103 


and in having the upper half or more of the postocular orbits silvery-white dusted, 
the mesonotum slightly white dusted anteriorly and quite densely so behind the 
humeri and on two spots on the supra-alar margins, and the wings paler, with the 
costal dark mark more sharply defined. Halteres black. 

Frons at vertex more than one-third of the head width, widened in front, 
each orbit at middle not more than one-third as wide as the interfrontalia; pre- 
apical central bristles of scutellum stronger than the preapical sublateral pair 
(weaker in costalis); wing not so narrow at apex as in costalis, the fourth vein 
more curved beyond the preapical angle than in that species. 

Length, 7 mm. 

Type, Hidsvold, Qld., 1923 (Bancroft). One specimen. 


STILBOMYIA OPULENTA Walker. 


This species should be omitted from the Australian list. It is apparently 
distinct from costalis, having the calyptrae entirely white. I have not seen it. 


Genus NEOAMENITA, 0. gen. 


This genus is almost intermediate between Amenia and Stilbomyia. running 
down to the section in my key to the genera of Australian Tachinidae which 
contains these genera, but it is separable on characters not utilized therein. The 
frons of the male is about one-fifth of the head width, and the forwardly directed 
fronto-orbital bristles are very weak, the third wing vein is setulose only at base 
and not to the inner cross-vein, and the facial carina is broadly, longitudinally, 
suleate. This last character distinguishes the genus from both of the others, the 
less extensively bristled basal section of the third wing vein distinguishes it from 
Stilbomyia, as does the narrower and less strongly bristled frons, and the presence 
of forwardly directed outer orbital bristles and the much longer third antennal 
segment distinguish it from Amenia. 

Genotype, the following species. 


NEOAMENIA LONGICORNIS, 0. Sp. ° 


6. Head bright orange-yellow, with yellow dust, occiput with a large black 
mark on each side of upper half; antennae reddish-yellow; aristae and their hairs 
black; palpi orange; frontal and occipital hairs black, genal hairs yellow, marginal 
genal bristles black. Thorax shining black, with very distinct purple or violet 
reflections, especially around the white marks and on disc of mesonotum and 
scutellum, the hairs all black; mesonotum with the following conspicuous white 
dusted marks: two submedian vittae anterior to suture, a streak over inner half of 
each humerus extending to the transverse suture, and two marginal postsutural 
spots; a white spot on the mesopleura and another on the sternopleura. Abdomen 
metallic violet-blue, with a conspicuous white dusted spot on each lateral curve of 
visible tergites 2 to 4 inclusive, largest on 4. Legs black. Wings’ greyish, 
blackened from bases to the apices of basal cells. Upper calypter white, lower one 
black except at base. Halteres black. 

Eyes bare; frons at vertex about one-fifth of the head width, inner verticals 
long and strong, outer pair short and fine; ocellars well differentiated, orbits 
linear above, with a series of black bristles along inner margins which are fine 
behind and become longer and stronger in front, one or two very fine forwardly- 
directed setulae on upper half, and in front of these numerous fine hairs laterad 


104 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


of the bristles; carina of face gradually widened from between antennae to middle, 
quite conspicuously sulcate; third antennal segment more than one and a half 
times as long as height of cheek, the latter not half as high as eye; parafacials 
bare; arista quite densely haired to apex, longest hairs not as long as width of 
third antennal segment; a number of bristles and setulae above the vibrissae. 
Thorax with two or three plus four dorsocentrals, one plus two or three 
acrostichals, sternopleurals two plus one, and eight marginal scutellars. Abdomen 
with two or four bristles on centre or apex of second visible tergite, and a 
complete series on apices of third and fourth. Mid tibia with a submedian ventral 
bristle; hind tibia with two anteroventral and six or more irregular anterodorsal 
and posterodorsal bristles. Venation of wing as in Amenia leonina Fabricius, the 
setulae on base of third vein not extending midway to inner cross-vein. 

Length, 9 mm. 

Type, Western Australia; no other data (Newman). One specimen. 


Tribe RUTILIINI. 


I had not intended to revert to this tribe again because of press of other 
work, but there are so many interesting species amongst the new material to hand 
that I have determined to add a few notes to those I have already published. 


Genus Formosia Guérin. 


I have found two species amongst Dr. Mackerras’s material which were 
previously unknown to me and, finding no published descriptions with which 
they agree, I am describing them as new. I also give some additional distribution 
records for some of the other species of the genus. The two new species belong 
to the subgenus Pseudoformosia. 


FORMOSIA QUADRIPUNCTATA, Nn. SD. 


6, °. Brilliant metallic blue-green; thoracic dorsum marked with white dust 
as in frontosa Malloch, two submedian presutural vittae, a streak from middle of 
each humerus to transverse suture, and one postsutural spot on each lateral 
margin; pleura with two white-dusted spots. Abdomen with twelve white-dusted 
spots as follows: one above and one below lateral curve on each side of second 
visible tergite, one on each side at lateral curve and one on each side of median 
line on third and fourth tergites. Legs black. Wings with bases infuscated. 
Calyptrae entirely fuscous. 

Structurally similar to frontosa, but smaller. Parafacials bare. Arista 
pubescent. 

Length, 12-14 mm. 

Type, male, allotype, and one male and one female paratype, Hidsvold, Qld., 
December, 1922 (Mackerras). 

This species may be distinguished from frontosa, to which it will run in my 
key to the species of this genus, by the following characters: 


A. Postocular orbits yellow dusted below, silvery-white dusted on upper half; second 
visible abdominal tergite without white-dusted submedian spots, four-spotted 

LPL RAR EL OOPS Gio ote CRS ORCE ONE ONG, OCr OCR CRC REE ORE ERE EME ose ee cue ge ico eeiees quadripunctata, nN. sp. 

AA. Postocular orbits entirely and densely golden yellow dusted; second visible abdominal 
tergite with a pair of submedian white-dusted spots, six-spotted .............. 

MSO aD eR Deen Lil een Ws th nines (ole ay i ide eR eee e et Ebel te hal atcty iy Ghose a frontosa Malloch. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 105 


FORMOSIA CINGULATA, 1. SD. 

6. Black, with blue or purple reflections around the lateral spots on mesonotum, 
and the submedian spots on tergites 3 and 4 of abdomen, and a bluish or greenish 
tinge showing through the white dust on second tergite, especially behind. Head 
bright orange-yellow dusted, upper half or more of postocular orbits silvery-white 
dusted, posterior extremities of frontal orbits, ocellar triangle, and a large mark on 
each side of upper half of occiput, blackish; antennae and palpi orange; aristae 
fuscous; hairs on frontal orbits and anterior portion of cheeks, and the postocular 
ciliae, black, other cephalic hairs yellow. Mesonotum and pleura with white-dusted 
markings as in the preceding species. Abdomen with a band of greyish-white dust 
covering almost all of second visible tergite, slightly notched in middle anteriorly, 
and not continued to extreme lateral edge below, third and fourth tergites each with 
four white-dusted spots, the submedian pair small, the sublateral one on each side 
below lateral curve and not visible from above. Legs black. Wings fuscous at bases. 
Calyptrae fuscous. 

A more robust species than the preceding one, with the frons a little narrower, 
the facial carina broader, and with a quite noticeable vertical sulcus below. Second 
visible abdominal tergite without apical central bristles. 

Length, 15 mm. 

Type, Wentworth Falls, 14.12.1923 (Harrison). 

This species will run down to the second segregate of Caption 4 in my key 
to the species of this genus already published, and may be separated from 
speciosa Hrichson as follows: 

A. Abdomen predominantly black, second visible tergite nearly all white dusted above, 
without a black apical central spot and similarly placed bristles; legs black; 
mesonotum without a white-dusted mark between the presutural submedian 
vittae, and lacking submedian white spots near posterior margin ............ 
Ta meen ye ito Pet creer a ene dan aes bereshote eal aireh ate atreneNemeweeas esr) welling of pea eect yee cingulata, n. sp. 

AA. Abdomen predominantly white dusted, second visible tergite with a central apical 
transverse black spot upon which there are several strong bristles; mesonotum 


with a white mark between the presutural submedian vittae, and a pair of white 
submedian spots near hind margin ....................... speciosa Errichson. 


FORMOSIA SPECIOSA HE\richson. 


Fourteen specimens from the following localities: Barrington Tops, N.S.W., 
February, 1925, on Leptospermum (S.U. Zool. Exped.); ‘“Allowrie’’, Killara, 
Eccleston, and Fish River, N.S.W., and Bright, Vict. (H. W. Davey). 


FORMOSIA SMARAGDINA Malloch. 


Nine specimens from the following localities: Meringa, Qld., November, 1926 
(Goldfinch), Kuranda (F. P. Dodd). 


FCRMOSIA ATRIBASIS Walker. 


Four specimens with the same data as the preceding species. 


Genus CHRySoPASTA Brauer and Bergenstamm. 
CHRYSOPASTA ELEGANS Macquart. 
Rutilia elegans Macquart, Dipt. Hxot., Suppl. 1, 1845, 309. 
I have before me a specimen labelled as this species and marked “Compared 


with type by Major E. E. Austen’. I had previously looked over Macquart’s 
H 


106 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


description, but had failed to associate it with this species. It will now be 
necessary to reduce zabrina Walker to a synonym of elegans. The latter was 
accidentally omitted from my catalogue of Australian Tachinidae. 


The series of specimens before me includes the following localities: Western 
Australia, no other data; Swan River, W.A. (J. Clark); Wyalkatchem, W.A., 
1.9.1926 (KH. W. Ferguson); Mundaring, W.A. Ten specimens. 

The species appears to be exclusively Western Australian, although Macquart’s 
original locality is “De L’ile Sydney”’. 

It would appear to be of importance to note that one of the Swan River 
specimens bears a large written label as follows: “Rutilia sp. in nest of Termites, 
Eut. westaustraliensis’”, and mounted with a second specimen of the same lot 
there is an empty puparium, this second one bearing also a red paper label with 
the word “Inquiline”’ printed on it. This is the first indication of the larval habits 
of the genus that I know. 


The puparium is dark brown in colour, slightly shining, about 14 mm. in total 
length and 5 mm. wide at widest point, broadly rounded at each extremity, the 
surface with microscopic transverse striae or furrows, and each segment with the 
greater part of its extent covered with minute sharp-pointed protuberances. The 
dorsal portion of the cephalic cap with the anterior spiracles attached is missing 
in the specimen in hand, there are no dorsal respiratory horns, and the posterior 
spiracular organs are large, flat, glossy, and situated in a slight cavity above the 
central line of the posterior extremity. Their general outline is as Figure 5, the 


Fig. 5.—Chrysopasta elegans. Posterior spiracles of larva, 
only one lobe showing the serpentine markings. 


“button” being encircled by the three greatly enlarged subtriangular spiracular 
lobes, each of the latter showing a small raised spot which may be the base of the 
fan-shaped processes generally found in most related larvae for the protection of 
the spiracular openings in liquid pabuli or surroundings, though no such processes 
are discernible, or they may represent the actual and much modified tracheal 
openings. The surface of each of the large subtriangular lobes is furnished with 
close-set serpentine markings which do not apparently penetrate the cuticle, 
though they roughen the surface somewhat. It would be necessary to obtain 
larvae to enable one to describe the structural characters more reliably. Enough is 
shown, however, to justify the belief that the species is really an inquiline and 
not a parasite. 


In the puparia of certain genera of the calliphorid subfamily Rhiniinae that 
I have examined, the posterior spiracles are similar to those of Chrysopasta, except 
that the three lobes are not so distinctly separated, and they are not situated in 
a cavity or depression. The small raised spot on each lobe is present in them also. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 107 


Genus RuriLiA Robineau-Desvoidy. 


I had not intended to return to this genus again, but in the material recentiy 
received there are several specimens which either belong to species previously 
unknown to me or throw a new light upon the distinguishing characters of some 
of those already dealt with in this series of papers. I present below data upon 
those species. 


RUTILIA ARGENTIFERA Bigot. 


When I dealt with this species, I had but one male before me; now I have a 
series of nine specimens, including both sexes. I find that, while the male has the 
submedian presutural pale vittae usually indistinct, the female has them normally 
well defined by the presence of white dust and, in addition, sometimes a pair of 
narrower and less distinct whitish-dusted vittae between these near the suture. 
The species belongs to my Group 1, both sexes having the sternopleurals 1 + 1, and 
the female lacking the forwardly-directed outer orbital bristles. 

In my key (presented in These PROCEEDINGS, 1928, p. 331) this species will 
run out very readily to its proper place, except that the conspicuous presutural 
submedian thoracic vittae of the female may cause some slight doubt on the part 
of users. However, the other characters, and more especially the presence of but 
two white spots on each lateral margin of the mesonotum, and four round spots on 
second and third visible tergites of the abdomen, will readily distinguish the 
species. 

Localities: “Allowrie’, Killara, N.S.W., 29.1.1921 to 7.2.1921; National Park, 
Sydney, N.S.W., 21.2.1925; Penrith, 11.38.1923; Woolgoolga, N.S.W., 27.1.1923 (Health 
Dept.) ; Eidsvold, Qld., December, 1922. 


RUTILIA LEUCOSTICTA Schiner. 


The material now before me contains two rather distinct varieties, the typical 
one, in which the calyptrae and the bases of the wings are brownish-yellow, and a 
new one, in which the calyptrae and bases of wings are fuscous, almost black. 

The general coloration of the typical form is more black on thorax and 
coppery on abdomen, the male having the abdomen coppery-brown, appearing 
semipellucid, with a broad black dorsocentral vitta. 

Localities: Barrington Tops, Allyn Range, N.S.W., on Leptospermum, 
February, 1925 (S.U. Zool. Exped.); and Leura, 23.3.1924 (Harrison). Twenty 
specimens. 


RUTILIA LEUCOSTICTA, var. FUSCISQUAMA, Nn. var. 


This variety, of which only two females are known to me, is distinguished 
from the typical form by the thoracic dorsum being largely metallic dark blue- 
green, the white-dusted band on second visible tergite of abdomen being broadly 
interrupted on each lateral curve, and the calyptrae and bases of wings quite 
conspicuously blackened. There are also two vertical white-dusted streaks on 
the central portion of the upper half of occiput which are faint or lacking in the 
other form. Possibly a good species. 

Length, 13-14 mm. 

Type and one paratype, Barrington Tops, Allyn Range, on Leptospermum, 
February, 1925 (S.U. Zool. Exped.). 


108 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


RUTILIA MICANS Malloch. 


Two specimens agreeing with the type series. 
Locality, Kosciusko, 21.2.1926 (Nicholson). This is the type locality. 


RUTILIA ALBOCINCTA, N. SD. 


3; &. Head black, frontal orbits, face and cheeks grey dusted, postocular 
orbits greyish dusted, changeable according to the angle from which they are 
viewed, in some lights brassy; antennae and palpi fuscous; occipital hairs dull 
yellow. Thorax black, almost velvety, posterior portion of mesonotum slightly, 
disc of scutellum noticeably, shining, presutural region in both sexes whitish-grey 
dusted on entire width, the male with four narrow, the female with four broad, 
black vittae, female with, male without, an elongate whitish-grey dusted mark 
on each side behind suture; mesopleura and sternopleura both whitish dusted 
centrally. Abdomen black, more or less shining and coppery at apex, male with 
the second visible tergite almost entirely greyish-white dusted, third tergite with 
a pair of large submedian spots and the anterior half on each side below lateral 
curve similarly dusted, fourth tergite with two small submedian spots and a 
spot on each side below pale dusted; female with second tergite almost entirely 
greyish-white dusted above, a black central line evident, but below curve the 
dust is sparse and the ground colour is noticeably metallic bluish or greenish, 
the third tergite has a complete white-dusted band on anterior half above and 
below, and the fourth tergite has the anterior margin faintly white dusted below 
curve only. Legs black, tibiae brownish. Bases of wings, calyptrae, and halteres 
fuscous. Thoracic and abdominal hairs black. 

Frons of male at vertex not more than twice as wide as third antennal 
segment, that of female more than one-fifth of the head width, both lacking 
forwardly-directed outer orbital bristles, and with the parafacials bare below 
level of apex of second antennal segment; third antennal segment in female 
about as long as distance from its apex to the mouth margin, much shorter in 
the male; arista subnude; palpi normal. Thorax as in the formosa group. Second 
visible tergite of abdomen in male with a pair of apical central bristles, in female 
with discal and apical bristles, third tergite in both sexes with apicals and discals. 
Male with a regular fringe of bristles on the anterodorsal surface amongst which 
one bristle is slightly longer than the others, female with two or more outstanding 
anterodorsal bristles on same tibia. 

Length, 13-15 mm. 

Type, female, allotype, and two female paratypes, Barrington Tops, Allyn 
Range, on Leptospermum, February, 1925 (S.U. Zool. Exped.). 

There is considerable sexual dimorphism in the specimens before me and, 
though it is quite possible I may have two species confused, I believe that, 
despite the difference in length of third antennal segment, and other characters, 
I have male and female of the same species in my type series. If it should be 
discovered that there are in fact two species in my concept, the female shall be 
considered as entitled to the name given above. 

This species belongs in Group I, as defined in my last paper on this genus, 
having forwardly-directed orbital bristles in neither sex, and the anterior sterno- 
pleural bristle present in the female only. It is readily distinguished from any 
of the other already known species by the general black and white coloration of 
the thorax and abdomen, and particularly by the black, whitish-grey dusted face, 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 109 


and the broad white-dusted fascia on the second visible abdominal tergite. It has 
much the same appearance as Formosia cingulata, n. sp., but the presutural 
dorsal area of the thorax appears to be white dusted, with four black vittae, 
while in cingulata the same area appears as deep black, with four narrow silvery- 
white dusted vittae. 


Subgenus SENOSTOMA Macquart. 
RUTILIA (SENOSTOMA) HIRTICEPS Malloch. 


One male, Sydney, N.S.W., 26.11.1922 (Health Dept.). 


RvUTILIA (SENOSTOMA) FLAVIPES Brauer and Bergenstamm. 
Two females: Northbridge, December, 1927 (M. Fuller), and Bowral, February, 
1923. 


RutTiILiA (SENOSTOMA) NIGRICEPS Malloch. 
Five males: E. Dorrigo, N.S.W., 30.1.1923, and Barrington Tops, January, 1925, 
and February, 1925, the last one on Leptospermum (S.U. Zool. Exped.). 


RuTILIA (SENOSTOMA) RUFICORNIS Macquart. 

I consider it highly probable that I have two closely related species, both of 
which would run out to this one in my key recently published, but I am unable 
to devote the necessary time to their elucidation at present and must perforce lay 
the material aside pending an opportunity to go into the matter. . 

One series of specimens from Barrington Tops has a much more coppery, or 
even purplish, suffusion on thorax and abdomen in both sexes than is found in the 
specimens from other sections, and possibly they belong to an undescribed species. 

There are at least two names involved in the matter, but whether they have 
been correctly synonymized remains to be decided. 


Tribe DExIINI. 

This tribe, as at present accepted, is rather heterogeneous, being a group 
. distinguished mainly by the slender form of the species, the presence of distinct 
' hairs on the arista, and a few rather intangible and variable characters of different 
nature. I hope to be able to deal with the grouping of the entire family at some 
future time, but have nothing concrete to offer at this time. The first genus dealt 
with below is quite different from Prosena and its allies, and was probably derived 
from entirely different progenitors. 


Genus THELAIRIA Robineau-Desvoidy. 


I did not include this genus in my key to the Australian Tachinidae, but I 
have before me now one species which I cannot distinguish from the genotype, 
and present below a generic diagnosis. 

Longest hairs on arista not as long as width of third antennal segment, frons 
of male narrower than that of female, at vertex about one-fifth of the head width, 
widened anteriorly, orbits bristled, lacking forwardly-directed supraorbitals in the 
male, possessing them in the female, interfrontalia complete in both sexes, ocellars 
long, proclinate and divergent, inner verticals long in both sexes, outer pair 
undeveloped in male, microscopic in female, parafacials bare; face almost flat; head 
at vibrissae shorter than at base at antennae; proboscis and palpi normal. 


110 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


Prosternum and centre of propleura bare, no hairs above or below lower .calypter, 
the latter bare on disc above, subtransverse at apex, and not very noticeably 
widened behind. First wing vein setulose on at least the basal half above, third 
with a few setulae at base below and on a variable extent of its upper surface; first 
posterior cell open, ending before wing tip; outer cross-vein much nearer to bend 
of fourth vein than to inner cross-vein. Abdomen with strong bristles in centre of 
apices of all tergites, and at least one pair of discal bristles on each tergite from 
second to fourth inclusive. 


THELAIRIA LEUCOZONA (Fallen). 

This species is evidently listed from Australia as 7. australis Walker. I have 
carefully compared Australian and North American specimens and can find no 
material differences in them. The male has the abdomen rufous, with a broad 
dorsal stripe and the apex black, while the female has it entirely glossy biack; 
both sexes have the bases of the tergites broadly silvery-white dusted. The legs are 
black. Hypopygium of male as Figure 6. 

Length, 9-12 mm. 

Localities: Sydney, N.S.W., October, November, December, and April (Health 
Dept.) ; Barrington Tops, N.S.W., January, 1928 (Benham). 

This genus will run down to Caption 32 in my key to the Australian genera, 
but it will not fit exactly in either segregate because of the hairing of the arista, 
the longest hairs of which are shorter than the width of the third antennal 
segment. It fits best in the first segregate, but is distinguished from 
Mesembriomintho Townsend (= Sumpigaster Macquart) and Rhinomyiobia Brauer 
and Bergenstamm by the setulose first vein of the wing, calling for the following 
change in the key: 
32a. First wing vein setulose above on at least its basal half 

First wing vein bare above 32b. 


N.B.—Change 32a to 32b in key. 


Genus SUMPIGASTER. Macquart. 
Amongst the material now before me there are two males and two females 
of this genus, one of them identified as fasciatus Macquart by the late Dr. E. W. 
Ferguson. A comparison with the genotype of Mesembriomintho compressa 
Townsend proves that the latter is synonymous. We must therefore dispense with 
the latter name. 


SUMPIGASTER FASCIATUS Macquart. 
To rectify my generic key it will be necessary to supplant Mesembriomintho 
by using Sumpigaster. 
Four specimens: North Bay, April 10, on ‘window pane; Sydney, N.S.W., 
19.10.1924; Gordon, 9.11.1924 (Harrison); Port Macquarie, 19.4.1924 (Nicholson). 
I may present a fuller description of this species than is now available at some 
future time if there should be any closely similar species in collections sent me. 


Genus ZoSTEROMYIA Brauer and Bergenstamm. 

This genus falls in Caption 32 of my generic key because of the distinctly 
haired arista, the longest hairs on which, though not as long as the width of the 
third antennal segment, are about twice as long as its basal diameter. Possibly 
the best method of rectifying this section of the key to take care of this genus and 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 111 


several others would be to amend the first sentence of Caption 32 as follows: 
“Arista distinctly haired, the longest hairs always at least twice as long as its 
basal diameter;’’ and to delete all after that point. This will permit the alteration 
given under the genus Jhelairia herein, and the present genus, having the arista 
with its longest hairs distinctly shorter than the width of the third antennal 
segment, may be distinguished from Sumpigaster Macquart, and Rhinomyiobia 
Brauer and Bergenstamm, by that character, and from the latter it can be further 
distinguished by the presence of discal bristles on at least the second to fourth 
visible tergites of abdomen. 


ZOSTEROMYIA CINGULATA (Macquart). 


A very conspicuous deep velvety-black species with silvery-white dust on face, 
lower occiput, and postocular orbits, a complete annulus of same nature on thorax 
just in front of suture and a fascia on hind margin of mesonotum, and one on 
each visible abdominal tergite from second to fourth inclusive similarly coloured. 
Cheeks, antennae, palpi, and legs black. Wings greyish hyaline, darker costally. 
Calyptrae white. Halteres yellow. 

Eyes bare; frons of male about one-sixth, of female about one-fourth, of the 
head width, the female with, the male without, forwardly-directed outer orbital 
bristles. Thorax with two plus three dorsocentrals and three plus three 
acrostichals; apical scutellars lacking. Abdomen conical, not compressed. Mid 
tibia in neither sex with ventral bristle; hind tibia with a number of antero- 
dorsal and posterodorsal bristles, two on each surface much longer than the others; 
fore tarsi slender in both sexes. Outer cross-vein about three-fifths from inner 
cross-vein to bend of fourth; first posterior cell ending a little before apex of 
wing, bend of fourth vein subangular, lower calypter not much widened behind, 
the apex rounded. 

Length, 5-8 mm. 

Localities, Kuranda, N. Qld. (F. P. Dodd); Meringa, Qld., Nov., 1926 (Gold- 
finch); Eccleston, Allyn River, 26.2.1921; Gundamaian, National Park, N.S.W., 
1.1.1926 (Nicholson); Sydney, N.S.W., 25.1.1924; Port Macquarie, 19.4.1924 
(Nicholson). 

Larval habits unknown to me. 


Genus Prosena St. Fargeau and Serveille. 


I included this genus in my generic key, the principal distinguishing characters 
cited being the long proboscis, the carinate face, and plumose arista. I figure the 
characteristic head of the genus (Fig. 7), and this may be compared with the head 
of a closely related genus included herein (Fig. 16). The palpi are comparatively 
short and somewhat club-shaped. Other characters may be gleaned from the 
generic key already referred to, and the matter appearing subsequently in this 
paper. The hypopygial characters are very similar to those of some of the related 
genera, indicating a possibility of a common, and recent origin, but my informa- 
tion on the matter of relationships is too scanty to draw any definite conclusions. 


Curran has published a key for the identification of the species, a reference 
to which is given in my recent catalogue, but it is based exclusively upon colour 
characters, and I find it impossible to determine the Australian species definitely 
by its use. I have made tentative identifications in some cases, but I may be 


112 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


wrong in my conclusions, which can be proven only by an examination of the 
hypopygia of the males of the species inyolved. It is for this reason that I now 
present a synoptic key and details of the hypopygial structures of the species 
before me, hoping that the same may prove useful to students of the family. I 
make use of the males-only in the first key. 


Fig. 6.—Thelairia leucozona. a, Male hypopygium from side; b, fifth sternite of 
same, one lobe. 

Fig. 7.—Prosena sibirita. Head of male from side. 

Fig. 8.—Prosena species. Hind tibiae; a, argentata; b, sibirita. 

Fig. 9.—Prosena tenuis. Male hypopygium; a, from the side; b, inferior forceps 
from behind; ec, fifth sternite, one side. ; 

Fig. 10.—Prosena species. Male hypopygia; a, sibirita, Australian form from side; 
b, inferior forceps of same from in front; c, fifth sternite of same; 
d, inferior forceps of Asiatic form and parva; e, superior forceps of parva 
from the side. 

Fig. 11.—Prosena sibirita, var. confusa. Hypopygium of male; a, from the side; 
b, inferior forceps from in front; c, fifth sternite, one side. 

Fig. 12.—Prosena argentata. Male hypopygium from the side; a, inferior forceps 
from below. 

Fig. 13.—Prosena indecisa. Male hypopygium; a, from the side; b, inferior forceps 
from in front; ec, fifth sternite, one side. 

Fig. 14.—Prosena indecisa. Apex of wing. 


be. 


(Jt) 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 113 


Key to the Species. 
Males. 

Interfrontalia practically obliterated for a shorter or longer distance above the 
middle of frons by the broad, densely white-dusted frontal orbits; mesonotum 
when viewed against the light and from above left humerus densely silvery- 
white dusted on anterior three-fourths, brownish-yellow dusted on posterior 
fourth, when seen from behind against the light the pale-dusted portion becomes 
dark grey or fuscous, broadly paler on central (acrostichal) area, and narrowly 
so on lines of dorsocentrals; hind tibia quite conspicuously attenuated on basal 
half (Fig. 8a), and with one quite well developed bristle on the posterodorsal 
surface well beyond middle; genital segments quite copiously furnished with 
Softipales hairs’ ventrallyaia sale achoisise«eboiaal cn are ie oe argentata Curran. 

Interfrontalia generally clearly visible on its entire extent, the frontal orbits never 
silvery-white dusted, and the dusting on the mesonotum always greyish or 
yellowish; other characters not as above in toto ........... 0... eee eee eee 2 

Hind tibiae not noticeably attenuated on basal half (Fig. 8b); mid tibia with a 
quite well developed submedian ventral bristle; hind femur with only one bristle 
on posterodorsal surface, which is at about its own length from apex ...... 3 

Hind tibiae quite noticeably attenuated on almost, or more than, the basal half 
(Fig. 8a); mid tibia without a distinct submedian ventral bristle; hind femur 
without any posterodorsal bristles or with two or more which are not close to 
FIV OXED.<) igs Geren GASSES CHORES EOE NER Decl ORG SOLER TET Ch CRG CHONG) CRCROR GEA CHT OF RENE ati aSt ries ce Pe enichona OG cr ota eRe NthiC 5 

Bases of the superior hypopygial forceps quite abruptly differentiated from the 
apical slender portion and with longer and more abundant brown hairs than 


usual, appearing tufted from side view (Fig. 9) .................. tenwis, MN. sp. 
Bases of the superior hypopygial forceps tapered into the apical portion, and not 
RETR OS STL ee UA ROR UTES Ma A 3 SS UMTS ee DL yt Nah 518 WOK 0 RD PRN aD Fae aie (ERS Wee Ls Yee 4 
Inferior forceps of hypopygium furcate (Fig. 10) .............. sibirita Fabricius. 
Inferion fLorcepsanot, truncate: (Mise oles) ie a eerste cus co eie ee sibirita Fabricius, var. ? 


Legs black, apices of femora narrowly reddish; fifth visible abdominal tergite with 
a pair of well developed apical bristles, in some cases very strong, in others 
much weaker; scutellum without differentiated discal bristles, the hairs much 
longer and denser apically than basally; cheeks almost bare behind the vibrissal 
ENT geal eyo ae Si aad RRHOTS CODER MIC He oan eC RCRA) Clee HERON RC MERE REY CCK halo nigripes Curran. 

Legs testaceous yellow, only the tarsi fuscous; fifth visible tergite of abdomen with- 
out well developed bristles, merely haired; discal hairs on scutellum of almost 
uniform length; cheeks quite distinctly pale haired behind vibrissae ............ 
oi ECHOES ONO GHCNE: OF EON C TER RORTE GIO G Sarr GEOR MGEOTe cae Den CARON Chee DC RMN RETRO pen aa a indecisa, nN. sp. 


Females. 
Legs black, only the extreme apices of femora reddish ............ nigripes Curran. 
WMescsmarcelyarvellowmorns TUlMmOUSM Eileen chesstioleho ieyei) tele lel eienlrckamene Eni, CeRON aS Crates 2 
One of the two bristles at apex of auxiliary vein on costa at least as long as the 
LIN CrACEOSSAVEI Merry tie en era wens peaticet rene eit cA ezculsicei'c ans el a Meon SE aN oop eas parva, Nn. sp. 
Neither of the two bristles at apex of auxiliary vein on the costa nearly as long 
ZS WAG) WMAP  GLOSIALSIN 5 lass agocouodoono boob ooo oo Gedooon oOo oeoocOo a dlindn 3 


Frontal orbits greyish-yellow dusted, dark brown at upper extremities; fourth vein 
slightly but distinctly bisinuate beyond the preapical bend (Fig. 14) .......... 
556 chlo: 6 IO OE I GOES On OG CRO FAT EEO RSTO TE OREO NST CHES IO CECT CG Geo SE te oR Io REECE RCROND IC Cactaia a6 indecisa, n. sp. 
Frontal orbits grey or yellowish dusted, not distinctly darker at upper extremities; 
fourth vein not bisinuate beyond the preapical bend ....................-... 4 
Outer pair of mesonotal dark vittae much broader than the submedian pair in front 
of the suture; abdomen brownish testaceous, apices of tergites almost black, 
their bases broadly and densely grey dusted, the whole having the appearance 
of being alternately grey and black-brown fasciate; antennae and aristae orange- 
yellow; third visible abdominal tergite with four strong apical bristles including 
CHOSE HONE RSIGESS Ps el te cee te she Poke Ta toreat cle Pest SUUR eerie ea etre BRR wReiy oy ey ne bella Curran. 
Outer pair of mesonotal dark vittae not much broader than the submedian pair; 
abdomen not conspicuously grey and dark-brown fasciate; third visible abdominal 
tereite with) at) least) six strons apical bristles) ft ce eas cic ct eee cide ce ses 5 
Thorax and abdomen with whitish-grey dusting; fore femur with the posteroventral 
series of bristles very short basally, becoming longer near apex .......... sp. 


114 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiili, 


Thorax and abdomen with yellowish-grey or brownish-grey dusting; fore femur with 
the posteroventral series of bristles normal, longest at or near middle ........ 
BR eere eeeel thea LRRD REAM cee Bocaire oo Se TGR PRU aBEW s Cobravtatns NEE RAW: Natanhs SPE cle Patten ie aa Oe gon eee sibirita et al. 


PROSENA ARGENTATA Curran. 


This is the most striking species of the genus known to me, the silvery dust 
on the head and thoracic dorsum being very noticeable. Curran describes the 
mesonotum as having a broad black fascia behind the suture, but makes no 
mention of the similar one before it, which is equally conspicuous. In several 
other respects the original description is not in accordance with my material, but 
I can see no reason to doubt the identification. I figure the male hypopygium 
(Fig. 12). I have seen no specimens which might with certainty be considered 
as the females of this species, the only specimens which I hesitated to identify as 
this species or sibirita being radically different from the one described as argentata 
by Curran. I therefore do not record any of my specimens as the female of this 
species. 

Localities: EHidsvold and Yeppoon, Queensland, and Glenreagh, N.S.W. 


PROSENA TENUIS, nN. Sp. 


6g. Head testaceous yellow, interfrontalia brownish-yellow behind, paler in 
front, antennae and palpi orange-yellow; aristae brownish-yellow; frontal orbits, 
face, cheeks, and occiput white dusted. Thorax as in sibirita, fuscous, with pale- 
grey dust, the four mesonotal vittae inconspicuous, interrupted at suture, and not 
continued to hind margin; scutellum blackened on sides basally; mesopleura 
with the hairs nearly all yellow, some on upper margin and a few behind the 
hind marginal bristles black. Abdomen testaceous “yellow, translucent, with 
slightly checkered white dusting, a black central apical mark and one on each 
lateral curve on first two visible tergites, the third and fourth tergites more 
broadly black on dorsal exposure. Legs yellow, apices of mid and hind femora 
and tibiae darkened, tarsi black. Wings greyish-hyaline. Calyptrae yellowish- 
white. Halteres yellow. 

Frons at vertex about one-third as wide as either eye, orbits as wide as inter- 
frontalia at any part, each with about seven inner marginal bristles; ocellars short 
but rather strong, outer verticals undeveloped, inner pair long. Thorax as in 
sibirita. First visible tergite of abdomen without apical central bristles, second 
with a pair; hypopygium as in Fig. 9. Legs as in sibirita, neither the apices of the 
femora nor the bases of the tibiae noticeably attenuated; mid tibia with the sub- 
median ventral bristle rather short. Fourth wing vein beyond the preapical 
curve slightly and almost regularly curved. 

Length, 12 mm. 

Type, Gundamaian, National Park, N.S.W., 1.1.1926 (Nicholson). One specimen. 


PROSENA SIBIRITA (Fabricius). 

This species is one which has caused me some difficulty in arriving at a 
decision as to its status. Originally European, it has been recorded from a large 
number of countries and, if certain authorities are correct, it has been described 
under quite a number of different names. I have made a careful study of the 
hypopygia of many of the available specimens from Europe, Asia, and Australia, 
and am still undecided as to the specific limits in the material examined. The 
typical forms have the inferior hypopygial forceps broad, and deeply cleft at 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 11a) 


apex (Fig. 10), which form is found also in parva, n. sp., but in the Australian 
specimens the same organ is found with the apex much narrower, and very much 
less deeply cleft (Fig. 10). Possibly the form figured as variety confusa, n. var., 
herein (Fig. 11) is merely a variety of sibirita, but more material is necessary to 
arrive at a definite conclusion as to this. 
I am uncertain of the identity of the female in my Australian material. 
Localities: Marwood and Hidsvold, Qld., and Manly, N.S.W. 


PROSENA SIBIRITA, Var. CONFUSA, Nn. var. 
This variety, if such it is, may be distinguished from typical sibirita only by 
the structure of the inferior forceps (Fig. 11). 
Type, Hidsvold, Qld., December, 1922. One specimen. 


PROSENA PARVA, Nl. SD. 

6, @. Very similar in general coloration to sibirita, but the male has the 
thoracic dorsum lead-grey dusted in front between the vittae and brownish-grey 
dusted behind, the abdomen has the dorsal dusting yellowish-grey except on a 
small region in centre of fore part of each tergite, where it is lead-grey. This 
difference in coloration is not noticeable in the female, except to a small extent on 
the abdomen. 

Structurally the species differs in being much smaller, and in having one of 
the bristles at apex of the auxiliary vein on costa about as long as, or longer than, 
the inner cross-vein. The male hypopygium is very similar to that of sibirita, 
but the inferior forceps are narrower at base, and the superior pair are straighter 
on the apical attenuated portion (Fig. 10). 

Length, 5-7 mm. 

Type, female, Sydney, 14.1.1923; allotype, same locality, 21.1.1923; paratypes, 
all females, Glenreagh, N.S.W., 1.2.1923, Manly, N.S.W., 16 and 19.11.1923, and 
Sydney, N.S.W., 1.1.1923. 


PROSENA NIGRIPES Curran. 
Dr. Aldrich (Ent. Mitt., 17, No. 2, 1928, 130) has discussed this species in a 
~ paper dealing with sibirita and its allies. He assumes that malayana Townsend 
is a good species, but states that he is unaware whether nigripes Curran and 
doddi Curran are synonymous with it. 

The male standing as malayana in the United States National Museum 
collection is, in my opinion, merely a dark-legged specimen of sibirita, but it is 
not the type, so that I am unable to state definitely the status of the species. 
However, nigripes is a good species, quite distinct from sibirita, the hypopygium 
of the male being very similar to that of indecisa figured herein, the only difference 
apparent to me being that the inferior forceps are somewhat broader at the apices. 
The peculiar broadened apices of the femora in the female of this species, coupled 
with the almost entirely black legs, readily distinguish that sex. The male has 
the legs much as in indecisa, but they are black. 

Localities: “Allowrie’’, Killara, N.S.W.; Sydney, N.S.W.; Austinmer, N.S.W.; 
Marwood, near Mackay, Qld.; Cairns, Qld. Eleven specimens. 


PROSENA BELLA Curran. 
I have seen only the female of this species and cannot, of course, tell if the 
presence of but four strong apical bristles on the third visible abdominal tergite 


116 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


is an invariable character. In the only specimen before me, the anterodorsal 
bristles on the fore tibia are more irregular and less numerous than in sibirita, 
and there is a pair of strong apical central bristles on the first visible tergite, which 
is quite unusual in the females of the genus. The colour markings would appear 
to be a good criterion for the identification of the species. 

Locality: Marwood, near Mackay, Qld., January, 1924 (W. C. Harvey). 


PROSENA INDECISA, Nl. SD. 


6; &. This species is very like argentata in general appearance, but lacks the 
silvery dust of the thoracic dorsum, and the presutural and postsutural black 
patches, the vittae being of the usual narrow form and well separated. The 
abdomen has the black dorsocentral vitta always distinct and usually more or 
less distinctly widened at apex of each tergite. Legs fulvous yellow, tarsi black. 
Wings slightly yellowish, the veins sometimes more or less clouded with yellow 
apically. 

Structurally differing from argentata in the distinct interfrontalia, and the 
form of the male hypopygium (Fig. 13), as well as in the bisinuate apical section 
of fourth vein beyond the preapical angle (Fig. 14). 

Length, 11-14 mm. 

Type, allotype, one male and one female paratype, Barrington Tops, N.S.W., 
January, 1925 (S.U. Zool. Exped.). Paratypes, Woodford, 27.1.1923, Austinmer, 
19.12.1921, Gisborne, V., 26.38.1922, Woy Woy, September and October, 1923-25, 
“Allowrie”’, Killara, 6.2.1921, 9.10.1924 and 4.11.1924, Blue Mts. 13.4.1922. Fourteen 
specimens in all. 

I would have accepted this as macropus Thomson were it not for the presence 
of a pair of strong bristles at the apex of the first visible abdominal tergite. 


PROSENA SP. . 
I have one female from Marwood which does not appear to belong to any of 
the species before me, but do not care to deal further with a single example. 


PROSENA DORSALIS Macquart; PROSENA VITTATA Macquart. 


I have nothing to add to my catalogue record, except that vittata closely 
resembles my description of indecisa. 


Genus PROSENINA, Nn. gen. 


This genus has much the appearance of Prosena, but the first posterior cell 
is closed at a short distance from the margin of the wing, the preapical angle of 
fourth vein is sharp, and usually furnished with a short appendiculate vein, and 
the sternopleural bristles are three (2 + 1) in number instead of two (1 +1). 

Genotype, the following species. 


PROSENINA NICHOLSONI, N. Sp. 


d; 2. Black, shining, with grey dusting on head, thorax and abdomen. Inter- 
frontalia brown, face and anterior portion of cheeks brownish or yellowish 
testaceous, frontal orbits, parafacials, face, posterior portion of cheeks, and the 
parafacials, densely grey dusted; antennae varying from brown to fuscous, the 
base of third segment reddish-yellow; palpi brown or yellowish. Thorax with 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 117 


traces of four blackish vittae, and irregularly marked with brown, especially at 
bases of the larger bristles and near posterior margin of dorsum. Abdomen with 
minute setigerous black dots on dorsum, and some larger dark brown spots on 
posterior margins of all tergites except fourth, the latter at bases of the strong 
bristles. Legs black. Wings greyish hyaline, a portion of the subcostal cell, both 
eross-veins, and at least the preapical angle of fourth vein, clouded with fuscous. 
Calyptrae white. Knobs of halteres fuscous. 


6. Eyes bare; frons at vertex about half as wide as one eye, interfrontalia 
complete, narrower above than either orbit, the latter with quite long strong inner 
marginal bristles on entire length, which are incurved, ocellars well developed; 
parafacials bare from below level of second antennal segment, wider than third 
antennal segment and more than half as wide as height of cheek, the latter not 
one-third of the eye height; facial carina as in Prosena, visible from the side; 
arista plumose; third antennal segment about three times as long as second; 
vibrissae a little above mouth margin; proboscis and palpi as in Prosena. Thorax 
with two pairs of presutural acrostichals, three pairs of postsutural dorsocentrals, 
and two pairs of intraalars, the other characters, except the sternopleurals, as in 
Prosena. Abdomen subcylindrical, the tergites all with apical central bristles 
which become progressively farther from apex to fourth where they are almost 
on centre of disc; hypopygium small, concealed. Legs shorter than in Prosena, 
similarly bristled, the mid tibia with a quite long submedian ventral bristle, the 
hind tibia usually with two long and one short bristles on the anterodorsal and 
posterodorsal surfaces, and two on the anteroventral. Apical wing venation as in 
Figure 15. 


%. Differs from the male in having the frons about as wide as one eye, the 
orbits wider and with two proclinate outer bristles, the parafacials wider, almost 
as wide as height of cheek, the abdomen broadly ovate, and the femora widened 
at the extreme apices much as in Prosena nigripes Curran, and mesonotum broadly 
dark on disc. 

Length, 5-6-5 mm. 

Type and two male paratypes, Gundamaian, National Park, N.S.W., 1.1.1926 

. (Nicholson) ; allotype, Eradu, W.A., 8.9.1926 (KH. W. Ferguson); male paratypes, 
Woodford, N.S.W., 28.11.1925 (Nicholson), Sydney, N.S.W., 3.9.1922 (Health Dept.), 
female, Wyalkatchem, W.A., 1.9.1926 (EH. W. Ferguson). Seven specimens. 

To facilitate the recognition of this genus and others in which the face is 
prominently carinate and the arista plumose, that are not included in my Key to 
the Australian genera, I append a key below. All of those genera, with the 
exception of one in which the centre of the propleura is haired, will run down 
to Caption 22 in the key. At that caption, two of the genera split off from the 
others on the length of the proboscis, Prosena and Prosenina having it more than 
twice as long as the head, while the others have it not more than one and a half 
times as long as the head. All of the other genera have the palpi rather short, not 
more than twice as long as the basal diameter of the apical portion of the proboscis, 
and would cause one to hesitate as to which section under Caption 23 they ought 
to fall in. They fit in neither very well, and it will therefore be necessary to erect 
a new section on the basis of the plumose arista and prominently carinate face, no 
genus in either section of Caption 23 having both of those characters in common. 
All of the genera are closely related and the following key will be of service in 
their recognition. 


118 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


bo 


(ae) 


Key to the Genera. 


Apical portion of proboscis distinctly longer than head, usually not less than twice 
as long, heavily chitinized, swollen at base and from there attenuated to apex 
OY MEAT TE. CHT NT) ae Ge ac ilew aancas ecresia erocnele see ace eee eee Oe ee USS ED aE CoM Eo ee ee acne Rn ee 2 
Apical portion of proboscis not, or very slightly, longer than head, chitinized, and 
usually of almost uniform thickness on entire length, the labellae always enlarged 


(Geet LW) y Resa Chater Goat earn Oo ERR rd oto Mero cin Re Bice Mec Dee cd CeO ch eRta Od Gere bdo obo 6 3 
First posterior cell of wing open ..... 0000000000 Prosena St. Fargeau and Serveille 
First posterior cell of wing closed and short petiolate ............ Prosenina, N. gen. 
Centre of propleura haired; lower calypter bare on upper surface; parafacials finely 

haired on almost their entire length ........................ Rhyncodexia Bigot 
Centre fof) ;propleural bare fie nae bee ete lece Sc back rey oswweiea e ea a RS a leben. oS cI Lae ee eee 4 
Lower calypter with fine erect hairs on a portion of upper surface along the outer 

Beal: of 23) bo eae ee eRe eee: arn con te ann Se AEE eRe SR Ara Ay EIEN. 6 OG w'6.0 5 
Lower calypter bare except for the marginal fringe ............ Austrodexia, n. gen. 
Parafacials bare below level of lower frontal bristle .......... _Lasiocalypter, n. gen. 
Parafacials haired on almost their entire extent ............ Lasiocalyptrina, ni. gen. 


Fig. 15.—Prosenina nicholsoni. Apex of wing. 

Fig. 16.—Lasiocalypter nigrihirta. Head of male from the side. 

Fig. 17.—Lasiocalypter nigrihirta. Hypopygium of male from the side. 

Fig. 18.—Lasiocalypter hirticauda.~ Hypopygium of male from the side. 

Fig. 19.—Lasiocalypter flavohirta. Hypopygium of male; a, from the side; b, from 
behind; one side incomplete. 

Fig. 20.—Lasiocalypter atripes. Hypopygium of male from the side. 

Fig. 20a.—Lasiocalyptrina modesta. Hypopygium of male from the side. 


Genus RHYNCODEXIA Bigot. 
I have some doubts as to the identification of this genus and wrote to Mr. 


J. E. Collin some time ago asking him to examine the genotype for certain 
characters, but have had no reply from him. Provided it is possible for me to 
obtain the desired information later, I will publish the results and if correction is 
necessary will make same in a future paper. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 119 


RHYNCODEXIA LONGIPES (Macquart). 

This is the largest species of this tribe known to me from Australia, and has 
the hind legs much elongated. Macquart’s description will enable anyone to 
identify it. 

Localities: Barrington Tops, January, 1925 (S.U. Zool. Exped.), and Gunda- 
maian, National Park, N.S.W., 1.1.1926 (Nicholson). Thirty specimens. 


Genus LASIOCALYPTER, n. gen. 


This genus is distinguished from any in Dexiini known to me, in which the 
face is strongly carinate, by the presence of rather long erect hairs along the 
outer margin of the lower calypter. Such hairs occur in the tachinid genus 
Nemoraea Robineau-Desvoidy, and in certain Calliphoridae, but in these they 
occupy a larger proportion of the surface, or, when more restricted, they are near 
base and not along the outer margin. In Anacamptomyia africana Bischof, an 
African species, the lower calypter is similar to that of the present genus, but the 
face is not carinate, and the arista is merely pubescent, not plumose. In other 
respects the new genus is quite similar to the preceding genus. The wing lacks 
an outstanding bristle at the apex of the auxiliary vein on the costa. 


Genotype, Lasiocalypter flavohirta, n. sp. 


I present below a key for the separation of the species now known to me. 


Key to the Species. 

FMR VSN GC Simcea ren forse isk oo ase een sUstencuieete ieksachalanesencr aye myieseeckiay cpiniraste eciaite, Sse Salodcranae Wl $1 cutatren abi euler Gar SMetuaen ene uristawhle 2 
DF TAM EN OSucetre RO Ke aie Tes See, eva es a hole Fee lary i hahle AS ay AAACN eA aE! Ct ORAL ie Ue hort. ll eee ADS a Heme, congas ea ate 4 

2. Fourth visible abdominal tergite with quite long and moderately strong apical bristles; 
claws and pulvilli of fore tarsi at least as long as fifth segment of that pair of 

tarsi; all of the hairs on the mesopleura, except those on lower anterior angle, 

and all, or a large portion, of those on margin of disc of the lower calypter, 

Dea Kar rere en sae ews (A AIPA RS PO eine Suab eran Miceliec bare UN ieal, epea ty Silat! J Tkiey nigrihirta, n. sp. 
Fourth visible abdominal tergite centrally without strong apical bristles; claws and 
pulvilli of fore tarsi not as long as the apical segment of same; most of the 

hairs on the mesopleura and all of those on margin of disc of lower calypter 
WACO sce oale Nein eis, cHU ate eye cca lead aire ta a el Nh a le Ra PR by cei aS aA Oey 3 

3. Bases of the superior hypopygial forceps with numerous long brown hairs which project 
backwards and are slightly curled (Fig. 18); legs entirely black .............. 

PP ame ae es oes £4. olhe oe acuta ered ca ehusigedi ah Sichat stbe sacar er enaiie raiiallcitey i, Sucoaicns Ve alla eg esmetepte hirticauda, n. sp. 


Bases of superior forceps without long backwardly directed hairs .............. 3a 
3a. Apices of femora, fore and mid tibiae, and bases of hind tibiae fulvous yellow; 
ya OWT AS TS He Ey Vs Meek SWAN rere bee DWC hcg seni a lNzar. Leena iene flavohirta, n. sp. 

Legs entirely black; hypopygium as Fig. 20 .................-0-e2e ees atripes, N. sp. 
4. All of the discal hairs on the mesopleura yellow or pale ..................00000- 5 
None of the discal hairs on the mesopleura pale .............. 0.20. e eee eee neee 6 

5. Legs entirely black; all femora widened at apices where they are as thick as at 
any other point; hind tibiae not at all attenuated basally ...... hirticauda, n. sp. 


Apices of femora and nearly all of tibiae yellowish-brown, remainder fuscous; femora 
not at all widened at extreme apices, apical third or more of mid and hind pairs 
distinctly attenuated, and thinner than the basal portions .... flavohirta, n. sp. 

6. Legs black; first visible abdominal tergite with a pair of strong apical central 
bristles; second with one or more pairs of discal bristles ...... nigrihirta, n. sp. 

Tibiae brownish-yellow; no apical central bristles on first visible abdominal tergite, 
and no discals on second tergite .................. sovoanovodoue flavohirta, n. sp. 


LASIOCALYPTER NIGRIHIRTA, D. Sp. 
6, 2. Occiput and frontal orbits fuscous, densely white dusted, interfrontalia 
dark brown in the male, fuscous in the female, lower portion of parafacials and 


120 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


anterior portion of cheeks reddish, upper portions of parafacials whitish-grey 
dusted; face testaceous yellow, dull; antennae in female almost entirely black, 
only the apex of second segment rufous, paler in the male, second segment rufous, 
the third segment reddish at base, fuscous beyond; aristae and their hairs fuscous; 
palpi brownish to fuscous, paler at apices; proboscis with the apical section glossy 
black; occipital hairs pale, those on margins and the frontal hairs dark. Thorax 
black, with quite dense whitish-grey dusting, the mesonotum with four black 
vittae, the submedian pair discontinued between suture and posterior margin, 
the sublateral pair interrupted at suture and continued almost to posterior margin, 
the surface slightly speckled with dark colour at bases of the hairs and bristles, 
the female with indications of brown intervening vittae behind suture, especially 
centrally in front of scutellum. Abdomen coloured as thorax, the dusting dense 
and changeably checkered, the male with a dark dorsocentral vitta which is widened 
at apex of each tergite, the female without such a distinct vitta. Pleural hairs 
mostly yellow, but those on disc of the mesopleura all black; abdominal hairs 
black above, largely yellow below to beyond middle. Legs black in female, apices 
of femora sometimes yellow in male, and generally the tibiae yellowish in the latter 
also. Calyptrae yellowish-white, margins yellow, the hairs partly yellow, partly 
black, in both sexes. Wings greyish hyaline, veins slightly browned in the female. 

6. Frons at vertex about as wide as third antennal segment, the interfrontalia 
obliterated just in front of ocelli, orbits with long bristly hairs along their inner 
margins; ocellar bristles long and fine, no hairs laterad of the marginal bristles; 
parafacials bare, about as wide as length of third antennal segment; profile 
as Figure 16; palpi short, not dilated at apices. Thorax with three plus three 
dorsocentrals, one pair of long presutural and prescutellar acrostichals, sterno- 
pleurals one plus one, prosternal plate and centre of propleura bare. Abdomen 
tapered to apex, cylindrical, first visible tergite depressed in centre to apex, 
bulging up on each side above, second tergite with a transverse depression at 
base above; all tergites with strong apical central bristles, second to fourth 
tergites with discal bristles; hypopygium as Figure 17. Legs slender, moderately 
elongated, hind tibiae attenuated on basal third or less; fore tibia with two or 
three anterodorsal and posterior bristles; mid tibia with one ventral, one antero- 
dorsal, one posterodorsal, and two posterior bristles; hind tibia with one antero- 
ventral and about three anterodorsal and posterodorsal bristles; claws and pulvilli 
of fore tarsi as long as fifth tarsal segment. Wings with some setulae at base of 
third vein above and below; bend of fourth vein angular; distance from apex of 
third vein to apex of wing about half as great as distance from it to apex of 
second vein; inner cross-vein distinctly proximad of level of apex of first vein and 
close to middle of discal cell. 

2. Frons at vertex nearly one-third of the head width; each orbit with two 
proclinate outer bristles, and some fine hairs laterad of the inner marginal 
bristles. Abdomen ovate, bristled as in the male. Legs not so long as in male, 
similarly bristled. 

Length, 11-12 mm. 

Type, male, allotype, one male and one female paratype, Barrington Tops, 
N.S.W., February, 1925 (S.U. Zool. Exped.). 


LASIOCALYPTER HIRTICAUDA, NH. SD. 
3, °. Differs from the preceding species in having the palpi yellow, the pleural 
hairs practically all yellow, the abdomen translucent fulvous yellow in the male, 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 121 


less translucent in female, with a black dorsocentral vitta and brown apices to 
tergites in both sexes, the dorsum with greyish or yellow dusting which is rather 
checkered and most distinct on the anterior lateral portions of the dorsal exposure 
of the tergites, legs black, calyptrae yellowish, more intensely yellow on margin 
of lower one, halteres yellow. 

Structurally the species differ as stated in the key, the tufted apex of abdomen 
of the male (Fig. 18) and the almost uniformly thick hind femora of the female 
being very distinctive. The mesonotum has two pairs of intra-alars, the abdomen 
in the female lacks discal bristles on second and third tergites and apical bristles 
on first, the male has apical central bristles on first and second visible tergites, a 
pair of bristles near apex of third tergite centrally and no apical bristles on fourth 
on the dorsal section, though there are some on sides, the second and sometimes 
the third with weak discals. Mid and hind femora of male attenuated on apical 
third or more, the hind pair with some anteroventral bristles on basal half, mid 
and hind tibiae in same sex attenuated on more than their basal third, mid pair 
without a distinct submedian ventral bristle, hind pair with one anteroventral, 
one posterodorsal, and usually two anterodorsal bristles, all very short; fore tibia 
in both sexes with some short bristles on median portion of anterodorsal surface, 
and two posterior bristles; female with a distinct submedian ventral bristle. 

Length, 8-10 mm. ; 

Type, male, allotype, and one male and two female paratypes, Barrington Tops, 
N.S.W., January and February, 1925 (S.U. Zool. Exped.). 

This species rather closely resembles some species of Prosena in superficial 
appearance, but the shorter proboscis and haired lower calypter readily separate 
it from any in that genus. 


LASIOCALYPTER FLAVOHIRTA, N. Sp. 


3, 2. Similar in general appearance to nigrihirta, but with the dorsum paler 
owing to the dusting being whitish and the soft hairs largely pale, the pleura 
almost entirely pale-haired, and the apices of the femora broadly yellow, more 
conspicuously so ventrally. 

Structurally the male is very similar to that of hirticauda, but the absence 
of long backwardly-directed hairs on the bases of the superior forceps, and 
differently-shaped forceps, will readily distinguish the two species. The female 
differs very markedly from that of hirticauda in the shape of the femora, which 
are attenuated apically, though not so much so as in the male. There is some 
slight difference in the colour of the hairs on the mesopleura in some of the 
specimens before me, and possibly they do not all belong to the same species 
(Figure 19). 

Length, 10-12 mm. 

Type, male, allotype, and two male and one female paratypes, Barrington 
Tops, N.S.W., Jan.-Feb., 1925 (S.U. Zool. Exped.); two females, same locality, 
25.1.1922 (Nicholson). 


LASIOCALYPTER ATRIPES, 0. SD. 


6. Very similar to the preceding species, but with the four black vittae on 
the mesonotum rather broader and more distinct, and the legs entirely black. 
Structurally similar, but readily distinguished by the structure of the 


hypopygium (Wig. 20), the broad, leaf-like inferior forceps apparently connecting 
I 


122 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


the species more nearly with the other species than with flavohirta. The legs are 
the same in structure as in the preceding species. 

Length, 11 mm. 

Type, Blue Mts., N.S.W., 26.1.1922 (Health Dept.). One specimen. 

In figuring the hypopygia of the species of this genus, I have purposely left 
out the penis except in one figure, but the omission is unimportant as this organ 
is apparently similar in all the species, the only appreciable difference being found 
in the superior and inferior forceps. 


Genus LASIOCALYPTRINA, nN. gen. 

Similar to the preceding genus, distinguished therefrom by the haired para- 
facials. The hind tibiae in the male are much attenuated on their basal halves 
as in some species of several of the foregoing genera, and the male has the first 
visible tergite humped up on each side dorsally and the second depressed across 
its anterior third. 

Genotype, the following species. 


LASIOCALYPTRINA MODESTA, Nl. SD. 

3, ¢. Similar to Lasiocalypter flavohirta in general coloration, even to the 
broadly pale apices of femora and the pale-haired pleura and lower calypter. 

Structurally it differs from that species in having the parafacials with fine 
and rather long forwardly-directed pale hairs on the greater portion of their 
extent, and the hypopygium quite different, very similar to that of UL. atripes, 
but with the inferior forceps more noticeably narrowed at bases (Fig. 20a), and 
the superior pair more slender and more evidently curved on apical halves. 

It is noteworthy that the female which I associate with the male of this 
species has the hind tibiae almost as conspicuously attenuated on basal halves as 
does the male, while the female associated with the male of flavohirta has them 
hardly at all attenuated. In both species the female has strong apical bristles 
on the fourth visible tergite, while the male lacks them. 

Length, 11-12 mm. 

Type, male, and one male paratype, Gisborne, V., 19.3.1922, and 26.3.1922, 
respectively; allotype, Barrington Tops, January, 1925 (S.U. Zool. Exped.). 

Provided it may be discovered subsequently that there are two species confused 
in my material, the male will be considered as entitled to bear the specific name. 

It is also possible that the character used for separation of the genus from 
Lasiocalypter may not be found invariably dependable and the genus may fall as a 
synonym thereof. 


Genus AUSTRODEXTA, n. gen. 


Very similar to Rhyncodeczia, but there are no hairs on the centre of propleura, 
or on the parafacials below the lower frontal bristle or at least from a short 
distance below it. The lack of erect hairs on disc along the outer lateral margin 
is a ready distinguishing mark from Lasiocalypter. 

Genotype, Austrodexia setigera, n. sp. 


Key to the Species. 


Males. 
1. Lower calypter with a large brown stain or cloud on disc, best seen when the 
ealypter Is viewed from be Giese reterenereee RS eS eee eats rtrd Ay eee 2 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 123 


Lower calypter satiny-white or uniformly yellowish-white, without a dark discal 
Cloudewhenviscenwtrompanyaan ele cieustnccined sl sieiehete el el oh sl eltel eel ielichoh ell elis vse Wel ner s\elelet l= 3 

2. First visible abdominal tergite with the anterior depression not continued beyond 
middle; lower calypter with most of the marginal hairs on outer side black, 

the long hairs carried farther towards apex than usual; intra-alars three, the 
anterior one close to suture; posteroventral bristles on fore femur uniseriate; 

tarsal claws and pulvilli fully as long as entire antenna; one of the pair of 
bristles on costa at apex of auxiliary vein as long as inner cross-vein ........ 
Scrape ese e TMM cae StS OIG eovran seine a recievie(el iiss, evened eivelial begemnzec st iat oyraits pictipennis Macquart. 
Depression on anterior portion of first visible tergite continued to almost the extreme 
apex centrally; lower calypter with all of the marginal hairs yellowish-white ; 
intra-alars two; posteroventral bristles on fore femur in more than one series; 

tarsal claws and pulvilli shorter than antenna; longer one of the two bristles 

at apex of auxiliary vein much shorter than inner cross-vein, hardly distinguish- 

PYLON S uh or are tn oun ere toe Eo IRE HO ReO ES ULE NHS Shc BT Rene MSmeR ans ar hia = let ey rubricarinata Macquart. 

8. Hind femur gradually and slightly tapered from beyond middle to apex, and with 
one outstanding posterodorsal bristle at not, or but little, more than its own 

length from apex; hind tibia not strikingly attenuated basally, or, if so, on less 

than its basal fourth, and with several anterodorsal and posterodorsal bristles, 

one beyond middle distinctly longer than diameter of tibia ................ 4 

Hind femur much attenuated on apical third or more, widened at extreme apex, and 
with from one to five bristles on basal portion of apical half; if with only one 
bristle, it is at one-third from apex; hind tibia distinctly attenuated on about 

its basal half, usually with one anterodorsal and posterodorsal bristle beyond 
middle which are not longer than its diameter .....................0-0000- 5 

4. Mid tibia with the submedian ventral bristle much longer than the tibial diameter ; 
three or more bristles on the basal half of anteroventral surface of hind femur; 
saucy eee heten Ee Wreestin el oW elaye nee cleat OGRoes oka OND GEe CCL S CRU RER PARAMORE Ia Tg GiGi 4 oO. setigera, n. Sp. 

Mid tibia with the submedian ventral bristle very small, often lacking; when present, 
not nearly as long as tibial diameter; usually no strong bristles on the basal 

half of anteroventral surface of hind femur; intra-alars two ..................- 

OPO Sao: AoE Cue es (0 BB Riso: REE OP ION SET ein Cerrar, Bas A) brs ROWE sor NOR TNE ts. dA Ze communis, Nn. sp. 

5. Fifth abdominal sternite with many long downwardly-directed bristles on basal half 
of each process, which are longer than the process and curve backward at apices 


giving the abdomen a tufted appearance (Fig. 23) .......... setiventris, nN. sp. 

Fifth abdominal sternite without long bristles as described above .............. 6 

6. Hind tibia with a submedian posterodorsal bristle; inner cross-vein distinctly clouded 
VLE SLU SCO USM rdehekehs:ciae beta sie tater Ae reetae ce vat bin NEN AC SUD Do ane unipuncta, n. sp. 

Hind tibia without a submedian posterodorsal bristle; inner cross-vein not at all 
CLOW GE Gime struc cases Te Fes eas MN ee Hecht cd f Sie diye Ghigena pone oakalte Parise een 7 
Upehorescoxae entirelys vellow-hairedl ym waa ee ce nes oi eecac eee pallidihirta, n. sp. 
Fore coxae with some strong black bristles amongst the yellow hairs .. mixta, n. sp. 

Females. 

1. Lower calypter with a large brown mark or cloud on middle of disc .......... 2 
Lower calypter white or yellowish, with a dark discal mark .................... 3 

Cee UN tra vlars three prac wep chou senate cae ete s face sivobe Velie cceh cuivis oo) yg sees oe pictipennis Macquart. 
Le N er eeE CEH NE AS} 29 ASG)» tirit (tcra-eess Sao REI SRE aU AY Ch Ne SRE BT Ie a eS rubricarinata Macquart. 

3. Inner cross-vein of wings distinctly clouded with fuscous ........ unipuncta, n. sp. 
innerrcross-vein of wings without a) dark cloud). 2.04044. 0 oe eee 4 


Men per eRe Roses Ronen seul MCR AL ee eto ag antic ae cr Wr Msn AAe nec aN cua MamiL aaah 2 fete ) Seti eu aaa AWARE pallidihirta, n. sp. 
BP elisiGie, wen tate) Mane ees setiventris, nN. sp. 


AUSTRODEXIA PICTIPENNIS (Macquart). 


6, §. A black species, with grey dusting on head, thorax, and abdomen. 
Interfrontalia and face centrally brownish testaceous in male, interfrontalia in 
female fuscous; basal two antennal segments reddish, third fuscous; palpi fuscous. 
Thorax with four or five dark dorsal vittae. Abdomen with the whitish-grey 
dusting distinctly checkered, the male with darker spots at bases of the strong 


124 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


bristles. Legs black. Wings greyish hyaline, with both cross-veins and usually 
the fourth vein on its apical section narrowly clouded with fuscous. Calyptrae 
white, lower one with a large dark brown discal mark. MHalteres brown. 

Frons of male at vertex hardly wider than third antennal segment, ocellars 
and inner marginal bristles on orbits long; frons of female fully one-third of the 
head width, orbits at level of lower reclinate outer bristle about as wide as inter- 
frontalia, each orbit with three outer bristles on upper half, the upper one curving 
outward and slightly backward, the other two proclinate; palpi short; arista 
rather densely haired, the longest hairs about as long as width of third antennal 
segment. Thorax with three plus three dorsocentrals, one or two plus two 
acrostichals, one plus one sternopleurals, and six marginal scutellars. Abdomen 
subeylindrical and tapered in male, with apical central bristles on all tergites and 
discals on second to fourth, first visible tergite with the central anterior depression 
not very sharply defined and ceasing well before apex of dorsum, fifth sternite 
with several quite strong bristles on each process, hypopygium as in Figure 21; 
abdomen of female ovate, lacking apical central bristles on first visible tergite 
and discal bristles on the others. Legs normal in female, except that the femora 
are slightly spatulate at extreme apices, the hind tibiae of male very distinctly 
attenuated at bases; female with, male without, a submedian ventral bristle on 
mid tibia. Outer cross-vein of wing almost S-shaped; first posterior cell narrowly 
open; one of the bristles at apex of auxiliary vein on costa quite long. 

Length, 7-11 mm. 

Localities: Hawkesbury Sandstone bush, 9.9.1923, two males (Nicholson) ; 
National Park, Gundamaian, 12.4.1925 (Mackerras); Kuring-gai, 26.9.1925; and 
Mundaring, W.A., 26.8.1926 (H. W. Ferguson). 

It must be noted that identification of this and other Macquart species will 
require confirmation by examination of type specimens, if such exist. 


AUSTRODEXIA RUBRICARINATA (Macquart). 


6, 2. This species is quite radically different from the preceding one, having 
the hind tibiae in the male without an attenuation at bases, the first visible 
abdominal tergite with a quite deep depression to apex in the male, no discal bristles 
usually present on third visible tergite in that sex, and the mesosternum with dense 
erect yellow hairs in front of the posterior marginal bristles which are not present 
in the male of pictipennis. The outer cross-vein is not noticeably clouded, though 
the inner one is, and the former is not so abruptly bent. The frons of the female 
is more narrowed above than in pictipennis, being less than one-third of the head 
width at vertex and, though this sex has a rather evident bristle at apex of the 
auxiliary vein on costa, the male has none. 

Length, 10-12 mm. 

Localities: National Park, 16.10.1927, and 1.1.1926 (Mackerras), Bayview, 
Sydney, N.S.W., 19.12.1925 (Health Dept.); “Allowrie’”, Killara, N.S.W., 7.11.1921; 
Woy Woy, 8.3.1924 (Nicholson) ; Mosman, N.S.W., 24.9.1922;: Hidsvold, Qld. Thirteen 
specimens. 


AUSTRODEXIA SETIGERA, D. SD. 
6, 2. Very similar to the preceding species in coloration, but the face is more 
yellowish, and the lower calypter is satiny-white. Structurally it differs in having 
the mid tibia in both sexes with a strong submedian ventral bristle, the hind 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 125 


tibia of male slightly but quite evidently attenuated at base, and the hind femur 
with three or four strong bristles on the basal half of the anteroventral surface. 
The inner cross-vein of the wing is slightly clouded, the outer one is without an 
evident cloud, and there is one rather long bristle on costa at apex of auxiliary 
vein; outer cross-vein less curved than in the two preceding species. 

Length, 11-13 mm. 

Type, male, allotype, and three male paratypes, Woy Woy, sand bush, 2.9.1925 
(Nicholson); paratypes, same locality as type, 8.8.1925 (Nicholson), and Manly, 
Sydney, N.S.W., 17.9.1923 (Health Dept.). 

The last mentioned male paratype has a pair of strong apical central bristles 
on the first visible abdominal tergite, which are lacking in the other males, but 
it agrees in every character other than that with the type, including the 
hypopygium (Fig. 25). 


Fig. 21.—Austrodexia pictipennis. Apex of hypopygium of male from the 
side. 

Fig. 22.—Austrodexia communis. Hypopygium of male; a, from the side; 
b. from behind; one side. 

Fig. 23.—Austrodexia setiventris. Apex of abdomen of male from the side. 

Fig. 24.—Austrodexia pallidihirta. BHypopygium of male; a, from the side; 
b, from behind; one side. 

Fig. 25.—Austroderia setigera. Hypopygium of male; a, from side; b, from 
behind. 


AUSTRODEXIA COMMUNIS, 0. Sp. 


¢. Very similar to the preceding species, differing in the characters mentioned 
in the key to species, and in the genitalia of the male (Fig. 22), though the latter 
has the same general characteristics to a greater extent than in other species of the 
genus. 

Length, 11-13 mm. 

Type, Canberra, F.C.T., 27.1.1929 (M. Fuller); paratypes, National Park, 
16.10.1927, Waterfall, 9.11.1927, National Park, Gundamaian, 12.4.1925 (Mackerras), 
Bunya Mt., Qld., 9.1.1926. 


126 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


AUSTRODEXIA UNIPUNCTA, Nl. Sp. 

6. A more slender species than the preceding one, with the hind legs more 
elongated, the hind tibiae attenuated on about their basal halves, the hind femora 
without well developed anteroventral bristles on the basal halves, and the meso- 
pleura black, instead of white, haired. 

Length, 11-13 mm. 

Type, male, and one paratype, Barrington Tops, N.S.W., January, 1925 (S.U. 
Zool. Exped.) ; paratypes, National Park, 16.10.1927, and Gundamaian, National 
Park, 12.4.1925 (Nicholson). 


AUSTRODEXIA PALLIDIHIRTA, N. Sp. 

6, 2. The largest and most robust species of the genus before me, readily 
distinguished from its congeners by the reddish or testaceous scutellum, and the 
conspicuous pale hairs on thorax and abdomen. The abdomen has the grey dusting 
on dorsum quite dense, and because of the distinct dark dorsocentral vitta and 
transverse dark marks on apices of the tergites, they appear almost as whitish 
spots on each side of each tergite. The face is paler than in the other species 
and so also are the central portions of the tibiae. The mid and hind tibiae are 
conspicuously attenuated on basal halves in the male, but they are not noticeably 
so in the female, though they are distinctly curved. Here, as in the other species, 
there is the sexual dimorphism of the abdominal armature, the male having discal 
bristles and the female lacking them. Hypopygium of male as Figure 24. 

Length, 12-15 mm. 

Type, male, allotype, and ten paratypes, Barrington Tops, N.S.W., January and 
February, 1925 (S.U. Zool. Exped.). 


AUSTRODEXIA MIXTA, Nn. SD. 
do. Very similar to the preceding species, but smaller, and differing as 
noted in the key to species. 
Length, 12 mm. 
Type, male, Barrington Tops, N.S.W., January, 1925 (S.U. Zool. Exped.). 


AUSTRODEXIA SETIVENTRIS, Nn. Sp. 

g. Like a slender specimen of pallidihirta, but with the scutellum not paler 
than the mesonotum, the legs even longer and more slender, and the body not so 
robust. Structurally the species is distinguished at once from all its congeners 
by the presence of many long bristly hairs on the basal portion of the fifth 
abdominal sternite, which curve backwards and give the abdomen a slightly tufted 
appearance. I have not dissected the hypopygium, as the external characters 
appear to distinguish the species for present purposes (Fig. 23). 

Length, 13 mm. 

Type, male, allotype, and three male paratypes, Glenreagh, N.S.W., 29.1.1923, 
2.2.1923, and 25.1.1923 (Health Dept.). 

When the family is ultimately worked up intensively, the hypopygia of all the 
species ought to be figured and more extensive descriptions published, but in the 
meantime the above details will suffice, with the type specimens, for comparison. 


Genus ANATROPOMYIA, n. gen. 
Propleura haired in centre; prosternum bare; face without a distinct keel; 
arista short-haired; palpi well developed; proboscis normal; third vein of wing 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 127 


setulose at base, other veins bare; first posterior cell open, ending near apex 
of wing; lower calypter widened behind. 
Genotype, the following species. 


ANATROPOMYIA FLAVICORNIS, Nl. SD. 


6. Frons fuscous, orbits grey-dusted, face testaceous, parafacials and anterior 
portion of cheeks brown, the former yellowish-grey dusted, posterior portions oz 
cheeks fuscous, with grey dust; antennae orange-yellow, basal two segments dark; 
palpi orange-yellow; proboscis black. Thorax black, with rather dense pale-grey 
dust, dorsum with four black vittae, the submedian pair abbreviated behind. 
Abdomen black, more distinctly shining than thorax, with grey dust which is 
somewhat checkered, and a rather indistinct dark dorsocentral vitta. Legs black. 
Wings greyish hyaline. Calyptrae yellowish-white, with a dark spot in centre of 
upper one. Halteres brown. 

Eyes bare; frons at vertex about one-third as wide as one eye, interfrontalia 
entire, orbits linear above, with quite long inner marginal bristles, inner verticals 
developed, ocellars proclinate, profile as Figure 26. Thorax with three plus three 
dorsocentrals and acrostichals, three intra-alars, the posterior sublateral lacking, 
sternopleurals two plus one and no hairs below lower calypter. Abdomen sub- 
cylindrical, tapered to apex, with apical bristles on tergites 2 to 4 and discals on 
3 and 4. Legs normal in length, tibial bristles quite long, mid pair with a 
submedian ventral bristle. Wings normal, preapical bend of fourth vein angular, 
without a spur, outer cross-vein much closer to bend than to inner cross-vein. 

Length, 11 mm. 

Type, Ilford, N.S.W., 30.12.1923. One specimen. 

This species is like a tachinine, being of stouter build than is usual in the 
Dexiini, but because of the haired arista, low situation of the antennal insertions, 
and one or two other characters, I place it in this tribe. Possibly it should be 
placed in Trichostylum Macquart, but the species is distinct from the type of 
that genus. ; 


Genus HoBarTIA, n. gen. 

Readily distinguished from its allies by the peculiar shaped head with the 
low placed antennal insertions, subplumose arista, and haired centre of propleura. 
Other characters may be gleaned from the description of the genotype given below. 

Genotype, the following species. 


HOoOBARTIA PECULIARIS, 0. Sp. 


3,2. Black, densely yellowish-grey dusted, basal two antennal segments, palpi, 
trochanters, and in the male the apical lateral portions of first visible and the 
entire sides of second visible tergite, testaceous yellow or reddish-yellow; tibiae 
more or less yellowish, sometimes entirely so. Wings greyish hyaline. Thorax 
with four incomplete dark dorsal vittae. Abdomen almost uniformly densely 
yellowish-grey dusted in male, shining black in female and with dense grey dust 
at bases of the tergites which tapers off apically. Calyptrae yellowish-white. 
Halteres brown. , 

Eyes subnude; profile as in Figure 27, frons depressed at vertex, inner verticals 
strong in both sexes, ocellars short and fine, orbits with an inner marginal series 
of incurved bristles and one recurved upper bristle; the male with rather strong 


128 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXili, 


hairs laterad of the bristles, the female with two or more proclinate outer 
orbitals; arista with the longest hairs not as long as width of third antennal 
segment; palpi well developed. Thorax with three plus three dorsocentrals and 
acrostichals, the posterior sublateral bristle lacking, sternopleurals one plus one, 
marginal scutellars six. Abdomen tapered apically in male, the tergites subequal, 
first with shallow depression to apex, second and third with discal and apical 


Fig. 26.—Anatropomyia flavicornis. Head of male from the side. 
Fig. 27.—Hobartia peculiaris. Head of female from the side. 
Fig. 28.—Ea«wechopalpus rufofemorata. Head of female from the side. 


bristles, fourth with long strong bristles on sides and apex, female with the 
abdomen ovate, less strongly bristled. Legs normal, mid tibia in both sexes 
with ventral bristle, fore tarsi of female slender. First posterior cell open, 
ending slightly before wing tip, first vein bare, third setulose at base, outer 
cross-vein about one third from bend of fourth. Lower calypter broadened and 
rounded apically, lying close to side of scutellum. 

Length, 6-8 mm. 

Type, male, and allotype, Hobart, Tasmania, male labelled “Bred from Wood”. 

This is the only perfect species of the family I have seen from Tasmania. 


Tribe LESKIINI. 


This group is a rather difficult one to define, there being no outstanding 
characters for its recognition, although the general shape of the head is quite 
uniform in all the genera, there being a similarity in the long lower border which 
always exceeds the length of head at bases of antennae. The proboscis is always 
rather slender, in some cases with the apical portion very slender and exceeding the 
length of the head. In other respects the head differs both in the absence or presence 
of hairs on the arista and the parafacials, and though the palpi are always well 
developed there is a slight variation in both the length and the dilation of these 
in different genera. I have seen no Australian genus in which there are hairs 
on either the prosternum or the centre of the propleura, and the dorsocentrals 
are invariably three-paired behind the suture. 

In my new key to the genera which I hope to publish shortly I have not 
attempted to bring the genera of the tribes together in the same section, believing 
that a key at this stage of our knowledge of this family here should primarily 
be intended to enable students to identify the species, and not to show relationships 
which unfortunately are too frequently based upon opinion and not upon 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 129 


demonstrable facts either of biology or anatomy. Subsequent work, or some other 
worker, may discover reliable means for the grouping of the members of this 
and other tribes, but at present there is none such available which may be 
used with ease by even the advanced student of the family, and certainly none 
which is not susceptible to misconstruction, and therefore apt to mislead. 

I have examined the genotypes of many of the genera which belong to this 
tribe, and base my deductions as to generic concepts upon these examinations. 
Coquillett has sunk Pyrrhosia Rondani, and Myiobia Robineau-Desvoidy and 
several other genera as synonyms of Leskia. but his generic concepts were quite 
broad and it is not advisable to accept his conclusions without careful comparisons 
of the genotypes, unless the genera are isogenotypic. 


Genus DeEMotTicus Macquart. 
Curran has referred one Australian species to this genus, but it does not belong 
here, so the genus should be deleted from the list, at least until confirmed. 


Genus RHINOMYIOBIA Brauer and Bergenstamm. 

This genus was founded for the reception of one species, australis, which, I 
consider, is represented amongst my present material. In his recent paper on 
the Diptera of the Fiji Islands, Bezzi described two species which he placed 
herein, but it is possible there are two genera represented in the recorded species, 
as the generic limits are not very clearly established. As accepted by me, on the 
basis of the characters of the genotype, the distinguishing features of the genus 
are: Parafacials bare below the lower frontal bristle, the latter not below apex of 
second antennal segment; proboscis with the apical section about as long as head 
and not very slender; palpi of average length; arista with distinct hairs, always 
distinctly longer than its basal diameter; abdomen without discal bristles. Bezzi 
describes one of his species as possessed of proclinate fronto-orbital bristles in 
both sexes, and the other without such bristles in the male. The one with the 
reclinate bristles in the male has the arista with its longest hairs as long as width 
of third antennal segment, while the other one has the arista much shorter. I 
_have two species before me which exhibit the same difference in the aristal hairing, 
but in the one with long hairs there are no proclinate orbital bristles in the male. 

Below I present a diagnosis of the two species in my hands. 


A. Arista with its longest hairs about twice as long as its basal diameter; frontal 
bristles biseriate in front near bases of antennae; second visible abdominal 
tergite with a pair of long strong bristles; tibiae reddish-yellow; mesonotum 
when seen from behind with four narrow dark vittae which are not fused behind 
CHEM SUIEWT Onyarvsn cas israyecaeibns secaenavsucied ck otencbers sistent ior australis Brauer and Bergenstamm. 

AA. Arista with its longest hairs about four or five times as long as its basal diameter, 
and about equal in length to width of third antennal segment; second visible 
abdominal tergite without well developed apical central bristles; tibiae largely 
infuscated; mesonotum when seen from behind with a pair of narrow dark 
grey submedian vittae in front of suture and on each side of these a broader 
spot-like black mark, the postsutural region with a broad black anterior marginal 
transverse mark which consists of the four fused vittae .... transversalis, n. sp. 


RHINOMYIOBIA AUSTRALIS Brauer and Bergenstamm. 
The male has the abdomen with a rather broad black dorsocentral vitta which 
is slightly widened at apex of second visible tergite and forms an apical fascia 
on third, while it almost entirely covers the apex of abdomen; the female has the 


130 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


dorsocentral black vitta less defined and the apices of the tergites either entirely 
black or with three black marks. Both sexes have the frontal bristles at least 
biseriate anteriorly, most noticeably so in the male. There is a slight difference 
in the structure of the fore tarsi in the two females before me, one having the 
apical three segments more noticeably widened than the other. However, I 
consider they are the same species. 


Localities: Sydney, N.S.W., 23.12.1923 (Health Dept.); National Park, Gunda- 
Mmaian, 12.4.1925 (Mackerras), and “Allowrie’”’, Killara, N.S.W., 16.1.1921. 


RHINOMYIOBIA TRANSVERSALIS, Tl. SD. 


©. Head: testaceous, with grey dust, interfrontalia black-brown, antennae 
fulvous yellow, third segment black except at base; palpi orange-yellow. Thorax 
black, with brownish-grey dusting, scutellum not noticeably yellow as in australis, 
the mesonotum marked as stated in key. Abdomen reddish-yellow, with a partial 
blackish dorsocentral vitta, the bases of the tergites narrowly white dusted. Legs 
fulvous yellow, tibiae largely infuscated, tarsi black. Wings brownish hyaline, 
darkest along costa. 


Frons at vertex hardly more than one-third of the head width, ocellar bristles 
minute, frontal bristles descending almost to apex of second antennal segment, in 
one series. Thorax with three plus three dorsocentrals, two pairs of presutural 
acrostichals, and two plus one sternopleurals. Legs normal, fore tarsi not widened, 
mid tibia with a ventral bristle. Wing venation as in australis, first posterior cell 
ending a little before wing tip. 

Length, 8 mm. 

Type, Cairns district, Qld. (Dodd), no other data. 


I have a male which may belong to this species, but it lacks the arista and has 
the mesonotum marked as in australis, so there is some doubt as to its identity 
and I therefore leave it aside meantime. It is from Marwood, Queensland. 


Genus EXECHOPALPUS Macquart. 


This genus was unknown to me when I arranged my key to the genera, but 
I now have several species which are referable here. All except one of these have 
the palpi much longer than usual in the group, and rather distinctly club-shaped. 
Like all of the tribe, the prosternum and propleura are bare, and the head is lenger 
at lower margin than at bases of antennae. In this genus the aristae are bare, 
the proboscis has the apical portion rather slender and varying from slightly 
shorter than, to a little longer than, the length of head at lower margin. The 
parafacials are either bare on their lower halves or almost so, the frontal orbits in 
male lack proclinate outer bristles, and they have at least one such in the female, 
the two upper outer bristles on each orbit in that sex being directed almost straight 
outward over the eyes, a character which distinguishes the genus from Demoticus, 
in which the upper bristle is directed, or curved, backward. The ocellars are 
distinct, quite strong in the female, and the profile of head is usually as in 
Figure 28. For other characters see the subjoined key and descriptions of species. 


I am not certain that I have the genotype, rufipalpis Macquart, in hand and 
am therefore leaving it out of consideration in my treatment of the genus. An 
examination of the type specimen will be required to determine its identity and. 
relationship to the species dealt with herein. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 131 


Key to the Species. 

Thee UMREIGS ES ane St W eroret igo ees Gta ce Sel eu G SUSI Men Ets Cronin cle pCR ERC Ler OMaaey Ge CHOIR Tolar etic a cHBAC IED voted 2 
PESTA SS Mirren reer iatee ees ete ceo euiett Nation otic ox ten shies hse em ace namenel sucht eoriel etisiteNanlotlehe] snore nara lveteuenerctel{= 3 

2. Abdomen with well developed discal bristles on second and third visible tergites; first 
posterior cell of wing open; femora rufous yellow, fore pair fuscous on posterior 

side; abdomen rather densely whitish-grey dusted, first visible tergite with its 

dorsal exposure, second and third with their apices, rather broadly shining 
DROWAISH DLA Chose saveter erst yer eitaceicr ee Nieves tare celiet cme meee ieiRer emote oreo Nene rufifemur, n. sp. 
Abdomen without well developed discal bristles on second and third visible tergites ; 
first posterior cell of wing closed and with a short petiole; femora black, rufous 

yellow on about the apical halves on ventral surface; abdomen quite densely 
whitish-grey dusted, the dust checkered when seen from different angles and 

not arranged as) in’ preceding Species)... 5.5...2...0+-..s2 eens e dubitalis, n. sp. 

3. Abdomen with well developed discal bristles on second and third visible tergites; 
legs tawny yellow, posterior side of fore femur and apical two or three segments 


Ofmead ChyntansuSyatliSCOUS My sia apenas cucdcaskeatincueiatowe av eveuoueheleeay euelete ekeaae rufifemur, n. sp. 
Abdomen lacking well developed discal bristles on at least the second visible tergite ; 
LESSHNO LT COlOUREM ASHA OME ec scd cease seen toy stones se Set al S Tele Shove, wheat tetahie cpa ieWenal cc oeies ee eriey eis 4 


4. Legs black, slightly reddish at apices of femora, most noticeable ventrally .......... 
Erato eiss arco ten etree eke e We sUemieulel casa erie hinlie ietiemertenentontebragls an cvaale let woc: tartesnebion Seruapretel ie) eieams atripes, n. sp. 

Legs tawny yellow, fore femur on posterior side and apices of tibiae slightly darkened, 
tAarsinenbicelyn lake Waser cicero eee eee obec Patri ay einer Mesh is eon ARON W a Neaveue fulvipes, n. sp. 


EXECHOPALPUS RUFIFEMUR, DN. SD. 


3, ¢. Fuscous, with rather dense pale-grey dusting. Interfrontalia reddish 
to fuscous, orbits whitish dusted; basal two segments of antennae rufous, third 
fuscous; palpi rufous yellow, usually darker at apices. Thorax with four dark 
dorsal vittae, in female sometimes the mesonotum and disc of scutellum brown 
marked. Abdomen rather checkered on dorsum in female, the male, and to a 
lesser extent the female also, with dark apices to tergites 2 and 3. Legs tawny 
yellow, fore femora largely dark in male on posterior side, less so in female, tarsi 
infuscated at apices. Wings slightly fumose, more noticeably so basally. Calyptrae 
greyish-white. Halteres brown. 

Eyes with sparse microscopic hairs; frons of male about one-fourth of the 
head width at vertex, orbits narrowed above, with incurved bristles along the 
inner margins and numerous lateral hairs, the female with the frons nearly one- 
-third of the head width at vertex, orbits more strongly bristled along inner 
margins and with three long outer bristles on upper half, the uppermost two 
curved outwardly, the anterior one proclinate; arista bare, second segment short; 
profile as Figure 28. Thorax with three plus three dorsocentrals, two plus two 
acrostichals, the anterior postsutural pair nearer suture than usual, three pairs of 
intra-alars, three bristles on presutural lateral area, and three sternopleurals, 
prosternum and regions above and below lower calypter bare; scutellum with four 
long marginal and two shorter preapical bristles, the apicals undeveloped. Abdomen 
-ovate, broader in the female, with apical central bristles of first and discal and 
apical bristles on other tergites. Fore tarsi of female not dilated, mid tibia in 
both sexes with anterodorsal and ventral bristles; hind tibia with two or three 
long and a number of short bristles on anterodorsal surface. First vein bare, 
third with setulae at base above and below; first posterior cell open, ending well 
before tip of wing, outer cross-vein not half as far from bend of fourth vein as 
from inner cross-vein, a quite conspicuous costal bristle at apex of auxiliary vein. 

Length, 9-11 mm. 

Type, male, allotype, and eight female paratypes, Eradu, W.A., 8.9.1926, and 
one female paratype, Wyalkatchem, W.A., 1.9.1926 (E. W. Ferguson). 


132 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiii, 


EXECHOPALPUS DUBITALIS, n. Sp. 

This species differs from the preceding one in being smaller, and in having 
darker legs, and the first posterior cell of wing closed. It is possible that there 
are sometimes discal bristles on the third visible abdominal tergite, but it is hardly 
likely that such are ever present on the second. Structurally the male differs from 
that of the preceding species in having the frons less protuberant, and the third 
antennal segment narrower. Besides the closed first posterior cell of the wing, 
the bend of the fourth vein is more rounded than in the preceding species and may 
be used as a distinguishing character. 

Length, 6-5 mm. 

Type and one male paratype, Tammin, W.A., 31.8.1926 (EK. W. Ferguson). 

This species in some particulars agrees very well with Macquart’s description 
of the genotype, but it does not do so closely enough to justify me in deciding that 
it is that species. The tibiae are but slightly paler at bases than at apices and 
not markedly yellowish as would be expected from the description of rufipalpis. 


EXECHOPALPUS NIGRIPES, Nn. Sp. 


©. Agrees very well with the colour description of rufifemur in so far as the 
head, thorax, and abdomen are concerned, except that the latter has no dark 
apices to the tergites and is.-checkered on dorsum. The legs are black, with very 
slight indications of red colour at extreme apices, most noticeable below. 

Structurally the species differs from duwbitalis in having the first posterior cell 
of the wing narrowly open, and in having the frons less protuberant. The fourth 
visible abdominal tergite has the discal transverse series of bristles quite strong 
and conspicuous. 

Length, 7 mm. 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W., 25.10.1925 (Health Dept.). One specimen. 

This can hardly be rufipalpis, as in the females of this and related genera 
the legs are always paler than in the males. 


EXECHOPALPUS FULVIPES, Nn. Sp. 


®. Similar in coloration to dubitalis, but the humeri and apex of scutellum 
are slightly yellowish, the fore femora are narrowly striped with fuscous along 
the posterior side, and the tarsi are black. Sides of abdomen yellowish at base. 

The palpi are not as long as in the other species, being shorter than the 
length of the head, and are less pronouncedly club-shaped, with much shorter 
bristles than usual, appearing almost bare except under a high power lens. The 
head is much as in the other species. with the parafacials above wider than the 
third antennal segment. The thorax is similar to that of rufifemur, except that 
there is a pair of apical bristles on scutellum, which are rather short and curve 
upward. Apical bristles on abdominal tergites strong, present on all tergites, 
discals lacking even on the fourth visible tergite. First posterior cell of wing 
open, bend of fourth vein angulate. Fore tarsus slender, mid tibia with two or 
three anteroventral bristles, the lower one longest, and a strong submedian ventral 
bristle. 

Length, 8 mm. i 

Type, Eradu, W.A., 8.9.1926 (H. W. Ferguson). One specimen. 

This species is slightly aberrant in having the palpi shorter and less strongly 
club-shaped and bristled than in the other species, but the frontal bristling is the 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 133 


same as in the others, and in most characters it agrees so closely with them that 
I can see no reason for removing it from the genus. 
There are several other Australian genera of this tribe. 


Tribe PALPOSTOMINI. 


I have already presented a key for the identification of the three genera of 
this tribe known to me, in Part xii of this series of papers, but in some manner 
I erred in omitting Hustacomyia Malloch from the segregate in my recent key to 
the Australian Tachinidae in which the propleura is haired, and included it in 
the one with the propleura bare. I present below some data on the tribe and 
rectify this error. 


Genus Hustacomyia Malloch. 


This genus has the propleura haired centrally and falls in the group contained 
between Captions 2 and 135 in my recent generic key. It is at once distinguished 
from all the genera in the segregate by the unlobed lower calypter, which is not 
produced on its inner side, but equally wide from base to beyond middle, lies well 
separate from the scutellum, and is evenly rounded at apex. 

If one attempts to place it in the published key, provided the propleural hairs 
are not overlooked, it will not run out to any genus because of the lack of a facial 
keel. There are several genera dealt with in the present paper that fail to find 
a place in the key because of this same feature, and I present herein an addendum 
to the key to include these. 

I have now in hand two species of the genus and present below a comparative 
synopsis to enable students to identify them. 


A. Arista hardly longer than the third antennal segment; abdomen brownish testaceous, 
with a blackish dorsocentral vitta, and dark dots at bases of most of the hairs 
and bristles, especially noticeable apically, the bases of the tergites grey 
dusted; outer cross-vein of the wing almost exactly mid-way between the inner 
eross-vein and bend of fourth vein; mid tibia with a ventral bristle beyond 
TANTO KOUKEN <-HGtes tlonaeeenr Sih tS corn Gn ORO Ok moa a ckeee ack DRT Ton Ete ER Een ees ic breviseta Malloch. 

AA. Arista longer than the entire antenna; abdomen dull black, mottled with grey 
dusting, which is seen only from certain angles, most evident on bases of 
tergites, and on a pair of small discal spots on second tergite; outer cross- 
vein of wing at about three-fifths of the distance from inner cross-vein to bend 
of fourth vein; mid tibia without a ventral bristle beyond middle .. hirta, n. sp. 


EUSTACOMYIA BREVISETA Malloch. 


I have still the type specimen of this species in my hands which enables 
me to give the above comparative data and other facts contained in the description 
of the new species. The locality of the type is Sydney, N.S.W. 


EUSTACOMYIA HIRTA, Nn. Sp. 


¢. A larger, more robust, and much darker species than the genotype, with 
the surface hairs much longer. Head testaceous yellow, occiput fuscous, with 
grey dust, parafacials yellow dusted: interfrontalia dark brown; antennae and 
palpi testaceous yellow, third segment of former browned apically; aristae fuscous: 
all cephalic hairs dark. Thorax black, slightly shining, mesonotum with whitish- 
grey dust, which leaves five black vittae, the central one lacking in front of suture, 
the submedian pair not continued much behind suture; pleura grey dusted. 


134 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXili, 


Abdomen dull black, with whitish dust, which appears speckled and is changeably 
visible as the surface is viewed from different angles. Legs pitchy, coxae and 
femora yellowish, the anterior surface of the fore pair noticeably pale, tibiae 
yellowish. Wings greyish hyaline. Calyptrae fuscous. Halteres brown. 

Eyes bare; frons in front of ocelli not as wide as third antennal segment, 
verticals undifferentiated, ocellars the same, each orbit with some fine bristles 
along the inner margin on anterior two-thirds or more, haired laterally, the hairs 
continued on parafacials to lower level of eye, parafacials wider than third antennal 
segment, and about half as wide as height of cheek; arista microscopically 
pubescent; palpi quite long, slightly thickened. Thoracic dorsum with long, strong, 
erect hairs, the postsutural dorsocentrals four pairs; one long pair of acrostichals 
in front of suture; the discal hairs on scutellum much longer and finer than in 
breviseta; sternopleurals two plus one; postscutellum with the chitin more 
obviously rounded over above than in breviseta. Abdomen narrowly ovate, with 
quite long erect hairs, and long apical bristles on tergites 2 to 4. Legs normal, 
no anterodorsal bristles on fore tibia. Wing with setulae at base of third vein 
above and below. 

Length, 9 mm. 

Type, ‘“Allowrie’’, Killara, N.S.W., 9.10.1921, no collector’s name given. One 
specimen. 


Genus APALPOSTOMA, hn. gen, 


This genus will take the place of Hustacomyia Malloch in my generic key 
as it will run down to Caption 19, second section, therein. It has the first posterior 
cell of the wing open, and the bend of fourth vein with a short spur vein which is 
never present, as far as I have seen, in Palpostoma Robineau-Desvoidy. There is 
one species of Palpostoma which has the first posterior cell of the wing very 
narrowly open or just closed at apex, apicalis Malloch, but in it the bend of the 
fourth vein is evenly rounded, and the frons is much narrower than in the present 
genus, while the third antennal segment is also longer. It might be well to 
change the two sections of Caption 19 in the key referred to as below. 

19. First posterior cell of wing usually closed and with a more or less distinct petiole, 
the bend of fourth vein never with a spur vein; third antennal segment at least 
as long as height of cheek at highest point .... Palpostoma Robineau-Desvoidy. 

First posterior cell of wing open; bend of fourth vein angular, and with a short 

spur vein; third antennal segment much shorter than height of the cheek at its 
HIGH ES™S HepO Ub arate ee depres a) sie Ge ctetGnl CS) Ned pel eece aaa cee uae cua ct Ga artes col Apalpostoma, n. gen. 
Genotype, the following species. 


APALPOSTOMA CINEREA, Nl. Sp. 


9. Head yellowish-white, interfrontalia yellow, ocellar spot and aristae black, 
third antennal segment brown except at base, basal two segments and palpi yellow, 
frontal orbits slightly darkened, grey dusted, parafacials white dusted, some of 
the lower occipital hairs white, other cephalic hairs dark. Thorax black, densely 
pale-grey dusted, entirely dull, with four linear dark vittae which do not extend to 
posterior margin of mesonotum; scutellum yellowish at apex. Abdomen coloured 
as thorax, with traces of a dark brown dorsocentral vitta, and similarly coloured 
apices to tergites, broadest on third, and broken on fourth. Legs testaceous yellow, 
fore femora on posterior sides and hind femora apically stained with grey or 
fuscous. Wings greyish hyaline. Calyptrae white. Halteres dull yellow. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. ~ 135 


Frons at vertex about one-third of the head width, much widened to anterior 
margin, each orbit at anterior extremity as wide as the parallel-sided inter- 
frontalia, with a series of inner marginal bristles, three or four proclinate outer 
bristles on upper half, and many lateral hairs; verticals and ocellars short, about 
as long as the orbitals; parafacial about as wide as third antennal segment above; 
profile of head as Figure 29; proboscis without palpiform apical processes. Thorax 
with the dorsal bristles short; postsutural dorsocentrals four pairs, the hind pair 
long, presuturals two pairs, acrostichals in front of suture hardly differentiated 
from the rather strong hairs; sternopleurals 2, hardly longer than the long discal 
hairs; scutellum with the usual four marginal bristles; postscutellum with the 
chitin carried a short distance over on dorsum. Abdomen ovate, second and third 


Fig. 29.—Apalpostoma cinerea. Head of female from the side. 
Fig. 30.—Apalpostoma cinerea. Apex of wing. 


visible tergites with the apical bristles short and weak. Legs normal; fore tibia 
without anterodorsal setulae; mid tibia with a distinct submedian ventral bristle; 
hind tibia with about three uneven anterodorsal and posterodorsal bristles. Outer 
portion of wing venation as Figure 30. Lower calypter normal for the tribe. 

Length, 4 mm. 

Type, Wyalkatchem, W.A., 1.9.1926 (HE. W. Ferguson). One specimen. 

The male is unknown to me. 


Genus PaLpostoma Robineau-Desvoidy. 


I have received some additional material in this genus lately, but am not as 
yet prepared to submit a revision for publication. As I have already pointed out 
in one of my published papers, the genus is a very difficult one and really would 
entail some careful field work and the possession of much material by some 
student to enable its thorough elucidation. 


[To be continued. ] 


NOTES ON THE GENUS APISTOMYIA [DIPTERA] AND DESCRIPTION 
OF A NEW SPECIES. 


By A. L. Tonnorr, 
Division of Economic Entomology, Canberra. 


(Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) 
(Fourteen Text-figures. ) 
[Read 30th April, 1930.] 


The genus Apistomyia is one of the best characterized among the 
Paltostominae, especially on account of the peculiar shape of the simple radial 
sector which is curved upwards in its distal part in such a way as to reach the 
costa very near the tip of R,, on account of its glassy wings with a dark apical 
spot in the females of most species, and the typical coloration of the abdomen 
with silvery-grey transverse bands either complete or interrupted. 


Five species, including the one hereafter described, are now known to belong 
to this genus, the distribution of which is a fairly wide one from the Mediterranean 
region, through the north of India to Malaya and to the east coast of Australia. 


The first species to be described, A. elegans Bigot, was discovered in Corsica, 
and in spite of Bezzi’s prediction that it would be found also in Sardinia and on 
the Italian peninsula, Cyprus is so far the only other locality from which it has 
been recorded. 


Why this species has not been able to maintain itself on the mainland of 
Europe is a puzzle; the more so that it seems to be able to hold its own in 
Corsica where other species of Blepharoceridae exist in the same mountain 
streams, apparently living in association with it. The larva of A. elegans 
remained unknown for nearly sixty years and it is only quite recently that 
Edwards (1928) made it known; he mentions capturing it in the river Porto at its 
junction with the Aitone, at which spot he also found larvae of Liponeura decipiens 
and L. bischoffi, although he does not specially mention finding these three species 
in association. It must be noted also that species of Apistomyia are found in 
India and in New South Wales in association with other species of Blepharoceridae. 
The fact that A. elegans is absent from the mountain ranges of Europe cannot 
therefore be explained by the competition between species. 


Apistomyia larvae seem to prefer spots where a large amount of water is 
falling directly on to them, such as the foot of a fall, as was observed for 
A. elegans by Edwards, by myself for A. tonnoiri and by Dr. Mackerras for the 
species hereafter described. Similar habitats abound in the mountain ranges of 
Europe, therefore this larval preference does not explain the absence of A. elegans 
from the Huropean mainland. 


BY A. L, TONNOIR. 137 


The second species to be made known, A. indica Brunn. from Kashmir, is one 
of the many species which apparently exist in the Himalayan region. In a fine 
collection of Blepharocerid larvae from India, kindly submitted to me for study 
by Dr. S. L. Hora, and on which a report is being published elsewhere, I found 
five larval forms which I consider may belong to as many species, unless they be 
races of the same species, but even in that case the abundance of these larvae 
and their universal distribution throughout the Himalayan ranges indicate that 
the centre of origin of this genus may well have been in Northern India. 


In his splendid study of the Blepharoceridae Bezzi (1912) described a third 
species, A. collini, from Queensland; but in spite of a detailed description, this 
species is not well known, as only one female specimen has ever been found. 


Dr. Tillyard (1922) discovered and described the fourth species, A. tonnoiri, 
from the Blue Mountains in New South Wales, and the larva and pupa, which 
were found at the same time, were described by me (1923) a little later, this being 
the first time that the early stages of this genus were made known; all those of 
other species found since then are as strikingly characteristic of the genus as are 
the imagines. 

In view of the presence of Apistomyia in India and in Australia, the recent 
discovery of that genus in Java does not come as a surprise. This species, on 
account of the complete anal vein, shows closer aifinity with the northern species 
A. elegans and A. indica than with the Australian A. collini and A. tonnoiri. 


The facts, that these last two species are somewhat more specialized and 
that this genus is absent from Tasmania, tend to show that Apistomyia is a 
comparatively recent immigrant from the north into Australia. In spite of 
extensive search for Blepharoceridae in New Zealand, this genus has never been 
found there yet and it is not likely to occur; its absence from that country is 
rather surprising, as the three endemic genera occurring there, Neocurupira*, 
Paracurupira and Peritheates, are all closely related to Apistomyia, but are more 
generalized. They are not found in Australia, yet the Blepharocerid fauna of New 
Zealand must have come from the north as no primitive genus related to 
EHdwardsina, which is evidently of southern origin and so well represented in 
‘Tasmania, is to be found in that country. 


All the known species of Apistomyia can be differentiated in the adult stage by 
means of the following table: 


1. Anal vein complete, reaching the wing margin; female with a distinct dark spot at 
DISCO LOEW ALT Sites ters ttstcta cst were Semester see mentee ene tenra sc Licthone talsat a viral a Nene sot asa UaN RC See Moe aE Giguere 2 
Anal vein incomplete; no definite dark markings on the wings in either sex 


2. Thorax with two distinct narrow whitish vittae on the disc of the mesonotum or else 
with three wide black vittae on greyish-white background, or else coloration 
mostiy,orange inithe females Wancer species! 6.75... asec acne cae sens 3 

Thorax without submedian narrow pale vittae; coloration blackish in female; smaller 
SDOCIOS Weed sera paencns coterie aici or sicliewe ered thee eretay cialan ch aera ce Se e-apsoomeranee A, mackerrasi, n. sp. 

3. Second antennal segment flat and dilated in female ............ A. trilineata Brunn. 
Second antennal segment normal; coloration of female often mostly orange ...... 
J\a's 010 O10. OL DIOL ONS Glo M9 Ordo lPasaG Crone Subcol Ghb cunt Gish Aad enna eae SP Ae Ee A. elegans Big. 


*TIt is not at all certain that the Australian species N. nicholsoni which Tillyard 
refers to Neocurwpira is congeneric with the genotype N. hudsoni Lamb from New 
Zealand. 

J 


138 NOTES ON THE GENUS APISTOMYIA, 


4. Wing clear; transverse basal whitish bands of abdominal tergites interrupted ...... 


UHeIe tl HELENE Nesta HevanG Ot oma Tenor OR SENT ceo OnE oKO Uo Er Otor Slots Gara DID 6 oeaks o- orden A. tonnoiri Till. 
Wing infuscated; abdominal pale bands complete ........... saab ajecy pil atte A. collini Bezzi 


As can be seen from this key, there are not many morphological features 
which can be used for differentiating the species. 


The eye structure, as already noted by Bischoff (1928), differs in the sexes, 
in that the region of large facets is more developed than the one of small facets 
in the male, whereas it is the reverse in the female; this proportion may vary to 
some extent for each species, and so does the length of the proboscis as compared 
with the height of the head capsule. 


The relative length of the antennal segments is also peculiar to each species, 
especially in the three or four basal segments. Usually there is no dimorphism 
in the structure of the antennae, but in the Indian species the pedicel of the female 


Text-figures 1-6. 


1.—Wing venation of male of Apistomyia mackerrasi. 2.—Anal lobe of female 
of A. mackerrasi? 3.—Hypopygium of A. mackerrasi from the side. 4.—'The same 
from above. 5.—The same from below. 6.—Aedeagus removed from hypopygium 
and seen from the side. 


is flat and dilated, whereas it is subnormal in the male; this observation has been 
made on imagines dissected out of some pupae of the Hora collection; the male of 
A. indica is so far unknown, so that no observation could be made on that point 
in this species. 

The wing shape is very constant within the genus and there is apparently no 
sexual dimorphism of that organ, except perhaps in A. mackerrasi, as the female 


BY A. L. TONNOIR. 139 


which I refer to that species has a distinctly produced anal lobe (Text-fig. 2) which 
is not found in the male or in any other species. Such a produced anal lobe is a 
feature of some species of Edwardsina, Philorus and Hapalothriz, but this character 
is not sexually dimorphic in these genera. 


The base of Rs is not always absent, as shown in the figures given by 
different authors, including Bischoff, for A. elegans. According to Bezzi, it is 
present in A. collini and I have ascertained its presence in A. tonnoi7i and 
A. mackerrasi, whereas in A. indica there is a close contact between R, and the 
curve formed by r-m and Rs. This basal segment of Rs is rather difficult to 
detect on account of its smallness, so that it may easily have been overlooked in 
A. elegans. 


The male genitalia of the various species of Apistomyia differ but little, as is 
often the case in the family. I have made a detailed study of the hypopygium 
of A. mackerrasi and its various aspects are depicted in Text-figures 3 to 6; the 
same organ of A. tonnoiri has also been dissected and found to be very little 
different from the one here figured even in the intimate structure of the aedeagus. 
To my knowledge the hypopygium of A. elegans has been figured only by Bischoff 
(1928, p. 261), so that the genitalia of the three species whose males are known 
show that the best, although rather precarious, character of differentiation, is to 
be found in the relative length of the forceps (styles) as compared with that of 
the fused coxites. In A. tonnoiri the styles are as long as the coxites, in A. 
mackerrasi one-third and in A. elegans two-thirds (according to Bischoff’s 
drawing) as long. 


In the first two species the parameres are much longer and stronger than the 
three filaments of the penis which can be easily overlooked on account of their 
small size. 


APISTOMYIA MACKERRASI, 0. Sp. 


6. Head and its appendages blackish, face greyish; upper portion of large 
facets more brightly red than the lower. Thorax silvery-grey, except on the disc 
of the mesonotum and the whole of the scutellum which are velvety-black. Abdomen 
velvety-black, with the first tergite completely grey and an anterior silvery-grey 
triangle on the sides of the following tergites; on the basal segments these 
markings are more extensive and not so distinctly triangular. Hypopygium 
velvety-black above, brewnish below. MHalteres with orange stem and brownish- 


black knob. Legs brown, the base of the anterior femora paler. Wing completely 
hyaline. 


Head: Eyes hairy, region of large facets distinctly larger than the one of 
small facets, especially when seen from the side; ocellar triangle little produced. 
Antennae short, ten-segmented, the first shorter than the second which is a little 
longer than broad, the third longer than broad, but the following one shorter 
than broad, the last ovoid and somewhat longer than broad. Proboscis one and 


a half times as long as the head, the labella shorter than the basal part of the 
proboscis. ; 


Tibial spur formula, 0.0.2; fore and mid femora subequal, fore tibiae and 
tarsi distinctly longer than the mid pair; hind legs very much elongate, their 
femora, tibiae and tarsi subequal to each other. 


140 NOTES ON THE GENUS APISTOMYIA, 


The relative lengths of the different segments of the legs are as follows: 


{ 

Legs. dip Il. II. 

MeEMOna sie, Uke “ae 15 17 49 
Tibiae By ree Wh cae 22 19 49 
ar Sita ae 17 10 20 
ae 5 12 

3) 4 7} 10 

AS 3 2 7 

BY 3 3 5 


All the claws finely denticulated (4-5 teeth). 

Wing venation as depicted in Text-figure 1, quite normal for an Apistomyia; 
base of Rs distinct. 

Hypopygium as depicted in Text-figures 3-6. 

Length of body, 3-5 mm.; wing, 4 mm.; hind legs, 11 mm. 

Type from Mt. Malabar, near radio station, Java, 4,400 feet, 26th May, 1929, 
I. M. Mackerras. Collected on leaves of small bush along a path, 20 yards from the 
stream in which some larvae were subsequently discovered. Paratype: One male 
with crumpled wings and swollen abdomen, evidently immature, but apparently 
identical with type; it was collected in the same situation as the type but two 
hundred yards at least further up the valley. Allotype: The female here described 
is doubtfully referred to the same species on account of the different wing shape; 
the only specimen of that sex was captured in the same locality as the males, but 
at a good distance from them. 

Coloration similar to that of the male, that is, velvety-black with silvery- 
grey markings, but these are more extensive in this sex. Frons with orbital grey 
margin; face grey; antennae more greyish than in the male. Coloration of 
thorax as in the male, the pale humeral markings more extensive. Abdomen 
velvety-black, first tergite completely silvery-grey, the following ones with a 
narrow transverse basal greyish band, sometimes very narrowly interrupted in 
the middle. Terminal lamellae brown. Wing with a small apical infuscation; the 
anal lobe also somewhat infuscated on the margin. 

Head: Frons very wide, but as the eyes are crumpled the proportion cannot 
be made out; the region of large facets about one-fourth the height of the head, 
the facets not much larger than those of the lower region. Antennae as in male, 
the second segment proportionately a little larger. Proboscis three times as long 
as the height of the head; palpi as usual, very small and apparently one-segmented. 
The proportion of the different segments of the legs as follows: 


Legs, I. yale II. 

Mem OLA mace es 20 20 55 
Tibiae ee a Be 25 22 55 
“vavasle I ae 12 10 27 
ie: 5 5 14 

oie 4 4 10 

4, 3 3 8 

Fi, 4 4 7 


BY A. L. TONNOIR. 141 


All the claws finely denticulated. 

Wings as in male, but the anal lobe much more produced as depicted in Text- 
figure 2. 

Length of body, 5:5 mm.; wing, 5-5; hind legs, 12 mm. 


Larvae and Pupae. 


The material collected by Dr. Mackerras in the stream along which the three 
imagines described above were captured, consists of about fifty larvae and thirty 
pupae which evidently do not all belong to the same species and perhaps not to 
the same genus. 


This material is eomposed as follows: 


A. Typical Apistomyia larvae, the majority in the fourth instar, a few in the 
third. : 


B. Numerous Apistomyia pupae with internal lamellae of the breathing 
organ pointed. 


Cc. <A few similar pupae but with the internal lamellae of the breathing organ 
blunt or truncate. 


D. A number of larvae in the fourth and third instars with some characters 
of Apistomyia, yet with the end of the body shaped more as in Liponeura or 
Blepharocera. 


Larva A. Text-figure 7. 


Length of fully grown specimen, 5 to 5-5 mm. 

No definite colour pattern, but general coloration rather dark brown, darker 
on the ridges, and dorsum sprinkled with darker granulations. Antennae com- 
pletely dark, the two segments subequal. Each body division is provided with the 
characteristic anterior and posterior ridges of Apistomyia larvae, as it has been 
found in A. tonnoiri, A. elegans and the many Indian larvae whose imaginal 
forms are not yet known. The median portion of the anterior ridge is formed by 
coarse granulations or protuberances which gradually change into spinules on 
the sides of the body; the larger spinules being placed on the anterior corners 
of the divisions; the posterior corners also carry one or two spinules, but these are 
not connected with the posterior ridge which starts a little more backwards and 
is only composed of granulations. In between the two ridges there are a certain 
number of small granulations arranged in a transverse row placed nearer the 
anterior ridge; this line is composed of six to eight granulations and is sometimes 
interrupted in the middle, on the sides of the divisions the granulations are 
smaller and scattered without any apparent order. Some specimens exhibit a 
second row of these small granulations behind the one just mentioned (Text-fig. 8). 
This row is more widely interrupted in the middle and somewhat \oblique and 
curved. I thought at first that these specimens might belong to a different species 
because the pupal breathing organ dissected out of two of them seemed to differ 
slightly from those of the first type in the shape of the internal lamellae (compare 
Text-figs. 9 and 10), but this difference is not very great and, besides, there are 
intermediate types having from one to eight or more granulations placed behind 
the first row. 

The lateral appendages carry long hairs dorsally and apically as well as 
smaller spinulous bristles which are not always very distinct. The iast body 


142 NOTES ON THE GENUS APISTOMYIA, 


division is provided with two pairs of appendages; those placed on the sides of 
the penultimate segment are very small as is the rule in Apistomyia and are not 
readily visible from above. 

The gill tufts are composed of five filaments, one turned backwards and the 
others forwards; the most internal one of the latter is in appearance two- 
segmented, but it is not doubled as in the Indian species of this genus. 


Text-figures 7-14. 


7.—Larva A. 8.—A median division of a specimen of larva A with two rows of 
granulations. 9 and 10.—Two types of pupal internal lamellae extracted from larva 
A. 11.—Pupa B. 12.—Breathing organ of pupa C. 13.—Larva D. 14.—Dorsal 
brushes of larva D seen in profile. 


In the few larvae in the third instar, the gill tufts are composed, as usual, of 
only three filaments, two turned forwards and one backwards; for the rest these 
larvae are similar, also in the antennal structure, to the fully grown ones with 
the exception of the very small lateral appendages of the penultimate segment 
which are completely visible from above; there are no small granulations between 
the two main ridges of the divisions. 


Length, about 3 mm. 


BY A. L. TONNOIR. 143 


Several fully-grown specimens of this type of larva are in the prepupal stage 
and the shape of the lamellae of the breathing organ of the pupa could be ascer- 
tained by dissection as shown in Text-figure 9; this shape corresponds well to 
that of the majority of the pupae contained in the material. 


Pupa B. 


This pupa, depicted in Text-figure 11, which should replace a detailed descrip- 
tion, does not differ from any of those known in the genus Apistomyia except 
for the shape of the internal lamellae of the breathing organs. The coarse grain 
of the integument is present on the whole dorsum except on the base of the wing 
sheaths. A male fly dissected out of one of these pupae corresponds well in the 
structure of the hypopygium to A. mackerrasi, as far as could be ascertained in 
spite of its immaturity; there is therefore little doubt that larva A and pupa B 
belong to that species. 


Pupa C. 


Among the pupae above described are four others which differ from them 
in the shape of the internal lamellae of the breathing organ, which are both 
broader, the upper one being besides devoid of emargination (Text-fig. 12). The 
sheath of the mouth parts is also different from that of pupa B in which some of 
the parts are more elongate; this cannot be a sexual character, since two of the 
imagines extracted from similar pupae belonged to opposite sexes, as could be seen 
by the eye structure. Except for the venation which is clearly that of an 
Apistomyia, the imagines were not sufficiently developed to be certain that they 
differ in any way from A. mackerrasi, although it is most probable that they 
belong to another species. 


Larva D. Text-figure 13. 
Length of fully grown specimen, 5 mm. 


No definite colour pattern, but general coloration rather dark, the transverse 
ridges darker. Antennae completely black, two-segmented, the segments subequal. 
The body divisions are shaped as in Apistomyia larvae, that is, with an anterior 
collar, a median part between the two ridges and a small tapering part behind 
the posterior ridge. The anterior ridge is not straight from one anterior corner 
to the other, but in its middle it bends backwards to the spot where it carries 
the two very peculiar tufts of bristles. These tufts or brushes are placed on a 
dilatation of the anterior ridge which is there darker than elsewhere; they are 
separated by a little gap where the dark coloration of that part of the ridge can 
best be seen. These brushes are formed by a row of cylindrical or tubular bristles 
slightly curved at the tip (Text-fig. 14). The spinules on the sides of the body 
are also rather cylindrical, not tapering to a point as in most Apistomyia larvae. 
The couple of brushes are present on the cephalic division, but there they are 
smaller and are touching each other. 


The shape of the last body division is very characteristic and not at all like 
any known larva of Apistomyia, but much more similar to a Blepharocera larva 
on account of the lateral processes of the penultimate segment, which are 
completely visible from above, pointing backwards and being rather elongate; 
there is a distinct suture between the last two segments. 


144 NOTES ON THE GENUS APISTOMYIA. 


The gill filaments are as in Apistomyia; they number five; three are pointing 
forwards and two backwards. 


Of the fourteen larvae of this type contained in the material, twelve are in 
the last instar, but none of these is in the prepupal stage; the two others are in 
the third instar; these are similar to the fully-grown larva, but the gill tufts 
are as usual composed of three filaments only, two pointing forwards and one 
backwards. The dorsal brushes are present in one of these specimens but not in 
the other which, however, does not seem to differ otherwise in the slightest; its 
anterior ridge is shaped as if the brushes were present, but even when looking 
at the specimen in profile there is no trace whatsoever of the brushes to be 
found. It seems that these dorsal processes could be either present or absent in 
this species, as is the case for the dorsal spines of the Indian genus Horaia. 


As no larva showed the breathing organ of the pupa below the skin, it is 
impossible to say if pupa C, which differs from the others only in the shape of 
the internal lamellae, belongs to these larvae; it is not quite impossible, but not 
at all likely, because this pupa is typically that of an Apistomyia, whereas larva D, 
chiefly on account of the conformation of the end of the body, does not seem to 
belong to that genus. 


The relationship of this larva with Apistomyia is evidently very marked; and 
much more so than in the three New Zealand genera Neocurupira, Peritheates 
and Paracurupira, the larvae of which are devoid of anterior and posterior ridges 
found in all Apistomyia larvae and in this larva D. 


The presence of the dorsal brushes cannot be considered as a generic character, 
as similar ornamentation may be present or absent in species of a given genus, 
as in Liponeura or Curupira, for instance. 


In conclusion, I wish to thank Dr. Mackerras for the opportunity he has 
given me of studying this interesting material; I hope that this paper will 
stimulate collectors in Malaya in searching more assiduously for Blepharoceridae 
and thus help to solve the questions of the generic status of larva D and of the 
correct attribution of the female here described as that of A. mackerrasi. 


References. 


Bezzi, M., 1912.—Blepharoceridi Italiani, ete. Bull. Soe. Ent. Ital., xliv, 1912, 67. 

BIscHOFF, W., 1928.—Die Oekologie der Paleartischen Blepharoceridae. Ergeb. Fort. 
Zool., 7, 1928, 257. 

EDWARDS, F. W., 1928.—The Nematocerous Diptera of Corsica. Diptera, Vol. iv, 1928, 177. 

TILLYARD, R. J., 1922.—Australian Blepharoceridae. Part i. Aust. Zool., ii, 1922, 169. 

Tonnoir, A. L., 1923.—Australian Blepharoceridae. Part ii. Awst. Zool., iii, 1923, 55. 


THE GEOLOGY OF THE SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES. 


Part ii. DEVONIAN AND OLDER PALAEOZOIC ROCKS. 


By Ipa A. Brown, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology. 


(Palaeontological Notes by W. S. Dun, Palaeontologist to the 
Geological Survey of N.S.W., and Lecturer in Palaeontology, 
The University of Sydney.) 


(Plates i-ii; two Text-figures.) 
[Read 30th April, 1930.] 


INTRODUCTION. 


Little detailed geological work has been published on the series of altered 
sedimentary or metamorphic rocks which outcrop over the south coastal portion of 
New South Wales, east of the Main Divide between the head of the Clyde River 
to the north and the Brogo River to the south. Over the greater part of this area 
are exposed outcrops of highly folded sediments, of which no stratigraphical 
subdivisions have been recognized up to the present time. The series is intruded 
by plutonic igneous rocks of various ages and characters, and is partly covered by 
Cainozoic sediments and volcanic rocks. 

The lack of knowledge concerning these old sedimentary formations is due 
essentially to the inherent nature of the rocks themselves: petrologically they are 
not so interesting as the associated igneous series; palaeontologically, so far as 
is known, they have revealed little by which their geological age may be deter- 
mined; and in addition the denudation of the series has produced wild, 
mountainous country, much of which is almost inaccessible. 

The country is drained by three coastal streams, the Clyde, Deua and Tuross 
Rivers, which have cut gorges about 2,000 feet in depth in the upper portions of 
their courses, although their mouths are tidal on account of recent submergence of 
the coast. 

As a result of the dissection by river action, road communication is confined 
chiefly to the coastal portion of the area, where the main road or Prince’s Highway 
closely follows the coast as far south as Eden; between Nowra and Bega, a distance 
of about 200 miles, only two roads lead from the coast up on to the Main Divide, 
namely, the road from Bateman through Nelligen to Braidwood, and, that from 
Moruya through Araluen to Braidwood. Some shorter roads connect inland farms 
and mines with the coast road, but do not lead westward to the tableland. 

Furthermore, the soils derived from the sedimentary series are usually poor 
and offer little inducement for agriculture or farming, so that, apart from mining 
localities, human settlement is almost confined to the outcrops of intrusive igneous 
rocks, which yield soils particularly suitable for dairy farming. 

The object of the present paper is to place on record some recently discovered 


occurrences of fossiliferous Palaeozoic sediments, and to collect together the avail- 
K 


146 GEOLOGY OF THE SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, ii, 


able information concerning the stratigraphical problems of the far south coast 
of New South Wales, as a basis for future geological work in the area. 


PREVIOUS RECORDS. 


The earliest record of the existence of pre-Permo-Carboniferous strata on the 
south coast is contained in a paper by Alexander Berry (1822), in which is given 
a brief description of rocks outcropping in the vicinity of Bateman Bay and the 
(newly-discovered) Clyde River. 


About the year 1851, the Rev. W. B. Clarke examined a large area of the 
Southern District in order to report to the Government on discoveries of gold at 
Araluen and elsewhere. Many of his geological observations are recorded in his 
“Southern Goldfields’ (1860) and “‘Sedimentary Formations of N. S. Wales’ (4th 
Edition, 1878, pp. 133, 17). He found Silurian fossils in the limestones near 
Bungonia, Shoalhaven River, and stated (1860, p. 42): “In the country along 
Yalwal and the Clyde, Silurian slates . . . undoubtedly occur”. He apparently 
considered that the slates of the Deua River below Araluen were also of Silurian 
age, an opinion which up to the present has been generally accepted in the absence 
of evidence to the contrary. 


Southwards, in the vicinity of Eden, the “reddish and purple deposits” (p. 196) 
he regarded as Devonian formations, apparently for lithological reasons alone, 
without the aid of palaeontological evidence, which since has fully justified his 
opinion. 

Further observations on these sedimentary formations in several isolated 
localities have been made by members of the New South Wales Geological Survey. 

Limestone caves discovered by Benjamin George at Bendithera, near the head 
of the Deua River, about thirty miles west of Moruya, were visited in 1890 by 
W. S. Leigh, who published a report (1890) and a map (1897) of the caves. In 
1891, W. Anderson discovered in these limestones a coral which was determined 
by R. Etheridge, Junior, to be Favosites, and probably of Upper Silurian age. 
Further reference to these limestones has been made by Carne and Jones (1919). 

In 1901, E. C. Andrews established the occurrence at Yalwal, of Devonian 
rocks, which had been considered by W. B. Clarke to be partly Silurian and partly 
Carboniferous. Marine forms from Yalwal Creek and Grassy Gully, Shoalhaven 
River, are recorded by C. F. Laseron (1910) and Lepidodendroid remains from 
Yalwal described in detail by A. B. Walkom (1928a). 


H. I. Jensen (1908a, 19080), C. F. Laseron (1908, 1910) and W. S. Dun (1911) 
have also described the Devonian marine fauna from Ettrema and Yalwal Creeks, 
tributaries of the Lower Shoalhaven. Although H. I. Jensen (1908a) noted the 
occurrence of similar beds and fossils between Nelligen and Braidwood, and 
W. N. Benson (1922) mentioned the existence of Rhynchonella pleurodon at the 
head of the Clyde River (Yardboro), no description of the form has been previously 
published. 


In 1892 Lepidodendron australe, in association with marine fossils, was 
discovered by P. T. Hammond on a hill overlooking Back Creek, three miles from 
Major’s Creek township. 

The association of marine forms and plant remains in these localities is 
comparable with that in the Mount Lambie district, described by C. S. Wilkinson 
(1893, David and Pittman). 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 147 


There appear to be no records of fossiliferous sediments between the Yalwal 
and Braidwood beds in the north and the Devonian series of the Eden-Wolumla 
district in the south, which extend to the south-west, across the New South Wales 
border into Victoria. 

The stratigraphical relationships of the Devonian and older Palaeozoic rocks 
of Gippsland, Victoria, which have become known by the works of A. W. Howitt 
(1874, 1876, 1877), R. A. F. Murray (1878), E. J. Dunn (1890), O. A. L. Whitelaw 
(1899), H. Herman (1898) and others, and more recently by H. W. Skeats (1929), 
are intimately related to those of the pre-Carboniferous rocks of the south-eastern 
portion of this State. This was recognized at the end of last century when a 
joint geological survey by members of the Victorian and New South Wales survey 
departments was carried out along the border between Cape Howe and the head of 
the Murray River, the result of which was published by J. E. Carne (1897). 

Reports on the goldfields of Pambula, Eden and Wolumla (Carne, 1896-7) 
contain valuable information concerning the stratigraphy of the area, while the 
palaeontology has been discussed in these papers and others by W. S. Dun 
(1897a, 1897b, 1898). 


FIELD OCCURRENCE. 
(i). Section from Moruya to Bendithera. 


With the object of examining the section from Moruya westwards to 
Bendithera, the writer arranged a short reconnaissance trip in April, 1928, with a 
small party under the guidance of Mr. Randolf George, the present owner of 
Bendithera, and son of the discoverer of the limestone caves. Insufficient time 
prevented detailed examination of this area of wild, mountainous country, which 
as yet has not been surveyed in any detail, but the following notes may be of 
interest. Aneroid barometric readings taken at a number of points along the 
track, and corrected for barometric variation at Moruya, give the heights mentioned 
below. 

The bridle track used at the present time is not indicated on the published 
county and parish maps; branching from the main road to Araluen about six 
miles from Moruya the track crosses the Deua River below its junction with the 
Burra Creek, and continues westward on the south side of Burra Creek, across 
Donald’s Creek, then following a ridge running approximately in a south-westerly 
direction as far as a marked tree GCx Peppermint) at an elevation of about 


1,275 feet. The track then ascends 46 Coondella Trigonometrical Station (2,243 
feet) and a mile beyond turns westwards and descends abruptly to Diamond 
Creek (1,010 feet). Coondella Creek (570 feet), a couple of miles to the north- 
west, is a suitable camping-ground 20 miles from Moruya. Following upstream, 
the way leads up a steep spur between two arms of Coondella Creek, and 
along a ridge covered with open forest. The highest point on the track (2,800 
feet) is reached near Bendithera Trigonometrical Station (3,265 feet), and from 
hereabouts an excellent view may be obtained of the tableland to the west, the 
general level of which is about 3,000 feet above sea-level; Big Badja (4,466 feet), 
Dampier (4,059 feet) and Snowball (3,426 feet) rise as monadnocks above the 
general level of the Plateau. 

The Upper Deua River flows northwards, to the east of the Plateau, in a gorge 
only 900 feet above sea-level at Bendithera Homestead, situated on the left side 
of the Deua River above its junction with Con Creek. 


148 GEOLOGY OF THE SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, ii, 


Folded slates, quartzites and quartz-schists occupy the greater portion of the 
area between Moruya and Bendithera. The rocks outcropping within half a dozen 
miles of Moruya have already been described by the writer (1928). The wide belt 
of intrusive quartz-porphyry, shown on the map accompanying that paper to out- 


LOCALITY MAP 


OF THE 


SOUTH COAST 
N. S.W ees 


pees 
Showing Upper Devonian Trend Lines ? 


Big Badja* 


eCOOMA 


\Mt By ij 
YourIe, ie TILB: 
Natira a, 


COBARGOE 


SCALE OF MILES 


PACT ERNE 


37 


& Owy River 


ORBOST 


LAB dalt. 


crop on the eastern side of the Deua River for several miles below Larry’s 
Crossing, continues to the south across Burra Creek. Friable quartz-schists, 
guartzites and purple slates alternately outcrop between Donald’s Creek and 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 149 


Diamond Creek, on the south side of Burra Creek; the outcrops are about fifty 
yards in width, and trend in a north-north-westerly direction; no reliable measure- 
ment of the dip of the beds, or of their total thickness, could be obtained in this 
portion of the section. Conglomerate occurs on the ridge three miles south-west of 
the junction of Burra Creek and Deua River, at a height of about 680 feet above 
sea-level, between sandy slates and fine purple slates, and again on the eastern 
side of Diamond Creek between 1,220 feet and 1,435 feet above sea-level. 


Light-grey, almost flinty quartz-porphyry occurs in the bed of Diamond Creek, 
while a similar rock outcrops again on the eastern bank of the Deua River at 
Bendithera Station, forming also a bar across the bed of the river. This rock 
bears a strong resemblance to the late Devonian porphyry outcropping along the 
coast near Twofold Bay, with which it may be tentatively correlated. 

West of Diamond Creek and extending across Coondella Creek is a belt of 
coarsely grained acid granite, between two and three miles in width, which is 
intruded by dykes of an andesitic nature. No perfectly fresh specimens are avaii- 
able, but the rock is probably similar to that outcropping near Currowan Creek, 
west of Nelligen. 

Between Coondella Creek and the Deua River at Bendithera Homestead, 
interbedded slates and quartzites strike between N. 20° W. and N. 25° W. Again 
no reliable measurement of the amount of dip could be obtained, as there are 
neither natural nor artificial sections along the ridge, and well-developed cleavage 
obscures the bedding planes of the slates in the small sections examined in the 
bed of Coondella Creek. Narrow andesitic and basaltic dykes intrude this series. 

Immediately east of the Deua River the strike of the beds swings round to 
N. 5° W., possibly due to the existence of a meridional fault, which appears to 
have determined the general course of the river here. 

West of the Upper Deua River occurs a series of interbedded slates, quartzites 
and limestones, which are probably older than the series to the east. There is a 
distinct change in the trend of these outcrops compared with the rocks to the 
east, measurements of their directions of strike varying from N. 40° W. to 
N. 50° W. 

There is evidence of faulting in three directions: (i), slightly west of north, 
along the course of the Deua River, and again to the west, a vertical fault on the 
north side of Con Creek, about one mile above its junction with the Deua, throws 
limestone on the west against slates and quartzites on the east; (ii), about 
W. 35° N. along the bed of Con Creek, resulting in the movement of the rocks 
on the south-west towards the north-west, relatively; (iii), approximately in an 
E. and W. direction, up a northern tributary of Con Creek, where limestone is 
thrown against grits and conglomerates. 


So far as could be ascertained the strike of the limestone’is N. 50° W. in the 
main mass at Bendithera Cave; the dip of a narrow fossiliferous band within the 
Cave was determined to be N. 40° E. at 53°. The strike of the limestone is 
therefore conformable with that of the associated slates and quartzites, while its 
thickness must be at least several hundreds of feet. An underground stream 
issues from the limestone 300 feet below the level of Bendithera Cave entrance. 

The limestone outcrops are easily recognized, even from a distance of several 
miles, on account of the very characteristic vegetation which they support (Plate i, 
fig. 1). A variety of Acacia (? Chalkeri or decora) having a bluish-grey foliage 
grows exclusively on the limestone, forming a very marked contrast with the 


150 GEOLOGY OF THE SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, ii, 


more sombre dark-green foliage of the eucalypts growing on the adjacent slates 
and quartzites. Brachychiton populneus (Kurrajong) and a yariety of Ficus 
also grow on the limestone. 

Some intrusive dykes of porphyry and andesite are responsible for small 
deposits of silver.ore, which were reported by W. Anderson (1891). According 
to Anderson, Devonian conglomerates cap the tableland to the west; certainly large 
boulders of conglomerate and granite occur in the valleys below. 


Geological ages of the Sediments between Moruya and Bendithera. 


(a) Silurian:—The question of the geological age of the limestones at 
Bendithera is one which cannot yet be definitely answered. 

W. Anderson (1892) discovered in the limestone near Bendithera Cave “a 
thin band which is very rich in individual specimens of one genus of coral”, 
determined by R. Etheridge, Junr., to “belong to the genus Favosites’, and to 
be “probably Upper Silurian’’. 

The writer has collected several varieties of Favosites, Crinoid stems and 
(?) Tryplasma from different outcrops of limestone at Bendithera, but the rock 
is so marmorized that exact identification of the enclosed organisms is almost 
impossible. The limestones are interbedded with slates, and appear to strike in 
a north-westerly direction, in contrast with the north-north-westerly trend of 
the Devonian beds on the eastern side of the Deua River here. 


To the north of Bendithera is a series of caves in limestones described by 
Carne and Jones (1919), which are probably of Silurian age, and with these the 
Bendithera beds may be provisionally correlated. 

(b). Devonian.—At a position about three-quarters of a mile south-south-west 
of Coondella Trigonometrical Station (see map, Text-fig. 2), and sixteen miles 
along the Bendithera Track from Moruya, there occurs a bed of quartzite, crowded 
with casts of Spirifer disjuncta, described by Mr. W. S. Dun (p. 158, Plate ii, 
figs. 1-5). It outcrops in a slight saddle in the ridge running south-south-westerly 
from the Trigonometrical Station, at an elevation of about 1,860 feet above sea- 
level, and appears as a belt some twenty yards in width, consisting of boulders 
of quartzite, which extend down the slopes on both sides of the saddle (Plate i, 
fig. 2). No section of the solid rock is known to be exposed here, but the general 
trend of the outcrop in a horizontal direction is N. 20° W., the bed probably dipping 
to the south of west. 

‘Along the track about a mile north-east of Coondella Trigonometrical Station 
and 2,000 feet above sea-level, a band of similar quartzite occurs interbedded with 
slates; only obscure traces of brachiopod casts were noticed here. 

Due consideration of the topographical situation of the outcrop leaves little 
doubt that the formation is not a relatively horizontal capping over the associated 
slates and quartzites, but is actually a conformable member of the slate series. 

Thus an Upper Devonian age may be assigned to the sedimentary series 
between the porphyry of the Lower Deua River and the granite of Coondella 
Creek, and possibly also to the series as far west as the Deua River at Bendithera. 


(ii). Section from Moruya to Araluen. 


On lithological evidence the series described above may be correlated directly 
with that of the quartzites and reddish-purple slates outcropping along the Deua 
River—Araluen Road between Larry’s Crossing and Merricumbene (see map, Text- 
fig, 2). 


is 


- ——- 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 151 


The road from Moruya to Araluen winds round the steep left bank of the 
Deua River, whose meanders are entrenched to a depth of several hundreds of feet. 
Normally the river does not occupy the whole width of its bed, but in flood-time it 
Tises rapidly and the tremendous volume of water which comes down this narrow 
valley does considerable damage to the numerous road embankments and cuttings. 
Good geological sections are exposed in these artificial cuttings as well as in those 
formed by river action. 

The sedimentary beds west of the belt of quartz-porphyry at Larry’s Crossing 
are thrown into a series of folds, in which the maximum dip of the beds is about 


LEGEND 


RECENT : \ 
Alluvium D0 lp ¥ SKETCH-MAP 
DEVONIAN (a ) 
Slates and Quartzites is”, 
| SILURIAN piniateatss eho | OF THE 
~} Limestone Siates and Quarfzitds MK 
ORDOVICIAN (?) NS 
Slates and Schists i MORUYA DISTRICT 
,'2'D 


oy 
Granite Cr Showing Bendithera Track and Oeua River Sactions 


Quartz Porphyry 
Oyke 

. Fault Warry's 
Fold U = Bl “ Mounae 


COUNTY 


¢ 
& 


a Donovan 
(29697 


DAMPIER 


= 
i 


E J 
aR 
NNa. wt _ Jeon Horizoa 
Bend thera, XN) ‘ a co ‘i a Ness 


Cavegzoon 


Magnetic 
North 


y Beaailn A Poe Re 


> 
= 


Ny 


Scale of Miles 
Coop. SSmen ve 


: Org” Fach 


1A. B. delt 


Text-fig. 2. 


45°. An anticline is visible from the Halfway House, 19 miles from Moruya, in 
the southern bank of the river, and the dips indicate other anticlines between 15 
and 16 miles from Moruya, and again near the 24-mile peg, with intermediate 
synclines. The axes of folding are nearly meridional. 


Two conspicuous fault-zones occur, one between 18 and 19 miles from Moruya, 
and another between 22 and 23 miles along the road. In both cases hardened 
sandstones and quartzites are repeatedly faulted against purple slates, which show 
considerable crushing and contortion as a result. The faults have usually a steep 
dip to the east, and in some cases, narrow veins of quartz-porphyry occur along 


152 GEOLOGY OF THE SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, ii, 


the fault-planes; the intrusive rock is lithologically similar to the belt below 
Larry’s Crossing, and somewhat resembles the porphyry intrusive into Upper 
Devonian sediments near Eden. 

The general sequence along the Araluen road is similar to that along the 
Bendithera Track (see Text-fig. 2), the series consisting essentially of interbedded 
slates and quartzites. Reddish colours prevail as a rule, with some white and 
bluish-grey quartzites and greenish-grey slates. Between 20 and 23 miles from 
Moruya there is a prominent outcrop of red and purple slates, very similar to those 
occurring on the south side of Burra Creek. In these slates there are obscure 
traces of organic remains, but all detailed structure has been obliterated by the 
severe crushing to which the rocks have been subjected by the faulting previously 
mentioned. 

West of the purple slates, quartzites predominate, and at Merricumbene the 
river valley opens out into broad flats, on account of the outcrop of more homo- 
geneous granite. Beyond Merricumbene, slates outcrop for a few miles along the 
road, and then give place to the granites of Araluen. 

The shallow-water erigin of the sediments is indicated by the occurrence 
of well-preserved ripple-marks in the sandstones, immediately west of the porphyry 
belt, about eleven miles from Moruya, but no determinable fossils have been found 
along this section. On account of their lithological similarity to the series along 
the Bendithera Track they may be provisionally classified as of Upper Devonian 
age. . 


(iii). Section from Bateman’s Bay to the Clyde Mountain. 


Recently the writer examined the section along the Bateman—Braidwood 
Road, approximately fourteen miles north of the Moruya-—Araluen Road section. 
From the coast to three miles west of Nelligen highly-cleaved greenish-grey slates 
and phyllitic rocks outcrop, which have a meridional trend and apparently almost 
vertical dip, similar to the altered sediments along the coast to the south. 

On the Braidwood Road between Nelligen Creek and Currowan Creek these 
give place to an outcrop of grey granite, lithologically similar to that at Coondella 
Creek, and probably of late Devonian age. 

The granite is bounded on the west by a sedimentary series of an entirely 
different character from -the slates on the east. A gently folded series of sand- . 
stones, quartzites and slates extends from below the junction of Currewan and 
Sugarloaf Creeks to the west of the Clyde Mountain. »In Currowan Creek the beds 
dip N. 60° W. at 23° (Plate i, fig. 3). The general direction of strike remains 
fairly constant to the top of the mountain, although on account of folding the dip 
may be either to the south-east or to the north-west. 

Certain bands in these beds contain abundant casts of Rhynchonella pleurodon, 
described and figured by Mr. Dun (page 159; Plate ii, figs. 6-7). H. I. Jensen 
(1908b, p. 304) implies that Spirifer disjuncta also occurs here, but no specimens 
are yet available for determination. The best preserved specimens of Rhynchonella 
occur near the top of the mountain, 15 miles from Braidwood, in hard, greenish- 
grey quartzites. In a cutting near the side of the road 21 miles from Bateman, 
a band only one inch in thickness, thickly crowded with a small, poorly-preserved 
variety of Rhynchonella, dips S. 30° E. at 25°. 

An examination of the river gravels at Currowan Creek indicates that volcanic 
and hypabyssal igneous rocks are also present in the series, but these have not 
yet been identified in situ, as at Yalwal by HE. C. Andrews (1901). 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 153 


(iv). Other fossiliferous Areas on the South Coast. 


(a). Quaama-Cobargo District—About three miles east of Quaama, in the 
neighbourhood of Pipeclay Creek, a tributary of the Murrah River, near the old 
road from Quaama to Bermagui, a gently-folded series of interbedded slates and 
quartzites was determined by the writer to strike N. 30° W. and S. 30° E. with 
average dips of about 25°. In these beds Dr. A. A. Pain first discovered, in hard 
purple quartzites, Devonian fossils which were identified by Mr. W. S. Dun as 
Spirifer disjuncta, Rhynchonella pleurodon, Pterinea, and Pteronites. 

To the east of the Devonian beds near Quaama, the older series of slates, 
cherts and more schistose rocks outcrop along the coast south of Bermagui, but 
the relations between the two series are not yet known. 

The Pipeclay Creek beds are bounded on the south-west by a granitic mass, 
extending from the north of Cobargo, through Quaama, to the Brogo District. The 
relationship of the granite to the sediments is apparently an intrusive one, although 
probably faulting also occurs. 

North of Cobargo the extension of the same granitic mass is in contact on its 
western margin with quartzites and black slates which, three-quarters of a mile 
north-west of Narira Trigonometrical Station, carry graptolites identified by 
C. F. Laseron as Diplograptus foliaceus (Murchison), Climacograptus sp., and 
Dicellograptus sp., thus fixing the age of the rocks as Ordovician (Browne, W. R., 
1914, p. 194). 

The lithological characters of these rocks strongly resemble those of the 
Ordovician slates and quartzites at Ballanya Trigonometrical Station near Tallong, 
described by W. G. Woolnough (1909). 


(0). Hden-Wolumla District.—In the Eden district fossils are known to occur 
in only two localities, both close to the main road between Eden and Wolumla: 
(i), at Bellbird Creek, three miles north of Eden, and (ii), at Merrimbula Creek, 
one to three miles south-east of Wolumla, on the road to Pambula (See map, 
Text-fig. 1), where they have been collected by members of the Geological Survey 
of New South Wales and others. 

Specimens obtained by J. E. Carne (1897, p. 163) from Bellbird Creek, were 
identified by Mr. W. S. Dun as Rhynchonella pleurodon (Phillips), Rhynchonella 
(?) cuboides, Atrypa sp. (?) reticularis (Linn.) and small branching polyzoa. 

In addition, W. N. Benson (1922, p. 177) records Rhynchonella primipilaris 
(University Collection, Wolumla) and the Sydney University collection includes 
also some Lepidodendroid remains, considered by Dr. A. B. Walkom (19286) to 
resemble the Protolepidodendron he has described (1928a) from Yalwal. These 
specimens were collected by Dr. W. G. Woolnough, the results of whose work in 
the Eden district are not yet published. 


Recently, the writer has collected at Bellbird Creek, in addition to 
Rhynchonella, some pelecypod casts, described below by Mr. Dun (p. 159, PI. 
ii, fig. 8) as probably Phthonia, and a fragment of (?) Aviculopecten. Fossils are 
not abundant in this locality, but occur in narrow bands in very hard greenish- 
grey quartzites, similar to some of the fossiliferous Upper Devonian quartzites at 
the Clyde Mountain, near Braidwood. The palaeontological evidence thus estab- 
lishes the age of these beds as Upper Devonian. 


In the lower portion of Bellbird Creek the red and purple quartzites are 
almost level-bedded; current-bedding is not noticeable, but ripple marks are well- 


154 GEOLOGY OF THE SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, ii, 


developed in layers only a few inches or less vertically above one another; the 
direction of the crests of the ripple-marks varies, but is most generally about east 
and west. Abundant remains of annelid tracks provide further evidence of the 
littoral origin of the beds. 


GENERAL STRATIGRAPHY AND TECTONIC FEATURES. 


The series of slates, quartzites, grits, quartz-schists, phyllites, cherts, and 
related rock-types outcropping on the far South Coast of New South Wales, and 
provisionally classified as Silurian, contain members of at least two formations, 
the newer being Upper Devonian (Lambian) in age, and the older Ordovician; 
rocks of proved Silurian age occur only west of the main series, in the Bendithera- 
Wyanbene belt. 


Upper Devonian Beds. 


The Upper Devonian beds described in this paper form a link between 
the- previously known Upper Devonian beds of the Eden district described by 
W. B. Clarke (1860) and J. E. Carne (1896-7), and those revealed by the erosion of 
tributaries of the Shoalhaven River in the Ettrema and Yalwal gorges, described 
by H. I. Jensen (1908), C. F. Laseron (1908, 1910), and E. C. Andrews (1901). 


Whereas at Eden these beds are practically horizontal or only gently folded, 
being probably extensions of the estuarine beds of Genoa Creek (Carne, 1897, 
p. 151; Dun, 1897) and the Upper Devonian of Gippsland (Howitt, 1874-7; Skeats, 
1929) the intensity of the folding, in general, has increased in a ‘northerly 
direction. Thus at Eden the dips do not exceed 20°, near Quaama the average 
dip of the beds unaffected by faulting or igneous intrusion is about 25°, along the 
Deua River the maximum dip is 45°, while at Yalwal some of the Devonian beds 
have almost vertical dip. This increase in the intensity of folding towards the 
north may be an early indication of the crustal down-warping which produced the 
great geosyncline of eastern New South Wales, in which Permo-Carboniferous and 
Mesozoic sediments were afterwards deposited. 


The general direction of the fold-axes shows a progressive change (see Text- 
fig. 1) from N. 30° W. at Quaama, to north-north-west about Coondella, more 
nearly meridional along the course of the middle Deua River, N. 30° E. at Currowan 
Creek, generally north-north-east at the Yalwal goldfield, to north-east at the 
junction of Yalwal and Ettrema Creeks, near the lower Shoalhaven River. 


Although there are minor local variations in dip, due to faulting and intrusion 
of igneous rocks, and the outcrops of Upper Devonian rocks are isolated on account 
of faulting and erosion, the general arcuate arrangement of the directions of strike 
of the Upper Devonian beds suggests that they have been compressed against a 
massif of older rocks lying to the east. 


Middle Devonian Beds. 


It has been shown by A. W. Howitt (1874-7) and others (Skeats, 1929) that 
there is a marked unconformity between Middle and Upper Devonian sediments 
in north-east Gippsland, Victoria, but hitherto no evidence of Middle Devonian 
deposition has been recorded from the adjacent area of south-eastern New South 
Wales. It therefore seems probable that the Upper Devonian sea extended much 
farther to the north-east into New South Wales than formerly, causing a consider- 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 155 


able overlap on to much older sediments. At many places near the township 
of Eden the Upper Devonian beds may be seen resting on the upturned and 
denuded edges of old slates and schistose rocks. 

Near Pambula and Merrimbula (north of Eden, see map) the writer has 
noticed a series of relatively gently-folded red beds underlying the Upper Devonian 
sandstones with a definite unconformity; no detailed examination of these beds 
has yet been made, but there seems a possibility that they may be Middle 
Devonian sediments, as they appear much less folded and altered than the series 
of slates and schistose rocks outcropping along the coast to the north, and under- 
lying the Upper Devonian sandstones around Twofold Bay. 


Older Palaeozoic Beds. 


The older complex series, occupying the greater part of the coastal area 
between the head of the Clyde River and the Brogo River, contains a great variety 
of types, including sedimentary, igneous and metamorphic rocks. 

There is no consensus of opinion regarding the age of the series; the only 
fossils yet recorded from the whole of the series are the graptolites in slates north 
of Cobargo, indicating an Ordovician age for these beds. The occurrence of 
turquoise at Whittaker’s Creek, near Bodalla, recorded by Curran (1896, p. 252), 
and the general lithological and structural resemblances to portions of the Brisbane 
“Schist” series, have led to the provisional classification of the beds as Ordovician 
by Sir Edgeworth David. 

it is hoped to give a more detailed account of the petrography and possible 
stratigraphical subdivisions of this series on a future occasion. 

The series is characterized by rather intense folding, some faulting and well- 
marked cleavage, all of which are in a meridional direction, as a general rule; 
some local variations in the trend lines may be due to pitching folds, while 
intrusive igneous masses, particularly that at Mt. Dromedary, are responsible 
for marked local variations in the trend of the beds. 


PALAEONTOLOGICAL Notes, by W. S. DUN. 
Spirifer disjuncta. 

The Spirifers from Coondella occur as internal casts and impressions and 
are in agreement jwith Gosselet’s figure (Mém. Soc. Géol. du Nord, iv, 1894, 
Pl. 1, fig. 1), being of his elongati group; some approach his high area forms, such 
as those shown on his Plate 4, figures 21, 22, and 23. They are also closely 
comparable to Davidson’s figures on his Plate v (Devonian Brachiopoda. Brit. 
Foss. Brach., iii, 1864). The species has also been described by R. Etheridge, Jr., 
from Mt. Lambie (Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xiv, 1880, 255). Hall and Clarke refer 
to Upper Devonian Spirifers “with well developed fold and sinus, elongate hinge 
and elevated cardinal areas” as of the “disjunctus type” (Pal. N. York, viii, part 2, 
1894; for figures see Vol. iv, Pl. 41, figs. 10-16). 


Spirifer disjuncta occurs at numerous localities in New South Wales. The 
Mining Museum has specimens from Mt. Lambie, where it is most abundant; 
Sunny Corner; 6 miles north of Mudgee; Wilbertree; Palmer’s Oaky; Limekilns, 
Bathurst; Winburndale; Ph. Bell, Co. Ashburnham, Molong; The Peaks, Tonalli 
Creek, Burragorang; Back Creek, Ph. Bendoura; Marulan; Clear Creek; Grassy 
Gully, Windellama; Kowmung; Por. 60, Ph. Goollooinboin; Hartley; and Crown 


156 GEOLOGY OF THE SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, ii, 


Station, Capertee. In the Australian Museum are specimens from Gap Creek, Ph. 
Barton, near Molong; Marangaroo, and head of Bull’s Creek, 3 miles NNE. of 
Jenolan Caves. 

See also W. N. Benson (Rec. Geol. Survey N.S.W., x, part 2, 1922, 181), 
Etheridge, R., Jr. (Cat. Austr. Fossils, 1878, 55-6), De Koninck (Foss. Pal. N. 
Galles Sud, 1876, 100; English Translation: Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Pal. No. 6, 
1898, 79-81). 


Rhynchonella pleurodon. 


The specimen of Rhynchonella (Pugnax) pleurodon figured is from the fine- 
grained, olive-coloured sandstone of the Clyde Mountain. This specimen of the 
protean species is closely comparable to the inflated quadrate-ovate type figured by 
Davidson (Brit. Foss. Brach., ii, 1858 (1859), Plate 28, figs. 12 @ and b). The 
ridges are subacute and accentuated towards the margins of the valves, undeveloped 
on the median and upper portions; there are from four to six ridges on the sinus, 
which has a well-marked marginal inflection. 

See also De Koninck (op. cit., 1898, pp. 75-76, 170, Pl. ii, f. 4; Pl. 40, f. 1); 
W.N. Benson (op. cit., p. 176); R. Etheridge, Jr. (op. cit.). 


Rhynchonella pleurodon occurs abundantly in the Upper Devonian of the 
Mount Lambie District, and at many localities in the Central Western Area of 
New South Wales; in the Southern District the form is found near Eden, Quaama, 
the Clyde Mountain, the Lower Shoalhaven at Grassy Gully, and the Ettrema 
Gorge. 


Phthonia sp. 


Specimens of a pelecypod, probably Phthonia (Solemya) of Hall, a genus which 
occurs in the Hamilton and Chemung of New York State, are from Bellbird Creek, 
three miles north of Eden. They represent a form very similar to Hall’s 
IB. cylindrica (Pal. N. York, v, Pt. i, Vol. ii, p. 473, Pl. 78, figs. 1-4). 

The preservation is not very satisfactory; concentric growth-lines are shown, 
but no traces of radial striae, which are clearly to be seen in other species of the 
genus. 

Phthonia has not been recognized previously in Australia. 


SUMMARY. 


The paper gives an account of the occurrence of Upper Devonian littoral 
deposits west of Moruya; between Braidwood and the Coast; near Quaama; and 
in the Eden District. Typical Upper Devonian fossils occur in each of these 
localities. 

There is a progressive increase in the intensity of the folding of these beds 
from north-east Gippsland, Victoria, through the Eden District northwards to 
Yalwal, near the Lower Shoalhaven River, while the arcuate arrangement of the 
trend-lines suggests compression against a massif of older rocks lying to the 
east. 

Within the area considered, rocks of proved Silurian age are only known to 
occur in the Bendithera—Wyanbene belt, west of the Deua River. 

Ordovician graptolite-bearing slates outcrop near Cobargo; the age of the 
slates, cherts and schistose rocks outcropping over the greater portion of the 
South Coast area is not definitely known. 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 157 


The paper includes a review of the previous literature on the stratigraphy of 
the older Palaeozoic rocks of the south-eastern portion of this State, and the 
adjacent area of Victoria. : 

Mr. W. S. Dun contributes -palaeontological notes on Spirifer disjuncta, 
Rhynchonella pleurodon and Phthonia. 


References. 


ANDERSON. W., 1892.—Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., ii, Pt. 4, p. 142. 
, 1891.—Ann. Rept. Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1891, 252-38. 

ANDREWS. E. C., 1901.—Mineral Resources of N.S.W., No. 9, 1901 (Yalwal Goldfield, 
oh JUS). 

Benson, W. N., 1922.—Materials for the Study of Devonian Palaeontology of Australia. 
Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., x, Pt. 2, 83-204. 

Berry, A., 1822.—Geology of Part of the Coast of New South Wales, p. 246. Geographic 
Memoirs on N.S.W., published by Barron Field, 1825. 

Brown, 1. A., 1928.—Geology of the South Coast of New South Wales, Pt. i. The 
Geology of the Moruya District. These PROCEEDINGS, liii, 1928, 151-192. 

BROWNE, W. R., 1914.—The Geology of the Cooma District, N.S.W., Journ. Roy. Soc. 
N.S.W., xlviii, 1914, 194. 

CARNE, J. E., 1896.—Preliminary Notes on the Yowaka or Pambula Goldfield, Aun. Rept. 
Dept. Mines, N.S.W., 1896, pp. 107-122, App. 8-9. 

—___—-—, 1897.—Report on the Geology and Mineral Resources of the south-east Border 
of New South Wales between Cape Howe and the head of the Murray River, Ann. 
Rept. Dept. of Mines N.S.W., 1897, 151-162 (Wolumla, pp. 162-7). 

CarRNE, J. E., and Jonges, L. J., 1919.—Min. Resowrces N.S.W., No. 25 (The Limestone 
Deposits of New South Wales, pp. 217-8). 

CLARKE, W. B., 1860.—Researches in the Southern Gold Fields of New South Wales, 1860. 

, 1878.—Sedimentary Formations of New South Wales, 4th Ed., 1878. 

CURRAN, J. M., 1896.—Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xxx, 1896, 252. 

Dun, W. S., 1897a.—On the Occurrence of Devonian Plant-bearing Beds on the Genoa 
River, County of Auckland. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., v, Pt. 3, 1897, 117-121. 

—, 1897b.—On the Occurrence of Lower Silurian Graptolites in New South Wales. 
Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., v, Pt. 3, 1897, 124-127. 

———_—,, 1898.—-Stratigraphical and Palaeontological Notes. 1. Devonian Fossiliferous 
Beds at Eden. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., v, Pt. 4, 1898, 179-80. 

, 1911.—Ann. Rept. Dept. Mines, N.S.W., 1911, 1938. 

Dunn, E. J., 1890.—Notes on the Geological Formation of the Country east and west of 
the Mitchell River, Gippsland. Rept. and Statistics of the Mines Department, Vic., 
Quart. ending 31/3/1890, pp. 22-26. 1 

HAMMOND, P. T., 1892.—In paper by David, T. W. E., and Pittman, E. F. Rec. Geol. 
Surv. N.S.W., iii, Pt. 4, 1893, 199. 

HERMAN, H., 1898.—Notes on Auriferous Devonian Formations of Gippsland. Aust. 
Inst. Mining Engineering, v, 1898, 157. 

Howitt, A. W., 1874.—Notes on the Geology of Part of the Mitchell River Division of 
the Gippsland Mining District. Prog. Rept. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1877, No. ii, pp. 59-73; 
No. iv, pp. 118-126. : 

————, 1876.—Notes on the Devonian Rocks of North Gippsland. Prog. Rept. Geol. 
Surv. Vict., 1877, No. iii, pp. 181-249; No. v, pp. 117-144. 

, 1877.—Notes on the Geological Structure of North Gippsland. Prog. Rept. Geol. 
Surv. Vict., No. iv, pp. 75-117. 

JENSEN, H. I., 1908a.—Note on Cupriferous Porphyrite and Quartz Veins of the Nelligen 
District. Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xlii, p. 56. 

, 1908b.—Some Geological Notes on the Country behind Jervis Bay. Journ. Roy. 
Soc. N.S.W., xlil, pp. 229-304. 

LASERON, C. F., 1908.—The Sedimentary Rocks of the Lower Shoalhaven River. Jouwrn. 
Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xiii, p. 320. 

, 1910.—Palaeontology of the Lower Shoalhaven River. Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 
xliv, pp. 222-225. 

LeicH, W. S., 1890.—Ann. Rept. Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1890, 310-311. 

———, 1897.—Awnn. Rept. Dept. Mines, N.S.W., 1897. 


158 GEOLOGY OF THE SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, ii. 


Murray, R. A. F., 1898.—Prog. Rept. Geol. Surv. Vict., No. v, p. 44. 

SxeEats, EH. W., 1929.—The Devonian and Older Palaeozoic Rocks of the Tabberabbera 
District, North Gippsland, Victoria. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 41 (n.s.), Pt. ii, 1929, 
97-120. 

Watkom, A. B., 1928a—DLepidodendroid Remains from Yalwal, N.S.W. These 
PROCEEDINGS, liii, 1928, 310. 

, 1928b.—PrRoc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., lili, Pt. 6, 1928 (1929), p. xl. 

WHITELAW, O. A. L., 1899.—Notes on the Devonian Rocks of Gippsland. Monthly Prog. 
Rept. Geol. Surv. Vict., No. 2, pp. 16-22. 

WILKINSON, C. S., 1893.—In paper by David, T. W. E., and Pittman, E. F. Rec. Geol. 
Surv. N.S.W., iii, 1893, 195. 

WooLNouGH, W. G., 1909.—The General Geology of Marulan and Tallong, N.S.W. These 
PROCEEDINGS, xxxXiv, 1909, 782-808. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATEHS JI-II. 
Plate i. 

1.—Outcrop of limestone faulted against slates and quartzites, on the north side of 
Con Creek, Bendithera. 

2.—Outcrop of quartzite containing Spirifer disjuncta, three-quarters of a mile south of 
Coondella Trigonometrical Station; Track from Moruya to Bendithera. 

3.—Tilted Devonian quartzites; Junction of Currowan and Sugarloaf Creeks, between 
Nelligen and the Clyde Mountain. 


Plate ii. 

1.—Spirifer disjuncta. Internal cast of pedicle valve, showing portion of area, and 
infilling of delthyrium. x 14. 

2.—Spirifer disjuncta. Internal ‘cast of more alate form, showing area. x 13. 

3.—Spirifer disjuncta. Internal cast of wide form, showing fine striate ornamentation. 
x 18. 

4._Spirifer disjuncta. Internal cast of pedicle valve, showing high area. x 2. 

5.—Spirifer disjuncta. Internal cast of brachial valve, showing septal ridge. x 13. 

6.—Rhynchonella (Pugnax) pleurodon J. Sby. Internal cast of brachial valve, showing 
coarse plications and median septal ridge. x 13. 

7.—Rhynchonella (Pugnax) pleurodon J. Sby. Internal cast showing inflation of brachial 
valve. x 13.’ 

8.—Phthonia (Solemya). Mould of left valve. x 13. 


Figured specimens 1-5 from half a mile south of Coondella Trigonometrical Station, 
10% miles west-south-west of Moruya. Figured specimens 6-7 from the Clyde Mountain. 
Figured specimen 8 from Bellbird Creek, three miles north of Eden. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE TI. 


sesaye) see Dike, 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PEATE Ir 


Photo., H. G. Gooch. 
: Upper Devonian Fossils from the South Coast, N.S.W. 


AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES. II. 
BIOMETRICAL STUDIES OF THE MORPHOLOGY OF SPORE FORMS. 


By W. L. WATERHOUSE, D.Sc.Agr. 
The University of Sydney. 


(Plate iii.) 


[Read 30th April, 1930.] 


Introduction. 

In the first paper of these studies (Waterhouse, 1929), the cereal rusts which 
occur in Australia were dealt with, and results of investigations into their 
specialization and occurrence recorded. These investigations followed the recog- 
nized methods of culturing the rusts on certain selected cereal varieties, and 
determining the physiologic forms from the rust reactions thus obtained. It has 
long been known that specialization of the rust fungi may be shown by this 
method. 

More recently, morphological differences between physiologic forms have also 
been shown to exist in some cases. Levine (1923, 1928) made careful and extensive 
studies of the comparative morphology of various cereal stem rusts. By altering 
the cultural conditions, pronounced morphological differences were obtained in the 
uredospores of an individual form. But the differences in the size and shape of 
the uredospores of different forms, grown under identical conditions, were in many 
instances considerably greater. than those induced by alteration of the cultural 
conditions. Definite parallelism between the differences in parasitism and in 
morphology was not found. It was concluded that, although there is a real 
morphologic distinction between physiologic forms of P. graminis tritici when 
developed under uniform conditions, the forms are best identified by their parasitic 
behaviour on standard differential hosts. 

Homma (1929) has shown that there are significant morphological differences 
between physiologic forms of Erysiphe graminis D.C. 

It would seem, then, that a biometrical study of the spores may serve as a 
useful tool in the rust identification work. In Australia, determinations of 
physiologic specialization have been made only in recent years. In the past, 
when severe epidemics occurred, no determinations were made of the forms 
concerned. But if biometrical studies can establish the identity of the forms, 
then from a study of herbarium material, it may be possible to determine the 
form or forms which caused the damage, and perhaps trace the changes in 
specialization which have occurred. These studies were, therefore, made as a 
first step to a more detailed and accurate series of measurements. 


Methods and Material. 
Efforts were made to ensure that the spores measured were truly representa- 
tive, and that the collections were uniform. 


160 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, ii, 


In the case of the aecidiospores, the infected barberry shoots were lightly 
shaken over slides faintly smeared with albumen fixative. A 50% watery solution 
of lactic acid was used as a mounting medium. From the same shoots, further 
lots of spores were taken and used to inoculate susceptible cereal hosts. The 
specialization of the rust concerned was then determined by culturing on the 
standard differentials. 

Uredospores were taken from fully susceptible hosts. A set of differentials, 
together with a pot of “Federation” wheat or of “Algerian” oats, was inoculated 
in the early summer. The pots of Federation wheat and Algerian oats were kept 
in similar locations on a well-lighted bench of the plant house, and given the 
most favourable conditions possible for rust development. After taking notes on 
the sets of differentials and making certain that the form used for measurement 
was what it purported to be, uredospores were obtained from the Federation and 
Algerian plants by lightly shaking the infected leaves over smeared slides, and 
mounted in 50% lactic acid. 

The teleutospores were scraped from straw which had been collected whilst 
some uredospores were present. The latter were used to determine the specializa- 
tion of the rust concerned. The straw in each case was later exposed in wire 
frames throughout the winter to weather conditions at Hawkesbury Agricultural 
College. The spores were taken in the following summer for measurement. Lactic 
acid was again used as the mounting medium. ; 

No one of the cultures used was of monosporous origin. To date more than 
250 single uredospores of P. graminis tritici have been isolated and used to 
inoculate susceptible Federation wheat plants. in no case has an infection been 
obtained, and therefore no monosporous culture is at present available. Levine’s 
studies indicate that there is no significant difference between the results of 
measuring random samples of uredospores of monosporous as compared with 
composite cultures of the same physiologic form. 

The measurements were all made with the same Zeiss microscope, standardized 
and calibrated in the ordinary way. An eyepiece micrometer was used, of which 
each division under the existing conditions measured 1:86 ». The same light 
intensity derived from an artificial source was used throughout. The spores in 
each case were mounted in a 50% solution of lactic acid in water. Every effort 
was used to avoid bias in regard to the particular spores measured: each spore 
encountered as the slide was mechanically moved from one side of the stage to 
the other was taken. The greatest length and greatest width were taken in the 
case of aecidiospores and uredospores. The length of the teleutospores was 
measured from the exterior of the apex to the point of attachment of the pedicel, 
and the width taken across the septum separating the two cells. The shape was 
determined by calculating the ratio of length to width of each individual spore 
measured; the figures thus obtained were used in the calculations of the constants. 

It should be stressed that these conditions of working differ from those 
employed by Levine. Whilst strict comparisons of the American and these 
Australian results are, therefore, not justifiable, a general agreement may be 
looked for. 

AECIDIOSPORES. 


Puccinia graminis. 
As indicated already, the aecidial stage is uncommon in Australia. Only 
three collections of aecidiospores have been used for measurement. Two were forms 


161 


WATERHOUSE. 


L. 


BY W. 


819-OFSL-2T | €400-0F8ST-0 LOTO-0+ $46-T 0-2-0-T I I 9 4 GT 9T 9% 9% G ty “* T apuarn svn *J 
€9-OF 8T-&L 900:0FFST-0 | G800-0F LI-T 8-1-0-T I G 1 7 $1 §1 6s LG LG "TL pur OF 200jr47 seurun.tB * I 
S29-OF88-GL | €200:0F8¢6T-0 | 9010-04 Z81-T &-1-0-1 I 6 I I OL OL GG OF §T SF “* TT taung svurupb J 
GGO-T+FST-t. | 6600-0F 8F1-0 GC10-OF 9FL-T G-T-0:1 € & & OL LT FL So “* OF 19070) SLULULDLB * J 
AQITIQVIIE A “UOIPRIAIT “uUBOW 0-3] 6:1] 8:T |] 2-1] 9-0] G-T |] FL] €&-L | 6L I] tt | OT 
Jo quaTDyye0p paepueyg 
ES "SIU 9zIg ULIOW 
"sqUvySTOD “UIPIM 09 YYZUET Jo Oey 
‘ad VHS 
€9-OF6F-1T 160:0F16-T 6ZT-OF 86-91 9F-0Z2-9T IT G £3 TF GS t G “ie ** T anuaan sruuni6 ‘d 
T¥-OF OF-OL 690-:0F 82:1 860-0F ZI: 2L1 9F -03-Z0: ST Z €9 LP 86 S “" LL pure gp 2029247 sxueulnib "I 
COF-OF IL-6 G80-OF TL-T GIT-0OF2S-L1 9-06-20: §T g GS 83 OL G ee “* TT Wuprg svurmob ‘d 
t9:-OF 6F:6 FOT-OF FE-T Z9OL-OF 89-91 OF -O2-88-FL- 6 IL 6L 8I Ba * OF OL) SLD “I 
“AQYIGVIIG A “WOTPBIAICT, “UBOW 9F-0Z 09 -ST\FLZ-91T/88-FLIZO:- SLOT: LL 
JO QuaTOIya09 parepurys | 
‘STW azis "ULIOLL 
*squUeysuo; ‘SUOIOIU UT SassETD a10dg 
“ALCIA 
6o-0+68-0L LT-04626-3 GCT-OF 81-16 06-26-88: FL I F II 96 tf OL 9 T ‘ ; “* [ anuaan syurunib ‘id 
8F:0+FG6-1L 680-04 62:3 9ZL-OF ST-61 91-66-88: FT T I 6 0S SF OF OL G “LL pure OF 2029012 srurun16 id 
€¢-04 96:01 80T-0F9Z-S €ST-0F 89-06 91-66-88: FT T I 8 FG RE CG a7 Gg ; 4 : “TT 2007.7 srr ‘d 
TL-OF St-OL T&T OF G6-T 661:0+F80-61 SL-F3-88- FL I 9 OL FG 9 € : * OF 29070g seuLULDIB * 
) 
“APIGVIIC A “WONPVIAIT “UvdT 91-62,06-26|F0-92|81-F3/ZE-Za|9F-0G 09-SL\FL:9L/88-FLIZO-ST9L- IL 
Jo yualyyaog piepueys 
"SUIT 9zIg *ULIO WT 
‘squeqsu09 “SUOIOIU UI SsassR[D a10dg 
‘HLONAT 


‘su DYUWINT JO satodsorplooe Jo odeys puv ‘YQpPIM ‘YASUE, IO ByUBISUOD PUL sUOTZTIAITA 


‘T Hav 


162 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, ii, 
of P. graminis tritici, and the other a form of P. graminis avenae. 
of P. graminis tritici 46 were obtained in 1921, when only 50 spores were 
measured (Waterhouse, 1921). P. graminis tritici 11 was obtained in 1928 under 
artificial conditions, as reported elsewhere (Waterhouse, 1929). In this case 100 
spores were measured, under conditions as nearly as possible identical with those 
obtaining in 1921. 

The result of adding together the measurements of these two forms of 
P. graminis tritici is given immediately following the individual results of each 
form. The aecidiospores of P. graminis avenae 1 were obtained as a result of 
infecting a barberry with teleutospore material sent by Miss K. Sampson from 
Ireland. 

Table 1 shows the results of these measurements. 

Comparisons of the results obtained are summarized in Table 2. 


Aecidiospores 


TABLE 2. 


Summary of differences between the means of the dimensions of aecidiospores of Puccinia graminis, 


Length. Width. Shape. 
Types compared. Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference 
in means | dividedby| in means | dividedby} in means | divided by 
in microns. P.E. in microns. P.E. in microns. P.E. 
P. graminis tritici 11 and 
P. graminis tritict 46 1:60+0-25 6:4 0-89+0-20 4-4 0-041+0-019 222, 
The total of P. graminis tritici 
11 and 46 and P. graminis 
avenae 1 Hs ... | 2°083+0-20 10-1 0:54+0-162 3-3 |0:104+0-016 6:3 
The total of P. graminis tritici 
11 and 46 and P. graminis 
tritici recorded by Levine.. | 0:67+0-226 2-96 1-46+0-14 10:4 
P. graminis avenae 1 and 
P. graminis avenae recorded 
by Levine .. 3 .. | 2°56+40-25 10:5 1-:89+0:16 11-8 


It will be seen that there is a significant difference in the length and the 
width of the aecidiospores of the two forms of P. graminis tritici. Form 46 has 
spores which are shorter and narrower than those of Form 11. The difference in 
the shape of the two is therefore not significant, the difference divided by the 
probable error being only 2:2. For purposes of further comparison, the constants 
for all the 150 measured spores of these two forms were determined, and are 
used as representing those of P. graminis tritici. 

Levine reports that, of the different varieties of P. graminis, the aecidiospores 
of P. graminis tritici have the largest arithmetical mean for both length and 
width. In the cases under consideration, it will be seen that the aecidiospores of 
P. graminis avenae 1 are significantly longer than those of P. graminis tritici 
11 and 46, and probably they are significantly wider. The difference in the shape 
is significant. Assuming that the differences in the methods employed do not 
preclude a general comparison of the results, it will be further seen that there 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 163 


are differences between the measurements of spores of P. graminis tritici as given 
by Levine and those herein recorded. In length the difference is probably not 
significant, but the Australian aecidiospores are significantly wider. Again, in the 
case of the aecidiospores of P. graminis avenae, the measurements given by 
Levine show that the spores obtained in Australia are significantly longer and 
wider than the American spores. 


UREDOSPORES. 

The variety of P. graminis which occurs on rye, and known as P. graminis 
secalis E. and H., has so far not been determined in Australia. In all cases 
examined, the stem rust on rye has proved to be one or other of the well-known 
forms of P. graminis tritici E. and H. On barley the stem rust is also P. graminis 
tritici. Oats commonly are attacked by P. graminis avenae E. and H. On cereals 
in Australia, then, the only stem rusts known are P. graminis tritici and P. 
graminis avenae. Other varieties of P. graminis occur on certain grasses, but 
these are not included in these measurements. 

McAlpine (1906) records the rust on these plants, and gives the measure- 
ments of uredospores of Puccinia graminis Pers. as a composite species. He 
records a length of 20-36 » and a width of 14-18 uw. It will be noted that these 
figures are unlike those found for the variety P. graminis tritici as a whole, but 
are in fair agreement with those given by P. graminis avenae as a whole. 

Of P. graminis tritici and P. graminis avenae, Levine reports that the 
former has the larger uredospores in regard to both length and width. Taking 
the totals of the spores measured, it will be seen that the same thing applies to 
the Australian rusts. 

A comparison of these two varieties of Puccinia graminis with those recorded 
in the United States is of interest. 


(a). P. graminis tritici. 
In all, thirteen physiologic forms were available for measurement. The 
results are set out in Tables 3-5, in which, after the measurements of the 
individual forms, are given the dimensions for the total of the eight forms which 
have occurred naturally in Australia, and then the sum total of all thirteen 
forms used. 

A comparison of types is shown in Table 6. 

It will be seen that the results of measurements of all thirteen forms, when 
compared with those given by Levine, show that the local types are shorter and 
narrower than those recorded in America. In length the difference is significant, 
though not so positive as in the width. The same thing applies in the comparison 
of the American results with those obtained from the eight naturally-occurring 
Australian forms. 

Of the individual forms, the only one common to the two sets of measure- 
ments is Form 27. Levine compared two isolations of this form, one from India 
with another from California. He found an appreciable difference in the width 
of the spores from the two sources, but considers that there is no conclusive 
evidence of them having different morphological identities. He remarks that this 
Form 27 was the most variable, as regards shape, of all his stock cultures. The 
measurements herein reported, when compared with Levine’s, show very signifi- 
cant differences as regards length, width, and shape. Apart altogether from the 


, 


i 


AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, 


164 


9T-0F06-IT | G0:0F0L-€ | 20-04 F0-TE 
02:0FGL-TL | 90:0F89-& | 60-0 93-18 
Ge-0F 98-2 60:0F80:% | FL-OF 28-86 
Ig-OF G-OL | ZT-OF 8F-S | €6-0F 90-68 
FF-0F96°6 LT-OF TE: | L6-0F 69-88 
6S-OFOL:0L | 9T-OF6E-E | FC-0F F9-18 
G-OF F-1T | SL-OF 62: | 93-07 89-68 
9¢:0F99-OL | 9T-OF8I-S | 1Z-0F SS-&& 
B9-OFGL-GL | 61-0F60-F | 246-0F60-68 
9:OF81-GL | 8L-OFESL-8 | 92-01 29-08 
IG-OF 4-00 | FL-0F60-8 | 16:0F96-86 
66-0F 12-8 GL:OF 8-6 | LT-0FZ9-08 
8F-0F60-0L | SL-0F80- | 1Z-0F 62-62 
99-0F8S-1L | ZT-OF9E-E | #2:0F 62-08 
8o-OFOL-GL | 41-0F 8S: | F2-0F 68-62 
“AQTIQVIIC A 
jo “MOTYRIAa(T ‘uve 

quUsTOYjo09 piepuryg 

“syuRqsuo0g 


£9 -FF-9F-06 
84+ 3F-O9F 08 
SF EE-8L- FZ 
F9-FF-BL FG 
36 OF-ZE 3S 
36: OF-ZE- BS 
8L+Bh-ZE+ BS 
G6 -OF-8L- FB 
G6: OF-ZE- BS 
90-68-ZE ZS 
FE-GE-9F 06 
0Z- LE-BE- BS 
03: L8-ZE 3S 
90-68-9F - 02 
03 -L8-9F - 0% 


“SsqtUY] 
aZIS 


¥9- FP 


B8L-6F 


awa 


Ss we AQ fF SF ww 


a 


66: 0F|90-68 


OL 
OF 


CSO rst) ret 


02-LE|PE-SE\8F- Es 


OZT 


oO 8 3 me oO 


it 


6G 


29-1 


94-66 


SST 


§L 


06-26 


6L 


GL 


F0:96 


6S 


SoA Pm monNtnrwaAt NO N 


81-76 


16 


oN Oo wet A ON 


GE + GS 


[ejoy, ung 
“qsny [840], 
WIOg MON 
ae 9L 
2 L1G 
ie gg 
zs Vor 


9F-06 


*‘SUOIOIUI UI sossv[o o10dg 


‘ON ULIOT 


“‘Vyudy SYULLULG DYULLDING, JO SWIIOF OIBO[OISAYd Jo setodsopam Jo YASUE, IOJ sjUvJsUOD PUB SUOIPVIIE A 


Ҥ GIAVE 


165 


WATERHOUSE. 


L. 


BYWis 


FL-OF €-O1 60-0F88-T $0-0F 96-81 
88T-0F 20-11 60-0 T0-% G0-OF FI-8T 
8-07 26-9 40-0F 48-1 60:0F 64-61 
TF-O0F 06-8 40-0F 8P-T OT-OF GF- LT 
€&F-0F 60-6 60-0F89-T TT-0F 69-21 
CF-OF F-6 80-07 29-T IT-O0F 82-21 
9¢-0F6¢-11 60-0F¢8-T §1T-0F 86-¢T 
GE-OF 28-2 90-0F 82-1 60-0F 08-21 
tF-OF0€-6 80-0F8¢-T IT-0F S6-9T 
Gé-OF 8-2 90-0F F8-T 60:0F 8&-8T 
3E:-0F 29-9 90-0F €2-T 80-0F &F-8T 
tF- OF FE-6 80-:0F 24-T ZL-0F 26:81 
c¢-0F 0-11 60-0F £6-T ST-OF 96-21 
I€- OF 24-9 90-O0F TZ-T 80:0F F6-8T 
FE: OF 18-2 20:0F0F-T 60:0F FF-6T 
“AQITIQviae A 
jo “UOIZCIAO(T “Uva 
quolyya0n prepueys 
“sqmeqsuo; 


SE - 36-91 - TT 
6&-G6-91- IT 
GE GS-88 FL 
9F 06-20: €T 
68 -G6-Z0- ET 
GE-GG-88 FL 
09-8T-9T- TT 
09 -81T-Z0-&T 
9F 06-88 - FT 
G6 -G6-FL- OT 
9F 06-88 - FT 
GE -2S-88- FL 
GE -2S-88- FT 
GE -GS-FL-9OT 
G&-Ge-FL OT 


‘SYMUYT 9zIg 


8g 
FP 


ot 
9T 


ex} 


OT 


CE:6S 


9F-02 


619 
89 


FL-9T 


O&T 


88-FI 


“SUOJOIUL UI sosse[o or0dg 


&T 6 
It a 
T 
T 
Or a 
IT 
G0-&T | 9T-TT 


VU) SLLUDAB DLULDIN JO SULIOJ o1ZOTOISAYd Jo sorodsopain Jo YYpPIA JOJ szuVysuOO puUe sTORIEA 


‘p ATAVE 


Teo wing 
“gsny [e301 
WIOF MIN 
oa 9T 
sf 16 
ss gg 
es Vor 
ee GF 
is 9F 
ee €& 
23 IT 
ane FE 
a $g 
ee tv 
oe &P 


‘ON UIIO,T 


’ 


i 


AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, 


-166 


CZ:OFGS:8L |€F00:0F FZE-0 | 1900-0F 22-1 0-8-6: 1 
&&-0F06-8L |2900-0F6E€:0 | 1800:0F62-T 0:8-Z6:T 
Lv-OF f6°6 400:0*F ST-0 010-0 F TS-T 8-1-36-T 
94:0F8¢:-ST | S10-0F 18-0 120-04 66:T 86-41 
§2-0F68:F1 €10-:0+ 82:0 610-0F88-1 9-6-6: 1 
bL:OF 3ST §10-0F 82-0 610:0F F8-T 8-3-6: 1 
48-0460-8T | 810:04 8&-0 920-OF IL-3 0-8-¥F-1 
GL-0FG6-ST | S10-0F 18-0 10:04 60:3 SiiGmaveal: 
11-04 99-ST S10:0F 18-0 120:-0F 86-1 8:°S-6: 1 
LL-OF 8-F1 | GLO-0F 42-0 410:0+69:-T F-G-3G:L 
19-07 €9-6L TLO-0F 32-0 G10:0F F2-T 6:°G-G- 1 
09-0FG§-ZL | OL0-0F 128-0 FL0-0F OL-T F:G-é'1 
69-OF 8L-FI T10:0F GZ-0 SLO-0+4 66-1 66-6: 1 
99-04 09-§T T1O0-0F €2-0 S10-0F69-T 6-6-6 1 
89-0F 0O:F1 TLO-O0F G6-0 ST0-0F 2¢-T 0-6-6: T 
“AQTEQVITe A 
jo “MONRIAN “UBOW 
queloyye0n paepurys “sqqur'y 
98ZIg 
“syueysuoy 


0°§ 


a! 
6L 


8:6 


&@ 


9°36 


LY 
Ge 


3G 


oOo nat NN 


GG 


T&S 
€oT 


FIs 


6G 
9T 
Té 
6G 
OF 
9T 
GG 
6G 


8-1 


6 
106 


9-T 


“YIPIM 07 ABU, Jo onery 


v1 


oOo AN 


6L 


ST 


6:1 


3: [ejog, ung 


"7 ashy 1801, 


7 ULIOWE MON 


a0 G0 91 


‘ON UNIO, 


wy sLUNMDIE DYUVON JO SUIIOT dIZOTOISAYd Jo. sorodsopoin jo odeys IOF squvjsuoo pue suOMeIVA 


G WIV 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. ‘167 


TABLE 6. 


Summary of differences between the dimensions of the means of uredospores of Puccinia graminis tritict. 


Length. Width. Shape. 
Types compared. Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference 
_in means |dividedby| in means | dividedby| in means | divided by 
in microns. E. in microns. pene in microns. P.E. 

P. graminis tritici at large as 

recorded by Levine and 

the total of the 13 forms 

measured in Australia .. | 1°:36+0-20 6:8 1:54+0:07 22-0 
P. graminis tritici at large as 

recorded by Levine and 
, the total of the 8 forms 

naturally occurring in 

Australia .. a .. {| 1°15+0-21 5:5 1-65+0-08-|- 20-6 
Total of all 13 forms measured 

in Australia and the total } 

of the 8 forms naturally ; 

occurring in Australia .. | 0:21+0-11 1-9 0-11+0-06 1:8 0-02+0-01 2-0 
P.graminis tritict 27 recorded 

by Levine and the same Z 

form isolated from English 

straw in Australia. . 2-59+0°39 6-7 1-84+0-14 iBioa 0-°324+0-:026 12-5. 
P. graminis tritici: 43 compared : 

with P. graminis tritici 46 ...| 2-70+0-36 so) 2-49+0-14 17-8 0-41+0-026 15:8 
P. graminis tritici 45 compared 

with P. graminis tritici 45a... | 0-87+40°33 2-6 1-32+0-15 8-8 0-08 +0-033 POY 


‘differences in methods of measuring, there may be a difference in the genetic 
constitutions of the rusts obtained from the different sources. Furthermore, the 
form measured locally was obtained from aecidial infections produced on barberries 
from Welsh wheaten straw. It is known that this aecidial stage may give rise 
to the occurrence of new physiologic forms under certain conditions. The genetic 
constitution of the form used may be different from the isolations dealt with in 
the United States. 


Taking the eight naturally-occurring Australian forms, some interesting facts 
come to light. It has elsewhere been pointed out that Forms 43, 44 and 54 show 
rather marked similarities in parasitic capabilities. Indeed, the separation of 
Forms 44 and 54 is not easy. An examination of the uredospore measurements 
of these three forms shows that there are striking similarities in length, width 
and shape. But morphology alone cannot be taken as a guide to specialization. 
The contrast in parasitism between these three forms and Form 34—which at 
present is the predominant form in Australasia—is most marked. And yet Form 34 
conforms closely to the. measurements given for the Forms 43, 44, and 54. The 
artificially-produced Form 11, which is parasitically rather similar to Form 34, 
and was derived as a hybrid between it and Form 43, differs but slightly from it 


168 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, ii, 


biometrically. And yet again, the rather weakly parasitic Form 33, obtained in 
the uredospore stage from Dr. Levine, agrees in measurements with these two 
virulent forms, 11 and 34. These six forms together constitute a group with 
biometric similarities. 


Turning next to the other four forms which occur naturally in Australia, viz., 
Forms 46, 45, 454, and 55, it will be seen that they show similarities in their 
measurements. As a group they are longer and narrower than the first group. 
This is strikingly reflected in the measurements of the shapes. As previously 
reported (Waterhouse, 1923) this difference may be noted in a casual examination 
of the uredospores. They are much more variable in shape, and much longer and 
narrower. The actual differences between Forms 43 and 46 are set out and are 
very significant. 


Conforming to this group of forms, in which the uredospores are relatively 
long and narrow, are the overseas Forms 16 and 27 derived from India and 
Wales respectively. The longest spore measured came from the lot of Form 16, 
being more than 44 uw in length. 


Of special interest is the remaining form, designated the “New Form” 
(Waterhouse, 1929). It may be remembered that this was obtained from aecidia 
on a barberry as a hybrid between Forms 34 and 43. The uredospores are the 
most uniform of those met. They are the shortest of any of the forms measured, 
having a mean length of only 28°37 + 0-14 uw. They are shorter than those of any 
form recorded by Levine. Amongst the Australian measurements, they 
approximate most closely to those of Form 11, which had its origin on the barberry 
at the same time and in much the same fashion as the New Form. Not only is 
this “New Form” shorter, but at the same time its mean width is the greatest 
of the forms measured. From this it follows that in shape it is also unique, 
the mean of the ratio of length to width being 1°51: 1. 


(bo). P. graminis avenae. 

Five forms of this rust have been determined from material collected in 
Australia. One further isolation has been made from aecidiospores produced on a 
barberry infected by teleutospores present on oaten straw collected in Ireland. 
Unfortunately, before the measurements were made, one of the five Australian 
forms was lost. The two stock cultures of it died during very hot summer 
conditions. The measurements of the others are given in Tables 7-9, together 
with the dimensions for the total of the Australian forms, and then for the sum 
total of all five forms measured. 

A number of comparisons may be usefully made as shown in Tables 10-11. 

If a comparison be allowable with the dimensions of P. graminis avenae at 
large as recorded by Levine, it will be seen that uredospores of the rust, as 
measured in Australia, are significantly shorter and narrower. The same applies 
to the total of the Australian measurements in comparison with the type from 
Ireland. Even though strict comparison between the Australian measurements 
and those given by Levine be not permissible, such comparisons can be made 
between the Australian measurements and those of the Irish rust; these were all 
made under identical conditions. That the uredospores of the Australian rust 
are smaller than those of the overseas type is further borne out by a comparison 
of the stock culture of P. graminis avenae 1, which originally came from 
Werribee, Victoria, and the Irish culture of P. graminis avenae 1. The differences 


169 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 


1g-OF 0%: FT c00-:0F 2-0 800-0F0L-T 9-3-3: T € 9 c% ¥S Let | gzt | +8 €T : "+ Teyoy, wing 
Gg -OF 19: FT 900-0 62-0 600-0769: T 9-0-3: 1 3 ¢ 81 If €Ol | stl | O02 €I : ‘+ -Qsny [e90U, 
Z9-O0F62-81 010-0 81z-0 GT0-0F 12-1 b-2-F-1 T ¢ ar 1 IF iat uD oe) 
£9-0F 26-21 010-0 32-0 F10-0F8¢-1 3-3-G:T I 9 9T cf ag 8 us Teme 3g 
2L-0F 8-FT €10-0+ 82-0 610-0+ 88:1 9-3-F-1 Z f ra 0% 0g rad 0 : =: gia. 4 
99-0FZL-8T Z10-0F 22-0 910-07 2-1 9-3-#:T I 1 2 If bg Of a : PS AEA {i 
CF-OF LE-6 200-0F TS1-0 O10-0F 19-1 0:3-Z:T € 0g OF aa ¢ : *s (Cqsny) T 
“AGTTEQVIe A “UOIRIAIT “UBON OS Feo Geo al OnGea|aes Te see hte cap lnOnn 
jo quaToyjoop paepurgys 
“SYTUIIT 9ZIG — ‘ON ULIOW 
“S}URSUO) "UIP 07 YASUE] Jo ORY 
“ODUALD svurupb DUVING JO so1odsopgm Jo odeys OF syuegsuood pure SUOTFRIIV A 
‘6 ATEVE, 
8T-0F 49-8 £0-0F69-T G0-0F€€-81 ZE-3S-ZO- ET T 06 ZLS TIT GZ T : “+ Teqoy, umg 
6T-0400-8 40-05 9F-T 60-04 92-81 BE -3S-ZO- ET it 19 IZ 86 13 I S "* qsny [eqOL, 
GE-0F 0F-L 10-0F 28-1 60:0+6F-8T 9F -0Z-88- FI &% 6 1G if : os =e ie 
GE -O0F €3-2 90-04 F8-T 60-04 €¢-8T 9F -0Z-88- FT 12 LG 61 € 2 aig pe ee 
#F-OF 1-6 80-0 66-T IT-OF€F-2T 9F -0Z-ZO- ST L OF LE GT t : ee ue SG 
GE-0F 88-2 10-0F88-T 60-0+F9-8T 9F -0Z-88- FT &% 09 €I f : “+ (ysty) T 
ZE-0FG2-9 90:-0F &-T 60-0F8¢-8T BE 3S-B8- FT T 9T 99 GT z : “  Casny) T 
“AQTTIQUIe A “UOTZeIAOT my BE BS 9F 0% 09-8T PL-91 88: FT 30: €T 
JO 4QUuoTOYyo0;) piepuezs 
“SyIUITT 9ZIg ‘ON WOT 
*sgueysuon, *‘SUOJOIUL UT sassefo a10dg 
‘apuadrn svunuDnis DYUWINT JO SeIOdsopam JO YAPIM IJOF syUKYsUOD pu sUOTZeIIE A 
"8 HTAVL 
€2-0F2¢-OT 10-04 F1-€ OT 0 66-62 90-6&-9F 0% ¥ Sieu| Se al SOns ee Se | OZTs| Geel tO fee |e ate lang T : "+ [Ryo ung 
#3-OFF1-OF 10-04 66-3 OL-OF IF 64 90-68-9F - 0B T t | rE | se | 99 | sor} zs | 99 | on | ¢ T : + -qsny [eqO7, 
LE-OFSL-6 F1T-0F 26-3 12-04 16-0 90: 6&-F0- 92 T | 2 OF | 6 (kes Ine SE : 0 Lee) 
LP-OF6L-6 €L-OFZL-Z 8L-OF 18-24% RF £E-9F 0G ¢ Ole AS A Gee i | 2 F T : 2 EC 
ZF-0+06-8 €L-OFTL-Z 81 -0FZ¢-08 03: LE-RT- FS Balled eM Che I) 8h eG T : 0 eeelz, 
0$-0+ SE -OL 9T-0F98-€ BS-0F€6-TE 90-68-81 - FZ € Pons KS tks Pie Oe i Oe fae : "+ (qstT) T 
CF -OF £€-6 €1-0F 19-2 8T-0F89-8% SF SE-ZE- Zo 6 Gil | ecanlmcce|sc0r | 98 T : “+ (Cgsny) T 
“AqTIQerre A “UOIyeIAed, “ueoy 90 - 66/02: 4E/F8-SE|8F-SE|/Z9- TE|9L-62|06-22/FO-9Z|8T- FaIZE-Sz|9F-0Z 
JO Jus v0 piepueys - 
“SqIUIT'T 9zIg ‘ON WIO7 
“97Ue4SU0R “SUOIOIU UT sosseTa o10dg 


‘anUawD sununIB DYING JO Se10dsopeIN Jo Y{BUe] 1OF syULYsUOD pue suOTELIEA 


‘, QTavt 


170 


AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, ii, 


TABLE 10. 
Summary of differences between the means of the dimensions of uredospores of Puccinia graminis avenae. 


Length. Width. Shape. 
Types compared. Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference 
in means |dividedby| in means | dividedby| in means | divided by 
in microns. P.E. in microns. P.E. in microns. P.E. 
Types of all forms measured 
in Australia and the U.S.A. 
type recorded by Levine.. | 1:49+0-18 8-3 1-61+0-09 17-9 
Types of all Australian forms 
and the form derived from 
straw from Ireland 2-12+0-23 9-2 0-38+0-10 3°8 0-06+0-018 a3 
A form derived from oaten 
straw from Ireland and a 
similar form obtained from 
Australian straw .. . | 2°85+0-34 8:5 0:06+0-13 0-46 0-142+0-019 7:5 
TABLE 11. 
Summary of differences between the means of the dimensions of uredospores of Puccinia graminis avenae. 
Length. Width. Shape. 
Types compared. Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference 
in means |dividedby| in means |dividedby| in means | divided by 
in microns. P.E. in microns. P.K. in microns. P.E. 
P. graminis avenae 1 and 
P. graminis avenae 2... | 1:84+0-255 Wd 1:15+0-133 8-6 0-:27+0:-021 12:8 
P. graminis avenae 1 and 
P. graminis avenae 3... | 0°87+0-°255 3°3 0-05+0-12 0:6 0-03 +0-037 0:9 
P. graminis avenae 1 and 
P. graminis avenae 7 1-83+0:28 6°5 0:09+0-125 0-7 0-10+0-018 0-55 
P. graminis avenae 2 and 
P. graminis avenae 3 2-71+40-255) 10-6 1:10+0:14 7:9 0-30+0-024 END 
P. graminis avenae 2 and 
P. graminis avenae 7 0-01+0-28 0-03 1-06+0-14 7:6 0-:17+0-024 oil 
P. graminis avenae 3 and 
P. graminis avenae 7 .. | 2:70+0-28 9-7 0-04+0-129 0-3 0-13+0-021 6°5 


in width are not significant, but they are certainly significant in regard to both 
length and shape of uredospores. It has already been pointed out that, as regards 
colour of pustule, and a striking tendency to produce teleutospores quickly on seed- 
ling leaves of oats and grasses, this Irish rust is obviously different from the 
stock culture of P. graminis avenae 1, so common in Australia. 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. Wel 

Taking next the forms naturally occurring in Australia, comparisons are 
instructive. Form 1 is significantly different from Form 2 as regards length, 
width, and shape of uredospores. Parasitically these two forms are markedly 
different. Very striking biometrical differences are also seen to exist between 
Forms 2 and 3. But, as tested on the standard differentials, the differences 
between them are comparatively slight. As in the case of P. graminis tritici, it 
is therefore clear that there is no definite parallelism between differences in 
regard to morphology and parasitism. : 

Turning now to a comparison between the total of all the forms of P. graminis 
tritici measured, and the total of all the forms of P. graminis avenae, some 
interesting facts emerge. In Table 12 the two varieties, delimited in this way, 


are compared. 


TABLE 12. @ 
Summary of the differences between the means of the dimensions of uredospores of 
13 forms of P. graminis tritici and 5 forms of P. graminis avenae. 


Length. Width. Shape. 
Types compared. Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference 
in means | dividedby| in means |dividedby} in means | divided by 
in microns. iP in microns. P.E. in microns. P.EH. 
Totalof13formsofP.graminis 
tritici and 5 forms of 
P. graminis avenae 1-05+0:-12 8-8 0-08+0:10 0:8 0:07+0-01 7-0 


It is seen that the variety P. graminis tritici, thus delimited, has uredosporeés 
which are significantly longer than those of P. graminis avenae. No difference 
occurs in the width, but the shape is necessarily different. It may be pointed out 
that these differences in length and shape of the two varieties are not as great 
as the differences which exist between certain of the physiologic forms of one or 
other of these two varieties of P. graminis. 

Levine (1923) found that the means for the length and width of the 
uredospores of P. graminis tritici were 32:40 + 0:19 x 19-70 += 0:06 uw, and for 
P. graminis avenae, 28:50 + 0-15 x 19:94 + 0:07 uw. This close approximation of 
the two widths is confirmed by the Australian results, as is also the greater 
length of the wheat rust form. 


(c). Puccinia triticina. 

It has been pointed out that in Australia there are two physiologic forms. 
These cannot be differentiated on the standard set of varieties used by Mains and 
Jackson, but on “Thew” the separation is absolute. Australian Form 1 produces 
flecks, whilst Australian Form 2 produces “4’’ reactions. Certain other varieties 
behave in the same way. 

Measurements of uredospores of the two forms are shown in Table 13. 

A comparison of the two forms is set out in Table 14. 

It will be seen that the second form is significantly longer and narrower 
than the first and, as is to be expected, significantly different in shape. 

McAlpine gives the measurements of the uredospores as 20 to 28 uw in length 
and 18 to 21 wu in width. It will be seen that as regards length, these limits agree 


\ 
66-07 82:8 €900-0+ IT-0 $400:07 €€-T Z-1-0-T qT OL G GS 0€ 02 =| 8 a = So FSV 
€&F- OF 241-6 €900-0F IT-0 $400-:0F 06:1 G-T-0-T I ae 61 96 | 8& ¥ ms T “9sny 

1 
| " 
= | 
“APTIGUITE A | 
Jo “UOINRIA(T ‘ygsueT ueay L£-1 9-T GT FL 6:1 oT T-T 0-1 
4ualoyya09 prepurys Eun | ‘ON ULIOT 
9218 S dee ees ie <a SE eee 
“sqyUeysuoD ‘UQPIM 09 YQSueT Jo oney 
‘dd VHS 

oS | 

= FEOF LT-L 190-07 F-T1 €60-O0F 19-61 G&-G6-FL-9T Z 17 OF Peers, ae 6 9sny 

im 91€-0F 29-9 490-04 G28 -T €60:-0+F 19-06 81 -F2-FL-91 I 96 PG 8- I a T “9sny 

lal 

a 

5 aaa ae Z 

= 

R “APIQVITE A 

SA jo “UOTZRIAA(T “UjsUeT ue 8L-FS | GE-dS | 9F-0% | O9-8T | FL-9T 

5 qU9I0 90) prepueys “Sqr Ty, ‘ON WLIO,T 

% A aZts 

3 “squeysuo) “SUOJOIUI UL sesse[o ar0dg 

s 

“ 

& *HILGIA 

D 

2 is Sie = 

F£-0F90-2 80-07 22-1 OZL-OF €1-42 9L-62-ZE - 2S ZL IL oF FG §1 = 6 Shy 
66-07 T-8 760-04 26-T SET-OF SE - £2 06 -0Z-9F - 06 Z 1é Gs 8- 6 ae T “osny 
AQTIGRIIG A 

jo “UOTPEIAVT ‘ygsueT Ueey 94-66 | 06-242 | F0-9G | 8T-FG | GE-ZS | 9F-0Z | O9-8T | F24-9T 
quatotya09 prepuryg ‘SHUT ‘ON WIOT 
aZIG 
‘squeysucy ‘SUOJOIU UL sassepy vI0dg 
“HLDNGAT 


172 


“DUI, DYULIING JO SULIOF OIFOpOIsSAYd UvTPeEysNny OM4 Jo soIodsopomn yo odeys pue ‘YQpPIM ‘q4BUd, JOJ syURysuUOD pu suOTZeIIEA 


‘SL QTaVE 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 173 


TABLE 14. 
Summary of differences between the means of the dimensions of uredospores of 
two Australian physiologic forms of Puccinia triticina. 


Length. Width. Shape. 
Types compared. Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference 
in means |dividedby| in means |dividedby| in means _ | divided by 
in microns. P.E. in microns. P.E in microns. P.E. 
Australian 1 and Australian 2 | 0:78+0-147 5:2 1-:10+0-13 8:5 0:13+0-01 13-0 


with those found in Australian Form 1. In width there is not the same agree- 
ment, but the figures approach more nearly to those of Australian Form 2. It 
would seem probable, therefore, that both the forms were present when McAlpine 
carried out his work. 

: TELEUTOSPORES. 

The identity of the uredospores taken for measurement can be accurately 
determined, and so one can be certain that a particular form and only that form 
is being dealt with. Teleutospores are somewhat more difficult to identify with 
certainty. In the cases in point, the teleutospores measured were obtained from 
naturally-occurring straw which had also carried uredospores whose identity 
was established. Only the one physiologic form was present in each case, and it 
is reasonable to suppose that this form is also represented by the teleutospores 
which were measured. 


McAlpine (1906) gives the teleutospore dimensions for Puccinia graminis as a 
composite species as 35-63 x 14-25 uw, with an average of 52 x 18 uw. He states 
that in size the teleutospores are very variable. No indication is given as to 
whether the measurements of length were made from the exterior of the apex to 
the point of attachment of the pedicel, and for width across the septum separating 
_the two cells. At the last-mentioned spot a constriction usually occurs, and it 
seems probable that the maximum width of the spores was actually measured. 
Taking the average figures for the measured teleutospores of P. graminis tritici 
and P. graminis avenae together, it will be seen that the length ranges from 
30 to 74 uw, and the width from 11 to 22 uw, with an average of 45 x 16 Tp 


(a). P. graminis tritici. 

Teleutospores of only three Australian forms were available for measurement. 
Their dimensions, followed by those for the sum total, are given in Table 15. 

Comparisons of the forms measured are set out in Table 16. 

Comparing the total of the three Australian forms with the measurements 
given by Levine, it will be seen that the Australian rust is significantly shorter 
and narrower. The greater variability is striking. \ 

Between the three Australian forms there are differences. Forms 34 and 43 
differ significantly in length and width. Form 34 is longer and wider than 43. 
It is much more variable in length. In shape there is no appreciable difference 
between the two. Between Forms 34 and 46 there are again differences. Form 34 
is significantly longer than 46, the shortest of the three forms. The difference 
in width is not appreciable, but in shape the difference is significant. 


ii, 


AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, 


172 


| 
6-0F82-8 | €900-0F TT-0 | F200-0F €€-T L-1-0-T T OT g c% 0g ae | @ I a Z “qeny 
€F-OF21-6 | €900-0F TT-0 | F2400-0F 02-1 ¢-1-0-1 if aI 61 9 | 8g 7 Ps I “qshy 
! 
{ co 
| 
“AGUIQVITE A. | 
jo “UOIPRIADT ‘ygsueT uray LT 9-1 G1 tT eT 3-1 TT 0-1 
queloyye0p paepurys “SULUT, | ‘ON ULIOg 
a oZIS oe gee i ee ee aces 
“szUeysuoD ‘YYPIM 09 YSU] Jo ony 
“ad VHS 
| 
t£-OF LT-4 190-05 F-1 660-0 F 16-61 BE -Zo-PL -OT D, It 99 | 9 SG ASN: 
916-0F 49-9 690-0 F 648-1 €60-0F 19-02% 8T-$2-FL-9T I 9% rg 81 I - T “ysny 
“AQUIQVIE A 
jo “UOTPRLAACT “yysueT Ua 8I-FZ | ZE-Zs | 9F-08 | 09-8T | FL-9T 
queloya0p paepuryg “SPUTT ‘oN WHO 
A aZIS 
*syueqsuoy ‘SUOIOIUL Ul sasseio o10dg 
“HIGIM 
| 
#E-0F90-2 $80-0F 22-1 OZ - OF €1-S% 9L-62-ZE +23 L II oF ¥% &I os 3 “gsny 
68-07 T-8 ¥60-0F 26-T E&1 OF SE- FZ 06 - 0Z-9F -02 L 1¢ Gg SI 6 = T “gsny 
“AQTIQRING A 
jo “UOT}BLAIG ‘ygauoT ueay 94-62 | 06-22 | 0-96 | ST-¥% | BE-ZS | 9F-0Z | 09-8T | F4-9T 
JUSTO Yoo prepurys “SPTUULT ‘ON WHO 
8ZIG 
‘squegsucy ‘SUOIONU UL SossR[D vI0dg 
“HLDNGAT 


“$T GTav 


“OULIYL DYUVING JO SULIOJ OBoToIsAyd Weypesysny OM Jo sosodsopomn jo adevys pue ‘YypIa ‘YQdU, Joy syURysuOD pure sUOTpELIE A 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 173 


TABLE 14. 
Summary of differences between the means of the dimensions of uredospores of 
two Australian physiologic forms of Puccinia triticina. 


Length. Width. Shape. 
Types compared. Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference 
_in means | dividedby| in means | dividedby| in means _ | divided by 
in microns. P.E. in microns. P.E. in microns. 


Australian 1 and Australian 2 | 0:78+0-147 Sieh 1-10+0-13 8: 0-13+0-01 13-0 


oO 


with those found in Australian Form 1. In width there is not the same agree- 
ment, but the figures approach more nearly to those of Australian Form 2. It 
would seem probable, therefore, that both the forms were present when McAlpine 
carried out his work. 

i TELEUTOSPORES. 

The identity of the uredospores taken for measurement can be accurately 
determined, and so one can be certain that a particular form and only that form 
is being dealt with. Teleutospores are somewhat more difficult to identify with 
certainty. In the cases in point, the teleutospores measured were obtained from 
naturally-occurring straw which had also carried uredospores whose identity 
was established. Only the one physiologic form was present in each case, and it 
is reasonable to suppose that this form is also represented by the teleutospores 
which were measured. 


McAlpine (1906) gives the teleutospore dimensions for Puccinia graminis as a 
composite species as 35-63 x 14-25 uw, with an average of 52 x 18 uw. He states 
that in size the teleutospores are very variable. No indication is given as to 
whether the measurements of length were made from the exterior of the apex to 
the point of attachment of the pedicel, and for width across the septum separating 
the two cells. At the last-mentioned spot a constriction usually occurs, and it 
seems probable that the maximum width of the spores was actually measured. 
Taking the average figures for the measured teleutospores of P. graminis tritici 
and P. graminis avenae together, it will be seen that the length ranges from 
30 to 74 uw, and the width from 11 to 22 uw, with an average of 45 x 16 uw. 


(a). P. graminis tritici. 

Teleutospores of only three Australian forms were available for measurement. 
Their dimensions, followed by those for the sum total, are given in Table 15. 

Comparisons of the forms measured are set out in Table 16. 

Comparing the total of the three Australian forms with the measurements 
given by Levine, it will be seen that the Australian rust is significantly shorter 
and narrower. The greater variability is striking. 

Between the three Australian forms there are differences. Forms 34 and 43 
differ significantly in length and width. Form 34 is longer and wider than 43. 
It is much more variable in length. In shape there is no appreciable difference 
between the two. Between Forms 34 and 46 there are again differences. Form 34 
is significantly longer than 46, the shortest of the three forms. The difference 
in width is not appreciable, but in shape the difference is significant. 


ii, 


AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, 


174 


C68:-O0FZI-82 | 60:0 G8-0 | 420:0F26:3 G-G=G- 1. G 8 GT 81 IP GL 62 69 9 ‘ a T?30.L 
¢¢-1+00-0€ | €80-0F602-0 | 8h0.0FSE-% q-G-G-T I G I G 6 81 9§ 0& T a : 797 
4E-T£08:9% | 660:0+628-0 | 990:0F 60-8 0-9-G-T if 8 OL €1 9G PG tL T : = “ "SP 
8E-LFES-26 | 6€0-0F968-0 | 990:0F 10:8 G-G-G-T I G 9 9 61 86 6L GT v i : “PE 
“AyIqerre A ™ 
jo “UOTZRIARG “UROL G-G | 0-9 | 9-7 | 0-7 | G-§ | O-€ | G-S | 0-3 | GT 
quorsyye0n pirepuryg “SqTUUY'T ‘ON UlIO.T 
9ZI§ 
“syURysuOD ‘UPIA 0) YAZUET Jo Oey 
“adVHS 
TF-OFG6-FT | €90:0F 22-3 | ¢20-0F06-ST | ZE-G2-9L- IT § €T tS GL SOL | ¥& 9T e eS 1¥40.L, 
8¢-0F 6-TT 60:0F 6-T SL-OFTF-9L | 9F-OZ-9L-TT F GG 66 Gs G G oe & “OF 
89-0 82-F1 OL-0OF 62-3 FL-OF€9-FL | 9F-0Z-9T-IT LT 8 IL sii 1G FL ey : TEST 
€9-OFOL-€L |- IL-OF 02-3 GT-OF82:9L | BE-33-Z0-8T € 8 IZ G& 836 8 or e “tS 
“AMTIGVITe A 
jo “UOINVIAG, “TROT GE -ZS/9F 06/09 -8TIPL- 91/88: FL/Z0-STj9T- TT 
quoloyyeog paepurys “SyTUUry ‘ON WUIO,T 
aZig | 
“sqUeysuo0D “SUOIOIU UT sosse[o erodg 
“ALGIM 
L¥-040L-91 02-0 OF-2 GZ-OFGE-FP | OF-FL4-94-66 I G P It GT 61 6G LG 6g Lg IG G i oe T830.L 
89-OF OT: FL 8Z:0F 68-¢ OF-0F99-1F | ZS-6G-91-62 G G € GL 6L GS GS Il I 28 oe 7 OP 
69-0F 48-81 6Z-0+F 20-9 TP-OFF9-SP | FZ-E9-8F-EE T g 9 GS 8T GS 61 9 ee ss SUZ 
68-0F29-LT GF-OF 9-8 8o-OF68-LF | OF-FL-9L-62 I G € 6 OL Or GI 0G GL §1L P T hd ; “PS 
AQTIGVETE A, 
Jo “WOTPETART “UBOT OF -FL|89 02/96 -99/F3 - €9|ZS - 64/08 - 44/80 -ZS|9E - 8F/F9- FF/Z6-OF|0G: LE\8F-SE/92-6z 
quUoTotyoon prepueysg “SqTUUy ‘ON WLIO, 
921g 
‘sgaeqysuog *SUOIOIUI UI sosseTa or10dg 


“HLONGT 


WOYL SYUNUDID DYWONT JO SULIOF oISOpOISAY UvITeIYsNYy dey} JO sorodsoqnoje, Jo edeys pur ‘YYpIM “YASUE, IOF syULysuUOD pu SsUOIgRIIEA 


“CT WTaViL 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 175 


TABLE 16. 
Summary of differences between the dimensions of the means of teleutospores of 
Puceinia graminis tritici. 


Length. Width. Shape. 
Types compared. Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference | Difference 
in means |dividedby| in means | dividedby| in means | divided by 
in microns. P.EB. in microns. P.E. in microns. P.E. 
The U.S.A. type recorded by 
Levine and the total of 
3 Australian forms .. | 7:48+0:-55 13°6 0:77+0-142 5-4 
Form 34 and Form 438... | 4:25+0-71 6:0 2°25+0°21 10:7 0:08+0:079 1-0 
Form 34 and Form 46... | 6:23+0:71 8:8 0:37+0-20 1:9 0:66+0:-074 8-9 
Form 43 and Form 46... | 1:98+0-57 3D 1-88+0-19 9-9 0-74+0:-074 10-0 


Comparing Forms 43 and 46, it is seen that Form 43 is significantly longer 
and narrower than Form 46. There is also a difference in shape. These are just 
the reverse of the results of the uredospore measurements, which showed that 46 
is longer and narrower than 43. 


(0). P. graminis avenae. 

Two sets of material were available for measurement. One batch of oaten 
straw came from Cowra, N.S.W. Uredospores from this straw showed the form 
to be P. graminis avenae 1. The other batch came from Ireland and was in part 
used to infect a barberry. From the aecidiospores, uredospore cultures were 
obtained. The form present proved to be P. graminis avenae 1.. The results are 
given in Table 17. 

A comparison of types is given in Table 18. 

It will be seen that the results given by Levine are intermediate in length 
and width between those of the Australian and the Irish rusts. Statistically 
there is no significant difference between the Irish and the United States rusts, 
but the difference in width between the Australian and the United States types 
may be significant. Comparing the Australian and the Irish forms, the former 
is the longer. The difference in length is significant, and this probably is also 
the case in width and shape. The uredospore measurements showed that the 
Irish was significantly longer than the Australian rust. 

Photomicrographs of some of the spore forms used in the measurements are 
shown in Plate iii. It is obvious that these cannot have as great a value as the 
biometrical determinations for identifying forms. As far as \possible, truly 
representative spores of the various forms were photographed to illustrate the 
types, but a small group of spores considered alone may be misleading. Taken 
in conjunction with the measurements they are instructive. 


SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS. 
Spore measurements have been made of aecidiospores, uredospores, and 
teleutospores of physiologic forms of varieties of Puccinia graminis and of 
uredospores of P. triticina. 


178 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, ii. 


Literature Cited. 
Homma (YAsu), 1929.—A Statistical Study on the Biologic Forms of Erysiphe graminis 
D.C. Trans. Sappora Nat. Hist. Soc., x, 2, pp. 157-161. 
LEVINE, M. N., 1923.—A Statistical Study of the Comparative Morphology of Biologic 
Forms of Puccinia graminis. Journ. Agr. Res., 24, pp. 539-568. 

, 1928.—Biometrical Studies on the Variation of Physiologic Forms of Puccinia 
graminis tritici, and the Effects of Ecological Factors on the Susceptibility of Wheat 
Varieties. Phytopathology, 18, pp. 7-125. 

McALPINE, D., 1906.—The Rusts of Australia. Pp. 349, Pl. 55. Melbourne (Literature, 
pp. 213-221). ‘ 

WATERHOUSE, W. L., 1921.—On the Production in Australia of Aecidial Stage of Puccinia 
graminis Pers. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 55, pp. 278-288. 

, 1923.—Notes on Rust Investigations in Progress (Abstract). Proc. Pan- 
Pacific Sci. Cong. Aust., 19238, 1, p. 142. 

,1929—A Preliminary Account of the Origin of Two New Australian 
Physiologic Forms of Puccinia graminis tritici. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 54, pp. 
96-106. 


, 1929.—Australian Rust Studies, I. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 54, pp. 615-680. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATH III. 
Photomicrographs made under uniform conditions of uredospores of Puecinia spp. 
(<x 2150): 
Uredospores of P. graminis tritici 43. 
Uredospores of P. graminis tritici 46. 
Uredospores of P. graminis tritici 11. 
Uredospores of P. graminis tritici ““New Form’’. 
Uredospores of P. graminis avenae 1. 
Uredospores of P. graminis avenae 2. 
Uredospores of P. triticina 1. 
Uredospores of P. triticina 2. 


PSs e© SO So 


Grateful acknowledgment is made of help given by Mr. H. G. Gooch in the 
photographic work. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE IIT. 


Uredospores of Pwecinia spp. 


i 
role 


e 


’ AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA*. NOTES AND NEW SPECIES. VII. 
By H. J. Carter, B.A., F.H.S. 
(Plate iv; one Text-figure.) 
[Read 30th April, 1930.] 


Family BUPRESTIDAE. 
MELOBASIS AUROCINCTA, N. Sp. 

Oblong. Head obscure coppery bronze, pronotum and elytra purplish-black 
with some metallic gleams, elytra with golden lateral vitta, extending from 
behind humeral swelling nearly to apex, a similarly coloured mark at base in 
front of humeral swelling and at suture behind scutellum. Underside and legs 
a fiery copper colour, prosternum with cyaneous stains. 

Head narrower than apex of prothorax, with short pubescence, finely 
punctate, eyes little prominent. Prothorax bisinuate at base, very feebly so at 
apex; sides very lightly widened behind middle and rather abruptly narrowed 
behind, hind angles a little produced, scarcely acute; disc finely and densely 
punctate, the punctures—especially towards sides—showing a transverse arrange- 
ment, a small mediobasal fovea, but no medial line. Scutellum small, longi- 
tudinally suleate. Elytra rounded at shoulders, lightly compressed at basal third, 
separately rounded at apex, apical margins serrulate; each elytron with two 
moderately raised costae, the more prominent one, not far from suture, extending 
from near base to near apex, the other, external to the first, only prominent 
on apical third; a short sutural costa indicated; hind part of suture also a little 
raised, and smooth longitudinal lines visible between the costae; surface otherwise 
with round punctures, somewhat irregular in size and distance apart, showing 
metallic gleams in each puncture. Prosternum densely and finely punctate, 
metasternum sulcate, abdomen strongly punctate, apical segment strongly 
bispinose. 

Dimensions: 12 x 4 (+) mm. 

Habitat—Western Australia (Du Boulay in Fry Coll., British Museum). 

A single male example belongs to Group 1, Section B, of my Revision, from 
the rest of which it is very distinct. The costae are less prominent than in 
other species; the metallic punctures of the elytra can be readily seen with a 
good lens or binocular. Holotype in British Museum. 


MELOBASIS PARVULA, Nl. SDP. 
Oblong; glabrous. Head, pronotum, scutellum, femora and underside metallic 
green, elytra bright metallic purple, becoming darker towards apex, tibiae dark. 
Head, including eyes, not wider than apex of prothorax, front rather flat, 
without impression, dengely punctate. Prothorax: Apex and base very lightly 
bisinuate; sides nearly straight, very feebly narrowed towards apex, posterior 
angles subrectangular; disc very finely (more finely and less densely than head) 


* Includes description of one new species from New Guinea. 


180 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA. NOTES AND NEW SPECIES, Vii, 


and closely punctate; a faint indication of smooth medial line, with a minute 
fovea at base and a feeble impression at apex. Elytra: basal two-thirds sub- 
parallel, apical margins minutely serrulate; disc closely punctate, the apical half 
showing some linear arrangement; a tendency to rugosity or fine granulation 
towards sides. Prosternum densely, abdomen strongly but less closely, punctate, 
metasternum sulcate, apex of abdomen with two short spines. 

Dimensions: 6 X 2-5 mm. 

Habitat.—Central Australia: Hermannsburge (H. J. Hillier). 

A single example sent, amongst other Buprestidae, from the British Museum, 
is clearly distinct from described species. In size and general facies near M. 
terminata Kerr.,* but, besides the different colour of the elytra, the apex and 
base of pronotum are less bisinuate than in that species, which also has the 
head wider than apex of pronotum. Holotype in British Museum. 


STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) IMITATOR, n. Sp. Plate iv, figure 6. 

Oblong. Head and pronotum bronze, elytra with narrow basal margins, 
suture, two fasciae (extending the full width) and wide apical margin black; 
underside nitid green, glabrous; legs blue. 

Head and pronotum densely and finely punctate. Prothorax widest behind 
middle, base and apex lightly sinuate. Elytra slightly widened at shoulders 
and constricted behind them; apex with moderate lunation, each with a rather 
long external and a scarcely defined sutural spine; disc finely striate-punctate, 
intervals almost impunctate, lightly convex, 3 and 5 subcostate, underside 
minutely punctate. 

Habitat—New South Wales: National Park, Newport, Kuring-gai Chase 
(Carter), Blue Mountains (G. F. Bryant and H. J, Carter). Queensland: 
Stanthorpe (EH. Sutton). 

A species so like in size, form and pattern to S. vigilans Kerr., that the 
author possesses two examples that were determined by the late C. O. Water- 
house as vigilans Kerr., after a comparison with the type. Mr. K. G. Blair has, 
however, sent me one of Kerremans’ examples marked “type’’, together with 
one of imitator, taken by Mr. Bryant on the Blue Mountains. I find both species 
in my collection (placed under vigilans) but they are clearly distinct by the 
following comparison: 


vigilans Kerr. imitator, n. sp. 
Head and pronotum black (with cyaneous bronze 
gleams in places) 
Underside blue green 
Prothorax widest at middle widest behind middle 
disc irregularly, rather disc densely, finely punc- 
sparsely punctate tate 
Elytral intervals a & Wh We Ome oee 3-5 very lightly costate 
costate | 
Habitat Victoria (1 example N.S.W. and S. Queensland 
_from Blue Mountains, 
N.S.W.) 


Holotype in Coll. Carter. 


*M. terminata Kerr., in its wide head and elytral sculpture, approaches 
Pseudanilara. 


BY H. J. CARTER. 181 


STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) INTACTA, 1. Sp. 

6. Oblong-ovate; glabrous. Head, pronotum, underside and appendages 
bright green, elytra yellow, save for a narrow basal margin green. 

Head sulcate, strongly, not densely, punctate. Prothorax: Apex moderately, 
base strongly, bisinuate, all angles produced and acute, the anterior more strongly 
so, widest and rounded near base, sides thence obliquely converging to apex, 
nearly parallel towards base, this one and three-fourths times the width of apex; 
disc rather convex, the greatest convexity on front half, with large, well-separated 
round punctures on basal half, the punctures smaller and closer towards apex, 
nowhere rugose; a smooth medial line at basal third, the basal sinuate outline 
almost unbroken, except for small fovea between scutellum and hind angles. 


Y 


WHS : 


Naa 


E.H.Zeck Del. 


Stigmodera intacta, n. sp. 


Scutellum scutiform, brassy-green, sparsely punctate. Elytra obliquely widened 
to humeral swelling, compressed behind this, widest at middle, each apex bispinose, 
the external spine much the longer, a lunate interspace between each pair, 
sutural margins divergent towards apex; apical margins entire. Prosternum 
finely, transversely strigose in front, medial area sparsely punctate only; abdomen 
glabrous, with minute shallow punctures; apical segment rounded. 

Dimensions: 19 x 8 mm. 

Habitat—Queensland (Fry Coll., in British Museum). 

©. Latet. 

A single male example is the only one I have seen, but it is so distinct as 
to deserve a name. Amongst the larger of the subgenus, coloured like planata 
Cart. (? auricollis Thoms.), and moribunda Saund., it is readily separated by 


182 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA. NOTES AND NEW SPECIES, Vii, 


large size, bispinose apices, and the curious convexity of the anterior area of the 
pronotum. Holotype in British Museum. 


STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) AERATICOLLIS, nN. Sp. 

Mr. H. W. Brown has recently sent me three examples of a Castiarina from ~° 

Wembley Park, W.A., that can only be distinguished from S. dilatata Cart., from 

the same district, by (1) larger size, 15 x 5 mm., (2) head, pronotum and under- 

side brassy-bronze (instead of blue), (3) pronotum more coarsely and closely 

punctate and a slightly different outline—sides more rounded, and (4) elytral 
margins near apex more decidedly sanguineous. 


Mr. Cedric Deane has lately sent two more, from Tammin, W.A., that are 
identical. But for (3) it might have been held to be merely varietal, but it 
must be considered distinct from this sculptural difference. Otherwise my 
description and figure (These Procrrpines, 1927, 226, 227,) will serve for the 
above. Holotype in Coll. Carter. 

The figure of C. gebhardti Obenb. corresponds rather closely, but this author 
only compares it with a/ffabilis Kerr., without. even mentioning the colour of 
the pronotum and underside. As affabilis is described as having the underside 
blue, and the pronotum ‘bronze verdatre”’, it would appear that gebhardti is very 
close to dilatata and still nearer to sagittaria L. & G. 


Family TENEBRIONIDAE. 


CESTRINUS CARBO, nl. Sp. 

Oblong-ovate; coal-black, subopaque. Antennae and tarsi brownish, the upper 
surface, especially at sides, sparsely clad with short, bristly, black hairs. 

Head granulose, epistoma arcuate, antennae stout, submoniliform, scarcely 
reaching the base of prothorax, third segment rather longer than 4-5 combined, 
11 longer and wider than the preceding. Prothorax transverse, arcuate-emarginate 
in front, subtruncate at base, widest, and widely rounded, in front of middle, 
thence converging sinuously behind, and with a tendency to become sinuous 
before the acute anterior angle*, posterior angles obtuse; surface coarsely granulose- 
punctate; a slight, but variable, medial depression, sometimes little evident. 
Elytra wider than prothorax at base, with lines of approximate punctures set 
in shallow grooves, intervals wider than grooves, slightly raised, but flat and 
finely granulose-setose, the setae very short and depressed. Prosternum very 
convex, with a steep declivity towards the front, the prosternal process arcuately 
bilobed and wide; whole underside strongly granulose-setose; legs stout, fore tibiae 
slightly curved. 

Dimensions: 7-8 x 4 (vix) mm. 

Habitat.—South Queensland: Stanthorpe (E. Sutton and H. J. Carter). 

Fifteen examples of the species before me show distinction from the western 
C. brevis Champ., in its black and granulose surface, its more oval and wider 
form, its much stouter appendages, and wider prosternal process. It is altogether 
a more robust and convex insect, the underside especially showing differences 
of structure and sculpture, brevis being rather coarsely punctured, without 
granules. From (C. trivialis, it is separated by the more widely transverse 


* This anterior sinuosity variably evident in examples seen. 


BY H. J. CARTER. ‘183 


prothorax, with sides more widely rounded, the posterior angles obtuse, antennae 
less widened towards apex, the bilobed prosternal process, et multa alia. Holotype 
in Coll. Carter. 


C. aspersus Blkb—Specimens from Mount Lofty, South Australia, agree with 
description. I am quite in accord with Mr. Blair (These Prockrepines, 1919, 
531) that this cannot be well distinguished from brevis. Both have a mixture 
of light and dark setae, the general colour of the Mt. Lofty examples being paler 
than that of brevis. 

DYSARCHUS BROWNI, 0. Sp. 

Widely oval; black, subnitid. Antennae, tibiae and tarsi rufescent. 

Head: Clypeus subtruncate, sinuate at sides, separated from front by wide 
depression, surface strongly tuberculate, eyes bordered by row of tubercles, mentum 
feebly notched at apex, reticulate-rugose; antennae short, stout, sublinear, the 
segments closely adapted, little enlarged at apex. Prothorax widest behind 
middle, apex strongly emarginate, the widely reflexed margins produced in front 
to form obtusely rounded anterior angles; base slightly bisinuate, posterior 
angles widely obtuse, sides evenly rounded, margins widely foliate and reflexed, 
extreme border scarcely, or only very finely, crenulate; disc very convex, closely 
rugose-pustulose, reticulate-rugose on margins, finely pustulose at base and apex; 
with two raised nitid areas in front of middle; medial line indicated near base 
by a rather wide depression. Scutellum transverse, finely and closely tuberculose. 
Elytra widely oval and convex, at base as wide as prothorax, shoulders obsolete, 
margins nitid and raised at and behind base, everywhere without crenulation, 
not evident from above on apical half, each with three nitid, but little raised, 
costae, not interrupted, but slightly diverted by invading punctures; the suture 
also raised and finely tuberculate, a fourth feebly indicated line of irregular 
tubercles between the third costa and margin, also, between the other costae, 
even less evident but perceptible lines; surface otherwise densely rugose-punctate, 
the punctures contiguous and cell-like. Prosternum coarsely rugose-pustulose 
on flanks, mesosternum and metasternum punctate, abdomen rather sparsely 
punctate, finely so on apical segments. 

Dimensions: 15-16 x 9 mm. 

Habitat—Western Australia: Lake Grace (H. W. Brown). 

Two examples sent by this indefatigable collector are readily distinguished 
from the other western species by the combination of widely ovate form, evenly 
rounded and closely sculptured pronotum, and the elytra with only three clear 
and uninterrupted costae on each. The protibial spur is unusually well developed. 
Holotype in Coll. Carter. 


DYSAROHUS PERCOSTATUS, DN. SD. 

Ovate; opaque-black. Antennae, tibiae and tarsi rufescent. 

Head: Clypeus widely excised in middle, sinuate at sides, these reflexed and 
subangulate in front of eyes; the clypeus scarcely definitely separated from front, 
eyes bordered by carina, antennae similar to those of browni. Prothorax arcuate- 
emarginate at apex, the wide upturned foliate margins forming rather sharply 
rectangular front angles, base rather strongly bisinuate, hind angles produced 
backwards and obtuse; sides very widely rounded, abruptly (subangulately) 
narrowed behind the middle, extreme border scarcely crenulate, disc densely 


184 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA. NOTES AND NEW SPECIES, Vii, 


and finely pustulose throughout except on margins, here rugose-punctate. Blytra 
less widely ovate than browni, shoulders more defined by reflexed epipleural 
fold, margins more explanate, evident from above throughout, crenulate and 
subundulate; each with three strongly raised costae, the third narrower and 
less raised than the other two and showing a tendency to interruption near 
apex; between the third costa and margin two little-defined rows of small pustules, 
a similar row between the other costae and a better defined row between first 
costa and suture, the last also slightly raised, but less so than the main costae. 
Mentum truncate at apex, closely pustulose; sternal area rugose, pustulose on 
propleurae; abdomen more strongly punctate than in browni. 


Dimensions: 14 x 8 (vix) mm. 


Habitat——Western Australia: Lake Grace (H. W. Brown). 

A single example sent with browni as from the same region is quite distinct 
in its narrower less convex form, its different (subangulate at sides) prothorax, 
and the strongly raised elytral costae, these almost entire, showing only a slight 
tendency to break up into tubercles at the extreme apex. Holotype in Coll. 
Carter. 

ONOSTERRHUS GRANULATUS, Nn. sp. 

Ovate, convex; subnitid black. Tarsi piceous, underside glabrous, more nitid 
than above. 

Head: Epistoma subtruncate, its angles rounded, its surface with some 
longitudinal wrinkles, canthus raised and ear-like, forehead finely and rather 
closely punctate, antennae 1-2 short and bead-like, 3 cylindric, as long as 4-5 
together; 4-6 successively shorter and wider at apex, 7 subtriangular, 8-10 sub- 
spherical, 11 pyriform. Prothorax 3 x 5-5 mm.; apex truncate-emarginate, its 
angles acutely produced in front of eyes, base bisinuate, hind angles forming 
acute teeth pointing backwards; sides well rounded, gently sinuate in front, 
more strongly behind; lateral border convex and moderately wide, lightly 
channelled within, disc minutely and sparsely punctate, slightly explanate laterally. 
Scutellum widely transverse. Elytra considerably wider than prothorax at base, 
shoulders rounded, rather closely covered with large granules of irregular size, 
these sometimes forming transverse or curved ridges; three longitudinal rows of 
more pronounced granules forming subcostate ridges, equally spaced on each 
elytron, external margins very narrowly horizontal on front half, unseen from 
above. A small triangular tooth on submentum, prosternum sulcate between coxae, 
post-intercoxal process widely truncate. Abdomen lightly wrinkled longitudinally, 
mid tibiae feebly pubescent, others, also underside, glabrous. 

Dimensions: 12 x 8 mm. 

Habitat—Central Australia: Petermann Ranges (Dr. H. Basedow). 

A single example, probably 9, is easily distinguished from its allies by the 
pronounced granulose surface of the elytra. In the pronotal structure and 
general shape it is nearest O. acuticollis Cart., but the angles of prothorax are 
even more prominent than in that species. Holotype in the South Australian 
Museum. 


BYALLIUS ANDERSONI, n. sp. Plate iv, figure 8. 
Oblong, obovate; dull brownish-black. Antennae and tarsi reddish. 
Head: Epistoma truncate in front, sinuate and obliquely widened at sides, 
densely and finely rugose-punctate, forehead channelled, antennae robust, 3 cylin- 


BY H. J. CARTER. 185 


dric, as long as 4-5 combined, 4-7 obconic, 8-10 subrectangular, 11 oval. Prothorax: 
Base wider than apex, widest behind middle; apex truncate between strongly 
produced, acute front angles, these pointing forwards; base truncate, sides sub- 
sinuate in front, thence widening, with a slightly irregular outline, rather 
abruptly narrowed and sinuate before the dentate hind angles, these pointing 
obliquely outwards, extreme border rather thick, punctate and recurved, forming 
a channel within; disc thickly and strongly punctate, with a transverse depression 
near base. Elytra much wider than prothorax at base, widest behind middle, 
epipleural fold recurved, margins a little explanate; each with three well marked, 
but irregular costae; intervals coarsely irregularly reticulate and rugose-punctate. 
Prosternum densely, metasternum more sparsely, punctate, abdomen finely strigose- 
punctate, the two apical segments finely and densely punctate. 


Dimensions: 15-19 « 7:5-9 mm. 
Habitat—New South Wales: Mullaley to Coonabarabran. 


I took eight examples in December, 1929, some in the Pillaga Scrub near 
Garrawilla homestead, and others near Timor (near the Warrumbungle 
Mountains). The species is superficially allied to B. punctatus mihi, from which 
it is readily distinguished by the dentate hind angles, the more prominent front 
angles and the strongly punctate surface of the prothorax. In punctatus the 
elytral ridges and costae carry punctures, while in andersoni the elytral punctures 
are confined to the depressed parts. I have named it after my genial host, Mr. 
Alexander Anderson, of Garrawilla Station, Mullaley. Holotype and allotype in 
Coll. Carter. 


BEPLEGENES LACHRYMOSA, nN. sp. Plate iv, figure 7. 


Elongate-ovate; upperside dark bronze, moderately nitid, glabrous; under- 
side nitid-black, tarsi reddish. 

Head: Labrum prominent, epistoma evenly arcuate and thick, terminating in 
raised antennal orbits, behind this a small nitid tubercle; whole surface closely 
rugose-punctate with a short occipital sulcus; eyes narrow, transverse and entire; 
antennae scarcely reaching base of prothorax, rather stoutly submoniliform, third 
segment elongate (about one and a half times as long as 4), apical segments 
successively widened, 11 asymmetricaily pyriform, twice as large as 10. Prothorax: 
Apex and base more or less truncate, all angles rounded ‘off, sides with two 
pronounced teeth, the anterior of these (slightly in front of middle) the larger; 
disc unevenly rugose, medial sulcus throughout its length, an irregular depression 
on each side near middle. Scutellum triangular. Elytra elongate-ovate, converging 
at apex to the width of prothorax, epipleurae not continuous to shoulder, extreme 
border only seen from above towards apex, elsewhere concealed by raised broken 
ninth interval; third, fifth, seventh and ninth intervals nitid, convex, inter- 
mittently constricted, those on the seventh and ninth more sharply and narrowly 
convex; sutural interval convex and narrow, the second, fourth ,and sixth wide 
and subopaque, less raised than the rest and undulating to correspond with 
constrictions of the adjacent intervals. Underside impunctate. 

Dimensions: 11-12 x 3-5-4 mm. 

Habitat.—North Queensland: Millaa-Millaa (F. H. Taylor). 

I am indebted to Mr. Taylor, of the Institute of Tropical Medicine, for this 
interesting addition to the Tenebrionidae. Two examples, probably the sexes, 
sent: the larger, having slightly more robust fore tarsi and hind tibiae, I take 


186 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA. NOTES AND NEW SPECIES, Vii, 


to be male. The characters are typical of Beplegenes, though the size is smaller 
than in the other three recorded species, and the sculpture is unique. This 
‘suggests the specific name from a rough resemblance to the well known Ptomaphila 
lachrymosa. Holotype and allotype in Coll. Carter. 


SEIROTRANA ACUTICOLLIS, 0. SD. 


Oblong-oval; nitid dark bronze above, nitid black beneath; antennae and 
tarsi dark. 

Head rugose-punctate, a nitid stirrup-Shaped impression on forehead, antennae 
stout, submoniliform, segments a little elongate, 3 about one and a half times 
as long as 4, 8-10 subtriangular, 11 large, pyriform. Prothorax: Apex strongly 
arcuate-emarginate, anterior angles unusually produced forward and acute; base 
truncate, sides widest and rounded in front of middle, rather strongly sinuate 
before the subrectangular (with a tendency to acute) hind angles; margins 
entire, moderately thickened; disc very minutely punctate with larger irregular 
punctures more than usually prominent; these large and sparse on medial area, 
smaller and crowded near hind angles and along margin. Scutellum transversely 
triangular. Elytra wider than prothorax at base, rather flat, raised border evident 
throughout from above, punctate-striate, the punctures in the two sutural striae 
small, elongate and close, in the others large, irregular in size and distance, the 
third, fifth, seventh and ninth intervals consisting of elongate tumuli of irregular 
length, and generally separated by a puncture, those on the third scarcely evident 
except near apex, intervals otherwise flat and impunctate and without smaller 
pustules. Underside nearly impunctate, the epipleurae only with large round 
punctures. 

Dimensions: 9-10 x 4-5 (vix) mm. 

Habitat. Queensland: Stanthorpe (EH. Sutton and Wieldt). 

Nine examples before me are readily separated from others of my Group ii 
(These PROCEEDINGS, 1925, 242) by the strongly produced front angles of prothorax, 
and the elytral tumuli occupying the full width of the intervals and which, on a 
larger scale, are of similar style to those of S. tumulosa Cart. Holotype and 
allotype in Coll. Carter. 


SEIROTRANA JOHNSTONENSIS, 0. SD. 


Oblong-ovate, dark bronze. 

Head and pronotum densely and finely punctate. Prothorax: Apex emarginate, 
the anterior angles prominent and subacute, with extreme tips blunt, base trun- 
cate; sides widely rounded, widest at middle, thence obliquely, scarcely sinuately 
narrowed to the rather widely obtuse posterior angles; lateral margins entire; 
disc with a few larger punctures irregularly scattered among the dense (cellulose) 
ground punctures. Scutellum strongly transverse. Elytra wider than prothorax 
at base, seriate-punctate, the punctures small and close near suture, larger 
externally, the striae subobsolete; intervals impunctate and flat, save for nodules; 
the fifth, seventh and ninth intervals with narrow elongate nodules more or less 
over their whole length, those on the third only on apical declivity, the suture 
and first two intervals quite flat. Pronotum and epipleurae sparsely punctate, 
abdomen finely strigose. 

Dimensions: 11 x 44 mm. 


Habitat.—Queensland: Johnstone River (EK. Mackness). 


BY H. J. CARTER. 187 


A single specimen with mutilated antennae is so distinct as to deserve 
description. In my table (These ProcreEpines, 1925, 242) it comes under ‘“elytral 
nodules longitudinal’ and can only be confused with S. parallela Germ., and 
S. bimetallica Cart., both of which are larger, with raised suture and the third 
interval raised or nodulose throughout, the former also having the pronotum little 
widened at sides. The unusually fine cellulose-punctate ground sculpture of the 
pronotum is characteristic of the new species. Holotype in Coll. Carter. 


Family CISTELIDAE. 


CHROMOMOEA SUTURALIS, Nn. SD. 

Head (including palpi and basal segments of antennae), the greater part of 
pronotum, the elytral suture (narrowly) and whole underside red; a wide medial 
vitta on pronotum and the greater part of elytra dark metallic green; antennae 
(except basal segments) dark; legs testaceous, knees of mid and post femora 
narrowly dark. Sides and apex of elytra, also sides of abdomen with light 
recumbent pubescence; head, especially clypeus, with longer upright hair. 

Head and pronotum with fine, rather close punctures; eyes widely separate 
and moderately prominent; antennae having segment 3 longer than 4, 4-10 
subequal and subconic, 11 shorter and more slender than 10. Prothorax sub- 
rectangular with front angles rounded and depressed; wider than long (2:5 x 3 
mm.), apex and base truncate, medial sulcus clearly impressed on basal half, hind 
angles rectangular. Elytra much wider than prothorax at base and nearly four 
times as long, sides parallel for the greater part, shoulders rounded; striate- 
punctate, the striae shallow, the close seriate punctures appearing as transverse 
hatching, intervals almost flat, except near apex, and themselves finely punctate 
and cross-wrinkled; legs slender, tibiae simple, hind tarsi with basal segment as 
long as the rest combined; sternal area finely punctate, abdomen nitid and 
impunctate. 

Dimensions: g, 13 x 4 mm.; 9, 16 x 5 mm. 

Habitat—New South Wales: East Dorrigo (W. Heron). 

Two examples, the sexes, taken by Mr. Heron, are very distinct from other 
described species by combination of large size, metallic elytra and vittate pronotum. 
It belongs to the violacea Cart., major Cart., and oculata Cart. group, but is easily 
distinguished by colour. Holotype and allotype in Coll. Carter. 


CHROMOMOEA METALLICA, N. SD. 


Upper side brown-bronze, glabrous; head and pronotum subopaque, elytra 
nitid metallic-bronze; antennae and palpi reddish, the former slightly infuscate 
towards apex; underside and legs dark brown, basal half of femora testaceous, 
tarsi red. 

Head less finely and closely punctate than prothorax, eyes rather prominent 
and widely separated, antennae elongate (the eighth segment opposite shoulders 
when extended backwards), 3-10 subequal in length and breadth, each feebly 
enlarged at apex, 11 lanceolate, as long as 10. Prothorax cylindric, about as long 
as wide, front angles rounded off and depressed, hind angles rectangular, densely 
and finely cellulose-punctate, without medial line. Scutellum widely oval. Elytra 
considerably wider than prothorax and two and a half times as long as it; apices 
separately rounded; striate-punctate, striae clearly impressed, seriate punctures 
uniform in size and evenly placed, slightly impinging on sides of intervals, these 


188 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA. NOTES AND NEW SPECIES, Vii, 


very lightly convex, with a single row of minute punctures on each. Underside 
glabrous, almost impunctate. 


Dimensions: 7 X 2:2 mm. 
Habitat.—North Queensland: Millaa-Millaa (F. H. Taylor). 


A single female, sent by its captor, is quite distinct from any described 
species by its glabrous, metallic surface. In general facies it is not very unlike 
C. unicolor Bates, which is, however, strongly pubescent, with much coarser 
punctures on pronotum and elytra and with more robust legs and antennae. 
Holotype in Coll. Carter. 


OMMATOPHORUS BOOPS, N. Sp. 

Upperside and underside castaneous red, nitid; sides of elytra infuscate, legs 
testaceous (dark at knees only), upper surface sparsely clad with long upright 
hairs. 

Head: The narrow triangular forehead with large punctures, not very close; 
eyes contiguous anteriorly, occupying greater part of head; antennae very stout, 
linear, segments 3-11 subequal, covered with short dense hair. Prothorax strongly 
transverse, sides rounded and converging in front, hind corners subrectangular, 
base lightly bisinuate; disc strongly, densely punctate. . Elytra slightly widest 
behind middie; striate-punctate, the striae little evident, seriate and interstitial 
punctures equally large, the intervals flat and transversely wrinkled, surface 
strongly pubescent, the long hairs most evident at sides and apical third. 


Dimensions: 6 X 2 mm. 
Habitat.—North Queensland: Millaa-Millaa (F. H. Taylor). 


A single male captured by Mr. Taylor is very like O. mastersi Macl., in 
general coloration, but differs widely* in (1) approximate eves, (2) much more 
densely punctate head and pronotum, (3) less clearly defined striae and seriate 
punctures (O. mastersi is without cross wrinkles on intervals of elytra), and 
(4) testaceous legs. Holotype in Coll. Carter. 


HYBRENIA CLERMONTIA, 0. Sp. 
Black; subnitid glabrous above, lightly pilose beneath; antennae (especially 
apical segments), palpi and tarsi red. 


Head densely punctate, eyes very prominent, rather widely separated in both 
sexes (in ¢ by about half the diameter of one eye), antennae long and tapering, 
38 much longer than 4, 4-11 successively shorter and narrower. Prothorax 
moderately convex, apex and base subtruncate, sides rounded in front, nearly 
straight on basal half, or slightly widened at the acute hind angles; disc densely 
and clearly punctate, medial line only faintly indicated near base. Elytra consider- 
ably wider than prothorax at base and more than thrice as long; striate-punctate, 
intervals wide, flat and minutely pustulose, the striae very narrow, with close 
punctures occupying their width; sternal regions with round, distant punctures, 
abdomen scarcely punctate with short, recumbent hair. 


Dimensions: 17 * 7 mm. 
Habitat.—Queensland: Clermont district (Dr. K. K. Spence). 


*In mastersi Macl., the eyes are closer in the @ than in the 2, but are clearly 
separated throughout their length. 


BY H. J. CARTER. 189 


A large species, recognizable by the combination of glabrous black, scarcely 
nitid surface, flat and pustulose elytral intervals, the pustules small and close, 
distinct under a binocular. Holotype and allotype in Coll. Carter. 


Hybrenia dentipes Cart.—Described from ¢ only, seems to be a common 
Queensland species. I have recently seen examples, including the sexes, from 
Townsville and Clermont. 


Family DryYopipar. 
STETHOLUS PAPUANUS, n. Sp. Plate iv, figures 1-3. 

Elongate-oblong; nitid black above, beneath fuscous with a thick clothing of 
short greyish hair; antennae, tibiae and tarsi reddish-brown, underside of femora 
reddish at base. 

Head, with eyes, much wider than apex of prothorax, eyes large, round and 
prominent, surface finely and closely punctate and lightly clothed with downy 
hair; antennae short (very much as in S. elongatus Cart. and Zeck), first segment 
stout, curved, thrice as long as second, these two hairy and much stouter than the 
succeeding; 3-4 cup-shaped, 5-10 transverse, more or less perfoliate, 11 pyriform. 
Prothorax: Apex truncate, base rather strongly bisinuate, narrowest at apex, 
widest near base, sides strongly and obliquely widening from apex to near base 
(subsinuate near apex through slight impression on each side), the posterior 
angles bidentate, formed by a deep subcircular excision, each tooth acute; surface 
finely punctate, sparsely clad with short hair. Scutellum large, triangular, with 
rounded sides. Elytra wider than prothorax and four times as long; shoulders 
prominent and tumid, subparallel (slightiy widest behind middle), separately 
rounded at apex; striate-punctate, the striae well marked, but not deep, seriate 
punctures finer near suture, coarse towards sides, intervals almost flat, minutely 
punctate and pilose. Prosternum very short, almost exactly as in S. elongatus 
C. & Z., with narrow, elongate process longitudinally carinate in middle, meta- 
sternum smooth and nitid in middle, closely pubescent elsewhere, abdomen with 
dense recumbent pubescence, legs very long and hairy, post tarsi with apical 
segment as long as rest combined. 

Dimensions: 6-7 x 2 (+) mm. 

Habitat—North-east Papua: Mt. Lamington, 1,300 feet (C. T. McNamara). 


Seven examples sent from the South Australian Museum, amongst other 
Papuan Coleoptera. The species is a close ally of S. elongatus from New South 
Wales; its notable distinctions are (1) shape of prothorax, and (2) coarser seriate 
sculpture of the elytra. In elongatus the pronotum has a strong groove which 
separates a sort of anterior lobe; in papwanus this groove is represented by a 
feeble depression towards each side near apex, forming a light sinuation at the 
margin, but the general outline is similar except for the cur fous, jouchetauelse hind 
angles. Holotype in the South Australian Museum. 


SIMSONIA DEANEI, n. sp. Plate iv, figures 4, 5. 
Nitid dark bronze above, beneath fuscous at sides, dark in the middle; antennae 
testaceous, the apical segments dark. 
Head and pronotum rather closely pitted with round punctures, pronotum 
bilobed, each lobe very convex and separated by a nearly straight transverse 
depression at anterior third, forming a light sinuation at sides; lateral margins 


190 AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA. NOTES AND NEW SPECIES, Vii. 


narrowly horizontal, their anterior angles rounded off. Scutellum large, sub- 
circular. Elytra wider than prothorax at base, lightly obovate, margins not 
explanate or perceptibly serrate; striate-punctate, the striae well marked, the 
seriate punctures large, round and of uniform size, placed about half the 
diameter of one apart, intervals transversely wrinkled and minutely punctate. 
Prosternum and metasternum sparsely and coarsely punctate, the prosternal 
process wider and shorter than in S. purpurea and S. wilsoni, with raised margins 
and a distinct medial carina. 

Dimensions: 2 (+) mm. long. 

Habitat—Queensland: Tambourine Mountain (C. Deane). 

A pair, sent by their captor, show a species distinguished from its allies, 
S. purpurea and S. wilsoni, by its wider form, especially of the prothorax, the 
different elytral sculpture, and very different prosternal process, this wider and 
carinate. Holotype in Coll. Carter. 


AUSTROLIMNIUS LURIDUS, C. & Z., Var. SUFFUSUS, n. var. 

Amongst the examples of A. politus King from the Allyn River we find four 
examples that differ from the typical politus very much as A. Juridus does in 
form and sculpture, but are distinct from both politus and luridus in markings. 
On the elytra the pale markings largely overrun the whole area, leaving undefined 
longitudinal patches and a moderately wide lateral area black. This may ultimately 
be found to be a distinct species, and at least is worth a name. 


HXPLANATION OF PLATE IV. 
Stetholus papuanus Cart. 
Sternal process of S. papwanus. 
Antenna of S. papuanus. 
Simsonia deanei Cart. 
Sternal process of S. deanei. 
Stigmodera imitator Cart. 
Beplegenes lachrymosa Cart. 
Byallius andersoni Cart. 


CON BDWIP wwe 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE IV. 


E.H.Zeck. Del. 


Australian Coleoptera. 


REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OHNOCHROMIDAE (LEPIDOPTERA). III*. 
By A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.E.S. 
[Read 21st May, 1930.] 


Genus 25. OENOCHROMA. 
Gn., Lep., ix, p. 184; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 40. 


Face with short anterior cone of scales. Palpi moderately long, obliquely 
ascending; second joint thickened, with loosely appressed hairs; terminal joint 
short, obtuse, porrect. Antennae of ¢ unipectinate, towards apex simple. Thorax 
stout; densely hairy beneath. Femora hairy. Fore tibiae sometimes with an 
apical hook. Forewings with 5 from middle of cell, 9 and 10 long stalked, 9 
anastomosing with 8 forming a long and extremely narrow areole (probably 
the connection formed by the basal part of 9 not always developed), 11 free 
but closely approximated to both i0 and 12. Hindwings with 3 and 4 closely 
approximated at origin or connate, 5 from middle of cell, 6 and 7 closely approxi- 
mated at origin or connate, 12 closely approximated to middle third of cell, thence 
diverging. Type O. vinaria Gn. 

A characteristically Australian genus of moderate size showing little 
variation in structure, except that a hook is developed on the fore tibiae in the 
four species, pallida, privata, polyspila and cycnoptera. This should not lead to 
generic separation, as these species are normal in all other respects, and do not 
seem to be specially closely allied. O. vinaria which has no tibial hook is very 
closely allied to pallida. The tarsi are spinulose except in O. infantilis. 


Key to Species. 


iP eindwinssswithstenmensstralohthworsmMearly ’SOv = Sai - ele siie re) ewcioineie err eerees 2 
IShinCh ISS WA. LEANER INOS GeeuleMe  sobooocesoodeobdboonouaoDdUoCOKOLOOO 7 
PROMO wineSmawathtLaplCesmshOrtlyamralCakCwa scyeisic ci ciciees si ietedeas onion lemon nee inate 3 
MOonewines witheaplicesenot fallcaes “Seance so stere cle sss = oe eres cleus) clined oieneiener sel tel 4 
Bo dOee Tilonea Wwrilaowre Byoyeeyl Inowle “oj osondvaceoucabacognoeeodcoocagnoe vinaria. 159 
Morepubigenwilth tapi calhook ie, ot ekcesie + aieisi aie ave! osays aye speteebecceate sane pallida. 160 
4. Fore tibiae with apical hook; wings with postmedian transverse band best marked 
OMMBUTTE SLES TO Sig ee custeseesah NAN es RELY ito Mo. nd ato arialiessa ahd sallnte eoayreycailal 5 gctah i aS privata. 163 
Fore tibiae without apical hook; wings without postmedian band ........... 5 
5. Forewings without trace of antemedian line .................... orthodesma. 161 
Horewinss) with) 7a; dotted antemedian) dime! Ss s2 532 i. les oe 2 echoes iene ee 6 
6. Wings and markings more or less tinged with crimson ........ phyllomorpha. 162 
WAS Al aO we Eloy Gehaso Whilst GoogungonoasbooenooncopGonccs subustaria. 64 
eee puEMiTa GaWVAI S Soest O VIN OGM Weaces cue crste vier sectenieh <ircyfaiie Corie er ive) sria (oh wise voy 6th sy ni olson roneealvaerteyal Milevedane manaens 8 
iEundwinesvaneledealtorbenieathy mai calle siint = ters) cia) lel oi oll-liol eclienteitenetcnt el oterienenonenemene 16 
Gy LOGIN AbOIS FRAO Cle) NSCS NABHTNENC) coo abodenoduoeponopoouooobdooUKdeodds 9 
INGEN MLNS INOW AUN obo sodauoud od Demo OeUdoondGoodososeDouOO bode NS 10 


* Continued from these PROCEEDINGS, lv, 1930, 40. 


192 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii, 


9. Forewings with an oblique yellow postmedian line ............... cerasiplaga. 165 
Forewings with postmedian line very obscure, whitish ............ infantilis. 173 

10. Forewings with three oblique reddish lines ..................... ochripennata. 166 
OG EWAN ES Ob SOn eet tear ey rele tele cite el Ale SNe me ial ea re Oat ic clin teat eee etree eleW net ee dea tag 11 

Hil, QWVNOO EHS Hl ANT COUIS AWiauloisla SOOUS o 4 clouccccudaobobucdnuboobddos polyspila. 167 
IWHNE Ss WAN OWE WITEISHE SPOT SIS iN iin ley ieee ste ro lsiceilet aoe) s/o) ey is'eat Scntdrs wats neflems tra teesueet Rome tore aes 12 

12. Forewings with a whitish-edged subterminal line ......................... 13 
Horewanes awithout i sulbternaimale imei er-mes sos oe cus eee ee cayenne crete cicienenenenaiene 14 

13. Hindwings with transverse hyaline discal mark .................... turneri. 170 
Hindwings without hyaline discal mark .................+0+0.2000. lissoscia. 171 

14. Forewings with white antemedian and postmedian lines .............. alpina. 172 
MoOrewine Siawalthouts swiilteye line Site meus s cists ts cle suc ace re cues tebe eo ciere ene eee eee ais) 

15. Hindwings grey with antemedian and median transverse lines ..... decolorata.. 168 
lehhoohwnhaetsy \waaue. ‘ighnoObhe INNES ooccobodboognadGbod obo doco bob sau nS cycnoptera. 169 

UO, \Wobarets) Syimligal lonyeylbave, Chig~oeNl sameness) Sobdoagogdawoodnoocdbundacoes quadrigramma. 175 
Wings without hyaline discal marks ................2..2000200006 vetustaria. 174 


159. OENOCHROMA VINARIA. 


Gn., Lep., ix, p. 185, Pl. 7, f. 2—Monoctenia decora W1k., Char. Undescr. Lep., 
p. 76.—Monoctenia vinaria Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, p. 1206. 


Usually at once distinguishable by its crimson coloration, but some examples 
have pale-grey wings. These may be distinguished from pallida by the dark 
oblique line of forewings as well as by the crimson cilia. Mr. D. Goudie bred 
this species from larvae feeding on Grevillea sp. 


North Queensland: Herberton. Queensland: Nambour, Caloundra, Brisbane, 
Toowoomba. New South Wales: Ebor, Sydney, Jervis Bay, Mt. Kosciusko (5,000 
feet). Victoria: Melbourne, Beaconsfield, Birchip, Ararat. South Australia: Mt. 
Lofty, Adelaide. Western Australia: Perth, Dundas, Cunderdin. 


160. Or&NOCHROMA PALLIDA. 


Warr., Novit. Zool., 1898, p. 231—Monoctenia pallidula Luc., Proc. Roy. Soc. 
Qld., 1898, p. 69 (published in 1899). 


3g. 38-46 mm. 9. 44-50 mm. Head and thorax pale-ochreous-grey, in 2 pinkish- 
tinged; lower margin of face crimson-fuscous. Palpi 2; crimson-fuscous; lower 
surface and base whitish. Antennae crimson-fuscous, apical half whitish; pectina- 
tions in ¢ 6, apical two-fifths to one-half simple. Abdomen pale-ochreous-grey, 
in 9 pinkish-tinged; beneath whitish. Legs whitish-ochreous, largely suffused 
with ochreous, and on anterior femora with dark-crimson, apices of all joints 
crimson-fuscous; fore tibiae with an anterior apical hook. Forewings elongate- 
triangular, costa straight almost to apex, apex acute, slightly produced, termen 
strongly sinuate beneath apex, apex bowed above middle, more strongly so in 
2, oblique; pale-ochreous-grey, in ? pinkish-tinged; costa coarsely strigulated with 
blackish or dark-fuscous; a very faint, pale, slightly outwardly curved, transverse 
line at one-fifth; a subcostal discal spot before middle, dark-fuscous or brown 
with hyaline centre; a straight whitish-ochreous line edged posteriorly with 
ochreous-brown from costa shortly before apex to two-thirds dorsum; a dark-brown 
or dark-fuscous marginal lunule on termen beneath apex; cilia ochreous-brown, 
apices sometimes fuscous. Hindwings with apex rounded, termen nearly straight; 
as forewings; postmedian line only slightly beyond middle, straight; a slight 
reddish-fuscous suffusion, in 9 larger and pale-centred, on middle of costa. Under- 
side similar; forewings with a circular purple-fuscous blotch on dorsal end of 
antemedian line; lines reduced to fuscous or reddish-fuscous dots. 


» 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 193 


In the greyer forms of O. vinaria the postmedian lines of both wings are 
dark-edged anteriorly. Any doubt as to the distinctness of this species is resolved 
by the presence of the fore tibial hook. 

North Australia: Melville Island. Queensland: Brisbane, Toowoomba. New 
South Wales: Broken Hill. Victoria: Ararat. Western Australia: Perth. 


161. OENOCHROMA ORTHODESMA. 

Monoctenia orthodesma lLow., Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 1894, p. 84.— 
Oenochroma erubescens Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 42. 

3, @. 5456 mm. Head and thorax pale-ochreous-grey. Palpi 13; pale-ochreous- 
grey sometimes pinkish-tinged. Antennae pale-ochreous-grey, towards base pinkish- 
tinged; pectinations in ¢ 6, apical third simple. Abdomen grey-whitish faintly 
pinkish-tinged; beneath ochreous-whitish. Legs pale-ochreous, apices. of all joints 
pinkish. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight almost to apex, apex 
pointed, termen bowed above middle, oblique; pale-ochreous-grey; costal edge 
sometimes ochreous towards base; no antemedian line; sometimes a median, sub- 
costal, ochreous, discal dot; postmedian line from costa near apex to two- 
thirds dorsum, straight, ochreous, edged anteriorly with pale-yellow, slender 
towards costa, more pronounced towards dorsum; cilia ochreous. Hindwings with 
apex rounded, termen straight; colour as forewings, but tinged with pink at 
apex; postmedian line straight, from three-fifths costa not reaching dorsum. 
Underside whitish-ochreous; forewings with a fuscous-crimson tornal blotch. 

Queensland: Brisbane, Southport. New South Wales: Sydney, Jervis Bay. 


162. OENOCHROMA PHYLLOMORPHA. 

Monoctenia phyllomorpha Low., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1899, p. 86.— 
Monoctophora stillans Luc., Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 1900, p. 44—Monoctenia subcarnea 
Warr., Novit. Zool., 1902, p. 348. 

6, 9. 40-44 mm. Head and thorax pale-ochreous-grey usually suffused with 
pinkish. Palpi 13; pinkish above, whitish with some pinkish irroration beneath. 
Antennae ochreous-whitish, more or less suffused with pinkish; pectinations in 
both sexes 6, apical fourth simple. Abdomen ochreous-whitish. Legs ochreous- 
whitish with some pinkish irroration. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa 
straight to near apex, apex acutely pointed, termen slightly sinuate beneath 
apex, nearly straight in J, slightly bowed in 9; pale-ochreous-grey, more or less 
suffused with pinkish, rarely with fine fuscous transverse strigulae; markings 
rosy, fuscous-rosy, or fuscous; antemedian line from one-third costa to one-third 
dorsum, but usually obsolete towards costa, often interrupted, or reduced to dots; 
no discal dot; postmedian from beneath costa near apex to two-thirds dorsum, 
slightly sinuate, sometimes interrupted or reduced to dots; cilia fuscous, bases 
ochreous. Hindwings with apex rounded, termen straight; as forewings but 
without antemedian line. Underside of both wings grey-whitish with fuscous 
discal dot and postmedian line. \ 

The impectinate antennae are alike in both sexes; an unusual character. 

North Queensland: Cairns, Townsville. Queensland: Brisbane. New South 
Wales: Newcastle. 


163. OENOCHROMA PRIVATA. 
Hypographa privata Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxi, p. 286—Monoctenia hypo- 
taeniaria Gn., Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., 1864, p. 15.—Monoctenia subustaria Meyr., Proc. 
Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, p. 1209, nec WI1k. ee 


194 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii, 


6, 9. 34-52 mm. Head and thorax pale-grey. Palpi in § 12, in 9 2; pale-grey. 
Antennae ochreous-grey; pectinations in ¢ 6, apical fourth simple. Abdomen pale- 
grey. Legs grey, more or less mixed with whitish; anterior tibiae with apical 
hook. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight almost to apex, apex acute, 
slightly produced, termen sinuate beneath apex, bowed in middle, oblique; pale- 
grey; some fine fuscous costal strigulae; first line and discal dot obsolete; a post- 
median band, sometimes containing a median darker line, edged anteriorly by an 
oblique outwardly curved series of fine fuscous dots from midcosta to one-third 
dorsum, posteriorly by a similar line from three-fourths costa to three-fourths 
dorsum, band sometimes faintly ferruginous; cilia pale-grey, apices sometimes 
suffused or barred with fuscous. Hindwings with apex rounded, termen straight; 
as forewings; postmedian band more distinct, ferruginous or suffused with fuscous. 
Underside similar, but postmedian band much more distinct and ferruginous on 
both wings, dilated towards costa, narrowed towards dorsum, posterior edge 
irregularly dentate. 

New South Wales: Sydney, Jervis Bay, Katoomba, Mittagong. South 
Australia: Penola. 


164. OENOCHROMA SUBUSTARIA. 

Phallaria subustaria W1k., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxi, 283.—Monoctophora caprina 
Luc., Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 1900, 145. 

3, 2. 36-42 mm. Head and thorax pale-grey. Palpi in ¢ 13, in 2 2; pale-grey. 
Antennae pale-grey; pectinations in ¢ 6, apical fourth simple. Abdomen pale- 
grey, beneath whitish. Legs fuscous, more or less mixed with whitish, except 
anterior pair; posterior pair mostly whitish. Forewings elongate-triangular, 
costa straight almost to apex, apex acute, termen sinuate beneath apex, bowed 
above middle; more so in Q, oblique; pale-grey with sparsely scattered fuscous 
scales; some short fuscous strigulae on costa; antemedian line at one-third, repre- 
sented by three dark-fuscous dots, beneath costa, on cubital and on anal vein; 
discal dot obsolete; second line represented by a series of dark-fuscous dots, 
slightly sinuate, from costa shortly before apex to two-thirds dorsum; cilia pale- 
grey, sometimes pinkish-tinged, apices suffused or barred with fuscous. MHind- 
wings with apex rounded, termen straight; as forewings but without ante- 
median line; postmedian line at three-fifths, nearly straight, becoming obsolete 
towards costa. Underside pale-grey; forewings with dotted postmedian line; 
hindwings with median discal dot, dotted postmedian line, and in ¢ with a small, 
subapical, dark-iuscous or reddish fuscous, subapical blotch. 

Superficially similar above to O. privata, but easily distinguished by the under- 
side, in addition to the absence of a fore tibial hook. 

Queensland: Brisbane, Stradbroke Is. New South Wales: Jervis Bay. 


165. OENOCHROMA CERASIPLAGA. 
Oenochroma cerasiplaga Warr., Novit. Zool., 1914, 425.—Oenochroma artia 
Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1922, 292. 
Western Australia: Perth, Dardanup. 


166. OENOCHROMA OCHRIPENNATA. 

Phallaria ? ochripennata Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxi, 284.—Diamuna gastro- 
pacharia WI1K., ibid., 289—Monoctenia ochripennata Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 
1889, 1205. 

Western Australia: 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 195 


167. OENOCHROMA POLYSPILA. 


Monoctenia polyspila Low., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1897, 263.—Oenochroma 
guttilinea Warr., Novit. Zool., 1903, 260.—Oenochroma polyspila Prout, Gen. Insect., 
Oenochrom., Pl. 1, f. 9. 

g. 32-38 mm.. Head crimson-grey. Palpi 12; grey. Antennae pale-crimson- 
grey becoming crimson-fuscous towards base; pectinations 6, ochreous, apical third 
simple. Thorax pale-grey tinged with crimson and ochreous, darker anteriorly. 
Abdomen ochreous-whitish, with slight crimson irroration; beneath whitish. Legs 
whitish irrorated, and apices of joints annulated, with fuscous. Forewings elongate- 
triangular, costa straight, apex acute, termen rounded, slightly sinuate beneath 
apex, oblique; pale-ochreous-grey rosy-tinged; some scattered basal spots, and four 
oblique lines of spots white irrorated with fuscous, broadly margined with fuscous 
crimson; first line from one-third costa to one-fourth dorsum; second from two- 
thirds costa to mid-dorsum; third and fourth equidistant, parallel; a short fuscous 
streak on termen beneath apex; cilia ochreous, on apex fuscous. Hindwings with 
termen slightly rounded; as forewings, but with only three lines of dots. Under- 
side whitish; forewings with a postmedian fuscous line terminating in a subdorsal 
fuscous blotch; hindwings with a smaller fuscous blotch on costa at two-thirds. 

@. 40-42 mm. Colour uniform grey-pink; spots on wings much smaller, often 
clear white, with very fine fuscous margins. Antennae simple. 

North Queensland: Cape York, Townsville. 


168. OENGCHRCMA DECOLORATA. 

Warr., Novit. Zool., 1896, 354 

Head and thorax grey. Abdomen pale-grey. Forewings grey with fine darker 
irroration; antemedian represented by a short reddish line from costa; discal 
spot dark-grey, indistinct, followed by an obscure oblique central shade; post- 
median line pale-ferruginous edged anteriorly with whitish; cilia purplish. Hind- 
wings with termen rounded; grey; an antemedian purplish transverse line; a 
median ferruginous transverse line, becoming purplish towards costa, edged 
anteriorly with whitish. Underside of forewings whitish, with a postmedian 
series of dots on veins, and a small purple tornal blotch; of hindwings white 
along dorsum, termen broadly suffused with ferruginous. 

I do not know this species. The above is a translation of Warren’s description. 

North Queensland: Cedar Bay near Cooktown. 


169. OENOCHROMA CYCNOPTERA. 

Monoctenia cycnoptera Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Auwst., 1894, 84.—Oenochroma 
simplex Warr., Novit. Zool., 1897, 206. 

6. 36-42 mm. 9°. 52 mm. Head and thorax pale-grey. Palpi 2; pale-grey. 
Antennae whitish-ochreous; unipectinate in both sexes, apical two-fifths simple, 
pectinations in ¢ 4, in 9 13. Abdomen pale-grey. Legs grey-whitish; anterior 
pair pale-grey; anterior tibiae with strong apical hook. Forewings narrowly 
triangular, costa straight almost to apex, apex pointed, in 9 acute, termen sinuate 
beneath apex, bowed above middle, strongly oblique; pale-grey, with sparse dark- 
fuscous irroration or strigulae; a very faint oblique line from three-fourths dorsum 
towards apex, but scarcely reaching half-way, faintly ochreous; cilia pale-brownish 
or pale-ochreous with dark-fuscous bars opposite veins, and dark-fuscous for a 
short distance beneath apex. Hindwings with termen gently rounded; whitish 


196 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii, 


with slight dark-fuscous irroration towards termen and dorsum; cilia whitish. 
Underside whitish-grey; forewings with a fuscous discal mark and a fuscous or 
reddish blotch above tornus. 

South Australia: Cardilho Downs, Lake Mulligan. Western Australia: 
Merredin. North-west Australia: Roeburne. 


170. OENOCHROMA TURNERI. 


Monoctenia turneri Luc., Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 1892, 82. 

d, 9. 45-48 mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi 14; grey, towards base reddish- 
tinged. Antennae grey; pectinations in gj 3. Abdomen grey; beneath purple-grey 
with transverse red bars. Legs grey with some fuscous and reddish irroration. 
Forewings elongate-triangular, costa bisinuate, apex obtusely pointed, termen 
bowed above middle, strongly oblique; grey with scanty fuscous irroration or 
strigulation; a short, strongly outwardly oblique white line from one-third costa, 
and a similar line on costa at two-thirds; a suffused darker oblique shade 
from one-third costa to near base of dorsum; a median, subcostal, transverse, red, 
discal mark; between this and apex a suffusedly darker area containing two or 
three red longitudinal streaks, a fine dentate line from a white mark on two-thirds 
costa to two-thirds dorsum; a subterminal fuscous line edged posteriorly by a 
white line, slightly wavy; cilia dark-grey. Hindwings with termen rounded; colour 
and cilia as forewings; a median, discal, transverse, bisinuate, hyaline mark; 
a slightly waved fuscous transverse line beyond middle; a transverse dark-grey 
shade before discal mark, and two similar but interrupted shades in terminal 
area. Underside of forewings pale-grey with slight fuscous strigulation; a trans- 
verse grey shade before middle; a dark-fuscous short outwardly oblique line 
followed by a small triangular spot on costa near apex; two incomplete, sinuate, 
interrupted, fuscous subterminal lines; a suffused dark-grey tornal blotch; of 
hindwings similar, but suffused with reddish; two longitudinal red streaks near 
tornus. 

I have described this from the type in my collection and a @ in that of 
Mr. W. B. Barnard, and I know of a third example. It is near O. lissoscia which, 
however, lacks the dentate postmedian line on forewings, the hyaline discal mark 
on hindwings, and the red streaks. 

Queensland: Brisbane. 


171. OENOCHROMA LISSOSCIA. 
Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1922, 292. 
Queensland: National Park (3,500 feet). 


172. OENOCHROMA ALPINA, Nl. SD. 


Oenochroma alpina Goldfinch MS. 

2. 75 mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 13; fuscous. Antennae reddish- 
fuscous. Abdomen fuscous. Legs reddish-fuscous. Forewings triangular, costa 
straight, apex rather acutely pointed, termen longer than dorsum, rounded, slightly 
sinuate beneath apex, strongly oblique; fuscous; costal edge narrowly whitish, 
strigulated with fuscous; a rather broad whitish line from two-fifths costa, bent 
inwards beneath costa, thence narrowly curved outwards, thence obliquely inwards 
to one-third dorsum, with a slight angle outwards on anal vein; a whitish line 
from costa shortly before apex, at first narrow but gradually becoming broader, 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 197 


slightly outwardly curved, and strongly oblique to two-thirds dorsum; cilia 
fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; red; a rather broad, whitish sub- 
terminal line from three-fourths dorsum, becoming less distinct towards costa; 
a small fuscous tornal suffusion prolonged along anal vein; cilia reddish, on 
tornus and dorsum grey. Underside similar, but disc of forewings suffused with 
red except towards costa and termen, and without first line; hindwings reddish- 
fuscous. 

A very fine and distinct species. Type in Coll. Goldfinch. 

New South Wales: Mt. Kosciusko (5,000 feet), in December; one specimen. 


173. OENOCHROMA INFANTILIS. 


Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 42. 

6. 30 mm. 92. 32 mm. Head and thorax whitish tinged with greenish. 
Palpi 12; whitish with some crimson irroration. Antennae whitish; pectinations 
in ¢ 10, apical two-fifths simple. Abdomen and legs whitish. Forewings rather 
broadly triangular, costa straight almost to apex, apex pointed, termen nearly 
straight, oblique; greenish-white; an obscure, whitish, outwardly oblique line 
from one-third dorsum about half-way across disc; a second, similar, straight 
line from two-thirds dorsum almost to apex; a similar, parallel, subterminal 
line; cilia crimson-fuscous, on apex, tornus, and dorsum whitish. Hindwings 
with termen only slightly rounded; as forewings, but only postmedian line 
present. Underside whitish. 

North Australia: Darwin, Melville Is. North Queensland: Chillagoe. 


174. OENOCHROMA VETUSTARIA. 


Balliace vetustaria Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxi, 1860, 290—Monoctenia diggle- 
saria Gn., Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., (4) iv, 1864, 15; Meyrick, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 
1889, 1207. 

2, 52-54 mm. Head pale-grey. Palpi 13; whitish with a few crimson scales. 
Antennae grey. Thorax brownish-grey; anterior third pale-grey, the two colours 
separated sharply on a straight transverse line. Abdomen grey with slight 
brownish and dark fuscous irroration. Legs whitish irrorated with brown and 
fuscous. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight almost to apex, apex 
acute, produced, termen sinuate, bowed above middle, costal half obtusely dentate; 
grey with a few dark-fuscous scales, suffused with brownish except on a pale 
oblique band from dorsum before middle extending more than half-way to costa; 
a pale straight line from two-thirds dorsum almost to apex; cilia fuscous. Hind- 
wings with termen acutely angled on vein 4, wavy; as forewings, but pale band is 
basal, and pale line transverse, slightly beyond middle. Underside of forewings 
suffused with brownish towards tornus; a transversely oval, annular, fuscous- 
brown, discal spot; a short fuscous-brown band from mid-dorsum not reaching 
middle of disc; postmedian line indicated by a few fuscous dots; of hindwings, 
grey irrorated with fuscous-brown, and suffused with brownish towards termen. 

Though this very distinct species has a wide distribution it has been rarely 
taken. 

Queensland: Nambour, Brisbane. Tasmania: Bothwell, Launceston. 


175. OENOCHROMA QU-ADRIGRAMMA. 
Galanageia quadrigramma Luc., Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 1900, 148. 


198 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ili, 


oS. 48-52 mm. Head white with a few fuscous or brownish scales; face brown. 
Palpi 13; purple mixed with whitish and fuscous, basal joint brown. Antennae 
fuscous with white bars towards base, towards apex whitish-ochreous; pectinations 
in ¢ 6, apical one-fifth simple. Thorax brown. Abdomen brown, on mid-dorsum 
with bars of fuscous mixed with white. Legs fuscous-brown suffused and irrorated 
with white. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight, towards apex sinuate, 
apex pointed, termen strongly bowed above middle, obtusely dentate below middle; 
brown, sometimes with darker strigulae; costa strigulated with fuscous mixed with 
white; no antemedian line; a large, oval or reniform, subcostal, discal spot 
beyond middle; whitish, with a few darker scales, containing a hyaline crescent 
on its anterior margin, with a hyaline dot above it, both of these edged posteriorly 
with fuscous; a nearly straight but slightly waved pale line from costa shortly 
before apex to dorsum, shortly after middle; cilia brown, on tornal half of termen 
crimson-fuscous, bases white. Hindwings with termen strongly angled on vein 3, 
slightly curved above angle, with a slight angle beneath apex, more strongly 
dentate towards tornus; colour, discal spot, and cilia as forewings; the discal 
spot interrupts a’pale transverse antemedian line edged anteriorly with fuscous. 
Underside similar. 

A very distinct species, but allied to O. vetustaria. 

Queensland: Coomera near Southport (R. Illidge. Dr. Lucas’s type now in 
South Australian Museum), National Park (3,000 to 3,500 feet) in March. Three 
specimens. 


Genus 26. ANTICVENTIA. 

Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 43. 

Face smooth, not projecting. Tongue well-developed. Palpi short (under 1), 
porrect; second joint loosely rough-haired beneath; terminal joint small. Antennae 
short (under 3); in ¢ imparipectinate, the inner pectinations short, outer long, 
extreme apex simple. Thorax stout, densely hairy beneath. Femora hairy. Tarsi 
finely spinulose. Forewings with 11 free, 10 and 9 long-stalked, their common 
stalk anastomosing with 8, 10 soon separating, 9 anastomosing for a longer distance 
(1 2), but more commonly 10 is free, and the portion of 9 connecting 10 and 8 
is not developed (4 g, 3 9), so that 10 appears free, and 9 appears stalked with 
8. Hindwings with 8 and 4 somewhat approximated, 5 from above middle of 
cell (about three-fifths from 4), 6 and 7 connate or short-stalked, 12 approximated 
to cell from one-fourth to middle. 

Monotypical. Allied to Oenochroma, but differing in the antennae, palpi, 
and some details of the neuration. 


176. ANTICTENIA PUNCTIUNCULIS. 
Monoctenia punctiunculus* Luc., Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 1892, 84.—Oenochroma 
leucospila Warr., Novit. Zool., 1898, 230. 
6. 40-44 mm. 9. 44-55 mm. Head and thorax pale-grey often reddish-tinged. 
Palpi less than 1; pale-grey sometimes reddish-tinged. Antennae whitish-grey; in 


* This is an evident misprint. Lucas intended to call this species M. punctiunculis 
(ablative plural), the Monoctenia with the little dots. Compare Leucania labeculis Luc. 
described on the same page. Both Lucas and Warren fixed on the same character for 
their names, that is, the whitish spots in the dark blotches on the underside of the 
hindwings. 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 199 


& bipectinated to apex, inner row 1, outer row 5. Abdomen pale-grey, sometimes 
reddish-tinged, with sparse fuscous irroration. Legs pale reddish or grey. Fore- 
wings elongate-triangular, costa straight almost to apex, apex obtusely pointed, 
termen slightly bowed above middle, strongly oblique; pale grey, often reddish- 
tinged, with some fuscous strigulae; basal area to antemedian line darker, ante- 
median line from one-third costa to one-third dorsum, outwardly curved, slightly 
dentate, fuscous-brown or brown; a median, subcostal, fuscous, discal dot; post- 
median line from costa near apex to two-thirds dorsum, nearly straight, fuscous 
or brown with pale anterior edge; a subapical fuscous or brownish spot; cilia 
reddish-grey or fuscous. Hindwings with termen only slightly rounded; as fore- 
wings but without antemedian line; a transverse line just beyond middle. Under- 
side of forewings similar, but without antemedian line; of hindwings similar, with 
in addition a small reddish apical blotch containing two whitish marginal spots. 

North Queensland: Townsville. Queensland: Duaringa, Yeppoon, Brisbane, 
Toowoomba. 


Genus 27. CARTHAEA. 

Wik., Cat. Brit. Mus., xiv, 1314; Prout, Gen. Insect.. Oenochrom., p. 44. 

Face flat, but clothed with dense hairs so as to appear projecting. Palpi 
rather long, obliquely ascending; second joint clothed with long hairs; terminal 
joint rather long, cylindrical, obtuse. Antennae slightly over 4; in ¢ bipectinate 
to apex, pectinations long. Thorax stout, hairy with a slight posterior crest, 
densely hairy beneath. Femora and tibiae densely hairy. Tarsi strongly spinulose. 
Forewings with 7 and § stalked, 9 and 10 long-stalked, areole not developed (owing 
to disconnection of 8 and 9), 11 free. Hindwings with cell about 4, 3 and 4 
separate, 5 from somewhat above middle of cell, 7 from before upper angle well 
separated from 6, 12 somewhat approximated to cell as far as middle, gradually 
diverging. Frenulum strongly developed. 

There is only one species which is confined to Western Australia. This 
magnificent insect, from its large size, and ample wings bearing large ocelli, 
somewhat resembles the Saturniadae. 


177. CARTHAEA SATURNIOIDES. 

Wik., Cat. Brit. Mus., xiv, 1314. 

6, 2. 80-98 mm. Head and thorax grey with fine white irroration; face 
ochreous-brown. Palpi 24; pale grey, second joint fringed with dense ochreous- 
brown hairs. Antennae grey; pectinations in ¢ 10, ochreous-brown. Abdomen 
ochreous-brown; dorsum, except margins, fuscous grey. Forewings triangular, 
costa gently arched, apex subrectangular, termen rounded; grey or brownish- 
grey, finely irrorated with whitish; a broad white line, edged posteriorly with 
dark grey, from one-fourth costa, outwardly oblique and sinuate, with a strong 
posterior tooth beneath middle, thence inwardly sinuate to one-fourth dorsum; 
a median, circular, subcostal ocellus, brown edged with blackish and containing 
a slender whitish lunule, its extremities directed posteriorly; a broad white line, 
edged anteriorly with dark grey, from three-fourths costa, crenulate, outwardly 
curved, sinuate towards tornus, on which it ends; cilia brownish-grey. Hindwings 
with termen gently rounded; whitish-grey, apical area widely suffused with 
crimson; a large, circular, median ocellus, blackish, containing a fine incomplete 
bluish ring, excentric outwardly, with a short line of the same colour on its 
inner side; a curved line posterior to this, crimson becoming brown towards 


Q 


> @ AT ly, “Sr 
QQ > 


wi(LIiBRAR 


Ui Sh- 


a 


€ 
eh 


wr 
i 


GICATS 
ew ON 
%B 
cs 


. 


vexst 


|= 


200 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii, 


dorsum, edged posteriorly with a whitish line; a transversely elongate crimson 
blotch towards apex; cilia grey, towards apex of wing crimson-brown. Underside 
whitish-grey; a large posterior crimson suffusion on forewings; ocelli of both 
wings as on upper surface of hindwings; a postmedian line crimson in forewings, 
brown in hindwings, in both edged posteriorly by a white line. 

Western Australia: Waroona, Collie, Guildford, Jandikot. 


Genus 28. GASTROPHORA. 


Gn., Lep., ix, 187; Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1202; Prout, Gen. 
Insect., Oenochrom., p. 44. 

Face shortly rough-haired. Palpi moderate, porrect; second joint with long 
rough hairs beneath; terminal joint short. Antennae in ¢ more than 3, bipectinate 
to apex, pectinations long; in 92 less than 3, shortly bipectinate to apex. Thorax 
stout, hairy beneath. Abdomen stout, disproportionately long. Femora hairy. 
Posterior tibiae smooth. Tarsi very minutely spinulose. Forewings with 6 
separate, connate, or stalked with 7, 8, 9 and 10 stalked, 9 anastomosing with 8, 
forming a narrow areole, 11 free. Hindwings with cell about one-half in 4, three- 
fifths in 9, 5 from well above middle of cell (two-thirds), 6 and 7 short-stalked, 
12 approximated to cell to three-fourths, gradually diverging. 

Contains only one species, which is large, very distinct and confined to 
eastern Australia. Structurally its chief peculiarities are the unduly long 
abdomen, difference of wing-shape in the two sexes, and stalking of 6 and 7 of 
hindwings. 


178. GASTROPHORA HENRICARIA. 


Gn., Lep., ix, 187, Pl. xxi, f. 4; Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1202; 
Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., PI. i, f. 7. 

Queensland: Brisbane, Mt. Tambourine, Stanthorpe. New South Wales: Glen 
Innes. Victoria: Melbourne, Beaconsfield, Gisborne. South Australia: Mt. Lofty. 


Genus 29. ARHODIA. 


Gn., Lep., ix, p. 185; Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1201; Prout, Gen. 
Insect., Oenochrom., p. 45. 

Face smooth, not projecting. Palpi short, ascending, shortly rough-haired, 
terminal joint minute. Antennae of ¢ bipectinate, pectinations long; of 2 shortly 
bipectinate, but not to apex. Thorax stout, hairy beneath. Femora hairy. Fore 
tibiae with subapical hair-tuft on flexor surface. Posterior tibiae without middle 
spurs. Tarsi not spinulose. Forewings without areole (owing to disconnection of 
8 and 9), 9 and 10 stalked, 11 free. Hindwings with 5 from above middle of 
cell (three-fifths to two-thirds), 6 and 7 closely approximated at origin, almost 
connate, 12 approximated to cell from one-fourth to middle, gradually diverging. 

There is only one species, which varies much in size and colour, but is easily 
recognized. 


179. ARHODIA LASIOCAMPARIA. 


Gn., Lep., ix, p. 186; Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1202.—Arhodia 
retractaria, Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxi, 282.—Nigasa subpurpurea WIk., ibid., 287.— 
Arhodia semirosea Wlk., Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., (3) i, 267.—Monoctenia ozora 
Swin., Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (7) ix, 1902, 167. 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 201 


North Queensland: Cape York, Cairns. Queensland: Clermont, Brisbane, 
Toowoomba, Charleville, Stanthorpe. New South Wales: Sydney. Victoria: 
Melbourne, Beaconsfield, Warragul, Marysville, Gisborne, Sea Lake. Tasmania: 
Hobart. South Australia: Mt. Lofty, Pinnaroo. Western Australia: Perth. 
North-west Australia: Sherlock River. 


Genus 30. Homospora. 

Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1904, 229; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., 
p. 45. 

Face with strong conical corneous projection. Palpi short, ascending, shortly 
rough-sealed; terminal joint minute. Antennae bipectinate to apex, pectinations 
long in g, short in 9. Thorax stout, hairy beneath. Femora hairy. Posterior 
tibiae without middle spurs. Tarsi not spinulose. Forewings with 9 and 10 
stalked, 9 anastomosing with 8 to form a long narrow areole, 11 closely approxi- 
mated to 12, or anastomosing at a point with 12. Hindwings with 5 from well 
above middle of cell (three-fourths), 6 and 7 connate, 12 closely approximated to 
cell as far? as middle, gradually diverging. 

Monotypical; allied to Arhodia. 


180. HomcsporRA RHODOSCOPA. 

Onychodes ? rhodoscopa Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 1902, 228.—Homospora 
procrita Turn., ibid., 1904, 230.—Homospora lymantriodes Prout, Novit. Zool., 1913, 
391. 

North Queensland: Stewart River, Townsville. North-west Australia: Derby, 
Hammersley Range, Sherlock River. 


I think lymantriodes is merely a paler local race of this species. 


Genus 31. GERUSIA. 
Warr., Novit. Zool., 1997, 118; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 54. 


Face not projecting, smooth, with a slight tuft on lower margin. Palpi moderate 
or rather short, porrect or slightly ascending; second joint rough-scaled; terminal 
joint short. Antennae in ¢ bipectinate to apex, pectinations long, in 2 shortly 
bipectinate, apex simple.. Thorax moderately stout, somewhat hairy beneath. 
Femora hairy. Anterior tibiae with a slender hair-tuft on flexor surface. Posterior 
tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Tarsi minutely spinulose. Forewings with il 
anastomosing first with 12 and then with 10, 9 and 10 long-stalked, 9 anastomosing 
with 8 to form a long narrow areole. Hindwings with 5 from middle of cell, 6 and 
7 separate, 12 anastomosing strongly with cell to about middle. 


Type, G. virescens Warr., from New Guinea. Immediately distinguished from 
its allies by the anastomosis of 12 of hindwings with cell. This, has apparently 
been an independent development, as there appears to be no close relationship 
to Hypographa. There are three known Australian species, all variable, and 
several in New Guinea. 


L, WihaAsS Wilda  GlisEbnes TRAINEES INAS) boos pW Gonenbueoodbobbudccsevecanecce 2 
Wanes without distinet transverse lines! {75).......2-5..508+ oooh ee rubricosa. 183 
4 Jabhl nines) Clemsehy GQurenleyee! oa oocausouseoucbacnboondasbndnodoocen excusata. 181 


Hindwings not, or only slightly, strigulated ....................... multicolor. 182 


202 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii, 


181. GERUSIA EXCUSATA. 

Monoctenia excusata W1k., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxi, 280. 

6; 2. 38-50 mm. Head whitish or grey-whitish; face fuscous or brown, inferior 
tuft whitish. Palpi 14; reddish-brown or fuscous, more or less mixed with whitish 
or pale-ochreous. Antennae grey, near base whitish; pectinations in ¢ 8, in 9 13. 
Thorax grey, sometimes tinged with brownish or whitish-ochreous. Abdomen grey, 
sometimes ochreous-tinged, sometimes with pairs of fuscous dorsal dots. Legs 
whitish or pale-ochreous variably strigulated with reddish-brown and fuscous. 
Forewings triangular, costa in ¢ slightly and evenly arched, in 2 strongly sinuate, 
apex pointed, slightly produced, more so in 9, termen obtusely angled on veins 
6 and 4, thence strongly oblique; grey, usually ochreous- or brownish-tinged, 
with some scattered fuscous strigulae; a fuscous line from one-fifth costa to one- 
third dorsum, strongly bent outwards from margins, more or less developed; a 
suffused fuscous median line from midcosta obliquely outwards, angled in dise and 
continued to mid-dorsum, but this is not always present; an angled line from 
three-fourths costa, slender and usually dotted beneath angle, to three-fourths 
dorsum; sometimes a short fuscous streak from costa before apex, edged posteriorly 
with white; beneath this are frequently two blackish dots; sometimes a blackish 
spot above tornus; cilia fuscous, sometimes tinged with ochreous or reddish-brown, 
on tornus grey. Hindwings with termen rounded, crenulate or in @? dentate 
towards apex; pale-ochreous densely strigulated with fuscous; a wavy fuscous 
antemedian transverse line; a more rounded and slightly dentate postmedian 
line; often some fuscous suffusion before termen; cilia as forewings. Underside 
similar but more ochreous; markings less distinct; sometimes a dark-fuscous blotch 
on forewing beyond middle, and a white dot or elongate mark beneath apex. 

Queensland: Brisbane, Toowoomba, National Park (3,000 feet). New South 
Wales: Katoomba. Victoria: Melbourne. 


182. GERUSIA MULTICOLOR. 


Onychodes multicolora Luc., Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 1892, 81.—Onycodes rubra 
Warr., Novit. Zool., 1897, 27. . 

3, 9. 40-44 mm. Head whitish or grey-whitish; face brown, inferior tuft 
whitish. Palpi 14; brown or reddish-brown, sometimes mixed with whitish. 
Antennae grey, towards base grey-whitish; pectinations in § 10, in 2 2. Thorax 
grey or grey-whitish. Abdomen grey or grey-whitish; sometimes with a median 
dorsal series of fuscous spots. Legs brownish; posterior pair grey-whitish. Fore- 
wings triangular, costa in ¢ slightly and evenly arched, in 9 sinuate, apex 
acute, slightly produced, more strongly so in 9, termen angled or dentate on veins 
6 and 4, thence strongly oblique; pale-grey or grey-whitish, sometimes pinkish- 
or purplish-tinged; transverse lines variably developed, very distinct, or slender, 
or even obsolete, brownish or fuscous; first from one-fourth costa to one-fourth 
dorsum, outwardly curved; second from two-fifths costa to mid-dorsum, slightly 
outwardly curved, suffused; third from two-thirds costa, outwardly oblique, acutely 
angled beneath costa, thence inwardly oblique and sinuate to three-fourths dorsum; 
in some examples the second and third lines are partly double; sometimes a 
subcostal discal dot precedes third line; rarely a small fuscous apical suffusion; 
more often one or two subapical fuscous dots; cilia dark-grey or brownish, 
pale-grey on tornus. Hindwings with termen rounded, slightly angled on veins 
6 and 4; as forewings, but sometimes suffused with pale pink; without first line; 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 203 


sometimes a subterminal series of fuscous spots. Underside grey or brownish; 
markings usually less distinct; sometimes a white patch strigulated with fuscous 
on dorsum of hindwing. 

Like G. excusata, very variable. From that species it may best be dis- 
tinguished by the absence of heavy strigulation of hindwings, the shorter palpi, 
and the longer antennal pectinations. 

North Queensland: Herberton, Mackay. Queensland: Gympie, Brisbane, 
Toowoomba. New South Wales: Sydney, Mittagong. 


183. GERUSIA RUBRICOSA, N. SD. 

rubricosus, reddish. 

9. 46-52 mm. Head pinkish-white; face brown, inferior tuft pinkish-white. 
Palpi 14; pale-reddish. Antennae pale-grey, towards base pinkish-white; pectina- 
tions in @ 2: Thorax and abdomen pale-reddish. Legs pale-reddish. Forewings 
triangular, costa in 9 slightly sinuate, apex acute and produced, termen strongly 
bowed, not distinctly angled; pale-reddish; sometimes a few scattered fuscous 
scales; lines slightly darker, suffused, or partly obsolete; first at one-fifth, out- 
wardly curved; second at two-fifths, rather broadly suffused; third from two- 
thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum, strongly sinuate, towards dorsum nearly 
approximated to second line; one or two whitish subapical dots surrounded by 
fuscous irroration; cilia concolorous. Hindwings with termen rounded, sometimes 
slightly angled on veins 6 and 4; as forewings, but paler. Underside of forewings 
whitish, except towards costa in basal two-thirds; terminal area and whole of 
hindwings darker red; apical markings of forewings more distinct. 

North Queensland: Cairns. Queensland: Brisbane, Toowoomba. Three speci- 
mens; type in Coll. Barnard. 


Genus 32. CIRCOPETES. 

Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., pb. 53. 

Face not projecting, slightly rough-scaled. Palpi short, obliquely ascending; 
second joint thickened with dense rough scales; terminal joint short. Antennae 
of ¢ bipectinate to apex, pectinations long, of 2 dentate. Thorax stout, beneath 
densely hairy. Femora hairy. Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Tarsi 
spinulose. Forewings with 11 free, 10 and 9 long-stalked from cell, 9 anastomosing 
with 8 soon after origin, forming a long narrow areole, but sometimes the 
connecting part of 9 is not developed, leaving the areole open. Hindwings with 
3 and 4 separate, 5 from much above middle of cell (two-thirds), 6 and 7 connate 
or closely approximated at origin, 12 closely approximated to cell from one-fourth 
to two-thirds. 

Monotypical. Best distinguished from Onychodes by the origin of 5 of 
hindwings from much nearer 6 than 4; from Gerusia by the non-anastomosis of 
12 with cell. 


184. CrRcoPpETES OBTUSATA. 


Monoctenia obtusata Wlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxi, 279; Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. 
N.S.W., 1889, 1207.—Monoctenia himeroides W1k., ibid., 279—Arhodia modesta 
Warr., Novit. Zool., 1904, 485. 

3, 2. 48-60 mm. Head pale-grey; face reddish-fuscous, lower edge, sometimes 
lateral edges, and some irroration, ochreous-whitish. Palpi 1; ochreous-whitish 


204 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii, 


irrorated with reddish-fuscous; terminal joint reddish-fuscous. Antennae pale- 
grey; pectinations in ¢ 8. Thorax and abdomen pale-grey. Legs grey-whitish 
irrorated with reddish-fuscous. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight, 
apex pointed, very slightly produced, termen sinuate beneath apex, strongly bowed 
above middle, thence only slightly rounded; pale-grey with fine fuscous strigulae 
more or less developed; a short oblique fuscous costal mark at one-fourth, with 
dots on median and anal veins indicating antemedian line; an oblique suffused 
fuscous mark on midcosta, indicating a median line, angulated beneath costa, but 
rarely developed; usually a fuscous, pale-centred, discal dot beyond middle; 
sometimes a fuscous mark on three-fourths costa, indicating commencement of a 
fine postmedian line, which is rarely present; cilia fuscous, apices usually whitish. 
Hindwings with termen gently rounded, wavy; colour as forewings; a transverse, 
fuscous, antemedian line; usually followed by a pale-centred discal dot; dorsal 
edge, except near base, whitish irrorated with dark-fuscous. Underside of fore- 
wings grey with pale-centred discal dot, and large, round, blackish, supratornal 
blotch; of hindwings like upperside, but with also usually a dark grey tornal 
suffusion prolonged to mid-disc, and sometimes a similar apical spot. 

North Queensland: Cairns, Herberton, Townsville. Queensland; Gayndah, 
Brisbane, Toowoomba. Victoria: Melbourne. Tasmania: Lilydale. Western Aus 
tralia: Perth, Waroona. 


Genus 33. ONYCODES. 


Gn., Lep., ix,442; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 51. 

Face smooth, not projecting. Palpi short or moderate, obliquely ascending; 
second joint shortly rough-scaled; terminal joint minute. Antennae bipectinate 
in both sexes, pectinations in ¢ very long, in 9 moderate, extending to apex or 
nearly to apex. Thorax stout or moderate, moderately hairy beneath. Femora 
slightly hairy. Anterior tibiae with a long slender subterminal tuft on flexor 
surface. Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Tarsi minutely spinulose. 
Forewings with 11 free, or anastomosing with 12, 10 and 9 stalked, 9 connected 
with § soon after separating to form a long narrow areole, but sometimes the 
connecting bar fails to chitinize, leaving the areole open. Hindwings with 3 and 
4 separate, 5 from middle of cell, 6 and 7 separate, connate, or short-stalked, 
12 approximated to cell from one-fourth to middle, gradually diverging. 

Type, O. traumataria Gn. O. lutosaria Gn. differs from this species in the 
stronger palpi and the anastomosis of 11 and 12 of the forewings, but I regard 
these differences as only specific. 


185. ONYCODES TRAUMATARIA. 

Gn., Lep., ix., 148, Pl. ix, f. 8—Chilma flagrantaria W1k., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxvi, 
1692. 

g. 40-48 mm. Head pinkish-white; fillet yellow; face dark-red. Palpi 1, 
slender; ochreous-whitish, pinkish-tinged. Antennae pale-ochreous-grey; pectina- 
tions darker, very long (16) and extending to apex. Thorax yellow or orange, 
anteriorly pale-pink. Abdomen yellow or orange, sometimes with a few paired 
fuscous dorsal dots. Legs pinkish-ochreous. Forewings triangular, costa straight, 
sinuate before apex, apex pointed, termen slightly rounded, sinuate beneath 
apex; 11 free; yellow, orange, or ochreous, with few fine fuscous strigulae; a 
pinkish broadly-suffused line on costa before middle; dark-fuscous costal spots on 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 205 


middle, three-fourths, and before apex; a brownish-ochreous line extends from 
subapical spot to three-fifths dorsum, variably developed, sometimes entire and 
straight, sometimes represented by a series of spots, which may be curved inwards 
above dorsum and succeeded by a large supratornal spot; extreme apex pink or 
pinkish-white; cilia brownish-fuscous, beneath apex sometimes pink. Hindwings 
with termen slightly rounded, not produced at tornus; as forewings, except for 
costal and apical markings. Underside darker; forewings, except dorsal and 
apical areas, more or less suffused with reddish; hindwings with reddish blotches 
on apex and tornus. 


9. 38-44 mm. Head and thorax pale-grey, pinkish-white, or crimson. Antennal 
pectinations 2. Forewings with termen doubly sinuate, apex produced; greyish- 
ochreous, pinkish-white, or crimson, more heavily striguiated and spotted than 
in g. Hindwings vary similarly. 

This handsome and variable species is found in the southern mountains 
and Tasmania. Though often similar to the following species, it may always be 
distinguished by the hindwings not being produced at tornus, and by the ¢ 
antennae. 

New South Wales: Barrington Tops, Mt. Kosciusko (4,500 feet). Victoria: 
Beaconsfield, Lorne, Sale, Gisborne, Mt. St. Bernard (5,000 feet). Tasmania: 
Hobart, Beaconsfield, Ulverstone, Zeehan, Strahan. 


186. ONYCODES RUBRA. 

9 Xenosuma rubra Luc., Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 1891, 81.—¢ Arrhodia ? illidgei 
Luc., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1893, 139. 

fg. 34:36 mm. Head whitish; fillet orange; face fuscous. Palpi 1, slender; 
ochreous or reddish, towards base whitish. Antennae pale-ochreous; pectinations 
10, reduced to serrations at apex. Thorax and abdomen pale-ochreous or whitish- 
grey. Legs pale-ochreous irrorated and annulated with brownish-fuscous. Fore- 
wings triangular, costa straight, sinuate before apex, apex round-pointed, termen 
slightly rounded; 11 free; pale ochreous or whitish-grey, with some fine fuscous 
strigulae; costal edge ochreous; three small fuscous dots on veins representing 
basal line; a fuscous costal spot at middle, and a second, larger, at three-fourths; 
a fuscous line from costa near apex to dorsum at or beyond middle, sometimes 
reduced to a series of dots; sometimes followed by a large dark-fuscous supra- 
tornal spot, which may be double; sometimes a very slender, whitish, dentate, 
subterminal line; extreme apex tinged with pink; cilia brownish-ochreous. MHind- 
wings with termen slightly rounded, produced at tornus; colour, cilia and trans- 
verse line as forewings. Underside ochreous or grey with slender postmedian line 
on forewings. 

9. 45-50 mm. Head pinkish or crimson, fillet orange, face reddish. Antennal 
pectinations 2%. Forewings with costa doubly sinuate, apex produced; pinkish- 
grey, pinkish-ochreous, or crimson; markings usually indistinct; a ‘small fuscous 
dot on costa at three-fourths, which rarely gives rise to a brownish-ochreous line, 
angulated beneath costa, to dorsum beyond middle; the line from costa before 
apex is sometimes distinct, but often reduced to a series of minute dots, sometimes 
a dark-fuscous spot before dorsum. 

Like the preceding, this is a variable species. Lucas’s type rubra is in my 
collection. 

Queensland: Caloundra, Brisbane. New South Wales: Sydney. 


206 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii, 


187. ONYCODES LUTOSARIA. 

Arhodia ? lutosaria Feld., Reise Novara, Lep., Pl. 124, figs. 15, 16.—Onychodes 
lutosaria Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1889, 1200. 

2. 72 mm. Head fuscous-brown, anteriorly greyish-ochreous; fillet pink; face 
fuscous-brown, inferior tuft ochreous-whitish. Palpi 14, thickened with densely 
appressed scales; ochreous-yellow spotted with crimson, apex greyish-ochreous. 
Antennae pink, more whitish towards apex; pectinations in 2 1. Thorax stout; 
greyish-ochreous; underside ochreous-yellow. Abdomen greyish-ochreous, 
posteriorly with a median dorsal line and some scattered irroration crimson. Legs 
ochreous-yellow spotted with crimson, anterior pair crimson except coxae. Fore- 
wings elongate-triangular, costa straight, slightly sinuate before apex, apex pointed, 
strongly produced, termen rather strongly bowed in middle, thence nearly straight; 
11 anastomosing with 12; greyish-ochreous with crimson fuscous spots; costal edge 
crimson; a few fuscous strigulae beneath costa, above dorsum, and in posterior 
part of disc; a spot beneath costa at one-fifth, another on midcosta, a third 
on costa at three-fourths; a small subcostal median discal spot; a subdorsal spot 
at one-fourth, and two placed transversely at middle; a slightly sinuate line from 
apex to three-fourths dorsum, at first continuous and crimson-tinged, but soon 
reduced to a series of small spots; a subterminal spot above middle, two spots 
below middle posterior to oblique line, and one above tornus; cilia greyish- 
ochreous, beneath apex crimson-tinged. Hindwings somewhat elongate, termen 
gently rounded; pale orange; a crimson fuscous discal spot; a grey tornal 
suffusion; a curved, acutely-dentate, transverse, postmedian line; three crimson- 
fuscous spots arranged parallel to termen towards tornus; cilia pale-orange, 
towards tornus crimson-tinged, on tornus grey. Underside orange-yellow, with 
crimson-fuscous strigulae and discal spots; upper part of oblique line of forewing 
developed; a large irregular supratornal blotch on hindwings crimson-fuscous and 
white. 

Queensland: National Park (2,500 feet). New South Wales: 
Fernshaw, Beaconsfield, Lorne, Gisborne. 


Victoria: 


Genus 34. CERNIA. 

WIk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xx, 267; Prout, Gen. Insect., Cenochrom., p. 51. 

Face smooth, not projecting. Palpi moderate in (4, long in 9, porrect; second 
joint thickened with loosely appressed scales; terminal joint short in ¢, longer 
in 9, cylindrical, obtuse. Antennae of Jd shortly bipectinate, towards apex simple. 
Thorax stout, beneath densely hairy. Femora hairy. Posterior tarsi with 
two pairs of spurs; in ¢ dilated with internal groove and tuft. Tarsi minutely 
spinulose. Forewings with 10 from stalk of 7,8,9, 11 from cell anastomosing 
first with 12, then with 10, 10 approximated to 9 but not anastomosing, areole 
absent. Hindwings with 3 and 4 separate, 5 from much above middle of cell 
(two-thirds), 6 and 7 separate, 12 approximated to cell from one-fourth to middle, 
abruptly diverging. 

Monotypical. The neuration is curiously identical with that of some 
Geometridae; nevertheless, I think it should be referred here. 


188. CERNIA AMYCLARIA. 
Wik., Cat. Brit. Mus., xx, 267.—Pseudoterpna diphtherina Meyr., Trans. Ent. 
Soc. Lond., 1889, 496—Monoctenia odontias Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. ADS, 1894, 
3.—Aspidoptera ambiens Luc., Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 1899, 147. 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 207 


of, 9. 32-38 mm. Head dark-reddish; face with paired whitish spots at upper 
and lower margins; palpi in ¢ 2, in 9 2%; dark-reddish, bases of joints and 
extreme apex whitish. Antennae whitish-ochreous, towards base dark-reddish; 
pectinations in ¢ 2. Thorax and abdomen pale-grey, more or less pinkish-tinged. 
Legs whitish mottled with dark-red; posterior tibiae of ¢ dilated with internal 
groove and tuft. Forewings triangular, rather narrow, costa straight to near 
apex, apex pointed, termen strongly rounded, crenulate; pale-grey, more or less 
pinkish-tinged; costal edge ochreous strigulated with dark-red and dark-fuscous; 
a median, subcostal, discal dot or transverse mark, fuscous or reddish; a fuscous 
sinuate line of dots from four-fifths costa to three-fourths dorsum, continuous 
towards costa, on dorsum followed by a short parallel dark-fuscous streak; terminal 
edge reddish; cilia dark-fuscous, apices usually white in concavities. Hindwings 
with costa emarginate towards apex, apex acutely rectangular, termen angled 
on vein 4, wavy, but not rounded above and beneath angle; colour and cilia as 
forewings; a small grey-whitish blotch, irrorated and capped with blackish on 
costa above emargination at two-thirds; from this proceeds a line of fine dots, 
sometimes obsolete to two-thirds dorsum. Underside similar, markings distinct, 
sometimes a suffused reddish terminal blotch above middle in both wings. 

North Queensland: Dunk Is., Townsville. Queensland: Duaringa, Gayndah, 
Brisbane, Southport, Coolangatta, Toowoomba. New South Wales: Sydney, Jervis 
Bay. Also from New Guinea. 


Genus 35. EUMELEA. 

Duncan, Nat. Hist. Exot. Moths, 1841, p. 215; Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 
1889, 1197; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 61. 

Face smooth, lower edge slightly prominent. Palpi rather long, ascending, 
rather slender; second joint shortly rough-scaled; terminal joint smooth, 
eylindrical, obtuse. Antennae nearly as long as forewings, slender, and simple 
in both sexes. Thorax slender, slightly hairy beneath. Legs very long and 
slender. Femora hairy. Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Tarsi minutely 
spinulose. Forewings with 7, 8, 9 stalked, no areole, 10 and 11 arising separately 
from cell, 11 anastomosing first with 12, then with 10. Hindwings with 3 and 4 
separate, 5 from well above middle of cell (three-fifths to two-thirds), 6 and 
7 stalked, 12 approximated to cell as far as middle, thence gradually diverging. 

Type, EH. rosalia Stoll. Prout gives sanguinata Warr. (rosalia Dune., nec 
Cram.) as the type, but in Seitz’ Macrolepidoptera he does not mention Warren’s 
species, and apparently merges it in rosalia. A singular and isolated genus. 

The species are both similar and variable and yet await a final division, 
but the Australian forms are at present three, all from Queensland, and can be 
certainly distinguished. 


1. Forewings with a nearly straight strongly oblique postmedian line from three-fourths 


COS Weer e see reper setae nue new kaite acre Bars Boneh tee gue sas otis Ves ot sl a TS) 3. syfeeiehe wan elie aey eR ae duponchelu. 191 
Forewings with postmedian line curved, from before two-thirds costa’ ...... 2 
2. Wings finely strigulated; posterior WHOS Ole CF PUNO So's 5o'ospob00000¢ rosalia. 189 


Wings coarsely strigulated; posterior tibiae of @ hairy on flexor surface 


189. EUMELEA ROSALIA. 
Stoll, Cram. Pap. Exot., iv, 1781, 152, Pl. 368; Humelea sanguinata (Warr.) 
australiensis Warr., Novit. Zool., 1897, 29. 
B 


208 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii, 


3d, 48-54 mm.; 9, 52-58 mm. Head yellow; anterior part of crown and upper 
part of face more or less mixed with crimson. Palpi in ¢ 2-23, in 2 23-3; yellow, 
more or less mixed with crimson. Antennae five-sixths; dark-reddish becoming 
ochreous-whitish towards apex. Thorax and abdomen yellow, sometimes reddish- 
tinged. Legs yellowish, more or less irrorated with crimson-red; posterior tibiae 
of ¢ fringed with long hairs on flexor surface. Forewings triangular, costa 
gently and evenly arched, apex round-pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly 
oblique; yellow or orange, rather coarsely strigulated with crimson-red or grey; 
the following markings are usually traceable: an outwardly curved line from one- 
fifth costa to one-fifth dorsum; a pale-centred, subcostal, discal spot before 
middle; a suffused, outwardly curved line from two-thirds costa to three-fifths 
dorsum; rarely also a suffused subterminal line; cilia yellow, reddish-fuscous, 
or crimson-red. Hindwings with termen slightly rounded; colour and cilia as 
forewings; a suffused median transverse line; often a small yellow apical 
spot. Underside similar. 

Distinct from EZ. stipata in wing-shape, coloration, longer palpi, and hairy 
posterior tibiae of ¢. It is incompletely sexually dimorphic; most of the males 
are crimson-red, but very few females; most of the females are yellow, but very 
few males; the distinction between red forms and yellow is, however, bridged by 
intermediate forms. This species is certainly australiensis Warr.; for its 
identification with rosalia Stoll I rely on Mr. L. B. Prout. 

North Queensland: Cairns, Herberton, Townsville. Queensland: Yeppoon. 
Also from the Archipelago. 


190. EUMELEA STIPATA, Nn. SD. 


Eumelea rosalia form stipata Prout, Seite Macrolep., Indo-Aust. Geom. 
p. 32. 

3g, 45-50 mm.; 9, 55 mm. Head crimson; fillet and two spots on lower margin 
of face yellow. Palpi 14, in 2 2; external surface crimson, lower margin and 
internal surface yellow. Antennae five-sixths; dark crimson becoming grey 
towards apex. Thorax and abdomen crimson. Legs pale-yellow mixed with 
crimson; posterior tibiae of ¢ smooth. Forewings triangular, costa straight but 
arched before apex, apex rounded, termen nearly straight, moderately oblique; 
pale-crimson, sometimes yellowish-tinged, finely and densely _ strigulated 
throughout with dark-crimson; costal edge narrowly yellow interrupted by 
strigulae; usually no markings, but sometimes obscure antemedian and postmedian 
lines and a pale-centred discal spot partly developed; cilia crimson. Hindwings 
with termen gently rounded; colour and cilia as forewings. Underside similar. 

The smooth posterior tibiae of the ¢ are sufficient evidence that this species 
is distinct from the following. By the practised eye it may be readily distinguished 
by its uniform dark-crimson coloration in contrast to the yellow and red of the 
latter species. 

North Queensland: Cape York, Cooktown, Cairns. It has not yet been recog- 
nized outside Australia, but doubtless will -be. 


191. HUMELEA DUPONCHELII. 
Montrousier, 1856.—Eumelea obliquifascia Warr., Novit. Zool., 1894, 375. 
9. 60-63 mm. Head yellow; some irroration on crown and upper half of face, 
red. Palpi 23; yellow irrorated with red. Thorax and abdomen yellow mixed with 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 209 


crimson-red. Legs yellow mixed with fuscous-crimson. Forewings triangular, 
costa moderately and uniformly arched, apex pointed, termen slightly rounded, 
moderately oblique; orange-yellow coarsely strigulated and spotted with orange- 
brown; an incomplete outwardly curved line from one-fifth costa to one-fourth 
dorsum; a broadly suffused, nearly straight line from three-fourths costa to 
dorsum beyond middle; a pale-centred, subcostal, discal spot before middle; cilia 
fuscous. Hindwings with termen very slightly rounded; colour and cilia as 
forewings; a suffused transverse line before middle. Underside similar. 

I have only two 9 examples, but understand that the colour varies as in rosalia. 
For the identification I am indebted to Mr. L. B. Prout. 

North Queensland: Cairns, Innisfail. Also from New Guinea and Moluccas. 


Genus 36. CELERENA. 

Wik., Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1862, 71; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 96. 

Face smooth, rounded, slightly projecting. Palpi rather short, ascending, 
rather slender; second joint shortly rough-scaled; terminal joint short, smooth- 
scaled. Antennae of ¢ simple. Thorax rather slender; hairy beneath. Femora 
hairy. Hindlegs of ¢ much modified and distorted. Tarsi not spinulose. Fore- 
wings with 11 and 10 long-stalked, their common stalk anastomosing with 12, 10 
approximated to 9 (sometimes anastomosing with it). Hindwings with 3 and 
4 separate, 5 from above middle of cell, 6 and 7 approximated at. origin, 11 
from near base, running into 12, 12 parallel but not approximated to cell as 
far as middle, thence gradually diverging. 

Type, C. divisa Wlk., from India. A rather large Papuan genus, of which 
one species occurs in India, and one reaches North Queensland. It appears to 
be rather distantly allied to Humelea, but shows important differences in the 
neuration. The males show many secondary sexual characters. 


: 192. CELERENA GRISEOFUSA. 

Warr., Novit. Zool., 1896, 281; Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 1922, 294. 

Antennae of ¢ with a dorsal median tuft of long scales. Abdomen of ¢ densely 
hairy beneath. Hindlegs of ¢ with femora short, thickened, and densely hairy; 
tibiae much dilated, densely hairy, with long crooked median spurs and a single 
terminal spur; first tarsal joint much swollen. Forewing of ¢ with a large basal 
fovea beneath, elongate and gradually disappearing distally, unscaled above and 
beneath. 

North Queensland: Claudie River. Also from New Guinea (Fergusson Is.). 


Genus. 37. AXIAGASTA, n. gen. 

a&iayaoros, worthy of admiration. 

Face smooth, not projecting. Palpi of ¢ short, ascending, closely appressed 
to face; second joint thickened with appressed scales; terminal joint minute; of 
? moderate, porrect; second joint rather slender; terminal joint moderate, cylindri- 
cal, obtuse. Antennae of <¢ bipectinate, towards apex dentate, pectinations 
moderate. Thorax moderate, not crested; beneath somewhat hairy. Femora 
smooth. Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Tarsi not spinulose. Forewings 
with 5 from much above middle of cell, 7, 8, 9 stalked, 10 and 11 long-stalked, 
their common stalk anastomosing with 12. Hindwings with 3 and 4 separate, 
5 from much above middle of cell (three-fourths), 6 and 7 separate, 12 approxi- 
mated to cell to beyond middle, thence gradually diverging. 


210 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii, 


The difference in the palpi of the two sexes is noteworthy. The genus is 
allied to Zeuctophlebia, the neuration of the forewings differing in the non- 
development of the basal connecting portion of 9 between 10 and 8, so that 9 has 
been “captured” by 8. 


193. AXIAGASTA RHODOBAPHES, N.. Sp. 

podoBadns, rosy-suffused. 

3, 26 mm.; 2, 32 mm. Head and thorax whitish tinged with rosy; face more 
or less fuscous. Palpi of ¢ 1, ascending and appressed to face; of 9 2, porrect; 
rosy mixed with fuscous, towards base white. Antennae grey-whitish; pectina- 
tions in ¢ 5, ochreous-fuscous. Abdomen whitish, towards base rosy tinged, apices 
of segments and some irroration fuscous. Legs rosy; femora and posterior pair 
whitish. Forewings triangular, costa straight, slightly arched before apex, apex 
round-pointed, termen rounded, oblique; whitish suffused with pale-rosy with 
some fine sparse fuscous irroration; costal edge deeper rosy; a very faint, out- 
wardly curved line from two-fifths costa to two-fifths dorsum; a similar line 
from four-fifths costa to four-fifths dorsum, indented above dorsum; both lines 
are obsolete in 2; a faint, fuscous, median, transverse, subcostal, discal mark; an 
interrupted dark-fuscous terminal line; cilia whitish, rosy-tinged. Hindwings 
with termen rounded; as forewings but without first line; discal mark more 
distinct. Underside paler, without lines, but with dark-fuscous discal spots on 
both wings. 

Queensland: Gayndah in November; two specimens received from Dr. Hamilton 
Kenny. 


Genus 38. AMPHICLASTA. 

Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1906, 132; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., 
p. 50. 

Face somewhat projecting, clothed with rough scales. Tongue present. Palpi 
moderate, porrect; second joint densely clothed with rough scales; terminal joint 
very short, obtuse. Antennae of ¢ bipectinate, base and apical one-sixth simple, 
pectinations moderate (3). Thorax stout, with a small posterior crest above; 
beneath densely hairy. Femora hairy. Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. 
Tarsi finely spinulose. Forewings with 7, 8, 9 stalked, 10 and 11 long-stalked 
from cell, 10 anastomosing with 9 to form an apparent areole. Hindwings 
with 3 and 4 separate, 5 from middle of cell, 6 and 7 separate, 12 closely 
approximated to cell as far as two-thirds, separating rather abruptly. 

Monotypical. The long-stalking of 10 and 11 is an exceptional character. 
The true areole has been lost; the apparent areole represents the posterior portion 
of the double areole that is found in other genera. 


194. AMPHICLASTA LYGAEA. 
Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 1906, 132. 
New South Wales: Bourke. Victoria: Birchip. South Australia: Pinnaroo. 


Genus 39. ZEUCTOPHLEBIA. 
Warr., Novit. Zool., 1896, 355; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 32. 
Face smooth without tuft. Tongue present. Palpi moderate, porrect, 
thickened with appressed scales; terminal joint concealed. Antennae of ¢ 
bipectinate, pectinations long, not extending to apex. Thorax and abdomen slender; 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 211 


the former hairy beneath. Femora smooth. Tarsi spinulose. Forewings with 
7 and 8 stalked from upper angle of cell, 9, 10 and 11 long-stalked, their common 
stalk anastomosing with 12; 9 and 10 then anastomosing with 8 to form a large 
areole from which 8&8, 9, 10 arise by a common stalk. Hindwings with 6 and 7 
approximated at origin, 12 connected with cell at about one-third by 11, closely 
approximate to cell to about two-thirds, thence diverging. 

Type, Z. squalidata Wlk. This genus is isolated. In neuration it is nearest 
Celerena, but there can be no really close relationship. Zeuctophlebia differs from 
all other genera, in which 12 of the hindwings is closely appressed to the cell, by 
the retention of vein 11, and this must be an archaic character. In my intro- 
ductory remarks, 11 is said to run into 12. This is quite incorrect; 11 anastomoses 
strongly with 10, while 12 anastomoses at a point with their common stalk. 


Key to Species. 
Mea CCM Eeduwapex OhetOL Swan e nalGuUce iy came isiecier la sists isietin ais ce ners cet eet oheahe squalidata. 195 
Face grey; apex of forewing not acute .°.................00.- 00 eee tapinodes. 196 


195. ZEUCTOPHLEBIA SQUALIDATA. 

Fidonia squalidata W1k., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxvi, 1671.—Zeuctophlebia rufipalpis 
Warr., Novit. Zool., 1896, 355. 

3d, 9. 22-30 mm. Head pale-reddish; face dark-red. Palpi 13; red mixed with 
dark-fuscous. Antennae grey; pectinations in ¢ 6. Thorax grey tinged with 
reddish and irrorated with fuscous. Abdomen whitish, bases of segments irrorated 
with dark-fuscous and rarely also with reddish. Legs dark-fuscous, more or less 
mixed with red; tarsi annulated with whitish-ochreous. Forewings triangular, 
costa slightly arched, apex acute, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; 
whitish more or less suffused with pale-reddish and irrorated with dark-fuscous; 
costal edge reddish; first line from one-third costa to one-third dorsum, slender, 
reddish-fuscous, sometimes slightly dentate; a median, subcostal, blackish, discal 
dot; second line from two-thirds costa obliquely outwards, acutely angled in disc 
above middle; thence nearly straight to two-thirds dorsum, slender, whitish, 
edged on both sides with reddish-fuscous; usually a subterminal series of dark- 
fuscous dots with pale haloes; a terminal series of dark-fuscous dots; cilia 
whitish, bases reddish-tinged, with a fuscous median line. Hindwings with termen 
rounded; as forewings, but without first line. This attractive little species 
deserved a better name. 

North Queensland: Herberton. Queensland: Yeppoon, Gympie, Nambour, 
Brisbane, Stradbroke Is., Mt. Tambourine, Coolangatta, National Park (3,000 ft.), 
Toowoomba, Bunya Mts. (3,000 feet), Killarney. Tasmania: Launceston. 


196. ZEUCTOPHLEBIA TAPINODES. 

Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1904, 228. 

3; 2. 23-26 mm. Head pale-grey; face darker. Palpi 1; whitish, apex grey. 
Antennae grey; pectinations in ¢ 8. Thorax and abdomen grey with a few fuscous 
scales. Legs grey; posterior pair ochreous-whitish. Forewings triangular, costa 
straight to near apex, apex round-pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly 
oblique; pale-grey sparsely irrorated, and costa strigulated, with fuscous; first 
line from one-fourth costa to one-fourth dorsum, usually represented by three 
fuscous dots, rarely continuous, sometimes obsolete; a median, subcostal, blackish, 
discal dot; sometimes a faint, fuscous, transverse, median line just posterior to 


212 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii, 


discal dot; postmedian line from three-fourths costa to two-thirds dorsum, slender, 
fuscous, sinuate, finely dentate; sometimes a faint fuscous subterminal line; 
cilia grey. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey; a fuscous discal dot at about 
one-third; sometimes a faintly darker transverse line at one-third; sometimes a 
very slender dentate transverse line beyond middle; an interrupted fuscous 
terminal line; cilia grey. 

Queensland: Caloundra in August, Stradbroke Island, Coolangatta in 
November; six specimens. 


Genus 40. PHYSETOSTEGE. 
Warr., Novit. Zool., 1896, 99; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 86. 


Face smooth, not projecting. Tongue well developed. Palpi moderate, 
ascending; second joint thickened with appressed hairs; terminal joint short, 
porrect, obtuse. Antennae of ¢ bipectinate, towards apex simple, each pectination 
ending in a long terminal bristle. Thorax and abdomen moderately slender; 
the former not hairy beneath. Femora smooth. Posterior tibiae of ¢ slightly 
dilated with internal groove and tuft. Tarsi minutely spinulose. Forewing of ¢ 
with a large sub-basal fovea between cell and anal vein; 2 from two-thirds, 3 from 
shortly before angle, areole present, 10 arising separately from areole, 11 anas- 
tomosing first with 12 and then with areole. Hindwings with 2 from three-fifths, 
3 from shortly before angle, 5 from middle, 6 and 7 separate, 7 arising from 
shortly before angle, 12 swollen at base, connected with cell near base, thence 
diverging. 

So far only one species has been recorded. This and the following genus 
are allied to Encryphia. 


197. PHYSETOSTEGE MIRANDA. 
Warr., Novit Zool., 1896, 99. 


3, 36 mm.; 9, 42 mm. Head and thorax reddish-brown. Palpi 24; reddish- 
brown. Antennae reddish-brown; pectinations in ¢ 3%, apical one-sixth simple. 
Abdomen reddish-brown, apices of third, fourth and fifth segments white or 
whitish on dorsum. Legs reddish-brown partly suffused with fuscous; tarsi broadly 
annulated with whitish. Forewings triangular, rather narrow, costa straight 
except near base and apex, apex pointed, termen very slightly rounded, rather 
strongly oblique; reddish-brown with fine fuscous strigulations most developed 
towards costa; antemedian line from one-third costa to one-third dorsum, slightly 
outwardly curved, dark-reddish; an inconspicuous, median, subcostal, dark, trans- 
verse, discal mark; postmedian from beneath three-fourths costa to two-thirds 
dorsum, angled obtusely outwards above middle, incurved above and below angle, 
dark-reddish edged posteriorly with pale-reddish-ochreous; cilia reddish. Hind- 
wings with termen strongly rounded; as forewings, but without antemedian line 
and discal mark; postmedian angled in middle and slightly dentate, sometimes 
preceded by a fuscous or blackish suffusion towards costa. 


My examples closely correspond to the New Guinea form. I have not seen any 
like those described by Warren as miranda rufata, which perhaps is a distinct 
species. 

North Queensland: Kuranda near Cairns in September, October and November; 
three specimens received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. Also from New Guinea. 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 213 


Genus 41. NOoREIA. 


WIlk., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiv, 1092; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 84. 

Face smooth, not projecting. Tongue well developed. Palpi short, ascending, 
rather slender; terminal joint minute. Antennae of ¢ shortly ciliated. Thorax 
and abdomen slender; the former not hairy beneath. Femora smooth. Posterior 
tibiae of ¢ slightly dilated with internal groove and tuft. Tarsi spinulose. Fore- 
wings with 2 from two-thirds, 3 from near angle, areole present, 7, 8, 9, 10 stalked 
from areole, 11 anastomosing first with 12, then with ‘areole. Hindwings of 3b 
sometimes with a tuft of hairs on vein 2 on underside; 2 from three-fourths, 3 
from near angle, 5 from about middle, 6 and 7 separate, 7 arising shortly before 
upper angle, 12 approximated to cell near base, thence diverging. 

Type, N. perdensata W1k., from India. A genus of about ten species ranging 
from India to New Guinea. It is allied to Physetostege and Hncryphia. 


198. NoOREIA VINACEA. 


Prout, Novit. Zool., 1899, 13—Idiodes loxosticha Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. 
Aust., 1906, 135. 

3, 9. 44 mm. Head whitish-grey; face fuscous-brown. Palpi short, not 
reaching middle of face; fuscous-brown. Antennae grey, towards base ochreous- 
tinged. Thorax and abdomen grey, purplish-tinged. Legs ochreous-grey. Fore- 
wings triangular, costa straight to two-thirds, thence arched, apex acute, very 
slightly produced, termen straight, slightly oblique; grey, purplish-tinged; costal 
edge pale-ochreous; antemedian line from one-fifth costa to one-third dorsum, 
slender, straight, fuscous-brown; a subcostal, dark-fuscous, discal dot before 
middle; a well-marked, straight, fuscous-brown line from apex to two-thirds 
dorsum, sometimes connected by a fine line with three-fourths costa; cilia con- 
colorous. Hindwings with termen moderately rounded; in ¢ with a small tuft 
of pale hairs on vein 2 at about one-fourth on underside; as forewings, but 
without antemedian line, discal dot at about one-third, minute or obsolete; post- 
median at about middle, transverse. 


Mr. L. B. Prout informs me that there is a long series from Queensland in 
Coll. Rothschild, and that he considers my name to be a synonym of N. vinacea. 


North Queensland: Kuranda near Cairns in April and May; two specimens 
received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. Also from New Guinea. 


Genus 42. ENCRYPHIA. 
Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 1904, 228. 


Face smooth, without tuft. Palpi moderately long, porrect; second joint 
thickened with appressed hairs; terminal joint short, obtuse. Antennae of ¢ 
bipectinate, pectinations slender, moderately long, not extending to apex, each 
accompanied by a long bristle (about twice its length), which arises proximally 
from its base. Thorax and abdomen slender; the former not hairy beneath. 
Femora smooth. Posterior tibiae of ¢ dilated with internal groove and tuft. 
Tarsi spinulose. Forewings with 11 from cell anastomosing first with 12 and 
then with 10, 10 stalked with 7, 8, 9, anastomosing again with 9 beyond 7, from 
areole so formed 8, 9, 10 arise by a common stalk. Hindwings with 6 and 7 
separate, 7 arising before angle, 12 connected by a short bar with cell near base, 
thence gradually diverging. 


214 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, ili, 


Only the following species is known. The double areole has been modified 
by the stalking of vein 10 and the long anastomosis with vein 12, but is essentially 
the same structure as that of Nearcha and Tazeotis.. The antennal structure is 
peculiar. The connection in the hindwings of 12 with the cell represents vein 11, 
which has been lost in most of the genera. 


199. ENCRYPHIA FRONTISIGNATA. 


Tacparia ? frontisignata W1k., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxvi, 1523.—Tephrina puncti- 
lineata WIk., ibid., xxxv, 1661.—Nearcha paraptila Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 
1889, 1156.—Encryphia argillina Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1904, 228. 


3, 9. 30-38 mm. Head grey, sometimes reddish or ochreous-tinged; face 
purple-fuscous. Palpi 24 to 24; ochreous-fuscous. Antennae grey; pectinations in 
¢ 14. Thorax and abdomen grey, sometimes reddish or ochreous-tinged, sometimes 
with sparse dark-fuscous irroration; abdomen in ¢ with two pairs of dense fuscous 
lateral tufts. Legs grey, sometimes reddish or ochreous-tinged. Forewings 
triangular, costa nearly straight, arched before apex, apex pointed, termen slightly 
rounded, slightly oblique; grey, sometimes reddish or ochreous-tinged, with more 
or less fuscous irroration or strigulation, sometimes confined to costal area; costal 
edge reddish-ochreous; first line from one-fourth costa to one-fourth dorsum, in 
¢ reduced to three or more dark fuscous dots partly surrounded by ferruginous- 
fuscous scales, rarely obsolete, in 2 continuous, reddish-ochreous sometimes mixed 
with fuscous, rarely obsolete; a median subcostal, dark-fuscous, discal mark or 
dot, sometimes faint or obsolete; postmedian line from three-fourths costa to 
before two-thirds dorsum, strongly outwardly curved in ¢ with.subcostal and 
median rounded projections, in 9 only slightly curved, in ¢ formed of dark fuscous 
dots usually connected by a ferruginous-fuscous line, in 9 slender and like first 
line, but sometimes broadly suffused with fuscous; sometimes a subterminal series 
of fuscous dots; cilia concolorous. Hindwings with termen rounded; as fore- 
wings, but without first line and discal dot. 


North Queensland: Townsville. Queensland: Bundaberg, Hidsvold, Gayndah, 
Brisbane, Rosewood, Toowoomba, Dalby. 


Genus 43. DERAMBILA. 
Wik., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxvi, 1630; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 72. 


Face smooth, not projecting. Tongue present. Palpi moderate, slender, 
smooth-sealed, porrect or ascending; second joint with an apical whorl of short 
hairs; terminal joint minute. Antennae of ¢ ciliated. Thorax and abdomen 
slender; the former smooth beneath. Legs long and slender. Femora smooth. 
Posterior tibiae without middle spurs; in ¢ more or less dilated; terminal spurs 
in ¢ sometimes minute or absent. Tarsi not spinulose. Forewings with 2 from 
middle of cell, 3 and 4 widely separate, 5 from middle, 6 from upper angle, 7, 8, 9 
stalked from before angle, 10 absent (coincident with 9), 11 connate with 7, 8, 9, 
immediately running into 12. Hindwings with 2 from middle, 3 and 4 widely 
separate, 5 from middle, 6 and 7 connate or stalked, 12 approximated to cell 
opposite origin of 11, which runs into it, thence diverging. 

Type, D. punctisignata Wlk., from Africa. The genus is of moderate size, 
characteristic of the African and Indo-Malayan regions, extending to the coast 
of North Queensland and North Australia. 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 215 


Key to Species. 


1, Ishhaehy oss vale GO eiaxol "7 JhowFasuey ely poe aamwoeanocodaditoeeuueorocconeeroenc 2. 
Hindwings with 6 and 7 connate or short-stalked ................ permensata. 203 

OAS SEE GHE Oyegiks SiG SS Eee Or GL Ore Gi Onno ORR OUTRO ROHR REE REE ity icy Chrome eRe uE eerste 1s eae ene 3 
DEX W YON J TLE essere G GStrc uss aN Hau niet te CSS RARI ANC GUC PEE ase i AT any he Rt Ue liosceles. 202 

3. Forewings with submarginal line and several dots in median area .... idiosceles. 201 


Forewings without submarginal line and with only one dot in median area ........ 
SPW Nea ey eH NK Telia cise a Sie aeite! ssuep cites] oulan Sac) Si Sy use. SiO: Sule patte eB Perr eave ken auePane oe catherina. 200 


As the species are very similar, I give a key based on the ¢ secondary 
characters. 


il, ANETTA OMGITETIG Tin Tb Cilio ike? Sooomuumococoocundsculoodneuocooeud 2 
Antennae evenly ciliated, ciliations moderate or short ..................... 3 

2. Posterior tibiae grooved externally and without terminal tuft ...... catherina. 200 
Posterier tibiae not grooved but with terminal tuft ................ idiosceles. 201 

Bo! JECSIESIOP Tore WwoGlhy NSodeody Booey seobkcesueesomoecgenesoubdusouus ol liosceles. 202 
Posterior tibiae densely hairy on internal surface ................ permensata. 203 


200. DERAMBILA CATHERINA. 


Zanclopteryx permensata Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1892, 674, nec W1k.— 
Derambila catherina Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 74. 


3, 9. 20-23 mm. Head and thorax white. Palpi 2; white; second joint with 
an apical, terminal with a subapical, fuscous ring. Antennae whitish-grey; in 
& biciliate in tufts, ciliations 3. Abdomen white; dark-fuscous dorsal dots on 
third and fourth, and sometimes also on second, segments; underside grey. Legs 
pale-grey; femora and posterior pair white; posterior tibiae of ¢ thickened and 
deeply grooved on their external surface, terminal spurs short, tarsi longer than 
tibiae. Forewings triangular, costa straight, apex acute, termen very slightly 
rounded; white with pale-fuscous dots; costal edge sometimes strigulated with 
fuscous; a subcostal dot at three-fifths, a subdorsal dot at one-third, and a dot 
on median slightly beyond them; a slightly darker median discal dot; a line 
of fine dots from five-sixths costa, at first parallel to termen, bent inwards below 
middle, and ending on two-thirds dorsum; a darker series of interneural terminal 
dots; cilia white. Hindwings with termen rounded; 6 and 7 stalked; white with 
fuscous dots; a median discal dot; a line of fine dots from three-fourths costa to 
three-fourths dorsum, strongly outwardly curved; terminal dots and cilia as 
forewings. 

This is a common species in North Queensland, but has not yet been recorded 
south of Townsville. The ¢ may be easily recognized by the structure of the 
posterior legs. . 


North Australia: Darwin. North Queensland: Cape York, Dunk Is., Palm 
Is., Townsville, Charters Towers. 


201. DERAMBILA IDIOSCELES, N. Sp. 

idvooxeAns, With peculiar legs. 

3; 9. 20-24 mm. Head and thorax white. Palpi 2; white; second joint with 
an apical, terminal with a subapical, fuscous ring. Antennae grey, towards base 
whitish; in ¢ biciliate in tufts; ciliations 3. Abdomen white; a blackish trans- 
verse bar on third segment, sometimes also a blackish dot on second segment; 
underside grey. Legs white; anterior pair fuscous; posterior tibiae of ¢ somewhat 


216 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii, 


enlarged, smooth, terminal spurs minute; a dorsal terminal tuft of scales, tarsi 
two-thirds, first tarsal joint shorter than second. Forewings triangular, costa 
straight to near apex, apex acute, termen slightly sinuate; white with pale-fuscous 
markings; a few pale-fuscous strigulae on costa towards base; a line from 
one-fourth costa to one-fourth dorsum, outwardly oblique from both margins, 
interrupted and widely open in middle; a blackish median discal dot; a dot 
between this and mid-costa, and two dots in a line between this and mid-dorsum; 
a nearly straight line of dots from five-sixths costa to three-fourths dorsum, 
interrupted beneath middle; two or three subterminal dots; an interrupted 
pale-fuscous submarginal line; a terminal series of black interneural dots; 
cilia white. Hindwings with termen rounded; 6 and 7 stalked; white with 
pale-fuscous markings; a sinuate, median, transverse line of dots; several dots 
in disc following this; an interrupted subterminal line, strongly outwardly curved 
in middle; submarginal line, terminal dots, and cilia as forewings. 


The terminal tuft and minute spurs of the ¢ posterior tibiae, together 
with the first joint of ¢ posterior tarsi being shorter than first joint, are peculiar 
characters. The markings are more numerous than in catherina and differently 
arranged. 

North Australia: Melville Is. North Queensland: Cape York. Five specimens. 


202. DERAMBILA LIOSCELES, 0. Sp. 
NevcooxeAns, Smooth-legged. 


3d. 28 mm. Head and thorax white; centre of face more or less grey. 
Palpi 14; white; apex of second joint grey. Antennae whitish-grey; terminal 
joints expanded at apices; evenly and shortly ciliated (4) in g. Abdomen white; 
sometimes a transverse, blackish, dorsal bar on third segment; underside grey. 
Legs whitish; anterior pair grey; posterior tibiae of ¢ somewhat enlarged, smooth, 
without spurs; posterior tarsi of ¢ about three-fourths. Forewings triangular, 
costa straight to two-thirds, thence arched, apex acute, termen slightly sinuate; 
white with pale-fuscous markings; a dot on dorsum at one-fourth and another 
on median beyond this; a median discal dot; a slightly sinuate line of dots from 
five-sixths costa to dorsum slightly beyond middle; a submarginal line, not 
always distinct; a terminal series of blackish interneural dots, sometimes 
narrowly connected; cilia white. Hindwings with termen rounded; 6 and 7 short- 
stalked; white with pale-fuscous markings; a median discal mark; a subterminal 
series of fine dots from five-sixths costa, at first rounded, thence strongly sinuate 
and bent to end on dorsum at three-fifths; submarginal line, terminal dots, and 
cilia as forewings. 

North Queensland: Kuranda near Cairns in November and May; two specimens 
received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. Also from Timor. 


203. DERAMBILA PERMENSATA. 


Zanclopteryx permensata W1k., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxvi, 1619.—Zanclopteryx 
guttilinea W1k., ibid., xxxvi, 1635. 


3, 2. 30-32 mm. Head white, anterior margin grey; face, except margins, 
grey. Palpi 13, ascending, terminal joint porrect; white; terminal joint and 
apex of second joint fuscous. Antennae whitish-grey; in ¢ evenly and moderately 
ciliated (1%). Thorax white. Abdomen white; underside grey; in ¢ with a 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 217 


median pale ochreous tuft of hairs. Legs white; anterior pair grey; posterior 
tibiae of ¢ much dilated, densely clothed with long hairs on inner surface, 
terminal spurs absent; tarsi 4. Forewings triangular, costa straight to three- 
fourths, thence arched, apex acute, termen slightly sinuate; white with fuscous 
dots; a sub-basal dot at one-fourth, and a dot on median beyond this; a discal 
dot rather beyond middle, sometimes larger and blackish; a series of fine dots 
on veins from five-sixths costa, at first parallel to termen, then bent inwards, and 
continued to dorsum slightly beyond middle; a terminal series of interneural 
blackish dots; cilia white. Hindwings with termen gently rounded, tornus 
prominent; 6 and 7 connate or separate; white with fuscous dots; a median 
discal dot, sometimes blackish; a subterminal series of fine dots, strongly out- 
wardly curved in middle, from five-sixths costa to three-fifths dorsum; terminal 
dots and cilia as forewings. 

North Australia: Darwin. North Queensland: Cape York. Also from Tenimber 
Is., Timor and Java. 


Genus 44. Ozona. 
Wi1k., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxiv, 1080; Prout, Gen. Insect., Oenochrom., p. 93. 


Face smooth. Palpi moderate, porrect, rather slender; second joint rough- 
scaled above towards apex; terminal joint short, truncate. Antennae about three- 
fourths; in ¢ ciliated. Thorax slender; not hairy beneath. Femora smooth. 
Posterior tibiae with a single median and two terminal spurs in both sexes; in 
6d more or less dilated, with internal groove and tuft. Tarsi not spinulose. 
Forewings with 10 absent (coincident with 9), 7, 8, 9 stalked from well before 
upper angle of cell, 11 arising from near 7, 8, 9, anastomosing strongly with 12, 
then with 10. Hindwings with 3 and 4 separate, 5 from middle of cell, 6 and 7 
separate, 11 from near base, running into 12, 12 widely separated from cell. 


Type, O. microniaria Wlk., from India. A moderately large genus ranging 
from India throughout the Archipelago, with one species in Africa. Many of the 
species have narrow forewings falcate at the apex. 


1. Hindwings with termen strongly angled on vein 6 .............. basisparsata. 204 
FindwinssSsawathenternmnlene round eder mse mei soni Siesee eS eccl cers cies evar mena exigua. 205 


204. OZOLA BASISPARSATA. 
Carima basisparsata W1k., Cat. Brit. Mus., xxvi, 1631. 


3, 9. 34-36 mm. Head brown-whitish. Palpi 14; fuscous; bases of first and 
second joints whitish. Antennae brown-whitish; ciliations in ¢ 14. Thorax and 
abdomen brown-whitish with a few fuscous scales. Legs whitish with slight 
fuscous irroration; posterior tibiae of ¢ dilated, with internal groove and tuft. 
Forewings narrow-triangular, elongate, costa nearly straight, but strongly arched 
before apex, apex acute, slightly produced, termen strongly angled on vein 4, 
slightly concave above and below angle, very oblique; brown-whitish variably 
suffused with brownish and with very sparse fuscous irroration; sometimes a 
curved, broadly suffused, antemedian line; postmedian line very slender, pale- 
grey, from three-fifths costa, outwardly curved beneath costa, thence straight 
to four-fifths dorsum, sometimes obscured by brownish suffusion; a subterminal 
line of confluent fuscous dots from costa to vein 5, or continued further, some- 


218 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii, 


times the area between this and postmedian line is darkly suffused; cilia fuscous- 
brown, apices brown-whitish, between veins 3 and 4 wholly whitish. Hindwings 
subquadrate, termen sharply angled on vein 6; as forewings, with the addition 
of a dark-fuscous discal dot before middle. Underside whitish irrorated with 
brown; markings as on upper side but more distinct; a discal dot on forewing. 


North Queensland: Cairns, Townsville. Also from Borneo and Malay 
Peninsula. 


205. OzoLA EXIGUA. 
Swin., Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1902, 645. 


6, @. 24-32 mm. Head ochreous-whitish; face with a transverse brownish bar. 
Palpi 14; fuscous-brown, towards base ochreous-whitish. Antennae ochreous-grey- 
whitish: ciliations in ¢ 1%. Thorax and abdomen ochreous-whitish, sometimes 
with a few fuscous scales. Legs ochreous-whitish partly suffused and irrorated 
with brown; posterior tibiae of ¢ dilated with internal groove and tuft. Fore- 
wings narrow-triangular, elongate, costa straight almost to apex, apex acute, 
slightly produced, termen sinuate, oblique; ochreous-whitish irrorated, and costa 
strigulated with fuscous-brown; a distinct fuscous-brown, outwardly-curved ante- 
median line from one-fourth costa to one-fourth dorsum; a median subcostal discal 
dot; a similar postmedian line from two-thirds costa to three-fourths dorsum, 
sinuate, sometimes wavy; a small irregular fuscous blotch on termen beneath apex, 
connected by a distinct line with costa before apex; a lesser terminal blotch above 
tornus; in 2 most of the area beyond the postmedian line is darkly suffused; 
cilia fuscous, between terminal blotches whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded: 
as forewings, but without tornal blotch, antemedian and postmedian lines meeting 
on costa. Underside similar. 


North Australia: Darwin. North Queensland: Palm Islands. Also from 
New Guinea. 


Species unknown or wrongly referred to this family. 


As already mentioned I refer the genus Diceratucha Swin., to the Notodontidae 
and the genera Dirce Prout (Qenone Meyr., praeoce.) and Xenomusa Meyr., to 
the Boarmiadae. 


206. Aspilates (Meyr., nec Treit.) chordcta Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1899, 
1196, belongs to the Boarmiadae. I have examined the type. 

207. Hypographa reflua Luc., Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 1898, 70. 

208. Onychodes fulgurans Lue., ibid., 70 (misprinted fulguraus). 


209. Arhodia orthotoma Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1894, 83, is a synonym 
of Orsonota clelia Cram. (Boarmiadae). 


210. Arhodia porphyropa Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1898, 42, belongs to the 
Geometridae. 


211. Monoctenia niphosema Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1908, 114, belongs to 
Noctuidae. 


212. Dichromodes ? triglypta Low., ibid., 114, belongs to the genus Sterrha. 


213. Epidesmia unilinea Swin., Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1902, is a synonym of 
Heteralex aspersa Warr. The type is from China, not Tasmania. 


Adeixis 
Amphiclasta 
Antasia 
Antictenia 
Arcina 
Arhodia 
Axiagasta 
Bradyctena 
Carthaea 
Cathaemacta 
Celerena 
Cernia 
Circopetes 
Derambila 
Dichromodes 


BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 


INDEX TO GENERA. 


Dinophalus 
Eephyas 
Enchocrana 
Encryphia 
Hpidesmia 
EHumelea 
Gastrophora 
Gerusia 
Homospora 
Hypographa 
Lissomma 
Macroctenia 
Monoctenia 
Nearcha 
Noreia 


INDEX TO SPECIES. 


4 


em re 


bo mH bo Co to DS tO 
FPrRrwnNwnwmnooranve nN wv o- 


cs 


Oenochroma 
Onycodes 
Ozola 
Phalaria 
Phrixocomes 
Physetostege 
Sarcinodes 
Satraparchis 
Symphylistis 
Systatica 
Tapinogyna 
Taxeotis 
Xenogenes 
Zeuctophlebia 


219 


De RF bE & bY 
FON, fF Fw oO 


oon 
a1 wo 


wood 


CD (= 


Synonyms, unrecognized species, and species wrongly referred to this family, 


in italics. 


acrothecta 
adelia 
adelpha 
aenigmatodes 
aesia 

agnata 
ainaria 
albitacta 
alloceros 
alpina 
ambiens 
ampycteria 
amyclaria 
anelictis 
anemodes 
angasi 
anthracopa 
areniferata 
argillina 
argyritis 
aridaria 
aristadelpha 
aristarcha 
artia 
atmoscia 
atrosignata 
atyla 
aurinaria 
basisparsata 
bathrosema 
benecristata 
berthoudi 
bigeminata 
bijugata 
blechra i 
brachygrammella 
buffalaria 
calladelpha 
calypsis 
capitata 
caprina 


27 
20 
28 
40 
79 
3 
74 
123 
41 
aLralt 
188 
144 
188 
88 


carbonata 
caronia 
catherina 
cerasiplaga 
chilonaria 
chordota 
chrysoplaca 
cirrhoplaca 
collineata 
compacta 
compar 
compsotis 
confluaria 
consignata 
corrogata 
costinotata 
curtaria 
cyanorrhaea 
eycnoptera 
cygnaea 
dasyzona 
decolorata 
decora 
delogramma 
denticulata 
dentigeraria 
devitata 
diasemaria 
didymochroa 
diffusaria 
digglesaria 
dilutaria 
Miphtherina 
disputata 
divergentaria 
drakei 
adryina 
duponchelii 
egenata 
emplecta 
endela 


mH H 
NYEHMOABDAUNUNANOSOUARAS 


a 


em O CoH 
NQXewmnwaorwre wp cow fr Ww DD WY 


HH 
Ho aD 


epaeneta 
epigaea 
epigypsa 
epiodes 
aremaea 
eremophila 
erubescens 
estigmaria 
euprepes 
euscia 
eustrotiodes 
exaereta 
exigua 
eximia 
exocha 
excusata 
explanata 
explicataria 
exsectaria 
exsignata 
falernaria 
flagrantaria 
fiavicapitata 
fraternaria 
frontisignata 
fulgorigera 
fulgurans 
fulvida 
galactica 
gastropacharia 
goniogramma 
griseofusa 
auttilinea W1k. 


\ 


guttilinea Warr. 


haematopa 
henricaria 
himerata 
himeroides 
hiracopis 
holopsara 
holoscia 


153 
43 
15 

149 
33 


992 
vo 


iL@al 

rial 

82 
114 
129 

37 
205 
156 
103 
181 
100 


D) 
a 


35 
103 
157 
185 

45 
t57 
IOS) 

64 
208 

82 

72 
166 

29 
192 
203 
167 


a 
4 


178 
141 
184 
145 

49 


9 
o 


220 


holzi 
hypenaria 
hypotaenaria 
icelodes 
idiocrana 
idiosceles 
illidget 
inconcisata 
incongrua 
indicataria 
infantilis 
inostentata 
insignata 
imspersa 


intermixtaria .. 


intextata 
ioneura 
ischnota 
isomeris 
isophanes 
lacista 
laetabilis 
lasiocamparia 
lechriomita 
leptocyma 
leptogramma 
leptozona 
leucospila 
limosa 

linda 
liosceles 
liospoda 
lissophrica 
lissoscia 
loxomochla 
loxosticha 
lutosaria 
lygaea 
lygrodes 
lymantriodes 
macrodonta 
macrophyes 
mesodonta 
mesogonia 
MeSOZONGA 
metaxanthana 
mimela 
minuta 
miranda 
modesta 
molybdaria 
multicolor 
mundiferaria 
nephocrossa 
nexistriga 
niphosema 
nullata 
obliquifascia 
obtusata WIk. 
ochripennata 


odontias Low .. 


odontias Meyr. 
ophiosema 


REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN OENOCHROMIDAE, iii. 


101, 


152 

55 
163 
116 
132 
201 
186 

17 
143 
115 
173 
127 
127 

55 

22 

1U%/ 

80 

69 

16 

23 
148 

76 
179 
137 
130 
109 
111 
176 
110 
118 
202 
108 
102 
171 

48 
198 
187 
194 
107 
180 
147 
136 
120 


ophiucha 
ophiusaria 
ophla 
oraula 
orectis 
oriphoetes 
ornata 
orphnina 
orthodesma 
crthogramma 
orthosticta 
orthotis 
orthotoma 
orthozona 
oxyderces 
oxyptera 
ozora 
pachygramma 
pallida 
pallidula 
paraptila 
partitaria 
pelopa 
perfabricata 
perichroa 
perinipha 
perlinearia 
permensata 
personalis 
petrilineata 
phaedropa 
phaeopa 


phaeostropha .. 


philodora 
phlegetonaria 
phoenicina 
phricocyma 
phyllomorpha 
plusiata 
poecilotis 
polyspila 
porphyropa 
postcarneata 
postmarginata 
privata 
procrita 
promelanaria 
prosedra 
pseudophaes 
ptilomacra 
punctilineata 
punctiunculis 
pygmaea 
pyrosema 
quadrigramma 
quaternaria 
raynori 

recisa 

reflua 
replicataria 
reserata 
reservata 
resignata 


113 
158 
10 
28 
104 
90 
126 
42 
161 
126 
24 


203 
112 
122 


retractaria 
rhodobaphes 
rhodoscopa 
rimosa 
rosalia 
rostrata 
rubra Luc. 
rubra Warr. 
rubricosa 
rufipalpis 
rufula 
sanguinata 
saturnioides 
schistacearia 
scothima 
semicanescens 
semifusca 
semirosea 
serpentaria 
sigmata 
simplex 
smerintharia 
squalidata 
staurotis 
stereospila 
steropias 
stilbiata 
stillans 
stipata 
strophiodes 
subcarnea 
subcelata 
subflava 
subfulvida 
subpurpurea 
subustaria 
subvelaria 
tapinodes 
teliferata 
thermistis 
transactaria 
transcissata 
traumataria 
tricolor 
tridenta 
triglypta 
triparata 
tristificata 
trychnoptila 
tryxaria 
turneri 
uncta 
undulifera 
uniformis 
unilinea 
ursaria 
usurpatrix 
vetustaria 
vinacea 
vinaria 
wayit 
xanthastis 
xanthogramma 


OBSERVATIONS ON THE DIPTEROUS FAMILY TANYDERIDAE. 


By CHARLES P. ALEXANDER, Massachusetts Agricultural College, 
Amherst, Massachusetts, U.S.A. 
(Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) 


(Plates v—vi; One Text-figure. ) 
[Read 21st May, 1930.] 


In the present paper, I wish to discuss two distinct subjects, first, to give a 
preliminary description of the immature stages of the family Tanyderidae, and 
second, to describe a new species of Radinoderus from the Dorrigo Plateau of New 
South Wales. 

The recent discovery of the immature stages of the Tanyderidae is a matter 
of very great interest to students of the Order, since this was the sole remaining 
family of lower Orthorrhapha whose larva had baffled discovery to the present 
time. It seems entirely fitting that the first discussion of the early stages of this 
archaic family should be published in Australia, despite the fact that the species 
in question is a North American one, Protoplasa fitchii (Osten-Sacken). Australasia 
is the great centre of distribution of the family, more than one-half of the species 
so far discovered being from this region (Alexander, 1928b). Now that the larval 
habitat is known and we have an idea of the general appearance of the larva, it 
seems certain that the early stages of some one of the larger and more showy 
Australian or New Zealand species will be discovered. 

The scantiness of larval, and especially of pupal, material has rendered it 
inadvisable to consider details of structure at this time. The majority of the 
larvae in my possession, together with the pupae, will be given to Professor J. 
Speed Rogers of the University of Florida, Gainesville, for more detailed considera- 
tion and dissection, especially of the head-capsule which has been but super- 
ficially treated in the present account. One additional larva has been deposited 
in each of the collections of the British Museum and United States National 
Museum. 


THE IMMATURE STAGES OF THE TANYDERIDAE. 


Protoplasa fitchii was long considered to be one of the rarest of North 
American Diptera (Alexander, 1919, 1920). In 1928, Dr. G. C. Crampton (Crampton, 
1929), while collecting in the Gaspé Peninsula of Eastern Quebec, Canada, 
encountered a large swarm of flies and was amazed to find that they pertained to 
the present very uncommon species. In his opinion, there were thousands of 
individuals about and nearly two hundred specimens were secured by passing the 
net through the swarm. a few times. 

It was due to the influence of the above discovery that Dr. Crampton and I, 
in June, 1929, undertook a 2,000-mile motor trip to the Gaspé country and, after 
a detailed search, finally discovered the early stages of the fly. The entire credit 
for the finding of the larva and rearing through to the adult condition of Protoplasa 


222 OBSERVATIONS ON THE DIPTEROUS FAMILY TANYDERIDAE, 


is due to Dr. Crampton, in the first place to his initial discovery of the species 
in numbers and later to his kind interest in returning to the place the succeeding 
year. 


In 1920, a most remarkable dipterous larva was described (Alexander, 1920) 
that was referred with but little question to Protoplasa. All the characters of 
this larva seemed to fit in so well with our presumed knowledge of the genus, 
that it came as a distinct shock to find that the true larva of Protoplasa was an 
entirely different creature. Paradoxical as it may sound, the erroneous larva 
referred here in 1920 still seems closer to what might be expected of the larvae 
of the Tanyderidae, based on a knowledge of the related families Psychodidae and 
Ptychopteridae, than does the weird creature that is now settled beyond question. 
The 1920 larva still remains unknown and much discussion has now arisen as to 
its correct position in the Diptera. One naturally turns to the Anisopodid 
subfamily, Axymyiinae, the type of which, Arymyia furcata McAtee, was described 
from this identical region, but Mr. Edwards and I both hesitate to place the larva 
in question in this section of the Orthorrhapha. Mr. Edwards is inclined to believe 
that it will be found to belong to the Bruchomyiine Psychodidae (Alexander, 
1928a), such as Nemopalpus, although the members of the group have not yet 
been discovered nearer than Peru. I myself cannot but feel the possibility that 
there still exists at Washington a Psychodoid Dipteron different from any yet 
discovered. 


The Washington larva above discussed was found in saturated logs on the 
banks of the Potomac River, indicating an aquatic or amphibious life. This 
supposition was substantiated by the associated insects occurring in the same log 
(Alexander, 1920). When Dr. Crampton and I finally arrived at the River Pabos, 
Gaspé, on the afternoon of 19th June, 1929, we at once began a critical survey of all 
saturated logs, stranded and imbedded in the earth at the stream margin, in a 
search for the particular type of larva we had in mind. After a long search that 
produced numerous insects and other animals, but nothing that could possibly 
be considered as being Protoplasa, we turned our attention to the water and, 
after a time, discovered the larva that finally proved to belong to this fly. After 
some hours of back-breaking sifting of sandy gravel at the water’s margin, amid 
swarms of black flies, Simuliuwm, and punkies, Culicoides, we finally secured a 
total of nine larvae, two of which were placed in rearing and eventually yielded 
one pupa and an emerged adult female, together with her cast pupal skin. The 
total duration of the pupal stage is not more than 9 days and presumably from 
two to three days less than this. 


The west branch of the River Pabos, three miles west of Chandler, is a 
shallow, pebbly to stony bottomed stream where the tides from the Bay of Chaleurs 
are slightly felt, although the water of the stream at this point is strictly fresh. 
The river here is about 120 feet wide, without evident rapids or riffles, crossed by 
an ancient wooden bridge (not iron, as stated by Crampton, 1929) with wooden 
railings. An island in the river supports the central pier of the bridge. A scanty 
woody vegetation lines the banks of the stream, this being chiefly alder, balsam 
poplar and spruce. On the eastern bank, the trees are somewhat taller and more 
dense, including white birch, spruce and balsam fir. The larvae were found on 
the west bank a few yards north of the bridge. They occurred in the sand under 
shallow water but, like the associated Hriocera, they undoubtedly migrate to drier 
soil when ready to pupate. 


BY C. P. ALEXANDER. 223 


Associated with the larvae of Protoplasa were larvae of a large species of the 
crane-fly genus Eriocera; larvae and abundant pupae of a new species of Eriocera, 
E. gaspensis Alexander; and a few larvae of a Tipuline crane-fly. 


On 21st June, when a short distance east of Matapedia, Gaspé, 140 miles west 
of Chandler, Dr. Crampton and I again encountered great swarms of adult 
Protoplasa flying at dusk near a small stream and secured some two hundred 
additional specimens. At this time, the swarms were in close proximity to large 

swarms of a Tipulid, Hriocera longicornis (Walker). 


Description of the Stages. 


Larva—Body eucephalous, terete; lateral spiracles on prothorax and abdominal 
segment eight; no creeping welts on body; caudal end of abdomen with six long 
filaments, of which one pair are borne near the caudal ends of two elongate anal 
pseudopods, the latter terminating in a circlet of short outer crotchets and a central 
group of long slender chotchets; four simple anal gills. 

Pupa.—Appearance very much like a Hexatomine Tipulid; head surmounted 
by a high bispinous crest; pronotal breathing horns relatively small, smooth, equal 
in size; leg-sheaths lying side by side, the fore pair shortest, the hind pair longest; 
venation showing clearly on wing-pads; abdominal segments with a tuberculate 
armature, chiefly near the posterior margins of the segments. 

Larva.—Length to end of longest filaments, 17-18 mm. Filaments alone, 
45-5 mm. Greatest diameter of body, 155 mm. General coloration dirty white, 
the head-capsule and spiracles blackened. 

Body (Plate v, fig. 1) eucephalous; segments terete or nearly so, those of the 
thoracic segments a little more dilated than those of the abdomen. | 

Head (Plate v, figs. 2 and 3) a compact, heavily chitinized capsule. Clypeus 
transverse, the margin with four lobes, the lateral pair each with two pale setae 
arising from the lower surface; intermediate lobes each with a single seta. 
Antennae distinct, three-segmented; basal segment widest; second segment 
longest, cylindrical; terminal segment reduced in size. What appear to be 
epipharyngeal structures appear as two large pale lobes densely cushioned with 
yellow setae. Both labial and maxillary palpi reduced in size. 

Prothorax longer than the remaining thoracic segments, divided by a 
constriction into two rings; on posterior ring at mid-height of body with a small 
spiracle; mesothorax a little longer and thicker than the metathorax, on dorsal 
surface divided into two rings by a weak constriction that becomes obsolete on 
the sides, the ventral margin entire. Nine apparent abdominal segments that 
gradually increase in length and decrease in diameter from the first to the last; 
abdominal segments with a narrow basal constriction or ring and a much longer 
posterior portion that is weakly subdivided into annuli. 


Penultimate or eighth abdominal segment (Plate v, fig. 4) with a small spiracle 
on side shortly before caudal margin; immediately caudad of the spiracle arises 
a long pale filament that is slightly longer than any of those on the terminal 
segment. Ninth abdominal segment with the ventral lateral angles produced 
into long slender anal pseudopods (Plate v, fig. 5), each terminating in two sets 
of crotchet-like structures, including a marginal series of short curved hooks and 
a central group of about eighteen long slender rods that are slightly curved at 
their tips. Just before apex of pseudopod on dorsal face arises a long slender 
filament. Each dorsal lateral portion of the ninth segment with a long filament 

c , 


224 OBSERVATIONS ON THE DIPTEROUS FAMILY TANYDERIDAE, 


that is a little stouter at base but somewhat shorter than the filaments of the 
penultimate segment. From the disk between these six elongate filaments arise 
four short simple anal gills. 


Chaetotaxy: Prothorax with a group of about five small setae on lateral 
aspect of basal ring, with an additional seta on posterior ring some distance before 
the spiracle. A further group of small setae on ventral surface. On the meso- 
thorax and metathorax, a group of three setae, two large and one smaller inter- 
mediate one placed in an oblique straight line on anterior ring; on ventral surface, 
setae about as on prothorax and still small, placed on slightly tumid swellings 
that cannot be considered as being creeping welts. Very small and weak setae on 
dorsal aspect of posterior ring of all thoracic segments, these gradually increasing 
in size on outer segments. On the abdominal segments the arrangement of setae 
is about the same, the dorsal series remaining small and inconspicuous, lacking 
on segment eight; the lateral series are arranged, one on basal ring, two on 
posterior ring; ventral setae of posterior ring becoming large and more 
conspicuous, arranged more or less definitely in pairs but with no indication of 
creeping welts. 

Pupa.—Male, length, 8-5-9 mm. Greatest width, dextro-sinistral, about 1-:5-1-6 
mm. Greatest depth, dorso-ventral, 1-6-1:8 mm. General appearance of pupa about 
as figured (Plate vi, fig. 1), the abdomen of this specimen more or less shrunken. 


Head (Plate vi, figs. 3 and 4) surmounted by a high, bispinous crest, the two 
terminal points directed cephalad and strongly ventrad; dorsal surface of these 
horns with a basal spinous protuberance, together with a long appressed seta lying 
further distad. Dorsal region of head behind the cephalic horns with four 
conspicuous tubercles that bear long setae. Sheath of labrum at base with a large 
median spine directed ventrad and two slightly smaller lateral spines directed 
ventrad and caudad (Plate vi, figs. 1 and 3). Sheaths of maxillary palpi very 
stout, five-ssegmented, directed laterad and thence cephalad. Labial sheath very 
large, bilobed. Ventral aspect of head between the antennal sheaths and the 
labrum and overlying the eyes of the developing adult within a transverse row 
of four tubercles that bear long delicate setae. 

Pronotum (Plate vi, figs. 1 and 4) extensive, finely transversely wrinkled. 
Pronotal breathing-horns (Plate vi, fig. 2) each appearing as a relatively small, 
smooth structure, slightly sinuous, gradually narrowed to a terminal point, both 
horns of equal size and quite symmetrical. Mesonotum nearly smooth, gibbous, 
with a more or less distinct median depression, best defined at anterior end; 
a weak callosity above wing-root provided with two small setae. All leg-pads 
lying side-by-side, the fore (inner) pair shortest, ending shortly before the pen- 
ultimate segment of the middle legs, which, in turn, end about opposite the 
termination of the third segment of the hind (outer) pair of legs. Wing-pads 
showing the essential features of venation of the family, Se simple; R five- 
branched, M four-branched; Cu simple; a single anal vein, with a second curved 
into the axilla. Metanotum narrow, smooth, with a large seta on either side; 
sheath of halteres chiefly concealed beneath the wing-pad. 

Abdominal tergites just before caudal margins with a transverse row of 
tubercles of various sizes and shapes, these terminating in long to short setae; 
the rows number between twenty-five and thirty such tubercles on tergites three 
and four, being somewhat reduced in number on the more basal segments, rapidly 
decreasing in number on the outer segments, there being only about six on 


BY C. P. ALEXANDER. 225 


the seventh tergite, but these all large and powerful. Hach cephalic lateral 
angle of the tergite with two additional tubercles, these more approximated 
on the basal segments, becoming slightly more separated on the outer segments. 
Pleurites with a single powerful setiferous tubercle on basal portion, together 
with a transverse group on posterior ring, consisting of two tubercles with a 
smaller tripartite or quadripartite tubercle between, the lateral tubercles becoming 
larger and more powerful on the outer segments. Sternites with a transverse 
swelling on either side near caudal margin, each bearing a tiny lateral seta and 
a powerful inner tubercle bearing a long seta (Plate vi, fig. 5); a transverse 
row of very tiny setae on basal portion of the sternites beyond the termination 
of the wing-pad, these becoming somewhat larger and more conspicuous on the 
outer segments. Highth segment with a lateral finger-like lobe, directed caudad. 
Genital sheaths of both sexes about as figured (male, Plate vi, fig. 1; female, 
Plate vi, fig. 5). 


Nepionotype (type larva).—River Pabos, Gaspé, Quebec, 19th June, 1929, ‘in 
collection of Professor Rogers. 


Neanotype (type pupa).—Reared from larvae from type locality, transformed 
at Amherst, killed 30th June, 1929. 


Paratype larvae and one pupal skin. 


Affinities. 

The larva of Protoplasa is so distinct from that of all other families of 
Diptera that a comparison is scarcely needed. On the other hand, the pupa is so 
exceedingly like a Hexatomine Tipulid, such as Hvriocera, that no features are 
available for definition of the family in this stage, other than the venation of 
the pupal wing-pads and the details of structure of the mouth-parts. 


For many years the Tanyderidae were placed with the Ptychopteridae and 
the relationship admittedly exists, though probably not as close as was believed 
before the discovery of the early stages. It was formerly believed that the 
immature stages of the Tanyderidae, when discovered, would conform in their 
chief essentials with those of the Psychodidae and the Ptychopteridae, such as 
the possession of an anal breathing-tube, a character of all families of Psychodoid 
Diptera. The Tanyderidae depart from all these related families in a totally 
different arrangement of spiracles, these being placed laterally on the prothorax 
and eighth abdominal segment, and so deviating from the normal arrangement 
of spiracles in amphipneustic respiration. Similarly the body pseudopods or 
creeping welts, that might well be pre-supposed from the taxonomic arrangement 
of the groups, do not occur. The long anal pseudopods are rather like those of 
the Chironomidae. 


I am supplying a tentative arrangement of the larvae of the Orthorrhaphous 
Diptera to show the position of the Tanyderidae therein: 


1. Body eucephalous; or the posterior portion of the head-capsule with deep longitudinal 
incisions; mandibles moving horizontally or obliquely; labium usually well- 
developed (larvae frequently peripneustic). (Orthorrhapha Nematocera) ... 2 

Body not eucephalous, the head being more or less retractile or lacking (Hetero- 
neuridae); labial plate not developed; mandibles moving vertically; (larvae 
normally amphipneustic; very rarely metapneustic or peripneustic, i.e., some 
Dolichopodidae). (Orthorrhapha Brachycera; Cyclorrhapha) ............ 19 

Head-capsuleincompleter behind.) retractile)... 2.25. see ocieiciseneeeie eicioie se) a 3 

Head-capsule complete, immovable, i.e., body eucephalous .................... 4 


bo 


226 


10. 


11. 


12. 


13. 


14, 


15. 


16. 


OBSERVATIONS ON THE DIPTEROUS FAMILY TANYDERIDAE, 


Larvae peripneustic; usually with a “‘breast-bone’, a chitinized plate on ventral 
surface of second thoracic segment (mainly phytophagous, mostly gall-makers; 
a few in decaying wood, bulbs, fungi; a few zoophagous) .................... 
wepaeleotssig sates ecie¥(evse) ceuus yistonteipente per omivey st ica sila: Spe meureweE ren eunnane gamenerien niet cite CECIDOMYIIDAE (ITONIDIDAE). 
Larvae metapneustic or apneustic, ie., Antocha; no ‘“breast-bone’’; never gall- 
makers (habits very various, mostly in wet earth or decaying wood) .......... 
Phas bnsr aroreRare Gsaroser at qeal neal Bicker cH ENGIG ‘oho Alc: Oa arh cater ue NT Mer OMen cg cro cick Hunton aes eecee- ol ae TIPULIDAE 
Body cylindrical, with the spiracles small, lateral in position on sides of prothorax 
and eighth abdominal segment; six long filaments at caudal end of body, one 
pair borne by long anal pseudopods; (aquatic) ................... TANYDERIDAE 
Charageters: (not sas CaAbOviey fate kee sewer eee ede reo cs eotas Eo can SEEM = ON A ehiclin 2a RAs ea ee 5 
Body depressed; abdominal segments one to seven with conspicuous lateral out- 
growths, at outer end of each with a ventral sucking-disk armed with con- 
centric rows of crochets; antennae long, unequally biramous; (larvae aquatic, 
in mountain streams, clinging to stones by pseudopods) ..... DEUTEROPHLEBIIDAE 
Characters Mot ta'sialb Ov ewes apes eae ek RELL e BN <meta OE a MAU ee el ee 6 


Body depressed, the head-capsule complete but permanently retracted within thorax ; 
body constricted into six primary divisions, each with a median ventral sucking 
disk, with a tuft of gill-filaments on either side; (aquatic) .... BLEPHAROCERIDAE 


td 


Characters NOtras Va OVien cr sree es A elena ec seco cscse ie te] GA PRUE ey Rhu aR OR ae ee 7 


Thoracic segments fused into a complex mass, without pseudopods; in most genera 
with an anal respiratory funnel; when lacking, as in Anophelinae and some 


Chaoborinae, the first statement holds; (aquatic) .................. CULICIDAE 
Thoracic segments not so fused; if conspicuously dilated or extended, provided with 
2) 1OOKEXOUIEHOY JOVEN MOP EKAKS OSI “wo onepadoauinogomeonoogoaebounavooncococ 8 
Posterior spiracles borne at apex of a breathing-tube that is at least one-half as 
long as body; two anal gills; (aquatic or semi-aquatic) ...... PTYCHOPTERIDAE 
Posterior spiracles borne at apex of a very short tube or sessile; gills four in 
number “or tlachkanig eyes awe eee oh as ene eee Ye ap ee TN ore re ee, a ae Lk 9 
Body amphipneustic or with conspicuous anal gills ...................2.000- 10 
Body peripneustic, metapneustiec or apneustic ................. 00. ee eee eee 13 
INO; nedianwpseudopodmonmprouloraxgies acc claire cache) ie ae eo nee 11 
MWimedianmventralypseudopodwonvprothonax 4c). seis eee ieee ene 12 


Body segments simple; in cases, with paired pseudopods on either abdominal 
segments one and two, or on the former alone; form in life U-shaped; (aquatic 


COpeme (Sfp ga eeKo NDEE MEE) lig 2 48 eng ss Hua ci aRm acer ape Ie RE MRE A Rats chee oct een PN nn To dT Rta Oo 5 omens A! DIXIDAE 
Characters not as above; body segments divided by false constrictions; (decaying 
WEL SCADTS MACE M) Meimpiee steep cee eau Ulan tress: c4 sens vanes bne 41 dlls) te Bein SCR rc UcStae anaes ANISOPODIDAE 


Thorax much distended; labial plate with only four to seven teeth, these capable 
of being directed caudad; antennae retractile ...... CHIRONOMIDAE (Tanypinae) 
Thorax not dilated; labial plate, when with distinct teeth, these exceeding seven in 
number and directed cephalad; antennae non-retractile ....................... 
Ee Ee Crea eG a cro a ee a nioe CHIRONOMIDAE (Chironominae) ; ORPHNEPHILIDAE 
IBOGh AAA OMI NOG CP AONGISMO socodaccoseddencbucooocgdsaouboouduoaHbobouaues 14 
IB OdVAsDECEIDNEUSUIC Taso rare cme meena steel ate c is isc) olleka ta le sticay cee eC oenre en ie Svat hc ST Os 16 
Body very elongate, slender, tapering toward both ends, terminal segment with about 
eight setae; (aquatic, movements snake-like, Palpomyia, Culicoides, etc.) ...... 
Bini esse hrerda adics pe belles © Air eee GAR SL REA E UR RM SR eM an Rei Git Suet eens CHIRONOMIDAE (Ceratopogoninae) 
ILENE MO WonlS enn! GARIKOSINKS ooascoceseoonnbagbedsuosuuucooe END heh ere Oe aU Coe 15 
Body without pseudopods; segments with transverse constrictions; some or all of 
the dersal segments with narrow, chitinized transverse bands or plates; or the 
terminal segment produced into a very short tube; (habits various, in decaying 
vegetable: matter (or aquatic) ima. tate siete isos ened Sie eee Tae ee PSYCHODIDAE 
Body stout, armed with numerous setae, some of which are flattened and lanceolate; 
segments without secondary constrictions or chitinized plates; (terrestrial, in 
dung, beneath bark, or in water-soaked logs, Forcipomyia, Ceratopogon, etc.) 
PARES T oN caones RGEC nag cr 0 iCieo Ait) Gn eORC ashi 070-6, Ook OO OL BIG OMabel B 2onn Moen CHIRONOMIDAE (Ceratopogoninae) 
Abdominal spiracles rudimentary but evident; body clavate, the caudal end strongly 
enlarged and bearing a sucking-disk with which larva adheres to habitat; mouth 
With “fans GaAquatre i 7 ie ie enna alan, MccrnnOerm eu Pene yan Ny) ad tlceey Ws, Biel hme aia SIMULIIDAE 
Abdominal spiracles distinct; other characters not as above; (terrestrial) .... 17 


18. 


ig), 


20. 


22. 


23. 


24, 


bo 
co 


BY C. P. ALEXANDER. 227 


Antennae elongate; body with conspicuous setae; arranged in transverse rows .. 18 
Antennae short and inconspicuous; body without conspicuous setae; (generally fungi- 
colous, some in decaying vegetable matter) ................... MYcCETOPHILIDAE 
Posterior spiracles elevated on long stalk-like processes, the lateral spiracles on 
shorter stalks; (in dung and other decaying matter) .............. SCATOPSIDAE 
Spiracles sessile, the posterior pair large, on dorsal surface of ninth abdominal 
segment; prothoracic spiracle larger than others of lateral series; (soil) ..... 
3 \BI0'O 0.0 oes OTOFON Che DrOr OE GOED. Bolo GENCE EDO: OF ECR ERT CCEA REACH AIT IORCMEC S01 > clo cuciiet Gee > RaroLa en ote hc e BIBIONIDAE 
Maxillae well-developed, the palpi distinct; mandibles normally sickle-shaped, not 
protruded far beyond the apices of the maxillae, often not extending one-half 
this distance; antennae well-developed, placed on a chitinized dorsal plate. 
@xthorrhaphaws raichiy.ceray eee acis cos euslecs eee cane ee ise ene deneet Ueto -lreeacnoice 20 
Maxillae poorly developel, the palpi visible only in a few scattered groups; mandibles 
short and hook-like, usually capable of protrusion far beyond the tips of the 
maxillae when the latter are developed; antennae poorly developed or lacking, 
when present placed upon a membranous surface .............. (Cyclorrhapha ) 
Body elongate, elliptical, strongly flattened, with a slight dorso-median carina, the 
body with only nine apparent segments, excluding the head; metathorax elongate 
and apparently including also the first abdominal segment; (amphipneustic ; 
posterior spiracles distant; pupa in last larval skin; six elongate appendages 
on thorax and two others on last abdominal segment; earth or beneath basal 
leaves of rosette plants; Lundbeck considers to be Orthorrhaphous, de Meijere 
GSH, CLOVE AD ITOUS)) ie yee ta eh eee aol a aeRO ak chau oils bite, cbroal aa nay cre peke Renae aaeeel oo LONCHOPTERIDAE 
Characters no tals wall Overs bpp siey sccyswete cio vepial cE SEGE or Sisal 9) a] o> chusviel S121) Sus Pal chya o peeme ee ERR cee crtetve = 21 
Posterior spiracles approximated, situated within a terminal or subterminal cleft 
or chamber and usually concealed ; body more or less shagreened or longitudinally 
SLALOM” ay hiie ewer taints aes isaek Suni isheweycllepr saci akente Cosh ha csidus pay Seaettal teats Meat ue BPE RAR EBA Gl, cr 5 o 22 
Posterior spiracles rather widely separated, situated on the apparent apical segment, 
or upon the penultimate or antepenultimate segment; body not shagreened or 
SUBD aa as soecush Awe epee Os A Hehe! ssa ute PSBLMGRE Qed Spel sad dca aeav ce: Gifas oeberavagie "elie haga TRO AEN erate airs 23 
Body depressed, spindle-shaped, the surface finely shagreened; head little, if any, 
retractile; spiracular fissure transverse; (earth, animal nests, under bark, 
decaying vegetable or animal matter; pupa in last larval skin) .. STRATIOMYIIDAE 
Body cylindrical to pyriform, the abdominal segments with a girdle of pseudopods 
on each segment; body-integument usually longitudinally striated, sometimes 
irregularly roughened; head retractile; spiracular fissure vertical; (aquatic or 


Seniue aquatics pupal PRE] In mescste seme abete Siete Sed ovate f ofthairay hunk aedes ait stetentey se ate TABANIDAE 
Posterior spiracles upon the apparent apical segment ....................0.. 24 
Posterior spiracles upon the penultimate or antepenultimate segment ........ 30 
Apical abdominal segment heavily chitinized, blackened ...................... 25 
Apical abdominal segment not heavily chitinized or blackened .............. 26 


Thoracic segments not chitinized dorsally; apical plate very large, the spiracles 
vertically elongated, the lobes surrounding the disk small, widely separated; 
Cearthisrarelysundersbark.)). Voy yalsaveseven con taues a sates sty, oye, aneh sue soeeanetsuepomels CoENOMYIIDAE 

Prothorax and mesothorax chitinized dorsally; apical chitinized plate rather small, 
spiracles circular, the paired surrounding lobes large, fused basally, each with 


amumbervoL Loneswsetae 7 (beneathwo ark)... 1s cre « clarecieleiel telco XYLOPHAGIDAE 
Posterior spiracles not in an apical transverse cleft ......................08-. 27 
Posterior spiracles widely separated, situated in an apical transverse cleft; head very 
small, retractile; (internal parasites of Coleopterous larvae) .... NEMESTRINIDAE 


Apical abdominal segment terminating in two elongate processes that are fringed 
with delicate elongate setae; abdomen with paired ventral pseudopods and 


fleshy dorsal and lateral appendages; (aquatic, Atherix) ..... L&EPpriDAk, in part 
Apical abdominal segment not as above, the pseudopods and other appendages lacking 
OLADPDLO MMA ECLYMS Ome crete cep smnter ae ena cite age Hal, Goeuaye eu suis dena lene CONUS ee SE cae 28 


Apical abdominal segment terminating in four or five short, pointed glabrous lobes 
or two fleshy lips; head-skeleton with a large arched dorsal plate, the longitudinal 
rods being articulated upon a horizontal plane; (terrestrial, Leptis, Chrysopila, 
(UGE)  dheco Ordechon OL Ola O MERE. EE OIDES GnCeD RICaIO tho 4 OR RCRCRAEmnoET ny oe Mroeeentn, oreo 6. LEPTIDAE, in part 

Apical abdominal segment not as above; or the head-skeleton without an arched 
dorsal plate, the longitudinal rods articulated with the labial plate at right 
anplestormnearlysso mineproile appearing; bent, a. eee oe oa eee 29 


228 


30. 


31. 


co 
wow 


OBSERVATIONS ON THE DIPTEROUS FAMILY TANYDERIDAE, 


Larva oval in outline, the smaller cephalic end marked off by a strong constriction; 
body integument smooth and viscid so particles of dirt adhere; abdomen with 
seven pairs of pad-like areas on venter of segments two to eight; spiracles not 
surrounded by lobes; (parasitic on spiders; the newly-hatched larva is more 
elongate-oval, the body with conspicuous palmate scales and with two conspicuous 
CAUGATHSEUBE) eR EAs Uta 2 Hrs ice aetpe ee) eT ae CYRTIDAE (AGCROCERIDAE) 

Body slender, cylindrical; spiracular disk surrounded by small fleshy lobes; abdominal 
segments with a ventral transverse creeping welt; ventral lobes of spiracular 
disk larger than dorsal pair; (fleshy lobes lacking in Neurigona; body amphi- 
pneustie except in Thrypticus which is peripneustic; habits various, under bark, 
in wet earth; aquatic; burrowing in stems of palustral grasses) ............... 
dee pr PRP eR rR RE mest cay Pee, Fy es Sel ts -en leva oP IRS EPR MODE Tes eee DOLICHOPODIDAE; H)}MPIDIDAE 

Posterior spiracles placed on antepenultimate abdominal segment; six basal abdominal 
segments subdivided by false constrictions to appear as twelve; body very long 


ANAMSIENIGEST Hs ENA een eR eae kd C2 FES GIT DR RR Ee Ee) Ae Ce ees a ae 31 
Posterior spiracles placed on the penultimate abdominal segment; abdominal 
segments all simple, undivided; body not excessively elongate ............ 32 
Posterior median plate of head-capsule spatulate at apex; (in earth and wood) 
Se ESE A al PER DIT PRN BSP etme Weed lo a eh ME a VAR Dae Oe ve Pk a re THEREVIDAE 
Posterior median plate of head-capsule not dilated at apex; (usually in houses, 
beneath) Carpe tsi) Sees Mestalla r ou Sock ae cet ayaa adn Aus ee Sede SCENOPINIDAE 


Penultimate abdominal segment longer than the ultimate, with a transverse impres- 
sion near the end to give the superficial appearance of two distinct segments; 
last segment terminating in a sharp ridge with a median point; (in decaying 
wood, predaceous on wood-boring Coleoptera) ....................... MYDAIDAE 

Penultimate abdominal segment shorter than the ultimate, or, if longer, without a 
transverse impression as described above; ultimate segment not as described.. 33 

Thoracic segments each with two long setae, one on either side on ventro-lateral 
margin; apical segment with from six to eight long setae; penultimate abdominal 
segment usually shorter than the ultimate; body in life straight; (in wood or 
SOIL DEREGCACEOWSH Nee w teat eece ful Asta ce aca cede uncle chee a iceeacel Rate nO EA ena ae ASILIDAE 

Thoracic segments, and apical segment of abdomen, without conspicuous setae; pen- 
ultimate segment distinctly longer than the ultimate; body in life usually 
arcuate; (habits various, predaceous, parasitic or inquilinous) ... BOMBYLIIDAE 


I cannot attempt at this time to give a key to the Orthorrhaphous pupae. 


The pupa of the Tanyderidae may be separated from the allied groups by the 
following simple key: 


Ik 


bo 


One of the pronotal breathing horns enormously elongated, much longer than the 


body, the other horn very short and abortive ................. PTYCHOPTERIDAE 
Breathing horns short, or, if elongated (in a few Tipulinae), not longer than the 
body and the disproportion in size not conspicuous ....................05- 2 
Tarsalesheatrhicmlyines sid emb ya sides mp areal ein see cease ie suche tesserae ane 3 
Tarsal sheaths overlying one another in pairs .................... TRICHOCERIDAE 
Wing-sheath showing radius as being five-branched ................ TANYDERIDAE 
Wing-sheath with radius reduced, with not more than four branches reaching the 
GOH Gt=8 0 0 Reni ISIE rE SOLO UEL Ate ts, 5 Shot halen A RR Re Me MRE REC eee Ptcr yh Arsen n he chien. HVANGeS nih Ra ae ee oe TIPULIDAE 


A NEW SPECIES OF RADINODERUS FROM THE DORRIGO PLATEAU. 


The new species described herewith was included in a large and interesting 


series of crane-flies received from my friend, Mr. W. Heron, from the Dorrigo 
Plateau of New South Wales. The type specimen is preserved in my collection 
through the kind interest of the collector. 


RADINODERUS DORRIGENSIS, N. SD. 
General coloration dark-brown; antennae 20-segmented, the scape black, the 


flagellum yellow; femora yellow, with a very broad black ring at near mid- 
length; tips of femora and bases of tibiae more narrowly blackened; wings whitish 


BY C. P. ALEXANDER. 229 


with a dark brown pattern that is arranged in the form of two X-shaped areas 
that are confluent at the outer ends of cells C and Sc, the more basal one 
extensively connected with the darkened areas around the arculus in cells R 
and M. 


9. Length about 25 mm.; wing 18-5 mm. 


Rostrum and palpi black. Antennae 20-segmented; scape black, the flagellum 
yellow, the incisures of the basal segments weakly darkened, the outer segments 
clearer yellow, the terminal two segments more dusky; first flagellar segment 
about one-third longer than the second; succeeding segments of nearly equal length, 
cylindrical, the last segment shorter. Head and cervical sclerites black or 
brownish-black,. discoloured. 


Anterior mesonotum light-brown, the disk almost covered by black stripes, the 
median stripe especially wide; scutellum obscure yellow, margined with dark- 
brown and including a median line of the same colour; postnotum dark. Pleura 
dark-brown; variegated with obscure brownish-yellow on the sternopleurite and 
cephalic portion of the pteropleurite. Halteres dusky at base, the outer half 
of the stem light-yellow, the knobs dark-brown. Legs with the coxae and 
trochanters dark; femora yellow, all with a very broad black ring at near mid- 
length, this including approximately two-fifths of the extent of the segment; tips 
of femora broadly blackened; tibiae yellow, the bases broadly blackened, the 
amount a little greater than the femoral tips; remainder of legs pale yellow. 
Wings (Text-fig. 1) whitish with a heavy dark-brown pattern, this appearing as 


ESS 


Text-fig. 1.—Wing of Radinoderus dorrigensis, 
n. sp.; holotype @&. 


two X-shaped areas that are joined in the outer end of cells C and Sc; the basal 
area is further connected with an extensive marking in the prearcular and arcular 
regions by rays in the radial and medial fields; veins yellow, dark-brown in the 
patterned areas. Venation: AS compared with terrae-reginae, the following differ- 
ences are most evident—R longer; Rs more arcuated at origin; R, less upturned 
at tip; R.,, shorter; cell M, narrower at margin; cell 2nd A narrower. 

Abdomen dark-brown, both sternites and tergites variegated laterally near base 
with conspicuous yellow areas; genital segment black. 

Hab.—New South Wales 

Holotype 9°, Brooklana, Eastern Dorrigo, altitude about 2,000 feet, 10th 
February, 1929 (W. Heron). 

Radinoderus dorrigensis is closest to R. terrae-reginae (Alexander), differing 
in the number of antennal segments (20 instead of 24), the conspicuous black 
medial rings on all femora, and details of the wing-pattern and venation. 


230 OBSERVATIONS ON THE DIPTEROUS FAMILY TANYDERIDAE, 


References Cited. 
A complete bibliography of the Tanyderidae has been given in an earlier paper by 
the writer (Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., liii, 1928, 373-374). 
ALEXANDER, C. P., 1919.—The crane-flies of New York. Part I. Distribution and 
taxonomy of the adult flies. Cornell Univ. Agr. Expt. Sta., Mem. 25, 883. 
————, 1920.—The crane-flies of New York. Part II. Biology and. phylogeny. 
Cornell Univ. Agr. Expt. Sta., Mem. 38, 769-772, Pl. 13. 
—-- , 1928a.—The Australasian species of the genus Nemopalpus (Psychodidae, 
Diptera). Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., liii, 291-294. 
, 1928b.—The Tanyderidae of Australia (Diptera). Proc, LINN. Soc. N.S.W., liii, 
367-374. 
CRAMPTON, G. C., 1929.—A swarm of males of the rare and primitive cranefly Frotoplasa 
fitchii observed near Chandler in the Gaspé Peninsula (Diptera). Canad. Ent., 
Ixi, 70-72. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES V-VI. 
Plate v. ; 
Larva of Protoplasa fitchii. 


1.—Entire larva, lateral aspect. 

2.—Head-capsule, diagrammatic, dorsal aspect. 

3.—Head-capsule, diagrammatic, lateral aspect. 

4.—Caudal end, lateral aspect. \ 

5.—Caudal end, ventral aspect, with further enlargements of anal pseudopod and crotchets. 


Plate vi. 
Pupa of Protoplasa fitchii. 


1.—-Entire pupa, male, lateral aspect. 

2.—Pronotal breathing horn. 

3.—Head, male, ventral aspect. 

4.—Head, male, dorsal aspect. 

5.—Genital sheaths, female, ventral aspect. ~ 


Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE V. 


Larva of Protoplasa fitchii. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE VI. 


Pupa of Protoplasa fitchii. 


opal 


Perey 
fej aide 


THE GENUS MICROMONOSPORA @MRSKOV, A LITTLE KNOWN 
GROUP OF SOIL MICROORGANISMS. 


By H. L. JENSEN. 
Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. 


(Plate vii.) 
[Read 21st May, 1930.] 


The large and somewhat heterogeneous group of microorganisms known as 
Actinomycetes or ray fungi has presented many troublesome problems to systematic 
microbiology: firstly, because of the marked variability exhibited by organisms of 
this group, which renders their separation from other microorganisms rather 
vague; secondly, because of their quite uncertain phylogenetic position (it is still 
a matter of dispute whether they should be classed with the Bacteria or with the 
Eumycetes); thirdly, and not least, because the study of these organisms has 
been rather one-sided, mostly limited to pathogenous forms and to certain groups 
of soil forms. The only work, in which they have been studied from a broader 
biological point of view, is so far the excellent monograph of Lieske (1921). The 
only rational attempt to classify the group of actinomycetes on a basis of definite 
morphological characters is represented by the work of Orskov (1923), who worked 
mostly with pathogenous species, among which were a fair number of old 
“laboratory strains’. @Mrskov suggested the following division of the group of 
the microorganisms previously known as the genus Actinomyces: 

i. Cohnistreptothrix: The vegetative mycelium consists of branched, uni- 
cellular hyphae; from this there arises an aerial mycelium of hyphae that are 
thicker than those of the vegetative mycelium. The aerial hyphae undergo a 
process of constriction which gives rise to a formation of chains of regular-sized 
spores; these are somewhat more thermo-resistant than the vegetative hyphae. 

ii. Actinomyces: The vegetative mycelium consists of more or less branched 
hyphae, which may or may not form an aerial mycelium, consisting of hyphae of 
the same thickness as those of the vegetative mycelium. Both vegetative and 
aerial hyphae divide by the formation of transverse walls into fragments of 
irregular size and shape. There is no difference in the thermo-resistance of 
vegetative and aerial mycelium. Some species of this genus seem to torm a 
transition to the genera Corynebacterium and Mycobacterium. 

iii. Micromonospora: A branched, unicellular mycelium is formed, consisting 
of very delicate hyphae with short lateral branches, each of which bears a single 
terminal spore. The spores are small, oval and highly refractive. This genus was 
represented by only a single strain, of which a culture had been obtained from 
Kral’s Mikrobiologische Sammlung, Prague, under the name of Streptothrix 
Chalceae. f 

Orskov did not find this organism mentioned anywhere in the literature 
accessible to him. An organism of this name has, however, been examined by 

D 


232 THE GENUS MICROMONOSPORA, 


Musgrave, Clegg and Polk (1908) in their studies on pathogenous actinomycetes. 
They state that Streptothrix chalcea is a non-pathogenous, saprophytic organism, 
of which a culture has been received by them from Professor A. G. Foulerton, 
London, who isolated it from the air. Foulerton has apparently not published 
any description of the organism, and the description given by Musgrave, Clegg 
and Polk is rather incomplete. Lieske (1921) had a culture of this organism 
from Kral, but does not say much about it. 

Whether any previously described ray fungus is of this morphological type is 
rather doubtful. The Thermoactinomyces vulgaris described by Tsiklinsky (1899) 
might be of this type, according to the figure of spore formation and to the fact 
that spore formation is stated to take place on submerged mycelium in liquid 
cultures. But the organism is also, in opposition to Micromonospora, said to 
form an aerial mycelium. Peklo (1910) gives, in his description of Actinomyces 
alni (which he claims to be the symbiont present in the root nodules of Alnus), 
some figures of a type of spore formation, which is not inconsistent with that of 
Micromonospora. The value of this observation is, however, tempered by the 
fact that Peklo, as pointed out by Lieske (1921), probably worked with cultures 
contaminated with spore-forming bacteria, and the occurrence of branching, spore- 
forming bacilli, which might simulate the appearance of a Micromonospora, is 
not excluded (LOhnis, 1922). Millard and Burr (1926) describe two “species”, 
Actinomyces salmonicolor and Act. maculatus, which are culturally much like 
some of the Micromonospora-strains described below, but the spores are stated to 
be formed “in short chains’. No microscopical illustration is given, so that an 
accurate idea of the nature of these organisms cannot be formed. 


Actinomyces monosporeus, which has been studied in detail by Schtitze (1908), 
shows a mode of spore formation which is to some extent analogous to that of 
Micromonospora, but since the spores are here formed on a specially differentiated 
aerial mycelium (as in the Cohnistreptothriz-group) which is absent in Micro- 
monospora, it is doubtful whether these two organisms are really related to each 
other. 

In 1927 the author observed in a microbiological analysis of a Danish garden 
soil, an organism apparently belonging to the Micromonospora-type, and in 
November, 1929, when some Australian soils were plated on agar media for 
observation of the general character of their bacterial flora, a number of colonies 
of organisms of the same type was observed. Since this suggested that this 
practically unknown genus might represent a group of common and perhaps 
important soil organisms, a number of strains were isolated from various soils, 
and their morphological and biological characters were tested in order to obtain 

a basis for a further study of this genus. 


Ten strains were isolated from the following soils: 
1.—No. 125. Alluvial soil, heavy clay, rich in organic matter, pH 6-0. Isolated 
Strains 125 I, 125 II, 125 IV, and 125 VI. 


2—No. 129. Laterite soil, poor in organic matter, pH 6-7. Isolated Strain 
129 V. 


3.—No. 163. Laterite soil, poor in organic matter, pH 7-9. Isolated Strain 
Goma 


4—No. 176. Laterite soil, poor in organic matter, pH 6:5. Isolated Strains 
176 IV, 176 XII, and 176 XVII. 


92 


BY H. L. JENSEN. 233 


5.—Soil from a lawn in the University grounds, rich in undecomposed grass 
roots, pH 6-6. Isolated Strain U IV. 

The following medium was used for the isolation: Dextrose 2-0 gm.; Casein, 
dissolved in 10 ec. 0-1N NaOH, 0:2 gm.; K.HPO,, 0-5 gm.; MgSO, 0:2 gm.; 
Agar, 15:0 gm.; H.O, 1000 c.c. pH 6-4-6-6. 

On. plates poured in a dilution of 1:100,000—-200,000 and incubated at 30° C., 
the colonies appear after 6-8 days; they grow very slowly and never attain any 
very considerable size (maximum about 1 mm. in 12-14 days). They are perfectly 
round, compact, with myceloid edges like colonies of ordinary actinomycetes and, 
like these, their structure is firm and cartilaginous, but, owing to their small 
dimensions, their actinomyces-character is not easily discovered except under the 
microscope. The colour of the colonies is pink to orange, except the strains 125 IV 
and 176 IV, which are blue. Surface colonies never show any aerial mycelium, but 
sometimes a dark, moist crust of spores. Pure cultures can be obtained from the 
colonies on casein-dextrose-agar without any difficulty. 


Several synthetic media, mostly those recommended by Waksman (1919) for 
the characterization of actinomycetes, were used for the study of cultural 
characters of the Micromonosporae. Only those which gave the most charac- 
teristic growth are mentioned here: 

1.—Dextrose-Asparagin-Agar: Dextrose 10:0 gm., Asparagin 0-5 gm., K,.HPO, 
0-5 gm., Agar 15:0 gm., H.O 1000 c.c. pH 7:0-7:2. 

2.—Starch-Casein-Agar: Soluble starch 10-0 gm., Casein dissolved in 1N NaOH 
1:0 gm., K,HPO, 0°5 gm., MgSO, 0-5 gm., H.O 1000 c.c. pH 7:0. 

3.—Gelatin: 15 per cent. gold label gelatin in tap water. pH 7-0-7-2. 

4—Milk. 

5.—Potato plugs. 

6.—Dextrose-Asparagin Solution: Same as No. 1, without agar. 

7.—Saccharose-Nitrate Solution: Saccharose 30:0 gm., NaNO, 2:0 gm., K,HPO, 
1:0 gm., MgSO, 0°5 gm., KCl 0-5 gm., FeSO, trace, Agar 15:0 gm., H.O 1000 c.e. 
pH 7-0-7-2. 

All the agar media were used as slope cultures. The temperature of incuba- 
tion was 30° C., unless otherwise stated. 5 


MorpPHOLOGY. 


All the strains studied here have the following common morphological 
characters: In nutrient solutions and on agar media they form an extensive 
mycelium of richly branched hyphae; these are very delicate, varying in thick- 
ness between 0-2 and 0-5 uw. ‘In older solution cultures one sometimes sees thicker 
central hyphae surrounded by more delicate branches, sometimes running out into 
tips of unmeasurable thinness. Definite cell walls or transverse septa are not 
visible. In young hyphae the protoplasm usually appears quite homogeneous, 
both in living and stained condition; in older cultures the thick hyphae are often 
seen to contain a number of unstainable elements—probably vacuoles or drops of 
fat—which sometimes gives them a beaded appearance. Old hyphae can be broken 
into pieces when the material is rubbed between two slides, but a typical 
spontaneous “fragmentation” of the mycelium does not take place. In nutrient 
solutions and on the surface of agar media, spores are produced in the manner 
described by @rskov: hyphae produce short lateral branches, usually 5-8 uw long 
and of varying thickness (from about the same as the main hyphae to almost 


234 THE GENUS MICROMONOSPORA, 


immeasurable thinness). Each branch bears a single terminal spore, round or 
oval, 0:8-1:2 ». The spores resemble bacterial endospores, being highly refractive 
and surrounded by a distinctly visible cell wall; this is most easily observed by 
vital staining with aqueous methylene-blue, which seems especially strongly 
absorbed in the cell wall. The spore formation is, both in solution and on agar,. 
limited to certain parts of the vegetative hyphae which, in ordinarily mounted, 
vitally stained preparations, appear as Botrytis-like clusters (Plate vii, fig. 1). 
In some instances the spores are seen to sprout directly from the hyphae (Plate vii, 
fig. 2), so that examples are observed, which bear a striking resemblance to the 
formation of ectogonidia in Bac. influenzae as figured by Wade and Manalang 
(1920). The sporulation is abundant in the Strains 125 VI, 176 XVII, 163 III, 
129 V, and UIV, very scanty in 1251 and 125 IY. 

The development from spore to spore takes place in the following manner*: 
When mature spores from the surface of an agar culture are transferred to a 
suitable agar or solution medium (dextrose asparagin-agar or solution was used 
in most cases), they swell somewhat and begin to germinate after 20-24 hours at 
30° C. One or two, in some cases three germ tubes are produced. These grow 
rapidly and soon begin to branch monopodially, so that after 2-3 days small, well 
defined mycelia are formed (Plate vii, fig. 3, b), and the short spore-bearing lateral 
branches begin to appear. On dextrose-asparagin-agar the course of development 
is soon obscured by the profuse sporulation which takes place, but it can be 
followed in solution and partly on tap-water-agar as recommended by @rskov 
(1923), although the growth here has a tendency to stop before the life cycle is 
complete. Plate vii, fig. 4 shows a small mycelium with new spores on this 
medium. In dextrose-asparagin-solution there is, after three days, an abundant 
formation of hyphae which in certain parts bear numerous short lateral branches 
(exactly simulating the figure given by @rskov) with intensely staining terminal 
swellings developing into new spores (Plate vii, fig. 3, c). 


é 


STAINING REACTIONS. 


The hyphae and spores of the strains studied here stain easily with all the 
usual bacterial stains (carbol-fuchsin, aqueous fuchsin, Loeffler’s methylene-blue, 
aqueous methylene-blue, gentian violet). Also Delafield’s haematoxylin gives, 
especially when material is fixed with sublimate-alcohol, fine and clear prepara- 
tions. The spores stain in all cases intensely, the hyphae rather badly. All 
elements of all strains are, even in three to four weeks’ old cultures, gram- 
positive, but never acid-fast (decolourized, after staining with hot carbol-fuchsin, 
by a few seconds’ treatment with 20 per cent. sulphuric acid). Whether nuclei 
are present in the spores and mycelium is difficult to decide owing to the minute- 
ness of the objects, and, moreover, the question of the presence of true nuclei 
in bacteria and related organisms is not yet definitely settled. Preparations stained 
by the method of Schumacher (1926) for demonstrating bacterial ‘‘nuclei’’} show 
the presence of deeply stained, minute granules both in old spores from dextrose- 
asparagin-agar and in germinating spores, germ tubes and young mycelia in 
dextrose-asparagin-solution (Plate vii, fig. 5). Whether these granules represent 


* Mainly based on the study of Strains 125 II, 125 VI, and 176 XVII. 

+ The material is dried on a slide and treated for 2-4 hours with 25 per cent. 
hydrochloric acid, washed first with water, then for 10 seconds with dilute Na,CO, 
solution, finally stained for 30 seconds with carbol-thionine. 


BY H. L. JENSEN. 235 


true nuclei remains uncertain, owing to the difficulty of following their develop- 
ment, but it does not appear unlikely. Petersen (1928) did by this method obtain 
figures much like those obtained by staining with iron haematoxylin or Giemsa- 
stain, by means of which methods he demonstrated the presence of bodies 
undoubtedly representing true nuclei in Bacillus mycoides. 

Similar minute round bodies, staining deeply with Delafield’s haematoxylin 
and imbedded in an amorphous, very badly staining substance, is sometimes 
observed in 5-6 days’ old cultures in dextrose-asparagin-solution. The whole 
phenomenon does not look unlike a “symplasm’’-stage (LOhnis, 1922), although 
it is not pretended to make any definite statements as to its nature, before it 
has been studied more fully. 


CULTURAL CHARACTERS. 
Strain 125 I. 

Hyphae in dextrose-asparagin-solution 0-3-0-5 u thick. Spores very scarce; on 
filter paper in mineral nutrient solution the inoculum is, after 15-16 days, covered 
by a crust of spores; these are spherical to oval, 1:0-1°3 u. 

Dextrose-asparagin-agar: Scant growth after 16 days. Vegetative: mycelium 
flat, smooth, with myceloid edges, spreading into medium, colourless with pink 
shade. After 24-30 days the growth is somewhat better, of unchanged appear- 
ance. No sporulation or soluble pigment. 

Starch-casein-agar: Growth scant after 16 days, fair after 24-30 days; appear- 
ance as on previous medium. On plate culture a diastatic activity is just discern- 
ible after 10 days. 

Gelatin, 22 days at 22-24° C., stab culture: Scant growth. Small round orange 
granules in stab; slow saccate liquefaction. No pigment. Liquefied gelatin clear, 
viscid. 

Potato: Scant growth after 16 days; small orange granules surrounded by 
white haloes. After 24-30 days growth becomes better; vegetative mycelium 
raised, lichnoid, dark orange. No sporulation or soluble pigment. 

Milk: No growth after 30 days. 

Dextrose-asparagin-solution, 24 days: Fair growth. Small, firm, round, pale 
pink granules on bottom of tube. 


Strain 176 XII. 

Hyphae 0-3-0:5 wu thick. Spores oval, 1:0 x 1:2 uw. 

Dextrose-asparagin-agar: Scant growth after 6 days. Vegetative mycelium 
flat, growing slightly down into medium, colourless. After 12-18 days the growth 
becomes better. Vegetative mycelium raised, smooth, heavy, pinkish-orange with 
greyish shade on surface. No soluble pigment. After 32 days the growth is very 
good, of unchanged appearance. 

‘Starch-casein-agar: After 4 days a narrow, granulated, orange vegetative 
mycelium is formed; after 12 days it turns brick-red, with tufts of orange 
mycelium growing down into the medium. After 18 days small greyish-black 
spots, due to spore formation, begin to appear on the surface which, after 32 
days, becomes nearly black. No soluble pigment. 

Gelatin, 21 days 22—24° C., stab culture: Small orange granules in stab. Slow, 
saccate liquefaction. No soluble pigment. 

Potato: Very scant growth after 10 days. Vegetative mycelium forms small 
brick-red granules surrounded by white haloes. After 18-32 days good growth. 


236 THE GENUS MICROMONOSPORA, 


Vegetative mycelium much raised, sharply folded, looking like minute roses. No 
sporulation or soluble pigment. 

Milk: No growth after 35 days. 

Saccharose-nitrate-solution, 20 days: Scant growth. Loose, colourless fakes 
on bottom of tube. No inversion of the saccharose. No reduction of nitrate. No 
acidity. 


Strain 125 V1. 

Hyphae 0-2-0°3, up to 0:8 uw thick. Spores oval, 0-9-1:0 « 1:0-1:2 u. 

Dextrose-asparagin-agar: After 6-14 days fair growth. Vegetative mycelium 
spreading, granulated, growing into medium, olive-brown with red tinge in lower 
portion. After 30 days good growth. The mycelium is dark olive-green with 
orange edges, surface covered by a soft, moist, glistening, greenish-black layer 
of spores. No soluble pigment. 

Starch-casein-agar: Fair growth after 6 days. Vegetative mycelium narrow, 
granulated, orange with greyish spots. After 14 days the mycelium is olive-brown 
with orange shade on edges, after 30 days quite equal to previous medium. Plate 
culture shows a fair diastatic activity after 11 days. 

Gelatin, 21 days 22-24° C., stab culture: Small orange granules in stab. 
Slow, saccate liquefaction. No soluble pigment. 

Potato: No growth after 30 days. 

Milk: No growth or change after 35 days. 

Saeccharose-nitrate-solution: After 9 days scant growth. Small colourless 
flakes on bottom of tube. No inversion of saccharose. Nitrate is reduced to 
nitrite. No acidity. 


Strain 176 XVII. 

Hyphae 0:3-0:-4 uw thick. Spores oval, 0:8-1:0 « 1:0-1:2 wu. 

Dextrose-asparagin-agar: After 8 days fair growth. Vegetative mycelium 
raised, granulated, orange with olive-green surface, after 14-30 days all dark olive 
with orange shade on edges, surface moist, glistening, greenish-black. No soluble 
pigment. 

Starch-casein-agar: After 6 days fair growth. Vegetative mycelium raised, 
granulated, orange with greyish-black spots on surface. After 14-30 days the 
mycelium is all greenish-black with orange spots, surface covered by a moist, 
glistening, smooth, greenish-black layer of spores. In plate culture there is a 
fair diastatic activity. 

Potato: No growth after 30 days. 

Milk: No growth or change after 35 days. 

Saccharose-nitrate-solution, 9 days: Scant growth. Small round colourless to 
faint orange granules on bottom of tube. No inversion of saccharose. Nitrate is 
reduced to nitrite. No acidity. 


Strain 163 III. 

Hyphae 0:3-0:5 » thick. Spores spherical, 1:0—-1-2 uw. 

Dextrose-asparagin-agar: After 8 days fair growth. Vegetative mycelium 
narrow, raised, granulated, orange with greyish spots, after 16-24 days covered 
by moist, glistening, greyish-black granules, consisting of spores. No soluble 
pigment. 


BY H. L. JENSEN. 237 


Starch-casein-agar: Good growth after 8 days. Vegetative mycelium narrow, 
superficial, folded, bright orange. After 16 days spore formation begins from 
upper end of growth and proceeds downwards, until after 24 days both the 
vegetative mycelium and the layer of spores are all greyish-black with a greenish 
tinge in reverse. A faint greenish soluble pigment is formed. Fair diastatic 

activity in plate culture. 


Gelatin, 22 days 22-24° C., stab culture: Small orange to dark grey granules 
in stab. Slow, saccate liquefaction. No pigment. 


Potato: Good growth after 8 days. Vegetative mycelium raised, lichnoid, 
orange. After 16 days assuming a greyish shade; after 24 days small black 
granules appear. 


Milk: After 8 days small orange granules along side of tube; no change. 
After 12 days the milk is coagulated; the coagulum is gradually softened and 
after 28 days largely redissolved. The whey is clear, yellowish, of neutral 
reaction (coagulation due to a rennet-like enzyme). 


Strain U IV. 

Spores oval, 0-7—-0-9 x 1:0-1-2 u. 

Dextrose-asparagin-agar. Good growth after 8 days. Vegetative mycelium 
spreading, granulated, greenish-black with orange edges (after 4 days all orange). 
After 18 days the surface is covered by a moist, greenish-black layer of spores. 
No soluble pigment. 

Starch-casein-agar. After 8 days excellent growth, equal to previous medium. 
Unchanged after 18 days. A faint greenish soluble pigment is formed. Very 
slight diastatic action in plate culture. 

Potato: Excellent growth after 8 days. Vegetative mycelium raised, lichnoid, 
orange. No sporulation or soluble pigment. Unchanged after 18 days. 

Milk: After 18 days numerous small round orange colonies are formed on wall 
of tube. After 21 days coagulation occurs; about one-third of the coagulum is re- 
dissolved after 50 days. Whey is clear, light yellow, with numerous flakes of 
light-orange mycelium. Reaction faintly acid. 

Saccharose-nitrate-solution: Fair growth after 10 days. Small round granules 
attached to wall of tube; large, loose, pink flakes on bottom. No inversion of 
saccharose. No reduction of nitrate. No acidity. 


Strain 129 V. 

Hyphae 0-:2-0:-4 wu thick. Spores spherical to oval, 0-8-1:0 uw. 

Dextrose-asparagin-agar: After 7 days fair growth. Vegetative mycelium 
superficial, granulated, light-orange with moist, greyish-black granules on surface, 
after 18 days nearly colourless with dark centre; surface granulated, moist, nearly 
black. No soluble pigment. 

Starch-casein-agar. Good growth after 7 days. Vegetative mycelium super- 
ficial, granulated, light-orange. After 12 days the mycelium turns dark-orange, 
and moist, brownish-black granules begin to spread over the surface. After 18 
days the mycelium is all black with orange edges and greenish shade in centre; 
surface all covered by a moist, dark olive-brown layer. 

Potato: No growth after 18 days. 

Milk: After 7 days numerous small round colonies, colourless to faint orange, 
along wall of tube; no change in the milk. After 18 days unchanged. 


238 THE GENUS MICROMONOSPORA, 


Saccharose-nitrate-solution: Scant growth after 18 days. Loose flakes of white 
mycelium with greyish spots on bottom of tube. No inversion of saccharose. No 
reduction of nitrate. No acidity. 


Strain 125 II. 

Hyphae 0:3-0-4 u» thick. Spores spherical to slightly oval, 1-:0-1-:2 p. 

Dextrose-asparagin-agar. Fair growth after 8 days. Vegetative mycelium’ 
raised, granulated, red-brown with moist, dark-brown spots. After 14 days the 
mycelium is mahogany-brown with nearly black, moist granules of spores on 
surface. A light coffee-brown soluble pigment is formed. After 24-30 days the 
growth is nearly all black, pigment deeper brown. 

Starch-casein-agar: Scant growth after 8 days. Vegetative mycelium flat, 
developing into medium, red-brown, after 14 days turning nearly black; light- 
brown soluble pigment. After 21 days growth is all black, surface dry, with 
metallic lustre; pigment deep-brown. Very slight diastatic activity on plate 
culture. 

Gelatin, 25 days 22-24° C., stab culture: Small granules in stab, first orange, 
later turning brown. Slow, saccate liquefaction. No pigment in gelatin. 

Potato: Scant growth after 14 days. Vegetative mycelium raised, granulated, 
‘orange with red-brown spots. After 21-30 days a brownish soluble pigment diffuses 
through the plug; growth unchanged. 

Milk: Very slow growth. After 60 days small greyish-brown granules on 
side of tube, faint greyish-brown discoloration of milk, but no coagulation or 
clearing. 

Saccharose-nitrate-solution: Scant growth after 9 days. Numerous small 
loose greyish flakes on bottom of tube. Saccharose is inverted (strong reduction 
of Fehling’s solution). Nitrate is reduced to nitrite. No acidity. 


Strain 176 IV. 

Hyphae 0-2-0:4 w» thick. Spores nearly spherical, 0-9-1-2 uy. 

Dextrose-asparagin-solution: Faint growth after 10 days. Vegetative mycelium 
forms compact, raised colonies which grow down into the medium, dark greenish- 
blue with paler edges (after 5 days all colourless). After 25 days the mycelium 
is nearly black, surface smooth and hard, without the moist masses of spores 
characteristic of the preceding strains. An extremely thin, greyish veil, resembling 
an aerial mycelium, is formed on the centre of the colonies. 

‘Starch-casein-agar: Very scant growth after 10 days. Vegetative mycelium 
forms minute isolated colonies, colourless with deep-blue centre. Unchanged after 
25 days. Very slight diastatic activity on plate. 

Gelatin, 22 days 22-24° C., stab culture: Small orange granules in gelatin. 
Slow, saccate liquefaction. No soluble pigment. 

Potato: No growth after 30 days. 

Milk: No growth after 30 days. 

Dextrose-asparagin-solution: Fair growth after 24 days. Small pinkish flakes 
on bottom of tube. Later bluish surface colonies appear, and a greenish-blue 
soluble pigment is formed. When the pink mycelium is transferred to a strip 
of filter paper in mineral nutrient solution, it turns blue in a few days, and 
sporulation takes place; the formation of the blue pigment seems to depend on 
perfect aeration. 

This strain as well as the following, develops very slowly in all media tested. 


BY H. L. JENSEN. 239 


Strain 125 IV. 


An organism of a type similar to the previous one (176 IV). Not studied 
in detail because of its very slow growth in all media. 


PHYSIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS. 


1. Oxygen requirements.—The ability to thrive under anaerobic conditions 
was tested for the following strains: 1251, 125 1I, 125 VI, 163 III, 1761V, 176 XII, 
and 176 XVII. ‘They were grown on dextrose-asparagin-agar in small test-tubes 
placed in a larger wide-necked, rubber-stoppered bottle, in which the oxygen was 
absorbed by means of pyrogallic acid and potassium hydroxide. No growth of 
any of the strains took place within 14 days at 30° C. These organisms are thus 
obligate aerobic, and even strictly aerobic, as was shown by growing the Strains 
125 1I, 1761V, 176 XVII, 16311], and UIV as “distribution cultures” in high 
layers of dextrose-asparagin-agar in test-tubes. Growth took place only in the 
upper 2-3 mm. of the medium, except in the case of Strain 1761V, where small 
colonies were seen developing at a depth of 7-8 mm. under the surface, where 
the best growth took place. 


2. Resistance to drying.—The ray fungi as a whole are known to be excep- 
tionally resistant to drying, especially in the spore state. In order to test this 
point for the Micromonosporae, spores from dextrose-agar cultures of Strains 
125 VI, 125 11, 176 XII, and 176 XVII were transferred to sterile glass splinters 
in small test tubes, allowed to dry and kept at room temperature. A similar 
experiment was made with vegetative mycelium from agar and potato cultures 
of Strains 129V and UIV. Sterile dextrose-asparagin-solution was added to the 
tubes with spores after 3 months and to those with vegetative mycelium after 5 
weeks. 

The vegetative mycelia had survived, but from the spores, growth was 
obtained only in the case of Strain 176 XII. The spores thus seem less resistant 
to drying than those of ordinary actinomycetes, which will generally retain their 
vitality for many months and even years. This is not quite in agreement with 
@rskov (1923) who found that the spores retain their vitality for at least eight 
months. 


TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIPS AND RESISTANCE TO HEAT. 


As mentioned before, all strains produced their best growth at 30-32° C. At 
22-25° C. the growth is also good, but visibly slower. In order to test their 
ability to grow at higher temperatures, Strains 125 VI, 176 XVII, 176 XII, 1251, 
163 III, UIV, 125 II, and 176 1V were grown on dextrose-asparagin-agar at 46—-47° C. 
and at 42-43° C. At the former temperature no growth of any of the strains 
took place. At 42-43° C. Strains 125 VI and 176 XVII produced a fair growth, 
125 11, 1761V, and 176 XII a very scant growth in 12 days, 1251 and UIV no 
growth at all. The Micromonosporae are thus ordinary mesophilic organisms. 


The resistance of spores and mycelium to higher temperatures was tested by 
heating about 0:5 c.c. of sterile dextrose-asparagin-solution, with either spores 
from the surface of a dextrose-asparagin-agar culture or small fragments of 
vegetative mycelium where spore formation had not yet started, for different 
lengths of time in small thin-walled test-tubes; after cooling, transferring either 
a loopful of spore suspension or a small fragment of mycelium to slants of 


240 THE GENUS MICROMONOSPORA, 


dextrose-asparagin-agar, and incubating at 30° C. The results are seen from 
Table 1. 


TABLE 1. 


Thermo-resistance of Spores and Mycelium of Micromonospora-Strains. 


Growth when transferred to dextrose agar. 


Temperature 
and 129 V UIV 


time of heating. 125 II 125 VI 
Spores. Spores. 


Spores. Veg. myc. Spores. Veg. myc. 


80°C. 5 min. ( 


65°C. 2 min. a dle 
65°C. . 5 min. if if ts + S + 
70°C. 2 min. se ar a ah aia = 
70° C. 5 min. =P + ah = + > 
80°C. 1 min. + + + te ‘. 
80°C. 2 min. ar ae = a = 

a) 9% se ata if = 


80°C. 10 min. = : 
100°C. 30 sec. = - > i = 


* Only 1 colony. 


This shows that the spores are fairly resistant to heat (although far less so 
than bacterial endospores), and more resistant than the vegetative mycelium. In 
this respect they resemble the spores of the Cohnistreptothriz-group of ray fungi, 
as shown by Domec (1892), Foulerton and Jones (1902), Gilbert (1904), Orskov 
(1923), and others. 


RESISTANCE TO ORGANIC DyEs. 


Lieske (1921) observed that the actinomycetes studied by him were exira- 
ordinarily sensitive to organic dyes, especially methylene-blue and gentian-violet, 
which prevented growth of the organisms when added to broth cultures in a 
concentration of 1:500,000. Since these and related compounds have come into 
use in recent years in bacteriology for diagnostic purposes, it was thought desir- 
able to test the Micromonosporae in this respect. Strains were grown on dextrose- 
asparagin-agar containing methylene-blue and crystal-violet in concentrations from 
1:10,000 to 1:200,000, for 15 days at 30° C. For comparison, two ordinary soil 
actinomycetes of the Cohnistreptothriz-group, isolated from soil U, were included 
in the experiment. The results (two figures indicate incomplete agreement 
between the duplicate cultures) are found in Table 2. 


Methylene-blue is seen to be far less toxic here than in the experiments of 
Lieske, especially towards Act. griseus and viridochromogenus, which grow un- 
hindered at a concentration of 1:10,000, whereas the Micromonosporae all are 
checked at 1:20,000. Strain 163 III seems distinctly more sensitive than the 
other ones, between which the differences are insignificant. Crystal-violet is far 
more toxic to the Micromonosporae, of which only Strain 125 II is comparatively 


BY H. L. JENSEN. 


TABLE 2. 
Resistance of Strains of Micromonospora and Actinomyces to Organic Dyes. 


241 


Growth at concentration of dye. 


Strain. | 
1: 10,000 | 1: 20,000 | 1: 50,000 | 1: 100,000 | 1: 200,000 
1251 0 0 1 2 1-2 
125 II 0 0 1 1-2 2-3 
125 VI 0 0 0 0-1 2 
Methylene blue 176 XVII 0 0 0-1 2-3 2-4 
163 ITT 0 0 0 0-1 0 
Act. griseus 3 2 4 4 4 
Act. viridochromogenus — 4 4 5 5 5 
! 

125 I 0 0 0 0 0 
125 IT 0 0 1 2 2-3 
125 VI 0 (0) 0 0-1 0-1 
Crystal violet 176 XVII 0) 0 0 0 0) 
163 Til 0 0 0 0 0 
Act. griseus 0 0 0 3 3 
| Act. viridochromogenus 3 3 3 4 4 


0, no growth; 1, trace of growth; 2, scant; 3, fair; 4, good; 5, excellent. 


TABLE 3. 
Strain. Growth. Final pH. 
Control (a) — SO7/ 
(ob) — 5-7 
125 I (a) none 0}7/ 
(b) trace 5-9 
125 IT (a) scant 5:8 
(b) seant | 5-9 
125 VI (a) none 5-8 
(6) none 5:8 
163 IIL (a) none S07 
(6) scant 5-8 
176 IV (a) none 5-8 
(b) none 5:8 
176 XII (a) none 5-8 
(b) trace 5-9 
176 XVII (a) none 4 5-7 
(6) none 5:8 
UIV (a) none LOS 
(b) fair 5-8 


242 THE GENUS MICROMONOSPORA, 


resistant, whereas the others are wholly or nearly checked by a concentration of 
1:200,000. Act. griseus is almost as sensitive, whereas Act. viridochromogenus 
is only little influenced. 


RESISTANCE TO ACIDITY. 


Eight strains were grown in dextrose-asparagin-solution where K,HPO, was 
replaced by KH.PO,. The solution, which had an initial reaction of pH 5:7, was 
used in portions of 4 c.c. in small test-tubes. Duplicate cultures were incubated 
for 14 days at 30° C. The results obtained are shown in Table 3. 


This simple experiment shows that the Micromonosporae are remarkably 
sensitive to acidity, even more so than the Cohnistreptothriz-group, of which 
even the most sensitive are able to induce growth at pH 4:8-5:2 (Waksman, 1919). 


PROTEOLYTIC ACTIVITY. 


The slow liquefaction of gelatin shows that the Micromonosporae, like most 
actinomycetes, are capable of producing a proteolytic enzyme. In order to obtain 
quantitative expressions for their proteolytic power, three Micromonosporae and 
Act. viridochromogenus were grown in the following solution: Casein diSsolved in 
1N NaOH, 10-0 gm., dextrose 10-0 gm., K,HPO, 1:0 gm., MgSO, 0:5 gm., FeCl, trace, 
H.O 1000 c.c. pH 7:0-7-2. The solution was used in portions of 50 cc. in 100 e.c. 
Erlenmeyer fiasks. Duplicates were inoculated with spores from dextrose- 
asparagin-agar cultures and incubated at 30° C. for 30 days, after which time 
the solutions were filtered and the filtrates restored to a volume of 50 cc. 
Determinations of amino-N were then carried out by means of the formaldehyde 
titration method. 


TABLE 4. 
Proteolytic Activity of Micromonospora-Strains in Casein Solutions. 


Formol-N, 
Organism. mgm. per 50 c.c. 


2-2 
125 II oe 9017 
3:1 
G 2-7 
Ps Wat oe se 2°6 
2:4 
13-8 
163 III .. ae 13-9 
14:0 
8-1 
Act. viridochromogenus a 9-3 
. 10:5 
( 1-2) 
Control (Sterile solution) .. i lan 
! 2-0 


oo 


BY H. L. JENSEN. j 24 


Table 4 shows that the proteolysis caused by Strains 125I1I and 125 VI is 
hardly significant, whereas Strain 163 III exceeds Act. viridochromogenus, which 
is a rather weakly proteolytic organism (Waksman, 1919). 


Another series of semi-quantitative experiments was carried out by growing 
the organisms on milk-agar plates. These were prepared by mixing 6 c.c. of milk 
and 3 c.c of melted agar (2% agar in tap water) in a Petri dish; after the 
mixture had set, the plate was inoculated at the centre with spore material and 
incubated at 30° C. Perfectly transparent zones, due’ to hydrolysis of the casein, 
were produced in all cases. In Strain 163 III, which coagulated the milk, the 
transparent zone was surrounded by a dense ring of precipitated casein, indicating 
the formation of a rennet-like enzyme. A measurement of the diameter of the 
proteolytic zones gave the results recorded in Table 5. 


TABLE 5. 
Proteolytic Activity on Milk Agar, 


Proteolytic zone, 
Organism. diam. in mm. 


THM 59 6-0 dc 50 t= 
176 XII.. 
125 VI .. 
163 III .. 1 
UIV 3 
125 II she on io 5 
RODIN ay : Oo 3- 

20 

2 


bob bo 


Act. viridochromogenus 2 
Act. griseus an ate e 6 


The more active Micromonosporae are here seen to be about equal to Act. 
viridochromogenus, but not nearly as active as Act. griseus, which is a very 
strongly proteolytic organism (Waksman, 1919). 

Upon the whole the Micromonosporae do not seem to be very active in 
proteolytic respect. ; 


UTILIZATION OF VARIOUS NITROGEN COMPOUNDS. 


Seven strains were tested for their ability to utilize nitrogen in various forms 
by growing them in dextrose-solution (medium 6, without asparagin) with 
0-2% of N-compound. The solutions were used in portions of 5 c.c. in small 
test-tubes, and duplicate cultures were incubated for 3 weeks at 30° C. Table 6 
shows the results. 

All strains grew as small whitish to orange flakes or granules on the bottom 
of the solution, except Strain 163 III, which also formed floating orange surface- 
colonies. Strain 125 II formed a brown soluble pigment in solutions with asparagin 
and peptone. Asparagin appears to be decidedly the best source of nitrogen; 
glycine and peptone are inferior, uric acid and sodium nitrate still more so, and 
ammonium sulphate is available only to Strain 163111. Finally, coffein is quite 
unsuitable. The comparatively good growth of the Strains 125I and 176 XVII in 
the nitrogen-free solution might suggest the possibility of a fixation of elementary 


244 THE GENUS MICROMONOSPORA, 


TABLE 6. 


Utilization of various Nitrogen compounds by Micromonospora-Strains. 


Growth with Source of N: 
Strain. j 
N-free. Asparagin.| Glycine. Peptone. NaNO, |(NH,).SO, | Uric acid. Coffein. 
125 1 1-2 2-3 2 1 1 0-1 2 0 
125 el 0-1 3 1 2 ! 1-2 1 1-2 0 
163 III 1 5 2-3 2-3 1-2 3 2 0 
125 VI 1 4 2 2-3 1 0 0-1 0 
176 XVII 1-2 4 1-2 2-3 1 0 0-1 0 
176 XII 1 2 2-3 3 1-2 0 1-2 0 
176 1V 0-1 2-3 I 1 1-2 0) 2 0 


The growth is indicated by the same characters as in Table 2. 


nitrogen by these organisms. However, a quantitative experiment (growing the 
two strains for 6 weeks in nitrogen-free dextrose solution and determining total 
nitrogen at the end of the experiment) gave negative results. 

= 


DECOMPOSITION OF CELLULOSE. 


Several strains of Micromonospora were grown in test-tubes on strips of 
filter paper half immersed in the following solution: NaNO, 1:0 gm., K.HPO, 
0-5 gm., MgSO, 0-5 gm., H.O 1,000 c.c. This experiment gave the following result: 

Strain 125 I: No growth after 45 days. 

Strain 125 II: Slight growth after 56 days; submerged part of paper shows 
numerous minute greyish-black spots; some loose fibres of cellulose on bottom of 
tube; paper appears slightly corroded at level of solution. After 88 days no 
striking change; paper is broken in two when tube is shaken; microscopically 
the fibres appear surrounded by spore-bearing hyphae, but not much attacked. 


Strain 163 III: After 75 days a small dark-olive spot is formed on the paper 
at the place of inoculation. No distinct growth or destruction of the paper. 


Strain 176 IV: After 65 days there is a small reddish spot on the paper, 
covered by bluish mycelium. Destruction of paper is visible neither microscopically 
nor macroscopically. 


Strain 176 XII: After 90 days there is at the place of inoculation a small 
dark spot surrounded by a bright orange halo, 7-8 mm. in diameter. In this 
zone the paper is loose and softened; microscopically the cellulose fibres appear 
much destroyed and penetrated by hyphae. 


Strain 125 VI: After 56 days strong decomposition of paper; submerged part 
semi-transparent, softened, falling into a pulp of loose fibres when tube is 
shaken; the exposed part of the paper is faint reddish with dark olive-green 
spots, becoming soft and pulpy. Microscopically the fibres are much destroyed 
and penetrated by spore-bearing hyphae. 

Strain 176 XVII: After 56 days strong decomposition; the inoculum on the 
exposed part of paper spreads out into a large greenish-black spot, in which the 
paper has practically lost its structure. After 100-110 days the attack has 


BY H. L. JENSEN. 245 


spread to the submerged part of the paper which is coloured reddish and dis- 
integrates into a pulp when the tube is shaken. 

Several strains of Micromonospora, especially 125 VI and 176 XVII, are thus 
capable of decomposing cellulose. This capacity is more pronounced when the 
nitrate is replaced by a more favourable source of nitrogen. In an experiment, 
where the above solution with 0-2% asparagin instead of nitrate was used, the 
following results were obtained after 35 days. 


Strain 163 III: Very slight growth. Small olive-grey spots on exposed part 
of paper. No destruction. 

Strain 176 IV: Fair growth. Numerous small round colonies, with dense 
olive-brown centre and paler periphery, appear on both submerged and exposed 
part of paper. No destruction. 

Strain 176 XVII: Excellent growth. Exposed portion of the paper greyish- 
orange with an olive-brown zone at level of solution. Paper very soft and pulpy 
when touched with the needle. No attack of submerged portion. 

Strain 125 VI: Appearance as 176 XVII. Destruction of paper very strong, 
especially just above the level of solution. 

Strain U IV: Appearance as 125 VI and 176 XVII, but destruction of paper 
somewhat less pronounced. 


IMPORTANCE IN THE SOIL. 


Although the data yet available do not warrant any definite conclusions 
as to the importance of the Micromonosporae in the microbial processes in the 
soil, a few observations have been made which give an idea of the conditions 
under which they are active in the soil. Samples of the soil 163 had received 
15% water and (1) 05% crude lignin prepared from oats straw, and (2) 1:0% 
cellulose as ground filter paper. The samples were stored in a moist condition 
at room temperature for five months, after which time plate counts were carried 
out on the casein agar medium described on page 233. The addition of lignin and 
cellulose to the soil gave rise to a marked increase in the numbers of actinomyces- 
colonies compared with soil without addition. The colonies were counted after 10 
days’ incubation at 30° C., and colonies suspected of being Micromonosporae were 
picked out and transferred to slants of dextrose-asparagin-agar, where sporulation 
usually occurs rapidly and Micromonosporae are easily recognized. The following 
results were noticed: 


1. Soil without addition: Dilution 1:250,000. Five parallel plates. Total 
number of Actinomyces-colonies (including Micromonosporae), 278. Isolated 16 
strains, of which 13 proved to be Micromonosporae. 

2. Soil + Lignin: Dilution 1:400,000. Five parallel plates. Total number of 
Actinomyces-colonies, 428. Isolated 33 strains, of which 23 proved to be Micro- 
monosporae. 

38. Soil + Cellulose: Dilution 1:500,000. Five parallel plates. Total number of 
Actinomyces-colonies, 329. Isolated 27 strains, of which 22 proved to be Micro- 
monosporae. 

These figures show a definite increase in the abundance of Micromonosporae, 
when cellulose or lignin is added to the soil. This phenomenon, together with the 
fact that several strains of Micromonospora, when incubated for a sufficiently 
long time, are capable of bringing about a marked decomposition of cellulose— 
stronger than that caused by most other ray fungi—suggests that they may play 


246 THE GENUS MICROMONOSPORA, 

an important réle in the decomposition of cellulosic material in the soil. Whether 
their increase in soil with lignin is due to an ability to decompose this rather 
vaguely defined group of very resistant compounds must be left to future studies 
to decide. “ 


SYSTEMATIC POSITION. 


The morphological features of the 10 strains show plainly that these organisms 
are, as pointed out by @Mrskov (1923), entirely different from the rest of the 
actinomycetes and should be recognized as a separate genus, Micromonospora. 
While the spore formation in the other actinomycetes, if present, is a kind of 
oidia formation, resembling that of several Hyphomycetes, we are here dealing 
with an entirely different process, a kind of conidia formation which exactly 
resembles the formation of ectogonidia in several bacteria, such as Bact. typhi 
according to Almquist (1908), Bac. influenzae according to Wade and Manalang 
(1920), and Spirillum rubrum according to Petersen (1921). The most striking 
resemblance is shown by the ectogonidia formation in Mycobact. tuberculosum, 
according to Meirowsky (1914), whose figures in certain instances (e.g., Fig. 35, 


TABLE 7. 


Summary of Cultural Characters of Micromonospora-Strains. 


Colour of /| Colour of Soluble |Reduction| Inv. of Action Growth 
Strain. veget. spore Sporulation.| pigment. of saccharose. on eon 
mycel. layer. NaNO; milk. potato. 
125 I colourless grey fair 
to to scant none none none none 
176 XII orange black | good 
i 
125 VI af none none 
none [ | 
176 XVII greenish | or aL none | none 
colourless} black |. faint 
163 LIL to to | abundant | yellow none none good 
orange | brownish to 
129 V black faint none coagulated none 
green | 
CIV none good 
125 IL ted to brown| black good brown + strong none fair 
colourless | 
176 IV or 
faint none 
orange | dark blue scant or none none none none 
to faint blue 
125 DV! deep 
blue | 


BY H. L. JENSEN. 247 


Plate iia and Plate xviii, see LOhnis, 1922, Plate xii, fig. 162, and Plate xiv) look 
quite like slightly diminished pictures of the spore formation in Micromonospora. 
The formation of ectogonidia and of branched and filamentous forms is upon the 
whole not of uncommon occurrence among the bacteria (for summary of the 
literature up to 1918, see LOhnis, 1922). There does not, therefore, seem to be 
any reason to regard the genus Micromonospora as anything but a _ highly 
developed group of bacteria, the resemblance of which to higher fungi, especially 
the loose conglomerate known as Hyphomycetes, seems purely external. This is 
probably true also of the other ray fungi (the genera Cohnistreptothrix and 
Actinomyces, if one accepts the system of @Mrskov), but whether these and 
Micromonospora are related in phylogenetic respect is quite uncertain. 


As to the question whether the strains studied here represent several definite 
“species”, we see from the summary of cultural characters in Table 7, that we 
are dealing with at least three different groups: (1) Strains 1251, 176 XII, 125 VI, 
176 XVII, 163 111, UIV, and 129V; (2) Strain 12511; and (3) Strains 1251V 
and 176 IV. 


In Group 1 the strains 125 VI and 176 XVII agree almost completely, but other- 
wise there is rather much heterogeneity—scant to very abundant sporulation (Strains 
125 I compared with 125 VI, 176 XVII, UIV), coagulation of milk by some strains, 
reduction of nitrate by others, absent to very strong power of decomposing 
cellulose, ete. It is very likely that this imperfectly known group of micro- 
organisms includes a large number of different forms, and the various characters 
studied here may be as variable as in the case of other actinomycetes (see 
Lieske, 1921). It would, therefore, probably be premature to establish any of 
the groups of theSe organisms as definite “species” until a closer study of a larger 
number of strains and of the constancy of their various cultural characters has 
been carried out. 


SUMMARY. 


Ten strains of actinomyces-like organisms of the type of Streptothrix chalcea 
(Foulerton) have been isolated from soil and studied. The evidence at hand 
justifies entirely the establishment of this group of microorganisms as a separate 
genus Micromonospora, as suggested by @Mrskov. Their vegetative thallus is 
composed of long, delicate, branching hyphae. The mode of spore formation 
resembles the formation of ectogonidia in the bacteria: short lateral branches 
sprout from the main hyphae, each bearing a single terminal spore, oval to 
spherical, highly refractive, and staining deeply with anilin dyes and haematoxylin. 
Spores and mycelium are gram-positive, but not acid-fast. The spores show a 
somewhat higher thermo-resistance than the vegetative hyphae. The organisms 
are strictly aerobic, mesophilic, and very sensitive to acidity and organic dyes. 
Their proteolytic and diastatic activities are rather weak. Free nitrogen is not 
fixed. Some strains reduce nitrate to nitrite. Cellulose is decomposed actively 
by several strains. They may occur in considerable numbers in the soil, occupying 
5-8 per cent. of the total numbers of colonies of Actinomyces-type. Their 
abundance seems increased through addition of cellulose or lignin to the soil. 


Addendum (30th June, 1930.) 


While this paper was in the press, the author became aware of a paper by 
Williams (1912) who studied an organism isolated from pericarditic exudate. 
E 


248 THE GENUS MICROMONOSPORA. 


His description and illustrations show plainly that the organism is a 
Micromonospora, although not identical with any of the forms described above. 


References. 

ALMQUIST, E., 1908.—Neue Tatsachen zur Biologie der Typhusbakterie. Centralblatt 
fiir Bakteriologie, I Orig., 45, 1908, 491-495. ; 

DomeEc, TH., 1892.—Contribution 4 l’ktude de la morphologie de l’Actinomyces. Arch. 
Med. Exp. Anat. path., 4, 1892, 104-113. 

FOULERTON, A. G., and JONEs, C. P., 1902.—On the General Characteristics and Pathogenic 
Action of the Genus Streptothrix. Trans. Path. Soc. London, 53, 1902, 56-127. 
GILBERT, J., 1904.—Uber Actinomyces termophilus und andere Actinomyceten. Zeitschr. 

f. Hygiene, 47, 1904, 383-406. 

LIESKE, R., 1921.—Morphologie und Biologie der Strahlenpilze (Aktinomyceten). Berlin, 
192/11; 

LGHNIS, F., 1922.—Studies upon the Life Cycles of the Bacteria. Part I. Mem. Nat. 
Acad. Sci. Washington, 16, Mem. 2, 1922, 1-252. 

MEIROWSKY, E., 1914.—Studien tiber die Fortpflanzung von Bakterien, Spirillen und 
Spirochaeten. Berlin, 1914. 

MiILuArD, W. A., and Burr, S., 1926.—A Study of twenty-four Strains of Actinomyces 
and their Relation to Types of Common Potato Seab. Ann. Applied Biol., 13, 1926, 
580-644. 

MUSGRAVE, W. E., Cuecc, M. T., and PoukK. M., 1908.—Streptothricosis, with special 
Reference to the Etiology and Classification of Mycetoma. Philippine Journ. Sci., 
Ser. B, iii, 1908, 447-542. 

Orskov, J., 1923.—Investigations into the Morphology of the Ray Fungi. Copenhagen, 
1923. 

PEKLO, J., 1910.—Die pflanzlichen Aktinomykosen. Centralbl- Ff. Bakt., i, 27%, 290, 
451-579. 

PETERSEN, E. J., 1921.—A new Sapropelic Microorganism (Conidiothrix sulphurea). With 
some Reflections on the Existence of Exogenous Spores in Bageteria. Dansk Bot. 
Arkiv, 4, 1921, No. 1. 

, 1928.—Unders@gelser over Kerneforholdene og Sporedannelsen hos Bacillus 
mycoides. Dansk Bot. Arkiv, 5, 1928, No. 13. 

SCHUMACHER, J., 1926.—Uber den Nachweis des Bakterienkernes und seine chemische 
Zusammensetzung. Centralbl. f. Bakt.. I Or., 97, 1926, 81-104. 

ScHttze, H., 1908.—Beitréage zur Kenntnis der termophilen Aktinomyceten und ibrer 
Sporenbildung. Archiv f. Hygiene, 67, 1908, 35-57. 

TSIKLINSKyY, P., 1899.—Sur les mucedinées termophiles. Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 13, 1899, 
501-505. 

WavDE, W. A., and MANALANG, C., 1920.—Fungous Developmental Growth of Bacillus 
influenzae. Journ. Hxp. Medicine, 31, 1920, 95-102. 

WAKSMAN, S. A., 1919.—Cultural Studies of Species of Actinomyces. Soil Science, 8, 
1919, 7-21.65 


WILLIAMS, H. U., 1912.—A pleomorphic Bacillus growing in Association with a Strepto- 
thrix. Journ. Med. Res., 27, 1912, 157-161. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE VII. 


Fig. 1.—Strain 12511. Clusters of spores from the surface of dextrose-asparagin-agar. 
(Vital staining with aqueous methylene-blue. ) 


Fig. 2.—Strain 1761V. Spore-bearing mycelium from filter paper in asparagin-solution. 
18 days 30° C. (Dilute carbol-fuchsin. ) 


Fig. 3.—Strain 176 XVII. Development in dextrose-asparagin-solution, 30° C. (Delafield’s 
haematoxylin.) a, 42 hours; b, 3 days; c, 5 days. 

Fig. 4.—Strain 176 XII. Young spore-bearing mycelium on water-agar. 5 days 30° C. 
(Living material.) 

Fig. 5.—Strain 176 XVII. Development in dextrose-asparagin-solution, 30° C. (2 hours’ 
treatment with 25% HCl, staining with carbol thionin). a, resting spores; 
b, germinating spores, 42 hours; c, young mycelium, 5 days. 

(All magnifications are approximately 1500.) 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. IPG AD) WAL, 


ff 
f 
fo ; 
ae e 
/ 
\ fo e 
1 fr ° 
. \ / 
‘ i : 
| 
i | 
4 . 
| 


£ 
4 
% : 
Q 2 
hy mf 
P| 
a - é 
Sg } 
~j 


Strains of Jlicromonospora. 


FIFTH CONTRIBUTION TOWARDS A NEW CLASSIFICATION OF 
AUSTRALIAN ASILIDAE (DIPTERA). 


By G. H. Harpy, 


Walter and Eliza Hall Fellow in Economic Biology, 
Queensland University, Brisbane. 


[Read 25th June, 1930.] 


In this and future parts of my studies in Asilidae, I am including notes on 
certain exotic forms that come within the tribes dealt with; for specimens 
received I am indebted to the late Prof. M. Bezzi and to Prof. J. Herve-Bazin for 
European genera, whilst Professor R. Painter and Mr. W. S. Bromley have 
supplied North American genera. 


New characters are being employed in these papers and many of them are 
fairly well maintained in the various sections, but it must be understood that 
none of them is necessarily of generic or tribal importance; they are recorded 
only as they are found on the material before me, and occasionally some mis- 
understanding of these characters may arise because they are founded chiefly on 
preserved material. Closer investigation on fresh and supple material may show 
the possibility of other interpretations so, as far as possible, all such characters 
are examined on newly killed material. Again, certain terms that have long 
been in use are now shown to be inapplicable, but more suitable names do not 
seem to have been substituted in such cases. One such example is the so-called 
“metapleura”’, a bulging part just above the metathoracic spiracle. The hairs 
and bristles thereon seem to have some generic and subgeneric value, varying 
from an abundance of hairs to a row of bristles, or they may even be absent. 
Other parts of the pleura may also have hair on them, but these have not 
been studied and in the tribes here dealt with they are comparatively scarce. 


Prothorax.—Already in these papers I have indicated that two types of 
prothorax are found, one being the form with one complete sclerite covering the 
whole of the underside, the other having this area divided so that there is a 
ventral plate surrounded by a membraneous area. It would seem the first of these 
is the primitive form and, as the part became soft and membraneous, the plate 
that was left near the anterior coxae took on its characteristic appearance. Part 
of it overlapped a membrane, another part forming a continuous surface with the 
softened portion of the sclerite, and often retaining the pollinose covering on 
that soft area. In Ommatius the sclerite has become only partly broken down 
in this manner. It appears rather obscure at times, whether this ventral plate 
has been isolated or not, and I find, contrary to my earlier statement, that it is 


250 NEW CLASSIFICATION OF AUSTRALIAN ASILIDAE, 


formed in the Leptogasterini, at least in Australian material. The sternum here 
differs from other cases by the apparent failure to develop a section overlapping 
part of the surrounding membrane, and therefore it looks as if the sternum has a 
uniform density throughout its more or less uniformly brown area. 


Chaetotaxy.—The ocellar tubercle usually contains a group of hairs or bristles 
which vary from a rather dense group of hairs to a smaller number, some of 
which are bristly in nature. A small group of bristles only may occur, varying 
from eight to two pairs, or even to a single pair, and in most of these cases the 
few hairs left may be inconspicuous. This vestiture may even be entirely absent 
as on Chryseutria. The character varies partly in accordance with the general 
hirsute nature, or otherwise, of the insect and, in the main, appears to be 
specific rather than generic in importance. 


The hairs are more or less plentiful on Thereutria and its allies, 
but are reduced on Diogmites and the Australian form that is very near it in 
the key. They vary on Neosaropogon and allies, are plentiful on Stenopogon and ~ 
allies, and also on Bathypogon; the two latter groups contain rather hairy species, 
whereas Microstylum, which contains bare species, has them reduced.’ Through- 
out the tribe Stichopogonini they are numerous or fairly so. 


The dorsal thoracic bristles are rather disappointing in Australian material; 
they are not always as consistent as one would expect, but some use may be made 
of them if one considers the general tendency to have them limited to a certain 
number rather than the actual numbers on any part. 


The bristles on Stichopogonini are more consistent in the material before me 
and all the genera are included in the table below; in the tribe Saropogonini only 
Australian material is listed and the exotic species placed in the same genera do 
not necessarily conform. 


Thereutria, Metalaphria, Rachiopogon, and the unnamed genus containing 
N. froggattii have the usual row of hairs, bristly hairs or bristles, rarely absent 
in any genus, on the anterior section of the pronotum and, in addition, one or 
two lateral bristles occur on the posterior section; in this they contrast with all 
other Australian material. 


Many of the larger species have a few strong bristles on the humeral callus, 
but these seem to be specific rather than generic in value. Again, the dorso- 
centrals may be present, often indicated, but frequently absent. Normally there 
are up to three pairs of notopleural bristles or, on the larger species, the number 
may be doubled, so that six are evident on each side, arranged in two rows, one 
of which is much weaker than the other and is ignored in the table. The usual 
three, when present, are arranged in a line or triangularly.. 


On Chryseutria there is one very strongly developed lateral bristle on the 
first abdominal segment, whilst none is present on Aterpogon, Questopogon, 
Cyrtopogon and Pseudobasipogon, all of which are rather hairy in this region; 
on all other genera of the Saropogonini there are, except in rare examples, three 
or four bristles. In Stichopogonini these bristles are only definitely developed 
on Neopogon; Cryptopogon may have one or more hairs black and bristly. Else- 
where on the abdomen, bristles are found only in the genus Microstylum and the 
subgenus Scleropogon, in which they are placed laterally on the second segment, 
on the former anteriorly, on the latter posteriorly, to the row of impressions 
that mark the interior muscular attachments. 


BY G. H.. HARDY. 251 


Table of dorsal thoracic bristles. 


Pairs of bristles. pct 
Sat 
Q ¢& 
; es 
ao 8 
| =3° 
: - | So us 
Genera. a 2] 2 |S3e Notes. 
s H ae =| é | 3 & a=! 
) = oS a6 Se |e#sd 
e SUS o) ee Siu aie 
B, & = = 7 
8 3 $ 2 | 22 |S2e8 
iS 5 iS) ae) Oo 2468 
Z nD i As AD |aSea 
SAROPOGONINI. | | 
Chryseutria Very bare species. 
Aterpogon — = = = = 10-12 | Very hairy species; bristles 
not apparent. 
Questopogon 2-3 2 3 = 4 10 
Thereutria 2-3 2 2-3 3 4 4-6 
Metalaphria 2 2 | 2 3-4 4-5 2-4 On small species reduced in 
number. 
Rachiopogon 2 2 1-2 — 0-3 2 
! 
Genus unnamed 3 2 3 -= 4-5 2 | (Neosaropogon) froggattii 
| | D. & F. 
Saropogon 2 2 2 = 5 2 S.  gamarus is without 
| scutellar bristles. 
Neocyrtopogon .. 2 | B "ah -- — = 
| 
Neosaropogon 2 2 1 | p Ne princeps has 2-4 
scutellars, and another 
species has only noto- 
pleurals. 
| 
Neodioctria 2 1 | — — — — 
Z | 
Erythropogon 1 1 ee — = — | E. maculinevris. 
| ‘ 
| 
2 3 1 —_ — 8 | BE. australis Macq. 
Stenopogon 2-3 1 1-3 —_ — 6-8 
Bathypogon 3 1 2 = 3-4 4 Very consistent in genus ; 
Microstylum has 2 supra- 
alar, and 3 laterals on 
pronotum, the rest as on 
Bathypogon. 
STICHOPOGONINI. 
\ 
Laphystia “8 1 3 
Lasiopogon 2-3 1-2 1-2 83 3 8 
Neopogon 1 — 1 — = —= if 
Clinopogen 1 1 1 — 2 = Scutellum with fringe of 
| numerous long hairs. 
Cryptopogon 1 1 1 — | 2 —_— Scutellum with fringe of 
| scanty short hairs. 


252 NEW CLASSIFICATION OF AUSTRALIAN ASILIDAE, 


Tribe SAROPOGONINI. 


The classification of this tribe is fraught with difficulties; it seems to be 
world-wide and therefore important, and my endeavour to place all genera 
belonging to it has met with but partial success. Many genera hitherto proposed 
may not be worthy even of subgeneric status, but I have, as far as possible, main- 
tained each known to me as a separate segregate in the following key. 


Key to the genera of the Saropogonini. 

yy ANpayceyenlOye Eloy) joyronaKcleel \walidal Bh SGOWUP 6 dananducoeosooed bcbg UoboDLoCUbuOUOoaDOOOS 2 
PN MAA KOVS AT OVEEKe NATE ONOWHE. (teh s ROWE) ty 6G o a Ol CrOR REN BHUOTS Ol Glo octal Ob Glee ation So Go ons i183 

2. Thorax with two stout spines, one above the base of each wing. Prothorax rather 
long, the posterior section of the dorsal portion being twice the length of the 
anterior part and divided from it by a broad U-shaped depression. A few 
scattered hairs above metathoracic spiracle. Antennae with three segments 

and a spine, the third being twice as long as the two basal ones. Scutellum 
without bristles, apex of first abdominal segment with only one lateral bristle. 


MEN AtOMMFSimM ples poe are TR aren eas Alcs etn aerate re rariar sols Chryseutria Hardy. 
ATHOLAXSEWATHOUEMSUCHSDINIES see e stedecarsiena: oceG ake hate UA etnies lic bone ee a tee ee ee 3 

3. Antennae with four segments and a spine, scutellum with a fringe of bristles, rarely 
bare. Venation simple. Face invariably with erect hairs above tubercle .... 4 


Antennae with three or four segments and a spine; face hairy or bare above 
tubercle; if antennae have four segments the face is bare, at most with a 

FEW GEPPESSEA ATES Hoi meee ete uo hierie oss sp ieils Siu sigeaehie pay hare feigeuce-c ce sea) ager ele ae ae iems get eee eee 6 

4. Soft hairs distributed over the whole face which is prominent but without a defined 
tubercle or moustache. A row of bristles above metathoracic spiracle. Without 
lateral bristles on first abdominal segment, abdomen widening to apex of 
second and third segment, thence narrowing on female, and on male more or 

less parallel sided ...... LoD OCC OOO HOM BNO bo UDO HO IUD. D5 O60 Aterpogon, n. gen. 

Mace! awathuewie lima Chilreayi 1a OUIS CACTI Mose ccs sec ke Hearse Se oan ey ee 5 

5. Tubercle of face very large, and the hair abundant. With abundant hair above 
metathoraciec spiracle, the bristles not well defined. With lateral bristles on 

first abdominal segment; abdomen strongly tapering to its apex .............. 

ENS e HOS ASML S oe Ce RE eT Me Verdot 13 ds Soa side et Mines erences teu cremeeeee Questopogon D. & F. 
Tubercle of face very small and containing a simple moustache; head at base of 
antennae also projects tubercle-like. With few weak hairs and bristles above 
metathoracie spiracle. Without lateral bristles on first abdominal segment; 
abdomen strongly club-shaped. Scutellum may be bare or may have a fringe 

of bristles. Hair on face rather sparse ................ Hrythropogon White. 

6. Abdomen strongly tapering from base; scutellum with bristles, rarely without. 
Antennae with three segments and a spine. One or two outstanding and 
isolated lateral bristles on pronotum, except on Diogmites and perhaps certain 

Other ExOlie hORTMUS NEN ae eemsae pec ne Soole cy ysteh amete eee Nay toys WaT eS eee en Ai opNat Uat) co i calkt grt ey oC ii 
Abdomen club-shaped or cylindrical. Scutellum generally without bristles. Antennae 
usually with four segments and a spine. Without lateral bristles on pronotum. 


excepts on) CertainicexobiGyphonm'S) lenis stcicis Sod Seno Gecrel cae eee eee ee ee itil 
7. Abdomen of normal length or rather short, most or all of its segments being 
Siorisie Cry Joapeclhy Jom” WINE AICI 55 do oclooob buco coo od undomdouFodbonKOOS 8 


Abdomen very long, the second and subsequent segments being all conspicuously 
longer than wide. With a row of strong bristles above metathoracic spiracle. 


ROP a ID Si ese at ean San ET LET as 2 URN SCT OA A a a ot EGE IV NS Gen. 
8. Numerous long hairs above metathoracic spiracle and amongst them bristles may 
be fairly well defined. Moustache rather bushy. Third antennal segment 


about as long as the basal segments combined. Scutellum with two or more 
marginal bristles. Veins R, and R,,, meet before or at the wing-margin 

idle los Yar Ricte gacerie we ve dayeVat ate tater eb ete ROMERO IMENTS e).'siss vse abe tl a seseuene AUPE Eto aM teu core Thereutria Loew. 
Bristles present only above metathoracic spiracle; if hairs are also present they 
arenshortwandwinCOnspicuoOuUsiter ney ne ciers Shera re eae tcl eeicnsReLe rien ie eens ) 

9. Third antennal segment about as long as the two basal segments combined. Veins 
R, and R,,, may meet before the wing margin, or M, may meet M,. Scutellum 

Within GOP si saywEhnouts:’ GISELE H wis cue sz: ly curs vey eter criehies Paolo RTC ote rs ea Ptetie cers TSW oie elds pe were yea 10 


10. 


ial 


14. 


16. 


18. 


8) 


BY G. H. HARDY. 253 


Third segment of antennae twice the length of the basal segments combined ...... 
Faro HEE Once UN CCST OSHC RTO CROUCH, Oc Sn OP ERERO I EON tO -aroriotn alo Cetera Rachiopogon Ricardo. 
Prothorax normal, the depression between the two equal sections of pronotum being 
V-shaped. Veins R, and R,,, meet at or before the wing-margin:............ 
Bog G0 ONG SEEN CCRC IE CREE Cec COG. CAAT ERO AICH ORO RiG ECh oa aa ee lett aIeKR eta ts Metalaphria Ricardo. 
Prothorax very long, the posterior section being twice as long as the anterior 
one and a broad U-shaped depression divides them. M, and M, meet at or 
HELORGMENE GWA SIM AaAT STM sence sreiceyey spicl sliewcua ares Len ekee nN eoi eee orewea notated Diogmites Loew. 
Scutellum with a pair of bristles, rarely without them. Antennae with four 
segments and a minute spine (fourth segment missing on Huropean specimens). 
Thorax normal (but considerably arched on exotic forms). Abdomen normal, 
rather parallel sided (but may widen towards apex on exotic forms). With 
a row of bristles above metathoracic spiracle. Two postalar and some dorso- 
central bristles on Australian species ...................200- Saropogon Loew. 
Scutellum without bristles, or, if present, the abdomen is elongate, very slender 
and more or less club-shaped. A row of bristles and some hairs almost 
invariably present above metathoracic spiracle; bristles often weak, with only 
OnempOStalareandmwitholt GOrsocentralss wiry et-ciens ena ene eieee ee ane eit 12, 
Face prominent, bulging and bare, moustache scanty and on an almost linear 
tubercle that is hardly discernible. Antennae with only three segments and a 


FAME OES)... SPORVGVE): 5 “Sabre ictors: Get OLs Gla oh ee ete Big eso Ie Heese erie Sennen i Neocyrtopogon Ricardo. 
Face normal, not bulging. Antennae with four segments and a spine, the fourth 
SCoINenteranelysiaDSeMmt, Gist cee cd eis eas suewe + leone fens) ate scars uasousiee Neosaropogon Ricardo. 
Face prominent and covered with hairs, but without a definite tubercle or moustache. 
Waithyabundantohairsvabove! metathoracic spiracle’ .-2 soso c eee eee. 14 
Face with well formed tubercle and moustache .................2. 00002 e eee 15 


Face covered with very dense hair. Non-metallic species, dorsally rather hairy. 
Md eA Nee wy ptsie ayeed A tibesy one hater ys tat ca EN Sea MDA ia Diet a) i Py a Ra Cyrtopogon Loew. 
Face covered with moderately dense hair. Metallic species, dorsally bare ...... 
dy ROIS ERR Oa ONO Gps DRONE ORE RENE ELBIT ENCORE Sor Rey ESR enn ara er Pseudoholopogon Strolb. 
Vein M, running into M, and forming an almost continuous but sinuous line with 
them nve dian CROSS=VELMOT ey, tea SPA ees etac soo cidiokbs, elie ehyalvor cae pedis gue OP AMEE Re Ria etter tome eal afl se 18 
Venation usually simple, but if M, meets M,, it never forms a continuous line with 
the median cross-vein, but is at right angles to it, or forms an acute angle 
Wilda Wl podecodocpounboeeobuccuoopondeaoopoUMOU Uo oR DOS FOO doOU KH ED OMO OHS 16 
Face broad, about the width of one eye; tubercle restricted to a very small area 
above oral margin. With hairs above metathoracic spiracle ................ 
3: .D ONG C0 CAE: BOREL CR OTO Ona oho cr ROME STG tO acecNG. CT CHARSEE IEIGIGT NER Ieee eames es Neodioctria Ricardo. 
Face narrow, at least near antennae where it is only about half the width of an 
eye; tubercle large, reaching half-way towards antennae or further ...... 17 


Species with antennae situated so that in profile they are seen to be about 
one-third the depth of eye. If higher there are no hairs or bristles above 
IMEGLAENOLACICHESDIFACLER Rais icy sleds veil stele -ie ei ccar-tena hese Stenopogon Loew. 19 

Species with antennae situated high up on the head, so that in profile they are 
seen to be at one-fourth the depth of the eye. Face with very short stiff 
hairs reaching from tubercle to very near antennae. With a row of bristles 
and short stiff hairs above metathoracic spiracle .......... Ospriocerus Loew. 


Face with a large tubercle covered with bristles. With abundant hairs above 
metathoracic spiracle. Only one supra-alar bristle present. M, and R, run 
to wing border separately. Wings relatively short ........ Bathypogon Loew. 

Face with a small tubercle and bare; moustache confined to the oral margin. Only 
a row of bristles above metathoracic spiracle. 'Two supra-alar bristles present. 
Mand RR. meet before wing; margin. :. 2. 22 2. Microstylum Macquart. 


Key to subgenera of Stenopogon. 


Thorax laterally very hairy, the hairs, including those above metathoracic spiracle, 
very long and fine. Face with a batch of very long hairs below antennae. 
Pronotum without marked bristles. Hypopygium inverted .................. 
DPR re tap Nites eley pom aciiel stis kotel Goi sme das ate dene yaita,allsn eee en mete Neoscleropogon Malloch. 

Thorax laterally rather bare, only a few hairs present. Face below antennae and 
above tubercle often bare. Hypopygium normal ........................ 20 


254 NEW CLASSIFICATION OF AUSTRALIAN ASILIDAE, 


20. With hairs and strong bristles above metathoracic spiracle. Fourth antennal 
segment very long, about two-thirds the length of the third. Face bare. 

Many strong bristles on pronotum, including a group of lateral ones on the 
DOSLEFIOT ADOKETO MI We PRR e a Mek eR err eu RIE aR Fo AE ae Scleropogon Loew. 
Without hairs or bristles above metathoracic spiracle. Fourth antennal segment 
normal, about one-fourth the length of the third or less. Face bare or hairy. 

Hair of prothorax forming many slender bristles including a lateral group on 

Ld OK Eys Ob Cov aKONG Db OWI UATE: NWN aM Sra y aeairaldnalt Utes leer ME Maru IKE oy othe a Mel Stenopogon Loew. 


Genus ERYTHROPOGON White. 


Two species belong here; they are very dissimilar in many characters, but 
both conform to those given in the key. The typical form, EF. maculinevris, was 
said to bear a resemblance to an ichneumon in the shape of the abdomen and 
the long antennae, whilst the other has been compared with a vespoid wasp in 
appearance. The relationship of the genus would appear to be nearest to the 
Neosaropogon group, but at present there is little information that supports the 
view. 


EXRYTHROPOGON AUSTRALIS Macquart. 


Dasypogon australis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., i (2), 1838, 45; Walker, List Dipt. 
Brit. Mus., vi, suppl. 2, 1854, 482; Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8) ix, 1912, 
350.—Dasypogon limbipennis Macquart, Dipt. Ezot., suppl. 1, 1847, 62; Walker, 
List Dipt. Brit. Mus., vi, suppl. 2, 1854, 479.—Brachyrrhopala limbipennis Ricardo, 
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (9) i, 1912, 487; White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania, 1916, 157.— 
Erythropogon limbipennis Hardy, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., li, 1926, 308.—Dioctria 
tasmanica Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., i, 1851, 85. 

Ricardo examined the type of D. australis Macquart, which is evidently 
mutilated or in poor condition, and she states that it may be easily recognized by 
the wings, for which purpose she described the pattern. She also stated that the 
apex of the abdomen has spines, the scutellum is reddish with long yellow bristles, 
the fourth posterior cell of the wings is wide open and the legs are yellowish. 
In all these the present species agrees, whereas the absence of the tibial spur 
(spine of Ricardo) is the only character given by her that disagrees; probably 
the spur was present but overlooked. Again a comparison of Macquart’s two 
descriptions, nine years apart in date of publication and differing somewhat, shows 
that both are equally applicable to this species. Ricardo stated that Walker’s 
species belongs here, and the description leaves no doubt on this point. 


Genus ATERPOGON, n. gen. 

The species upon which this genus is founded has its nearest relationship 
with Questopogon, and its characters are given in the key. To this genus, 
Brachyrrhopala bella White probably belongs, but the species described below 
is not the same as White’s species, which I have seen on two occasions. 


ATERPOGON CYRTOPOGONOIDES, n. Sp. 

d. Face greyish and with long yellowish hairs. Proboscis, palpi and antennae 
black. Head behind whitish, and with ocular cilia and scanty beard white. 
Thorax black with postalar callus and scutellum brown and a golden patch above 
scutellum; the pleura is golden, this colour extending on to the coxae; hairs on 
dorsum long and thin, and above the metathoracic spiracle are similar hairs, 
amongst which a row of bristly hairs may be detected; long bristly cilia occur 


BY G. H. HARDY. 255 


along the apical margin of the scutellum. Abdomen mainly black, with long 
seattered hairs; the second to sixth segments bordered with reddish-brown, which 
colour increases in width on the successive segments, and the seventh is 
entirely brown. Hypopygium black. Legs brown with the apex of metatarsus, 
the subsequent segments and the coxae black. Wings hyaline, with the basal 
half smoky. 

©. Similar to the male, the brown border of the abdominal segments less 
distinct, and the eighth segment black. Anterior femora fuscous at base for 
about one-third the length on the anterior side. 

Length, 6-8 mm. 

Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane (1d, 19); a pair taken by me when sweeping 
grass at Mt. Coot-tha, 12th December, 1920. New South Wales: Albury (14, 
6.1.29, F. E. Wilson), a much larger specimen but, I believe, the same species. 


Genus QUESTOPOGON Dakin & Fordham. 

Two females are represented in the South Australian Museum, and another 
(Denman, N. S. Wales, 26.12.22, A. P. Dodd) in Mr. J. S. Mann’s collection, but 
the antennal characters do not conform to those given for the typical species; 
most of the specific characters agree, however, and all the principal structures 
given by Dakin and Fordham equally apply, so I have little doubt concerning 
the generic relationship. 


Genus METALAPHRIA Ricardo. 

This genus was based on a single species, and of it I have four species before 
me. Two are presumably near M. australis Ric., the third is M. aurifacies White, 
and the fourth is described below as new. There is some doubt concerning the 
original species which, possibly, may not belong to the genus as here under- 
stood. The small species show reduced thoracic bristles, there being only one 
pair each of supra-alar and postalar, and also dorsocentral bristles. 


METALAPHRIA TESSELLATA, 0. Sp. 

6. A  brownish-yellow species with the whole dorsal area moderately 
tessellated, so that the pattern changes according to the reflection of the light. 
Moustache and antennae yellow; proboscis and palpi black with white hairs; 
beard and bristles behind head yellow. On thorax thin dark stripes evident. 
The bristles above the metathoracic spiracle distinct, and a few short hairs to be 
detected near them. The abdomen has dark patches on each segment, chiefly 
at the sides. Legs yellow throughout, but the intermediate and posterior femora 
darkened above towards the apex, and also at the apex of the tibiae. Wings 
hyaline, but yellowish towards the base, and the veins R, and R.,, meet at or, 
usually, before the apex. 

©. Similar to the male, but the seventh and eighth segments of the abdomen 
darker and without tessellation. 

Length, 12-15 mm. 

Hab.—Queensland: Brisbane, throughout the summer months, mainly on 
sandy tracks at Sunnybank, but not common, and their colour makes them very 
difficult to detect. In the field they are readily mistaken for the genus Bathypogon. 
The type series consists of seven males and three females. South Australia: 
Two specimens in the South Australian Museum may belong here, one from Angas 
Plains, the other without further locality. 


256 NEW CLASSIFICATION OF AUSTRALIAN ASILIDAE, 


Genus RAcCHIOPOGON Ricardo. 

This genus was proposed for a single species, Dasypogon grantii Newman, 
and in it I am placing related species that have the third antennal segment twice 
the length of the two basal ones combined. In addition, on the under side of 
the anterior tibiae there is but one outstanding long bristle, contrasting with two 
that occur on Thereutria and Metalaphria; an exception in the latter genus occurs 
on small species, where the bristles in general may be much reduced. 

Relatively this becomes a complex when compared with Thereutria and 
Metalaphria, and the coloration of the species is very diverse. Besides those 
recorded below, I believe Dasypogon luctuosus Macquart may belong here, as I 
have from Chinchilla, Queensland, a species that agrees very closely with the 
description. 


RACHIOPOGON CARBO Walker. 

Dasypogon carbo Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., i, 1851, 87; List Dipt. Brit. Mus., 
vi, suppl. 2, 1854, 478; Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., x, 1912, 350—Rdachiopogon 
carbo Hardy, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., li, 1926, 308—? Dasypogon limbinervis 
Macquart, Dipt. Ewot., suppl. 5, 1854, 71. 

‘A black species with black wings; the fourth and fifth abdominal segments 
are red or mainly so, but this colour seems to vary so that only one of these 
segments may be red. Macquart’s description is very similar but the wings 
are lighter, and the record is from Sydney. 

Hab.—North-west Victoria: Bannerton (A. Nicholson) in collection of Mr. 
F. E. Wilson; another pair from the same locality, but entirely black, may also 
belong here. South Australia: 1 ¢, 2 2 without further locality in the South 
Australian Museum. There are further specimens in collections and, as far as 
yet known, it would seem to be limited to these two States. 


RACHIOPOGON NIGRINUS Ricardo. 

Neosaropogon nigrinus Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (9) i, 1918, 60.— 
Rachiopogon nigrinus Hardy, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., li, 1926, 308. 

In 1926 (these PROCEEDINGS, li, p. 305), I drew attention to two species 
standing under the name Neosaropogon nigrinus, one of them being an Ommatius. 
The identity of the other has now been accepted as correct; Mr. F. H. Taylor has 
sent me a specimen of the same form, which specimen he informs me is part of 
the type series, and I have compared it with the description, finding it agrees in 
every character. In the original description this species is said to be related to 
N. claripes Ric., but this is hardly the case, for on structural grounds it must 
be placed in Rachiopogon. 


RACHIOPOGON RUBESCENS White. 

Saropogon rubescens White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania, 1913, 271. 

The type is before me, and the antennae are broken, but another specimen 
which I have seen shows that the third antennal segment conforms to Rachiopogon, 
with which other characters agree. The resemblance to Saropogon is superficial 
and White had not recognized S. sergius Walker, to which he allied it. 


Genus 2 
As pointed out on a previous occasion, a new generic position is wanted for 
Neosaropogon claripennis Ricardo and Neosaropogon froggattii Dakin & Fordham. 


BY G. H. HARDY. 257 


I have indicated the affinities and characters in the key, leaving the genus blank. 
The first species is represented in the Australian Museum, Sydney, the second, 
besides being represented in the South Australian Museum by two specimens, is 
in Mr. F. E. Wilson’s collection and from Mundaring, near Perth, Western 
Australia (J. Clark). The position of N. salinator is open to doubt, but according 
to Walker’s description it could hardly belong here. 


Genus DiogmitrEs Loew. 


The genus Diogmites has long stood as a synonym of Deromyia Phil., but 
there would seem to be no reliable data available to confirm this, and for 
Australian material the genus Deromyia has been used to harbour a complex. 
There are four species of Diogmites before me from North America, and these 
are certainly Saropogonini in affinities; there is an undescribed Australian species 
that conforms in many respects, but it differs in having no scutellar bristles and 
vein M, does not meet My For Deromyia australis, Ricardo gives the character 
of the ovipositor as “prominent below’, which description eminently fits yet 
another form that I am unable to place in this tribe so, pending further informa- 
tion, I am omitting the generic name Deromyia from any segregate, and I think 
it very likely the genus will be found to be limited to South America. 


Genus SAarRopoGgon Loew. 


I would retain temporarily one described species, Saropogon semirufum Bigot, 
of which I have seen one specimen, a female. An ally to it is from the Blue 
Mts., and two further species are from Brisbane. Two European and one North 
American species are before me, and some differences in characters are noted 
in the key. The American species is so very large that at first sight it appears 
distinct; this species, S. dispar Coq., superficially resembles a Diogmites, but in 
structure it differs. The American and Australian species have the fourth antennal 
segment, the European ones seem to be without it. The abdomen of the 
Australian forms is relatively longer than the others and tends to taper towards 
the apex, whereas it tends to widen, at least on the males, on the others. Exotic 
forms have one or two outstanding lateral bristles on the posterior section of 
the pronotum, a character missing on the Australian species. 

A new genus close to this has a superficial appearance of the Huropean 
species of Saropogon, but the moustache is more bushy, and other characters 
would exclude it. It is readily recognized by the abdomen broadening towards 
the apex and it contains one of the commonest Brisbane species which was 
referred to as a Saropogon in my earlier papers. 


SAROPOGON GAMARUS Walker. 

Dasypogon gamarus Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii, 1849, 346; ibid., vi, 
suppl. 2, 1854, 486.—Lasiopogon gamarus Kertesz, Cat. Dipt., 1909, 73:\—Dasypogon 
suavis Walker, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., n.s., iv, 1857, 327.—Saropogon suavis 
Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8) ix, 1912, 146.—Neosaropogon suavis Hardy, 
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., lii, 1927, 397. 

Ricardo thinks Dasypogon analis Macquart may be this species; the type is 
said to be without a head and the abdomen is yellow. It is not clear if there 
are markings on the abdomen of the specimen seen by her, as Ricardo only refers 
to them in respect to the original description. Macquart’s remarks concerning 


258 NEW CLASSIFICATION OF AUSTRALIAN ASILIDAE, 


these markings of the thorax and abdomen suggest the species may not belong 
to this genus. The remainder of the synonymy was proposed by Ricardo and is 
accepted with the necessary alteration to conform with priority. The species is 
not uncommon around Sydney from February to April. 

Although this species is without scutellar bristles, the other bristles, and 
the character of the abdomen, this being much shorter than in Neosaropogon, 
suggest that the affinities are as here given. 


Genus NEOCYRTOPOGON Ricardo. 


The excavation between the eyes on this genus was said to be “eliminated’’; 
this should have been “almost eliminated’, but there seems to be some variation 
in this respect. I have now seen a long series of specimens and find only one 
species represented amongst them, but it varies in size and markings. 


NEOCYRTOPOGON MACULATA Roder. 


Brachyrrhopala maculata Roder, Wien. Ent. Zeit., ii, 18838, 274; Hardy, 
Proc. Roy. Soc. Q’land, xli, 1929, 60.—Neocyrtopogon bifasciatus Ricardo, Ann. Mag. 
INOhig JEWSige,  (B)) tbe3 ANA, 80; 

In 1929, when revising species of Brachyrrhopala, I excluded B. maculata 
from that genus, and suggested that it might be a species of Neosaropogon. When 
checking characters for its generic position, it became evident that it was a 
Neocyrtopogon and, moreover, the same species as that upon which the genus 
was founded. 


Genus NEOSAROPOGON Ricardo. 


This is a large genus in Australia, of which I have eight species before me. 
Two described forms are recognizable and neither quite conforms to the remainder. 
The genus would seem to be related to Australian species placed under Saropogon, 
not to the exotic forms placed there, and it is closely akin to Neocyrtopogon, 
under which it may ultimately be placed as a subgenus. The typical form may 
or may not have the fourth antennal segment present; it occurs in the others. 


NEOSAROPOGON PRINCEPS Macquart. 


Previously (these PROCEEDINGS, liii, 1928, 472) I drew attention to the fact 
that there may be a complex standing under this name. Three of Walker’s 
names are placed as synonyms by Ricardo (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8) ix, 1912, 
591) who stated that, amongst characters given on the type, on the abdomen 
“the third segment is almost wholly dark” as compared with ‘only dark on the 
anterior border” for the other forms. These colour characters seem to conform 
on Queensland and New South Wales specimens respectively, so it is possible the 
one known to me only from Queensland may be the typical species and the 
remainder would then come under one of the names proposed by Walker. 


NEOSAROPOGON NITIDUS Macquart. 

Dasypogon nitidus Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 1, 1846, 61; Walker, List Dipt. 
Brit. Mus., vi, suppl. 2, 1854, 479—Brachyrrhopala nitidus Ricardo, Ann. Mag. 
Nat. Hist.. ix, 1912, 585; White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania, 1916, 156; Hardy, 
Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania, 1916, 271.—Neosaropogon nitidus Hardy, Proc. LInn. 
Soc. N.S.W., lii, 1927, 397.—Dasypogon sergius Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus.. 


BY G. H. HARDY. 259 


ii, 1849, 473; id., vi, suppl. 2, 1854, 477.—Lasiopogon sergius Kertesz, Cat. Dipt., 
iv, 1909, 73—Saropogon sergius Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ix, 1912, 585.— 
Dasypogon festinans Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., i, 1851, 92.—Brachyrrhopala 
nitidus var. dissimilans, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania, 1916, 271. 

The above synonymy is not new, but there are one or two discrepancies 
in it. Ricardo states that D. festinans, from unknown locality, is identical with 
D. sergius Walker, from New South Wales; she also added “from the description 
of Dasypogon nitidus Macquart, from Tasmania, it is possibly the same species 
as this”. Judging from her descriptions and remarks, there would be no doubt 
concerning the synonymy, but Walker’s description of D. sergius does not corres- 
pond in markings, and if the synonymy is correct, the locality is wrong. 

With regard to the variety dissimilis, this has not been met with again, 
but Mr. C. EH. Cole took an intermediate form that has the face with normal 
colouring, otherwise it resembles the variety. In build it resembles that of 
N. princeps to a remarkable extent. 

The species has the scutellum with two pairs of bristles, and there are a 
few depressed hairs on the face above the tubercle; these two characters are 
unique to the species, which is only known from Tasmania. 


Genus Neropioctria Loew. 

The typical form, N. australis Ricardo, from the Blue Mts., is before me. 
In general resemblance it conforms to Neosaropogon, but is without the tibial 
spur and the abdomen does not tend to widen at the apex but is more or less 
uniformly wide. In the genitalia of the male, being somewhat globular and 
having a conspicuous ventral plate, it conforms best to the Stenopogon group. 
On many specimens the hypopygium is inverted, in other cases it is turned 
through 90 degrees or more. 


Genus STENOPOGON Loew. 

With the possible exception of Leptogaster, Neosaropogon and other genera 
with very elongate slender abdomen, the Asilidae have the first sternite of the 
abdomen divided into two parts, a modification that seems to be responsible for 
the flexibility of the abdomen at its base. In Therevidae this sclerite may be 
partly divided, or even partially formed into three sections. Malloch has 
used the hairy nature or otherwise of this divided sclerite in order to group species 
of genus Stenopogon into divisions, but the character would seem to be too 
trivial to be used thus. Neoscleropogon is coupled by him with that section of 
Scleropogon that has the posterior part of this sclerite bare, but Australian 
forms of the genus Stenopogon form a homogeneous group that may or may 
not be bare in this region. 

There is only one character given by Malloch in his definition of 
Neoscleropogon that appears to me to hold true, namely, the long pleural hairs. 
I have attempted to give a better interpretation in the key in regard) to this and 
other subgenera already proposed, but it seems inadvisable to maintain subgenera 
at the present time when the genera are so poorly understood. 

In my figure of the genitalia (Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., li, 1926, 310), illustrated 
as that of S. elongatus, but later shown to be that of S. fraternus Bigot, one of 
the forms confused under the former rmame, the parts labelled should be 
eorrected as follows: for d.p. read v.p.; for u.f. read 1.f. and for l1.f. read w.f.; this 
and all other hypopygia on Australian species are inverted, so the dorsal plate 


260 NEW CLASSIFICATION OF AUSTRALIAN ASILIDAE, 


(d.p.) there referred to, becomes the ventral plate (v.p.), and the names of the 
forceps, upper and lower, need reversing. 


Genus Ospriocerus Loew. 


This North American genus belongs to the Stenopogon group, but it differs 
very considerably in the antennae; the third segment is very long, and the fourth 
very short, and both together are about three times the length of the basal ones 
united. 


Tribe STICHOPOGONINI, n. tribe. 

To this tribe, hitherto left unnamed by me, and which contains two Aus- 
tralian genera, Clinopogon and Cryptopogon, belong also the American genera 
Lasiopogon, Neopogon and, I believe, Stichopogon; the last of these I have not 
seen. Holocephala, Laphystia and Psilocurus do not come within the definition 
of the group. 


Key to genera of the tribe Stichopogonini. 


1. Tubercle very large, occupying nearly the whole of the face and containing long 
erect hairs throughout its length. Hypopygium inverted .... Lasiopogon Loew. 
Tubercle moderate in size. If long hairs occur on the face above tubercle, they are 
strongly depressed and lie over the moustache. Hypopygium normal .... 2 
Moustache more or less restricted to the oral margin, the hairs above it being 
shortiands inconspicuous amiss sc le. AAPAlede UaPIA) «cect cl chee alebe) 7 a Panes cp Seer See an 3 
Moustache not so confined, long dense hairs overlying the bristles on the tubercle 
PS oy ot UU RMR DUC AS ih. yl ah SA MRCS gt yc ean 2s yrs ae dee TE ie Wad ae eg Be Clinopogon Bezzi. 
Species with rather long abdomen. One presutural and one postalar pair of bristles 


bo 


(Je) 


ONLYSDTESEMIE MEN) Nie ene anes ree hao LEW een RI bee Ce ee AE Eee Neopogon Bezzi. 
Species with shorter, normal abdomen. More than two pairs of thoracic bristles 
DRESEMCS veces ees RAG. Bac can teme eee ae aise). lis 5c Yay etches eure ie eae eats Mee ee Cryptopogon White. 


Genus LASIOoPpOoGON Loew. 


The American species of this genus comes within this tribe, and although 
Lundbeck, when describing the European form, does not mention the character of 
the prothorax, the description he gives fits here too. Lundbeck draws attention 
to the inverted hypopygium, a character I find also occurring on the American 
specimen. Melin, recording the habits of copulation, states: “the two sexes sit 
with their abdomen in a straight line, facing in opposite directions”, which is in 
keeping with the inverted hypopygium, but Melin makes no mention of this fact. 
Lundbeck refers to Cyrtopogon Loew, as being nearly related, but that genus 
has a superficial resemblance to it and I am unable to maintain the supposed 
relationship. 


Genus NEOPOGON Bezzi. 

Of this genus I have seen two American species. It is regarded as being a 
synonym of Stichopogon by many, but I have not seen the latter genus which is 
the first described of this group and therefore used for the tribal name. There 
may be some doubt also if Clinopogon and Cryptopogon are worthy of separate 
generic status, but Neopogon seems to be consistently different in chaetotaxy as 
well as shape of the abdomen; the two Australian genera are only to be 
distinguished from each other by the nature of the moustache. The three genera 
form a natural group having many characters in common with Lasiopogon, to 
which they are undoubtedly allied. 


THE MOSSES OF FIJI. 
By H. N. Drxon, M.A., F.L.S., and WILLIAM Gamaaaon, F.L.S. 
(Plates viii—ix.) 
[Read 25th June, 1930.] 


In general, the flowering plants of any country are collected more and are 
consequently known better than the cryptogams, and Fiji is no exception to this. 

The main collections of mosses made in Fiji are those collected by the United 
States Exploring Expedition of 1840, Milne in ‘‘the Herald’ in 1856, Seemann and 
Graeffe about 1860 and Miss Gibbs in 1907. These collections altogether recorded 
100 species from Fiji. In 1917 Greenwood commenced collecting the mosses 
whilst on week-end trips to the mountains for botanical and entomological material, 
and the number of known species now stands at 205. 

In this paper all species at present known are included, all the previous records 
being given as far as possible. Of the numbers collected by Greenwood only about 
half are given, except where these show an extension of range within the islands 
beyond that previously known, or are records of species not previously recorded 
or new. 

From the point of view of geographical distribution the mosses of a country 
are of interest, as they are not plants that would be carried about from place to 
place by natives. The mosses of Fiji show a strong Indo-Malay element, while, of 
the remainder, some extend east and west to Samoa and the New Hebrides, New 
Caledonia and Australia. Only some 205 are at present known from Fiji, and this 
is probably about half the number to be expected. It would be premature to 
attempt to give the number of species, out of those recorded, that are endemic, 
since there is a strong probability that several of those that at present appear 
to be so (especially among the species described by C. Mueller in the Musci 
Polynesiaci) may be identical with species already described from surrounding 
groups. 

Of the new records of already known species, the following are of special 
interest. Calymperes tuberculosum (Thér. & Dix.) Broth.; Bryuwm chrysoneuron 
C.M.; Pseudorhacelopus philippinensis Broth.; EHEuptychium Gunnii Broth. & 
Watts; Papillaria pellucida Broth. & Watts; Homalia exigua (Bry. jav.); Campylo- 
dontium flavescens (Hook.); Clastobryella cuculligera (Bry. jav.) Fleisch. 

A word about the localities quoted may not be out of place. | Miss Gibbs 
collected around Nadarivatu, which lies under Mt. Victoria (4,000 feet) and is 
on the north side of Viti Levu, the largest island in the group. Greenwood 
collected mostly in the mountains lying about ten miles back from Lautoka, 
which is on the coast in the centre of the sugar-growing area of the west coast. 
These mountains form a range parallel to the coast, and the highest peak, Mt. 
Evans, is about 3,960 feet high. Nagaga is a Fiji village lying under Mt. Evans 
and about 8 miles from Lautoka, and the Falls are a short distance from Nagaga. 


262 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


Loloti is the name of a place where there was a Fiji village years ago and lies 
about midway between Nagaga and Sabeto. Both Mt. Evans and Nadarivatu are 
on the dry side of the island. On Vanua Levu, the second largest island, the main 
collecting has been at Labasa and Wainikoro. Labasa is the centre of the sugar- 
growing area and lies on the north side of the island. Wainikoro is on the same 
coast, about 30 miles from Labasa. Both places are on the dry side of the island. 
Levuka is on Ovalau, the third largest island, and is on the wet side of the island. 
Nausori and Suva are on the wet side of Viti Levu. 


On the wet side of the islands the forests extend nearly down to the sea, and 
when more collecting has been done in this area many more species should be 
found. 


On the dry side, the country near the coast is open rolling hilis, with 
scattered clumps of Pandanus, Guava and Dodonaea, and flat cultivated land. The 
forests do not extend below about 1,000 feet elevation, except in the gullies and 
watercourses where the timber may come a little lower. 


On the dry side, in the gullies and near the coast one finds little of interest 
in the mosses except Fissidens and Philonotis. Once one climbs past the 1,000 
feet level, one comes into patches of timber and reed covered hills with rocky 
gullies, and here can be found Entodon Hillebrandii, Thuidium cymbifolium, 
Ectropothecium, Hypopterygium, Mnium, and Hyophila. Climbing higher one 
enters a forest of very tall trees with very little undergrowth, and here the 
fallen logs are covered with Syrrhopodon mamillatus, Fissidens and Leucomium. 
Climbing higher the forest thins out, and near the top of Mt. Evans (3,960 feet) 
the trees are only about 30 feet high, and stunted by the wind. Here the fallen 
logs and branches are covered with a thick growth of Papillaria, Leucoloma and 
Mniodendron. 

In the following pages a key is given to the genera, and to some of the 
species, and it is hoped that these will prove useful. 

As more collecting is done, and more species become known from Fiji, it is 
hoped to issue a supplementary article bringing the knowledge of the mosses up 
to date. 


Key to Genera of Mosses Found in Fiji. 


[Note.—This key is only applicable to the species (of the included genera) which 
are actually found in Fiji.] 


Ie aeavesmequitant) .conduplicatesGistichousy a. coeiceccicieiieicncieiiciens tee 2 
Leaves often complanate, but not equitant or truly distichous ................ 3 
2.. Leaf sheath basal only, formed by an additional lamina (vaginant lamina) arising 
ALO EM EMMET VE: Healers real oter asl uae alas viaites iovie Wake. eorelse eee meh nave ee Nemecea eene al shiemece ns naman belts Fissidens 


The whole leaf doubled on itself and sheathing the stem, leaves nerveless .......... 
Maen ares Tee RAD MOET ES SS Glare oO cholo Ra tc eRe LOL Eeen Alem cor id Ola Mah Genie Geona ea too Orthorrhynchium 


a0 


Acrocarpous, i.e., the stems are more or less erect (in Syrrhopodon (Thyridium) and 
Macromitrium they may be more or less creeping, but the fruit is terminal on 
erect branches) ; fruit terminal except in Anoectangium .................. 4 

Pleurocarpous, i.e., the stems are creeping or erect from a creeping rhizomatous 
stem; fruit lateral, the perichaetia produced on the side of the stem or main 
DEATICHES Hy Aces ERs: eR arian! Ce Se ES 3 fl rath ae ee ee niet ad Teed, SS 3 

4. Branches fasciculate, dimorphous, some spreading, some pendent and appressed 
to stem; leaf cells dimorphous, chlorophvllose, very narrow and inconspicuous, 
hyaline, large, empty, with spiral fibres. Marsh plants .......... Sphagnum 

Branches not fasciculate; cells all chlorophyllose, or if large and empty, without 
Spiral “fibres iss hepato Py ee Ore Boke alr He aye eee ied aah tila es ae eee ve 5 


(or) 


| 


10. 


Wal, 


14. 


18. 


19. 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. i 263 


Leaf nearly all composed of nerve—hence apparently nerveless—nerve composed of 
at least three layers of cells, minute chlorophyllose cells (chlorocysts) and 


largey emptys Cells) (eucocy sts) a. js e-em ice ete leaetiie lacie (Leucobryaceae) 6 
Lamina of leaf mostly composed of chlorophyllose cells; nerve narrow (rarely half 
WA CIDE O Lan CANE imate ecco state eb ts, oy! han a ca unek, Rive aw A ume ag Aber teal aictaere pene Ulcer Pua ay Am ne 9 
Chlorocysts superficial (as well as internal), on dorsal and ventral surface of nerve, 
PENTINOEO, KO Woes Was Ikea WS ioe ee agcuidosccuauoducudubuUaoudD Hxodictyon 
Chlorocysts in a single median layer (seen only in a transverse section of leaf)... 7 
Nerve with a dorsal median bundle of stereid cells (appearing as a narrow midrib) ; 
CAMO SANG, GAAINTNAUHO Gecscoucccadadcdodvoceadconcounsouoocs Leucophanes 
INeRVenwithoutamedian’ (stereid bundle. 5 356508565 cde ccc ees cere ce shalele ec tele cles 8 
Chlorocysts in transverse section of leaf always quadrangular, capsule curved, 
(GUIG EE ONO TIO LPS Greer ais on etCr oreo Toke cid a Oldib cies PReacn Uno een mire eer eee bcd Oe MORE bio! Gro cial a tate Leucobryum 
Chlorocysts in upper part of leaf in section triangular; capsule erect, symmetric 
3 BSB OAKS Grd OnE sOsOleaG 9S CROUE NE coe OREO No ar Ole tos on Cree tetc ie av ene cE Ge AE yet ayaa Octoblepharum 
Median basal cells large, empty, very clearly differentiated from the minute 
chlorophyllose lamina cells ........................005- (Calymperaceae) 10 
Median basal cells not strikingly differentiated .............................. 11 


Calyptra mitriform, plicate; peristome 0; abnormal leaves often present (with apex 
narrowed to a more or less prolonged, proboscid extension, then expanded at 
tip and bearing a tuft of gemmae). Teniole frequently present in lamina (a 
very narrow intramarginal band of 2-3 rows of paler cells, best seen at shoulder 
of leaf base, but often continued both upwards and downwards) .. Calymperes 
Calyptra cucullate, smooth. Peristome usually present. Abnormal leaves and - 
teniole wanting (but the upper part of the lamina frequently with a narrow, 


hyaline border or with a thickened intramarginal band) ........ Syrrhopodon 
Stems erect. Calyptra large, covered with a dense felt of whitish hairs, pointing 
GUS AG VER ROIS SAG Oto 6 Cros TRO IOP OPER TER OES ICC ROTORS RIE TCR Cee ReneS nie tei ... (Polytrichaceae) 12 
Calypiramnaked womsitmnalny with erect Walrsi nn so. cs 4 ciel eticieneueecleeenerelcicn: 183 
Seta rough, leaves without lamellae ......................-+-00- Pseudorhacelopus 
Seta smooth. Upper surface of nerve with numerous longitudinal lamellae ........ 
ROR ALA cay ae RE RMN LRU Andean Ltr iL ops kN hele Ge Pogonatum 
Calyptra rather large, campanulate, smooth or hairy; stems creeping, with erect 
RANCH Ee Si ues emer a Mi cliseems ett saan ay GNin pasar ks cwatiah sn aydasheperaneaetuebete Macromitrium 
Calyptra cucullate, mostly small; stems usually erect .:...................... 14 
Leaves large (4-10 mm. long) in rosulate tufts (or in Mniwm along prostrate 
SHOOUS)) Sir CellSm lame Gabe ruaity eens seen le eretede Senishiaia: dataset cl teehee shel APS ame emer 15 


Leaves smaller, mostly narrow; cells much smaller ...................+.0208. 16 
Leaves rotund-spathulate, obtuse and apiculate, cells 20-30 uw in diameter, isodia- 
mMetrichabornderRmotmenickenedecelllSmyy ma ceaeiaeiees cele ee eee Mnium 
Leaves spathulate, shortly acuminate, cells rhomboid, border narrow, of non- 
PHY CKEMCAECELS maine acer sbcpency al ouisens ead ci sroitsuade caieee. dis dalehiad syansucn Ae ehenona ogeromehere Rhodobryum 


Plants small, capsules almost sessile and immersed .......... SSE Sad Walks epemaesveds WY 
Seta usually long, always longer than the capsule .............6.-c..080+c-2005 18 
Comal leaves larger, lanceolate-subulate, rigid, entire .................. Garckea 
Leaves few, broadly ligulate, twisted when dry, subdenticulate ........ Diphyscium 
Leaves narrowly linear or subulate, with thickened border, and bigeminate, spinose 

teethh-anervertoothed sat) backeci iis Siyiesile wie diets yeie leucans elu eoae eusheneu ae Rhizogonium 
Border not thickened, teeth when present not bigeminate ..................... 19 


Capsule subspherical, plicate; leaf cells usually unipapillate or with prominent 


COM TAVIS SS ees Stee aiteces oto GSOIERG NCO ERED Lo ie OTR ERE a Nomen aeretere cs eis d i ny ola ac Philonotis 
Capsule more or less elongate, cells either smooth or with numerous fine papillae 20 
Capsule erect or suberect, peristome 0 or single .............-. 00. e eee eeeeee 23 


Capsule more or less inclined or pendulous (except Brachymenium), peristome 


double; cells more or less rhomboid, smooth ...................00 00 ee eee 21 
IOGEREAS EMI sReCllnr Gils cath 6 Gadd 6 OU nip olo Uo arto SepMeroIOsolD Bro O10 loID 6 Uimdio ld aio 5 O10 64g Mniobryum 
MeAVeSeNotsnred wexcept. Ati basen ais els Mh ose Si sad eau a peueyaraenglelalicinenslay eusl Suey Gl aicaseyabanewaes 22 
Capsule almost erect, endostome very imperfect .................. Brachymenium 
Capsule inclined or pendulous, endostome well developed .................. Bryum 
Nerve very broad, 4-4 width of leaf base; leaves rigid, little altered when dry 

Bb okcins ohath cuto boc 6) bo: bro Oro CORSO HeNienO Clo,8 Sle eREROIREDNG Eee OIn HO o.ceciatots Giorct Ceio pi Campylopus 


TINER Nave TOKENS ONY 3 Goo 't.y lee cree EN CORE RRE OG MEG Ima EMEC To acl olia a cla caathig pro acG Goo kerb 24 


264 


bo 
“1 


28. 


30. 


31. 


33. 


34. 


35. 


36. 


37. 


38. 


39. 


40. 


41. 


42. 


MOSSES OF FIJI, 


Capsule with a very long, tapering neck or apophysis, leaves narrow-linear ...... 

SUP AR Ie ei aS EB PPM aaa MUL beal Ae ope Pape i tier Uae aera te ean StS te Kp pe a Rr Trematodon 
Capswleliwithoutamcleaniyannarked mec kara cove iene one eee iei ae eee 25 
Alar cells clearly defined, large, often orange Sdibiosplo olalo co Olaid-olo ald GHGS csMla lS 'o ocd ‘ova 6 26 
Alarvcells notvor little differentiated esis eo licls ciel bi cme eile ene ele te cisions sualecooheve tenes 27 
Leaves broad, concave, piliferous; perichaetial leaves very long, reaching to capsule 

Aes UE Greene ar aAeAI i cncer Or acereMetaie anid Gols oF ors ena aaRarone Gear oemoEs Mom odio Wigtor oe arOln es Hucamptodon 
leaves) marrow, eradually, finelyacuminater = 45 elemento onie eke Leucoloma 
Perichaetia lateral; leaves oblong-ovate, shortly pointed; cells dense and opaque 

WATCH DADUTAGH cheney cce ollie ea nus cemeretaneorre hee oi A ahh yaa SN ae 0 mS aoe Ea Anoectangium 
Perichactiavand truititerminalieyaaectsccscig es cele euoinis eieleinilelole tiie oe ree Ine 28 


Peristome dicranoid (teeth broader at base, usually more or less deeply bifurcate, 
transversely barred), leaves narrow and acuminate, cells more or less elongate, 
STOO GI ites eri iene ued. Aieceer het eatemeea abe teere ha itot cre cisieet nc cta fi tha eae aretem OTe ae cians fe fanaa eM ar We 29 

Peristome barbuloid (teeth filiform, often in pairs, usually papillose, not broader at 
base or conspicuously barred, sometimes very long and spirally twisted) ; leaves 


often broad above; upper cells mostly isodiametric, often papillose ...... 30 
Seta flexuose and curved when moist, capsule plicate .............. Campylopodium 
SSbAMERSC tay STS ANE Day DU Geta RO Tee AACA I UME pen Ta pM re aeRO ek Dicranella 
Leaves rigid; upper cells ovoid-rectangular, smooth; lid obliquely subulate, peristome 

papillose; slong} Mot) twaSstedy wees he cite Ask Seki SPIN INR) Ny Sane 7 ere ean a Rhamphidium 
Leaves twisted or flexuose when dry, upper cells isodiametric, mostly papillose .. 31 
Leaves small, margins involute above .................00e ee eeeee Hymenostomum 
Leaves with plane or revolute margins ........... 000 e eee cee eee cee eee eee eee 32 
Peristome 0; leaves rather wide, often denticulate at apex .............. Hyophila 
Peristome long, twisted, leaves rather short and wide .................... Barbula 
Peristome teeth very short, erect, leaves long and narrow, margin plane ........ 

A ORGS MAM EUG RAEN eee ite a A AN ORS A se a Uc eI oe So Trichostomum 
Stems with differentiated dorsal or ventral leaves (amphigastria) much smaller 

thanicthe normal leaves eg eee is Ck aaa EI UR eR ee SUE eee atte sean ene 34 
Stem'shiwithouty am phiga seria iweedacncnescissanenevalepeveeacns ciallckeuarseatehelt senetawelelich eet eeenae aig enemas 35 
Amphigastria on under side of frond, rounded, with short points, leaves bordered 

Ty TOA supe ears Wah oGe AL a et HU Healey ramet agerper Pobealreirs ae (este sy 4s Hor Slee nnettoee meate bel te tal oh teleniteetonrc ore te ovat Hypopterygium 
Amphigastria on upper side, cordate-acuminate with long points, leaves not 

DOTASTEE Ie ett SUS Corre hon eretiar ance voisostotravey suehe mata Colicneene emails rotrslnel pateyrs Rhacopilum 
Leaves with a well defined, often thickened border ....................-000085 36 
Leaves without thickened border (slightly thickened in Pterobryella) ...... 38 
Very robust plants, with very long, rigid, lanceolate leaves .............. Spiridens 
Smaller plants, with rounded leaves and lax cellS ................02200.-0 000s 37 
INTERES ISIN Sites eae ee CHE REPRE Ce ey eevee ay costal Urn toi mn WRG NUN OAM ge RET eS Ws Distichophyllum 
INiervienwithueworlonebranchesmmenunn- tj isic cliente bene Relorenen tcl eneiees Cyclodictyon 
Nerve with two branches reaching nearly to apex ...............++05- Callicostella 
Nerve single, or double and very short, or 0 ........ cee eee ee eee ee ee eee 39 
INIERV.E) SIM ETE ete eV ey Wee U Meter Mere me catia sGclt: tanh ehe anaia inca icine aT MEM RE MESA sH ae) ue eaten anette aie 40 
INjervierd oubleor: (0 se Re aeiseir ume user eu uhaie te Munna Malle MIAO ERHAWAMeyu teu tevetar attain etenah eter emaemente 62 
Nerve strong, reaching to near apex, and there markedly sinuous; leaves coarsely 

{OVO AVY LTH OXON Sains aio cb claloloroud Ole: coo Coon Er Gar aDciold hikcighd eiown'G, Golo Bib lo.cldioiaids Herpetineuron 
Nerve notumanked bys iSIMMOUSMM meta crclcrsca cul oats ie lense renee tenes oteie acerca cieeeauaiee maple 41 
Stems pendulous, julaceous, leaves very concave, plicate when dry, cells usually 

UNIPAPIVTA CS. rei seteershe neat tee N MM calreg Pesala iat arekc cy avaire ne aks WMGoe een BTM arafrow toler arr | Meteorium 
Leaves not markedly coneave and plicate . 2.2... 0.55.2 h.- cee eo ee eee es ee 42 
(OAT Moy) a tbo fel Seige bid oroiuic olold ule oa. c10 Clb Oreo Bipkcle odio ote atara.6°6.0,0'd 00/0, GOlolaitona Ghd ab oro: o-0. 0/0 43 
Cellss “STO OE I Bey SE ie teara tas teentiare hal ss laste se Ga wi Suse CARGO L ECM SHORE ohclen ie eie sist ar tee en suas Ae re49 


Stems prostrate, bi-tri-pinnate, stem- and branch-leaves markedly dimorphous .. 44 
Stems pinnate only, or irregularly branched, leaves not markedly dimorphous .. 45 


Calyptra ‘cucullate, naked) Smooth ii. oo. 2 elec. eels mci eicieiiene ele) lie) s\ 0 eke tal atic Thuidium 
Calyptra mitriform, hairy, plicate, fringed at base ..................-0-. Pelekium 
Plants very delicate, on rocks, with minute leaves ................ .... Claopodium 
Larger, mostly pendulous, leaves mostly 2 mm. long .........0..... ee ce ee eens 46 
Ieee Srods Oe MEE COWEN Gooddonobodsobob oo ocOodOOON OD OOUoooUOUO OOOO 47 


IEEE Telos COI RNNENT) Glodoovccocnn0cUgoDgco Od OBO aDODODDOODOODDOODS Bae. hs Sets 48 


47. 


74. 


76. 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 265 


Nerve long, distinct, cells unipapillate, margin of leaf undulate ...... Aérobryopsis 
Nerve indistinct, cells obscure with numerous small papillae, margin not undulate 

BG bea: Bccld. OCOD. CACHE TG CREE GTEC Se HEA SA CUT RAT GIeRE SERRA Snob Aa ARR cn fiat he AU Ale CR ex LR Floribundaria 
Stemisisslenders pendulous; flexWOSen ise) «cin cuwloude cect eniereie elemersiel «lellcnere\leiyet els! «iol lle Papillaria 
Stemiswan Gh L@ AWS: srl Ge ce Ae Seal he cer Giehta re wane) cen Saco sate Wa iow tne t ee eetiiet-e opeb ei Gb alletie Trachypus 
INEnViesIMoOLenonnless toothed tate backsaDOvies scsi creche reich crcl ele) ia ot aienal «fol leh silolle! «| eile 50 
INISAVS CRUE Gono A ENE IES Gohobodonoopeoolapobbamnooood boogandodo pou DD Udo DS 53 
Wippenmcellsmroundedwongelliptien meyer cic ce ciee cere ercieiiacienel =e) <i evedeneteneds 6 Bescherellea 
Upper cells elongate, prosenchymatous; stem dendroid ..................-..--. 51 
Leaf margin entire or slightly denticulate .................00.2-0-6- Pterobryella 
ILE? IMATE Gobanosahn cOCUN sooogoosoonedbononuodoboooduoooooUGaOnddo Udon OC 52 
STSTIMPILOTITETHEOSE Mem aie erAd is sone taiceniat te cer orate atte Rete no 2 aH ate PER, A a ee eS RSNA ws Mniodendron 
SPermenO Le tLOTMEN POSE ures ees cbs teleenallsvatecn elise aisereules 8) Sehebeaiier oh aire Au cmeuean ener ee Osa Ie Hypnodendron 
Branching -irregular, rarely subpinnate, leaves not complanate ........... uae 54 
Branching more or less pinnate; branches or leaves (often both) complanate .. 57 
Upper cells rounded, capsules immersed in the conspicuous perichaetia .. Cryphaea 
UWipper cells elongate, capsules! exserted |.........020. 5c ce ee es ee ees eee es 55 
Alar cells well defined, numerous, plant very slender .............. Stereophyllum 
Alar cells little differentiated; lid long-beaked ............... 2.0.2.2. .02 eee 56 
Plants very slender; leaves minute, narrow .................0..0- Rhynchostegiella 
Plants larger, leaves 1 mm. long or more, broader ............... Rhynchostegium 
Secondary stems dendroid, very complanate, bi-tri-pinnate, leaves coarsely dentate 

ELD OW CRM et Rete Cen ef acs act ce orn SE Meena MCMgee sires lohita vay Sua, 'c eltthe Rene sueneRe meee Homaliodendron 
*Stems pinnate only, or leaves not coarsely deritate ..................0.0.0000e 58 
IE CAVeSEISCRONe lve UL Cle Gl essa spun cs apaee ai eeey vu bie repli fsa bo, fara'lo paueueliaanet aan a Calyptothecium 
Woavesmnotecleanlv@rauriGle di issih cw emo tL et stone atte te cuien es Osteen tea RSE aera 59 
Leaves very complanate, sub-distichous, stems not densely branched .......... 60 
Leaves little or not complanate, biplicate when dry, stems densely branched .... 61 
Slender, leaves orbicular, not undulate when dry .....................- Homalia 
Larger, leaves lingulate, transversely undulate when dry ........ Himantocladium 
Leaves subentire, stems often bipinnate ..................-.0..-2e eee Pinnatella. 
Leaves toothed above, stems irregularly pinnate ...................... Thamnium 
Leaves transversely undulate, obtuse, very complanate ....... Mees oto Hin Neckeropsis 
Leaves not (or irregularly) transversely undulate ...............0.0000eeeeee 63. 


Alar cells few, large, inflated orange or hyaline (in Meiothecium less marked) 
51686: OSG aC ORE cane ets BABE SE RO ESE BPS eee ler nai tin Pa a ag aa (Sematophyllaceae) 64 


AM aArMCell Seno mrintlared sor whyalinve ieee oracsyei tei ce eee cease eek rec lela oe ey Spee Reece ape eee mle 
WWCAVESHMSEROM EVA PICA UG we chi cohen eee e nN MEN RS BERS F010) 5 ben als Ca Nau Piloecium 
Leaves not 10) bhekeh OC as to tu stceeh SiO vas Ol ol MICRD CoA be Bech Ch OR et CON ce bat MPR erent 4 aU Serene ape 65 
Very slender; crowded brood-filaments near the tips of some branches; leaves 

Shanplivgad enticuilate ass edsesiery make trae Asa cieaier sits \c alcacnirs So) Siicthelmaura nue eure Clastobryella 
Brood filaments wanting; plants usually robust ................ 0.000 eeeeeeee 66 
Cell Si DAU OSSH eee bs es ee Peliallee’ HA Sr reiteaautcu eae clbake ee Auge Galcle nakie cto Rou Neen ae AP eek ee Na 67 
Well SSMOOLN Rey eee ey ere el the a ota re re ise E 2) Pao. ot Sod a kalls: aus ota HE Shy ore 68 
Capsulemsulberector win Clin eday 2: cyecespcvenseeaerone osminnounrials Gyan tes civ web oreo Trichosteleum 
Capsule pendulous, leaves concave, abruptly loriform ............ Rhaphidostichum 
WWCAVESUSN ALD VentOOLlN eer crrveteusia coer eves ae renee) ciiosja ce) s\lone, eae Lelie lone leh evtonel eeet meters Trismegistia 
Meavesmentine or finely; Genticulaver sy acvtee netic fo srelicc lie) hemera elem chensiereicte ara eloeonene 69: 
Upper cells short, elliptic or rhomboid-elliptic ...................... Meiothecium 
Wipperscell Serelom cate) epee lie sete woken tous irsremaieware oat rebel felieliei loafer Solcowoyenonel telihsysetene) lecanertesats 70 
Tall plants, leaves large, broad, shortly pointed ...................... Acroporium 
Slender, creeping plants, leaves small, lanceolate, subpiliferous .... Rhaphidostegium 
CellsMpapillosermsnaa ll’ splaimitis irs cjeccieucite euch erste neieicn sh oieisas. Js 5: e118) wepel shatenel MeMe EAR Mei a ctloeite 72 
(CVAD Siaavaveng al 5 Biba cr aibonen eats BSI Otte Ct ncn EO IoC Ee GENE tein ROR er OACPOE HC. SIE em Mie aiieias enone 73 
Cell ends sharply protruding, seta hispid or papillose .............. Chaetomitrium 
Papillae distinctly on lumen, often seriate ..............+0.+.. ee se cues Taxithelium 
Alar cells numerous, markedly differentiated ; capsule erect, cylindric .......... 74 
Alarmcellsistewsandenot markedly diStinCtie oi secre) clchelcl sles elllstelneiciceeiensneeleneieienene 75 
TMCAV ESD CAGE mere uonetes cia SE Mste MN Stl aycedee saree yrepray susemtsi's (oi ebb adamegenateed bekens Campylodontium 
THCAVESINO Lapp li CAteninns sie ceveneaemepen aimee Aas siren sliniccysa\| shlay io evel ap eke riohictedratiette relue clue nem arom eure Entodon 
Stem sSpmonrenorslessGendroidssoLtenerigidu a aie cic ieucetenesneicie ciciaicicisioieicnemercuoneneioneneie 76 


Stems: MOG CMT OLA Ge rai eptca arin ite atagley oes aire sh aise ove! siceytemestontal [ened epscicieue wens eal aaa ePot sae eae ae 78 


266 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


76. Robust; leaves seriate, cochleariform, abruptly cuspidate ............ Symphysodon 
More slender, leaves not seriate, more gradually pointed ....................-. ul 

(i euicsiGuapmnnates not mlasellitOnmiiyn eee ene eee cree acto Symphysodontella. 
Less rigid, branches more or less curved, often flagelliform at tips .. Camptochaete 

78. Stems more or less erect, simple or slightly branched, mostly densely foliate, with 
large leaves; capsules immersed or shortly exserted ...............-...-. 79 

Stems more or less prostrate, irregularly branched; leaves smaller, setae long .. 81 

MOR MIseaves wNOLNDICAtE: sui cen G Nia Nampa weet MLS 8 CU bales Sey ae See pe aE oe ae Garovaglia 
eaves! (longitudinally, plicaterniaar seme o5 missy iiiiiisk citesnaeiei ce ke) ae ticied., ochre ara 80 

80. Peristome teeth papillose, processes filiform; capsule shortly exserted ............ 
MEE ae eee dO OT A I EE TATE ene Tone eile to PES SURI one RD EE Endotrichella 
Peristome teeth striolate, processes broad; capsule immersed in the large peri- 

CON VEE CSTD 9g LAU RM asia ea ade a Cr Nan 8 Cs fee) eo eh a Ne PMR ce UC aA Ut oC Gl Huptychium 

SM Ce Ls: etsy oe ears ree Gees rn SU vf need ere a Mr EE a teh cha a a te oe REA SMS cy elle es PACE pp eee 82 
C™1ISE SVE BY i REET OW CRY ARE UE a te MRIS) SUSE MNES ON lh aN REY ARRON,“ IEE SN a 3 

82. Usually whitish, cells large, 20 uw wide, acutely rhomboid .............. Leucomium 
Cells shorter, 15 w wide or less, branch leaves usually dimorphous, some wider and 
with wider cells, some more acuminate with narrower cells ........ Vesicularia 

83. Capsule suberect, asymmetric, leaves mostly complanate, little curved ............ 
AG Ls op 20 a erie meer ae nn cy Seite cl ASCH REDE CL Ie PRPC es es Nea LM hed aarti aaa. § id Tsopterygium 


DICRAN ACEAE. 
TREMATODON Michx. 
TREMATODON SP. 

On dry, stony bank, Lautoka, near sea-level, 6.8.17; Greenwood (28). 

A very slender plant with much twisted leaves when dry, acute or subacute, 
and with the apex entire or slightly denticulate, the upper cells very small, not 
inerassate. Seta short, apophysis about twice the length of the sporangium, 
clearly strumose. The fruit is very imperfect, and the species scarcely determin- 
able; it is quite probably new, but in its present condition it is not possible to 
find any characters to separate it from 7. suberectus Mitt. 


GarRCcCKEA C. Muell. 
GARCKEA PHASCOIDES (Hook.) C.M. 

New to Fiji. On wet bank, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 600 feet, 10.5.19; 
Greenwood (158). On -wet clay bank, Mts., interior of Vanua Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 
25.12.22; Greenwood (465). 

The capitula are rather more densely and shortly foliate than in the common 
Indian forms; but other Indian plants agree quite well. The recorded distribution 
has hitherto been southern Asia and Queensland. It is, however, very doubtful 
whether the four African species are really distinct. 


DICRANELLA Schimp. 
DICRANELLA FLACCIDULA Mitt. 
Viti; Seemann. 
On clay banks, Suva, Viti Levu, near sea-level, 16.3.18; Greenwood (110). 
Labasa, Vanua Levu, near sea-level, Aug., 1922; Greenwood (443). Clay bank, 
Macuata Coast, Vanua Leyu, 29.2.24; Greenwood (519). 


DICRANELLA PYCNOGLOSSA (Broth.) Broth. 
New to Fiji. On clay bank, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 1,000 ft., 11.4.20; 
Greenwood (331). 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 267 


The Queensland plant (F. M. Bailey, 1889, No. 663) agrees perfectly. Not 
known hitherto except from Eastern Australia. 


CAMPYLOPODIUM Besch. 
CAMPYLOPODIUM INTEGRUM (C.M.) Par. 
Syn. Dicranetla trichophylla Mitt. 
Viti, Seemann; 862 pp. Ovalau, Milne in herb. Hook., 356a. Labasa, Vanua 
Levu, near sea-level, Aug., 1922; Greenwood (444). On wet bank, Mts., Labasa, 
Vanua Levu, c. 300 ft., 2.9.23; Greenwood (513). 


LEvuUcOoLoMA Brid. 
LEUCOLOMA TENUIFOLIUM Mitt. 

Syn. Dicranum oceanicum C.M. 

Ovalau, Graeffe. On rocks, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 3,000 ft., 4.1.20; 
Greenwood (276). On trees, ibidem, c. 3,600 ft., 18.6.22; Greenwood (426). Mt. 
Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,600 ft., 16.4.22; Greenwood (414). Rotten wood, 
Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (259). 


CAMPYLOPUS Brid. 
CAMPYLOPUS RICHARDII (Schwaegr.) Brid. 

Syn. Thysanomitrium Richardii Schwaegr.; JT. uwmbellatum W.-Arn.; T. 
hawaticum C.M.; T. Powellianum C.M., nomen nudum. 

Wet ground and wet rocks in open swampy places, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, 
ce. 1,500 ft., 3.1.20; Greenwood (186, 192). Wet ground, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti 
Levu, c. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (226). 

For a discussion on the relationship of the Oceanic plant to the South 
American one, cf. Dixon (Journ. Bot., 1x, 1922, 287). 

Thériot (Rev. Chilena Hist. Nat., xxix, 1925, 289-290) has given what seem 
to me entirely cogent reasons for considering Thysanomitrium as a subgenus only 
of Campylopus. 


DIcNEMOS Schwaegr. 
DICNEMOS RUGOSUS (Hook.) Schwaegr. 
Paris cites this from Fiji, but there appears to be no evidence for its 
occurrence. 


EvucaMpropon Mont. 
EUCAMPTODON PILIFERUS Mitt. 
(Cf. C.M., Gen. Musc. Frond., p. 251, sub Solmsia inflata Hampe MS., and 
Salmon, Journ. Bot., xl, 1902, p. 3.) 
Fiji, Graeffe (Herb. Schimper et Herb. Hampe). 


LEUCOBRY ACEAE. 
LEUCOBRYUM Hampe. 
LEUCOBRYUM SANCTUM Hampe. 
Viti; Milne. Ovalau, in montibus, Graeffe. 


LEUCOBRYUM LAMINATUM Mitt. 
Viti, Ovalau, Seemann, 844. On tree trunks, and on ground, Nadarivatu, Viti 
Levu, ce. 2,700 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (772). 


268 -MOSSES OF FIJI, 


LEUCOBRYUM TAHITENSE Aongstr. 


New to Fiji. On trees, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,500 ft., 1.9.17; Green- 
wood (72). Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, c. 2,700 ft., 20.619; A. Aspinall, Herb. Green- 
wood (114). 


LEUCOBRYUM PUNGENS C.M. 

Ovalau, regio montosa et in cacumine montis Tana-lailai, 2,000 ped. alt., 
Dec., 1864; Graeffe. On dead wood, Mts., Labasa, Vanua Levu, ec. 1,000 ft., Db: 
Greenwood (491). Ibidem, 13.3.24; Greenwood (524). 

These two appear to agree with the description of L. pungens; the nerve is 
strongly heterostrosic; the chlorophyllose cells are hypercentric at the base, 
centric in mid-leaf and at apex. 


LEUCOBRYUM SAMOANUM Fleisch. ined. 


_ (M. Fr. Arch. Ind. et Polynes., No. 404; Ins. Upolu, leg. Fleisch.) On dead 
wood, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 3,000 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (213). 


LEUCOBRYUM TEYSMANNIANUM Bry. jav. 
Ovalau, in sylvis montosis, Graeffe. 


LEUCOBRYUM PENTASTICHUM Bry. jav. 
Ovalau, regio montosa, Graeffe. In open forest, Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, 
Vanua Levu, ec. 100 ft., Feb., 1925; Greenwood (552). 


LEUCOPHANES Hampe. 
LEUCOPHANES VITIANUM C.M. 
Ovalau, ad basin Rhizogonii setosi in cacumine montis Tana-lailai, 2,000 ped. 
alt., Graeffe. 


LEUCOPHANES DENSIFOLIUM (Mitt.). 
Syn. Octoblepharum densifolium Mitt. 
Viti, Seemann, inter 862. Milne in herb. Hooker. 


LEUCOPHANES SMARAGDINUM (Mitt.) Par. 
Syn. Octoblepharum smaragdinum Mitt. 
Viti, Seeman, inter n. 863. 


LEUCOPHANES PUNGENS Fleisch. ined. 


(M. Fr. Arch. Ind. et Polynes., No. 405; Samoa, Ins. Savaii, detex. Fleischer.) 
Samoa, Powell, Herb. Mitt., det. H. N. Dixon. New to Fiji. On rotten logs, 3,500 
ft., Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, 4.1.20; Greenwood (199, 277). On tree ferns, 
Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 2.1.20, Greenwood (210, 263). 

I expressed the opinion (Journ. Bot., 1927, p. 255) that Leucophanes pungens 
Fleisch. was identical with L. smaragdinum (Mitt.). This was incorrect. Well 
grown plants of the latter agree closely in habit and leaf-form, though with 
rather more acute and acutely spiculose apex, but the nerve structure is entirely 
different, that of L. pungens being homostrosic, while that of L. smaragdinum is 
heterostrosic; in consequence of this the leaf-base of L. pungens is much thinner 
and more transparent. 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 269 


OcTOBLEPHARUM Hedw. 
OcTOBLEPHARUM ALBIDUM (L.) Hedw. 
New to Fiji. On trunks of coconut palms, Sigatoka, Viti Levu, sea-level, 
10.6.21; Greenwood (391). Levuka, Ovalau, sea-level, 23.4.20; Greenwood (339). 
Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 11.4.20; Greenwood (333). 


ExopicTyon Card. 
EXoDICTYON SCABRUM (Mitt.) Card. 
New to Fiji. On trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,600 ft., 18.6.22; 
Greenwood (4381). 
It must be confessed that it is difficult to see how this species differs from 
E. Blumii (Nees) Fleisch. The papillae of the nerve do not appear to be any 
shorter than in that species. 


EXoODICTYON DENTATUM (Mitt.) Card. 
Syn. Octoblepharum dentatum Mitt.; Arthrocormus dentatus C.M. New to 
Fiji. Vanua Balavu, Aug., 1927, leg. B. Tothill; Herb. Greenwood (572). 


EXODICTYON SCOLOPENDRIUM (Mitt.) Card. : 
Syn. Syrrhopodon Scolopendrium Mitt.; Octoblepharum Scolopendrium Mitt. 
Viti, Seemann, N.843. 


FISSIDENTACEAE. 

FIssIpeEns Hedw. 

§ RETICULARIA. 
FISSIDENS DALTONIAEFOLIUS C.M. 

New to Fiji. On ground, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 4.1.20; Green- 
wood (224). Ibidem, c. 800 ft., 4.4.20; Greenwood (306). On ground, Mts., 
interior Vanua Levu, ec. 2,000 ft., 25.12.22; Greenwood (470, 471). On ground, 
Levuka, Ovalau, c. 300 ft., 13.1.27; Greenwood (565). 


§ BRYOIDIUM. 
FISSIDENS .PUNGENS Hampe & C.M. 
New to Fiji. Falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; Greenwood 
(32). Agrees exactly with the Australian plant. 


FISSIDENS ZOLLINGERI Mont. 

New to Fiji. On ground, Lautoka, Viti Levu, sea-level, 23.3.20; Greenwood 
(303). JIbidem, Mts., c. 2,000 ft., 4.4.20; Greenwood (317). Ibidem, c. 600 it., 
16.1.21; Greenwood (380). On ground, Labasa, Vanua Levu, near sea-level, 8.12.22; 
Greenwood (455), 24.8.23; Greenwood (510). On ground, Wainikoro, Macuata 
Coast, Vanua Levu, c. 500 ft., Feb., 1925; Greenwood (550). On wet bank, Levuka, 
Ovalau, c. 200 ft., 13.1.27; Greenwood (564), with F. diversiretis Dix. 


FISSIDENS GLOSSO-BRYOIDES Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 1. 

§ Bryoidium. Caules gregarii, usque ad 1 cm. fere alti, pallide virides, 
laxifolii. Folia sicca contracta, flexuosula, lingulata vel rarius oblongo-lingulata, 
acuta (raro subobtusa); lamina vaginans circa dimidiam partem longitudinis 
aequans vel paullo ultra; lamina dorsalis ad basin costae enata ibidemque angusta, 
vix decurrens. Costa perpallida, angusta, percurrens, vix excurrens. Lamina 


270 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


ubique limbo latiusculo albo subaequali circumdata. Cellulae minutissimae, 4-6 zu 
irregulares, perobscurae, humillime, perindistincte papillosae, basilares paullo 
majores, distinctiores. 

Planta sterilis sola nota. 

Hab.—Mountains, Lautoka, Viti Levu, on clay banks, Dec., 1917; Greenwood 
(130, type; 120; 307). 

The Section Bryoidium is poorly represented in Oceania, and indeed the only 
species hitherto recorded of the group is the Tahitian F. nano-bryoides Besch., 
which is a smaller plant with large cells. The pallid colour, very pale nerve, leaves 
shrinking when dry, and very small cells make this a quite distinct species. 


FISSIDENS DIVERSIRETIS Dix., nh. sp. Plate viii, fig. 2. 


§ Bryoidium. Subcaespitulosus, pallidus, circa 5 mm. altus, densiuscule 
foliosus. Folia sicca contracta, perangusta, ligulato-lanceolata seu lingulata, supra 
sensim angustata, acuta vel peracuta; lamina dorsalis infra angustissima, longe ad 
costam decurrens, saepe basin haud attingens. Limbus ubique (nisi laminae 
vaginantis) perangustus, apicem folii vix attingens, ibique saepe minute denticu- 
latus. Costa perangusta, sinuosula, subconcolor vel superne pallida. Cellulae 
superiores minutae, 6-9 uw, hexagonae, obscurae, quaeque papilla singula alta 
coronata. Cellulae basilares laxissimae, hyalinae, saepe 50 wu longae atque 
12-15 wu latae. 

Synoicus. Fructus terminalis. Seta circa 8 mm. longa, theca parva, elliptica, 
erecta; operculum rostratum. Peristomii dentes rubri, inferne lati, intus alte 
cristati. 

Hab.—Mountains, Lautoka, Viti Levu; Greenwood (202, type; 172, 319d, 305). 
In deep shade on bank, close to water, Lautoka (144). Levuka, Ovalau (344, 564b). 
On damp ground in forest in mountains, Labasa (514). 

A very distinct species in the narrow leaves and extreme diversity between 
the upper cells and those of the vaginant lamina near base. It appears to be 
frequent, and is often associated with F. daltoniaefolius. 


§ SEMILIMBIDIUM. 
FISSIDENS LAUTOKENSIS Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 4. 


§ Semilimbidium. Caespitosus. Caulis longiusculus, usque ad 1 cm., simplex 
‘ vel hic illic divisus. Folia plurijuga, conferta, plumose disposita, sicca decurvata, 
falcata, anguste lanceolata, acute acuminata, apex plerumque asymmetricus. 
Lamina dorsalis ad basin costae enata, ibique plerumque rotundata. Costa angusta, 
pallida, in vel cum apice soluta. Margines vel ubique elimbati, vel paucorum 
foliorum supremorum (praecipue caulibus fructiferis) angustissime inconspicue 
limbati, ceterum ubique conferte regulariter minutissime, superne rotundate 
inferne argute, crenulati. Cellulae omnes subaequales, 6-7 u, hexagono-rotundatae, 
perindistinctae, parietibus hyalinis, alte mammosae, basilares minime mutatae. 
Seta saepe geniculata, 2 mm. alta; theca minuta, erecta; peristomii dentes angusti, 
inter se remoti, inaequales, irregulariter, saepe ad basin fissi, pallidi. 

Hab.—On bark, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, Jan., 1920; Greenwood (184, 
type). Hills near Lautoka (4, 133, 134, 147-149, 150). Loloti (363). Labasa 
(458, 495). 

A member of the characteristic plumose-leaved species, often entirely destitute 
of border, and usually with slight traces only; but very distinct in the areolation 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 271 


which, instead of being obscure and minutely papillose as is usually the case, 
consists of very distinctly separated cells, having the walls highly pellucid, and 
the lumen dark, though rather by the refraction of light due to the high, conical 
mamillae than by the cell contents; this. is particularly noticeable in the lower 
cells. The lower margin of the dorsal lamina is spiculose with the projecting 
cell ends. 


It varies much in the form of leaf and the development of the border, but the 
structural characters seem constant. 

F. abbreviatus Mitt. is a much shorter plant, with few, not plumose leaves, 
and obscure, very finely papillose cells. 

F. philonotulus Besch. differs, e descr., in the leaf margin entire 
(“integerrima”), the much longer vaginant lamina (reaching to two-thirds of the 
length of the leaf), habit resembling a Philonotis, et cetera. 


FISSIDENS CUSPIDIFERUS Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 3. 


§ Semilimbidium. Plantae gregariae, minutae, humillimae, virides, pauci- 
foliae. Folia oblongo-lanceolata, mollia, haud acuminata, plerumque in cuspidem 
brevem acutum obliquum raptim angustata; costa tenuissima, concolor, percurrens; 
lamina vaginans anguste viridi-limbata, ceterum margines tenerrime crenulati. 
Cellulae superiores parvae, circa § u» latae, irregulares, chlorophyllosae, parietibus 
tenuibus, omnes papilla alta singula arguta praeditae; basilares in lamina 
vaginante laxiores, subquadratae. Seta tenuis, pallida, caule longior, theca minuta, 
erecta, sicca urceolata, operculo longirostro. 

Hab.—Mountains, Lautoka, Viti Levu, Apr., 1920; Greenwood (3819a). 

Apparently rare; very minute, with rather wide, soft, chlorophyllose leaves, 
very variable in the point, but usually ending in an oblique, acute, abrupt point, 
mostly formed by the nerve. 


§ ALOMA. 
FISSIDENS FISSICAULIS C.M. 


Ovalau, inter Mniadelphum specimina perpauca; Graeffe. 


FISSIDENS ALTISETUS Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 6. 


§ Aloma. Plantae gregariae, humillimae, brevissimae, subacaules; folia 4-6, 
infima minuta, 2-4 suprema multo majora, circa 0:8 mm. longa, lanceolata, peracuta, 
perpellucida, immarginata, integra; lamina vaginans minusquam dimidiam partem 
folii aequans, aperta; costa validiuscula, opaca, in vel cum apice soluta. Cellulae 
laxae, superiores elongatae hexagonae, inanes, parietibus tenuibus, firmis; 18-24 u 
longae, 8-10 » latae, inferne sensim laxiores. Seta tenuis, flavida, flexuosa, longa, 
6-7 mm. alta; theca perminuta, turgide ovata, deoperculata circa 0:5 mm. longa; 
operculum longirostre. 


Hab.—On track in dense shade; mountains, Lautoka, Viti Levu, Jan., 1920; 
Greenwood (211, type). Loloti, 18.9.20; Greenwood (360, 364). 


Very distinct in the narrow, very pellucid leaves, and lax, elongate areolation. 
F. fissicaulis has a distinct, plurijugous stem, crenulate leaves, and excurrent 
nerve. The length of the seta is a conspicuous feature here, being six or seven 
times the height of the whole gametophyte. 


272 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


FISSIDENS, VITIENSIS Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 5. 

§ Aloma. Caules aggregati, ad 3 mm. alti, rigidi; folia laxa, carnosa, com- 
planata, 6-7 juga, sicca vix..mutata, stricta, oblonga, acuta; lamina dorsalis ad 
basin folii enata; lamina vaginans brevis, apice rotundato; costa valida, bene 
delimitata, fusca, in vel sub: apice soluta; margines crenulatae; cellulae hexagonae, 
irregulares, majusculae, 10-14 wu latae, incrassatae, inferne parum majores. 


Cetera ignota. 


Hab.—On ground, mountains, interior Vanua Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 25.12.22: 
Greenwood (476, type). On ground in forest, Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua 
Levu, c. 500 ft., 27.38.24, Greenwood (542). 


Entirely distinct from the last-mentioned species, and nearer to some Asiatic 
species. 


§ CRENULARIA. 
FISSIDENS LAGENARIUS Mitt. 
Ovalau, reg. montana, Graeffe. 


FISSIDENS PEROBTUSUS Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 7. 


§ Crenularia. Caulis brevis, plurijuga, angustus, polymorphus, folia nunc 
dissita, patentia, nunc densissime conferta, sicca decurvo-faleata; e basi latiore 
(saepe aperta) late brevissime lingulata, obtusissima. Lamina vaginans plerumque 
aperta, longissima; ad apicem folii fere attingens. Costa perpellucida, infra 
apicem desinens. Lamina dorsalis parva, angusta, infra raptim angustata, longe 
ante basin folii desinens. Laminae omnes elimbatae, crenulatae. Cellulae minutae, 
perobscurae, chlorophyllosae, dorso inaequaliter, saepe altiuscule papillosae, inferne 
saepe transverse elongatae, ad margines, praecipue ad apicem, saepe una serie 
paullo majores, pallidiores, valde crentlatae. 


(Fructus in specimine typico nullus; in 518 seta geniculata 1-5-2 mm. longa, 
theca erecta, minuta, angusta.) 


Hab.—On damp ground, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 100 feet, Aug., 1917; Greenwood 
(34, type). Damp bank, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu; Greenwood (518). 


A most distinct little species in the opaque and chlorophyllose, very obtuse 
leaves, and the vaginant lamina reaching almost to the apex. 


§ AMBLYOTHALLIA. 
FISSIDENS MANGAREVENSIS Mont. 

Syn. F. samoanus C.M. 

New to Fiji. On ground and rocks, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, 800-3,000 ft.; 
Greenwood (201, 146, 154, 346, 350, 351, 370). On rocks in spray of falls, Lautoka, 
Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 9.12.17; Greenwood (45). Rock and clay bank, Loloti, Viti 
Levu; Greenwood (208, 212, 361). On wet bank, and on dead wood, Labasa, Vanua 
Levu, 300 and 500 ft.; Greenwood (486, 499). 


FISSIDENS MANGAREVENSIS var. PERACUTUS Dix., n. var. 
Gracilis. Folia perangusta, angustissime acuminata. 
Hab.—On calcareous rocks, mountains, Lautoka, Viti Levu, Sept., 1917; 
Greenwood (20, type). Ibidem, edge of creek; Greenwood (215). 
In its extreme form a very marked variety, but intermediate forms occur. 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 273 


I have examined authentic specimens of F. samoanus C.M. (Upolu, Samoa, 
leg. Graeffe), and find them identical with F’.. mangarevensis Mont. The cells 
show a good deal of variation in their degree of obscurity, and the leaf point in 
acuteness, while the basal termination of the dorsal lamina also varies a good 
deal; in some stems it is distinctly auriculate in the upper leaves, narrowly 
decurrent in the lower. The only character by which F'. samoanus, as described 
by C. Mueller, should differ from F. mangarevensis (he does not compare it with 
that) is that he describes the vaginant lamina as ending very acutely above, 
while it is described by Bescherelle as ending obtusely. It is, however, an incon- 
stant character in the species; I have seen it moderately obtuse on the lower, 
broader leaves of a stem, and very acute on the narrower, upper leaves. 

The var. taitensis Besch. does not seem of importance. It is only a small 
form. 

C. Mueller does not include Fiji in the ‘““Musci Polynesiaci”’ for F. samoanus; 
Paris gives Fiji in the distribution, but apparently without foundation. 


FISSIDENS PERACUMINATUS Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 8. 

* § Amblyothallia. Habitus F. mangarevensis Mont., praecipue var. peracutae 
Dix. Differt cellulis multo majoribus, 10-12 wu (in F. mangarevensis 5-7 u, 
perobscurae), haud obscuris, subincrassatis, altiuscule mamillosis, marginalibus 
prominentibus, unde folia distincte obtuse crenulata; costa concolore, haud 
pellucida, valde sinuosa; lamina dorsalis infra angustissime desinente, saepius 
longe supra costae basin dissoluta. Theca perbrevis, turgida, inaequalis, 
subeurvata. 

Hab.—In thick bush, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, Mar., 1924; Greenwood 
(535, type; 532). 

In habit and leaf-form almost exactly similar to the shorter, narrow-leaved 
forms of F. mangarevensis; but differing at once in the far larger, clearly defined 
cells, the green, very sinuose nerve, strongly crenulate margins, and the dorsal 
lamina narrowing downwards and ceasing often far above the base; in 
F. mangarevensis it ends abruptly at the leaf base, usually in a rounded auricle. 
I have seen no fruit of F. mangarevensis; Bescherelle describes it as urceolate- 
cylindric; it is here very short and turgid, and more or less gibbous. 


CALYMPERACEAE. 
SYRRHOPODON Schwaegr. 
SYRRHOPODON ALBO-VAGINATUS Schwaegr. e 
Viti, Milne, in herb. Hook. 


SYRRHOPODON LAEVIGATUS Mitt. 
Ovalau, Milne, in herb. Hook. 


SYRRHOPODON GRAEFFEANUS C.M. 
Ovalau, regio montosa, Graeffe. Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,960 ft., 
4.1.20; Greenwood (249). 


SYRRHOPODON MAMILLATUS C.M. 
Ovalau, inter Mniadelphum vitianum, Graeffe. On dead wood in forest, near 
Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, c. 2,300 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (760). On rotten log, Mt. 
Evans, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 10.5.19; Greenwood (161); 4.1.20; Greenwood (270). 


274 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


On rotten log, Labasa, Vanua Levu; Greenwood (496, 504). On rotten log, 
Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, c. 300 ft., 29.2.24; Greenwood (517). 


SYRRHOPODON (THYRIDIUM) FASCICULATUS Doz. & Molk. 
Ovalau, reg. montosa, Graeffe. 


SYRRHOPODON (THYRIDIUM) LUTEUS Mitt. 
Ovalau, Milne, on stones in the mountains. Ovalau, in reg. montosa, Graeffe. 


SYRRHOPODON CROCEUS Mitt. 
Ovalau, reg. montosa, quoque in cacumine montis Tana-lailai, Graeffe. 


CALYMPERES Sw. 
CALYMPERES TENERUM C.M. 
New to Fiji. Levuka, Ovalau, near sea-level, 23.4.20; -Greenwood (340). 
Sigatoka, Viti Levu, near sea-level, 11.6.22; Greenwood (417). Vanua Balavu, 
July, 1927, leg. B. Tothill; Herb. Greenwood (568). 


CALYMPERES MOLLUCCENSE Schwaeegr. 
New to Fiji. On dead wood, Suva, Viti Levu, sea-level, 25.1.23; Greenwood 
(477). On trees in forest, Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, c. 300 ft., Feb., 
1925; Greenwood (553). 


CALYMPERES SAMOANUM Besch. 
New to Fiji. Falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; Greenwood 
(lq). 
Distinguished, by Bescherelle, from C. Dozyanum by the presence of a teniole 
in the basal part, by the cancelline cells markedly scalariform, and the normal 
leaves rounded at the summit. 


C. LINEARIFOLIUM C.M., and C. OBLIQUATUM C.M. 
Paris gives both these for Fiji, but I can find no evidence for their occurrence. 
The references in Engl. Bot. Jahrb. do not apply to Fiji. 


CALYMPERES CHAMAELEONTUM C.M. 
New to Fiji. On dead wood, Mts., Labasa, Vanua Levu, c. 300 ft., 3.6.23; 
, Greenwood (484). On tree in forest, Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, ec. 
500 ft., 27.3.24; Greenwood (541). 
This agrees perfectly with a specimen from New Caledonia, leg. Franc, det. 
Thériot. . 


CALYMPERES ALBO-LIMBATUM Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 9. 

C. marginato Dix. et C. molluccensi affine. Differt ab illo foliis angus- 
tioribus, anguste lingulatis; cellulis majoribus, 7-9 uw, altius papillatis, cancellina 
distincte scalariformi, seriebus margines versus parum angustatis. 

A C. molluccensi cancellina scalariformi, .vagina haud vel vix dilatata, costa 
angustiore, seriebus cancellinis multo paucioribus, margines versus minime angus- 
tioribus. Margines basilares minute argute denticulati, teniola perangusta, in 
lamina ad apicem fere producta, limbum perangustum distinctum albescentem 
irregulariter eroso-denticulatum instruens. 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 275 


Hab.—On rotten wood, in mountains, Labasa, Vanua Levu, June, 1923; 
Greenwood (483). 


A delicate little plant which, although by the scalariform cancellina it would 
be placed under Climacina in Bescherelle’s arrangement, is certainly nearly allied 
to the following species, C. marginatum, which belongs to the Eurycyela Group. 
It differs from that markedly in some characters, especially the large cells, 
narrower marginal (not intramarginal) border, cancelline cells scarcely narrowed 
towards margin, narrower nerve, ete. The teniole separates it at once from 
C. tenerum. U 


CALYMPERES MARGINATUM Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 10. 


Subgenus Hyophilina. C. molluccensi Schwaegr. (sensu Fleischer) affine; 
differt foliorym basi vel paullo vel haud latiore. hyalocystis multo paucioribus, 
8-9 (in C. molluccensi 12-16 seriatis); marginibus basilaribus et ventralibus 
integris vel subintegris; teniola perdistincta, ad apicem producta, limbum angustum 
hyalinum bene notatum instruens, aut marginalem aut serie unica cellularum 
quadratarum circumductum. Cellulae superiores minutae, 4-6 » latae, papillosae. 


Hab.—Tree trunk, circa 3,000 ft., interior of Vanua Levu, Dec., 1922; Green- 
wood (474). 


C. molluccense Schwaegr. is a much misunderstood species; either it is a 
highly variable and widely spread plant, or else many of the plants in herbaria 
are incorrectly determined. As described by Fleischer from the original plant 
(Rauwak, Molluccas), it varies within certain limits, including the development 
of the teniole; but the widened base of the leaf, with a much larger number of 
rows of cells in the cancellina region, seems to preclude the present plant from 
being placed there. The same characters exclude C. Geppii Besch., which (recorded 
from New Caledonia) is the only species of this alliance at present reported from 
anywhere in the Oceanic region. It is, therefore, rather remarkable that the 
present list should include the true C. molluccense, together with two other 
species which, while nearly allied, are certainly distinct from it and from one 
another. 


CALYMPERES TAHITENSE (Sull.) Mitt. 
Syn. C. denticulatum C.M.; C. orientale Mitt. 


Viti, damp places on high ground, Milne, 352 in herb. Hook. On rocks, Mts., 
Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,500 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (220). “Mts., Labasa, Vanua 
Levu, ec. 500 ft., 8.7.23; Greenwood (503). Labasa, near sea-level, 7.10.22; 
Greenwood (453). On trees, Lautoka, Viti Levu, Mt. Evans, c. 2,000 ft., 4.1.20; 
Greenwood (183). On rock, Levuka, Ovalau, near sea-level, 17.5.23; Greenwood 
(480). 


CALYMPERES TAHITENSE var. TRUNCATUM Thér. & Dix., n. var. Plate viii, fig. 11. 


Apex foliorum truncatus, saepe retusus. Laminae margines saepe bigeminate 
dentati. 

Hab.—Faisi, Solomon Is., 1912; leg. Lee, herb. G. Webster (804), type. Mt. 
Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,500 ft., 9.12.17; Greenwood (44). ; 

This was at first considered to be a new species, but the leaf apex, though 
very marked at times, varies considerably. 


276 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


Fleischer has reduced C. denticulatum C.M. to C. orientale Mitt. But I have 
examined the original plant of C. tahitense Sull., coll. Wilkes, and find it identical 
in every respect with C. orientale and C. denticulatum. Brotherus indeed puts 
C. tahitense in a group with ‘“‘Scheidenteil gesagt’, but it is quite entire in 
Wilkes’ plant, and is so figured by Sullivant. 


CALYMPERES SERRATUM A. Br. 


New to Fiji. Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 3.10.20; Greenwood 
(367). 
CALYMPERES LONGIFOLIUM Mitt. 
New to Fiji. Mts., Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, c. 500 ft., 27.3.24; 
Greenwood (538, 558). 


CALYMPERES LORIFOLIUM Mitt. 
Viti, Milne. Ovalau, Graeffe. 


CALYMPERES TUBERCULOSUM (Thér. & Dix.) Broth. 


Syn. Syrrhopodon tuberculosus Thér: & Dix. 

New to Fiji. On rock, Mts., Labasa, Vanua Levu, c. 500 ft.; Greenwood (506). 
On ground in forest, Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, c. 300 ft.; Greenwood 
(533). 

Brotherus is without doubt correct in placing this very distinct species in 
Calymperes. Its distribution is rather. remarkable; it has only been found else- 
where in Borneo. 


POTTIACEAE. 
HYMENOSTOMUM R. Br. 
HYMENOSTOMUM EDENTULUM (Mitt.) Besch. 
New to Fiji. On ground, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; 
Greenwood (225, 229). 


RHAMPHIDIUM Mitt. 
RHAMPHIDIUM VEITCHII Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 12. 


Habitu R. purpurati Mitt., sed elatius, strictius, foliis siccis erectis, appressis, 
comalibus tantum paullo patentibus. Caules 2 cm. alti. Folia inferiora e basi 
vaginante breviter lingulata, concava, rotundato-obtusa, superiora sensim longiora, 
magis acuminata, suprema subula longa angusta tenui, sed apice plerumque obtuse 
truncato ibique conferte denticulato. Costa valida, fusca, subpercurrens. Margines 
superiores anguste recurvati. Cellulae basilares inanes, anguste lineares, 
superiores subquadratae, pellucidae. Seta 1 cm. vel supra; theca erecta, elliptica, 
deoperculata 2 mm. longa, castanea; operculum subaequilongum, oblique tenui- 
rostratum. Peristomii dentes longi, stricti, sicci conniventes, madidi erecto- 
patuli, supra filiformes, infra latiores sed angusti, linea media pallida exarati, 
ibique hic illic fissi, ubique densissime papillosi. Spori circa 14 yu, tenerrime 
punctulati. 

Hab.—On wet ground, Nausori Mill, Viti Levu, c. 100 ft., May, 1921: leg. R. 
Veitch, herb. Greenwood (440). 

Named in honour of the collector, Chief Entomologist to the Colonial Sugar 
Refining Co. of Sydney, N.S.W., from 1914 to 1925. 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 277 


A quite distinct species of a small genus with a very discontinuous 
geographical distribution. 


HyopHina Brid. 
HYOPHILA VITIANA (C.M.) Jaeg. 
Ovalau, Graeffe. 


HyornHitaA MicuHouirzi1 Broth. 
New to Fiji. On rocks at falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 27.10.17; 
Greenwood (18, 103). On wet rocks, Lautoka, Viti Levu, near sea-level, 25.11.19; 
Greenwood (142). Jbidem, c. 800 ft., 2.1.20; Greenwood (262). 


HyYopPpHILA MICHOLITZII, var. STERILIS Fleisch. 


Nagaga, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 1912; McRoberts. 

On rocks in spray of falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 1,000 ft., 19.9.17; 
Greenwood (1, 135); ibidem, 27.10.17; Greenwood (15); ibidem, 10.5.19; Green- 
wood (156). ¢ 

This appears to agree exactly with the Javan plant. The specimen of 
McRoberts was distributed as H. elata Broth. & Watts ined., but I think it certainly 
belongs to this variety; the fact that the type occurs in the Islands confirms the 
determination. 


HYOPHILA SAMOANA Mitt. 
New to Fiji. Fiji, 1909, leg. Jas. Murray; herb. W. Ingham (4). 
This agrees well with an authentic specimen of Graeffe’s; but I doubt very 
much whether it differs from H. Micholitzii. 


TRICHOSTOMUM Hedw. 
TRICHOSTOMUM MAUIENSE (C.M.) Broth. 


(nec TF. mauiense Broth., Bull. Bern. P. Bishop Mus., 40, p. 12.) 

Syn. Barbula mauiensis C.M. 

New to Fiji. Falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 27.10.17; Greenwood 
(13). Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 3.10.20; Greenwood (372). 


TRICHOSTOMUM INSULARE (Besch.) Broth. 


- New to Fiji. Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,500 ft., 4.4.20; Greenwood (335). 
This agrees quite well with the New Caledonian plant. 


BARBULA Hedw. 
BARBULA LOUISIADUM Broth.? 
On side of wet rock cutting, Sigatoka, Viti Levu, near sea-level, 12.9.20; 
Greenwood (358); ibidem, 20.5.21; Greenwood (389). 
An undeveloped plant. It scarcely differs from B. louwisiadum, except in the 
leaves obtuse or very shortly mucronate. 


BARBULA LEUCOBASIS Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 13. 
§ Hydropogon. Pallide viridis, gracilis, humilis. B. javanicae Doz. & Molk. 
affinis, sed foliis multo mollioribus, latioribus, late oblonga, 1-5 mm. longa, 0-5-0-6 
mm. lata, acutiora, cellulis basilaribus laxis, unde folii basis in situ albida, 


278 MOSSES OF FLJI, 


conspicua. Cellulae superiores subquadratae, 8-10 uw latae, alte mamillosae. 
Margines plani vel hic illic angustissime revoluti. Costa percurrens vel in 
apiculum minutum excurrens, dorso laevi vel papillosa. Folia perichaetialia vix 
distineta. Seta tenuis, flexuosa. Peristomii dentes intense rubri. 

Hab.—On wet rock, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, Jan., 1920; Greenwood (206, 
type). On wet bank, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 700 ft., 1.5.21; Greenwood (386). 

Near to B. javanica, but of softer texture, with broader leaves, their bases 
conspicuous by their pale colour, due to the lax basal cells. B. inflexa has longer 
leaves, plane margins and different areolation. The basal cells here are iax and 
hyaline, but they do not extend high in the leaf, and pass very quickly into the 
small upper cells. 


ORTHOTRICHACEAE. 
ANOECTANGIUM Bry. eur. 
ANOECTANGIUM TAPES Besch. 
New to Fiji. Rocks, falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; Green- 
wood (21); ibidem, 9.12.17 (63); ibidem, 3.1.20 (285). 


Macromirrium Brid. 
MACROMITRIUM ANGULATUM Mitt. 
New to Fiji. On trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,000 ft., 18.6.22; 
Greenwood (4386). Jbidem, 4.1.20; Greenwood (198, 207). 


MACROMITRIUM INVOLUTIFOLIUM (Hook. & Grev.) Schwaegr. 
New to Fiji. On trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,600 ft., 23.10.21; 
Greenwood (406). On rocks, ibidem, c. 3,000 ft., 18.6.22; Greenwood (433, 434). 
Distr.—EKast Australia. The reference to New Zealand in Brotherus, Musci, 
is incorrect. 


MaACROMITRIUM INCURVIFOLIUM Schwaegr. 


On tree trunks in forest, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, c. 2,700 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs 
(755). On trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 2,000 ft., 3.10.20; Greenwood 
(368, 373, 374). Ibidem, ec. 3,600 ft., 23.10.21; Greenwood (405). 


MACROMITRIUM BEECHEYANUM Mitt. 
New to Fiji. On trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,600 ft., 23.10.21; 
Greenwood (409). Ibidem, c. 3,000 ft., 18.6.22; Greenwood (435). 


MACROMITRIUM TONGENSE Sull. : 
On wood in forest, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, c. 2,700 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (857). 
On trees, Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, c. 300 ft., Feb., 1925; Greenwood 
(549). 


Key to the Fiji Species of Macromitrium, 
1. Erect branches very short, less than 3 mm. high, leaves closely spirally twisted when 
Cheng Re SEO ROIaS Bo .5'0.0 0.6 6 cca Oe 6 EaenID O OO bo soe 6 ono OD outa. cit M. tongense 
Erect branches jones 4 mm: orsmore high) i775 as peice Pleo oleic 2 
Branches yery slender, rigid; leaves very small, scarcely 1 mm. long, appressed and 
rigidly curved to one side when dry; calyptra densely hairy; seta papillose .... 
Ri RANE dena hh A CA ets oe lS iy Vel an aide ted aera mantra AL aib NLS Soe 3 M. angulatum 
Branches stouter; leaves longer, more or less contorted when dry; seta smooth .. 3 


to 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 209 


Se CADSULEWSUbDCYLINGTI Ca TObUS ty planitims rise sci ceeiional clone ncleleichaicneren MM. involutifolium 

Capsule wellpp tI C=O ViGlaee wera s seek Meecha shoe whaler ce MOUS TERME MM SLI SZ otte eLEe otioe Nees esac hoprouleneaaie 4 

dl (EGAN MAicOK hy Abily wey Mkurovety Oks aioioueto.o 6 bd ould ba clouds dio Go omono me M. Beecheyanum 

WMeavesmmuchieshornter acumina tem. sci are cee ee eens etoile ieisiors M. incurvifolium 
BRY ACEAE. 


BRACHYMENIUM Hook. 
BRACHYMENIUM INDICUM (Doz. & Molk.) Bry. jav. 


New to Fiji. On rocks, Levuka, Ovalau, c. 100 ft., 17.5.23; Greenwood (479); 
ibidem, 23.4.20; Greenwood (338, 341). 


BRACHYMENIUM INDICUM, var. CORRUGATUM Besch. 


On coral rocks in shade, Sigatoka, Viti Levu, near sea-level, 10.6.21; Greenwood 
(121, 393). 


MNIoBRYUM Schimp. 
MNIOBRYUM RUBRUM Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 14. 

Densissime coespitosum, humillimum, rubrum. MHabitu et colore M. tasmanici 
Broth. simile, atque foliorum forma, sed costa in cuspidem brevem integrum 
excurrens; foliorum margines integerrimi; cellulae marginales in seriebus 1-2 
lineares, limbum angustissimum bene notatum instruentes. 

Hab.—F¥iji; leg. Jas. Murray, 1909 (1). 

The generic position of this moss is not quite certain; but the leaf form, 
colour, etc., are so similar to M. tasmanicum that it seems likely to belong here 
rather than to Webera. The very narrow, pellucid leaves, with a very narrow 
but well defined border, quite entire margin, and the red, excurrent nerve, are 
strong characters. 


BryumM L. 
§ DoLioLipiuM. 
BRYUM PACHYTHECA C.M. 
New to Fiji. Damp ground in open, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu. ec. 400 ft., 
29.5.21; Greenwood (385). Wet places, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 900 ft., 3.1.20; 
Greenwood (187). 


§ ERYTHROCARPA. 
BRYUM CHRYSONEURON C.M. 

Syn. B. erythrocarpoides Hampe & C.M. 

New to Fiji. Falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; Greenwood 
(30); ibidem, 22.2.19; Greenwood (152). Levuka, Ovalau, c. 100 ft., 23.4.20; 
Greenwood (348). 

This is certainly identical with the Australasian plant, which has gone under 
more names than one. It appears very doubtful whether B. gedeanum, Doz. & Molk. 
is not the same thing. 


§ ALPINIFORMIA. 
BrRYUM VITIANUM Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 15. 


Dense caespitosum; caespites superne pallide virides, subnitidi, inferne rubri. 
Caules 1-2 cm. alti, conferte foliosi. Folia sicca suberecta, leniter -curvata, 
convoluta, 2 mm. longa velpaullo ultra, 1 mm. lata, valde concava, mollia, eymbi- 

é ‘ 


280 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


formia, oblongo-ovata, obtusa vel obtuso-apiculata vel acuta, breviter apiculata, 
plus minusve cucullato-incurva, apiculo saepe leniter recurvo; margines omnino 
erecti; costa sat valida, rubra, superne angustata, cum apice soluta vel indistincte 
brevissime excurrens. Rete laxum, cellulae superiores 40-50 mu x 10-14 yu, elongate 
rhomboideae, parietibus tenuiusculis, firmis; marginales angustati, sed limbum 
notatum haud formantes; apud apicem breviores; basilares laxae, rubrae, saepe 
late rectangulares vel quadratae. 


Fructus ignotus. 


Hab.—Rocks in stream, Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 1,000 ft., 10.5.19; Greenwood 
(159, type). JIbidem, 22.9.17; Greenwood (12), and 9.12.17 (75). 


No. 12 is a more rigid form, with strict stems and closely imbricated, rigid 
leaves. Z 

The only species of the Section, I believe, yet recorded from the Pacific 
region, Australasia excepted. B. Sullivani C.M. from Australia is very near it, 
but has stouter nerve, narrower leaves and much smaller cells. 


§ ROSULATA. 
BryuM GREENWoopIr Dix., n. sp. Plate viii, fig. 16. 


Robustum, caules 2-4 cm. alti vel supra, plerumque haud comati (interdum 
subcomati); folia conferta, paullo decurrentia, e basi angustiore latissime 
spathulato-ovata, apice subrotundato, nullo modo acuminato, subobtusa vel sub- 
acuta; margine inferne revoluto; costa validiuscula, superne multo angustior, in 
apiculum validum vel cuspidem brevissimum excurrens. Seta 2-2:5 cm. longa. 
Theca angustiuscula, curvata, brevicolla. 

Hab.—Flat, damp rocks in open place, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Apr., 1922; 
Greenwood (410, type; 162, 228). Mountains, near Lautoka (71). All sterile 
except the type. 

Near to B. truncorum, B. Decaisnei, etc., but I think sufficiently distinct in the 
widely-rounded leaf-apex, scarcely at all pointed, the very shortly excurrent nerve, 
and curved, narrow capsule with very short neck. 

The type gathering shows the stems slightly comose, but the sterile plants 
have the stems equally foliose throughout their length. 


RHODOBRYUM (Schimp.) Hampe. 
RHODOBRYUM GRAEFFEANUM (C.M.) Par. 

Ovalau, ad arbores, Graeffe. On rocks in stream, foot of Mt. Victoria, Viti 
Levu, c. 2,500 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (798). On rock in open, Mts., Lautoka, Viti 
Levu, c. 900 ft., 3.1.20; Greenwood (182, 200). On ground, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, 
c. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (239). In crevices, flat rock, Mts., Lautoka, ec. 2,000 
ft., 3.10.20; Greenwood (375). 


MNIACEAE. 
Mnium Linn. emend. 
MNIUM ROSTRATUM Schrad. 


On wet bank, falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 1,000 ft., 27.10.17; Greenwood 


(5). Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (235). Mts., 
Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 18.6.22; Greenwood (430). 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 281 


RHIZOGONIACEAE. 
RHIZOGONIUM Brid. 
RHIZOGONIUM SETOSUM Mitt. 
Ovalau, in cacumine montis Tana-lailai, 2,000 ft., Graeffe. 


RHIZOGONIUM SPINIFORME (L.) Bruch, f. SAMOANA Mitt. 


Trees, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, 2,700 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (856). Ibidem, dead 
wood in forest, c. 2,300 ft.; Gibbs (714). On rotten log, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, 
ce. 2,000 ft., 9.12.17; Greenwood (47). Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 4.4.20; 
Greenwood (323); 4.1.20; Greenwood (189, 194). Mts., Wainikoro, Macuata 
Coast, Vanua Levu, ec. 500 ft., 27.38.24; Greenwood (537). 

All these plants belong to Mitten’s form, which is a slender one, with smaller, 
shorter leaves; it occurs in other Pacific groups as well. 


BARTRAMIACEAE. 
PHILONOTIS Brid. 
PHILONOTIS ASPERIFOLIA Mitt. 


Ovalau, Graeffe. Covering rocks, Mt. Victoria, Viti Levu, ec. 3,000 ft., Sept., 
1907; Gibbs (789). Falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; Greenwood 
(26). An unsatisfactory plant. The capsules are smooth. No specimens of 
Mitten’s are at Kew; he describes the capsules as plicate; but Brotherus puts it in 
a group with capsules smooth or only lightly plicate, and I assume that Mitten’s 
statement is incorrect. Otherwise—apart from the comparison with P. tenella— 
the description agrees well. 


PHILONOTIS OBTUSIFOLIA Mitt. 
Ysabel (Veitch, in herb. Hooker; Mitt. in Fl. Vitiensis). On wet rocks, 
Lautoka, Viti Levu, near sea-level, 25.11.19; Greenwood (138, 141). 


PHILONOTIS REVOLUTA Bry. jav. 
New to Fiji. On damp banks, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 600 ft., 1.9.17; Greenwood 
(67). Falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; Greenwood (11, 24, 33). 
A sterile plant which appears to belong here, but without fruit or ¢ flowers 
its position must remain somewhat uncertain. 


PHILONOTIS IMBRICATULA Mitt. 
New to Fiji. Nausori, Viti Levu, c. 100 ft., Feb., 1920; A. F. Smith; herb. 
Greenwood (294). 


PHILONOTIS ETESSEI Broth. & Par. 
New to Fiji. Falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood 
(167). 


CRYPHAEACEAE. 
CRYPHAEA Mohr. 
CRYPHAEA GRACILIS Mitt. 
Viti, Seemann; Milne. 


CRYPHAEA SCHLEINITZIANA C.M. 
Insulae Vitienses, Viti Levu, Rewa superior, ad arbores, 30.11.75; Naumann. 


282 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


CYRTOPODACEAE. 
BESCHERELLEA Duby. 
BESCHERELLEA CRYPHAEOIDES (C.M.) Fleisch. 

Syn. ? Cyrtopus cryphaeoides C.M. 5 

Ovalau, in reg. montana corticolus, Graeffe. 

Fleischer in Hedwig., Ixi, 403, refers this to Bescherellea, differing from 
Cyrtopus mainly in having no endostome. Graeffe’s plant, however, was sterile, 
so that the reference to Bescherellea can only be made on vegetative grounds. Its 
position is in any case rather doubtful. 


SPIRIDENTACEAE. 
SPIRIDENS Nees. 
SPIRIDENS ARISTIFOLIUS Mitt. 
Viti, Milne. On trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; 
Greenwood (231). 


SPIRIDENS FLAGELLOSUS Schimp. 
Viti, Seemann, 1865, n. 840. Wilkes, 1842. Thwaites, 1854. Milne. Ovalau, 
in cacumine montis Tana-lailai, 2,000 ped., Graeffe. 


SPIRIDENS BALFOURIANUS Grey. 
Viti, Milne. On trees, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, 3,200 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs 
(602). 
It is very doubtful whether these are anything more than forms of one and 
the same species. 


PTEROBRY ACEAE. 
ENDOTRICHELLA C.M. 
ENDOTRICHELLA GRAEFFEANA C.M. 
Ovalau, reg. montosa in sylvis, Graeffe. 


GAROVAGLIA Endl. 
GAROVAGLIA WEBERI Broth. 
On tree trunks, Taviuni, 1,000 ft., C. Weber in herb. Berol., No. 8. 


EKuprrycHium Schimp. 
HUPTYCHIUM SETIGERUM (Sull.) Broth. 
Syn. Garovaglia setigera Mitt. 
Viti, Amer. Expl. Exped. Ovalau, Milne; Seemann No. 846. Tree stems in 
forest, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, 2,300 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (756). On trees, Mts., 
Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 800 ft., 3.12.20; Greenwood (377); ibidem, 16.1.21 (382). 


HUPTYCHIUM GUNNII Broth. & Watts. 

Syn. #. assimile Broth. & Watts. 

New to Fiji. Mts., interior of Vanua Levu, c. 2,000 ft., Apr., 1924, leg. Dan 
Petersen; herb. Greenwood (545). Trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, 16.4.22; Greenwood 
(416). 

H. assimile was described as very similar to #. Gunnii, but smaller, with the 
leaf-apex more sharply serrate, upper cells shorter and wider. Greenwood’s No. 
545 agrees in habit and size with H. assimile, while No. 416 has the robust habit 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 283 


of FE. Gunnii, with the wider cells of EH. assimile, and the denticulation of both, 
on different leaves of the same plant. I think there is no question that both are 
forms of the same species. 

I received an unnamed plant (No. 2, Garovaglia, Fiji Is., Wm. G. Milne, 1859, 
Herb. Mitten) from the New York Botanic Garden, which also is HE. Gunnii. 


EUPTYCHIUM VITIENSE Dix., n. sp. Plate ix, fig. 17. 

Habitu et foliorum forma inter H. robustum Hampe et EH. cuspidatum (Mitt.); 
folia breviora quam in illo, quam hujus multo longiora, minus seriata, magis 
patentia; 3-5-4 mm. longa, oblongo-lanceolata, raptim breviter acutata, apice lato, 
nunquam tenui-acuminato, marginibus distanter tenuiter denticulatis. Fructus 
omnino immersus in foliis caulinis, foliis perichaetialibus vix vel parum fructum 
superantibus. Peristomium magnum; dentes externi fragiles, endostomii membrana 
praealta, aurantiaca. 

Hab.—On trees, alt. 3,600 ft., near summit of Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Oct., 1921; 
Greenwood (408). 

A distinct species of this small and interesting genus, smaller than F. robustum, 
with much shorter, less finely acuminate, denticulate leaves, and much shorter 
perichaetial bracts. E. cuspidatum has very short, closely appressed, very regu- 
larly seriate leaves, and much emergent fruit. H. pungens Broth. & Par., from 
New Caledonia, has somewhat similar, but finely pointed leaves, and few alar cells. 


PTEROBRYELLA C.M. 
PTEROBRYELLA SPECIOSISSIMA (Sull.) C.M. 
Viti, Amer. Expl. Exped. 


SyMPHYSODON Doz. & Molk. 
SYMPHYSODON RUGICALYX (C.M.) Broth. 
Syn. Pilotrichum rugicalyx C.M. 
Ovalau, reg. montosa, inter muscos, Graeffe. 


SYMPHYSODON VITIANUS (Sull.) Broth. 
Syn. Pterobryum vitianum (Sull.) Mitt. 
Viti, Seemann, No. 842. On trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 3,600 ft., 
18.6.22; Greenwood (422). 
This is the plant referred erroneously to Hypnodendron Junghuhnianum in 
Bonplandia. 


SYMPHYSODONTELLA Fleisch. 
SYMPHYSODONTELLA CYLINDRACEA (Mont.) Fleisch. 
Syn. Symphysodon cylindraceus (Mont.) Broth. 
New to Fiji. Mts., interior of Vanua Levu, ec. 2,000 ft., Apr., 1924; leg. 
Dan Petersen; herb. Greenwood (546). 
METEORIACEAE. 
PAPILLARIA C.M. 
PAPILLARIA CROCEA (Hampe) Jaeg. 
Syn. P. cuspidifera (Tayl.): Jaeg. 
Trees, summit of Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,000 ft., 23.10.21; Green- 
wood (403). 


284 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


P. Aongstroemiana C.M., from Tahiti, is, as Fleischer says, at most a sub- 
species of this. 


PAPILLARIA INTRICATA (Mitt.) Jaeg. 

Syn. Meteorium intricatum Mitt. 

Viti, Seemann. Ovalau, ad arbores reg. montanae, Graeffe. On trees, Mt. 
Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,960 ft., 3.10.20; Greenwood (366), with P. pellucida. 
On dead branches, ibidem, 18.6.22; Greenwood (428). Ibidem, 23.10.21; Green- 
wood (402, 407), forma tenella. 

P. intricata (Mitt.) and P. helictophylia (Mont.) Broth. are apparently 
inseparable except by fruiting characters, and for geographical reasons, therefore, 
it seems best to place these plants here. No. 402 is a very delicate form, which 
would have seemed well worthy of varietal rank; but 428 shows the more robust, 
typical form, in some cases running out into the slender form or state. A form 
from Samoa, also, is intermediate between the type and the slender plant. 


PAPILLARIA PELLUCIDA Broth. & Watts. 

New to Fiji. On trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, -Viti Levu, 4.1.20; Greenwood 
(279); ibidem, c. 3,960 ft., 3.10.20; Greenwood (366); <ibidem, June, 1921; 
Greenwood (390); ibidem, 16.4.22; Greenwood (415). 

Papillaria pellucida was described by Brotherus and Watts (Journ. Roy. Soc. 
N.S.W., xlix, 141) and the record from Fiji is a very interesting extension of its 
range. It is otherwise only known from the New Hebrides. No. 415 is the male 
plant; 366 is in fruit, though with one or two capsules only; the fruit has not been 
described. The capsule is similar to that of P. crocea, but smaller; the calyptra 
is long and covered with dense, more or less spreading hairs. Peristome teeth 
connivent when dry, erect and somewhat spreading when moist, reddish, long and 
gradually tapering, very opaque. Processes filiform, less than half the length of 
the teeth. These fruiting characters confirm the specific difference of the plant 
from P. crocea, of slender forms of which it has the habit. 


METEoRIUM Doz. & Molk., emend. Fleisch. 
MrrrortuM MIQUELIANUM (C.M.) Fleisch. 
New to Fiji. On trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,600 it., 23.10.21; 
Greenwood (400). 


FLORIBUNDARIA Fleisch. 
FLORIBUNDARIA FLORIBUNDA (Doz. & Molk.) Fleisch. 
On trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,000 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood 
(175, 287). 


FLORIBUNDARIA AERUGINOSA (Mitt.) Fleisch. 

Syn. Meteorium aeruginosum Mitt. 

Ovalau, reg. montana, et in cacumine montis Tana-lailai, 2,000 ped., Graeffe. 
On trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,600 ft., 18.6.22; Greenwood (418); 
ibidem, c. 2,000 ft., 9.12.17 (61); ibidem, 4.4.20 (309, 314). On trees, Mt. Evans, 
Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,000 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (168). 

This is not a very satisfactory species. In 168 the leaf-base is broad and 
cordate, the leaves very variable in the degree of acumination, the papillae some- 
what seriate, but few. It has therefore some characters of F. pseudo-floribunda 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 285 


Fleisch. In 309 the papillae are distinctly few and not seriate, but the leaf-base 
is narrow. If, therefore, there are any good characters to distinguish FF. pseudo- 
floribunda from F. aeruginosa they must reside in the peristome and, since all 
the Fiji plants are sterile, it is safest to refer them to fF’. aeruginosa. 


AEROBRYOPSIS Fleisch. 
AEROBRYOPSIS VITIANA (Sull.) Fleisch. 


Syn. Meteorium vitianum Sull. 


Viti, on trees; Amer. Expl. Exped. On trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, 
c. 3,000 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (282). 


AEROBRYOPSIS LONGISSIMA (Doz. & Molk.) Fleisch. 


New to Fiji. On soil on rocks in open, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, 
ce. 2,000 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (271, 275). Ibidem, ec. 3,600 ft., 18.6.22; Greenwood 
(419). On dead wood, Mts., Labasa, Vanua Levu, ec. 300 ft., 8.6.23; Greenwood 
(488). 


TRACHYPUS Reinw. & Hornsch. 
TRACHYPUS BICOLOR Reinw. & Hornsch. 


New to Fiji. On wet sloping rocks, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 
3.10.20; Greenwood (376); ibidem, 16.4.22; Greenwood (411). 


NECKERACEAE. 
ORTHORRHYNCHIUM Reichdt. 
ORTHORRHYNCHIUM CYLINDRICUM (Lindb.) Broth. 


Viti; Milne (as Phyllogonium angustifolium Schimp. in herb. Mitten). Ovalau, 
reg. montana, ad arbores; Graeffe. On branches, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 
1,000 ft., 28.10.17; Greenwood (19). Vanua Balavu, Aug., 1927; leg. B. Tothill; 
herb. Greenwood (571). 


CALYPTOTHECIUM Mitt. 
CALYPTOTHECIUM URVILLEANUM (C.M.) Broth. 
Syn. Neckera Eugeniae Lindb. 
Ovalau, ad arbores reg. montosae; Graeffe. Falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, 
ec. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; Greenwood (27, 112). Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 
4.4.20; Greenwood (311). 


NECKEROPSIS Fleisch. 
NECKEROPSIS LEPINEANA (Mont.) Fleisch. 

Syn. Neckera Lepineana Mont. 

Viti Levu; Milne, 337; Seemann, 863. Ovalau, reg. montana; Graeffe. On 
trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (219). Mts., 
Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 1,500 ft., 4.4.20; Greenwood (312). Vanua Balavu, Aug., 
1927; leg. B. Tothill; herb. Greenwood (573). 

No. 573 is a slender form, with somewhat the habit of N. gracilenta, but does 
not differ structurally from N. Lepineana. 


286 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


HIMANTOCLADIUM Fleisch. 
HIMANTOCLADIUM LORIFORME (Bry. jav.) Fleisch. 
Syn. Neckera loriformis Bry. jav. 
Gau, Milne; Viti Levu, Seemann, 836. 


HIMANTOCLADIUM IMPLANUM (Mitt.) Fleisch. 

Syn. Neckera Graeffeana C.M. 

Ovalau, in sylvis montosis, Graeffe. On trees and rocks, Mts., Lautoka, Viti 
Levu, ec. 1,500 ft., 9.12.17; Greenwood (62). Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 
14.2.20: Greenwood (297); 4.4.20; Greenwood (334). 

Much confusion has arisen in this genus owing to Mitten having described 
his Neckera implana as dioicous, whereas it is actually synoicous. N. Graeffeana 
is quite identical with Mitten’s plant. 


Homaria (Brid.) Bry. eur. 
HoMALIA EXIGUA Bry. jav. 
New to Fiji. On trunks of trees, Mts., Labasa, Vanua Levu, c. 300 ft., 1.7.23; 
Greenwood (492). 


HOMALIODENDRON Fleisch. 
HoMALIODENDRON FLABELLATUM (Dicks.) Fleisch. 

Syn. Hookeria flabellata Sm., Trans. Linn. Soc., ix, 1808, 280—Neckera 
dendroides Hook., Musc. exot., 1818, t. 69.—Porotrichum dendroides Mitt., Fl. Vit., 
p. 397.—Homaliodendron dendroides Fleisch.—wNeckera australasica C.M., Syn. 
ii, 42. 

Ovalau, ad arbores reg. montanae, quoque in cacumine montis Tana-lailai, 
2,000 ped. alt., Graeffe. Viti, Seemann. Trees, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, 
ce. 2,000 ft., 9.12.17; Greenwood (46); 4.1.20 (264); interior Vanua Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 
Apr., 1924, leg. Dan Petersen; herb. Greenwood (548). 

There seems no reason whatever for separating H. flabellatum and #H. 
dendroides. Wilson has a MS. note in herb. Hooker, on ‘‘Hookeria flabellata 
Smith, St. Vincent’s, Mr. Dickson”, as “scarcely different if at all from Neckera 
dendroides Hook. M. Exot. t. 69’. Wilson, however, seems to have failed to note 
that Smith’s species was published in 1808, ten years earlier than N. dendroides 
Hook. and it is Smith’s specific name that must be retained. 

There seems no difference whatever between them. It may be doubted 
whether all, or most, of the Incisifolia group are not slight forms of one species; 
but such as they are, H. flabellatum and H. dendroides have been thought separable 
by the densely bi-tri-pinnate, flabellate fronds and the ramuline leaves shorter 
and wider than in the other species, widely obovate-elliptic, with the nerve, 
perhaps, rather weaker. Whatever may be the value of these characters, they 
are shared by the Indo-Malayan H. flabellatum equally with the usual forms of 
the Oceanic H. dendroides (though in Hooker’s type the branch leaves are narrow, 
and hardly differ from those of H. javanicum, etc.). 

H. flabellata was described as from St. Vincent’s, in the West Indies. But, 
while it is common in Indo-Malaya, no other specimen has, I believe, been found 
in the West Indies (H. grandidens (C.M.) has more the H. javanicum form of 
leaf). In this connection it may be mentioned that Dickson’s specimen at Kew is 
labelled “St. Vincent’s ?”, as though there might be some doubt of its origin. Its 
range, therefore, does not seem to include America. 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 287 


THAMNIUM Bry. eur. 
THAMNIUM SUBLATIFOLIUM Dix., n. sp. Plate ix, fig. 18. 

T. aneitensi Mitt., et J. latifolio (Bry. jav.) peraffine. Ab hoc differt foliis 
stipitis perangustis, rigide divaricatis, interdum recurvis; foliis caulinis et 
Tameis angustioribus, oblongis (2°5-3 x 1), acutioribus, siccis distinctius longi- 
tudinaliter plicatis, saepius minus fortiter denticulatis. 

T. aneitense Mitt. (cujus folia stipitis similia sunt) folia latiora, eis 
T. latifolii subsimilia habet. 

Hab.—Rocks, alt. 3,000 ft., Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, Dec., 1917; Green- 
wood (49, type). Astrolabe Range, East of Port Moresby, New Guinea, 1923; 
Rey. J. B. Clark (102). 

In the New Guinea plant the stipe leaves are broader and less divaricate, 
thus bringing the plant nearer to TZ. latifolium, but the leaf characters are 
similar, and fairly distinct. 


PINNATELLA Fleisch. 
PINNATELLA KUBLIANA (Bry. jay.) Fleisch. 
Syn. Porotrichum elegantissimum Mitt. ; 
Ovalau, inter alios muscos, Graeffe. On dead wood, Loloti, Mts., Lautoka, 
Viti Levu, ec. 800 ft., 2.1.20; Greenwood (218). 


LEMBOPHYLLACEAE. 
CAMPTOCHAETE Reichdat. 
CAMPTOCHAETE POROTRICHOIDES (Besch.) Broth. 


On stones in stream in forest, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, 2,800 ft., Sept., 1907; 
Gibbs (7387). On rocks, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 9.12.17; Greenwood 
(42). On rocks, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, 18.6.22; Greenwood (423). 


EWNTODONTACEAE. 
Entopon C.M. 
ENTODON HILLEBRANDII C.M. 

New to Fiji. On rocks and wood, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; 
Greenwood (22). Loloti, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 800 ft., 29.5.21; Greenwood 
(384). On rocks, Mts., Levuka, Ovalau, c. 200 ft., 13.1.27; Greenwood (562). 

Stems flattened, not turgid and subjulaceous, and capsule elongate, cylindric, 
slightly curved, by which characters it may be known from #. pallidus Mitt. 
Does it differ from E£. Solanderi (Aongstr.) Jaeg.? 


CAMPYLODONTIUM Schwaeer. 
CAMPYLODONTIUM FLAVESCENS (Hook.) Bry. jav. 


New to Fiji. On dead wood, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 1,000 ft., 9.12.17; 
Greenwood (118). On trees, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 600 ft., 16.1.21; Green- 
wood (379). 


STEREOPHYLLUM Mitt. 
STEREOPHYLLUM VITIENSE Dix., n. sp. Plate ix, fig. 19. 
E gracillimis generis, habitu Isopterygii alicujus brevifolii. Corticicola, arcte 
appressum, nitidum, pallescens. Folia madida complanata, sicca convoluta, ovata, 
acuta vel subacuta, circa 0-8 mm. longa, 0:3 mm. lata, vix coneava, integra, 


&E 


less, SS DIA 


&e 


G 


pS 
oP5 we 


<a 


hoiLiBRARY 


we 
c- 


-\ 


“(ae 


io 


SO 


C 
E 


Re, 


288 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


pallida, pellucida; costa tenuis, vix dimidiam partem folii attingens. Folia 
dorsalia multo minora, appressa. Cellulae rhomboideo-lineares, perangustae, 4-5 mu 
latae, parietibus tenuissimis; alares sat numerosae, subquadratae, hyalinae, 
majusculae, ad costam fere attingentes. 

Autoicum. Flores masculi et feminei plures, immaturi. Fructus ignotus. 

Hab.—On trees in mountains, Lautoka, Viti Levu, Apr., 1920; Greenwood 
(316). 

An interesting extension of the range of this genus. A single species is 
known from New Caledonia, otherwise none is recorded from Oceania. 


HOoOKERIACEAE. 
DISTICHOPHYLLUM Doz. & Molk. 
DISTICHOPHYLLUM FLAVESCENS (Mitt.) Par. 


Syn. Discophyllum flavescens Mitt. 
Ovalau, Graeffe. 


DISTICHOPHYLLUM GRAEFFEANUM (C.M.). 


Syn. Mniadelphus Graeffeanus C.M. 
Viti Levu, ad litus australe in sylvis humidis, Graeffe. 


DISTICHOPHYLLUM VITIANUM (Sull.) Besch. 


Ovalau, trees in the mountains, Milne. At edge of creek in shade, Falls, Mts., 
Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; Greenwood (3). On soil, Mt. Evans, 
Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,500 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (179, 292). Ibidem, c. 3,960 ft., 
4.1.20; Greenwood (247). 


DISTICHOPHYLLUM LIMBATULUM (C.M.) Par. 


Syn. Mniadelphus limbatulus C.M. 
Ovalau, reg. montosa sylvestri, Graeffe. 


DISTICHOPHYLLUM TORQUATIFOLIUM Dix., n. sp. Plate ix, fig. 20. 


§ Mniadelphus. Robustiusculum. Caules 3 cm. alti vel paullo ultra, simplices 
vel parce ramosi, madida 4-5 mm. lati. Folia sicca spiraliter semitorta, difficillime 
emollita, etiam madefacta subtorquata, oblongo-ovata, vix spathulata, superne 
angustata, breviter cuspidata. Costa sat debilis, longa infra apicem desinens. 
Limbus folii validus, superne e 3-4 seriebus cellularum compositis,; integer, apice 
in cuspidem validam confluens. Cellulae superiores inanes, magnae, medianae 
circa 22-28 uw latae, versus margines paullo minores, omnes parietibus crassius- 
culis, collenchymaticis. Cellulae basilares rectangulares, nec valde laxae, partem 
minimam folii implentes. 

Fructus ignotus. 

Hab.—On dripping rocks, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, Jan., 1920; Green- 
wood (177). Associated with D. vitianum. 

A very distinct plant in the leaves twisted when dry, cuspidate, strongly 
bordered, and the lax cells. D. vitidanum has the leaves not twisted, larger cells 
and weaker border. It is nearest to D. tortile, but that has considerably larger 
cells, and the rectangular basal cells reach high in the leaf; here they only 
occupy a small part. 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 289 


CycCLoDIcTYON Mitt. 
CYCLODICTYON BLUMEANUM (Mont.) Fleisch. 
Syn. Hookeria Graeffeana C.M.—Hookeria vescoana Besch. 
Ovalau, with Hypnum complanatulum, specimen unicum, Graeffe. On dead 
wood in forest, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, 2,800 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (738). On 
damp ground, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 9.12.17; Greenwood (58). 


CALLICOSTELLA C.M. 
CALLICOSTELLA PAPILLATA (Mont.) Jaeg. 

Syn. Hookeria oblongifolia Sull. 

Ovalau, ubi copiosa videtur, Graeffe. On dead wood, summit of Mt. Victoria, 
Viti Levu, 3,800 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (803). Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, 2,700 ft., 
Sept., 1907; Gibbs (717). On rotten wood, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 
3,000 ft., 18.6.22; Greenwood (424). 


CALLICOSTELLA VESICULATA C.M. 
New to Fiji. Mts., Labasa, Vanua Levu, c. 300 ft., Aug., 1922; Greenwood 
(448). 
Fleischer’s descriptive notes on C. oblongifolia (Musci. . . von Buitenzorg, 
iii, 1027), refer, I believe, to this species, not to C. oblongifolia, which has denser 
areolation and high papillae. OC. vesiculata has larger cells than C. papillata, 
almost smooth, and less toothed leaves. 


CHAETOMITRIUM Doz. & Molk. 
CHAETOMITRIUM RUGIFOLIUM Sull. 


Viti, on trees, Amer. Expl. Exped. Ovalau, in the mountains, Milne, 364. 


CHAETOMITRIUM DEPRESSUM Mitt. 


New to Fiji. On trees in forest, Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, 
c. 200 ft., Feb., 1925; Greenwood (554). 
Distr.—Samoa. 


HYPOPTERYGIACEAE. 
HYPOPTERYGIUM Brid. 


A — / - 4 
HYPOPTERYGIUM STRUTHIOPTERIS Brid. > /S Pew *e\ = 
Viti, Seemann. WI(LIBRARYj;s 
Z,\ fst | 
o Se <> wean f 
HYPOPTERYGIUM SEMI-MARGINATUM C.M. ANG J ~y 
\e iy a y, 
Wh ~WA SED 
ae 


Ovalau, inter alios muscos, Graeffe. 


HYPOPTERYGIUM OCEANICUM Mitt. 


Dead wood in forest and on stones, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, near Nadala, 
2,300 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (719). 


HyYPoptrERYGIUM DEBILE Reichdt. 
On rocks in spray, falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 1,000 ft., 28.10.17; 
Greenwood (8). Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 4.4.20; Greenwood (318). 
Distr.—Tahiti, Samoa. 


bo 
its) 
j=) 


MOSSES OF FIJI, 


RHACOPILACEAE. 
RHACOPILUM P. Beauv. 

It is exceedingly doubtful whether four species exist in Fiji. There is, 
probably, no question about R. spectabile; which is known by its robust habit, 
very coarsely denticulate leaves and amphigastria, with the basal juxta-costal 
cells very lax and pellucid. 

The remaining species are very perplexing. The distinguishing characters 
as given by Bescherelle differ very considerably from those given by Fleischer, 
and the most probable conclusion to be drawn is that the supposed specific 
characters do not hold, and that we have to deal with a widespread and rather 
variable species. 

As Fleischer treats them, the species are separable thus: 

R. cuspidigerum.—Cells minutely papillose, rounded-hexagonal; lateral leaves 
when moist concave and not widely flattened out. 

R. pacificum.—Lateral leaves when moist widely flattened out, not concave. 

R. convolutacewm.—Cells distinctly papillose. 


Bescherelle separates them as follows: 

R. cuspidigerum.—tLeaves slightly denticulate only at apex, cells rounded, not 
dorsally papillate. 

R. pacificum.—Leaves slightly denticulate only at apex, cells not dorsally 
papillose, hexagonal, not rounded. 

R. convolutaceum.—Leaves toothed almost from base, and more strongly at 
apex; all cells rounded and dorsally very prominent. 


Now the cells in R. cuspidigerwm, Fleisch., M. Fr. Arch. Ind. et Polyn., No. 477, 
from West Java, are quite distinctly elongate-hexagonal, and therefore do not 
comply with Bescherelle’s requirements. 


The most reasonable explanation is that R. convolutaceum is fairly well 
marked by the more toothed leaves and more papillose cells, but that R. pacificum 
is probably not specifically distinct from R. cuspidigerum. 


Greenwood’s 115 has the cells distinctly elongate-hexagonal, and therefore 
would be referable to Bescherelle’s R. pacificum; on the other hand, they are more 
or less conspicuously papillose. 


RHACOPILUM SPECTABILE Reinw. 


Viti, Seemann. 


RHACOPILUM CUSPIDIGERUM Schwaeegr. 
Viti, Milne. 


RHACOPILUM PACIFICUM Besch. 


New to Fiji. On wet rocks, falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; 
Greenwood (115). 


RHACOPILUM CONVOLUTACEUM C.M. 


On volcanic red rock in stream in forest, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, 2,700 ft., 
Sept., 1907; Gibbs (739). 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 291 


THUIDIACEAE. 
HERPETINEURON Card. 
HERPETINEURON ToccoaE (Sull. & Lesq.) Card. : 
New to Fiji. On rock, falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; 
Greenwood (131). 
An interesting new link in the chain connecting the Asiatic and American 
localities. 


CLaopopIuM Ren. & Card. 
CLAOPODIUM AMBLYSTEGIOWES Dix., n. sp. Plate ix, fig. 21. 

Gracile. Habitu fere Amblystegii serpentis, sed foliis siccis crispulo-contortis. 
Caulis et rami laeves, haud papillosi. A C. leuwconeuron cellulis unipapillosis 
differt, ramisque haud complanatis. A C. assurgens (Sull. & Lesq.) et C. hawaiiense 
Williams marginibus planis, ‘cellulis marginalibus valde notatis, inanibus, pellu- 
cidis; a C. nervosum (C. prionophyllum) cellulis multo minus obscuris, papillis 
humilioribus. 

Hab.—Rocks, 3,000 ft., Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, Dec., 1917; Greenwood 
(BM))o 

This may be only a race of C. nervosum, from which it scarcely differs but 
in.the less obscure areolation with lower papillae. That species, however, has not 
been recorded from the Pacific region. C. hawaiiense has recurved margins. 


PELEKIUM Mitt. 
PELEKIUM VELATUM Mitt. ; 

New to Fiji. On dead wood, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 600 ft., 22.9.17; 
Greenwood (10). JIbidem, ec. 2,000 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (301). Nausori, Viti 
Levu, May, 1921; leg. R. Veitch, herb. Greenwood (439). Mts., Labasa, Vanua 
Levu, ec. 300 ft., Aug., 1922; Greenwood (447). 


THUIDIUM Bry. eur. 
THUIDIUM TAHITENSE Broth. 

Syn. Amblystegium byssoideum Besch. 

New to Fiji. Falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 22.9.17; Greenwood 
(165). Mt. Evans, ec. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (252). 

An interesting discovery. It is a somewhat overlooked plant, hitherto known 
from Tahiti only. Paris omits it altogether. It is curious that Bescherelle did 
not recognize it to be a Thuidium, especially as he compares it with T. byssoideum 
Besch. It is an exceedingly delicate, minute-leaved plant. 


THUMWIUM MEYENIANUM (Hampe) Bry. fav. 

Syn. 7. trachypodum (Mitt.) Lac.—T. erosulum Mitt. 

I. of Wakaya, Milne. Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood 
(195). Sigatoka, Viti Levu, sea-level, 10.6.21; Greenwood (392). Trees, Wainikoro, 
Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, 13.3.24; Greenwood (527). Mt. Evans, Lautoka, 
Viti Levu, c. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (260). On dead wood, Mts., interior of 
Vanua Levu, ec. 2,000 ft., 25.12.22; Greenwood (473). 


THUIDIUM BIPARIUM (Doz. & Molk.) Bry. jav. 
New to Fiji. On ground, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 800 ft., 2.1.20; Green- 
wood (169). Mts., Labasa, Vanua Levu, ec. 300 ft., Aug., 1922; Greenwood (449); 
1.7.23; Greenwood (498). 


292 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


THUIDIUM PLUMULOSUM (Doz. & Molk.) Bry. jav. 
Ovalau, Wilkes, in herb. Kew. 
THUIDIUM GLAUCINOIDES Broth. and T: SAMOANUM Mitt. 

The relation between these two plants is very obscure. According to Mitten’s 
description the differences would lie entirely, or almost so, in the cells very lowly 
and indistinctly papillose in 7. samoanum, and the perichaetial bracts ciliate. 
These characters would seem marked enough, since TJ. glaucinoides has high, 
spiculose papillae, and the perichaetial bracts without cilia. An examination of 
the Fijian and Samoan plants, however, leads to much pérplexity. Thus plants 
from ‘Tutuila, 1867, coll. Veitch” and “Fiji, Horne’, both determined by Mitten 
as T. samoanum, have well developed papillae, and the latter has ciliate bracts. 
“Tutuila, coll. Powell. No. 105” has the cells usually smooth at back, but here and 
there more markedly papillose. Another plant, determined by Mitten, ‘Ysabel, 
Veitch”, has the inner perichaetial leaves (in an unfertilized perichaetium) some- 
what ciliate, but the cells are quite highly papillose. 


Another specimen ‘360, Ovalau, Oct./54, only specimen found in fruit, Milne, 
H.M.S. Herald, 1855’ determined by Mitten as Leskea glaucina M. (Mitten, of 
course, did not distinguish between 7. glaucinum and T. glaucinoides) has the 
single, high, curved papillae of 7. glaucinoides, but the perichaetia are too old for 
examination. 

Miss Gibbs’ plant, recorded as JT. samoanum, has the ciliate perichaetial 
bracts, but the cells highly papillose. 


A male plant, “Fiji, Horne’ determined by Mitten as 7. samoanum, has well 
marked papillae; and another “7. samoanum Mitt., Fidschi-Insel, Ovalau, Graeffe, 
Dr. C. Mueller misit”, fairly bristles with papillae! 

All the Indo-Malayan plants of J. glaucinoides seen in the fertile state, have 
the bracts without cilia. The stem leaves of JT. glaucinoides, moreover, have the 
margin recurved, while in the type of JT. samoanum (Powell, 105) the margin 
is distinctly plane (as in 7. glaucinum). 


It would seem, on the whole, safest to conclude that the Fiji-Samoan plant 
differs substantially from the Indo-Malayan 7. glauwcinoides in having the peri- 
chaetial bracts ciliate, and the leaf-margin plane, and that the normal form has 
the high papillae of TJ. glaucinoides, while rarely the papillae are low and the 
leaves almost smooth, and the latter form may be made a new variety, LAEVIUS 
Dix., based on No. 105, Powell. It may be objected that Mitten makes this his 
type, and the low papillae a specific character of 7. samoanum; but Powell’s 
plant cannot be looked upon as strictly the type of the species, since it is sterile, 
and Mitten not only describes the fruit, but makes the ciliate bracts equally a 
specific character. The description was evidently drawn up from more than 
one plant. 

Sterile plants may be determined by the margin of the stem leaves, but it is 
perhaps a not very satisfactory distinction. 


THUIDIUM GLAUCINOIDES Broth. 
Seemann, inter 847 (as Leskea glaucina Mitt., in Bonplandia, ix, 366). Mts. 
near Lautoka, Viti Levu, 1.9.17; Greenwood (9). Mt. Evans, Lautoka, 9.12.17; 
Greenwood (64). 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 293 


THUIDIUM SAMOANUM Mitt. 
Viti, Seemann. Ovalau, Milne. Fiji, Horne. Ovalau, ad arbores, Graeffe. 
On stones, Mt. Victoria, Viti Levu, 3,000 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (802). On rock, 
Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 2,000 ft., 10.5.19; Greenwood (116). 


THUIDIUM CYMBIFOLIUM (Doz. & Molk.) Bry. jav. 

Syn. T. ramentosum Mitt. 

Falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; Greenwood (105). Mt. 
Evans, Lautoka, ec. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (246). Jbidem, ec. 2,000 ft., 4.1.20; 
Greenwood (191), and 4.4.20; (310). 

There is no difference at all between 7. ramentosum Mitt. and 7. cymbifolium; 
Mitten, in describing the Samoan plant, says: “Very like the 7. cymbifolium 
Dozy et Molk., Bry. javan. t. 221, from Java and India, but more slender”. The 
Pacific plants are often quite as robust as the Indian plant, however. 


HYPNACEAE. 
ECTROPOTHECIUM Mitt. 
ECTROPOTHECIUM SODALE (Sull.) Mitt. 


New to Fiji. Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 18.6.22; Greenwood (421). 


EXCTROPOTHECIUM PERCOMPLANATUM Broth. 


New to Fiji. On wet rocks, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; 
Greenwood (126, 128). Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; Green- 
wood (255). 


EcTROPOTHECIUM PERCOMPLANATUM, Var. FALCATUM Dix., n. var. 

Plus minusve dense, regulariter pinnatum, folia fortiter falcato-decurva. 

Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (256, type; 
261). Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, 9.12.17; (129). 

In the typical plant this is a very distinct variety, but No. 129 has laxer 
branching, and connects it with the type form. The falcate leaves are, however, 
a marked feature for the species, but -in structure and in fruit there is no 
difference from E. percomplanatum. 


EcCTROPOTHECIUM INCUBANS (Reinw. & Hornsch.) Jaeg. var. SCABERULUM 
(Broth. MS.) Fleisch. 
New to liji. Fiji; Steel (Herb. Dixon). 
Fleischer refers HE. scaberulum Broth. in sched. to a form of EH. incubans; 
it is perhaps worth distinguishing as a variety. 


ECTROPOTHECIUM PACIFICUM Mitt. 


Ovalau, in sylvis montosis, Graeffe. On dead wood in forest, Nadarivatu, 
Viti Levu, 2,700 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (715). 


ECTROPOTHECIUM TUTUILUM (Sull.) Mitt. 


Viti, Milne. Labasa, Vanua Levu, c. 300 ft., 22.7.23; Greenwood (507); 16.9.23, 
(516). 


294 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


ECTROPOTHECIUM ADNATUM Broth. 
New to Fiji. On rotten log, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 10.5.19; 
Greenwood (157). On wet bank, Mts., Levuka, Ovalau, c. 200 ft., 13.1.27: Green- 
wood (563, 566). 


ECTROPOTHECIUM CYATHOTHECIUM (C.M.) Jaeg. 

Ovalau, inter Hookeriam oblongifoliam dense intricatum, Graeffe. Mt. Evans, 
Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; Greenwood (237, 240, 251). Mts., interior 
of Vanua Levu, ec. 2,000 ft., 25.12.22; Greenwood (466, 475). Trees, Wainikoro, 
Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, c. 200 ft., 13.3.24; Greenwood (531). 


EICTROPOTHECIUM MALACOBLASTUM (C.M.) Par. 
New to Fiji. On edge of stream, Falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 
1.9.17; Greenwood (16). On wet rock, Lautoka, Viti Levu, near sea-level, 25.11.19; 
Greenwood (145), with Vesicularia inflectens. 


° 


EcrroPpoTHECIUM MOLLE Dix., n. sp. Plate ix, fig. 22. 

Dioicum videtur. Pallide aureum, nitescens, robustum, mollissimum; caules 
ad 9 cm. longi, plus minusve regulariter densissime pinnati, ramis inaequalibus, 
‘4-8 mm. longis, haud complanatis. Folia fortiter falcata, dense conferta, circa 
2 mm. longa, e basi concava, oblonga, breviter sed tenuiter acuminata, apice 
denticulato; costis binis, bene notatis, longiusculis praedita. Cellulae superiores 
angustissimae, longae, laevissimae, inferne parum latiores, breviores, ad angulos 
paucissimae, minutae, unica magna, vesiculosa, hyalina. Folia ramea brevius, 
latius acuminata, argutius dentata, saepe ad basin fere tenuiter denticulata. 

Hab.—Trees, near summit of Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,960 ft., Oct., 
1921; Greenwood (404). 

A rather robust, golden plant, with something the habit of E. intorquatum, 
but with the leaves finely acuminate, more or less sharply denticulate, and with a 
rather long and well marked double nerve. The leaves at the extremities of 
the stem and branches are often distant, straight and not falcate, only flexuose. 

E. sandwichense has shorter basal cells and wider upper ones, but is other- 
wise very near. ; 


VESICULARIA C.M. 
VESICULARIA INFLECTENS (Brid.) C.M. 
Rocks in pool, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 600 ft., 2.9.17; Greenwood (14); 
ibidem, 4.1.20; (203). 
This appears to be unrecorded from Fiji. Paris includes the group in the 
distribution, but I have been unable to trace the origin of the record. 


VESICULARIA CALODICrYON (C.M.) Broth. 
Syn. Ectropothecium calodictyon (C.M.) Jaeg. 
On dead wood, Mt. Victoria, Viti Levu, 4,000 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (891). 
On dead wood, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, 2,700 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (892). ‘Trees, 
Nausori, near sea-level, R. Veitch, May, 1921; herb. Greenwood (442). 


VESICULARIA VITIANA (Mitt.) Dix., n. sp. 
(Ectropothecium vitianum Mitt. MS. in herb.) 
Prostrata, vix nitida, caules sat regulariter pinnati, ramis 3-4 mm. longis. 
Folia forma structuraque eis V. reticulatae similia. Seta brevis, 1 cm. longa. 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 295 


Hab.—Viti Levu, Fiji Is., 1855; Milne, 338; herb. Mitten. comm. New York 
Bot. Garden; type. On dead tree-fern, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 600 ft., 22.9.17; 
Greenwood (36). On damp ground and wood, Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua 
Levu, c. 300 ft., 138.3.24; Greenwood (529); ibidem, Feb., 1925 (551). 

This is so exactly similar to V. reticulata, except in the constantly short 
seta, that it would not be surprising if it turned out to be a race of that species. 
The distribution of V. reticulata, however, is so far entirely Indo-Malayan, so that 
it is perhaps best to keep the Fiji plant distinct. 


ISOPTERYGIUM Mitt. 
ISOPTERYGIUM TAXIRAMEUM (Mitt.) Jaeg. 
New to Fiji. On damp ground near creek in open, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 
100 ft., 18.8.17; Greenwood (6). 


ISOPTERYGIUM BYSSICAULE (C.M.) Jaeg. 
On dead wood in forest, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, 2,300 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs 
(758). 


ISOPTERYGIUM MINUTIRAMEUM (C.M.) Jaeg., var. VITIENSE Dix., n. var. 

Minutum. Statura var. austro-pusillo (C.M.) Fleisch. simillimum, sed foliis 
laxioribus, tenuius acuminatis, seta breviore, 5 mm. longa, raro 6 mm. 

Hab.—On dead tree-fern; Mts. near Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., Sept., 1917; 
Greenwood (36c, type; 337). On dead wood, Cuvu, Sigatoka, Viti Levu; Greenwood 
(3538, 354, 355). On dead wood, Labasa, Vanua Levu; Greenwood (457). Also on 
earth, 7,500 ft., Bias Valley, Kulu, N. W. Himalayas, Sept., 1928; R. L. Badhwar 
(1162). 

This at first appeared to have all the appearance of a new species, but it 
cannot be separated from the minute forms of J. minutiramewm, and scarcely 
differs from the Javan plant referred (as a var. of J. minutirameuwm) by Fleischer 
to I. austro-pusillum (C.M.)}; the leaves, however, are a little laxer, and the seta 
seems constantly shorter. 

It is remarkable that, to all intents and purposes, the same plant should 
occur at a considerable altitude in the Himalayas, but there seem no characters 
whatever to separate it. 


ISOPTERYGIUM ALBESCENS (Schwaegr.) Jaeg. 

Syn. J. lonchopelma (C.M.) Jaeg.—I. molliculum (Sull.) Mitt. 

Viti, Milne. Ovalau, Graeffe. On bark, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 
2.1.20; Greenwood (190). Rotten wood, Sigatoka, Viti Levu, near sea-level, 
10.10.19; Greenwood (125). On dead wood, Loloti, Mts., Lautoka, ce. 800 ft., 2.1.20; 
Greenwood (209). On ground, Levuka, Ovalau, c. 100 ft., 23.4.20; Greenwood 
(342). On dead wood, Mts., Labasa, Vanua Levu,~-c. 300 ft., 16.9.23; Greenwood 
(515). 

Examination of Hypnum molliculum Sull. shows that it is identical with 
I, albescens. The type gathering (Mauna Kea, Hawaii, Wilkes, herb. Kew) has 
more distant and narrower leaves than in the usual forms of J. albescens; the 
leaf acumen is fine and quite entire; exactly similar forms, however, occur in 
Borneo and elsewhere in Indo-Malaya. The Sunday I. plant, leg. Milne, has the 
leaves rather broader and more closely set, and is in every way the same plant 
as the commoner forms of /. albescens, where the branch leaves are often slightly 

H 


296 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


denticulate at apex. The description does not suggest any difference from 
I. albescens. The distribution of J. albescens in Indo-Malaya is very wide, but it 
has not been recorded from the Pacific; naturally so, since all the plants have 
been referred to J. molliculum. 

There can be little doubt that J. lonchopelma (C.M.) belongs here also. The 
occasionally sub-margined leaves, of which C. Mueller makes a point, are frequently 
found in the Indo-Malayan plant, and Fleischer describes them so. As to the 
seta, C. Mueller gives no measurements, but simply “longissimo”. The seta is 
given in the Bry. jav. as 1:5 cm. in length. Fleischer gives it as 1-5 to almost 
2 cm. In Greenwood’s 190 it varies from 1:25 to practically 2 cm. C. Mueller’s 
plant is no doubt simply J. albescens with (possibly) unusually long setae. 

The sporophyte characters are identical in the Indo-Malayan and Pacific 
plants. 


TAXITHELIUM Spruce. 
TAXITHELIUM PAPILLATUM (Hary.) Broth. 

Syn. 7. stigmosum (Mitt.) Broth. 

Ovalau, on stumps of trees in high ground, frequent; Milne. Ovalau, in reg. 
montana, Graeffe. On wood in shade, Mts., Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua 
Levu, c. 300 ft., 27.3.24; Greenwood (536). 

Mitten says of his Trichosteleum stigmosum “nearly resembling 7. papillatum 
(Hornsch.), but more slender’. There is, however, hardly any limit to which 
T. papillatum may not go in this and many other directions. As a matter of 
fact Mitten has determined Samoan specimens as 7. papillatum (herb. Kew), 
though in his “Samoan Mosses” he does not mention itS occurrence in Samoa; 
and it is quite probable that these, or some of them—there are more forms than 
one included—are the plants he originally referred to his J. stigmosum, but 
afterwards altered his opinion as to their specific value; at any rate, there are no 
specimens there referred by him to T. stigmosum. 


TAXITHELIUM HERPETIUM (C.M.) Broth. 
Dead wood.in forest, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, 2,800 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (716). 


TAXITHELIUM VENTRIFOLIUM (C.M.) Broth. 
Ovalau, Graeffe. 


TAXITHELIUM SAMOANUM (Mitt.) Broth. 
Syn. Trichosteleum samoanum Jaeg.—Sigmatella Powelliana C.M. 
Ovalau, Graeffe. Dead wood, Mt. Victoria, Viti Levu, 4,000 ft., Sept., 1907; 
Gibbs (801). Dead wood in Mts., Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, c. 300 
ft., 13.38.24; Greenwood (530). 


TAXITHELIUM POLYANDRUM Dix., n. sp. Plate ix, fig. 23. 

§ Anastigma. Prostratum, diffusum, subrobustum, percomplanatum, pallide 
virens, nitidum; caules irregulariter ramosi; folia stricte complanata, circa 1 mm. 
longa, lingulata, sensim paullo attenuata, subobtusa, uno latere prope basin inflexo, 
ceterum marginibus planis, inferne minute, ad apicem conferte argutius denticu- 
lata; ecostata; cellulae superiores breviter lineares, valde sigmatoideae, ad basin 
paullo tantum longiores; alares 2-3 majusculae, subvesiculosae, inanes; omnes 
laeves. 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 297 


Autoicum. Flores ¢ ad caulem et ramos numerosi, magni. 


Seta 1-1:25 ecm. longa, laevis. Folia perichaetialia numerosa, e basi convoluta 
erecta in subulam loriformem, robustam argute denticulatam hic illic sub- 
laciniatam, saepe fortiter hamatam attenuata. Theca minuta, turgide elliptica, 
gibbosa, curvata, collo brevissimo, turgido. Peristomii dentes aeque ac endostomii 
processus supra valde papillosi. Rete exothecii perlaxum, e cellulis isodiametricis, 
majusculis, parietibus valde flexuosis instructum. 


Hab.—Clinging very closely to rocks in mountains, Lautoka, Viti Levu, 
c. 1,000 ft., 3.1.20; Greenwood (217, type). On rock, Loloti, Viti Levu, c. 800 ft., 
29.5.21; Greenwood (388, 394). 


In habit much like 7. Binsteadii Dix., from Ceylon, but with the cells quite 
smooth. Most species of the group (Glossadelphus, § Anastigma Fleisch.) have 


the leaves rounded above and not or scarcely attenuated, and the alar cells less 
differentiated. 


TAXITHELIUM PROTENSUM Dix., n. sp. Plate ix, fig. 24. 


Polystigma. Aureo-viride. Sat robustum. Caulis usque ad 7 em. longus, sat 
regulariter pinnatus, ramis divergentibus, 5-6 mm. longis, percomplanatis. Folia 
laxe disposita, complanata, divergentia, substricta, parva, vix 1 mm. longa, 
perconcava, oblongo-lanceolata, e basi contracta dilatata, inde ad apicem sensim 
acuminata in acumen breve, peracutum, subintegrum angustata; ecostata. Cellulae 
omnes elongatae, lineares, perangustae, parietibus tenuibus, distinete, sat valide 
pluripapillatae. Cellulae basilares vix mutatae; infimae tantum ad insertionem 
una serie breviores, latiores, pellucidae, parietibus sinuoso-incrassatis; alares 1-2 
parum latiores, haud notatae. 

Cetera ignota. 

Hab.—Fiji Is., coll. Steel; herb. Dixon (4). 


A marked species in the pinnate stems, with divergent, complanate, rigid 
leaves, something of the form of TJ. isocladum, but more longly and finely 
acuminate, and more concave. The habit is not at all, however, that of 
T. isocladum. The papillae are strong, very regular and very distinct. 


LEUCOMIACEAE. 
LEUCOMIUM Mitt. 
LEUCOMIUM DEBILE (Sull.) Mitt. 


Gau, on decayed trees, Milne, 22. Ovalau, inter alios muscos, Graeffe. On 
dead wood in forest, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, 2,800 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (718). 
Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, ec. 2,000 ft., 3.10.20; Greenwood (369). On wet 
rock, Nausori, Viti Levu, near sea-level, May, 1921; leg. R. Veitch; herb. Green- 
wood (441). Mts., interior Vanua Levu, c. 2,000 ft., 25.12.22; Greenwood (464). 


SEMATOPHYLLACEAEL. 
CLASTOBRYELLA Fleisch. 
CLASTOBRYELLA CUCULLIGERA (Bry. jav.) Fleisch. 
Syn. Sematophyllum cuculligerum Jaeg. 
New to Fiji. On bank, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,500 ft., 4.1.20; 
Greenwood (207b); with Macromitrium involutifolium. 


298 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


‘TRISMEGISTIA (C.M.) Broth. 
TRISMEGISTIA RIGIDA (Hornsch. & Reinw.) Broth. 
Viti Levu, Milne. 


TRISMEGISTIA COMPLANATULA (C.M.) Broth. 
Ovalau, reg. montosa, Graeffe. 
Very doubtfully distinct from 7. rigida. 


MEIOTHECIUM Mitt. 
MEIOTHECIUM MICROCARPUM (Harv.) Mitt. 
New to Fiji. Rocks, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 2,500 ft., 3.10.20; Greenwood 
(365). Nausori, Viti Levu, near sea-level, leg. A. F. Smith, Feb., 1920; herb. 
Greenwood (296). Dead wood, Suva, sea-level, 25.1.28; Greenwood (478). 


MEIOTHECIUM SERRULATUM Dix., n. sp. Plate ix, fig. 25. 

Habitu M. microcarpi sed robustius, aureo-viride vel brunnescens. Folia 
paullo majora, 1:25-1:75 mm. longa, minus profunde carinata, apud apicem 
plerumque marginibus anguste recurvis; ibidem, plus minusve distincte, nonnun- 
quam argute denticulatis. Cellulae superiores paullo majores, anguste ellipticae, 
subsinuosae, parietibus perincrassatis. 

Fructus ignotus. 

Hab.—On dead wood on mountains, Labasa, Vanua Levu, June, 1923; Green- 
wood (489, type; 497). 

The larger size, and the apical margins recurved and more or less distinctly 
denticulate, make this a fairly well defined species. Only small quantities were 
collected, in both cases sterile. 


ACROPORIUM Mitt. 
ACROPORIUM BREVICUSPIDATUM (Mitt.) Fleisch. 
On rocks, foot of Mt. Victoria, Viti Levu, 2,500 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (789). 


; RHAPHIDOSTICHUM Fleisch. 
RHAPHIDOSTICHUM THELIPORUM (C.M.) Broth. 
Syn. Sematophyllum theliporum Jaeg. 
Ovalau, Graeffe. 


RHAPHIDOSTICHUM PALLIDIFOLIUM Dix., n. sp. Plate ix, fig. 26. 

Corticolum; prostratum, dense appressum, caulibus parallelibus, robustiusculis, 
complanatis, circa 2 mm. latis, albescentibus, vel pallide viridibus, subnitidis. 
Folia dense conferta, arcte appressa, nullo modo patentia, plana vel apice lenissime 
decurvo, subflexuosa, 1-5-2 mm. longa, e basi contracta oblonga, concava, plus 
minusve abrupte in subulam robustam latam, saepe semitortam, loriformem, 
obtusiusculam integram contracta. Costa nulla. Cellulae medianae anguste 
fusiformes, perincrassatae, supra magis breviores latiores, in subula elliptico- 
rhomboideae, infra sensim longiores angustiores, basilares lineares; omnes incras- 
satae, perdistinctae; superiores ad angulos apicales saepe humiliter grosse prom- 
inentes. Cellulae alares quoque latere 3-4 magnae, vesiculosae, hyalinae. 

Dioicum. Flores feminei solum visi. 

Hab.—On damp logs in forest, Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, c. 
300 ft., Feb., 1925; Greenwood (555). 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 299 


Although without fruit, this moss is fairly certain to belong to Rhaphido- 
stichum in the neighbourhood of R. bunodicarpum (C.M.) Fleisch. The leaves are 
much like those of R. luxurians as figured in the Bry. javanica, but with broader, 
less pointed subula, entire or almost so, and very incrassate cells. In habit and 
colour it is very distinct.. 

I have not seen R. theliporum (C.M.), but it is described as having the leaves 
laxly set, and “setaceo-loriformi-acuminata”’. 


RHAPHIDOSTEGIUM De Not. 
RHAPHIDOSTEGIUM CONTIGUUM (Hook. f. & Wils.) Par. 
Syn. Sematophyllum contiguum Mitt. 
On rocks, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 700 ft., 16.1.21; Greenwood (381). 
Ibidem, on rotten wood, ec. 2,000 ft., 18.6.22; Greenwood (420). 


TRICHOSTELEUM Mitt. 
TRICHOSTELEUM HAMATUM (Doz. & Molk.) Jaeg. 

Syn. T. Pickeringii (Sull.) Jaeg—T. rhinophyllum (C.M.) Jaeg. 

Ovalau, Graeffe. Dead wood in forest, Nadarivatu, Viti Levu, Sept., 1907; 
Gibbs (759). Ibidem, 3,000 ft.; Gibbs (740). On rotten wood, Loloti, Viti Levu, 
c. 800 ft., 2.1.20; Greenwood (171, 178). Rotten wood, Mts., Lautoka, c. 3,000 ft., 
18.6.22; Greenwood (425). Rotten wood, Mts., interior Vanua Levu, ec. 2,000 ft., 
25.12.22; Greenwood (468). 

I can see nothing in 7. Pickeringiwi (Sull.) and JT. rhinophyllum (C.M.), but 
slight forms, differing from the type form only in minute variations of the length 
of the leaf point and the degree of roughness of the seta. 


TRICHOSTELEUM TRACHYAMPHORUM (C.M.) Par. is recorded from Fiji in Paris, 


Index, but I can find no authority for its occurrence. 


TRICHOSTELEUM BoscHit (Doz. & Molk.) Jaeg. 


New to Fiji. On dead wood, Mts., Labasa, Vanua Levu, ec. 300 ft., 3.6.23; 
Greenwood (485). 


TRICHOSTELEUM BOSCHII, var. MINUS Dix., n. var. 


Minus. Seta perbrevis, circa 6-7 mm. longa. 

Hab.—On dead wood, Mts., Labasa, Vanua Levu, e. 300 ft., 17.12.22; Greenwood 
(462); ibidem, Greenwood (460). 

A small plant with very short seta, which is very nearly the same thing as 
T. brachypelma (C.M.). 


TRICHOSTELEUM FISSUM Mitt. 
New to Fiji. On wood, Mts., Labasa, Vanua Levu, ec. 300 ft., 7.10.22: Greenwood 
(452). On rotten logs, Mts., Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, ec. 400 ft., 
27.83.24; Greenwood (543). y 


PILOECIUM C.M. 
PILOECIUM PSEUDO-RUFESCENS (Hampe) C.M. 
New to Fiji. Mts., Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, ec. 300 ft., 21.7.26; 
Greenwood (556). 


300 MOSSES OF FIJI, 


BRACHYTHECTACEAE, 
RHYNCHOSTEGIUM Bry. eur. 
RHYNCHOSTEGIUM SELAGINELLIFOLIUM C.M. 


New to Fiji. Falls, Mts., Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 1,000 ft., 1.9.17; Greenwood 
(9b). Dead wood, ibidem, c. 2,000 ft., 4.4.20; Greenwood (336). 


RHYNCHOSTEGIELLA Limpr. 
RHYNCHOSTEGIELLA VITIENSIS Dix., n. sp. Plate ix, fig. 27. 


Pro genere robustiuscula. Lignicola, arcte adhaerens, rigidiuscula, subpin- 
natim, complanata, divaricato-ramosa. Folia laxa, subdisticha, rigida, sicca 
minime mutata, sed contracta et convoluta, 1-1'5 mm. longa, lanceolata, breviter 
acute acuminata, marginibus planis, apice argute, inferne obsolete denticulata. 
Costa perbrevis, tenuissima, vix quartam partem folii longitudinis aequans. 

Cellulae rhomboideo-lineares, parietibus tenuissimis, inde subobscurae, 
basilares breviores, latiores, laxae, pellucidae, sed alares haud distinctae. 

Autoica. Folia -perichaetialia erecto-appressa, caulinibus sat similia sed 
minora. Seta tenuis, laevissima, circa 6 mm. alta. Theca parva, oblonga, paullo 
curvata, inclinata, sub. ore leniter constricta, aetate nigrescens; exothecii rete 
laxum, e cellulis quadratis vel breviter rectangularibus, parietibus tenuibus, haud 
collenchymaticis instructum. Operculum haud visum. Peristomium sat magnum; 
dentes angustiusculi, opaci, striolati; internum aurantiacum; membrana circa % 
altitudinem endostomii aequans, processus lineares, anguste rimosi; cilia aut 
nulla aut valde rudimentaria. 

Hab.—On dead wood, Loloti, Lautoka, Viti Levu, Sept., 1920; Greenwood 
(362). 

A pretty and distinct species, nearer to some undescribed Indian species than 
to any published species, but distinct in the smooth seta, very faint and short 
nerve, and the absence of any differentiated alar cells. 


HYPNODENDRACEAE. 
HYPNODENDRON Mitt. 
HYPNODENDRON ARBORESCENS Mitt. 
Ovalau, Seemann, 845. Milne, 351. Ovalau, in sylvis montosis, et in cacumine 
montis Tana-lailai, 2,000 ped., Graeffe. On rotten wood in forest, Nadarivatu, 
Viti Levu, 2,800 ft., Sept., 1907; Gibbs (708). 


HYPNODENDRON VITIENSE (C.M.) Mitt. 
Syn. Hypnum Graeffeanum C.M. 
Viti, Seemann, 842. Ovalau, ad arbores reg. montosae, Graeffe. 


HYPNODENDRON REINWARDTIT (Hornsch.) is given by Paris for the group, but 


I find no evidence of its occurrence. 


MNIODENDRON Lindb. 
MNIODENDRON TAHITICUM Besch. 
New to Fiji. On dead wood, Mt. Evans, Lautoka, Viti Levu, c. 3,960 ft., 4.1.20; 
Greenwood (230). 
Agrees well with the type (leg. Nadeaud) in herb. Bescherelle. The leaves 
are sometimes a little less narrowly acuminate, but even this is inconstant. 


BY H. N. DIXON AND W. GREENWOOD. 301 


DIPHYSCIACEAE. 
DieHyscium (Ehrh.) Mohr. 
DIPHYSCIUM SUBMARGINATUM Mitt. 
Syn. Webera submarginata Broth. 
Viti, Seemann. Summit of Mt. Victoria, Viti Levu, 4,000 ft., covering stones, 
Sept., 1907; Gibbs (799). 


POLYTRICHACEAE. 
PoconatumM P. Beauv. 
POGONATUM VITIENSE Mitt. 
Viti, Milne. 


POGONATUM GRAEFFEANUM (C.M.) Jaeg. 

Ovalau, in reg. montosa, Cuming, 1854. Clay bank by roadside, Nadarivatu, 
Viti Levu, c. 2,700 ft., Oct., 1907; Gibbs (858). On damp clay bank, Mts., Lautoka, 
Viti Levu, c. 600 ft., 22.9.17; Greenwood (40). JIbidem, 4.4.20; Greenwood (308) ; 
29.8.20; Greenwood (352). 


PSEUDORHACELOPUS Broth. 
PSEUDORHACELOPUS PHILIPPINENSIS Broth. 


New to Fiji. On damp clay bank, Wainikoro, Macuata Coast, Vanua Levu, 
c. 100 ft., 29.2.24; Greenwood (520). On wet banks, Labasa, 8.8.22; Greenwood 
(445). 

A very interesting discovery. The plant has only been recorded from the 
Philippines, from Luzon. No. 445 differs from this plant only in the very short 
stem with few leaves, less crisped when dry, but 520 approaches the original plant 
very closely. The felt of the young calyptra is strongly spirally twisted. 

Brotherus in describing the Philippine plant makes no mention of the long 
and very conspicuous ochrea, often showing above the perichaetial leaves; I find 
this in both the Philippine and Fiji plants. 


SPHAGNACEAE, 
SPHAGNUM Dill. 
SPHAGNUM SEEMANNII C.M. 
Syn. S. cuspidatum Mitt., nec Ehrh., fide C.M. et Warnstorf. 
Ovalau, Seemann. 


SPHAGNUM VITIANUM Schimp. 
In herb. Kew, apud Warnst. In Hedwig., xxx, 144. Viti (no collector given). 


SPHAGNUM REICHHARDTII Hampe e Warnst. 
In Hedwig., xxix, 206. 
Syn. S. acutifolium Mitt. in Fl. Vit. 
Viti (herb. Mitten). 


References. 
BRoTHERUS, V. F., and Watts, W. W., 1915.—The Mosses of the New Hebrides. Journ. 
Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales, xlix, 127. 
GIBBs, LILIAN S., 1909.—A Contribution to the Montane Flora of Fiji. Journ. Linn. Soec., 
J8VoKc, 2.0.0.0b.45 ILA, 


302 MOSSES OF FIJI. 


MITTEN, W., 1861.—Musci et Hepaticae Vitienses. Bornplandia, ix, 365. 
, 1873.—Mosses, in Seemann, Flora Vitiensis. 
MUELLER, C., 1874.—Musci Polynesiaci praesertim Vitiani et Samoani Graeffeani. Jowrn. 
Mus. Godeffroy, Heft vi, 51-90. 
1897.—Musci, in Reinecke, die Flora der Samoa-Inseln. Hngl. Bot. Jahrb., 
xxiii, 317. 
SULLIVANT, W. S., 1854.—On some new species of Mosses from the Pacific Is. Proc. 
Amer. Acad., iii, pp. 73, 181. 
WaRNSTORF, C., 1897.—Beitr. zu exot. Sphagna. Hedwig., xxx, 144. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES VIII-IX. 
Plate viii. 

Fig. 1.—Fissidens. glosso-bryoides. «a, leaf, x 20; b, leaf-apex, x 50. 
Fig. 2.—F. diversiretis. a, leaf, x 20; b, upper cells, x 200; c, basal cells, x 200. 
Fig. 3—F. cuspidiferus. a, leaf, x 20; b, apices of leaves, x 20. 
Fig. 4.—F. lawtokensis. a, leaf, x 20; b,:leaf-apex, x 50; c, upper cells, x 200. 
Fig. 5—F. vitiensis. a, leaf, x 20; b, leaf-apex, x 50; c, upper cells, x 200. 
Fig. 6.—F. altisetus. a, plant, x 2; b, leaf, x 20; ¢, leaf-apex, x 50; d, upper cells, x 200. 
Fig. 7.—F. perobtusus. a, a’, leaves, x 20. 
Fig. 8.—F. peracuminatus. a, leaf, x 20; b, upper marginal cells, x 200. 
Fig. 9.—Calymperes albo-limbatum. a, b, leaves, x 20; ec, cells at shoulder, x 200. 
Fig. 10.—C. marginatwm. a, leaf, x 20; b, cells at shoulder, x 200. 
Fig. 11.—C. tahitense var. truncatum. a, a’, leaf-apices, x 20. 
Fig. 12.—Rhamphidium Veitchii. a, upper, b, lower leaves of stem, x 20; c, upper cells, 

x 200; d, basal cells, x 200; e, capsule, x 5; f, peristome, moist, x 20; 

g, peristome tooth, x 100 (drawn rather too broad for its length). 
Fig. 13.—Barbula leucobasis. a, leaf, x 20. 
Fig. 14.—Mniobryum rubrum. a, leaf, x 20; b, leaf-apex, x 50. 
Fig. 15.—Bryum vitianum. a, leaf, x 20; b, upper cells, x 100; ec, leaf-apex, x 40. 
Fig. 16.—Bryum Greenwoodii. a, leaf, x 8. 


Plate ix. 
Fig. 17.—Huptychium vitiense. a, stem, x 1; b, leaf, x 10. 
Fig. 18.—Thamnium sublatifolium. a, a’, leaves, x 20. 
Fig. 19.—Stereophyllum vitiense. a, leaf, x 20; b, base of leaf, x 40. 
Fig. 20.—Distichophyllum torquatifolium. a, stem, dry, x 1; Db, leaf, x 20; e, leaf-apex, 
x 50; d, upper median cells, x 200. 
Fig. 21.—Claopodium amblystegioides. a, a’, leaves, x 20; b, upper marginal cells, « 200. 
Fig. 22.—Hctropotheciwm molle. a, stem-leaf, x 20; b, upper cells, x 200. 
Fig. 23.—Tawithelium polyandrum. a, lateral, b, dorsal leaf, x 20; c, upper cells, x 200. 
Fig. 24.—Tavithelium protensum. a, stem, x 1; b, db’, leaves, x 20; c, upper cells, x 200. 
Fig. 25.—Meiothecium serrulatum. a, leaf, x 20; b, leaf-apex, x 50. 
Fig. 26.—Rhaphidostichum pallidifolium. a, b, leaves, x 20; c, alar cells, x 50. 
Fig. 27.—Rhynchostegiella vitiensis. a, stem, xX 1; b, branch, moist and dry, x 2; 
c, leaves, x 20; d, upper cells, x 200; e, alar cells, x 100. 


PLATE VIII. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


34 His) 


1b 


da 


Hee Ro eee 


Sat wo 


area 


10a 


. pa 
JAb 


{6c ale ye 
74 a 


125 
AL a 
15 ¢ 


v Le | 
: i V3 a Ly (sa 


fle 


del. H. N. Dixon. Mosses of Fiji. 


Qa 


i. ee 
ener’ 
il Raa 
var ite 


ek: 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. IDDAUNS 1k 


del. H. N. Dixon. Mosses of Fiji. 


NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. XXIV. 


By J. R. MaALtocg. 
(Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) 


(Forty-four Text-figures. ) 
[Read 25th June, 1930.] 


This paper completes the notes on Tachinidae, of which the first section was 
published as No. xxiii of the series (see above, pp. 92-135). 


Tribe ACTIINI. 


In the last shipment of Tachinidae from Dr. Mackerras there were many 
specimens of this tribe and I purpose to present a key for the identification of all 
the species now available to me from Australia. I have in the press a similar 
treatment of the Oriental species, and have compared the two groups of species 
so that there may be no synonyms created in the papers. ; 


One of the most remarkable species of the tribe is described in the present 
paper, but, unlike all of those possessing such remarkable antennal characters 
which have previously been described, it is treated as a subgenus and not a 
distinct genus. The reason for this action is that in all probability the female 
possesses no exceptional characters such as does the male and it would be impos- 
sible to distinguish it generically from many of the other species retained in 
Actia. I tentatively accept Schizoceromyia Townsend, which antedates 
Schizactiana Curran, as a subgenus on the basis of the antennal characters of 
both sexes, but doubt if it can be maintained. 


Key to the Species. 


1. Third antennal segment remarkably specialized, either split into two subequal parts 
from near base to apex, or with a branch on outer side emanating from near 

base which is furnished with lateral forked filaments (males) ............ 2 

Third antennal segment simple, of the normal form .......................-. 4 

2. Third antennal segment with a branch emanating from near base on outer side 
which bears many forked and simple filaments on one side (Fig. 31); lower 
stigmatal bristle long and strong, directed downward (Subgenus Talaractia) 
LER eRe RN aee STE Te Nr ee STIS oer alge HOLE U Sy ea erase Vawsaie sas prinel ah oWaae meee eareeseairoyrs baldwini, n. sp. 
Third antennal segment with a simple cleft from apex to near base dividing the 
segment into two almost equal portions (Fig. 32); lower stigmatal bristle 
very short and fine, directed upward (Subgenus Schizoceromyia) ........ 3 
Second segment of arista longer than the third .................... fergusoni Bezzi 
Second segment of the arista distinctly shorter than the third ...... invalida, n. sp. 
4. Second segment of the arista not less than six times as long as thick; parafacials 
haired to or below middle close to eyes (Subgenus Schizoceromyia) ........ 5 
Second segment of arista less than four times as long as thick; parafacials rarely 
haired below level of lower frontal bristle (Subgenus Actia) ............ 6 
Second segment of the arista about four-fifths as long as third .... fergusoni Bezzi 
Second segment of the arista about half as long as third .......... invalida, n. sp. 


(sx) 


or 


304 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


6c SMIESte Wane =aViEIN DAREN AO OW noite icone were Cee TIS ao Se aee ooraf eta IPE EVES, ele eR a Te ee a 7 


First wing-vein setulose in part, at least on upper side .................... 10 

7. Fourth wing-vein obliterated beyond the subapical bend; apical section of fifth vein 
Subequaillatonthespreaplcalyoneie ae nrania ee ee een eucosmae Bezzi 
Fourth wing-vein distinct beyond the preapical bend; apical section of fifth vein 
OMUKGlY SHarorws Wain Woe SuloeyonCrNl CMS socodbnpococ0o coun o0cobaSbudodosebaes 8 


8. Sixth wing-vein obsolete at apex, not traceable to margin of wing; upper anterior 
sternopleural bristle much longer and stronger than the lower one; antennae 
entirely blaekey ts). asc 6 Re Eee ee Se ach ore desea sia 3) SARE Sew aswew eye ecole ce) cee oneeeaene 9 

Sixth wing-vein weak apically, but distinctly traceable to margin of wing; upper 
anterior sternopleural bristle weaker and shorter than the lower one; antennae 
orange-yellow at bases, third segment largely fuscous apically .. norma Malloch 

9. Mid tibia with a distinct and quite long anterodorsal bristle near middle; thorax 
with three pairs of postsutural dorsocentral bristles; abdomen broadly trans- 
lucent yellowish on sides of basal half; third antennal segment very wide, about 
haltvasiwidemaisvey.erimy yor Obl ete genus cues. seh colle mumacn me newene tenella rrsirne Sys onsie lata, n. sp. 

Mid tibia without a submedian anterodorsal bristle; thorax with four pairs of post- 
sutural dorsocentral bristles; abdomen entirely black, with rather conspicucus 
white-dusted bases to the tergites; third antennal segment not nearly half as 
Wwiderasr ey. ering promle sec neeia ere avarsie co ene SU eto Cuoiaies conchoveeleiaps parviseta, nN. sp. 

10. First, third and fifth wing-veins setulose on upper side; fourth vein faint, but 
evident beyond the preapical curve; mesonotum with three pairs of postsutural 
GorRsocentral bristle swine seme recrceuoee oetse aie aehiens imei esien eitenee sy eicis darwinit Malloch 

First and third wing-veins setulose above, fifth vein bare ...................... 11 

11. Lower stigmatal bristle undeveloped; fourth wing-vein very faint beyond the pre- 
apical curve; mesonotum with three pairs of postsutural dorsocentral bristles; 
first vein setulose from near base to apex above, and at apex below ............ 
Bic cere na Arm ne Ones tes lig A) 3 LOT ne ae Coan Preto, OB, TAG an RTM Oa hae oe brevis, Nn. sp. 

Lower stigmatal bristle long and strong, directed downward; fourth vein quite 
conspicuous beyond the apical curve; mesonotum with four pairs of post- 
suturals dorsocentraliobri ste spe cs ayes ot <i sos Ale) suey esac speeo aeaey ie alee doused macy eee 12 

12. First wing-vein setulose from near base on upper side;: abdomen entirely black, 
the tergites white-dusted at bases ................2002c 2s sees nigritula, n. sp. 

First wing-vein setulose only on apical portion beyond the slightly thickened 
portion; abdomen more or less largely yellow on sides .................. 13 

13. Frons of male when seen from the side and in front densely silvery-white dusted; 
inner cross-vein of wing a little proximad of middle of discal cell ............ 
ye RSet ace Ren Piao anti Bs yt clef] Pe MR RR a eR mR fa) at Ald) Se OPO oe argentifrons, n. sp. 

Frons of both sexes greyish-dusted on orbits, less evidently so on interfrontalia ; 
inner cross-vein of wing usually quite evidently beyond middle of discal cell 
Mea lata scauesel Vania teulavcnten suemeuemauenel ete embetter eels vei eee cs) ¢ sol aits Jae ONONe eRe ene tena Pane ae plebeia, Nn. sp. 


Subgenus ScHIzocEROMYIA Townsend. 
Phil. Journ. Sci., 29, 1926, 542. 


Tentatively I accept this subgenus, but I rather incline to the belief that it 
will ultimately be sunk as a synonym of Schizotachina. There are possibly four 
species in Australia, to judge from my material, and accepting valida Curran as 
distinct from those in my hands. I present some notes on the three forms avail- 
able now. 


ACTIA (SCHIZOCEROMYIA) FERGUSONI Bezzi. 


This species was the first one with fissicorn antennae described from 
Australia, and it is represented by a number of specimens of both sexes in my 
material. I have figured the antenna of the male, showing the much elongated 
second aristal segment (Fig. 32a). In addition to the characters already listed 
as distinguishing the male, it is worthy of mention that the mid tibia lacks the 
anterodorsal bristle beyond the middle, and the scutellum is shining black when 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 305 


seen from the side and slightly from behind, the apex being not at all paler than 
the disc. The female is similar to the male, but has the third antennal segment 
simple, and the abdomen is usually darker, generally entirely shining black, with 
white-dusted fasciae at bases of the tergites. 

Locality, Sydney, N.S.W., various dates, September-December (Health Dept.). 


ACTIA (SCHIZOCEROMYIA) VALIDA Curran. 

In his original description, Curran describes the arista of this species as 
having the second segment scarcely, if any, longer than the third. I have seen 
no examples that have the second segment so nearly equal to the third and, unless 
there is more variation in the genus than I at present suspect, it is probable that 
the species is not amongst my material. 


AcTIA (SCHIZOCEROMYIA) INVALIDA, 0. SD. 

This species is so very similar to fergusoni that it is necessary to mention 
only the distinctions between them to enable anyone to identify it. The antennal 
characters may be gleaned from a study of the figure (320) presented herein; and, 
in addition to this, the presence of a strong but rather short bristle about one- 
third from apex of mid tibia on its anterodorsal surface in the male will 
distinguish it from fergusoni. Curran does not mention whether this bristle is 
present or absent in valida. 

I at one time considered the present species as valida, but decided finally to 
accept it as distinct, pending further information on the above points. 

Length, 3-3-5 mm. 

Type, male, Sydney, N.S.W., 16.12.1923; allotype, same locality, 7.12.1923; para- 
types, same locality, 26.10.1924, 30.11.1924, 18.12.1923, and one no date; Collaroy, 
near Sydney, N.S.W., 24.1.1924 (EH. W. Ferguson). 


ACTIA (SCHIZOCEROMYIA) SP. 

I have a single male specimen before me which differs from fergusoni in 
having the second segment of the arista only about two-thirds as long as the 
third, and from invalida in having no anterodorsal bristle beyond middle of the 
mid tibia. It is possible that this specimen represents another species, but there 
is nothing to be gained by describing it from one example, so I leave it aside 
pending the receipt of more material. 

Locality, Warburton, Vict., 13.1.1924 (F. E. Wilson). 


Subgenus TARARACTIA, n. subgen. 

This subgenus approaches Talarocera Williston and Cryptocladocera Bezzi 
in the subdivision of the third antennal segment, but it is a true member of the 
Actiini, whereas the other two genera belong to distinct tribes. The structure 
of the insect, apart from that of the third antennal segment, is much the 
same as in fergusoni, but the lower stigmatal bristle is long, strong and down- 
wardly directed, the first wing-vein is setulose from about level of humeral 
cross-vein to apex on upper side and bare below, the third is setulose at base 
below and to a point about midway between inner cross-vein and its apex above, 
the apical section of fifth vein is about as long as the preapical one, and the 
outer cross-vein is about one-fourth of the distance between the inner cross-vein 
and the bend of fourth vein. 

Subgenotype, the following species. 


306 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


ACTIA (TALARACTIA) BALDWINI, Nn. SD. 

6. Head testaceous yellow, frontal orbits and occiput darkened, densely 
yellowish-grey dusted; antennae orange-yellow, third segment with the simple 
inner portion darkened apically; the filamented portion fuscous; palpi orange- 
yellow. Thorax black, densely brownish-grey dusted, not vittate. Abdomen 
glossy black, bases of visible tergites 2 to 4 narrowly white dusted. Legs black, 
fore coxae, trochanters, and tibiae testaceous yellow. Wings hyaline. Calyptrae 
white. Halteres yellow. 

Frons more than one-third of the head-width at vertex, normally bristled; 
eyes bare; parafacials not visible in profile except at upper extremities; antennae 
fully as long as face (Fig. 31). Mesonotum with four pairs of postsutural dorso- 
centrals, sternopleurals three. Apical bristles on tergites 2 to 4. Legs normal. 
First posterior cell ending almost exactly in wing-tip; bend of fourth vein 
rounded. 

Length, 3-5 mm. 

Type, Palm Is., Qld. (M. Taylor). 

Named in honour of Dr. A. H. Baldwin, of the Australian Institute of Tropical 
Medicine, Townsville, Queensland, who submitted the specimen for study. 


Subgenus AcriA Robineau-Desvoidy. 


There are several well defined groups in this subgenus, some of them readily 
distinguished by the nature of the armature of the wing-veins, and others by the 
chaetotaxy of the thorax. The remarkably strong lower stigmatal bristle in 
some of the species might be accepted by some authorities as sufficient basis for 
the erection of a distinct genus, but other characters do not bear this out, so 


Fig. 31.—Actia baldwini. Antenna. 

Fig. 32.—Actia fergusoni (a) and invalida (b). Third antennal segment. 

Fig. 33.—Actia norma. Wypopygium of male; a, from the side; b, from 
behind. 

Fig. 34.—Actia selangor. Hypopygium of male; a, from the side; b, from 
behind. 

Fig. 35.—Actia plebeia. Wypopygium of male; a, from the side; 6, from 
behind. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 307 


I leave the species listed hereunder as members of the subgenus Actia. In all 
species the parafacials are bare, except rarely just below level of lower frontal 
bristle. 


AcTIA (ACTIA) EUCOSMAE Bezzi. 

This species is readily distinguished from all the others now known from 
Australia by the complete lack of the fourth vein beyond its preapical bend, 
and the absence of setulae on the first vein. The dorsum of thorax has four 
pairs of postsutural dorsocentral bristles, the lower stigmatal bristle is undeveloped 
and the mid tibia lacks the anterodorsal submedian bristle in the male. 

Localities: Como, N.S.W.; and South Australia (A. H. Elston). I have also 
a male before me from the Philippines, which I cannot distinguish from this 
species. 


AcriA (AcTIA) NORMA Malloch. 

I described this species from one male specimen in one of my more recent 
papers in this series. I have now before me a large series containing both 
sexes and add a few more details of the structure. The postsutural dorsocentrals 
are three in number, the lower sternopleural bristle is usually slightly larger 
than the upper anterior one, the male has an anterodorsal submedian bristle 
on the mid tibia, the lower stigmatal bristle is undeveloped, the first vein is bare, 
the third is setulose above to, or nearly to, the inner cross-vein, the outer cross- 
vein is a little nearer to bend of fourth than to the inner cross-vein and about 
its own length from the apex of fifth. 

Localities: Sydney, Kuring-gai, and Barrington Tops, N.S.W.; Beaconsfield, 
Vict.; and Narrogin, W.A. Twenty-four specimens representing both sexes, 
September-February. 

The species is very similar to selangor Malloch, but differs in the structure 
of the hypopygium (Figs. 33 and 34); selangor is an Oriental species. 


AcCTIA (ACTIA) LATA, N. SD. 

6. Head testaceous yellow, upper half of occiput black on each side, grey- 
dusted, frontal orbits, face,and cheeks, with dense yellowish-grey dust; antennae 
and aristae black; palpi testaceous yellow. Thorax black, mesonotum densely 
yellowish-grey dusted, with faint traces of four dark vittae, apex of scutellum 
slightly yellowish. Abdomen testaceous yellow, first and second visible tergites 
each with a large central black spot, third black except at anterior lateral angles 
above, fourth all black above, each tergite with a centrally interrupted white- 
dusted basal fascia that is about one-third of the length of tergite on fourth. 
Legs black, fore coxae and the trochanters testaceous yellow, tibiae brownish, 
possibly sometimes paler. Wings hyaline. Calyptrae yellowish-white. Halteres 
yellow. 

Frons at vertex about one-third of the head-width, slightly widened anteriorly, 
with the usual bristling, ocellars not very strong; parafacials bare below the 
lower frontal bristle, linear below, third antennal segment extending to mouth- 
margin, and about half as wide as eye in profile; second segment of arista a 
little longer than thick; palpi normal; proboscis not very thick. Thorax with 
three pairs of postsutural dorsocentral bristles; apical scutellar bristles very 
short and fine, the preapical discals hardly longer; lower sternopleural bristle 
minute, the upper anterior one as long as posterior one; lower stigmatal bristle 


308 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN. DIPTERA, XXiv, 


undeveloped. Abdomen with two apical central bristles on second visible tergite, 
and six rather short bristles at apex of fourth. Legs normal, mid tibiae lacking 
in type. Outer cross-vein of wing about mid-way from inner cross-vein to bend 
of fourth vein and at about its own length from apex of fifth, inner cross-vein 
at middle of discal cell; first vein bare, third with setulae up to inner cross-vein; 
bend of fourth vein broadly rounded. 

Length, 3-5 mm. 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W., 18.12.23 (Health Dept.). One specimen. 


AcTIA (ACTIA) PARVISETA, 0. SD. 

6. Head testaceous yellow, occiput almost all black, grey dusted, inter- 
frontalia red, frontal orbits, face, and cheeks, densely greyish-yellow dusted; 
palpi testaceous yellow; antennae and aristae black. Thorax and abdomen 
shining black, both with greyish dust, the abdomen with the dust more yellowish 
and very dense on bases of visible tergites 2 to 4, where it forms a basal fascia 
which is very distinctly interrupted in centre on each. Legs black, only the 
trochanters more or less yellowish. Wings hyaline. Calyptrae and halteres 
brownish-yellow. 

Head in profile almost vertical in front, the parafacials of almost equal 
width on entire extent, not narrowed below; frontal orbits as wide as inter- 
frontalia; parafacials bare below lower frontal bristle; third antennal segment 
extending almost to vibrissae, not more than one-third the width of the eye in 
profile; arista distinctly pubescent, second segment fully twice as long as thick; 
palpi normal. Thorax with four pairs of postsutural dorsocentrals, the posterior 
pair only long; lower sternopleural about half as long as upper anterior one, 
the latter subequal to posterior one; apical scutellar bristles very short and fine. 
Abdomen broadly ovate, apical bristles on all tergites very much shorter and finer 
than usual. Fore tibia with the anterodorsal setulae longer and stronger than 
usual and forming an almost complete series, basal segment of fore tarsi rather 
longer setulose above than usual; other tibiae with the bristles much shorter 
than usual, none of them longer than diameter of tibia, the mid pair lacking 
the anterodorsal submedian bristle, the hind pair with almost complete series 
of short setulae on anterodorsal and posterodorsal surfaces. Wing venation as 
in lata, the sixth vein incomplete. 

Length, 3-5-4 mm. 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W., 16.12.23 (Health Dept.) ; one paratype, Collaroy, N.S.W., 
24.1.1924 (EH. W. Ferguson). 


ActiaA (ACTIA) DARWINI Malloch. 

I described this species from a single male in my preceding paper on the 
family. I have now before me the female and some other examples, and give 
the additional locality records. The female is similar to the male, but has the 
yellow colour of the abdomen reduced in extent, confined to the sides of first, 
or first and second visible tergites, and the tarsi are a little darkened. 

The female used in drawing up the above details is the allotype. 

Type, male, Darwin, N. Aust., 11.10.1916 (G. F. Hill); allotype, Sydney, 
N.S.W., 25.1.1925; other specimens, Sydney, March, 1921, and 26.1.1921; Coramba, 
N.S.W., 15.2.1925. 

This species is not very closely related to ewcosmae Bezzi, in which the 
fourth wing-vein is obsolete beyond the bend. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 309 


AcTIA (ACTIA) BREVIS, 0. Sp. 


6. Very similar to the preceding species and possibly but a variant of it, 
differing as it does essentially only in having the inner cross-vein at about. two- 
fifths from apex of discal cell, the abdomen darker, more like the female of 
darwini, the fifth vein without setulae, and the third with the setulae on the 
upper side not so far extended apically. I have reason to doubt its specific 
distinctness, because of the presence on one wing of a fine setula near base of 
the discal cell on fifth vein. Possibly an examination of the hypopygia would 
settle the matter, but I have only one male of brevis and do not desire to destroy 
its appearance by dissection, so prefer to await the discovery of more specimens 
for an opportunity to test the validity of the species. 

Length, 3-5 mm. 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W., March, 1921 (Health Dept.). 


AcTIA (ACTIA) NIGRITULA, nN. Sp. 


°. Head testaceous, occiput largely fuscous, interfrontalia yellow, frontal 
orbits, face, and cheeks densely whitish-grey dusted; basal two antennal segments 
and palpi testaceous yellow, third antennal segment black, arista fuscous. Thorax 
black, rather densely greyish dusted, without evident vittae. Abdomen glossy 
black, with a centrally interrupted narrow basal fascia of white dust on tergites 
2 to 4. Legs black. Wings greyish hyaline. Calyptrae white. MHalteres yellow. 

Interfrontalia a little narrower than either orbit, frontal armature strong, 
the ocellars quite long, no hairs below the lower frontal, parafacial linear 
below; third antennal segment hardly more than twice as long as_ second, 
extending almost to vibrissae; second segment of arista about twice as long as 
thick; palpi not much dilated at apices. Thorax with four pairs of postsutural 
dorsocentral bristles, the lower stigmatal long and strong, directed downward, 
lower sternopleural nearly as long as anterior one, the latter shorter than the 
posterior one; apical scutellar bristles of moderate length and cruciate. Abdomen 
with the apical tergal bristles long. Legs normal. Wings almost identical with 
those of darwini, but the fourth vein is distinct to apex, and the fifth vein is 
entirely bare above. 

Length, 35-45 mm. 

Type, and one paratype, Cairns, N. Queensland (Dodd); paratypes, Sydney, 
N.S.W., 21.11.1920; Coramba, N.S.W., 15.2.1925. Four specimens. 

This species is most closely related to monticola Malloch, from the Philippines, 
but the fourth wing-vein beyond the bend is different, and the third antennal 
segment is shorter. 


AcTiaA (ACTIA) ARGENTIFRONS, 0. SD. 


6. Head whitish-yellow, densely silvery-white dusted, the frons when seen 
from one side in front entirely white dusted, the interfrontalia not darker than 
the orbits, occiput largely blackened on the sides; antennae orange-yellow, 
third segment dark brown except at base and narrowly below, aristae concolorous 
with antennae; palpi orange-yellow. Thorax black, densely grey-dusted, apex 
of scutellum slightly testaceous yellow. Abdomen glossy-black, sides of first 
three tergites translucent yellow, bases of tergites quite conspicuously white- 
dusted, the fasciae interrupted in middle. Legs black, fore coxae, the trochanters, 


310 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


apices of fore femora, and the fore tibiae, yellow, mid and hind tibiae brownish. 
Wings greyish-hyaline. Calyptrae yellowish-white. _Halteres yellow. 

Frons at vertex about one-half of the head-width, slightly widened in front, 
the interfrontalia more than twice as wide as either orbit, the latter with the 
usual bristles, ocellars of moderate length; third antennal segment extending 
almost to mouth margin, about three times as long as second, and of moderate 
width; second aristal segment about three times as long as thick; palpi normal; 
parafacials linear below. Thorax with four pairs of postsutural dorsocentrals, 
the lower stigmatal bristle very long and strong, directed downward, lower and 
anterior sternopleural bristles about equally long; apical pair of scutellar bristles 
rather well developed. Abdomen narrowly ovate, with normal bristling. Mid 
tibia with the submedian anterodorsal bristle strong. Wings almost as in the 
preceding species, the inner cross-vein a little proximad of middle of discal cell. 

Length, 3-5 mm. 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W., 2.12.1921 (Health Dept.). One specimen. 


ACTIA (ACTIA) PLEBEIA, 0. SD. 


3, . Very similar to the preceding species, but the interfrontalia is yellow 
and well differentiated from the grey-dusted frontal orbits; the latter are fully 
half as wide as the interfrontalia, the ocellar bristles are longer and stronger, 
the hind tibial bristles are longer and stronger, especially on the anterodorsal 
surface, and the mid and hind tibiae paler than in argentifrons, and the inner 
cross-vein is slightly beyond the middle of the discal cell. 

From hyalinata Malloch, an Oriental species. this one differs but slightly, 
the hypopygia being rather similar. The third antennal segment in hyalinata 
is more than four times as long as the second, and it is narrower than in plebeia. 
In all three species the arista is rather noticeably pubescent. I figure the hypo- 
pygium of plebeia (Fig. 35). In hyalinata the inferior forceps are more curved 
and more distinctly dilated at apices. 

Length, 3-5-4:-5 mm. 

Type, Coramba, N.S.W., 15.2.1925; allotype, Sydney, N.S.W., 26.12.1920; para- 
types, Sydney, N.S.W., 9.1.1924; March, 1921; 13.4.1925; 25.9.1921; and one with 
no date. 

There is no doubt that many more species of this genus will be found in 
this country as there are a large number of species in the Orient, Hurope, the 
Americas and Africa, though so far none has been recorded from New Zealand. 
None of the Known species exceeds 6 mm. in length. 


Tribe LINNAEMYIINI. 
Genus CHAETOPHTHALMUS Brauer and Bergenstamm. 
(Amphibolosia Surcouf. ) 


The genus Amphibolosia was described by Surcouf in 1920 in his “Revision 
of the Muscidae Testacea” for the reception of Ochromyia flavipennis Macquart 
1851, not 1843. I have listed the references to both in my catalogue, the first 
one, from Brazil, being a valid species, and the Australian one obviously invalid, 
being a homonym. In connection with Surcouf’s work there are several points 
that appear worthy of notice. He very fully describes Macquart’s type, but 
nowhere does he indicate the characters of the arista. On Plate V he figures 
the species from dorsal view entire. On the same plate we find a figure labelled 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 311 


Via, but there is no such figure listed in the explanation of the plate, though 
there is a figure Va which is listed as the head of Amphibolosia flavipennis. 
If one examines this last figure carefully it will be noticed that the arista, instead 
of being represented by sharp complete engraved lines, is merely dotted in, 
and though I note no mention of the lack of this in the type I am certain that 
this was really the case and that the artist merely drew upon his imagination 
to fill out the figure. 

Bezzi (Buli. Ent. Res., 17, pt. 3, 1927, 244) records the species as having been 
recognized by him from Sydney, N.S.W. 

He possibly did not connect the figures of the head and the entire insect on 
Surcouf’s plate, but he did state that the arista is bare. He does not indicate 
the relationships of the genus, which he evidently accepts, nor does he mention 
that the palpi are minute. Surcouf does not show the palpi in his figure, which 
is not remarkable, as they are frequently difficult to see. Had Bezzi related 
the figures, I am certain that he would have been of the same opinion as I am, 
that Amphibolosia is a synonym of Chaetophthalmus. 

It is not possible, of course, to make certain of the identity of Macquart’s 
species, but I am fairly certain that it is merely brevigaster Macquart, as it 
agrees in all details with what appears to be the commonest species of the genus 
in Australia. 


CHAETOPHTHALMUS BISERIATUS, Nl. Sp. 

6. Similar in general coloration and structure to brevigaster Macquart. 
Head reddish-yellow, with yellow dust which is paler and somewhat changeable 
on the frontal orbits; third antennal segment browned apically above; palpi 
yellow. Thorax reddish or fulvous yellow, dorsum broadly black to hind margin, 
the dark portion with whitish dust and four narrow black vittae; pleura with 
yellow dust, sternopleura dark on lower portion; all pleural hairs dark. Abdomen 
coloured as thorax, dorsum broadly black at base, more narrowly so on second 
tergite, the vitta widening on third and fourth, the dust on dark portion whitish, 
on sides yellowish. Legs fulvous, apical two segments of each tarsus dark. 
Wings yellowish hyaline. Calyptrae and halteres fulvous yellow. 

Eyes densely haired; frons at vertex about one-third of the head-width, 
orbits at centre as wide as interfrontalia, each with two proclinate outer bristles 
and a series of inner marginal incurved bristles as well as many fine hairs, the 
hairs sparse on entire extent of parafacials, the latter not as wide as third antennal 
segment, which is slightly concave on upper surface. Thorax with three plus 
three dorsocentrals, four plus three acrostichals, no posterior sublateral bristle, 
and one plus one sternopleurals. Abdomen ovate, with a pair of central apical 
bristles on second and third visible tergites and a preapical and apical series on 
fourth; third and fourth sternites each with a dense complete series or fringe 
of stiff black hairs across apex and for a short distance before it; fifth sternite 
deeply cleft, the inner apical angles of processes rounded, slightly darkened, and 
without exceptional armature. Legs as in brevigaster; mid tibia with a sub- 
median ventral bristle. Bend of fourth vein angular. 

Length, 7-5 mm. 

Type, Narromine, N.S.W., no other data. One specimen. 

Distinguished from brevigaster by the presence of an apical fringe on the 
third sternite. This fringe and the one on fourth sternite is more dense and 
broader, hence more conspicuous, than the one on fourth sternite in brevigaster. 


312 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


Tribe CYLINDROMYIINI. 
Genus CYLINDROMYIA Meigen. 


Since the completion of my last paper on this tribe I have received some 
additional species which are dealt with below. One species has the centre of the 
propleura haired, and will thus fall in the first segregate of my generic key, 
being distinguished from all the included genera by the high, vertical, entirely 
chitinous, area above bases of hind coxae and below the base of the abdomen. 
The bare arista and the lack of a vertical carina on the face are additional 
distinguishing characters. 

Below I present a key for the identification of the species now available, 
with descriptions of the new species, and data upon the distribution. 


Key to the Species. 


1. Centre of the propleura haired; first visible abdominal tergite narrowed apically, 
and with a pair of well developed discal, as well as a pair of apical central 
bristles; apical venation of wing as in Figure 36; glossy black species, humeri, 
apex of first visible abdominal tergite, apex and base of second, and the base of 
third, and a broad patch on entire length of dorsum of fourth tergite, densely 
yellow dusted; legs tawny yellow, coxae, fore femora, except their apices, and 


alll athe qatarsiss: Dlaic key sys ee ete aa ee 5 sk ate) pee Tree Manes nigricosta, Nn. sp. 
Centre of the propleura bare; first visible abdominal tergite wider at apex than at 
baseyand) withoultmdiscal@bnistlesmancsa- ce ocialeel cic serene oie ERO AIR acien isicic 2 

2. Thorax and abdomen glossy black, with white-dusted markings .............. 3 
Thorax usually black, abdomen largely red or reddish-yellow basally, both with 
whitewonnyvellowishwdustedamnanrkwine sy 4) ys coord oo eee eee 4 

3. Genitalia of the female with a process on each side (Fig. 37) .... sydneyensis, n. sp. 
Genitalia of the female without a process on each side (Fig. 38) .... atratula, n. sp. 


4. Pleura largely testaceous yellow; costa of wing quite distinctly, and rather broadly 
browned; fourth abdominal sternite of male without any short stout bristles 
at apex in centre; apical venation of wing as Figure 40 ...... brunnea, nN. sp. 

Entire thorax black; wings not, or very faintly, browned along the costa ........ 5 

Abdomen with black dorsocentral spots or vitta on one or both of the red segments 
of basal portion, first visible tergite with a very narrow apical white-dusted 


oO 


PASC Ay Bea isle dec wey cnet dicule Cate werea emM enn e aefeaas oak tis wei ar taatabyi CORO MEME Lo cearauS ei favte flavifrons Macquart 
Abdomen lacking black dorsocentral spots or vitta on first and second visible 
tergites, the former without a white-dusted apical fascia ...... tricolor, n. sp. 


N.B.—I am unable to include tristis Bigot in the above key through lack of 
information on certain structural features. If it belongs to this genus and has the 
centre of the propleura bare, it will run down to the segregate containing 
sydneyensis and atratula, from both of which it may be distinguished by its 
larger size (14 mm.), dark margins to the lower calyptrae, and the presence of 
dark clouding along the wing veins. 


CYLINDROMYIA NIGRICOSTA, nN. Sp. 


3. Head black, frontal orbits and parafacials densely yellow dusted, the 
latter becoming whitish dusted below, centre of face, all of cheeks, and lower half 
of occiput, silvery-white dusted, upper occiput shining, but lightly dusted, upper 
postocular orbits brownish dusted; antennae, aristae, and proboscis black; inter- 
frontalia dull black; genal and occipital hairs yellowish-white. Thorax black, 
humeri densely golden-yellow dusted, mesonotum when seen from behind with 
white dust which is almost uniform behind suture, but broken and vittiform 
presuturally, the central vitta most distinct; scutellum and pleura slightly white 
dusted. Abdomen black, with two narrow golden-yellow annuli, one at suture 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 313 


between first and second visible tergites, the other at that between second and 
third, fourth tergite with a large discal mark of same coloured dust. Legs 
tawny-yellow, coxae, the greater part of fore femora, and all of tarsi fuscous. 
Wings hyaline, with a dark-brown costal streak from base, which fills all of the 
area anterior to fourth vein up to, or slightly beyond, inner cross-vein, and from 
there to apex of first posterior cell extends a little over third vein. Calyptrae 
yellowish-white. Halteres yellow. 

Frons at vertex a little more than one-sixth of the head width, inner verticals 
long but fine, upper postocular ciliae quite prominent, ocellars not differentiated, 
orbits linear above, widened below, with rather closely placed, quite long, fine 


Fig. 86.—Cylindromyia nigricosta. Apex of wing. 

Fig. 37.—Cylindromyia sydneyensis. Apex of abdomen of female from the 
side. 

Fig. 38.—Cylindromyia atratula. Apex of abdomen of female from the 
side. 

Fig. 39.—Cylindromyia atratula. Apex of wing. 

Fig. 40.—Cylindromyia brunnea. Apex of wing. 


bristles along their inner margins, and mesad of these some shorter and finer 
hairs, interfrontalia of uniform width throughout its length; antennae more than 
four-fifths of the facial length, third segment nearly twice as long as second; 
arista subnude; parafacial as wide as third antennal segment; cheek twice as 
high as width of third antennal segment; vibrissa long; cheek rather long haired 
on raised portion; palpi undeveloped. Thorax with the prosternal plate bare, 
the dorsal hairs and bristles long and erect, the dorsocentrals three or four plus 
four; scutellum with two strong bristles on each side, the second one from base 
diverging apically, the apical bristles fine and long, curving upward; sterno- 
pleurals fine, two plus one, not well differentiated from the surrounding hairs. 
Abdomen narrowed at base, all tergites with apical and discal bristles, those on 
disc of fourth weak, fourth sternite with about five short stout spines in centre 
near apex and a long bristle on each side at same level. Mid tibia with a sub- 
median ventral bristle; hind femur with bristles on basal half or more of the 


314 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPIERA, XXiv, 


anteroventral and posteroventral surfaces; tarsal claws and pulvilli on all legs 
longer than the fifth tarsal segment. Third wing-vein with several fine hairs 
at base above and below; petiole of first posterior cell short; apical venation 
as Figure 36. 

Length, 11 mm. 

Type, Kosciusko, N.S.W., 7.12.1922 (Goldfinch). One specimen. 


CYLINDROMYIA ATRATULA, Nl. SD. 


6, 2. Shining black, with white-dusted markings. Frontal orbits of male 
yellow-dusted, those of female white-dusted anteriorly, shining black posteriorly; 
interfrontalia dull-black; face, parafacials, cheeks, lower occiput, and upper 
postocular orbits, silvery-white dusted, upper occiput shining, with slight dusting; 
antennae, aristae, and proboscis black, third antennal segment slightly reddish 
at base on inner side; genal and lower occipital hairs pale. Thorax with white 
dusting on dorsum, which leaves two broad shining black vittae in front of 
suture and a broad central postsutural black mark; pleura with a vertical 
silvery-white erect stripe over anterior margin and another above mid coxae. 
Abdomen with the sutures between first and second and second and third visible 
tergites silvery-white dusted. Legs black, all coxae and the posterior surface 
of fore femora silvery-white dusted. Wings greyish hyaline. Calyptrae yellowish- 
white. Halteres fuscous. 

Frons of male about one-fourth of the head width at vertex, orbits of almost 
uniform width except anteriorly, and each as wide as interfrontalia on uvper 
half, inner vertical bristles strong and long, ocellars distinct, each orbit with about 
eight incurved bristles along inner margin; frons of female a little wider 
than that of male, the orbits not as wide as interfrontalia above, and each with 
at least one forwardly-directed outer upper bristle; face quite noticeably convex, 
almost carinate above in centre, visible in profile, parafacial not as wide as third 
antennal segment, the latter extending almost to mouth margin, broader than in 
nigricosta, and more than one and a half times as long as second segment; arista 
‘subnude, swollen at base; cheek in profile very narrow owing to a quite 
pronounced infolding of the central lower part. Thorax with the dorsal hairs 
sparse, the dorsocentrals two or three plus three; sternopleurals one plus one; 
scutellum as in the preceding species, but the apical bristles are cruciate and do 
not curve upward. Abdomen without discal bristles, except on fourth visible 
tergite, the apical bristles present; genitalia of female as in Figure 38; fourth 
sternite of the male with two central apical bristles and a longer bristle on 
each side at apex, which are not so strong as in nigricosta. Third wing-vein 
with one or two setulae at base above and below; apical venation as in Figure 39. 

Length, 5-6 mm. 

Type, female, Sydney, N.S.W., 6.11.1921; allotype and one male paratype, 
same locality, March, 1921, and 30.10.1921, respectively (Health Dept.). The para- 
type lacks the head. 


CYLINDROMYIA SYDNEYENSIS, Nn. sp. 


9. This species is quite similar to the preceding one, but it is considerably 
larger, the pleura are more evenly white-dusted, the female genitalia are furnished 
with a process on each side near base (Fig. 37), and the prosternal plate has 
a pair of quite strong bristly hairs which are lacking in atratula. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 315 


Unfortunately the head is broken off in the only specimen available and 
the male is not amongst my material, so that it is not possible to describe the 
species completely. There are indications, however, that there may be venational 
differences, as there is almost no trace of a spur vein at the preapical angle of 
the fourth vein, and the latter is more noticeably curved at its extremity than 
in atratula. 

Length, 7-5 mm. (estimated with head present). 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W. (C. Gibbons). 


CYLINDROMYIA BRUNNEA, N. SD. 

6. Reddish-brown, distinctly shining, with yellow or white dusted markings. 
Interfrontalia chocolate-brown, paler on sides, frontal orbits, and parafacials 
golden-yellow dusted, the face paler dusted, cheeks and lower occiput white-dusted, 
upper occiput fuscous, yellow-dusted; antennae orange, third segment black, 
except at base and below; aristae black; proboscis rufous at base, black apically; 
genal hairs black in front, pale behind. Mesonotum more or less bronzy, with 
yellowish dust which leaves four incomplete dark vittae; scutellum fuscous, with 
a bronzy tinge; pleura brownish-yellow, rather evenly yellowish-dusted. 
Abdomen reddish-brown, with the dorsocentral region darker, bases of all tergites 
broadly, and apices of second and third narrowly, pale-dusted. Legs red, extreme 
apices of femora and all of tarsi fuscous. Wings browned, darker along costa 
much as in nigricosta, but the dark cloud not as clearly defined as in that species. 
Calyptrae white, with yellow border. MHalteres brown. 

Frons at vertex about one-fourth of the head-width, verticals irregular 
in type, but the inner one strong, ocellars distinct; orbits narrowed above, at 
middle about half as wide as interfrontalia, each with about ten inner marginal 
bristles; parafacial not as wide as third antennal segment, the latter rather 
broad for this genus, and not much longer than second segment, extending to 
about three-fourths of the facial length; face in centre slightly vertically convex, 
produced below; arista subnude. Thorax with the prosternal plate bare, three 
plus three dorsocentrals, sternopleura with two bristles and some long hairs; 
scutellum as in atratula. Abdomen with bristles as in that species, fourth 
sternite without strong apical central bristles. Mid femur with an irregular 
and almost complete series of bristles on the anteroventral surface and a similar 
series on posteroventral surface; mid tibia with a strong submedian ventral 
bristle; hind femur with bristling much as the mid pair, but the posteroventral 
series is not continued to apex; hind tibia with about four strong anteroventral 
bristles; all tarsal claws and pulvilli longer than the fifth tarsal segment. 
Apical venation of wing as Figure 40. 

Length, 9 mm. 

Type, Perth, W.A. (J. Clark). One specimen. 


CYLINDROMYIA FLAVIFRONS Macquart. 
I have already fully described this species. I have now on hand specimens from 
the following localities: Sydney,. Barrington Tops, Manly, Tarro, Toronto, Mt. 
Kosciusko, Wentworth Falls, and Perth. 


CYLINDROMYIA TRICOLOR, Ni. sp. 
@. This species is very similar to the preceding one, differing, in addition to 
the manner stated in the foregoing key, in having the mesonotal dusting yellowish 


316 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 
a 


on lateral anterior margins, and the preapical bend of the fourth wing-vein 
rounded and without a spur-vein, similar to that of brunnea, instead of angular 
and with a more or less elongate spur-vein which is the case in flavifrons. 

Length, 8-5 mm. 

Type, “Allowrie”, Killara, N.S.W., 17.11.1920. One specimen. 

There are, in all probability, many more species of this interesting genus 
yet to be discovered in Australia. The genitalia of both sexes provide characters 
for the distinction of the species, but, except in one case, I have not been 
compelled to depend upon these for specific distinction. 


Tribe TACHININI. 

I have in the following pages segregated the species into groups by means 
of characters which I make use of in my generic key, heading the group with 
a short diagnosis of such character or characters as are met with in all the species, 
and where the genus is not included in my key I give a summary of the characters 
by means of which it may be distinguished from its nearest allies that are 
so included. 


Section with hairs at apices of hind coxae above bases of femora. 


In its most restricted sense this tribe is poorly represented in the Australian 
material now in my hands, only one genus being at present known to me. If we 
use as the typical forms those most closely related to the genus TJachina Meigen 
as at present accepted (= Hchinomyia Dumeril), the distinguishing characters 
are to be found in the presence of hairs on the hind coxae above bases of the 
femora, and the short and peculiarly-shaped third antennal segment, which is 
usually not longer, and often much shorter, than the second segment. 


Genus CUPHOCERA Macquart. 

This genus is distinguished from all others in its restricted tribe by the very 
small palpi, the lack of ocellar bristles, and the presence of one or two strong 
bristles on the lower portion of the parafacials. This last character it has in 
common with Peleteria Robineau-Desvoidy, but the latter has long palpi. 

There are three species in my present material which are dealt with below. 
The most dependable characters for the distinction of the species are to be found 
in the structures of the male hypopygia and, as a reliable guide to the identities 
of the species now dealt with, I figure these organs for each species. 


Key to the Species. (Males.) 


1. Fifth abdominal sternite without strong bristles on any part of its surface (Fig. 42) 
BRAT CECA HERON Cae Oe RS Sea IDO" o: 0- Ob REE er Ea meta aah Gi ota: qlyO RAAB NO heed pilosa, n. sp. 


Fifth abdominal sternite with a number of long strong bristles on each lobe .... 2 
2. Third antennal segment very little shorter than second; palpi extremely short, 
papilla=likey (Gio NAA) eee ee ears terrace ualsci iar a uabaaniatin sted toh aoe Cineus Becta a aiieee emmesia, n. sp. 


Third antennal segment very distinctly shorter than second (Fig. 44a); palpi longer 
TOAST TR ERO COTE, SROs EO 0G, CED EN ROMEO ER Sock GEOG Cee iio Gud Dict cel cae setigera, n. sp. 


CUPHOCERA PILOSA, 0. SD. 

6, 2. Head yellow, with dense yellow dust, almost golden, interfrontalia red; 
third antennal segment fuscous except at base and below in male, more narrowly 
darkened above in female; aristae black; proboscis black; palpi yellow; occipital 
and most of the genal and parafacial hairs golden-yellow, remainder of hairs and 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 317 


the postocular ciliae black. Thorax black, slightly shining, with quite dense yellowish 
dusting which is slightly changeable, leaving four rather broad bronzy-black vittae 
on the mesonotum, the submedian pair not continued to the hind margin, the 
sublateral pair narrowly broken at the suture; scutellum dark along middle. 
Abdomen coloured as the thorax, more distinctly shining, and with grey checkered 
dusting somewhat similar to that on the abdomen of many species of the genus 
Sarcophaga; hypopygium tawny-yellow. Legs black, tibiae more or less evidently 
brownish or reddish. Wings greyish hyaline. Calyptrae yellowish-white. Halteres 
brownish-yellow. 

Eyes bare; frons at vertex nearly one-third of the head-width in male, more 
than one-third of the head-width in female, similarly armed in both sexes, the 
orbits wider than interfrontalia above, each with two forwardly-directed outer 


Fig. 41.—Cuphocera pilosa. Hypopygium of male; a, from the side; b, from below, 
one side. 

Fig. 42.—Cuphocera pilosa. Fifth sternite of male; a, from above; b, from below. 

Fig. 43.—Cuphocera pilosa. Antennae of female (a), and male (b). 


Fig. 44..—-Cuphocera emmesia. a, head from side, and antenna of setigera (Db). 

Fig. 45.—Cuphocera setigera. Hypopygium of male; a, from the side; b, from 
below, one side. 

Fig. 46.—Cuphocera setigera. Fifth sternite; a, from above; b, from below. 

Fig. 47.—Cuphocera emmesia. a. fifth sternite, right side, from above, left side, 
from below; b, hypopygium from below, one side. 


bristles, four verticals, and no ocellars; parafacials as wide as third antennal 
segment, with two strong bristles and many fine hairs; antennae as Figure 43; 
palpi fully as long as basal two segments of arista. Thorax with three plus four 
dorsocentrals, three plus three acrostichals, three postsutural intra-alars, five 
bristles on the presutural lateral area, the prealar long and strong, three sterno- 
pleurals, prosternum, centre of the propleura, and the regions above and below 
lower calypter, bare. Abdomen with apical bristles on visible tergites 2 to 4, 
and discals on 4; hypopygium and fifth sternite as Figures 41 and 42. Inner cross- 
vein of wing well proximad of level of apex of first vein, outer cross-vein not more 


318 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


than half as far from bend of fourth vein as from inner cross-vein; first posterior 
cell ending well in front of apex of wing; third vein with setulae at base above 
and below. Hind coxae soft-haired at apices above bases of femora; mid tibia 
with a strong submedian ventral bristle; apical four segments of fore tarsi in 
female quite distinctly widened. 

Length, 10 mm. 

Type, male, allotype, and one male paratype, Woy Woy, N.S.W., 2.9.1928, and 
410.1925 (Nicholson). Type and paratype labelled “Sand Bush” and taken on 
same date. 

CUPHOCERA SETIGERA, 0. SD. 

6. Differs from the preceding species in having the hairs on parafacials 
partly and most of those on the cheeks, black, the abdomen largely reddish-brown, 
most markedly so on the sides, and yellow-dusted, the tibiae paler, and the halteres 
dull-yellow. 

Structurally similar, but larger, the parafacials wider, second antennal segment 
longer (Fig. 44a), and the hypopygium and fifth abdominal sternite as Figures 
45 and 46. 

Length, 13-5 mm. 

Type and one paratype, Kosciusko, N.S.W., 5,000 feet, 14.3.1920, and 6,000 feet, 
13.3.1920; no other data. 


CUPHOCERA EMMESIA, N. SD. 

6. Similar in size and general appearance to pilosa. but with the dust of 
thorax and abdomen grey, and the frontal orbits more greyish-dusted than in that 
species. There is also a larger number of black hairs on the parafacials and 
cheeks, the central portions of the tibiae are quite noticeably yellowish, and the 
veins are slightly darkened on apical portions of wings. 

Head as Figure 44; the palpi are very small. Fifth abdominal sternite as 
Figure 47, hypopygium almost as in pilosa. 

Length, 10 mm. 

Type, Geraldton, W.A., 5.9.1926 (EK. W. Ferguson). 

CUPHOCERA SP. 

A female which appears to belong to a fourth species has the third antennal 
segment entirely black, not much widened, rounded at apex, and about three-fourths 
as long as second segment. This may be Micropalpus vittatus Macquart. 

Length, 11 mm. 

Locality: Sydney, N.S.W., 3.9.1922 (Health Dept.). 

It may be pertinent to note that this genus will run down to Caption 24 in 
my key to the Australian genera where it will readily separate from the genera 
with the palpi aborted by the apically haired hind coxae, all the others having the 
hind coxae without hairs at apices above the bases of the femora. 


Section with outer cross-vein not distinctly nearer to bend of fourth vein than 
to inner cross-vein, first posterior cell open, and erect apical or 
discal scutellar bristles. 


Genus VoriA Robineau-Desvoidy. 
The present is the first record of this genus from Australia. It belongs to 
the group in which the outer cross-vein of the wing connects with the fourth at 


BY J.-R. MALLOCH. 319 


a point not much nearer to the bend of the latter than to the inner cross-vein. 
In my generic key Voria will run down to Caption 17a, where it is readily 
distinguished from Hyleorus Aldrich by the presence of only a few hairs or setulae 
instead of a series of strong bristles above the vibrissae, and from Calcageria 
Curran, a New Zealand genus, by the presence of only one strong downwardly- 
directed bristle on each parafacial, which is situated above the middle, instead 
of a series of about six such bristles. The venation of the wing is somewhat 
different from that of Calcageria, but I do not emphasize this character. The 
scutellum has several long erect bristles on disc near apex as in most related 
genera, the abdomen lacks discal bristles, and the second segment of the arista 
is about as thick as long. The fifth wing-vein, though generally accepted as bare, 
has sometimes one or more bristles on upper side near the base. 


VoRIA RURALIS Meigen. 


This species, the genotype, occurs in Hurope and North America. It is also 
the genotype of Plagia Meigen. The larvae parasitize the larvae of Lepidoptera in 
Europe. I figure the hypopygium of the male (Fig. 48), and the head (Fig. 49), 
from Australian examples. 

The species is shining black, with dense grey or yellowish dust on head, in 
the American specimens often golden-yellow on frons, and whitish dust on thorax 
and abdomen, the thoracic dorsum quadrivittate, and the abdominal tergites quite 
broadly fasciate with dust at bases; antennae black, second segment yellowish at 


Fig. 48.—Voria ruralis. Hypopygium of male from the side. 

Fig. 49.—Voria ruralis. Head from the side (male). 

Fig. 50.—Plagiprospherysa acuminata. Head of male from the side. 
Fig. 51.—Plagiprospherysa acuminata. Apex of wing. 

Fig. 52.—Stomatomyia micropalpis. Head from the side, male. 
Fig. 55.—Vorina setibasis. Apex of wing. 


320 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


apex, palpi black, paler at apices. Legs black. Wings greyish hyaline. Calyptrae 
yellowish-white. 

Frons about one-third of the head-width at vertex in both sexes, frontal 
orbits wider than the interfrontalia at anterior extremities, and with forwardly- 
directed outer bristles in both sexes. Thorax with three plus three dorsocentrals, 
and three sternopleurals almost equilaterally arranged. 

Length, 7-8 mm. 

Locality: Sydney, N.S.W., 29.5.1910, 27.11.1920, 2.12.1920, 29.11.1921, and 
Narrandera, 25.3.1925. Nine specimens. 


Genus PLAGIPROSPHERYSA Townsend. 


This genus is very similar to Stomatomyia Brauer and Bergenstamm, being 
distinguished therefrom by the much less distinctly haired eyes, the absence of 
discal abdominal bristles on the second and third tergites, and the larger palpi. 
The validity of the genus is doubtful, but I retain it for the present. 

I identify, as occurring in Australia, the following European species: 


PLAGIPROSPHERYSA ACUMINATA Rondani. 


Very similar to Voria ruralis Meigen in coloration, but the frons, face, and 
cheeks quite obscured by white dusting, and the bases of the abdominal tergites 
with quite broad white or yellowish dusted fasciae. 

Head as in Figure 50. Apical venation of wing as in Figure 51; first vein 
bare above, third setulose at base above and below, the setulae not extending 
to inner cross-vein on upper side. Hypopygial forceps much as in Thrycolyga 
sorbillans Weidemann, excavated behind, tapered to a fine point which is slightly 
forwardly curved, and furnished in the hollowed-out basal portion of the posterior 
surfaces with yellow, slightly flattened hairs. 

Length, 6-8 mm. 

Localities: Cairns district, and Kuranda, Qld. (Dodd), Loowanna, N.S.W., 
31.1.1923 (Health Dept.); Collaroy, near Sydney, N.S.W., 30.1.1924 (EK. W. 
Ferguson); and South Perth, W.A., 17.12.1905 (H. M. Giles). I have also seen 
a specimen in the United States National Museum collection from New Caledonia 
(Koebele). 

I know nothing of its larval habits. 

In my generic key this genus will run down to Caption 18 and fit the first 
two characters of the first section thereof, differing from Calcager Hutton in 
the following manner: 


A. Third antennal segment subequal to second; prosternum bare; facial ridges with 
Gl iia iba IMAI WISE EOOWES WlloweiSsey obs se0cscoscossacuods0e Calcager Hutton. 

AA. Third antennal segment at least three times as long as second; prosternum setulose 
in part; facial ridges with strong bristles to above middle .................. 

SUS TAYE fatten tet Fat sesed USER VoitOl. RANCH Sar RRA EME RCIC ISAS There hen aes Se Plagiprospherysa Townsend. 


Genus SroMATOMYIA Brauer and Bergenstamm. 


This genus is, as pointed out under the preceding genus, distinguished from 
it by rather trivial characters, consisting mainly of the more conspicuously haired 
eyes, and the presence of discal bristles on the second and third visible tergites 
of the abdomen. The frontal bristles descend to about the lower level of the upper 
third of the parafacials, and the facial ridges are strongly bristled to above the 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 321 


middle. Wings much as in Plagiprospherysa, the first posterior cell open, and 
the outer cross-vein a little nearer to the bend of fourth vein than to the inner 
cross-vein; ultimate section of fifth vein about half as long as the penultimate. 


STOMATOMYIA MICROPALPIS, Nl. SP. 


¢. Shining black, with white dusting. Head coloured as in Vorina setibasis. 
Thoracic dorsum with the presutural black vittae narrow and separated, the post- 
sutural area largely black on disc, but with traces of two grey-dusted vittae 
centrally. Second and third visible tergites of abdomen almost entirely whitish 
dusted, fourth with faint brownish dust when seen from certain angles. Legs 
black. Wings greyish, darker at bases. Calyptrae white. Halteres fuscous. 

Eyes with quite conspicuous pale hairs; frons at vertex a little less than 
one-third of the head-width, widened in front, interfrontalia parallel-sided, at 
middle as wide as either orbit; frontal bristles all long and strong, upper two 
on each orbit backwardly curved; parafacial about half as wide as third antennal 
segment, bare below the lower frontal bristle which is at one-third from upper 
extremity; profile as in Figure 52; palpi minute. Thorax as in Voria, with three 
plus three dorsocentrals and acrostichals, three sternopleurals, the pteropleural 
long and strong; discal hairs and the apical pair of bristles on the scutellum 
erect; prosternum setulose. Abdomen narrowly ovate, strongly bristled on centre 
of dorsum and on fourth visible tergite. Legs as in Voria. First wing-vein 
bare, third setulose to inner cross-vein on upper side; outer cross-vein a little 
nearer to bend of fourth vein than to inner cross-vein. 

Length, 7 mm. 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W., 26.4.1928 (Health Dept.). One specimen. 

Distinguished frem filipalpis Rondani, by the very much shorter palpi. 


Genus VoRINA, n. gen. 


This genus will run down to Hyleorus Aldrich in my generic key, and may 
be readily distinguished from it by its having the first posterior cell of the wing 
petiolate (Fig. 53), the bend of fourth vein without a spur-vein, the outer cross- 
vein less oblique, the ultimate section of fifth vein not more than two-thirds 
as long as penultimate, and the setulae on the upper surface of third vein 
discontinued a little beyond the inner cross-vein. The eyes are also much less 
distinctly haired, the parafacials are wider, and there are but two outer forwardly- 
directed bristles on each orbit. 

Genotype, the following species. 


VORINA SETIBASIS, nD. Sp. 


©. Head black, with dense white dust except on the interfrontalia, the 
latter black-brown, epistome testaceous; antennae and aristae black; palpi brown; 
occipital hairs white, the others black. Thorax shining black, quite densely 
white-dusted, mesonotum when seen from behind with a broad glossy black 
vitta laterad of each series of dorsocentrals in front of suture which is fused 
partially with the linear one on each side of the acrostichal area, and a broad 
black central mark behind suture which does not extend to posterior margin; 
scutellum more densely dusted apically than basally. Abdomen glossy black, 
with conspicuous white-dusted bases to tergites. Legs black. Wings greyish 
hyaline. Calyptrae white. Halteres fuscous. 


322 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


Head much as in Plagiprospherysa acuminata, but the parafacials narrower 
and the eyes. larger, quite inconspicuously haired, the female with two outer 
forwardly-directed orbitals, and the antennae descending almost to the mouth 
margin; palpi about as long as width of interfrontalia and very slender. Thorax 
as in acuminata. Abdomen narrowly ovate, with apical bristles on all tergites, 
a pair of discals on second and third tergites, and a discal series on fourth. Legs 
as in Voria. Basal half of first wing-vein setulose above. 

Length, 5-6 mm. 

Type, female, Sydney, N.S.W., 20.10.1921, and allotype, Belaringar, N.S.W., 
1.6.1923 (Health Dept.). 

The male is in poor condition, lacking one wing. It differs from the female 
in having the outer cross-vein nearer to inner cross-vein, and no forwardly- 
directed orbitals. 


Section with outer cross-vein about equidistant between bend of fourth vein and 
inner cross-vein, the first posterior cell open, and no erect 
; bristles on scutellum. 


Genus MAcroptia, n. gen. 


This genus, because of the position of the outer cross-vein, not much nearer 
to the bend of fourth vein than to the inner cross-vein, and the ultimate section 
of fifth vein exceeding in length the outer cross-vein, will run to Section 17 in 
my generic key. It may be readily distinguished from all the genera in the 
group segregated by those characters by the position of the antennae, which are 
inserted far below the middle of the head in profile, and by the very large and 
posteriorly emarginate eyes (Fig. 54). In addition to these characters the male 
has at least three, and the female five or more, proclinate outer bristles in a 
series on each orbit; the apical scutellar bristles are not directed upward; and 
the first, third, and fifth wing-veins are setulose above. The peculiar head 
characters clearly indicate that the genus is not closely allied to any of those 
in the segregate indicated at Caption 17 of my key, nor is it at all closely 
related to Hobartia, a new genus described.in the previous paper, in which the 
antennae are inserted even farther below the middle of the head in profile. 

Genotype, the following species. : 


MACROPIA RUFIVENTRIS, Nn. Sp. 


d, 2. Head black, with dense white, almost silvery, dusting except on the 
interfrontalia, the face showing yellowish beneath the dusting; interfrontalia 
brownish-black; antennae and palpi orange-yellow, third segment of the 
former more or less browned apically; aristae fuscous; occipital hairs dark. 
Thorax black, almost entirely dull because of the presence of. dense yellowish- 
grey dusting, the mesonotum with two narrow dark submedian vittae anteriorly, 
and two broader and more nearly complete dark vittae laterad of these. Abdomen 
shining black, broadly orange on sides and venter on basal half or more, visible 
tergites 2 to 4 each with a conspicuous basal fascia of white dust. Legs orange, 
tarsi fuscous, basal segment of fore pair largely reddish-orange. Wings greyish 
hyaline. Calyptrae white. Halteres yellow. 

Frons of male about one-fifth of the head-width at vertex, widened anteriorly, 
each orbit at middle about twice as wide as the interfrontalia, the inner bristles 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. , 323 


as far from inner margin as the outer series is from the eye, the upper four 
or five curved backward, the anterior two or three incurved; frons of female 
nearly one-third of the head-width at vertex, much as in male, but with the 
proclinate outer bristles on each orbit five or more instead of three or four 
in number, and carried almost to anterior extremity; ocellars small and weak, outer 
verticals short; profile of -male as in Figure 54; second segment of the 
arista short; eye slightly emarginate behind. Thorax with three pairs of 
postsutural dorsocentrals, one plus one sternopleurals, no long pteropleural, 
prosternum and centre of the propleura bare, scutellum with six marginal 
bristles, the apical pair much shorter than the preapical pair, cruciate. Abdomen 
cylindrical, all tergites with apical, and second to fourth tergites with discal, 
bristles. Tibiae and tarsi slender, hind tibia with irregular bristles, one near 
middle longer than the others. Wing venation as in Figure 55; first vein 
setulose on entire extent above in both sexes, and on apical third below in 
female; third vein setulose at extreme base below and to near apex above, fifth 
setulose nearly to apex of discal cell above. Lower calypter broad, - rounded 
at apex. 

Length, 5 mm. 

Type, male, and allotype, Sydney, N.S.W., 31.12.1922, and 8.1.1923, respectively 
(Health Dept.). 

The head is quite large and with its peculiar armature, and the added 
character of the setulose first, third and fifth wing-veins, the species should be 
readily distinguished from any described Australian species. 

The species has much the appearance of some of the calliphorid subfamily 
Metopiinae, but it has a very well developed postscutellum and is a true Tachinid. 
Nothing is indicated of its life-history on the labels of the two specimens. 

It may be pertinent to note here that the Dexiini normally have the antennae 
inserted below the middle of the eyes in profile, while typical Tachinidae have 
them inserted above that point. 


Section with outer cross-vein as last section, but first posterior cell petiolate. 
Genus LEucostomMa Meigen. 

This genus, like the preceding one, falls in the group in my generic key in 
which the outer cross-vein is not distinctly nearer to the bend of fourth vein 
than to the inner cross-vein. It does not belong to the Actiini, having the first 
posterior cell closed and petiolate, and the head quite different. In the key 
it runs down to Caption 21, because of the wing venation, but there are no 
bristles on the facial ridges above the vibrissae, and it is thus distinguished 
from Phorocerostoma Malloch, and WHillia Malloch. 

It therefore falls into a new segregate with pedunculate first posterior cell 
and unarmed facial ridges containing at present this and one other genus, 
Hyalomyodes Townsend. The different preapical curvature of the fourth wing- 
vein (Fig. 56), and the strong erect, or slightly backwardly curved ocellar 
bristles (Fig. 57) will distinguish this genus from Hyalomyodes. 

Genotype, Leucostoma simplex Fallen. 


LEUCOSTOMA SIMPLEX (Fallen). 
36; ©. Glossy- black; frontal orbits, face, parafacials, cheeks, and lower 
occiput white-dusted.. Antennae black; palpi brownish-yellow. Thoracic dorsum 


324 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


slightly whitish dusted when seen from in front. Abdomen without dusting. 
Legs black. Wings greyish hyaline, paler at bases. Calyptrae white. Halteres 
fuscous. 

Eyes bare; frons of male about one-fourth of the head-width at vertex, 
widened anteriorly, each orbit at middle about as wide as interfrontalia at same 
point, with a series of about eight fine inner marginal bristles, the upper one 
recurved, the others incurved, the anterior two short, the series ending opposite 
base of antenna; frons of female about one-third of the head-width at vertex, 


FS rr TTI 


Fig. 54.—Macropia rufiventris. Head of male from the side. 

Fig. 55.—Macropia rufiventris. Apex of wing. 

Fig. 56.—Leucostoma simplex. Wing. 

Fig. 57.—Leucostoma simplex. Head of female from the side. 

Fig. 58.—Leucostoma simplex. Apex of abdomen of female from above. 
Fig. 59.—Hyalomyodes australasiae. Head of male from the side. 
Fig. 60.—Hyalomyodes australasiae. Wing. 


each orbit at middle distinctly wider than interfrontalia at same point, and with 
two strong forwardly directed outer bristles on upper half; ocellars long, erect 
or slightly backwardly directed, divergent at apices; verticals not distinguishable 
from the rather long and numerous setulae in male, all four strong and well 
differentiated in the female; head in profile as Figure 57. Thorax with two plus 
three dorsocentrals, two plus one acrostichals, three sternopleurals in an almost 
equilateral triangle; scutellum with no discals and six marginals, the apical 
pair shortest. Abdomen with strong apical central bristles on visible tergites 
2 to 4 inclusive, fifth tergite in female about as long as fourth, genital processes 
in that sex protruded forceps-like (Fig. 58); hypopygium of male of moderate 
size. Legs moderately stout, fore tarsi slender in both sexes; mid tibia with 
a median ventral bristle; hind tibia with a series of rather widely spaced 
bristles, one at middle of anterodorsal surface much longer than the others. 
Wing as in Figure 56, usually one setula at base of third vein above and below. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 325 


Lower calypter large, bulging above, subtransverse behind, and almost totally 
devoid of fringe except at base on outer side. 

Length, 3-5-4 mm. 

Locality: Sydney, N.S.W., 6.12.1920, no other data. The species occurs in 
Europe, North America, and the Hawaiian Islands. 

The larvae are parasitic upon Hemiptera of the families Nabidae and Coreidae. 


Genus HyaLomyopeEs Townsend. 


This genus will run down to Caption 21 in my key to genera, and will there 
fall in the segregate with the first posterior cell closed and rather long petiolate. 
All the others in the group included in the key have the facial ridges bristled 
on the lower two-thirds or more, while here they are bare except just above 
the vibrissa. I figure the head of the species before me (Fig. 59). The 
preceding genus, Aequia, is distinguished from the present one by the strong 
erect ocellar bristles, and the wing venation. The prosternal plate in Hyalomyodes 
is bare. Other characters may be gleaned from the description of the species 
given below. 


HYALOMYODES AUSTRALASIAE, N. Sp. 

3. Deep black, subopaque. Frontal orbits narrowly yellowish-grey dusted, 
interfrontalia velvety-black, face, parafacials, cheeks, postocular orbits, and lower 
half of occiput densely whitish-grey dusted; antennae black; palpi dull yellow; 
all cephalic hairs black. Thorax with two golden-dusted fasciae on dorsum, 
one at the transverse suture, the other on the hind margin of mesonotum, the 
former connecting with one on pleura which widens out behind and extends 
over hypopleura; scutellum black. Abdomen with dense golden-yellow dust 
on visible tergites 2 to 4 inclusive, second tergite with a large black mark on 
each side of middle line which extends almost the entire length of tergite at 
its inner extremity and tapers off outwardly, forming a narrower hind marginal 
fascia to almost the extreme lateral margin of tergite, third tergite with two 
small submedian hind marginal spots and smaller dark dots at bases of the 
large marginal bristles, fourth tergite with only the dark setiferous dots. Legs 
black. Wings greyish hyaline, veins black. Calyptrae dark-brown, paler at 
junction. Halteres fuscous. 

Eyes bare; frons at vertex about one-ninth of the head-width, narrowed 
below ocelli and widened above antennae, ocellars short and fine, proclinate and 
divergent, inner verticals short; each orbit with a series of short inner marginal 
bristles, all incurved; profile as Figure 59; second segment of arista not longer 
than thick. Thorax with two plus three dorsocentrals and acrostichals, sterno- 
pleurals one plus one; scutellum with a pair of short discals and six marginals, 
the apical and basal pairs longest. Abdomen broadly ovate, with apical bristles 
in a series on each tergite, the discals present but rather weak. Mid tibia with a 
submedian ventral bristle; hind tibia with two or three anterodorsal and postero- 
dorsal bristles. Third wing-vein setulose at base above (Fig. 60). Lower calypter 
broad, subtransverse at apex. 

Length, 5 mm. 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W., 1.1.1924 (Health Dept.). One specimen. 

There is no indication of the larval habits of this species on the label, but 
the North American species is parasitic upon Chrysomelid and Coccinellid beetles. 


326 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


Genus PHOROCEROSTOMA, new name. 
This genus was described as Phorocerosoma in my last paper on this family 
and is known to me only from the following species. The name Phorocerosoma 
is pre-empted by Townsend. 


PHOROCEROSTOMA SETIVENTRIS Malloch. 
Two males which agree perfectly with the type specimen are from Hidsvold, 
Qid., no other data. 
The female is still unknown to me. 


Section with centre of propleura haired, arista short-haired, pubescent or bare, 
and face not carinate. 


Genus EupHASIA Townsend. 


This genus falls in the segregate of my key in which the propleura is 
haired in centre. It will not run out to any genus contained therein because of 
the lack of a facial carina, the bare arista, and prominently convex postscutellum. 
It finds a place in my additions to the key (see below) next to Acucera, a new 
genus, Eustacomyia Malloch, and one or two others described herein, having 
the parafacials entirely haired, but it is distinguished from the two above-named 
by the closed first posterior cell of the wing. A quite strixing character of 
both sexes is the centrally obsolete suture between the fourth and fifth visible 
tergites of the abdomen. The female has, and the male lacks, outer forwardly- 
directed orbital bristles; the prosternum, postalar declivity, and sides of meta- 
notum, are bare; sternopleurals one plus one; abdomen without discals; lower 
calypter widened behind, subtruncate at apex; first vein bare, third setulose 
at base above and below. 

Genotype, the following species. 


EUPHASIA PICTA (Brauer and Bergenstamm). 

3, °. Head orange-yellow, with golden-yellow dusting .on frontal orbits, 
parafacials, and postocular orbits, the cheeks yellow-dusted; interfrontalia 
brownish-black; upper occiput fuscous, with yellowish dusting; antennae and 
palpi orange-yellow; aristae black; a brownish mark above level of vibrissae on 
suture between facial ridge and parafacial; occipital hairs pale, the others dark. 
Thorax shining black, a broad streak of golden-yellow dust extending over each 
humerus to a little beyond suture, and the scutellum similarly dusted except 
narrowly at base; mesonotum with a narrow central presutural white-dusted 
vitta; pleura largely white-dusted; hairs black. Abdomen orange-yellow, with 
deep black markings as follows: male, all of dorsal exposure of first visible 
tergite, a posterior marginal fascia on second and third which are extended 
centrally to anterior margin, a central vitta and a hind marginal spot on each side 
at curve on fourth, and a central spot on fifth tergite; female, first visible tergite 
with only the centre black, third with all of dorsal exposure black, otherwise as 
male; all tergites with white dust on bases. Legs orange-yellow, coxae black; tarsi 
fuscous, basal segment of mid pair yellowish in part. Wings tricoloured, yellow 
at bases (the light stippled part in the figure), black on a zig-zag area centrally, 
and pale at apices and behind (Fig. 61). Calyptrae and halteres orange-yellow. 

Eyes with very short sparse hairs; frons of male about one-sixth, of female 
about one-fourth, of the head-width at vertex, much widened to anterior 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 327 


extremity, orbits at middle narrower in male, wider in female, than interfrontalia, 
entirely haired, the inner marginal bristles weak, all incurved; all four verticals 
present; ocellars distinct but short; parafacials haired, as wide as third antennal 
segment, the latter angular at upper apex, extending to lower third of the face; 
profile of head as Figure 62; second segment of arista about as thick as long. 
Thorax with three plus four dorsocentrals and two plus two acrostichals, the 
dorsal hairs numerous and quite prominent; scutellum convex, rounded in outline, 
with six strong marginals, the apicals short and fine. Abdomen ovate, bluntly 
rounded at apex, the fifth visible tergite curving forward underneath and the 


Fig. 61.—Huphasia picta. Wing. 
Fig. 62.—Euphasia picta. Head of male from the side. 
Fig. 63.—Acucera monticola. Head of male from the side. 


genital organs in both sexes at some distance from the tip of abdomen; first to 
fourth visible tergites with apical central bristles. Legs normal, fore tarsi of female 
not widened; both sexes with a submedian ventral bristle on mid tibia; hind 
tibia with a rather regular series of short bristles on anterodorsal surface. 
Wing venation as Figure 61. 

Length, 7-8-5 mm. 

Localities: Gundamaian, National Park, N.S.W., 1.1.1926 (Mackerras) ; 
Sydney, N.S.W., 1.12.1928 (Wassell) ; Heathcote, N.S.W., 9.12.1923, on Angophora 
flowers (Nicholson); Berowra, N.S.W., 11.12.1923, on  Angophora flowers 
(Nicholson). The last two examples are damaged. 

Originally described from Western Australia. The type specimen, lacked 
the antennae. I have presented the above full description to make up for 
deficiencies in the one given by Brauer and Bergenstamm. These authors named 
the genus Neophasia, but that name was preoccupied in Lepidoptera and it was 
renamed by Townsend. 


Genus GERALDIA, n. gen. 


A genus of rather doubtful tribal position, but possibly a\dexiine because 
of the position of the antennal insertions which are slightly below the middle 
of the eye in profile. However, I leave the matter open. It has much the 
appearance of Prosenina, but the face is not carinate, the arista is pubescent, and 
the proboscis is similar to that of Lasiocalypter, but the palpi are long. Para- 
facials strongly haired, centre of propleura haired, prosternum bare; for other 
characters see description of species. 

Genotype, the following species. 


Oo 
bo 
wm 


NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXIV, 


GERALDIA HIRTICEPS, Nn. sp. 


Black, shining, with grey dust. on head, thorax and abdomen. Face, anterior 
portion of cheeks, and basal two antennal segments and palpi reddish testaceous. 
Thorax with four black dorsal vittae. Abdomen with the dust checkered, and 
with a, fine black dorsocentral vitta. Legs black, tibiae brownish, paler in male 
than in female. Wings hyaline. Calyptrae white. Halteres brown. 


g. Eyes bare; frons at vertex about one-fifth of the width of one eye; profile 
similar to that of Acucera, but the mouth margin more distinctly produced, the 
arista almost bare, and the third antennal segment angulate but not pointed at 
upper apex. Thorax with three plus three dorsocentrals, two plus one or two 
acrostichals, sternopleurals one or two plus one, the scutellum with six or eight 
marginal and two discal bristles, and the centre of propleura haired. Abdomen 
cylindrical, strong apical bristles present on visible tergites 2 to 4. Legs normal; 
mid tibia with a strong submedian ventral bristle. Third wing-vein setulose from 
base to more than midway to inner cross-vein; bend of fourth vein angular, with a 
strong stump vein, petiole of first posterior cell longer than inner cross-vein. 
One strong bristle at apex of auxiliary vein on costa. 


9. Similar to the male, but the frons at vertex one-third of the head-width, 
and each orbit with two strong outer proclinate bristles. The petiole of first 
posterior cell is shorter than in the male. 


Length, 7 mm. 


Type, male, Geraldton, W.A., 5.9.1926 (EH. W. Ferguson). The allotype was 
loose in the box and had lost the head, which I recovered, and also the locality 
label. 


Genus ACUCERA, n. gen. 


This genus is one of two known to me from Australia in which the third 
antennal segment is produced in the form of a short point at its upper apical 
angle, the other being Myothyria van der Wulp, dealt with in this paper. Acephana 
Townsend has the same type of antenna, but has the abdomen without macro- 
chaetae, and in certain other respects differs from Acucera. In many characters 
the new genus resembles Froggattimyia Townsend, but the face is not deeply 
sunken and furnished with a linear vertical carina, being concave in profile, 
visible from the side, and with a slight central vertical convexity on the upper 
portion, which cannot be considered as a definite carina, and the prosternal plate 
is bare. First posterior cell of wing open, outer cross-vein much nearer to the 
bend of fourth vein than to inner cross-vein. 


Genotype, the following species. 


ACUCERA MONTANA, Nl. SD. 


3, °. Shining black, with greyish dust. Frontal orbits, face, cheeks, and 
occiput in male, with whitish-grey dust, in female with yellowish-grey dust; 
antennae and palpi brownish-yellow, third segment of former and the aristae 
fuscous; all cephalic hairs black. Mesonotum with four black vittae. Abdomen 
almost uniformly grey dusted above and below in male, and more evidently so 
at bases than at apices of the tergites in the female. Legs black, tibiae brownish 
or reddish. Calyptrae yellowish-white. Halteres brown. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 329 


Eyes almost bare; frons of male about as wide as third antennal segment 
behind, much widened in front, interfrontalia complete, orbits quite strongly 
bristled along inner margins, the bristles incurved, and strongly haired laterally, 
the hairs continued to lower level of eyes, parafacials wider than third antennal 
segment; frons of female about one-third of the head-width at vertex, each 
orbit with two strong forwardly-directed outer bristles, the upper two on each 
curved outward; ocellars strong; profile of male as Figure 63. Thorax with three 
plus three dorsocentrals and two or three plus three acrostichals, sternopleurals 
two plus one, posterior sublateral lacking, propleura haired, prosternum bare, 
some short hairs below the lower calypter, scutellum with six marginal and two 
discal bristles. Abdomen of male narrowly ovate, with apical central bristles 
on tergites 2 to 4. Fore tibia with the anterodorsal bristles well developed; fore 
tarsi in female not widened; both sexes with a submedian ventral bristle; hind 
tibia with several long and short anterodorsal and posterodorsal bristles. Bend 
of fourth vein angular, with a short spur; outer cross-vein about one-fourth 
from bend of fourth vein; costa with a quite long bristle at apex of auxiliary 
vein. 

Length, 8-10 mm. 


Type, male, Blue Mts., 25.3.1922; allotype and two male paratypes, same 
locality, 4.3.1922; paratypes: one female, same locality, 12.3.1922; one male, 
Barrington Tops, 25-27.1.1922. Two of the male paratypes lack their heads. 

The peculiar third antennal segment, strongly haired parafacials, and haired 
propleura, taken in conjunction, ought readily to distinguish this genus from its 
allies. 


Genus PILIMYIA, n. gen. 


Closely similar to the next genus, differing in having the eyes densely haired, 
and the facial ridges bristled to above their middle. The second antennal 
segment has short bristles as in the next genus, and the frons of the male is 
similar to that of Delta major, but narrower. First posterior cell of wing open, 
ending rather close to apex of wing. For other characters see accompanying 
generic key and the description of the species given below. 


Genotype, the following species. 


PILIMYIA LASIOPHTHALMA, N. Sp. 


6. Head black, with dense yellowish-grey dusting except on the interfrontalia 
and upper occiput; antennae and aristae black; palpi brownish-yellow; lower 
occipital hairs white, genal and other hairs black. Thorax shining black, meso- 
notum with dense yellowish-grey dust, presuturally with five black vittae, the 
sublateral pair widest and interrupted at the suture, the central three fused 
behind suture and not continued to posterior margin; pleura rather densely 
grey-dusted; scutellum with but light grey dusting. Abdomen shining black, 
conspicuously yellow on sides of first three visible tergites at the lateral curve, 
the hind margin of first, all of second, and the fore margin of third being 
semipellucid yellow when seen from above, the yellow colour extending to lateral 
extremities of first and second tergites when seen from below; anterior margins 
of tergites 2 to 4 densely yellowish-grey dusted, less broadly so centrally on the 
first two. Legs black. Wings greyish hyaline. Halteres brown. 


330 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


Frons at vertex less than half the width of either eye, the interfrontalia 
eomplete, orbits with an inner marginal series of bristles which become stronger 
in front and descend to beyond the level of apex of second antennal segment, and 
many lateral hairs; ocellars hardly differentiated; inner verticals of moderate 
length, outer pair undeveloped; profile of head as in Figure 64; arista almost bare, 
second segment not elongated; face almost flat between the ridges. Thorax 
with three plus four dorsocentrals, three plus three acrostichals, the posterior 
sublateral bristle lacking, prosternum and centre of propleura haired, and the 
scutellum with six marginal and two discal bristles. Abdomen ovate, with apical 
central bristles on all tergites, no discals on second and third visible tergites. 
Fore tibia with the anterodorsal setulae weak, and present only basally; mid 
tibia with a long submedian ventral and anterodorsal bristle; hind tibia with 
a complete series of rather irregular and quite long bristly hairs, the posterodorsal 
surface with three or four longer and stronger bristles; claws and pulvilli of 
all tarsi long. Outer cross-vein about one-third: from bend of fourth vein, and 
nearly as long as that vein from bend to its apex. 

Length, 7-5 mm. 

Type, Blue Mts., 21.1.1922 (Health Dept.). 

. The characteristic pale yellowish colour of the abdomen of this species is 
met with in several allied genera, including the next one, but the bristled facial 
ridges, long-haired eyes, entirely haired parafacials, and haired centre of propleura 
and sides of the prosternal plate taken in conjunction will readily distinguish 
the genus from any other at present known to me from Australia. 

The female is unknown to me, as are also the larval habits of the species. 


Genus Zira Curran. 


Curran compared this genus with Arctophyto Townsend, a North American 
genus, but there are many distinctions between the genera other than those 
mentioned by that author which lead me to conclude that they are not very 
closely related. The head of the type specimen of the genotype is slightly distorted, 
which gives the face the appearance of being faintly carinate, a feature which I 
am sure will not be noticeable in perfect examples of the species. 

I have before me the type specimens of aureopyga Curran, and have seen 
no other. 

The genus will run-down to Pygidia. a new genus, in my extended key to the 
genera, but is distinguished therefrom by the presence of discal bristles on the 
second and third visible tergites of the abdomen, the shorter first visible tergite 
and much longer and unrecurved fourth. 

The paired submedian dorsal spots of silvery-white dust on the second and 
third visible tergites of the abdomen, and the quite conspicuous white-dusted 
lateral marks on the mesonotum, are reminiscent of certain Rutiliini, but the 
bright-yellow-dusted fourth tergite is quite distinctive. 


Genus PyYGIDIA, n. gen. 4 
This genus is very similar to the preceding one, but it has no strong discal 
bristles on the second and third visible tergites of the abdomen, the first visible 
tergite of same is about as long at centre as is the fourth, and the fifth tergite 
is not much shorter than the fourth. The apex of the abdomen is rather 
elongated and curved towards base ventrally, which character suggested the 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 331 


generic name. The eyes are almost bare, the parafacials lack hairs, the prosternum 

is bare, centre of propleura haired, first wing-vein bare, third setulose at base, 

bend of fourth vein rounded angular, first posterior cell open; lower calypter 

broadened behind, lying close to lateral margin of scutellum, apex subtransverse. 
Genotype, the following species. 


PYGIDIA RUFOLATERALIS, 1. Sp. 

s. Interfrontalia, occiput, upper portions of frontal orbits, and greater part 
of cheeks fuscous, face, parafacials, anterior portion of cheeks, and anterior 
portions of frontal orbits testaceous yellow, frontal orbits, parafacials, and 
cheeks brassy-yellow-dusted, occiput grey-dusted; antennae orange-yellow, third 
segment dark-brown, except at base and below; palpi testaceous yellow; central 
occipital and genal hairs yellow. Thorax black, mesonotum grey-dusted and with 
four narrow black vittae, pleura yellow-dusted, and almost entirely yellow-haired. 
Abdomen translucent testaceous yellow, with a broad black dorsocentral 
vitta which occupies about the median third of the first two visible tergites 
and almost all of dorsal exposure of third and fourth, hypopygium fulvous yellow, 
venter and hypopygium yellow-haired, dorsum black-haired. Legs yellow, tarsi 
slightly darkened at apices, all femora with long yellow hairs basally, the bristles 
black. Wings yellowish hyaline. Calyptrae and halteres yellow. 


Fig. 64.—Pilimyia lasiophthalma. Head of male from the side. 

Fig. 65.—Pygidia rufolateralis. Head of male from the side. 

Fig. 66.—Delta australiensis. Head of female from ithe side, and (a) 
second antennal segment from above. 


Hyes bare; frons at vertex about one-fourth as wide as one eye, inner 
verticals long, outer pair undeveloped; ocellars present, proclinate; interfrontalia 
entire, orbits with a series of inner marginal bristles and practically bare laterad 
of them; antennae inserted above middle of eye in profile, third segment more 
than three times as long as second, extending to a little above vibrissae, and 
not as wide as parafacial; epistome projecting; palpi slender, distinctly longer 
than antenna; profile as Figure 65; arista distinctly pubescent. Thorax with 
three plus three dorsocentrals, two plus two acrostichals, two plus one sterno- 
pleurals, two pairs of intra-alars, the posterior sublateral bristle lacking, 
prosternum bare, propleura haired, about eight marginal scutellars, and a few 
hairs below lower calypter. Abdomen strikingly recurved ventrally at apex, 
the hypopygium rather bulbous. Legs with the femora thickened basally; fore 
tibia without a series of bristles on anterodorsal surface and with one submedian 


332 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXivV, 


posterior bristle; mid tibia without a submedian ventral bristle and with one 
anterodorsal; hind tibia with two anteroventral and posterodorsal and about four 
anterodorsal bristles; claws and pulvilli long. First posterior cell open, ending 
before apex of wing, fourth vein much curved beyond the preapical angle. 
Length, 11 mm. 
Type, Kosciusko, N.S.W., 11.2.1924 (Nicholson). 


Genus DELTA, n. gen. 


A genus containing mostly small dull-coloured species, recognizable by the 
possession of hairs on centre of propleura, sides of prosternum, and entire para- 
facials, and two rather short stout bristles at apex of second antennal segment 
which are normally divergent from each other (Fig. 66). The position of the 
outer cross-vein and the strength of the ocellar bristles is quite variable in the 
genus, the latter being occasionally entirely lacking. Other characters may be 
gleaned from the descriptions of the species given below. None of the genera of 
this group is included in my key to the Australian Tachinidae and the accompany- 
ing additional key must be utilized to identify them. 

Genotype, Delta australiensis n. sp. ; 


Key to the Species. 
1. Thorax with three pairs of postsutural dorsocentral bristles; posterior sublateral 
bristle present; fore tarsus of female compressed centrally, not as long as fore 
tibia; ocellar bristles moderately long and strong; frons of male less than one- 


hallivast awidels asi either Gey eves cs sc eres & creieieyenain eaanenlsaenrsne australiensis, Nn. sp. 
Thorax with four pairs of postsutural dorsocentral bristles .................... 2 

DET CTVAV ESE ui ee is Maar Sue epee wie au ews oe IM eater cpicse as oe OE AEE Ol SE es Ee Pe SUBS sata ga Re ees gee 3 
NY Ife Wk Spa tea oe hen a eta Rs dt ORR ep 2) ee lo a oor em Poo RE RR Cap UA MRS ter ee, Stal opm hrs 5 


Ocellar bristles undeveloped; interfrontalia pale-yellow, hardly darker than the 
greyish-white-dusted frontal orbits; posterior sublateral bristle present; pre- 
sutural dorsocentrals 3; scutellum densely pale-grey-dusted, hardly noticeably 
V EMO We sWt Map Ox. Lee Str el Ne ear rs Metis iy Foe ne 2) SMe ee ee grisea, N. sp. 

Ocellar bristles well developed, of moderate length and strength; interfrontalia 
always much darker than the pale-dusted frontal orbits, or quite strongly 
contrasted mawith theming colouinersssar- 5s eras eon rai enone er aaaeannen renee 4 

4. Posterior sublateral bristle lacking or hair-like; palpi slightly thickened; dorsum 
of thorax entirely dull, lead-grey dusted, with linear dark vittae in front 
LOE ia sy as Senso Renate ad geese kl Sa oS ORR ERR Sale, 2 Tadic clencly Sngiay StL eeaeecow MA ee Ree at eg RL opaca, Nn. sp. 

Posterior sublateral bristle quite strong; palpi slender; dorsum of thorax largely 
shining black, with whitish-grey dusting, and four rather faint dark vittae 
ire evr Caite tos aha Mees aideths Ras gM de CC Heo ROM MERIT eh Tan Sure Said ses T see OER is Tee RS eee RE ee en scutellata, n. sp. 


et 


5. Thoracic dorsum largely shining black, with slight greyish dusting and five linear 
black vittae, the submedian pair ceasing a little behind the suture; scutellum 
except base, and the sides of second and third visible abdominal tergites trans- 
MWIGent wb ROW NUS =v ClO Wary see ce weak c s BoeUioussv oes) Gai cecaee oe sca Reed caine ates scutellata, n. sp. 

Thoracic and abdominal dorsa densely grey-dusted, not shining, the former with 
four linear dark vittae, the submedian pair ceasing about midway between the 
suture and posterior margin; scutellum at apex and second and third visible 
abdominal tergites on sides faintly yellowish .................... major, Nn. sp. 


DELTA AUSTRALIENSIS, n. Sp. 


6. Head black, frontal orbits, parafacials, cheeks, and occiput, dark-grey 
dusted, the frontal orbits darker behind; antennae black; palpi fuscous. Thorax 
shining black, with grey dust, the mesonotum with five black vittae, the central 
one ceasing about midway between suture and hind margin and a litle longer 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 333 


than the submedian pair, the sublateral pair complete. Abdomen shining black, 
when seen from behind, with the dorsum densely yellowish-grey dusted, the 
second visible tergite with a pair of large subtriangular blackish marks, the 
‘third with these less distinct, and all tergites with a rather faint dark central 
line. Legs black. Wings brownish hyaline, darker at bases. Calyptrae brownish- 
yellow, disc of the lower one broadly dark-brown. Halteres brown. 


Eyes microscopically haired; frons fully one-third of the head-width at 
vertex, interfrontalia complete, orbits narrow above, with a series of rather long 
fine bristles along their inner margins which continue downward to at least the 
level of apex of second antennal segment, the lateral portions and entire para- 
facials with numerous black hairs; profile much as in the female (Fig. 66); inner 
verticals well developed, outer pair lacking; ocellars as long as inner verticals; 
arista bare. Thorax with two plus three dorsocentrals and three plus three 
acrostichals, three intra-alars, one plus one sternopleurals; scutellum with six 
marginal and two discal bristles of unequal lengths. Abdomen ovate and 
depressed, first visible tergite without apical central bristles, all the others to 
fourth with apical and discal bristles; hypopygium small. Legs normal, fore 
tibia with two or three posterior bristles; mid tibia with a submedian ventral 
bristle; hind tibia with a series of irregular bristles on anterodorsal surface, 
- three of which are usually much longer than the others. Outer cross-vein of 
wing nearer to bend of fourth vein than to inner cross-vein; first posterior cell 
almost or quite closed in margin of wing. Lower calypter much widened behind. 

°. Differs from the male in being more densely pale-grey dusted, with the inter- 
frontalia brownish-yellow, the face showing testaceous below the dust, the palpi 
testaceous yellow, and the thoracic vittae much less distinct, the median one absent, 
and the outer pair incomplete. 


Structurally different in having the frons at vertex about one-half as wide 
as either eye, the orbits each with two strong outer proclinate bristles, and the 
fore tarsi with the apex of first segment, the second and third, compressed and 
with a carina or keel on ventral surface. 

Length, 4-5 mm. 


Type, male and one male paratype, Mullewa, W.A., 3.9.1926 (HK. W. Ferguson) ; 
allotype, and two female paratypes, Tammin, W.A., 31.8.1926 (E. W. Ferguson). 


I may be in error in connecting the sexes, but they appear to be the same 
species. If they should eventually be found to be different, the male will bear 
the name australiensis, and the other will require to be renamed. 


DELTA GRISEA, Nn. SD. 


9. Similar to the female described above, but the general colour is even 
paler grey, the interfrontalia is pale reddish-yellow, the second antennal segment 
is yellow, and the abdominal dusting is more pronouncedly checkered. 


The type specimen lacks ocellar bristles, the thorax has the dorsocentrals 
three plus four, the acrostichals three plus three, and the sternopleurals have a 
weaker bristle between them which is lacking in australiensis. The fore tarsi 
are not compressed but slightly widened. In other respects similar to the foregoing 
species. 

Length, 6 mm. 

Type, Mullewa, W.A., 3.9.1926 (EH. W. Ferguson). One specimen. 


334 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXivV, 


DELTA OPACA, 0. Sp. 

%. Similar to the preceding species in coloration. 

Differs as stated in the key to species. The thoracic dorsocentrals are two plus 
four, the ocellars are well developed, there is no central sternopleural bristle 
present, and the fore tarsi are slender, and longer than their tibiae. 

Length, 5 mm. 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W., 24.10.1923 (Health Dept.). 

A second specimen has the discal bristles lacking on the third visible tergite 
and may not belong to this species. Locality, Maroondah, Trangie, December, 
1920 (L. J. Perry). 


DELTA SCUTELLATA, DT. SD. 


3g. Similar to australiensis, but more shining black, the face below and the 
cheeks yellowish, the interfrontalia reddish-brown, the scutellum largely or 
entirely testaceous yellow, and the sides of the basal two or three visible tergites 
of the abdomen translucent yellowish. 

Frons about half as wide as one eye, ocellars variable, sometimes indistinct. 
Thorax with the dorsocentrals three plus four, the posterior sublateral strong, 
sternopleurals one plus one plus one. Abdomen as in australiensis, but the 
bristles are rather variable; when a full complement is present there is a weak — 
pair at apex of first visible tergite, a pair of discals on second and third, and 
apical series on second to fourth. Legs as in australiensis. 

©. Differs from the male in having the sides of abdomen without yellow, 
the scutellum less extensively yellow, and the frons almost as wide as one eye. — 

Type, male, and three male paratypes, Mullewa, W.A., 3.9.1926 (KH. W. 
Ferguson); allotype, Wyalkatchem, W.A., 1.9.1926 (EK. W. Ferguson). 


DELTA MAJOR, Nn. SD. 


3. Head testaceous yellow, upper occiput broadly fuscous on each side, with 
dense grey dust; orbits slightly darkened, grey-dusted; parafacials, cheeks, and 
face whitish-grey dusted; antennae orange-yellow, third segment dark-brown 
except narrowly at base; palpi testaceous yellow. Thorax black, slightly shining, 
with dense grey dust, mesonotum with four dark vittae, the submedian pair 
discontinued between suture and hind margin; scutellum yellowish apically. 
Abdomen black, slightly yellowish on sides basally, densely grey dusted, with a 
narrow dark dorsocentral line on basal two tergites, a pair of faint dark marks 
on dorsum of second visible tergite, and dark dots at bases of the hairs and 
bristles. Legs black, tibiae very slightly brownish. Wings hyaline. Calyptrae 
white. Halteres brownish-yellow. 

Eyes bare; frons fully one-third of the width of one eye, ocellars lacking, the 
other characters .as in australiensis. Thorax with three plus four dorsocentrals, 
the posterior sublateral bristle strong, and the sternopleurals three in number. 
Abdomen broadly ovate and depressed, no apical or discal bristles on first and 
second visible tergites, no discals on third, discals and apicals on fourth and apicals 
on third. Legs normal; mid tibia with a submedian ventral bristle; hind tibia 
with a series of quite regular anterodorsal setulae amongst which there is one 
longer bristle. Outer cross-vein of wing not more than one-third from bend of 
fourth vein, the latter straight beyond the bend, the first posterior cell a little 
wider at apex than usual. 


. BY J. R. MALLOCH. 335 


2. Palpi larger and thicker than in the male; frons at vertex about three- 
fourths as wide as one eye; fourth vein beyond the bend distinctly arcuate; fore 
tarsi subequal to fore tibiae, slightly broadened. Otherwise as male. 

Length, 7 mm. 

. Type, male, Eccleston, Allyn R., 26.2.1921; allotype, Hidsvold, Qld. 

I have before me one female specimen which does not agree in some essential 
particulars with the above genus, nor with Voriella, the parafacials being furnished 
with a series of hairs on their lower halves, and the second antennal segment 
being without the cruciate bristles. I do not care to deal with it further than to 
mention its occurrence at this time. The specimen is from Sydney, N.S.W. 


Genus VORIELLA, n. gen. 


This genus is distinguished from Delta, to which it appears to be most closely 
related, by the absence of hairs on the lower half or more of the paratacials, and 
the presence of a variable number of quite strong bristles on the facial ridges 
above the vibrissae. It is possible that, when more material is available, the 
genus may be broken into two or three subgenera or even genera, as there are 
structural characters present in the three species which some authorities would 
consider justification for that course. However, in the light of present material, 
I include all in one genus, the distinguishing characters being pointed out in the 
key to species and the descriptions given below. 

Genotype, Voriella recedens, n. sp. 


Key to the Species. 

1. Four or five strong frontal bristles either in a single or partial double series below 
level of antennal insertion, laterad of which there are no fine short hairs; only 
one setula at base of third vein both above and below .......... uniseta, nN. Sp. 

Two to four strong bristles in a single series below level of antennal insertion, and 
laterad of these, and usually to a short distance below them, some short fine 
hairs; one setula below and two or more above at base of third wing-vein .. 2 

Facial ridges strongly bristled to well above middle; fore tarsi of female normal; 
outer cross-vein of wing almost twice as far from inner cross-vein as from bend 
OLMEOUT EMM VELEN sere ryay OL Ae Ars atte ba kcdeags sulse tata Fas TPE ah otc iLse ol edheiee es ae ebro bstrateet wireh ate armiceps, N. sp. 

Facial ridges each with about two bristles above the vibrissae which do not extend 
to middle; fore tarsi compressed centrally; outer cross-vein. of wing about mid- 
way between inner cross-vein and bend of fourth vein ...... inconspicua, Nn. Sp. 


bo 


VORIELLA UNISETA, 0D. SD. 


3,9. Black, slightly shining, with grey dust on head, thorax and abdomen. 
Antennae entirely black; palpi orange-red at apices, more conspicuously so in the 
female; interfrontalia black-brown in both sexes. Thorax with four black vittae on 
dorsum, less distinct in female, and sometimes a fifth in centre in male. Abdomen 
with the grey dust rather checkered, most dense at bases of tergites, and in the 
male a narrow black dorsocentral vitta evident. Legs black. Wings greyish 
hyaline, brownish basally. Calyptrae white. Halteres yellow. 


6. Frons at vertex about one-third as wide as one eye, interfrontalia entire, 
of uniform width, orbits linear above, with a series of inner marginal bristles 
which descend to about middle of parafacials, and no fine lateral hairs, ocellars 
and inner verticals present but not very strong; profile of head as Figure 67; 
second segment of arista about three times as long as thick; palpi slightly 


dilated at apices. Thorax with two or three plus three dorsocentrals and three 
K 


336 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


plus three acrostichals, sternopleurals one plus one, apical scutellars fine and 
short, hypopleura with a fine hair at upper anterior angle. Abdomen cylindrical, 
with or without a fine pair of central apical bristles on first visible tergite and with 
apical central and discal bristles on the other tergites. Fore tibia with a few short 
setulae on anterodorsal surface basally, and one or two posterior bristles; fore 
tarsi normal; mid tibia with a submedian ventral bristle; hind tibia with 
irregular anterodorsal and posterodorsal bristles; claws and pulvilli rather long. 
Outer cross-vein about midway between inner cross-vein and bend of fourth vein; 
first posterior cell very narrowly open, ending rather close to wing tip. 


Fig. 67.—Voriella wiriseta. Head of female from the side. 
Fig. 68.—Voriella armiceps. Head of female from the side. 


°. Differs from the male in having the frons about one-third of the head-width, 
the outer verticals present, but weaker than the inner pair, the upper bristle on 
each orbit curved backward, and two outer proclinate bristles on each orbit. In 
both sexes the third antennal segment is not twice as long as second. Palpi of 
female more distinctly dilated at apices than in male. Fore tarsi slightly dilated 
at apices. 

Length, 5-6 mm. 

Type, male, Sydney, N.S.W., 16.11.1922; allotype, same locality, 2.7.1924; para- 
types, all same locality, 27.11.1921, 3.10.1921, 22.10.1922, 9.12.1923, 31.8.1924, and 
19.10.1924. All Health Department collection. Nine specimens. 


VORIELLA ARMICEPS, Nn. Sp. 

®. Similar to the preceding species in general coloration, but the interfrontalia 
is paler, reddish-brown, and the face below and cheeks yellowish. J 

Structurally this species differs from wniseta in the more strongly armed 
facial ridges, general shape of head, including the longer third antennal segment 
(Fig. 68), much weaker discal bristles on abdomen, those on second visible tergite 
being almost undeveloped in the type, and the different wing-venation and armature 
of the base of third vein. 

Length, 6 mm. 

Type, Eradu, W.A., 8.9.1926 (EH. W. Ferguson). One specimen. 


VORIELLA INCONSPICUA, N. SD. 
©. General colour similar to that of the two preceding species. 
Structurally this species is more slender than either of the others, the frontal 
bristles do not descend as far on parafacials, the frontal orbits are narrower, the 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 337 


third antennal segment is narrower than in armiceps, and comparatively as long 
as in that species, the second and third segments of fore tarsi and the apex of 
first segment are distinctly compressed when seen from the side, the wing-venation 
is much as in uwniseta, but the fourth vein beyond the preapical angle is as long 
as the portion from outer cross-vein to angle, not distinctly shorter, and there 
are three or four short hairs at base of third vein on its upper side. The pair of 
discal bristles on second visible tergite of abdomen is short while the one on 
third is quite long. 

Length, 5 mm. 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W., 20.11.1921 (Health Dept.). One specimen. 

This genus resembles Hypostena Meigen, but all the species of the latter that 
I have seen have the propleura bare on centre. Chaetophlepsis Townsend has the 
propleura haired centrally, and the fore tarsus compressed in the female of 
tarsalis Townsend, but the first wing-vein is setulose above. Although I can find 
no genus with which the above one agrees in all characters it is not at all impos- 
sible that some subsequent worker will discover that it has already been described 
from some other region under a different name. 


Key to the Genera of this Section. 


1. Parafacials haired on practically their entire extent ......................... 2 
Parafacials bare below level of apex of second antennal segment .............. 6 

2. First posterior cell of wing closed and petiolate, sometimes closed only in the margin 
of wing, if the latter the wing is conspicuously marked with black ...... 2a 

First posterior cell of wing open, if almost closed the wings are hyaline ...... 3 


2a. Wings pictured, first posterior cell very short petiolate (Fig. 61); suture between 
the fourth and fifth visible abdominal tergites obliterated centrally, the apex 
OLsabdomen@bluntlymrounded yaya och cas caer rele Euphasia Townsend 

Wings hyaline, first posterior cell quite long petiolate; suture between fourth and 
fifth visible abdominal tergites normal, apex of abdomen of the usual form 

OOK TEEN e ROHS RRO RG ROL Horace crac RI UTE ASUS TSAR Sts ici cie cate Ta Ae LIAaeO PRI oa PR on Re re en Geraldia, n. gen. 

3. Third antennal segment with an acute point at upper apical angle (Fig. 63); 
prosternal plate bare; outer cross-vein of wing very much nearer to bend of 


fourth vein than to inner cross-vein ..................+00005 Acucera, nN. gen. 

Third antennal segment rounded or subtransverse at apex, without a sharp point 
at upper apical angle; prosternum setulose ...............-.-0000 eee eeeeeee 4 

4. Lower calypter straight on inner side, not at all lobed, lying clear of side of 
scutellum, and evenly rounded at apex (Palpostomini) .... EHwstacomyia Malloch 

Lower calypter lying close to side of scutellum, distinctly lobed on inner side, sub- 
EVEL MUSH EY ASS) CEE TYREE OY SD, Sth teste oo ae ae OT UT CEG OE Pacheco ee A rae Sea 5) 

d. Eyes almost bare; facial ridges setulose on lower fourth .......... Delta, n. gen. 
Eyes densely hairy; facial ridges bristled to above middle ...... Pilimyia, n. gen. 


6. Antennae inserted below level of middle of eye in profile; arista haired, the longest 


hairs more than twice as long as its basal diameter ..................... 7 
Antennae inserted above middle of eye in profile; arista pubescent or bare .... 8 

7. Ocellars long and strong (Fig. 26*); first posterior cell ending well before tip of 
AD aes «Batak 5 sais) Seneat micas biel Stcraaena tency CEA ISES A 6 ce SIAL GONE He ae Alle Bara Anatropomyia, n. gen. 


Ocellars minute (Fig. 27*),; first posterior cell ending close to tip of wing ...... 

Pe ete Meer saeco par sree es peh cic tct cae sh enc hies emspece Sunt swalconty & (5) suis cua: ms Sy aleae es ue wneee a Hobartia, n. gen. 

8. Thoracic region above hind coxae and below base of abdomen quite high and 
vertical, usually transversely convex, and entirely uniformly chitinous; palpi 

Vesti Sa hier et ere Uri OS tw AN oie See ete Ape oe Cylindromyia Meigen 
Thoracic region above hind coxae and below base of abdomen not high, largely 
membranous centrally; palpi well developed ............:........0-002-05 9 

9. Frontal bristles descending well below level of apex of second antennal segment 
(Fig. 67); second and third visible tergites of abdomen with discal bristles; 


* See above, p. 128. 


338 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


outer cross-vein of wing about equidistant between inner cross-vein and bend 
of fourth vein; prosternum setulose ..............-+-.++-2. Voriella, n. gen. 
Frontal bristles not descending below level of middle of second antennal segment 
(Fig. 65); outer cross-vein of wing twice or more than twice as far from inner 
cross-vein as from bend of fourth vein; prosternum bare ................ 10 


10. Second and third visible tergites of abdomen with discal bristles, central length of 
first visible tergite not half as great as that of fourth, the abdomen curved 
under from base of sixth visible tergite, the fifth very short (male) ........ 
SEE OPER HAUS Ne near Sen ARS Raye S) IRONNU ieucon eli Sess Ra Oe en MAI (a cTaU Steet een kaog as Zita Curran 


Second and third visible tergites of abdomen without discal bristles, central length 
of first visible tergite greater than that of. fourth, the abdomen curved under 
from base of latter, fifth visible tergite not much shorter than fourth ........ 
PEE TR oF MR riot Pr tet PAE Pie Oe aarti Orn “Ott eC eee ema ee Gio nc Mee EN meer Oe, ars Pygidia, n. gen. 


N.B.—It must be understood that the genera contained in the above synopsis 
are arbitrarily linked together for purposes of identification only and that there 
are several groups represented. Hustacomyia Malloch belongs to the Palpostomini, 
and in the character of the wing-venation is very similar to Voriella, but the 
latter is not closely related, having the lower calypter distinctly widened behind 
and lying close to the scutellum. Nor is the latter at all closely related to 
Pygidia and Zita, the structure of the head and the armature of the thorax being 
quite distinct from those found in the other two genera. 


There will undoubtedly be more genera of this group found in Australia and, 
despite the artificial nature of such a synopsis as the above one, it will be of 
material assistance in identifying either new genera or those already known, but 
in all cases care should be taken to compare the insects with the full descriptions 
of both the genera and species to prevent mistakes. 


Section with bare eyes and parafacials, and outer cross-vein near bend of 
fourth vein. 


Genus MyorHyria van der Wulp. 


This American genus has apparently two representatives amongst the Aus- 
tralian species now before me. The bare eyes, acutely pointed upper apical 
angle of the third antennal segment, and the very strong apical central bristles 
on the second and third visible tergites of the abdomen distinguish the genus 
from any other now known to me from Australia. Acemyia Robineau-Desvoidy 
of the Nearctic and Palaearctic regions is very similar to Myothyria, but it has 
the prosternal plate bare, while in the latter it is setulose on the sides. In 
Myothyria there is also a series of three or more proclinate outer orbital bristles 
on each frontal orbit which are lacking in Acemyia, and in the female there is a 
complete series of such bristles in the former and only two or three bristles in 
the female of Acemyia. The species of Myothyria known to me all have but one 
setula above and below at extreme base of the third wing-vein, while those of 
Acemyia have more numerous setulae. The first posterior cell of the wing may 
be closed in margin of wing, short petiolate, or narrowly open, and it is distinctly 
preapical in termination in both genera. The Philippine genus Hoacemyia 
Townsend is very similar to Myothyria, having the prosternal plate setulose, but 
it is furnished in the female with fewer proclinate orbitals, has much weaker 
ocellar bristles, and the first posterior cell of the wing is open and terminates 
very close to the tip of the wing. Unless there are more intermediate forms, I 
would retain Hoacemyia as a distinct genus. All the genera under discussion 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 339 


have the female genital organs with the apical sternite glossy, chitinous, and 
more or less scoop-like, the lower surface rounded, and the apex blunt. 

Acucera Malloch, described in the present paper, I do not place close to 
Myothyria because of its possession of hairs on the centre of the propleura, and 
on the parafacials, and the lack of them on the prosternum. The female does not 
appear to have the same form of genital plate. 

Acephana Townsend was erected for the reception of Masicera rubrifrons 
Macquart, the author of the genus using as its chief distinguishing feature the 
shape of the third antennal segment, which is the same as in the genera above 
referred to, but in Acephana the eyes are hairy, and the tergal bristles are weak. 
I have not seen this genus, nor had Townsend, whose generic concept was based 
upon notes on Macquart’s type published by Brauer, as indicated in my Catalogue. 

I figure the head and wing of the Australian species fergusoni herein. 


MyYOTHYRIA FERGUSONI, n. sp. 


6, 9. Shining black, more or less obscured by pale-grey dust. Interfrontalia 
brownish-black, orbits and remainder of head densely white dusted, more yellowish 
on frons in the female, less conspicuously dusted on upper occiput; antennae 
black; palpi brownish-yellow; occipital hairs white, postocular cilia and ocher 
cephalic hairs black. Mesonotum with four partial vittae which appear brown 
when seen from the side, interrupted at the suture, and ceasing about midway 
between it and posterior margin, the surface otherwise slightly dark dotted; 
scutellum lightly grey dusted. Abdomen partly translucent yellowish on sides 
of the basal three visible tergites in the male, without pale sides in female, 
tergites broadly but not very conspicuously white dusted. Legs black. Wings 
greyish hyaline. Calyptrae white. Halteres brown. 


Fig. 69.—Myothyria fergusoni. Head of male from the side. 
Fig. 70.—Myothyria fergusoni. Wing. 


Eyes nude; frons of male at vertex one-fourth of the head-width, widened in 
front, inner verticals long, outer pair absent, ocellars moderately long, proclinate 
and divergent, each orbit at middle fully as wide as the interfrontalia, with 
about nine inner marginal bristles, the upper two recurved, the others incurved, 
and four outer proclinate bristles; the frons of female about one-third of the 
head-width, each orbit at middle as wide as interfrontalia at same point, 
the proclinate outer bristles more irregular in length than in the male; profile 
of head of male as in Figure 69. Thorax with two plus three dorsocentrals, two 
plus two acrostichals, sternopleurals one plus one, prosternum haired on sides, 
propleura bare on centre, scutellum with six bristles, the apical cruciate pair 


340 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


shorter than the preapical pair. Abdomen cylindrical, tapered apically, visible 
tergites 2 and 3 each with a pair of long strong central apical bristles, the apical 
series sometimes complete on 3 and always so on 4; hypopygium small, forceps 
tapered to a sharp point. Legs normal, tarsal claws as long as fifth tarsal 
segment in male and female; fore tarsus in female not widened; mid tibia in 
both sexes with a submedian ventral bristle; fore tibia with the anterodorsal 
setulae longer than its diameter basally, becoming much shorter apically; hind 
tibia with irregular series of about four widely spaced bristles on posterodorsal 
and anterodorsal surfaces, the latter with some much shorter setulae also. 
Venation of wing as Figure 70; third vein with one setula at base above and below; 
petiole of first posterior cell variable, but always very short. Calypter broadly 
rounded at apex, bulged up centrally, the fringe very short and fine. 

Length, 6:-5-7-5 mm. 

Type, male, allotype, and one male and one female paratype, Eradu, W.A., 
8.9.1926 (EH. W. Ferguson). 


MyYoOTHYRIA ARMATA, Nl. SD. 


°. Similar to the preceding species, but with the dusting of the frons grey, 
the abdomen more uniformly grey-dusted amd not so noticeably checkered, the 
ocellar bristles stronger, and the second visible abdominal tergite with four very 
strong bristles on middle of the apical margin. The fore tibia has also a much 
stronger series of bristles on the entire length of the anterodorsal surface which 
are all decidedly longer than the diameter of the tibia, and the first posterior cell 
of the wing is narrowly open in margin of wing. While I do not place too much 
emphasis upon the details of the wing-venation, it appears possible that the 
position of the outer cross-vein may be of specific significance. This is situated at 
distinctly less than its own length and less than one-third of the length of the 
section between the inner cross-vein and bend from the latter and at about its 
own length from apex of fifth vein. In fergusoni the outer cross-vein is farther 
from the bend of fourth vein and from apex of fifth vein as shown in Figure 70. 

Length, 8 mm. 

Type, Kosciusko, N.S.W., 5.12.1921 (Health Dept.). One specimen. 

This genus will run down to Caption 40 in my generic key, but may be 
distinguished: from any in the remaining part of the key by the pointed upper 
apical angle of third antennal segment, the others all having it angular or 
rounded. 

Section with the sutures between the tergites of abdomen obliterated centrally, 
the tergites of apical half of abdomen immobile; arista pubescent; 
face not carinate. 


Genus DoppiANA Curran. 


I have before me a paratype male of Doddiana pallens Curran and find that 
the genus is the same as Semisuturia Malloch, though the genotypes are distinct 
and in a measure entitled to consideration as separate subgenera. The species 
which I placed in Semisuturia are, with the exception of the genotype, similar in 
nearly all respects to Doddiana, the genotype of Semisuturia alone differing in 
having a pair of strong proclinate outer bristles on each orbit in the male. I had 
only the female of australis before me when I described the genus and species, and 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 341 


now I have a series of specimens, including one male. Besides the paratype of 
pallens I have specimens of this species submitted by Mr. F. H. Taylor, and below 
I present some notes on the genus. 


Key to the Species. 
1. Entire occiput testaceous yellow; submedian ventral bristle on mid tibia very short 


and weak, not as long as diameter of tibia ................. australis Malloch 
Upper half of occiput black on each side; submedian ventral bristle on mid tibia 
Stroneswaumleastaasm lone wasmatiameter Of |uhieistiolane site ale scien autnenene ice eile eaetions 2 


2. Ventral bristle on mid tibia hardly longer than tibial diameter; third antennal 
segment more than twice as long as second; costal division between apices of 
auxiliary and first veins about two-thirds as long as the preceding one ........ 
Sa CR Ted OES seer om tana Sins eee Sor fate cae Ne tsY Spceriall ale allel Shas @ obi car ah avis onGh DAR ASAT OP ATE parviseta, Nn. sp. 

Ventral bristle on mid tibia much longer than tibial diameter; third antennal 
segment not twice as long as second; costal division between apices of auxiliary 


and first veins not more than half as long as the preceding one ............ 3 
3. Interfrontalia yellow; dorsum of abdomen largely glossy black .... flavifrons, n. sp. 
Interfrontalia red; dorsum of abdomen glossy testaceous yellow .... pallens Curran 


DopDIANA AUSTRALIS (Malloch). 


The male of this species has a pair of strong proclinate outer orbitals not 
present in any other species in which the male is known to me. In the specimens 
before me there are four black spots on each side of the apical half of the 
abdomen, which are not mentioned in my original description. I have been unable 
to find the type specimen of the species and pending its discovery, which is merely 
a matter of thorough search amongst my mass of material, I accept the specimens 
as australis. The venation is the same as in parviseta, of which latter the male 
is unknown to me. A thorough examination of the series of specimens of australis 
has failed to disclose any microscopic setulae on the upper surface of first vein 
such as are present in parviseta. 

Localities: Oxford Falls, 15.3.1923, the first known male and allotype, and one 
female; Kenthurst, 3.6.1922, six females (Gallard); National Park, N.S.W., 
28-29.9.1922, three females (Health Dept.). 

This species, and possibly the next one, will fall in the subgenus Semisuturia, 
distinguished from Doddiana by the proclinate outer orbital bristles in the male, 
the short ventral bristle on mid tibia, and the longer costal division between 
apices of auxiliary and first vein. 


DoppDIANA PARVISETA, nh. SD. 

©. Glossy testaceous yellow, third antennal segment except the base, the 
aristae, and each side of upper occiput black, the latter and the frontal orbits 
and parafacials white dusted. Thorax with slight even white dusting on meso- 
notum when seen from in front, which is not divided into vittae and is rather 
indistinct presuturally. Wings yellowish. 

Third antennal segment about two and one-fourth times as long as second; 
arista almost bare; head in other respects as in australis. Thorax and abdomen 
as in that species. Ventral bristle on mid tibia very little longer than diameter 
of tibia. First wing-vein with a few very short black hairs on upper side apically 
which may possibly be lacking in other specimens; wings otherwise as in 
australis. 

Length, 6-5 mm. 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W., February, 1928 (F. H. Taylor). One specimen. 


342 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


DoppDIANA PALLENS Curran. 

Because of the lack of mention of the fused abdominal tergites, I would not 
have been able to place this species definitely without access to type material, 
and, though there is no mention made in the original description of the large 
black occipital marks, they are very prominent in the paratype before me. There 
are no setulae on the upper side of the first vein, and the other characters by 
which it may be distinguished from its congeners may be gleaned from the above 
key to species. 

Localities: Palmerston (Dodd), paratype; Roberts Plateau, Macpherson Range, 
2,500-4,000 feet, Feb._March, 1929 (Dr. A. J. Turner). 


DODDIANA FLAVIFRONS, Nn. sp. 

9. Very similar to the foregoing species but smaller, with the interfrontalia 
lemon-yellow, and the dorsum of the abdomen largely glossy-black; this last 
possibly a variable character. The mesonotum has three white-dusted vittae in 
front of the suture, which are more evident than in pallens. 

Third antennal segment hardly longer than second, deep-black except at 
extreme base on inner side; interfrontalia wider than in pallens; arista practically 
bare, not as long as entire antenna. Thorax and abdomen as in the other species. 
Ventral bristle on mid tibia distinctly longer than tibial diameter. First vein 
bare on the upper side; third with two setulae at base above; venation as in 
australis, except for the shorter costal division between apices of auxiliary and 
first veins. 

Length, 6-5 mm. 

Type, Eidsvold, Qld., December, 1922, no other data. One specimen. 

It may be of interest to note that this genus differs from Hyalurgus Brauer 
and Bergenstamm, with which Curran compared it, in having one or more strong 
bristles on the raised central portions of the cheeks, in having no distinct tergal 
sutures centrally, and the eyes much less distinctly haired. Hyalurgus lucidus 
Meigen, the genotype, has discal bristles on the second and third abdominal 
tergites, and the palpi considerably longer than in Doddiana. There are some 
other distinctions of less import also. 


Section with the facial ridges bristled to above middle, and parafacials 
haired. 
Genus QuADRA Malloch. 

I have found a second species of this genus amongst my recently received 
material, and, though it differs quite strikingly from the genotype in colour, it 
agrees in all essential details with it. The species is represented by a male 
specimen and, as would be expected, the eyes are a little more distinctly haired. 
The facial ridges are similar in form to those of the genotype, bulging out in 
profile rather abruptly at, or close to, the level of the base of the third antennal 
segment, the vibrissae are situated at some distance above the mouth margin, and 
are differentiated from the numerous shorter bristles which are above them, the 
latter extending well beyond midway to bases of antennae. The discal bristles 
on the second and third abdominal tergites are not as strong as in the genotype, 
and show indications of possible variability in number. 

It might be well to add to the characters given in Caption 40 of my key the 
character of the form of the facial ridges and their armature to insure the 
identification of the genus. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 343 


QUADRA DISSIMILIS, n. Sp. 


6. Black, shining, with yellowish-grey dust. Head with the ground colour 
largely obscured by dense brownish-yellow dusting, the parafacials and cheeks 
showing brownish, the facial ridges and face yellowish testaceous; interfrontalia 
dark-brown; antennae orange-yellow, third segment fuscous except at extreme 
base; aristae fuscous; palpi orange-yellow; occipital hairs yellowish-white, the 
other cephalic hairs black. Thorax and abdomen black, the latter showing indica- 
tions of testaceous colour on the sides of basal half; thoracic dorsum with four 
dark vittae in front of, and five behind, the suture; the abdomen with the dusting 
changeably checkered. Legs fuscous, tibiae reddish-brown. Wings greyish 
hyaline. Calyptrae white, margins yellow. Halteres brown. 


Eyes with sparse but rather evident hairs; frons at vertex about half as wide 
as either eye, upper two bristles on each orbit recurved, the inner series incurved, 
the lower portion of the series diverging at base of antenna and ending more than 
half-way to eye at about level of apex of second antennal segment, the lateral 
hairs long and numerous, continued to about lower level of eye; ocellars and 
postverticals present, not as long as the inner verticals, the outer verticals absent; 
vibrissae about as far above mouth margin as length of second antennal segment; 
bristles on facial ridges extending to well above middle, in two or three series 
below; antennae elongate, third segment about three times as long as second, and 
not more than one-third as wide as parafacial, extending to a little above level 
of vibrissa; arista thickened on basal half, the apical half filiform; palpi slender, 
normal in length. Thorax with the posterior sublateral bristle present, dorso- 
centrals three plus four, acrostichals three plus three, sternopleurals two plus one, 
the prealar long, prosternum haired, centre of propleura bare, numerous hairs in 
front of the hypopleural series of bristles, but none on the upper margin of 
hypopleura; apical pair of scutellar bristles short, discal pair quite long. Abdomen 
ovate, the first visible tergite without apical central bristles, second and third 
with both discal and apical.bristles; no sexual tufts present on third and fourth 
tergites. Legs normal; fore tibia with a series of short bristles on the entire 
length of the posterodorsal surface, which are longer than the one on antero- 
dorsal surface, except at base; mid legs missing in type; hind tibia with a rather 
irregular series of bristles on the anterodorsal surface, one or two of the bristles 
much longer than the others. Wings as in the genotype, the petiole of the first 
posterior cell very short, the cell really closed just in the margin of the wing; 
third vein with not more than three bristles at extreme base above and below. 


Length, 11:5 mm. 
Type, and one paratype, Como, N.S.W., 18.10.1925 and 3.11.1923 (Nicholson). 


The type specimen shows indications of translucence on the sides of the 
‘abdomen on basal half, which is much more pronounced in the paratype, though 
it is possible that the females may not show this colour. The scutellum may also 
be rather more noticeably yellowish in other examples, as is shown in the para- 
type, but it is not so evident here to warrant mention of it in the description. 


The genotype, ornata Malloch, is distinguished from the above species in 
having the thorax and abdomen densely white-dusted, the former with four 
conspicuous black vittae and the abdomen with a large deep-black spot on each 
side of second and third tergites. 


344 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


Section with the eyes densely haired, facial ridges bristled to above the middle, 
and the parafacials bare on at least the lower half. 
Genus AUSTROPHOROCERA Townsend. 

This genus was erected by Townsend on the basis of notes on Phorocera 
biserialis Macquart published by Brauer. I have before me a male and female 
which are evidently congeneric with Macquart’s species, and agree closely enough 
with his description to justify the belief that they belong to the species. 

In distinguishing the genus from Phorocera Robineau-Desvoidy the bristling 
of the frons is practically the only character that can be used, and possibly, if 
there are a few intermediate forms, the genus cannot be upheld. Townsend 
stated that the facial bristles were in two series, which is erroneous. In typical 
Phorocera there are two upper backwardly-curved bristles on each frontal orbit, 
and laterad of the inner marginal bristles on the orbits there are some hairs 
which are never as strong as the bristles; in Awstrophorocera. there is but one 
backwardly-directed upper bristle on each orbit, and on at least the anterior 
half of its extent there are bristles laterad of the inner series, most numerous in 
front (Fig. 71). The ocellar bristles are quite long, the prosternum is setulose, 
and sometimes there are irregular discal bristles on at least the third visible 
tergite of the abdomen. 


AUSTROPHOROCERA BISERIALIS (Macquart). 


A shining black species, with pale-grey dust on head, thorax, and abdomen. 
Interfrontalia brown, face and cheeks testaceous, frontal orbits fuscous beneath 
the dust; basal two antennal segments and the palpi orange-yellow, third antennal 
segment black. Mesonotum with four black vittae; scutellum testaceous yellow. 
Abdomen testaceous yellow on sides basally, most extensively so in male, the 
dusting slightly changeable. Calyptrae white. Halteres fuscous. 

Eyes densely pale-haired; frons of male about one-fourth, of female about one- 
third of the head-width at vertex, each orbit wider than the interfrontalia, with 
two forwardly-directed outer bristles in female only; third antennal segment 
more than twice as long as second (four times'as long in Macquart’s description) ; 
palpi normal. Thorax with three plus four dorsocentrals, the sternopleurals 1:1:1. 
Abdomen broadly ovate, no genital hair patches on third or fourth visible tergites 
in the male. Both sexes with a submedian ventral bristle on mid tibia; fore tarsi 
of female not widened; hind tibia with a series of bristles on the entire antero- 
dorsal surface, most dense in male, and with one of the bristles outstanding. 

Length, 8-9 mm. 

Localities: South Perth, W.A., 17.2.1906 (H. M. Giles); and Kojarena, W.A., 
6.9.1926 (EH. W. Ferguson). 

The tibiae in both specimens are slightly yellowish centrally, while in 
Macquart’s description the legs are given as black. 


Genus PALIANA Curran. 

This genus has the frons in both sexes quite different from any other that 
is closely related, the orbits being very much wider than the interfrontalia, with 
incurved bristles which are rather widely spaced along almost the entire inner 
margin to level of second antennal segment in male, and one recurved bristle 
proximad of level of ocellar triangle which is much laterad of the inner marginal 
series; the latter in the female is less regular than in the male, except on the 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 345 


anterior half of its extent, there are two proclinate outer bristles on posterior half, 
the reclinate upper bristle being in line with the second of these. Ocellar bristles 
lacking; prosternum setulose. 

I have examined both of Curran’s types and incline to the opinion that they 
represent the sexes of one species, the paler femora and general coloration of the 
female being merely a sexual colour dimorphism. The very striking coloration of 
the wings is a ready identification mark, the bright orange-yellow basal third, 
and broad dark-brown suffusion of the veins beyond that being quite distinctive. 

If my surmise is correct there will be but one species, basalis, intensa falling 
as a synonym. It appears pertinent to note that the name written on the label 
of the type specimen of the latter is ‘“‘intensica’, not intensa. 

Both examples are from Kuranda, Qld. (Coll. Lichtwardt). 


Section with eyes subnude; facial ridges bristled to or above middle, 
and two strong recurved bristles on each orbit laterad of the 
inner bristles. 

Genus APILIA, n. gen. 

This genus has much the appearance of a Phorocera, but the eyes are sub- 
nude, the facial ridges are less strongly bristled, and the frontal orbits each have 
two strong recurved bristles on upper half laterad of the inner marginal bristles. 
The genus would appear to belong near Pseudochaeta Coquillett, but it lacks the 
setulae on the prosternal plate which that genus, and those most closely related 
to it, have. In my recent key to the Australian genera it will run down to 
Caption 28, section one, but the lack of prosternal setulae will distinguish it from 
the genus listed at that point, and also from Frontina Meigen. 

Genotype, the following species. 


APILIA CILIFERA, nN. SD. 


6. Head black, interfrontalia opaque-black, the other portions densely whitish- 
grey dusted; antennae black, second segment hardly paler; palpi fuscous, the 
apices yellowish testaceous. Thorax shining black, with grey dusting, mesonotum 
with four black vittae and a fifth one behind suture in centre when seen from 
behind, this central vitta more densely pale-grey dusted when the thorax is 
viewed from in front; scutellum slightly rufous at apex, when seen from behind 
with the apex broadly grey-dusted, the base shining black. Abdomen coloured as 
thorax, with the bases of tergites broadly whitish-grey dusted and traces of a 
dark dorsocentral vitta, the extreme lateral, margins of tergites on venter densely 
whitish-grey dusted. Legs black. Wings hyaline, slightly darkened at bases. 
Calyptrae white. MHalteres fuscous. 

Eyes almost bare; frons at vertex about one-third of the head-width, inter- 
frontalia narrowed above, at* upper extremity not wider than either orbit, the 
latter with a series of incurved inner marginal bristles, two strong recurved 
bristles laterad of this series on upper third and some weaker bristles laterad of 
the series anteriorly, the inner series continued downward to a little beyond level ° 
of apex of second antennal segment; profile as Figure 72; arista nude; facial 
bristles biseriate. Thorax with three plus four dorsocentrals, three plus three 
acrostichals, posterior sublateral bristle present; prealar strong; sternopleurals 
two plus one; prosternum and centre of propleura bare. Abdomen ovate, with 
sometimes a pair of bristles at apex of first, and always a pair at apex of second 


346 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


and a series of bristles at apex of third tergite, the latter with a large patch of 
fine depressed black hairs on each side below the curve; hypopygium as Figure 73. 
Fore tibia with a series of short anterodorsal bristles and a similar series on the 
basal portion of posterodorsal surface besides two or more longer posterior 


Fig. 71.—Austrophorocera biserialis. Head of male from the side. 
Fig. 72.—Apilia setifera. Head of male from the side. 

Fig. 73.—Apilia setifera. Apex of abdomen of male from the side, 
and (a) penis. 


bristles; fore tarsi shorter than tibia; mid tibia with a strong submedian ventral 
bristle; hind tibia with a series of closely placed bristles on entire length of 
anterodorsal surface, and some longer bristles on posterodorsal surface. Black 
costal setulae not in evidence beyond apex of second vein; first posterior cell 
open, ending well proximad of apex of wing; bend of fourth vein subangular, 
the vein arcuate beyond it. 


Length, 12 mm. 
Type: Hidsvold, Qld., December, 1922, no other data. One specimen. 


Another male before me has the basal two antennal segments testaceous 
yellow, the frontal orbits, parafacials, cheeks, face, and occiput yellow-dusted, 
only the narrow inner margins of the frontal orbits grey-dusted, the palpi entirely 
testaceous yellow, and a narrow dark vitta in centre of mesonotum in front of 
the suture. 


It is possible that this is a different species, but I can detect no differences 
in the hypopygium and therefore leave it tentatively as cilifera. 


Locality: Cairns district (Dodd). 


A female agrees very well with the last male, but the face is white-dusted, 
almost silvery, as are also the frontal orbits, parafacials, and postocular orbits. 
There are a few microscopic hairs below the lower frontal bristle in both speci- 
mens, which are not evident in the genotype, and the facial ridges have but one 
series of moderately strong bristles instead of two series. The female has the 
usual two proclinate orbitals. 


Loeality: Cairns district (Dodd). 
More material is required to enable one to arrive at a conclusion as to the 


identity of the last two specimens. Three males from the Federated Malay States 
agree almost perfectly with the type specimen. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 34 


co | 


Section as preceding one, but the frontal bristles in a single series in male. 
Genus VESPIVORA, n. gen. 


Closely related to Frontina Meigen, but distinguished from it and all 
closely related genera by the lack of the propleural bristle. The facial ridges are 
bristled to well above the middle, the eyes are subnude, and the prosternum is 
setulose. In my generic key it will run to Caption 38, and is distinguished from 
the genus there listed by the lack of the propleural bristle. 


Genotype, the following species. 


VESPIVORA NIGRIVENTRIS, 0. Sp. 


6, 2. Head testaceous yellow, with dense yellow dust except on the lower 
portion of the postocular orbits where it is white, interfrontalia red, upper occiput 
fuscous on each side, third antennal segment largely darkened; palpi yellow. 
Thorax fuscous, shining, with dense yellowish-grey dust, mesonotum with five 
dark vittae anteriorly in male, four in female; scutellum largely reddish-yellow. 
Abdomen reddish-yellow, with yellow dust, most distinct on bases of tergites, 
venter glossy-black almost up to the curve on each side of the tergites, in male, 
and a black dorsocentral vitta in both sexes, which is incomplete at apex in male. 
Legs testaceous yellow in female, femora broadly fuscous at bases in male. Wings 
hyaline. Calyptrae and halteres yellow. 


Frons of male about two-thirds as wide as either eye at vertex, of female 
but little wider, female with, male without, proclinate outer orbitals; ocellars 
short in both sexes; all four verticals present in both sexes; upper two or three 
orbitals in male recurved, the series not on inner margin but at some distance 
from it and hairs present on both sides of it, the lower bristle below level of 
apex of second antennal segment; parafacials bare, not wider than third antennal 
segment, the latter more than three times as long as second segment; arista bare; 
palpi normal. Thorax with three plus four dorsocentrals, three plus three 
acrostichals, posterior sublateral strong; sternopleurals one plus one. Abdomen 
ovate, centre of black ventral portions of tergites 2 and 3 densely haired, visible 
tergites 2 to 4 with apical, 4 with discal bristles. Mid tibia without a submedian 
ventral bristle in either sex; hind tibia fringed on anterodorsal surface in both 
sexes, one outstanding bristle in series in female. Wings as in Frontina. 

Length, 8-9 mm. 


Type, male, allotype, and two male paratypes, Hidsvold, Qld., parasite of wasps. 


Section with the eyes densely, or at least very distinctly haired, parafacials 
with hairs to below middle, and the facial ridges with at most 
the lower half setulose. 


Genus AMPLIPILIS Curran. 


The only characters that would appear to warrant one accepting this as 
distinct from Winthemia Robineau-Desvoidy consist of the lack of developed 
ocellars, and the comparatively higher placed vibrissae. The more densely fringed 
anterodorsal surface of the hind tibia is assumably a male character, and possibly 


the others are also, but the female is unknown so that it is not possible to report 
definitely on this. ; 


The lack of ocellars is again the only character for the separation of Palia 
Curran from Phorocera Robineau-Desvoidy, and there is a segregate of Sturmia 


348 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiV, 


in which this distinction from the typical form occurs, but it is rather doubtful 
whether the character is worthy of consideration as of generic value. 

I have carefully compared versicolor Curran, the genotype and only known 
species of Amplipilis, with the genotype of Winthemia and incline to the opinion 
that it is merely an exaggerated form of the latter genus, though I believe there 
is nothing to be gained by sinking Amplipilis without access to both sexes. 


Genus WINTHEMIA Robineau-Desvoidy. 


The genus Chaetolyga Rondani is distinguished from Winthemia in 
Lundbeck’s work on the Danish Tachinidae by the possession of three instead of 
two sternopleural bristles, and by the male having a strong reclinate upper 
frontal bristle on each orbit. The original spelling of the genus name is 
Chetoliga. I have one Australian species that is very similar to the genotype of 
this genus. 

There are two species of Winthemia represented by males in my Australian 
material and only one species of the genus is described from here. I append a 
synopsis of the characters of the species to enable students to recognize them. 
Two of the examples have evidently been reared, as there are accompanying 
empty puparia mounted with them. In other regions the species are parasitic 
upon Lepidoptera, quadripustulata Meigen being a very effective and common 
enemy of the Army-worm in the United States. 

In presenting the data upon this genus I must emphasize that it is possible 
he species described as new may have been described from some adjacent 
region, and that my presentation is made to enable names to be applied to known 
Australian forms pending a careful comparative treatment of the species of the 
world. 


Key to the Species. 


1. Pleural hairs entirely black; face and parafacials white-dusted, the latter contrast- 
ing rather noticeably with the bronzy-yellow-dusted frontal orbits, and with 
dark hairs; third visible abdominal tergite with a very small tuft of black 
bristly hairs on the incurved lateral portions near to the lateral posterior 
EW OY ED EY Se he tear eee remO NOG Laat BOS cs GARE ROMS CeE ooot cna are uiLoree elena etree diversa, . sp. 

Pleural hairs partly pale, the long hairs on posterior margin of mesopleura behind 
the marginal bristles always conspicuously yellow; face either yellowish-dusted 
or the parafacials are white-haired; third and fourth visible abdominal tergites 
with the greater portion of the incurved lateral portions densely covered with 
LACK OTIS Cyt aS Mires MRR Pe ole ieee La RPP eo ccc four eee ea 2 

Face and parafacials densely white-dusted, the latter with white hairs, frontal 
orbits white-dusted, becoming greyish at upper extremities .... albiceps, n. sp. 

Face, parafacials, and frontal orbits, brassy-yellow-dusted, the parafacials with black 
LoVe W Wek Whlins Geno: re ER IA eR Sth Shee 5 45/-c.A\G-Guct Bo ee ee Renn Cieieee cc Pe RoR trichopareia Schiner ? 


bo 


WINTHEMIA DIVERSA, Nn. SD. 


dg. Similar in general appearance and coloration to quadripustulata Meigen, 
but with a small tuft of bristly hairs on each side on the incurved lateral portions 
of the third visible abdominal tergite. Face and postocular orbits white-dusted, 
frontal orbits yellowish-dusted, cheeks darkened, parafacial hairs dark, palpi 
testaceous yellow, darkened basally; antennae entirely black; hairs on eyes 
yellowish. Thorax black, shining, with yellowish-grey dust, mesonotum with five 
shining black vittae, the central one rather indistinct anteriorly, the sublateral 
pair complete, the submedian pair not extending to posterior margin; scutellum 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. _ 3849 


testaceous, darkened basally; pleural hairs all black. Abdomen shining black, 
sides of first three tergites broadly translucent yellowish, apex of fourth narrowly 
yellowish. Legs entirely black. Wings greyish hyaline. Calyptrae yellowish- 
white. Halteres pale-brown. 

Eyes densely haired; frons at vertex about one-third as wide as either eye, 
interfrontalia entire, orbits rather densely haired on entire extent, their inner 
margins with a series of bristles, all incurved, ocellars short but distinct, para- 
facials not as wide as third antennal segment, dark haired, cheek about as high 
as width of third antennal segment, the latter not three times as long as second 
segment, extending almost to vibrissae; palpi slightly club-shaped. Thorax with 
three plus four dorsocentrals, three plus three acrostichals, the posterior sub- 
lateral strong, prealar of moderate length, three intra-alars, eight scutellars on 
margin and two on disc. Abdomen normal, except for the presence of a small 
tuft of bristly hairs on the incurved portion of each side of third visible tergite 
and rather numerous hairs on same part of fourth; first and second tergites 
without apical central bristles, third and fourth each with a complete apical 
series, the one on third strongest. Legs normal, hind tibia with the usual antero- 
dorsal fringe of regular bristles. 

Length, 10 mm. 

Type, “Allowrie”’, Killara, N.S.W., 28.1.1921. One specimen. 


WINTHEMIA ALBICENS, Nn. Sp. 


do. Similar in most particulars to the preceding species, but differing as 
stated in the synopsis. In addition to these characters the frons is a little wider, 
the species is somewhat larger, and there is a distinct yellowish patch on the 
hind margin of the mesonotum centrally. 

Length, 12 mm. 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W., no other data. One specimen. 

Coquillett has identified this as Masicera lata Macquart, in the United States 
National Museum collection, but it does not agree with the description. It is 
possible that it may be trichopareia Schiner, but the next species agrees as well 
with the description and is more common apparently. There is a possibility that 
it is dispar Macquart. 


WINTHEMIA TRICHOPAREIA Schiner ? 


I believe that the specimens before me are this species, though it is rather 
unsatisfactorily described by Schiner. It will, however, be possible to check the 
identification as the type is in all probability in the Vienna Museum. Bezzi has 
suggested the synonymy of this species and dispar Macquart. 

In most particulars it is similar to the preceding species, differing in the 
characters listed in the synopsis. 

Length, 10-12 mm. 

Locality: Cairns, N. Qld. Four males. 

I hope to return to this genus at some future time and further elucidate the 
species, especially the females, of which I have a number, two of them reared. 


Genus CALopycipiA,*n. gen. 


This genus has the head much as in Quadra, but the parafacials are haired 
to the lower level of eyes with quite strong black hairs, the first posterior cell 


390 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXiv, 


of the wing is open, the eyes are densely haired, the ocellars are lacking in the 
male and present though short in one female, and the abdomen lacks discal 
bristles on the second and third visible tergites. 


Genotype, the following species. 


CALOPYGIDIA ANALIS, n. Sp. 


6; 2. Head testaceous yellow, densely yellow-dusted except on the frontal 
orbits which are slightly shining, interfrontalia reddish in male, paler in female; 
antennae orange-yellow, third segment black in male, reddish-yellow below and 
black above in female; aristae black; palpi orange-yellow; proboscis black; 
frontal, parafacial, and genal hairs black, occipital hairs golden-yellow. Thorax 
black, with white dusting, the mesonotum with four narrow black vittae; 
scutellum translucent testaceous yellow. Abdomen glossy-black, fourth visible 
tergite entirely densely grey-dusted, incurved lateral margins of the other tergites 
grey-dusted. Legs black. Wings greyish hyaline, yellowish at bases. Calyptrae 
white, yellowish basally and on margin. Knobs of halteres fuscous. 


o. Frons at vertex more than half as wide as either eye, interfrontalia entire, 
not as wide as either orbit above, each orbit with a backwardly-curved bristle at 
upper extremity of the inner series and laterad of them, the inner series strong, 
extending below level of apex of second antennal segment where it runs diagonally 
towards eye, ocellars lacking, inner verticals long, outer pair undeveloped; para- 
facials about twice as wide as facial ridges when seen in profile and fully as wide 
as third antennal segment; vibrissae situated above mouth margin; third antennal 
segment about six times as long as second; arista thickened to well beyond 


Fig. 74.—Calopygidia analis. Apex of 
abdomen of male from the _ side. 


middle, then abruptly tapered, with microscopic pubescence; face with centre 
deeply sunken, and a central vertical linear carina; palpi moderately long. 
Thorax with the same bristling as Winthemia, the posterior sublateral present 
and the sternopleurals two. Abdomen broadly ovate, not longer than thorax, 
second, third, and fourth tergites with apical central bristles, the series complete 
on last two, fourth with discal bristles; hypopygium as Figure 74, the forceps 
quite long. Wings as in Winthemia. Mid tibia with a strong submedian ventral 
bristle; hind tibia with one outstanding bristle in the anterodorsal series of 
regular bristles; fore tarsi normal, the claws and pulvilli not as long as in 
Winthemia species. & 


?. Similar to the male, but with the frons wider, almost as wide as one eye 
at vertex, and with two strong proclinate bristles on each orbit outside of the 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 351 


inner series; the ocellars may be developed or undeveloped. The fore tarsi are 
not dilated. 

Length, 8-10 mm. 

Type, male, allotype, and one defective paratype, Barrington Tops, February, 
1925, on Leptospermum (S.U. Zool. Exped.); paratypes, Blue Mts., no other data 
(Health Dept.); Sydney, N.S.W., no other data, and Blackheath, N.S.W., 26.12.1921 
(Health Dept.). 

This genus will run down to Winthemia in my generic key, but it is 
distinguished from that genus by the rather prominently visible facial ridges with 
their bristles on lower half, the longer third antennal segment, sharply carinate 
face, and broader form. 


Section with eyes bare or almost so, parafacials bare, and the facial ridges haired 
or bristled on not more than their lower third. 


Genus SrurmMia Robineau-Desvoidy. 


This genus as defined in my generic key will contain quite a large number 
of species from Australia, some of them undoubtedly the same as occur in the 
Orient or on some of the intervening islands between Asia and Australia. 

Certain groups of species of greater or lesser magnitude have been split off 
from Sturmia by different authors as genera, and when it devolves upon some 
worker to make a comprehensive survey of the Australian species, careful com- 
parative work alone will determine the status of these groups. In the meantime 
I prefer to consider but one genus of the complex valid and refer all to Sturmia, 
sens. lat. : 

Most of the species of which the larval habits are known are parasitic upon 
the larvae of Lepidoptera, and are thus of considerable economic importance. 

In the material now before me, I find one very strikingly coloured species, 
semirufa, which I cannot find any published description to fit, and I describe it 
as new. It has no evident posterior sublateral bristle, and it also lacks the sub- 
median ventral bristle on the mid tibia of the male, but it is entirely possible 
that both of these bristles may be present in the female. 


STURMIA SEMIRUFA, 0. SD. 


6. Head black, frontal orbits yellowish-grey-dusted except on upper extremities, 
parafacials yellowish-grey-dusted above, becoming grey-dusted below, face and 
cheeks grey-dusted, the latter brown centrally, postocular orbits grey-dusted, 
becoming yellow above; antennae and palpi black; all cephalic hairs black. 
Thorax deep velvety-black, entirely black haired. Abdomen vermilion red, dorsal 
exposure of first visible tergite black, second to fourth tergites each with a 
more or less evident narrow dorsocentral black line, which is slightly dilated 
posteriorly on at least the second tergite; all the hairs black. Wings greyish 
hyaline, darker at bases. Calyptrae and halteres fuscous. 

Eyes with microscopic hairs; frons at vertex not more than one-fifth of the 
head-width; inner vertical bristles short, outer pair lacking, ocellars short, upper 
two bristles on each orbit short, recurved, inner marginal bristles incurved, 
regular and close, extending to level of apex of second antennal segment, hairs 
laterad of the bristles extending to lowest level of same; parafacial not as wide 
as third antennal segment, the latter extending almost to vibrissae, which latter 
are situated a little above mouth margin; facial ridges setulose on lower third; A 

L Fe 


(Jt) 
ot 
bo 


NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXIV, 


cheek about three-fourths as high as length of third antennal segment; palpi 
slightly club-shaped, quite densely fine-haired; arista subnude, swollen on basal 
fourth. Thorax with three plus four dorsocentrals, three plus three acrostichals, 
posterior sublateral bristle lacking, sternopleurals two plus one. Prosternum 
haired; apical scutellar bristles very small and weak. Abdomen broadly ovate, 
with strong apical bristles on only the third visible tergite; no sexual patches on 
third and fourth visible tergites. Fore tibia with the anterodorsal setulae very 
short, mid tibia with one anterodorsal and one or two posterodorsal bristles, 
hind tibia with a regular series of anterodorsal bristles. Wings normal. 

Length,.9 mm. 

Type, Kuranda, N. Qld. (Dodd). One specimen. 

There are many Australian species of this and related genera. Many of those 
species referable to this group are of importance in the control of injurious 
Lepidoptera and other orders of insects and some of them have been widely 
distributed throughout the world, but they are not at all easy to identify, and 
are often quite misleading in their close superficial resemblance to other species 
which may belong to distinct genera. The best method of obtaining reliable data 
upon the species is to rear them and save not only the adults but their empty 
puparia, taking care to associate these carefully with each other, as the puparia 
often present good characters for the generic and specific identification of the 
species. 


New Zealand Species. 


I present at this time the description of one New Zealand species. 


Genus ProroHystrRiciA Malloch. 


When I described this genus I had but one species in mind, pachyprocta 
(Nowicki), but there is a similar but smaller species amongst my New Zealand 
material which I briefly describe below. I do not consider the small size of the 
palpi sufficient ground for its generic separation from the genotype. 


PROTOHYSTRICIA HUTTONI, nN. Sp. 


3. Similar in general coloration to pachyprocta, the face testaceous, with 
pale-grey dust, the interfrontalia brownish-black, orbits and upper occiput fuscous, 
with grey dust; antennae black; palpi brown; proboscis black. Thorax fuscous, 
with brownish-grey dust, most of the fine hairs pale. Abdomen semipellucid 
testaceous yellow, with grey checkered dusting and a rather broad black dorso- 
central vitta which expands on fifth tergite and almost covers it, the fine hairs 
mixed black and pale. Legs black, tibiae and apices of femora testaceous yellow. 
Wings greyish hyaline, veins brown, paler basally. Calyptrae white. MHalteres 
yellow. 

Eyes densely haired; frons at vertex about one-fifth of the head width; ocellar 
bristles long, erect and divergent; interfrontalia complete; parafacials haired to 
middle or below it; face almost carinate above; third antennal segment not 
twice as long as second, extending almost to vibrissa, the latter about the length 
of second antennal segment above epistome; second aristal segment about twice as 
long as wide; proboscis with the apical section slender, tapered to the apical 
labellae, and about one and a half times as long as head; palpi not as long as 
second antennal segment; parafacials as wide as third antennal segment. Legs 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 353 


normal, mid tibia with a ventral bristle. Fifth abdominal sternite densely covered 
with short black bristles; sixth visible tergite with more numerous, seventh with 
less numerous, bristles than in pachyprocta. 

Length, 10 mm. 

Type, Bold Peak, New Zealand, 24.12.1912 (M. M. Watt). 

Readily distinguished from the genotype by the small palpi and longer and 
more slender apical section of the proboscis. Both have the thoracic dorsum 
conspicuously quadrivittate with black, the vittae abbreviated behind. 

Dedicated to Capt. F. W. Hutton, pioneer New Zealand dipterist. 


hanes syisaco atest ie Bok 


i 


sila abtinnaisyl lesen ney 


4) Sy ee it fi : he year ys ae 


gly ny’ ve pear 


sete Ke 


t Tichves 


WiC oan 
int 


“ ‘ seals pray yang 


2 ene! Bee: aE ss hart | 


Se 


fate REY ate 


+ a a 44 ? wets ia at pe RY 
‘el Ba q 

ei ieee es ehh ca eee te 

TR or. 7 ayy Rue ee id ot 

€! F oe ‘ L4% ts ' ua 3 


ND Rata ho a ce Oban Th ck Bey iyi ah 


BO ne AT Ae a 
dnoirticroniae OE 
eae apy TRY SBS a id 


eo ees) 4a Ti hay ‘ ant ‘. ad nbs Ae 


SS fay! Mhaut ove Aa i) ‘wal fram ‘ 
i RAPER) | PENT IN Iai iek i 


ee ee hi 
PS a 
Berean ane Ta 


JOSEPH HENRY MAIDEN. 
1859-1925. 


(Memorial Series, No. 3.) 
(With Portrait.) 


Joseph Henry Maiden was born at St. John’s Wood, London, on April 25th, 
1859. He was educated at the City of London Middle Class School. He was a 
spirited boy and well-minded to defend his rights. He once gave me an amusing 
picture of himself as a small youth, dressed immaculately in an Eton suit and 
wearing a high hat, as he stood with his back to some railings on his way home 
from school, and with clenched fists bade defiance to the pack of street Arabs, 
who jeered at his attire and threatened violent hands. It was an indication of 
the man to be. 


At school he soon developed a taste for science. Professor T. Barff, Professor 
of Chemistry at New College, had charge of the teaching of Chemistry at the 
School, and for three years young Maiden acted as his Demonstrator. Barff was 
a well-known chemist of the time and had written what was the favourite text-book 
on Chemistry for the London Matriculation Examination. In this way Maiden 
must have acquired a good groundwork in Chemistry. 


In various ways he gained experience and, amongst other things, he fore- 
shadowed his later Museum Curatorship by being appointed to the care of a 
fine collection of products which entered the Port of London, and which was 
used by some of the Masters for lecture purposes. He came out sixth in his 
final school examinations and matriculated at the University of London. 


During the Matriculation Examination he found himself seated next to 
Mrs. Annie Besant, and, as a student of Natural History, observed that Mr. Charles 
Bradlaugh used to accompany the lady to the examination hall and call for her 
when the day’s work was over. 


Leaving school he worked on at the B.Sc. course. Professor Barff had been 
so impressed with his ability that Maiden was engaged as Demonstrator for two 
sessions at the Royal Academy of Arts, where Barif was delivering courses of 
lectures on Oils and Pigments to the Royal Academicians and an invited audience. 
Other recognition was made by the wealthy Fishmongers’ Company, who offered 
him a scholarship of £50 a year tenable at Christ’s College, Cambridge; and by 
Sir Frederick Abel, who nominated him for a post in the chemical laboratory of 
the Royal Arsenal at Woolwich. 


He did not avail himself of these offers but “suffered disappointment after 
disappointment through illness’. He was finally induced to try the effect of a 
long sea voyage and decided on a trip to Australia for the benefit of his health. 


He came to Australia then at the end of 1880, with a return ticket, and 
introductions to a Bishop and to Professor Liversidge. The former was never 
presented, for the diocese of the Bishop was far from Sydney; and the latter was 


356 JOSEPH HENRY MAIDEN. 


not presented till a year after date. The Professor was inclined to find fault 
with so belated a visit, until the circumstances of the health holiday were 
explained to him. He added that Professor Barff had written to him twice 
about his visitor. He wound up by offering Mr. Maiden the post of Curator of 
the Technological Museum, about to be established in Sydney. 

In August, 1878, at a meeting of the Trustees of the Australian Museum, Mr. 
(after Sir Alfred) Roberts moved a resolution “that, in the opinion of this 
Board (of the Trustees), a Technological and Industrial Museum, with classes 
for instruction, would afford much valuable and practical information to a large 
class of the community, that it may be advantageously associated with this 
Institution (the Australian Museum), and that the necessary accommodation 
might be provided in the building about to be erected for the exhibition of works 
of art.” Professor Liversidge was one of the most active and influential Trustees, 
but he was at this time in England. He was deputed to make inquiries in Europe 
and to join with the Agent-General in procuring information and in the purchase 
of specimens. In 1879 a Committee was formed of Professor Liversidge and 
Messrs. Roberts and Hunt, and by their advice, in 1880, the collections, including 
specimens, both “suitable and unsuitable’, left over from the Sydney Inter- 
national Exhibition, were housed in the Garden Palace, the building erected for 
the Exhibition. It was of this Technological Museum, then under the adminis- 
tration of the Trustees of the Australian Museum, that Mr. Maiden was appointed 
Curator in October, 1881. 

With the exception of designing a building, then, Mr. Maiden was charged 
with the formation and stocking of a Museum. In spite of all difficulties, including 
the disposal of the “unsuitable” reliquiae of the Exhibition, he succeeded in the 
organization of a worth-while Technological Museum. Sir Joseph Hooker, 
Director of the Royal Gardens at Kew, presented, through Professor Liversidge, a 
large and valuable collection of specimens of Economic Botany. Some 10,000 
specimens were gathered together in the Palace Garden. But in September, 1882, 
a disastrous fire broke out in the Palace, which destroyed the building and every- 
thing except a few of the largest and least destructible of the iron and steel 
exhibits. Amongst these was a Beam Engine, made by the celebrated James Watt 
and presented by Messrs. Whitbread & Co., of London. 

Neither the Trustees of the Australian Museum nor the Curator were daunted 
by this great disaster. The Committee went on collecting objects of interest and 
by September, 1889, estimated that their new collection included some 30,000 
specimens, many of great value. Mr. Maiden had to look out for another home 
for his Museum. In the Outer Domain, at the back of the Sydney Hospital, was 
a long galvanized iron building, unlined, and floored with battens, which had 
served as the Horticultural building of the Exhibition. The Hospital had utilized 
the southern half as an Out-Patients’ Department, while the northern half was 
vacant. It had housed the members of the unfortunate Marquis de Rays 
Expedition and contained much inflammable rubbish. The bunks and some rough 
sereens remained, very few of which had been touched by the plane. The home- 
less Curator thought that half a loaf was better than no bread. He went to 
the Colonial Secretary’s Office and begged for the vacant half of the shed, which 
was granted to him before the end of the year. In these unpromising quarters 
he set up his Museum, and carried on, and advanced by leaps and bounds for 
ten years. His efforts were rewarded by the erection of the fine building at 
Ultimo, its present home, by the Government of New South Wales, which had 


MEMORIAL NOTICE. 357 


meanwhile taken over the Technological Museum from the Trustees of the 
Australian Museum. The architect, Mr. Kemp, embodied in the design the ideas 
that Mr. Maiden supplied after an experience of twelve years as Curator. “The 
Tin Shed” was abandoned and the Ultimo building was opened to the public by 
the Governor and Lady Duff in August, 1893. The fighting Maiden had won 
through. And in addition to his official duties he had published valuable papers 
on Economic Botany and a larger work on “The Useful Native Plants of 
Australia”, which was received with much favour by the British and Colonial 
press. The botanic trend is now obvious. In company with Mr. J. J. Fletcher, 
he made weekly excursions into the bush country, making himself familiar with 
Australian vegetation as it grows. He also sat at the feet of that venerable and 
amiable botanist, Rev. William Woolls, who was well acquainted with all the 
known Port Jackson plants, and he was also in communication with Baron 
von Mueller. 

In 1894 the duties of Superintendent of Technical Education were added. 
Two years later he was transferred to the Botanic Gardens as Director and 
Government Botanist, succeeding Mr. Charles Moore, who had been in office for 
forty-eight years. At the Technological Museum he was ably supported by 
Messrs. R. T. Baker and Henry G. Smith, who continued the good work when 
Mr. Maiden removed to the Gardens, and made the Technological Museum famous 
by their elaborate researches in Australian Timbers and Australian Essential 
Oils. 

Maiden had now found the metier for which his temperament, his experience 
and his inclination exactly fitted him. He delighted to be the “Watchdog of the 
Gardens”, protecting the plants and keeping the walks and lawns free from 
objectionable characters, that the citizens of Sydney, and especially the women 
and children, might possess a safe and pleasant recreation ground. He prohibited 
smoking in the Gardens even by Members of Parliament. He watched his plants, 
affectionately as a flower-loving citizen loves his private garden, learned where 
each grew and saw to it that they were well tended. He fought the flying foxes 
which, in some years, invaded the Gardens in swarms of thousands. He brought 
in soil to improve the natural infertility of the sandy ground. He arranged for 
better drainage and better water supply. He secured better accommodation for 
his gardeners and was great on labels. ° 

It was in the office that he found greatest scope for his organizing and 
constructive talents. There was no Herbarium, no collections of the flora of New 
South Wales even, no museum, no library of botanical works. It seems incredible. 
However, Maiden was used to starting with nothing, and he at once set himself 
indefatigably to work to supply these services. His first Report on the Gardens 
and Domains for the year 1897—the first Report for twenty years!—is interesting 
reading. He writes:— 

“Next to the Garden and the other outside establishments under my super- 
vision, the care of the Herbarium has been my greatest solicitude. My botanical 
assistant, Mr. Ernst Betche, is practically the keeper of the Herbarium, and it is 
impossible to speak too highly of the value of his services in making this 
Herbarium worthy of the Botanic Gardens, and of the Colony at large. The 
Herbarium being of course essential to the daily work of the establishment, I 
spend every hour in it I can possibly spare. After 18 months of incessant labour, 
barely half of the natural orders are properly arranged—the result, mainly, of 
the large number of specimens steadily flowing in from many parts of the world 


358 JOSEPH HENRY MAIDEN. 


{in the way of exchange), and also those collected by myself and my staff, 
amongst ‘whom, as earnest and discriminating collectors, I must specially indicate 
Mr. Betche, and Messrs. Forsyth and Camfield, Overseers of the Centennial Park 
and Garden Palace grounds respectively. Parliament has been pleased to vote 
a sum of money for the erection of a building to house the Herbarium, and in my 
next Report I hope to be able to announce that the building is ready for occupa- 
tion, or nearly so.” And again: “We have already the nucleus of a valuable 
botanical Museum.” } 

He did not spend all his time, however, in the Herbarium, but, between 
August, 1896, and December, 1897, he made collecting journeys to Wagga Wagga 
district; Cooma, Nimitybelle, Tantawanglo Mountain, Bombala, Delegate; Victoria 
and South Australia; Condobolin and Parkes; Gloucester district; Seaview Range 
and New England (Port Macquarie to Walcha); Marulan. 

He says: “My visit to Victoria and South Australia enabled me to examine 
the Botanic Gardens in Melbourne and Adelaide, and the smaller provincial 
establishments, while I studied the forests and forestry matters in both colonies.— 
With Mr. Walter Gill, Conservator of Forests, Adelaide, I travelled for several 
days inspecting the various forest-nurseries and State Forests in South Australia, 
and to him and to Mr. G. S. Perrin, the Conservator of Forests, Melbourne, I am 
indebted for much information and many valuable specimens.” 

The Report for 1898 relates that he had made extensive changes, improve- 
ments and additions to the Natural Order beds in the Gardens; had given orders 
for two new hot-houses, one especially for tropical Orchids; and had secured 
the erection of Packing and Potting Sheds and Store-rooms, together with a 
kitchen and dining-room for the men; all in brick. He had not yet got his home 
for the Herbarium but “the Government Architect has designed a commodious 
building of handsome design which will be in keeping with its beautiful surround- 
ings. As I write a tender for its erection has been let, so I trust that my hope 
of last year may be realized during the present one.” “I think that the number 
of species in the Herbarium at the end of the year is not less than 15,000.” 

The journeys this year were made to Mount Kosciusko; Jenolan Caves; 
Lord Howe Island; Melbourne Herbarium; Dubbo and Narromine districts and 
Harvey Range; Clarence Siding, the highest point of the Blue Mountains; Appin; 
Shoalhaven gullies; King’s Tableland; Mount Tomah; Tenterfield district and 
Dividing Range to Mount Spiraby. 

It must be remembered, too, that Maiden had not only the control of the 
various sections of the Botanic Gardens but also the superintendence of the 
Outer Domain and Centennial Park, and the State Nursery at Campbelltown, as 
well as the care of the grounds of the Governor at Moss Vale, of the Admiral at 
North Sydney and the Gaol Reserves at East Maitland. He was also looked to 
for the supply of palms and shrubs for all sorts of institutions and all sorts 
of public functions. He had the wisdom of King Louis the Fourteenth in main- 
taining a general supervision, but leaving the details to his capable lieutenants, 
Mr. George Harwood, the Superintendent of the Gardens, and to Messrs. Forsyth 
and Camfield, abovementioned, while Mr. Betche was a tower of strength in the 
Herbarium. Throughout his tenure of office, too, Mr. Maiden had the magnificently 
loyal and capable support of the Chief Clerk, Mr. R. Nichol. 

It was not until March, 1901, that the Herbarium and Museum building was 
officially opened by the Hon. John See. It is a two-storey building. On the 
ground floor—Herbarium of Cryptogams, 41 feet x 31 feet; Museum, 40 feet x 30 


MEMORIAL NOTICE, 359 


feet; Library and Office, 32 feet 6 inches x 19 feet; Superintendent’s Office, Halls, 
Stores, Seed-rooms, etc. On the first floor—Herbarium for Australian Phanerogims, 
41 feet x 31 feet; Herbarium for Exotic Phanerogams, 40 feet x 30 feet; Director’s 
Office and Assistant’s Room. Tables of Maiden’s own design for the purposes of 
study and for handling the collections are placed in convenient situations. The 
plants are kept in boxes, 18 x 12 x 3 inches, stowed on shelves lining the walls 
to their extreme height. Iron book-shelves of special design, known as the 
Oxford book-cases, are placed alongside the plants to which the books refer. 
The building has no balconies, and plenty of large windows through which 
comes a flood of light, so that on the dullest day the examination of specimens 
may proceed without interruption. The walls of the broad staircases and halls 
are adorned with the portraits of the eminent botanists of the world, Linnaeus, 
Naegeli, Schleiden, Loewenhock, Humboldt, Robert Brown, Allan Cunningham, 
Lindley, Hooker, Dampier, Rae, Bentham, Leichhardt, von Mueller, Bailey, and 
many others. The gathering of these must have cost Mr. Maiden much thought 
and expense. How on earth he managed to get hold of them one can only 
wonder. No bibliophile could have done better. But he was a bibliophile, too, and 
secured a whole library of botanical classics, furnishing both Phanerogamic and 
Cryptogamic Herbaria with an excellent literature. 

In January, 1927, Mr. Edwin Cheel, the Curator, states that there were 
contained in the Herbarium upwards of 18,000 of the boxes, incorporating about 
340,000 sheets of specimens classified into their families, genera and species. 
In 1926 the staff identified and reported on upwards of 2,225 specimens besides 
attending to numerous personal inquiries and other routine work. 

Probably Maiden’s creation of this great Herbarium is his finest contribution 
to science. Nearly all of the described Australian Phanerogams and many of 
the Cryptogams are stored in the Herbarium and will serve investigators for 
ages. Many a Monograph might, and ought to, be written on the material 
stored in the Maiden Herbarium. 

At first he had to rely on the excellent staff bequeathed by Charles Moore, 
but later he was able to choose officers from men whose marked ability and 
scientific bias he had noted with the keen eyes which were ever on the watch 
for efficient helpers. Thus on Mr. Harwood’s death he appointed Mr. E. N. Ward 
to be Superintendent of the Gardens, and introduced Messrs. E. Cheel and A. A. 
Hamilton and later Mr. W. F. Blakely as Assistants in the Herbarium, with 
Miss Margaret Flockton as expert botanical artist. Thus’the supply of Taxonomic 
Botanists was maintained by men of his own training. The Gardens was a busy 
hive. He worked hard himself and had the gift of keeping all his assistants 
going all the time at full speed. 

In 1900 he made a trip to Europe. ‘Before my departure from the colony 
the staffs of the establishments under my supervision generously presented me 
with a handsome souvenir in the shape of a beautifully fitted travelling bag. 
The kind words that were said on that occasion were not empty words, but were 
expressive of the very cordial relations that exist between the staff and myself.” 
Such were his relations with his staff in the early days. On the occasion of his 
retirement in 1924 the staff gathered to bid him farewell. Every available officer 
in the Sub-Department, from Dr. Darnell Smith, the new Director, to the office boy 
—about 130 of them—mustered at the Depé6t in the Gardens and there were 
speeches of hearty appreciation of his great work and regret over his retire- 
ment by Dr. Darnell Smith, Mr. E. N. Ward and Mr. Mitchell, the Foreman of 


360 JOSEPH HENRY MAIDEN. 


the gardeners. Later on the same day there was a leuve-taking at the Head 
Office of the. Department of Agriculture, when all Branches were represented. 
The Hon. F. A. Chaffey, Minister for Agriculture, presided. The Under Secretary, 
Mr. G. Valder, spoke in feeling terms of his long association with Mr. Maiden, 
and of the distinguished services he had rendered in:so many ways. during the 
twenty-eight years he had been Government Botanist and Director of the Botanic 
Gardens. Dr. Darnell Smith, in speaking for the Scientific and Professional 
Staff, commended Mr. Maiden on his wise choice of subordinates, and spoke of 
his unflagging interest in his botanical studies, as an active worker and officer 
in learned Societies, and as a prolific author. Mr. E. N. Ward spoke of the late 
Chief as a hard worker himself and who expected the same of others. At the 
conclusion Mr. Chaffey presented Mr. Maiden with a wallet of notes as a token 
of his fellow officers’ esteem, and expressed his deep regret that they were losing 
so distinguished an officer as Mr. Maiden had proved to be. 

He showed his usual activity in his trip abroad. He visited many of the 
principal botanic gardens, parks and herbaria in Great Britain and Ireland, 
France, Germany, Holland, Belgium and Ceylon... He attended the International 
Botanical Congress held in connection with the Paris Exhibition and the 
Botanical Section of the British Association for the Advancement of Science at 
Bradford. He cemented old friendships, made new ones, and obtained a fund of 
practical information in regard to botanical and horticultural establishments. He 
hardly spent a day in recreation. No wonder that he “stepped on the return 
steamer more dead than alive out of pure weariness’. Amongst other achieve- 
ments he made arrangements for his collection of portraits of eminent botanists 
and was the means of obtaining from the British Museum nearly 586 botanical 
specimens collected by the hands of Sir Joseph Banks and his assistants at 
Botany Bay and in Northern Queensland on the voyage of the “Endeavour”, 
commanded by Captain Cook, in 1770. This collection of original type specimens 
is the gem of the National Herbarium of New South Wales. 


Maiden was an untiring and remarkably methodical worker. He let nothing 
slip. However weary in body, and in later years his physical afflictions were 
severe, he carried on with unflagging energy and will power. He made recording 
and suggestive notes of everything, and all these were placed in docketed and 
systematized pigeon holes... The notes were clearly expressed and clearly written 
in a bold hand. In this way he kept a wonderful control of his work. He made 
a careful and thorough arrangement of the details of preparation for all his 
enterprises showing great forethought, and so he secured unexampled success. 

His excursions were carefully planned campaigns. I had the pleasure of 
accompanying him in one of his investigations of the Mount Kosciusko flora. His 
equipment was complete. Messrs. J. J. Fletcher and W. Forsyth and myself were 
laden with huge vascula. It was a riding trip, and, with one of these vascula in 
front and one behind, riding was difficult on the steep slopes. We constantly 
alighted to collect, and I fear that each in turn was also rudely precipitated 
where no plants called to us. A two days’ blizzard of wind and snow added to the 
difficulties, but Maiden made an exhaustive collection of the flora and extensive 
notes, and Forsyth made a fine series of ecological photographs. A feature of 
Maiden’s investigations was his close attention to details, and it was his custom 
to stand in front of the tree or shrub under examination, note-book in hand, and 
enter his observations on the spot. He did not yield to the temptation to trust 
to memory. 


MEMORIAL NOTICE. 361 


He was handicapped by physical disabilities, incurred in his public service. 
He was on a trip to Moss Vale collecting orchids for the Gardens and certain 
fresh flowering and fruiting twigs for his Forest Flora. He took a sulky from 
Robertson, and in jumping across a small ravine at the top of Macquarie Pass, he 
found that something had happened and he hurried to bed at the local hotel. It 
having been pronounced that he was badly ruptured he took medical advice at 
Moss Vale and returned to Sydney, where he consulted his own doctor and was 
measured up for a truss. He says: “Few people can understand the distress and 
risk I underwent for a few years, and at last I consulted (1911) Sir Alexander 
MacCormick, who ordered me to “The Terraces” that day. He operated on me the 
next day. I was in the hospital three weeks but I took no sick leave, only 
ordinary recreation leave. This specific duty of plant hunting near Robertson 
must have cost me at least £100. It never occurred to me to come to the Govern- 
ment for leave or medical expenses.’ His lameness, due to the above accident, 
increased as the years went on, until it was only possible to move with great 
dificulty and much pain. But he kept a stiff upper lip and went on with his 
great labours as before. 

In fact, while actually a poor man with a quite inadequate official salary, 
he spent freely of his own money in carrying out his various enterprises for the 
benefit of Science and of the country. He was ambitious but with a noble 
ambition. His last major botanical journey was to Western Australia. Here he 
travelled and collected wholesale for four months, spending his own money and 
using his leave. The Government of New South Wales gave no aid, but a kind 
Melbourne friend made a generous gift of £200. “It all went and very much more 
out of my own resources.” “I had been studying the routes of botanists and 
explorers for years to make this trip the success it was. But I underwent much 
hardship.” i 

He found other workers and joined with them, publishing papers in con- 
junction with R. T. Baker, Ernst Betche, Henry Deane and R. H. Cambage. The 
last two were great travellers, and both keenly interested in the Eucalypts, and 
brought their wide field knowledge to add to the taxonomy and distribution of 
the genus. E 

He was an active and distinguished member of many scientific Societies, 
served on their Councils and as President, and furnished an immense number of 
valuable papers. 

He joined the Linnean Society of London in 1888 and was a Fellow of the 
Royal Horticultural Society. In 1915 he was awarded the Gold Medal of the 
Linnean Society. The Medal was handed to the High Commissioner, Sir George 
Reid, for transmission to Mr. Maiden. The Vice-President, from the Chair, 
addressed him in these words:—‘Sir George Reid: It gives me sincere pleasure 
to ask you on behalf of the President to receive and transmit to Mr. Joseph 
Henry Maiden of Sydney, New South Wales, the Medal of the Linnean Society, 
which the Council has thought fit to bestow on him. The pleasure is all the 
greater as it goes for the first time to one of our great Dominions oversea. Mr. 
Maiden was born in this city, but he has by his life work identified himself with 
the scientific aspirations of the Commonwealth of Australia. He has for more 
than thirty years taken a very prominent part in the study of the Australian 
flora and the development of applied botany in that country. The number of 
papers which the publications of the Linnean ‘Society and of the Department 
of Agriculture of New South Wales owe to his zeal and ability is as considerable 


362 JOSEPH HENRY MAIDEN. 


as they are excellent. To them must be added his independent publications, 
which by their titles indicate the trend of the work that has placed him in the 
forefront of Australian botanists. . . Will you, Sir George, be good enough 
to assure him of the most cordial wishes of the Fellows who are assembled here 
at this anniversary meeting, and are glad to have been associated with him for 
so many years in the common bonds of this Society?” 

He had previously been awarded the Grande Médaille, with diploma, of the 
National Acclimatisation Society of France. In 1916 he received the high honour 
of election to the Fellowship of the Royal Society of London, the blue ribbon 
of British science. 

He was also a Corresponding Member of the Pharmaceutical Society of Great 
Britain; Corresponding Member of the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, U.S.A.; 
Honorary Member of the British Pharmaceutical Conference, 1901; Corresponding 
Member of the National Society of Agriculture, Santiago, Chili; of the Horti- 
cultural Society of Algiers; of the National Society of Natural Sciences, 
Cherbourg; of the Botanical Society of Edinburgh; of the National Institute of 
Geneva; of the National Society of Acclimatisation of France; of the Netherlands 
Society for the promotion of Industry, Haarlem; of the Agricultural Union of New 
Caledonia; of the Southern California Academy of Sciences. He was appointed 
by the New South Wales Government, representative Member of the Consultative 
Commission for the International Protection of Nature, Basle, Switzerland. 


He was a member of the Royal Society of New South Wales for forty-two 
years, Honorary Secretary for twenty-two years, and President in 1896 and 1911; 
a member of the Linnean Society of New South Wales for forty-two years, a 
member of the Council for thirty-five years, and President in 1901 and 1902; 
President of the Horticultural Society of New South Wales from 1904 to 1917 
and President for eighteen years, and then Patron, of the Horticultural Associa- 
tion of New South Wales; President of the Royal Australian Historical Society 
for two years; Founder and Patron of the Wattle League. 


He was for fourteen years Honorary Secretary to the Australasian Association 
for the Advancement of Science. He was offered the Presidency in 1921, but was 
unable to accept for health reasons. In 1922 he was awarded the Mueller Medai 
of that Association. 

He was made Companion of the Imperial Service Order, I.S.0., in 1916. 


He was awarded the Clarke Memorial Medal by the Royal Society of New 
South Wales in 1924. 

He was the author of several valuable works on Australian Botany and 
contributed papers to the journals of the various scientific Societies and in- 
numerable articles to the Agricultural Gazette on many practical subjects, such as 
Forestry and the uses of various timbers, Ring-barking, Fodder Plants, Poisonous 
Plants, Sand-drift problems, particularly sand-binding along the sea-beaches, and 
Eradication of Weeds. 

His first book was “Useful Native Plants of Australia’, 1889. This was a 
very useful compilation of what was known on our economic plants at that time. 
It contained nearly 700 pages, witnessing a vast amount of labour, and was well 
received in Europe as in Australia. 

In 1903 he published the First Part of his immense work “The Critical 
Revision of the Genus Eucalyptus’. He brought out Part after Part, working 
on till his death at this which he looked upon as his Magnum Opus. He left 


MEMORIAL NOTICE. 363 


material behind him to complete the Monograph, as far as completion is possible 
to a growing subject, and the loving hands of R. H. Cambage and W. F. Blakely 
continued the publication of his observations. In 1929 the seventy-first Part has 
appeared and still more of Maiden’s material remains to be set in order. There 
are seven volumes, each with an average of 400 quarto pages, and the eighth has 
been commenced. 

The advance made, due to the researches of Maiden and his co-adjutors, may 
be seen by a comparison of the “Critical Revision” with the ‘“HKucalyptographia” 
of Baron von Mueller. This, probably the Baron’s most prominent work, was 
published in 1879. It consisted of ten Decades, each comprising the description, 
together with a full account of the tree and a full size Plate of detailed drawings, 
of ten species of Eucalyptus. Thus 100 species are fully illustrated. In the 
Second Edition of the Baron’s Census of Australian Plants there appear 137 then 
known species of Eucalyptus. Before Maiden had finished his work the number 
had grown to 366. 

Maiden’s Plates run up to 291. He records all the information which he 
and others had been able to gather on every part of the tree: roots, stem, bark, 
branches, leaves, buds, flowers, fruits. He records all the exudations and essential 
oils, the qualities of the timber, any other economic use. He gives the distribu- 
tion of each species, and every figure of a part of a plant has attached to-it the 
locality in which it was obtained. He cultivated seedlings by the thousand in 
order to trace the changes in growth of the foliage. And all his illustrations 
were drawn by his devoted and skilled and most careful artist, Miss Margaret 
Flockton. Little indeed could escape the keen eyes of Maiden and his trained 
artist. 

The Monograph will certainly stand as a magnificent life work. But it may 
be doubted if the “Forest Flora of New South Wales” does not equal it in amount 
of research and in permanent value. This is another great quarto publication, 
illustrated in the same ample fashion by the same pencil. He began it in 1904 
and continued to issue Parts until his death. In all there are 77 Parts bound up 
into eight volumes. 

All the conspicuous trees and shrubs of the subtropical and the temperate 
Forests of the State are delineated at length. 

Maiden was emphatically a taxonomist. He realized that the first study of 
our plants must be in the determination of what plants exactly we have. He 
himself worked at the Phanerogams and at all Families. And he was zealous in 
promulgating the information he acquired. 

He was assiduous in the collection of Cryptogams for the Herbarium but 
did not himself work on these groups. He gained the aid of specialists. Thus 
the Ferns of the Herbarium were classified by Rev. W. W. Watts and later by 
T. Whitelegge; the Mosses and Lichens by W. Forsyth and E. Cheel; the Fungi 
by Dr. Cleland and E. Cheel; the Algae by A. H. S. Lucas. 

In conjunction with W. S. Campbell from 1895 to 1898 he brought out 
“The Flowering Plants and Ferns of New South Wales.” ‘A Manual of the 
Grasses of New South Wales” appeared in 1898, an octavo volume of 199 pages; 
a “Guide to the Botanic Gardens’, 108 pages, in 1903; “A Census of New South 
Wales Plants” with Ernst Betche in 1916; Forestry Handbook, in two parts, 1917: 
“The Weeds of New South Wales” in 1920. 

He was ever interested in the life and labours of his predecessors, and 
anxious that their part in botanical history should be duly recognized. He greatly 


364 JOSEPH HENRY MAIDEN. 


revered Sir Joseph Banks, whom he termed the Father of Australia, and searched 
out in England details of his life and correspondence. He incorporated these in 
his “Life of Sir Joseph Banks”. This biography is esteemed a classic. 


In the Journal of the Royal Society of New South Wales he published long 
accounts of the earlier botanists, English and French, who worked on Australian 
plants. These are illustrated by portraits of these old pioneers, portraits which 
he had been at great pains to secure. He published records, too, of early botanists 
who had laboured in those colonies, in the scientific journals of Victoria, Tasmania 
and Western Australia. 

He had accumulated detailed information on the early history of the Sydney 
Botanic Gardens, and left his manuscript with Mr. R. H. Cambage, with a view 
to later publication. Mr. Cambage’s death unfortunately prevented this publica- 
tion by him, but it is to be hoped that it will not be lost sight of. Maiden also 
prepared an Early History of the Royal Society of New South Wales and wrote 
historical articies in the Journal of the Historical Society. 

When Maiden had an object in view which he thought to be of great 
importance, he laid his plans with careful foresight, and then pursued his course 
in confident determination, turning neither to the right nor the left, but keeping 
straight on in face of all difficulties and all opposition, until he had achieved 
the end in view. A good instance of this character is seen in his study of the 
prickly pear, which had taken front rank among the pest weeds of the Eastern 
States. He set apart one of the best sites in the Botanic Gardens for the 
purpose, and planted in it many species, and watched their growth and behaviour. 
From 1911 to 1917 fifteen articles were published, beautifully illustrated with 
coloured plates. He deliberately placed the experimental plot in the Gardens, in 
order that it might be readily accessible to him, and that he might reduce to 
a minimum the chance of the plants spreading into the country. And he Kept 
this batch of monsters growing on in the Gardens, in spite of daily protests and 
gibes, until his retirement. He felt that the utilitarian took precedence of the 
ornamental. It was typical of the man. 

Of his married life this is not the place to speak at large. He was fortunate 
in his wife and four daughters, who made his home life happy, and who cared 
for him in his later years of suffering. The one evil stroke of fortune was 
inflicted when his only son, a promising and vigorous young man, was lost at 
sea, and neither he nor Mrs. Maiden ever quite recovered from the shock. It was 
a cruel blow, but he carried on with his relentless energy and, though crippled, 
continued to do two men’s work. 


He died on November 16th, 1925, at his home in Turramurra. To quote Mr. 
R. H. Cambage, the President of the Australasian Association for the Advancement 
of Science, “Maiden ranks among the half-dozen leading pioneering botanists, and 
was for many years regarded as the doyen of Australian botanists. He served 
as an inspiration to very many science students, probably many more than 
ever will be known; and as some evidence of the affection and esteem in which 
he was held by his colleagues in Science, he was, in 1916, presented with his 
portrait in oils.” This is now appropriately shown on one of the walls of his 
Herbarium. A Pavilion has been erected to his memory in the Botanic Gardens 
where he held sway for so many years, raised by the Government and by the 
contributions of his friends and admirers. He will not be forgotten. His work 
lives after him. A.H.S.L. 


MEMORIAL NOTICE. 365 


LIST OF PAPERS BY J. H. MAIDEN. 


1887. 
Notes on some indigenous sago and tobacco from New Guinea. Proc. LINN. Sou. N.S.W., 
(2) li, 1887, 457. 
Some New South Wales Tan-substances. Parts 1, 2, 3, 4. Jowrn. Proc. Roy. Soc, N.S.W., 
887, pp. 27, 82, 18l, 250: 


1888. 

Some reputed medicinal plants of New South Wales. (Indigenous species only.) Proce. 
LINN. Soc. N.S.W., (2) iii, 1888, 355. 

Australian indigenous plants providing human foods and food-adjuncts. Proc. LInn. 
Soc. N.S.W., (2) iii, 1888, 481. 

Indigenous Australian Forage Plants (Non-grasses) including plants injurious to stock. 
Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1888, 204. 

Some New South Wales Tan-substances. Part 5. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1888, 
259. 


1889. . 
Notes on the geographical distribution of some New South Wales plants. Proc. LINN. 
Soc. N.S.W., (2) iv, 1889, 107. 
The resin of Myoporum platycarpum. Journ. Chem. Soc., 1889. 


1890. 

The examination of Kinos as an aid in the diagnosis of Eucalypts. i. The Ruby group. 
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2) iv, 1889 (1890); 605. 

The examination of Kinos as an aid in the diagnosis of Eucalypts. ii. The Gummy 
group: Proc LINN. Soc) N-S.W., (2)) iv, 1889 (1890), 1277. 

Spinifex resin. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., (2) iv, 1889 (1890), 639. 

On Cedar Gum (Cedrela australis F.v.M.) Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2) iv, 1889 (1890), 
1047. 

Notes on Australian Economic Botany. i. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2) v, 1890, 273. 

On Grass-tree Gum. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., (2) v, 1890, 429. 


ibfseals 
Notes on Australian Economic Botany. ii. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., (2) vi, 1891, 138. 
On the occurrence of a gum in Hchinocarpus (Sloanea) australis Benth. Proc. Linn. 
Soc. N.S.W., (2) vi, 1891, 140. 
Angophora Kino. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2) vi, 1891, 2538. 


1892. 
The examination of Kinos as an aid in the diagnosis of HEucalypts. iii. The Turbid 
group. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2) vi, 1891 (1892), 389. : 
On two undescribed exudations from the Leguminosae. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., (2) 
vi, 1891 (1892), 679. 
On Panax gum. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., (2) vii, 1892, 35. 


1893. 
Description of a new Hakea from Eastern New South Wales (Title only). Proc. LINN. 
Soc. N.S.W., (2) vii, 1892 (1893), 352. (With F. von Mueller.) 
Description of a new species of Acacia. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2) viii, 1893, 13. 
(With F. von Mueller.) 


1894. 

Botanical Notes from the Technological Museum, Sydney. i. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 
(2) viii, 1893 (1894), 309. (With R. T. Baker.) 

Description of a new species of Acacia. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., (2) viii, 1893 (1894), 
515. (With R. T. Baker.) 

Description of a new Croton from New South Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2) ix, 
1894, 160. (With R. T. Baker.) 

Description of an apparently new Acacia from New South Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc. 
N.S.W., (2) ix, 1894, 168. (With R. T. Baker.) 

Dorrigo Forest Reserve. Agric. Gaz. N.S.W.. v, 1894, 218. 

Plants of the Australian Alps. Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., v, 1894, 836. 


366 JOSEPH HENRY MAIDEN. 


1895, 

Notes on plants collected on a trip to the Don Dorrigo Forest Reserve. (Title only.) 
Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., (2) ix, 1894 (1895), 463. 

Botanical Notes from the Technological Museum, Sydney. ii. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 
(2) ix, 1894 (1895), 456. (With R. T. Baker.) 

Botanical Notes from the Technological Museum, Sydney. iii. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 
(2) ix, 1894 (1895), 722. (With R. T. Baker.) 

A giant Acacia from the Brunswick River. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2) x, 1895, 337. 

Description of a new species of Acacia from New South Wales. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 
(2) x, 1895, 385. (With R. T. Baker.) 

A contribution to the chemistry of Australian Myrtaceous Kinos. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. 
N.S.W., 1895, 30. (With H. G. Smith.) 

On a natural deposit of Aluminium Succinate in the timber of Grevillea robusta R. Br. 
Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1895, 325. (With H. G. Smith.) 

Contributions to a knowledge of Australian vegetable exudations. i. Journ. Proc. Roy. 
Soc. N.S.W., 1895, 393. (With AH. G@. Smith.) 

Preliminary notes on the bark of Carissa ovata R.Br. Rept. Aust. Ass. Adv. Sci., 
Brisbane, 1895. 


1896. 

On a new species of Hlaeocarpus from Northern New South Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc. 
N.S.W., (2) x, 1895 (1896), 469. (With R. T. Baker.) 

The Grey Gum of the North Coast Districts (Hucalyptus propinqua, n. sp.). Proc. LINN. 
Soc. N.S.W., (2) x, 1895 (1896), 541. (With H. Deane.) 

Botanical notes from the Technological Museum, Sydney. iv. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 
(2) x, 1895 (1896); 512. (With R. T. Baker.), 

Descriptions of some new species of plants from New South Wales. Proc. LINN. Soc. 
N.S.W., (2) x, 1895 (1896), 582. (With R. T. Baker.) 

Notes on some vegetable exudations. Report Horn Expedition, 1896. 

Observations on the Eucalypts of New South Wales. i. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2) 
x, 1895 (1896), 596. (With H. Deane.) 

Concerning Hill Top. Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., vii, 1896, 268. 


1897. 

Observations on the Bucalypts of New South Wales. ii. Proc Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxi, 
1896 (1897), 798. (With H. Deane.) 

Descriptions of three new species of Australian plants. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxii, 
1897, 150. (With H. Betche.) 

On a new species of Macadamia, together with notes on two plants new to the Colony. 
Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxi, 1896 (1897), 624. (With H. Betche.) 

Presidential Address. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1897, 1. 

On a new Atriplex from South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1897. 

The Murray Red Gum, Hucalyptus rostrata, and its Kino. Amer. Journ. Pharmacy, 
1897. 


1898. 

On a new species of Hucalyptus from the Sydney District. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 
xxii, 1897 (1898), 561. (With H. Deane.) 

Observations on the Eucalypts of New South Wales. iii. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxii, 
1897 (1898), 704. (With H. Deane.) 

Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. i. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxii, 1897 (1898), 
746. (With EH. Betche.) 

Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. ii. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxiii, 1898, 11. 
(With EH. Betche.) 

Notes on a trip to Mount Seaview, Upper Hastings River. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 
xxiii, 1898, 20. 

Observations on the vegetation of Lord Howe Island. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxiii, 
1898, 112. 

Descriptions of four new species of New South Wales plants. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 
xxiii, 1898, 15. (With EH. Betche.) 

Notes on Sterculia (Brachychiton) laurida and discolor. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 
xxiii, 1898, 159. (With E. Betche.) 


MEMORIAL NOTICE. j 367 


Notes on some Port Jackson plants. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxiii, 1898, 264. (With 
J. H. Camfield.) 

On the White Ash of Southern New South Wales. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxiii, 1898, 
412. (With H. Deane.) 

On a new Myoporum from South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1898. 

Some Eucalypts of the New England Tableland. Rept. Aust. Ass. Adv. Sci., Sydney, 
1898. 

Contribution towards a flora of Mount Kosciusko. Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., ix, 1898, 720. 


1899. 

Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. iii. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxiii, 1898 
(1899), 772. (With EH. Betche.) 

Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. iv. Proc. LInn. Soc. N.S.W., xxiv, 1899, 143. 
(With E. Betche.) 5 

Some further observations on the vegetation of Lord Howe Island. Proc. Linn. Soc. 
N.S.W., xxiv, 1899, 381. 

Observations on the Eucalypts of New South Wales. iv. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxiii, 
1898 (1899), 780. (With H. Deane.) 

Observations on the Hucalypts of New South Wales. v. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxiv, 
1899, 448. (With H. Deane.) 

Contribution towards a flora of Mount Kosciusko. Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., x, 1899, 1001. 


. 1900. 

A new variety of Dendrobiwm undulatuwm from the Solomon Islands. Proc. LINN. Soc. 
N.S.W., xxiv, 1899 (1900), 652. 

Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. v. Proc. LInn. Soc. N.S.W., xxiv, 1899 
(1900), 640. (With EH. Betche.) 

Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. vi. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxv, 1990, 101. 
(With E. Betche.) 

Observations on the Eucalypts of New South Wales. vi. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxiv, 
1899 (1900), 612. (With H. Deane.) 

Observations on the Eucalypts of New South Wales. vii. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxv, 
1900, 104. (With H. Deane.) ; 


1901. 

Description of a new species of Acacia. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxvi, 1901, 12. 

On one of the so-called Honeysuckles of Lord Howe Island. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 
xxvi, 1901, 156. 

Observations on the Eucalypts of New South Wales. viii. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 
xxvi, 1901, 122. (With H. Deane.) 

Further notes on supposed hybridisation amongst MWucalypts including a description of a 
new species. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxvi, 1901, 339. (With H. Deane.) 

Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney, vii. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxvi, 1901, 79. 
(With E. Betche.) 

Two historical notes in regard to Captain Cook, the Circumnavigator. Journ. Proce. 
Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1901, 47. ‘ 

The gums, resins and other vegetable exudations of Australia. Jowrn. Proc. Roy. Soc. 
N.S.W., 1901, 161. 

Notes on the botany of Pitcairn Island. Rept. Aust. Ass. Adv. Sci., Melbourne, 1901. 

On the occurrence of Hucalyptus dives, Schauer in Victoria. Vict. Nat., 1901. 

Plants of Jenolan Caves. Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., xii, 1901, 1390. 


1902. 
On Eucalyptus pulverulenta Sims. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxvi, 1901 (1902), 547. 
On Eucalyptus Stuwartiana F.v.M. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxvi, 1901 (1902), 556. 
On Hucalyptus Gunnii Hook. f. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxvi, 1901 (1902), 561. 
Presidential Address, 26th March, 1902. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxvi, 1901 (1902), 7406 
On Eucalyptus Baueriana Schauer. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxvii, 1902, 214. 
On Eucalyptus calycogona Turecz. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxvii, 1902, 220. 
On a new Cryptocarya from Lord Howe Island, together with Notes on other plants from 
that Island. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxvii, 1902, 347. 
Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. viii. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxvii, 1902, 55. 
(With E. Betche.) 


: 4 x 
AP», Ay ah! 
RARY 

ARE, SP-C j 
J 


368 JOSEPH HENRY MAIDEN. 


The Parks of Sydney; and some of the problems of control and management. Jowrn. Proc. 
Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1902, 1. 

The mitigation of floods in the Hunter River. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1902, 107. 

Forests considered in their relation to rainfall and the conservation of moisture. Journ. 
Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1902, 211: 

Is Hucalyptus variable? Jowrn. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1902, 315. 


1908. 
On Hucalyptus bicolor A. Cunn. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxvii, 1902 (1903), 516. 
On Eucalyptus polyanthemos Schauer. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxvii, 1902 (1903), 527. 
Presidential Address, 25th March, 1903. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxvii, 1902 (1903), 683. 
The sand-drift problem in New South Wales. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1903, 82. 


George Caley: Botanical Collector in New South Wales, :1800-1810. Agric. Gaz. N.S.W.., 
xiv, 1903, 988. : 


1904. 


The Flora of Norfolk Island. i. Proc. LInNn. Soc. N.S.W., xxviii, 1903 (1904), 692. 

The variability of Hucalyptuws under cultivation. i. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxviii, 
1903 (1904), 887. 

On four new species of Hucalyptus. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxix, 1904, 469. 

The botany of Funafuti, Ellice. Group. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxix, 1904, 539. 

Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. ‘ix. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxviii, 1903 
(1904), 904. (With H. Betche.) ; 

On some natural grafts between indigenous trees. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 
1904, 36. 

Description of two Victorian Hucalypts (H#. Kitsoni and H. neglecta). Vict. Nat., 1904. 


1905. 


Miscellaneous notes (chiefly taxonomic) on Hucalyptus. i. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 
reabe, TOMS (GLO). 7/ile 


Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. x. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxix, 1904 
(1905), 734. (With HE. Betche.)- 


Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. xi. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxx, 1905, 534. 
(With EH. Betche.) 

Notes on the Hucalypts of the Blue Mountains. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxx, 1905, 190. 
(With R. H. Cambage.) 

On a new species of Hucalyptus from Northern New South Wales. Proc. LINN. Soe. 
INE SWer exo) LOO brsisibs 

Observations on the illustrations of the Banks and Solander plants. Journ. Proc. Roy. 
Soc. N.S.W., 1905, 34. 


An Aroid new for Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1905. 


1906. 


Miscellaneous notes (chiefly taxonomic) on Hucalyptus. ii. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 
oo, IN (GIOG)S WO4s 

further notes on hybridisation in the genus Hucalyptus. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxx, 
1905 (1906), 492. 

The botany of Howell (Bora Creek): A Tin-Granite flora. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 
xxxl, J906,) 63% 

A review of the New South Wales species of Halorrhagaceae as described in Prof. 
A. K. Schindler’s Monograph (1905): with the description of a new species. Proc. 
LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxi, 1906, 393. (With EH. Betche.) 

Notes on some plants which in drying stain paper. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 
1906; 319: 

The International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature (Adopted by the International 
Botanical Congress, Vienna, 1905). Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1906, 74. 
Australian Solanaceae considered as Narcotic and Poison Plants. Trans. Therapeutical 

Soc. Lond., 1906. 


MEMORIAL NOTICE. 369 


1907. 
Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. xii. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxi, 1906 
(1907), 731. (With H. Betche.) 
Botanical notes relating to a trip in the 8.S. Governor Macquarie in January, 1907. 
Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. Aust., S. Aust. Branch, 1907. 
One of the so-called quinines of New South Wales (Petalostigma quadriloculare). Agric. 
Gaz. N.S.W., xviliy 1907, 432. 


1908. 
Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. xiii. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxiii, 1908, 
304. (With E. Betche.) f 
Records of Australian Botanists (a) General, (b) New South Wales. Journ. Proc. Roy. 
Soc. N.S.W., 1908, 60. 
Records of Victorian Botanists. Vict. Nat., 1908. 
A contribution to the botany of South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1908. 


1909. 
Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. xiv. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxiv, 1909, 
357. (With EH. Betche.) - 

Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. xv. On a plant, in fruit, doubtfully referred 
to Cymodocea. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxiv, 1909, 585. (With E. Betche.) 
Botanical, topographical and geological notes on some routes of Allan Cunningham. 

Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1909, 123. (With R. H. Cambage.) 
A plea for the study of phenological phenomena in Australia. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. 
N.s.W., 1909, 157. 
Records of Western Australian Botanists. Journ. Nat. Hist. Soc. W. Aust., 1909. 
Records of Tasmanian Botanists. Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1909. 
Solanaceous plants in New South Wales. Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., xx, 1909, 1012. 


1910. 
Records of the earlier French Botanists as regards Australian plants. Journ. Proc. 
Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1910, 123. 
On two Western Australian species of Hucalyptus. Journ. Nat. Hist. Soc. W. Aust., 1910. 


Malate, 
Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. xvi. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xxxv, 1910 
(1911), 788. (With H. Betche.) 
A new species of Boronia. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Auwst., 1911. 
Notes on Western Australian HEucalypts. Journ. Nat. Hist. Soc. W. Aust., 1911. 


ileal? 
Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. xvii. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxvii, 1912, 
244. (With H. Betche.) : 
Presidential Address. Jowrn. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1912, 1. 


iLG)aLS3. 
Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. xviii. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xxxviii, 1913, 
242. (With H. Betche.) 
Notes on Eucalypts. i. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1913, 76. 
Notes on Eucalypts. ii. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W, 1913, 217. 
On a new species of Hucalyptus from North Queensland (H#. Brownii). Journ. Proc. 
Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1913, 215. 


1914. 

Further notes on the botany of Lord Howe Island (Fifth paper). Proc. Linn. Soc. 
INS en 2Sodbsg, WGI Bie 

Observations on some reputed natural Hucalyptus hybrids, together with descriptions 
of two new species (H. kybeanensis and EH. Benthami). Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. 
N.S.W., 1914, 415. (With R. H. Cambage.) 

Notes on Eucalyptus (with a description of a new species, E. praecoxv). iii. Journ. 
Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1914, 423. 

Sketch of the Botany of the County of Cumberland. The Tableland and Sub-alpine Areas 
(with R. H. Cambage). The Western Plains (with R. H. Cambage). The Eucalypts 
of New South Wales. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. Handbook, Sydney, 1914. 


370 JOSEPH HENRY MAIDEN. 


Notes on some Tasmanian Eucalypts. Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1914. 
Notes on Panicum helopus Trin. and on two Australian grasses that have been confused 
with it. Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., xxv, 1914, 1033. (With EH. Cheel.) 


1915. 
Notes on Eucalypts. iv. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1915, 3809. 
Notes on Acacia. i. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1915, 463. A 
Panicum globoidewm Domin. An Australian grass which has been confused with 
P. flavidum. Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., xxvi, 1915, 131. (With E. Cheel.) 


1916. 
On Brachychiton populneo-acerifolius, F.v.M., the Crimson-flowered Kurrajong. Proc. 
LINN. Soc. N.S.W., xli, 1916, 180. 
On a Bucalypt hybrid (#. calophylla x E. ficifolia). Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.,. xli, 1916, 
185. 
Sequential list of Dr. Basedow’s plants from N.W. Australia. Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. 
Aust., S. Aust. Branch, 1916-1917. 


WOM, 
Notes on Acacia. ii. (Tropical Western Australia.) Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 
WON Bale 
Notes on Acacia. iii. (Extra-tropical Western Australia). Jowrn. Proc. Roy. Soc. 
N.S.W., 1917, 238. : 
Notes on Eucalypts. v. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1917, 445. 
Notes on some South Australian Eucalypts. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1917. 


1918. 
A contribution to the history of the Royal Society of New South Wales. Journ. Proc. 
Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1918, 213. 
Notes on Eucalypts. vi. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1918, 486. 
Notes on some Tasmanian Eucalypts. Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1918. 
The tropical Acacias of Queensland. Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., xxx, 1918. 


1919. 
Notes on Hucalypts. vii. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soe. N.S.W.. 1919, 57. 
Notes on Hucalypts. viii. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W.. 1919, 107. 
Notes on Acacia. iv. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1919, 171. 


1920. 
Notes on the colouration of the young foliage of Hucalyptus. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 
xliv, 1919 (1920), 761. 
Descriptions of three new species of Eucalyptus. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1920, 66. 
On a Box Tree from New South Wales and Queensland. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 
1920, 168. 
Notes on Hucalypts. ix. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1920, 167. 
On a new Angophora. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1920, 175. 
Notes on two Acacias. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1920, 227. 


1921. 
A few notes on the botany of Lord Howe Island (Sixth paper). Proc. LINN. Soc. 
N.S.W., xlv, 1920 (1921), 564. 


1922. 
An alphabetical list of Victorian Eucalypts. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 1922. 


1925. 
Descriptions of sixteen new species of Eucalyptus. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1925, 
156. (With W. F. Blakely.) 


1927. 
Description of fifty mew species and six varieties of West Australian and North 
Australian Acacias. Journ. Roy. Soc. W. Aust., 1927, 1. (With W. F. Blakely.) 


In addition he contributed numberless articles to the Agricultural Gazette of New 
South Wales, and furnished many reports to his own Government and to those of other 
States and New Caledonia. 


THE ORIGIN OF ENDEMISM IN THE ANGIOSPERM FLORA 
OF AUSTRALIA.* , 


By the late A. ANSTRUTHER LAwson, D.Sc., F.R.S.E., 


Professor of Botany, University of Sydney. 
(Communicated by Dr. J. McLuckie.) 


(Plates x—xi.) 
[Read 30th July, 1930.] 


The large Angiosperm Flora of the island continent of Australia offers an 
exceptionally favourable field for the investigation of Plant Evolution. It is a 
flora that has never been devastated by ice and one that has been isolated from 
other floras for a long period of geological time. Its evolution has not been 
checked by the action of glaciation, nor has it been seriously affected by the 
constant invasion of types from beyond its borders. Evolving under such 
exceptional conditions, it manifests many peculiar and extraordinary features 
that make it unique and one of the most interesting floras inhabiting the earth. 

Among the many unusual features it presents, there are three that are quite 
obvious and conspicuous and which impart to it a characteristic facies, namely :— 

1. The predominance of the single genus Eucalyptus, with its three hundred 
odd species spread very widely over the continent and constituting by far the 
most conspicuous element in the flora. The Myrtaceae thus bulk very largely 
-as its main constituent. The Leguminosae, although including many more species 
than the Myrtaceae, and among them especially the important genus Acacia, also 
constitute a very conspicuous and important element, but neither as individuals 
nor as communities do they bear comparison with the Myrtaceae. The highly 
xerophytic family Proteaceae is also a very important and conspicuous feature, 
but takes only third place in predominance. It is the Myrtaceae with its main 
genus Hucalyptus, that gives character to the entire flora. No other continental 
flora is so greatly dominated by a single genus. 

2. The striking and varied xerophily of the flora, of which the greater 
proportion consists of perennials whose foliage is ever-green. The texture of the 
foliage, especially in the very extensive regions of little rainfall, is remarkable. 
With high cutinization, sunken stomata, reduced leaf surfaces, or with phyllodes 
and phylloclades in certain forms taking on the work of photosynthesis, it displays 
rather striking devices for conserving water and for retarding transpiration. The 
Myrtaceae, Leguminosae, Proteaceae, Compositae, Orchidaceae, Epacridaceae, 
Rutaceae, Casuarineae, and many other families furnish innumerable examples. 
The great majority of such special adaptations, however, are to be found among 
the endemic types. 


* At the time of his death, Professor Lawson left behind a draft of the manuscript, 
which has been prepared by me for publication. The meaning of the text has not been 
altered, although it has been considerably condensed to secure conciseness.—J. McLucKIE. 

B 


372 ENDEMISM IN THE ANGIOSPERM FLORA OF AUSTRALIA, 


3. The presence of so many endemic types. Among the Myrtaceae, 
Leguminosae, Proteaceae, Orchidaceae, Epacridaceae, Rutaceae, Goodeniaceae, 
Casuarineae, and other families there are many genera and species that are 
limited geographically to this southern continent. With such extraordinary 
genera as Hucalyptus, Angophora, Tristania, Syncarpia, Backhousia, Callistemon, 
Melaleuca, Leptospermum, Darwinia, Pultenaea, Gompholobium, Bossiaea, Acacia, 
Grevillea, Hakea, Banksia, Lambertia, Telopea, Stenocarpus, Xylomelum, 
Petrophila, Isopogon, Persoonia, Epacris, Styphelia, Sprengelia, Boronia, Correa, 
Crowea, Hriostemon, Goodenia, Dampiera, Casuarina, Doryanthes, Xanthorrhoea 
and other important genera, as well as many species of non-endemic genera 
limited in their geographical distribution to Australia, the vegetation has a 
distinct physiognomy and an individuality that sharply contrasts it with all 
other floras. Seventy per cent. of its species and thirty per cent. of its genera 
are endemic. Considering the great area of the continent, this high percentage 
is very remarkable; in Western Australia, where eighty-five per cent. of the 
species are endemic, we find the highest rate of endemism in any known flora. 


From this brief account it is quite clear that endemism is one of the three 
important features of the Australian Angiosperm Flora. The predominant types 
of the Myrtaceae, such as Hucalyptus, many Leguminosae, the main genera and 
species of the Proteaceae, are essentially endemic. Practically all of the highly 
specialized adaptations to xerophytic conditions are characteristic of endemic 
types. 

It seems to me, therefore, that a sound and logical interpretation of this 
Flora involves the consideration of the origin of its Endemism, and any light 
thrown upon this problem would clear the way for an understanding of the main 
factors concerned in the evolution of the Angiosperms, not only of this large 
continent, but also of other Floras. 


As endemism is an important feature of the vegetation of all continents and 
the majority of islands of the earth, it becomes a subject of profound interest to 
botanists engaged in the investigation of evolution, especially of the most recent 
expressions of Plant Life, the Angiosperms, and has attracted the attention of 
investigators for many years. The important researches of Bentham, De Vries, 
Schimper, Lotsy, Willis, Guppy, Taylor, Bews, and others, have revealed many 
interesting and valuable facts which have resulted in placing Endemism among 
the fundamental problems of organic evolution. The theoretical interpretations 
of the facts, however, especially those of De Vries, Willis and other followers 
of that school of thought, have led to controversy and still require careful and 
critical scrutiny from every possible angle. 

The new school of geneticists, founded and developed by such workers as 
Rosenberg, Bateson, Jeffrey, Lotsy. and others, has established a very sound 
criterion for the identification of hybrids. The credit for discovering this most 
important and useful criterion belongs to Rosenberg (19090) who, in his classical 
investigation of the cytology of a Drosera hybrid, pointed out the great significance 
of the abnormal mitoses in the reduction division in microsporogenesis. In 
Drosera ovata, which is a recognized hybrid between Drosera longifolia and 
Drosera rotundifolia, he discovered certain remarkable features of the reduction 
mitosis which have proved to be of fundamental importance, namely, that in this 
mitosis of the pollen-mother-cell there were ten chromosomes in Drosera rotundi- 
folia and twenty chromosomes in Drosera longifolia, the two parents of the 


BY THE LATE A. A. LAWSON. 373 


hybrid, that in the hybrid spindle of the corresponding mitosis there are ten 
bivalent and ten univalent chromosomes. Rosenberg’s interpretation of the 
reduction mitosis of the hybrid is that the ten bivalent chromosomes are derived 
from both parents, and the ten univalent chromosomes are derived from one 
parent only, namely, D. longifolia. These ten supernumerary univalent chromo- 
somes do not arrange themselves regularly at the equator of the spindle, but lag 
behind the bivalent chromosomes and give an abnormal appearance to the spindle. 
As a result of this, a number of small abnormal nuclei are produced which give 
rise eventually to a number of small abortive microspores in addition to the 
normal pollen grains. This abnormal condition of the pollen, produced in this 
manner, has thus provided a very sound criterion for the identification of hybrids. 
This important character of the pollen has been recorded by Rosenberg him- 
self in the hybrid species of Hieracium and by Taeckholm in his investigation of 
the genus Rosa (1920, 1922). The latter investigation shows that, while the 
normal number of chromosomes here is seven, in the different Roses examined 
there may be different multiples of this number present, and in such polyploid 
types there is a marked tendency to sterility and variability. Moreover, they show 
abortive pollen with its preceding meiotic peculiarities, such as the presence of 
both bivalent and univalent chromosomes; also the lagging on the spindle of 
the latter as well as the supernumerary nuclei which Rosenberg established as 
characteristic of hybrids. Similar results have been obtained in the study of 
Roses by Blackburn (1921, 1924) and others. But the most recent and convincing 
results in this important field of enquiry are those furnished by Jeffrey (1914-1925) 
and his pupils. Jeffrey’s investigations cover a wide field of types and they have’ 
gone far towards removing any doubts that may have existed as to the soundness 
of Rosenberg’s criterion. The investigations of his pupils have materially extended 
the field of enquiry and have added greatly to the now rapidly accumulating 
convincing evidence. All of these results are in harmony with Lotsy’s view that 
the hybrid origin of mutations and variations is of general occurrence in nature. 


In view of these important recent researches the writer for some consider- 
able time has been engaged in an investigation of the possible extent of the 
hybrid origin of Australian Angiosperms, and more especially of the endemic 
types. The results obtained have been quite astonishing as revealed in the micro- 
sporogenesis of endemic types. 

In the present paper it is intended to confine inquiries to one aspect of the 
subject, namely, the possible hybrid origin of endemic types, which has received 
little attention from other investigators. 


THE PROTEACEAE. Plate x. 


The protean nature of this tribe of Angiosperms was recognized when the 
natural order was first established by De Jussieu who gave it the very appropriate 
appellation it bears. Among the many genera included in it, such as Grevillea, 
Hakea, Dryandra, Banksia, Lambertia, Xylomelum, Isopogon, Lomatia, Petrophila, 
and Persoonia, there exists a very wide range of habit, foliage, inflorescence, flower 
and fructification. To a less degree, there is a similar wide range among the 
species of the various genera. Of the 200 species of Grevillea, for instance, there 
is the greatest possible range of form and habit—from the trailing prostrate shrub, 
G. laurifolia, to the large tree, G. robusta. Of the Hakeas, Banksias, Persoonias, 
and other genera, a similar protean feature is manifest. Even among the 


374 ENDEMISM IN THE ANGIOSPERM FLORA OF AUSTRALIA, 


individuals of the species of these larger genera a marked variation which amounts 
to inconstancy is frequently met with. 

In considering such a widely divergent expression of form and habit the 
question of their origin naturally arises. To one who has studied such variations 
in the field for several years, it is impossible to be reconciled to the idea that 
they originated as infinitesimal variations that had been developed by natural 
selection. 

These widely divergent expressions of habit, morphological adaptation, and 
variability, are associated with another very important characteristic feature of 
the family, namely, the very high rate of infertility of the seed compared with 
the great profusion of flowers per individual. A typical example of this may be 
observed in Banksia serrata. On a mature individual of this species many large 
cone-shaped inflorescences are produced, each of which bears between three 
hundred and five. hundred flowers; but the number of seed-bearing follicles 
maturing from each inflorescence is notoriously small. In many instances no 
fruits whatever develop, while in others six to ten, or perhaps in exceptional cases 
twenty, may mature from a single inflorescence. It is safe to state that not ten 
per cent. of the flowers produce fertile seed, a statement which is equally true 
for the various species of Grevillea, Hakea, Lambertia, Petrophila, Isopogon, 
Persoonia, Xylomelum, Telopea and other genera. 

This very marked partial sterility of the flowers, compared with the potential 
seed-output associated with the notable variations in the foliage and other 
morphological features, has led the writer to the conclusion that such types are 
‘of hybrid origin. After many years of study of the Proteaceae in the field, I 
believe that such a conclusion has ceased to be tentative, but I realize that, 
resting solely upon morphological variability and partial sterility of the flowers, 
this would invite criticism from those who have not had the opportunity of 
studying these remarkable endemic types for an extended period in their natural 
soil and climate. 


Table Showing Sterility of Pollen of the Proteaceae. 


Percentage 


Type. of Sterile Remarks. 
Pollen. 
| 

Grevillea robusta Cunn. ASIN tien 90 The Grevilleas have a large number of 
G. oleoides Sieb. 80 abortive seeds, and the sterility of 
G. asplenifolia R. Br. 60 pollen ranges from 90% to 50%. in 
G@. lavandulacea Schlecht. .. .. | 60 types studied. The sterile grains are 
GANOULION CSRS eae ae ent te 60 variable in size and shape and are 
GARDUNICCO Rae Db Neen | nets 50 devoid of protoplasm. 


Banksia integrifolia Linn. 75 In the Banksias each inflorescence bears 
BemarginataiCanaeee ee ee 30 between 300 and 500 flowers, of 
B. spinulosa Sm. 30 which about 10% set seed. This low 
seed production is associated with 
pollen sterility ranging from 30% to 
75%. . 


Dryandra floribunda R. Br... .. 65 A genus with about 50 species endemic 
to Western Australia. Moderate seed 
fertility and fair amount of variation. 
Abortive pollen grains small, mal- 
formed, abundant. 


Table Showing Sterility of Pollen of the Proteaceae.—Continued. 


Type. 


Hakea eriantha R. Br. 
H. kippistiana Meissn. 


Lomatia silaifolia R. Br. 
L. longifolia R. Br. 


Lambertia formosa Sm. 


Stenocarpus sinuatus R. Br. 


S. salignus R. Br. 


BY THE LATE A. A. LAWSON. 


Percentage 


of Sterile Remarks. 


(ae) 
ol 


Pollen. 


65 
25 


70 


50 


95 
95 


One hundred species in genus which is 
endemic. Small percentage of flowers 
which set seed. Pollen of second 
species is highly fertile. 

Most species of this genus are endemic, 
variable in habit and foliage; flowers 
abundant, fruits and seeds per in- 
florescence few. High pollen sterility. 


Small endemic genus of eight species, 
one in New South Wales, seven in 
Western Australia. Few fertile seeds 
in proportion to flowers. Fairly 
sterile pollen. 


= 

Chiefly .found in Eastern Australia, but 
extends to New Caledonia. Large 
numbers of wheel-like umbels. of 
flowers develop, but low percentage set 
seed. Extremely sterile pollen. 


Telopea speciosissima R. Br. 


xXylomelum pyriforme Sm. 


Petrophila pulchella R. Br. 


70 


oo 
nO 


Small endemic genus with 30 species; 
marked variation of foliage, about 200 
flowers per raceme; few follicles 
mature; less than 10% of flowers 
develop follicles. High sterility of 
pollen. 


High sterility of pollen. Small endemic 
genus of four species. Two to three 
follicles per inflorescence of numerous 
flowers. 


Endemic genus of 35 species, mostly 
confined to Western Australia. Foliage 
very variable. Flowers abundant, few 
mature fruits and seeds. Pollen highly 
sterile. 


Isopogon anethifolius R. Br. 


IT. anemonifolius R. Br. .. 


Persoonia myrtilloides Sieb. 


50 
85 


Endemic genus of 30 species, leaves 
markedly variable. Flowers abundant 
in compact cone-like inflorescences and 
about 10% produce fruits. JPollen 
shows high degree of sterility. 


Anomalous: protean genus of 60 species, 
confined to Australia, excepting one 
species in New Zealand. Great varia- 
tion in habit. Less than 20% flowers 
set seed. Fairly fertile pollen. 


An investigation of the precise cause of that most important and characteristic 
feature of the types concerned, the markedly low output of fertile seeds, seems 
to the writer to provide the necessary additional support to his contention. 


oo 
=~] 
lor) 


ENDEMISM IN THE ANGIOSPERM FLORA OF AUSTRALIA, 


The accompanying table gives succinctly the results of studies of the mature 
pollen of the more important species of the Proteaceae. 


THE MyRTacEAk. Plate xi. 

As the introductory remarks to the Proteaceae, having a general bearing on 
the subject of hybridization, apply equally well to the Myrtaceae, a repetition of 
them here is unnecessary. It is well to emphasize, however, that among the 
genera of this Natural Order, forty-five are found in Australia and the majority 
of these are essentially endemic. Species of such important genera as Hucalyptus, 
Angophora, Tristania, Syncarpia, Callistemon, Melaleuca, Kunzea, Leptospermum, 
Baeckea, Darwinia, and others, constitute by far the predominant expressions of 
endemism in the Australian vegetation. 

The possible role that hybridization plays in the evolution of the Myrtaceae, 
must therefore be carefully considered. In this connection, I propose to call 
attention to certain hybrid characteristics which are manifest in the pollen of 
several of these genera. 

The accompanying table shows the percentage sterility of the pollen of 
important representatives of the Myrtaceae. 


‘Table Showing Sterility of Pollen of the Myrtaceae. 


Percentage 
Type. of Sterile Remarks. 
Pollen. 

Eucalyptus saligna Sm. = on 85 Most important genus in Australian 
E. crebra ¥.v.M. Sie SRE AOE isc 85 flora, to which it is practically con- 
IF, GUOOWMMS Ibo, bs oo be on 85 - fined. 

IH); AOQUUYO OUCH INN IME 23 oo) Soe 80 Systematists have found many difficul- 
EH. tereticornis Sm. Be Gea) hee 75 ties in establishing sound criteria for 
EH. eugenioides Sieb. Adages lies 65 classification and _ identification of 
H. peltata Benth. .. Bh AES ee Pkt euts 60 species, as many closely related species 
#. calophylla R. Br. apes ae gato 60 occur. . 
1H, SHGHLICTED SHED, po fon. oa oo 50 Many species show marked tendency to 
IS EHLOK AO OKO JBN, Gol oe ao 50 vary in habit, foliage and fructifica- 
E. haemastoma Sm. a Skt iste 50 tion. Colour variation is apparent in 
EH. piperita Sm. BEE Sar oaune ro Res enetaa Athy 50 flowers. Comparatively few flowers 
E. Flocktonae Maiden .. oe ee 50 set seed, and the capsules contain 
HE. acmenioides Schau... =<... .. 45 many unfertile seeds. Bentham (1866) 
ID, COPMUMOORS S105 Ga ao oe. oo 40 mentions this character, as well as 
1, Bonne TORG: JINN 65 oo 06 BS) the variability in the number of 
EF. pilularis Sm. SIRES mace MEG 35 earpels forming the ovary in the ‘same 

species. 

“The abortive seeds are generally 
numerous in the capsules and variously 
shaped, the several seeds of the same 
specimen often differing more from 
each other than the corresponding 


ones of different species.” x 

This infertility of the seeds and their 
abortive abnormalities are charac- 
teristic more or less of all species and, 
associated with various degrees of 
pollen sterility, suggest natural 
hybridization. 

The percentage of sterility of pollen 
ranges from 35 to 85 in the species 
examined. 


BY THE LATE A. A. LAWSON. 


(Se) 
-] 
1 


Table Showing Sterility of Pollen of the Myrtaceae.—Continued. 


Type. 


Angophora lanceolata Cav. 
A. cordifolia Cav. 


Percentage 
of Sterile 


Pollen. 


Remarks. 


we 
Or or 


Five species in genus, confined to 
Hastern Australia. Small percentage 
of flowers develop fruits. Many 
abortive seeds in capsules. 


Syncarpia laurifolia 


Tristania laurina R. Br. 
T. confertifolia R. Br. 


5 


to Hastern 
abortive pollen 


genus confined 
Many 


Monotypic 
Australia. 
grains. 


Callistemon linearis DC. 
C. punifolius DC. 
C. lanceolatus DC, 


Melaleuca nodosa Sm. 


Leptospermum stellatum Cav. 


80 
80 


Small genus extending into New Cale- 
donia and Malaya. Five endemic 
species. Capsules contain many 
sterile seeds; pollen very sterile, often 


adhering in groups. 


95 
80 


oy 
Oo 


-j 


OU 


szenus with about 18 species showing 

variability in colour of flowers, habit 
and foliage. Few capsules mature 
compared with flowers produced; 
many sterile seeds present. Pollen 
sterility ranges from 35% to 95%. 


Genus with 100 
lated to Callistemon. 
foliage and colour of flowers. Cap- 
sules comparatively few in number, 
many abortive seeds present.. Sterile 
pollen variable in size, some attaining 
size of fertile grains. 


species, probably re- 
Varied in habit, 


80 


Genus with 20 species, of which 18 are 
endemic and well distributed in 
Eastern Australia. Sometimes strik- 
ing variations in colour and foliage. 
Several to many abortive seeds per 
capsule. Highly ‘sterile pollen. 


Backhousia 
Hary. 


myrtifolia Hook. & 


Endemic genus of four species; many 
seeds abortive. Sterile pollen of small 
size and peculiar shapes. 


such 


CONCLUSION. 

It is quite probable that within the Flora of Australia there are residuals 
of genera and species that, at one time, enjoyed a much wider range of geographical 
distribution. One would naturally expect to find examples of these in groups of 


great antiquity as the Pteridophytes, 


Conifers and Cycads. Residuals, 


originating in this manner, thus become peculiar to this continent, ard are, 


in the generally accepted definition of the term, endemic. 
“sperms, however, we have no record of this kind of endemic. 


Among the Angio- 
If such exist, 


their number is so small as to be negligible in comparison with the numerous 
genera and many hundreds of species whose peculiarity to this region is due to 


their having originated here. 


IT have, therefore, not considered “residual endemics”’ 


as coming within the scope of the present enquiry. 


378 ENDEMISM IN THE ANGIOSPERM FLORA OF AUSTRALIA, 


The exceptionally large proportion of endemics present in the Australian 
Angiosperm Flora, may be rationally accounted for on the grounds: (1) that 
its evolution has not been interrupted by serious climatic changes, such as 
periodical glaciation, and (2) that it has not been influenced by the constant 
invasion from other floras, owing to its isolation for a long period of geological 
time. The Angiosperm life, evolving under these conditions, offers an exceptionally 
favourable field for the investigation of the origin of species; and there seems 
no reason whatever for assuming any essential difference in the origin of non- 
endemic and endemic species. 

The hypothesis of the origin of species by infinitesimal variations developed 
by natural selection, is no longer entertained by leaders of evolutionary thought. 
As an alternative to this De Vries’ Theory of the origin of species by mutation 
has been accepted and approved by many botanists and zoologists. De Vries 
founded his theory essentially upon the behaviour of cultures of Oenothera 
lamarckiana. He observed that from the progeny grown from the seed of this 
plant, there were several that showed remarkable variations from the parent 
type. As some of these bred true to type, he called them mutants and regarded 
them as initial species. He observed, however, that among these aberrant forms, 
or mutants, some were more or less sterile. This spontaneous appearance of 
mutations, observed by De Vries, constitutes the main support of his Mutation 
Theory. 

_ The recent school of geneticists, however (including Rosenberg, Jeffrey, 
Bateson, Lotsy and many others), has demonstrated that, owing to the disturbance 
of the germ-plasm, represented in the chromosomes, variations and mutations 
are characteristic of hybrids. It has also been demonstrated, on very reasonable 
grounds, cytological and otherwise, that Oenothera lamarckiana and other species 
of this genus, are undoubtedly of hybrid origin. As this conclusion has been 
accepted by the majority of the leading geneticists, the De Vriesian hypothesis of 
the origin of species by unaccountable spontaneous mutations has been deprived 
of the foundation upon which it has rested. 


On the zoological side, the Mutation Theory of De Vries has received 
enthusiastic support in America, by a school founded by Professor Morgan. The 
main foundation of this school of mutationists was laid upon the apparently 
spontaneous and rather remarkable mutations appearing in the dipterous insect, 
Drosophila melanogaster. But here again, the remarkable variations observed 
in this insect may be accounted for on the basis of hybridization. In his recent 
work on the cytology of the spermatogenesis of this insect, Jeffrey (1925) has 
revealed new and important facts which prove, beyond any reasonable doubt, that 
Drosophila melanogaster is a hybrid. 

In view of the light of these recent genetic researches, I am obliged to 
interpret the characteristic features of the Proteaceae and Myrtaceae, especially 
those observed in sporogenesis and recorded in the condition of the pollen, as proof 
of their hybrid origin. As the types whose pollen has been described in the 
present paper cover such a wide range of genera and species of both these large 
families, which represent the predominant portion of the endemic Flora of 
Australia, it seems a reasonable hypothesis that hybridization has been of no 
uncommon occurrence in the evolution of these two great tribes. I am quite 
convinced that hybridization occurs whenever possible, and the possibilities, in 
these two tribes at least, are general. 


9 


BY THE LATE A. A. LAWSON. 379 


Moreover, I am convinced that the great majority, if not all of the endemic 
species, of the Proteaceae and Myrtaceae examined by me are of hybrid origin. 
It seems safe to conclude that all such endemic species originated as hybrid 
mutations. The facts revealed in this investigation are in harmony with the 
general trend of progress made by contemporary geneticists in other fields of 
enquiry, and this progress is directed to the conclusion that hybridization, 
followed by Natural Selection, has been the main determining influence in the 
evolution of the Angiosperms. There is almost inexhaustible evidence of this in 
the Endemic Flora of Australia. aaa 


Literature. 
BATESON, W., and Surron, IpA, 1919.—Double. flowers and sex linkage in Begonia. 
Journ. Genetics, 8, 1919, 199-207. 
BENTHAM, G., 1866.—Flora Australiensis. London, 1866. 
Brews, J. W., 1920.—Plant Succession and Plant Distribution in South Africa. Ann. 
Botany, xxxiv, 1920. 
BLACKBURN, K. B., and Harrison, J. W. H., 1921.—The Status of the British Rose 


Forms as determined by their Cytological Behaviour. Ann. Botany, xxxv, 1921, 
159-188. 


, 1924.—Genetical and Cytological Studies in Hybrid Roses: i. The origin of a 
fertile Hexaploid Form, the Pimpineilifolae-Villosae Crosses. Brit. Journ. Exper. 
Biology, 1, 1924, 557-590. 

Guppy, H. B., 1921.—The Testimony of the Endemic Species of the Canary Islands in 
favour of the Age and Area Theory of Willis. Ann. Bot., xxxv, 1921, 513. 

JEFFREY, E. C., 1916.—Hybridism and the Rate of Evolution in Angiosperms. Amer. 
Nat., 50, 1916, 129-143. : 

, 1918.—Evolution by Hybridization. Brook. Bot. Gard. Mem., 1, 1918, 298-305. 

, 1922.—Polyploidy, Polyspory and Hybridism in the Angiosperms. Science, 55, 
No. 1428. 

———__, 1925.—Drosophila and the Mutation Hypothesis. Science, 62, No. 1592, 3-5. 

, 1925a.—Reduction Division in relation to Mutation in Plants and Animals 
(with G. C. Hicks). Amer. Nat., 59, 1925. 

, 1925b.—Evidence as to the so-called Mutations in Drosophila. Genetica, vii, 
1925, 273-286. 
Lotsy, J. P., 1914.—On the Origin of Species by Crossing. Proc. Linn. Soc. London, 


1914, 73. 
, 1916.—Evolution by means of Hybridization. The Hague, 1916. 


,1916a.—Die Endem. [flanzen -von Ceylon und die Mutations Hypothése. 
Biol. Cent., xxxvi, 1916, 207. 


, 1925.—Evolution considered in the light of Hybridization. Cant. College, N.Z., 
1925. 


ROSENBERG, O., 1909a.—Uber der Chromosomenzahlen bei Taraxacum und Rosa. Svensk. 
Bot. Tidsk., 3, 1909, 150-162. 


, 1909b.—Cytologische und Morphologische Studien on Drosera longifolia x 
rotundifolia. Kgl. Svensk. Vet., Handl. 43, 1909, 3-64. 


TAECKHOLM, G., 1920.—On the cytology of the Genus Rosa, A preliminary note. Svensk. 
Bot. Tidskr., 14, 1920, 300-311, 
, 1922.—Zytologische Studien uber die Gattung Rosa. Acta Host Bergiani, 7, 
1922, 97-381. 
Wiuuis, J. C., 1915.—The Endemic Flora of Ceylon. Phil. Trans. R. Soc., B206, 1915, 
307. 
————,, 1916.—The Evolution of Species in Ceylon. Ann. Bot., xxx, 1916, 1. 
, L9i7.—Relative Age of Endemic Species: Ann. Bot., xxxi, 1917, 189. 
——_——,, 1921.— Endemic Genera of Plants. Ann. Bot., xxxv, 1921, 493. 
Cc 


380 ENDEMISM IN THE ANGIOSPERM FLORA OF AUSTRALIA. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES X-XI. 
Plate x. 


Mature pollen grains of Proteaceae; (A) Grevillea buwifolia, (B) Grevillea robusta, 
(C) Dryandra floribunda, (D) Xylomelum pyriforme, (FE) Isopogon anethifolius, (F) 
Telopea truncata. 


Plate xi. 


Mature pollen grains of Myrtaceae: (A) Hucalyptus hemiphloia, (B) Eucalyptus 
tereticornis, (C) Leptospermum lanigerum, (D) Syncarpia laurifolia. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. THAGR WH mexe: 


Mature pollen-grains of Proteaceae. 


BGA Mexe 


Proc: Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


Re 
OO 


if 


& 


bees DB 


QO 


A 


Mature pollen-grains of Myrtaceae. 


GOULBURN—A VITAL POINT ON THE NEW SOUTH WALES HIGHLANDS. 
By F. A. Crart, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geography. 
(Two Text-figures.) 

[Read 27th August, 1930.] 


Introduction.—Goulburn, by reason of its geographical position and by virtue 
of the trade supremacy of Sydney, is the principal gateway to Hastern Riverina 
and one of the most important strategic centres in the State, commanding, as it 
does, the main route between Sydney and Melbourne. Discovered first by a white 
man (Meehan) in 1818, the site of Goulburn is a level plain beside the Wollondilly 
River and is remarkable as being the focus of numerous wide, easily-travelled 
valleys. The surrounding country varies in elevation from 2,000 to 3,000 feet 
above sea-level, but the upland slopes are gentle and the higher masses have 
been parted by wide, mature valleys. There is an easy slope westward forming 
the eastern part of Riverina, which includes the most productive sheep, wheat 
and cattle areas in New South Wales. South of the city rise the masses of the 
Kosciusko and associated tablelands, whilst to the north are slopes leading up 
to the Blue Mountain Plateau. 


Position and Topography.—Between Moss Vale and Goulburn the main road 
and railway pass over a causeway of land somewhat similar to that used by the 
Western Railway at Mt. Victoria. To the north of this ridge are the deepening 
valleys and gorges of the Wollondilly and Cookbundoon Rivers; on the southern 
side is the profound canyon of the Shoalhaven, here 1,600 feet deep. Tributary 
valleys of these two systems head near Marulan (16 miles east-north-east of 
Goulburn), where the main road and railway are confined to a narrow watershed. 


For thirty miles to the north and south of this point there are no roads of 
any importance across the highlands; the greater part of the canyon country is, 
indeed, almost impassable. Thus the main routes passing from Sydney to 
Goulburn are naturally defended in these directions by almost precipitous gorges 
which form a strategic line of great importance, limiting movement from the 
level tableland around Moss Vale to the downs country beyond Goulburn. 


Around the city itself a varying topography is met with (Text-fig. 1). The 
plains on which Goulburn is situated are due to the erosion of an anticline in the 
prevailing Devonian strata, which strike approximately along the magnetic 
meridian and consist mainly of shales, slates and quartzites. Further south 
the softer rocks and weaker structures have been swept away to form the plains 
of Gundary and Mulwaree Creeks (“Goulburn Plains’) and those of Lake George. 
The more resistant structures and rocks stand as conical monadnocks up to 800 
feet above the plain. The glassy white quartzites which form or reinforce these 
residuals have been so greatly weathered through long ages that level valleys have 
been cut between them, giving easy routes for roads. 


382 GOULBURN—A VITAL POINT ON THE N.S.W. HIGHLANDS, 


North of the Wollondilly near Goulburn a gently rising plain leads up to a 
higher tableland about the source of that river. Like the plains previously 
mentioned, this higher tableland forms part of the late Tertiary peneplain, but 
it is marked by extensive basalt flows. Its gentle southern warped slope has 
favoured the formation of mature valleys which offer no great obstacles to roads. 
On the other hand, its eastern edge consists of a steep bank parallel to the 
Cookbundoon River, being partly a fault-line scarp, but owing some of its height 


o/ 
Vee ee 
% \ & - ace 
9 / pris! a rawa, ry Chey op? 
Ney Wee! 


a 
2600 a 
L 1 eI 


a ~~ 
y 


NEG Se SK 


th. 
\Goulburm 
! ¢ KN 
‘Plains 

\ 


! 


(L. George | 


Interval 200 Ft. 
Roda s) oes . 
Braidwood. Rat lways Bp 


Jo Cooma x 


Text-fig. 1.—Topography of the Goulburn district, County of Argyle. Note the 
convergence of valleys on Goulburn, and the position of that city as a focus 
of land routes. 


BY F. A. CRAFT. 383 


to the resistant character of its rocks. This slope, combined with the steep gorge 
of the Cookbundoon, is a formidable natural barrier. 

West of Goulburn the Bredalbane Plains lead to Fish River, the head of the 
Lachlan, an insignificant stream which has cut a gap through the Cullarin fault 
block, which is responsible for the existence of Lake George. The higher parts 
of this gap are used by the road and railway, but elsewhere the narrow horst 
provides a barrier which can, however, be readily enough surmounted, as erosion 
has yet had but little effect on it. This appears to be the most recently developed 
tectonic feature in the region. 

Bredalbane Plains, divided into three sections, are shallow tectonic basins 
formed during the uplift and bending of the plateau surface. They have been 
filled with sediment and hill-wash which has almost obliterated the former lakes. 
Stormwater lying on the level expanse of the plains is readily evaporated. 

Topographic features about Goulburn depend on the preservation of the 
Tertiary peneplain or, where parts of this surface have been differentially 
uplifted, on the erosion of gentle, mature strike valleys down the warped 
slopes. Where the main streams have been affected by headward erosion following 
the uplift of the tableland, steep-sided gorges have been developed, forcing lines 
of communication to hold to the gentle upland country. This also applies to the 
Abercrombie River, 40 miles north-north-west of Goulburn. 


Communications (see Text-fig. 2).—The Blue Mountain Tableland, extending 
from the southern scarp of the Hunter River Valley to within 30 miles of 
Goulburn is, in general, very sparsely settled. A number of tourist resorts and 
coal-mining towns, including Katoomba and Lithgow, have grown up along the 
Great Western Railway, but elsewhere in this area there is only one large settle- 
ment, the silver-mining village of Yerranderie, near the Wollondilly River. We 
have, then, an almost uninhabited strip of tableland parallel to the coast with 
a length of 120 miles and a width varying from 60 miles in the north to 40 in 
the south. Owing to the infertile nature of its soil, which is derived largely from 
Triassic sandstones and partly from older metamorphic rocks, and to the steep 
canyons which intersect the surface, roads are not needed for purposes of settle- 
ment, nor are they practicable in most of this area at a reasonable cost. 


Immediately to the west of this highland country, on the westward drainage 
of the upper Lachlan, Abercrombie and Macquarie Rivers, sparse settlement is 
possible. The land surface is still much dissected, especially by the powerful 
Abercrombie rising in the high tableland near Jenolan (4,200 feet), forty miles 
north of Goulburn. However, the raising of sheep and a few cattle is possible, 
and small crops of potatoes and oats are grown in isolated places. On the rich 
basalts of the Main Divide extending through Taralga and Crookwell, these 
crops are of more importance and cold-climate fruits are grown, but sheep- 
raising and some dairying are the main industries. Here there is more extensive 
settlement, requiring local means of communication.. \ 


Means of transport are provided by three main roads (Text-fig. 2), which 
extend north and north-west from Goulburn, in addition to branch railways to 
Crookwell and Taralga. Full advantage is taken of ancient (Tertiary) passes and 
of gentle valleys. The continuation of two of these roads to Bathurst, via 
Taralga and Laggan, involves the passage of the difficult Abercrombie gorges, but 
direct communication is provided with Bathurst, Blayney and Oberon and the 
Great Western Road and Railway. Another important road leads westward from 


384 GOULBURN—A VITAL POINT ON THE N.S.W. HIGHLANDS, 
Goulburn to Boorowa in the wheat belt, after passing the early mature valley of 
the upper Wollondilly. The Great Southern Railway and Road give access to the 
Riverina, via Gunning and Yass, whilst roads and railways leading southward 
serve Canberra and the pastoral regions of the upper Shoalhaven and Snowy 
Rivers. These latter are the arteries for the whole of the Southern Tablelands 
of the State and take advantage of long, parallel meridional valleys, avoiding the 
high, barren ridges between the various rivers. 

The sole eastward outlets from the upper Shoalhaven and Snowy are provided 
by rather steep roads leading from Braidwood, near that river, to the coast at 
Nowra, Bateman and Moruya. These are the only routes crossing the broken 


| RX Bath 
a ee 
y, : ) in oe 


) [ZACGAN) nies ee 


ASG 
Rev COULBUR 


ZA CUNNING 


Yi 
ie 


\ Tes 
We? 7 t 
he) ~F. /  \WWERRIGA 
RTARAGO Send r Ney) 
NX \ NS 


\ / MILES OLAS S/O 
Nee IRoals ———. 
Ci Cay ; Railways 


ros 4 
re UEANBEYAN \Z Gorges #HiHH 
To n CRN =a 
Cooma ~—BRAID ae| SS 


Text-fig. 2.--The key position of Goulburn. Rugged topography limits 
communication to the east and north, whilst lesser dissection to the west 
and south favours the development of land routes. 


BY F. A. CRAFT. 385 


coastal slopes in a length of 130 miles. Braidwood, controlling these and the 
level upper part of the Shoalhaven valley, resembles Goulburn, 47 miles to the 
north, but on a much smaller scale. 

Conclusion.—The routes leading from Sydney to Melbourne, the Southern 
Tableland, the south-western slopes and the western slopes of part of the Blue 
Mountain Tableland diverge from Goulburn. They take advantage of favourable 
topography, which makes Goulburn the principal strategic centre in the south of 
New South Wales. A considerable fraction of the inland trade and transport 
of the State passes through the city, whose industrial and commercial importance 
is growing. 

Reference.—For a more detailed description of the physiography of this district 


see—CraFT, F. A., 1928.—The Physiography of the Wollondilly River Basin. Proc. 
LINN. Soc. N.S.W., lili, Part 5, 618. 


ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDII R. BR., A SUPPOSED NATURAL 
HYBRID BETWEEN GREVILLEA LAURIFOLIA SIEB. 
AND G. ACANTHIFOLIA A.C. 


Part J.—ANALYSIS OF THE HYBRID. 


By J. McLuckig, D.Sc., M.A., 
Assistant-Professor of Botany, University of Sydney. 


(Plates xii-xv, and nineteen Text-figures.) 


[Read 27th August, 1930.] 


Historical. 


Fletcher (1913) gave a short account of this natural hybrid and Fletcher 
and Musson (1927) amplified this account. A careful comparison of the hybrids 
with the putative parents was made, and the authors came to the conclusion that 
“the entire series known as Grevillea Gaudichaudii is a series of variable, 
naturally related forms explainable only as being hybrids between the two 
other species mentioned. That the two parent species are markedly contrasted 
in most of their morphological characters, in their habit of growth, etc.” and that 
“Grevillea Gaudichaudii has no specific characters; being of mixed origin, the 
characters are inherited, being blends or mixtures of the parent-forms.” 

The occurrence of natural hybrids has attracted a great deal of attention 
within recent years. ‘Cockayne, Allan, Simpson and Thomson have recorded 
about 290 groups of wild hybrids in the New Zealand flora, belonging to 42 
families and 92 genera. The majority of these consist of polymorphic swarms, 
found abundantly in such genera as Myrtus, Olearia, Celmisia, Nothofagus, 
Ranunculus, etc. Interspecific hybrids are much more common than intergeneric 
hybrids. 

The hybridizing species usually have the same growth-form although the 
New Zealand flora furnishes exceptions, e.g., the tree-form, Plagianthus betulinus, 
hybridizes with the bush-form, Plagianthus divaricatus, while the Grevillea ~ 
hybrids dealt with here are the result of crossing of species with different growth 
forms, one being a prostrate shrub, the other a divaricating bushy form. 

In Nothofagus Cliffortioides.x N. fusa and in Myrtus bullata x M. obcordata 
the hybrid swarm shows every gradation from one species to another. Although 
many natural hybrids have been recorded, very few have been produced 
artificially, or have been studied intensively or cytologically. 


The Problem. 

In the present investigation the writer set out to place on record detailed 
observations on the Grevillea hybrids, to endeavour to produce them by artificial 
crossing and to investigate their cytological details, especially the character of 
the reduction spindle in the pollen-mother-cells. 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 387 


The present communication gives a detailed analysis of the chief contrasting 
characters of the putative parents and demonstrates the relationships of the 
hybrid series to these parents. The coefficients of divergence of the hybrid forms 
from the two parents and from the midparent (hypothetical form in which the 
parental characters are perfectly blended) have been calculated and these 
coefficients have been plotted graphically about the midparent as a reference line. 
From the graphs of the two hybrid forms the degree of blending of the parental 
characters will be apparent, and it will be possible to compare these hybrids 
with others. 

In regard to artificial production of the hybrids a considerable amount of 
work is in progress, and seedlings have been raised from the cross Grevillea 
laurifolia (female) and G. acanthifolia (male). Photograph 1 (Plate xii) shows 
two such seedlings, and it will readily be seen that these very closely resemble 
the H1 form analysed in this paper. The details of this experimental work will 
be published later. 

The reduction spindles in the microspore-mother-cells have also been - 
investigated and the typical irregular heterotypic spindle described by Rosenberg 
(1909) for the Drosera longifolia x Drosera rotundifolia hybrid, in which there 
' is a lagging of unpaired chromosomes on the spindle, has been found. The cyto- 
logical details of the hybrid spindle and of the parents will be published later. 


ANALYSIS OF THE HyBriIDS IN RELATION TO THEIR DIVERGENCE FROM THE PARENTS. 
The characters selected show distinct contrast in the two putative parent 
species. 


Habit. 

Grevillea laurifolia is a prostrate shrub, with a thick root-stock from which 
several long trailing branches develop. All branches are prostrate, flexible, and 
produce numerous short lateral branches bearing the leaves and large attractive 
spikes of red flowers. The main branches vary considerably in length, the mean 
length is 4:33 feet (30 measurements) while the number of branches per plant 
also varies, the mean for 30 counts being 7:25. The mean area occupied by a 
single plant is approximately 42:6 square feet. Photograph 2 (Plate xiii) shows 
part of a plant. 

This species colonizes the dry sandstone habitat on the Blue Mountain 
Plateau, frequently growing beneath larger shrubs. 

Greviliea acanthifolia is an erect compact shrub producing numerous branches 
from the thick root-stock. The mean number of main branches per plant is 4:33, 
while the mean length of the branches is 3-1 feet (the mean of 30 measurements). 

In habitats near creeks or where there is soakage at the head of valleys in 
this locality, the height of some plants is sometimes as much as 7 to 8 feet, but 
in drier habitats this species does not grow so tall. The mean spread of this 
species is 14:23 square feet (10 measurements); it occurs in the same valley-heads 
as G. laurifolia, but while G. acanthifolia colonizes the lower slopes (where moist) 
and the valley floor, G. laurifolia invariably occupies the upper drier slopes. The 
flowering period lasts from September to March in both species; this fact and 
their frequent proximity provide the opportunity for natural hybridization. 
Photograph 3 (Plate xiii) shows part of a plant. 

Grevillea Gaudichaudii, supposed hybrid between the putative parents 
G. laurifolia and G. acanthifolia, is represented by two distinct forms, which I 

D 


388 ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDII, 


will refer to as Hl and H2. These forms have approximately the same frequency 
in this locality; Hi is represented by six individuals, and H2 by four individuals. 
H1 is a form about intermediate between the putative parents, approximating the 
midparent, while H2 is closer to G. laurifolia than G. acanthifolia; in other words, 
laurifolia appears prepotent in the general complex of the hybrid H2. The H1 
form is typically prostrate in habit, with a tendency for the apices of the 
branches to become erect. The habit is definitely like that of the laurifolia 
parent, but the tendency to erect apices suggests the influence of acanthifolia. 
The mean number of branches per plant is approximately 3-5 (6 plants), while 
the mean length of each branch is 2:5 feet (20 measurements). Measurements 
were made from plants in open; branches of all forms are much longer when 
sheltered by taller shrubs. The mean area occupied by the whole plant is 18-0 
square feet (6 plants). In general appearance this type is about midway 
between the two putative parents. The flowering period is slightly shorter 
than in the parents. Photograph 4 (Plate xiv) shows part of a plant. 

The H2 form is also prostrate and approximates to the laurifolia parent 
very closely in general habit (and other characters which will be referred to 
later). It is a much more vigorous form than the Hl hybrid, and only close 
inspection will distinguish it from the lawrifolia parent when they occur together. 
The mean length of the branches is 5:16 feet (measurements from plants in-open; 
branches of all forms are much longer when sheltered by taller shrubs). The 
mean number of branches is 5, and the mean area 40 square feet. Photograph 5 
(Plate xiv) shows part of a plant. 

Table 1 shows the habit characters of the parents and of the hybrids, and the 
coefficients of divergence of the hybrids from the midparent and the parents. 


TABLE 1. 
: G. laurifolia H1 H2 G. acanthifolia) M—H I M—H2 
Character. | mean. mean. inean. | mean. | J=a | l-a 
| | 
| | 
| = = i 
Branches per plant oa 725 B55) a) 4°33 | +0:78 SPA) 
Height above ground in feet .. | 0 0) 0) 3-1 == == 
Approximate area in square fect | 42-6 18-0 40 14°23 +0:°37 —O-41 
Mean length of branches (fect) .. | 4-338 De Hy 5:16 | 39 iL +0:99 —1-18 
| | 


The last two columns give the coefficients of divergence of the hybrids from 
the midparent. The coefficient of divergence from the midparent, for the number: 
of branches, of the H1 form (+ 9-78) is considerable and indicates that this 
type is much nearer to the acanthifolia parent than to the laurifolia. In the H2 
form there is a closer approximation to the midparent, but the balance is shown 
in favour of the acanthifolia side. The laurifolia parent is obviously dominant 
in regard to the inheritance of the other characters referred to under habit, as 
the coefficients of divergence indicate. 


Foliage. 
The leaves of G. laurifolia are petiolate, entire, often with an apiculus (some- 
times recurved), dark green on adaxial surface, whitish-tomentose on abaxial 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 389 


surface. The size is variable, the greatest length is 111 mm., the greatest 
breadth 64 mm., the shortest length 35 mm., and the narrowest leaf 17 mm. across. 
The measurements give the greatest length and breadth. The length of the 
petiole varies between the limits 22 mm. and 4 mm. 


The shape of the leaf varies, being lanceolate, broadly ovate, almost circular, 
or mucronate. The young leaves and shoot-apices are covered with a thick 
indumentum of white and ferruginous closely appressed hairs. The adaxial surface 
of old leaves becomes practically glabrous. The abaxial surface retains its 
covering of hairs. The venation is prominent, and there is a characteristic intra- 
marginal vein. In acanthifolia the leaves are considerably dissected, each segment 
being pungent-pointed. As in lauwrifolia, they vary in all dimensions, the mean 
length of the largest leaves is 50:8 mm., the mean breadth 40-6 mm., the mean 
length of the smallest adult leaves is 31:6 mm., and the mean breadth 22:2 mm. 
The number of lobes varies within wide limits (vide Photograph 6, Plate xv). 
There is no intra-marginal vein. The young apices and young leaves are covered 
' with whitish hairs, but the adult leaves are glabrous. Text-figure 1 shows the 
type of foliar hairs for the parents and hybrids. The petiole is winged, the 
lowest segments of the lamina being decurrent with the edge of the petiole. 


Text-fig. 1.—a, b, ce. Foliar hairs’of laurifolia, H2 and H1 respectively. 
Isolated hairs occur on the leaves of acanthifolia. very similar to those 
of the Hl forms. H2 has hairs approximating to those of laurifolia. 
In H1 there is a more or less perfect blending of the two parents. x 40. 


The H1 hybrid is represented by individuals, the leaves of which are pinna- 
sected; Photograph 7 (Plate xv) shows the degree of dissection of the leaf of 
one plant. The segments vary from 3 to 13 in number. Some of these may 
again be twice or thrice dissected. This latter character appears in some of 
the older basal leaves and seems to indicate the prepotency of the acanthifolia 
parent. 


The hairy covering varies on different leaves, but all have appressed hairs on 
the abaxial surface. The adaxial surface is glabrous. 


390 ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDI, 


The H2 form shows a considerable range of leaf size and form, even in the 
one individual. The majority of the leaves are entire, but associated with them, 
and occurring in no definite sequence, are variously pinnasected leaves of the 
most variable shape and size. Photograph 8 (Plate xv) shows the range of 
dissection in leaves from a single plant, the number of segments varying from 
2 to 5; a typical intramarginal vein is present in all leaves of this form. The 
proportion of entire to dissected leaves varies in different individuals, for 
example, as Fletcher and Musson (1927) have recorded, there are H2 individuals 
with a large majority of pinnasected leaves, and others with a smaller proportion 
of them. 

The general texture, indumentum, colour and shape of leaf approximate to 
the laurifolia parent, and indicate its prepotency. The undivided leaves of the 
H2 form are usually longer and narrower than those of lawrifolia. 

Table 2 gives the means of the maximum length and maximum width of 
a number of the larger leaves of both parents and of the hybrid forms, and 
the length of the petioles. The divergence of the hybrids from the two putative’ 
parents and from the midparent is also shown. 


TABLE 2. 
Plant. Coefficients of Divergence. 
Characters. 
7—H1 | —H2 |M—H1|M—H2! a— H1| a—H2 
Pyle sh > dealin Pee = 
G.laurifolia| H1 H2 |G.acanthifolia i ras as me ee ae 
Length of leaf (mm.) 96 80:2] 101-6 59:8 +0-44,—0-15|] —0-07| —0- 65) —0-56| —1:15 
Width of leaf (mm.) 52 57 46°3 40-6 —0-44| +0-50) —0-94/+0 —1-44|—0-50 
w 
Ratio sp we) Aes 542 712 456 679 +1-24|! —0-63| +0-74) —1-13)+0:-24] —1-62 
Lengthof petiole (mm.) 14-2 8-4 9:8 9°38 +1-31]+1-00] 4-0-82} +0-50; +0-32)+0 
Means of coefficients +0-64|+0-18) +0-14| —0-32 —0-36|—0-82 
| 


From this table it is apparent that. the absolute measurement of the leaf- 
width of the H1 form (57 mm.) is greater than that of either parent, while the 
leaf-width measurement of the H2 form (46:3 mm.) exactly coincides with 
the value for the midparent. 

The absolute length of the leaf of the H2:- form, 101-6 mm., is greater than 
that of either parent; as frequently happens in hybrids (Warren, 1929). In 
regard to the petiole, the absolute measurement of length (9:8 mm.) of the H2 
form coincides with that of the acanthifolia parent, while the petiole of the Hl 
form is shorter than either parent, but nearer acanthifolia. 

In the leaf-ratio, the Hl hybrid exceeds the ratio of either parent, but is 
only slightly greater than the ratio of the acanthifolia parent, while the ratio of 
the H2 form is less than either parent but is considerably nearer the laurifolia 
parent. 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 391 


So far as the petiole is concerned, the prepotency of the acanthifolia parent 
is distinctly apparent in the tendency of the lowest segments of the lamina to 
become decurrent on the petiole and to produce the winged petiole of the parent 
in the H1 forms; and also in the mean of the absolute length. 

If we consider the mean of the coefficients of divergence of the hybrids from 
the laurifolia parent, the midparent and the acanthifolia parent in Table 2, we 
find for the H1 form, + 0-64, + 0:14, — 0-36, respectively when the sign is regarded, 
while for the H2 form the respective means are +0-:18, — 0:32, — 0-82. 

As the sign of the coefficient indicates the direction in which the individual 
diverges from the reference point and the mean of the coefficients with regard 
to the midparent “expresses the degree of inequality of balance of the sum total 
of the hereditary influences from the two parents’ (Warren, 1929) it appears 
that the H1 form (+ 0:14) approximates more closely to the midparent than the 
H2 form (— 0-32); this balance about the midparent being slightly weighted in 
favour of the acanthifolia parent in the former, and slightly more so in favour 
of the laurifolia parent in the latter. 

There is also considerable inequality of balance about either parent in the 
H1 forms, but more so about the laurifolia parent (+0-64); in the H2 forms 
there is only slight inequality of balance about the laurifolia parent, but great 
inequality about the acanthifolia parent (— 0°82). 

As the mean of the coefficients gives the relative degree of general divergence 

of the hybrid from the parents when the sign is disregarded, we get for the H1 
forms 0-86, 0-64 and 0:64, and for the H2 forms 0-57, 0-57, 0:82. 
These means indicate that in the leaf characters under discussion the general 
divergence of the Hl form from lauwrifolia (0:86) is considerably greater than 
from acanthifolia (0-64) and from the midparent (0-65); that is, the acanthifolia 
parent is distinctly prepotent over Jaurifolia. In the H2 form the general 
divergence from the acanthifolia (0-82) is much greater than from the laurifolia 
parent, and therefore in the determination of its leaf characters the lauwrifolia 
parent is prepotent. In the H1 type the difference in the general divergence 
from the acanthifolia parent and the midparent is negligible; while in the H2 
type the difference in the divergence from the laurifolia parent and the mid- 
parent is also negligible. 

Very similar conclusions may be arrived at from the measurements of the 
smallest adult leaves of the plants. 


; Lobing of the Leaf. . 

As laurifolia has entire leaves, the presence of dissections of the lamina is a 
clear indication of the prepotency of the acanthifolia parent, but the number of 
lobes and their character vary, so that the H2 form clearly approaches the 
undivided laurifolia lamina, while the H1 form approaches the acanthifolia side. 

In Table 8 the details of the lobing are indicated, and the coefficients of 
divergence of the hybrids from the parents and midparent calculated. 

For the H1 hybrids the mean number of lobes is 7:53, for the H2 2-9, and for 
the acanthifolia parent 12:34; commonly there are 7 lobes in H1, 2 or 3 lobes in 
H2 and 11 lobes in acanthifolia. The coefficient of divergence of the H1 form 
from the laurifolia parent (+ 0:58) shows that there is considerable prepotency 
of the acanthifolia parent; the coefficient of divergence of the H2 form from the 
laurifolia parent is only + 0-23, so that the potency of the acanthifolia parent is 


392 ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDII, 


approximately two and a half times less than in the Hl form. Moreover the 
coefficient.of divergence of the Hl form from the midparent (+ 0:09) indicates a 
distinct balance round the midparent, while the coefficient of the H2 form 
(— 0-26) indicates considerable inequality of balance due to the hereditary effect 
of the laurifolia parent. 


TABLE 3. 
Number of primary lobes per leaf. Coefficients of divergence of hybrids. 
Plant. | | | 
E en z 1—H1 | —H2 |M—H1|/M— H2| a—H1 | a—H2 
21/3)4)/5) 6] 7 ole 10 antes 14/15/16 (se Eran an [Means . 
aan 
G. *laurifolia Leaves entire (0) 
OL 36 ae 2) 1) 2] 4 )25) 4/10) 1) 1/1) 1) +0-58 +0-09 —0-41 (fee) 
134 56 .. |15/16| 7 | 2 | +0°23} —0-26 +0-76} 2-90 
G. acanthifolia 4 7) 315) 33) 1 | 12-34 
| 
TABLE 4. 
Plant. | Coefficients of divergence of hybrids. 
Characters. 
Bas! ‘ ___. | /—- 81 | /—H2 |M—H1)/M—H2) a—H1)a—H2 
a G.laurifolia H1 H2 G.acanthifolia Peas | dean eae ee 
Intramarginal strongly less strongly Absent 
vein developed | strongly | developed 
developed 
Distance from 2 0:7 108 0 +0: 65) +0-25) +0-15] —0: 25) —0-35] —0-75 
margin (mm.) 


Intramarginal Vein. 


In G. laurifolia this vein is strongly defined, and at a mean distance of 2 mm. 
from the margin; in G. acanthifolia it is usually absent, although there is 
frequently a development of fibres where the margin rolls back towards the 
abaxial surface (thus simulating a vein in section). In both the H1 and H2 
hybrids the vein is present, but is more strongly developed in the H2 forms. The 
mean distance from the margin in H2 is 1-5 mm., while in H1 it is 0-7 mm. 


The prepotency of the Jaurifolia parent is clearly indicated in regard to the 
presence of this vein, but the weaker development in the H1 form which, from 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 393: 


previous evidence of leaf characters, is undoubtedly close to the midparent 
indicates the “inhibiting” effect of the acanthifolia factor. 

The coefficient of divergence of the H1 form from the laurifolia parent (+ 0-65) 
indicates considerable deviation, but with regard to the midparent the H1 form 
shows considerable balance around this point. The H2 form shows less divergence 
from the laurifolia parent, and more from the midparent than is the case for 
the H1 forms. 


Table 4 gives the coefficients of divergence of the Hl and H2 hybrids from 
the parents and the midparent in regard to the intramarginal vein development. 


a To 


A 


aT 
ii 


ii 
dl] 


i 


Text-figs. 2, 3, 4, 5——Transverse sections of lamina of the two parents, 
laurifolia and acanthifolia, and of the H1 and H2 forms respectively. 
se Pi, 


Thickness of Lamina. 


Text-figures 2, 3, 4, 5 represent camera lucida drawings of transverse sections 
of the lamina of the two parents and of the Hil and H2 hybrids. The sections 
reveal small differences in thickness; but the H1 hybrid is slightly thicker than 
any of the others, i.e., thicker than either parent. 


394 ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDII, 


The laurifolia parent has strongly developed papillate epidermal cells on 
the abaxial surface. This is also strongly indicated in the Hl and H2 forms. 
The acanthifolia parent has no papillation of this epidermis. 

The acanthifolia parent has a decidedly thicker palisade zone than the 
laurifolia parent and slightly thicker than the Hl and H2 hybrids; the H1 form 
approximates to the acanthifolia condition more nearly than the H2. Both 
hybrid forms have stalked hairs similar to those of the lawrifolia parent (Text- 
fig. 1). All leaves are strongly cuticularized on the adaxial surface, but the 
tomentose abaxial surface of laurifolia, H1 and H2 are slightly less cuticularized 
than the glabrous acanthifolia leaf. 

Text-figure 6 shows the general view of the section of the acanthifolia leaf; 
the recurved margin is plainly indicated, and the distribution of the vascular 
bundles and fibrous tissue. In HI there is an occasional tendency to recurving 
of the leaf margin (Text-fig. 7). 


Diagram of transverse section of leaf of G. acanthifolia 
showing the recurved margin and the mass of fibres (F) simulating 
the intra-marginal vein where leaf recurves. x 15. 
Text-fig. 7—Diagram of transverse section of Hi lamina showing the 
intra-marginal vein (i.v.) and the slight tendency towards recurving of 

the leaf-margin. x 15. 


Text-fig. 6. 


Stomata. 
The mean number of stomata in the same field of the microscope for laurifolia, 
acanthifolia, H1 and H2 respectively is 46:3, 66, 49, 49-5. The large number in 
acanthifolia, compared with the other forms, is accompanied by a reduction in 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 395 


size of the guard-cells. The width of the guard-cells of the forms is approximately 
the same. The longest guard-cells occur in the H1 form (310 “), the shortest in 
acanthifolia (241 w). In the lawrifolia parent the mean length is 291 uw, while in 
the H2 form it is 267 uw. 

Text-figures 8, 9, 10, 11 show the relative size of the stomata of the parents 
and of the hybrids; and it is readily seen that the guard-cells of the H1 form 
are larger than in either parent. Each stoma opens into an air space beneath 
the abaxial epidermis. Text-figure 12 (a, b, c, d) shows camera lucida drawings 
of these air-spaces as seen in section of the abaxial surface. 


Text-figs. $, 9, 10, 11.—Drawings of the abaxial epidermis of laurifolia, 

acanthifolia, H1, and H2, showing the stomata. The stomata of the 

hybrids approximate to the laurifolia character rather than acanthifolia. 
: 3 RAR 


The H2 hybrid (which is most like the lauwrifolia parent in habit and general 
morphology) behaves unexpectedly in the matter of the palisade. Although it 
grows close to the laurifolia parent (often intertwined with it), under precisely 
the same degree of illumination, it yet develops a much thicker palisade layer— 
a layer, in fact, which is slightly thicker than in the exposed acanthifolia parent. 
Moreover, the ratio of spongy to palisade mesophyll in the H1 form is higher than 
in the other three forms. 


396 ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDII, 


The intercellular space system (as revealed in sections parallel to abaxial 
surface) of the acanthifolia parent is distinctly smaller on the whole than in 
the other leaves, the Hi and H2 hybrids approximating to the laurifolia structure 
(Text-figure 12, a, b, c, d). 

Table 5 gives the divergence of the hybrids from the parents and the mid- 
parent in relation to the chief histological characters of the leaf. 


TABLE 5. 
| Plant. Coefficients of Divergence. 
Leaf Character. 
1—H1 | /—H2 |M—H1|M—H2) a—H1|a—H2 
Ae - eae 
laurifolia H1 H2 acanthifolia pap yam a (, [=a ae 
Mean length of guard-cells C 
(20 measurements) . 291 310 267 241— —0-38|+0-48] —0-88) —0-02) —1- 40] —0-52 
Mean number of stomata in 
equal areas .. ae a 46-3 49 49-5 66 +0-14|/+0-17|—0-37| —0-34|—0-86] —0-84 
Thickness of palisade mesophyll 
(4) (20 measurements) .. 600 672 848 800 +0-36) +1-24| —0-14/+0-74| —0-64|] +0-24 
Spongy mesophyll (uw) (20 
measurements) on Be 1,400 1,728 1,448 1,624 +1-40|+0-21]}+0-93) —0-29| +0-46] —0-78 
_ Spongy mesophyll 
Ration B 2-3 2-57 1:7 2-03 |—1-00|+2-20|—1-50] +1-70| 2-00] +1-2 
Palisade mesophyll : 
Means of coefficients (sign regarded) ie as, aC Se ae .. |+0-10) +0-86| —0-39] +0-36|—0-89) —0-14 
Means of coefficients (sign ignored) Bae at wae ee fis 5h 0:65} 0-86) 0-76) 0-62) 1-07) O-71 


The most important features revealed in this table are: (1) the mean size 
of the guard cells of the Hi hybrid (310 u) is greater than in either parent; 
(2) the relative number of stomata in equal areas of leaf surface of the two 
hybrid forms deviates only very slightly from the laurifolia parent; (3) the 
acanthifolia parent has the largest number of stomata per unit area and also the 
smallest stomata; (4) the coefficient of divergence of the Hl hybrid from the 
midparent (—0-88) in regard to length of guard-cells is considerably weighted in 
favour of the lawrifolia parent, while the coefficient of the H2 (—0-02) shows 
only a very slight divergence of this form from the midparent. Considering the 
means of the coefficients of divergence of the hybrids from laurifolia, the mid- 
parent, and acanthifolia, we find for the Hl form +0-10, —0:39 and —0-89 
respectively (when sign is regarded), and for the H2 form, + 0:86, + 0:36 and 
—0-14 respectively; these coefficients indicate that the Hl form deviates very 
slightly from laurifolia in the sum-total of these foliar characters, but it deviates 
considerably from acanthifolia. The mean coefficient of divergence of the H2 
form from acanthifolia is —0-14, thus indicating the dominance of the acanthi- 
folia parent. If the sign of the coefficients is ignored we obtain the relative 
degree of the general divergence of the hybrids from the parents and mid- 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 397 


parent; for Hl these: means are 0-65, 0-76, and 1:07 from laurifolia, midparent, 
and acanthifolia respectively, and for the H2, 0:86, 0:62, and 0-71. Thus the 
general divergence of the Hl forms is much greater from acanthifolia than from 
laurifolia so far as the histology of the leaf is considered. The H2 form shows 
a slightly greater divergence from the laurifolia structure than from acanthifolia. 
The means of the coefficients with regard to the midparent are, for H1, 0:76 and, 
for H2, 0-62, indicating a fair degree of divergence from the midparent in both 
hybrid series. 


Text-fig. 12:—a. b, c, d. Camera lucida drawings of the air-space system 
of laurifolia, acanthifolia, H1, and H2 respectively. A stoma is super- 
imposed in relation to the main air-spaces. x 175. 


Inflorescence and Flowers. 

Table 6 gives the coefficients of divergence of the hybrids from the parents 
and the midparents for the main characters of the inflorescence. 

Considering the number of flowers per inflorescence the ‘coefficients of 
divergence of the Hl form from laurifolia (+ 0:61) and from the midparent 
(+ 0-11) indicate a weighting of the balance in favour of the acanthifolia parent. 
The coefficients of divergence from the same points of reference for the H2 form 
are —0-11 and —0-61 respectively and the absolute number of flowers of the H2 
form is lower than that of either parent, but is very near to the number for the 
laurifolia parent, thus indicating the dominance of the lawrifolia parent in this 
character. 


398 


59-4 mm., is about twice the mean length of laurifolia. 


divergence from the midparent being —- 0-06; 


ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDII, 


closely to the midparent in respect to this character. 
considerably from the midparent as its coefficient of divergence (— 0-4) indicates; 
but it approaches the laurifolia condition closely (coefficient + 0-08). 


Considering the length of the inflorescence we see that acanthifolia, with 


The H1 form (mean 
41 mm.) shows the prepotency of the acanthifolia parent, the coefficient of 


i.e., the H1 form approaches very 
The H2 form diverges 


TABLE 6. 
Characters. 
Plant. Mean length of Mean length of Mean number of Mean length of Mean length of 
‘ Inflorescence Peduncle flowers in Pedicel Gynophore 
(mm.). (mm.). Inflorescence. (mm.). ° (mm.). 
laurifolia . . 26:3 19:3 26°7 2150 3-1 
H1 41-0 19:1 39-3 2-08 at 
H2 29-0 7k) 24-5 2-48 2-66 
acanthifolia 59-4 11:1 47-4 1-92 2-01 
I-H1 | I-H2 
i Py +044 | +0-08 +0:02 | +0-22 +0-°61 | —0-11 +0°75 | +0-14 +0-91 | +0-40 
l-a —4 
M—H1 M—H2 |. 
i ; —0:06 | -—0-40 —0:47 | —0-30 +0-11 | —0-61 +0:24 | —0-37 +0-41 | —0-10 
—a —a4 | 
a—H1 a—H2 | 
; | 7 0-55 | —0-92 | —0-97 | —0:80 —0:39 | —1-10 —0-25 | —0-86 —0-08 | —0-60 
—a —a 
| 


The Hl and H2 forms come nearer the laurifolia parent in the matter of 
length of peduncle, than to the acanthifolia parent. The midparent value is 
15-2 mm.; both hybrid forms exceed this value as their coefficients of divergence, 
—0:47 and — 0-30, indicate; the influence of the laurifolia parent is seen here. 
In regard to the length of the pedicel we see that the H2 form (2:48 mm.) comes 
very close to the laurifolia parent (2°57 mm.) and that its coefficient of divergence 
from the midparent is —0:37, thus showing the prepotency of the Jlawrifolia 
parent. The Hi form (2:08) approaches closely to the acanthifolia side (1:92 mm.). 

In regard to the gynophore, we find practically the same condition, the H1 
form, with a mean length of 2:66 mm., approaching lawrifolia, with mean length 
of 3:1 mm. Here, too, the Hi form shows the prepotency of the acanthifolia 
parent. The coefficient of divergence from the midparent is + 0-41, i.e., in favour 
of acanthifolia. 

From a consideration of these characters of the inflorescence it is apparent 
that.the characters of the two parents blend in a remarkably peculiar fashion; 
one parent being prepotent in one character, the other in some other one; while 
in yet another, one or both of the hybrids show a more or less true blending of 
the parental characters. 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 399 


The means of the coefficients of divergence of the H1 forms from laurifolia, the 
midparent, and acanthifolia in these characters of the inflorescence and flowers 
are +0-55, +0:05, and —0:-45 respectively, when sign is considered, and for 
the H2 hybrid the corresponding means are respectively +0-15, — 0-36, and — 0-86. 
For the H1 hybrid the balance about the midparent is very definite, but slightly 
weighted on the acanthifolia side (+ 0:05). The inequality of balance about 
laurifolia (+ 0:55) and acanthifolia (— 0-45) is considerable and similar. In the 
H2 form the means show great dissimilarity, and that the balance is greatest 
about the laurifolia parent. 


Text-fig. 13.—a, b, c, d. Hairs from the corolla of the four forms; 
in the hybrids the hairs are generally longer than in the two parents 
and tend towards slight asymmetry—an acanthifolia character. x 30. 


When the signs of the coefficients are disregarded, the means of these 
coefficients give the relative degree of the general divergence of the hybrids from 
the parents and from the midparent. These means are, for the H1 hybrid, 
0-55, 0:26, and 0-45 respectively, and, for the H2 hybrid, 0:19, 0:36, and 0-86 
respectively. Thus the general divergence of the Hl form from the laurifolia 
(0°55) is slightly greater than from the acanthifolia (0:45), while\the H2 form 
shows very little divergence from the Jaurifolia parent (0:19), but a very consider- 
able divergence from the acanthifolia parent (0-86). The two parents are almost 
equally balanced in the H1 hybrid, but the laurifolia parent is dominant in these 
characters in the H2 hybrid. 


Pilosity of the Inflorescence and Flowers. 
In Table 7 the chief characters of the pilosity of the inflorescence of the 
parents and hybrids are enumerated. 


400 ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDII, 


From the data recorded in Table 7 it also seems that there is a fortuitous 
blending of the parental influences in the matter of hair-colour and _ hair- 
structure; for example, the ovary and gynophore have red and white hairs in 
laurifolia, white only in acanthifolia, and a mixture of white and yellowish- 
brown or white and ferruginous in the Hl and H2 forms respectively, thus 
suggesting a blending of-the two parents. In the corolla, laurifolia has red or 
ferruginous hairs, acanthifolia chiefly white, few greenish-brown, while the 
hybrids are chiefly ferruginous, clearly indicating the dominance of the lauwrifolia 
parent. The same conclusion’ may be drawn from the hair-colour of the bracts 
and of the inflorescence axis. 


Text-fig. 14.—a, b, c, d. Drawings of the hairs from the ovary and 

gynophore of lawrifolia, acanthifolia, H2, and H1 respectively. The 

influence of acanthifolia is seen in the asymmetrical position of the 
stalk in the hybrids. x 39. 


In regard to hair-structure, the laurifolia parent has symmetrically stalked 
hairs, while the acanthifolia parent is decidedly asymmetric in this respect; the 
H1 form has chiefly asymmetrically stalked hairs, but less so than the acanthifolia 
parent, while the H2 form has hairs which are almost symmetric. Clearly the 
prepotency of the laurifolia parent is revealed in this character of the H2, while 
the two parents are more or less equally represented in this character in the 
H1 hybrids. The other parts of the inflorescence or flower reveal similar 
features of hair-structure. 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 401 


Text-figure 13 (a, b, c, d) demonstrates the structure of the hairs from the 
corolla and Text-figure 14 (a, b, c, d) shows the structure of the hairs from the 
ovary and the gynophore. 


Bracts of the Inflorescence. 

Text-figure 15 depicts the floral bracts of all four forms; it is clear that the 
shape of the H1 and H2 bracts is affected by the laurifolia parent, for they are 
almost like enlargements of the bracts of this parent. 

Table 8 gives the means of the maximum length and maximum breadth of the 
bracts and the coefficients of divergence of the hybrids from the parents and the 
midparent in regard to these characters. 


Text-fig. 15.—a, b, c, d. Drawings of bracts of lawrifolia, acanthifolia, 
H1, and H2. The effect of the lauwrifolia parent is seen in the general 
appearance of the bracts of the hybrids. x 15. 


From this table it appears that the mean length of the bracts of acanthifolia 
is more than twice that of the laurifolia bracts, while the hybrids come between 
the parents. The midparental mean is 3-85. The H1 form shows a coefficient of 
divergence of — 0:14 from the midparental value; in the H2 form the coefficient 
of divergence from the midparent is — 0:26, so that the influence of the laurifolia 
parent is greater than in the Hl form. There is slight predominance of the 
laurifolia influence in this bract-character. Considering the mean of the width 
of the bracts, we find that in the Hl form the mean is greater than for either 
parent, while the H2 form lies between the parental values. The midparental value 
is 2:92; the coefficient of divergence of H1 from the midparent is +1. while the 
H2 form has a coefficient of divergence of —1:57; both forms therefore show 
considerable divergence from the midparent in opposite directions. 


402 


ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDII, 


TABLE 7. 
Plant. 
Organ. 
laurifolia Hi H2 acanthifolia 
Inflorescence hairs red or ferru- | ‘hairs ferruginous, | hairs ferruginous, | greenish-brown, white. 
Axis. ginous, short, sym- | few white, ~ short, almost symmetrical. | longer than in lauri- 
metrical. mostly asymmetrical. folia, asymmetrical. 

Bracts red or ferruginous, | few white, chiefly | mainly ferruginous, | few greenish-brown, 
short, resembling ferruginous, gener- stalk generally sym- chiefly white, stalk 
hairs of corolla, ally asymmetrical ; metrical; purple symmetrical ; no 
symmetrical; purple no purple patches. patches present. purple patches. 
patches present. 

Ovary and red and white ‘in | chiefly white, few | chiefly white, occa- | all white, long, very 

Gynophore. proportion 1 to 6; greenish-brown, sional ferruginous asymmetrical. 
stalk generally some-| asymmetrical. hair present, asym- 
what asymmetrical. metrical generally. 

Corolla red or ferruginous, | chiefly ferruginous, | mainly ferruginous, | chiefly white, few 
latter more abun- few white, asym- few. white, stalk greenish-brown, 
dant, stalk slightly metrical generally. slightly asymme- short, less asymme- 
asymmetrical. trical. trical than in ovary. 

TABLE 8. 
Character of Bracts. Means Means 
of of 
Plant. Coefficients Coefficients 
L : (sign (sign 
Mean length. Mean breadth. w'* 1,000) regarded). ignored). 
(mm.). (mm.) H1 H2 H1 H2 
G. laurifolia 2:40 2-75 873 
ial 43 3:44 Boy7/ 1,052 
1B 6 3°10 2°37 1,308 
G. acanthifolia 5-30 3°10 1,709 
Coefficients of divergence of hybrids from parents and midparent. 
7—H1 1—H2 
i i +0-36 ; +0-24 +1:50 ; —1-10 a OerAL 2. a0) RY +0-69}—0-11} 0-69 | 0:62 
—a —a 
M—H M—H2 
i —0-:14 ; —0:26 SP iO(00) 3) alors —0-28 ; +0:02 +0-19}—0-60] 0:49 | 0°62 
l—a l—a 
—H1 1—H2 
- - —0:64 ; —0:76 +0-50 ; —2-10 —0:78 ; —0:°48 —0:31}—1-11] 0-64 | 1-11 
—4 —a 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 403 


The column giving the ratio of length to width of bracts shows that the 
hybrids fall between the two parents in this character, but the coefficient of 
divergence from the midparent indicates that the Hl form (—0-28) deviates 
considerably from this point of reference in favour of the lauwrifolia parent, while 
the H2 form (coefficient of divergence + 0:02) approximates much more closely 
to the midparent. The prepotency of the lawrifolia parent in regard to this 
character is suggested in the H1 form and the camera lucida drawings of the 
bracts (Text-fig. 15, a, 0, c, d) also demonstrate this conclusion. 

The means of the coefficients of divergence of the H1 hybrids from laurifolia, 
the midparent, and acanthifolia in regard to the characters of the bracts are 
+ 0:69, + 0:19, and —0:31 respectively, when sign is considered; and for the H2 
hybrids - 0-11, —0-60, and —1-:11 respectively. In regard to the Hil form, the 
mean of the coefficients of divergence from the midparent, + 0:19, shows a greater 
approximation of this hybrid to the midparent than is the case in the H2 form; 
in other words there seems to be a more perfect blending of the characters of 
the two parents in the. bract-structure; there is a slight dominance of the 
acanthifolia parent, as the sign indicates. The means of the coefficients of 
divergence from the parents show considerable inequality of balance (+ 0:69 from 
laurifolia and — 0:31 from acanthifolia) and are distinctly dissimilar. 


If we consider the means of the coefficients for the H2 forms, there is 
apparent a very considerable inequality of balance about the midparent (— 0-60) 
and about the acanthifolia parent also (—1:11). The balance about the lauwrifolia 
parent is very definite. In the H2 form it is apparent that all the means of the 
coefficients of divergence (—0-11, —0-60, and —1:11) are on the laurifolia side, 
thus indicating the dominance of this parent. 

If we consider the relative degree of divergence of the hybrids from their 
respective parents and midparent, we obtain an indication of the effect of either 
parent. The means of the coefficients of divergence from the usual points of 
reference, when sign is disregarded, give the relative effect of either parent in 
the constitution of the hybrids. The means of these coefficients are 0-69, 0:47, and 
0-64 respectively for the H1 hybrids and for the H2 hybrids 0-62, 0-62, and 1-11 
respectively. In the Hl form the general divergence from laurifolia (0:69) 
approximates closely to that from acanthifolia (0:64), but is considerably greater 
than the divergence from the midparent; thus acanthifolia is slightly dominant. 

In the H2 form the general divergence from the lJaurifolia parent (0:62) is 
equal to that from the midparent (0°62) and only about half the divergence from 
the acanthifolia parent. Thus in the constitution of this form the laurifolia 
parent is strongly prepotent in the bract characters. 


Pollen. 

Table 9 sets out the colour, the dimensions, and the percentage of small and 
sterile pollen grains of parents and hybrids. 

The colour of the H1 pollen is about intermediate between that of the 
parents, while the H2 form shows a different degree of blending of parental 
colours. 

In size, the grains of the acanthifolia parent are larger than those of 
laurifolia and of the hybrids. The Hil form shows a coefficient of divergence 
from the midparent of — 0:33, while the H2 form has a coefficient of — 0°84. The 
latter diverges considerably from the mean of the parents and indicates the 

E 


404 ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDII, 


TABLE 9. 
Plant. Coefficients of divergence. 
Character. 
1—H1 | (—H2 |M—H1|M—H2| a—H1 | a—H2 
laurifolia Hl H2 acanthifolia |i, San Se | a | ee ee 
Colour a bright- greenish- | brownish-| dark-red 
yellow yellow red 

Size of largest 

grains Re 548 564 514 646 +0-16}—0-:34] —0-33| —0-84| —0-83] —1-84 
Size of small 

grains ee 360 390 400 400 +0-75|+1-00]+0-25|+0-50}—0-25}) O 
Percentage of 

sterile and 

small grains 3:7 13:4 8-17 23:6 +0:48]+0-22)—0-01|—0-27| —0-51| —0-77 

| 


dominance of the laurifolia parent in this character. On the contrary, in regard 
to the small sterile grains the hybrids approximate more closely to the 
acanthifolia side. The parents and hybrids show a most remarkable variation 
in the percentage of these small and usually sterile grains which invariably 
appear abnormal in their contents (which. appear as large globular oily masses, 
absent from the larger and normal grains). (See Text-figure 16, a, b, c, @.) 


A common property of most hybrids is a high degree of pollen and ovule 
sterility. But from numerous counts of sterile and normal pollen-grains of all 
four forms, I find that the acanthifolia parent has far more small, undeveloped 
and sterile grains than the hybrids, e.g., laurifolia has 3-7% sterile, acanthifolia 
23:7%, H1 and H2 have 13:4% and 8:17% respectively. This character was so 
unexpected that I made numerous check counts at intervals, always with the same 
result, namely, that the hybrid pollen is much more consistently normal than the 
acanthifolia pollen, although in the H1 form it is four times more sterile than 
laurifolia pollen, and in the H2 approximately twice as sterile. 


The accompanying Table 10 sets out the coefficients of divergence of the 
hybrids from the two parents and from the midparent for the chief characters 
discussed in the text; the coefficients being arranged in order of magnitude. 
These coefficients of divergence have been plotted as a graph taking the mid- 
parent as the reference line and plotting horizontally from it in a vertical series 
the appropriate coefficients recorded in the table. In the graphs (Text-figs. 17, 18) 
the horizontal distance between the lawrifolia and the acanthifolia reference lines 
shows graphically the range of the coefficients of divergence of the characters 
where the values of the hybrids come within the limits of the two parents. 
Identity with one or other parent is obviously indicated if the coefficient of 
divergence of the hybrid from the midparent is + 0:5. In such a graph the 
relationship of the hybrids as a whole to the parents is presented in a manner 
which makes it possible to compare one hybrid with another, for the sum of the 
coefficients of divergence from any reference line is represented by the area 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 405 


between the graph and any of the three vertical reference lines. The numerical 
value of this sum of the coefficients of divergence (neglecting the sign) is, for 
the Hi form, 0:67, 0:46, 0:64 respectively and, for the H2, 0:53, 0:49, and 0:84 
respectively. In the former it is seen that the effect of the two parents is nearly 
balanced, neither having any distinct dominance in regard to the hybrid’s con- 
stitution, but in the H2 form there is a striking difference in the potency of the 
parents in its make-up, the Jaurifolia parent being more predominant than the 


o 


P rer p- 


<M ae 
[> 
LK A 


G d 


Text-fig. 16—Drawings of pollen grains of lawrifolia, Hl, H2, and 
acanthifolia, showing the relative size of the grains, and some of the 
small sterile ones. The contents in the latter show disorganization, 
while the others have a uniform distribution of the ‘contents. x 150. 


y 
[> 


acanthifolia parent. This is also suggested in the graphs plotting the coefficients 
of divergence of the hybrid from the midparent (Text-figs. 17, 18). There is no 
strong tendency for the graph to approximate to the midparental line (as may 
be expected, since the mean coefficient of divergence from the midparent is 0-55), 
but there is a very large proportion of the graph on the lawrifolia side, and the 
curve is decidedly asymmetric. The graph for the Hi form, however, displays 
considerable symmetry about the midparental line and is thus strikingly different 
from the graph for the H2 hybrid, so far as balance about this reference line is 
considered. 


406 ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDII, 


The balance of the graph about the midparental line may also be expressed 
numerically (Warren, 1929). The sum of the negative coefficients of divergence 
from the midparent (i.e., on the lawrifolia side) for H1 is —5:19, the sum of the 
positive coefficients (acanthifolia side) is + 5:52, giving a difference of + 0-33, or a 
mean difference per character of +0:01. Thus in the constitution of the H1 form 
the acanthifolia parent is slightly dominant. 

Considering the H2 form, we find the negative coefficients (laurifolia side) 
total —7:98, while the sum of the positive coefficients totals +3-71, giving a 
difference of — 4:22, or a mean difference per character of —0-17. Thus the 


3 

<< 

& me a 

S i = 

iS) (a) < 

~ re ~ 

aS 2 

x w S 

= a S 

3 Ge} S 

ss = S 
Ye) Vex} 10 <€ 19 Ve} S 
Ne) MS ig ite) a i= an 10 ~ (—) 
el re i Oo oS Oo oS oO Qo S Sool 
| | | | | | + + + + 


1 
2 
3 
Py 4 
1) 
S 
oO [= 
oo 2 
Ww 
Oo 
EB 6 
ko) 
oa 7 
% 
= 8 
on 
5) 9 
& 
S 10 
(3) 
is) 11 , 
3 
S 12 
= 
a 13 
oO 
& 14 
a 
° 
ru 15} 
v 
2 16 
(o) 
5 17 
i 18 
5) : 
5 19 
oO 
5 20 
QO 
21 
22 


Text-fig. 17.—H1 Hybrid. 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 407 


constitution of the H2 hybrid is largely determined by the laurifolia parent, 
and the graphs of the two forms confirm these conclusions. Text-figure 19 is a 
reproduction of the graph representing the generic hybrid between Venidiwm and 
Arctotis studied by Warren (1929). A comparison of this graph with Text-figures 
17 and 18 above, for the specific hybrids analysed in this: paper, will show clearly 
the similarity of the curves, and the symmetrical arrangement about the mid- 
parental line. From the graph of the Venidium x Arctotis hybrid and the graphs 
of the G. laurifolia « G. acanthifolia hybrids, it is apparent that most of the hybrid 


8 
= 
Sie gee on ase 
3° Co) c~ 
= m4 = 
Ss x = 
3 = S 
ss = > 
Vex} Ve} wD isi ite) te) 
Oy Giles es Gay aha lo Pe) BS) GS 
= = mo oO i=) i=) S o> i) i=) Sl nd Sl hol 
ee Femelle al gene all + + + + + + 
ut f { \ \ | ' 
2 
3 
ov 4 
13) 
5 
oo 5 
fu 
Oo 
i 6 
eo) 
ca) 
3 7 
45 
2 8 
oy 
o 9 
= 
: 
2 10 
Y 
MH 
© alal 
& 
5 12 
a=] 
| 
on 13 
S 
5 14 
Get 
° 
“4 15 
x 
- ad 
A 16 
& 17 
n 
® 18 
9 
i] 
uu 19 
w 
a 
6) 20 
21 
22 : 
-- Agee ee 


Text-fig. 18.—H2 Hybrid. 


408 ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDI!, 


characters fall within the limits of the characters for the two parents; but it is 
also apparent that the means of some of the characters of the hybrids are outside 
the means of the parents. 

Table 10, a, b, gives the coefficients of divergence of the H1 and H2 hybrids 
from the parents and midparent in respect to the characters discussed in the 
text; the coefficients are arranged in order of magnitude. 


pau foe wv Zr ¥ Ss FT ewana 


Ven., Venidium ; 


Gloxiniaeflora Backcross. 


® 
oe) 
3) 
% 
yy 
pa 
iS) 
5 WH 
2 on 
So as 
om 29 
ee 
. 
S) 
Gal (Sy 
o 
ice 
Se Sed 
ae 
S 
One 
mw 
ea 
ane 
= 3 
i); 
Es 
g 
EE 
Sy Lae 
ey 
o 
O en 
ae 
aS 
38 
1a & 
oN 
isl Cg 
ey 28 
Bee 
ao} S 
so) 
by 2) 
m & 
om 
« oO 
fe) 
a Ss 
w 
ie} 
D 
pS) 
Q 
(as) 
u 
1 
ra 
re 
bo 
a 
tu) 
tal 
o 
a 


| did | naneror eo lesacegreaganns 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 


TABLE 10a. 


409 


H1 


Coefficients of Divergence. 


. Character. 

1—H1 M—H1 a—H1 

=a l—a l—a@ 
1, Spongy Mesophyll (1 999) —1-00 1-50 ~2-00 

Palisade Mesophyll 

2. Width of Leaf —0-°44 —0-94 —1-44 
3. Length of Guard-Cells .. —0°38 —0-88 —1-40 
4. Length of Peduncle +0-02 —0:47 —0-97 
5. Stomata per Unit Area e +0-14 —0-37 —0-86 
6. Size of Largest Pollen-Grains .. +0-16 —0-33 —0-83 
7. Ratio of Bract iw 1,000 | .. +0-21 —0-28 —0-78 
8. Length of Bract.. +0°36 —0-14 —0-64 
9. Thickness of Palisade +0:36 —0-14 —0-64 
10. Length of Lamina +0:44 —0-07 —0:56 
11. Length of Inflorescence +0-44 —0-06 —0-55 
12. Percentage of Small Grains +0-48 —0-01 —0-51 
13. Lobes of Lamina +0-:58 +0:09 —0-41 
14. Flowers per Inflorescence +0:61 +0-11 —0:39 
15. Distance of Marginal Vein +0:65 +0:15 —0°-35 
16. Length of Pedicel +0-75 +0-24 —0-25 
17. Size of Small Pollen-Grains +0°-75 +0-25 —0-25 
18. Length of Gynophore +0-:91 +0-41 —0:08 
19. Leaf Ratio 1% 1,000 { 1-24 40°74 +0-24 
20. Main Branches per Plant +1:30 +0:78 +0:30 
21. Length of Petiole +1-31 +0-82 +0:32 
22. Thickness of Spongy Mesophyll +1-40 +0-93 +0:46 
23. Breadth of Bract +1-50 +1-00 +0:50 
Means (signs ignored). . 0-67 0-46 0:64 
Means (signs considered) +0-51 +0:01 —0:48 


410 


ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDII, 


H2 


Character. 

1—H2 | 

l—a | 

i i | 

1. Breadth of Bract = 71051() | 

2. Leaf Ratio {© x:1,000 t 0-63 | 

3. Size of Largest Pollen .. —0-34 | 

4. Length of Leaf .. —0-15 | 

5. Flowers per Inflorescence —0-11 | 
6. Length of Inflorescence +0-08 

7. Length of Pedicel +0-14 

8. Stomata per Unit Area +0°17 | 
9. Length of Peduncle +0: 22 
10. Thickness of Spongy Mesophyll +0-21 

11. Percentage of Small Grains +0-22 | 

12. Length of Bract.. +0-24 | 
13. Lobes of Lamina +0:23 
14. Distance of Marginal Vein +0-25 
15. Length of Gynophore ~ +0-40 
16. Length of Guard-Cells .. +0:48 
17. Ratio of Bract ix x 1,000 | +0°52 
18. Width of Leaf ‘ +0-50 
19. Branches per Plant +0-80 
20. Length of Petiole +1-00 
21. Size of Smallest Pollen-Grains +1-00 
22. Thickness of Palisade +1:24 
23, Spongy Mesophyll (+ 990) 42-20 


Palisade Mesophyll 


Means (signs ignored). . 


Means (signs considered) 


+0: 


33 


M—H2 
l-—a 


= Nolsy/ 


leila} 


+1-70 


0-49 


Coefficients of Divergence. 


24 


20 


“84 
67 


BY J. MCLUCKIE. 411 


SUMMARY. 


1. A detailed analysis of the natural specific hybrids Grevillea laurifolia x 
G. acanthifolia is made, and the opinion of Fletcher and Musson (These 
PROCEEDINGS, 1927) as to their probable hybrid origin is confirmed. 


2. The most important contrasting characters of the putative parents and 
hybrids have been investigated, their coefficients of divergence from the parents 
and from the midparent calculated and plotted graphically about the midparental 
reference line. 


3. There are two distinct hybrid series or swarms, H1 and H2; in the former, 
as the graph shows, there is an almost equal blending of the characters of the two 
parents, but a slight predominance of the acanthifolia parental complex; in the 
latter the graph shows that the lauwrifolia parent is strongly predominant. This 
conclusion is further confirmed by means of the coefficients of divergence for 
the Hi and H2 hybrids, which are respectively +0:01 and — 0:17. 


4. The mean of the H1 form exceeds the means of the parents in the following 
eight characters: ratio of spongy mesophyll to palisade mesophyll, width of leaf, 
length of guard-cells, leaf-ratio (width/length), main branches per plant, length 
of petiole, thickness of spongy mesophyll, and breadth of bracts. The H2 hybrid 
exceeds the means of the parents in the following seven characters: ratio of 
spongy mesophyll to palisade mesophyll, leaf-ratio (width/length), length of leaf, 
size of largest pollen-grains, flowers per inflorescence, thickness of palisade 
mesophyll, breadth of bract. In the remaining characters the means of the 
hybrids fall between the means of the parents, and therefore the effect of both 
parents is discernible. ; 

The H1 forms approach the laurifolia parent in twelve characters and the 
acanthifolia parent in eleven, so that the effect of the two parents is almost 
evenly balanced. 


In the H2 hybrids the lawrifolia effect appears in seventeen characters and 
the acanthifolia in five, thus demonstrating the dominance of the former parent. 


5. The graphs sum up the data available from an analysis of the H1 and H2 
hybrids of Grevillea, and indicate the relationship of the hybrids as a whole to 
the two parents. The graph for the Hl form is sigmoid, and resembles that 
obtained by Warren for the Venidium and Arctotis hybrid. The graph for the H2 
hybrids is not so symmetrical about the midparental line as that of the H1 form; 
indeed most of the graph is on the laurifolia side, thus graphically representing 
the dominance of the laurifolia parent in the constitution of this form. The graph, 
moreover, strongly resembles that of the Gloxiniaeflora backcross in the Foxglove 
hybrids, reproduced by Warren (1929), and indicates that the H2 hybrids may 
probably be a backcross, H1 (male) and lawrifolia (female). This aspect is being 
investigated. 

Literature. 
ALLAN, H. ist, 1925.—Illustrations of Wild Hybrids in the New Zealand Flora. Genetica, 

Deel vii, 1925. 

CocKAYNE, L., and E. ATKINSON, 1926.—On the New Zealand Wild Hybrids of Nothofagus. 

Genetica, viii, 1926. 

FLETCHER, J. J., 1913.—On a case of Natural Hybridism in the Genus Grevillea (Nat. 

Ord. Proteaceae). ABSTRACT LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 1913. 

FLETCHER, J. J., and C. T. Musson, 1927.—On a case of Natural Hybridism in the 

Genus Grevillea (Nat. Ord. Proteaceae). Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 52, 1927, 122. 

F 


412 ON GREVILLEA GAUDICHAUDII. 


ROSENBERG, 1909.—Cytologische und Morphologische Studien an Drosera longifolia x 
D. rotundifolia. Kgl. Svensk. Vet., Handl., 48, 1909, 3-64. 


WARREN, 1929.—On a Natural Hybrid between the Genera Venidium and Arctotis. 
Ann. Natal Mus., vi, Pt. 2, 1929. 


HXPLANATION OF PLATES XII-XV. 
Plate xii. 
Photograph I.—Seedlings of the Hl hybrid raised by crossing Grevillea laurifolia 
(ovule parent) and G. acanthifolia (pollen parent). 


Plate xiii. 


Photograph II.—Portion of the lawrifolia parent. 
Photograph JII.—Portion of the acanthifolia parent. 


Plate xiv. 


Photograph IV.—Part of the H1 hybrid. 
Photograph V.—Part of the H2 hybrid. 


Plate xv. 


Photograph VI.—Leaf-lobing of acanthifolia. 
Photograph VII.—Dissection of the lamina of H1 hybrid. 
Photograph VIII.—Dissection of the lamina of the H2 hybrid. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. TAUB exci. 


1. Seedlings of H1 hybrid, Grevillea lawrifolia x G. acanthifolia. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


PLATE XIII. 


Portion of acanthifolia parent. 


Q) 
to) 


Portion of lawrifolia parent. 


9 
(4 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


PLATE XIV. 


hybrid. 


Part of the H2 


5. 


Part of the H1 hybrid. 


4, 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


6. Leaf-lobing in G. acanthifolia. 


PLATE 


EXaVis 


hae ete 
cae 


ie 


NOTES ON THE AUTUMN ORCHIDS OF THE SOUTH MAITLAND 
COALFIELDS, N.S.W. 


WITH DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF PTEROSTYLIS. 
By the Rev. H. M. R. Rupp, B.A. 
(Three Text-figures. ) 
[Read 30th July, 1930.) 


The season 1930 has been most favourable for the growth and development 
of the autumn-flowering orchids in the above area. The following species have 
been in abundance far greater than I have seen in any other district: 
Prasophyllum nigricans R. Br., Pterostylis ophioglossa R. Br., Pt. concinna R. Br., 
Pt. revoluta R. Br., Pt. reflexa R. Br., and Pt. truncata Fitzg. These are closely 
followed in numbers by Pterostylis acuminata R. Br., Pt. obtusa R. Br., Acianthus 
exsertus R. Br., A. fornicatus R. Br., and Friochilus cucullatus Reichb. f. Less 
common are the following: Prasophyllum acuminatum Rogers, Pterostylis, n. sp., 
Pt. parviflora R. Br. and Chiloglottis reflexa (Lab.) Cheel. ° 

Pterostylis concinna and Acianthus fornicatus belong rather to the winter than 
to the autumn months, but as they flowered in early May they may be included 
here. Prasophyllum nigricans has been extremely abundant; P. acuminatum 
seems to be rare. Single specimens of two doubtful Prasophylls of the same 
section have been found, but are omitted as of uncertain identity. 

The most interesting orchids in the list are the nine Greenhoods (Pterostylis) 
and Acianthus exsertus, and notes on these ten plants will be found below. Among 
the Greenhoods is a new species of which fifteen flowers have been obtained, and 
which I have named P. furcillata, from the diminutive forking of the apex of the 
labellum (Fig. 3). 

Pterostylis ophioglossa R. Br.—F lowering stems vary in height from 6 to 
almost. 24 cm. Colour ranges from greyish-green through bright green 
to a pale reddish tint, while flowers out in the open are sometimes nearly white. 
The angle formed by the forking of the labellum varies considerably, occasionally 
approaching that of P. concinna; in such cases the flowers are usually small, 
suggesting hybridization between the two species.. Two remarkable abnormal 
plants were found side by side on one occasion, both being robust and well 
developed. One has two flowers on a common “double’’ ovary, \facing each 
other, both normal except for the lateral sepals; on one side the sepal of each 
flower is quite free to the base, on the other the sepal of one flower is united to 
that of the other, forming a sinus similar to that between the paired sepals of 
the typical flower. The other plant has two perfect flowers, the second rising on 
a peduncle 10 cm. long from the base of the bract subtending the first flower. 
Miss D. Watson of Weston has obtained a similar specimen with a shorter 
peduncle, but the second flower lacks a labellum. 


414 AUTUMN ORCHIDS OF SOUTH MAITLAND COALFIELDS, 


For some years I have been disposed to regard P. ophioglossa as having 
originated by hybridization between P. truncata and P. concinna. The chief 
reason against this has been my inability to secure any evidence of these two 
species being in flower concurrently, but I now have flowers of both before me. 
Figure 1 shows the close resemblance between the galea-segments of P. truncata 
and those of P. ophioglossa. The general form and habit of the latter and of 
P. concinna are much alike, while the similarity in outline of the flowers of 
P. truncata and P. ophioglossa is very obvious, even in dried specimens. A cross 
between P. truncata and P. concinna might well produce an intermediate-sized 
flower with a deeply-cleft labellum. 


Pterostylis concinna R. Br.—Very abundant; often very tall, up to 24 cm., 
otherwise typical. 


Pterostylis acuminata R. Br.—Much less restricted to the vicinity of water- 
courses and gullies than any of the others (P. parviflora excepted). Often tall, 
reaching 30 cm., but short stems are common. 


Pterostylis revoluta R. Br. and Pterostylis reflera R. Br. (Text-fig. 2)—The 
resemblances between these species are obvious, but are far more apparent in 
dried specimens than in the living state, and I am more and more convinced 
that Robert Brown was right in separating them. I have examined at least 
several hundred specimens of each, but have failed to find anything which could 
be regarded as an intermediate form. In the dried plants the labella are not 
dissimilar, but in the living plants that of P. reflera is consistently darker and 
narrower except in one form, which I think is a hybrid, but not with P. revoluta. 
The most outstanding difference (apart from dimensions) in the living plants is 
in the curvature of the flower, the curve of P. reflera beginning almost from the 
base. When a dorsal sepal is pressed flat and dried, it is almost impossible to 
imagine it forming the curve natural to it; this is because in its natural 
condition the whole segment forms a curve. It is quite different with P. revoluta, 
where there is a comparatively long upright portion of the flower from the base 
upward, before the forward curve develops. In the field this distinction gives 
the two flowers quite a different appearance, which is not nearly so marked in 
many herbarium specimens. In my experience P. reflera is always found in 
colonies, while P. revoluta, though sometimes grouped, is scattered indiscrim- 
inately over the area where it occurs. In its larger forms this species is 
undoubtedly one of the handsomest of all our Greenhoods. 

Pterostylis truncata Fitzg—Hitherto I have only found, in two other districts, 
occasional groups of this species. In the neighbourhood of Weston it is in great 
abundance. Fitzgerald’s specimens came from Mittagong; the tall one depicted 
by him must have been exceptional in height, and cannot be regarded as typical. 
The outstanding characteristic of P. truncata, as seen on the western slopes of 
New England, in the Paterson Valley, and about Weston, is the abnormally 
short stem for so large a flower. Victorian plants from Sunshine and the You 
Yangs agree in this respect. The red tints in the flower make it very attractive, 
but the shortness of the stem, which is often only 3 or 4 cm., gives it the 
semblance of a dwarf. Mr. E. Minchell and I have found at Weston three plants 
with’ two flowers; in one the second flower is 4 cm. above the first, in the 
other two the flowers are level with each other, on separate peduncles. 

Pterostylis obtusa R. Br.—This vivid-green flower is fairly plentiful. The 
stem-leaves vary greatly, and are sometimes very broad. There is also much 


BY H. M. R. RUPP. 415 


variation in the length of the sepals, particularly the dorsal, which is occasionally 
produced into a moderately long filament. In most New South Wales localities 
the galea is shortly-pointed,. but I have Tambourine Mountain (Queensland) 
specimens matching those of Weston. 

Pterostylis parviflora R. Br.—Plentiful among the low shrubby growths. Very 
slender, not tall, whole plant bright green, flowers rarely tinged with red. The 
remarkable development of the stigmatic plate in this tiny flower is worth 


noticing. 


Fig. 1—Comparison of P. truncata, P. ophioglossa and P. concinna. 
1. Dorsal sepal of P. truncata (T) and P. ophioglossa (O). 
2. Petal of the’ same. 3. Lateral sepals of the same. 
4. Labellum of P. concinna, P. ophioglossa, and P. truncata. 

Fig. 2.—Comparison of P. revoluta (large) and P. reflexa (small). 
1. Dorsal sepal. 2. Petal. 3. Labellum. \ 

Fig. 3.—Pterostylis furcillata, n. sp., showing enlarged labellum and 
column. 


PTEROSTYLIS FURCILLATA, n. sp. Text-figure 3. 

Planta gracillima 12-20 cm. alta. Folia ad basem fere duo, petiolata, latissime 
lanceolata, cum marginibus crispis. Bractea similis sub medium caulem, tanto 
base amplexans. Bractea appressa sub florem. Ovarium 10-18 mm. longum. 
Flos solitarius, a base ad galeae apicem 4-5 cm., summe viridis. Sepala lateralia 


416 AUTUMN ORCHIDS OF SOUTH MAITLAND COALFIELDS. 


ad sinum latum tumida, abhinc galeam magnopere excedenta. Galea curvissima, 
supra petala 8-10 mm. deflexa. Labellum 15 mm. longum, ad apicem bifidum cum 
cuspidibus obtusis, summe fuscum sed ad basem pallidum. Columna graeillima, 
circiter 13 mm. longa, lobi inferiores vix ciliati. Stigma angusta, prominens. 

A very slender plant from 12 to 20 cm. high. Basal leaves usually 
two only in flowering plants; two plants were found with one leaf, and one with 
three, while some non-flowering plants close by had four. The rule, however, 
seems to be two. Leaves petiolate, broadly lanceolate or in one or two cases 
nearly ovate, acuminate, with crisped edges. One bract similar to the leaves 
on the lower part of the stem, clasping only at its base, and a more appressed 
bract subtending the long ovary. Flower solitary, 4-5 cm. from base to tip 
of galea, vivid-green. Lateral sepals forming a protruding lip (less marked 
than in P. obtusa) at the broad sinus, thence prolonged into filaments far beyond 
the galea. Galea much curved, deflexed, extending 8-10 mm. beyond the petals. 
Labellum 15 mm. long, shortly bifid at the apex, with obtuse points, very dark 
but paler at the base. Column very slender, a little shorter than the labellum, 
the lower wing-lobes obtuse and scarcely ciliate. Stigma narrow, prominent. 
Fl. April—May. : 

This orchid was found in Melaleuca scrub not very far from the Kurri Kurri 
Hospital grounds.* Its affinities seem to be largely with P. obtusa, and it may 
have originated by hybridization between that and P. ophioglossa or P. concinna; 
but as 15 flowers were obtained, all true to the type described (except for shorter 
sepals in one), it may fairly claim recognition as a species. The cleft in the 
labellum, though very small like that of the southern P. Toveyana, is quite 
definite in every flower. Young plants without flowers were seen close by, 
agreeing in the character of the leaves, and no other species was noticed within 
about twenty yards. The foliation is quite unlike that of P. obtusa. In general 
appearance the flower resembles that of P. decurva. As stated above, some of 
the non-flowering plants had four leaves; those with two only might easily have 
been mistaken for leaves of Chiloglottis. 

Acianthus exsertus R. Br.—This usually insignificant plant will acquire new 
interest from the remarkable forms assumed by it in this district. The typical 
form is not uncommon, but a most abnormally robust form occurs in large 
colonies near Weston. The plants reach a height of 21 ecm., with a stem-width of 
2mm. Sepals 8 mm. long, labellum 6 mm., column 4 mm. across the curve. These 
measurements were from one of the largest flowers. A whole colony of this robust 
form (not quite so tall) was found, in which every plant except three had a 
perfect flower at the point where the leaf is attached to the stem, far below the 
flowering-raceme. This flower is on a short peduncle connate to the stem itself. 
These interesting forms were brought under my notice by Mrs. P. Watson and 
her daughter, of Weston. 


* Subsequently found three miles away, near Abermain. 


THE TOPOGRAPHY AND WATER SUPPLY OF COX’S RIVER, N.S.W. 


By F. A. Crart, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the 
Society in Geography. 


(Four Text-figures.) 
[Read 27th August, 1930.] 


Position and Rainfall—Cox’s River drains some 1,300 square miles of 
plateau country to the west of Sydney, and its water falls into the Nepean-— 
Hawkesbury system. The river basin is situated on the eastern slope of the 
highlands and is open to south-east and easterly winds, which bring considerable 
rain at all seasons. The actual rainfall varies directly with elevation and inversely 
with distance from the sea. The effect of elevation gives a steadily increasing 
annual rainfall from Penrith (elevation 89 feet; rainfall 28-92 inches) to Katoomba 
(elevation 3,336 feet; rainfall 55-80 inches). Further inland, a decreasing gradient 
of the highland surface corresponds with a markedly decreased rainfall. Distribu- 
tion through the year is indicated by figures referring to precipitation along the 
Great Western Railway, as there are no recording stations elsewhere in the area 
apart from that line of settlement. 


Average Monthly Rainfall (in Inches) for the Central Tableland, to 1928. 


Years | April 
Station. of Jan. | Feb. | Mar. |April.| May. | June.| July. | Aug. |Sept.| Oct. | Nov.} Dec. | Year. to 
Record. October. 
Lithgow as 39 Boek |) Mol? |) Blows |) BoG |) Asks i) Bow Bock |) Weg i) Ohoh4 I) Mass: | P2a(a} 1) o(0) || BBoRs|| - als}ors) 
Mount Victoria 56 Bo | Abo) Sows |) Bork | Bae) 1 Bowy |) Bows Wi Ashy | MAesy |! Mock Oo} te Bore | BVHsey | alts)os} 
Blackheath .. 31 Hosy |r Biot |p ZEo@) I!) Betsy Bea |) Bee Sols 1) Mobsy |) Hoch |) Wo. |, Bol) Nicloss |) AKojoteyi | alors} 
Katoomba .. 43 GoZeieGrO) 65 | 50) | 4c ON 45) |e aG Se sul 2S Ss) 327 a bs) 548i) S27 
Lawson ae 33 Ho {| Cbatsy 4) Zo) Zhoks |) Boss Bieky 1 Zlob. |) Aes) |) Moby i) Broks} |] Biol). 1] Gyo(o) fash) BAebob} 
Springwood .. 41 BOBS He eo) aoa BRB Wh Oho) Nt Doky retest roa i Oley Both N B{oO2 NH Bios 1) Bias) 19-0 
Penrith fe 32 Bos || Pho |) Bo) Aor 983) PAO) |) Boal a aloy? cabotss |) ilo’) |) $4983 |) Bee) PAssoBy |! alisjoR 
Sydney AG 70 Boel i AloBh |) IO) | job | yoy I eho) Wy Chores Bo() | PAoey |) leh i Woks} i joes} | elrfadt li) Pessoa) 
1 


(After N.S.W. Statistical Register, 1927-1928.) 


As far as the tablelands are concerned, these figures are probably representa- 
tive enough, but the wide meridional valleys of the Cox and Kowmung have a 
topographic form and position which is suggestive of lower rainfall. Winds 
blowing from the west, south and south-east into these valleys tend to deliver 
their rain on the high tableland edges where a maximum updraught is created, 


418 TOPOGRAPHY AND WATER SUPPLY OF COX’S RIVER, 


and to form areas of local high pressure and corresponding dryness in the leeward 
parts of the valleys. In the wide valleys of Kanimbla and Megalong, on the 
central section of Cox’s River and 1,200 feet below the plateau, it is quite usual 
to experience fine weather whilst rain is falling on the high, exposed tableland 
less than ten miles distant. This is particularly the case during summer, when 
the valleys are hot on account of their relatively low elevation and the fact that 
they are enclosed by much higher land. 


| ToMud gee Spans, \\ eS? 
ees THE 
AG Soe megs 


ilo <SANINY, 
CP See) “7 COX BASIN 


XK 


WW or Pe es S C A i E ssa 
rans \ z PETE 
RYDAL/p ee 
spAL 
\ 


J \ 
VoMacquarieR.\ | 
eu 


“ 
> 3G 


SO artis 
7 Iw 
—— 


My 


mteiiiy 
“3 


= 


STEIN) 


HILL 


> 


RS 


SHOOTERS 
\ 


WOVE era 
y 


> 


“UWE, 


4 
1 
4, 


Text-fig. 1.—Locality’ map,’ showing names used in the text. 
The principal areas for stream water supply are hatched. 


Ise Es een CRAM 419 


Thus there are reasons for suspecting some local variations of rainfall which 
are not disclosed by existing meteorological observations, and which would tend 
to lessen the supply of water given to the drainage system by the wide, deep 
valleys. On the other hand the high tableland (about 4,200 feet) around Jenolan 
Caves is in a favourable position for intercepting moisture as it is bounded, 
especially on the eastern side, by fairly steep slopes, and rises from 1,200 to 2,000 
feet above its surroundings. Its contribution towards the streams might, there- 
fore, be considerable. In point of fact the streams flowing from this high mass 
are the most reliable of the region, a circumstance which is not wholly due to 
high rainfall. 


cn 


Lithgow Valley 
2 ey \Kanimbla Valle 


Fi <¥ 
All ‘ 4 
AN i 1 MUA 
Win i 


Kanangra Valls 
3300 


Kowmung \ 
Mt.Colong 


3400 


Verranderie a 

: q rTM A aan 

Wollondilly \WsteeSey 
4 3 12~ 


M HIW.M. 


O 


S 


epee ai / Monkey Cr. Nepean 
Mathie So Warragamba Bottleneck 


Text-fig. 2.—Block Diagram of the Cox River Basin, showing the 
principal topographic features and divisions. 


Topography and Geology (Text-fig. 2).—An account of the physiography of 
this area has already been given by the writer (1928); consequently, a summary 
of the topographical and geological conditions will be sufficient for the purposes 
of this paper. ; . 

The valleys of Cox’s River and its principal tributary, the Kowmung, form 
a line of demarcation between the newer Permian and Triassic strata to the 
south and east and the older Silurian and Devonian beds on the west. Thus that 
part of the tableland forming the eastern watershed of Cox’s River, together with 
the mass lying six miles east of the Kowmung has a surface of Hawkesbury 
Sandstone. That series of wide, mature valleys which includes the levels at 

G 


420 TOPOGRAPHY AND WATER SUPPLY OF COX’S RIVER, 


Lithgow and Wallerawang (3,100 feet), Kanimbla and Megalong Valleys (2,200 
feet), and the higher-level valleys of Kowmung River and Jamieson’s Creek 
(between 400 and 2,800 feet) has a surface covering of Upper Marine (Permian) 
sandstone and conglomerate in part, but a great deal is carved out of intrusive 
granites and porphyries and highly inclined metamorphic strata. 

The wide surfaces of these valleys are trenched by deep gorges cut in the 
underlying intrusives and metamorphics. That of the Cox in southern Megalong 
is 1,900 feet deep, and its sides slope at angles of 40 degrees and more. Similar 
gorges up to 3,000 feet in depth extend into the high tableland about Jenolan 
Caves, on whose edges small outliers of Permian littoral sediments rest uncon- 
formably on the prevailing older rocks. 

Thus the Cox River area comprises a high metamorphic tableland about 
Jenolan which is separated from the lower sandstone plateau to the north and 
“east by a series of upland valleys of varying elevations, and with a width 
which varies from six miles on the upper Cox to twelve miles in Kanimbla- 
Megatong and eight miles in the main Kowmung valley. Despite recent erosion 
there are considerable areas of undissected land in these valleys. The catchment 
ot the Cox waters presents a variety of geological structures, mineral characters 
and topography, all of which would be expected to have great influence on the 
volume and permanency of the streams. 

Evaporation.—The rainfall, as has already been indicated, is spread fairly 
through the year with a rather dry season in spring. In winter, with the pre- 
vailing high pressure and westerly winds, there is a tendency towards evaporation 
which is effectively checked by uniformly low temperatures in the highlands. 
Snow is experienced at intervals above 3,000 feet; frosts are of common occur- 
rence, and ground, in places which are not exposed to the direct rays of the sun, 
may remain frozen for a week during frosty weather. In the valleys and on the 


Highland (Shade) Temperatures, 1928. 


Means. Extremes. Extremes, 1923-1928. 
Annual 
Station. | Altitude. Mean. 
Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. 
Katoomba .. Sea 3 49) atts 55-2 63-3 47-1 88-0 | 31-0 98:0 | 28-0 
Mount Victoria .. | 3,490 ft. 53-6 61-2 46-0 87-0 | 29-0 94-0 26-0 
if 


Temperatures in degrees F. 
(After N.S.W. Statistical Register, 1927-1928). 


lower parts of the plateaus conditions are warmer but, given anything close to the 
average rainfall month by month, soil remains moist throughout the winter. 

During the warmer months (October to April) the daily temperature is 
fairly high, although it is subject to such great occasional variation that snow 
has fallen on the higher tablelands upon Christmas Day. This is an exceptional 
circumstance, the opposite extreme being attained during those summers when 
hot westerly winds prevail for some weeks during January and February and 
bring inland conditions almost to the eastern coast. 


BY F, A. CRAFT. 421 


In general, the summer conditions are warm or hot during the day, whilst 


the nights are much cooler. Evaporation is much greater than in winter and, 


with the uniform rainfall experienced, the natural stream flow diminishes with 


sara ee er 


Og JO _15_20 CHAINS 
INTERVAL — 100 F. 


Plateau near Leura. Note the 

represented here by silicified grit) 

dissected by modern gorges (east) and older valleys containing swamps (west). 
The uplands are typical water-bearing country. 


Text-fig. 8—Portion of the Blue Mountain 
level, B, of Tertiary basalt (3,100 feet, 


422 TOPOGRAPHY AND WATER SUPPLY OF COX’S RIVER, 


the approach of summer, and is generally at a minimum in March. The greatest 
sustained flow in the streams is observed between June and August owing to 
sustained rainfall and a low evaporation. 


Sources of the Stream Water.—With a large catchment area existing under 
the conditions outlined, it might be thought that the main stream and its principal 
tributaries would, normally, carry a large volume of water. This would be the 
case if the whole area contributed a regular supply, but actually most of it is 
quite unreliable. In the evaluation of the land surface as a catchment area it 
may be considered in sections according to the broad divisions of geology and 
topography. These, as already indicated, are four in number. 


a. The Sandstone Tableland (Text-fig. 3).—Ags Carne pointed out (1908), the 
Hawkesbury sandstones are essentially a non-waterbearing formation. He 
instances various borings undertaken in the Sydney Basin and the shafts of the 
Balmain Colliery (Sydney), the former being quite dry and the latter yielding — 
a little water, mainly through a fissure. An examination of the base of the 
Triassic sandstones—namely, the Narrabeen beds, which underlie the Hawkesbury 
Sandstone series—shows that the seepage from those rocks in the Cox River area 
is inconsiderable. Adits driven into the coal measures immediately below the 
Narrabeen beds in Megalong Valley (near Blackheath), Nelly’s Glen and Narrow 
Neck (Katoomba), and the old Gladstone colliery (near Leura), show very little 
seepage and in most cases are quite dry, even where loose talus slopes above 
could act as gathering grounds for water. When the strongly jointed character of 
the sandstones is remembered in addition, the absence of a considerable flow of 
water is all the more remarkable. 

The generally impervious character of the sandstones is the result of a 
combination of factors. In the first place, the tableland surface is carved prin- 
cipally out of the top beds of the Hawkesbury series which consist, as Carne 
notes, of a ferruginous quartz-pebble conglomerate underlain by a coarse grit, in 
which there are numerous bands and concretionary structures of iron oxide. These 
latter are almost impervious and, as they have been developed by lecal concen- 
tration after the original deposition or, in some cases at least, as the result of 
more recent weathering, their jointing does not necessarily correspond with that 
of the surrounding beds. Where such bands are exposed in the upland valleys, 
as between Lawson and Blackheath, they frequently mark the upper edges of 
swamps, and water issuing from above them carries iron oxide in solution, which 
is re-deposited in the swamp areas as a chromatic scum. 

As a general rule the sandstones are very compact and tightly cemented. 
They form good storage ground, as the water supply reservoirs at Lithgow 
(Cooerwull Brook), Blackheath and Katoomba (small tributaries of Grose River), 
Wentworth Falls and the coastal storage areas for the water supply of Sydney 
testify. : 

The run-off from such an impervious catchment immediately after rain is a 
considerable proportion of the rainfall received. During, and immediately after 
rainstorms, the streams are greatly swollen, but quickly resume their normal 
appearance upon the return of dry conditions, when the entire water supply is 
drawn from relatively small areas. 

Carne recognized upland swamps as forming “the gathering ground and 
starting point of the drainage’, a thesis which is essentially true. In these 
level, ancient valleys special facilities have been provided for the storage and 


” 


BY Ff. A. CRAFT. 423 


gradual release of water. Surface weathering by frost and the alternations of 
heat and cold, together with the deeper action of plants and moisture, gradually 
break up rocks on the gentle slopes, giving a thickness of soil up to five feet on 
the uplands by the Western Railway, although in the more dissected country on 
either side of this watershed much less soil is noticed. Some of this material 
is washed into the upland valleys where it accumulates, giving sandy beds which ° 
store up a considerable quantity of water and which may favour the growth of 
water-loving plants. 


On the higher hillsides rock degradation is a progressive factor, resulting in 
the cracking-up of rock masses and the development of joint and bedding planes 
into weathered bands. Weathering of the surface rock is accompanied by increas- 
ing porosity, which is shown well in many of the upland railway cuttings. The 
result of this weathering is to allow the freer penetration of rainwater, which 
percolates downward until it reaches an impervious stratum which is followed 
to the surface of the ground below the point of intake. 

The horizontal line or outlet so formed represents the upper level of the 
resultant moist surface or swamp. 

We have, therefore, to keep two actions in mind—the process of weathering 
and the storage of meteoric water for stream supply. When the former action 
is carried to completion on a surface subject to swift erosion of small ultimate 
magnitude, the result is seen in the formation of ‘‘monuments”. These are seen 
on the high ground around the more ancient valleys, and a line of them extends 
from the head of Cox’s River along the southern edge of the valley past Lithgow 
to Mt. Victoria, being found again on the cliffs above Megalong Creek, near 
Katoomba, and around the head of Grose Valley near Mt. Victoria. The monu- 
ments rise to thirty feet above their surroundings and are almost square in plan, 
tapering upwards. An edge of the base may be up to forty feet, and the 
prevailing strongly jointed grit is suitable for their formation. 


As regards water supply, the derivation of stream water is well illustrated 
at Wentworth Falls, about a half mile south-south-east of the main waterfall. 
Here the slopes of an ancient valley overlooking the modern gorge are wet and 
boggy. A shallow well, deriving water from the soil and humus on the surface, 
is always full. Nearby, and lower down the slope, a deeper well has been cut 
at least ten feet in the sandstone. The top has been carefully drained so that 
no surface water may enter, and no other water has done so, although there are 
swamps both above and below. 

Continuing south-east from this latter point, an extensive series of gentle 
swampy valleys is found draining westward to Jamieson’s Creek (to Cox’s River), 
whilst similar slopes drain eastward to the Nepean. In these cases good storage 
ground is provided by a spongy morass composed of sandy soil, humus and 
masses of water-loving plants, the swamps being fed in the first place by water 
percolating from the weathered sandstone above. The storage capacity of such 
an area is greatly increased by the accumulation of humus and plants. 

The effect of providing artificial drains is well shown above Katoomba Falls, 
where such drains have been successful in collecting the water seeping from soil 
above the ironstone bands and delivering it quickly into the stream, thus 
militating against a continued permanent flow. 

Streams which depend for their water supply upon swamps and shallow 
valleys incised in the plateau include Marangaroo Creek, Farmer’s Creek 


424 TOPOGRAPHY AND WATER SUPPLY OF COX’S RIVER, 


(Cooerwull Brook), Lett River, Megalong and Jamieson’s Creek and all the 
heads and main tributaries of Grose River. The head of Cox’s River is made of 
two branches—tributaries of Piper’s Flat Creek coming from broad, alluviated 
valleys to the north of Mt. Lambie, whilst Cox’s Creek rises in swamps above 
the coal-measure shales. In this latter case, the water is derived from the 
monument country and weathered slopes, but the swamps themselves are in 
mature valleys incised 300 feet in the plateau. On leaving the higher areas the 
streams plunge over cliffs into another series of valleys, or flow into juvenile 
gorges. In either case they receive but little water from their lower courses. 


b. The Older Valleys——One series, that extending around Wallerawang and 
Lithgow, and carved in a varying surface of shales, sandstones, conglomerates 
and metamorphic strata, has already been mentioned as the gathering ground 
of Cox’s River. Going downstream, the lower levels of Kanimbla and Megalong 
Valleys are met from 1,800 to 2,600 feet (average 2,200 feet). Their main extent 
is to the east of the river, and their surface consists of granite about the river 
with Permian (Upper Marine) sandstone on the eastern periphery. The talus 
slopes from the tableland scarps lie at angles varying from 14 to 20 degrees. On 
account of this slope and the coarsely fragmental nature of the screes, they are 
of little importance for the storage of water. 

The granites of the main valley weather into a gravelly soil which gives free 
passage to rainwater, whilst the underlying rock is almost impervious. The small 
streams originating on the floors of these valleys flow only after heavy rain, 
and dry up quickly. On the exposed surface of Upper Marine sandstone there 
are level areas of porous weathered material which, aided in some cases by 
neighbouring weathered granite, provide storage for the water supply of Black- 
heath, Galong and Breakfast Creeks. The latter drains several square miles of 
tea-tree flats about 2,000 feet above sea-level, and is by far the largest of the 
three. 

On the western side of Cox’s River in this area, the weathered granite is 
deeply cut into by mature valleys, which are occupied by small, swampy creeks, 
including Lowther Creek, Marsden’s Swamp, and Long Swamp. Compared with 
the area of their gathering grounds these streams are small. From the point 
of view of permanent water supply, the great areas of Megalong’ and Kanimbla 
Valleys cannot be compared with the restricted swamp and mature valley areas 
of the tablelands. 


In this latter respect the valley of the Kowmung is still more striking. A 
great trench, twenty miles long and eight miles wide, and sloping from 2,800 
feet in the south to 400 feet in the north, has been carved in the plateau. It 
continues still further north to form Jamieson’s Valley at a rising elevation. Its 
floor is occupied by Kowmung River, flowing in a deep gorge, and by Black 
Hollow Creek. The latter receives half of the drainage, but is almost invariably 
dry. Partly owing to this fact its depth of entrenchment is not great, but the 
northern section of the Kowmung, fed by streams from the higher tableland 
further west, has incised a trench up to 2,000 feet deep. To the east, the parallel 
valley of Green Wattle Creek exists in a similar state of aridity to Black 
Hollow Creek, gathering water from its own level floor. 

c. The Canyons.—The deep gorges which trench the older valleys and are 
attacking the higher (Jenolan) tableland are incised principally in granites, 
slates and quartzites. These newly-dissected rocks are naturally impervious, and 


BY F. A. CRAFT. 425 


water falling on the steep sides of the gorges, which slope from 25 to 45 degrees, 
runs off quickly, except in a few special instances. 

In the valley of Little River there are areas of dense forest, due to a richer 
soil from weathering slates and claystones and a sheltered easterly aspect. These 
have the effect of storing up water, thus minimizing floods and giving a good flow 
even in seasons of drought. This valley, with its luxuriant vegetation and level, 
fern-covered sidings near the stream, contrasts with the sterile slopes and rocky 
bottoms of the turbulent and variable Cox and Kowmung. Other forest areas 
are found along the head gullies of Jenolan and Kanangra Rivers, and on the 
eastern side of Gangerang Range overlooking the Kowmung River. The forests 
and brush of Gangerang are developed from 1,500 to 3,300 feet above sea-level on 
slates facing eastward. The section appears to receive a heavy rainfall as it 
faces eastward and presents a high, bold slope. The forests act the part of a 
sponge and feed Gingra Creek. The lower course of this Kowmung tributary is in 
a characteristically sterile gorge. 

Jamieson’s Valley and its southern extension to the Kowmung Valley beyond 
Cox’s River have areas of forest on eastern and southern slopes, between 1,300 and 
2,600 feet. These act as storage grounds but the westward slopes, subject to cold 
winter gales, are only sparsely forested. 


The canyon sides, then, contribute little to the normal water supply of the 
streams. This applies with equal force to the gorges dissecting ancient valleys: 
and those cutting back into the higher tableland. 


d. The High (Jenolan) Plateau.—Rising from 3,300 to 4,400 feet, the essen- 
tially level plain which forms this part of the tableland has a surface comprised 
of weathered metamorphics, granite and Tertiary basalt, with a few small outliers 
of Permian rocks. Considerable areas have not yet been subject to dissection, but 
preserve the mature features developed both prior and subsequent to the extrusion 
of Tertiary basalts. The water supply comes from three principal sources—forest 
lands, swamps and basaltic residuals, a special case of the second being provided 
by certain Tertiary wash. 


Considering these in order, we find that there are areas of forest along the 
high ridge which passes from Rydal, through Hampton, immediately to the west 
of Jenolan Caves and thence to Kanangra Walls, a distance of 35 miles. The 
forests grow on level, deeply-weathered country with an extent up to two miles 
on either side of this ridge. The soil, while generally of a clayey nature, is able 
to retain much moisture where it supports forests and has the associated humus. 
The heads of valleys in this area are marked by clear, boggy patches in the 
forest. This high ridge gives water to Fish River (Macquarie system), and to 
tributaries of the Cox and the Kowmung. The head stream of the latter— 
Hollander’s River—derives much water from this source, the forest lands sloping 
gently into the upper valleys of the stream. This also applies to the southern 
head of Tuglow River, ten miles south-west of Jenolan Caves. 

Of the purely swamp areas, three are most notable, at the heads of Boyd, 
Kanangra and Werong (or Ruby) Creeks. Of these, the first two are only a mile 
apart in places, but the third is on the Main Divide between the Kowmung and 
Abercrombie Rivers. ° 

Boyd Creek rises in granitic country about 3,600 feet above sea-level. The 
northern branch is in a level tea-tree swamp, whilst the more permanent southern 
head is in a morass two miles long, both occurring in broad, mature valleys incised 


426 TOPOGRAPHY AND WATER SUPPLY OF COX’S RIVER, 


300 feet in the tableland surface. Granite here is deeply weathered, and the 
valleys have been partly filled with hill wash which makes a fine storage ground. 
Swamp plants grow in profusion in the morass, giving a spongy surface. A 
similar effect is achieved by tea-tree in the other branch. The water table corres- 
ponds with the upper limit of unweathered granite and, where the surface deposits 
have been removed on the downstream side by recent erosion, this fresh surface 
is revealed. 

Further east, the heads of Kanangra Creek are found in swampy valleys 
beginning on the face of a steep eastward slope leading from 3,900 to 3,300 feet. 
The edge of the Upper Coal-Measures and Upper Marine Series is represented at, 
and below, the lower level by shore line agglomerates, conglomerate, grit and 
carbonaceous shale containing a coal seam. These strata rest on, and against, 
Devonian quartzites and slates, the surface having been weathered to produce the 
soil necessary for water storage. As with the head of Boyd Creek, tea-tree and 
other water-loving plants have taken possession of the moist areas, greatly 
increasing the natural water storage capacity. Such streams as Boyd and 
Kanangra Creeks have a constant, permanent flow, the swamps distributing their 
water gradually and uniformly. 

The third area quoted above, at the head of Ruby or Werong Creek, owes its 
origin to a slightly different circumstance. There are beds of Tertiary wash (Text- 
fig. 4) resting on. slate and intrusive quartz-felsite and quartz-porphyry. The 


DWE NEON 


S Gi ee 
& (a) a I MILE 
a 


hrterval -pooft, §$s ——— 

Fertiary Basalt SS 
do. Drift — 

YROZGES Wi See 


Murruin Ck. 
| ee 


CG 
Abercrombie R. 


Text-fig. 4.—Water-bearing upland country at Mt. Werong. The tableland is 
swampy or forested. The gorge of Ruby Creek is typical of the deep canyons, 
and its sides give no permanent contribution to the stream. 


BY F, A. CRAFT. 427 


sediments are overlain, in a small portion, by Tertiary basalt, which has hardened 
and crystallized some of the sands. Mature valleys up to 150 feet deep have been 
carved in the surface with their heads encroaching on the drift, which has been 
partly redistributed by streams radiating from the basalt knob of Mt. Werong. 
The presence of a thick layer of soil in the valleys and on the hillsides, together 
with water-bearing drift, has resulted in the formation of swamps, which give a 
permanent water supply to Ruby and Murruin Creeks, the latter draining eastward 
to the Wollondilly River. Apart from these areas the gentle, deeply-weathered 
and forested slopes on the west of the Main Divide provide water to the head 
of the Abercrombie River. 


The two basalt areas worthy of note are at Shooter’s Hill and at the 
head of Budthingeroo Creek, the latter being between Jenolan Caves and Kanangra 
Walls. Tuglow River heads in a broad, mature valley near Shooter’s Hill. The 
valley itself is at 3,800 feet, whilst the basalt mass of the hill, which is reported 
to overlie gem-bearing Tertiary wash, rises 300 feet higher. Underlying strata 
weather to give a stiff clay soil almost impervious to water. Thus Shooter’s Hill 
resembles the other basalt masses of the tableland in that the basalt, although 
itself impervious, is notably cracked and broken. Water can thus penetrate some 
distance below the surface—in many cases right to the base of the low—and, being 
gradually given up, it provides a permanent flow to nearby valleys. The gradual 
removal of soluble matter tends to form cavities in the basalt, giving increased 
facilities for water storage. 


In a similar area on Budthingeroo Creek at 3,950 feet, the basalt itself is 
crossed by gentle, swampy valleys some 300 feet below the surface of the table- 
land. Again water supply depends upon accumulation of soil in gentle valleys 
and the presence of much-cracked and broken rocks. 

The canyons which penetrate this high region have the normal characteristics 
of fresh rock-slopes, namely, generally sparse forest and a very quick run-off. They 
are marked by considerable roughness and depth, the deepest, that of Kanangra 
Creek, being incised 3,100 feet in the tableland. 


Upland Valleys—The occurrence of valleys such as those shown in Text- 
figures 3 and 4 is of considerable physiographic interest. In the former case a 
broad, swampy valley 200 feet deep has been incised in Hawkesbury sandstone 
below the southward continuation of the Mt. Hay basaltic level. In the latter 
case the mature valley of Ruby Creek has been eroded to a lesser depth in 
slate and intrusive porphyries, but again the time relation of the upland valleys 
to the Tertiary drift and basalt is clear. Upland valleys indicated in these two 
figures share one point in common with Lithgow and Kanimbla Valleys—all are 
of post-basaltic age. These shallow upland valleys represent a period of erosion— 
probably a continuation of the cycle begun before the outpouring of the basalts— 
definitely ante-dating the modern “canyon cycle’. It is not suggested that these 
basalts are all of similar age, but the broad agreement of physiographic resem- 
blances certainly calls for remark, and is typical of such areas in the Central 
Tableland. Hiv 

Conservation of Water Supply.—Cox’s River and its tributaries depend upon 
limited areas existing under special conditions for their normal water supply. 
In order to maintain the permanency of the streams it is necessary to protect 
their sources of supply—the swamp areas and the upland forests. The artificial 


draining of the swamps and the deforestation of the highlands will result in 
H 


428 TOPOGRAPHY AND WATER SUPPLY OF COX’S RIVER, 


the drying up of stream sources, in increased erosion and sterility of the table- 
lands, and in the further development of those features characteristic of streams 
in semi-arid regions namely, violent floods alternating with periods of little or no 
flow and the complete silting of their courses. These streams are bound to be of 
greater importance in the future for purposes of water supply and the generation 
of electric power for the mining of coal and metallic minerals, so their preserva- 
tion and the checking of erosion resulting from indiscriminate settlement and 
deforestation are of great importance. 


° References. 

CARNE, J. E., 1908.—Geology and Mineral Resources of the Western Coalfield. Mem. 
Geol. Survey N.S.W., Geology No. 6. 

CraFrt, F. A., 1928.—The Physiography of the Cox River Basin. Proc. LINN. Soc. 
INS 45 Uobb, eeee B, AOT, 


NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. XXV. 


By J. R. MALLocH. 
(Communicated by Dr. G. A. Waterhouse.) 


(Eighteen Text-figures. ) 
[Read 30th July, 1930.] 


The present paper contains, besides some additional data on four families 
that have been already dealt with to some extent in this series, a revision of the 
species of the calliphorid subfamily Metopiinae, and some notes on Empididdae. 

I have to a large extent recently neglected the smaller forms from Australia, 
of which I still have many submitted to me by the late Dr. E. W. Ferguson and 
others, but, in view of the greater amount of interest generally evinced in the 
Tachinidae and similar families, I have deferred working up the many species 
of such families as Chloropidae that are yet before me. 


Family ORTALIDAE. 
Subfamily PLATYSTOMINAE. t 
I am as yet not in possession of sufficient material to present a synoptic key 
to the genera of this subfamily; in fact I am not in possession of a sufficient 
number of the genera of the family to give a generic key for any other subfamily 
Obit: 


Genus PoGonorrTaLis Hendel. 
PoGONORTALIS pocLEA Walker. 

Some specimens named by Coquillett Rivellia doclea Walker, in the United 
States National Museum, are identical with barbifera Hendel and are evidently 
correctly named. The species will, therefore, be known as Pogonortalis doclea 
(Walker). It may be noted that Hendel uses the name barbata in his generic 
key for the genotype, but in the text he uses barbifera. The above synonymy 
prevents any question being raised as to which of Hendel’s names ought to be 
used. 


Genus Huprosopta Macquart. 
EUPROSOPIA CONJUNCTA Hendel. 

In connection with the separation of this species from separata Hendel in my 
key, it must be noted that the character of the scale-like hairs of the abdominal 
tergites applies to the males only, the females in both species having the apex 
of the first visible tergite only with scale-like yellow hairs. It would appear 
worth noting that, in addition to the character of the connected apical and 
preapical dark marks on the wing, the present species has the tegular process 
produced forward at least as far as the base of the posterior notopleural bristle, 
while separata has it produced only to the hind margin of the mesopleura. 

Three females, Kuranda, Qld., no other data (F. P, Dodd). 


430 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXV, 


EQUPROSOPIA MACROTEGULARIA Malloch. 
Hight specimens including both sexes, Mt. Molloy, Qld. (F. H. Taylor). 


EUPROSOPIA PUNCTIFACIES Malloch. 

One female, Kuranda, Qld. (F. P. Dodd). 

The tegulae are very short, extending to pleural suture as in separata. The 
species was described from the male only. 

A striking feature of this species is the presence of four vertical bristles, 
all the other Australian species known to me except miliaria Hendel having but 
two verticals. The fourth visible tergite in the female is similar to the third in 
colour and texture, and there is no indication of a pair of dorsal subapical 
spiracles on the dorsum, in contradistinction to biarmata Malloch, conjuncta 
Hendel, and separata Hendel, in which there is a white-fringed spiracle on each 
side close to apex of dorsum. In scatophdga Malloch this pair of spiracles is much 
closer together and clear of the hind margin of the tergite. : 


HIUPROSOPIA MACULIPENNIS Guérin. 

I included this species in my first key to the species of this genus on the 
basis of the record by Hendel and his figure of the wing. I have now before me 
two examples and desire to add some notes on the species. 

Hendel’s figure of the wing, although photographic, does not show the apical 
markings as distinctly as is the case in my material, both of the latter specimens 
having a distinct, though not conspicuous, fuscous fascia over the outer cross- 
vein which is to a greater or lesser extent broken by pale marks in its field, 
especially in the marginal cell where it is represented by three or four small 
spots. It will thus be necessary to qualify my statement in the key in which I 
state that there is no fascia beyond the middle of the wing, the series of dark 
markings being possible of acceptance as a fascia in the more fully marked 
examples. However, the other characters are correct and no doubt the key will 
serve its purpose until I get sufficient material to enable me to draw up a more 
reliable one based upon a knowledge of the variations in this and other species. 

Hendel was in error in stating that there are but six scutellar bristles, as in 
the male and female before me there are eight. The abdomen in the female has 
pale lanceolate hairs at apices of first and second visible tergites, the male has 
such hairs at apices of first to third and on disc of third and fourth tergites. 
The facial carina is granulose. Tegulae almost unproduced forward in either 
sex. 

Locality: Brisbane, Qld., 2.12.1913 (H. Hacker). Baker collection, United 
States National Museum. 


HUPROSOPIA TENUICORNIS Macquart. 

Although I included this species, which is the genotype, in my synoptic key 
to the species, I did not record it as amongst the available species. It has now 
come to hand from Mr. F. H. Taylor, but only the female is represented in the 
series of six examples. 

Structure of tegular process as in conjuncta, arista bare at base, scutellum 
without any indication of an apical central sulcus, evenly rounded and with six. 
bristles, lateral portions of apices of first to third visible tergites with pale 
yellow lanceolate hairs, least noticeable on third tergite. 

Locality, Sydney, N.S.W., February, 1928 (F. H. Taylor). 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 431 


No more definite record has been published for this species than Australia 
up to the present. Macquart’s record for Tasmania is undoubtedly an error. 


EUPROSOPIA BIARMATA Malloch. 


Fortunately a female of this species has been submitted by Mr. Taylor, so 
that at least one specimen will be available for comparison in some Australian 
museum. This example is identical in all respects with the type specimen which 
has to be returned to the Deutsches Entomologisches Museum. 


As indicated in my original description, the species will not run into either 
of the two divisions of my synoptic key, because of the very slight apical sulcus 
and dark brown glossy lateral areas of the scutellum. It finds its closest affinities 
in the separata group, as none of the other species now known to me has the 
scutellum glossy laterally at apex, all having very distinct and dense greyish 
dust on the entire surface. 


Locality: Tully, Qld., October, 1925 (KF. H. Taylor). 


EUPROSOPIA SCATOPHAGA, Nn. Sp. 


©. A smaller species than macrotegularia, but resembling it in the marking 
of the wings, except that they are more evenly reticulated at bases and the fascia 
over the other cross-vein is broader and more intersected on costa with pale marks 
so that it resembles a broad-limbed V. 


Head clay-yellow, frons fulvous yellow, with irregular dark dots and small 
marks centrally and in front and the upper lateral margins dark, the upper 
orbits overlain with pale dust; face with a dark mark from middle of each 
antennal fovea to mouth-margin, labrum with a dark mark on each side; palpi 
fuscous, yellow at bases and apices; antennae brownish testaceous. Thorax as in 
macrotegularia, dorsum with dark-brown vittae which are much interrupted, 
three dark marks at base of scutellum; pleura without dark dots. but shaded 
with dark-brown on parts. Abdomen with the tergites blackish-brown, sides of 
anterior half of first visible tergite and two rather indistinct central anterior 
marks on third pale-grey dusted. Legs fuscous, basal half or more of each tibia 
fulvous yellow, basal segment of each tarsus, except the extreme apex, white. 
Wings rather evenly marked with fuscous streaks and spots, the most conspicuous 
being a fascia over inner cross-vein which is darkest on costa and tapers off 
behind, and a V-shaped fascia over outer cross-vein which is not connected with 
the apical spot, the latter with a pale mark at centre, and numerous small dark 
marks between the fasciae and basad of the one over inner cross-vein. MHalteres 
yellowish-brown. Mesonotum with dark hairs except on posterior margin, 
scutellum pale haired except at base, pleural hairs partly pale and partly dark. 

Arista bare; third antennal segment extending to below middle of face; facial 
carina microscopically transversely striate. Scutellum with a slight apical central 
depression or sulcus and six bristles, not glossy on sides. Abdomen with scale- 
like yellow hairs on apex of first visible and sparsely over entire surface of 
second, third and fourth tergites. Legs normal. Tegular process short, extending 
to suture, lower process lacking or minute. 


Length, 7-8 mm., exclusive of ovipositor. 


Type and six paratypes, Hungella, via Mackay, Qld., altitude 2,300 feet, 
March 1, 1929, on horse dung (F. H. Taylor). 


432 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXV, 


This species is another one which does not fall into either of the two 
initial segregates in my key, having a distinct apical sulcus and no glossy 
lateral areas on the scutellum. 


Genus LAMPROGASTER Macquart. 
In a recent paper on Australian species of this genus I believe I mis- 
identified one of van der Wulp’s species and below offer a few notes to clear up 
the situation. 


LAMPROGASTER ELONGATA van der Wulp. 

I identified as this species two examples from Cairns, N. Queensland. These 
agree very closely with the description of elongata and, were it not for the 
fact that I am now in possession of a series of specimens which differ in a few 
essential features while agreeing in the main with the Australian specimens, I 
would still be of the opinion that the latter represented van der Wulp’s species. 
The new material is from ,Papua, the original locality of the species, and the 
weight of evidence appears to justify my decision that these, and not the Cairns 
examples, represent the true elongata. 

It is opportune that I present a few additional characters which modify my 
key in the paper just referred to. The changes are embodied in the following 
paragraphs. 


3. Mesonotum with a well developed pair of prescutellar acrostichals; humeral bristle 
present; general colour of thorax and abdomen rufous, with a conspicuous 
metallic-blue tinge, the mesonotal hairs and bristles black; scutellum slightly 
suleate in centre at apex; fourth wing-vein not conspicuously curved forward 
at outer cross-vein, practically straight on its apical section, the first posterior 
eell slightly and gradually narrowed from outer cross-vein to apex .......... 
Svat aswel eoeb hentai esate wallace BORO T ON CHG NE Ded CEN MEIGS Goad O' Gra'a eG She OOO ERICUIOL ALONG KOHLER, (TM, “STU, 

Mesonotum without a distinguishable pair of prescutellar acrostichal bristles, the 
other characters not as in above combination; fourth wing-vein always very 
noticeably bent forward at outer cross-vein, the first posterior cell much 
narrowed from there to short of middle of apical section of fourth vein, and 
OMB KOEKCE WIN? joe NUK SiGleYol IA OIOR WIMNEICO WO) BINESS caccoucocnaaboscectococadocece 4 

4. Humeral bristle well developed: general colour of thorax and abdomen deep 
metallic violet-blue; face testaceous, with a dark streak on each side from 
antennal fovea to mouth; mesonotum with the hairs and bristles dark; mid 
tibia with one or two strong black apical ventral spurs; ventral surface of 
scutellum much paler than dorsal, yellowish; second vein of wing not at all 
UNA UIA aD ICA Ly aes pls nal ech otis ANs MORSE RGU TE Mona anengeercise Ste xsanthoptera Hendel 

Humeral bristle lacking; face testaceous, without well defined dark lateral streaks; 
ventral surface of scutellum not paler than dorsal, scutellum either all blue- 


or yellowish ; second wing-vein distinctly undulated apically ................ 4a 
4a. Thorax and abdomen metallic violet-blue, dark haired; mid tibia with a strong 
INES -EhanGEN i AWerminceyl) Spowbhes 5 y dea late 6 Wield 6 a.m 6 8-6 ole 6 Brdloner oe eto elongata van der Wulp 


Thorax and abdomen testaceous yellow, with a more or less evident blue or violet 
suffusion, the hairs on both yellow; mid tibia with the apical ventral spur 
Yellow Or ‘MAle=OrO WM ai. waco e REE OO oie dal ec Sue Sees es zelotypa Hendel 
There are so few characters for the distinction of the above species outside 
of those included in the diagnosis that descriptions may be dispensed with. 
Locality: Papua (F. P. Dodd). Ten specimens, including both sexes. 


LAMPROGASTER PSEUDELONGATA, 0. SD. 
9. 'This species agrees very closely with the preceding one, differing in being 
less intensely violet blue, the thorax and abdomen showing a brownish ground 
colour through the metallic suffusion, while in elongata this is rarely evident 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 433 


except on the thorax. The structures mentioned in the synopsis, by means of 
which I am distinguishing the species, are not mentioned in Hendel’s paper. I 
figure the apical portions of the wings of the two species to demonstrate more 
clearly the differences in venation (Figs. 1 and 2). The apex of the scutellum 


Fig. 1.—Lamprogaster elongata. Apex of wing. 
Fig. 2.—Lamprogaster pseudelongata. Apex of wing. 


in the new species has a rather evident but shallow depression or sulcus in centre 
between the apical bristles, which is not distinguishable in elongata. 

Type and one paratype, Cairns, N. Qld., 1907 (Coll. Lichtwardt). Type in 
Deutsches Entomologisches Museum, Berlin-Dahlem, paratype deposited in 
Australian Museum by the author, on authority from Dr. Walther Horn. 

I have no additional data on the other species listed in the key above. 


LAMPROGASTER FUSCIBASIS, Nl. Sp. 


3, 2. General colour tawny or pale-brownish testaceous, with variable sub- 
cutaneous dark dots on face and thorax, which may not be normal, frons variably 
darkened centrally, thoracic dorsum with traces of four dark vittae which are 
not at all clearly defined, the scutellum sometimes darkened in part on disc, 
abdomen paler than thorax, without dark markings, sometimes with a bluish 
or violaceous lustre that is not very distinct. Legs pale. Wings yellowish, with a 
brownish or fuscous cloud at bases, which extends over costal half or more and 
to the apices of the basal cells, and is most distinct over the veins closing the 
latter, the costa yellowish, most intensely so,in the stigmal region, inner cross- 
vein quite distinctly clouded with brown. Calyptrae yellowish-brown, margin of 
upper one darker; halteres yellowish-brown. 

Head of the same type as that of viola Malloch, adhering rather closely to 
the anterior margin of thorax, and without a deep concavity on upper occiput; 
frons half of the head-width, with the usual four vertical bristles; arista short- 
haired on basal half; genal bristle pale and short. Thorax with bristling as in 
pseudelongata, but the scutellum is without fine hairs and has usually ten 
marginal bristles. Abdomen broadly ovate, the first visible tergite adhering 
quite closely to metanotum and with a deep rounded excavation in front, which 
is defined by a sharp edge. Legs normal, the mid tibia with two or three black 
apical ventral spurs. Wing-venation similar to that of pseuwdelongata, except that 
the second vein is almost straight. 

Length, 13 mm. 


434 NOLES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXV, 


Locality: Kuranda, Qld., no other data (F. P. Dodd). Type, mate, allotype, 
female. 

This is the most robust species of the genus known to me and, unless it has 
lost some of its usual colour, the dullest-coloured one. .-In Hendel’s key to the 
species of the genus it runs fairly well to basalis Walker, but an examination of 
the description of that species shows clearly that it is distinct from it both in 
colour, and in the bare scutellum and iess densely haired thorax and abdomen. In 
my key it will run to Caption 9, but it does not fit in either of the segregates 
there defined. 


Family SAPROMYZIDAE. 
Genus SAPROMYZA Fallen. 
SAPROMYZA LICHTWARDTI, nN. Sp. 

°. Head clay-yellow, frons dark-brown, opaque, shining and yellow on a 
narrow line on each side and the orbital stripes; upper half of occiput dull- 
brown; face without dark marks; antennae and aristae black; palpi yellow. 
Thorax clay-yellow, mesonotum, scutellum, and metanotum fuscous brown, the 
first-mentioned with slight pale-grey dusting. -Abdomen yellowish-brown, the 
tergites possibly. variable in depth of colour. Legs yellow, fore pair black from 
basad of middle of femora to apices of tarsi, mid and hind pairs with apices of 
femora and tibiae deep-black, bases of tibiae and apical two or three segments of 
tarsi darkened. Wings hyaline. Halteres yellow. 

Frons nearly one and a half times as long as wide; ocellars short and fine; 
longest hairs on arista about twice as long as its basal width; general structure 
as in alboatra Malloch. Thorax as in that species; intradorsocentral hairs in 
about eight series; anterior sternopleural undeveloped; prosternum with a few 
hairs. Mid tibia with one long apical ventral bristle; hind femur without apical 
anteroventral bristles; fore femur without an anteroventral comb. Inner cross- 
vein close to middle of discal cell; ultimate section of fourth vein but little 
longer than penultimate section. 

Length, 7-5 mm. 

Type, Herberton, N. Qld., 3,700 feet, January, 1911 (Dodd). 

Type in Deutsches Entomologisches Museum, Berlin-Dahlem, Germany. 

This. species will run down to Caption 23 in my recently published key to the 
species of this genus, but will require a new segregate, because the frons is 
neither entirely black, nor entirely yellow, being brown with pale orbital stripes. 
The black palpi distinguish the species from alboatra Malloch and brevicornis 
‘Malloch, the two species in the section with black frons. In the published key, 
mariae is used at the second segregate of Caption 24 instead of brevicornis 
Malloch, an error which I am unable to account for, as the species are not at all 
similar and mariae occurs subsequently in the key at its proper place. 


Family CLUSIOIDIDAE. 
The family Clusioididae is the same as Heteroneuridae and Clusiidae of 
authors. Only one species is as yet recorded from Australia, to which I now add 
a second one. 


Genus HETEROMERINGIA Czerny. 
The new species may be distinguished from the one already described by 
means of the following characters: 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 435 


A. Wing with a faint fuscous cloud which extends from costa to a little beyond fourth 
vein on slightly less than the apical half; halteres black ...... imitans, nN. sp. 

AA. Wing with three quite conspicuous blackish fasciae, the basal one narrow and 
extending entirely across wing, the second one broader and enclosing the two 
cross-veins, connecting with a broader apical fascia along costa, and less 
distinctly so with it along hind margin of wing; halteres with yellow knobs .... 

BE Ba REET ORONO IOS GO) CRORE HERD Oro Ra che REE ORSAT t.G Cees CeO ERA rc itt GeO australiae Malloch 


HETEROMERINGIA IMITANS, Nn. Sp. 

9. Almost identical with australiae in colour and markings, the principal 
distinctions lying in the features listed in the above synopsis, and in its 
having black palpi, and the fore femur with a smaller dark apical spot. 
Structurally the two species are very similar, both of them having the ocellars 
very small, a character which distinguishes them from nigrimana Loew of 
EKurope, to which imitans is very similar in other respects. The yellow coxae 
and femora, and faintly marked wings should readily distinguish the species from 
the European form. 

Length, 3-5 mm. 

Type, Cairns, N. Qld., 1907 (Coll. Lichtwardt, Deutsches Entomologisches 
Museum). 

The type specimen is the only one available and it must be returned to the 
museum to which it belongs. I consider, however, that there will be no trouble 
experienced in distinguishing it when it is again collected. As already pointed 
out, the species may frequently be found upon fallen tree-trunks in shade and, 
wherever the insects are present, patient and careful collecting will disclose that 
they are not as rare as their infrequent occurrence in collections would appear 
to denote. 


Family NEOTTIPHILIDAE. 
Genus TAPEIGASTER Macquart. 

I have recently received from Dr. Walther Horn, examples of two species of 
this genus, previously unknown to me, and below I present a key for the identifica- 
tion of the species. It should be noted that the upper mouth margin (epistome) 
in marginifrons is quite prominently produced, contrary to Bezzi’s statement in 
his key, and that this species is more closely related to argyrospila than to the 
other species. . 


Key to the Species. 
1. Hind femora not noticeably stouter than mid pair; epistome transverse, or almost 


so, but little produced beyond vibrissal angle ................2.000.-0000: 2 
Hind femora distinctly stouter than mid pair; epistome produced centrally well 
beyvondelevelvots vibnissalame le ji er asiyy saswegete srekedencess usite: @letabe eae Went wsmab ete ee Weliea se 4 


bo 


Mid and hind femora slender, about equally thick, fore pair quite noticeably stouter 
than either pair, fore and mid pairs with two series of rather short black 
spines on less than the apical half, one on the anteroventral and the other 
on the posteroventral surface; femora with black mark at apices, none on 
central portion; tibiae without long hairs; hypopygium of male without any 


GOT SAMGDWEOCESS+ zpos ches shar oiel hve) Sap ened ayone ee ethasiel slalioy “ence SE veraglen oitaite ious EONS eae fulva Malloch 
Mid femora distinctly stouter than hind pair, all pairs with a median dark mark 
or ring; second hypopygial segment of male with a pair of processes ...... 3 


Lt) 


Tibiae of at least the mid and hind legs with dark basal annulus; processes of 
second hypopygial segment prominent, pointed, and slightly curved .......... 
NAS SME Re aewl este cs Chen eeure ile okeoueee a del Surehea) aera ley oppeilemel beavrety atenns ag yaaa gsubaareNe teeke te annulipes Macquart 
Tibiae all lacking a dark basal annulus; processes of second hypopygial segment 
SHoreaAn a MbT un taae eS ET Ab sce) cash ctenrs oe se een ges ett orate ene aes luteipennis Bezzi 
I Faldo 


436 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXV, 


4. Antennae black or fuscous; rather slender species, testaceous brown: in colour, with 
a broad central grey-dusted vitta on the mesonotum, which may be more 
or less divided by longitudinal dark lines; abdomen grey-dusted, each tergite 
with a more or less evident brownish spot on each side of anterior half ...... 
5, STS RAMEE oRe ST A ERE Rac ARD UY A ie RED PALA 2 gO SEY Oe PASS UE marginvifrons Bezzi 

Antennae fulvous yellow, but slightly darkened; species fulvous yellow in colour, 
mesonotum greyish-dusted; abdomen shining fulvous yellow, with a _ black 
dorsal mark over apical half of second, all of third and fourth visible tergites 
Sia sean: Aaa Rate spel Bact elgemge ego aco HO BS GOED Oo OID OO te Ack DAL OcOnS Hina CUR KHOmy a tian’ IBxXerAa 


TAPEIGASTER ANNULIPES Macquart. 


One male, Katoomba, Blue Mts., N.S.W., 3,400 feet, 1912 (Dodd). Lichtwardt 
collection. 


TAPEIGASTER MARGINIFRONS Bezzi. 


This is apparently the commonest species of the genus, judging from the 
number of specimens that I have examined. 

Sunbury, Vict., and specimens with same locality and date as the preceding 
species. Lichtwardt collection. Thirteen specimens. 


TAPEIGASTER ARGYROSPILA Bezzi. 


This species is considerably stouter than any of the others and more brightly 
coloured, the dark dorsal mark on the abdomen standing out quite conspicuously. 
It may be noted that the epistome is not always bituberculate, as one of the 
specimens before me now has the tubercles almost undeveloped. 

Male and female, Sunbury, Vict., Lichtwardt collection. 

Bezzi had only the male before him when he described the species, and 
this is the only subsequent record of the species. 


TAPEIGASTER FULVA Malloch. 
I have seen only the original material of this species. 


TAPEIGASTER LUTEIPENNIS Bezzi. 
This species is yet unknown to me. 


Family CALLIPHORIDAE. 
Subfamily METOPIINAE. 

The family Calliphoridae, which I have dealt with to some extent in a 
previous paper in this series, is distinguished from Tachinidae by the lack of a 
prominently rounded postscutellum, and the exposed second abdominal sternite, 
the latter overlying the lateral edges of the second tergite. 

The Metopiinae are readily distinguished from most Calliphoridae by the 
bare or microscopically. pubescent arista, in which respect they agree with most 
Tachinidae, but there are many genera of Calliphoridae outside of this subfamily, 
which have the arista bare or almost so, and it is difficult to distinguish metopiine 
species from such genera. Up to the present, I have seen no genus from Australia 
that could be the cause of doubt as to its position either in Calliphorinae, Sarco- 
phaginae, or the present subfamily, though it is quite possible that such may 
exist. The situation, therefore, is not as difficult here as in America where a 
number of rather doubtful forms occur, and for present purposes one may accept 
as belonging to Metopiinae all species having hypopleural bristles, that lack a 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 437 


well developed postscutellum, have the second abdominal sternite overlying the 
edges of its tergite, the arista bare or almost so, the stem-vein of the wing bare 
on its basal section above, the lower calypter bare. the occiput dusted on each 
side of upper half, and the notopleural bristles usually two in number. It is 
worth mention that the prosternum and postalar declivity in all Australian 
species known to me are bare, the palpi are always present, the first posterior 
cell of the wing is always open and ends at some distance before apex of wing, 
the abdomen has always bristles on dorsum, sometimes reduced to those at apex 
of third visible tergite, and the lower calypter is widened behind, and more or 
less bulged up basally. 

So far as we know at present, the females are viviparous, and the larvae 
live in the nests of Hymenoptera-Aculeata, generally in those of fossorial forms, 
the habits of the flies in pursuing their prey-laden hosts being the basis for many 
interesting notes in various entomological journals. 

In attempting to make use of the generic key given below, it must be 
distinctly understood that it is applicable to only the Australian material avail- 
able to me at this time. In North America there are some species referred to 
one or more of the included genera, which would not run out at the proper 
position in the key, but these are exceptional and need not interfere with the 
use of the key for the purpose of identifying native species. It may be pertinent 
to note that the region I refer to as the “notopleural triangle” is the slightly 
depressed and more or less triangular region at each side of the transverse suture, 
the lateral margin of which supports the notopleural bristles. The presence of 
numerous hairs on this region in the Australian species of the genus Protomilto- 
gramma Townsend has caused me to retain this as a valid genus, though it is 
very closely similar to Senotainia Macquart, and may yet be united with it. 


Key to the Genera. 


Mn eropleunay Wainedml Mme CentTren tipcenicnceoovecsiiueds ep suacs, o\oree yer oi earch see aie Sunwear can Dare setpel nauseous er 2 
IPTrOpDlEUTAy HAGE IURCETELE wiat. f eee kee terete ee chara ca: o,f nt ay nba e, ose atcha Gee cet eae te eae. ite 3 
One or both of the notopleural bristles duplicated, the adjacent hairs long and 
strong; fore tibia with two subequal preapical dorsal bristles; frontal orbits 
with two or more series of lateral hairs, and no strong proclinate outer 

IO TISGICSIe pew mace Naish nseiiayerohensiieest ann comer secs pope nana eivacenesbioneaey ancy ease Austrometopia, n. gen. 
Neither of the notopleural bristles duplicated, the triangle otherwise bare; fore 
tibia with one outstanding preapical dorsal bristle; frontal orbits almost bare 
outside of the inner marginal bristles, except for two or three strong proclinate 
TRIS CSS Papert esc nel eth see neta teeta tneer- ay Mes. trate erences eee gotten Chaetometopia, n. gen. 

3. Parafacials each with a single series of quite long bristles near anterior margin 
extending to below middle of face; facial ridges with a few bristles above 
vibrissae of about the same length as those on the parafacials and extending 
upward almost, or quite, to the lowermost of the latter; first and third wing- 

WOINS: WAU? SAHUOHE ANOS sadncoabcaccooueuuebocueobdd Opsidiopsis Townsend 
Parafacials bare, or with microscopic hairs, if rather strongly setulose their entire 
width above is armed and not only the anterior margin; first wing-vein bare, 
thinduisetulosemalts.oasel 2.8r8 bre gece wee Rete neo y Gch dese 6 Ph nae tee Ae eet ahaa 4 

4. No outstanding bristle at vibrissal angle, the series quite regular ................ 
OMoo.0bicws Daas pO TORR LEGA Ue OHEre (eat oacu nee ate le neo IB RRR erales cae eg oat Miltogramma Meigen 

One of the bristles at vibrissal angle much longer than the others in the series 
GNPLACTAIMGIM SES eer te ete cst te a ect Se cel Shue R cheap EE teed ete eae Re Ree 5 

5. Parafacials with. strong black bristly hairs which are distinctly lengthened near 
anterior margin, especially below, the longest fully as long as width of para- 

facial at level of its base; postsutural dorsocentral bristles in three pairs and 

quite long; first posterior cell of wing much narrowed at apex, sometimes 
PRACICALY: TCLOSCAUH Aha seek ey he hen sc Meebo cults haais stearate Aenigmetopia, n. gen. 


bo 


438 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXV, 


Parafacials with very inconspicuous hairs, or bare; postsutural dorsocentral bristles 
in four pairs, the two or three anterior pairs short and weak, almost, or quite, 
indistinguishable from the adjacent hairs; first posterior cell of wing always 
Quite VAIStinctly7 OMEN! erasers Mee eee eM lee Tete ene Te ee Tra PS cadaete el Ea See ee 6 

6. Frontal orbits with one or two series of strong black hairs laterad of the inner 
marginal series of bristles; vibrissae separated from each other by a much 
greater distance than either is from eye-margin, and situated at less than the 
length of second antennal segment from mouth-margin .....................; 
Be reas PANE CN Eee CRS TOS AERS THOR a Oath ote eae Pachyophthalmus Brauer & Bergenstamm 

Frontal orbits without series of noticeable hairs laterad of the inner marginal 
bristles, usually with two or more strong proclinate outer bristles on upper 
half; vibrissae separated from each other by a distance equal to, or shorter 
MAT, WAKE OI QOMP WHO EME occoadccgacacasadcound Protomiltogramma Townsend 


Genus AUSTROMETOPIA, n. gen. 


This genus is very similar in most respects to Pachyophthalmus, but is 
readily distinguished from it and all other genera of the subfamily known to me 
except one, by the haired central anterior portion of the propleura. The strongly 
haired notopleural triangle is characteristic of these two genera, though most of 
the Australian species of the subfamily have hairs present there and, like 
Pachyophthalmus, it has one or two series of quite well developed black hairs on 
each frontal orbit laterad of the inner marginal bristles. For other characters see 
description of the genotype. 

Genotype, the following species. 


AUSTROMETOPIA BURNSI, N. SD. 


do. Head black, occiput grey-dusted, postocular orbits, cheeks, face, and 
frontal orbits yellow-dusted, sometimes almost golden; antennae, aristae, palpi, 
and cephalic hairs black. Thorax and abdomen black, with grey dusting, the 
former with three broad shining black vittae which are traceable over the 
scutellum, abdomen with three shining black subtriangular marks on each 
tergite, less distinct on the first and fourth. Legs black. Wings greyish hyaline. 
Calyptrae yellowish-white. Halteres brown. 

Eyes subnude, with the facets of the central anterior portion enlarged; frons 
at vertex about half as wide as either eye, interfrontalia complete, about as wide 
as either orbit above, narrowed below, each orbit with a series of incurved inner 
marginal bristles, laterad of these two or more series of rather strong black 
hairs, one strong recurved bristle near upper extremity, and the hairs continued 
slightly below bases of antennae; parafacials generally bare; outer pair of 
vertical bristles much shorter than inner pair; ocellars and postverticals prac- 
tically undeveloped; profile as Figure 3; aristae subnude; vibrissae situated 
slightly above epistome, separated by a distance about one and a half times as 
great as that of either from eye; palpi normal. Thorax with only the posterior 
presutural and two posterior pairs of postsutural dorsocentrals well developed; 
prealar of moderate length; sternopleurals variable, sometimes one or two below 
both the anterior and posterior bristles; sides of scutellum quite densely haired 
on basal half or more. Abdomen subcylindrical, slightly tapered to apex, first 
to fourth visible tergites each with quite strong apical central bristles. Tarsal 
claws and pulvilli moderately large, no exceptional tarsal armature on any of 
the legs; fore tibiae without noticeable ventral setulae, with two posterior bristles, 
and the anterodorsal setulae fine; mid tibia with one anterodorsal, one ventral, 
and two posterior bristles; hind tibia with rather irregular anterodorsal and 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 439 


posterodorsal bristles, and one anteroventral bristle. Inner cross-vein of wing 
distinctly proximad of apex of first vein; first posterior cell open, ending in 
costa before tip of wing. 

Length, 6-5-7 mm. 

Type, and three paratypes, Meringa, N. Qld., 28.6.1926, ‘““‘Parasitic on Eumenid’”’ 
(A. N. Burns). Named in honour of the collector. 


Genus PACHYOPHTHALMUS Brauer & Bergenstamm. 

This genus is found in North America and Europe, the species living, in the 
larval stages, in the nests of various genera of solitary wasps. In my present 
material there is but one example of the genus, a female in rather poor condition 
which I am unwilling to identify specifically. It does, however, closely resemble 
signatus Meigen, the genotype, which occurs in Europe and North America. 
Pending receipt of more and better preserved examples of both sexes, I leave 
the matter of specific identity unsettled, though it’ appears possible the species 
is signatus. 

Locality: Gordonvale, N. Qld., ex. mud wasp. 


Genus Opsipiopsis Townsend. 

I am placing in this genus one Australian species which does not agree in 
all particulars with the genotype, oblata Townsend, a North American species. 
There is, however}; a very close resemblance between the species and the 
characters in which they do not agree are not in every case considered as of 
generic import. 

The peculiar armature of the parafacials is similar to that of Metopia 
Meigen, a genus not so far known to me from Australia, but one which may be 
expected to occur. The principal distinguishing character, by means of which 
it may be separated, is the setulose upper surface of the first. wing-vein, Metopia 
having this vein bare. In the genotype of Opsidiopsis the first vein is setulose on 
the basal half above, while in the Australian species it is setulose on the &pical 
half, and while in the latter the parafacials are practically bare except for the 
anterior marginal bristles, in oblata there are fine short hairs on almost their 
entire extent. In other respects the two agree very well. 

Nothing is known of the larval habits of the genotype, and the new species 
has no indication on the label other than the locality and date. 


OPSIDIOPSIS NUDIBASIS, Nn. sp. 

©. Black, thorax and abdomen slightly shining. Interfrontalia black, vertex 
grey-dusted behind the ocelli; frontal orbits, face including the parafacials, cheeks, 
and postocular orbits densely silvery-white-dusted. occiput grey-dusted; antennae 
and aristae black, palpi fuscous. Thorax with grey dust, the mesonotum with 
four narrow incomplete black vittae, the submedian pair present only in front 
of suture, the sublateral pair interrupted at suture; sides of scutellum darker 
than disc. Second to fourth visible tergites of abdomen each with a rather broad 
fascia of grey dust near base, which is interrupted centrally. Legs black. Wings 
greyish hyaline. Calyptrae yellowish-white. Halteres brown. 

Eyes bare, facets very slightly enlarged centrally in front; frons at vertex 
about one and a half times as wide as either eye, interfrontalia in front of ocelli 
twice as wide as either orbit, slightly narrowed anteriorly. All four verticals 
long, postverticals short; vertex rather sharp, ocelli as far from vertex as they 


440 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXV, 


are from each other, ocellar bristles long, proclinate, and divergent; each orbit 
with about eight inner marginal bristles, all but the upper one incurved, the upper 
reclinate, and laterad of these on the upper half two sets of two bristles, the 
inner pair recurved, the outer pair proclinate and slightly lower placed, a few 
fine black hairs laterad of the bristles, the lowermost descending to level of 
apex of second antennal segment; profile as Figure 4; frontal lunule distinctly 
haired; face not widened below; vibrissae close to epistome, separated by about 
three times as great a distance as either is from eye. Thorax with two plus three 
pairs of strong dorsocentrals, notopleural triangle without fine hairs; apical 
scutellar bristles shorter than the two pairs of laterals and cruciate, sternopleurals 
one plus one. Abdomen tapered to apex, second and third visible tergites with a 
pair of strong apical central bristles, fourth with a series of such bristles. Fore 
tarsi slender; fore tibia with one posterior submedian bristle and a series of 
minute anterodorsal setulae; mid tibia with one anterodorsal bristle, about four 
short posterior bristles, and no ventral bristle; hind tibia with about four antero- 
ventral, posterodorsal, and anterodorsal bristles, one of ‘the latter much longer 
than the others. Inner cross-vein proximad of apex of first vein; outer cross- 
vein at about one and a half times its own length from the bend of fourth vein, 
the latter angular, apical section of the vein arcuate, first posterior cell ending 
well before apex of wing, rather narrowly open, apical section of fifth vein about 
half as long as preapical section; first wing-vein setulose on about its apical third, 
third vein setulose above from its base to well beyond inner cross-vein and with 
about three short setulae at base below. 

Length, 6 mm. 

Type, Hidsvold, January 23, no other data. Submitted by Dr. I. M. Mackerras, 
and to be returned to him. 

Unless my placing of this species is erroneous, the male ought to correspond 
closely with the female in cephalic characters and the above description should 
suffice for its recognition. In all probability the species occurs on sand and flies 
low over it, resembling certain Hymenoptera-Aculeata that occur with it. 

It would appear to be worth noting, in connection with my doubt as to the 
generic position of the above species, that the arrangement of the fronto-orbital 
bristles in it is similar to that in Metopia and quite different from that found in 
the genotype of Opsidiopsis. In the latter, there are many short hairs on the 
orbits, amongst which there are two proclinate outer bristles on the upper half 
and one reclinate bristle which appears to belong to the inner series, but there 
are no intermediate reclinate bristles such as occur in nudibasis. 


Genus MILTOGRAMMA Meigen. 

This genus occurs in Europe but is lacking in North America and, while the 
character upon which it is separated from its allies in the key may appear at 
first sight a rather trivial one, it is usually sufficiently well marked to distinguish 
the species readily, the vibrissae in all the other genera always standing out 
as well differentiated bristles in the series which runs from the lower margin of 
cheek to a greater or lesser distance above the vibrissal angle, the latter being 
in all cases quite well defined. In all the Australian species the ocellar bristles 
are very weak, almost erect, and divergent, and the frontal orbits have outer 
proclinate bristles which are not as strong as in most of the other genera. 

The Australian species now before me may be distinguished as in the 
following key. Unfortunately the species are poorly represented, and males are 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 441 


almost lacking, so that good characters for their distinction are difficult to 
assemble. 


a 9 Nasar 


“22 


Fig. 3—Austrometopia burnsi. Head from the side. 

Fig. 4.—Opsidiopsis nudibasis. Head from the side. 

Fig. 5—Miltogramma rex. Head from the side. 

Fig. 6.—Miltogramma rex. Face. 

Fig. 7.—WMiltogramma rectangularis. Head from the side. 
Fig. 8—Miltogramma rectangularis. Face. 

Fig. 9.—WMiltogramma rectangularis. Apex of wing. 

Fig. 10.—Miltogramma normalis. Head from the side. 
Fig. 11.—Miltogramma normalis. Face. 

Fig. 12.—Miltogramma normalis. Apex of wing. 


Key to the Species. 


1. Thoracic dorsum with five distinct black presutural vittae ...........\.......... 2 
Thoracic dorsum with but four distinct black presutural vittae, the central one 
eve kein eey: Peete hog Se PPE EPS AEC SA PARRY 22 SRR OME ED, LUD Se SENN 3 
LEVADTISSAlapristles ming mone nthannonerSerles ities el el cee cel eee eaciebe eke rex, n. sp. 
WAbDTLISSalebristlesmingamsinelegsericsuerin erates ciclo nica neice regina, n. sp. 


3. Fourth vein very conspicuously bent beyond the preapical angle, the latter a 
distinct right angle; inner cross-vein slightly but distinctly proximad of middle 
OREGISCA Cell her ES cad Beye oa eee ees OS EE ee rectangularis, n. sp. 

Fourth vein not very conspicuously bent beyond the preapical angle, the latter not 
a right angle; inner cross-vein slightly but distinctly beyond middle of discal 
(XSI Ui ie Tha etl taes tod oes 0 Scko Loh SIG casa ner OL EL ScFIAGUr RRS MMI AUR eben st bs § normalis, n. sp. 


442 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXV, 


MILTOGRAMMA REX, N. Sp. 


6. Head testaceous yellow, interfrontalia brownish-red, frontal orbits, face 
including the parafacials, and cheeks yellow-dusted; occiput fuscous, yellowish- 
grey-dusted; antennae orange-yellow, third segment slightly darkened above; 
aristae black; palpi orange-yellow; frontal hairs and bristles black, those on 
lateral margins of frontal orbits anteriorly, on parafacials and cheeks yellow, 
occipital hairs black. Thorax black, slightly shining and with rather dense grey 
dust, the mesonotum with five black vittae anteriorly, the submedian pair dis- 
continued slightly behind suture, the others complete, the sublateral pair evident 
on sides of the scutellum, but the central one not evident there, the scutellum 
slightly yellowish apically. Abdomen testaceous yellow, darkened above, with a 
quite uniform and rather broad dorsocentral vitta and apices to tergites 2 to 4 
brownish-black and slightly shining, first tergite entirely dark, the paler portions 
of the tergites yellowish-grey-dusted and dull, fifth tergite with the dark markings 
smaller than on the other tergites. Legs black, femora grey-dusted. Wings 
greyish hyaline. Calyptrae yellowish-white. Halteres dark-brown. 


Frons at vertex about one-fifth of the head-width, interfrontalia of uniform 
width throughout its length, at middle more than one and a half times as wide as 
either orbit, all four vertical bristles well developed, ocellar and postvertical 
bristles very small, each orbit with a rather closely placed series of hair-like 
inner marginal bristles, incurved below, almost erect on posterior third, one 
recurved stronger bristle at the upper extremity of series, and three to five 
proclinate outer bristles, the outer portions of orbits with fine hairs which are 
continued to lower level of eyes on the parafacials; frontal lunule bare; profile 
as Figure 5; armature of face as in Figure 6; anterior central facets of eyes 
slightly enlarged. Thorax with only the posterior pair of the presutural and 
postsutural dorsocentral bristles well distinguished from the surrounding hairs; 
notopleural triangle quite copiously furnished with long erect hairs; sterno- 
pleurals one or two plus three or feur; scutellum with about ten marginal bristles 
of rather unequal lengths. Abdomen subcylindrical, tapered apically, sixth tergite 
with only fine apical hairs, no bristles. Fore tarsi without exceptional armature; 
fore tibia with about six or seven ventral setulae at middle forming the usual 
comb; mid tibia with one long ventral, one or two short posterior, and three or 
four longer anterodorsal bristles; hind: tibia with a quite regular series of 
rather closely placed fine bristles on anterodorsal and posterodorsal surfaces, and 
two to four anteroventral bristles. Inner cross-vein of wing close to middle of 
discal cell, apical section of fourth vein distinctly arcuate. 

Length, 10 mm. 

Type, King George’s Sound, W.A.; no other data (Australian Museum). 


MILTOGRAMMA REGINA, 0. SD. 

©. A darker species than the preceding one, without trace of yellow on the 
scutellum, and dorsal exposure of abdomen. In other respects very similarly 
coloured and marked. 

Structurally distinguished by the uniseriate vibrissal series of bristles. The 
frons is also narrower, but this is a character of the female of most of the 
species in this subfamily. The apical section of fourth vein is also more 
pronouncedly bent than in rez. 

Length, 8-5 mm. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 443 


Type, Eidsvold, Qld. (Bancroft). 
It is possible, but hardly probable, that this is the female of rez. 


MILTOGRAMMA RECTANGULARIS, Dl. SD. 

9. Very similar in colour to the preceding species, but the dusting is more 
yellowish or brownish, the mesonotum lacks the central black vitta before the 
suture, the others are not so sharply defined, and the markings of the abdomen 
are more diffuse, the apical black fascia being rounded in front on each side 
and rather changeable when viewed from different angles. Knob of halteres 
yellowish. 

Frons at vertex fully one-fourth of the head-width; interfrontalia at middle 
about one and a half times as wide as either orbit, the inner marginal bristles 
stronger than usual in the genus; profile as Figure 7; vibrissal series of bristles 
much stronger than in the next.species (Figure 8). Thorax as in the preceding 
species, scutellum not at all yellowish at apex and with eight marginal bristles, 
including the basal one which is situated above the margin. Abdomen tapered 
apically, the apical bristles on tergites three and four short. Fore tarsus very 
slightly widened, mid tibia with one long and one short ventral bristle, the 
legs otherwise as in regina. Venation of wings as stated in the specific key, 
apical section as Figure 9. 

Length, 7-5 mm. 

Type, Sydney, N.S.W., 4.2.1924 (Health Dept). 


MILTOGRAMMA NORMALIS, 0. Sp. @ 

©. Similar to the preceding species, but the dark thoracic vittae are rather 
bronzy, and the abdominal markings are more extensive. 

Structurally distinguished by the characters listed in the key and the weaker 
series of bristles on the vibrissal region (Figures 10-12). 

Length, 7-5 mm. 

Type and one paratype, Kalgoorlie, Southern Cross, W.A., 13.11.1924 
(Nicholson). 


Genus CHAETOMETOPIA, n. gen. 

This genus is very similar in general characters to Senotainia Macquart, and 
Protomiltogramma Townsend, but it differs from both of these in having some 
strong black hairs in centre of the propleura, a character which is possessed by 
only one other genus of the subfamily known to me and described in the present 
paper. This character alone will readily distinguish the genus from its allies, 
though it is not improbable that others as yet unknown to me may possess a 
similar character. 

Genotype, the following species. 


CHAETOMETOPIA CINEREA, Nl. SD. 

6. Head testaceous, occiput fuscous, entirely whitish-grey-dusted, the inter- 
frontalia fuscous, and when viewed from behind without white dusting; antennae 
black, base of third segment narrowly reddish; palpi testaceous yellow. Thorax 
and abdomen black, densely grey-dusted, the former. with five presutural black 
vittae on mesonotum, the submedian pair disappearing a little behind suture, the 
sides of the scutellum blackish; abdomen with the usual five series of black 
tergal spots, but in the type specimen they are sharply margined only when seen 


444 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXV, 


from behind, the submedian spots narrow, extending the entire length of terete 
Legs black. Wings hyaline. Calyptrae white. Halteres yellow. 

Frons at vertex a little less than one-fourth of the head-width, parallel-sided, 
orbits a little narrower than interfrontalia, each with two strong forwardly- 
directed outer bristles, an inner series of incurved bristles, and one upper recurved 
bristle, as well as some microscopic lateral hairs; outer pair of verticals not 
half as long as inner pair; postverticals minute; ocellars of moderate length; 
parafacials with a few weak black hairs; profile as Figure 13; face as Figure 14; 
eyes with the anterior central facets slightly enlarged. Thorax with two plus three 
pairs of dorsocentrals, and one plus one pairs of acrostichals; two strong and three 
weak bristles on the presutural lateral area, no hairs on notopleural triangle; 
sternopleurals one plus one; scutellars six; stigmatal region with three bristles, 
the lower one very short and weak. Abdomen cylindrical, tapered to apex, first 
visible tergite without apical central bristles, second with a short pair, third 
and fourth each with a strong pair. Fore tarsi without exceptional armature; 
fore tibia with two posterior median bristles; mid tibia with one ventral, one 
anterodorsal, and two short posterior bristles; hind tibia with one anteroventral, 
and two or more anterodorsal and posterodorsal bristles; tarsal claws rather 
long. Third vein with a few weak setulae at base; inner cross-vein at middle 
of discal cell; apical section of fourth vein arcuate near angle. 

Length, 4 mm. 

Type, Darwin, Qld. (G. F. Hill). 

I have before me.what appears to be a second species of this genus from 
North Borneo, but am mot dealing with it at this time, as I intend to make a 
report on the collection of which it forms a part in another magazine. 


Genus PROTOMILTOGRAMMA Townsend. 


As already indicated in the foregoing pages, I have some doubts as to the 
propriety of retaining this as a good genus, the only character of note for its 
separation from Senotainia being the haired notopleural triangle, and some of 
the North American species of Senotainia have a few hairs on that portion of 
the thorax. There is, however, no species in Australia which appears to be inter- 
mediate and it is not really essential that the status be definitely decided at 
this time. 

Some of the species have males in which there is a peculiar tufted appearance 
to the apex of the abdomen owing to the presence of numerous backwardly-directed 
bristles on the incurved lateral portions of the fourth visible tergite, but this is 
not a character that can be used as a generic criterion. 

I give below a key for the separation of the species at present available. 


Key to the Species. 
1. Third antennal segment at least twice as long as the distance from its apex to 


MOuth=mMareiny Wi LAME She ocPea MAT ake te rece aiaret eden Giclee ole sr eusiler ote etrele mace Tose 2 

Third antennal segment much less than twice as long as the distance from its apex 

COM MMO Uh te y CaS vee Ae ee on RN on enrternc cyt docile 1 an AS 

Dey HILAL GSS oes rosin a cays esa es totes Bl arratieles Shoe SEERA Hee TORSO RSC OAV Goh e oe LTC GATE EE TORS CCR ee 3 
dS) =) 00 F2 AsY te Cale A ae a ieee rete nh na Ske penis Ont aN NE eRe ena ACAI ih SIA Santee MS es ero 4 


3. Wings entirely clear apically and posteriorly, quite conspicuously browned at bases 
on costal half, the dark colour fading out at or just beyond apex of first vein; 
neither frontal orbit at level of anterior forwardly directed outer orbital 
bristle as wide as interfrontal stripe; parafacial at middle not noticeably wider 
thanechind yantennaliscementese aa meen eee nee cincta Townsend 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 445 


Wings clear, almost whitish at bases, browned on apical half, more noticeably so 
along the courses of the longitudinal veins; either frontal orbit at level of 
anterior forwardly-directed outer orbital bristle quite distinctly wider than 
the interfrontal stripe; parafacial at middle much wider than third antennal 


YG¥23 9 (29 Ue Sane ney iio EA CEER ERE ECISIORELS GSinee anne cece Oo aecnoic no icELe runes CueicaD ae rcntnC Ceti acer ee laticeps, n. sp. 
4. Frons at vertex not more than one-fourth of the head-width .... cincta Townsend 
IXGONSmatnvientexe One-thinrdwot, theshead=widthy so orapeidcreereieeic cei neice laticeps, n. sp. 


5. Male; wings entirely hyaline; frons more than one-fourth of the head-width 
516 eect ATA SRO uc RIG SBS RAO aso IVERSON (OtbI DES EEC Roni ait cuGRE Anan oo cio Ect aEnar plebeia, n. sp. 
Female; frons at vertex less than one-third of the head-width; central dark thoracic 
vitta not distinguishable over dise of scutellum ................ plebeia, n. sp. 


PROTOMILTOGRAMMA CINCTA Townsend. 


No mention is made in the original description of the dark bases to the 
wings of the male. I have examined the type material in the collection of the 
United States National Museum and the specimens now before me agree in 
all respects with it. 

Localities: Eidsvold, Qld., December, 1922; Sydney, N.S.W., 8.1.1923 (Health 
Dept.); Glenreagh, N.S.W., 1.2.1923 (Health Dept.); Blue Mts., 21.3.1922 (Health 
Dept.). Four specimens, two of each sex. 


PROTOMILTOGRAMMA LATICEPS, Nn. Sp. 


6. Very similar to the preceding species in general coloration, but for the 
information of students I give a fairly full description, cincta having been 
described in a Canadian magazine in 1916. 

Head testaceous yellow; orbits, face, and cheeks densely white-dusted, not 
silvery, occiput fuscous except on a quadrate area behind vertex, the dark part, 
including the postocular orbits, densely white-dusted; antennae and palpi testaceous 
yellow; aristae black. Thorax black, densely grey-dusted, especially on pleura, 
the mesonotum with five blackish vittae, the central three narrower, the one on 
each side of central one discontinued a little behind suture, the central one 
rather faint on its hind portion, scutellum largely black, all the dark portions 
of dorsum with a bronzy tinge. Abdomen black, sides of segments of basal half 
more yellowish, apices of tergites narrowly yellowish and with whitish dust, 
bases of tergites quite broadly whitish-dusted, the yellowish colour showing 
through on second and third visible tergites, and the black colour: usually carried 
forward to anterior margins centrally, the basal tergite black on exposed dorsal 
surface. Legs black. Wings hyaline, distinctly browned on apical halves, most 
noticeably so along the courses of the veins and costally. Calyptrae white. 
Halteres yellow. : 

Frons at vertex about one-third of the head-width, outer orbitals consisting 
of an upper backwardly-curved and two forwardly-directed bristles; inner margin 
of each orbit with about a dozen fine bristles, the upper three or four sloping 
backward, the others slightly inward and forward; head in profile as Figure 15, 
the slender part of arista much shorter than in cincta; face as Figure 16. Thorax 
with only one presutural and two postsutural pairs of dorsocentrals distinct from 
the surface hairs; sternopleurals one plus three. Abdomen cylindrical, slightly 
tapered to apex, second visible tergite without strong apical central bristles, third 
with the apical bristles weaker and less closely placed than in cincta, the fourth 
tergite without apical bristles; anal tuft not as prominent as in cincta. Fore 
tibia with the ventral series of setulae inconspicuous, mid tibia with a strong 
ventral bristle; hind femur with one rather long preapical anteroventral bristle, 


446 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXV, 


two similar bristles near base on ventral surface, and some shorter and finer 
bristles opposite the latter on posterior surface, no fine hair-like bristles beyond 
the ventral pair; hind tibia with three or four anteroventral bristles, and some 
irregular anterodorsal and posterodorsal bristles. 

%. Similar to the male in most respects, differing mainly in the broader 
abdomen with more pointed apex. 

In both sexes the parafacial hairs are pale and microscopic, very difficult to 
distinguish without the aid of a very strong lens. 

Length, 6 mm. 

Type, male, Sydney, N.S.W.. 24.10.1923; allotype, Kojarena, W.A., 6.9.1926 
(HE. W. Ferguson). 


Fig. 13.—Chaetometopia cinerea. Head from the side. 
Fig. 14.—Chaetometopia cinerea. Face, incomplete. 

Fig. 15.—Protomiltogramma laticeps. Head from the side. 
Fig. 16.—Protomiltogramma laticeps. Face. 

Fig. 17.—Aenigmetopia fergusoni. Head from the side. 
Fig. 18.—Aenigmetopia fergusoni. Apex of wing. 


PROTOMILTOGRAMMA PLEBEIA, Nl. SD. 

6. Differs from the preceding species in having the frontal orbits and most 
of the parafacials yellow instead of white dusted, though in some lights the 
white colour may be distinguished, the scutellum is without dark marks except 
on sides, the dusting of thorax and abdomen is yellowish, and the abdomen is 
more extensively yellowish on sides; antennae with the third segment brown. 

A stouter species than laticeps, with narrower frons and parafacials, shorter 
antennae, the vibrissae much higher above mouth-margin, arista tapered on 
apical half, the third visible abdominal tergite with stronger apical bristles, in 
addition to the characters mentioned in the key. 

°. Similar to the male, but the fourth visible tergite with some strong 
apical bristles. 

Length, 7-8 mm. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 447 


Type, male, Sydney, N.S.W., 15.1.1923; allotype, same locality, 4.12.1921; para- 
type male, same locality, 30.3.1924 (Health Dept.); paratype female, Gundamaian, 
National Park, N.S.W., 14.2.1926 (Nicholson). 

It appears to be worth noting that in both sexes in this genus there are 
four almost equally long vertical bristles, and in no case are the ocellars long 
or strong. 


Genus AENIGMETOPIA, n. gen. 


A peculiar genus, resembling in appearance some littoral Phaoniinae because 
of the grey colour and wide frons. Frons about one-half of the head-width, 
bristled as in the preceding genus, but the bristles much stronger, the para- 
facials exceptionally strongly setulose in front; profile as Figure 17. Dorsocentral 
bristles well developed both before and behind suture; sternopleurals one plus one. 
Abdomen flattened, ovate, with a pair of strong apical central bristles on second 
and third visible tergites and a complete series of strong apical bristles on fourth. 
First posterior cell of wing almost or quite closed in margin of wing (Fig. 18). 

Genotype, the following species. 


AENIGMETOPIA FERGUSON], N. SD. 


6, %. Black, entirely grey-dusted, the parafacials and face more distinctly 
white-dusted; antennae and palpi black, mesonotum with faint traces of vittae 
in arrangement as in the preceding genus, abdomen slightly checkered on dorsum; 
legs black; wings greyish hyaline, veins fuscous, bright orange at bases; calyptrae 
white; halteres brown. ' 

Ocellar bristles strong, divergent; outer orbitals generally four or five in 
number, the upper two recurved, the others proclinate, inner marginal bristles 
long; face not centrally carinate; profile as in Figure 17. Thorax with two plus 
three pairs of strong dorsocentrals and at least one pair of presutural acrostichals; 
prealar moderate in length; scutellum with six long marginal and. two short 
discal bristles. Hypopygium of male small, semiconcealed. Legs much as in the 
preceding genus, but the ventral setulae on fore tibia inconspicuous; mid tibia 
with a long ventral bristle; hind femur as in P. laticeps; hind tibiae missing in 
male, that of female with one anteroventral and a number of rather irregular 
anterodorsal and posterodorsal bristles. Third wing-vein setulose above to beyond 
midway to inner cross-vein, and with one or two setulae at base below, apical 
venation as Figure 18. 

Length, 7-8 mm. 

Type, male, Geraldton, W.A., 5.9.1926; allotype, Wyalkatchem, W.A., 1.9.1926 
(EH. W. Ferguson). 

Named in honour of the collector who was responsible for my undertaking 
work on Australian Diptera and who collected this and many other interesting 
species which have passed through my hands. 


Family HE MPIDIDAE. 


This family has recently been reviewed for New Zealand by Mr. J. EH. Collin* 
who records 102 species from that country, but there is no published work of any 


* “New Zealand Hmpididae’’, British Museum (Natural History), London, 1928. QGlC47 
508 BC 


(Rp, 


«OE 


Ay 


s 


448 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXV, 


note on the Australian species. Tillyard, in his book on the Insects of Australia 
and New Zealand, published an estimate of the number of Australian species as 50, 
but there may be many more, as nothing has been done on the family here. I 
have no material of any consequence from Australia, but have quite a number of 
species from New Zealand, and have seen additional species from that country 
in the collection of the United States National Museum. 

The economic status of the family is rather doubtful. Although the adults 
are mainly if not entirely predaceous, feeding largely upon other small insects, 
and especially Diptera, this does not necessarily imply that the insects are 
beneficial. This habit, and also that of parasitism, is too often accepted as 
indicative of benefit to mankind, but unfortunately neither can invariably be 
classed as such. There are, of course, a number of species of parasitic insects 
that confine themselves largely, or entirely, to one, or a few very closely related, 
injurious species and in such cases the parasites may be depended upon.to justify 
their introduction into certain areas where they do not naturally occur, for the 
purpose of curtailing enemies of man; but, on the other hand, many such insects 
may eventually, on the elimination of their normal prey, or hosts, become injurious 
through attacking other than their normal hosts, the later choice being in no 
manner injurious, or even beneficial. 

The larvae of many of the Empididae are found in rotten wood, in the earth 
in woods, and in mud of stream and lake beds. The transformation is complete. 
The adults of many species may be taken flying over streams, in glades in woods, 
or on flowers. Certain species have peculiar mating habits, the males capturing 
insects with which they fly past a group of females dancing in the air, whereupon 
one of the females darts out from the group and flies to the male, both of them 
settling upon the herbage or continuing flying, but almost immediately after they 
come together they may be found in copula. Several interesting notes on this 
habit have been published in Europe and North America. 

I do not purpose presenting at this time a survey of the material in my hands, 
as it is quite insufficient to justify a revision of the Australian species, but I 
give below a key to the subfamilies, which may be found of.interest to anyone 
having species available. The included subfamilies are those known to occur in 
New Zealand with the addition of Hybotinae from Australia. Possibly two or 
three of these do not occur in Australia. 


Key to the Subfamilies. 


1. None of the longitudinal veins of wing furcate, discal cell always lacking, first 


loyeustel El iaONG IKoraFerere Wola KECOING! Goncaadsosanoooo re odeucccb on Tachydrominae 

One or more of the longitudinal veins of wing furcate, or if all are simple the 
first basal cell is distinctly longer than second; discal cell usually present .. 2 

2. Diseal cell always present and with but two veins emanating from its apex, 
neitherviofiithe»mes HuaiRCaves ts: bel. MER see oe eR Pe Re I oe AS REL AU AR, cde cs ena eee a 3 

Discal cell present or absent, when present with three veins emanating from its 
apex, at swaths bit two thie: upp eraomeyesitu Caley iis esr alee eset eens 4 

oF Analcellmdistinctlysshorter=thanisSecondabasalesee siren eccrine Ocydrominae 
Nae) | Cl Woraksie Wario eveorael |NAREWY Gono oocoououoaudougdodogauogdcouODOS Hybotinae 

4. Second antennal segment projecting forward into inner side of base of third in a 
finger-like process; anal cell of wing entirely lacking .......... Ceratomerinae 
Second antennal segment without a projection or process at apex on inner side .. 5 


+. Fore coxae elongate, at least twice as long as either of the other pairs; anal angle 
of wings never developed; fore legs usually fitted for holding prey .......... 
bP brapia, ta; betaylcvneeaceve Ke RS nour ow sits Marea NRC OWE MT NCEE ELA NMR Sok Spore WONG A es CUL Tes HCI MONTREAL PaO: Hemerodrominae 
Fore coxae not noticeably elongated, not twice as long as hind pair ............ 6 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 449 


6. Apex of anal cell of wing projecting beyond level of apex of second basal cell; 
inid femora distinctly thicker at bases than either fore or mid pairs, tapered 


{EGY EONS Sree Sic cea EE ST ORONO Ss CRI las FO chgs EeG  SISUE Ie noitoN coe = Cae One eS Homalocneminae 

Apex of anal cell not projecting beyond level of apex of second basal cell; mid 
femora not thicker than other pairs and not noticeably thickened at bases .. 7 

7. Empodium pulvilliform, the apical segment of tarsi pointed at apex above ...... 
SH fatal Ati os Real Ate a gS SnD ar E ete cee SI See cae CM CIE ERE rOiET SOFT UT REE Rea Clinocerinae 
Empvdium normally slender and bristle-like; the apical segment of tarsi blunt cr 
(IeDOVGRNUS) NC, ENOXED<) Sig olSza bain Gr a.b ier Heo vale aid joforalnrSrolo Glo 6tG "Ro eabio es orolo ibeot n athn cto Empidinae 


Subfamily EMPIDINAE. 
Genus RHAMPHELLA, n. gen. 


This genus has the anal vein incomplete, fading out before attaining margin 
of wing, and without a weak portion just after leaving the apex of the anal cell, 
and the subcostal vein (mediastinal of Collin) connects with the costa. It also 
is noteworthy that the fore metatarsus of the male is much thickened, the 
hypopygium of the same sex is somewhat kKeel-shaped; and I can detect no hairs 
on the posterior apical margin of the hind coxae. 


Genotype, the following species. 


RHAMPHELLA INCONSPICUA, N. Sp. 


d. Brownish fuscous, with grey dusting. Antennae and palpi testaceous 
yellow. Thorax in type greasy so that it is impossible to decide if it is vittate. 
Abdomen largely testaceous, darkened on dorsum and hypopygium. Legs 
testaceous yellow, hind femora largely blackened,. mid pair faintly so, apices of 
all tarsi fuscous. Wings hyaline, with a faint stigmal darkening below apex of 
first vein. -Halteres brownish. ‘ 

Frons at narrowest point at least as wide as base of third antennal segment, 
the posterior ocelli widely separated, lying close to margins of eyes; ocellar 
triangle not much elevated and with microscopic hairs only, no distinct bristles; 
vertical hairs pale and fine; antennae inserted about middle of eyes, damaged in 
type, but the third segment apparently short, conical, and with a terminal style; 
face as wide as frons; eye apparently notched at base of antenna; proboscis 
short and stout, not as long as height of head, projecting straight forward in type. 
Thorax with dorsal hairs weak and pale, mostly rubbed off in type; scutellum with 
four pale marginal bristles; propleura with some fine hairs below; metapleura 
bare. Abdomen Slender, hypopygium of above average in size, rather sharply 
keeled below. Legs without bristles; fore metatarsus wider than apex of tibia. 
Upper vein emanating from apex of discal cell about one and a half times as 
long as that cell. 


Length, 2 mm. 


Type, Como, N.S.W., December, 1923, swept from flowers (H. Petersen). Sub- 
mitted by the late C. F. Baker and in collection of author. 


Genus Ruampromyra Meigen. 


This genus is a very large one and has recently been broken into a number of 
subgenera by Frey and Collin. It has been mentioned as occurring in Australia 
by Tillyard in his book on Australian and New Zealand insects, but no species 
has been described from this country up to the-present. Collin does not record it 
for New Zealand, though I have before me one species from there. ; 


450 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXV. 


RHAMPHOMYIA-ALBIDIPENNIS, N. Sp. 


6. Shining black, with milk-white wings, whitish calyptrae, and pale knobs 
to the halteres. Antennae and palpi black. Thorax slightly and evenly grey- 
dusted, with three indistinct blackish vittae on dorsum. Costal vein and apex of 
first vein blackish, the other veins pale. Fringes of calyptrae pale. Body and 
leg hairs and setulae black. 

Hyes touching on about three-fourths of the extent of frons, ocellar triangle 
not noticeably elevated, the ocellar setulae very short and weak; third antennal 
segment broken off in type; proboscis not as long as height of head, eyes notched 
at base of antennae. Thorax rather elevated, with fine erect biseriate acrostichals 
and the dorsocentral series closely set and hardly stronger than the acrostichals, 
except posteriorly; collar with two or three hairs on each side above and one 
longer hair on each side below; propleural hairs not numerous; scutellum with 
two well developed apical marginal bristles; notopleural region with two posterior 
bristles and some weaker and shorter setulae in front of them and closer to 
margin; metapleural bristles in a single vertical series of about six. Abdomen 
normal, with short dark hairs, the hypopygium slightly keeled, higher than long. 
Legs normal, all tibiae with distinct setulose hairs amongst which there are two 
or three on the anterodorsal and posterodorsal surfaces of each distinctly longer 
than the others but not much longer than the diameter of the tibiae; fore tarsus 
normal; all tarsi with the claws long, equal, and curved. Wing much as in 
aprilis White, but without a dark stigmal spot, and with the discal cell com- 
paratively longer than in that author’s figure, the length of it being about three- 
fifths that of the upper vein emanating from its apex instead of less than one- 
half; sixth vein obsolete except at base. 

Length, 3 mm. 

Type, Seaford, Vict., no other data (W. F. Hill). 


Subfamily HEMERODROMIIN AE. 


The genus Ptilophyllodromia Bezzi occurs in Australia. It is known from 
other genera by the plumose apical antennal arista. I have not seen the genus. 


DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA. XXI. 
By ARTHUR M. Lea, F.E.S. 


[Read 24th September, 1930.] 


In addition to truly Australian forms, five others from Fiji and Papua are 
herein described, but they are closely allied to Australian forms. 


Family ScARABAEIDAE. 
DIPHUCEPHALA GLABRA, 1. SD. 


6. Green, coppery-green or coppery; elytra red with a green or coppery- 
green gloss, lower surface of clypeus blackish; antennae (club black), palpi, and 
legs (claws infuscated) reddish. Upper surface glabrous, under surface, pygidium 
and legs with rather dense white setae. 

Head with crowded and rather shallow punctures. Clypeus almost parallel- 
sided, apex widely notched, front half with sparser and smaller punctures than 
elsewhere. Prothorax moderately transverse, with a wide median impression, 
evenly narrowed to apex, each side with a transverse fovea, outside of which is 
a strong but not very acute tooth; with large and comparatively sparse punctures, 
each with a central granule. Scutellum polished and impunctate. Elytra with 
slightly elevated lines, and coarse crowded punctures, larger across middle than 
elsewhere. Front tibiae bidentate at and near apex, front tarsi with four basal 
joints wider than those of other tarsi. Length, 8-9 mm. 

New South Wales: Eccleston (J. Hopson). 

The longitudinal sulcus of the pronotum is wide, fairly deep and continuous 
almost to apex, much as on D. richmondia, from which, as from most of the red- 
legged species, it is distinct by its glabrous upper surface. D. pulcherrima and 
D. hirtipes have parts of the prothorax densely squamose and are otherwise very 
different. The lateral foveae of the pronotum are usually isolated, but on several 
specimens there is a vague line connecting each of them with the median impres- 
sion. I have not seen a female of this species, but there are nineteen males 
under examination. 


DIPHUCEPHALA DICKSONIAE, Nl. SD. 


J. Metallic-green or coppery-green; elytra reddish with a green or coppery- 
green gloss, legs reddish, tarsi, antennae (except part of basal joint), palpi, and 
lower surface of clypeus black or blackish. Upper surface with rather sparse, 
uniform, white, depressed setae, becoming denser and longer on under surface and 
legs. 

Head coarsely shagreened, punctures fairly distinct only on a semicircular 
space connecting the hind parts of the eyes. Clypeus with sides gently incurved 
to middle, apex deeply notched. Prothorax moderately transverse, median sulcus 

B 


452 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, XXi, 


in two parts: a wide, rather deep, and almost square basal portion, and a 
narrower part connected with the apex, each side with a deep transverse impres- 
sion, shallowly connected with the median sulcus, the side beyond it with a distinct 
tooth; with irregularly distributed and fairly large punctures, each with a 
setiferous granule. Scutellum flat, shining, and with sparse, minute punctures. 
Elytra with feebly elevated lines and with coarse crowded punctures, becoming 
sparser at base and apex. Front tibiae bidentate at and near apex; three basal 
joints of front tarsi moderately wide, with dense white setae on under surface. 
Length, 9-11 mm. 

©. Differs in having the clypeus much shorter, traversed by an elevated line 
’ at the apical third, with the apical portion smaller, its sides not elevated and less 
deeply notched, abdomen more convex, middle of pygidium glabrous, and front 
tarsi thinner and only sparsely clothed on under surface. 

New South Wales: HEecleston and Barrington Tops, in November (J. Hopson), 
Upper Williams River, in October (F. E. Wilson and A. M. Lea); common on tree- 
ferns (Dicksonia antarctica). 

Some of the specimens, to a certain extent, resemble some of those of the 
preceding species, but may be at once distinguished by the clothing of the upper 
surface, and the median sulcus of the pronotum; on this species its basal half 
is wide, quadrangular, and connected with the lateral foveae. On the preceding 
species the sulcus decreases evenly in width from base to apex, and is isolated 
from the lateral foveae. In Blackburn’s table it could be referred to A.BB.C., and 
from the species there placed it differs from D. nitidicollis in its much sparser 
punctures of prothorax, with the lateral foveae slightly connected with the median 
sulcus, and in its entirely dark tarsi, which are sometimes purplish. From 
D. richmondia and D. parviceps it is distinct by the median sulcus of the pronotum. 
On some specimens the prothorax has been forced aside, exposing the basal 
portion of the scutellum; this is seen to be divided into two concave parts, each 
of which has crowded punctures. 4 

Var.—Three specimens (tWo males and one female) from the Upper Williams 
River have the elytra bright metallic-green (of the exact shade of the prothorax) 
without the ieast trace of red, and the antennae (except the club) reddish. 


DIPHUCEPHALA CONCINNA, Nl. SDP. 

do. Bright metallic-green, some parts coppery-green; antennae (club blackish), 
palpi, and legs (claws infuscated) pale-reddish. Moderately densely clothed with 
short, depressed, white setae, or thin scales, becoming denser on under surface; 
legs with thinner clothing. 

Head with crowded punctures or coarsely shagreened. Clypeus convex in 
middle, sides gently incurved to middle, apex less deeply notched than usual. 
Prothorax rather feebly transverse, median line narrow but wider near apex than 
near base, transverse impressions narrow and isolated; punctures fairly dense 
and partly concealed. Elytra with several feeble elevations, and coarse, crowded 
punctures, becoming sparser about base and apex. Abdomen gently depressed in 
middle. Front tarsi with three basal joints wide, the first asymmetrical. Length, 
6-7 mm. 

°. Differs in having the clypeus smaller, sides more narrowed to apex, which 
is less deeply notched, prothorax more transverse, apex and sides of elytra sub- 
opaque, abdomen more convex, club of antennae smaller, and front tarsi much 
thinner. 


BY A. M. LEA. 453 


Queensland: Kuranda (F. P. Dodd). 

In general appearance close to small specimens of D. rufipes, but hind tibiae 
of male not at all black, only the claws of the hind tarsi dark, and the pygidium 
evenly convex; on the males of rufipes there is a depression (sometimes almost 
foveate in appearance) on each side of the pygidium; its pronotum is also almost 
evenly clothed throughout, instead of being almost glabrous in the middle. 
D. tarsalis and D. cribripennis have more deeply notched clypeus, and clothing of 
upper surface considerably longer; the former also has much wider front tarsi 
in the male. D. nitens (which also occurs at Kuranda) is a much more brilliant 
species, with longer prothorax and sparser clothing on upper surface. In 
Blackburn’s table of the genus it could be associated with that species. The head 
and prothorax are usually coppery-green, the head and scutellum on some 
specimens are almost coppery-red. 


DIPHUCEPHALA MONTANA, Nn. SD. 

do. Metallic-green or coppery-green; antennae, palpi, and legs (tibial teeth 
reddish) black. Rather sparsely clothed with depressed white setae, becoming 
moderately dense on under surface. : 

Head with crowded and shallow punctures, or coarsely shagreened. Clypeus 
with sides feebly undulated, and apex widely notched. Prothorax moderately 
transverse, median sulcus very wide on basal half, and feebly connected with 
apex, transverse impressions deep and isolated, each side angulate in middle; 
with rather dense shallow, setiferous punctures. Scutellum with minute punctures 
and a large median impression. Elytra with several feeble elevations, and with 
coarse, crowded punctures, becoming smaller about base and apex. Front tibiae 
bidentate at and near apex; front tarsi with three basal joints dilated and densely 
clothed on under surface. Length, 6-7 mm. 

®. Differs in having the clypeus much smaller, less deeply notched, tips 
less upturned and front tarsi thinner and more sparsely clothed. 

New South Wales: Barrington Tops (Australian Museum, in January, 
K.55866, and T. G. Sloane). 

In general appearance like enlarged specimens of D. carteri, but prothorax 
with sparser punctures, median sulcus much wider, scutellum almost impunctate, 
and with a conspicuous impression. It is also close to D. sordida, but is slightly 
larger, and with more distinct punctures on pronotum. In his table Blackburn 
stated of that species, “Puncturation of pronotum (except fine close asperity) all 
but wanting”. This is hardly correct; there are numerous shallow punctures, 
which are quite distinct on the front part of the prothorax, and close to the 
base, although on most of the surface they are partly obscured by dense and small 
punctures (hardly shagreened). On many specimens of sordida the colour is 
bronzy or coppery, occasionally green with a coppery gloss; of fourteen specimens 
of the present species, thirteen are green or coppery-green, and one is purplish, 
not one is bronzy. In Blackburn’s table it might be associated with D. quadratigera 
and D. angusticeps, two considerably smaller species, with more sharply defined 
prothoracic punctures. 


DIPHUCEPHALA PURPUREITARSIS Macl. 
(D. crebra Blackb., var.) 
The type of D. crebra, now in the British Museum, was described by Blackburn 
from a specimen I sent to him as D. purpureitarsis, and I believe correctly so. 


454 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, XXi, 


He stated that from that species it “has widely different sculpture of the pro- 
notum” and in the table they are separated by 


“C. Longitudinal sulcus of pronotum not double in hind part” ................ crebra 
“CC. Longitudinal sulcus of pronotum doubled in hind part” .......... purpureitarsis 


On most specimens of purpureitarsis the doubling is sufficiently distinct, but 
on several it is faint, and on an occasional specimen the sulcus is not at all 
doubled. Most of the specimens before me are from Galston, the National Park, 
and other localities near Sydney. 


DIPHUCEPHALA CAERULEA Macl. 

The type of this species has perished (Lea, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1916, 
p. 294). It is probable that it was founded upon a female of a purplish variety of 
D. pulchella, which varies from 3 to 3% lines, and in colour from coppery-green 
through various shades of green and blue, to deep-purple; and occurs in New 
South Wales, Victoria and Tasmania. Although no locality was given when 
the species was first described, it was afterwards recorded in the monograph as 
from Queensland. 


CUNDERDINIA SETISTRIATA, N. Sp. 

6. Bright metallic coppery-green; parts of legs blue, tarsi purplish, antennae 
and palpi black. Head, sides of prothorax, and lines on elytra with white setae, 
becoming hairs on under surface and legs. 

Head with crowded, rough punctures between eyes, becoming smaller about 
base. Clypeus not quite twice as wide as long, sides moderately uplifted, apex 
more strongly so, and not at all notched. Antennae eight-jointed, club three- 
jointed. -Prothorax slightly transverse, median line shallow, transverse impres- 
sion on each side rather short and fairly deep, a marginal tooth near it; with 
crowded but sharply defined punctures. Scutellum convex and minutely punctate. 
Elytra almost parallel-sided to near apex; with crowded and rather coarse 
punctures, and transversely corrugated on most of surface. Front tibiae with a 
long and acute apical tooth, and a small subapical one, three basal joints of front 
tarsi densely setose on lower surface, all claws bifid. Length, 7-8 mm. 

®. Differs in having the clypeus shorter, its sides and apex less upturned, 
abdomen strongly convex, legs shorter and front tarsi thinner and less densely 
clothed. 

Western Australia (H. M. Giles), Tammin (H. J. Carter). 

Slightly larger than C. variabilis, and elytra with conspicuous lines of white 
setae on the alternate interstices. 


HAPLONYCHA PILOSICOLLIS, nN. Sp. 

Pale castaneous-brown; head reddish, parts of front tibiae blackish. Densely 
clothed with long stramineous hairs on base of head, prothorax, scutellum, under 
surface, and legs, but less dense on abdomen than on sterna, pygidium almost 
glabrous on disc. 

Head with crowded punctures behind clypeal suture, less crowded but still 
dense in front, the punctures there of two distinct sizes. Antennae nine-jointed, 
club three-jointed. Penultimate joint of palpi slightly shorter than antepen- 
ultimate, and distinctly shorter than apical. Prothorax more than twice as wide 
as long, strongly convex, hind angles rounded off; with dense and rather small 
punctures. Elytra not quite parallel-sided, geminate striae well defined and with 


BY A. M. LEA. 455 


fairly large punctures, the interstices with rather sparse and irregular ones, 
marginal fringe of setae long at base, becoming short posteriorly, without a dense 
downward fringe. Propygidium with punctures about as large as on pronotum, 
but not as dense, becoming sparser and smaller on pygidium, especially in middle. 
Second joint of hind tarsi slightly longer than first. Length, 13 mm. 

South Australia: Minnie Downs (N.E. corner, L. Reese). 

The pronotum, propygidium and sterna are more densely clothed than on any 
other species .before me, but the lateral gutters of the pronotum are not more 
densely clothed than elsewhere. Still, if considered as belonging to Blackburn’s 
Group 2, it is distinct from all the species of that group by its small size. The 
clothing is even denser than on H. crinita (of Group 1, with the antennae eight- 
jointed). Passing Group 2, it could only be referred to Group 6, from all the 
small species of which it is distinct by the clothing of the pronotum. The type 
is evidently a male, as the lamellae of the club are as long as the clypeal suture. 


HAPLONYCHA BREVISETOSA, N. SD. 


Purplish-brown, with a greenish iridescence; antennae and palpi castaneous, 
parts of front tibiae black. Head with a few long hairs near eyes, prothorax with 
a sparse marginal fringe, continued across part of the base, elytra with a 
- marginal fringe of setae, rather long at the base, becoming smaller posteriorly, 
and absent from tips; with a very short and dense downward fringe, sterna and 
legs with long stramineous hairs, becoming sparser on abdomen, pygidium with 
minute pubescence. 

Head with crowded punctures behind the bisinuate clypeal suture, clypeus 
more than twice as wide as the median length, with crowded punctures at base, 
becoming less crowded and individually distinct in front. Antennae nine-jointed, 
club three-jointed. Penultimate joint of palpi slightly longer than antepen- 
ultimate. Prothorax more than thrice as wide as long, hind angles rounded off; 
with a faint median line, and numerous but not crowded punctures. Elytra not 
quite parallel-sided, geminate striae rather feeble, especially posteriorly, the inter- 
stices with numerous but not crowded punctures of fairly large size, suture 
briefly mucronate. Pygidium with crowded and small, asperate punctures, 
becoming very small posteriorly. Second joint of hind tarsi distinctly longer than 
first. Length, 19-24 mm. 

South Australia: Minnie Downs (L. Crabb, F. Parsons, and L. Reese), 
Birkett’s Wool Shed (South Australian Museum Expedition, 1916); Western 
Australia: Coolgardie (Blackburn’s collection). 

In general appearance strikingly close to H. deceptor (the specimen from 
the Blackburn collection was placed with that species), but at once distinguished 
by the tip of the elytra, which has the apical downward fringe of setae very short; 
on a cotype of deceptor, and on many other specimens, the apical fringe is fully 
thrice as long. In Blackburn’s table it could be associated with that species. The 
hairs near the eyes are readily abraded. Some of the specimens are more reddish 
than others. 


HAPLONYCHA PRUINOSA, N. Sp. 
Head and prothorax dark-brown (the former almost black), elsewhere 
purplish-brown, the elytra with a pruinose bloom, antennae and palpi castaneous. 
Prothorax with a sparse lateral fringe of long hairs, elytra with a fairly long 


456 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, XXi, 


fringe on each side almost to apex, downward fringe very short, dense and 
continuous, sterna densely pilose, abdomen sparsely pilose, pygidium glabrous. 

Head. with rather dense but not crowded punctures towards base, but crowded 
near clypeal suture; clypeus with slightly larger and more crowded punctures 
than behind its suture. Antennae nine-jointed, club four-jointed. Prothorax fully 
four times as wide as long, hind angles not rounded off, punctures of moderate 
size, and numerous but not crowded. Elytra somewhat dilated to near apex, 
geminate striae moderately distinct, interstices with slightly sparser and larger 
punctures than on pronotum, suture unarmed: Pygidium with small and fairly 
numerous punctures about base, sparser and smaller elsewhere. Second joint of 
hind tarsi slightly longer than first. Length, 17-18 mm. 

Western Australia: Kellerberrin (J. Clark). 

On the type, probably a male, the club has four long joints, and the preceding 
joint has an acute inner projection, which is rather too short to be considered 
as belonging to the club. On the second specimen the first joint of the club is 
about three-fourths of the length of the second joint, the preceding joint (fifth of 
antennae) is acute inwardly, but without a produced part. The penultimate joint 
of the palpi is just perceptibly longer than the antepenultimate, so by Blackburn’s 
table it could be regarded as belonging to either Group 4 or 5. If referred to 
Group 4, it could be associated with H. bella, from which it differs in having the 
elytra more dilated posteriorly, the short downward fringe of elytra more 
conspicuous, and the prothorax with more conspicuous punctures; bella is a 
brilliantly iridescent species, without bloom on the many specimens before me; 
on each of the present species the elytra have a distinct bloom. If referred to 
Group 5, it could be associated with H. electa and H. fraterna, to neither of which 
is it at all close. 


HAPLONYCHA IMMATURA, 0. SD. 

Flavous, part of head reddish-flavous. A few hairs on sides and base of 
prothorax, on base of elytra and of scutellum; elytra with a sparse marginal 
fringe of reddish bristles, but without a downward fringe; sterna moderately 
densely clothed, abdomen with hairs almost confined to a row across each 
segment, pygidium glabrous. 

Head with numerous but scarcely crowded and rather small punctures. 
Clypeus wider than usual, the punctures smaller and sparser than on the surface 
behind its suture. Antennae nine-jointed, club four-jointed, the joints of the club 
as long as the clypeal suture. Penultimate joint of palpi slightly shorter than 
antepenultimate, the apical joint with a slight basal impression. Prothorax about 
thrice as wide as long, hind angles obtuse but not completely rounded off, punctures 
about as large as on head, but not quite as numerous, and interspersed with very 
minute ones. Elytra almost parallel-sided, geminate striae distinct, interstices 
with rather sparse punctures, and in places transversely rugose, suture slightly 
mucronate. Pygidium punctate and shagreened. Second joint of hind tarsi very 
little longer than first. Length, 11-12 mm. 

South Australia: Minnie Downs (lL. Reese). 

In appearance like H. pallida (Group 5), on a reduced scale, but less shining, 
with more distinct punctures, impression of apical joint of palpi more distinct, 
although not strong enough for the species to be placed in Group 3; the lamellae 
of the club are also much longer. It is smaller than all the species known to 
Blackburn of Group 5. 


BY A. M. LEA. 457 


HAPLONYCHA IRIDEA, 0. SDP. 
Red; elytra blackish-purple, becoming reddish on sides, abdomen and 
pygidium usually, but not always, darker than sterna; elytra brilliantly iridescent, 
rest of upper surface moderately so. 


Head with rather sparse and small punctures behind clypeal suture, denser 
but not very large in front of it. Antennae nine-jointed, club three-jointed. Pro- 
thorax about thrice as wide as long, front angles acute, hind ones somewhat 
obtuse but not rounded off; punctures much as on head. Elytra somewhat 
dilated to beyond the middle, with distinct geminate striae, the interstices with 
punctures about as numerous as on pronotum, but slightly larger. Abdomen 
shagreened. Pygidium with rather sparse and small punctures. Two basal joints 
of hind tarsi subequal. Length, 10-14 mm. 


South Australia: Minnipa (H. A. Johnson), abundant at lights. 


A beautiful species, with colours somewhat like those of H. ruficollis, but 
smaller and more brilliantly iridescent. With the mouth-parts detached it is 
evident that the penultimate joint of the maxillary palpi is slightly longer 
than the antepenultimate, and therefore that it should not be referred to 
Blackburn’s Group 4, but without removing it from the head, on many of the 
specimens, the penultimate joint appears to be slightly the longer. Passing 
Group 4, it can only be referred to Group 7. The male has the lamellae of the 
club slightly longer than the six preceding joints combined, of these the fifth and 
sixth are pointed inwardly; on the female the lamellae are about one-third shorter, 
and the fifth and sixth joints are less pointed. The male also is narrower than 
the female, and has darker abdomen and pygidium. 


HAPLONYCHA PYGIDIALIS, nN. sp. 


Black; elytra and parts of legs dark-brown, antennae somewhat paler. Pro- 
thorax with a sparse and dark fringe on each side, elytra with lateral fringe at 
base about as long as on prothorax, but becoming shorter posteriorly, downward 
fringe very short (almost absent), sterna with rather dense cluthing, becoming 
sparse on abdomen, pygidium glabrous. 


Head with crowded punctures, somewhat obscuring the clypeal suture. 
Antennae nine-jointed, club three-jointed, the lamellae not half the length of the 
clypeal suture. Palpi with penultimate joint shorter than the antepenultimate. 
Prothorax almost four times as wide as long, sides strongly rounded, front angles 
acute, hind ones almost rounded off; with sharply defined punctures, about as 
large as on head, but much less crowded. Elytra with sides dilated to beyond 
the middle, geminate striae well defined; punctures slightly larger than on pro- 
thorax and less crowded. Pygidium acutely carinated in middle, with dense and 
small punctures, becoming shagreened at base. Second joint of hind tarsi distinctly 
longer than first. Length, 17 mm. 


Victoria: Murtoa. 


In Blackburn’s table belongs to Group 8, and in appearance is somewhat like 
H. gagatina, with the elytra darker than usual, but the punctures on the pro- 
notum are sharply defined, and the pygidium is distinctly carinated. In appear- 
ance also it is fairly close to the specimen of H. rustica commented upon (post.), 
but that specimen belongs to Group 5. dH. nigra, of Group 8, is larger, with the 
pygidium noncarinated. 


458 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, XXi, 


HAPLONYCHA SETOSA Blackb., 2 (Colpochila). 
(H. marginata Blackb., 3.) 

The type of Colpochila setosa is now in the British Museum, and was unique 
when described; although noted as a male, its tarsi were not even mentioned. 

There were, however, two specimens from Charters Towers labelled as setosa 
in the Blackburn collection, and apparently correctly so; they agree well with 
other specimens from Oodnadatta and Alice Springs (the type was from McDonnell 
Ranges), but these are all females (on dissection of one» specimen eggs were 
found) and have the front claws not very different from the others. A male from 
Alice Springs (taken during the same trip as a female by Dr. C. J. Hackett) has 
the front claws asymmetrical, the outer one on each tarsus has a small basal 
appendix, and the upper portion evenly arched, but the inner one has a large 
basal appendix, and the upper portion, instead of being evenly arched, is some- 
what sinuous. The male has the elytral margins thickened. The type of H. 
marginata (now also in the British Museum) was described as probably a female, 
but two cotypes in the South Australian Museum are certainly males, as they 
have the front claws asymmetrical (as on the Alice Springs male), and I believe 
them to be males of H. setosa. Fresh specimens have some straggling erect hairs 
or setae on the elytra, but they appear to be easily abraded. 

H. gibbicollis (see the following note) and H. tarsalis, also have asymmetrical 
front claws in the male. On most species of the genus the claws are not 
sexually variable, and apparently Blackburn relied principally on the antennae 
for sexual distinctions, and did not examine the front tarsi. 


HAPLONYCHA GIBBICOLLIS Blackb. 

The sexes of this species may be at once distinguished by the front tarsi; on 
the female the claws are much as on the other tarsi, but on the male they are 
asymmetrical, the outer claw has a large basal appendix, and its upper portion 
is evenly arched, and regularly decreases in thickness, the inner claw has a much 
larger basal appendix, and its upper portion is somewhat sinuous, with the lower 
edge not evenly decreasing in thickness. 


HAPLONYCHA RUSTICA Blackb., var. 

A male from Pungonda (South Australia) appears to belong to this species, 
but has the prothorax subopaque, and with denser and larger punctures than 
usual; in general appearance it is like H. gagatina, but the club of antennae is 
four-jointed, instead of three-jointed, prothoracic punctures sharply defined, and 
elytral fringe fairly long at apex. 


LIPARETRUS DISTINCTUS Blackb. 

In the original description of this species (Blackb., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 
1895, p. 34) the two basal joints of the hind tarsi were described as “subaequalibus”. 
I cannot find that Blackburn commented upon it elsewhere, except that in the 
table (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1905, p. 291) it is placed with those having 
(page 290) “Basal joints of hind tarsi equal (or scarcely differing) in length”. 

The types are in the South Australian Museum, and it is evident that Blackburn 
did not re-examine them (or that the apparent lengths of the two joints were 
partly obscured by a few bristles) when preparing the table, as the basal joint 
of the hind tarsi is distinctly longer than the second, and in that table it should 
have been placed with A, B, CCC, DDD, EE, and there associated with L. melano- 


BY A. M. LEA. 459 


cephalus, to which it is certainly very close, and which, perhaps, should be 
considered as a variety of it. The types of both were from Lake Callabonna, both 
have the clypeus obtusely tridentate, and second segment of abdomen of male 
fasciculate at middle of apex. 


Family CURCULIONIDAE. 
EUTINOPHAEA FASCICULATA, 1. SD. 


Dark reddish-brown; legs and antennae paler. Densely clothed with light 
brown scales, obscurely variegated with paler and darker ones, becoming paler, 
but scarcely whitish, on under surface; in addition with short sloping setae, 
condensed to form a conspicuous black fascicle, on the suture half-way down the 
apical slope, two less distinct ones on the third interstice (near base and just 
beyond middle), and a still more feeble one on the fifth, about the middle. 

Head as described in H#. bicristata. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, 
sides rather strongly rounded, with large punctures indicated through clothing. 
Elytra much wider than prothorax, sides almost parallel on basal half, then 
rounded and near apex strongly narrowed; with regular rows of rather large, 
partly concealed punctures, odd interstices gently elevated above the even ones. 
Front and middle tibiae strongly curved, the hind ones almost straight. Length, 
3-2 mm. 

Queensland: Cairns district (A. M. Lea). 

Distinct from all other species before me by the conspicuous black fascicle 
on the suture. Judging by the convexity of the abdomen the three specimens 
taken are all females. The clothing as described is that of two of them; on the 
third it is mostly sooty, obscurely variegated with small paler spots. 


HUTINOPHAEA SETISTRIATA, N. Sp. 


6. Reddish-brown; legs and antennae somewhat paler. Densely clothed with 
pale, almost stramineous, scales, variegated with pale-brown markings, the under 
surface with whitish scales. In addition with short sloping setae, on the elytra 
forming a distinct row on each odd interstice. 

Head wide, with numerous concealed punctures. Rostrum with a feeble 
median line, near apex traversed by a line marking off the glabrous muzzle from 
the squamose portion; scrobes angular, upper portion of each distinct from above, 
oblique lower portion almost touching lower edge of eye. Scape short and stout; 
two basal joints of funicle moderately long, the first stouter than second. Pro- 
thorax slightly longer than wide, sides feebly bisinuate, with the middle portion 
slightly elevated across middle; with rather large punctures, faintly indicated 
through clothing or entirely hidden. FElytra oblong-cordate, much wider than 
prothorax, with regular rows of fairly large punctures, appearing much smaller 
through clothing, odd interstices slightly elevated above the others, the suture 
thickened, but not tuberculate, about summit of apical slope. Basal segment of 
abdomen flattened in middle. Front tibiae bisinuate on lower surface. Length, 
3-0-3-5 mm. 5 

®. Differs in having wider elytra, abdomen more convex, and legs somewhat 
shorter. 

Queensland: Mount Tambourine, in November (H. Hacker), in January 
(A. M. Lea); Bunya Mountain, in December (Hacker); National Park (H. J. 
Carter). 


460 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, XXi, 


The setae on the alternate interstices of the elytra are very distinct. From 
the sides the upper surface appears to have several feeble fascicles, and the elytra 
to approach those of the female of H. bicristata, but the prothorax is decidedly 
narrower than on that species, and the elytra of the male are very different. 
The hind margin of each eye is slightly encroached upon by the derm, so that it 
is not quite circular in outline; it is slightly suggestive of the encroachment on 
the eyes of the species of Ophryota. The darker markings of the upper surface 
are not very dark, and consist of two small spots on the head, a fairly wide 
median vitta on the pronotum (sometimes longitudinally divided in the middle) 
and a patch occupying most of the basal half of elytra (excluding the shoulders), 
but they vary considerably in size and intensity; there are sometimes faint 
markings on the sides of the prothorax, and the prothoracic setae usually cause the 
surface to appear speckled. On several specimens the scales on the under surface 
have a faint bluish tinge, but are not metallic. 


HUTINOPHAEA SUTURALIS, I. Sp. 


Dark reddish-brown; legs and antennae paler. Densely clothed with greyish- 
white scales mottled with darker ones, becoming whitish, or with a faint bluish 
tinge, on under parts; in addition with sparse, sloping setae. 

Head wide, with large, concealed punctures. Rostrum short, muzzle glabrous, 
separated from the clothed portion by a narrow transverse line; scrobes with 
upper portion short, the lower narrow and oblique. Prothorax slightly longer 
than its greatest width, sides rather strongly rounded in middle, feebly trans- 
versely impressed near base and apex, with punctures as on head. Elytra oblong- 
cordate, much wider than prothorax, parallel-sided to about middle; with regular 
rows of large punctures, appearing small through clothing, odd interstices slightly 
elevated above the even ones, the third more noticeably (but not suddenly) 
elevated just beyond the middle; suture subbituberculate at summit of apical 
slope. Front tibiae gently curved. Length, 3-2-3-7 mm. 

Queensland: Mount Tambourine, in November (H. Hacker), in January (A. M. 
Lea), National Park, in November (Hacker), in January (H. J. Carter); New 
South Wales: Dorrigo (W. Heron). 

Allied to the preceding species, but average size larger, alternate interstices 
with series of setae scarcely defined even from the sides, but nevertheless giving 
the surface a flea-bitten appearance, and suture conspicuously subbituberculate at 
summit of apical slope. The elevation of the third interstice on each elytron, 
although distinct, is not so sudden as on #. bicristata. On some specimens there 
is a fairly large dark patch at the base of the prothorax, and the patch is continued 
on to the elytra, then suddenly dilated so as almost to touch the sides, excluding 
the shoulders, and terminated about the middle; but on some specimens the 
mottling is more vague, and is extended over most of the surface; in fact the 
scales on the prothorax and elytra (except on the sides) could sometimes be 
regarded as of a vaguely mottled muddy-brown colour. The abdomen of the 
female is more convex than that of the male, but the external sexual distinctions 
are otherwise very slight. 


EUTINOPHAEA SUBVIRIDIS, 0D. SD. 


Dark reddish-brown; legs and antennae paler. Densely clothed with scales 
varying from whitish to dark-brown, and becoming green on sides (invisible from 


BY A. M. LEA. 461 


directly above), under surface and bases of femora, in addition, with sloping setae, 
also varying in colour; on the elytra setae are confined to the alternate interstices. 

Head and prothorax sculptured as in preceding species. Elytra oblong-cordate, 
parallel-sided to beyond the middle; with regular rows of large, partly concealed 
punctures, odd interstices very feebly elevated above the even ones. Front and 
middle tibiae curved only at apex. Length, 3 mm. : 

Queensland: Cairns district (A. M. Lea). 

Allied to H. setistriata, but with green (usually glittering) scales on under 
surface, prothoracic and elytral markings different, and setae less numerous. The 
two specimens obtained are probably males, as the abdomen is but slightly convex, 
and are similarly marked; on the head and prothorax the scales are mostly of a 
pale slaty-grey, vaguely mottled with brown, and the prothorax with two feeble 
fascicles in front; on the elytra there is a fairly wide, irregular sutural space, from 
near the base to beyond the middle, where the scales are whitish, with a slight 
golden gloss, elsewhere the scales (except on the sides) are mostly mouse-coloured, 
with some dark-brown spots. The elevation of the third interstice, on each elytron, 
is no greater beyond the middle than elsewhere, but is marked there by a short 
strip of blackish scales; the suture is not subtuberculate. 


HUTINOPHAEA MURINA, 0. SD. 


Black; parts of antennae and of legs obscurely reddish. Densely clothed 
with mouse-coloured scales, changing to whitish on under surface; in addition 
with setae scarcely rising above the general level. 

Head with punctures traceable through clothing. Rostrum with a distinct 
median line, near apex traversed by a narrow groove, dividing off the glabrous 
muzzle from the densely clothed portion. Prothorax with sides strongly rounded 
and widest near apex, where the width is slightly more than the length; with 
large punctures indicated through clothing, and each containing a seta. Elytra 
oblong-cordate, much wider than prothorax, parallel-sided to beyond the middle; 
with regular rows of large punctures, appearing smaller through clothing; inter- 
stices even. Front tibiae curved only at apex. Length, 5-7 mm. 

North Australia: Groote Eylandt (N. B. Tindale). 

Considerably larger than any species previously referred to Hutinophaea, but 
several species of Ottistira (which should probably be regarded as a generic 
synonym) are quite as large. On this, as on other species of the genus, each 
scrobe is in two parts, a short, deep, and comparatively wide part, running parallel 
with (or but slightly divergent from) the upper edge of the rostrum, and a 
narrower and longer part, joining the upper portion at right angles, so as to 
resemble an elongated T. As on other species also, the claws are separated only 
at their tips. The rostrum is traversed by a narrow deep line near the apex, but, 
viewed from behind, the edge of the line appears as a shining carina bounding the 
glabrous muzzle. The clothing of the upper surface is almost uniform, but on 
close examination some feeble pale spots may be noticed. It is probable, however, 
that the clothing is variable. As the two basal segments of abdomen are flattened 
in the middle the type is probably a male. 


EUTINOPHAEA VITIENSIS, N. Sp. 


Dark reddish-brown; antennae and legs paler. Densely clothed with pale, 
fawn-coloured scales, variegated with chocolate-brown, becoming paler on under 


462 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, XXi, 


surface, but most of under surface highly polished, setae inconspicuous, even on 
legs. 

Head with rather large punctures indicated through clothing. Rostrum with 
a feeble median line, near apex traversed by a narrow deep line, separating the 
glabrous muzzle from the squamose portion. Prothorax feebly transverse, sides 
rather strongly rounded and widest slightly nearer apex than base; punctures 
well indicated through clothing. Elytra oblong-cordate, much wider than pro- 
thorax, parallel-sided to beyond the middle; with regular rows of large, partly 
concealed punctures, interstices evenly elevated. Front tibiae moderately strongly 
curved, the middle ones less strongly. Length, 2:-6—2-8 mm. 

Fiji: Viti Levu and Taveuni (A. M. Lea). 

’ Quite an ordinary species of the genus, with markings nearer those of 
H. variegata than any other Australian species. The claws from most directions 
appear to be single, but, as on variegata, they are slightly separated at the tips; 
the scrobes are also as on that species. On the pronotum there are two chocolate- 
brown vittae, narrowly separated by a pale median line, and usually one or two 
spots on each side; on the elytra there are numerous small dark spots, often 
joined together and covering almost as much space as the paler scales, on two 
specimens covering more; the abdomen and median parts of the metasternum are 
almost entirely glabrous, allowing the punctures to be plainly seen. One specimen 
has the paler scales of the upper surface of a slaty-grey colour. On another 
the scales at the sides of the sterna are greenish. 

Three specimens, from Viti Levu and Ovalau, probably belong to this species, 
but are considerably smaller (2 mm.); one specimen has the aedeagus protruding, 
so is certainly a male. The difference in size is probably sexual, and is no more 
pronounced than on the Australian H. dispar. 


EUTINOPHAEA PAPUENSIS, 0. SD. 

Blackish-brown; antennae and parts of legs obscurely reddish. Densely 
clothed with green and chocolate-brown scales. 

Head with fairly large, concealed punctures. Rostrum with squamose portion 
sharply limited by the scrobes and a transversely impressed line behind the 
muzzle. Prothorax slightly transverse, sides strongly rounded, punctures concealed 
but indicated through clothing. EHlytra oblong-cordate, much wider than pro- 
thorax, sides parallel to beyond the middle; with regular rows of large punctures, 
appearing much smaller through clothing, interstices even. Front tibiae strongly 
curved, middle ones moderately so, hind ones almost straight. Length, 2-8-3:0 mm. 

Papua: Mount Lamington, 1,300-1,500 feet (C. T. McNamara); New Guinea: 
Komba, 5,000 feet (Rev. L. Wagner). 

A beautiful species, and structurally quite an ordinary member of the genus, 
although the clothed portion of the upper surface of the rostrum is rather smaller 
than usual. It appears to be allied to Ottistira pulchella, from Morty 
and Macassar. On the type the brown scales form a basal triangle on the head, 
two interrupted vittae on the pronotum, and three irregular fasciae on the elytra. 
On the specimen from Komba the scales are more golden than green, the basal 
spot is absent from the head, and the elytral fasciae are more irregular. Ona 
second specimen from Mount Lamington the scales are entirely green, except that 
some of those on the elytra are golden. There are some pale setae on the upper 
surface, but as they do not rise above the general level they are inconspicuous 
even from the sides. 


BY A. M. LEA. 463 


EUTINOPHAEA, 1870. 
(Ottistira, 1872.) 

It appears to be probable that these names should be regarded as synonymous. 
The type of the former is #. nana, from South Australia, and the genus to Pascoe 
was monotypic, the type (or at least the first described species) of Ottistira is 
O. bispinosa from Dorey, etc. Hutinophaea, however, is now known to contain 
many species from Australia, Fiji, and New Guinea. Oitistira was recorded from 
New Guinea to the Malay Archipelago. The two species before me (0. ocularis 
Pase. and O. sulcicollis Faust.) agree in having the scrobes (which are very 
distinctive) and claws (soldered together except at the tips) uniform with those 
of the species of Hutinophaea, and in all other generic details. 


VITICIS, n. gen. 

Head moderately large. Eyes round and lateral. Rostrum short, dilated to 
near apex, each scrobe in two parts: a short upper portion, and a longer one 
cutting obliquely downwards slightly nearer eye than apex. Antennae with scape 
moderately long, funicle six-jointed, club elliptic-ovate. Prothorax subcylindrical, 
without ocular lobes. Scutellum absent. Elytra wider than prothorax. Front 
and middle coxae slightly separated, the hind ones more distant; femora bidentate; 
tibiae arched, hooked at apex; tarsi three-jointed. 

A remarkable genus, certainly close to Hutinophaea, but with the funicle six- 
jointed, and without a claw-joint, as in Misophrice of the Erirhinides. The third 
tarsal joint is wide, with a faint median notch, as on many species of Misophrice. 
The femoral dentition is also remarkable, each femur has an acute and fairly large 
tooth near the base, and a smaller one about the middle (very feeble on the 
hind pair). 

Genotype, the following species. 


VITICIS BIDENTATUS, 0D. SD. 

Black; scape and funicle reddish. Moderately densely but irregularly clothed 
with ochreous scales. 

Head with dense, parily concealed punctures. Rostrum as wide near apex 
as the median length, upper surface flat and with a feeble median line. Scape 
curved and clavate, first joint of funicle stout, about the length of second, but 
much stouter, second thinner and slightly longer than third, third slightly 
shorter and thicker than fourth, fifth and sixth slightly increasing in length and 
thickness. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, sides gently dilated near base, 
with dense punctures, partly concealed by scales. Elytra about one-third wider 
than prothorax, sides feebly dilated to beyond the middle; with regular rows of 
large, partly concealed punctures, the interstices even. Front and middle tibiae 
strongly arched, the hind ones less strongly. Length, 2-5 mm. 

Fiji (Blackburn’s collection), Viti Levu (A. M. Lea). 

The scales on the type, from some directions, have a golden gloss, but they 
usually appear opaque; on the elytra they are dense across the apical third so as 
to appear almost fasciate. The second specimen is badly abraded, and the scales 
are usually whitish, but some of them have a greenish gloss. 


NESOGENOCIS, n. gen. 
Head directed downwards. Eyes lateral, briefly elliptic. Rostrum short, near 
apex traversed by an impressed line, cutting off the glabrous muzzle from the 


464 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, XXi, 


squamose portion; scrobes each in two parts, a short upper one, and a longer 
one joining its middle at right angles. Prothorax with the front and sides 
rounded, the front turned down so as to present a vertical face, on the same 
plane as the interocular space, and the upper surface of rostrum. Scutellum 
absent. Elytra oblong-cordate. Front and middle coxae slightly separated; front 
tibiae long and strongly arched, middle shorter and less strongly arched, hind 
ones almost straight; claws soldered together almost to tips. 

Close to Hutinophaea, and with very similar head, rostrum, antennae, and 
claws, but at once distinguished by the prothorax; this is abruptly turned down 
in front, the turned-down portion being almost as long as the head itself, instead 
of the front edge of the prothorax appearing as a narrow section of a ring, as on 
most weevils. I know of no other genus having the prothorax like it, except the 
Australian genus Cucullothoraz, of the Phalidurides. There is a slightly thickened 
transverse ridge on each side of the scutellar position, but the scutellum itself is 
absent. 

Genotype, the following species. 


NESOGENOCIS CUCULLUS, 0. SD. 

6. Dark-brown; legs and antennae paler. Densely clothed with chocolate- 
brown and somewhat stramineous scales; sparsely setose. 

Head with punctures normally concealed. Scape-about as long as funicle, 
first joint of the latter rather large, club briefly ovate. Prothorax with apex 
and sides strongly rounded, base truncate; punctures large and well indicated 
through clothing. Elytra at base wider than base of prothorax, but no wider 
than its widest part, parallel-sided to beyond the middle; with regular rows 
of punctures, appearing much smaller through clothing, interstices even. Basal 
segment of abdomen depressed in middle. Length, 2-1—2:3 mm. 

Fiji: Viti Levu (A. M. Lea). ; 

The scales on the rostrum are mostly pale, on the head the pale ones encircle 
the eyes like a pair of spectacles, on the pronotum the dark scales are in the 
majority, leaving a median line and small spots and lines on the sides; on the 
elytra small pale spots are numerous, and there are two of larger size at the 
base and some forming an irregular fascia at summit of the apical slope; much 
of the under surface is-glabrous. The abdomen of the two specimens certainly 
appears to be masculine, as is also the great width of the prothorax; the front 
tibiae have some rather long hairs on the under surface, that are probably 
absent from females. 


EUPHOLOCIS, n. gen. 

Eyes lateral, almost circular in outline. Rostrum short, each scrobe in two 
parts: an upper one almost parallel with the upper edge of the rostrum, and 
a longer one joining it at right angles, directed to the lower surface, and passing 
close to the eye. Prothorax subecylindrical, without ocular lobes. Scutellum 
minute. Elytra rather long. Front and middle coxae slightly separated; femora 
dentate; front and middle tibiae faleate, the others almost straight; third tarsal 
joint widely bilobed, claws widely separated. 

Allied to Hutinophaea, but with claws diverging from their bases, and widely 
separated at their tips; the muzzle also is not separated from the rest of the 
rostrum by a deeply impressed line. In some respects it is close to Viticis, but 
that genus has clawless tarsi. 


IDY Ay Wik, IDA 465 


The two species before me are structurally much alike, but differ considerably 
in their clothing. The tooth on each front and middle femur is submedian and 
distinct, but on the hind ones is very feeble. 

Genotype, the following species. 


EUPHOLOCIS DENTIPES, 0. sp. 

Black; legs and parts of antennae reddish. Rather densely clothed with 
green and golden-green scales, becoming sparse on under surface. 

Head with dense, partly concealed punctures. Rostrum very short, its greatest 
width (close to apex) more than the median length. Scape rather short and 
clavate, basal joint of funicle stout, club ovate. Prothorax about as long as wide, 
sides gently rounded in middle; with rather coarse, partly concealed punctures, 
and with a feeble median elevation. Elytra about twice as long as wide, decidedly 
wider than prothorax, parallel-sided to about apical third; with regular rows of 
large punctures, partly concealed by scales, interstices even. Front femora arched, 
with an acute tooth at basal third, middle femora less arched and with a smaller 
tooth nearer the middle, hind femora still less arched, and very feebly dentate. 
Length, 2:2-2-5 mm. 

Queensland: Cairns district (A. M. Lea). 

There is a fairly distinct spot, or two conjoined spots, of paler scales, on the 
middle of each elytron, and two near the apex, but, except for these, the scales 
on the upper surface are almost evenly distributed; when wet they are nearly all 
brilliantly golden. 


EUPHOLOCIS MACULATUS, 0. SD. 

Black; part of scape reddish. Rather sparsely clothed, except for spots of 
blue scales. ( 

Head and rostrum with rather coarse punctures, becoming small and incon- 
spicuous on apical half of rostrum. Prothorax very slightly wider than long, 
sides gently rounded, punctures rather coarse, but leaving a short, shining, median 
ridge. Elytra rather long, considerably wider than prothorax, sides feebly dilated 
to beyond the middle; with regular rows of large punctures. Legs slightly longer, 
but otherwise much as on preceding species. Length, 2-2 mm. 

New Britain: Beining district (G. F. Hill). 

Structurally near the preceding species, but with blue scales covering much 
less of the surface, and mostly condensed to form spots or vittae; on each side 
of the prothorax there is a vitta extending from the base, where it is widest, 
almost to the apex; on each elytron there is a small spot on the third interstice 
at the basal fourth, a transverse series a short distance behind it, commencing on 
the fifth interstice, two spots at the apical fourth, and a right-angled strip at the 
tip; there are also some blue scales on the sides of the under surface; and on 
the upper parts of the legs. In some lights the scales glitter. 


PLATYNOTOCIS, n. gen. 

Head rather wide. Eyes round and lateral. Rostrum very short, muzzle 
glabrous; scrobes curved,. one portion of each directed downwards in front of 
the eye. Scape stout, scarcely the length of club, first joint of funicle as stout 
as scape, and half as long, second longer and thinner, club elliptic-ovate. Prothorax 
subeylindrical. Scutellum small but distinct. Elytra somewhat flattened, much 
wider than prothorax. Front coxae touching, middle ones moderately, the hind 


466 NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, XXi, 


ones widely separated. Femora stout, the hind ones very stout and strongly 
dentate, the others edentate, tibiae gently bisinuate on lower surface, third 
tarsal joint widely bilobed, claws widely separated at their tips. 

The type is a somewhat pear-shaped but flattened insect with head and 
rostrum approaching those of Hutinophaea, to which it is certainly allied, but 
from which it differs in its powerful hind legs, with widely separated claws; the 
hind legs also distinguish it from Hupholocis. 

Genotype, the following species. 


PLATYNOTOCIS PYRIFORMIS, N. SD. 


Dark brown; legs and antennae (except club) paler. Densely clothed with 
scales varying from almost white, through fawn, to chocolate-brown, and becoming 
sparser, thinner and uniform on under surface. 

Head with punctures faintly traceable through clothing. Rostrum with a 
feeble median line. Prothorax slightly longer than basal width, sides feebly 
dilated to base, and slightly rounded near it, with dense, concealed punctures. 
Elytra much wider than prothorax at base, sides dilated to beyond the middle, 
where the width is more than twice that of the base of prothorax; with regular 
rows of large punctures, only partly concealed by clothing; interstices even, except 
that the odd ones are slightly elevated above the even ones, more noticeably at 
apical third than elsewhere. Length, 3-4 mm. 

North Queensland (Blackburn’s collection). 

Most of the scales on the head and prothorax are fawn-coloured, but there is 
a narrow stramineous vitta on each side of the latter; on the elytra they are also 
mostly fawn-coloured, but there are several pale vittae at the base (one on each 
side continuing the one on each side of the prothorax), and an oblique fascia 
commencing near the suture before the middle and touching the sides near the 
shoulders, between the fascia and the base the clothing is mostly darker than 
elsewhere, beyond the clothing is faintly variegated, with indications of a pale 
fascia crowning the apical slope. 


PELIOCIS, n. gen. 


Head wide. Eyes small, lateral, and obtusely pointed in front. Rostrum short, 
scrobes reversed-L-shaped, the upper part of each rather short and wide, the 
lower part narrow and cutting into the side to its lower edge, slightly nearer 
the eye than the muzzle. Scape much shorter than funicle, first joint of the 
latter large; club elliptic-ovate. Prothorax subcylindrical. Scutellum distinct. 
Elytra subcylindrical, not much wider than prothorax, base trisinuate. Front 
coxae touching, middle ‘slightly, the hind ones moderately separated; femora 
unarmed; tibiae very short; third tarsal joint widely bilobed, claws widely 
separated at tips. 

Allied to Hutinophaea, Eupholocis and Platynotocis, but with very different 
legs, and eyes less rounded. In some respects it approaches Homoeotrachelus, 
but the species of that genus have the scrobes terminated before the lower edge 
of the rostrum. The claw-joint of the front tarsi projects but little beyond the 
lobes of the third, but on the middle and hind ones it passes them for some 
distance. The type is a subcylindrical insect, in appearance slightly suggestive 
of some species of Platypus, of the Scolytidae. 

Genotype, the following species. 


BY A. M. LEA. 467 


PELIOCIS SUBCYLINDRICUS, 0. Sp. 


Pale reddish-flavous, club darker. Densely clothed with stramineous scales, 
having a slight golden gloss, and somewhat variegated on upper surface. 

Head with punctures concealed but evidently rather dense. Rostrum more 
than twice as wide as long. Prothorax no wider than head across eyes, middle 
of sides very little wider than base or apex. Elytra very little wider than pro- 
thorax, parallel-sided to near apex; with rows of punctures appearing small through 
clothing, the interstices not separately convex. Metasternum elongate. Two basal 
segments of abdomen each as long as the three apical combined. Length, 4 mm. 

New South Wales: Gosford (H. J. Carter). Unique. 

On the pronotum there are four slightly infuscated vittae, continuous from 
base to apex; on the elytra there are numerous inconspicuous pale spots or 
vittae, and still fewer blackish ones, the latter mostly confined to the median 
parts of each elytron; there are also three brownish vittae on the three apical 
segments of abdomen. The type being in perfect condition, no scales were 
abraded to see the punctures more clearly, but on the elytra they appear to be in 
feeble rows without striae. 


. PHLYCTINUS CALLOSUS Boh. (Schh., Gen. Curc., ii, p. 523.) 


A small (6 mm., including the rostrum) grey weevil, with very prominent 
eyes, has been identified by Dr. Guy Marshall as this South African species. In 
Australia specimens have been taken at Blackheath (New South Wales) and 
Gawler (South Australia). 


Family CERAMBYCIDAE. 
RHYTIPHORA FRENCHI Blackb. 


Numerous specimens of this grand beetle were taken in the Cue district of 
Western Australia by Mr. H. W. Brown. The type was a female; the male differs 
in being somewhat narrower, with slightly longer antennae, but in particular by 
the abdomen; this has six large pads of dense pale clothing, instead of two, as is 
common in the genus; the two pads nearest the base are so large (they are 
sometimes so close together that they appear as but one) that they entirely conceal ° 
the suture between the two first segments and, as a result, the abdomen appears 
to be composed of but four segments. 


NOTES ON GALL-MAKING COCCIDS WITH DESCRIPTIONS OF 
NEW SPECIES. II. 


By WALTER W. FrRoccatt, F.L.S. 
(Plates xvi—xvii.) 
[Read 24th September, 1930.] 


In this paper I add five new species to the genus Apiomorpha. Three of them 
in the coccid collection of the Queensland Museum I have been able to study by 
the courtesy of the Director (Mr. Heber A. Longman). 

The female coccids are examined (when possible) and measured before they 
are boiled in potash. The descriptions are made upon the examination of the 
cleared mounted specimens. The specific characters are based upon the form and 
arrangement of the chitinous bands, spines and hairs, upon the dorsal surface of 
the derm, and the structure of the anal appendages which are very constant and 
distinct. 

I have added notes on the exact locality and range of several species, and 
record the specific names of the Hucalypts upon which they develop, previously 
undetermined. 


APIOMORPHA DUMOSA, Ni. SD. 


I am indebted to Mr. W. S. Campbell (late of the Department of Agriculture) 
for the specimens of this coccid which he collected from a Mallee Gum (Hucalyptus 
sp.) near Mildura, Victoria. 

The ¢ galls are typical circular tubes dilated at the apex, about 4 mm. in 
height, produced upon the small branchlets. 

The 9 galls develop upon the branchlets, clustered together or scattered over 
the twigs, attached to them with a slightly thickened base, green in colour, oval 
in form, with a small circular opening at the apex. The outer surface is some- 
times roughened; walls thin, hard; gall chamber large, oval. Height 12 mm., 
diameter 8 mm. 

Female coccid yellowish-brown, broadly rounded at the apex, turbinate, the 
abdominal segments contracted to the terminal ones which are narrow; anal 
appendages black, very small, separated from the base and pointed at the tips. 
Ventral surface of the usual wrinkled form, the cephalic portion folding over 
the thoracic segments, which are well: defined, the first and second depressed in 
the centre, with the third rounded across the body. Abdominal segments well 
defined, the last two very small. Length 9 mm., width 6 mm. 

Antennae reddish-brown, small, terminal one with tip curving inward. Legs 
normal, first and second pairs small. Hind ones longest, basal joint broad, rounded, 
second short, third short, blunt and curved inwards. Derm thick, with the 
abdominal segments chitinous. Dorsal surface lightly clothed with small spiny 
hairs. The abdominal segments also clothed with bands of large spines, crossing 


BY W. W. FROGGATT. 469 


the centre of each segment. On the first these spines are smallest and irregular, 
on the second to sixth the transverse chitinous bands show groups of pores and 
bands of fine pointed spines, and spiny hairs increasing in number and density 
to the base of the anal appendages. 


APIOMORPHA LONGMANI, n. sp. Plate xvi, fig. 2. 


This is one of the species received from the Queensland Museum. Exact 
locality and specific name of Eucalypt unrecorded. Locality, Queensland. 

The ¢ galls reddish-brown, produced upon the leaves, typical tubular form 
with the apex dilated. Height, 4 mm. 

The ° galls formed upon the branchlets, the action of the coccid causing a 
circular raised platform about 13 mm. in diameter and 6 mm. above the surface 
of the surrounding stem; from the centre of this, the circular gall stands up 
10 mm., with basal diameter 8 mm., and apical diameter 3 to 4 mm.; truncate at 
the apex with a small circular anal aperture. 

Female coccid yellow, legs and antennae reddish-brown, anal appendages 
black, tipped with reddish-brown. General form turbinate, abdominal segments 
elongated. Cephalic and thoracic portion rounded to the second pair of legs. 
Anal appendages rounded at the base, stout, long, separated from each other 
two-thirds from the base, rugose on the sides as if annulated, fringed with stout 
reddish hairs, and several stout spines towards the tips. Legs large, stout, first 
joint broad, second swollen, oval, truncate at the base and rugose on the inner 
margins, tarsal claws small, pointed. Antennae small, with short irregular joints. 
Dorsal surface clothed with rather long, scattered, spiny hairs on the cephalic 
portion and thoracic segments, thickly fringing the abdominal segments in 
regular bands and finest at the base of the anal appendages. Abdominal segments, 
with the first and second segments with transverse bands of irregular spiny hairs, 
third with similar bands interspersed with stout spines, fourth with similar 
band as third but further thickened with stout lobed spines, last two segments 
banded in a similar manner with longer, slender spines on the sides of the apex 
of the last two segments. 


APIOMORPHA ANNULATA, nh. sp. Plate xvi, fig. 6. 


This coccid is also described from specimens in the Queensland Museum, with 
no record of exact locality or specific name of Eucalypt. Habitat, Queensland. 

The ¢ galls scattered over the surface of the leaves, generally in line with, 
if not upon, the midrib of the leaf, typical cylindrical form dilated at the apex. 
Height 5 mm., diameter 1:5 mm. 

The @ galls growing on the branchlets singly or in groups of three or four, 
contracted and rounded at the base, cylindrical to the truncate apex, which is 
smooth, depressed in the centre, where it is slightly funnel-shaped, with a rather 
large circular orifice at the bottom. The basal portion of the gall is green, the 
apical portion ringed with light-brown scars. Sometimes the whole of the gall 
is ringed with these roughened scars, only the base being smooth. Height 12 mm., 
diameter 6 mm. 

Female coccid dull-yellow with darker transverse bands along the upper half 
of the thoracic and abdominal segments. Antennae and legs yellowish-brown, anal 
appendages reddish-brown. General form turbinate, abdominal segments of 
uniform width. Length 8 mm., diameter 5 mm. 


470 NOTES ON GALL-MAKING COCCIDS, ii, 


Antennae small, second and third joints rounded to the tip. Legs: first pair 
small, second and hind pairs large, basal joint squat, irregularly oval, second 
joint swollen in the centre, third joint or tarsal claw short, arcuate on the side, 
tip blunt. Dorsal surface of cephalic and thoracic segments covered with very 
small scattered tubercles each bearing a short, pointed bristle, the abdominal 
segments more thickly clothed with similar, tiny tubercles and a short band, 
increasing in length and density to the sixth segment, of large irregularly-rounded 
brown tubercles each bearing a short conical spine. Anal appendages reddish- 
brown, well developed, long, rounded on base and sides, which are serrate and 
fringed with fine hairs, finely pointed at the tips, which are almost in contact, 
with only a slight opening between them towards the tips. 


APIOMORPHA FUSIFORMIS, n. sp. Plate xvi, fig. 3. 

The galls of this curious species also came from the Queensland Museum 
collection. Exact locality and specific name of EHucalypt unrecorded. Habitat, 
Queensland. 

The ¢ galls unknown. 

The 9 galls produced on the surface of the leaves, singly or in groups of three 
or four, spindle-shaped, slender, cylindrical, narrowest at the base, broadest at 
the apex which forms a convex button of light-yellow, in the centre of which is 
the rounded anal aperture. Length 13 mm., diameter at base 1:5 mm., in the centre 
2mm. Probably coloured green when fresh. 

Female coccid dull-yellow, legs and antennae brownish, anal appendages light 
reddish-brown. General form round, tapering to tip of abdomen, elongate. Length 
7 mm. Antennae very small, legs small, hind pair hardly larger than the fore 
and middle pairs, basal joint short and broad, second joint short, broad, tarsal 
joint small, narrow, coming to a point. Dorsal surface lightly clothed with rather 
long fine hairs. The fourth, fifth and sixth abdominal segments with a transverse 
row of widely separated, small, short, conical spines. Anal appendages with a 
cone-shaped base, slightly rounded at junction with the last abdominal segment, 
truncate at base with the anal appendages only occupying half the apex which is 
fringed with fine hairs. Anal appendages narrow, straight, of uniform width to 
the tips, which are deeply arcuate, with a sharp point on either side, slightly 
serrate on the outer margins. 


APIOMORPHA SPINIFER, Nl. SD. 

The specimens were sent to me by Mr. Herbert Jarvis from Stanthorpe, 
Queensland. He collected them upon the foliage of an undetermined species of 
Eucalypt growing in that district. 

The ¢ galls unknown. 

The 2 galls are scattered over the surface of the foliage in a similar manner 
to those of Apiomorpha fusiformis, which they resemble in general form. They 
differ in being slightly shorter, cylindrical in form, not contracted at the base, 
but of a uniform thickness to the apex which is similar in form and coloration, 
but more depressed round the anal aperture. 

The female coccid is very similar in form, but the cephalic fold bears a short 
transverse chitinous plate near the summit, apparently above the base of the 
antennae, on which are three or four stout, short spines. The derm is more 
chitinous, particularly upon the abdominal segments. The thoracic segments 
and abdominal segments have a row of stout spines along the lower margin 


BY W. W. FROGGATT. 471 


varying in number on each. The first abdominal segment has a row of three, 
the second five, the third seven, fourth none to thirteen, the fifth five to seven, 
.and the sixth six to eleven. The anal appendages reddish-brown and somewhat 
similar in structure to those of Apiomorpha fusiformis, except that the inner 
spine is much smaller than the outer point. The curious stout spines on the 
cephalic portion are quite unique and unknown upon any other species of 
the genus. 


APIOMORPHA DIPSACIFORMIS Froggatt. Plate xvi, fig. 5. 


This year I have received a fine series of the male and female galls of this 
fine species from Mr. J. Macqueen, who collected them upon the branchlets of the 
narrow-leaved ironbark, FHucalyptus  pilligaensis at Millmerran, Southern 
Queensland. 

This is an interesting record because the exact locality or host-plant of the 
type was unknown when I received a bunch of female galls from South Australia 
with the information that they had .been collected in Queensland. It is evident, 
as can be seen in the figures given, that as the female gails mature the spiny 
filaments covering the surface become dry and brittle and break off. In the 
type the spiny filaments were much more developed and perfect than those 
figured in the present plate. 

The male galls (previously unknown) are somewhat like those of the allied 
species, Apiomorpha excupula, being attached to the twigs in the same manner 
in irregular little masses of tangled tubes, but are shorter, more irregular in 
form, and the filaments covering them are so fine that they almost look woolly. 
The closed apex is more rounded and ribbed, but opens out later in the same 
manner. In fresh specimens they vary in colour from light-red to reddish-brown 
and if anything are more massed together at the hase. 


APIOMORPHA DUPLEX Sch. Plate xvii, fig. 4. 


The female gall of this remarkable species is probably the largest insect gall 
in the world. I have had specimens more than a foot in length from the base of 
the gall to the tips of the stout flattened horns. As they spring directly from the 
side of a branch and are of the same green tint as the surrounding leaves, with 
their curling leaf-like tails, in spite of their size, they easily escape detection. 
This species seems to have a restricted range and, as far as we know, its com- 
monest locality is the Hawkesbury River district, ranging north as far as Glen 
Innes, but C. French, Jr., has found it at Dandenong Ranges, Victoria. The 
following is its range, with the host-plants: Hucalyptus piperita, Katoomba; 
EH. haemastoma, E. Camfieldi and E. eugenioides, Hornsby (W. F. Blakely) ; 
E. occidentalis, Glen Innes (I. Dorrington); H. saligna, Thornleigh (W. W. 
Froggatt); Hucalyptus sp., Paterson River (Rev. H. M. R. Rupp); Hucalyptus 
sp., Cheltenham (H. E. Ellen). 

Though the female galls have been known since Schrader described the species 
in 1862, we had no knowledge of the male galls until I found the specimens now 
figured, in the Herbarium of the Botanic Gardens, together with a female gall 
sent to the Curator by Mr. H. E. Ellen. 

Male galls massed together covering both sides of leaves and branchlets 
between them; there are more than a thousand galls on the leaves figured. They 
are dark-red, faintly striated on the outer surface, cylindrical, of uniform thick- 


472 NOTES ON GALL-MAKING COCCIDS, ii, 


ness from attachment to the surface of leaf to the apex, the latter rounded and 
closed (until the gall is full grown) with a raised cork-like plug. When it falls 
out the rounded apex is slightly expanded. They average 7 mm. in height. 
Diameter 1-5 mm. 


APIOMORPHA EXCUPULA Fuller. Plate xvi, fig. 1. 


This species was originally described from the Port Stephens district. I have 
since had specimens from the Tweed River. I now record them from the following 
localities in New South Wales: Narrabri, on Eucalyptus Woollsiana (J. H. Maiden) ; 
Ourimbah, on FH. paniculata (F. McPhearson); Wollomba State Forest, Nabrac, 
on EL. paniculata (L. C. MelIvor). : 

The male galls are either situated upon the twig at the base of the female 
gall, or more frequently form an irregular mass of twisted tubes turning at all 
angles, upon the branchlets. Each gall is about 6 mm. in height, of a greenish 
tint when fresh. It is an irregularly rounded tube, rough and clothed with fine 
filaments. In the immature specimen the apex is closed and covered with a tuft 
of filaments like a plug. When adult the plug drops off, leaving a roughened, 
rounded summit with a rounded opening into the male gall chamber. 


APIOMORPHA FLETCHERI Fuller. Plate xvii, fig. 7. 


In my previous paper last year, when noting the enormous number of female 
galls infesting the branches of the Red Box (Hucalyptus bicolor) on the Murray 
River, I stated that the male galls of this species were unknown. Since then I 
have received a fine series of the male galls with some female galls infesting the 
leaves of the Long-leaved Box (Hucalyptus elaeophora) collected by Mr. C. French, 
Jr., at Dandenong, Victoria. I have also a record of specimens of the female galls 
being collected at Gulgong, New South Wales (J. H. Maiden and J. L. Boorman) on 
Eucalyptus tereticornis. The ¢ galls are rich deep pink with a whitish bloom 
covering the upper surface. They are very slender, cylindrical tubes, broadest 
at the base, tapering slightly to the open apex, which is not dilated like the 
typical tubular galls of other species. They measure from 3 to 4 mm. in height 
and hardly 1 mm. in diameter. They are massed together on the upper surface 
of the leaves, so as to be almost in contact at the base. There are more than 
1,100 tubular galls on the largest leaf figured. 


APIOMORPHA PHARATRATA Sch. Plate xvii, figs. 5, 6. 


Two figures are given to show the normal form and the abnormal form 
when the male gall-mass is many times larger than the overshadowed female gall. 

- There are three species described of these curious combined male and female 
galls, formed by these coccids. The elongate-oval female gall is produced upon 
the midrib or base of a leaf stalk, and in some remarkable way the male larvae 
gather together on the side of the well-grown female gall, and by their united 
action cause a rounded excrescence to grow out from the surface of the female 
gall. This finally forms a fleshy sheath, rounded above, with the under surface 
flattened into a mass of coalesced, rounded tubes open at the apex, each containing 
a winged male. It would be very interesting to watch the early development of 
these galls for, while both the male and female larvae desert the matured gall 
at the same time, the female gall has to grow to a certain size before the male 
larvae can find lodgment upon it. ana 


BY W. W. FROGGATT. 473 


This species has a wide range: South Australia: Encounter Bay, on Huca- 
lyptus Baxteri (Prof. J. B. Cleland); Border Town, on Hucalyptus sp. (lL. G. 
Manning); New South Wales: Guyra, on EH. coriacea (Rev. EH. N. McKie); Braid- 
wood, on H. rubida (H. A. Vining); Kendall, on EL. pilularis (Prof. J. B. Cleland). 


APIOMORPHA ROSAEFORMIS Froggatt. Plate xvii, fig. 1. 


The type specimen, which came from the Manning River, New South Wales, 
was much larger than the specimen figured here. It has, however, the same 
bright coloration and slightly convex under surface of the mass of male galls. 

The specimen figured is of a brilliant red tint, but the under surface (the 
sheath of male galls) is clothed with a white bloom from the floury secretion 
from the enclosed larval male coccids, so that the outer margin is much brighter 
than the rest of the gall mass. 

Habitat—Middle Harbour, Sydney, N.S.W., on Hucalyptus sp. (Prof. J. B. 
Cleland). 


APIOMORPHA THORNTONI Froggatt. Plate xvii, figs. 2, 3. 


This is a very variable form of the “cocks-comb” group; the female galls 
formed on the leaves upon the main rib or stalk, oval and ribbed; the mass of 
male galls often very wrinkled and irregular in form. 

Lately I have received a very fine series of immature female galls from 
Archdeacon Haviland, who collected them at Portland on an undetermined species 
of Eucalypt. The first form of the female gall is an irregular, rounded rosette 
of soft reddish tissue with a roughly granulated surface, which, when opened, 
shows a tiny, white, oval cell, based on the surface of the leaf. The coccid 
enclosed is pale-yellow, rounded and thickly covered with floury matter and 
bearing two white tails. At this stage the galls are about 3 mm. in diameter. 
When more developed, though still rosette-like, they stand up from the leaf and 
the apex is open and surrounded with floury matter. These contain ‘perfectly- 
formed pupal coccids (if we can use the term), somewhat more elongate in form 
than the adult female. They have the same development of legs and anal 
appendages, and the rows of spines across the dorsal surface of the abdominal 
segments are very well defined. The female galls are usually almost full-sized 
before the mass of male galls accumulates and develops. 


APIOMORPHA URNALIS Tepper. Plate xvi, fig. 4. 

This species has a wide range over Australia from the west, across South 
Australia and Victoria, through New South Wales to Southern Queensland. It is 
an inland form and very partial to the small Mallee Scrub gums. It is very 
variable in form, but the thick-set vase shape is the most typical form, as figured 
(Plate xvi, fig. 4). 

I have included it in my plate to show the variation in the form of the female 
gall. The following localities and host-trees are recorded: Millmerran, South 
Queensland, on Hucalyptus pilligaensis (J. Macqueen). New South Wales: 
Condobolin, on H. sideroxylon (J. H. Maiden); East Merool, on H. macrocarpa 
(W. Campbell); Kenmore, on EH. melliodora (J. H. Maiden). South Australia: 
Paretta Forest, on Mallee (H. calycogona) (Botanic Gardens Herbarium); Border 
Town, on #. gracilis (L. E. Manning). Western Australia: Conderdes, on £. 
spathulata (W. V. Fitzgerald); Swan River, on Hucalyptus sp. (L. J. Newman). 


474 NOTES ON GALL-MAKING COCCIDS, ii. 


ove go be 


FU Se Ge te 2 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES XVI-XVII. 
Plate xvi. 


Apiomorpha excupula, showing the peculiar form of the ¢ galls and the various 
forms of the @ galls in all stages of development. 

Apiomorpha longmani, n. sp. § galls on branchlet. 

Apiomorpha fusiformis, n. sp. @ galls on leaves. 

Apiomorpha urnalis, showing the variations in form of the ? galls. 

Apiomorpha dipsaciformis, showing oc galls in groups like those of A. excupula and 
variations in form of @ galls. 

Apiomorpha annulata, n. sp., showing ¢ galls on leaves and @? galls on branchlet. 


Plate xvii. 


Apiomorpha rosaeformis, showing the rounded mass of ¢ galls above the slender @ 
gall attached to the leaf. 

Apiomorpha thorntoni, showing immature ribbed @ galls on leaf before the ¢ gall 
develops. 

Apiomorpha thorntoni, with the ¢ galls above the single 2 galls, when adult. 

Apiomorpha duplex, showing twig and leaves encrusted on both sides with ¢ galls: 

Apiomorpha pharatrata. Typical 9 gall with mass of ¢ galls. 

Apiomorpha pharatrata, with an abnormal mass of ¢& galls on @ gall. 

Apiomorpha fletcheri, showing massed & galls on upper surface of leaves. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XVI. 


Species of Apiomorpha. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XVII. 


Species of Apiomorpha. 


AN ABNORMAL XANTHIUM BURR. 
By J. CALVERT, M.Sc., F.L.S., Division of Plant Industry, Canberra. 
(Gomunioeitd by Dr. B. T. Dickson.) 
(One Text-figure. ) 
[Read 24th September, 1930.] 


During the course of investigations on Noogoora Burr (Xanthium pungens 
Wallr.) a collection of burrs made at Goondiwindi was received through Mr. 
A. P. Dodd of the Commonwealth Prickly Pear Board. While looking through 
these specimens, the abnormal burr, which is the subject of this note, was 
discovered. 


Text-fig. 1—Burr of Xanthium pungens Wallr., Noogoora 
Burr, showing A, B, two male florets; C, an unopened 
fioret; D, beak on the normal half of the _ burr. 


476 AN ABNORMAL XANTHIUM BURR. 


It is well known that the genus Xanthium is monoecious, that is, the flowers 
are unisexual, both sexes occurring on the same plant, the globular male 
inflorescence being surrounded by the female inflorescence which, after fertiliza- 
tion, develops into the common burrs. The burrs generally are bilocular, each 
loculus containing one seed, but sometimes multiple-seeded burrs are recorded, 
i.e., burrs with several loculi, each loculus containing one seed. Naturally- 
occurring multiple-seeded burrs have been recorded five times, as far as the 
writer can ascertain, four times in America by C. A. Shull (Bot. Gaz., 83, 1927, 
385; 84, 1928, 240) and once in Queensland, Australia, by J. White-Haney (unpub- 
lished report, Division of Plant Industry, 1929). 

In the present instance, two male florets, A and B in Text-fig. 1, were 
discovered occupying a portion of the burr, whilst just alongside, a loculus 
contained what looked like an unopened floret (C). This made up one-half of 
the burr and the other half consisted of the normal one-seeded loculus with the 
beak (D) projecting at the summit of the burr, as is usual. From the arrange- 
ment of the loculi it appears that one-half of the burr is normal while the other 
half is tending to become a multilocular burr. 

Concerning the two male florets, the abnormality may be either that (1) the 
involucre has enclosed part of the male inflorescence; or (2) some male primordia 
have taken the position usually occupied by female primordia. 

Summing up, the question appears to be whether the male primordia in 
question have wandered or the involucre taken upon itself to enclose these male 
primordia, both processes bringing about a similar result. 

P.S.—Since the above was written the May issue of the Botanical Gazette 
(Vol. 89, No. 3, 1930) has been received, containing an article by Dr. C. A. Shull 
on the occurrence of multiple-seeded Xanthium in Australia. In this he makes a 
significant statement, viz.: “It seems probable, therefore, that the sporadic occur- 
rence of these unique plants may be expected in any part of. the world where 
cockleburs are found, or at least in localities where two or more species occupy 
the same region”. 

Acceptance of his statement indicates the necessity of a widespread collection 
of Noogoora Burr material for the purpose of naming. In the most recent issue 
of the Journal of the Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, a note on the 
botanical name of material received, is published. 


TRICHOPTERYGIDAE OF AUSTRALIA AND TASMANIA. 
DESCRIPTIONS OF SIX NEW GENERA AND ELEVEN NEW SPECIES. 
By CEpRIC DEANE, A.M.LE. Aust, 

(Twenty-two Text-figures. ) 

[Read 24th September, 1930.] 


The only species belonging to this family of minute Coleopterous insects 
previously described from Australia are six species by A. M. Lea in the genus 
Rodwayia Lea, 1907, and one each in the genera Actinopteryx, 1872, and Ptilium, 
1878, by Matthews. With the material sent to me by the authorities of the South 
Australian Museum for naming, and other which has been collected, it is probable 
that the numbers will be greatly swelled. The author hopes to deal with these 
and some island forms in subsequent papers. 

One of the chief points of interest centring around this group is the fringed 
formation of the wings, the hairs composing the fringe often extending completely 
and uniformly around both anterior and posterior margins as well as apex. The 
length of these hairs is sometimes ten times as great as the width of the membrane. 
The hair fringing of the wings, although greatly developed in the Trichopterygidae, 
is by no means confined to this family, or even to the order Coleoptera, being 
present in most orders of insects. It appears to be a characteristic of size rather 
than kind, being usually most pronounced in the most minute forms. As we pass 
from the larger forms of insect life, such as the Cicadas and large wasps, to the 
smaller and finally to the extremely minute, a remarkable change commonly 
occurs when the overall length is in the neighbourhood of one millimetre; hair 
fringe appears on the posterior or trailing edge of the membrane and, extending 
towards the apex, passes round to the forward side, until in the smallest species 
it adorns the complete margin uniformly. Accompanying this transition the 
supporting rib—radius, costa, subcosta, etc., in the Cicadas—moves from the 
anterior edge to the centre. Under these conditions propulsion would be by a 
flapping movement of the wing, like that of a feather fan or a shark’s tail. These 
modifications, I should say, are provided by Nature to enable the creature to cope 
with meteorological and other physical forces, which in bodies of those dimensions 
would differ from those with which we are ordinarily acquainted. 


PHILAGARICA, n. gen. 


Oval, convex, margin entire. Head of medium size, scarcely visible from above, 
widest at base, deeply inserted in prothorax, not salient, widely produced anteriorly 
downwards to a chisel-edge medially excavated widely and faintly. Eyes medium, 
not visible from above, widely separated, the head conforming to the anterior 
marginal curvature of pronotum. Antennae eleven-segmented, 1 and.2 large sub- 


478 TRICHOPTERYGIDAE OF AUSTRALIA AND TASMANTA, 


cylindric, 2 longer than 1 but of equal diameter, 3 to 8 subequal, less than half as 
thick as 1 and 2, 9 to 11 large, of nearly equal thickness, thicker than 1 and 2, 
furnished with bristles, segments 9 and 10 spheroidal, 11 longer, pointed at apex. 
Length of antennae 0:45 of the length of insect without antennae. Palpi exserted. 
Pronotum widest at base, not exserted, posterior angles very acute, produced back- 
ward, lying close to body, conforming to integral margin. Prothorax transverse. 
Elytra sub-elongate, extending well beyond apex of abdomen, diaphanous, some- 
what tapering, rounded at apex. Lateral margins somewhat incurved at middle. 
Wings long, narrow, lanceolate membrane, fringed with fine long hairs, these 
hairs ten times as long as width of membrane at middle of latter. Legs: anterior 
strong, large; intermediate medium; posterior small; tarsi not slender, claws 
moderate to small. Anterior femora robust, wide, and somewhat flat, margins 
convex throughout, tibiae more siender, thickening towards apex, margin concave 
along interior basal half. Coxae: anterior medium, round, almost contiguous; 
intermediate not nearly contiguous, rather widely separated by ‘“‘sternal process”; 
posterior large, almost contiguous, occupying the full width of the body. Meta- 
sternum extending nearly to sides of body. Scutellum medium, visible portion 
rather small, triangular, one-seventh of width of base of pronotum. Sternal 
process conspicuous, lightly convex. 
Genotype, P. agilis. 


Philagarica is perhaps in general facies nearest to Nossidium Matthews, 
figured and described by him in his monograph of the family published in 1872. 
Some of the most conspicuous differences are: elytra extending far beyond apex 
of abdomen, metasternum attaining the sides of the body, head more deeply 
inserted in prothorax and almost concealed from above, pygidium rounded at 
apex, not tridentate. 


PHILAGARICA AGILIS, n. sp. Text-figures 1-3. 


Oval, convex, brown, translucent, scarcely pubescent, the several parts forming 
an integral margin. Without sculpture. Head normal size, very little visible from 
above, produced downwards, anterior medial excavation conspicuous, conforming 
to anterior marginal curvature of pronotum. Antennae 0:45 length of body. Eyes 
not visible from above. Palpi prominent, large. Antennal segments 9, 10 and 11 
of equal thickness, furnished with bristles up to one and a half times the length 
of the segment they are set on. Body widest before middle. Pronotum nitid, 
widest at base, lateral margins entirely convex, posterior angles very acute, 
produced backwards and conforming to the integral margin. Elytra slightly 
pubescent, elongate, extending well beyond apex of abdomen, diaphanous, some- 
what tapering, rounded at apex, lateral margins incurved at middle. Wings long 
narrow, the hairs of fringe equal and about ten times as long as width of membrane 
at middle. Hairs very pale, almost white. Membrane colourless with blackish 
patches. Legs: anterior strong, large, intermediate medium, posterior small; 
tarsi not slender, claws moderate to small. Sternal process conspicuous, lightly 
convex. 


Length, 0-57 mm.; width, 0-28 mm. 
Habitat.—Eungai, Macleay River District, N.S.W. (Lea and Deane). 


Type in Coll. Deane: co-types in South Australian Museum, National 
Museum, etc. ; 


| BY C. DEANE. 479 


PHILAGARICA PILOSA, nN. SDP. 


Elliptical, convex, light-brown, pilose, translucent, widest at middle. Head 
less deeply inserted, less concealed from above than P. agilis, more produced at 
mouth. Palpi rather small, concealed. Eyes just or almost visible from above, 
medium, moderately separated. Antennal segment 10 thicker than 9, 11 thicker 
than 10. Legs: posterior large. Antennae length 0-44 of the length of the body, 
segment 9 not as thick as 10 and 11 and considerably shorter than 8, segments 3-8 
slender, gradually thickening, subcylindric, 1 and 2 large, 2 larger than 1. Pro- 
notum paler than elytra, basal margin convex posteriorly at centre but reverses 
near angles, which are acute but small. Elytra entire, convex, darker than pro- 
notum, strongly pilose, slightly translucent on apical two-thirds, scarcely dehiscent 
at apex, but often not quite closed in repose, extending well beyond tip of pygidium, 
without depression along suture, lateral margins not incurved at middle. Wings 
1:92 times length of body, narrow, hairs of fringe dark-brown. Tarsi slender, 
claws large. Coxae: anterior globular, contiguous; intermediate rather widely 
separated by the mesosternal process; posterior contiguous, occupying the full 
width of body. Sternal process convex, prominent, hastate. 

Length, 0-74 mm.; width, 0°35 mm. 

Habitat—Waratah, Tasmania (Lea). 

Type in Coll. Lea; co-types in Coll. Lea and Coll. Deane. : 

This species may be compared with the previous one as follows: Body larger, 
about 30 per cent. on the length, paler, more strongly pilose. Head less clearly 
cut, front and clypeus less sharply defined; palpi less prominent and smaller, not 


Text-figs. 1, 2.—Philagarica agilis Deane. 
Text-fig. 3—Wing of Philagarica agilis Deane. 
Text-figs. 4, 5—Leaduadicus tolerabilis Deane. 


480 TRICHOPTERYGIDAE OF AUSTRALIA AND TASMANIA, 


so vitreous. Antennae with segments 9, 10 and 11 increasing instead of equal. 
Sternal process much narrower. Posterior coxae having anterior plate narrower. 
Posterior legs longer. 


LEADUADICUS, n. gen. 


Oval, convex, widest across elytra, margin not entire. Head medium to small, 
not concealed from above, widest across eyes, slightly exserted, margin concave 
before eyes, rounded in front. Eyes medium to small, easily visible from above. 
Antennae 11l-segmented, 1 and 2 large, 1 thickest, cylindric, 2 slightly tapering 
towards apex, 3 to 8 slender, 3 slightly tapering towards apex, 4, 5 and 6 cylindric, 
7 thickening towards apex, 8 and 9 elongate-elliptic, 8 to 11 increasing in size; 
length of antennae 0:48 of length of body. Palpi prominent, terminal joint large, 
oval or globular. Pronotum widest before base, nearly as wide as elytra; posterior 
angles not acute, lateral margins strongly convex, anterior margin convex, 
posterior concave on lateral thirds; base wider than base of elytra. Elytra oval, 
convex, widest at middle, subtruncate, exposing 2 or 3 dorsal segments of abdomen, 
not or only lightly rounded at basal angles. Legs moderate, subequal. Coxae: 
anterior strongly contiguous, subquadrilateral; intermediate almost contiguous, 
junction masked by narrow sternal process; posterior remote, medium to small. 
Femora: anterior robust, swollen at middle on anterior margin; intermediate 
robust, margins convex throughout; posterior medium. Tibiae subequal, medium; 
apices of anterior rounded, of intermediate truncate, of posterior pointed. Tarsi 
medium. Prosternum: divisional plates distinct. Mesosternum rounded at sides. 
Metasternum attaining sides of body; posterior margin of intercoxal piece lightly 
rounded. Abdomen with six visible ventral segments; basai, 2nd, 3rd and 4th 
not attaining side margins of elytra. Scutellum large, triangular, more than 
one-third the width of base of elytra. 

Genotype, D. tolerabilis. 

Leaduadicus is not closely allied to any existing genus. It differs from 
Ptenidium notably in having elytra truncate instead of elongate and rather pointed. 
It has the apical dorsal segments of abdomen exposed. The whole form is wider 
and more robust. The posterior coxae are more widely separated. 


LEADUADICUS TOLERABILIS, n. sp. Text-figures 4, 5. 


Widely obovate, light-brown, moderately convex, sparsely pubescent. Head 
widely rounded in front, irregularly clothed with fine pale pubescence; deep-brown. 
Pronotum convex, light-brown, uniformly pubescent, anterior margin rounded with 
sides, not forming humeral angles, lateral margins very convex, pale; posterior 
margin dark-brown. Elytra oval-quadrate, truncate, light-brown, uniformly 
pubescent; basal angles not rounded. Abdomen pale-brown, each ventral segment 
with a row of longish hairs. Pro-, meso- and metasternum flavous. Tarsi, palpi 
and segments 3 to 9 of antennae pale-yellow. 

Length, 1:125 to 1:25 mm.; width, 0-55 to 0°58 mm. 

Habitat.—Ourimbah, N.S.W., in rotting leaves (A. M. Lea). 

Type in Coll. Lea. 


LEADUADICUS IMPERIALIS, n. sp. Text-figures 6, 7. 


Widely obovate, brown to dark-brown, convex, strongly pubescent. Head 
widely rounded in front, deep-brown, pubescence white. Pronotum dark-brown, 


BY C. DEANE. 481 


pubescent, convex; anterior margin not merging into sides, forming obtuse humeral 
angles, these rounded; lateral margins convex. Elytra subquadrate, truncate, 
dark-brown, strongly pubescent, pubescence white to pale-yellow; basal angles 
rounded. Abdomen brown, each ventral segment with a row of longish hairs. 
Pro-, meso- and metasternum light-brown. Tarsi, palpi and antennae flavous. 

Length, 1:02 mm.; width, 0-55 mm. 

Habitat—Tambourine, Queensland (A. M. Lea). 

Type in South Australian Museum. 

L. imperialis differs from UL. tolerabilis-in having length smaller and less 
variable, width also less variable; form wider in proportion. The colour is much 
darker and the pubescence thicker and whiter. The humeral angles of pronotum 
are formed, the basal angles of elytra are rounded, and the apex of abdomen is 
less exposed. The posterior margin of metasternum is less curved. 


ACHOSIA, n. gen. 

Elongate-oval, subdepressed, widest across elytra. Head largely visible from 
above, prominent, widest across eyes; front medium, margins straight near 
insertion of antennae, capable of being exserted, narrowing a little towards base. 
Eyes easily visible from above. Mouth not produced. Antennae 11-segmented, 
basal segment and 2 large cylindrical, 3, 4 and 5 slender, 6 to 11 gradually 


on ee ge a 


\ / # : aE 


OO 


Text-figs. 6, 7.—Leaduadicus imperialis Deane. 
Text-figs. 8, 9.—Achosia lanigera Deane. 
Text-figs. 10, 11.—Achosia femoralis Deane. 


482 TRICHOPTERYGIDAE OF AUSTRALIA AND TASMANIA, 


becoming larger. Palpi elongate, 4-segmented; basal segment cylindrical, 2 
elongate, 3 very large, 4 minute, basal and stem of 2 forming a swan-neck. 
Prothorax: posterior angles obtuse, distinct; component ventral plates well 
marked; widest before base, almost as wide as body across elytra. Elytra widest 
at middle, subtruncate, exposing 3, 4 or 5 dorsal segments of abdomen; slightly 
dehiscent at apex. Legs uniform; coxae: anterior and intermediate globular, 
contiguous or almost so; posterior lamellate, very remote, rather small. Meso- 
sternum without medial carina, but having a small shallow granule on the inter- 
coxal process. Metasternum extending to sides of body, hind margin scarcely 
excavated for insertion of coxae; anterior outer angles acute. Scutellum triangular, 
large, more than one-third the width of pronotum at base. Abdomen with six 
visible ventral._segments. 

Genotype, A. lanigera. 

Achosia has for its nearest ally in the existing genera, Ptinella, from which 
it differs conspicuously in having posterior angles of pronotum not acute, elytra 
not so truncate; antennal segments 6 to 11 gradually becoming thicker towards 
the apex, segments 3, 4 and 5 more slender, almost cylindric. It is also allied to 
Cnemadocia described herein, the chief differences being antennal segments 8 to 11 
elongate-subovate, tapering towards apex, less plumage; mouth parts more centrally 
situate; frons less narrowed; humeral angles of pronotum more distinct; pro- 
thoracic sternites distinct; form narrower. 


ACHOSIA LANIGERA, n. sp. Text-figures 8, 9. 


Pubescent, brown. Head sub-trapeziform; front narrow,. rounded; rather 
exserted. Antennal segments 3, 4 and 5 cylindric, 6 to 11 pointed both ends. 
Pronotum wider at base than apex. Elytra with apices greatly rounded at interior 
corners, sloping away at sides. Femora slender. Tarsi slender. 

Length, 1:25 mm.; width, 0-49 mm. 

Habitat.—Glen Innes, N.S.W. (A. M. Lea). 

Type in South Australian Museum. 


ACHOSIA FEMORALIS, n. sp. Text-figures 10, 11. 


Elongate-oval, somewhat depressed, light-brown, pilose, slightly wider across 
elytra than prothorax, widest at one quarter from base. Head largely visible from 
above, rather deeply inserted, widest across eyes. Eyes rather large, visible from 
above. Mouth somewhat produced. Antennal segments 10 and 11 large. Scutellum 
rather broad. Elytra normal. Abdomen elongate. Posterior coxae somewhat 
produced longitudinally backwards; posterior femora dilated on hind margin. 

Length, 1-26 mm.; width, 0-51 mm. 

Habitat.—Tamworth, N.S.W. (A. M. Lea). 

Type in Coll. Lea. 


EPpoprTia, n. gen. 


Oval, very convex, especially below, widest across elytra. Head rather large, 
easily visible from above, widest across eyes, widely rounded in front. Eyes 
medium, little visible from above. Antennae 11-segmented, 1 and 2 large, 1 
cylindric, 2 barrel-shaped, apical margin projecting slightly at outer edges, 3 to 9 
slender, 3 thickening towards apex, 4 elongate-conic, 5 and 6 elongate-elliptic, 
7 and 8 oval, 9 similar to 8 but larger, 10 and 11 very large, flask-shaped, 7, 9, 10 


BY C. DEANE. 483 


and 11 but not 8 furnished with setae. Length of antennae 0:47 of length of 
body. Pronotum mobile, very convex, widest at middle, nearly as wide as body, 
anterior and side margins very convex throughout, basal margin with a wide 
space stretching from side to side to permit of movement relatively with the 
mesothorax. Elytra oval, convex, entire, extending beyond apex of abdomen, not 
dehiscent at apex, fitting unusually closely along entire suture, widest at one- 
third from base, margins inflexed on basal three-quarters to cover edges of meta- 
thorax, forming epipleurae. Wings long, stalked; membrane narrow, bent; hairs 
of fringe six times as long as width of membrane at middle. Legs slender, 
subequal. Coxae: anterior contiguous, junction hidden by prosternal process, 
somewhat transverse; intermediate globular, contiguous, junction hidden by meta- 
sternal process; posterior distant. Femora moderate. Tibiae: anterior truncate, 
thickening towards apex; intermediate normal, thickening towards apex, finely 
serrate on apical one-third or more of inner margin; posterior thickening at first, 
then tapering to apex, finely serrate on apical half of inner and one-third of outer 
margin. Tarsi rather short, claws rather large. Prosternal process rather long, 
prominent, slender, pointed. Metasternal process rather long, slender, blunt. 
Scutellum very large, triangular, more than half the width of base of pronotum, 
indistinct. Abdomen seven-segmented, basal segment fixed, or semifixed, all 
others mobile, retractile. 

Genotype, H. rotunda. 

Epoptia has its closest ally in the previously described genus Ptenidium, by 
comparison with which the following points of distinction are easily noticeable: 
Form more robust, wider, more highly convex; head set downwards, front 
decumbent; antennae differently clothed, pedicel without setae, this and basal 
thicker, segment 10 larger than 11, 10 and 11 only forming the club; eyes not so 
prominent;. pronotum much more convex, almost or quite as wide as elytra; 
these with apical margin entire; pronotum with a wide tergite running from side 
to side at base; scutellum much larger; posterior coxae more distant; abdomen 
contracted, not nearly extending to apices of elytra. 

Note——The scutellum is indistinct and tangential illumination is required 
to distinguish it. 


EPOPTIA ROTUNDA, n. sp. Text-figures 12-14. 

Oval, very convex, black, nitid, with sparsely scattered short hairs or setae. 
Head widely rounded anteriorly, front somewhat produced downwards. Antennae 
pale-yellow, rather small, slender, 0-48 of length of body. Pronotum very sparsely 
setose, very convex. Elytra oval, convex, entire, nitid, dark-brown to black, apices 
semi-transparent, flavous, the colour extending around side margins, tapering and 
disappearing at widest part of body. Wings: membrane long, narrow, colourless; 
hairs of fringe dark, visible through apical parts of elytra. Legs flavous. 

Length, 1:06 mm.; width, 0°57 mm. 

Habitat—Launceston, Tas. (A. M. Lea). 

Type in South Australian Museum. 


TRICHOPTERYX AUSTRALICA, n. sp. Text-figures 15, 16. 

Quadrate, lightly convex, dark-brown to nearly black, opaque, pilose, dorsal 
surface strongly granulate, sides parallel. Head largely visible from above; eyes 
hardly visible from above, large. Antennae rather short, slender, segments 1 and 
2 large, subcylindric, 2 largest, 3 to 8 slender, elongate-oval. each being thicker 


484 TRICHOPTERYGIDAE OF AUSTRALIA AND TASMANIA, 


at apical half than basal, 9 to 11 larger, increasing in size and diameter, 11 largest 
of the three but not so large or so thick as 2, 7 and 8 not thicker than 5 and 6. 
Pronotum scarcely wider than elytra, widest at or near base; posterior angles 
not very acute. Elytra quadrate, parallel, truncate, exposing pygidium, opaque. 


re 


Wo A 


Text-figs. 12,13.—Hpoptia rotunda Deane. 
Text-fig. 14.—Wing of Hpoptia rotunda Deane. 
Text-figs. 15, 16.—Trichopteryx australica Deane. 


Legs: anterior and intermediate nearly equal; posterior smaller and more slender; 
tarsi very slender, rather long; coxae: anterior round, medium, contiguous; inter- 
mediate small, nearly contiguous; posterior very remote. Metasternum: posterior 
intercoxal production moderate or weak. Scutellum: visible portion large, nearly 
one-third the width of pronotum at base. 

Length, 0-78 mm.; width, 0-47 mm. 

Habitat—Melbourne (C. Deane), Ferntree Gully, ete. (C. Oke). 

Type in Coll. Deane. 

The dorsal facies of this species somewhat resembles that given by Matthews 
for T. volans, but posterior outer angles of elytra are curved downwards, and head 
larger. Antennae are 0-44 of length of insect as against 0-55 for Matthews’ out- 
line figure for the genus. 


CoOOHLIARION, n. gen. 

Oval, highly convex above, rather flat below, margin entire. Head medium to 
small, visible from above, deeply inserted in prothorax, lightly salient, front not 
produced, mouth produced. Eyes wanting. Searcely conforming to anterior 
margin of pronotum. Antennae rather short, 0:31 of the length of body, 11- 
segmented but appearing only 10-segmented, segment 3 contained within 2; 1 and 2 


BY C.- DEANE. 485 
large, 3 to 9 slender, 10 and 11 large forming the club, bristles twice as long as 
segment on which they are set. Setae on club long. Body receding into shell 
cavity formed by pronotum and elytra as in Coccinellidae and Paropsis. Widest 
at base of pronotum. Pronotum widest at base, posterior angles sharp, but not 
acute. Elytra entire, extending beyond abdomen, narrowing towards apex, not 
dehiscent at apex. Wings absent. Legs: femora robust, having deep grooves for 
the reception of the tibiae. Tibial interior outline convex, exterior nearly straight. 
Intermediate tarsi with a hook process attached to base of basal segment. Coxae: 
anterior elongate, transverse, separated by small prosternal positive process; inter- 
mediate subtriangular, separated by small mesosternal receptive process; posterior 
large, not nearly contiguous, extending to sides of body. Abdomen with six 
visible ventral segments, taper conforming to elytra. Metasternum attaining the 
sides of the body, scarcely produced anteriorly between the coxae. Mesosternal 
carina with a groove for the reception of the prosternal process. 

Genotype, C. victoriense. 

Cochliarion differs widely from all previously described genera, especially in 
having form more compact, even more so than in Rodwayia; margin more oval, 
more entire; appendages secluded in repose; more convex above; head decumbent; 
anterior coxae narrower and more oblique. This genus is blind, a feature which 
it possesses in common with Rodwayia of Australia and Limnodes of America. 
Also the antennae have a passing resemblance to those of Rodwayia, one of the 
chief differences being the greater size of the basal segment in the new genus. 
In other features and in general form Cochliarion in no way suggests Rodwayia, 
the former being almost subnavicular, while the latter is subquadrate. The 
striking and conspicuous form of sternal process, so characteristic of Rodwayia, 
does not appear in Cochliarion. 


COCHLIARION VICTORIENSE, n. sp. Text-figure 17. 


Oval, brown. Antennae yellow, segments 1 and 2 barrel-shaped, 3 of peculiar 
form, enclosed within 2, 4 cylindric, 5 and 6 ovoid, 7, 8 and 9 nearly globular and 
equal or very slightly increasing in width, 10 and 11 large forming the elub, 
10 nearly globular, 11 pointed. The bristles more than twice as long as the 
segment on which they are set. Legs rather short, femoral grooves deep. Coxae: 
anterior narrow, diagonal; intermediate triangular, their anterior and approaching 
angles rounded. Intermediate tarsal appendages long, claws almost obsolete. 
Mesosternal median groove small, deep, proceeding to a blunt carina. 

Length, 0°87 mm.; width, 0-5 mm. 

Habitat.—Ferntree Gully, Vic. (C. Oke). 

Type in Coll. Deane. 


RODWAYIA GRANDIS, n. sp. Text-figures 18, 19. 


Large, ovate-quadrate, widest across pronotum at one-third from base, convex, 
reddish, marginal outline interrupted at hind angles of prothorax and at apex of 
elytra. Head visible from above, conforming in front to the anterior curvature 
of pronotum, paler than pronotum. Palpi small. Antennae 10-segmented, robust, 
short, 0°22 of length of insect without antennae, basal segment small, deeply 
inserted, 2 large, ellipsoidal, 3 to 7 normal, cylindric, of equal thickness, 8 sub- 
conic, much smaller than 9, 9 globular, 10 largest, pointed, 8, 9 and 10 forming the 
club, bristles not longer than the segments on which they are set. Pronotum: 


486 TRICHOPTERYGIDAE OF AUSTRALIA AND TASMANIA, 


posterior angles very acute, projecting backwards. Legs: anterior and inter- 
mediate rather long; tibiae curved, convex sides exterior, long, slender, not 
thickening towards apex; anterior and intermediate femora very broad and flat; 
posterior femora concealed by coxae. Sternal process large, posterior medial and 
anterior side marginal. incurvatures very shallow. Posterior coxae large, quadrate, 
‘widely distant. Abdomen with six visible ventral segments. Elytra extending 
beyond pygidium, slightly tapering, rounded at apex. 

Length, 0:96 mm.; width, 0-61 mm. 

Habitat.—Belgrave, Vic. (C. Oke). 

Type in Coll. Deane. 

Rk. grandis differs from R. orientalis (Text-fig. 20) notably in having posterior 
angles of pronotum less acute, posterior coxae almost square, and the prosternal 
process larger and much less excavated all round; the insect as a whole is 
considerably larger; colour darker and redder; pubescence coarser. 


Text-fig. 17.—Cochliarion wictoriense Deane. 
Text-figs. 18, 19.—Rodwayia grandis Deane. 
Text-fig. 20.—Rodwayia orientalis Lea. 
Text-figs. 21, 22.— Cnemadowia okei Deane. 


CNEMADOXIA, Nl. gen. } 
Elongate-elliptic, very large, widest across elytra at one-third from base. 
Head, pronotum and elytra clothed with short hairs. Head largely visible from 
above, large, subtriangular, pointed anteriorly. Eyes easily visible from above. 


BY C. DEANE. 487 


Antennae long, slender, 11-segmented, 1 and 2 very large, cylindric, 3 to 11 slender, 
clavate, 7, 8, 9 and 10 gradually increasing in size, 10 and 11 subequal; setae 
fine, long, numerous. Pronotum widest before base, posterior angles not acute; 
side margins uniformly rounded. Hlytra widest behind base, truncate, a little 
dehiscent at apex. Legs long; femora slender, straight, nearly equal. Coxae: 
anterior contiguous; intermediate nearly contiguous; posterior very remote. 
Metasternum attaining the sides of the body. Scutellum: visible portion large, 
more than one-quarter the width of base of pronotum. Metasternal process 
prominent but not carinate, of peculiar form. Abdomen with six visible ventral 
-segments, projecting beyond apices of elytra. 
Genotype, C. okei. 


Cnemadoxzia, when compared with previously described genera from other parts 
of the world, is possibly nearest to Ptiliodes figured in Matthews’ monograph of 
the family (Supplement). The chief differences are: form more oval, much 
larger; antennae slender, segments 6 to 10 elongate-conic, each thickening towards 
the apex, 5 to 11 furnished with long hairs, head narrowly produced in front; 
prothorax widest behind middle. Compared with Ptinella it has antennal 
differences as above, also front and hind angles of pronotum not acute, posterior 
margin of metasternum not deeply excavated at coxal insertions; elytra less 
truncate; dorsal apical abdominal segments less exposed. From Ptilium it differs 
in antennal segments 6 to 10 subclavate; hind angles of pronotum more distinct; 
elytra less elongate; coxae narrower laterally, and widely separated. It also 
bears certain resemblances to the genus Achosia described above (see note, p. 482). 


CNEMADOXIA OKEI, n. sp. Text-figures 21, 22. 


Elongate-elliptic, large, pale-yellow, pubescent. Head narrowly pointed in 
front. Mouth finely produced. Palpi prominent, bifid. Antennae very slender, 
long, segments 6 to 11 clothed with numerous long fine hairs, 6 to 10 increasing 
in size, 10 and 11 almost equal; basal and second segment cylindric, 1 slightly 
thicker than 2. Pronotum with side margins entire, more strongly curved 
anteriorly. Elytra: side marginal curvature elliptical, conforming to sides of 
abdomen. Legs long; femora robust; tibiae slender, straight; anterior and inter- 
mediate scarcely thickening towards apex, posterior thickest at middle, tarsi 
well formed. Abdomen exposed beyond apex of elytra. 

Length, 1:37 mm.; width, 0-54 mm. 

Habitat.—Victoria (C. Oke, in nests of the ant, Amblyopone obscura). 

Type in Coll. Deane. 


In submitting the foregoing descriptions of new genera and species, and also 
a number of other new genera and species of this family which, it is hoped, will 
follow in subsequent papers, I have to thank Mr. A. M. Lea and the authorities of 
the South Australian Museum, Miss Winifred Kent-Hughes and the, authorities 
of the Canberra Museum, and Mr. C. Oke for the gift of specimens and loan of 
others, Mr. F. Hrasmus Wilson, Mr. W. B. Gurney and Mr. C. Oke for the loan of 
literature, Mr. R. Blackwood for the gift of specimens, and Mr. A. M. Lea for 
checking the descriptions contained in the foregoing paper. 


NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA. XXVI. 


By J. R. MALtocu. 
(Communicated by Dr. G. A. Waterhouse.) 


(Three Text-figures. ) 


[Read 24th September, 1930.] 


Family OCHTHIPHILIDAE. 

This group has been variously treated by systematists, in some cases as a 
subfamily, and in others either as a tribe, or as a family. In his most recent paper 
on the families of European Diptera, Hendel has used the latter category and 
called it Chamaemyiidae. In two previous papers in the present series I have 
had occasion to deal with the genus revised below, and in both cases I referred it 
to the subfamily Ochthiphilinae, placing the latter in the family Agromyzidae 
according to the more general practice in North America and Europe. It is 
my opinion that the placing of the group in Agromyzidae cannot be maintained, 
and I consequently tentatively accept it as a distinct family, distinguished from 
others in its neighbourhood by the lack of breaks in the costa, the complete 
auxiliary vein, presence of a cross-vein at base of discal cell and a complete anal 
cell, lack of vibrissae and of distinct hairs on the arista. This characterization 
places it close to the family Sapromyzidae, but the preapical tibial bristle is 
undeveloped, and the propleural is lacking. 

For the information of Australian students of the acalyptrate Diptera, I 
present below a key to all the genera of this family known to me, many of them 
not as yet in the material from Australia which has reached me. 


Key to the Genera. 


1. Frontal orbits each with one or more well developed bristles .................. 2 
Frontal orbits without bristles in front of the verticals ...................... 6 

2. Head pointed at base of antennae, the face almost horizontal; wings distinctly 
Spotted) with LuUSCOMS) fas caessesce eo een uses ssl naelicinel eee ide neue Me eae henry cess Acrometopia Schiner 

Head not pointed at base of antennae, the face shorter and nearly, or quite, vertical; 
WANES) MUMS WOTEOR ae cat seis ieee ac uitr vaeerrey Le aA ai Sota eae) NU RSUT ARTSY oweaisa SUPSW Eo ete ore enc UA eer 3 

3. Thoracic dorsum with four pairs of dorsocentral bristles; ocellar bristles absent ; 
mesopleura bare. 22M eek Na Bae oe een EE Ne Te eg Chamaemyia Panzer 
Thoracic dorsum with two or three pairs of dorsocentral bristles; ocellar bristles 
present, ‘Sometimes: short wan Gy swiea ea pes yyei cious - 1 sasveloeiey cde resales ice uc i ueueh ay casey ucts 4 


4. Thoracic dorsum with three pairs of well developed dorsocentral bristles .......... 
CeO ORONO EORTC U ONES MALUiGi 6 bloc] OOS IC OO SIDI MIEReG ont clues Ochthiphila Fallen 


Thoracic dorsum with but two pairs of well developed dorsocentral bristles .... 5 
5. Mesopleura with one strong hind marginal bristle ........ Pseudodinia Coquillett 
Mesopleura without a hind marginal bristle ................ Pseudoleucopis Malloch 
GO. sAristaly Lalckoin cca. eeecensners dapsone onee cee cue AM SG Raaeiay ra eon arlet eon Cryptochaetum Rondani 


ALISA MPRESEM by oisje ai czcanedatsge cocoons toy seclou stays taR eee te ttehs col ue gis deh ciate te eae erect NEL ea nae oats tc) ra ee nS Saree 7 
Costa with small setulae on under surface; species glossy blue-black .......... 

Hae oie GnaTE eid otercitch G- chc ioioiheG bid a loncanad oft oid oc orav oun mroloko Gleiahe ata: bore Paraleucopis Malloch 
Costa not setulose; species densely grey dusted .................. Leucopis Meigen 


~ 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 489 


Genus PsSEUDOLEUCOPIS Malloch. 


My reason for dealing with this genus at the present time is that I have 
received from Mr. A. Tonnoir examples of a species which he informs me may 
be of considerable economic value and, as he desires a specific name for it, I am 
compelled to make a revision of the described species and augment the published 
data thereon. 


The species described as new in this paper bears a label stating that it was 
“Dred” from Eriococcus sp. and, in his letter, the sender states that it is a 
parasite. I have another species labelled “parasite’’, referred to below, but I am 
inclined to suggest that the species are rather predaceous than parasitic, though 
the distinction is sometimes a rather fine one. The genus Cryptochaetum is 
undoubtedly parasitic in the larval stages, living inside its host, but Leucopis, 
on the other hand, is predaceous, feeding in the larval stages on various plant 
lice, and travelling about amongst its prey like a small syrphid larva which it 
rather closely resembles. Of course, in the case of the present genus, the larva 
may attach itself either outwardly or internally to a single host-specimen and thus 
be rankable as a true parasite. In this latter case its efficacy would be much less 
than if it were predaceous and destroyed a number instead of but one specimen 
of the species upon which it preys. However, these matters are of economic and 
not systematic importance and, aside from merely referring to them, I give them 
no weight herein. 


I have not previously presented a key to the species of this genus and to make 
it possible for students to recognize them without referring back to the original 
descriptions, I do so now. 


Key to the Species. 


1. Abdomen with the tergites conspicuously bicoloured, deep velvety-black at bases 
and densely whitish-grey-dusted at apices; third antennal segment sharply 
angulate at upper, broadly rounded off at lower apical extremity ............ 
Bee cacy tories Busey ree ene MME MNS RE Sm eee Yas Ueto clrehpet dons ati euis uioh crue gefeaatsget ce hie utes fasciventris Malloch 


Abdomen not conspicuously bicoloured on dorsum, either entirely shining black or 
with slight grey-dusting which is not confined to apices of the tergites; third 
antennal segment equally broadly rounded at upper and %Ilower apical 
EXTREMES, RAt ewer ey ome cei tatrey NUNes Reeditan catietiee oh te lew Alon sNemeeos Gh veditic sh edness cae Reneeenes a 2 


2. Frontal orbits when seen from behind narrow, grey-dusted to base of upper orbital 
from upper extremity, from there to lower orbital very narrowly or not at all 
grey-dusted, slightly so at base of the bristle, and practically without dusting 
from there to anterior margin; face with a linear carina above, which becomes 
greatly elevated to epistome, and glossy-black on each side below; tibiae largely, 
tarsi entirely, itestaceous) yellowmMy iin nse) cee oe cle acne magnicornis Malloch 


Frontal orbits when seen from behind grey-dusted on their entire extent, sometimes 
narrowed above or below, but never without a broad grey portion between the 
orbital bristles; face with a linear carina on upper half, but slightly, or not 
at all, elevated in centre below, and entirely dull-grey-dusted .............. 3 


3. Frons distinctly longer than its width at vertex, the latter distinctly less than one- 
third of the head-width, interfrontalia when seen from behind dull black, much 
darker than the grey-dusted orbits, the latter reduced to a mere line opposite 
posterior ocelli; ocellar bristles much weaker and shorter than upper pair of 
LTONLCO=OGDNGATS ge bj id aye ts She eaNs eRe eer ey ote ake olhgoe! etl Sy ay eee recs cle flavitarsis Malloch 


Frons as wide as long, at vertex much more than one-third of the head-width, inter- 
frontalia when seen from behind almost as densely grey-dusted as the orbits, 
the latter not attenuated behind; ocellar bristles at least as long and strong 
AS) WAS) DI AHe WEIS Ole IcoOpMUO-Oclorsyly Soaonoaoccwosesusccnacoaacds benefica, n. sp. 


490 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXVi, 


PSEUDOLEUCOPIS FASCIVENTRIS Malloch. 

Besides the type material from Waterfall, N.S.W., I have a male from 
Cronulla, N.S.W., which differs from the former in having the basal black fascia 
on visible tergites 2 to 4 carried over the lateral curves instead of tapering off 
posteriorly and ceasing at the lateral curve on anterior margin. This may 
represent a distinct species, but the third antennal segment is similar to that 
of the type, and the face has the same raised vertical line on the upper half. The 
inner cross-vein of the wing is nearer to the middle of the discal cell than in the 
other group, sometimes even a little basad of the middle, and the penultimate 
section of fourth vein is thus almost half as long as the ultimate section, while 
in the other species of the genus listed below the inner cross-vein is distinctly 
beyond middle of the discal cell and the penultimate section of fourth vein is 
always much less than half as long as the ultimate one. 


PSEUDOLEUCOPIS MAGNICORNIS Malloch. 

This species is readily distinguished from the preceding one by the rounded 
apex of the third antennal segment, the elevated lower portion of the face with 
its glossy-black colour, and the paler legs. 

Described from Sydney, N.S.W. 


PSEUDOLEUCOPIS FLAVITARSIS Malloch. 
I have seen only the type and one other specimen of this species. There is 
no record of the larval habits of the type, but the additional specimen has a 
label on it with the following notation: ‘‘Parasite on Mealy-bug on Ac. linearis”. 


PSEUDOLEUCOPIS BENEFICA, Nl. Sp. 

6, 2. Similar in general coloration to flavitarsis, but the frons is more evenly 
pale-grey-dusted when seen from behind, the mesonotum has traces of two sub- 
median brownish vittae on anterior half and two fainter outer vittae, and the 
apical segment of each tarsus is slightly infuscated. 

Structurally the two species are very similar, but the head seen from above 
is differently proportioned, as indicated in the foregoing key to the species, the 
inner vertical pair of bristles is proportionately longer and erect and incurved, 
not proclinate and incurved as in flavitarsis, the portion of the frontal orbits 
anterior to the lower bristle is less copiously haired, and the frons is not 
appreciably widened anteriorly as in that species. The thoracic dorsum is not so 
closely haired as in flavitarsis, but otherwise they agree very closely. 

Length, 2-5 mm. ; 

Type, male, allotype, and two paratypes, Black Mt., F.C.T., December, 1929, 
“Bred from Hriococcus sp.” (A. L. Tonnoir). 


Genus CrRYPTOCHAETUM Rondani. 
I have already dealt with the species of this genus known to me from — 
Australia in a paper in this series. 


Genus LEucoPiIs Meigen. 

I have not seen any species of this genus from Australia, but it very probably 
occurs here as it is almost cosmopolitan in distribution. I have divided the genus 
into three subgenera and should it occur in Australia it will be of interest to 
find out which subgenus, or subgenera, may appear. 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. 


Genus OcCHTHIPHILA Fallen. 
This genus is almost as widely distributed as Leucopis, but it is unknown to 
me from Australia and its life-history details have not been clearly established. 


cf te 


gas 
Ra as 
Ya 


Genus CHAMAEMYIA Panzer. 
This genus occurs in the old world and I have taken it in the United States. 
It was for many years considered as a synonym of Ochthiphila, but it is quite 
Wistinct. 


Family ORTALIDAE. 
Genus RIVELLIA Robineau-Desvoidy. 
Up to the present time I have seen three species of this genus from Australia. 
They may be distinguished from each other as in the key presented below. 


Key to the Species. 


1. Wing without black fasciae, with only the following black marks: Along costa to 
slightly beyond humeral cross-vein, in the entire subcostal cell, and a spot 
on tip of third vein touching costa which extends from about midway between 
apices of second and third veins to a little below apex of latter, but never to 
fourth: Vein Ge xtStre rey 8 6 ele, clates ois set abs enshauauiccsicuauswer seeue sae ae connata Thomson. 

Wing with more extensive black markings, the basal and apical marks much larger, 
and two complete, or almost complete, fasciae centrally, one over inner cross- 
Wea, WIA Ola Owe OUP GROSEAVGITN ooas os bebboooconeoonopoonoodavocsoouubn 2 


2. Apical dark mark on wing never encroaching on tip of marginal cell, though there 
may be an isolated dark spot there, and not extending more than midway 
across first posterior cell near its apex, costal cell almost uniformly dark; 
femora and tibiae black, knees yellow (Text-fig. 2) .......... isolata, n. sp. 

Apical dark mark on wing more elongate, always encroaching upon apex of marginal 
cell and extending over entire apex of first posterior cell to apex of fourth 
vein, apical half or more of costal cell hyaline (Text-fig. 3); legs generally 
VSL OW ~ Oe ierarepel sieteec deen occ even laencterel cline cecal aan aff ol uate tatabens) aGensieaetbawa a age Asbek virgo Hendel 


Text-fig. 1.—Wing of Rivellia connata. 
Text-fig. 2.—Wing of Rivellia isolata. 
Text-fig. 3.—Wing of Rivellia virgo. 


RIVELLIA CONNATA Thomson. 
I have already recorded this species from Australia. It occurs in the Samoan 
and Fiji Islands. 
A 


492 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXVi. 


RIVELLIA virco Hendel. 


This species is very similar to the next one, comparative characters being 
given under the description of the latter and in the foregoing key. Wing as Text- 
figure 3. 

Locality: Herberton, N. Qld., January, 1911, 3,700 feet (Dodd). In Lichtwardt 
collection, Deutsches Entomologisches Museum, Berlin-Dahlem, Germany. 


RIVELLIA ISOLATA, N. SD. 


6, 2. Frons brown, becoming orange in front, orbits white-dusted except on 
the upper fourth which, like the ocellar triangle, is shining black; face orange, 
infuscated above, and slightly grey-dusted; antennae dull-orange, third segment 
darkened apically; aristae black; palpi fuscous, paler at apices. Thorax dark 
metallic-blue, slightly obscured by grey-dusting. Abdomen concolorous with 
thorax, without dusting, the surface roughened or granulose, and rather densely 
covered with decumbent black hairs. Legs black, apices of coxae and femora, and 
all tarsi except their apices, fulvous yellow. Wings hyaline, with black markings 
as in Text-figure 2. Calyptrae pale. Halteres missing in type material. 

Vertex with four strong bristles, the outer pair divergent, inner pair cruciate; 
two orbitals present on each side, which are much shorter than the verticals; 
ocellars very short and fine; aristae bare; third antennal segment extending to 
the mouth-margin. Thorax with well developed humeral bristle, one pair of 
prescutellar acrostichal and dorsocentral bristles, and four strong marginal 
scutellars. Legs normal, mid femur of male with a series of pale bristly hairs 
on the posteroventral surface. 

Length, 4-4-5 mm. 

Type, female, Illawarra, N.S.W.; allotype, Botany Bay, N.S.W. (H. Peterson). 
Material submitted to me by C. F. Baker some years ago and in my collection. 

Most nearly related to virgo, but readily distinguished from it by means of 
the wing markings. The wing figured is that of the female type, the male 
lacks a well defined black dot at apex of the marginal cell, but possibly this 
character is variable and not a sexual one. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


LINNEAN Society oF N.S.W.—Wildflower Series, No. 1.—Hpacris longiflora. (Approx. normal size.) 
(Reproduced by kind permission of the Government Printer, Sydney.) 


aah 


(eee 
Lesko tery 


inc 


NOTES ON THE AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF THE GENUS ATRIPLEX. 


By R. H. ANvDERSON, B.Sc. (Agr.), Assistant Botanist, 
Botanic Gardens, Sydney. 


(Plate xviii.) 
[Read 29th October, 1930.] 


The following notes on established species and the descriptions of proposed 
new ones are offered as a contribution to the knowledge of the Australian species 
of the genus Atriplex. It was hoped to make the revision complete and to offer 
a key to all species, but material of several species was not available for 
examination. 


The genus offers a number of difficulties to the systematist, as the species 
are remarkably variable within themselves, and it is often difficult to define 
their limitations satisfactorily. Apart from habit of growth, most of the specific 
differences must be founded upon the character of the fruiting bracteoles and 
leaves, as the male flowers and seeds afford few points of difference. 


The fruiting bracteoles of any one species are usually most variable in 
character, not only on different plants of the same species, but on the individual 
plant itself. Atriplex vesicarium Hew., for example, is usually characterized by 
the presence of spongy appendages on the fruiting bracteoles. These appendages 
are usually present on both bracteoles, but vary considerably in size, being some- 
times very small, but in other cases they completely cover or exceed the bracteoles. 
Frequently, however, the appendages are missing from one bracteole and 
occasionally are absent from both. All stages can be found on the one plant, 
so that the presence or absence of appendages on the fruiting bracteole of this 
species is altogether variable. The same inconstancy is noticed in many other 
species of the genus. 

Leaf characters are also variable within a species, as indicated in the notes 
given on some of the species in this paper. A study of the gradations and inter- 
mediate forms between species leads one very easily to the opinion that possibly, 
if not probably, there is a good deal of natural hybridization taking place within 
the genus. Many of the species grow in close proximity to each other and there 
appears to be little obstacle to some degree of cross-fertilization. 

The idea that many intermediate forms between species may be largely due 
to the result of natural hybridization is strengthened by a comparison of specific 
definiteness in this genus with that found in the genus Bassia. When revising 
the latter genus it was found that specific differences were mainly constant and 
there were very few intermediate forms. The flowers in the various species of 
Bassia are bisexual, whereas those of Atriplex are unisexual and very frequently 
dioecious, so that one would expect a much higher rate of possible hybridization 
in the latter genus. 


494 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF ATRIPLEX, 


In the case of these genera, then, we have a possible connection between floral 
characters which favour natural hybridization and the presence of intermediate 
forms between species. 

To the systematist this genus is difficult, and, in many ways, unsatisfactory. 
It is essentially a plant group in which the taxonomic worker appears to require 
the cooperation of the geneticist and cytologist in order to define adequately the 
individual species. 


ATRIPLEX ELACOPHYLLUM F.v.M. 

Fragm., vii, 1870, 8. 

This species is rather imperfectly described both by Mueller in the original 
description and by Bentham in the Flora Australiensis. Neither mentions the 
three small protuberances or tooth-like appendages which are present on the face 
of both or one of the fruiting bracteoles. These are present on the type specimen, 
collected at Sturt’s Creek in 1856 by Mueller, and are characteristic of all specimens 
of this species seen by me. 

Bentham also describes the leaves as rarely exceeding 2 lines (2:2 mm.) long, 
whereas the leaves of the species usually vary from 8 to 18 mm. in length, and 
average between 10 and 12 mm. Mueller, in the original description, gives the 
leaves as 13-3 lines long, more rarely 9 lines long. The leaves of the type specimen 
examined varied up to 12 mm. long. These apparent imperfections in the descrip- 
tions of this species are important in view of the opinions expressed below on 
Atriplex varia Ewart and Davies. 

The fruiting bracteoles of Atriplex elacophyllum approach in some respects 
to those of Atriplex Muelleri, especially those forms of the latter species in which 
the free portion of the bracteoles is reduced to a narrow rim. The bracteoles of 
Atriplex Muelleri, however, differ in having no appendages and in their upper 
part being much more acutely triangular and sharply toothed. The leaf characters 
of the two species are also usually quite distinct. There does, however, appear 
to be distinct affinities between the two species and intermediate forms are not 
wanting. The typical forms of each species are, however, quite sharply different. 


Atriplex crassipes J. M. Black (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., xlii, 1918, 171) was 
reduced to a synonym of Atriplex elacophyllum F.v.M. by the author of the 
former species (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., xlv, 1921, 8). The fruiting bracteole 
of Atriplex crassipes, however, appears to be very distinct from that of Atriplex 
elacophyllum, differing in shape, in the possession of a short, thick pedicel, and 
in the absence of the three characteristic appendages. Atriplex crassipes appears 
to be a valid species. 


ATRIPLEX VARIA Ewart and Davies. 


JP, IN, WGP, LOT, 94, 

There appears to be no essential difference between this species and Atriplex 
elacophyllum F.v.M. As indicated above, the description of Atriplex elacophyllum 
was imperfect, both in regard to the fruiting bracteoles and the leaves, and perhaps 
this was partly responsible for the erection of Atriplex varia by the authors. 

The fruiting bracteoles of one of the type specimens of Atriplex varia 
(G. F. Hill, No. 284a, 7.6.1911) bear on their faces the three protuberances or 
appendages so typical of Atriplex elacophyllum, and the general characters of the | 
fruiting bracteoles agree fairly closely with those of that species, the only point 


BY R. H. ANDERSON. 495 


of difference being in the slightly stronger toothing of the free upper portion 
of the bracteoles. 

There is also some confusion in the description of the size of the leaves of 
Atriplex varia. The authors describe them (Fl. N. Terr., 1917, 94) as 15-20 cm. 
long. This is probably a misprint for 15-20 mm. But in the key to the species 
on page 93 the leaves of Atriplex varia are given as 2 inches long or more, which 
means approximately 5 em. This is at variance with the description of the 
species on page 94, whether it be read as 15-20 cm. or 15-20 mm. I have examined 
portion of the type specimen and found the leaves measuring from 8-25 mm. in 
length. There is, therefore, no essential difference between the leaf measure- 
ments of the type specimens of both Atriplex varia and Atriplex elacophyllum. 

In our specimens of Atriplex elacophyllum we have one from the Hungerford- 
Brindingabba district (J. L. Boorman, 10/1912) which is a very robust form of 
that species, the leaves measuring up to 4 em. long. Atriplex varia may be 
regarded as the strong growing form of Atriplex elacophyllum, and on the present 
evidence must be regarded as a synonym of that species. 

J. M. Black (Flora S. Auwst., p. 683) is of opinion that it is doubtful whether 
Atriplex varia is more than a variety or form of Atriplex Muelleri. Atriplex 
varia certainly approaches Atriplex Muelleri in some respects, but differs from 
that species in the same respects as does Atriplex elacophyllum, mentioned in the 
notes on the latter species given above. 


ATRIPLEX SEMIBACCATUM R. Br. forma TENUIS Bail. 

Qld. Agric. Journ., xxv, 1910, 164. 

I have examined the type specimen of this form and found that the fruiting 
bracteoles closely resemble those of Atriplex elacophyllum, except for the apparent 
absence of the three appendages on the face. The tendency for ribbing is also 
rather more marked than in some specimens of Atriplex elacophyllum. All the 
leaves appear to be entire, whereas those of Atriplex elacophyllum are generally 
sinuately or more sharply toothed. nee: 

The affinities of this form, however, are undoubtedly with Atriplex elaco- 
phyllum rather than with Atriplex semibaccatum, and, on the evidence offering, 
it can hardly be separated from that species, even as a variety. 


ATRIPLEX FISSIVALVE F.v.M. 

Fragm., ix, 1875, 123. 

This species is a rather small growing annual with greyish-coloured, scaly 
tomentose leaves and usually densely massed greenish fruiting bracteoles, giving 
the plant a rather distinctive appearance. 

The fruiting bracteole of this species is a well defined one, being deeply 
toothed with the central, very acute, lobe usually the largest and the remaining 
margin of the bracteoles spiny-lobed or laciniate. Each bracteole is strongly 
veined and bears a spiny-edged flat appendage somewhat resembling the bracteole 
itself. In some specimens the appendage itself bears a number of small spines 
at the base. : 

Occasionally the appendages are reduced to a deeply-cut and narrow fringe, 
superficially resembling a row of spines, situated near the base of the fruiting 
bracteoles, and it is interesting to note that all specimens seen by me which 
exhibited this feature were from Western Australian localities. The difference, 
however, does not appear to be worthy of varietal rank. 


496 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF ATRIPLEX, 


ATRIPLEX SPINIBRACTUM, n. sp. Plate xviii, fig. 4. 


Fruticulus saepe decumbens, caulibus gracilibus, foliis lanceolatis vel anguste 
obovatis, ad basin attenuatis, 8-25 mm. longis, marginibus breviter denticulatis 
vel sinuato-dentatis; bracteolis fructiferis late-triangularibus 3-6 mm. latis, 
reticulatis, fere ad basin liberis, marginibus valde denticulatis vel spinosis, 3-6 
spinis dorsalibus instructis, semine orbiculari fusco, radicula supera. Minore, 
J. L. Boorman, February, 1899. 


A small plant, usually creeping, with slender stems. Leaves 8-25 mm. long, 
lanceolate or narrowly obovate, more or less scaly tomentose, tapering at base into 
a short pedicel, the margins shortly denticulate or sinuately toothed. The fruiting 
bracteoles are broadly triangular, 3-6 mm. broad, and about the same in length, 
but often longer, free almost to the base, strongly veined, the edges strongly 
toothed or spiny, the central lobe broader but acute. Hach fruiting bracteole bears 
3-6 spine-like appendages on its face and is shortly stalked, the pedicel being up 
to 1:5 mm. in length. 


In addition to the locality quoted above, the following localities are repre- 
sented by specimens in the National Herbarium: Bathurst (W. Webb, 6/1910); 
Coonamble (Archdeacon Haviland, 2/1923); Gilgandra (J. D. Simon, 4/1916); 
Nyngan (KE. Breakwell, 8/1915); Narromine (EH. Breakwell, 4/1913); Barraba (Rey. 
H. M. R. Rupp, 4/1913); Dubbo (J. L. Boorman, 12/1897); Coolabah (J. H. Maiden 
and J. L. Boorman, 12/1908). 


This species has strong affinities with Atriplex semibaccatum on the one 
hand, and Atriplex fissivalve on the other. In general habit of growth and leaf 
character it is very suggestive of the former species, but the fruiting bracteoles 
are quite different. The fruiting bracteole of Atriplex semibaccatum is, how- 
ever, most variable in character. It varies from almost rhomboidal in shape 
with entire edges and no pedicel to a broadly triangular, almost cordate, shape, 
distinctly pedicellate and with denticulate margins. This latter form merges to 
some extent into the type of bracteole commonly found in Atriplex spinibractum, 
and the two species are further linked by some specimens of Atriplex semibac- 
catum showing rudimentary appendages on the face of the bracteoles, somewhat 
similar to those of typical Atriplex spinibractum. In spite of the intermediate 
forms, however, the typical fruiting bracteoles of the two species are very 
different. 


The fruiting bracteole of Atriplex spinibractum is also strongly suggestive 
of that of Atriplex fissivalve, and individual ones may be selected from both 
species which are almost identical. The characteristic spiny-edged flat appendage 
of the fruiting bracteole of Atriplex fissivalve is, however, not found in Atriplex 
spinibractum, but is replaced by several separate spines or bristles. In this 
respect Atriplex spinibractum approaches the Western Australian form of 
Atriplex fissivalve mentioned previously in the notes on the latter species. The 
fruiting bracteoles of Atriplex fissivalve are, moreover, always arranged in fairly 
dense clusters, which are abundantly produced, whereas those of Atriplex spini- 
bractum are much more sparingly produced, and are shortly stalked and rather 
more tomentose than those of Atriplex fissivalve. 


The leaves of the two species also differ, those of Atriplex spinibractum being 
much smaller and narrower, and the whole plant more slender and less crystally 
hoary than Atriplex fissivalve. 


BY R. H. ANDERSON. 497 


The general appearance of the two species appears to be quite different, and 
the specimens are readily separated in the herbarium, but the close resemblance 
of some of the fruiting bracteoles of the two species suggests that Atriplex spini- 
bractum combines the fruiting bracteoles of Atriplex fissivalve with the general 
habit and leaf characters of Atriplex semibaccatum. 

A close study of all the specimens cannot but result in the opinion that the 
three species, Atriplex semibaccatum, Atriplex spinibractum and Atriplex fissi- 
valve are closely related, and a genetical or cytological study of these may be of 
interest. 


ATRIPLEX LOBATIVALVE F.v.M. 

Iconog. Austr. Salsol. Plants, vi, 1889; Vict. Nat., ix, 1893, 187. 

This species was figured in the Iconography of Australian Salsolaceous Plants, 
but the first written description appeared in the Victorian Naturalist. 

It is a small prostrate plant, distinguished by the deeply-lobed, usually five- 
lobed, valves of the fruiting bracteoles, which bear no appendages but are charac- 
terized by a ridge-like thickening at the base continued vertically from the short 
stalk. 

It appears to be most closely allied to Atriplex fissivalve, but is readily 
distinguished from that species by the absence of any appendages to the bracteoles, 
which are also less spiny-edged and more regularly lobed. 


ATRIPLEX ANGULATUM Benth. 

Fl. Aust., v, 1870, 174. 

The exact limitations of this species are not altogether definite. Bentham 
described the species from three small specimens of which the ‘fruiting perianth 
was not yet quite ripe’. Mueller subsequently considered it as merely a form of 
Atriplex campanulatum Benth., and figured both species (Icon. Salsol. Plants, 
Plate xi) under the name of Atriplex angulatum Benth. Later botanists, how- 
ever, have accepted the two species as being quite distinct. 

An examination of the material in the New South Wales National Herbarium 
indicated that several varieties or species could be separated from the Atriplex 
angulatum—Atriplex campanulatum group. These may be designated as follows: 

1. ATRIPLEX CAMPANULATUM Benth.—The fruiting bracteoles in this species are 
usually unequal in length, the anterior one being the shorter and bearing at the 
base two herbaceous or somewhat inflated appendages. Occasionally the two 
bracteoles are equal, but the appendages are always present. ‘ 

2. ATRIPLEX CAMPANULATUM var. INAPPENDICULATUM, n. var.—Variat bracteolis 
fructiferis inappendiculatis aequalis, pediculis aliquantum crassis. Murrumburrah 
Town Clerk, 5/1911; Zara Station, Miss H. Officer, 5/1905. 

This variety is distinguished by the complete absence of appendages on the 
fruiting bracteoles, or their reduction to rudimentary structures, by the two 
bracteoles being equal in length and usually of thicker texture, and by the more 
solid pedicel. The variety shows affinities with Atriplex intermedium, Nn. Sp., 
and also approximates closely to Atriplex crassipes J. M. Black, particularly in 
the general shape of the bracteoles which, however, are more tomentose, and 
have a longer pedicel than in that species. : 

In addition to the specimens mentioned above, the following in the National 
Herbarium are included in the variety: Brewarrina (J. L. Boorman, 11/1908) ; 
Coolabah (Peacock, 3/1900); Nulty-Toorale (J. L. Boorman, 9/1912). 


498 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF ATRIPLEX, 


The Brewarrina specimen shows small appendages on the fruiting bracteoles, 


‘and is intermediate in general characters between the species and its variety. 


For systematic purposes this variety is an aggregate one, embracing a number 


_of individuals which, while obviously differing from each other in some respects, 


“éxhibit a somewhat uniform divergence from the typical species. 

3. ATRIPLEX ANGULATUM Benth.—As mentioned above, the exact limitations of 
this species have been somewhat indefinite, especially as Bentham described it 
from imperfect material. Two specimens are quoted by Bentham in the Flora 
Australiensis, viz., Cudnaka (Mueller) and Murray River (W. Ross). An effort 
was made to get these specimens from the Melbourne Herbarium, but it was 
found that only the Murray River specimen was represented in that collection. 
The Victorian Government Botanist reported that this specimen very closely 
resembled portion of the drawing of Atriplex angulatum (Icon. Salsol. Plants, 
Plate xi), which was evidently taken from the type. This portion is represented 
by the large central branch in the Plate, and by figures numbered 6, 7, 8 and 9. 

Our material of specimens assumed to be Atriplex angulatum shows two 
distinct forms. The first is characterized by the valves of the fruiting bracteoles 
being rather short but broad (7-11 mm.), often cordate or somewhat so at the 
base, and with the tube continued into a moderately stout to rather slender 
pedicel. The leaves are broad, obtuse, sinuate-lobed and rather large. 

The second form is characterized by the valves of the fruiting bracteoles 
being subrhomboidal or somewhat triangular in shape, and tapering gradually into 
the pedicel, showing no evidence of the cordate base characteristic of the form 
mentioned above. The pedicel is much thickened or swollen, especially just below 
the valves, and tapers towards the base. The bracteoles are usually marked by 
three longitudinal lines. 

These two forms appear to be specifically quite distinct, and as the first form 
mentioned appears to resemble most closely the type specimen of Bentham from 
the Murray River, I propose accepting it as Atripler angulatum Benth. 

The second form described above appears to be undescribed, and it is here- 
under offered as Atriplex intermedium, 0. Sp. 

J. M. Black (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 42, 1918, 171) has drawn attention to 
two forms of Atriplex angulatum which he is of the opinion may prove to be 
distinct. I am not, however, sure that the forms so described are referable to 
those mentioned above. 


ATRIPLEX INTERMEDIUM, n. sp. Plate xviii, fig. 3. 

Herba annua, foliis ovato-lanceolatis vel lato-obovatis, sinuato-dentatis vel - 
nonnunquam integris, 2-4, cm. longis; bracteolis fructiferis sub-rhomboideis 
marginibus plus minusve denticulatis, circiter 3-4 mm. longis et 2-4 mm. latis, 
saepe 3 nervis conspicuis longitudinalibus, pediculis sub bracteolis dilatatis, ad 
basin attenuatus, 4-6 mm. longis; semine orbiculari, radicula supera. Paroo River 
(E. Betche, 9/1900); Stephen’s Creeks, Broken Hill (A. Morris, No. 170, 4/1920; 
No. 710, 10/1921); Corona (Miss M. Collins, No. 33, 9/1921). 

Apart from its affinities with Atriplex angulatum mentioned previously, this 
species somewhat approaches some of the forms of Atriplex leptocarpum F.v.M., 
particularly the forma turbinatum, which, however, differs in the long tube 
formed by the bracteoles and in other respects. In a number of ways, however, 
the species appears to be a connecting link between Atriplex angulatum and 
Atriplex leptocarpum. 


BY R. H. ANDERSON. 499 


ATRIPLEX LEPTOCARPUM F.yv.M. ~~ go Ps 
Trans. Phil. Inst. Vict., ii, 1857, 74. ee ee 
This species is readily distinguished by the union of the fruiting bracteoles 
to form a distinct tube, the lower portion being somewhat hardened and swollen,\~ 
the upper part more herbaceous, and terminated by the two free, very short, ee. ge oe 
triangular lobes of the bracteoles. The fruiting bracteoles vary from 4 to 8 mm. ‘fe A 82 
in length, and are sessile or tapered at the base to form a short pedicel up to 
2mm. in length. Sh 
Two rather distinctive forms of this species in regard to leaf character are 
found. In one form the leaves are narrow-oblong or almost lanceolate, and entire. 
In the other they are obovate and sinuately toothed. This difference in leaf 
character, however, is not accompanied by any difference in the nature of the 
fruiting bracteoles. The species is generally a variable one, with several well 
marked forms and varieties, some of which indicate affinities with Atriplex 
intermedium. The chief of these forms of varieties are indicated below. 


ATRIPLEX LEPTOCARPUM F.y.M. var. ACUMINATUM J. M. Black. 

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., xlvi, 1922, 568. 

This is a well marked variety, and perhaps sufficiently distinct to warrant 
specific rank. The fruiting bracteoles are free for almost half their length, being 
produced into acuminate lobes which usually bear one or two fine marginal teeth 
towards the base. The basal portion of the tube is somewhat hardened and 
swollen. The leaves of this variety are similar to the obovate sinuately-lobed- 
leaved form of the species. 

The close affinities of this variety with Atripler acutivalvum, n. sp., are 
dealt with under the description of that species. 


ATRIPLEX LEPTOCARPUM forma MINOR, n. form. 

Herba parva, bracteolis fructiferis 2-4 mm. longis tubo dilatato subgloboso. 
Tibooburra (O. HE. Couch, 1913, and A. Morris, No. 709, 1921). 

This is a small growing form of Atriplex leptocarpum F.v.M. which also 
possesses fairly distinctive fruits. The lower half of the tube formed by the 
fruiting bracteoles forms a smooth, swollen, semi-spongy or solid, rounded mass, 
the somewhat herbaceous and fairly strongly veined upper portion of the bracteoles 
being comparatively flattened. The bracteoles and tube vary from 2 to 4 mm. in 
length. The two specimens collected from the same locality are almost identical, 
and the fact that two different collectors obtained similar material after an 
interval of eight years may indicate that this form is worthy of varietal rank. 


ATRIPLEX LEPTOCARPUM F.y.M. forma TURBINATUM, n. form. 

Bracteolis fructiferis sub-turbinatis ad basin attenuatis vix induratis nec 
dilatatis. Mt. Lyndhurst, South Australia (Max Koch, 1897); Hergott (J. M. 
Black, 10/1917). | 

In this form the tube formed by the united fruiting bracteoles tapers fairly 
regularly towards.the base, forming a narrow inverted cone with a very short 
thick pedicel, and does not become swollen and hardened as in-the typical form 
of the species. The bracteoles at their upper end are also broader. The leaves 
are rather small, broadly lanceolate, entire or somewhat toothed. 

Mr. J. M. Black, in a note on the specimen from Hergott which he kindly 
forwarded to me, writes: “I take this to be Atriplex leptocarpum tending towards 


500 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF ATRIPLEX, 


Atriplex angulatum”. The form certainly tends towards Atriplex intermedium, 
which in turn shows affinities with Atriplex angulatum. 

At present I do not feel inclined to give this form varietal rank, but the 
discovery of additional plants with a wider range might justify such a course. 
It is, however, a well defined form. 


ATRIPLEX ACUTIBRACTUM, n. sp. Plate xviii, fig. 5. 

Fruticulus parvus ramosus, foliis late-obovatis sinuato-dentatis ad basin 
attenuatis 15-20 mm. longis; bracteolis fructiferis 3-5 mm. longis, subrhomboidal- 
ibus, ad medium liberis, breviter pedicellatis, 2 appendicibus dorsalibus instructis; 
semini orbiculari, radicula supera. Murray Flats, west of Blanchetown, South 
Australia, J. B. Cleland, 5/1911. 

This species is a small branching undershrub, with broadly obovate, sinuately 
toothed leaves which taper into a short pedicel. It is characterized by the sub- 
rhomboidal fruiting bracteoles, the free upper portion of which is acutely 
triangular, and by the presence of two prominent appendages on each bracteole 
about half-way down the tube. In some cases these appendages are reduced to 
one or two small tubercles, or, in the case of immature bracteoles, may be entirely 
wanting. The tube formed by the fruiting bracteoles is produced at the base 
into a short thick pedicel. 

This species approaches Atriplex leptocarpum F.v.M. var. acuminatum J. M. 
Black fairly closely, differing mainly in the presence of the two appendages on 
both bracteoles. J. M. Black (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 46, 1922, 569) describes 
the fruiting bracteoles of Atriplex leptocarpum var. acuminatum as often having 
two small tubercles at the base. These are not evident in the Tarcoola specimen 
examined by me, but a specimen from Ooldea is also quoted which I have not 
seen. 

A method of dealing with the proposed new species which suggested itself to 
me was to include the specimens assigned to it under Atriplex leptocarpum var. 
acuminatum and raise the variety to specific rank. This, however, I did not 
feel justified in doing, firstly because I was not altogether satisfied that the Murray 
Flats specimen was not specifically distinct from the variety acuminatum, and 
secondly because the name acuminatum has already been given to a species of 
Atriplex by Waldstein and Kitaibel. The Index Kewensis quotes this species as 
a synonym of Atriplex nitens Schk., but the International Rules of Botanical 
Nomenclature definitely recommend the avoidance of using names which are 
homonyms. 

The affinities of Atriplex leptocarpum var. acuminatum certainly lie with 
Atriplex acutibractum rather than with Atriplex leptocarpum, but, pending further 
investigation, it seems advisable to allow that variety to remain as it is. 

A specimen from Hughes, South Australia (E. H. Ising, No. 1508, 9/1920) 
can also be included under Atriplex acutibractum. The fruiting bracteoles in 
this specimen differ from the type specimen in being borne on a slender pedicel 
2-3-5 mm. long, and the appendages, although present, are not so strongly 
developed. 


ATRIPLEX MUELLERI Benth. 
Fl. Aust., vy, 1870, 175. 
This species is distinguished by the obovate or broadly oblong, coarsely toothed 
or sinuately lobed leaves, which are generally greenish above and more or less 


BY R. H. ANDERSON. 501 


mealy-white beneath. The fruiting bracteoles are small and usually fairly densely 
clustered, but vary rather considerably in shape. In some forms the bracteoles 
are swollen in the lower part to form a globular or somewhat compressed tube, 
the free upper portion of the bracteoles forming a narrow, shortly denticulate rim. 
Most typically the bracteoles are more or less rhomboidal in shape, free for half 
their length and 3-7 toothed along their margin. They are described by Bentham 
as sessile, but quite commonly they are quite distinctly pedicellate, the pedicels 
being up to 1-13 mm. long. Both sessile and pedicellate forms are found on the 
one plant. ; 


Atriplex Muelleri, especially those forms with shortly pedicellate, denticulate 
bracteoles, approaches fairly closely to certain forms of Atriplex semibaccatum. 
The bracteoles also occasionally exhibit to a less degree the rather conspicuous 
nervation associated with the bracteoles of the latter species, although typically 
they are much more mealy. The much broader obovate leaves, however, provide 
the most readily observed point of difference betwen the two species. 


The affinity existing between Atriplex Muelleri and Atriplex elacophyllum has 
already been dealt with in the notes given on the latter species. 


Mueller (Fragm., vii, p. 9) refers certain specimens of Atriplex Muelleri to 
Atriplex rosea L., but, as Bentham points out, they are quite distinct from that 
species. 


In the “Report of the Babbage’s Expedition into the North-west Interior of 
South Australia’, published in 1858, Mueller refers a specimen collected at Emu 
Springs to Atriplex roseum var. stipitatum. The fruiting perianth is described 
as “small and tapering into a thick pedicel which is 4-1 lines long’. This 
specimen has not been seen by me, but it might be referable to the form of 
Atriplex Muelleri which has shortly pedicellate fruiting bracteoles, or possibly to 
Atriplex semibaccatum. 


ATRIPLEX HYMENOTHECUM Moq. 

DC. Proadr., xiii, ii, 1849, p. 101. 

This species approaches very closely to Atriplex vesicarium Hew., the 
character of the fruiting bracteoles and appendages of the two species being almost 
identical. It differs, however, in the leaves, which are smaller, narrower, and 
less white scaly tomentose than those of Atriplex vesicarium. Herbarium material 
of the two species is fairly readily separable, and possibly they look very different 
under field conditions. 


Moquin, in the original description of the species, definitely describes the 
fruiting perianth as without appendages, and it is difficult to understand the very 
conspicuous bladder-like appendages being overlooked. 


Bentham (Fl. Aust., v, 1870, 173), however, described the same material as 
Moquin (Drummond’s Nos. 128 and 129) and observed the appendages, at the 
same time commenting on Moquin’s omission. It is apparently quite safe, in 
spite of the original description, to ascribe the conspicuously appendaged fruiting 
bracteoles to this species. 

The leaves of Atriplex hymenothecum are nearly always quite entire, but 
one specimen (Cunderdin, J. B. Cleland, 1908) has the margins shallowly sinuately 
toothed. 

The species is apparently confined to Western Australia. 


502 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF ATRIPLEX, 


ATRIPLEX PALUDOSUM R. Br. 

Prod., p. 406. 

Perhaps the main characteristic of this species is the comparative glabrous- 
ness of the upper surface of the leaves, which, contrasted with the pale-coloured 
scaly tomentum on the under surface gives the leaves a more or less green and 
white appearance. This feature was partly referred to in the original description 
by Robert Brown, but Bentham in the “Flora Australiensis” omits any reference 
to it. In some specimens, however, the leaves are more or less equally tomentose 
scaly on both sides. 

The fruiting bracteoles on most of the specimens examined are ovate- 
triangular and generally cordate at the base. Only occasionally do the margins 
appear to be toothed, although all the figures except one in the “Iconography of 
Salsolaceous Plants”, Plate xiv, depict the margins as markedly so. 


ATRIPLEX PALUDOSUM var. APPENDICULATUM Benth. 
Fl. Aust., v, 1870, 170. 
I have seen no specimens of this variety, but it would appear to be more 
closely allied to Atriplex vesicarium, and might be better placed under one of the 
many forms of that variable species. 


ATRIPLEX CINEREUM Poir. 

Dict., Suppl. i, 471. 

This species appears to be confined to coastal areas, and is distinguished by 
the oblong or lanceolate ashy-grey leaves which are usually 2-7 cm. long. The 
fruiting bracteoles are variable in shape from broadly triangular and somewhat 
cordate to almost rhomboidal. 

Specimens from Rottnest Island, Western Australia (W. V. Fitzgerald) are 
rhomboidal in shape, the bracteoles united to half-way and the upper free halves 
triangular and rather acutely pointed. At the base the bracteoles form a short, 
more or less turbinate, solid base. These specimens show affinities with Atriplex 
rhagodioides F.v.M. 

The species also approaches Atriplex isatidea to some extent, especially in the 
general character of the leaves, but differs in the fruiting bracteoles. 

Plate xv in the “Iconography of Salsolaceous Plants’ includes a number of 
fruiting bracteoles, showing the variability of this species, but the more common 
form with the broadly triangular bracteoles and somewhat cordate base is not 
figured. 

J. M. Black in the “Flora of South Australia” describes the species as “with a 
spongy rugose appendage or tubercle on the lower part of each bracteole, and 
sometimes covering the pedicel also”. I have not seen this form, and it was not 
figured by Mueller in the “Iconography”’, but Bentham in the “Flora Australiensis” 
describes the fruiting perianth as with rarely one or two tubercles. 


ATRIPLEX RHAGODIOIDES F.v.M. 

This species in many respects resembles Atriplex cinereum Poir., and it is 
difficult to separate them clearly. 

Bentham (Fl. Aust., v, 1870, 172) remarks that the specimens are insufficient 
to determine whether the species is more than a variety or state of Atriplex 
cinereum. Mueller perhaps was a little uncertain of its specific rank, as it is not 
figured in the “Iconography”. 


BY R. H. ANDERSON. 503 


I have seen the Murchison River specimen collected by Oldfield and mentioned 
by Bentham, and also another specimen determined by Bentham as Atriplex 
rhagodioides, but with no locality given. The latter is possibly the Murray 
Scrub type specimen collected by Mueller. 

These specimens differ from typical Atriplex cinerewm Poir. both in the 
character of the fruiting bracteoles and the leaves. The bracteoles are much 
thickened and rhomboidal, with the upper portion usually much shorter than the 
lower portion, and are united for more than half their length. There is no 
suggestion of cordateness about the base. The leaves are smaller and more angular 
or hastate at the base than those of typical Atriplex cinereum. 

A specimen collected by Mueller (no locality given) is intermediate between 
Atriplex rhagodioides and Atriplex cinereum, being distinguished by the rather 
sharply acute fruiting bracteoles. 

Atriplex rhagodioides has undoubtedly close affinities with Atriplex cinereum, 
and some of the specimens attributed by botanists to the former species might 
more correctly be placed under the latter. 

Atriplex rhagodioides, however, as represented by the Murchison River 
specimen mentioned above, appears to be specifically distinct. 


ATRIPLEX QUINIT F.v.M. 

Vict. Nat., v, 1888, 96. 

This species has affinities with Atriplex vesicarium, from which it is dis- 
tinguished by the much thickened and conspicuous pedicel (2-4 mm. long) of the 
fruiting bracteoles, by the reniform shape of the appendages on the bracteoles, 
and by the narrower, more linear leaves. 

Specimens from Booroorban (F. A. G. Fisher) in the National Herbarium 
show the close affinity between the two species. The leaf character of these 
specimens is similar to that of Atriplex Quinti, but the conspicuous pedicel of 
the fruiting bracteoles is almost entirely absent, and the specimens are probably 
best included under Atriplex vesicarium. 


ATRIPLEX CONDUPLICATUM FE.v.M. 


Journ. Pharm., i, 1886, 429. 

The typical form of this species is very different from Atriplex halimoides 
Lindley, and the degree of transition between the two species is no more marked 
than in many other species of the genus. 

Mueller regarded Atriplex conduplicatum as only a variety of Atriplex 
halimoides. He omits it from the “Census of Australian Plants” and in the 
“Teonography of Salsolaceous Plants’, Plate xix, figures both species under the 
name of Atriplex halimoides. 

Mueller and Tate (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 16, 1892, 345) list this species as 
Atriplex halimoides var. conduplicatum, and other botanists have subsequently 
accepted this reduction to varietal rank. 

The fruiting bracteoles of Atriplex conduplicatum are united for the greater 
part of their length, but instead of forming the circular and horizontally flattened 
structure as in Atriplex halimoides, produce well developed opposite-winged 
structures which are free for about two-thirds the length of the bracteoles. These 
wings almost or quite exceed the ununited tips of the bracteoles, the free portion of 
the bracteoles being also much longer and more strongly developed than in 


504 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF ATRIPLEX, 


Atriplex halimoides. The fruiting bracteoles are also usually much less spongy 
in texture than those of Atriplex halimoides, and at times are hardly more spongy- 
than the majority of Atriplex species. 

A number of transition forms between Atriplex conduplicatum and Atriplex 
halimoides are to be found, but the typical forms of both species are so well 
marked that it is desirable to keep them specifically distinct. The fruiting 
bracteoles of Atriplex halimoides occasionally exhibit a tendency to form the two 
opposite lobes characteristic of Atriplex conduplicatum, but the lobing is not so 
marked, the free tips are much smaller, and the bracteoles retain their spongy 
character. 

The difference between the two species is well illustrated in the figure of 
Atriplex halimoides in the “Iconography of Australian Salsolaceous Plants’, 
Plate xix. Figure 6, the upper right hand fruit of Figure 4, and the twig on the 
right hand side represent Atriplex conduplicatum, the remainder being Atriplex 
halimoides. 


ATRIPLEX SPONGIOSUM F.v.M. 

Trans. Phil. Instit. Vict., ii, 1857, 74. 

This species is a small-growing plant rarely exceeding 30 cm. in height and 
characterized by the spongy inflated fruiting bracteoles which are entirely 
coalesced except for the two minute tips. In some specimens the whole of the 
fruiting bracteoles remain spongy or fibrous in texture, but most commonly the 
inner portion surrounding the seed becomes more or less hardened. 

Atriplex holocarpum F.v.M. must apparently be regarded as a synonym of 
this species. Mueller (Rep. Babb. Hxped., 1858, p. 19) describes it as closely 
allied to Atriplex inflatum (Atriplex halimoides), but does not mention its affinity 
to Atriplex spongiosum, although recording a specimen of the latter species from 
Lake Gregory in the same report. 

Bentham retains specific rank for both Atriplex holocarpum and Atriplex 
spongiosum, but the only points of difference noted by him between the two species 
are in the size of the fruiting bracteoles, and to a lesser extent in their shape. That 
of Atriplex holocurpum is given as “turbinate-globular 4-6 lines diameter”, that 
of Atriplex spongiosum as “depressed globular not 2 lines diameter’’. 

Mueller himself omits Atriplex holocarpum from his “Census of Australian 
Plants”, and in the “Iconography of Australian Salsolaceous Plants” only figures 
Atriplex spongiosum, the figure, however, including both the large- and small- 
fruited forms. 

There appears to be no justification for maintaining specific rank for both 
Atriplex spongiosum and Atriplex holocarpum. J. M. Black in the “Flora of 
South Australia’, p. 188, places Atriplex holocarpum as a synonym of Atriplex 
spongiosum. 

In the “Census of New South Wales Plants’ Maiden and Betche make 
Atriplex spongiosum a variety of Atriplex holocarpum, quoting Mueller as the 
authority for the variety. Atriplex spongiosum, however, has priority and must 
stand, and there appears to be little to justify even a varietal difference between 
the two species. 


ATRIPLEX Morrisit, n. sp. Plate xviii, figs. 1, 2. 
Herba annua plus minusve cano-farinosa, foliis obovatis sinuato-dentatis 10-20 
mm. longis, ad basin attenuatis; floribus monoicis glomerulis confertis axillaribus, 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE Xvi. 


Fruiting bracteoles of 1, 2. Atriplex Morvrisii; 3. A. intermedium ; 
4. A. spinibractum; 5. acutibractum. 


BY R. H. ANDERSON. 505 


masculis in apice ramulorum sitis et aliquat floribus femineis circumdatis, 
glomerulis inferioribus omnino femineis; bracteolis fructiferis oblongis vel 
truncato-obovatis fere ad apicem connatis, appendicibus rugosis plus minusve 
spongiosis instructis, apicibus bracteolorum dentatis 2 mm. latis; semine orbiculari 
fusco, radicula supera. 

Broken Hill District, A. Morris, No. 1238, 1/1920, No. 711, 11/1921, and No. 
1075, 1/1924. 

This species is a small branching annual plant more or less completely scaly 
tomentose. The fruiting bracteoles are very distinct and separate it sharply from 
any of the allied species. They are somewhat oblong or truncate obovate and 
united practically for the whole of their length, the apex being about 2 mm. wide 
and 2-4 toothed. The lower three-quarters of the bracteoles are spongy and 
covered with soft pointed projections which give it a rough or rugose appearance. 

The upper quarter of the bracteoles is comparatively smooth and fairly 
strongly veined. At the base the bracteoles are produced into a short, fairly 
stout pedicel 1-2 mm. long. 

So far the species has been recorded only from the Broken Hill district, 
where it occurs fairly plentifully in some seasons. 

The species is named in honour of Mr. A. Morris of Broken Hill, who for 
many years has studied the flora of the Broken Hill district and who first collected 
this species and drew the attention of the Herbarium staff to its distinctiveness. 


Acknowledgments. 
I wish to acknowledge the valuable assistance, by means of specimens and 
notes, received from Mr. J. M. Black of Adelaide, the staff of the Victorian 
National Herbarium, and Mr. C. T. White, Government Botanist of Queensland. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVIII. 
1, 2.—Fruiting bracteoles of Atriplex Morrisii (Broken Hill, A. Morris, No. 123, 
1/1920). 
3.—Fruiting bracteole of Atriplex intermedium (Corona, Miss M. Collins, 9/1921). 


4.—Fruiting bracteole of Atriplex spinibractum (Coonamble, Archdeacon Haviland, 
2/1923). 


5.—Fruiting bracteole of Atriplex acutibractum (Murray Flats, Dr. J. B. Cleland, 
By//lelal yn 


THE UTERINE CYCLE OF PREGNANCY AND PSHUDO-PREGNANCY AS IT 
IS IN THE DIPROTODONT MARSUPIAL BETTONGIA CUNICULUS. 


WITH NOTES ON OTHER REPRODUCTIVE PHENOMENA IN THIS MARSUPIAL. 
By T. THOMSON FLtyNnN, D.Sc., Ralston Professor of Biology, University of Tasmania. 
(Plates xix—xxi; three Text-figures. ) 


[Read 29th October, 1930.] 


Contents. 

Introduction. 

Reproductive Phenomena in Bettongia: (a) Number of Pouch Young; (0b) Breeding 
Habits; (¢) Periods of Gestation and Lactation; (d@) Pregnancy and Pseudo- 
pregnancy. 

The Uterine Cycle of Pregnancy and Pseudo-pregnancy in Bettongia. 

Summary of Conclusions. E 

Discussion. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Little attention has been paid to the investigation of reproductive phenomena 
in the diprotodont marsupials, and the present communication is an endeavour to 
lessen the gap in our knowledge by describing the uterine cycle in one of them, 
Bettongia cuniculus. Opportunity is also being taken to offer some remarks on 
the breeding season, pouch-phenomena, foetal nutrition, the gestation period and 
other matters having to do with repreduction in this marsupial. 

The observations herein set down can be regarded as being preliminary only, 
it being intended that the reproductive cycle in its various phases will be more 
intensely investigated later. 

Bettongia cuniculus is one of the so-called “rat kangaroos” and is a diproto- 
dont marsupial of small size found in Tasmania. There is some difficulty in 
securing specimens at present and it is inevitable that, with the spread of settle- 
ment, its numbers will be even more seriously depleted in the near future. 

Collection of material of Bettongia has proceeded since 1924 and has been 
supported by funds supplied by the Trustees of the Ralston Bequest and more 
recently by a grant from the Grants Committee of the Royal Society. To both 
these bodies I take the opportunity to express my heartfelt thanks for their 
generous assistance. 

Much of this work was carried out in vacation time in the Zoology Depart- 
ment of the University of Sydney and I have to express my sincere thanks to 
Professor W. J. Dakin for placing the resources of his department at my disposal. 

The fixatives employed in the preserving of uteri, ovaries and associated organs 
have been of several kinds, mainly, however, corrosive sublimate with acetic acid 
and Bouin’s picro-formol-acetic solution. Carnoy’s mixture of acetic alcohol with 
chloroform and Sansom’s modification of the same have been employed where a 
quickly penetrating fluid has been required as, for example, in the fixation of 


BY T. T. FLYNN. 507 


whole uteri with contained embryos. In this latter case, in order to preserve 
as far as possible the relationships of the foetal membranes to the uterine wall, 
the process of double embedding with paraffin and celloidin has been resorted to. 


REPRODUCTIVE PHENOMENA IN BETTONGIA. 
(a.) Number of Pouch Young. 


Bettongia cuniculus agrees with Potorous tridactylus, Phascolomys, 
Trichosurus and various species of Macropodinae in that it produces but one 
young at a birth. There being four. teats in the pouch, three of them are 
unoccupied at a time. In the respect that there are insufficient young born at one 
time to occupy all the teats of the pouch, Bettongia, with those marsupials above 
mentioned and some others, differs very considerably from another group in 
which the number of newly-born is normally greater than the pouch can accom- 
modate. This phenomenon was first noted by J. P. Hill (1910) in Dasyurus, 
and was shown afterwards to occur in Didelphys (Hartman, 1920; Hill, 1918) and 
probably happens also in Sarcophilus (Flynn, 1921). 


Pseudochirus cooki, with respect to the number of young born, occupies a 
position intermediate between these two groups (Flynn, 1921). Possessing four 
teats, two are functionless. These never become enlarged and are never used 
by the pouch young. There may be aS many as six young produced at a birth 
in this animal; usually there are three; rarely there is but one. In this way 
Pseudochirus cooki may be recognized as an example now living of a marsupial 
showing progressive reduction of the number of teats and of young. Where, as in 
Trichosurus, Phascolarctos, Phascolomys, various species of Macropodinae and 
others, the number of young ones born is normally less than the number of teats 
available, the phenomenon might be termed Hypogony. 


Bearing in mind the suggestion of Hill and O’Donoghue (1913) that marsupials 
show a progressive reduction in the number of teats present in the pouch—a 
statement with which one must agree—it is also obvious that, in the Class, there 
is also to be found a progressive reduction in the number of young born, and 
that this reduction has reached its limit in the hypogonous marsupials in which 
it has proceeded in advance of teat reduction. 


(b.) Breeding Habits, etc. 


I have been able to collect females of Bettongia over the greater part of the 
year, and find that its breeding season lasts at least from March to December, 
that is, over the autumn, winter, spring and early summer months. I have not 
yet had the opportunity of collecting animals during January and February, but 
there is every possibility that during these months the animal rests from its 
breeding activities. 


Bettongia is polyoestrous. This is shown by the fact that most of the 
females obtained over the above-mentioned breeding season are found to be 
pregnant, by the condition of the ovaries, and by the fact that quite a large 
number of the pregnant females possess at the same time a pouch young. Thus, 
of eighty-one females taken in the breeding season of 1924, no less than seventy 
were pregnant, and of these twenty-six had in addition a young one in the pouch. 
Of the other pregnant animals, some eight were in a condition that showed that 
the young animal still occasionally visited the pouch to be suckled. 

B 


508 UTERINE CYCLE IN BETTONGIA CUNICULUS, 


This shows that, of the seventy pregnant females gathered in the breeding 
season of 1924, at least thirty-four had given birth to an embryo some short 
time previously. 

Evidence of the condition of polyoestrum is given by the following notes 
taken from my laboratory note-book. These examples are only two of many. 

Example 1. Bett. A., 1/10/27. 

“Pouch, fairly well haired pouch young present, left anterior gland and teat 
well developed, other three resting and small. 

“Uteri, both about equal in size and of similar appearance. 

“Ovaries, left ovary with fairly recent corpus luteum, whitish in colour, 
right ovary with one very old corpus luteum.” 

On opening the left uterus a small blastocyst was found. 

Example 2. Bett., 15/10/27. 

“Pouch, pouch young present, very small. 

“Teats, the young one attached to the anterior right teat, anterior left and 
posterior right teats very small and undeveloped, posterior left teat and gland 
very large giving indication of the fact that this teat and gland had up till 
recently been used by a young one that had been visiting the pouch for the 
purpose of being suckled. 

“Uteri, small, slightly congested, both about the same size. 

“Ovaries, left ovary with a recent corpus luteum, the right ovary with an old 
corpus.” 

A small blastocyst was found in the left uterus. These organs showed that 
there had been three successive pregnancies. 


Text-fig. 1.—Direct evidence of the condition of polyoestrum as 
shown by the arrangement of the nipples in the pouch of specimen 
Bett., 10/8/28. The mammary glands are indicated in their extent by 
broken lines. The right posterior gland is strongly secreting and its 
condition and the size and form of its nipple (c) show that a young 
one still visits the mother to use it. To the left posterior nipple (d) was 
attached a pouch ‘foetus measuring 25 mm. in direct length. The 
anterior nipples (a and b) and glands are small and non-functioning. 
An early blastocyst was found in the right uterus. There is, therefore, 
definite evidence of three successive pregnancies. 


BY T. T. FLYNN. 509 


Not only are these examples definite evidence of the condition of polyoestrum, 
but they also bring to mind a suggestion made some time ago by O’Donoghue 
(1916, pp. 442 and 457), that in Phascolarctos and Trichosurus vulpecula, in which 
animals only one young one is produced at a birth, ovulation is alternate from 
each ovary. 

As will be seen from the body of this paper, pregnancy in Bettongia is 
normally alternate and it is very likely that in Phascolarctos and Trichosurus 
this condition also holds. While one of the uteri is pregnant, the other is 
‘“pseudo-pregnant” and, for this reason, it is impossible to know by external 
examination of the uteri alone, until mid-pregnancy, which of the uteri is the 
gravid one. 

The condition of “pseudo-pregnancy” in Bettongia is of a somewhat different 
type and has a correspondingly different history from that which supervenes in 
all marsupials when the spontaneously discharged ovum is not fertilized. 

This subject will be discussed later in this paper. A full and complete under- 
standing of it will finally depend, however, on the results obtained by a thorough 
examination of the ovaries at various stages. This work is being carried on by 
Miss M. Garde, B.Sc., of the School of Anatomy, University of Sydney. 


(c.) Periods of Gestation and of Lactation. 


On the length of these periods I have at present very little information based 
on direct evidence. So far, I have been unable to get Bettongia to breed in 
captivity, so that coitus has never been observed. The same difficulty arises with 
Potorous tridactylus, as has already been pointed out by Misses Altmann and 
Ellery (1925, p. 466). It does not seem possible that the period of gestation in 
such a marsupial as Bettongia, in which pregnancy is unilateral and ovulation 
spontaneous, could ever be correctly determined. An approximate calculation 
might be made by opening animals under anaesthesia and determining the age 
of the corpus luteum. This I have not yet attempted. The few cases which I 
have had under observation point to about six weeks as being the approximate 
length of gestation in both Bettongia cuniculus and Potorous tridactylus. 


Records relating to the length of time which elapses between coitus and 
parturition in the Macropods exist in widely scattered publications and are so 
conflicting as to suggest that considerable research and observation are necessary 
before the matter can be cleared up. Wood Jones (1923, p. 74) quotes a case 
in which a male and female Macropus rufus were kept for some time in the 
Zoological Gardens in Philadelphia, the male dying on October 28, 1908. Seven 
weeks after the male died an embryo was observed in the pouch of the female. 
This young suckled till November 7, 1909, but on September 25, 1909, another, 
apparently new-born, embryo was noticed in the pouch. 


The interval between coitus and parturition in this case could not have been 
less than eleven months. It is hardly likely that the gestation period in the 
Macropods would extend over more than six weeks or so, and it is evident that 
more information is needed as to the length of time the spermatozoa may remain 
alive and retain their fertilizing power in the body of the female in these animals. 

With regard to the period of lactation, the recording of observations is 
difficult in the case of Bettongia, since in most cases the pouch young disappear 
a few days after the animals are put in the yard. However, since there is never 
more than one foetus found in the pouch at one time and since in pregnant animals 


510 UTERINE CYCLE IN BETTONGIA CUNICULUS, 


there is present in many instances a pouch foetus, it is obvious that in normal 
cases the duration of the lactation period is about equal to the length of the 
gestation period, i.e., about six weeks. It is also worthy of note that the 
lactation period of one pregnancy is overlapped by the gestation period of the 
next succeeding one. 


(d.) Pregnancy and Pseudo-pregnancy. 

In all viviparous mammals, it is agreed, the growth and shedding of the 
ovum have a profoundly stimulating effect on the uterus and upon the remainder 
of the female reproductive organs. It is now universally admitted that this 
effect is due to hormones secreted by the growing follicle and the corpus luteum, 
but the whole series of occurrences is not yet sufficiently investigated, and it is 
obvious that other glandular structures may also be effective in this stimulation. 

In those mammals in which ovulation is spontaneous, normal pregnancy may 
be expected to supervene if fertilization follows ovulation; on the other hand, 
should fertilization fail, the uteri and other female organs enter into a condition 
which simulates pregnancy. This condition, noticed first by Hill and O’Donoghue 
(1913) in Dasyurus, was called by these investigators “pseudo-pregnancy”. It is 
a most significant phenomenon, since it shows definitely the influence of ovarian 
structures, before and after ovulation, in activating the uterus. Pseudo-pregnancy 
is, naturally, a temporary condition and the transition to normal anoestrum or 
dioestrum consists in the reconstitution of the uterine and gland epithelia and 
in the resorption of the distending lymph material found in the connective 
tissue of the mucosa (Hill and O’Donoghue, pp. 159-160). 

In Bettongia, ovulation is spontaneous, as might be expected, but is unilateral, 
and only one ovum is shed at a time. Hither pregnancy or pseudo-pregnancy 
may follow, according as this ovum is fertilized or not. Unfertilized ova are 
quite rare. Ordinary pseudo-pregnancy in this animal is of the same character as 
in the case of Dasyurus (Hill and O’Donoghue) and has not. been examined in 
any detail for the purposes of this paper. 

Pregnancy is obviously unilateral and the pregnant uterus proceeds to undergo 
the usual changes associated with this condition and which have their climax in 
the act of parturition. More interesting, however, is the fact that the contra- 
lateral (non-pregnant) uterus also undergoes changes by which it is not to be 
distinguished either by external observation or by microscopical examination from 
the pregnant uterus until the time of mid-pregnancy. The non-pregnant uterus 
is therefore in a condition of pseudo-pregnancy. But this pseudo-pregnancy is of 
a somewhat different type from thaf occurring in the case’ of ovulation not 
followed by fertilization. In the latter type, the pseudo-pregnant uterus returns 
more or less gradually to the condition of anoestrum or dioestrum, this return 
being caused apparently by the waning hormonic influence of the ovary. In 
Bettongia, however, the history of the unilaterally pseudo-pregnant uterus is 
peculiar and significant. It does not attempt to return immediately to the 
condition of dioestrum, but remains through the latter half of pregnancy in a 
well stimulated condition, exhibiting a turgid mucosa, with a well-developed lymph 
and blood supply. Just before parturition occurs in the contralateral uterus, 
there is a convulsive expulsion of the contained lymph from the connective tissue 
of the mucosa of the pseudo-pregnant uterus. 

The significance of this behaviour is to be found apparently in two causes: 
(a) the presence of an embryo in the pregnant uterus, (0) the stimulation of the 


e 


Bet aer sR ENINING LIL 
uterine muscles which results in parturition. These will be discussed later in 
this paper. 


THE UTERINE Cycir OF PREGNANCY AND PSEUDO-PREGNANCY IN BETTONGIA. 
Stage 1. Bett. E., 15/9/26 (stage of anoestrum). (Plate xix, figs. 1, 2.) 


It is remarkable at what an early stage the young Bettongia is able to 
receive the male. Coitus seems to occur soon after the young animal is reasonably 
free of the pouch. For this reason it is difficult to obtain resting uteri from free 
animals during the breeding season. Consequently I have taken as an example 
of the anoestrous condition the uterus of a young Bettongia which had not yet 
entirely severed its connection with the pouch. 

Each of the two uteri measured 7 xX 355 mm. Sections show that the wall 
has the usual layers found in the uterine wall of other marsupials. The uterine 
epithelium consists of a single layer of columnar cells of moderate height with 
‘somewhat large nuclei. The latter -are found near the centre of the cell, not 
basally, situated as is the case with the nuclei of the gland epithelium. The 
nuclei are oval in shape and to a great extent fill the centre of the cell. The 
shape and position of the nucleus vary according to the direction in which the 
cell is cut. Narrow cells with thin nuclei mostly prove to be cells cut along one 
edge. The cytoplasm of the cell is finely granular. The nucleus has a well 
defined membrane and is coarsely granular, often with one large chromatic 
particle standing out from the rest. The thickness of the epithelium varies 
between 0-019 and 0:025 mm. 

The uterine epithelium in the anoestrous stage is strongly and almost 
uniformly ciliated. I have not been able to find in literature any reference to 
the fact that the surface epithelium of the uterus of any marsupial is ciliated at 
any stage. Hartman states (1923, p. 372) that his preparations of the anoestrous 
uteri in the opossum do not allow him to say whether any of the cells of the 
epithelium or of the glands possess cilia. Hill and O’Donoghue (1913) refer to 
gland ciliation only, so we may infer that no surface ciliation is present in the 
uterus of Dasyurus. : 

The uterine glands are also strongly ciliated, even to. their bases. The 
glands are of comparatively large diameter, having a diameter of from 0-046 
to 0:058 mm. The glands are straight and are lined by fairly high columnar 
cells in which, however, the nuclei are basally situated. They have small but 
distinct lumina, these, particularly in their basal portions, being occluded by a 
mass of material which, when examined, proves to be closely aggregated cilia, 
these being just as strongly developed in the lower portions of the glands as in the 
upper. 

Of the remainder of the mucosa there is nothing to be said other than that 
it is in the resting condition. It is not markedly supplied with blood vessels or 
with lymphatic material. There is a slight condensation of the connective tissue 
below the uterine epithelium to form a sub-epithelial layer. 


Stage 2. Oestrous Stage. (Plate xix, figs. 3, 4.) 

As an example of this stage will be taken the sterile uterus of specimen 
Bett. F., 29/8/24. In this specimen the two uteri were empty, but there was a very 
small young one in the pouch, newly born. This foetus measured 14:8 mm. direct 
length. There was in the pouch also a larger pouch-foetus which had been dead 


512 UTERINE CYCLE IN BETTONGIA CUNICULUS, 


for some time and which had become quite putrescent. No doubt if this latter one 
had lived it would have been by this time free of the pouch. 


Examination of the uteri showed that the smaller foetus had come from the 
left uterus which showed remains of the foetal membranes, not yet completely 
absorbed. The right uterus, from which the larger foetus had been born, has 
now recovered and has progressed to a stage closely corresponding to oestrus. 


The epithelium of the right uterus is very high and the nuclei are plentiful 
and are arranged at several heights so as to resemble the similar stage in the pig 
(see Corner, 1921, Plate 4, figs. 25, 26). Mitotic figures are very common in the 
epithelium and there are instances of the vacuolar degeneration to which Corner 
refers. The epithelium measures from 0-021 to 0-028 mm. in thickness, so that 
it is appreciably thicker than in the anoestrous stage, but cilia are not nearly so 
plentiful on the surface epithelium. 


The cells of the gland epithelium are extremely active in division, mitotic 
figures being very common. In a single cross-section of a gland as many as three 
cells may be seen in division. A gland section containing two divisions is shown 
on Plate xix, fig. 4. Cilia are abundantly present-in the glands, and they often 
project profusely from the gland mouth into the uterine lumen. The gland 
lumina are larger than in the previous stage and there is sometimes present a 
little secretion. The diameter of an average gland is 0-46 mm. Before dividing, 
the gland cell falls out of line, approaching nearer to the gland lumen. After 
division the two cells apparently work back again to their place in the gland 
epithelium. It is of note to mention that, contrary to what occurs in the pig 
(Corner, 1921), mitoses are just as numerous in the deeper portions of the glands 
as in the more superficial. 

Hach gland cell has clear protoplasm and the nucleus here again largely fills 
the cell. The thickness of the gland epithelium is from 0-020 to 0-021 mm. 


There is at this stage an appreciable increase in the amount of infiltrated 
lymphatic material in the mucosa and through it, also, many blood vessels extend 
and come to lie just below the epithelium. 

Polymorphs occur fairly plentifully at this stage, being found in the con- 
nective tissue of the mucosa, in the gland epithelium and in the uterine epithelium 
as well as being free in the gland and uterine lumina. 

In another small female (Bett., 4/12/29) the uteri were in a condition either 
of late pro-oestrous or early oestrous. She was a very small animal, obviously 
not long free of the pouch, and it is surprising to find her organs in a condition 
of preparatory activity. The two uteri are small, about the size given in the 
stage of anoestrum, left 7 x 3:2 mm., right 7 x 3:0 mm. The uterine wall shows 
a slight advance on the previous stage. The uterine epithelium consists of a 
single layer of columnar cells, but the cilia are much less numerous and are not 
so easily stained. There is a tendency for the epithelial cells to become crowded 
in places so that they become arranged at’ several heights. Occasional mitoses 
occur in the epithelial cells. The uterine epithelium has an average depth of 
0-023 mm. 

The mucosa measures on the average 0-80 mm. from the top of the folds to 
the muscularis, so that it is thicker than in the anoestrum stage. There has 
been a certain amount of infiltration of lymphatic material, so that the glands 
are now being forced somewhat farther apart. The inter-glandular connective 
tissue is becoming more attenuated and fluid laden. 


BY T. T. FLYNN. 513 


Glands.—These present, in general, the same characteristics as in the previous 
stage, with a diameter from 0-054 to 0:060 mm. They are very strongly ciliated 
and their activity is shown by the presence, fairly commonly, of mitoses in the 
gland epithelium. 


Staveusa sect Hrwl!9)/9//2 4s (El sexx 255) 


In this specimen the left uterus contained a small blastocyst in a very early 
unilaminar stage. There was also a well-grown foetus in the pouch. The uteri 
and blastocyst were fixed in picro-nitro-osmic solution. 

In external appearance and in microscopic structure the two uteri are identical. 

The uterine epithelium has now become appreciably thicker, measuring from 
0:026 mm. to 0:04 mm. Mitotic divisions have by this time completely ceased 
and the number of nuclei present in the epithelium is now very large, so that 
they appear to overlap even in thin sections. They are arranged at about three 
levels. The free ends of the epithelium cells are slightly rounded as in the 
pig at this stage (Corner, 1921) and the protoplasm is finely granular. Cilia are 
not nearly so plentiful. The epithelium gives every evidence of being in a state 
of active secretion and the exposed surfaces of its cells are coated with amorphous 
material exuded from them into the uterine lumen. 

A feature of the epithelium is that the distance between the nucleus and the 
base of the cell has increased, due to the intense vacuolation of the basal cyto- 
plasm. This portion of the cytoplasm is quite distinct and owes its distinctive 
appearance no doubt to the absorption of fluid material from the underlying 
stroma, this material being on its way to the interior of the uterus. 

The glands are still fairly crowded, but there is opportunity for lymphatic 
material to be well distributed through the mucosa. The lower portions of the 
glands are much convoluted and the coils are closely crowded. In their upper 
courses the glands are straight. The glands are ciliated right to their bases. The 
cilia are not so plentiful or so strong as in the previous stage. Mitoses in the gland 
cells have entirely ceased. The thickness of the gland epithelium is about 0-024 
mm. The relative proportion of the amount of cytoplasm to nucleus in the 
gland cells is greater than in the previous stage, and there is a strong tendency 
for the cytoplasm to become vacuolated. The nuclei are in general quite basally 
situated in the gland epithelium, but there has commenced in this stage a 
phenomenon which seems to be of the greatest importance and which is much 
more marked in subsequent stages. 

This consists in some of the gland nuclei leaving their basal positions and 
passing toward the gland lumen. In the process, they lose their staining qualities 
and sometimes are with difficulty distinguishable from the general cell proto- 
plasm. In the process of desquamation which the gland cells undergo, especially 
in the next stage, these nuclei go to swell the amount of cellular secretion present 
in the gland lumina. This secretion, although fairly abundant just now in the 
deeper portions of the glands, is much more marked in subsequent stages. On 
occasions it is possible to see the very pale nuclei working their way into the 
lumina of the glands. 


Stage 4. Bett. A., 6/9/24. (PI. xix, fig. 6.) 

A small unilaminar blastocyst, somewhat more advanced than in the last 
stage, was present in the right uterus. The two uteri, which were identical in 
external appearance and in microscopical structure, were fixed in Bouin’s solution. 


514 UTERINE CYCLE IN BETTONGIA CUNICULUS, 


The uterine epithelium.—This is appreciably lower than in Stage 3, measuring 
on an average 0:020 mm. in thickness. The changes initiated in the previous 
stage are continued in this. 


Structurally, the uterine epithelium of this stage bears a very close 
resemblance to that of the pig eight days after ovulation (Corner, 1921, Plate 4, 
fig. 28). An interesting and prominent feature is the presence of abundance of 
narrow cells with dark-staining nuclei whose nature and function have caused 
much discussion. These are the so-called “intercalar cells’, or “cells with pycnotic 
nuclei’ to which Corner refers in the pig (1921), which Hill and O’Donoghue 
have recorded in the uteri of Dasyurus (1913, p. 146), and which are also shown 
by Hartman to occur in the uterus of Didelphys (19238, p. 375). They have been 
long regarded as being cells undergoing extinction but, in the case of Bettongia, 
they appear rather to be wandering cells which, in pushing their way between 
the epithelial cells, have been forced to take a narrow shape while they resume 
a more rounded one on arrival in the uterine lumen. Corner refers to darkly- 
staining rounded cells which force themselves between the epithelial cells at their 
bases in the case of the pig. The basement membrane at this stage is very 
indefinite and may be said to have disappeared. 3 


No mitoses are observable.in the epithelial cells either of the uterus or of 
the glands. In the latter the migration and alteration of the gland nuclei are 
in full activity. 


The cilia have practically the same arrangement as in the last stage. They 
are not very common on the uterine epithelium and the ciliated cells are usually 
somewhat depressed below the general surface. The glands, however, are ciliated 
right to their bases. 


Stage 5. Bett. B., 30/8/24. (Pl. xix, fig. 7 and Pl. xx, fig. 8.) 


A fully formed bilaminar blastocyst was found in the right uterus. 'The two 
uteri are identical in appearance and structure. They have both increased in 
size and turgidity. 

Epithelium.—This shows a considerable advance on the previous stage. Due 
to the thickening of the mucosa, the formation of uterine folds and the general 
increase of area covered by the epithelium without any compensating new cell 
formation, the epithelium has become of a low columnar type, its thickness being 
now about 0-010 to 0-014 mm. The nuclei do not overlap any longer in the 
sections, but lie side by side. The exposed edges of the epithelial cells are plenti- 
fully coated with secretion and the whole layer is in an active secretory condition. 
Cell boundaries are not always distinct in this layer. Some of the cells are ciliated. 


Leucocytes are abundantly present in some places, particularly in the super- 
ficial layers of the stroma. Polymorphs are to be found in the superficial 
epithelium, and in that of the glands, also in the stroma. 

The subepithelial layer is particularly well defined at this stage, due to the 
large number of capillaries which now form its dominant feature. 

Infiltration of the stroma with lymphatic material has gone on apace. Its 
arrangement is such that there is a superficial portion of the stroma which is 
rather spongy and in which the gland tubes are widely separated and are fairly 
straight. 

Contrasted with this there is a deep compact layer of the mucosa not so 
much infiltrated and in which the glands are tortuous and more closely set. 


BY T. T. FLYNN. 515 


There is also a considerable difference in the histology of the glands in these two 
regions of the mucosa. 

In the deeper portion, the gland epithelium has increased greatly in thickness, 
to 0:040 mm. The cytoplasmic portion of the cell has grown largely in volume and 
is profusely vacuolated. In many cases the rounded nucleus is contained in a 
small mass of protoplasm connected to the cell wall by strands. 

Migration of the nuclei is very active, and there seems to be no doubt that 
their substance passes into the lumen of the gland together with the frayed-off 
ends of the gland cells. Nevertheless, many of the gland cells still retain their 
ciliated condition. 

In their superficial portions the epithelium of the glands is not nearly so 
thick (0:033 mm.). Further, the nuclei are smaller and deeply staining. The 
cytoplasm is but little vacuolated. The transition from the deeper portion of the 
gland to the more superficial region is somewhat abrupt. 


Stage 6. Bett., 2/9/24. (Pl. xx, figs. 9-13.) 
A blastocyst of the primitive streak stage was present in the left uterus. 


In this stage, although externally the two uteri are similar, microscopically 
they are very different. 


Structure of the right (non-pregnant) uterus.—The epithelium shows consider- 
able signs of disintegration and degeneration. Where intact it is similar to the 
epithelium of the last stage, but its connection with the underlying tissues is 
very loose, so that in patches it is liable to break away and float in the cavity 
of the uterus. Other degenerative processes are also in operation. Epithelial 
cells swell, their nuclei lose their staining properties and the whole cell either 
breaks away completely or even bursts, throwing the contained material into the 
uterine lumen. Vacuolar degeneration in situ is common. Associated with these 
processes is the presence of numbers of leucocytes in the epithelium. The place 
of the cast-off or degenerated epithelial cells is apparently taken by connective 
tissue cells of the mucosa, these cells moving up into place and forming a new 
single-layered epithelium. 

Blood vessels are plentiful and the breaking away of the epithelial cells causes 
blood extravasations, but these are rare and not of great extent. 


The mucosa is tremendously infiltrated with fluid material, so much so that 
it resembles a mass of fluid in which the blood vessels and glands are suspended. 

The glands are also undergoing degeneration and reconstitution, these 
phenomena being confined at this stage to their more superficial portions. Here, 
vacuolar degeneration, desquamation and migration of the gland cells and nuclei 
are in progress, although not so actively as in the uterine epithelium. With 
these phenomena is associated the presence of leucocytes of various kinds, the 
number of which is remarkable. 

The result.of all this is that each gland becomes divided into two portions, 
a lower secretory portion, convoluted and lined by large vacuolated columnar cells 
with vesicular nuclei, and a more superficial duct-like portion, non-secretory, 
lined by smaller cells, with granular non-vacuolated protoplasm and containing 
small dark-staining nuclei. The separation of each gland into these two portions 
is very distinct. 

Left (pregnant) uterus——There are no signs of degeneration in the uterine 
epithelium. Each gland consists of two portions as in the non-pregnant uterus, but 


516 UTERINE CYCLE IN BETTONGIA CUNICULUS, 


the alteration has not gone so far, nor is the division between the two portions 
of each gland so abrupt. Leucocytes, though present, are not nearly so numerous 
as in the non-pregnant uterus at this stage. 

The two uteri, pregnant and non-pregnant, at this time agree, then, in the 
division of each uterine gland into two portions, a superficial non-secretory and a 
deeper secretory portion. They agree also in the fact that the mucosa is largely 
infiltrated with lymphatic material. The non-pregnant uterus, however, shows a 
wide-spread destruction and regeneration of the superficial epithelium associated 
with the presence of numerous leucocytes. These features are absent in the 
pregnant uterus. 


Stage 7. Bett. H., 14/9/24. (Plate xx, fig. 14.) 
The right uterus contained an embryo in the medullary plate stage. 


The two uteri are very dissimilar in external appearance, the measurements 
being: right uterus 17 x 9 mm., the left 12 x 5-5 mm. 


Left (non-pregnant) uterus—The epithelium varies in thickness from 0-012 
to 0:0121 mm. and in most places is completely restored, although here and 
there are still to be found signs of degeneration. The basement membrane in 
most places is very distinct. Leucocytes are much rarer than in the previous stage. 
In the glands the division into superficial non-secreting and deeper secreting 
portions is quite marked. In the latter portion the glands have a diameter of 
0-48 mm. and possess large and vacuolated cells. More superficially they measure 
0:32 mm. in diameter and the cells possess small darkly-staining nuclei and the 
cytoplasm is granular and but little vacuolated. Cilia are very plentiful. 


Right (pregnant) uterus—The cavity of the uterus is almost circular owing 
to the presence of the blastocyst which fits snugly against the epithelium, 
obliterating many of the folds. The blastocyst is separated from the epithelium 
by the shell membrane which, although very thin, has not yet disappeared. The 
blastocyst is orientated so that its embryonic pole is towards the mesial side of 
the uterus and so that the embryo is arranged transversely to the length of the 
uterus. The anterior end of the future embryo is placed towards the dorsal side. 
In order to retain as much as possible the true relations of the uterus and 
embryo, the organs with the contained embryo were fixed intact in Carnoy’s 
solution. 

Although the inner surface of the uterus is practically smooth, there are 
still a few grooves left and these are in the neighbourhood of the embryo. The 
grooves disappear at the lower pole of the vesicle. 

The epithelium consists of a single layer of cells which are cubical in form 
and possess large spherical nuclei. There is a tendency for the epithelium here 
and there to thicken slightly and penetrate downwards between the subepithelial 
blood-vessels. Many of the epithelial cells possess the excretory processes which 
are characteristic of similar cells in the American opossum (Hartman, 1923, 
p. 374) and in the pig (Corner, 1921, p. 139). Corner considers these processes 
to consist of extruded cytoplasm, contrary to Geist, who believes that they repre- 
sent secreted material on its way into the lumen of the uterus. 

Whatever may be the case in the pig, it appears that in Bettongia the 
processes consist of amorphous material extruded actually from the epithelial cells. 

Cilia are present, though rarely, on the surface of the uterine epithelium. 
Underlying the epithelium there is an almost continuous layer of capillaries which, 


BY T. T. FLYNN. SALT 


with the particular stroma cells, makes a very definite subepithelial layer. 
Between this and the overlying epithelium there is a narrow clear zone which 
consists of aggregated lymphatic material collected probably on its way to the 
lumen. 

Glands are well developed and are ciliated right to their bases. The glands 
are actively secreting and many are greatly dilated. Each gland presents the 
same two divisions already referred to. A feature of the stroma is the presence 
of great numbers of deeply-staining granules which are specially congregated just 
below the surface epithelium. 


Stager8s" Bety G7 1/9/24. (Ply xx) fis) Wb; Pl. xxi, fig? 16%) 

The two uteri measured as follows: right 21 x 11 mm., left 10 x 5:55 mm. The 
embryo contained in the right uterus measured approximately 3-5 mm. in direct 
length. 

Left (non-pregnant) uterus.—The cavity of this uterus is compressed and its 
inner surface is marked by fairly deep longitudinal grooves. 

The cells of the epithelium are now arranged to form a somewhat irregular 
columnar layer of medium height. Cilia are now found more plentifully 
distributed on the surface and take the stain more thoroughly. Blood-vessels have 
been largely withdrawn from the vicinity of the surface epithelium. Polymorpho- 
nuclear leucocytes are observable in the epithelium. The basement membrane and 
subepithelial layer are distinct. The stroma is still infiltrated with lymph. 
Occasionally there are leucocytes to be found in it. 

Glands——These have become much less active than in previous stages, 
although in some of them is to be found secreted material which often contains 
whole cells. Leucocytes are also to be seen in the gland lumina occasionally. In 
all except one region the gland cells take the character of non-secretory cells of 
low cubical type with dense nuclei. In these the average height of the cells is 
from 0-0132 to 0:0148 mm., whereas towards the mesial side of the uterus where 
the deeper parts of the glands still consist of vacuolated columnar cells, the height 
of the cells is on the average 0:020 mm. The glands are ciliated to their bases. 

Right (pregnant) uterus—In order to retain the embryo in its natural 
position, the right uterus was divided by a vertical longitudinal incision. The 
mesial half is shown from its inner aspect on Plate xxi, figure 16. The embryo 
in its membranes is contained in this mesial half. It is arranged fairly trans- 
versely, the head being dorsally directed. The anterior portion of the body is 
strongly bent on the remainder and is contained in the proamnion. In the figure 
the embryo, viewed from underneath, is hidden by the yolk-sac splanchnopleure 
-(y. spl.) which is invaginated towards the observer into the cavity of the yolk-sac 
(y.s. cav.). The yolk-sac splanchnopleure passes up at the side of the embryo and 
is then carried outward towards the uterine wall where it unites with the chorion 
and is then deflected downwards as the yolk-sac wall. This is in extremely close 
contact with the inner surface of the uterine wall, so that the large cavity in the 
figure is the cavity of the yolk-sac, not of the uterus as would first appear. The 
upper portion of the omphalopleure consists of the vascular omphalopleure. The 
lower limit of this is shown by a light line representing the sinus terminalis 
(s.t.). The remainder of the yolk-sac wall consists of the bilaminar omphalo- 
pleure which is in close and intimate contact with the uterine epithelium. 

As has already been suggested by Jenkinson (1913, p. 193), the amnion in 
Marsupials is formed by folds. In Bettongia it is the head-fold which appears 


518 UTERINE CYCLE IN BETTONGIA CUNICULUS, 


first. The foetal membranes of a corresponding stage have been figured by Selenka 
(1886-91, Plate xxxii, figure 3). The arrangement of the foetal membranes of 
Bettongia is that indicated by Semon in his description of the second marsupialian 
type (1894). It is similar to that of all Macropods so far described, except 
Halmaturus ruficollis in which Caldwell (1884) testifies to the presence of an 
allantochorion and.of a union between the bilaminar omphalopleure and the 
uterine wall. With this exception the allantois in all Macropods is small, its 
vascular supply is poorly developed and no part of its wall reaches at any stage 
to the chorion. 

At this stage there is, in Bettongia, a large proamnion, but it is not so 
voluminous as is shown in Selenka’s diagram, in which more than half the body 
is enclosed in proamnion. - 

The chorionic ectoderm consists of a layer of cells which exceed greatly in size 
the cells of the uterine epithelium which are apposed to them. Their nuclei are 
round or oval and usually stain very darkly. The structure of these cells is rather 
characteristic, for the nucleus, placed in the centre of the cell, is surrounded by 
much vacuolated protoplasm. There is intense absorption going on in this layer. 
It will be referred to later. The chorionic mesoderm is a thin layer consisting of 
much smaller fiattened cells, with correspondingly flattened nuclei, well spaced 
apart and connected by thin strands of protoplasm. 

The trophoblast of the vascular omphalopleure is similar to that of the chorion, 
but the cells have a tendency to be somewhat larger. There are many places where 
the contact between this layer and the uterine epithelium is very intimate. The 
two are undoubtedly united in places, but can always be distinguished. There is 
nothing of the nature of an interpenetration of one layer by the other. The union 
occurs on the tops of the small folds which are so characteristic of the inner 
wall of the uterus. Into the deeper folds the vascular omphalopleure at this 
stage does not pass. The mesoderm in this region is very delicate, but is 
abundantly supplied with blood-vessels which make an almost complete layer 
underlying the trophoblastic ectoderm. The entoderm cells are usually flat and 
delicate, but are sometimes large, never, however, becoming as large as the 
ectoderm cells. 

The trophoblast of the bilaminar omphalopleure resembles in general that 
of the other regions, but the cells of the entoderm of this region differ markedly 
from those elsewhere. Instead of being flattened, they are robust cells of the 
characteristic shape made familiar in the drawings of Selenka. These cells 
have somewhat narrow bases, but their apices are expanded and rounded. 
Typically each cell is separated from its neighbours by narrow spaces across 
which continuity is assured by delicate strands of protoplasm. 

Maternal Structures—The inner uterine surface may be distinguished into 
three regions, one in contact with the chorion of the embryo, a second in contact 
with the vascular omphalopleure, and a third in contact with the bilaminar 
omphalopleure. 

The inner surface of the uterus is covered with fine corrugations due to the 
swollen condition of the blood-vessels which lie just below the epithelium. Sections 
of the uterus show that the mucosa is very variable in thickness. At the lower 
pole of the yolk-sac it may be as little as 0:15 mm., whereas it may be as much 
as 0-5 mm. in other places. 

Uterine Hpithelium.—In the region corresponding to the chorion of the 
embryo, the uterine epithelium is quite thin with round or oval nuclei fairly 


WSF Tau LES EGLNYAINEINS 519 


deeply stained. Division between the cells is made out with difficulty. 
The layer is raised into numerous minute rugosities caused by the underlying 
blood-vessels. The nuclei being spaced widely apart in some places, there remains 
between them only a thin and delicate film of protoplasm covering the capillary. 
The epithelium of the other regions of the uterus shows very little departure in 
its structure from what has just been described. Occasionally in any region 
there may be found in the uterine epithelium a ciliated cell, its cilia being bathed 
by the secretion which fills the space between the epithelium and the trophoblast. 


The Mucosa.—The connective tissue of the mucosa consists of a very delicate 
reticulum with stroma cells distributed at wide intervals. There is abundant 
fluid in the meshes of the net-work. Blood-vessels, sometimes of great size, are 
plentiful in the mucosa and their minute branches come to lie immediately below 
the epithelium as a definite and practically continuous layer of capillaries. The 
presence of these in abundance causes the corrugations of the epithelium previously 
referred to. 

The glands are of small diameter, measuring on an average 0:056 mm. Their 
lumen is small and there appears to be little glandular secretion. Their epithelial 
eells possess small, deeply staining, basally situated nuclei. Many of the cells, 
basal as well as superficial, are ciliated but the cilia are very delicate. 


Through the stroma are scattered leucocytes of various kinds and these are 
to be found especially just below the epithelium. 


The Placenta.—The placenta is an organ consisting of the intimate apposition 
or fusion of the foetal membranes with the uterine wall for the purpose of carrying 
out physiological processes (and, it may be added, certain mechanical ones) 
destined for the well-being of the embryo (Assheton, 1909). 


With this conception in mind, it can be stated at the outset that Bettongia 
possesses a very efficient placenta formed by the intimate apposition throughout 
its extent of the trophoblast to the uterine epithelium. The allantois remains 
small, but very efficient absorptive and nutritive functions are carried out in the 
regions of the chorion, vascular omphalopleure and bilaminar omphalopleure 
respectively. Actual fusion between maternal and foetal tissues at this stage is 
practically confined to the region of the vascular omphalopleure—a condition 
recalling that in Dasyurus and Phascolarctos—but this union is very slight and 
occurs at relatively few points. There is no actual penetration of maternal by foetal 
tissue. In the region of the chorion, the space between this membrane and the 
uterine epithelium is entirely filled by a liquid material, actively secreted by the 
maternal tissues and just as actively absorbed by the chorionic ectoderm. This 
secretion occupies all the spaces and folds between the two tissues. It is mainly 
a transudate from the mucosa, and to a very limited extent a secretion from the 
uterine glands. Beyond an occasional leucocyte, there is very little of a cellular 
nature in it. Here and there, however, occur patches of pigment, particularly in 
the neighbourhood of the mouths of some of the glands. It would be expected 
that this is the result of the breaking down of extravasated haematids, but I am 
not able to observe any such extravasations into the mucosa or the passage of 
haematids into the gland lumina. 

A feature of this region, as it is of others, is the formation of pigment in the 
blood-vessels themselves. This, due probably to the degeneration of the red 
corpuscles, is confined to the superficial vessels and no doubt is of embryotrophic 
significance. , 


520 UTERINE CYCLE IN BETTONGIA CUNICULUS, 


In the region of the vascular omphalopleure (omphaloplacental region) the 
relationship of the trophoblast to the maternal epithelium is much more intimate 
than in the chorionic area, and there are numbers of places where actual union 
of the two layers occurs. Where this happens, the foetal and maternal blood- 
streams are separated by the endothelium of the foetal vessel, the trophoblast, the 
uterine epithelium and the endothelium of the maternal vessel. Sometimes con- 
nective tissue is interposed between the maternal vessels and the uterine 
epithelium. Usually there is a narrow space between the foetal and maternal 
tissues and the space is filled with secretion similar to that found in the chorionic 
area. In the omphaloplacental region, however, with this fluid medium there is 
abundance of other material. The same formation of pigment occurs in the 
superficial vessels of this region as in the chorionic area. Patches of similar 
pigment appear in the embryotrophic secretion and are also in evidence in the 
cytoplasm of the trophoblast cells. Many of the leucocytes of the foetal circulation 
show dense masses of pigment in their substance. The activity of the absorption 
by the trophoblast cells of the fluid transudate is such that it is often impossible 
to define the boundary between the two media, the cytoplasm on the one hand and 
the secretion on the other. There is also to be found a considerable quantity of 
cellular debris, many leucocytes and often whole cells. These cells undergo 
immediate and intense disorganization so that, soon, all that is evident of the 
original cell is the nucleclus set in a pale non-staining mass of protoplasm. The 
whole of the colourable materials of the cell, with the exception of the nucleolus, 
seem to have been dispersed. These nucleoli form a very characteristic feature 
of the embryotrophe and of the contents of the megalokaryocytic trophoblast cells. 
Most of the cells which appear in this way in the uterine milk are cells of the 
uterine epithelium which have been loosened from their moorings and in this 
way have formed an integral part of the nutritive material of the embryo. This 
phenomenon is much more evident in the region of the bilaminar omphalopleure. 

The cells of both layers of the bilaminar omphalopleure in the metrioplacental 
region are tremendously vacuolated. This points to the active absorption of 
carbohydrates in this portion of the yolk-sac placenta. 

In many places in this region there are to be found clumps of cells projecting 
from the surface of the uterine epithelium. Sooner or later these become 
loosened and fall away into the secretion between the foetal and maternal 
epithelia. They soon lose their identity and in a short while the only recog- 
nizable part of each original cell is the nucleolus. As in the region of the 
vascular omphalopleure, these nucleoli can be recognized in the cytoplasm of 
the trophoblast cells. 

Many leucocytes are to be seen in the embryotrophe of this region. 

Evidence of active absorption is to be seen in the fact that the free apices 
of the cells of the yolk-sac entoderm are covered with caps of secreted material. 


Stage Os eBett. Bs, Aal/9/- 245) Gala excxdneiess wen Se) aliOe) 

Right uterus contains an embryo near full term with the following measure- 
ments: direct length 14:2 mm., head length 7 mm. 

Description of non-pregnant (left) uterus—The uterus has a lumen which 
is narrow and compressed, presenting narrow longitudinal grooves. This is a 
highly significant and important stage in the cycle of the pseudo-pregnant uterus, 
since active resorption and removal of the infiltrated lymphatic material are in 
progress. 


BY T. T. FLYNN. 521 


Epithelium.—This consists of a columnar epithelium of medium height with 
the cells and contained nuclei fairly closely packed. The nucleus in each case 
fills most of the cell and is oval in shape. Occasionally the nuclei are arranged 
at more than one height. Mitoses occasionally occur. Here and there are to be 
seen also degenerating epithelial cells. No doubt their remains go to swell 
the secretion present in the uterine lumen. Cilia are only rarely present. The 
epithelium measures in average thickness about 0:048 mm. 

Stroma.—Below the epithelium there is a marked condensation of the stroma 
to form a sub-epithelial layer. Everywhere the stroma contains abundance of 
lymph material, particularly at the apices of the folds. The blood-vessels of the 
mucosa are much swollen. Leucocytes, mainly of the large mononuclear type, are 
fairly plentiful in the stroma. 

Glands.—It is in these structures that the greatest activity is shown at this 
stage, since they serve as the most important agents in the removal of the 
contained lymph from the stroma. The glands are of ali diameters, ranging 
from 0:16 to as much as 0:80 mm. Usually the gland epithelium is high and 
strongly ciliated, but in the case of the much expanded glands the epithelium is 
low and cubical, an expression of the internal pressure to which these glands are 
being subjected. The oval, somewhat vesicular nuclei are mostly basally situated. 

The cavities of the glands are filled with abundance of lymphatic material 
which is being poured into the uterine cavity. With this is to be found cellular 
debris associated with whole cells and portions of the gland epithelium. 

The weight of passage of the fluid lymphatic material into the glands is 
remarkable. In many cases it transudes in such a way as to cause little disturb- 
ance to the integrity of the gland epithelium. Often its passage is of such a kind 
as to cause the epithelium to break down and cells are thus carried into the gland 
lumina and added to the gland secretion. In Text-figure 2 one of these breaks 
is shown. Here the external pressure has caused a gap in the wall and the flood 
of lymph has carried some of the epithelial cells with it. In other cases, as is 
shown in Text-figure 3, a larger area of the epithelium becomes invaginated and 
at last loses its connection with the wall altogether. The appearance is then 
presented of a ball or short rod of coagulated secretion wrapped in an envelope 
of flattened and distorted epithelial cells contained within the gland lumen. 

These phenomena recall very vividly the formation of cellular secretion by 
invagination of the gland walls as recorded by Kolster and Bonnet for the horse 
and dog (see Jenkinson, 1913, fig. 142). If a gland be unable to dispose of the 
secreted material quickly enough or should its duct for some reason become 
blocked up, its cavity becomes distended to the relatively enormous dimensions 
mentioned above. j 

Leucocytes are a prominent feature of the gland secretion and are to be seen 
in many places making their way through the gland epithelium. 

Lymph also makes its way to the uterine lumen directly through the uterine 
epithelium, without, however, greatly disturbing the latter. Obviously the pressure 
which would force the lymph into the glands with such destructive effect is 
considerable, and one can only liken the process to that of water being squeez-d 
from a sponge. It appears, therefore, as if the force is exercised by the contraci’on 
of the circular musculature of the uterus which at this stage must have been 
subjected to some considerable stimulus. It is of some significance that this 
should happen in the pseudo-pregnant uterus at a stage which corresponds to a 
few hours before parturition in the pregnant uterus. 


522 UTERINE CYCLE IN BETTONGIA CUNICULUS, 


Pregnant uterus.—This contained an embryo, near full term, of the measure- 
ments given above. The allantois is quite small and does not enter into relation- 
ship with the chorion. 


Text-fig. 2.—One of the glands of the left non-pregnant uterus of 
specimen Bett., 11/9/24. The pressure of the lymph has caused a break 
in the wall and some of the epithelial cells have been carried inward with 
the flow of lymph. 


Text-fig. 3.—A gland from the same uterus as the gland shown in 
Text-fig. 2. Here the invading lymph stream has actually invaginated 
a portion of the gland wall. Notice the reversed position of the cilia of 
the invaginated epithelium. 


The wall of the uterus is greatly folded and into the grooves and crannies so 
formed the wall of the vesicle follows. In some cases these grooves approach 
very closely to the muscularis, there being only a small thickness of mucosa left 
between the two. Here the mucosa may measure only 0:2 mm. in thickness, while 
to the top of the folds it may easily be ten times as much. The mucosa is very 
uniform in appearance, consisting of a homogeneous plasma-like mass: in which 
the glands and blood-vessels appear to float. Stroma cells are very few and are 
much scattered. Leucocytes are present, some bearing pigment, and there are 
occasionally to be seen erythrocytes. The lymph plasma is particularly 
aggregated in the tops of the folds where it stains deeply with eosin. The blood 
vascular supply shows its best development in the superficial region of the stroma 
where it takes the form of a very rich and continuous layer of capillaries. In 
these there is to be found a similar formation of pigment to that which occurs 
in the previous pregnant stage. Here, however, it is not so marked. 

Epithelium.—Opposite the chorion the maternal epithelial cells are very thin 
and strap-like, with nuclei which cause the cell to bulge at its centre. This layer 


BY T. T. FLYNN. 523 


is for the most part, then, no more than a thin investment covering the sub- 
epithelial capillaries. In other regions of the uterus the epithelium presents much 
the same characteristics. 


Glands.—These are small, measuring about 0:055 mm. in diameter. The 
nuclei of the gland epithelium are small and condensed. Ciliation is not very 
marked. Cilia are not always present and, where they are found, neither the 
cilia themselves nor their basal granules stain very well. Further, there is no 
great evidence of secretory activity in the glands. In some there is present a 
homogeneous liquid secretion, to which may be added occasionally cellular detritus. 
Sometimes an expanded gland is to be met with, but the impression given is that 
glandular secretion does not play a very important role in embryotrophic processes 
at this stage. However, wherever a glan?’ is found pouring its secretion into the 
uterine lumen, the trophoblast cells can be seen to be actively absorbing the 
secreted material by means of pseudo-podial processes. 


Foetal structures—Over the full extent of the vesicle, with very little excep- 
tion, the trophoblast is closely and intimately applied to the uterine epithelium. 
It is a case of union without intergrowth. This particularly occurs in the region 
of the vascular omphalopleure. In some places, especially over the mouths of 
active glands, the maternal and foetal tissues are separated by spaces which are 
filled with secretion. 


The Chorion.—The trophoblast cells here, as over the remainder of the vesicle, 
are of very great size. Their nuclei are also large and are chromatically rich. 
These cells are true megalokaryocytes and the presence in their cytoplasm of 
pigment, of vacuoles, and of various granules with the inclusion of broken down 
cells and of leucocytes points to the same active processes of absorption being 
carried on as in the previous stage. Occasionally, an extravasation of blood occurs 
and, where this happens, active ingestion of the haematids by the trophoblast 
cells occurs. 


The mesoderm of this region is a flattened layer with the nuclei spaced at 
intervals. 


In the mesoderm of the vascular omphalopleure is contained a continuous 
layer of blood-vessels, and it is probably in this region that the most active 
processes of absorption are being carried on. The two blood-streams, foetal and 
maternal, are separated by the two epithelia, themselves very thin, and the two 
endothelia, of even greater tenuity. To these may be added, but not always, a 
small proportion of maternal connective tissue. The enormous size of some of 
the megalokaryocytes is remarkable. Their contents are similar to those of the 
megalokaryocytes of the chorionic area. 


Bilaminar omphalopleure.—Here the trophoblast presents the same features 
as in other regions. The entoderm cells are large and extensively vacuolated. 
This, as I have already suggested in the case of Perameles (1923, p. 150), is 
probably due to the absorption of carbohydrate in this region of the yolk-sac 
placenta. 


Stage 10. Bett. F., 29/8/24. (Post-partum.) (Pl. xxi, fig. 20.) 


This is the animal in which the right uterus served as an example of the 
stage representing the condition of oestrus. In the pouch was a newly-born embryo 
measuring 14:8 mm. in direct length. 

Cc 


524 UTERINE CYCLE IN BETTONGIA CUNICULUS, 


This uterus contains remnants of the foetal membranes which are being 
actively absorbed. Mostly they are more or less free in the uterine lumen where 
absorption is in progress by the aid of enormous numbers of polymorphonuclear 
leucocytes. 


Maternal structures.—It is remarkable with what rapidity repair has been 
effected. In some situations the uterus is almost normal, while in others regenera- 
tion processes are being carried on with the utmost rapidity. 


The epithelium has undergone a remarkable transformation from its condition 
just before parturition. In the latter stage, it consisted of thin flattened cells 
placed end to end, thus forming a thin investment for the underlying blood- 
vessels and connective tissue. Now, however, where thoroughly regenerated, the 
epithelium consists of fairly high plump cells with the nuclei arranged in two 
or even three layers. Where regeneration is in progress many of the original 
epithelial cells are undergoing degeneration in situ. This consists mainly in the 
absolute dissolution of the cell which soon becomes an amorphous darkly staining 
mass (Pl. xxi, fig. 20, d.c.). 


Regeneration of the epithelium is brought about partly by the growth and 
multiplication in situ of a number of the original cells. Partly also it results 
from the immigration of underlying stroma cells. Such cells undergo marked 
hypertrophy and subsequent division (Pl. xxi, fig. 20, str. c.). The formation of 
new epithelium by radial growth from the gland mouths as recorded by Hill for 
Perameles (Hill, 1897, p. 422) does not occur in Bettongia. 


Where the epithelium is practically normal the cells are fairly high and the 
nuclei are arranged at one, two or three heights. The cytoplasm is vacuolated 
while the nucleus is vesicular, its chromatin being confined to one or two con- 
spicuous particles. 


Active proliferation is still being carried on, mitoses being very frequent. 
Cilia are quite common and are very robust, their basal granules being easily 
stained. 


Stroma.—Although in some places the stroma is still largely infiltrated, in 
others it has practically returned to its normal condition. In such situations the 
glands are quite closely packed. Further, the stroma cells form a fairly compact 
layer below the epithelium. Although there is no doubt that these cells have 
increased somewhat in size and in many cases undergone division, there is no 
evidence of as great a growth and multiplication as is instanced by Hill in the 
case of Perameles at a corresponding stage (Hill, 1897, p. 240). In the blood- 
vessels, there is some thickening of the walls and in some cases this increase in 
thickness is almost or completely sufficient to obliterate the lumen of the vessel. 


The glands have undergone considerable alteration. The gland cells have 
increased in size and their protoplasm has become greatly vacuolated. The nuclei 
have now become larger and more vesicular with a well-defined nuclear membrane. 
The glands are in many cases still engaged in the removal of lymphatic material 
and cell remnants. They are well ciliated, cilia being best observed at or near 
the mouths of the glands. In their basal portions are to be found many poly- 
morphonuclear leucocytes. These are also to be seen in the stroma, and in the 
vessels. 


BY T. T. FLYNN. 525 


SUMMARY OF CONCLUSIONS. 
1. Breeding Habits, ete. 


(a). The breeding season of Bettongia is known with certainty to extend 
over ten months of the year, from the beginning of March to the third week in 
December. 


(0). Bettongia is polyoestrous. 


(c). Ovulation is spontaneous and unilateral, one ovum being discharged at 
each ovulation. 


(d). Pregnancy is unilateral and under normal conditions occurs alternately 
in each uterus. 


(e). Gestation and lactation periods are each of about six weeks’ duration. 


(f). When breeding is active, the gestation and lactation periods overlap, i.e., 
a new pregnancy may occur while there is still present a pouch foetus. 


2. Pregnancy and “Pseudo-pregnancy”’. 


(9g). While one uterus is pregnant the contra-lateral one enters into and 
remains in a condition of pseudo-pregnancy. This condition of pseudo-pregnancy 
persists till parturition, probably being brought about by the same hormones 
which control the pregnant uterus. 


(h). During the first half of pregnancy the pregnant and pseudo-pregnant 
uteri are to all intents and purposes identical, both macroscopically and micro- 
scopically. Although ovulation is unilateral, the two uteri undergo quite similar 
changes during pro-oestrus, oestrus and early pregnancy. 


(i). Ciliation of the epithelium of the uterus and glands is strongly developed 
in anoestrum, but later the surface ciliation tends to become suppressed. Gland 
ciliation persists quite well through the whole cycle. 


(j). The uterine epithelium proliferates actively during pro-oestrus and 
oestrus, with the result that the cells become greatly crowded and are arranged 
at several heights. Thereafter there is little or no new cell formation. The 
increase in the extent of the internal surface causes the epithelium to become 
definitely single-layered. Towards the end of pregnancy this layer becomes very 
delicate, with the nuclei spaced widely apart. 


(kK). Other features of pro-oestrus and oestrus are increase of vascularity, 
tremendous oedema of the mucosa with infiltration of lymphatic material, and, 
following upon this, active secretion by the glands of liquid material and of 
cellular debris, the latter resulting largely from thrown-off gland epithelial cells. 


3. “Pseudo-pregnancy”’. 


(1). From mid-pregnancy onward the pseudo-pregnant uterus decreases 
slightly in size. This is due very little to loss of infiltrated material. The large 
difference in dimensions between the two uteri is mainly due to the mechanical 
effect of the presence of a growing embryo in the pregnant uterus. 

(m). Mid-pregnancy is marked by the occurrence of well-marked regeneration 
processes in the epithelium of the pseudo-pregnant uterus and of the superficial 
portions of its glands. 


(n). Infiltration of the mucosa persists until just before the stage of 
parturition. 


526 UTERINE CYCLE IN BETTONGIA CUNICULUS, 


(o). In the later stages the glands gradually lose their secretory function, 
becoming more or less inactive. 


(p). A few hours before parturition occurs the whole wall of the pseudo- 
pregnant uterus becomes greatly disturbed. This is apparently due to stimulation 
of the uterine muscles, whose contractions cause the infiltrated material held in 
the mucosa to break through the walls of the glands and so be removed. 


(q). Immediately after parturition has occurred and while the breeding season 
lasts, the pseudo-pregnant uterus enters into the stage of pro-oestrus. 


4. Pregnancy. 
(i.) Maternal Structures. 


(r). As in the pseudo-pregnant uterus, infiltration of the mucosa endures 
throughout and the glands appear to lose their secretory importance. 


(s). Embryotrophic material is present in abundance and consists mainly of 
a transudate from the epithelium with included epithelial cells, cellular debris, 
leucocytes and haematids. 


(ii.) Foetal Structures. 
(t). The amnion in Bettongia arises by folds, of which the head fold appears 
first. 


(w). The allantois remains small and no allanto-chorion is formed. 


(v). An efficient placenta is developed by the close apposition of the tropho- 
blast to the uterine epithelium. Actual union without penetration occurs, being 
most marked and appearing first in the region of the vascular omphalopleure. 


5. Parturition. 


(w). Parturition occurs when the embryo measures about 14:5 mm. in direct 
length. 


(x). The foetal membranes are retained in the uterus at parturition and are 
absorbed with the aid of maternal leucocytes. 


DISCUSSION. 


The genus Bettongia belongs to what is acknowledged to be a very specialized 
family of marsupials, the Macropodinae, and for that reason may be expected to 
exhibit highly specialized characteristics superimposed upon others which can 
be recognized as primitive. 


In this discussion, I will confine myself to three points: (a) the condition of 
polyoestrum, (0) the placental arrangements, (c) the control of pregnancy. 


(a). The condition of polyoestrum. 


In Hill’s monograph on the development of the Native Cat, Dasyurus (1910), 
it is stated that Dasyurus has only one breeding season in the year. Later (1913), 
Hill and O’Donoghue repeated this statement, and drew the inference that the 
monoestrous condition is the primitive one. However, still later (1918), the result 
of investigations on the breeding habits of Didelphys aurita raised doubts in 
Hill’s mind as to the accuracy of his statement for Dasyurus. What is of some 


BY T. T. FLYNN. 527 


importance to us at the present juncture, also, is that he states, with regard to 
Macropus ruficollis, originally believed by him to be monoestrous, that it breeds 
“during August-September, and again during December—February, as soon as the 
young one has vacated the pouch or even before” (p. 102). This last statement 
shows that Hill had recognized the overlapping of the gestatory and lactatory 
periods in a Macropod. 


As regards Didelphys virginiana, Hartman at first believed (1916) that this 
marsupial was monoestrous, but his later researches showed that in this belief he 
was wrong and that the Virginian opossum is definitely polyoestrous. 


It is highly probable that Dasyurus is also polyoestrous, although I have no 
observations to offer on this point myself, and that the polyoestrous condition, as 
suggested by Hartman, is the more primitive. 


The condition of polyoestrum as found in Bettongia offers considerable 
differences in detail from the conditions found in Didelphys. In the latter animal, 
at ovulation, a large number of ova are shed, some from each ovary. Should 
these be unfertilized, pseudo-pregnancy supervenes which lasts for some eleven 
days. After this comes a short dioestrous period which is followed again by the 
next pro-oestrus. 


During the season, then, the cycle in Didelphys virginiana is as follows: 


Anoestrus (or Dioestrus) 
Pro-oestrus 


Oestrus 


Post-oestrus 
Pseudo-pregnancy or Pregnancy 


Dioestrus (or Anoestrus) 


In Bettongia ovulation is unilateral and one ovum only is discharged. Except 
for this detail the non-pregnant cycle is not very different from that in Didelphys. 
After ovulation, in the non-pregnant female, psuedo-pregnancy of the two uteri 
supervenes (controlled apparently by the single corpus luteum) after which the 
organs return to the condition of dioestrus. 


In a female undergoing successive pregnancies during the breeding season, 
the cycle becomes somewhat complex, since, while one uterus is pregnant, the 
other is pseudo-pregnant, and this goes on alternately throughout the season under 
normal conditions. The pseudo-pregnant uterus, so soon as parturition occurs 


528 UTERINE CYCLE IN BETTONGIA CUNICULUS, 


in the pregnant, uterus, passes on to the pro-oestrous and oestrous stages. The 
cycle is therefore of the following type (commencing from anoestrus) : 


Anoestrus 


Pro-oestrus 


| 


Oestrus 


Post-oestrus 


< 
he 


Pregnancy Pseudo-pregnancy 
Parturition 
4 Pro-oestrus 
? Oestrus 
Pseudo-pregnancy Pregnancy 
Parturition | 


Cycle of Pregnancy in Bettongia. 


It will be seen from the above diagram that the cycle of pregnancy in 
Bettongia is very different from any yet described for a mammal and in fact 
is only possible in a monotocous marsupial. While the whole cycle is deserving 
of more intense and detailed study, it will also be seen that the post-partum 
changes undergone by the ex-pregnant uterus, at a stage in the cycle when the 
ex-pseudo-pregnant uterus is being influenced by pro-oestrous and oestrous stimuli, 
is, in the present state of our knowledge with regard to the origin of these stimuli, 
one particularly deserving of attention. 

Finally, it may be conceded, I think, without difficulty, that in view of the 
nature of the cycle in Didelphys, the curious cycle found in Bettongia is a type 
of polyoestrum which must have been secondarily acquired simultaneously with 
the development of the monotocous condition from one primitively polytocous. 


(b). Placental arrangements in Bettongia. 
The evidence adduced by Hill (1897, 1899), Flynn (1923) and others is 
unquestionably in favour of the ancestral marsupial having been a placental 


y 


BY T. T, FLYNN. 529 


mammal. It is also unquestionable that Bettongia is a genus very far removed 
in many respects from the primitive type, and it might be expected that this 
specialization will be indicated in its placental arrangements. This is so, since 
in this marsupial the allantois remains quite small and an allanto-chorion, conse- 
quently an allantoplacenta, is never developed. Nevertheless, nutrition, respiration, 
and elimination of the waste-products of the foetus have to be arranged for and this 
is done by the development of a yolk-sac placenta of a very efficient type. This 
consists of the close apposition and, in places, of actual union, of the trophoblast 
with the prepared uterine epithelium. Definite union is particularly to be found 
in the region of the vascular omphalopleure. Between the foetal and maternal 
tissues, where separated, there occurs abundant “uterine milk” consisting of cell 
debris, leucocytes, haematids, lymph and other material, all being actively absorbed 
and ingested by the trophoblast cells. 


As in other marsupials, at parturition, the foetal membranes remain behind 
in the uterus to be absorbed. 


(c). The control of pregnancy. 


¥ It will be seen from the foregoing that the phenomenon of pregnancy’ (and 
pseudo-pregnancy) in SBettongia offers for solution interesting and complex 
problems, the elucidation of which may well help in the understanding of the 
sexual cycle in mammals in general. 


The first half of pregnancy in this animal ‘is characterized by identical 
changes in the two uteri, respectively pregnant and pseudo-pregnant. There are 
to be found, inter alia, definite identity in the alterations in the form of the 
epithelium of the uterine lining and of the glands, in the amount of lymph 
infiltration into the stroma and in the intensity of vascularization of the uterine 
tissue. 


During the later stages of pregnancy, macroscopically and microscopically, the 
two uteri differ greatly. Macroscopically, the pregnant uterus increases greatly 
in size, this increase being due to the presence of the growing embryo. There is 
no increase in the amount of lymph infiltration over that found in the contra- 
lateral pseudo-pregnant uterus. At about mid-pregnancy, the surface epithelium, 
and that of the superficial portion of the glands, in the pseudo-pregnant uterus, 
undergo involution, but it is to these structures that involution is confined, for 
the stroma remains of the same turgidity and of the same vascularity until just 
near the stage of parturition. It would, therefore, seem as if two factors, at least, 
are concerned in the control of the uteri during pregnancy. 


Detailed experimentation will be necessary before any certainty can be arrived 
at as to what these factors are and how they act. 


As pointed out above, a further stimulus is evident just before parturition 
when the lymphatic contents of the wall of the pseudo-pregnant uterus are 
squeezed out and the wall collapses. 


There are many other outstanding problems awaiting solution in this animal. 
The relation of pro-oestrus and oestrus to lactation, the overlapping of lactatory 
and gestatory periods, and the occurrence of ovulation (no doubt preceded by pro- 
oestrus and oestrus) in the immediate post-partum period are a few of the 
prominent questions whose solution, I am convinced, will help to a better under- 
standing of the sexual cycle in the higher mammals. 


530 UTERINE CYCLE IN BETTONGIA CUNICULUS, 


In speaking of the function of the corpora lutea, Parkes (1929, p. 175) says: 
“The ideal subject for experiments of this nature would be a small monotocous 
animal in which the ovary containing the corpus luteum could be readily removed, 
leaving intact the second ovary containing no corpus luteum, to carry on the other 
ovarian functions.” In this, as in other respects (for example, the possession of two 
separate uteri), Bettongia seems to be eminently suitable, and for our knowledge 
of these and allied phenomena investigation and experimentation upon this animal 
hold great hope for the future. 


List of References. 


ALTMANN, S. C. A., and Euuery, M. EH. W., 1925.—The Chromosomes of Four Species of 
Marsupials. Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., Vol. lxix. 

ASSHETON, R., 1909.—Professor Hubrecht’s Paper on the Harly Ontogenetic Phenomena 
in Mammals: An Appreciation and a Criticism. Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., Vol. liv. 
BENSLEY, B. A., 1903.—On the Evolution of the Australian Marsupialia; with Remarks 
on the Relationship of the Marsupialia in general. Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., (2) 

Vol. ix. 

CALDWELL, W. H., 1884.—On the arrangement of the Embryonic Membranes in Marsupial 
Animals. Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., Vol. xxiv. 

CORNER, G. W., 1921.—Cyclic Changes in the Ovaries and Uterus of Swine and their 
Relation to the Mechanism of Implantation. Carnegie Inst., Cont. to Embryology, 
Vol. xiii. 

FLYNN, T. THOMSON, 1922.—Notes on Certain Reproductive Phenomena in some Tas- 
manian Marsupials. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (9) x. 

, 1923.—The Yolk Sac and Allantoic Placenta in Perameles. Quart. Journ. Micr. 
Sci. Vol. 1xvii. 

HARTMAN, C. G., 1920.—Studies in the Development of the Opossum Didelphys virginiana. 
V. The Phenomenon of Parturition. Anat. Rec., Vol. xix, No. 5. 

—, 1923.—The Oestrous Cycle in the Opossum. Amer. Journ. Anat., Vol. xxxii. 

Hiuu, J. P., 1897.—The Placentation of Perameles. Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., Vol. x1. 

, 1899.—On a Further Stage of the Placentation of Perameles and on the Foetal 
Membranes of Macropus parma. Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., Vol. xliii. 

, 1910.—The Early Development of the Marsupialia, with Special Reference to the 
Native Cat (Dasyurus viverrinus). Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., Vol. lvi. 

,1918.—Some Observations on the Early Development of Didelphys awurita. 
Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., Vol. 1xiii. 

Hiuu, J. P., and O(DoONOGHUE, CHAS. H., 1913.—The Reproductive Cycle in the Marsupial 
Dasyurus viverrinus. Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., Vol. lix. 

JENKINSON, J. W., 1913.—Vertebrate Embryology. Oxford: Clarendon Press. 

JONES, F. Woop, 1923.—The Mammals of South Australia, Pt. I. The Monotremes and 
the Carnivorous Marsupials. Adelaide (Govt. Printer). 

MARSHALL, F. H. A., 1922.—The Physiology of Reproduction. London. 

O’DoNOGHUE, CHAs. H., 1916.—On the Corpora Lutea and Interstitial Tissue of the Ovary 
in the Marsupial. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., Vol. 1xi. ; 

ParKEs, A. S., 1929.—The Internal Secretions of the Ovary. London. 

SELENKA, H., 1886-1891.—Studien tiber Entwickelungsgeschichte der Tiere: IV (1 und 2), 
Das Opossum (Didelphys virginiana): V (1), Beutelfuchs und Kangaruhratte 
(Phalangista et Hypsiprymnus). Wiesbaden. 

SEMON, R., 1894.—Die Hmbryonalhtillen der Monotremen und Marsupialer. Zool. Forch. 
in Australien, Bd. II. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES XIX—XXI. 


b.m., basement membrane; cap., capillary; ch. ect., chorionic ectoderm; ch. mes., 
chorionic mesoderm; cil., cilia; c.m., cellular material in active ingestion by the tropho- 
blast; d.c., degenerating cell; ent., entoderm; foet. cap., foetal capillary; gl. ep., gland © 
epithelium; haem., haematids; lewe., leucocyte; m. cap., maternal capillary; mit., cell 
in mitosis; mgc., migrating gland nuclei; plm., polymorphonuclear leucocyte; proa., 
proamnion; sec., secretion; s.t., sinus terminalis; str. c., stroma cell; troph., trophoblast ; 
u.e., uterine epithelium; w.m., material secreted into: uterine lumen (uterine milk) ; 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. IPGAT EV EXeDxe 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. IP GATHUXeKe 


re del. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XXI. 


Y.5 Cav. 


BY T. T. FLYNN. 531 


w.c., wandering (?) cell; # (fig. 8), remains of a degenerated gland nucleus as it passes 
into the gland lumen; y.s.cav., yolk-sac cavity; y.s.spl., yolk-sac splanchnopleure. 


Plate xix. 


Figs. 1, 2.—Stage 1. Bett. E., 15/9/26. 1. Uterine epithelium with underlying 
stroma. 2. Transverse section of uterine gland. 

Figs. 3, 4.—Stage 2. Bett. F., 29/8/24 (right uterus). 3. Portion of the uterine 
epithelium and underlying stroma. 4. Cross-section of uterine gland. 

Fig. 5.—Stage 3. Bett. F., 19/9/24. Portion of uterine epithelium and underlying 
stroma of left uterus. 

Fig. 6.—Stage 4. Bett. A., 6/9/24. Portion of uterine epithelium and underlying 
stroma of right uterus. 

Fig. 7.—Stage 5. Bett. B., 30/8/24. Portion of uterine epithelium and underlying 
stroma (right uterus). 


Plate xx. 


Fig. §.—Stage 5. Bett. B., 30/8/24. Cross-section of a uterine gland showing 
inward movement of nuclei accompanied by degeneration. At a is shown the last 
remnants of a nucleus as it passes into the lumen. At y is a portion of a gland cell 
about to be desquamated into the gland cavity. 

Figs. 9-13.—Stage 6. Bett., 2/9/24. 9. Portion of the epithelium of the right, non- 
pregnant uterus showing degeneration of epithelial cells and the movement upward of 
stroma cells to help form a new epithelium. 10 and 11. Degeneration in situ of epithelial 
eells of the non-pregnant uterus, the latter figure showing the contents of the cell being 
thrown into the uterine cavity. 12. Cross-section of the upper portion of a gland in 
the non-pregnant uterus, showing active involution in this region. 13. Epithelium of 
pregnant uterus with underlying stroma. 

Fig. 14.—Stage 7. Bett. E., 14/9/24. Portion of the epithelium of the pregnant 
uterus with underlying stroma. 

Fig. 15.—Stage 8. Bett. G., 11/9/24. Portion of the epithelium of the non-pregnant 
uterus with underlying stroma. 


Plate xxi. 


Fig. 16.—Stage 8. Bett. G., 11/9/24. Internal view of the mesial half of the 
pregnant uterus. 

Figs. 17-19.—Stage 9. Bett. B., 11/9/24. 17. Section showing active absorption, by 
the trophoblast cells of the vascular omphalopleure, of secretion from a uterine gland. 
18. Section showing an area in which the chorion is fused to the uterine epithelium and 
in which active ingestion by the chorionic ectoderm of extravasated blood corpuscles and 
other cellular material is in progress. 19. Close apposition of the bilaminar omphalo- 
pleure to the uterine epithelium and ingestion by the former of haematids and other 
cellular material. 

Fig. 20.—Stage 10. Bett. F., 29/8/24. This shows degeneration of uterine epithelium 
and the movement upward of stroma cells to form new epithelium. Notice cells in 
mitotic division and the enlargement of the endothelial cells of the maternal capillaries. 


NEW GUINEA AND AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA. 
NOTES AND NEW SPECIES. 
By H. J. Carter, B.A., F.H.S. 
(Thirteen Text-figures. ) 


[Read 26th November, 1930.] 


The close geographical relationship existing between the Australian Continent 
and the Austro-Malayan Islands gives a particular interest to the study of the New 
Guinea Fauna. Australian Museums can do good work in the furtherance of this 
study and Mr. A. M. Lea of the South Australian Museum is to be congratulated 
on his appreciation of this importance by the extensive insect collections from 
New Guinea that he has directed to the Adelaide Museum. _ 

Our generous patron, Sir William Macleay, was well aware of the value of this 
study and the “Chevert” Expedition, organized by him, with its resultant additions 
to our zoological knowledge, set a notable example to our naturalists. He further 
contributed two papers on the entomology of New Guinea—‘‘The Insects of the 
Maclay Coast’ (1884) and “Insects of the Fly River (Coleoptera)” (1886). 

The Tenebrionidae and Buprestidae (also one Dryopid) collected for the 
South Australian Museum have been sent me for determination. These scarcely 
bear out Macleay’s remark as to the “limited Coleopterous Fauna of the Island”, 
since there are 136 species of the first and 36 of the second, and these numbers 
are slightly increased by the examination of collections in the Australian Museum, 
Sydney, and the National Museum, Melbourne. The single member of the 
Dryopidae sent is especially interesting as being a close ally of the monotypic 
Stetholus elongatus Cart., from Dungog, New South Wales—a strongly differ- 
entiated genus, so far unrecorded elsewhere. The above were mostly collected by 
Mr. C. T. McNamara at Mt. Lamington, Buna District, and the Rev. L. Wagner 
in the Finschhafen District. The absence of named collections from the Austro- 
Malay Islands, together with the difficulty of obtaining much of the older litera- 
ture dealing with this fauna, has prevented my doing as effective work as I could 
wish. 

In the Tenebrionidae the thorough work of Gebien in “Résultats de 
lV’Expédition Néerlandaise, 1920’, together with that author’s gifts of many 
specimens, including cotypes, to me, has made it possible to identify a consider- 
able number. Except in a few cases, which seemed to me beyond doubt, I have 
thought it undesirable to describe species as new, since continual cases of proved 
synonymy show a wider range for insects than was formerly supposed. Thus a 
few beetles are known to range from India to Australia (see Amarygmus morio 
F. below). Again Pentaphyllus bifasciatus Geb., described from the Philippine 
Islands, was amongst those collected by Mr. McNamara on Mt. Lamington, S.E. 
Papua. The extension of the Australian genus Stigmodera to New Guinea is not 
surprising. I have seen others in the collection of Monsieur Théry. 


BY H. J. CARTER. 533 


I am indebted to Mr. J. L. Wassell for the drawing of Stigmodera ariel and 
details of other species. 


Family BUPRESTIDAE. 
STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) APICENOTATA, n. sp. Text-fig. 1. 


Oblong-ovate; head, pronotum, underside, and legs coppery-bronze, above with 
a reddish tinge, darker beneath; underside densely silvery-pilose; elytra yellow 
with the base narrowly, suture, two fasciae and the apex widely, violaceous blue- 
black, the apical mark with two small yellow spots; the premedial fascia bifurcate 
laterally, the anterior branch extending to the basal angle, the hinder branch also 
reaching margin; both fasciae enlarged at suture; antennae green. 

Head excavate and channelled, densely punctate. Prothorax: Apex nearly 
straight, base lightly -bisinuate, anterior angles obtuse, the posterior slightly 
produced and acute, rather strongly convex, widest at middle, sides evenly and 
widely rounded; disc densely and evenly punctate, the punctures larger and sparser 
near hind angles; medial line laevigate throughout and terminating behind in 
a small foveate puncture. Scutellum scutiform, concave and laevigate. Elytra 
of same width as prothorax at base, lightly enlarged at shoulder, moderately 
compressed behind this; apices with a small semicircular lunation between two 
short spines; subapical margins serrulate; striate-punctate, the strial punctures 
evident; intervals very convex at sides and apex, flatter near suture, with a few 
perceptible punctures; sculpture of underside obscured by dense pubescence. 

Dimensions: 10-12 x 4-4:5 mm. 

Habitat Queensland: Rockhampton. 

Three examples, two 3, one 9, have an elytral pattern very like that of 
humeralis Kerr., especially in the case of the variation mentioned below, but differ 
from that species in the less elongate and attenuate form, the pronotum without 
yellow margins, and the more strongly pilose underside, besides the very differently 
shaped prothorax. In one example the premedial fascia is only represented by a 
diamond-shaped spot on the suture, and the arcuate shoulder mark. 

Holotype and allotype in the South Australian Museum. 


STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) SUBGRATA Blkb. var. DISCOFLAVA Cart. 


Two examples from Stanthorpe, Queensland, in the South Australian Museum 
deserve a varietal name as above. In these the metallic-green has invaded the 
greater part of the elytra leaving only the following yellow areas: the margins 
throughout, a discal triangular mark, representing the medial fascia, and a short 
narrow preapical fascia not reaching the yellow border nor quite extending to 
the suture. 


STIGMODERA ARIEL, n. sp. Text-fig. 2. 


Narrowly oblong; head, antennae, pronotum, scutellum, underside and legs” 
bright metallic-green; elytra coppery-violet with two round spots near base; two 
premedial spots longitudinally oval, narrowly connected with a wide oblique 
lateral spot behind shoulder extending to sides; a short postmedial fascia extending 
to sides, widely interrupted at suture and two oval preapical spots yellow. 

Head rather deeply excavate and canaliculate. Prothorax: Apex truncate, 
base moderately bisinuate, anterior angles depressed and obtuse, posterior acute, 
widest at base, thence arcuately converging to apex; disc closely, finely punctate, 
media! line suggested by sparser punctures; three lightly impressed foveae, one 


534 NEW GUINEA AND AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, 


mediobasal, the other two symmetrically placed near middle. Elytra rather flat, 
striate-punctate; intervals only convex near apex, not perceptibly punctate; apices 
bispinose, with an oblique lunation, with a short sutural and rather long exterior 
spine; margins entire. Underside glabrous, finely punctate, apical segment 
rounded. 

‘Dimensions: 7 x 2-5 mm. 

Habitat.—New South Wales: Dorrigo (Dr. R. J. Tillyard). 

A single example (? 9) of a very distinct species which has been in my 
collection since 1912; I refrained from describing it earlier in the hope of obtaining 
more material. It is nearest S. parva Saund., in general facies, but differs from 
that species in narrower prothorax, the junction of the medial spot with lateral, 
and the extra preapical pair of yellow spots, the margins not widely yellow and 
the more distinctly bispinose apex. 

Holotype in Coll. Carter. 


1.—Stigmodera (Castiarina) apicenotata, n. sp. 
2.—Stigmodera ariel, n. sp. 


9 


3.—Stigmodera (Castiarina) bogania, n. sp. 
4.—Stigmodera (Castiarina) dryadula, n. sp. 


STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) BOGANIA, n. sp. Text-fig. 3. 


Ovate attenuate in front and behind; head, pronotum and underside dark- 
bronze; elytra yellow, with black markings as follow: rather wide mark behind 
seutellum, terminating at basal fourth in a diamond-shaped spot, a comma-shaped 
post humeral mark, arcuately extending backwards from humeral callus to margin, 
a rather narrow, straight, postmedial fascia, extending the full width of elytra, 
having a bisinuate outline on each edge and a squarish apical patch. 

Head rather narrow, strongly punctate, deeply excavate. Prothorax: Apex 
truncate, base lightly bisinuate, widest at base, sides arcuately narrowed to apex, 
all angles subacute; medial line smooth and depressed on basal half; rather 
irregularly punctate, closely in front, more sparsely at sides and base. 

Elytra lightly enlarged at shoulders and behind middle, constricted at basal 
third, markedly attenuate behind; somewhat uniformly striate-punctate, intervals 
lightly convex on apical half; subapical margins entire, apices a little divergent 
and strongly bispinose, with long exterior spine. : 

Dimensions: 10 * 3:5 mm. 

Habitat.—New South Wales: Bogan River (J. Armstrong). 

A single ¢ example, generously presented by the above-named. keen young 
entomologist, shows a species near obscura Saund., and atricollis Saund., but 


BY H. J. CARTER. 535 


differs from these by the narrowed prothorax and the attenuate apex, this unusually 
strongly bispinose, very much as in caudata Kerr., insignis Blkb., and coeruleipes 
Saund. It is probable that other examples will have the three premedial marks 
joined to form a fascia. 

Holotype in Coll. Carter. 


STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) DRYADULA, n. Sp. Text-fig. 4. 


Head golden-green; pronotum blue with medial vitta and sides brilliantly 
golden; elytra peacock-blue with four transversely oval spots yellow, two pre- 
medial, two postmedial, the former the larger; underside golden-green; antennae 
and legs blue. 

Head lightly channelled and excavate, forehead finely, closely punctate. 

Prothorax lightly bisinuate at apex and base, sides lightly rounded, widest 
at middle, thence converging and depressed to apex, subparallel to base; anterior 
angles subacute, posterior rectangular; disc regularly and closely punctate, the 
punctures finer on medial vitta and larger on sides. 

Elytra widest at shoulders, thence sinuately compressed and again widened, 
then narrowing to apex, each with a single sharp spine (forming continuation of 
third interstice), suture scarcely produced, finely striate-punctate, very small 
punctures in striae, intervals flat on greater part, the third, fifth, seventh and 
ninth sharply raised on apical third; subapical margins entire. 

Dimensions: 7:5 x 2-5 mm. 

Habitat—New Guinea: Wareo, Finschhafen (Rev. L. Wagner). 

A lovely little species, unique, suggesting S. cydista Rainb., by its golden- 
sided pronotum, and S. pulchella Cart., in colour but with yellow spots different 
in number and position. 

Holotype in South Australian Museum. 


STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) QUADRIPLAGIATA, nh. sp. Text-fig. 5. 


Widely oblong-ovate; head (partly), prothorax, elytra and abdomen brick-red, 
with the following markings peacock-blue: head with forehead more or less 
suffused with blue, pronotum with an irregular and rather wide basal band, elytra 
with a similar basal band irregularly enlarged around the scutellum (in the ¢ 
this mark smaller than in the 2 example), two large postmedial spots and apex 
wholly covered—this mark with anterior margin straight. Underside blue, except 
the prothoracic episterna and abdomen, which are red, the last with basal, and 
extreme apical, segment mostly blue. Legs blue, antennae green. 

Head strongly punctate, widely excised between eyes. Prothorax widest behind > 
middle, thence gently narrowed to base, more strongly so to apex, the latter 
slightly advanced at the angles, these acute (seen from above); base strongly 
bisinuate, with wide medial lobe and angular excisions; posterior angles rectan- 
gular; disc strongly and closely punctate, the punctures larger near base and 
sides; a marked medial sulcus and depression on basal half. Scutellum scutiform, 
concave and laevigate. Elytra of same width as prothorax at base, widening at 
shoulders, lightly compressed at anterior third, apices entire, separately rounded; 
subapical margins finely serrulate, striate-punctate; seriate punctures more 
distinct towards sides, intervals uniformly strongly convex throughout, and 
closely punctate; underside glabrous, prosternum coarsely, metasternum 
moderately, abdomen finely, punctate. 

Dimensions: 15 x 6 mm. 


536 NEW GUINEA AND AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, 


Habitat.—Queensland: Bowen (A. Simson). 

A pair, the sexes of this fine species, is from the collection of the late 
Augustus Simson and is clearly distinct from trimaculata Saund., though the 
form of prothorax, and elytral pattern are somewhat alike. Its chief distinctions 
are (1) general colour brick-red instead of testaceous, (2) markings of upper 
surface are bright-blue instead of black, the pronotal spot of trimaculata is 
transferred to the base of the elytra, (3) the apices of elytra entire instead of 
being armed with a strong external spine and (4) the red abdomen. The base of 
pronotum appears also to be different, having “a narrow small median lobe” and, 
if Saunders’ figure be correct, without marked excisions. 

Holotype and allotype in the South Australian Museum. 


STIGMODERA (CASTIARINA) MACKAYANA, n. sp. Text-fig. 6. 
Oblong-oval, robust; head and prothorax bright greenish-bronze, the latter 


with a violaceous tinge in the middle; elytra yellow with bright violet markings 
as follows: basal margin narrowly, a wide sutural mark surrounding scutellum, 


5.—Stigmodera (Castiarina) quadriplagiata, n. sp. 
6.—Stigmodera (Castiarina) mackayana, nN. sp. 
7.—Pseudolyprops australiae, n. sp. 


produced and enlarged on basal fourth, two large oval spots on each side of this 
enlargement, an arcuate postmedial fascia extending to sides, much enlarged on 
suture and an arcuate apical mark; antennae, scutellum and prosternum bronze- 
green; abdomen red, here and there suffused with green, legs blue. 

Head rather closely punctate, widely excavate between eyes. Prothorax: 
Apex lightly, base moderately, bisinuate, the former slightly advanced at middle, 
more so at angles, these acute, the base with a pronounced fovea at each excision; 
smooth medial line also terminated in a smaller fovea; posterior angles obtuse; 
sides subangulately widened at basal third, thence converging each way, more 
strongly in front; disc closely, unevenly punctate, the punctures larger and 
sparser near base and posterior angles, smaller and more crowded on anterior 
area. Scutellum pentagonal, punctate. Elytra slightly produced and subdentate 
at basal angles, of same width as prothorax at base, enlarged at shoulders, lightly 
compressed behind these; apices bidentate, exterior tooth longer, with a small 
arcuate lunation; subapical margins serrulate; striate-punctate, seriale punctures 
large, close and evident, intervals rather widely convex, more strongly so behind, 


BY H. J. CARTER. 537 


and closely punctate. Underside glabrous; prosternum finely, metasternum more 
strongly, punctate; abdomen minutely strigose, just perceptibly punctate. 

Dimensions: 18 x 7 mm. 

Habitat.—Queensland: Mackay. 

A single example (? 9) is from the South Australian Museum. In shape of 
prothorax, and pattern of elytra it is not unlike the figure of S. blackburni Cart. 
(Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 1916, fig. 12), which is a wider species, without the 
sutural mark near scutellum, and with a differently-shaped apical mark. It is 
also near rubriventris Blkb.—a smaller western species with different apical 
markings and structure inter alia. 

Holotype in the South Australian Museum. 


Family TENEBRIONIDAE. 
LEIOCHRODES VARIABILIS, nN. Sp. 


Hemispherical, very nitid; head, pronotum, scutellum, underside and appen- 
dages black, except for a narrow lateral area of pronotum, epipleurae and two 
basal segments of antennae yellow or reddish; elytra fulvous with ten, variably 
large, black maculae as follows: an elongate dumb-bell-shaped sutural mark 
extending from base to apical declivity, followed, at short interval, by an apical 
sutural mark, like an inverted T, with transverse bar at apex; a large irregular 
shoulder mark, a subreniform latero-apical mark on apical half, separated 
narrowly from sutural marks, and two spots, one behind the other, between the 
lateral and sutural marks. 

Head: Eyes rounded and rather prominent, antennae closely segmented, two 
basal segments short, third longer, subconic; the rest subequal. Prothorax: Apex 
and base very widely sinuate—base more obviously so—all angles rounded off, a 
very narrow, horizontal, lateral explanation, disc mirror-like without perceptible 
punctures. Scutellum transversely triangular, rounded behind. Elytra with some 
indistinct lines of punctures showing on pale area, otherwise without perceptible 
sculpture; a very narrow, horizontal border seen from above near shoulder only, 
this continuous to near apex, but concealed from above by convexity. Prosternum 
with fine, little-raised carina, channelled on each side; legs stout and short, femora 
not quite reaching sides—tarsi combined as long as tibia—clothed beneath with 
reddish hair; post tarsi with basal segment rather shorter than the rest combined. 

Dimensions: 3-3-5 x 245-3 mm. (approx.). 

Habitat Queensland: MacPherson Range-Queensland National Park (A. J. 
Nicholson and the author), Tambourine Mountain (H. Hacker); N. S. Wales: 
Clarence River (H. W. Cox). 

The elytral pattern is very variable, the maculae tending to coalesce, so that 
in some examples only a few pale spots occur; but in most cases the typical 
pattern can be discerned. The epipleurae have the translucent redness seen in 
some thick glass bottles. It is apparently allied to L. octomaculatus Westw., from 
Borneo, from which its dark legs and different elytral pattern distinguish it. It 
occurs on the trunks of trees and readily escapes notice by its harmony with its 
surroundings. This is the species hitherto erroneously determined by me as 
Derispia coccinelloides Westw., a very different insect, from Ceylon, which must be 
eliminated from my Check-list (Aust. Zool., 1926, p. 135), an example of which 
has recently been courteously sent on loan by my friend Gebien. 

Leiochrodes suturalis West.—a widely distributed species throughout the 
Malayan islands and Australia—is the only other member of the genus so far 


538 NEW GUINEA AND AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, 


recorded from Australia. I have found this amongst fallen leaves and under wood 
refuse, always on the ground, from Sydney to North Queensland. 


Pseudolyprops australiae, n. sp. Text-fig. 7. 


Brownish-black; nitid; margins of prothorax reddish; whole upper surface 
clothed with long, upright, pale-red hair. 

Head rather strongly, not densely, punctate; form, also antennae, very much 
as in figure of P. carinicollis Geb., but forehead wider, apical segment of maxillary 
palpi securiform. Prothorax at its widest as wide as elytra, width less than twice 
the length, apex gently arcuate to the obtuse front angles; sides scalloped with 
five bays, the two apical equal and indistinctly separated by a minute tooth; the 
next two, at middle, wider and deeper, limited by distinct teeth, the fifth at base 
widest and deepest, limited by sharp, prominent, posterior tooth; margins sub- 
explanate; base strongly bisinuate, with wide medial lobe; disc rather flat, with- 
out medial line or fovea; cellulose-punctate, covered with round, almost contiguous 
punctures, these larger towards sides, here and there showing subrugose intervals. 
Scutellum large, transversely triangular. Elytra much wider than prothorax at 
base and sinuately adapted to it. Shoulders well rounded and slightly advanced; 
sides parallel, apex pointed, margins narrowly horizontal, extreme border entire, 
with a row of close large punctures within; the whole rather closely covered with 
punctures as on the pronotum, these smaller and slightly sparser near middle, 
towards sides showing some tendency to rugose intervals, without any sign of 
longitudinal or seriate arrangement. Legs hairy, abdomen wanting. 

Dimensions: 7 x 3 mm. 

Habitat.—North Australia: Newcastle Waters (T. G. Campbell). 

A single example sent from the Division of Economic, Entomology of the 
Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, Canberra, is interesting as being 
the first of the genus and second of its Subfamily (Heterotarsinae) to be recorded 
from Australia. Though the abdomen is mutilated, it is in a sufficiently good 
condition for description. The tarsi are very much as in Gebien’s figures of the 
tarsi of P. carinicollis, but both pronotum and elytra are quite different, nor can 
the species be near any of the five tabulated in the “Résultats de l’Expédition 
Néerlandaise a la Nouvelle-Guinée’’. 

Holotype in the Museum of the Division of Economic Entomology, Canberra. 


PTEROHELAEUS WAGNERI, 0. sp. 


Ovate, very nitid black, legs piceous, apical segments of antennae, tarsi, pro- 
and epipleurae reddish. 

Head closely and minutely punctate, epistoma truncate in front, obliquely 
widened at sides; antennae: 3 sublinear, longer than 4, 4-6 pyriform, 7-10 trans- 
verse, 11 subspherical. Prothorax nitid, only microscopically punctate, anterior 
angles produced, rounded at apex, posterior acute, margins widely explanate. 
Scutellum transversely triangular. Elytra wider than prothorax at base, lightly 
oval, explanate margins wide and slightly concave; irregularly and coarsely 
seriate-punctate, with about 14 lines of large rounded punctures of unequal size, 
besides a short scutellary row of small punctures and a submarginal row of 
coarse punctures, delimiting the explanation, the punctures of the four sutural 
rows smaller than the rest. Prosternum finely rugose, abdomen longitudinally 
strigose. 

Dimensions: 11 x 7 mm. 


BY H. J. CARTER. 539 


Habitat—New Guinea: Komba (Rev. L. Wagner). 

Three examples sent, with other Tenebrionidae, for determination show a 
very distinct species, nearest as to nitid surface to P. nitidissimus Pasc., from which 
it differs strongly in its coarser sculpture and more oval form. It belongs to 
Macleay’s Sub-Section iii. The only other species that I can find recorded from 
New Guinea is P. papuanus Geb., which belongs to Macleay’s Section i. 

Holotype and paratype returned to the South Australian Museum. One para- 
type in Coll. Carter. 


HELAEUS PERLATUS, Nl. Sp. 


Widely, somewhat squarely, ovate; black, subnitid. 

Head wanting. Prothorax (7 x 13 mm.): Base bisinuate, its margins serrulate, 
sides semicircularly narrowed from base to apex, apical processes wide and over- 
lapping; extreme margins revolute and narrow, edges (seen sideways) undefined 
(sublaminate), posterior angles acutely falcate; lateral foliation wide and concave, 
the discal part less than half the total width at base; disc almost smooth, but 
minute granules can be seen with a lens, especially on the foliation; a strong 
medial carina bluntly rounded at highest point of convexity near base, the carina 
depressed at middle. Scutellum convex, widely triangular. Elytra narrower than 
. prothorax at base, very convex, sides subparallel for the greater part, widely 
rounded behind; lateral foliation wide, extreme margin strongly raised through- 
out, edges (seen sideways) clearly defined and concave; disc with two strongly 
raised, parallel costae, starting from base, terminating on apical declivity, the 
suture also carinate throughout; a row of large punctures at the base, on each 
side of suture and costae, also within the extreme lateral margins; surface in 
general irregularly punctate, with minute pustules interspersed. Underside 
minutely and sparsely pustulose. Legs wanting. 

Dimensions: 18 x 14 mm. 

Habitat—Western Australia: Eradu (near Geraldton) (H. J. Carter). 

I found several fragments of this species in September, 1926, of which the 
above is sufficiently perfect to warrant its description. Clearly distinct by the 
combination of size, squarish form and high convexity, it is nearest in general 
facies to the obovate H. occidentalis Cart., in Section iii of my Revision (These 
Proc., 1910, p. 93). The elytral costae are 3-5 mm. apart. 

Holotype in Coll. Carter. 


ONOSTERRHUS HACKERI, 0. Sp. 


Widely ovate, black, opaque above, nitid beneath; antennae and tarsi piceous 
red, in one example (? male) a thin line of red tomentum on hind tibiae. 

Head and pronotum not perceptibly punctate, epistoma truncate, its angles 
rounded off, its sides sinuately connected with curve of canthus, and with two 
large shallow depressions within front margin, antennae rather slender, 3 less 
than twice as long as 4, 5-8 triangular, 9-10 round, 11 oval. Prothorax widest 
at middle, apex arcuate-emarginate, base bisinuate, sides well rounded without 
definite sinuation; lateral border thick, raised and widely channelled within, 
anterior angles rather widely acute, the posterior produced and rather sharply 
dentate; apex and base without border, base with triangular excision half-way 
between scutellum and hind angles. Scutellum transversely triangular. Elytra 
nearly as wide as long, wider than prothorax at base, a very narrow margin, 
invisible from above; without definite sculpture of any kind, even the usual line 


540 NEW GUINEA AND AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, 


of lateral punctures absent, or scarcely indicated in one example. Mentum widely 
subovate, tooth of submentum flattened, broadly widened at apex and pointing 
obliquely forward; sterna and epipleurae smooth, abdomen longitudinally strigose. 

Dimensions: 13-14 x 8-9 mm. 

Habitat.——South Australia: Tarcoola (H. Hacker). 

Three examples examined, two of which have been long in my cabinet. The 
third was sent from the Zoologische Museum, Hamburg, for determination. It is 
nearest O. acuticollis Cart. in form, but is easily distinguished by the much 
thicker margins of pronotum, its less sharply produced anterior angles, the 
absence of the lateral row of punctures on the elytra and its more opaque surface. 
It is shorter and wider than O. lugubris Blkb. O. duboulayi Cart., from Western 
Australia, has sinuate sides to the prothorax, besides being much larger and with 
a nitid surface. : 

Holotype and allotype in Coll. Carter. Paratype in Hamburg Museum. 


NEOTHECGA, n. gen. Cnodaloninarum. 


Body elongate, subcylindric, winged, surface non-metallic. 

Head very much as in Chariotheca, eyes round (seen from above) and 
prominent, cheeks narrower than eyes; mentum with scarcely perceptible keel 
near base, last segment of maxillary palpi securiform, of labial palpi ligulate. 
Antennae short, basal segments slender and short, 3 slightly longer than 4; 7-10 
oval, increasingly transverse, 11 much the largest, oval. Prothorax subquadrate, 
apex subtruncate between lightly advanced anterior angles (feebly advanced in 
middle); base feebly bisinuate, sides a little rounded and explanate with reflexed 
border, apex without border, base with very narrow border. Elytra striate- 
punctate. Epipleurae continuous to apex. Prosternum convex, its process—with 
corresponding triangular receptacle in the mesosternum—short. Legs rather 
short and stout, front tarsi having apical segment nearly as long as the rest; 
post tarsi with first shorter than fourth, second longer than third. 

A genus with the general form of Thesilea or of certain Chariotheca, but 
differing in its expanded sides of prothorax and non-metallic surface. 

Genotype, the following species. 


NEOTHECA FUSCA, n. sp. Text-fig. 8. 


Cylindric, head and pronotum subnitid black, the latter sometimes reddish 
at sides and apex, elytra, underside and legs reddish-brown, tarsi, antennae and 
palpi pale-red. 

Head short and wide, labrum prominent, epistoma rounded and continuous 
with the horizontal antennal orbit, separating groove indistinctly impressed, 
antennae not extending to middle of prothorax; surface densely punctate. Pro- 
thorax transverse, rather flat, width to length as 5 to 3; anterior angles advanced 
and a little obtuse; widest about middle, sides more rounded anteriorly, posterior 
third nearly straightly, sometimes a little sinuately, narrowing to base; hind 
angles obtuse, a moderately wide lateral border, extreme margin showing small 
crenulate irregularity near middle—seen more clearly from below—dise densely 
cellulose-punctate, subrugose near apex and sides, with a tendency to longitudinal 
coalescence of the punctures. Scutellum semicircular, laevigate. Elytra rather 
convex laterally, little wider than prothorax, shoulders oblique, humeral swelling 
inconspicuous; sides parallel, jointly rounded at apex, striate-punctate, the striae 
narrow, in general shallow but deepened on apical declivity; the seriate punctures 


BY H. J. CARTER. 541 


elongate, evenly spaced and evident to apex; intervals wide, strongly punctate, 
nearly flat at the middle, moderately convex at base and strongly so towards apex. 
Tibiae slightly curved; underside punctate, pro-, meso-, and metasternum strongly 
and closely, abdomen finely and less closely, femora also closely, punctate. 

Dimensions: 7-9 x 2-5-3-5 mm. 

Habitat—New Guinea: Mt. Lamington, 1,300-1,500 feet (Buna District) (C. T. 
McNamara). 

Twenty-nine examples sent from the Adelaide Museum were not referable to 
any genus known to me. I therefore sent an example to my friend Gebien who 
courteously replied: “Evidently a new genus of Cnodalonidae somewhat related to 
Thesilea’. The smaller examples examined were males. 

Holotype and paratypes in South Australian Museum. 


8.—Neotheca fusca, n. sp. 8a, Mandibles (x 12); 8b, Mentum and Maxilla 
C& 16). ‘ga, galeai; ic, lacinia; lg, ligula; ip, labial palpi; m7, 
mentum; map, maxillary palp. 

9.—Licinoma oblonga, n. sp. 

10.—Hbenolus serraticollis, n. sp. 


LICINOMA OBLONGA, n. sp. Text-fig. 9. 


Hlongate, subcylindric, nitid bronze-black, glabrous. Legs, antennae and tarsi 
(except under surface) black. 

Head with sparse round punctures on front and near eyes, with deep, rhom- 
boidal impression on forehead, its suture straight; eyes large and transverse, 
antennal joints oval, 3 a little longer than 4, enlarging from 7 outwards, 
11 wider than and half as long again as 10. Prothorax not much wider than 
head; truncate at apex, slightly arcuate at base, widest in front of middle, sides 
feebly arcuate and considerably narrowed to base; front angles depressed and 
rounded, posterior widely obtuse, lateral margin narrow, bearing a few setae; 
disc very finely closely and evenly punctate, a shallow depression at centre near 
base, within this a short smooth portion of a medial line; a large setiferous 
puncture well within each hind angle. Scutellum small. Elytra elongate-oblong, 
two and a half times as long as the prothorax; humeri subobsolete, punctate- 
striate, seriate punctures small and little obvious, intervals minutely punctate, 
slightly convex and of uniform width, strongly so at sides and apex, the third 
with two setiferous punctures at wide intervals on hinder half. Underside smooth; 
tibiae of male lightly curved, fore tibiae with narrow fringe of tomentum. 

Dimensions: 9-12 x 3-4 mm. 


542 NEW GUINEA AND AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, 


Habitat.—South Queensland: Bunya Mountain (H. J. Carter). 

Three examples (one much larger than the other two) taken by myself, 
October, 1919, during the visit of the Ornithologists’ Union to this beautiful range. 
The species is nearest to L. elata Pase., which is of a paler bronze, with red 
antennae and tarsi, prothorax more widened and rounded at middle and more 
coarsely punctate inter alia. 

Holotype in Coll. Carter. 


LICINOMA TRICOLOR, Nn. SDP. 


Elongate-ovate; head black, pronotum dark metallic-green, very nitid, elytra 
bright violet-bronze, antennae opaque-black, femora nitid black, tibiae and tarsi 
piceous-red, apical segments of latter red. 

Head strongly, unevenly punctate, with an oval frontal impresssion. Antennae 
shorter than in L. splendens mihi, 8-10 nearly round, 11 pyriform. Prothorax: 
Apex and base subtruncate, anterior angles feebly advanced and subacute—seen 
from above—posterior angles obtuse, widest in front of middle, sides well rounded, 
a narrow lateral margin, slightly explanate only near front angles, bearing 3 or 4 
setae; a shallow medial depression (not sulcate) near base, medial line further 
indicated by a brassy line of lesser punctures, seen in favourable light. Surface 
finely and closely punctate. Elytra slightly wider than prothorax and nearly 
twice as long, striate-punctate, the punctures only seen as crenulations on the 
insides of intervals; striae well marked; intervals 3 and 5 slightly wider than the 
rest in one example, in three others the 5th interval only obviously wider than 
the rest; intervals apparently impunctate, the third with a single seta on apical 
declivity. Hind tarsi with first segment about as long as the fourth. 

Dimensions: 11-12 x 3-3-5 mm. 

Habitat.—Northern New South Wales: Rivertree (EH. Sutton), Boonoo-Boonoo 
(F. A. Perkins). 

Four examples show a species that seemed at first a dark variety of splendens 
Cart., to which it is closely allied, but the following differences warrant, I think, 
specific distinction: (1) obvious colour differences—dark antennae and legs, less 
brilliant pronotum and bronze elytra, (2) shorter and different antennae, (3) 
prothorax widest in front of middle (at middle in splendens), its apex propor- 
tionally wider—apex to base 6:5 in splendens, 7:5 in tricolor, and (4) elytral 
intervals not of uniform width. 

Holotype in Coll. Carter. 


AMARYGMUS INSIGNIS, n. Sp. 


Oval, convex, nitid coppery-bronze, underside nitid-black, legs piceous, antennae 
and tarsi red, the last flavo-setose. 

Head finely and closely punctate, eyes large, interspace narrower than in 
A. morio F., antennae slender, 4-11 subequal in length, successively and lightly 
thickened to apex. Prothorax bisinuate at apex and base, all angles obtuse, the 
anterior widely so, sides well rounded, widest behind middle, thence arcuately 
converging to apex and almost straight to the base; disc uniformly, closely and 
finely punctate. Elytra rather widely oval, shoulders obtusely angulate; striate- 
punctate, each with eight well impressed striae set rather closely with small 
punctures, the intervals nearly flat towards the centre, becoming convex laterally 
and on apical half, strongly so on the declivity, these uniformly and finely 
punctate, the interstitial punctures finer than the pronotal. Underside glabrous, 


BY H. J. CARTER. 543 


abdomen strigose, tibiae straight, with short, hairy clothing beneath, hind tarsi 
with basal segment as long as the rest combined. 

Dimensions: 15 x 9 mm. 

Habitat—New Guinea: Mt. Lamington, 1,300-1,500 feet alt. (C. T. McNamara). 

Eleven examples are before me that cannot fit any recorded description, 
including Gebien’s valuable table of New Guinea species. It may be readily 
identified by comparison with the common A. morio F., which I found confused 
with it (on the same card), but which presents the following marked distinctions: 


A. insignis, N. sp. A. morio F. 
Colour brighter bronze darker 
Dimensions 15 x 9 mm. 11-12 x 6 mm. 
Aniennae slender moderately stout 
Pronotum and elytral intervals 
more clearly punctate much less clearly punctate 
Blytral strial punctures smaller larger 
Hind tibiae straight strongly curved 
Hind tarsi first segment as long as first segment much shorter than rest 
rest combined combined 


In colour and size it is near Chalcopterus perforans Geb., which is amongst 
those sent from Finschhafen, New Guinea, but the sculpture is very different. 


Holotype in South Australian Museum. 


Amarygmus curvipes Geb. (alienus Blkb.) is abundantly distinct from A. morio 
F., by larger size, more oblong form, opaque surface, coarser elytral punctures— 
especially the intervals. The post tarsi also have the first segment as long as the 
rest combined (shorter in morio). Two examples in my collection are from 
Nar-nar-goon, and the Grampians, Victoria. I have not seen morio from regions 
south of tropical Queensland. The locality of tasmanicus appears dubious. Gebien’s 
name is unfortunate since the tibiae are not evidently curved. 


AMARYGMUS HOSSFELDI, n. Sp. 


Very convex, widely oval; head, pronotum, underside, legs and tarsi nitid- 
black, the last aureo-setose, antennae piceous, the apical segments paler, elytra 
metallic dark-green with purple sheen on middle area. 


Head finely and rather closely punctate, eyes widely separated, interspace 
equal to first antennal segment. Antennae moderately robust, 3 longer than 4, 
5-11 subequal in length, the apical five successively, lightly enlarged. Prothorax: 
Apex nearly straight, the very wide anterior angles only feebly produced, sides 
arcuately narrowed from base to apex, base weakly bisinuate; posterior angles 
obtuse; disc finely, not closely, punctate, showing smooth spaces along medial 
line and, to less extent, elsewhere. Elytra strongly convex, widest at shoulders, 
thence ovately narrowed to a rather sharp apex, striate-punctate, the striae wide 
and containing very large oval punctures continuous to apex, becoming even 
larger laterally, about 30 in a row; intervals wide, moderately convex and minutely 
punctured. Prosternum tumid and glabrous, abdomen indistinctly strigose; pro- 
tibiae lightly arched, others straight; hind tarsi: segment 1 = 4; 2 = 3 and short. 

Dimensions: 13 x 8 mm. 

Habitat—New Guinea (Paul Hossfeld). 


544 NEW GUINEA AND AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, 


A single example shows a species distinct from those in the lists of Gebien 
(L’Expédition Néerlandaise, 1920) and Blair (Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1915), with 
a sculpture almost as coarse as in the Australian Chalcopierus catenulatus 
Blkb. 

Holotype in South Australian Museum. 


CHALCOPTERUS NITIDUS, Nn. sp. 


Oval; head, pronotum, scutellum, underside, legs, tarsi, and tarsal clothing 
black, elytra blue—in some aspects with purplish gleams—surface very nitid. 

Head finely punctate, eyes widely separated, interval rather less than in 
affinis Bless., without sulcus; antennae very similar to affinis Bless. Prothorax 
very convex, apex arcuate, base lightly bisinuate, widest at base, this twice as 
wide as apex, sides arcuately converging to the front, all angles obtuse, the 
posterior deflexed and wide; disc very minutely punctate, without medial line or 
fovea on its mirror-like surface. Scutellum laevigate. Elytra wider than pro- 
thorax at base, slightly obovate, seriate-punctate, the serial punctures small, 
round and close, slightly larger and more distant laterally, intervals flat and 
microscopically punctate. Meso- and metasternum minutely punctate, abdomen 
rather strongly isngitudinally strigulate. Hind tarsi with basal segment longer 
than the rest combined. 

Dimensions: 11 x 7 mm. 

Habitat—Western Australia: Balladonia, Norseman (Miss Baesjou). 

Two examples in the Australian Museum are very distinct from its nearest 
allies in my tabulation, sparsus Blkb., and clypealis Blkb., by the combination of 
colour difference, fine sculpture and nitid surface. In the last, however, it is 
less brilliant than lucidus Cart., or meyricki Blkb. The seriate punctures are very 
much as in purpureus Germ., but the intervals are much less strongly punctulate, 
the punctures being visible only under a strong lens. The convex prothorax is 
also distinctive. 

Holotype in Australian Museum. 


EBENOLUS SERRATICOLLIS, n. sp. Text-fig. 10. 


Elongate-oblong; nitid greenish-bronze above, nitid-black beneath, legs and 
basal segments of antennae red, apical segments of antennae opaque-black. 

Head finely closely punctate, epistoma rounded in front, eyes large, prominent, 
almost contiguous in front, interspace strongly widened behind, this area flat and 
punctate; antennal orbits raised and ‘“ear-like’; antennae moderately robust, 3-5 
sublinear, 3 longer than 4; 6-9 much wider than preceding, subconic; 10-11 
wanting. Prothorax subrectangular, slightly widest at middle, strongly trans- 
verse, width nearly twice the length; apex and base subobsoletely bisinuate, the 
former sulcate within a narrow explanate border; anterior angles obliquely trun- 
cate, posterior sharply rectangular; anterior two-thirds of sides with about four 
unequal serrations, the largest near middle, thence narrowed, but nearly straight, 
to hind angle; a reflexed basal border, with three large foveae, equally placed 
within it; disc rather sparsely and irregularly punctate, the punctures coarser 
and rugose towards sides; medial line impressed throughout; widened on basal 
half. Elytra considerably wider than and about four times as long as prothorax, 
shoulders rounded and rather tumid; sides parallel for the greater part, jointly 
rounded at apex, coarsely striate-punctate, the large, rectangular, closely-ranged 
punctures occupying most of the surface; the narrow intervals impunctate, third, 


BY H. J. CARTER. 545 


fifth and seventh more strongly raised than the rest. Underside almost impunctate, 

abdomen finely strigose; post tibiae with basal third lightly hollowed interiorly, 

widened beyond this; post tarsi having basal segment rather longer than second 

and third combined, much shorter than fourth. 
Dimensions: 9 x 4 mm. 


Habitat—New Guinea: Mt. Lamington (Buna district), 1,300-1,500 feet (C. T. 
McNamara). 


A single example is remarkable for its serrated and unusually transverse 
pronotum. It cannot be fitted to any in Gebien’s table, though apparently nearest 
to #. plicicollis Geb., of which the colour is black, the form narrow, and the pro- 
notum without impressed middle line. In the elytral sculpture it must be near 
EH. sculptipennis Geb., which differs in size, colour and pronotal structure. 


Holotype in the South Australian Museum: 


Allecula papuensis Macl.—Having examined the type of this I find that it is 
an Hbenolus and, further, that it is identical with #H. wollastoni Blair var. 
anthracinus Geb. The species must, therefore, be known as Hbenolus papuensis 
Macl., var. anthracinus Geb. 


EBENOLUS ARUENSIS, n. sp. Text-fig. 11. 


Elongate, subcylindric; nitid-black above and below, appendages also black, 
the front margins of basal segments of antennae and claws of tarsi only red. 


Head: Labrum prominent, epistoma rounded in front, strongly, rather closely 
punctate, antennal sockets prominently raised and squarely rounded; eyes 
occupying greater part of head, on front half only separated by the narrowest 
line, on basal half by a narrow triangular area suleate in middle; antennae long 
and slender, sublinear, 3-5 subequal, 6-11 wider and longer than preceding, sub- 
equal in length, 8 slightly the widest. Prothorax subquadrate, transverse, width 
less than 13 times length, apex and base subtruncate, the former feebly arcuate, 
the latter feebly bisinuate; anterior angles rounded, posterior subacute; sides 
nearly straight, feebly sinuate on basal half, narrowly bordered throughout, basal 
margin raised; disc strongly, irregularly punctate, with some smooth nitid areas, 
medial line only indicated by a depression near apex. Elytra wider than and about 
four times as long as prothorax, parallel for the greater part, separately rounded 
at apex, striate-punctate, the striae narrow, seriate punctures fine, close and 
evenly placed—more widely so outwardly; sutural intervals a little raised, the 
rest wide and flat except near apex. Underside lightly punctate; hind tibiae 
arcuate near base, hind tarsi wanting. 

Dimensions: 10 x 3 mm. 

Habitat—Aru Island (H. Elgner). 

A single § example shows an elongate, narrow species not very near any in 
Gebien’s table. 

Holotype in South Australian Museum. 


STRONGYLIUM PUSILLUM, 0. sp. 
Cylindric; nitid-black above, basal segments of antennae reddish, underside 
and legs piceous, tarsi red. 
Head: Labrum prominent, epistoma rounded and strongly punctate, antennal 
sockets obliquely raised, not prominent; eyes close, interspace in front less than 


546 NEW GUINEA AND AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, 


length of second antennal segment, considerably widened behind; front strongly 
punctate; antennae sublinear, 3-5 subequal, much narrower than the succeeding, 
6-11 subequal in length and width. Prothorax laterally convex, subquadrate, 
width less than 13 times length; apex and base truncate, each with raised border 
narrowly suleate within; sides depressed, notably widened (scarcely angulate) 
near middle and subsinuate behind; anterior angles rounded, posterior rectangular ; 
dise with large round punctures, irregularly placed, an impressed middle line on 
basal half. Elytra much wider than and four times as long as prothorax, sides 
parallel, apices jointly rounded; striate-punctate, the striae as wide as intervals; 
seriate punctures large and close, intervals convex, near suture strongly so, also 
impunctate. Underside punctate, mid and hind tibiae a little curved, post tarsi 
with first longer than fourth but shorter than 2, 3 and 4 combined, second twice 
as long as third. 


Dimensions: 5 x 1:6 mm. 
Habitat—New Guinea: Finschhafen (Rey. L. Wagner). 


A single example (? ¢) is in size only comparable with angulatum Geb., and 
infans Geb., in Gebien’s tabulation; both differently coloured, with much more 
widely separated eyes, the former also with angulate sided pronotum. 


Holotype in South Australian Museum. 


STRONGYLIUM WAGNERI, n. sp. Text-fig. 12. 


Head and pronotum subnitid-black, elytra nonmetallic nitid-brown; under- 
side very nitid brownish-black, coxae, legs and abdomen reddish; antennae with 
five basal segments red, the apical segment yellow, the remainder dull black; 
tarsi red. } 

Head: Labrum produced, epistoma truncate, closely punctate; eyes separated 
by the length of first antennal segment in front, more widely behind; antennal 
sockets moderately raised; front finely sulcate and strongly punctate; antennal 
segments more or less obconic, 8-5 subequal, 6-10 longer and much wider, 
especially at apices, but equal in length inter se, 11 elongate ovate, of same length 
as preceding. Prothorax convex, slightly wider in front than behind, apex lightly 
produced forward in middle, otherwise nearly straight; base feebly bisinuate, sides 
subangulate in middle, with short wide tooth, otherwise nearly straight, widely 
margined at apex and base, anterior angles rounded off, posterior subrectangular; 
disc closely and strongly punctate, lightly rugose in places, without impressed 
medial line. Scutellum black, nitid, triangular. Elyvtra lightly obovate, much 
wider than, and four times as long as, prothorax, shoulders widely rounded, with- 
out tumidity, apices jointly rounded; sides slightly enlarged behind middle; 
striate-punctate, striae wider than intervals, containing large, close punctures 
continuous to apex; intervals ribbed (costiform) and themselves microscopically 
punctate. Prosternum and propleurae strongly punctate, metasternum and 
abdomen very nitid and impunctate; all tibiae straight, post tarsi 1 = 4; 2 = 3. 


Dimensions: 8-10 x 3-3-5 mm. 
Habitat—New Guinea: Finschhafen (Rev. L. Wagner). 


Five examples examined show little sexual differentiation. The species has 
a similar facies to S. punctithorax Cart., and must also be near S. keyanum Geb., 
but the latter is larger and differently coloured. S. punctithorax has much finer 
and sparser sculpture of the pronotum and is without the lateral tooth. 

Holotype in South Australian Museum. 


BY H. J. CARTER. 547 


11.—Ebenolus arwensis, n. sp. 13 
12.—Strongylium wagneri, n. sp. 
13.—Coptocercus scripticollis, n. sp. 


Synonymy. 

1. Gonocephalum hispidocostatum Fairm. = G. costipenne Cart. = G. costatum 
Cart. (nom. praeocc.). 

2. Bradymerus crenatus Pase. = granaticollis Frm. 

3. B. raucipennis Blkb. = seriatus Geb. 

4. Platydema detersum Wlk. = laticorne Frm. = annamitum Frm. = malaccaum 
Mars. = Ceropria valga Pase. 

5. Ceropria janthinipennis Chev. = peregrinus Pasc. 

6. C. maculata Geb. n. nom. = bifasciata Cart. = quadriplagiata Geb. 

7. Diaclina nitida Cart. = immaculata Geb. 

8. Diphyrrhyncus nicobaricus Redt. = apicalis Champ. 

9. Uloma corpulenta Geb. 2 = Acthosus pascoei Geb. . 

10. Doliema (?) nitidula Macl. (Ipsaphes) = D. spinicollis Frm. 

11. Graptopezus crenaticollis Macl. (Nyctozoilus) = G. costipennis Blair. 

12. Zophophilus curticornis Frm. 9 = raptor Geb. ¢ = Meneristes dentipes Cart. 6. 

13. Chariotheca planicollis Frm. (Thesilea) = oblonga Blanch. (Thesilea) = 
cupripennis Pase. = impressicollis Frm. 

14. C. cupripennis Macl. (Prophanes) = C. punctiventris Geb. 

15. Pezophenus submetallicus Macl. (Prophanes) = rutilans Geb. 

16. Amarygmus convexiusculus Macl. (1886) = niger Geb., n. nom. 

17. A. morio F. = aeneus Ol. = cupreus Guer. = rujficrurus Blanch. = foveoseriatus 
Frm. = foveostriatus Frm. = inornatus Macl. = picipes Frm. (Dietysus) = 
tasmanicus Blkb. = uniformis Blkb. 

18. Amarygmus cuprarius Web. = A. mutabilis Geb. 

19. Notostrongylium rugosicolle Cart. = Strongylium horridum Geb. 

20. Strongylium gravidum Macl. = 8S. tuberipenne Frm. var. 

21. Ebenolus papuensis Macl. (Allecula) = wollastoni Blair var. anthracinus Geb. 

No less than twenty-nine species of Tenebrionidae are now known to occur on 
both sides of Torres Straits. 
Also the following generic synonymy holds (fide Gebien) : 
Zophophilus Fairm. = Sphenothorax Geb. = Teremenes Cart. 
E 


548 NEW GUINEA AND AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA, 


Fam. CERAMBYCIDAE. 
COPTOCERCUS SCRIPTICOLLIS, n. sp. Text-fig. 13. 


Head and prothorax black, the latter with a short line of white pubescence 
within the apical and basal border, more or less connected by two sinuate 
longitudinal lines of similar pubescence forming a subovate pattern. Elytra red, 
with an irregular medial fascia and subapical maculae testaceous; antennae, legs 
and underside red. 

Head pubescent, with sparse longer hair on muzzle, punctate at base; antennae 
longer than body, segments 3-6 externally spinose. Prothorax: Sides lightly 
rounded, with a subobsolete, round, lateral tubercle, strongly constricted at base, 
scarcely so at. apex; disc with four—in one example five—feebly raised nodules, 
densely punctate, with sparse long hair at sides, besides discal pubescence. 
Scutellum large, triangular, clad with white pubescence. Elytra: Shoulders 
rather square and slightly tumid; sides subparallel, slightly converging behind; 
apices with long, sharp, external spine, sutural angle just perceptibly produced, 
surface strongly punctate, the punctures coarse and close near base, finer and 
more distant behind the pale fascia, subobsolete on apical fourth; each elytron 
with a single raised interval; surface sparsely clothed, especially on sides and 
apex, with long, whitish hair. 

Dimensions: 138-16 x 3-4 mm. : 

Habitat.—Victoria: Portland (M. L. Hauschild), second example labelled 
“New Holland”. 

Two examples, both 3, were sent from the Zoologische Museum, Hamburg, with 
other longicorns, for determination. In my Revision of the Group it would stand 
near C. vicinus Hope, from which it differs in its pronotal pattern and structure. 
The elytral fascia has a forward prolongation at middle of each elytron; it is 
interrupted at suture and continuous to the sides. 

Holotype in Hamburg Museum. 


PORITHODES PUSTULATA, Nl. Sp. 


Castaneous; apical third of elytra, also the whole abdomen, dark-brown, 
except for a small triangular white mark across external apices of elytra. 

Head impunctate; a small nitid pustule at each angle of clypeus; antennae 
longer than body, 3 longer than 4; 4-10 subequal in length, but successively finer; 
3-5 spinose on outside. Prothorax longer than wide, widest about middle, lateral 
outline a little irregular but scarcely nodose; disc with five well-raised nodules, 
the middle one elongate. Elytra two and a half times as long as prothorax and 
wider than it at shoulders; sides subparallel, apices truncate; each with a trace- 
able subcostate impression from the shoulders to the apical third; basal two- 
thirds with sparse, irregular pustules, the lateral area indistinctly punctate, the 
whole elytra finely pubescent. Prosternum concave in front of coxae, this 
accentuated by abrupt convexity of apical area; femora clavate. 

Dimensions: 15 x 4 mm. 

Habitat.—Queensland: Clermont, Peak Downs (Dr. K. K. Spence), and also 
in the Hamburg Museum. 

Two examples examined, both ¢. The truncate apices and irregular-sided 
pronotum may suggest generic distinction, though I consider this undesirable. 
Pustules are also found on the elytra of P. spinipennis mihi, though differently 
placed. 

Holotype in Coll. Carter. Paratype in Hamburg Museum. 


BY H. J. CARTER. 549 


The six species described may be tabulated as follows: 


Porithodes Auriv. 


i, AOS Oe Ghani, Gobi sdlooubod onsen ob Sebo oDoO ob doomo ae conc spinipennis Cart. 
IN OMONS Ope GAG We UUAGCENIS Ga e.d99.6 0,0 00 6 olds o Boloeluic DIGG oro ob icin 0 0'0 a /0}0 pustulata, n. sp. 
IADICES) OL elyitha wel OUMNH aay srcpecs cots: sircy shsiouchis vs) Sie auistts <a rar apeaelcouancs Suet elected Stay havior choveveLenatarshs 2 

D. IPRNIGY Bie Owe Ghose, Gonsincel Wo) Eyokoryl qonbech Soko auueocoboobeoobuoboDdS apicalis Lea 
IPaAlewarecar Obs ely aie OCHSOMHess wtetsrarretslepeilsialrevsiele iss carsulsl's ei lasbins ton liebe nets detstetormuerapa scate) eeemeallei's 3 

SeEA Mex: Of Ve liytrals Gar Key teseyevaysneyelotel <nete teveie ede auetchevieralfavarie (sds, sueitopten syje:leser ce statis ome alece plagiata Blkb. 
ING OGD: CaOn Ba NH cee be TOW. og Goyorctommronee CLOG IO GsDIOre, caeeanG CEMCREIGROTcEE NG oy Oa unio Orato. CDs Ce blotma CeO 4 

AME Greater, Dart OL ely tVas pale ysis tayeiseles =persue ere levels nejreve rans by fere aceueus) sretiedeione parenthetica Lea 
INDO, Eel ieyoers Orly DEVI coodiceaodds boomueaoes onan aod fasciata Auriv.; obliqua Lea 


Fam. DASCILLIDAE. 
DASCILLUS OBLONGUS, Nn. sp. 


Elongate-oblong; nitid reddish-brown, antennae, tarsi and underside red; 
upper surface sparsely clad with short pale hair, adpressed on pronotum, upright 
on elytra, this abraded except near margins, also base of pronotum. 

Head: Eyes large, round and prominent, separated by the width of one eye; 
antennae long, extending nearly half the length of elytra, segments 3-10 sharply 
triangular, forming a strong serration, 11 narrowly lanceolate. Prothorax widest 
at base, its outline from above subconic with a slight anterior sinuation, narrowing 
and convex towards apex, its extreme apex bluntly rounded, and about the width 
of forehead (between eyes), a narrow, horizontal margin visible at basal third. 
anterior margins decurved, posterior angles acute; base rather strongly bisinuate, 
its margins finely serrulate; disc with shallow punctures, a large oval depres- 
sion at base, within this two deeper foveae symmetrically placed. Scutellum large, 
subpentagonal. Elytra oblong, slightly wider than prothorax at shoulders, feebly 
enlarged behind middle, apices rounded; striate-punctate, the striae rather deep, 
the punctures therein small, close and transverse; intervals lightly convex, closely 
punctate towards base, transversely elongate for the greater part; procoxae 
approximate; underside with silky pubescence. 

Dimensions: 9 x 3 mm. 

Habitat—New South Wales: EH. Dorrigo (W. Heron). 

A single specimen before me is certainly conspecific with D. serraticornis mihi, 
but longer, narrower and with stronger striation and elytral sculpture. Both are 
doubtfully referred to Dascillus, though clearly allied to D. brevicornis Macl. Its 
general facies is that of an Elaterid. 

Holotype in Coll. Carter. 


ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES. II. 


By H. CLAIRE WEEKES, D.Sc. 


Formerly Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Zoology. 
(Plates xxii-xxviii; ten Text-figures.) 
[Read 29th October, 1930.] 


Contents. 
Introduction. 
Description of allantoplacentation in (a) Hgernia cunninghami, H. whitei and 
EH. striolata; (b) Tiliqua scincoides and T. nigrolutea; (c) Lygosoma (Hemiergis) 
quadridigitatum; (d) Mabuja multifasciata; (e) Lygosoma (Liolepisma) ocellatum, 
L. (L.) metallicum and L. (L.) pretiosum. 


Description of early stages in the development of the allantoplacenta in Lyguosoma 
(Liolepisma) entrecasteauxi. 

Theoretical considerations. 

Summary and conclusions. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The placentation of eight scincid lizards from Australia and one from Java 
is described here. The lizards include three species of the genus EHgernia, 
EF. cunninghami, H. whitei and E. striolata; the large skink Tiliqua nigrolutea, 
commonly called the “blue tongue” lizard in south-eastern Australia; the semi- 
subterranean skink Lygosoma (Hemiergis) quadridigitatum; the skink Mabuja 
multifasciata collected in Java; and three species of the genus Lygosoma, subgenus 
Liolepisma, Lygosoma (Liolepisma) ocellatum, L. (L.) metallicum and L. (L.) 
pretiosum. 

Unfortunately specimens of the other two Australian species of Hgernia, 
#H. kingti and EH. stokei, were not available for examination. 

A stage in the development of the placenta in Tiliqua scincoides, the most 
common “blue tongue” in New South Wales, Australia, has already been described 
by Professor T. Flynn (1923). The stage described here for J. nigrolutea is 
probably later than that described by Flynn for T. scincoides. 

Both Lygosoma (Hemiergis) decresiensis and L. (Hemiergis) quadridigitatum 
are viviparous, but stages in the development of the placenta suitable for descrip- 
tion were only available in L. (Hemiergis) quadridigitatum, those in the other 
species being too young. 

I have to thank Professor A. N. Burkitt of the Department of Anatomy, 
University of Sydney, for the specimens of Mabuja multifasciata which he brought 
from Java in 1929. 

Placentation has already been described for two skinks of the subgenus 
Liolepisma, L. (L.) entrecasteauxvi (Harrison and Weekes, 1925) and L. (L.) 
weekesae (Weekes, 1929). The placentae in these two small skinks were shown 
to be essentially similar, although differing in the degree of their specialization 
(Weekes, 1929). The placentae in L. (L.) ocellatum, L. (L.) metallicum and 
L. (L.) pretiosum are identical, but there is a marked difference between the degree 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 551 


of specialization of the placenta in these lizards and that of the placenta in 
L. (L.) entrecasteauxi and L. (L.) weekesae. 

The allantoplacentation alone is described here and the description of the 
maternal and foetal tissues surrounding the yolk-sac is reserved for a later date. 

The reptiles for which placentation has so far been described are the lizards 
of the family Scincidae: Chalcides tridactylus (Giacomini, 1891), C. ocellatus 
(Mingazzini, 1891), Tiliqua scincoides (Flynn, 1923), Lygosoma (Liolepisma) 
entrecasteauzi (Harrison and Weekes, 1925), L. (Hinulia) quoyi (Weekes, 1927), 
and L. (Liolepisma) weekesae (Weekes, 1929); and the snakes Denisonia superba 
(Weekes, 1929), and D. suta (Weekes, 1929). 

The reptiles for which placentation is here described are the following lizards 
of the family Scincidae: Egernia cunninghami, E. whitei, E. striolata, Lygosoma 
(Liolepisma) ocellatum, L. (L.) metallicum, L. (L.) pretiosum, L. (Hemiergis) 
quadridigitatum, Tiliqua nigrolutea, and Mabuja multifasciata. 

I have also examined embryos from other viviparous species, the snakes 
Notechis curtis (Australia), Tropidonotus sirtalis (North America), Pseudechis 
porphyrae (Australia) and the lizard Sceloporus torquatus (Texas). The speci- 
mens are unfortunately not in a satisfactory state of preservation for description, 
so that the fact of their viviparity can alone be recorded here. The number of 
species of reptiles for which viviparity is recorded is rapidly increasing and it is 
remarkable that so many lizards are, upon examination, proving to be viviparous. 
It will be interesting to see how many different types of placentae occur among 
the viviparous reptiles. The majority of the examinations so far made have 
revealed only simple types of placentae. : 

I have been able to collect a series of young embryos of L. (L.) entrecasteaucxi 
and the account of the development of the allantoplacenta in this lizard promised 
by Professor Harrison and myself in 1925 is included here. 

I wish to thank the University of Sydney for a grant which enabled me to 
collect in Tasmania in January, 1929, and also to thank the Linnean Society of 
New South Wales for a grant which enabled me to collect within New South 
Wales. I further wish to take this opportunity of expressing my gratitude to 
Professor J. P. Hill, Department of Anatomy and Embryology (University of 
London), University College, in whose department this work was completed, 
for the help he has given me, and particularly for the opportunity of obtaining the 
photomicrographs which appear in this paper. 


EGERNIA CUNNINGHAMI, E. WHITEI AND HE. STRIOLATA. 
Materiai. 

The habitat of Hgernia ranges from low to comparatively high altitudes. 
Specimens of H. whitei were collected from La Perouse, Sydney, at sea-level; from 
Cooma, 260 miles south of Sydney, at a height of about 2,700 feet above sea-level; 
from the Jenolan district, 140 miles west of Sydney, at a height of about 4,000 
feet, and from the New England Plateau, north-eastern New South Wales, at a 
height of about 5,000 feet. Specimens of ZF. striolata were collected from north- 
eastern New South Wales, at a height of about 600 feet, and also from the Jenolan 
district at 4,000 feet. Specimens of FE. cunninghami were collected in great 
numbers from Tarana on the western slopes of the Blue Mountains, about 120 
miles west of Sydney, at a height of about 3,000 feet, and this lizard was also 
found at Sydney at sea-level. It will be seen that Hgernia is fairly widely 
distributed, at least throughout eastern New South Wales, and other records show 


552 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii, 


that it is also distributed over the western region. Specimens of H. whitei were 
also collected in Tasmania, but neither H. cunninghami nor E. striolata was seen 
there. 

The female lizards collected contained embryos ranging from the early stage 
in development where the embryo lies flat upon the yolk-sac with no amnion or 
allantois formed, to the stage immediately prior to the birth of the foetus. 

The material was stained with Ehrlich’s haematoxylin and counterstained 
with eosin. 


Placentation. 


The gestation period of these lizards begins in the spring and covers about 
three months. At Tarana ovulation occurred in H. cunninghami during the last 
week in November in 1927 and it also occurred during the same week in other 
species of lizards found in the same locality and obviously controlled by the same 
climatic conditions. Ovulation occurred at least two weeks earlier in the same 
species found in the Jenolan district, which is on the eastern slope of the Blue 
Mountains, about 40 miles south of Tarana, and which has an earlier spring than 
the Tarana district. The direct influence of climatic conditions upon the ovulation 
and maturation of the eggs in the lizards was thus demonstrated. 


In lizards examined at Tarana during the first week in November, the ova 
present in the ovaries were so small that it was at first thought that the lizards 
were oviparous and that the eggs had been laid. However, an examination of the 
ovaries revealed no burst follicles, and in the lizards collected in the second week 
of November the ova were noticeably larger. By the end of November they were 
in the oviducts, ovulation having taken place during the last week. There is no 
record of the time of ovulation in either H. whitei or EH. striolata as the ova were 
in the oviducts in all the specimens collected. 


In FE. cunninghami the number of eggs in one lizard varies from five to nine 
and in H#. whitei and H. striolata from three to five, the right oviduct usually 
containing one more egg than the left, a condition prevalent among lizards. The 
eggs are round, soft and creamy-yellow. Those in H. cunninghami are the largest 
and measure about 20 mm. in diameter, while those in H. whitei and LH. striolata, 
smaller lizards, measure only about 10 mm. in diameter. They are surrounded by a 
thin transparent membrane, but there is no trace of shell. In early stages in the 
development of the embryo a little albumen collects at the base of the yolk-sac. 


The embryonic pole of the egg lies in a position dorsal with regard to the 
parent and the embryo develops in the region immediately beneath the main 
longitudinal blood-vessels, so that on opening up the ventral body wall of the 
parent the eggs must be turned over to bring the embryos into view. This 
position is constant and the embryos, which are surrounded by only a very thin 
uterine wall, are thus given a certain amount of protection by the overlying 
backbone of the parent. The eggs in the uterus cause it to become expanded into 
a series of regular swellings which Giacomini (1891) called “‘incubatory chambers”. 
Each uterus is vascularized by one main longitudinal artery and vein, which lie 
along its dorsal surface (Text-fig. 9a, M.Ut.A.; M.Ut.V.). The main artery 
supplies branch arteries which pass transversely round each incubatory chamber 
to the region underlying the base of the yolk-sac of the contained egg and each 
vein receives blood from transverse branches which also come from the region of 
the uterus underlying the base of the yolk-sac and which roughly alternate with 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 553 


the branch arteries. A similar condition in L. (L.) entrecasteauzi is illustrated 
by Figure 4 on Plate xxvii. 


The uterine wall at the time of ovulation consists of the tissues usually found 
in lizards: the external coat of longitudinal muscle, the internal coat of circular 
muscle, the mucosa with scattered glands embedded, and the single layer of 
lining epithelium. Before ovulation the epithelial cells lining the oviduct are fairly 
uniform in structure and height, with definite dividing walls and with their free 
margins ciliated. The maternal capillaries lie for the most part at the bases of 
the epithelial cells although many are scattered throughout the mucosa. 


Since the three species, H. cunninghami, E. whitei and E. striolata have the 
same type of placentation, no distinction will be made between them in this 
description. The mature allantoplacenta in these species of Hgernia is very 
simple and fundamentally similar to that already described for Lygosoma (Hinulia) 
quoyi (Weekes, 1927). The maternal capillaries invade the epithelium lining the 
lumen of the uterus and are more or less exposed at the maternal placental face; 
the allantoic capillaries are concentrated at the surface of the chorio-allantoic 
membrane, which is attached to the uterus, and the maternal and foetal blood- 
streams are thus in close apposition (Text-fig. 3). 

The youngest embryo examined lies flat upon the yolk-sac, with no indication 
of amnion formation. The epiblast cells have extended for a short distance over 
the dorsal surface of the yolk-sac and are firmly attached to the overlying shell- 
membrane which is about as thick as the epiblast layer. Even at this early 
stage there are the beginnings of the modification of the structure of the uterine 
wall for placentation. The maternal capillaries can be seen pressed against the 
epithelial cells and those cells immediately in contact with them are flat and 
about half their original size. The dividing walls of the epithelial cells are not 
as definite at this stage as they are in the non-pregnant condition. This modifica- 
tion of the structure of the uterus is restricted to that part surrounding the 
embryonic pole of the egg. 

At the next important stage in the development of the placenta the embryo 
lies on its left side on the yolk-sac, the chorionic membrane is established and the 
allantois is represented by a small, insignificant, bladder-like protuberance at the 
posterior end of the embryo. The structure of the uterine wall is further modified 
for placentation and this modification extends for some distance beyond the 
embryonic region, to the region overlying the yolk-sac. The maternal capillaries 
have now definitely invaded the uterine epithelium and lie almost completely 
embedded in it, but there is still a layer of epithelial cytoplasm separating them 
from the underlying ectoderm cells of the foetal chorionic membrane (Text-fig. 1; 
Pl. xxii, fig. 1). The uterine epithelium in sectioned material has the appearance 
of a nucleated syncytium (Text-fig. 1); however, an examination of the surface 
view of the uterine wall reveals dividing cell-walls which show that the epithelium 
is not definitely syncytial. In the embryonic region the shell membrane has 
disappeared from between the uterine wall and the chorionic membrane, having 
been absorbed by the underlying chorionic ectoderm cells, which thus come into 
contact with the surface of the overlying uterus and some of which are at this 
stage actually attached to the uterine surface. These chorionic ectoderm cells 
are slightly larger than at the earlier stage described, but are still flat and 
tapering and are already characterized by the deeply-staining nuclei which are so 
prominent at later stages. From the description of these two stages in the 


554 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii, 


development of the placenta it can be seen that the modification of the uterus 
for allantoplacentation is independent of the presence of an underlying allantois, 
since at the first stage described there is no allantois present, and at the second 
stage the allantois is but a small swelling at the posterior end of the embryo. 


Ut.Epi. Mat.Cap. 


->> Ps 


Text-fig. 1.—Section of uterine wall of H. cunninghami with apposed 
chorionic membrane of embryo. The maternal capillaries have begun invasion 
of uterine epithelium. x 400. All, allantois; OCh., chorionic membrane; 
Mat. Cap., maternal capillary; Som. Mes., somatic mesoderm; Ut. Epi., uterine 
epithelium. 


At this stage the area vasculosa has extended over approximately one-third 
of the yolk-sac surface. The method of the extension of the extra-embryonic 
blood-vessels round the yolk-sac resembles that described for the lizards 
L. (Hinulia) quoyi, T. scincoides (Weekes, 1927), L. (L.) weekesae and L. (L.) 
entrecasteauxit (Weekes, 1929), and for the snakes Denisonia superba and D. suta 
(Weekes, 1929). Over the dorsal and embryonic region the blood-vessels form on 
the surface of the yolk-sac over the thick hypoblastic layer, but at the side of 
the yolk-sac the extra-embryonic mesoderm dips into the substance of the sac, 
cutting off a fairly thick layer of yolk-containing endoderm cells from the main 
bulk of the sac. The mesoderm continues to grow round the sac embedded in 
its substance and, on the splitting apart of the “somatic” and “splanchnic” layers 
of mesoderm and the formation of the extra-embryonic coelome, the outer strip 
of yolk-sac is cut off and entirely isolated from the main sac. The mesoderm 
spreads immediately beneath the chorionic ectoderm as well as into the substance 
of the yolk-sac, so that when the allantois extends into the extra-embryonic coelome 
and unites with its outer wall, a composite membrane is formed composed of 
chorionic ectoderm, mesoderm, yolk-sac endoderm, “somatic’’ mesoderm, allantoic 
mesoderm and allantoic endoderm. This membrane can no longer be correctly 
called chorio-allantoic membrane and the term  ‘“chorio-omphalo-allantoic 
membrane” was suggested and used in a previous paper (Weekes, 1929). Also 
the membrane which consists of chorionic ectoderm, mesoderm, yolk-endoderm and 
“somatic”? mesoderm is referred to in this paper as the “omphalo-chorion” or the 
“omphalo-chorionic membrane.” In the embryos of every viviparous reptile so 
far examined by me, the extension of the extra-embryonic circulation follows this 
plan and, according to Dr. H. Hrabrowski (1926), it follows the same plan in the 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 555 


ovoviviparous lizard Lacerta agilis, as well as in the viviparous species Lacerta 
vivipara and in the slow-worm Anguwis fragilis. A more detailed account of this 
phenomenon is in course of preparation. 


At the time of the establishment of the chorio-allantoic membrane there are 
no further obvious modifications for allantoplacentation in the uterine wall, and 
the chorio-allantoic membrane simply consists of an outer layer of flattened 
chorionic ectoderm cells attached to the uterine face and an inner layer of 
mesenchymatous tissue which carries the allantoic blood-vessels and which is 
bounded by a single layer of tapering endoderm cells. 


Text-fig. 2.—Section through egg and surrounding uterine wall showing a 
well developed embryo of H. cunninghami on yolk-sac, the relations between 
embryo and allantois, and extent of allantoplacental region indicated by broken 
line. x 4. All. St., allantoic stalk; All. Ves., allantoic vesicle; B. All. Ves., 
boundary of allantoic vesicle; In. All. Memb., inner allantoic membrane; 
L. Umb. V. & A., left umbilical vein and artery; M. Ut. A., main uterine artery ; 
M. Ut. V., main uterine vein; R. Umb. A., right umbilical artery; R. Umb. V., 
right umbilical vein; Y.S., yolk-sac; Y.S. St., yolk-sae stalk; Y.S. Vess., yolk-sae 
vessels. 


When the placenta is mature the chorio-allantoic membrane is well established 
and the embryo is about four weeks old (Text-fig. 2). The uterine epithelium is 
thinner and the maternal capillaries are more or less exposed at the surface of 
the uterus, also the vascularization of the uterus is noticeably richer (Text-fig. 3; 
Plate xxii, fig. 2). The allantoic capillaries are concentrated at the surface of the 
chorio-allantoic membrane and are covered only by a thin layer of much flattened 
chorionic ectoderm cells so that the capillaries come into fairly close contact with 
the overlying maternal capillaries (Text-fig. 3). The chorionic ectoderm cells 
insert protoplasmic protuberances into the maternal tissue, so that it is difficult 
to tear away the foetal from the maternal tissue. At this stage there may be a 
thick sheet of mesenchymatous tissue, strengthened by numerous muscle fibres, 
underlying the allantoic blood-vessels in the chorio-allantoic membrane. This 
tissue is especially characteristic of H. cunninghami, in which the allantois is 


556 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii, 


much larger than that in either H. whitei or EH. striolata, its outer wall therefore 
needing more support (Text-fig. 3; Pl. xxii, fig. 2). 


The placentation occurs over the entire chorio-allantoic membrane (Text-fig. 
2) and, as the allantois extends with the shrinking of the yolk-sac, the area of 
placentation is correspondingly extended. Although in the lizards the allantois 
only extends as the yolk-sac decreases in size, in the snakes examined it completely 
encircles the yolk-sac at early stages in the development of the embryo when the 
yolk-sac comprises the main bulk of the egg in the incubatory chamber (Weekes, 
1929). 


Y / : Sh 
ie cal Ne. 2 -—_Mus.Mes. 
id be ie Wis as ya 
\ PP Ce oe a re BAe “ 
at iy Ray Lt as aA NS = SS A= 
CPt Pie 


Text-fig. 3.—Section of mature allantoplacenta of H. cunninghami. x 400. 
All. Cap., allantoic capillary; C.M., circular muscle; Ch. Ect., chorionic ectoderm ; 
L.M., longitudinal muscle; Mus. Mes., muscular mesenchymatous tissue; 
Ut. Cap., uterine capillary; Ut. Epi., uterine epithelium. 


From this description it will be seen that the placenta is fundamentally simple 
and closely resembles that in L. (Hinulia) quoyi in that it is chiefly characterized 
by closely apposed maternal and foetal blood-streams. It might perhaps be as well 
to stress the fact that, although the foetal tissue is attached to the maternal tissue, 
there is no invasion of the maternal tissue by the foetal tissue, the attachment 
being only superficial, and in no lizard has any such invasion been so far observed. 
It seems possible that this simple type of placenta may be the type most commonly 
found among reptiles, as it occurs in nine of the seventeen species for which 
placentation has so far been described. The presence of such a comparatively 
large yolk-sac in each of the three species and the simplicity of the structure of 
the placenta seem to indicate that the placenta may function chiefly for respira- 
tion. It is proposed in the coming breeding season to see how far this assumption 
is correct. 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 55 


~] 


The modification of the maternal and foetal tissues surrounding the yolk-sac in 
E. cunninghami, E. whitei and EH. striolata. 


It is not proposed to discuss at any length the structure and function of the 
maternal and foetal membranes surrounding the yolk-sac. Only a brief description 
will be included here, since these tissues must be more fully studied before a 
satisfactory understanding of them can be obtained. 

The base of the yolk-sac of embryos of Hgernia in fairly advanced stages 
of development seems to be a collecting ground for all kinds of debris which 
includes degenerating shell-membrane, albumen, scattered corpuscles and loose 
cells. These substances form a pad of material which varies in thickness with 
the individual egg and which can be lifted away from the yolk-sac on dissecting 
away the uterine wall after fixation. This accumulation of materials seems to 
influence to some degree the structure of the overlying chorionic ectoderm cells 
for usually where the pad is thickest, that is, at the base of the yolk-sac, the 
chorionic ectoderm cells are pressed closely against it and are much flattened. At 
the sides of the sac, where the deposit, although present, is much less plentiful, the 
chorionic ectoderm cells are enlarged and columnar. The enlargement does not 
occur uniformly over the yolk-sac but in irregular patches, so that an area of 
enlarged cells may suddenly abut on a region where the cells are normal in size. 
The uterine epithelium underlying the yolk-sac also shows the same patchy 
modification. The epithelial cells of the uterine wall immediately underlying an 
area of enlarged chorionic ectoderm cells are usually correspondingly enlarged 
and are curious in that they are extraordinarily narrow (PI. xxiii, fig. 1). Where 
the chorionic ectoderm cells are not modified, the underlying epithelial cells of 
the uterine wall are as a rule also unmodified, but although this is usually so, 
areas of enlarged uterine epithelial cells have been observed underlying an area 
of chorionic ectoderm cells of normal structure. The difficulty of obtaining a 
satisfactory explanation of the structure of the maternal and foetal tissues 
surrounding the yolk-sac is thus demonstrated. Another interesting point is that, 
while such apposed areas of thickened maternal and foetal epithelial tissues 
usually have at least a small accumulation of materials between them, areas do 
occur where there is no trace of such substance (Pl. xxiii, fig. 1). Why the 
maternal and foetal epithelial tissues should be so modified is a curious and 
interesting problem. The comparatively large yolk-sac in these species of Hgernia 
is full of yolk and this makes it somewhat difficult to believe that an omphalo- 
placenta for the absorption of food is necessary, especially at the comparatively 
early stages in the development of the embryo, when the specialization of the 
maternal and foetal tissues surrounding the yolk-sac is most marked. If the 
region is omphaloplacental, the reason for the irregular distribution of the 
specialized areas is a problem. 


TILIQUA NIGROLUTEA AND T. SCINCOIDES. 


Specimens of TViliqua nigrolutea were collected from Tasmania at sea-level 
and at a height of about 3,000 feet. They contained young in fairly advanced 
stages of development and unfortunately earlier stages are not available. At the 
stages examined the structure of the allantoplacenta is identical with that of the 
allantoplacenta of the three species of Hgernia described above, as a comparison 
of photomicrographs 3 and 2 on Plate xxii and Text-figures 4a and 3 will show, 
and therefore it is not considered necessary to describe the placenta any further. 


558 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii, 


The structure of the maternal and foetal tissues surrounding the yolk-sac is also 
very similar to that of these tissues in Hgernia, except that in J. nigrolutea the 
surface of the uterine wall is often folded and the omphalo-chorionic membrane is 
thrown into corresponding folds which fit loosely into the shallow grooves between 
the uterine folds. Occasionally a similar folding occurs in Hgernia, but it is not 
as characteristic as in Tiliqua. 

The extension of the blood-vessels around the yolk-sac is on the same plan as 
in Hgernia, where a wide strip of yolk-containing endoderm is separated from the 
main bulk of the yolk-sac. 

Professor T. Flynn (1923) described a stage in the placentation of the “blue 
tongue” lizard, Tiliqua scincoides. He writes (1923, p. 76): “Possessing as I do 
but one definitely placental stage, it is not easy to say with exactness what altera- 
tions have taken place in the various foetal and maternal structures which enter 
into the formation of the allantoic and maternal placenta. The union between 
chorion and the uterine epithelium is very intimate. Uterine epithelium apparently 
consists of a single layer of very flattened cells, while the chorionic ectoderm has 
proliferated greatly, is much vacuolated, resembling a typical plasmodium, and is 
formed in the main of markedly enlarged cells with large nuclei connected 
together by amoeboid processes. With this previously prepared tissue the 
allantois fuses by its placental surface. This is not at this stage a complete 
union but occurs at a large number of points.” Flynn gave no accompanying 
figures of the histological relations of the placental region, so it was difficult 
accurately to compare the placentation he described with that of other lizards. 
However, I collected specimens of 7. scincoides during the breeding season of 1928 
and was able to make observations of the placentation. The placentae examined 
were all taken from embryos in advanced stages of development and are con- 
sidered to be mature. Flynn does not mention the maternal circulation. From 
my observations, the maternal capillaries are seen to be concentrated at the 
surface of the uterus and the “single layer of very flattened cells”, which Flynn 
speaks of, represents the remains of the deeper layer of uterine epithelium which 
partially degenerated as a result of its invasion by the capillaries. At the stage 
examined I could find no trace of the “typical plasmodium of markedly enlarged 
cells’? (chorionic ectoderm cells). Although the nuclei are fairly large and deeply 
staining, the cells themselves are not markedly enlarged but are flat and tapering 
and even degenerated in places, allowing the allantoic capillaries to come into 
contact with the overlying maternal tissues (Text-fig. 4a). As this stage differed 
in this respect from that described by Flynn, it is assumed that his must have 
been a younger stage than was available to me, since at all later stages examined 
the placenta remained as described. 

Flynn also described an even earlier stage, but unfortunately the maternal 
structures had not been Kept and the evidence afforded by the uterine wall was not 
available to him. In this stage, where the allantois is but a small diverticulum of 
the hind gut, the chorionic ectoderm cells in the immediate region of the embryo 
have begun to proliferate and are considerably enlarged. Through the courtesy of 
the Department of Zoology, University of Sydney, I was able to examine Flynn’s 
slides of this stage and to figure it (Harrison and Weekes, 1925). It is interesting 
that such a modification was not met with during the examination of the various 
stages in the development of the placenta of those other lizards which have a 
similar type of mature placenta. However, as there are no signs of such prolifera- 
tion in the mature allantoplacenta of 7. scincoides, it seems justifiable to deduce 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 559 


that the condition is transitory, the proliferation possibly only serving to facilitate 
the attachment of the foetal to the maternal tissue, and that the mature placenta 
corresponds in all essentials to that in the lizards L. (Hinulia) quoyi, E. cunning- 
hami, E. whitei and E. striolata. 


Ail. Cap. Ch.Ecr. &. 


Text-fig. 4a—Section of mature placenta of TJ. wnigrolutea. x 400. 
4b.—Section of mature allantoplacenta of ZL. (Hemiergis) quadridigitatum. 
x 400. All. Cap., allantoic capillary; C.M., circular muscle; Ch. Hct., chorionic 
ectoderm; L.M., longitudinal muscle; Mat. Cap., maternal capillary; Mus. Mes., 
muscular mesenchymatous tissue; Ut. Hpi., uterine epithelium. 


LyGosoMA (HEMIERGIS) QUADRIDIGITATUM. 

Specimens of Lygosoma (Hemiergis) quadridigitatum were collected from 
Tarana and the Jenolan district in the summer of 1928, together with specimens 
of HL. cunninghami and other lizards. This lizard measures about six inches in 
length and is narrow and snake-like, its fore and hind limbs having degenerated. 


560 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii, 


It always lives in the dark, mostly under logs or tree stumps. The ovulation and 
fertilization of these lizards took place during the last week of November in 1928, 
and the young were born at the end of February. The eggs in the oviducts are 
distinctly oval, in accordance with the narrow snake-like body of the parent. A 
little albumen is present and a thin shell-membrane surrounds the eggs. In 
early stages in the development of the embryo the shell-membrane over the 
embryonic region is absorbed and the remainder collects with the albumen at the 
base of the yolk-sac. 

The embryo lies on its left side on the yolk-sac and the allantoic stalk passes 
immediately upward to expand into the allantoic vesicle. The allantois is 
vascularized by two main umbilical arteries and veins and the yolk-sac is vascu- 
larized by two main arteries and one main vein which unite in the yolk-sac stalk 
before passing into the embryo. The allantois does not grow round the yolk-sac, 
but only expands as the yolk-sac decreases in size. The uterus is vascularized by 
one main longitudinal artery and vein on its dorsal surface and each of the vessels 
has transverse branches which pass round the uterus to the region underlying the 
bases of the yolk-sacs of the contained eggs. In all these respects L. (Hemiergis) 
quadridigitatum resembles other lizards examined, but it has been thought advis- 
able to include a brief description as this is the first account of the intra-uterine 
relations of this subgenus Hemiergis. 

Allantoplacentation occurs over the whole of the uterine surface embraced by 
the chorio-allantoic membrane. The allantoplacenta is fundamentally similar to 
that found in L. (Hinulia) quoyi, HE. cunninghami, E. whitei and H. striolata, and 
a description is therefore considered unnecessary. Since L. (Hemiergis) quadridi- 
gitatum is a small lizard and has comparatively small embryos, the thick band of 
mesenchymatous tissue underlying the chorionic ectoderm of the chorio-allantoic 
membrane found in the larger lizard H. cunninghami_.is absent (Text-fig. 4D). 


MABUJA MULTIFASCIATA. 


Mabuja multifasciata is yet another viviparous skink and is a fairly large 
lizard, the mature adult measuring about 10 inches in length. Only mature stages 
in the development of the allantoplacenta are available for examination. The 
allantoplacenta is essentially similar to that described above for Egernia, 
T. nigrolutea and T. scincoides, in which the area of allantoplacentation extends 
over the whole surface of the uterus embraced by the chorio-allantoic membrane 
and is characterized by the partial degeneration of maternal and foetal epithelial 
tissues over the placental face and the close apposition of maternal and foetal 
blood-streams. 


LYGOSOoOMA (LICLEPISMA) OCELLATUM, L. (L.) METALLICUM AND L. (L.) PRETIOSUM. 
Material. 


Hach of these three species of lizard is a comparatively small skink about 
four or five inches in length, and all three occur in great numbers in Tasmania. 
According to the available records L. (L.) ocellatum and L. (L.) metallicum are 
apparently restricted to Tasmania. Specimens from Victoria recorded as 
L. (L.) pretiosum were examined and found to be really a new species now called 
Lygosoma (Liolepisma) weekesae (Kinghorn, 1929). As this is the only record 
of L. (L.) pretiosum from the mainland of Australia it seems possible that this 
lizard may also be restricted to Tasmania. The three species are the most common 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 561 


skinks in Tasmania and no difficulty was experienced in collecting numbers of 
them, whether at sea-level or at a height of 4,000 feet. 

The lizards were collected during January, 1929, and were kept alive until 
the birth of the young, which occurred for the most part during the first and 
second weeks of February; however, some young were born in the middle of 
January from lizards collected at sea-level in northern Tasmania, where spring 
and consequently the beginning of the gestation period are earlier than in the 
high regions in the south. The embryos in the lizards collected were all fairly 
well developed and were at about the middle of their gestation period. 


Placentation. 

The placentation and the anatomical relations between the embryo, its 
membranes and its yolk-sac are the same in the three species and in this 
description no distinction is made between the species. The females carry from 
three to seven young, five being the usual number and, as in other viviparous 
lizards examined, the right uterus usually holds one more egg than the left. The 
embryo lies on its left side on the yolk-sac, with its long axis parallel to that of 
the parent. The general disposition of the embryo on its sac and of the foetal 
membranes and umbilical and yolk-sac blood-vessels has been described for two 
- other species of this subgenus, L. (L.) entrecasteauxi (Harrison and Weekes, 1925) 
and L. (L.) weekesae (Weekes, 1929) and it is sufficient to say here that in these 
respects L. (L.) ocellatum, L. (L.) metallicum and L. (L.) pretiosum correspond 
in all essentials with the two related species. 

There are the remains of shell-membrane at the base of the yolk-sac. At the 
early stage examined the embryo and its allantoic vesicle occupy about half the 
incubatory chamber and the yolk-sac is reduced and occupies the other half. The 
chorio-allantoic membrane is firmly established, the allantoic vesicle completely 
filling the extra-embryonic coelome as far as the upper surface of the yolk-sac. 
The area of allantoplacentation extends over the whole surface of the chorio- 
allantoic membrane. 

Perhaps one of the most striking features of the allantoplacenta in these 
forms is the extreme thinness of the uterine wall, as illustrated by Figure 3 on 
Plate xxiii. The chorio-allantoic membrane is usually pressed against the uterine 
surface, but the epithelial cells of the chorionic membrane are not actually 
attached to the maternal face of the placenta. In Figures 2 and 3 on Plate xxiii 
the apposition is not close, but the separation of the tissues occurred during their 
preparation for sectioning. There are often large areas where the apposition is 
close (Text-fig. 5b). The uterine wall is covered with a series of small folds 
which, although small, are nevertheless quite characteristic, and distinguish this 
type of placenta from that described above for Hgernia and Tiliqua. Hach fold 
consists of one maternal capillary with a thin endothelial coat surrounded by a 
layer of uterine epithelium in which the cell walls are difficult to distinguish. 
That part of the epithelium which immediately underlies the capillaries is thin 
and usually without nuclei, the nuclei being congregated in the thicker epithelium 
between the capillaries (Text-fig. 5a; Pl. xxiii, fig. 2). 

The chorio-allantoic membrane is vascularized by numerous small capillaries 
and larger vessels which immediately underlie the chorionic ectoderm. In section 
.the chorionic epithelium has almost the appearance of a deeply staining syncytium 
with large nuclei embedded (PI. xxiii, fig. 2); however, in surface view the cell 
walls are distinct and the ectoderm is seen to be truly cellular. Over most of the 


562 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii, 


placental region the chorionic epithelium is pressed closely against the folds in 
the uterine wall and extensions of the epithelial cells grow into the grooves 
between the folds, so that the whole has the appearance of dove-tailing. Often 
in section the groove appears to be completely filled with the extension from one 
large epithelial cell (Text-fig. 50) which may attach itself to the maternal tissue 


Ur Epi. Ut.Cap. Fold. 


- SORC wo} (AMIZQE : 
Ez eS DEES Te Ny’ ¢ 


Chaber ANS ae 


Text-fig. 5a.—Section of mature allantoplacenta of L. (L.) ocellatum. x 400. 
5b.—Section of mature allantoplacenta of LZ. (L.) ocellatwm showing apposition 
of maternal and foetal tissues. x 400. All. Cap., allantoic capillary; Ch. Ect., 
chorionic ectoderm; Ut. Cap., uterine capillary; Ut. Epi., uterine epithelium. 


so that, if the maternal and foetal tissues are separated in the process of sectioning, 
the free margins of the epithelial cells may be jagged and torn (PI. xxiii, fig. 2). 
This type of placenta is obviously simple and its significance will be discussed 
later. 


SoME EARLY STAGES IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE ALLANTOPLACENTA IN THE SCINCID 
LizarpD, LyGosoMA (LIOLEPISMA) ENTRECASTEAUXI. 
Material. 

In the paper on the placentation of Lygosoma (Liolepisma) entrecasteauxi by 
the late Professor Harrison and myself (Harrison and Weekes, 1925), a late stage 
in the development of the placenta was described and an account of earlier stages 
promised. At the beginning of the breeding season of 1925 specimens of L. (L.) 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 563 


entrecasteauxi containing very young embryos were collected from Mount 
Kosciusko, Australia, and were kept alive during the rest of the gestation period, 
about eleven weeks. Lizards were opened and the young removed at intervals 
of a few days during that period and a fairly complete series of developmental 
stages is therefore available. At the earliest stage examined, the beginnings of 
placentation are already evident and therefore, although this stage is compara- 
tively a very early one in the development of the embryo, it will be necessary to 
examine even earlier stages before the account of the development of allanto- 
placentation in this lizard can be completed. A description of available stages is 
included here since, in the discussion of the placentation in the other lizards 
described in this paper, reference is made to the early development of the 
placentation in L. (L.) entrecasteauci. 


Placentation. 

As stated, the mature allantoplacentation has already been described and 
illustrated (Harrison and Weekes, 1925). Included here is one of the photomicro- 
graphs published in that paper which illustrates very satisfactorily the general 
disposition of the main maternal allantoplacental region in surface view (Pl. xxvii, 
fig. 4). This placental region is roughly elliptical in shape and the coiled folds 
in the uterine wall stand out distinctly in the photomicrograph. The maternal 
circulation is also clearly shown; the darker region lying longitudinally in the 
middle of the placental region represents the two main maternal blood-vessels, the 
longitudinal artery and vein, slung in a fold of mesometrium, and the numerous 
vessels running transversely are branches from these two main vessels, the 
narrower arteries (Pl. xxvii, fig. 4, Br. A.) roughly alternating with the thicker 
veins (Pl. xxvii, fig. 4, Br. V.). 

Further illustrations of the mature allantoplacenta of material collected since 
the publication of the above paper are given as Figure 4 on Plate xxvi, Figure 3 on 
Plate xxvii and Figure 5 on Plate xxviii. Figure 4 on Plate xxvi illustrates the 
histological structure of the mature elliptical allantoplacenta, for a detailed 
description of which reference should be made to the above-mentioned paper. It 
is sufficient to say here that the folds lining the uterus are complicated when 
compared with those in the allantoplacentae of other species of lizard; that each 
fold is filled with capillaries and lined by a single layer of enlarged, cuboid, 
ciliated, epithelial cells, which have the appearance of being secretory; that the 
chorionic ectoderm cells pressed against maternal folds are enormously enlarged 
and ciliated; and that the general form of the ridges impresses itself upon the 
chorionic surface which is thus marked off into a series of bays and prominences, 
the prominences loosely fitting into the grooves between the maternal folds. 
Figure 3 on Plate xxvii is a photograph of the foetal elliptical allantoplacenta. The 
dark elliptical area consists of greatly thickened chorionic epithelium overlying a 
richly vascularized allantois. This elliptical region lies immediately beneath the 
maternal elliptical region illustrated on the same plate. 


Description of the Allantoplacentation of Embryos in Lizards collected and 
examined on 11th November, 1925. 


It is impossible to judge accurately the age of the embryos examined on 11th 
November, 1925, since the times of the fertilization of the ova are not known and 


the date of the fixation of the embryos can alone be recorded. It must be stressed 
F 


564 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii, 


that the dates given are for the breeding season of 1925 only, since the beginning 
of the breeding season varies each year and roughly corresponds with the coming 
of spring. The embryos examined are, with few exceptions, at similar stages of 
development, the breeding season being a fairly regular one. The embryos have 
reached the stage in their development illustrated by Text-figures 6a and 6b, 
where the amnion and chorion are formed, but where the allantois is only a small 
protuberance at the posterior end of the embryo. The embryo lies on its left side 
on the surface of the yolk-sac in a position dorsal with regard to the parent and 
immediately beneath the main maternal longitudinal blood-vessels. 


Text-fig. 6a—The stage of development of majority of embryos of 
L. (L.) entrecasteauxi examined 11th November, 1925. x 10. 6b.—A diagram- 
matic representation of section through egg and surrounding uterine wall at 
this stage. x 14. Sin. Term., sinus terminalis; Th. Ch. Ect., thickened chorionic 
ectoderm; Ut., uterus; Y.S., yolk-sac. - 


At this stage there is a thin shell-membrane and a little albumen at the 
sides and base of the yolk-sac, but in the dorsal and embryonal region there is 
only the remains of degenerating shell-membrane embedded in a thin coagulum of 
what may be maternal secretion containing loose cells and corpuscles. A surface 
view of the placental area was obtained by removing the dorsal half of an 
incubatory chamber and staining and mounting it whole as shown in Plate xxvii, 
figure 1. In surface view there are as yet no indications of the elliptical. allanto- 
placental region which is so well defined at later stages. In the previous paper 
(Harrison and Weekes, 1925, p. 474) we said ‘we reserve a full statement of the 
details of maternal circulation for a future occasion when we shall have earlier 
developmental stages for examination and comparison. Here we give merely a 
brief outline of the arrangement of the vessels in the uterine wall. A large artery 
and vein run longitudinally along the dorsal side of the uterus, slung in a fold of 
the mesometrium, and standing out as a prominent ridge bisecting the allanto- 
placental area .... the vein receives a single large branch vein from each 
placental area to which latter the artery sends out a single branch .. .” An 
examination of early stages has shown that, as in other lizards examined, the 
branch arteries and veins which run transversely round the uterus pass directly 
into the single large artery and vein which lie in a longitudinal direction along 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 565 


the dorsal surface of the uterus and not first into separate branch vessels from 
each placental area. The interpretation published in 1925 was incorrect. 


At the early stage under consideration the arrangement of the vessels is 
essentially similar to that at later stages and, except for a marked enrichment of 
the blood supply and a consequent enlargement of the vessels, the maternal circula- 
tion conforms to the same plan throughout the gestation period. There are small 
branch vessels which feed the elliptical allantoplacenta alone and which are most 
evident at later stages of its development. Whether they are all formed in the 
uterus at early stages of development or whether they are formed throughout the 
gestation period is difficult to determine, since at early stages they are narrow and 
indistinct and it is not easy to separate them from the general background of the 
uterus which contains an extraordinarily rich capillary network. From the 
evidence available it seems probable that many of the vessels are formed through- 
out the gestation period. A comparison of Figures 1 and 4 on Plate xxvii shows 
the marked enrichment of the blood supply during the gestation period. 


In section the uterine wall of the earliest stage available is very thin and 
contains few glands, those present being flattened and obviously not functioning 
(Plate xxiv, fig. 2). No folds are noticeable when a surface view of the uterus 
is examined, but in sectioned material they are quite distinct although small. The 
absence of any indication of an elliptical allantoplacental area on the surface of 
the uterus is due to the more or less uniform distribution of the small folds over 
the entire under surface of the uterus surrounding the dorsal half of the egg 
(Text-fig. 6b). There may be a few smooth areas on the face of the uterus in this 
region, but these later become covered with folds. Over the smooth region the 
uterine epithelium is a single layer of fairly regular long and narrow cells which 
are to a large extent separated from each other, have swollen apices, and appear 
to be secretory (Text-fig. 8a; Pl. xxiv, fig. 1). In the ridged regions each small 
ridge contains a small capillary which is surrounded by epithelial cells, arranged 
in a fan-like manner, which have the same histological structure as the cells 
lining the smooth portions of the uterus (Pl. xxiv, fig. 2). It is interesting that 
the folds are so widely distributed when first formed. At this stage the chorionic 
membrane extends for a comparatively short distance over the yolk-sac and in 
the immediate embryonic region the chorionic epithelium is thickened (Text-fig. 
6b), but the epithelial cells, although comparatively large, are only about one- 
tenth of the size they eventually attain. The dividing cell walls are distinct, the 
cell cytoplasm stains deeply and the cell apices are swollen. These cells have 
probably absorbed the shell-membrane from their immediate vicinity, as do the 
chorionic ectoderm cells in the early developmental stages of other viviparous 
lizards examined.: : 


Description of the Allantoplacentation of Embryos in Lizards examined on 
20th November, 1925. 


At the next important stage in the development of the allantoplacenta, the 
allantois covers the posterior end of the embryo and the chorio-allantoic membrane 
is established (Text-fig. 7; Pl. xxvi, fig. 1). Stages intermediate between this and 
the previous stage described are available, but beyond the acquisition of a com- 
plete covering of folds over the under surface of the uterus surrounding the 
dorsal half of the egg and the further extension of the extra-embryonic ectoderm 
and the extra-embryonic circulation over the yolk-sac, there are no further 


566 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii, 


important developments to be observed. In the surface view of this second stage 
there are still no signs of an elliptical placental region on the uterine wall; 
in sectioned material, however, the folds are seen to be more numerous and 
slightly larger, the increase in the size of each fold being caused by the enlarge- 
ment of the epithelial cells and the swelling of the contained capillary which is 
not only larger at this stage, but is also rounded and packed with corpuscles. 

The folds are pressed close together so that they appear square in cross-section 
(Text-fig. 8d; Pl. xxiv, fig. 3; Pl. xxvi, fig. 1) and their general outline resembles 
that described for the folds in early developmental stages of the allantoplacenta 
of L. (L.) weekesae (Weekes, 1929, p. 49). With the growth of the embryo and 
the expansion of the allantoic vesicle the uterus is stretched and the folds again 
become separated. Figures a, b, c and d of Text-figure 8 illustrate the four main 
steps in the development of the folds up to this stage. 


Text-fig. T7a—The stage of development of majority of embryos of 
L. (L.) entrecasteauxi examined 20th November, 1925. x 10. 7b.—A diagram- 
matic representation of section through egg and surrounding uterine wall at 
this stage. x 14. All., allantois; Sin. Term., sinus terminalis; Th. Ch. Ect., 
thickened chorionic ectoderm; Thin. Ch. Hct., thin chorionic ectoderm; Ut., 
uterus; Y.S., yolk-sac. 


The thickening of the chorionic epithelium extends for some distance over 
the surface of the yolk-sac and there may be thin areas interspersed among the 
thick areas (Text-fig. 7b), although there is no apparent reason for this patchy 
arrangement. The allantoic mesenchyme contains many capillaries and fresh blood 
channels are being formed. Figure 3 on Plate xxv is a photomicrograph of part 
of the allantoplacenta at this stage, included here to show the collection of 
material between the uterus and the chorionic ectoderm. 


Description of the Allantoplacentation of Embryos in Lizards examined on 
28th November, 1925. 


It is not until the embryo and its allantois occupy a third of the incubatory 
chamber that the next important steps in the development of allantoplacentation 
are evident. At this stage an elliptical faintly opaque area can be seen in the 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 567 


dorsal region of the incubatory chamber. This is the beginning of the mature 
elliptical allantoplacentation which is about half its ultimate size (Pl. xxvii, 
fig. 2). 

As may be expected, an examination of the sectioned material reveals a 
further specialization of the maternal folds particularly at the dorsal region 
of the incubatory chamber beneath the main longitudinal blood-vessels, where 
many of the folds are deep and narrow and perhaps more closely packed than at 


Text-fig. §—Stages in development of maternal folds in allantoplacenta of 
SC) EVENECAStTCAUWLIy a-e) X40 xX 8405) 1G, cilia: 


the last stage described. The folds in the uterine wall surrounding the elliptical 
area (Text-fig. 10b, Sm. Plac. R.), are now flattened (Pl. xxviii, fig. 1) and this 
flattening is the first step in their degeneration which is complete by the time the 
mature placenta is established (Pl. xxviii, fig. 3). 

The chorionic epithelium underlying the deep narrow folds is definitely 
thicker than that in surrounding regions, but the epithelial cells are not yet 
ciliated (Pl. xxvi, fig. 2). 

The most important advances, then, in the development of the allantoplacenta 
at this stage are (1) the appearance of the opaque, elliptical area on the dorsal 
surface of the incubatory chamber, due to the further specialization of the folds 
in the uterine wall in the region of the main uterine longitudinal blood-vessels, 
(2) the beginning of the degeneration of the folds in the uterine wall over- 
lying the sides of the egg, and (3) the further thickening of the chorionic 


568 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii, 


epithelium immediately beneath the more specialized maternal folds. With the 
concentration of the specialization of maternal and foetal tissues into an elliptical 
area at the dorsal region of the incubatory chamber and egg respectively, the 
beginnings of the main region of allantoplacentation are made. 


The further development of the elliptical allantoplacenta is from this stage 
(28th November, 1925) quite straightforward until, in specimens examined at the 
end of the first week of December, the elliptical placenta is well defined, its 
clearer definition being due to its greater opacity which is caused by the general 
enlargement and further folding of the ridges and the thickening of the underlying 
chorionic epithelium (Pl. xxvi, fig. 4). The elliptical placenta is considered to 
be mature at this stage, since there is no further noticeable specialization during 
the rest of the gestation period. The amount of folding of the uterine wall 
varies with the individual specimen as a comparison of Figure 4 on Plate xxvi 
with Figure 5 on Plate xxviii shows. The epithelial cells lining the folds are now 
enlarged, cuboid and ciliated. The specialization of the chorionic epithelium is 
restricted to the region immediately underlying the maternal folds, so that an 
area of thickened chorionic epithelium underlies the elliptical maternal placenta. 
The chorionic ectoderm cells attain enormous proportions and are ciliated (PI. 
xxv, fig. 2). A comparison of Figure 4 on Plate xxiv with Figure 2 on Plate xxv 
shows the marked enlargement of these cells. The fairly complicated fold shown 
as Figure 1 on Plate xxv arose out of a further development of a simple fold 
such as is shown in section by Figure 2 on Plate xxiv. 


The structure of the tissues of the uterus and the chorio-allantoic membrane 
in the smooth regions adjoining the mature elliptical ridged placental area deserves 
special comment. The flattening and degeneration of the folds, which are already 
noticeable in those specimens examined on 28th November (Pl. xxviii, fig. 1), 
continue (Pl. xxviii, fig. 2) until. at the end of the first week of December, 
there are no longer even traces of the former folds, and the maternal epithelium 
lining the uterine face has actually degenerated so that there is only a thin layer 
of epithelial cytoplasm underlying the maternal capillaries (Pl. xxviii, fig. 3). The 
foetal tissue is attached to the maternal tissue by the chorionic epithelial cells 
which are also flattened and which taper over the allantoic capillaries. This region, 
which has been referred to in a previous paper (Weekes, 1929) as the “smooth 
region of allantoplacentation”’, to distinguish it from the elliptical ridged region, 
is obviously allantoplacental, the secretion and absorption of gases and perhaps 
nutriment being facilitated by the close apposition of maternal and foetal blood- 
streams. The structure of the smooth allantoplacental region is strikingly similar 
to that of the mature allantoplacenta described for ZL. (Hinulia) quoyi, E. 
cunninghami, E. whitei, E. striolata, T. nigrolutea and T. scincoides. 


In the development of the allantoplacenta of L. (L.) entrecasteauxi there is, 
then, first the occurrence of small folds on the entire under surface of the dorsal 
half of the incubatory chamber and the enlargement of the chorionic ectoderm 
cells of the chorionic membrane in this region. There follows the enlargement 
and further complication of the folds and their concentration into an elliptical 
area on the under surface of the dorsal region of the uterus in the region of the 
main longitudinal artery and vein and the further thickening of the chorionic 
epithelium immediately underlying the enlarged uterine folds. Finally, the folds 
in the regions surrounding the elliptical area degenerate and the chorionic 
ectoderm lining the underlying chorio-allantoic membrane also degenerates, so 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 569 


that a second region of allantoplacentation is established where the thinness of 
the maternal and foetal epithelium allows the close apposition of maternal and 
foetal blood-streams. 


THEORETICAL CONSIDERATIONS. 

In an earlier paper (Harrison and Weekes, 1925) it was claimed that the 
occurrence of similar types of placentae in two not very closely related Scincid 
genera, Lygosoma and Chalcides, indicates the independent evolution of the placenta 
in each. The results of continued investigation into reptilian placentation have 
further established the claim of the independent evolution of similar types of 
placentae among reptiles. The occurrence of similar types of placentae in the 
lizards EH. cunninghami, T. nigrolutea and L. (Hinulia) quoyi can, to my mind, 
only be explained by this hypothesis, since it would be obviously unsatisfactory 
to attempt to relate these forms more closely, because of their similar placentae, 
in spite of the obvious anatomical differences between them. Further substantia- 
tion is given by the difference in the placentation of members of the same 
genus Chalcides and by the fact that both oviparous species and viviparous species 
with fairly well developed placentae occur in one and the same subgenus, 
Liolepisma. 

The facts thus far established by a study of reptilian placentation point to the 
conclusions, (i) that placentation as a functional adaptation to environment 
has arisen independently many times in the course of evolution among reptiles, 
and (ii) that the phenomenon of parallel development of similar types of placentae 
among reptiles is common. 

It is interesting that all the lizards for which placentation has been recorded 
belong to the family Scincidae, but no significance is attached to this fact, since 
it is known that members of other families are viviparous and these may prove 
to be placental upon examination. Miss J. Procter, Curator of Reptiles, Zoological 
Gardens, London, has called my attention to a viviparous chameleon, the investiga- 
tion of which should be interesting. 

The possibility of tracing various stages in the evolution of the more 
specialized types of placentation suggested itself after a study of what are now 
considered to be simpler types. The placentation first examined was that of 
L. (L.) entrecasteauri (Harrison and Weekes, 1925) and, in the beginning, 
attention was mainly given to the elliptical area of allantoplacentation so 
prominent in the dorsal region of the incubatory chamber. Later, after an 
examination of the placentation of L. (Hinulia) quoyi (Weekes, 1927), it was 
noticed that the histological structure of, and the relationship between, the uterine 
wall and the apposed chorio-allantoic membrane over the non-ridged area in 
L. (L.) entrecasteauzi (Pl. xxviii, fig. 3) were almost identical with those in the 
mature placenta of L. (Hinulia) quoyi. In both these regions of allantoplacentation 
the maternal and epithelial tissues partly degenerate and the maternal and foetal 
blood-streams are closely apposed. This resemblance, together with the simplicity 
of the structure of the placenta in L. (Hinulia) quoyi, suggested that perhaps 
the placentation in L. (L.) entrecasteauxi may have evolved from a type similar . 
to that now occurring in L. (Hinulia) quoyi. This is not a remarkable or even 
an important supposition, as obviously the placentation in L. (L.) entrecasteauxi 
must have developed out of some very simple form of placenta, and it would be 
difficult to visualize a more simple or natural expression than that which occurs 
in L. (Hinulia) quoyi and also in EH. cunninghami, E. whitei, HE. striolata, T. 


570 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii, 


nigrolutea, T. scincoides, L. (Hemiergis) quadridigitatum and Mabuja 
multifasciata. 


Giacomini (1906) described a condition for Chalcides ocellatus in which the 
richly vascular maternal and foetal tissues are closely apposed and which he 
considered too simple to be called placental. Giacomini’s description of the 
apposed tissues could very well be applied to the corresponding condition in 
L. (Hinulia) quoyi, E. cunninghami, E. whitei, H. striolata, T. scincoides, T. 
nigrolutea, L. (Hemiergis) quadridigitatum and Mabuja multifasciata; however, 
early stages in the development of the embryo in these lizards show that this 
condition is brought about by a definite change in the structure of the uterine wall 
and the chorio-allantoic membrane, and that the foetal tissues are actually attached 
to the maternal tissues and that some exchange, even if only of gases, obviously 
takes place between them. This condition, therefore, to my mind, rightly deserves 
the name placenta in spite of the obvious simplicity of its structure. 


A study of the eggs, as well as a consideration of the simplicity of the placenta 
in L. (Hinulia) quoyi, E.. cunninghami, EH. whitei, EH. striolata, T. scincoides, 
T. nigrolutea, L. (Hemiergis) quadridigitatum and Mabuja multifasciata, suggests, 
to my mind, that these lizards have possibly adopted viviparity and this form 
of placentation comparatively recently, since the eggs, when compared with those 
of oviparous lizards of the same adult size, do not show an obvious reduction 
in yolk-content and the yolk in some species is even surrounded by a little 
albumen. But when the eggs of L. (L.) entrecasteauxi and C. tridactylus, lizards 
with a comparatively specialized placenta, are examined, the reduction of the 
yolk-content is obvious, the eggs of L. (L.) entrecasteauxi being barely two-thirds 
the size of eggs of oviparous species:of the same adult size, while those of 
C. tridactylus (Giacomini, 1891, p. 333) measure only about 2:5 to 3 mm. in 
diameter compared with at least 8 mm. in oviparous species of the same adult 
size. This reduction suggests, to my mind, that a comparatively long time 
must have elapsed since this form became viviparous. The suggestion might 
be made that L. (L.) entrecasteauxi and C. tridactylus adopted viviparity at the 
same time as the above-mentioned lizards, but that their specialized type of 
placenta has been developed and the yolk-content of their eggs reduced more 
rapidly. Whether the adaptation was synchronous or not has no important 
bearing on the conclusions that the type of placenta in L. (Hinulia) quoyi is 
simple and that in its evolution the placenta in L. (L.) entrecasteauxi possibly 
passed through a stage similar to that now represented by the mature placenta 
in L. (Hinulia) quoyi. 

The discovery in L. (L.) weekesae (Weekes, 1929) of an allantoplacenta 
which is of the same type as that in L. (L.) entrecasteauzi, although not as well 
specialized, was not unexpected. In L. (L.) weekesae there is the same well- 
defined elliptical allantoplacenta in the dorsal region of the incubatory chamber 
and the same smooth allantoplacental region characterized by closely apposed 
maternal and foetal blood-streams as in L. (L.) entrecasteauzxi. The maternal 
folds in the elliptical placental region are essentially similar to those in L. (L.) 
entrecasteauxi, but the ridges are simpler and not so deeply folded and the sheet 
of chorionic epithelium underlying the maternal ridges is not so thick. Indeed, the 
mature placenta in L. (L.) weekesae greatly resembles a stage in the development 
of the placenta in L. (L.) entrecasteauxi just before it reaches maturity, and so 
close is this resemblance that it was necessary to refer to the labels on the slides 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 571 


of sectioned material in order to distinguish the species. This resemblance 
suggests rather obviously that in its phylogeny the placenta in L. (L.) entre- 
casteauxi passed through a stage now represented by the mature placenta in 
L. (L.) weekesae. A comparison of Figure 4 on Plate xxviii, Figure 3 on Plate xxvi 
and Text-figures 10a and*10b0 will show clearly enough the grounds for this 
assumption. It may be suggested that, since L. (L.) entrecasteauxi and L. (L.) 
weekesae are closely related lizards (Kinghorn, 1929), they may have come 
from the same placental stock, the specialization of the placenta having progressed 
further in one than in the other. This would naturally mean that their placentae 


M.ULA. 
M.URL.V. 


Text-fig. 9a.—A diagrammatic representation of part of incubatory chamber 
with apposed chorio-allantoic membrane, illustrating the simple type of allanto- 
placenta found in the lizards L. (Hinulia) quoyi, E. cunninghami, EL. white, 
#H. striolata, T. scincoides, T. nigrolutea, L. (Hemiergis) quadridigitatum and 
M. multifasciata. The attachment of foetal to maternal tissue is indicated by the 
broken line X. x 10. 9b.—Portion of allantoplacenta shown in Figure 9a 
magnified to show histological structure. 9c.—A diagrammatic representation 
of part of incubatory chamber with apposed chorio-allantoic membrane, 
illustrating type of allantoplacenta found in lizards UL. (ZL.) ocellatum, 
LL. (L.) metallicum and L. (L.) pretiosum. The separation of foetal from 
maternal tissue is indicated by unbroken line Y. x 12:5. 9d.—Portion of allanto- 
placenta shown in Figure 9c magnified to illustrate its histological structure. 
Ch. All. M., chorio-allantoic membrane; WM. Ut. A., main uterine artery; M. Ut. V., 
main uterine vein; Ut., uterus. 


572 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii, 


are related and have not been independently evolved. Indeed, it would perhaps 
be strange if such instances of placental relationship did not occur among a group 
so widely adopting viviparity and the general conclusion of the independent 
evolution of similar types of placentae among the reptiles is not challenged by 
such an instance. ° 


The placenta in L. (L.) ocellatum, L. (L.) metallicum and L. (L.) pretiosum 
may now be considered. This placenta is slightly more highly specialized than 
that in L. (Hinulia) quoyi, since the maternal capillaries, instead of remaining 
level with the surface of the maternal placental face as they do in L. (Hinulia) 
quoyi, bulge to form the folds described above and the chorionic ectoderm Cells, 
which are much flattened in L. (Hinulia) quoyi, are enlarged and fit into the shallow 
maternal grooves between the folds. However, these are not fundamental differ- 
ences and, to my mind, the placenta in L. (L.) ocellatum, L. (L.) metallicum 
and L. (L.) pretiosum may be regarded as a further specialization of the con- 
dition in L. (Hinulia) quoyi, and, since it is suggested that the placenta in 
L. (L.) entrecasteauxi may possibly have come from an original type such as is 
now found in L. (Hinulia) quoyi (Text-fig. 9a and 9b), it is interesting to see 
if there are any suggestions in the ontogeny of the placenta in L. (L.) entre- 
casteauzi of it having passed through such a stage in its phylogeny as is now 
represented by the mature placenta in L. (.) ocellatum, L. (L.) metallicum and 
L. (L.) pretiosum (Text-fig. 9c and 9d). It will be recalled that, at the earliest 
stage in the development of the placenta in L. (L.) entrecasteauxi examined, 
small folds occur over the entire under surface of the uterus surrounding the 
embryo, and that it is only at later stages that they become restricted to the 
elliptical area on the dorsal region of the incubatory chamber. The presence 
of small folds over the entire under surface of the uterus in contact with the 
chorio-allantoic membrane does, to my mind, suggest the placentation in L. (L.) 
ocellatum, L. (L.) metallicum and L. (L.) pretiosum and the structure of the 
shallow folds in L. (L.) entrecasteauxi and of those in the three above-mentioned 
lizards is also fundamentally similar, in that each fold contains one small capillary 
and is lined by a layer of uterine epithelium. 


A consideration of these facts does seem to suggest that in its phylogeny 
L. (L.) entrecasteauxi has passed through a stage of development essentially 
similar to that now represented by the mature placenta in L. (L.) ocellatum, 
L. (L.) metallicum and L. (L.) pretiosum, and it may be possible that the type 
of placentation in these three lizards may eventually attain the comparatively 
high degree of specialization already acquired by the placenta in L. (L.) entre- 
casteauzi. For, with the concentration of the folds into an elliptical area beneath 
the main longitudinal uterine blood-vessels, and with the further definition of the 
folds and their acquisition of a lining layer of epithelial cells, and with the 
enlargement of the underlying epithelial cells, the type of placentation in DL. (L.) 
weekesae is attained (Text-fig. 10a); with the further gathering together of the 
simple villous ridges into more complicated folds and the further enlargement 
of maternal and foetal epithelial cells, the type of placenta in L. (L.) entrecasteauxi 
is attained (Text-fig. 100); here it is interesting to note that a folding of the 
foetal tissues to fit into the maternal grooves, thus providing a greater absorption 
surface, would result in the type of placentation found in C. tridactylus (Text- 
fig. 10c). Although the facts revealed from a study of reptilian placentation are, 
to my mind, highly suggestive that such a course as is outlined above has been 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 573 


followed, no definite claim is made that such was the course followed. It may be 
considered inadvisable to speculate at all as to the possible course of the evolution 
of types of reptilian allantoplacentae, but after all the placentation, even in 
C. tridactylus, is so simple when compared with placentation among HEutherian 
mammals that there is little scope for dangerous speculation. 


M.UrA. 
{2 —M.Ur.V. 


Text-fig. 10a—A diagrammatic representation of allantoplacentation in 
L. (L.) weekesae; 10b in UL. (L.) entrecasteauxi; and 10¢ in C. tridactylus. 
10a, x 12:5; 106 and 10c, x 15. Ch. Ect., chorionic ectoderm; HII. Plac. Reg., 
elliptical placental region; Foet. Tis., foetal tissue: Mat. Tis., maternal tissue; 
Mat. Fold, maternal fold; WM. Ut. A., main uterine artery; M. Ut. V., main uterine 
vein; Sm. Plac. Reg., smooth placental region. 


It would naturally be wrong to expect the type of placentation found in 
L. (Hinulia) quoyi to give rise exclusively to the types found in L. (L.) ocellatum., 
L. (L.) weekesae, L. (L.) entrecasteauxi and C. tridactylus, as a consideration of 
the placentation of the two snakes Denisonia superba and D. suta (Weekes, 1929) 
will show. In the two snakes, although the smooth placental region is similar 


574 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii, 


in structure to that in the lizards L. (L.) weekesae, L. (L.) entrecasteauxi and 
C. tridactylus, the ridged placental region is essentially different. In the snakes 
the uterine folds are deeper and the foetal tissue is folded round and attached to 
them, and the degeneration and flattening of maternal and foetal tissues lead to 
the close apposition of maternal and foetal blood-streams. This structure is 
obviously different from that of the ridged region of the two lizards, where the 
free maternal folds are clothed by enlarged cubical epithelial cells and the under- 
lying foetal tissue is also covered by enlarged ciliated epithelial cells. 

After a consideration of all the forms of placentae so far recorded among 
reptiles, there can only be recognized the following types: 

i. The extremely simple type found in L. (Hinulia) quoyi, E. cunninghami, 
E. whitei, E. striolata, T. nigrolutea, T. scincoides, L. (Hemiergis) quadridigitatum, 
M. multifasciata and most probably C. ocellatus. 

ii. The type found in the snakes D. superba and D. suta. 

iii. The type found in varying degrees of SVOGEE CL. | ial, JE (UG) ech eae 
L. (L.) entrecasteauxi and C. tridactylus. 

iv. It is difficult to place the type found in L. (L.) ocellatum, L. (L.) 
metallicum and L. pretiosum since, although the placenta is very simple, it has 
differences which separate it from type i, and, on the other hand, although it has 
characteristics in common with type iii, its very simplicity prevents it, at least 
for the present, from being included in this group. It may, therefore, be 
temporarily regarded as a fourth type. 


SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS. 

The present communication consists of a description of early stages in the 
development of the allantoplacenta of Lygosoma (Liolepisma) entrecasteauai and 
of the mature allantoplacentation in the lizards Egernia cunninghami, E. whitei, 
E. striolata, Tiliqua nigrolutea, T. scincoides, Lygosoma (Hemiergis) quadridi- 
gitatum, Mabuja multifasciata, Lygosoma (Liolepisma) ocellatum, L. (L.) metal- 
licum and L. (L.) pretiosum. 

In early stages of development in these lizards a thin shell-membrane and 
sometimes a little albumen is present surrounding the egg. The shell-membrane 
does not hinder the establishment of the allantoplacenta, as it collects at the base 
of the yolk-sac at a comparatively early stage in the development of the embryo. 

It is shown that the lizards H. cunninghami, E. whitei, E. striolata, T. nigro- 
lutea, L. (Hemiergis) quadridigitatum and M. multifasciata have the same type 
of allantoplacentation which is quite simple and is characterized by closely apposed 
maternal and foetal blood-streams separated by degenerated maternal and foetal 
epithelium. 

The three lizards L. (L.) ocellatum, L. (L.) metallicum and L. (L.) pretiosum 
have also a similar type of allantoplacentation which is characterized by the 
presence of small folds on the surface of the uterine lumen and by the enlargement 
of the related chorionic ectoderm cells, processes of which extend into the shallow 
crypts between the folds. This area of placentation extends over all the surface 
of the uterus embraced by the chorio-allantoic membrane. 

It is claimed that parallel development of similar types of allantoplacentation 
among reptiles is common. ; 

A possible course of evolution of such comparatively highly specialized types 
of allantoplacentation as are found in the lizards L. (L.) entrecasteauxi and 
Chalcides tridactylus is discussed. 


BY H. CLAIRE WEEKES. 575 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES XXII-XXVIII. 


All., allantois; All. B.V., allantoic blood vessel; All. Cap., allantoic capillary; All. Hnd., 
allantoic endoderm; Br. A., branch artery; Br. V., branch vein; C., cilia; C.M., circular 
muscle; Ch. All. M., chorio-allantoic membrane; Ch. Hetl., chorionic ectoderm; Coag., 
coagulum; Corp., corpuscles; Het., ectoderm; Hl. Plac. R., elliptical placental region ; 
Emb., embryo; Hnl. Ch. Hct. C., enlarged chorionic ectoderm cells; Foet. B.V., foetal 
blood-vessels; Foet. Cap., foetal capillary; Flat. Ch. Ect., flattened chorionic ectoderm ; 
Flat. F., flattened fold; Gl., gland; L.M., longitudinal muscle; M.Y.S., main body of the 
yolk-sac; M. Ut. A., main uterine artery; M.Ut. A.&@ V., main uterine artery and vein; 
M. Ut. V., main uterine vein; Mes., mesenchyme; Mus. Mes., muscular mesenchyme ; 
N.D. Fold, narrow deep fold; Plac., placenta; Ut., uterus; Ut. Cap., uterine capillary; 
Ut. Hpi., uterine epithelium; Ut. Fold, uterine fold; Ut. W., uterine wall; Sec., secretion ; 
Som. Mes., somatic mesoderm; Sm. Ut. Fold, small uterine fold; Y.S., yolk-sac; Y.S. End., 
yolk-sac endoderm; Y.S. Ves., yolk-sac vessels. 


Plate xxii. 


1.—Photomicrograph of section of uterine wall, and the apposed chorion and under- 
lying allantois of a very young embryo of H. cunninghami. x 300. 

2.—Photomicrograph of section of mature allantoplacenta of EH. cunninghami show- 
ing the maternal capillaries more or less exposed at the maternal placental face. x 300. 

3.—Photomicrograph of section of mature allantoplacenta of JT. nigrolutea. x 300. 


Plate xxiii. 

1.—Photomicrograph of transverse section through part of base of yolk-sac of 
EH. cunninghami showing the surrounding foetal and maternal tissues and the peculiar 
position of the yolk-sac blood-vessels. ; 

2.—Photomicrograph of part of mature allantoplacenta of L. (L.) ocellatwm. x 350. 

3.—Photomicrograph of allantoplacenta of ZL. (L.) ocellatwm showing general dis- 
position of placenta. x 50. The small size of the folds is noticeable when they are 
compared with those of L. (L.) entrecasteauxi shown as fig. 4 on Plate xxvii. 


Plate xxiv. 


1, 2, 3 and 4.—Photomicrographs of sections of uterine wall of L. (L.) entrecasteauxi 
showing folds in uterus in various stages of development. x 350. 


Plate xxv. 


1.—Photomicrograph of section of one uterine fold from a mature allantoplacenta of 
L. (L.) entrecasteauxi. The cilia lining the epithelium are matted together with what is 
probably maternal secretion. x 350. 

2.—Photomicrograph of section of foetal tissue of mature allantoplacenta of 
L. (L.) entrecasteauai. x 350. 

3.—Photomicrograph of section of young allantoplacenta of L. (L.) entrecasteauxi 
included here to show the accumulation of materials between maternal and foetal tissue. 
x 350. 


Plate xxvi. 
1, 2, 38 and 4.—Photomicrographs of sections of the allantoplacenta of L. (L.) 
entrecasteauai in four of its main stages of development. x 50. 


Plate xxvii. 

1.—Photomicrograph of dorsal half of incubatory chamber of L. (L.) entrecasteauxi, 
examined 11th November, 1925. x 8. 

2.—Photomicrograph of dorsal half of incubatory chamber of L. (L.) entrecasteauxi, 
examined 28th November, 1925. x 8. 

3.—Photomicrograph of foetal portion of mature elliptical allantoplacental area of 
L. (L.) entrecasteauxi. The dark elliptical region consists chiefly of thickened chorionic 
epithelium. x 8. 

4.—Photomicrograph of dorsal half of incubatory chamber showing mature elliptical 
allantoplacental region of L. (Z.) entrecasteauaxt. x 8. 


576 ON PLACENTATION IN REPTILES, ii. 


3 Plate xxviii. 

1.—Photomicrograph of section of uterine wall of L. (L.) entrecasteauxi showing 
beginnings ‘of flattening and degeneration of folds in the neighbourhood of elliptical 
placental region. x 350. 

2.—Photomicrograph of section of uterine wall of L. (L.) entrecasteauxi in same 
region as Figure 1, but at a later stage. x 350. 

3.—Photomicrograph of section of uterine wall of L. (L.) entrecasteauwxi in same 
region as Figure 1 showing complete degeneration of folds and establishment of smooth 
region of allantoplacentation. x 350. 

4.—Photomicrograph of section through mature allantoplacenta of L. (L.) weekesae. 
s< DO, 

5.—Photomicrograph of section through mature allantoplacenta of L. (L.) entre- 
casteauxi. x 50. 


References. 


FLYNN, T. T., 1923.—On the Occurrence of a true Allantoplacenta of the conjoint type 
in an Australian Lizard. Rec. Aust. Mus., xiv, pp. 72-77. 
GIACOMINI, 1891.—Matériaux pour l'étude du développement du Seps Chalcides. Arch. 
Ital. Biol., xvi, pp. 332-359. (Reprint from Monitore Zool. Ital., Ann. ii, Nos. 9-10.) 
, 1906.—Mem. Accad. Bologna (Sez. Sci. Nat.), Ser. 6, iii. 
HARRISON, L., and H. CLAIRE WEEKES, 1925.—On the Occurrence of Placentation in the 
Secincid Lizard Lygosoma entrecasteauxi. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 1, p. 470. 
HRABROWSKI, 1926.—Das Dotterorgan der Hideschen. Zeit. Wiss. Zool., 128 Bd., 2 Heft. 
KINGHORN, J. R., 1929.—Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., liv, Part 2. 
WEEKES, H. CLAirRE, 1927.—Placentation and other Phenomena in the Scincid Lizard 
Lygosoma (Hinulia) quoyi. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., lii, Part 4. 
, 1929.—On Placentation among Reptiles. No. I. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.., liv, 
Part 2. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XXII. 


Ur. Epi. 


Ch. Ect. 
Som.Mes. 


Mus.Mes. 


All. End. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XXIII. 


i—Y.S.Ves. 


Veo cs 
OmpClh. 


rented 


; 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XXIV. 


Sm.Ut-fold 


ees 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XXV. 


C. 


Ch.Ecr. 


All.Cap. 


AW. End: 


Che Eck. 


st —All.cap. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


Ur. Fold. 


tor 


: j Ale ai 
Alt.Ves. 


~M.UF.A  (OM.UrV. 


Ati Ves 


ee 
angen OOT 


PE Re ae ee 
Berea ee, OG a 
Goes 


All.Ves. 


Alu.BN. Ch.Eck 


PLATE XXVI. 


M.urA. 4 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XXVII. 


Eu.Plae.R. 


M.Ut.A.&V. BrA. Bry. 


4 


ipmageone wr es 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XXVIII. 


Flat.F. Flat.Ch.Ect 9 Flat.Ch.Ecr. 


M.UrV. M.Ur.A. 


Ch.Ecr. All.Cap 


M.Ur.A. 


= ——_ 
ee fa 


ati alien ye 


XEROPHYTES AND XEROPHILY. 

WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO PROTEAD DISTRIBUTION. 
By OsSwALp H. SARGENT. 
(Communicated by A. G. Hamilton.) 

[Read 26th November, 1930.] 


The inspiration of this paper is to be found in one by A. G. Hamilton (These 
PROCEEDINGS, lii, 1927, 258), where it is stated (p. 260): ‘Notwithstanding their 
very perfect adaptation it is very noteworthy that the Proteaceae are very sparsely 
distributed in the arid and semi-arid regions of Australia. . . The stronghold of 
the family is the belt of well-watered country bordering the Continent, and 
possessing a sandy soil. It therefore seems to be the edaphic factor which governs 
the distribution of the Proteaceae—they require a highly siliceous soil.’ Invited 
by its author to comment on his suggestion, that soil governs the distribution 
of Proteads, the present writer was incited to search diligently through his note 
books and available literature, make many fresh field observations, and experiment 
as far as limited means and circumstances would permit. 

Authors consulted are unanimous as to the general distribution of the family. 
Spencer Moore (Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond., xxxiv, 1899) writes: ‘Bearing in mind 
the richness of this order in the south-west corner of the Continent, it is very 
poorly represented in the desert.” He states that only 47 of the 397 then known 
species are found in the drier areas, 12 of them being endemic there. Writing of 
the Sandhills flora of the Ooldea district, Nullarbor Plain, E. H. Ising (Trans. 
Roy. Soc. S. Aust., xlvi, 1922) says: “Two Grevilleas were usually seen growing on 
the flat ground, but of infrequent occurrence.” Not only are species and individuals 
more numerous near the coast; but in the case of most, if not all, those which 
have a wide range, the coastal examples are larger and more vigorously healthy 
than those of inland districts. In the moister regions tree forms are more 
numerous and distinctly larger. According to J. H. Maiden (B.A.A.8., Federal 
Handbook, Australia, 1914), proteads only attain the dignity and magnitude of 
first class trees in the brushes of New South Wales and Queensland; and “the 
brush corresponds to what in India is called jungle and consists of well-watered, 
rich soil areas chiefly in the coast belt and coast tablelands of Eastern Australia’’. 

It seems, therefore, quite beyond dispute that this family, whose members are 
generally regarded as “typical xerophytes”—drought-resisting plants, often, indeed, 
drought-loving plants—as a family has a strong preference for the moister regions 
of our Island Continent. Perhaps no other family is quite so inconsistent, so 
very unfaithful to appearances; but such behaviour characterizes more than a few 
genera and species of other families. Xerophytes in aspect—they are leafless, and 
only a few have leaf-like phylloclades, rigid or coriaceous in texture—species of 
Jacksonia (Leguminosae) seem admirably adapted to inhabit the driest regions; 
yet they are more abundant and more luxuriant in the moister coastal parts. 


578 XEROPHYTES AND XEROPHILY, 


Viminaria denudata Sm., though its leaf is reduced to a slender bladeless petiole, 
is to be found only in boggy places. Casuarina glauca Sieb., leafless switch-plant 
as it is, rarely, if ever, wanders far from the banks of permanent pools. Melaleuca 
raphiophylla Schau. has short terete leaves, and its trunk and branches are 
wrapped in many layers of papery cork; but it is not found away from places 
that are permanently moist. The “Black Boy”, Xanthorrhoea Preissii Endl., though 
its trunk is encased in a resinous shell and its leaves are harsh, dry, and rush- 
like, does not wander far from the coast, and seems to prefer the wettest parts 
of its habitat. Species of Lachnostachys (Verbenaceae) are provided with so 
dense a coat of woolly indumentum that they well deserve the name of “Blanket 
Plants”. The aspect of a flowering branch suggests an arid desert or parched 
tableland as its habitat. It was, therefore, strange to find Ll. cordifolia Moore 
and another (undetermined) species at home in the wettest parts—damp valley 
bottoms—of the wettest portion of the York district. Physopsis spicata Turez., a 
somewhat. less woolly ally, was equally at home on higher, rather less moist 
ground near by. The incident was very impressive, and consideration on the 
spot led to the making of the following note: “whilst among these plants to-day 
it struck me that their wool is related to the extremes endured: over wet in 
winter, over dry in summer’’. In the light of subsequent experience with Proteads, 
it seems not unlikely that these plants, and innumerable others that might be 
cited as examples of paradoxical behaviour, really require abundance of water; and 
that their wool (or other protection) saves them from over desiccation in the 
driest periods. It is not necessarily too great a hindrance to transpiration in 
wettest times, because then the plants are dormant or sub-dormant. 


This question of apparently paradoxical distribution arose in connection with 
the Proteaceae, and it seemed that so natural a family should offer special oppor- 
tunities for the elucidation of the problem. It was therefore decided to concentrate 
on the Proteads. Western Australia offers unique opportunities for the study of 
the Proteaceae, seeing that it possesses nearly twice as many species as all the 
other States of the Commonwealth together, and six of the family’s seven tribes 
are represented here. Even a superficial study of the whole 400 (or thereabouts) 
species was quite out of the question. In his all too limited time the writer has 
given so much attention as circumstances permitted to a few representative 
species and the results seem worthy of record. 


While authorities consulted are unanimous in regard to distribution of the 
family in reference to rainfall, in regard to the influence of soil few references 
have come under the notice of the author. Valuable evidence is contained in a 
paper by Cecil R. P. Andrews (Journ. Mueller Bot. Soc., W.A., i (10), 1902). He 
writes: “I have tried to ascertain the relation of our Proteaceae to the geological 
conditions. For this purpose I have taken the 61 species I know to occur in the 
neighbourhood of Perth. I have divided our district into—(1) The Darling Range 
with its granite, ironstone and red clay, extending to Guildford; (2) the inter- 
mediate belt of sand, roughly from Guildford to Subiaco; (3) the limestone belt 
of the coast; (4) swamps. The only species confined to swampy ground are Hakea 
varia and Banksia littoralis. Of the other 59, 6 are found on all three belts, 2 on 
the hills and sand, 4 on sand and on limestone, 2 on the hills and the limestone. 
Of the remaining 45, 33 seem to belong to the hills alone, 10 to the sand, and 2 to 
the limestone.” Thus it seems, in a district of approximately equal rainfall, the 
majority of species prefer the less siliceous soils. Recently the opportunity 
occurred for the writer to make counts of the species growing on two types of 


laf 


BY 0. H. SARGENT. 579 


soil, loam and sand, in a still more restricted district, Mt. Clarence, at Albany. 
Twelve species were found exclusively on loam, seven on sand, and nine were 
common to both. An attempt was then made to estimate the relative abundance 
of individuals, irrespective of species, on the two soils. In places offering as unin- 
terrupted a view as possible, where the protead population appeared to be of 
average density for the soil concerned, while standing at the centre the proteads 
visible within a circle of about 20 yards radius (about one-quarter of an acre) were 
counted, with these results: sand, 14; loam bordering sand, 22; loam, more than 
100 (owing to the size of some examples many of the smaller plants could not be 
seen on the loam). On another occasion a patch of apparently firmer slightly 
damp sand was found and 100 proteads were counted in the circle, with the 
probability of a few misses. No other sand patch so densely populated was dis- 
covered; but in many places the count for such an area would be nil. Not a single 
protead could be found on a hill apparently of drift sand at the head of Princess 
Royal Harbour, where Agonis flexuesa was growing as a fair sized tree, and 
Hibbertia, Pimelea and other shrubs were plentiful and healthy enough. Proteads 
seem to be entirely absent from Garden Island (W.A.), though its sandy soil does 
not seem to differ from that of the neighbouring mainland coast, where proteads 
are not uncommon. So far, therefore, as Western Australia is concerned the 
Protead family shows no preference for a sandy or highly siliceous soil. Even if 
they did, are there no highly siliceous soils in the interior? No opportunity has 
presented itself for the present writer to make a detailed examination of the 
distant interior of the State; but he has given some attention to the relation of 
Proteads to soils in the wheat belt, about 160 miles from the coast. Here, on sandy 
loam, the estimate was 350 shrubs (5 species) per acre; on heavy clayey soil, 20 
shrubs (3 species) per acre. These soils are scarcely comparable with those of the 
coast. While in this district (Bruce Rock), an observation was made which 
suggested the making of an attempt to estimate the water needs of a few species. 
On a broad elevation where the soil was firm, dry, and barren-looking loam mixed 
with ironstone gravel two species of Acacia with rather broad (about one-quarter 
of an inch) phyllodes almost monopolized the ground. Scattered amongst them 
were a few rather impoverished examples of Grevillea paradoxa, with leaves 
bipinnately divided into narrow terete segments. The Grevilleas increased in 
numbers and luxuriance as one gradually descended into looser and less parched- 
looking ground. Twigs of one of the Acacias, and of the Grevillea were taken 
and placed with cut ends in narrow-necked vials filled with water. At varying 
periods the quantity of water used up was determined by measuring the quantity 
necessary to refill the vials, a vial without a specimen being used as a check. 
Whenever hereinafter mentioned this is designated the “wet” method. 


Seeing that some species might be much more dependent than others upon 
root-pressure, the cut ends of their stems less efficient as absorption organs, this 
method seemed of doubtful value for comparative purposes. A ‘dry’? method 
was tried as a check and alternative: the cut end of the twig was sealed with 
soft paraffin or anhydrous wool fat, weighed, and water loss determined by 
periodical weighings. Often, but not always, the two methods gave closely 
concordant results. Rigid accuracy could not be expected; but the figures obtained 
do at least give some idea of minimum water needs, which is all that is needed 
for present purposes. There was no perceptible loss of turgidity by tender develop- 
ing parts, nor any visible evidence, such as change of colour in mature parts, 


suggestive of serious water shortage till long after the conclusion of any experi- 
G 


580 XEROPHYTES AND XEROPHILY, 


ment recorded. Transpiration seemed to be proceeding in a perfectly normal way. 
Absence of injury was demonstrated in some instances by changing over from 
“dry” to “wet” method, when water absorption proceeded quite normally. In one 
experiment both Acacia and Grevillea lost 10% of their original weight in 24 hours. 
In each of the 11 others made, Grevillea lost far more heavily than Acacia. The 
average for the 12 experiments (7 wet, 5 dry) was: Grevillea 33% and Acacia 
12% of original weight in 24 hours. Some experiments were made in July; others 
in October. It seems certain that the water needs of the Grevillea far exceed 
those of the ‘Acacia as their relative abundance and luxuriance in the locality 
mentioned suggest. Taking into consideration the size of the shrub and the area 
it occupies, the minimum transpiration rate found for the Grevillea suggests a 
water requirement for the four almost-rainless summer months roughly equivalent 
to 0:15 inch of rain; the maximum is equivalent to quite 12 times as much. 
As the experiments had to be conducted indoors, it is certain the figures do not 
overstate the case. Similar experiments on twigs of Hakea trifurcata, R. Br., at 
Albany and at Claremont in the open air suggested water-needs for that species 
equivalent to 5 inches and 3 inches of rainfall respectively. The shade tempera- 
ture at the time of both these experiments varied between 60° F. and 70° F., and 
a gentle breeze was biowing. These conditions are far too mild for average 
summer weather, so that the estimates may well be regarded as representing 
something like minimal requirements. 


In order to link up, so far as practicable, with the more precise and more 
extensive work of other investigators on transpiration, the total area of the leaf 
surface of the Claremont specimen was calculated, and the transpiration rate 
worked out at 18 grammes per square metre per hour. For the first 20 minutes 
of this experiment, the rate was 35. These rates are considerably below rates 
found by H. W. Wilson (Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., n.s. xxxvi, 1924) for Grevillea 
robusta, Hakea gibbosa, and Banksia serrata in Victoria. Now Hakea trifurcata 
covers a wide range of territory from the coast to some considerable distance 
inland. It may probably be fairly taken as representative of the family in regard 
to water requirements. Only one author, H. H. Ising (J.c.), mentions it; but it is 
a point of considerable importance that their water supply is rapidly decreasing 
to its minimum just at the time when Proteads stand in much need of water. It 
is with the advent of warmer (and drier) weather that most of them wake 
into activity, putting forth fresh young growth and flowers. No opportunity has 
presented itself for the estimation of the relative water needs of young and 
mature leaves; but experiments with a species of Grevillea at Cunderdin showed 
that a flowering branchlet required about twice as much water as a flowerless one 
of the same size. During this period of activity (the warmer summer months) 
over a large portion of South-western Australia only about 10% of the annual 
rainfall occurs. For the whole continent, according to meteorological maps, 
evaporation increases as rainfall decreases. This must needs accentuate the 
adversity of the summer months where winter rains exceed summer rains, and every- 
where when evaporation exceeds rainfall. Ignoring evaporation for the moment, 
assuming rainfall to be regular, and granting that the average Protead requires 
during summer 3 inches of rain, that being 10% of the annual fall, we ought to 
find the majority of Proteads grouped about or within the 30-inch isohyet. 
Stated still more broadly, in view of their heavy water requirement Proteads ought 
to be most numerous and most luxuriant in the wetter regions of Australia, as 
in fact they are: the distribution of the Proteads as a family is ruled by rainfall! 


BY 0. H. SARGENT. 581 


Admitting their need of abundant wuter we can well understand that Proteads 
reach their noblest development ‘only in the brushes of New South Wales and 
Queensland’. We can understand, also, why they are so heavily waterproofed. 
For practically all there must be times of dangerous dryness. In spite of their 
armour they transpire very heavily: what would happen without it? 


The fact that many Proteads wander far beyond the 30-inch isohyet—some 
species, indeed, being actually endemic in the dry area beyond the 10-inch rainfall 
belt—does not in the least invalidate the hypothesis of “rainfall rule’ for the 
family. Moreover, the term “rainfall rule’ must be accepted in a rather broad 
sense: it is not, indeed, a stated amount of rain that our plants need, so much as 
a sufficiency of water within reach of their roots in the soil. There are oases in 
every desert; and in every belt of country there are favoured spots where the 
water available to roots is actually in excess of the rainfall. Therefore, we must 
not expect the isohyet indicated by the ascertained water needs of any species to 
be the actual limit of its range. Hakea suberea S. Moore is a tree with thick 
corky bark and slender terete leaves, endemic in distinctly dry country, beyond 
the 10-inch isohyet; nevertheless, “wherever it occurs, subterranean water is 
supposed to be somewhere in the vicinity, and experience has, so far I believe, 
justified the supposition’’ (Moore, J.c.). The author well remembers an abandoned 
plantation of fig trees and a few grape vines, which for many years continued to 
bear moderate crops of passable fruit each year; and more recently he has seen 
abandoned plums and peaches doing reasonably well. These are scarcely to be 
called xerophytes: they would need many times the rain that falls during their 
active lives each year. They were in spots where there is reason to think a good 
supply of subterranean water would be within reach of their roots. During a 
recent visit to Merredin a healthy looking colony of Casuarina Huegeliana (7?) 
trees was observed growing on the top of a large granite outcrop. Investigation 
revealed a large soil-filled basin, whose broad rim, sloping inwards, formed an 
excellent water-shed for the soil-filled centre. “This seems probably a miniature 
of what must be existent, invisibly, on a larger scale in many places. Depressions 
or basins in the underlying rock would perhaps secure for plants, trees particu- 
larly, a more regular water supply in regions of less rainfall, than others obtain 
in heavier rainfall belts’’ runs a note made at the time. Three weeks had elapsed 
since rain had fallen, but on a patch of coarse sandy loam between granite out- 
crops the vegetation was distinctly fresh and green; small annuals, including 
a species of Drosera (in bloom) had sprung up and were growing vigorously: 
only an inch below the surface the soil was still quite moist. Not very far away 
ploughs and scarifiers in action were accompanied by clouds of dust! Later still, 
nearly five weeks after rain, in soil capping a mound showing granite outcrops, 
Cheilanthes tenuifolia Swartz., the “Rock Fern’, was in vigorous healthy growth. 
These observations are important, because it is highly probable that the question, 
whether a Protead shall occur in a given locality or not, is largely dependent 
upon, whether the advancing root-tips of the young plants can or cannot keep 
pace with the receding water level. Mature plants with water-absorbing root- 
tips buried deeply in the soil, or perhaps with their own storage reservoirs well 
filled, would doubtless withstand a period of dryness fatal to the young ones. At 
Albany, many hundreds of young Hakea trifurcata were seen. Those on the 
rapidly drying sand were showing signs of distress and seemed likely to die, while 
those on the heavier and moister soils were still healthy and vigorous. The close 
proximity of rocks at times presents special problems in superabundance and 


582 XEROPHYTES AND XEROPHILY, 


deficiency of water; and only specially adapted plants can inhabit outcrops and 
their near neighbourhood. An interesting example of this is presented by the 
small terrestrial orchid, Spiculaea ciliata Lind. This species is found in the 
Darling Range, scarcely 20 miles from the coast and extends eastwards at least 
150 miles (Merredin), and probably much further. It grows in the shallow soil 
close to the lower edges of granite outcrops, or in shallow soil-filled basins on the 
sloping face of the rock. In these places the soil is supersaturated during the 
wet season. At this time a small fleshy dark-green leaf, the only sub-aerial 
portion of the orchid, exposes its broad surface to the winter sun. With the 
advent of warmer weather a small fleshy spike appears in the axil of the leaf. 
Though the humous nature of the soil retards desiccation to some extent, the 
cessation of rain is soon followed by the withering and gradual conduplication of 
the leaf, while the flower spike rapidly elongates and enlarges. When the first 
flower opens late in October the soil of the plant’s habitat is “‘dust dry”. The 
peduncle is now a fleshy fulvous elongated club, its base at the soil surface dead 
or nearly so. As flowering proceeds, mortification of the stem progresses steadily 
upwards. Severing the scape from the parent plant makes no difference to open 
flowers or unopened buds, unless indeed to prolong the period of inflorescence. 
It may be stood in a dry vase—water is undesirable—or even placed under pressure 
between drying sheets. Bud after bud to the topmost and last will expand as 
normally as circumstances permit. To make a satisfactory herbarium specimen 
the scape must first be dipped in boiling water, or its vital activity otherwise be 
brought to an abrupt end, when drying will be rapid. A microscopic examination 
was disappointing: the cuticle was not thick, and stomata were numerous. These 
results, considered in conjunction with the striking effect of boiling water, point 
to the conclusion that the nature of the plasma, rather than the structure of the 
epidermis, is the real regulator of transpiration. Is there not some evidence that 
this is the case with Proteads and other plants too? Moore (Journ. Linn. Soc. 
Lond., xxxiv, 1899) remarks upon the paucity of plants in the near neighbourhood 
of outcropping granite, and decides upon soil constitution rather than water supply 
as the principal reason. It may be so; but often in such places there is a very 
long range between wettest and driest conditions, and sometimes the extremes 
must be suddenly experienced. Spiculaea ciliata is specially adapted to meet both 
extremes; and some Proteads seem to be unharmed thereby; but many plants are 
not so constituted. Moisture and the duration of the desirably moist state un- 
doubtedly exercise a very powerful influence upon the distribution of all plants. 
On the one hand, Spiculaea ciliata makes special provision for excessive dryness; 
Leschenaultia biloba Lindl., conversely, must needs provide defence against exces- 
sive wet. Seven years ago, while rambling through the bush, a white-flowered 
example of this species attracted attention; and as the other two branches of the 
shrublet bore normal blue flowers, the specimen was taken for further study. 
Interest in floral coloration was soon overshadowed by an utterly unexpected 
discovery. On the following day, while examining the specimen which had been 
standing in a vase of water over night, glistening droplets were noticed on the 
tips of the sepals and some of the upper leaves. Investigation into their nature and 
the reason for their presence was immediately commenced. The results are 
briefly recorded hereunder. The apex of the subterete or triquetrous leaf (or 
sepal) is reminiscent of the prow of a boat, even to two depressions, one on 
either side, suggestive of hawse holes. Usually in each depression there is a 
small dark globular body, though recently specimens have been: seen in which this 


BY 0. H. SARGENT. 583 


is replaced by a group of minute papillae. Observations in the field and upon 
cultivated plants (in pots) leave no doubt that the globules or papillae are 
hydathodes, active during times of hyperturgidity and retarded transpiration. 
They are not found on leaves developed early or late in the season, when water 
supplies are not excessive. They are very rare on plants from the drier areas 
(the species extends more than 100 miles eastwards from the coast) and are not 
invariably present even on wet-country plants; indeed, field observations suggest 
that the number of leaves so provided is closely related to the actual moisture 
conditions of the spot where the plant grows. The leaves of coastal plants are 
patent; those from the drier areas are shorter, relatively broader, and closely 
appressed. Last year a dry-area plant was successfully transferred to Claremont. 
Its leaves spread to normal patency, and tiny hydathodes developed on some of 
the young leaves formed after the transfer. This plant was from a locality where 
no trace of hydathodes could be found when the plants were examined during the 
previous flowering season. However, on examining again the following season 
(after transferring the experimental plant) a plant with a few small hydathodes 
(active) was found. The transferred plant has died; and the question whether 
the hydathodes are only formed as a direct response to the stimulus of environ- 
ment remains so far unanswered. Similar structures occur upon L. laricina 
Lindl., but the author has examined the following without finding any trace: 
L. formosa R. Br., L. linarioides DC., L. tubiflora R. Br., and L. floribunda Benth. 
The matter is still receiving attention. 


This experience recalls the experience of many years ago with Acacia celastri- 
folia, var. myrtifolia Benth. (Sargent, Journ. W.A. Nat. Hist. Soc., vi, 1909). The 
upper (adaxial) edge of the phyllode of this species bears a small saucer-shaped 
gland, active at flowering time, when it secretes a slightly sweet fluid attractive 
to honey-eating birds, which pollinate the blossoms while sipping the fluid. In 
the course of attempts to discover the mechanism of secretion, some young plants 
(in pots) intended for later experimental work, happened to be submitted to 
conditions favouring vigorous absorption by the roots, while retarding transpira- 
tion. The glands on the phyllodes were roused into activity, suggesting hydathode 
nature for themselves. Many other species possess phyllode glands, more or less 
developed; but the author has not yet seen any other species with glands in a 
state of activity. In the light of experience with Leschenaultia, it seems not 
unlikely that these glands serve (or have served) to extend the range of some 
species into moister regions. Seeing that in some cases they are obsolete or 
obsolescent, they also suggest that once upon a time the habitat of the plants was 
moister than now. So far no special defence against excess of water has been 
recorded for any Protead. It seems these thirsty plants are capable of dealing 
with all they can get, though upon occasion they can withstand a remarkably high 
degree of desiccation unharmed. A goodly company of species and genera, repre- 
sentative of many other families, also gravitates to wetter regions, notwithstanding 
the pronounced xerophytic appearance of the plants. On the other hand, examples 
are not lacking of plants, not always of specially xerophytic aspect, which 
gravitate to the drier parts. Of these the Myoporaceae are specially noteworthy, 
so high a proportion (50% or thereabouts) of its species being dry-area endemics. 
Thus it seems we have two distinct classes of xerophytes: the moisture-seeking or 
hygrophilous; and the true dry-country or xerophilous. Xerophyte and xerophil 
are both useful, but not synonymous terms. 


584 XEROPHYTES AND XEROPHILY, 


Hakea trifurcata R. Br. is a strange shrub: almost always, scattered among 
the forked needle leaves (assumed normal), there are to be found broad, more or 
less flat, lanceolate or elliptical simple blades. Though the former are usually far 
in excess, the proportion of both types varies from zero to 100%; but the writer 
has seen only one example with 100% broad leaves, a small shrub on Mt. Clarence, 
Albany. While endeavouring to glean an idea of the water needs of this species, 
it was decided to test how much more was transpired by the broad leaves than by 
the needles. The astonishing result in eight experiments out of ten was that the 
broads transpire less than the needles! The other two are rather mixed results. 
The experiments were made under varying circumstances and conditions, so that 
it was impossible to observe uniformity in the duration of the whole experiment, 
or in intervals between weighings. The following are some of the results obtained: 

Four pairs of specimens from four localities were carefully measured and the 
surface areas of the leaves estimated: needle leaves were 300, 360, 400 and 510 
sq. millimetres; broad leaves, 360, 400, 500 and 600 sq. mm., i.e., on the average 
the broad leaves present to the air a surface 20% greater than the needle leaves. 


At Merredin, two specimens were compared for loss by the “dry” method. 
One bore 57 broad leaves of total area 22,800 sq. mm.; the other, 32 needles, 11,520 
sq. mm. Losses in weight were: for the first hour, 2 grains and 14 grains; second 
hour, 14 gr. and 2 gr.; third hour, 1 gr. and 14 gr. During the experiment the 
temperature rose from 67° F. to 75° F. 


At Albany a pair of specimens was exposed to sunshine and breeze in the 
open air for an hour. One bore 142 broad leaves, 64 mature and 50 immature 
needles, the other 100 needle leaves. The former lost 18 grains and the latter 10 
grains, though the calculated areas were 125,200 and 50,000 sq. mm. respectively. 
Presuming that the needle leaves lost at the same rate in both cases, the smaller 
size of immature leaves making the area of needles in both specimens 
approximately equal, the broad leaves should have lost (at the needles’ rate) 50% 
more than they did. 

The discovery of the shrub, bearing broad leaves only, induced another trial. 
A branchlet from it bearing leaves, many of them immature, having a 
total surface area of 12,000 sq. mm., was exposed in the open air for 20 minutes 
side by side with a branchlet, from a neighbouring shrub, bearing nearly all mature 
needle leaves, 5,600 sq. mm. in area. The actual loss was exactly the same for 
both—one grain. 

An experiment at Claremont in May last yielded interesting results. An 
hour’s exposure to sun and breeze was divided into three periods of 20 minutes. 
Taking as standard the weight lost by the needle-leaf specimen, the broad-leaf 
twig should have lost 3:04 grains during the full hour; it did actually lose 3-5 
grains. However, during the first and last 20 minute sections its loss was 33% 
above standard; but during the middle section 33% below. At the conclusion of 
this experiment the sealing grease was removed from the twig ends and the 
specimens were put in water. In 39 hours (indoors) the needles had regained 
their original weight utilizing 17 minims of water to recover the 2 grains lost. 
The broad leaves during the same period used only 10 minims of water and 
regained only 14 of the 34 grains lost. There is some doubt about the accuracy 
of the only other experiment which showed a higher rate of water loss by the 
broad leaves, so it is not detailed here. 

The weight of experimental evidence strongly suggests that the furcate 
needle leaves are the more active transpirers as a rule. Field observations lend 


BY 0. H. SARGENT. 585 


support to this suggestion. Nowhere has the author seen broad leaves so plentiful 
as at Albany, where the vegetation has a very pronounced xerophytic facies, and 
severe variations in soil moisture certainly occur, often with some suddenness. 
Inland, shrubs with a high proportion of broad leaves seem much more plentiful 
than in the moister coastal belt. Recently in Perth, four shrubs in cultivation 
were examined. These of course have their water supply artificially augmented 
during the rainless periods. Only on one could any broad leaves at all be found 
and on it there were only two, both small. Examination of many hundreds of 
young plants at Albany revealed that broad leaves are not developed till the 
second year of life, perhaps not till the third—during this period death seems 
to be the result of failing water supply. For the older plant the broad leaf 
certainly possesses the advantage of presenting a wider area to direct light, 
thereby presumably speeding up photosynthesis during periods of water sufficiency; 
if it actually as a rule requires less water than the needle leaves, it must also 
prolong the period of food-forming activity. A few plants are now being raised 
from seed with a view to more exact experimentation. The tiny plumules just 
appearing are clothed with appressed silky hairs, though the plantlets have been 
kept in a moist atmosphere under glass. At Merredin some young plants of 
Grevillea excelsior (?) were found. The lowermost leaves were broad, lance- 
ovate, entire. Successive later leaves were more and more divided. Several 
experiments pointed to the conclusion that the broad leaf did not lose water more 
rapidly than the divided leaves. The adult leaf of this species consists of a short 
rachis bearing long narrow virgate pinnae, carried so as to expose but little 
surface at a time to direct light. Round Albany Petrophila diversifolia R. Br. is 
common. The juvenile foliage of this shrub is very graceful, the much-divided 
feathery leaves having an aspect suggestive of fern fronds. Gradually, as the 
plant ages, the foliage coarsens till the leaf is a rigid structure of few broadly 
cuneate segments. The young plants are of value for table decoration; so it may 
be of some economic importance that a damaged shrub was seen reproducing the 
foliage appropriate to the stem level, that is, juvenile foliage near the base. No 
reason for the diversity of foliage can be offered, because the author has not been 
able to experiment with this species. 


From the observations and experiments ‘recorded above it may be judged 
that it is necessary to be very cautious about divining habitat from aspect, or from 
minute anatomy. To know the plant’s needs, however, is to know something of the 
place in which it grows. 


In conclusion, the author desires to express ‘his special indebtedness to Mr. 
A. G. Hamilton, who inspired the paper, and the work involved in its preparation. 


Addendum.—Since the above was completed, a copy of J. C. Philip’s ‘‘Physical 
Chemistry: Its Bearing on Biology and Medicine’ (E. Arnold, 1910) has come 
under notice. The chapter therein on gases has an important bearing on the 
subject of this present essay. Quoting the researches of Brown and Escombe, it 
is shown that the hindrance offered to the diffusive flow of a gas (in this case 
carbon dioxide) by a multi-perforate diaphragm (such as the cuticle of a leaf) 
“may be nil and is certainly surprisingly small’. The significance of this in 
reference to carbon dioxide intake had been noted by the present writer years 
ago; but it was only on the occasion of this recent re-reading that the importance 
of the following almost casual statement was suddenly realized: “A similar 
‘diameter law’ has been established for the diffusion of water vapour .. . and 


586 XEROPHYTES AND XEROPHILY. 


for the evaporation of water through narrow apertures into desiccated air.” Its 
density being lower, the diffusion rate of water vapour must be higher than that 
of carbon dioxide. Presumably, therefore, epidermal obstructions will hinder 
egress of water less than ingress of CO,. Biological observations and experiments, 
notably the high transpiration rates found for Proteads, certainly support this 
conclusion. Wilson (J.c.) quotes Brown and Hscombe as stating that the diffusion 
capacity of the epidermis of Helianthus leaf is six times greater than its trans- 
piration rate! Now if we regard the epidermis as practically non-existent as a 
primary factor in the regulation of transpiration (as indeed, it seems we must), 
we can well understand why Hamilton (l.c.) could “detect no modification or 
diminution of xerophytic characters” in specimens sent from wet places in 
Tasmania, and why the addition of “another xerophytic character” (thickened 
succulent leaves) was the only response he found in Hakea pugioniformis growing 
on a sand dune almost on the edge of the sea. When water supply approaches a 
minimum and the stomata gradually close, the protective power of the epidermal 
structure doubtless comes fully into play. The heavy cuticle, and the wonderful 
internal stereome system of the protead leaf maintain its shape and orientation, 
preserving the organ in fit condition to make full use of any chance accession of 
moisture during times of stress. But the dominant vegetation of Australia is not 
protead. Wilson’s conclusion is extremely pertinent: “It is certain that in plants 
there must be some important factor, other than the opening and closing of the 
stomata, regulating the supply of water to the foliage, and so regulating, to a 
great extent, the transpiration rate.” 


It is the inner nature, and not the outer structure that decides whether any 
species shall inhabit a given locality or not. 


ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF NEW ENGLAND, N.S.W. 


By W. F. Buaxety, Assistant Botanist, National Herbarium, 
Botanic Gardens, Sydney, and Rey. HE. N. McKrr, B.A., Guyra. 


(Plates xxix—xxx.) 
[Read 29th October, 1930.] 


In this paper the following five species and two varieties are described as new: 
Proteaceae: Grevillea sarmentosa. 

Leguminosae: Aotus subglauca, A. subglauca, var. filiformis. 

Epacridaceae: Brachyloma daphnoides, var. latiusculum. 

Myrtaceae: Hucalyptus codonocarpa, LE. Youmani, EH. tinghaensis. 


_Family PROTEACEAE. 
GREVILLEA SARMENTOSA, n. sp. Plate xxix, fig. 1. 


Frutex procumbens, ramis gracilibus sericeo-tomentosis, 2-3 m. longis. Folia 
oblongo-pinnatifida, breviter petiolata, basi congruentia vel obliqua, 5-8 cm. longa, 
4-5 em. lata, lobis 4—5 latis, pungentibus, levibus, supra nitidis venulosis, subtus 
albidis sericeo-pubescentibus. Racemi solitarii, axillares vel terminales, pruinoso- 
purpurei, subsecundi, 2-3 cm. longi. Flores breviter pedicellati, pedicellis robustis 
sericeo-pubescentibus. Corolla pruinoso-purpurea, 8 mm. longa, glabra intus, stylo 
glabro atropurpureo 15-20 mm. longo; disco stigmatico ovato rugoso, ovario 
stipitato sericeo-hirsuto. Folliculus non visus. 

A strictly prostrate shrub with long slender, silky-tomentose branches extending 
along the ground for several feet, the young shoots silky-silvery to purple- 
ferruginous. Leaves alternate, oblong, coarsely pinnatifid, petiolate, regular or 
oblique at the base, 5-8 x 4-5 cm., 4-5-lobed, the main lobes divided to about the 
centre of the lamina, and again divided into one or three short broad pungent- 
pointed lobes, smooth, shining and venulose above, silvery or closely silky-hairy 
beneath, the midrib and primary veins very conspicuous on the lower surface. 
Racemes solitary, axillary and terminal, hoary-purple, subsecund, 2-3 cm. long. 
Flowers shortly pedicellate, the pedicel robust and, like the rhachis, silky-hairy. 
Corolla hoary to pale-purple, 8 mm. long; style glabrous, dark purple, 15-20 mm. 
long; stigmatic disc ovate-rugose; ovary stipitate, silky-hairy, stipes elongated. 
Fruit not seen. 

Loc—Pheasant Mountain, 2 miles NE. of Backwater, Guyra district, New 
South Wales (Rev. HE. N. McKie, T. Youman and W. F. Blakely, 30th Oct., 1929). 

Its position is near G. aquifolium, from which it differs in the larger and 
broader-lobed leaves, the finer and more silvery tomentum on the under surface, 
and in the different vestiture of the inflorescence, smaller and narrower flowers, 
differently shaped stigmatic disc, and in its strictly prostrate habit. 

H 


588 ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF NEW ENGLAND, N.S.W., 


Family LEGUMINOSAE. 
AOTUS SUBGLAUCA, N. SD. 

Suffrutex humilis, erectus, ramosissimus, subglaucus, pedalis vel bipedalis, 
ramulis virgatis modice hirsutis, subglabris. Folia lineari-obionga vel lineari- 
lanceolata, 10—20 mm. longa, 1-3 mm. lata, glabra, subglauca subtus, folia juvenilia 
etiam minute hirsuta. Flores in fasciculis 2—3-floris axillaribus aggregati, breviter 
petiolati cum bracteis carnosis, deciduis, late obovato-emarginatis, subscabris, 
circa 2 mm. longis. Calyx villosus, subatropurpureus, 4 mm. longus, hujus lobi 
lati, acuti, fere aequales. Vexillum orbiculare, emarginatum, flavidum macula 
purpurea media notatum, 5-6 mm. longum, 5-6 mm. latum. Carina oblonga, 
obtusa, atropurpurea, 5 mm. longa. Alae flavidae, obtusae, longitudine carinam 
aequantes. Ovarium breviter stipitatum, dense villosum. Legumen stipitatum 
obtuse ovoideum, subhirsutum, apiculatum, 5 mm. longum, 4 mm. latum. Semina 
subreniformia, modice muricata, strophiolata, 2 mm. longa. 

‘A small, erect, densely branched, subglaucous, virgate undershrub, 1-2 feet 
high. Branches slender, closely hirsute, with very short appressed hairs or 
nearly glabrous. Leaves linear-lanceolate, acute or linear-oblong, obtuse, 10-20 x 
1-3 mm., the margins revolute, glabrous, scabrous and shining above, or when 
young minutely hirsute, the lamina glabrous and subglaucous beneath, the midrib 
smooth or minutely hairy. Flowers clustered in the axils, shortly pedicellate. 
Bracts carnose, deciduous, broadly obovate, emarginate, slightly scabrous, about 
2 mm. long. Calyx villose with long white hairs, green at the base, the upper 
half dark purple or nearly black, 4mm. long, the lobes broad, acute, almost equal, 
purple inside and minutely fringed. Standard orbicular, emarginate, yellow, with 
a large purple blotch in the centre, 5-6 x 5-6 mm., the filiform claw 2-3 mm. long. 
Keel oblong, obtuse, slightly incurved, dark purple, about 5 mm. long. Wings 
yellow, obtuse, as long as the keel. Ovary shortly stipitate, densely villose with 
white silky hairs. Pod 5 x 4 mm., stipitate, obliquely ovoid, hirsute to almost 
glabrous, subglandular, terminating in a short, strong hooked point, not seen in a 
fully developed state. Seeds subreniform, slightly muricate, strophiolate, 2 mm. 
long. 

Affinities—Near A. mollis, from which it differs in the almost glabrous 
branches and lanceolate scabrous leaves with their subglaucous under surface, 
different vestiture, shorter, scabrous, and emarginate bracts, and slightly smaller 
flowers with straighter and more oblong keels. 

Loc.—“The Parlor’, Boorolong Run, 18 miles SW. of Guyra, New England, 
N.S.W. (Rev. E. N. McKie, T. Youman and W. F. Blakely, the type, 28th Oct., 1929) ; 
Pheasant Mountain, Backwater; Wandsworth; Bismuth, via Deepwater; Torring- 
ton; Jennings; Boonoo Boonoo, N.S.W.; Stanthorpe, Q.; Wallangarra, Q. 


AOTUS SUBGLAUCA, var. FILIFORMIS, n. var. 
Leaves very slender, almost subulate, 8-18 x 1 mm. . 
Loc.—Tingha (R. H. Cambage); Warialda; Timor Rock, Coonabarabran, 
N.S.W. 


Family EPACRIDACEAE. 
BRACHYLOMA DAPHNOIDES Benth., var. LATIUSCULUM, n. var. 

An evergreen shrub, three to five feet high, with oblong or oblong-cuneate 
leaves, 7-16 x 83-5 mm. Flowers axillary, the outer floral bracts measuring 7 x 4 
mm. Sepals scarcely acute, 3-4 mm. long; corolla 6 mm. long, with acuminate 
lobes. 


BY W. F. BLAKELY AND E. N. MCKIE. 589 


This variety differs from the typical form in its taller habit, broader leaves, 
larger flowers, and in its outer floral bracts being much longer and broader. 


Loc.—Pheasant Mountain, two miles NE. of Backwater, Parish of Coventry, 
County Clarke, Guyra district, N.S.W. (Rev. E. N. McKie, Thos. Youman and 
W. F. Blakely, 30th Oct., 1929, the type); Torrington (J. L. Boorman, Oct., 1911). 


Family MyRTrackAk. 
EUCALYPTUS CODONOCARPA, n. sp. Plate xxix, fig. 2. 


“Mallee” erecta, multicaulis, 6-25 pedes alta, cortice levi, glauco, deciduo. 
Folia alterna, petiolata, lanceolata vel obliquo-falcata lanceolata, acuminata, 
uncinata, 10-17 cm. longa, 1:5—2°3 cm. lata, pallido-viridia, tenui-coriacea et propter 
glandulas oleosas multas semi-pellucida. Costae penninervosae; venae laterales 
tenuissimae, subobscurae, a costa media divergentes angulo 20 graduum, vena 
peripherica juxta marginem laminae. JInflorescentia in umbellis axillaribus 
plerumque 3-floris. Gemmae sessiles, conicae, 5-6 mm. longae. Operculum fere 
hemisphaericum, subverrucosum, tubo calycis multo brevius. Antherae subadnatae, 
reniformes. Capsulae sessiles, campanulatae, truncatae, 8-10 mm. longae, 7-8 mm. 
latae. Discus latus, tenuis, fere planus. Valvae tres, inermes, maxime fragiles. 


An erect, many-stemmed, smooth-barked Mallee, 6-25 feet high, 1-4 inches in 
diameter, with rather short branches and almost equal-sided, narrow, glossy 
leaves. Bark subglaucous, perfectly smooth and of a uniform colour throughout, 
deciduous. Timber white or a very pale brown at heart, moderately tough and 
strong. Juvenile leaves not seen in the earliest stage, opposite for 2-3 pairs, 
shortly petiolate, narrow lanceolate, thin and flat, 2-4 x 0-5-1 cm., dark-green 
on both sides, copiously dotted with minute oil glands. Internodes elongated, 

markedly glandular-hispid with raised reddish glands. Intermediate leaves 
alternate, petiolate, lanceolate to somewhat obliquely lanceolate, 6-9 x 1:5-2-5 cm., 
dark glossy-green on both sides, slightly hispid with numerous oil glands, venation 
obscure, lateral veins spreading at an angle of 15-20° to the midrib, intramarginal 
vein distant from the edge. Adult leaves alternate, petiolate, obliquely falcate- 
lanceolate to acuminate, uncinate, 10-17 x 1-5-2:3 cm., flat, glossy on both surfaces, 
coriaceous, semi-pellucid with copious oil dots, almost inodorous, the midrib 
canaliculate on the upper surface, slightly raised on the lower; lateral veins very 
fine and almost obscure, making an angle of about 20° to the midrib; intramarginal 
vein somewhat close to the edge. Petioles usually erect, yellowish to purple-brown, 
semi-canaliculate above. 


Umbels axillary, 3-5-flowered, usually three; peduncles slightly compressed, 
dilated upwards, 5-7 mm. long. Buds sessile, the central one shortly pedicellate, 
conical to umbonate, nearly as long as the peduncles. Operculum almost hemi- 
spherical, slightly warty, obtuse or minutely apiculate, much shorter than the 
calyx-tube. Anthers adnate, reniform, opening in divergent slits. Fruit sessile 
to shortly pedicellate, campanulate, truncate, with a slightly expanded, rather 
thin rim and a broad countersunk brownish disc, which occupies two-thirds of 
the capsule, 8-10 x 7-8 mm., valves usually three, very thin and pointless, or so 
frail that they roll up, leaving a rather small roundish orifice. 


Loc.—Pheasant Mountain, 2 miles NE. of Backwater, Guyra district, New 
South Wales (Rev. EH. N. McKie, T. Youman and W. F. Blakely, 30/10/1929). 


Affinities—It differs from E. stricta Sieber in the three-flowered umbels and 
in the campanulate fruit, with its broad, almost flat, disc and very frail valves. 


590 ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF NEW ENGLAND, N.S.W., 


The leaves are also slightly broader than those of H. stricta and are more copiously 
dotted with oil glands. 


It has the habit of H. approximans Maiden and resembles it somewhat in the 
leaves being densely covered with oil dots, but on the other hand they are longer, 
broader, and more falcate. The fruit, however, is distinct from that of 
EH. approximans; it is larger and uniformly more bell-shaped. 


EUCALYPTUS YOUMANI, n. sp. Plate xxx, fig. 1. 


Arbor robusta, “Stringybark”, 25-50 pedes alta, dense vestita cortice rufo- 
fusca trunco ramisque persistenti. Folia juvenilia opposita bina ad nodum tertium 
vel quartum, deinde alterna, paulo stellato-pilosa petiolata obtuso-lanceolata vel 
lanceolata, 3-6 cm. longa, 2-5 cm. lata. Folia matura alterna, petiolata, levia, 
obliquo-lanceolata, breviter acuminata, crassa, coriacea, atroviridia, nitida, 8-14 
cm. longa, 2-3 cm. lata, venis lateralibus tenuibus, subobscuris, a costa media 
angulo 30-40 graduum egredientibus, vena peripherica prope marginem. Inflores- 
centia in umbellis axillaribus, 3—-7-floris, pedunculis compressis, 7-15 mm. longis. 
Gemmae plerumque sessiles, ovoideae vel clavatae angulares, 8-10 mm. longae, 
5-6 mm. latae. Operculum obtuso-triangulare vel acute conicum, aequilongum nunc 
longius tubo calycis. Antherae adnatae, reniformes. Capsulae sessiles, sub- 
sphaericae vel turbinatae, 10-12 mm. longae, 12-15 mm. latae, disco prominenti 
convexo, lato, crasso, parte obscuranti tres inclusas vel minime exsertas valvas. 
Lignum fuscum vel rufo-fuscum, fissile, permanens. 


A sturdy Stringybark, 25-50 feet high, invariably spreading in habit when 
mature, the large branches usually crooked, forming a somewhat open but heavy 
canopy. Young trees are more symmetrical and furnished with a dense crown 
of coriaceous, rather broad, dark-green leaves. Branchlets compressed to sub- 
quadrangular. Bark thick, markedly furrowed, reddish-brown, strongly fibrous 
and persistent to secondary branches, the latter covered with a smooth or thinner 
and less fibrous bark. Timber brown to reddish-brown, fissile, durable and largely 
used for fencing and building purposes. 


Juvenile leaves opposite for 3-4 pairs, slightly stellate-hairy, shortly petiolate, 
thick, subcoriaceous, oblong-ovate, to somewhat obtusely lanceolate, 3-6 x 2-5 cm. 
Intermediate leaves alternate, petiolate, dark-green, ovate to obliquely lanceolate, 
abruptly apiculate, thick, coriaceous, 7-10 x 4-7 cm. or larger, lateral veins obscure, 
making an angle of 40° to 50° with the strong midrib; petioles rather broad, 
compressed, channelled above, 10-15 mm. long. Adult leaves alternate, petiolate, 
broadly and obliquely lanceolate, shortly acuminate, moderately thick, dark green 
and shining on both sides, 8-14 x 2-3 cm., venation fine and subobscure, the lateral 
veins making an angle of-30—-40° with the midrib; the intramarginal vein close to 
the edge; petioles thick, usually reddish. 4 


Umbels axillary, 3-7-flowered; peduncles angular or compressed, robust, 
expanded at the top, 7-15 mm. long. Buds sessile, or the inner ones on very short 
compressed or quadrangular pedicels, somewhat ovoid to angular clavate, 8-10 x 
5-6 mm. Operculum obtusely triangular to acutely conical, thick, shining, as long 
as, or longer than, the calyx-tube. Anthers reniform, the broad cells opening in 
front, sometimes crowned with a minute terminal gland. Fruit sessile, subspherical 
to turbinate, 10-12 x 12-15 mm.; dise convex, broad and thick, extending half-way 
over the thick capsule and sometimes leaving a well-defined furrow between the 
base and the calycine ring; valves usually three, enclosed or slightly exsert. 


BY W. F. BLAKELY AND E. N. MCKIE. 591 


Named in honour of Mr. Thomas Youman, Rosehill, Guyra, who assisted the 
authors in many ways to work out the New England Stringybarks. 

The late Mr. Maiden regarded this species as an extreme form of EH. macror- 
rhyncha, and illustrated it in his “Critical Revision of the Genus Hucalyptus”’, 
Part viii, Pl. 39, figs. 12a, 120, 12c, 12d, 13a, 136, 18a, 186. Plate 37, figures 7a, 7b, 
under #. capitellata (page 214) from Guy Fawkes, are also EH. Youmani. It is also 
recorded as H. capitellata Sm. by Deane and Maiden (These PROCEEDINGS, xxi, 1896, 
800). 

Loc.—It is very plentiful on the New England Tableland, and around Stan- 
thorpe, Q., and particularly in the Guyra district, principally on slate and trap-rock 
formations, where it forms moderately thick forests, mainly in shallow or moist 
depressions, but it is by no means uncommon on dry stony ridges; on the latter, 
however, its growth is more retarded. 


Specimens from Rosehill, 64 miles SW. of Guyra (T. Youman, Rev. E. N. 
McKie, and W. F. Blakely, October, 1929) constitute the type. Some of the fruits 
from Stanthorpe are much smaller than those on the type. 


Affinities—The sessile buds and fruits of H. Youwmani readily separate it 
from £. Cannoni R. T. Baker, which is regarded as a large-fruited form of JL. 
macrorrhyncha, and a close study of the floral and carpological characters of both 
species will show that the former is much closer to the type of H. macrorrhyncha 
than the latter. 


Both #. Youmani and EH. macrorrhyncha F.v.M. are typical Stringybarks, but 
on the whole #. Youmani is a shorter-barrelled and more spreading tree, with 
shorter and broader coriaceous leaves than H. macrorrhyncha. It also differs from 
it in having the buds sessile and angular, in the more pyriform sessile fruit and 
in the darker timber. 

Maiden (Crit. Rev., Part viii, p. 229) discussed this species under H. macror- 
rhyncha as follows: “On New England the tendency of the leaves is to become 
smaller and more coriaceous, and the buds to become less to more angular than 
the type,* the operculum shorter and the fruit more pear-shaped. The rim is not 
so sharp and the domed portion is narrow. At the same time there are consider- 
able differences in the shapes and sizes of the fruits in these Northern forms as 
the figures will show.” 

H. Youmani is somewhat similar to EH. capitellata Sm. in the sapling and 
adult stages, but the buds of #. Youmani are shorter than those of its ally, the 
fruits are also thicker, less compressed, and more turbinate, while the timber is 
much darker and far more brittle. 


EUCALYPTUS TINGHAENSIS, n. sp. Plate xxx, fig. 2. 


Arbor “Stringybark” 40-80 pedes alta, cortice maxime fibroso longitudinaliter 
sulcato persistente. Folia juvenilia angusto-lanceolata, acuminata, molliter 
stellato-hirsuta, 3-6 cm. longa, 0:-7-1:5 em. lata. Folia matura angusto-lanceolata 
vel obliquo-lanceolata, levia, nitida, in longum petiolum sensim angustata, 8-13 
em. longa, 1-5-2 cm. lata. Inflorescentia in umbellis axillaribus 5-10-floris, gemmae 
pedicellatae, clavatae, acutae, 6-7 mm. longae, 3-4 mm. latae, operculis acute conicis 
vel rostratis calycis tubo longioribus. Antherae subadnatae, reniformes. Capsulae 
brevi-pedicellatae, ovoideae, truncatae, subpyriformes, supra cum orificio paulo 


* “In the more exposed situations the mutual compression causes the buds to be 
bluntly angular and compressed just like H. capitellata of the toast.” 


592 ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF NEW ENGLAND, N.S.W., 


contracto, 8-10 mm. longae, 7-9 mm. latae. Discus angustus, planus vel sub- 
convexus. Valvae parvae, deltoideae, inclusae. 


A typical Stringybark, 40-80 feet high and 1-4 feet in diameter, with a long 
straight barrel, and a very broad canopy of rather dark-green glossy leaves. Bark 
longitudinally furrowed, red-brown, somewhat soft, very fibrous and persistent 
to secondary branches. Timber pale-pink shading to very light-brown, straight- 
grained, very fissile, strong and durable, one of the best of the Stringybarks in 
the Guyra-Tingha districts. Juvenile leaves opposite for 3-5 pairs, very shortly 
petiolate, narrow lanceolate, acuminate, pale-green, very fragrant when fresh, 
softly stellate-hairy, much paler on the lower surface than on the upper, 3-6 x 0-7- 
1-5 em.; internodes terete, minutely stellate-hairy. Intermediate leaves occasionally 
opposite, but usually alternate, narrow lanceolate, subacuminate, thin, pale-green, 
much paler beneath, 8-10 x 1:5-2:5 cm., lateral veins very thin, diverging at an 
angle of 30-40° from the prominent midrib. Aduit leaves alternate, petiolate, 
narrow lanceolate-acuminate to obliquely lanceolate, gradually tapering into the 
rather long petiole, 8-13 x 1-5-2 em., pale-green when dry. Venation somewhat - 
distinct, lateral veins spreading at an angle of 25-35° from the midrib, intra- 
marginal vein rather distant from the thin margin. Some of the leaves are 
denticulate like those of H#. quadrangulata and E. nitens. 


Umbels axillary, 5--10-flowered, peduncles compressed and somewhat sharply 
angled, up to 10 mm. long. Buds pedicellate, clavate, acute, 6-7 x 3-4 mm., pale- 
green, smooth and shining. Operculum sharply conical to rostrate, usually longer 
than the calyx-tube. Anthers sub-adnate, reniform. Fruit shortly pedicellate, 
ovoid to subpyriform, truncate or slightly contracted at the top, 8-10 x 7-9 mm., 
sometimes smaller. Dise flat or slightly thickened into a narrow convex ring 
over the top of the capsule and exceeding the calycine ring, or sometimes a little 
oblique, the orifice rather broad; valves 3-4, small, deltoid, usually enclosed.° 


Loc.—Forest Reserve 43110, Inverell district, near Gilgai, and 7 miles on the 
Inverell-Guyra Road (L. B. Peacock); 6 miles from Tingha, on G. W. Browning’s 
property (Rev. E. N. McKie, Thos. Youman and W. F. Blakely, 1st Nov., 1929, 
the type); Kangaroo Camp, about one mile south of 36 mile post, Guyra-Tingha 
Road, and also about one mile further south on the fall to Cope’s Creek; junction 
Limestone and Moredun Creeks on the track from Barn Gully to Tingha (Rev. 
EH. N. McKie). 


Affinities.—Closely allied to H#. nigra in the buds and fruits, but the latter are 
thicker than those of H. nigra, while the juvenile leaves are much narrower, the 
timber is also paler in colour and superior in every way. 


It differs from the species described as LH. McKieana (see post.) in its broader, 
softer and more aromatic juvenile leaves, its larger and differently shaped fruits 
and its paler timber which is longer in the grain. 


\ 
HXPLANATION OF PLATES XXIX-XXX. 
Plate xxix. 


1.—Grevillea sarmentosa Blakely and McKie.—1. Portion of flowering branch 
showing the upper surface of the leaves, and the short tomentose raceme. 2. A leaf 
showing the pale-silvery under-surface. 

2.—Hucalyptus codonocarpa Blakely and McKie.——1. Juvenile leaves, of which one 
pair is opposite. Note the minute oil dots and the prominent oil glands on the internodes. 
2. Intermediate leaf. 3. Upper portion of a branch with immature buds, and mature 
leaves. 4. Fruiting branch showing the sessile, bell-shaped fruits. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XXIX. 


ucalyptus codonocarpa, Nn. sp. 


2. 


sp. 


llea sarmentosa, n. 


Grevi 


if 


y * 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


PLATE XXX. 


sp. 


ensis, nN. 


Hucalyptus tingha 


9 
a. 


Eucalyptus Yowmani, n. sp. 


ate 


BY W. F. BLAKELY AND E. N. MCKIE. 593 


Plate xxx. 


1.—Eucalyptus Youmani Blakely and McKie.—1. Juvenile leaves. 2. An oblong, 
apiculate intermediate leaf. 3. A large obliquely lanceolate intermediate leaf, with the 
long acuminate point broken off, and a spray of immature buds. 4. Four almost mature 
buds, and two clusters of fruits. 5. Mature leaf with buds in situ. 
2.—Eucalyptus tinghaensis Blakely and McKie.—1. Juvenile leaves, of which three 
pairs are opposite. 2. Types of intermediate leaves, the four lower ones are acuminate- 
lanceolate and slightly hispid, the upper ones are narrow lanceolate, very shortly petiolate 
and almost smooth. 3. Two clusters of buds. 4. Fruits. 5. Types of mature leaves 
(All figures about three-fourths natural size.) 


ANOTHER NEW SPECIBS OF EUCALYPTUS FROM NEW ENGLAND. 
By W. F. BuaKkety, Assistant Botanist, National Herbarium, Sydney. 


(Plate xxxi.) 


[Read 29th October, 1930.] 


EucALyprus McKIgANA, n. sp. Plate xxxi. 


Arbor “Stringybark”, ampla, formosa, 50-100 pedes alta, diametro 1-3 pedes, 
cortice rufo-brunneo, parum sulcato, maxime fibroso, persistente ad ramulos parvos. 
Lignum pallido-brunneum, leve, firmum. Folia juvenilia creberrima, opposita ad 
4-6 paria, sessilia vel brevi-petiolata, lineari-oblonga, acuminata vel angusto- 
lanceolata, dilute viridia, microscopice stellata vel subglabra, 1:5-4-5 cm. longa, 
0-3-0-5 cm. lata. Folia intermedia, opposita et alternata, nec numerosa, sessilia 
vel brevissime petiolata, levia, parum undulata, angusto- usque lato-lanceolata, 4—7 
em. longa, 1:3-2-3 cm. lata, venis lateralibus tenuissimis, a costa media angulo 
20-30 graduum_ divergentibus. Folia matura alternata, petiolata, angusto- 
lanceolata vel falcato-lanceolata, dilute viridia. tenuia, coriacea, nitida, 5-9 cm. 
longa, 0:-8-1-4 cm. lata, venis lateralibus subobscuris, angulo 20-25 graduum a costa 
media orientibus. Inflorescentia axillaris, umbellata vel breviter paniculata, 
umbellis 5-10-floris, pedunculis gracilibus subteretibus, 7-10 mm. longis. Gemmae 
flavidae, cylindroideae, acutae, breviter pedicellatae, 5-6 mm. longae, 3-4 mm. 
latae. Operculum acute conicum, calycis tubo aequilongum. Capsulae ovoideae 
usque ad formam sphaeroideo-urceolatam, truncatae, breviter pedicellatae, 
coronatae disco annulari parvo angusto-convexo in quo valvae tres aut quattuor 
inclusae. Valvae raro subexsertae. 

A symmetrical Stringybark, 50-100 feet high, 1-3 or more feet in diameter, 
of a good shape and with a rather dense canopy of narrow glossy leaves. Bark 
red-brown, slightly furrowed, very fibrous and persistent to the small branches. 
Timber pale-pink when fresh, drying a pale brownish-pink, rather light, with a 
moderately long, free grain and, when well worked, displays a slightly mottled and 
wavy figure with faint transverse markings. It is also tough and flexible, and 
capable of withstanding a good strain, and is mainly used for poles, mining 
purposes, fences and building construction. 

Juvenile leaves opposite for 4-6 pairs, then alternate and growing up with 
the plant to a height of 6-12 feet, sessile to very shortly petiolate, linear-oblong 
to linear and narrow lanceolate or acuminate, minutely stellate-hairy, but not 
hispid, dull and pale on the lower surface, dark green on the upper, 1°5-4:5 x 0-3- 
0-5 cm., obscurely veined, the margins subcrenulate and somewhat thickened. 
Internodes covered with a minute greyish stellate tomentum. Intermediate leaves 
opposite and alternate on the same branch but not numerous, sessile to very 
shortly petiolate, narrow to broad lanceolate, dark green above, pale beneath, 
smooth and slightly undulate, 4-7 x 1:3-2-°3 em. Venation penninerved, the lateral 
veins very fine and somewhat obscure, diverging at an angle of 20-30° from the 


IPIANGYH 3:O:0:00. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


BU 


‘punaryon snydhijwongy 


BY W. F. BLAKELY. 595 


more prominent median nerve. Adult leaves alternate, petiolate, narrow lanceolate 
to faleate-lanceolate, rather thin, light-green and shining on both surfaces, 
5-9 x 0-8-1:4 em. Lateral veins moderately distinct, radiating at an angle of 
20-25° from the midrib; intramarginal vein very close to the edge. Inflorescence 
usually umbellate, but sometimes forming short axillary panicles which are shorter 
than the leaves. Umbels 5-10-flowered; peduncles slender, subterete, 7-10 mm. 
long. Buds cylindroid, acute, yellowish-brown, radiating in stellate clusters, 
subsessile, 5-6 x 3-4 mm. Operculum conical, shining, as long as or longer than 
the calyx-tube. Anthers subadnate, reniform, the cells distinct and opening in 
divergent slits. 

Fruit ovoid to sphaeroid-urceolate, truncate, shortly pedicellate, 4-5 x 4-5 mm. 
Dise small, slightly convex or forming a narrow raised band over the top -of the 
capsule, leaving a moderately large orifice in which are usually enclosed 3-4 small 
broad acute valves. 

This species is remarkable for its very narrow and numerous sucker leaves, . 
the narrowest of all the Stringybarks, and which persist to a height of 6-12 feet. 

Loc.—From Limestone Creek to Moredun Creek, Guyra-Tingha districts, 
N.S.W., 24 to 27 miles NW. of Guyra, where it forms in places a moderately dense 
forest, partly in association with H. Andrewsi, EF. macrorrhyncha and E. Nicholi 
(Rev. E. N. McKie, Thos. Youman, and W. F. Blakely, 30th Oct., 1929). 

At Moredun Creek, on the upper part of the Gwydir watershed, this new species 
is found growing on quartz-porphyry formation on the edge of the Tingha tin- 
granite, at an elevation of 3,000, feet or more above sea-level. 

The Moredun Creek specimens constitute the type. 

Its nearest affinity is H. conglomerata, from which it differs in size and habit, 
in the narrower and more numerous juvenile leaves, differently shaped inter- 
mediate leaves, shorter and narrower adult leaves, in the sparsely-flowered umbels 
and. subpaniculate inflorescence, pedicellate, nonconglomerate fruits, and in the 
quality of the timber. 

Named in honour of the Rey. Ernest Norman McKie, B.A., Presbyterian 
Minister at Guyra, N.S.W., who, by his intimate field and botanical knowledge of 
the New England HEucalypts, has helped in the elucidation of this and other 
species of this most economic genus. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXT. 


1.—Hucalyptus McKieana Blakely.—1. Juvenile leaves (note their grass-like appear- 
ance). 2. Intermediate leaves (note the change from sessile to shortly petiolate). 
3. Buds and fruits. The upper buds are mature, some have lost their opercula and 
display the white filaments, and reniform anthers. 4. Types of mature leaves showing 
the filiform petioles. (Approximately three-fourths natural size.) 

2.—A photograph of Hucalyptus McKieana, about 100 feet high, near Moredun Dam, 
Guyra-Tingha districts. 


AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES. III. 
INITIAL RESULTS OF BREEDING FOR RUST RESISTANCE. 
By W. L. WATERHOUSE, D.Sc.(Agr.), The University of Sydney. 
(Plates xxxii-xxxiv.) 
[Read 26th November, 1930.] 


CONTENTS. 
Introduction. 
Crossing technique. 
Germination as affected by developmental stage of grain. 


Breeding results. 
Wide crosses.—Wheat x barley; wheat x rye; interspecific wheat crosses: 
“Khapli” crosses, Durum crosses. 
Vulgare crosses.—‘‘Canberra”’ x “Thew”: Inheritance of resistance to stem rust, 
inheritance of resistance to leaf rust, inheritance of morphological charac- 
ters; “Federation” x ‘“‘Canberra’’; “Federation” x “Thew’’; “Riverina” x 
“Thew”; “Gluyas” x “Thew”; “Federation” x “Japanese Bearded’. 
Further crossing work. . 
Occurrence of grass clumps in wheat crosses. 
Inheritance of resistance to Puccinia graminis avenae. 
Summary and conclusions. 
Bibliography. 


Introduction. 

In this paper it is proposed to record some of the initial results obtained 
in breeding varieties for rust resistance. The first paper of the series (Waterhouse, 
1929) set out the general results of the specialization studies, and the second 
(Waterhouse, 1930) referred to biometrical studies of the spore forms. All three 
papers deal with results obtained in work ending early in 1929. Help has been 
given throughout by numerous workers as gratefully acknowledged in the first 
paper of this series. 

In the control of plant diseases many methods are used. Of these it is 
generally conceded that the practice Known as “immunization” offers the greatest 
promise. When dealing with an annual crop plant cultivated as wheat is, other 
methods are difficult of application. Breeding for disease resistance is the main 
hope for the control of rust, as well as the other diseases of wheat. Considerable 
success has attended work of this nature in many places, and a voluminous 
literature has accumulated. References to some of the important contributions 
are included in the bibliography. The phenomenon of specialization offers one 
of the greatest complications, but controlled genetical studies help largely in 
overcoming this obstacle. 

Naturally, success in breeding work is not likely to be met with except as a 
result of many years of work. Any addition to the physiologic forms of the 
pathogen present in a country must seriously prolong the operation. This is well 
illustrated in the results of the work now to be recorded. These have not involved 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 597 


the production of a rust epidemic in the field. The danger of having valuable 
F, and other wheats killed or seriously affected by such an occurrence has made 
it unwise to produce an epidemic. With a “rust nursery” available, this would be 
done. Nevertheless, spontaneous rust attacks in the field have been made use 
of wherever possible. 


Crossing Technique. 
The methods adopted in the work may be briefly described. 


Heads of the maternal variety were selected just as the anthers about 
one-third the length of the head below the tip were turning yellow and ripening. 
The flowers were emasculated in the usual way. But instead of leaving only 
about three spikelets on each side of the rachis of the spike, it has been the 
practice to leave double that number, and frequently many more. The emasculated 
heads were covered with glassine bags and allowed to mature for pollination. 


TABLE 1. 
The result of pollinating stigmas of ‘‘ Federation ”’ of different ages with pollen of ‘‘ Indian 12”. 


! 
Date Date Age of Number of Number of | Percentage of 

Crosa No. of of Stigmas Flowers Grains Grain 

Emasculation. Pollination. in days. Pollinated. produced. set. 
| 

TI 23.31 SELORZ3 13.10.23 0 24 11 45:8 
32 13.10.23 14.10.23 1 28 21 75 

33 13.10.23 15.10.23 2 28 | 22 78:6 

43 HeelselOR23: 17.10.23 4 | 26 16 61-5 

54 13.10.23 22.10.23 9 28 3 10-7 

69 13.10.23 24.10.23 11 24 1 4-2 
72 eneliselOR23) 26.10.23 13 28 0 0 
74 13.10.23 27.10.23 14 20 0 (0) 
76 | 13.10.23 30.10.23 7p 32 0 0 
83 | 13.10.23 31.10.23 18 26 0 0) 
92 13.10.23 1.11.23 19 28 0 0 
96 13.10.23 Zale 23 20 24 0 0 
100 13.10.23 De liles23 23 24 0 0 
103 13.10.23 Get 23 24 28 0 0 
106 13210523: Ce Ala 3733 25 | 26 0 0 
109 183510) 5283 Sell 23 26 26 0 0 


A test was made to determine how long such heads ought to be left before 
being pollinated. The variety “Federation”, which is botanically Triticum vulgare 
alborubrum Korn., was selected as the ovule parent, and “Indian 12’’, which is 
T. vulgare pseudo-hostianum Flaksb., as the pollen parent. The former has opaque 
grain and the latter corneous grain. Grain produced as the result of crossing 
the two is corneous, so it was possible to be assured that grain set on “Federation” 
was the result of crossing. Furthermore, the F, plants are markedly different from 
each of the parents, so that any plants not true crosses can be readily detected. 

In the test that was made, fifteen heads were selected at the same stage of 
development, viz., with the ripest anthers just turning yellow. These were 
emasculated and bagged, and successively pollinated with “Indian 12” on different 
days, the operation being carried out in the early afternoon. For purposes of 


598 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


pollination, from the selected male parent an anther which at a touch was ready 
to dehisce was inserted in each emasculated flower. The pollinated heads were 
then covered again with the glassine bags and allowed to mature grain. The 
result of the test is shown in Table 1. j 

Each of the grains was corneous. Confirmation of the fact that they were 
the result of the pollination specified was obtained by sowing them and noting 
their growth. All had tip-beards, velvet chaff which was bronze, and coloured 
grain. These characters are of course quite different from those of “Federation’’, 
the ovule parent. 


TABLE 2. 


Results obtained in crosses between varieties of the same species groups of wheat in 1925, 
showing the number of grains set. 


Grains Pollinations 
Cross No. Parents. set. made. 

17 25.13 Bunyip x Early Bird as at ae is as see 20 24 
16 Gullen x Firbank .. ive ta ce aR Lys Pes 18 24 
18 Bunyip < Gullen .. is ns AS no oA wee 14 26 
19 Florence x Gullen. . od At he he exe be ill 22 
21 Riverina x Firbank BG a bls bee ays see 19 22 
22 Gullen x Florence. . fe ete Pa Br aie aie 17 24 
24 Clarendon x Bunyip Ate oan ye oie ae the 12 24 
27 Thew X Riverina .. ane ie ae ae whe a 16 18 
30 Indian F x Canberra aps aes ‘ys oe ae ae 16 26 
31 Cedar x Indian F.. an AG an aw of ve 20 26 
33 Canberra x Gullen ae Ae As i 5 ae 20 24 
34 Canberra <x Bunyip uke aS ae es Ria ake 18 24 
35 Canberra <x Bunge oH So at 50 ws a 18 26 
37 Indian F x Cedar. . ae ae ae ae ne fin 14 28 
38 Gullen x Federation ae es ar ne ree Ne ila 18 
40 Bunyip =< Federation aus ae as A ae ates Ae 15 24 
43 Federation x Gullen su ‘ds aS ae oe se 27 30 
46 Waratah x Clarendon .. oe Mi Le a5 a 23 24 
47 Bena x Clarendon. . na ne ae ste Sas se 28 30 
48 Clarendon x Bena. . ws yd <a aN: Ee a 21 26 
49 _ Clarendon x Waratah .. a fe oe ae oe 18 24 
52 Federation x B33/4 Aa oo at ag ne oe 23 26 
54 Federation x Canaan 50 sue oh he ee ae 27 30 
55 Federation x College Eclipse .. ain ai ate ne 26 28 
56 Federation x Aussie ae ae ss as a8 cs 16 26 
57 Federation x White Federation. . WEN ee Ae ee 15 22 
58 Indian F x Jonathan .. oe ae Bi ae ae 22 26 
59 Canaan < Waratah a3 at as AG bis sti 19 20 
60 Canaan x Federation a: ite a AG a an 30 32 
65 Bobs x Federation es oo es a ae a 23 26 
69 Canberra < Bobs .. ae oh an a as ae ill 22 
70 Jonathan x Bobs.. ee ys oes As ae ae 24 26 
(als Bathurst 7 * Bathurst 8 ae He i th ae 29 30 
72 Indian F x Bobs .. sis ae We we ee re 17 22 
75 Khapli x Glossy Huguenot We a os ae Be 26 30 
80 Federation x Jonathan .. nie as aa 8 ai 29 34 
86 Khapli x Kahla .. bs at mae oy aie ay 21 28 
88 Federation x Barletta .. ae oa bay nts a 21 22 
100 Federation x Japanese Bearded ts ae ae ate 19 22 
Percentage of grain set, 79% .. v: as aa 5:6 784 986 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 599 


Clearly then, under the conditions prevailing at Sydney University, the best 
result was obtained by pollinating flowers about 2 days after emasculation. After 
about 10 days, a setting of grain can hardly be expected. 

It was of interest to note that the one grain produced in cross No. II 23.69 
was present in the lowest flower on the spike; this is, of course, the latest flower 
in the head to mature. 

At Chico, California, Florell reports that a 26% successful pollination was 
obtained in 1920 in a case involving about 240 pollinations of emasculated flowers 
which had been left for 16 days. The different climatic conditions doubtless 
explain the divergent results. 


To indicate the efficiency of the method, results which have been obtained are 
quoted in Tables 2-4. 


TABLE 3. 


Results obtained in crosses between varieties of the same species groups of wheat in 1926, 
showing the number of grains set. 


Grains Pollinations 
Cross No. Parents. ; set. made. 

TI 26.6 Florence < Gullen.. 0 A an ive a are 18 22 
9 Firbank x Florence ate ie e. Me Se a 15 24 
10 Gullen x Federation ae re ot oe ae are 13 24 
14 Federation x Firbank .. & ae a: ae ne 10 24 
15 Federation x Florence .. i oH ae wh Bt 15 24 
21 Federation x Thew ie ot 50 a ae Ors 18 24 
22 Bunyip x Guillen .. ae suk a, ee se: e 16 22 
26 White Federation x Federation... fe he ae Ne 15 24 
29 Hard Federation x White Federation .. A ae Pe 12 24 
30 White Federation x Hard Federation .. af one a 13 22 
31 Federation x White Federation. . a Ws By ee 11 32 
38 Marshall’s No. 3 x Thew es ae ne, ote os 13 30 
39 Federat on x Roseworthy ays ne Se she Ke 24 26 
40 Thew x Roseworthy a as aS ae 5:6 te 11 14 
43 ! Exquisite x Thew. . 2 3h ae a an a 9 28 
44 Wandilla x Federation .. 3 a ae - i 21 28 
47. Bobs x Roseworthy cee ore 3 as ae ete 23 26 
48 Roseworthy x Bobs Pa abe a Me ‘iy ae 24 30 
49 Thew x Marshall’s No. 3 se ie a8 Ae =e 14 16 
53 Glossy Huguenot x Kubanka 2094 .. wa ae Pie 25 32 
56 Yandilla King x Gullen .. a “3 ai se it 17 i 22 
57 11 23.97.2 x I123.97.4 .. ue He BG is BiG 10 22 
58 Federation x Webster .. hiss Be muh ore SG 20 22 
65 Webster x Federation .. ae ka ao at he 12 24 
66 Federation x Webster .. # on ae Aira Soa 15 18 
71 Thew x Japanese Bearded 8 SA Fis we 56 11 20 
78 Hope x Federation Rs ae 2 Is fe Bt 8 24 
Percentage of grain set, 64% .. AG aus Aa wis 413 648 


In many species crosses made between varieties of groups like 7. vulgare and 
T. durum, where the chromosome numbers are different, poor setting of grain 
was of course obtained. Low results were also obtained, as was expected, in 
certain crosses in which it was known that the emasculated heads had been left 
longer than they should have been, or that the pollen used was unavoidably 


‘ 


600 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


TABLE 4. 


Results obtained in crosses between varieties of the same species groups of wheat in 1927, 
showing the number of grains set. 


Grains Pollinations 
Cross No. Parents. set. made. 

11 27.12 Firbank x Florence oes ae a zen oe as 22 26 
13 Florence x Firbank 7 on Bye a Me a LG, 26 
14 Gullen x Florence. . S05 a sa aA a6 a 20 24 
15 Florence x Gullen. . Gis bes oe ie Shs As 17 26 
16 Bunyip < Gullen .. as ie ab he Se 6 19 22 
17 Gullen x Federation ee Be oo Bes oe sa 20 28 
19 Federation x Florence .. Sis a che es sits ill 30 
20 Florence < Federation .. Ba 2): ne Bi Be 21 26 
21 Hard Federation x Florence .. as Be ba an 19 30 
25 Thew x Canberra .. at a oe a at aie 948} 24 
28 Yandilla King x Thew .. hus MG hs sigs sie 28 34 
34 Hard Federation x White Federation . . sy ia Ae 16 28 
36 Yandilla King x Gullen .. ist ae as As Se 16 28 
37 Federation x Yandilla King .. as ae He Be 20 26 
43 Federation x Roseworthy si a nO its ze 19 26 
48 Federation x Marshall’s No. 3 .. is Ae Ne 3 22 26 
53 Federation x Rieti Be ae a see BSH le 14 22 
80 Federation x Euston (Sel.) = AAS at a8 aif 21 24 
81 Federation <x Euston (Sel.) ets ce a a6 ae 25 26 
82 Federation < Euston (Sel.) ae aie Sc ae ae 20 24 
87 Waratah x Webster be ty a ae ae shy 18 26 
89 Clarendon * Webster os us ony ath as ats 16 24 
91 Marshall’s No. 3 x Webster ae sie sits we af. 12 14 
93 Warren x Webster oH ar a ive Pha be 16 26 
94 I17/4 x Webster .. ie Be an ae on AY 18 20 
98 J 37/1 x Webster .. au oe ae BS ae a 14 18 
102 H 27/2 x Webster. . Pe aS ie ae Me ee 23 26 
103 Gi1/1 x Webster .. oe ite ig er he we 14 20 
110 Webster x Euston (Sel.).. es aid a ants as 13 16 
111 Euston < Webster ou Ns hs ae We Bo 14 18 
117 Euston x Webster ais re ate ae se a4 20 26 
123 Euston x Webster aS at A ac RE st 17 3 22 
127 Euston x Webster ee oe ths ee ers He 19 22 
128 Euston x Webster Se ous be Ss ote a 15 18 
Percentage of grain set, 76% .. tS ad ai ae 629 822 


in a poor condition. These results have not been included in the tables. There 
was a noticeable falling off in the efficiency of the crossing in 1926 and in 1928 
when abnormally dry spring and early summer conditions were experienced. But 
the results show that under ordinary conditions an efficiency of 75% may be 
looked for. 


Pollination of Flowers on severed Stems. 

An unusual method of effecting the cross was tested. A head of ‘‘Waratah’’ 
was emasculated in the usual way in the field. The stalk was then cut off at 
ground level and inserted in a conical flask of water, where the end of the stem 
was severed under water. After removal of this severed portion from the flask, 
the stigmas were pollinated in the plant house with pollen of a selection from 


ny 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 601 


the cross “Federation” x “Webster”. The flask and stem were kept in a sunny 
position in the plant house, where each day a stream of water was allowed to flow 
gently through the flask for two minutes and thus completely change the water 
in which the stem was immersed. Under these conditions the uppermost of the 
three leaves on the stalk remained green for three weeks. The water was then 
removed from the flask and the stem allowed to dry out. 


Later the grain was rubbed out. From 28 flowers pollinated, 16 grains were 
obtained. They were somewhat shrivelled, but gave normal germinations and 
healthy F, plants. 


This method may be valuable in special cases. Repeatedly it has been 
necessary to obtain pollen from heads of particular plants forwarded from 
country centres. No difficulty has been met in obtaining a normal setting of 
grain by this method. But the test just recorded shows that maternal as well 
as paternal material severed from the plant may be used in cases of necessity. 


Germination as affected by the Age of Grain. 


It was decided to see how soon after pollination, under the prevailing con- 
ditions, viable grain was set. In a uniform plot of “Federation” wheat growing at 
Sydney University, a number of plants were selected on the same day when the 
first flowers of the most forward ear of each plant were just about to push up 
the anthers. All these ears at the same stage of maturity were tagged, and all 
but the two lowest flowers in each spikelet removed. Commencing on the third 
day from the first appearance of the anthers, i.e., the 16th of October, the stalk 
bearing the tagged head was cut off at ground level. This was done at daily 
intervals as far as possible. The harvested heads were suspended in a dry room 
for a little more than four months, when the grain was rubbed out and tested for 
germination by sowing in separate pots of garden soil. Pots of normal graded 
“Federation” grain were sown at the same time for comparative purposes. The 
results are shown in Table 5. 

It was surprising to find that after only six days from pollination, 28 very 
shrivelled grains in an ear produced 11 very spindly seedlings. The seven-day-old 
ear gave 12 very spindly seedlings from the 26 very shrivelled grains formed, 
and the nine-day ear, 17 from 26 grains. Thereafter, although the grain was 
shrivelled, it was fully viable, but gave spindly seedlings. An ear 17 days old 
gave practically normal seedlings. These results are illustrated in Plate xxxii. 

The result showed that it was perfectly safe to use this method of harvesting 
crossed heads of wheat and obtain a normal germination of the crossed grain. On 
account of the danger from sparrow attack and from damage by trespassers, the 
method of harvesting the stalks carrying the crossed ears after lapse of a period 
of three to four weeks from pollination has been adopted, and has proved fully 
satisfactory. 


BREEDING RESULTS. 
WIDE CROSSES. 


The possibility of obtaining resistant types of wheat from wide crosses has 
not been neglected. This was additional to considerations concerning the genetics 
of such crosses. 


602 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


TABLE 5. 


Stage of development of wheat grain after pollination in relation to germination capacity. 
Anthers first showing in each case on 13th October. 


Age of Character Character 
No. Date Harvested. Grain of of 
in days. Grain. Resultant Seedlings. 
1 16 October @3 Nil. Nil. 
2 17 i 4 Nil. Nil. 
3 19 aS 6 Very shrivelled. Hw Wear gah 
4 20 5 a do. 12 ao! 
26 
5 22 30 9 do. 17 aot 
26 
6 23 %0 10 Shrivelled. 24 Spindly. 
24 
7 24 Ps 11 do. do. 
8 25 bs 12 do. i do. 
9 26 4s 13 do. do. 
10 27 5 14 do. do. 
11 29 Sate: 16 do. do. 
12 30 a 17 Somewhat pinched. Almost normal. 
13 31 uu 18 do. do. 
14 1 November 19 do. do. 
15 2 x 20 do. Normal. 
16 3 FA 21 do. do. 
We 5 3 23 do. do. 
18 6 ‘. 24 do. do. 
19 7 - 25 do. do. 
20 8 x 26 Normal. do. 
21 9 a 27 do. do. 
22 10 ig 28 do. do. 
23 12 a 30 do. do. 
24 13 a 31 do. do. 
25 14 a 32 do. do. 


Wheat x Barley. 


The commercial variety of wheat named “Bobs” is reputed to have been 
derived from a cross of this nature. It was produced by the late William Farrer 
in 1896 and is stated to have originated from a cross between ‘“Nepaul’’ Barley 
and a wheat named “Early Lambrigg”. Starting with one shrivelled grain 
obtained from the cross, the variety was fixed in four years. 

A second Australian variety known as “Canberra” is also stated to have 
originated in a cross of this nature. The parents in this instance are reputed to 
be “Federation” crossed with “Volga” Barley. 

In the work that is in progress, both these varieties of barleys were used as 
the pollen parents, the main work being done with “Volga”. Farrer’s “Harly 
Lambrigg” was not available as an ovule parent. A number of varieties of 
T. vulgare which flowered at the same time as the two barleys were used as the 
ovule parents. The work reported covered tests made in 1924, 1925, 1926, and 1927. 
This gave a range of seasons in case some special seasonal influence might 
contribute to successful crossing. The practice was to emasculate the flowers at 
the stage already described under the technique of crossing, and to leave them 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 603 


until the next day for pollination. On the following day the pollinations of the 
same flowers were repeated. In a number of cases when it was practicable, yet 
another pollination was made on the next day. In the results given hereunder, 
this third pollination is not counted. Nor is any note taken of numerous further 
attempts made by senior students of various classes. The phrase “pollinations 
made’”’,—totalling 1,932,—means that 961 wheat flowers were actually used, being 
pollinated at least twice. The results are as follows: 


TABLE 6. 


Results of attempts to cross varieties of 7. vulgare with 2 varieties of barley. 


Number of Number of 

Parents of Cross. Grains Pollinations 
set. made. 
Clarendon x Volga Barley .. § 2 336 
Hard Federation <x Volga Barley.. 0 80 
Federation < Volga Barley. . 0 104 
Hurst’s 11 x Volga Barley. . 0 328 
Bunyip < Volga Barley 0 332 
Early Bird x Volga Barley 0) 92 
Sunset x Volga Barley ‘ 0 48 
Plowman’s No. 3 X Volga Barley 0 52 
Canberra x Volga Barley .. 0 144 
Firbank x Volga Barley 0 52 
Federation <x Nepaul Barley 1 164 
Canberra <x Nepaul Barley. . 2 144 
Bobs xX Nepaul Barley 10) 56 
| 5 1,932 


It will be seen that in all, five grains were obtained. In each case they were 
sown the next season and grown to maturity. All proved to be normal wheat plants 
of the variety used as the pollen parent, viz., “Federation”, “Canberra”, and 
“Clarendon”. In the succeeding generation no segregation occurred. Each was 
clearly the result of accidental self-pollination. 

There would therefore seem to be doubt whether the claims that barley 
and wheat were successfully crossed to give “Bobs” and “Canberra” can be 
substantiated. 


Wheat x Rye. 

It has long been known that crosses between these two cereals can be made. 
Reference has elsewhere been made to the fact that even in seasons when wheat 
was heavily attacked by P. graminis tritici 34, adjacent crops of rye showed but 
rare infections. For a long time it has been hoped that cross-bred material might 
be available for studies in rust resistance. 

In the years 1921, 1922, 1924, 1925, 1926, 1927 and 1928 crosses have been 
attempted. The ovule parent in each case has been wheat. ‘Federation’ has been 
mainly used, but in some cases “Hard Federation” has been substituted, and in 
fewer instances, ‘“‘Thew”. The pollen parent has in the main been “Rosen” rye, 
but “Black Winter” has also been used. As in the case of the wheat x barley 


604 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


crosses, pollinations of the same flowers were made on the second and on the third 
days after emasculation. In these instances also, yet a third pollination was 
many times made, so the results given are again conservative. Actually 1,010 
wheat flowers were used. Senior students made additional attempts which are not 
here included. 

During .the six years, 13 grains have been obtained from more than 2,020 
pollinations: five of the grains failed to germinate, seven yielded “Federation” 
or “Hard Federation” plants which showed no departure from the normal behaviour 
of these varieties and were therefore the result of accidental self-pollination. In 
only one case to’ date has a true cross been obtained. This was in 1925 from a 
cross between “Federation” and “Rosen” rye. The F, plant tested with Forms 
43 and 46 gave “flecks”, whereas the ovule parent “Federation” at the same time 
gave “4” reactions. The seedling after test was transplanted and grown to 
maturity. A notable feature was its abundant stooling. This was welcomed as 
giving the possibility of making back crosses. 

The hybrid plant proved to be completely sterile, though pistils and stamens 
were seemingly normal. A large number of attempts were made to effect crosses 
with each of the parents, and also to pollinate stigmas of the hybrid plant 
with pollen from the wheat and from the rye parents. In no case was the 
attempt successful. The hybrid was sterile and the attempt to obtain resistance 
accordingly failed. 

From crosses made in 1928, two plants are available from the cross ‘‘Canberra” 
x “Rosen” rye. In the seedling tests, these gave flecks with P. graminis tritici 46 
which normally produces a fully susceptible reaction on “Canberra”. They are 
therefore hybrids and are being grown to maturity under carefully controlled 
conditions. 

It will therefore be seen that so far no success has attended the efforts 
to secure fertile progeny as a result of crossing wheat and rye. 


Interspecific Wheat Crosses. 
“Khapli” Crosses. 


Of the wheat varieties tested by different workers for resistance to stem rust, 
the variety of 7. dicoccum Ajar Perc., known as “Khapli’’, is, perhaps, the most 
resistant. Of the physiologic forms recorded to date by Stakman and Levine, only 
one attacks “Khapli’. It is, therefore, not surprising that many efforts have 
been made to cross this resistant emmer with the commercial types of vulgare 
wheat which are susceptible. 

Hayes and Stakman (1922) report disappointing results from ‘the attempts 
to cross “Khapli” with ‘Marquis’ wheat. Hynes (1926) reports a successful cross 
between “Federation” and “Khapli”. 

Commencing in 1921 attempts have been made each year to obtain successful 
crosses between commercial vulgare wheats and “‘Khapli’. In the main, “Federa- 
tion” has been the variety used. Extending the work over a number of seasons 
has made it possible for various seasonal influences to operate. It was thought 
that perhaps some special influences might contribute to successful crossing. 

In the work it has been the practice to pollinate the vulgare wheat with 
“Khapli” pollen on the second day following the emasculation, and to repeat this 
the next day. In very many cases a third pollination was also effected. In 
tabulating the results only the two pollinations are taken into account. Actually 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 605 
om 


930 flowers were used for the pollinations. Senior students have also made a 
number of unsuccessful attempts to secure results, but these are not taken into 
account. The figure 1,860 is therefore a very conservative estimate of the 
pollinations made. 

The results are summarized in Tables 7 and 8. 


TABLE 7. 


Results obtained in seven of the years in attempts to cross certain vulgare wheats with ‘‘ Khapli’’ emmer. 


: Number of Number of 

Year. Vulgare Parent. Grains Pollinations 
set. made. 
1921 Federation 0 32 
1922 . Federation 1 40 
Hard Federation an sed ire ae nit 5 34 
1923 Hard Federation AA ie rh es ae uf. 9 96 
1924 Federation 17 262 
1925 Federation 13 96 
Canberra. . Z ae a6 Ss aye eee 7 52 
1926 Federation ae as ar See were aS PAs) 304 
Gluyas .. ace the ses ay ose ae 6 48 
_ | Gurkha (Gullen) 50 Bc 50 ac Be 9 44 
1927 Federation 5G na 36 + ai ne 106 380 
Gluyas .. ae i es oi Se Se 52 240 
Gurkha (Gullen) 2 ifs oe ae ae 7 64 
Bunyip .. Se cE: aye So ae oe 15 60 
Hurst’s 11 ers A th ae ae ste 9 56 
Early Bird 5 52 
Totals .. se a ie ae ah he ss sce 286 1,860 


TABLE 8. 
Summary of the results of attempts to cross certain varieties of vulgare wheat with “ Khapli’’ emmer. 


Number of Number of 

Variety. Grains Pollinations 
set. made. 
Federation .. ie je oe ft ao ae sit aS 162 peeeelelela: 
Hard Federation oe oy zt ae vs By Se we 14 130 
Gluyas. . Bs Be ae Be Ss ae Be ant oe 58 288 
Gullen. . Bs Ae Be ws ee ste is te a 16 108 
Bunyip Be ae wis bis ie is a igs ob 15 60 
Hurst’s 11... one Bre ok Ae Oe ae ae ae 9 56 
Early Bird ae he wit ile Ee a6 Se nh 5 52 
Canberra a ie A ob ie 58 6 she 30 7 52 
Totals .. Be ne ws at Ale ee as nce 286 1,860 


Out of the 286 grains obtained, two germinated, with the production of pure 
“Federation” plants. These two grains were plump and well filled. Clearly they 
were the result of accidental self-pollinations. The 284 F, plants which were 


606 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


crossed thus show approximately a 15% setting of grain. In all instances the 
grain was much shrivelled. Much of it was very tiny. Typical results are 
illustrated in Plate xxxiii. 


The crossed grain was sown in pots or boxes under the best conditions for 
germination. 


Prior to 1927, the F, seedlings were in part inoculated in the “first leaf’ 
stage with Form 43, and in a later leaf stage with Form 46. In other cases 
this order was reversed, Form 46 being used first and Form 43 second. The 
mean of the reactions shown with Form 43 was “1”, ‘and with Form 46 “24”. 
Simultaneous tests on “Federation” and “Khapli’ gave respectively “4” and ‘0;” 
with Form 48, and “4” and ‘“1” with Form 46. There is, therefore, dominance 
of resistance in the F,, although the dominance is not quite complete. In 1927 
and 1928 the F, seedlings were inoculated with Form 34. Whilst the parental 
reactions were again as just stated, the F, reactions were of the “X” type. They 
are illustrated in Plate xxxiii. 


After the seedling tests, the F, plants were transplanted to open beds and 
given the best possible conditions for growth. In no case did any one of them 
attain to maturity. The plants were stunted and died before producing ears— 
with two exceptions—usually when about 10 inches high. It was observed that 
there was a difference in development depending upon the vulgare parent used. 
When “Gluyas” and ‘“Hurst’s 11” were the parents, the smallest growth took 
place, the plants reaching only 6 inches in height. With “Federation” as the 
parent, the F, plants grew slightly larger, reaching 8 inches. The plants derived 
from the crosses using “Bunyip” and “Early Bird”, grew to 10 inches, being 
exceeded slightly by those derived from the ‘“Gullen” crosses, which grew to 12 
inches. Illustrations of these are given in Plates xxxiii and xxxiv. 


The two exceptions above referred to occurred in the crosses of “Khapli” 
with “Bunyip” and “Gullen’.. In each case one tiny ear resembling an emmer 
with a tip beard was produced. Each ear comprised two lateral spikelets on 
each side of the spike. In one of the spikelets of one ear, three small stamens 
were produced, and in one spikelet of the other ear a small pistil was found. In 
each instance an effort was made to cross back on to the “Bunyip”, “Gullen” and 
“Khapli” parents. The pistil of the F, in addition to receiving pollen from 
“Bunyip”, “Gullen’, and ‘“‘Khapli’, was also pollinated with one of the three small 
anthers produced by the other F, plant. No setting of grain occurred in any case. 


In 1924 Mr. J. T. Pridham forwarded a quantity of grain stated to be an F, 
generation obtained from a cross between “Canberra” and “Khapli’”. The grain 
was white and opaque and perfectly plump and well-filled. No shrivelled grains 
at all were present. A series of more than 900 seedlings was tested with Forms 43 
and 46. To these “Canberra” shows respectively resistance and susceptibility, 
whilst “Khapli” is strongly resistant to both. In all cases the seedlings showed 
resistance to Form 43 and susceptibility to Form 46. Nevertheless they were 
transplanted to open beds and grown to maturity because of the potential value 
of such cross-breds. All plants showed the typical characteristics of ‘Canberra’, 
proving clearly that the F, plant or plants had resulted from accidental self- 
pollination of the female parent. 


It is therefore believed that little is to be gained from attempts to cross 
vulgare wheats directly with “Khapli’. The fact that the F, plants of some 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 607 


vulgare parents showed greater vigour than others may perhaps make it worth 
while to persevere with tests of other vulgare varieties as parents. 


Attempts to incorporate the “Khapli” resistance in vulgare wheat are being 
made in other ways. ‘Khapli’” has been crossed with certain durum wheats 
which readily give fertile progeny as a result. Some of these F, plants have been 
used for crossing with commercial vulgare wheats. In other cases, series of 
F, families of such crosses have been tested in the seedling stage for resistance, 
and families homozygous for resistance of the “Khapli” type noted. These wilt 
be used for crossing with commercial vulgare wheats. These studies are still 
in their early stages, but the general results may be indicated. 


One of the crosses involves the durum wheat known as “Kahla”. This is 
resistant to all the Australian forms except the second group, viz., 45, 46, and 55. 
“Khapli” is strongly resistant to all. 


In the F,, six seedlings tested with Form 43, as representing the first group, 
gave flecks. Tested with Form 46 they gave “1” reactions. There was dominance 
of resistance. At that time the troublesome Form 34 had not yet made its 
appearance. 


A group of 190 F. seedlings was tested with Form 43. They showed strong 
resistance throughout. Another batch of 184 was tested with Form 46. There 
were 170 resistant : 14 susceptible plants. This approximates to a 15:1 ratio. 
On a two factor basis the expectancy for 184 individuals would be 172 resist- 
ant : 12 susceptible plants. This result is now being confirmed by F, tests. 


A series of F, tests involving the use of Form 34 is in progress and points 
clearly to the operation of two factors. 


Further crosses between “Khapli’ and “Abyssinian”, and between “Khapli” 
and “Glossy Huguenot” are giving essentially similar results. 


Vulgare and Durum Crosses. 


The durum wheats are reputedly rust-resistant in Australia. Tests of seedlings 
have shown that some varieties are quite susceptible. Others are strongly resistant 
to some of the physiologic forms, e.g., “Arnautka’’, “Mindum”, and “Spelmars”’ 
of the differential set. It was decided to see the mode of inheritance of this 
sharp resistance in crosses with vulgare wheats. 


Crosses were made in 1922 between “Federation” and each of these three 
durums. From 176 “Federation” flowers pollinated, 98 grains were secured. The 
grains were somewhat shrivelled, and in some cases produced very weakly F, 
plants which failed in the seedling stage. The F, plants were tested in the 
seedling stage with Forms 43 and 46, to which the durum parents are respectively 
strongly resistant and strongly susceptible. The reactions are “flecks” in the 
first case and ‘4”’ in the second. ‘Federation’ is completely susceptible to both. 


The F, plants gave “1” reactions to Form 43, and ‘4” to 46, indicating 
dominance of resistance. The F, plants at maturity were intermediate in 
characters between the two parents. Many flowers in each spike failed to produce 
any grain, and where grain was set, much of it was very shrivelled. 


F, tests were made with seedlings sown in boxes and inoculated with Form 
43 in the usual way. The results are as follows: 


608 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


TABLE 9. 
Results in the F, generation of crosses between ‘‘ Federation ’’ and certain durum varieties tested with 
Form 43 of P. graminis tritici. 


Reactions and Frequency. 
Cross. 
E(Ne? to $6 5Xe ao. CIB 30) & “4 a" 
Federation <x Arnautka or o6 6 ie ifs a0 sie 98 33 
Federation x Spelmars ANS 6 As ae ai Wie aa PAIL 54 
Federation x Mindum ah aa es SG ag! ae oy 25 11 
Mindum x Federation ft sits aie ane ae sot nts 84 24 
Totals .. irs a6 es ae is a Pies ae 418 122 


Thus the ratio is 418 resistant : 122 susceptible plants. The expectancy on a 
single factor hypothesis is 405 resistant : 135 susceptible plants. 


D. 13 
——} = —— = 1°91. 
P.H. 6-79 

After completing the tests on the first leaf, the seedlings were carefully 
pruned and new leaves of each plant inoculated with Form 46. In 10 plants 
out of the 540, the reaction, instead of being “4”, was “1”. Cultures from these 
tiny reactions were made and proved to be Form 46. Transgressive segregation 
had occurred. This series of tests was carried out in the late spring, and 
although the transgressive segregates were transplanted, they failed to mature. 

In regard to Form 43, there would seem to be a single dominant factor 
determining the resistance of these durum wheats when they are crossed with 
“Federation”. Complications from sterility in the progeny may, however, upset 
this assumption. 

A second cross made in the same year was between “Marquis” and ‘““Mindum”, 
and reciprocally. Form 43 gives completely susceptible and resistant reactions 
respectively on these parents. The grain setting was 29 grains from 46 pollinations. 

The F, plants gave flecks with Form 43. There was a considerable degree of 
sterility in the F, plants. 

The F, results were as shown in Table 10. 


TABLE 10. 


Results of testing F, generation seedlings of crosses between ‘“* Marquis’ and “ Mindum” with Form 43. 


Reactions and Frequency. 


Cross. | 
“0.” to “X”. eg Keer, 
Marquis x Mindum .. ae 0 a Les af a ae 101 32 
Mindum < Marquis .. wy is a B16 “vs a5 ois 76 23 
Notals-- ah ae Pa oe nye ae a re 177 55 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 609 


Thus the ratio is 177 resistant to 55 susceptible plants. On a single factor 
hypothesis the expectancy would be 174 resistant : 58 susceptible plants. 


Se a O68. 
P.E. 4-45 

Here again there are clear indications that a single dominant factor for 
resistance is present in the durum parent. 

This work with the durums has not so far been carried beyond the F, 
generation. As pointed out later, from certain vulgare wheats the desired resist- 
ance should be obtainable, and will not involve the very wide segregation and 
sterility involved in the vulgare and durum crosses. But the work points to the 
resistance of the durums being due to one main dominant factor. 


VULGARE CROSSES. 
“Canberra” x “Thew”. 

It has been pointed out that specialization studies revealed that prior to 
1926 there were six physiologic forms of wheat stem-rust in Australia. These 
six forms belonged to two divergent groups, each group comprising three forms. 
Tests with commercial varieties of wheat showed that, amongst others, ‘‘Canberra’”’ 
was strongly resistant to Forms 43, 44, and 54 which comprise the first group, 
but was completely susceptible to the second group comprising Forms 45, 46, and 
55. The variety ‘“Thew” showed reciprocal reactions. Crosses were therefore made 
with a view to selecting commercial types which would embody the complete 
resistance to all six forms. The discovery that “Thew” was also resistant to 
one of the two known Australian forms of P. triticina and to at least one form 
of Hrysiphe graminis was not made until the work was well in progress. The 
initial aim was simply to obtain stem-rust resistance from this cross. 


Inheritance of Resistance to Stem-Rust. 

F, Results —A number of seedling tests of the F, plants has been made, using 
inoculations with Form 43 as representing the first group of forms, and with 
Form 46 as representing the second group. In some tests the first leaf was 
inoculated with Form 43, and a later leaf with Form 46; in others Form 46 was 
used for the first leaf and Form 43 for a later leaf. When tested with Form 43 
the reaction was “0;”, and with Form 46 it was “2+”. Simultaneous tests with the 
parental varieties were made. “Canberra” with Form 43 gave “0;” and “Thew” 
with 46 gave “2+”. These tests were carried out in the late autumn (May). 
Dominance of resistance is shown in the F). 

Certain of the F, grains were not tested, but were kindly grown at the 
Cowra Experiment Farm by Mr. J. T. Pridham in order that a good yield of 
grain might be obtained. The F, seedlings which had been subjected to test 
were afterwards transplanted to open beds and grown to maturity. After harvest, 
a comparison of the heads of the individual plant progenies was made in order 
to be certain that each plant was truly an F, plant, and not the result of 
accidental self-pollination. That this was really so was further proved by the 
segregation which occurred in the progeny. In all cases the F. progenies of 
individual F, plants were kept separate. 

F, Results —Grain from single F, plants was sown in boxes and tested in 
the seedling stage. In some instances the first inoculation was made with Form 
43, and after notes had been taken on this first leaf reaction, these leaves were 


610 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


carefully removed, the plants thoroughly sprayed with distilled water, and the 
emerging leaf then inoculated with Form 46. In other instances the order of 
inoculation was reversed. Pots of each parent were similarly treated and used 
for comparison. 


The results were as follows: 


TABLE 11. 


Results of testing F, seedlings of ‘‘ Canberra’”’ x ‘“‘ Thew’”’ with two forms of P. graminis tritici. 


Totals. 
Reactions and 
Frequency. 

Form of Observed. Expected. D- 

Stem-Rust Used. PE. 
“0;”’ to “X’’.| “3” & “4”’.| Resistant. | Susceptible.| Resistant. | Susceptible. 
Form 43 509 135 509 135 483 161 eB 
Form 46 493 151 493 151 483 161 ree. 3 


From these results it will be seen that the F, analysis is explainable on a 
single factor hypothesis. There is a somewhat wide divergence in the case of 
Form 43, but it appears that one main factor determines the resistance to each 
of the forms. 


F, Results—During the late autumn, winter, and spring of 1924 and of 
1926, two series of F, tests were carried out. Single F. plants grown at Hawkesbury 
Agricultural College were harvested separately, at least three good ears of each 
being taken. In promising agronomic plants more were harvested. Two pots 
containing about 20 grains of each family were sown and tested in the ordinary 
way with Forms 43 and 46. 


TABLE 12. 
Results of testing seedlings of F; families of a cross between ‘“‘ Canberra’”’ and ‘“ Thew”’. 


Number of families present in each of the three classes. 
Form of Homozygous Resistant. Heterozygous. Homozygous Susceptible. 
Stem-Rust Used. 
Observed. Expected. Observed. Expected. Observed. Expected. 
Form 43 90 83 170 166 72 83 
Form 46 74 76°25 148 153°5 83 (ABEPAS 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 611 


In the pots tested with Form 43, there were, on an average, 24 plants per 
pot in the homozygous resistant class, and 23 per pot in the homozygous susceptible 
class. In the pots tested with Form 46, the numbers were 23 and 25 respectively. 
Taking the heterozygous classes, in the tests with Form 43 it was found that 
there were 3,058 resistant and 993 susceptible plants. The expectancy on a single 


D. 
factor difference is 3,038 : 1,013, and on, = 0°87. The average number of plants 


tested in each family was 23. In the tests with Form 46, the heterozygous 
class comprised 3,565 plants, of which 2,638 were resistant and 927 were sus- 
ceptible. The expectancy here on a single factor hypothesis is 2,674 resistant : 891 


D. 
susceptible, and —— = 2:1. 
P.E. 


It would seem, therefore, that a single factor underlies resistance to each 
of these two forms. 

'Assuming “A” to represent the dominant factor for resistance to Form 43 
and “a” its allelomorph for susceptibility, and “B” to represent the dominant 
factor for resistance to Form 46, and “b” its allelomorph, then “Canberra” can be 
represented as having the genotype AAbb, and “Thew” as having aaBB. The F, 
would be AaBb, and in the F, there would be the usual nine classes. On the 
basis of the F, reactions shown, the genotypes of the F, families were allocated 
and the results are summarized in Tables 13 and 14. 


TABLE 13. 
F, genotypic Tesults as determined by the F; tests. 


F, genotypes. 


AABB AABb AaBB AaBb AAbb Aabb aaBB aaBb | aabb 


30 30 27 83 18 38 15 30 22 Observed. 
18°3 36°6 36°6 73°2 18-3 36°6 18°3 36°6 18:3 | Expected. 
TABLE 14. 


F, Phenotypic results. 


AB Ab aB ab 
170 56 45 22 Observed. 
165 55 55 18 Expected. 


It will be seen that there is a fairly close agreement between the observed 
and the expected results, the main departure being in the double dominant 
genotype. 


J 


612 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


Inheritance of Resistance to Leaf Rust. 
The fact that “Thew” shows marked resistance to one form of leaf rust 
designated “Aust. 1”, whilst “Canberra” is fully susceptible, was also taken 
into account in this work. 


F, tests with six seedlings showed that they gave flecks at a time when the 
resistant parent “Thew” was also showing flecks. Dominance of resistance occurs. 


One series of 110 F, families, after being tested with Form 46, was pruned and 
tested with this form of P. triticina. It was found that there were 26 homozygous 
resistant families, 55 heterozygous families and 29 homozygous susceptible families. 
This is a close approximation to the expectancy on a single factor hypothesis. 


Work was done to determine whether the same factor determined resistance 
to Form 46 and the form “Aust. 1” of P. triticina. In one instance a series of 
12 pots of families heterozygous for resistance to Form 46 was taken and 
the resistant and susceptible plants separately tagged prior to inoculation with 
the leaf rust. There was no connection between the resistance to the two rusts. 


This was further borne out by an examination of the results for all the 
families. 


Calling the dominant factor for resistance to this form of P. triticina “C” and 
its allelomorph “c’’, “Thew’” may now be represented as having the genotype 
“aaBBCC”, whilst “Canberra’’ is AAbbcc. 


On the basis of the F, results, the genotype was allotted to each of the 107 
families fully tested. In dealing with this small number of families on a three 
factor basis it is to be expected that a divergence from the genotypic expectancy 
should occur. On a phenotypic basis the approximation is close. The results 
were as shown in Table 15. 


It is clear, then, that with this independent assortment of the factors for 
resistance, homozygous types combining the complete resistance should be 
obtainable. ; 


Results of Back Crosses. 


Heads of “Canberra” after emasculation were pollinated with pollen from F, 
plants of the “Canberra’”’ x ‘‘Thew” cross. Seventy-one grains were obtained and 
without testing were sown and the plants grown to maturity. The grain produced 
by 70 of these plants was harvested separately and tested in the seedling stage 
with Forms 43 and 46 of P. graminis tritici and with Aust. Form 1 of P. triticina. 


In the tests with P. graminis tritici 43, it was found that there were 35 
families homozygous for resistance. These comprised 780 plants, or an average 
of more than 22 plants per family. There were alse 35 families heterozygous for 
resistance. They comprised 810 plants or more than 23 per family. Of them, 
614 were resistant and 196 susceptible. On a single factor basis the expectancy is 


: D. 6:5 
a ratio of 607-5 : 202-5 plants. —— = —— = 0-78. 
121d, tpanil 


Hence there is a close approach to the expectancy on a single factor hypothesis. 


In the tests with P. graminis tritici 46, it was found that there were 33 
families homozygous for susceptibility. These comprised 748 plants, or an average 
of more than 22 plants per family. The remaining 37 families were heterozygous. 
They comprised 739 individuals, or an average of 20 plants per family. Of them, 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 613 


TABLE 15. 
Results of F; tests of seedlings of ‘‘ Canberra ’’ x ‘‘ Thew’’. 


Genotype. Observed. Expected. Phenotype. Observed. Expected. 
AABBCC 3 1:7 

AABBCc 6 3°3 

AABbCC 3 3:3 

AaBBCC 1 3°3 

AABbCc 5 6:7 ABC 45 45 
AaBBCe 1 6:7 

AaBbCC 9 6:7 

AaBbCc ales 13:3 . 

AABBee 2 1:7 f 

AaBBcc 4 63083 

AABbcc 4 373 ABc 14 15 
AaBbcc 4 6:7 

AAbbCC 0 iLe¢ 

AabbCC 5 3°3 

AAbbCc 7 323 AbC 16 15 
AabbCec 4 6:7 

aaBBCC 1 Ih9'7/ 

aaBbCC 1 3:3 

aaBBCc 4 BoC) aBC 13 15 
aaBbCc 7 6:7 

AAbbec 2 1:7 

Aabbec 3 3°3 } abe 8 ? 
aaBBce 0 Ley alt 

aaBbec 4 3-3 saa ; 2 
aabbCC 2 U7, ae 

aabbCe 5 3°3 ak ee i 3 
aabbce 3 iLo#/ abe 3 2 


Totals 107 106°7 107 107 


614 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


573 were resistant and 166 susceptible. On a single factor basis the expectancy is 
D. 19 

a ratio of 554 :185 plants. —— = —— = 2°4 
IPM, AoA 

Here again the assumption that a single factor determines resistance is 
borne out, although the approach to the expectancy is not as close as in the tests 
with Form 438. 

For the tests with Aust. Form 1 of P. triticina, more plants were available. 
Seedlings that had already been used in the stem-rust tests were pruned and 
inoculated in later stages of growth for purposes of these leaf-rust tests, with 
quite satisfactory results. 

The tests revealed that there were 37 families homozygous for susceptibility. 
They comprised 1,427 plants, or an average of more than 38 plants per family. 
The remaining 33 families were heterozygous. They comprised 1,373 individuals, 
or more than 41 plants per family. Of them, 1,042 were resistant and 331 sus- 
ceptible. The expectancy on a single factor basis is a ratio of 1,030 : 343 plants. 

D. 12 


Dh) ale 


The approach to the expectancy in this instance is very close. 


Heil 


Using now the same factorial symbols for the resistance to each rust, viz., 
“A” for resistance and “a” for susceptibility to P. graminis tritici 48, “B” for 
resistance and “b” for susceptibility to P. graminis tritici 46, and “C” for resist- 
ance and “ec” for susceptibility to P. triticina Aust. Form 1, the genotypes of each 
may be written. “Canberra’”’ becomes AAbbcc and the F, plant AaBbCc. Summating 
the genotypes obtained, the results were as follows: 


TABLE 16. 


Results of testing 70 families of a back cross between ‘‘ Canberra ”’ and 
the F, of the cross ‘“‘ Canberra’”’ x ‘*‘ Thew”’. 


Number of Families. 
Genotype. 
Observed. . Expected. 

AABbCc 9 8-75 
AABbcc " 8-75 
AAbbCce 10 8:75 
AAbbcc 8 8-75 
AaBbCc 9 8°75 
AaBbcc 12 8:75 
AabbCc 5 8-75 
Aabbce 10 8:75 


It is seen that there is confirmation of the assumption that a single dominant 
factor underlies resistance to each of the three rusts used. These factors are 
independent in their inheritance. 

F, Field Results.—Of the same F, families which were tested in the plant 
house, seed residues of 132 taken at random were sown in row tests at Hawkesbury 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 615 


Agricultural College in 1924. Observations were made on stem-rust attack 
naturally occurring. Forms 43 and 46 were known to be present in the area. 
The plant-house tests of seedlings inoculated with the two forms had shown that 
14 of these families were homozygous for resistance. The field observations 
indicated that in all but two cases, these families showed no infection. In the 
remaining two where rust was present, the attack was light and occurred on only 
a few of the plants in the rows. There were six additional field rows in which no 
rust was noted. These families were all early maturing types and they had 
apparently escaped attack. The seedling tests in the plant house had shown 
heterozygosity for resistance in these families. 

F, Results.—Of the F, families, 11 were carried into the F, They comprised 
five of the first series tested in 1924 which were shown to be homozygous for 
resistance to Forms 43 and 46, together with six other families which were 
heterozygous for resistance but were particularly promising agronomically in the 
row tests. Two of the five homozygous families were the most promising of all. 
They were heterozygous in the F, for chaff colour and tip beard, and one of the 
two was heterozygous for grain colour as well. The selections used in these 
F, tests totalled 44; they came from 11 of the F, families, varying from 1 to 7 
per family. 

Two pots, each of 20 grains, were used for plant-house tests with Forms 43 
and 46. The five families which had shown homozygosity for the double resistance 
in the F, tests were again homozygous for resistance. Further sowings of the 
grain of these F, selections were made in the open at Sydney University and at 
Hawkesbury Agricultural College, and Mr. J. T. Pridham kindly made yet another 
sowing of them at Cowra Experiment Farm. He made selections for agronomie 
characters from these families, and these selections formed the basis of the sub- 
sequent work. : 

F, Results—These tests dealt with 14 selections tracing back to the two 
homozygous resistant F; families which were so promising. Each one showed 
homozygosity for resistance to Forms 43 and 46. Four were also homozygous for 
resistance to the form of P. triticina designated ‘Aust. 1”, one was homozygous 
for susceptibility, and the remaining nine were heterozygous to this leaf-rust. 


Sowings of all families were made at the Sydney University and Hawkesbury 
Agricultural College for field observations. At Cowra Mr. Pridham again grew 
them and made further selections. 

At Hawkesbury Agricultural College, Forms 43 and 46 were found to be 
present in the area this year. ‘‘Thew’ and “Canberra” were each infected. Plant- 
house tests showed the rusts to be Forms 43 and 46 respectively. Both Australian 
forms of leaf-rust were also abundant in the crop. On the flag of “Thew’’ were 
pustules of leaf-rust intermingled with sharp flecks and tiny “1” reactions. Cultures 
from the pustules tested in the plant-house showed that the rust was the “Aust. 2”. 
The flag of “Canberra” gave cultures of Aust. 1 and Aust. 2. A scrutiny of the 
“Canberra” x “Thew” selections revealed no stem-rust attack. On the flag, leaf- 
rust was present. The family which was homozygous for susceptibility gave 
cultures of both forms. The homozygous resistant families showed flecks and 
pustules on the leaves, and from these latter the form Aust. 2 was determined. 

There was, then, complete agreement between the plant-house and field 
results at Hawkesbury Agricultural College. 

At the same time that these results were obtained, further samples were 
grown by Mr. J. R. A. McMillan at the Gatton Agricultural College in Queensland, 


616 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


and by Mr. W. H. Darragh at Grafton, N.S.W. Mr. McMillan reported that at 
Gatton the wheats were sown on black soil and were irrigated during growth. 
As was to be expected, a very severe rust attack developed in the early summer 
as the wheats approached maturity. Samples of susceptible varieties submitted 
showed some of the heaviest infections ever seen. Tests showed that Forms 43 
and 44 were present. 

Under these identical conditions the “Canberra” x “Thew” selections were 
reported to be “perfectly clean and free of rust.” 

At Grafton Mr. Darragh reported that rust was present in abundance on 
susceptible varieties of wheat. Tests showed that it consisted of Forms 43 and 44. 
The “Canberra” x “Thew”’ selections were rust-free as had been the case at 
Gatton. 

F, Results.—The tests made in 1927 dealt with 41 selections. Homozygosity 
for resistance to Forms 43 and 46 was shown, but in some cases there was 
heterozygosity for resistance to the Form Aust. 1 of P. triticina. 

The 1927 field results with the F, material proved to be very interesting. An 
extensive series of selections which plant-house tests showed to be homozygous 
for resistance to Forms 43 and 46 was sown at Sydney University, Hawkesbury 
Agricultural College, Cowra, Gatton, and Grafton. It will be remembered that 
the specialization studies had shown that prior to 1926, only the two groups of 
forms represented by 43 and 46 respectively were present in New South Wales, 
and that in the summer of 1926, a few scattered isolations from western areas 
of New South Wales revealed the advent of Form 34. 


In July and September of 1927, rust samples sent by Mr. T. H. Harrison 
showed that Form 438 was present in the crops at Hawkesbury Agricultural 
College. On 31st October a scrutiny of the plots showed that the “Canberra” x 
“Thew” cross-breds were perfectly clean, but rust was found on “Little Club”, 
“Thew’’, and a number of other varieties. The collection made was a representa- 
tive one of wheats and barleys. The rust proved in each case to be Form 43. 
“Canberra” was free. On 4th November, Mr. Harrison forwarded a sample of 
rust on “Japanese Bearded” growing in the plot: it proved to be Form 43. A 
further visit to Hawkesbury Agricultural College was made on 11th November. 
Collections of rust on “Thew”, a representative group of wheats, and a group of 
barleys were made. The “Canberra” x “Thew” wheats were still free of stem- 
rust. Tests made with the three collections showed in each case a mixture of 
Forms 43 and 34. On 18th November another visit revealed a tremendous develop- 
ment of stem-rust throughout the plot. Samples were collected from ‘Thew”, 
“Canberra”, numerous other wheats and groups of barleys. Stem-rust was now 
present on the “Canberra” x “Thew”’ selections and was also sampled extensively. 
In every instance Form 34, and only this form, was present. Since that date 
very numerous isolations of rust from Hawkesbury Agricultural College have 
been made. Hxcepting an occurrence in December, 1927, of Form 43 on Agropyron 
scabrum and one on “Glossy Huguenot’ wheat when Forms 43 and 34 were 
together present, Form 34 alone has been present at the College. This applies 
to wheat, barley, rye and grasses. The change in the rust flora has been as 
complete as it is remarkable. 


The leaf-rust tests during this period at Hawkesbury Agricultural College 
revealed that forms Aust. 1 and 2 were present on susceptible varieties in the plot. 
On “Thew”, “Japanese Bearded”, and the “Canberra” x “Thew’’ selections, flecks 
and pustules occurred. In each case the pustules were those of Aust. 2. 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 617 


From Gatton, Q., Mr. McMillan forwarded representative rust samples of the 
commercial varieties twice in October, 1927. In each instance a mixture of 
Forms 44 and 34 occurred. A fortnight later another representative sample was 
sent, together with a series of rusted specimens of the ‘Canberra’? x “Thew” 
selections which were stated now to be showing rust. In each instance the only 
form present was Form 34. 

The Grafton results were of the same nature. In October, 1927, samples of 
wheat and barley showed that Forms 43 and 34 were present. Three weeks later 
similar samples showed that only Form 34 occurred in both the wheats and 
barley, and that the “Canberra” x “Thew” selections were now attacked by this 
form. Leaf rust isolations from this locality again showed only Aust. 2 on the 
“Canberra” x ‘“Thew’’ selections. 

At Cowra the same general result was obtained. 

At Bathurst there was also a development of Form 34. 

In this year Mr. R. HE. Dwyer was given a number of F, selections of 
“Canberra” x “Thew”, many of them different from those tested at Cowra and 
Gatton. The only rust determined on the samples of these which were submitted 
was Form 34. ; 

Thus it became abundantly clear that the “Euston” types needed resistance 
to more than Forms 43 and 46 and their cotypes. Further crossing of the 
“Huston” types became necessary in order to obtain resistance to Form 34. It 
was a fortunate circumstance that Dr. Levine of Minnesota at this time forwarded 
samples of his “Webster” and ‘‘Hope’”’ varieties, both of which show resistance to 
Form 34. Crosses with them have been made, and some of the material is now in 
the F, generation. Various strains of ‘Euston’ and of other commercial varieties 
have been used in this work. 

F, Results —In 1928 a further series of plant-house tests of the selected 
material was made, and homozygosity for resistance to Forms 43 and 46 deter- 
mined. Now known as the variety “Euston”, tests were made at Cowra on a 
field scale for the first time. In its trial as a late-sown grain variety, Euston 
headed the list with a computed yield of 23 bushels 15 Ibs. per acre (Medley, 1929). 
At Bathurst, yield tests carried out by Mr. Dwyer with his types showed that 
one of the ‘Canberra’ x “Thew” selections headed the list. Taking the yield 
given by the standard variety “Waratah” as 100, the best of these “Canberra” 
x “Thew” selections yielded 115:6%. In all, five families were included in this test 
and all except one exceeded 100%. 

Conclusion.—The results of this work show that plant-house work in con- 
junction with field tests can lead to the development of useful varieties of wheat 
which are rust-resistant. 


Inheritance of Morphological Characters. 


When practicable, the inheritance of certain obvious morphological characters 
‘has been traced. “Canberra” has tip beard, bronze chaff, and white grain. 
“Thew’’ is beardless, has white (golden) chaff and reddish graix. 

In the F,, intermediacy was found in the characters. 

A group of F, plants was analysed, with the following results: 

Tip Beard.—By direct comparison with the parent types, the generation was 
sorted into a group with tip beards similar to “Canberra”, a group that was 
beardless similar to ‘‘Thew”, and a third group that was intermediate in character. 
The ratio was—90 tip bearded : 191 intermediate : 106 beardless. This approximates 


618 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


to a 1:2:1 ratio, the expectancy being 97: 193:97. Seemingly a single genetic. 
factor determines the production of the tip beard in ‘Canberra’. 

Chaff Colour.—The same F, generation was sorted into groups on the basis of 
the presence or absence of colour in the chaff. The ratio obtained was 298 
coloured : 89 white-chaffed plants. The expectancy on a single factor basis is 


290 : 97. —— =——-=1-4. That is, a single factor also underlies the production 
IPB 5:75 


of bronze chaff. 

Grain Colour.—The same F, generation was sorted, by direct comparison: 
with grain of the parental types into the three groups, one coloured corresponding 
to “Thew’’,, one white corresponding to “Canberra”, and a third group comprising 
individuals intermediate in colour. There were 107 coloured : 195 intermediate : 
85 white-grained, the expectancy being 97: 193: 97. A single factor determines 
the production of grain colour in this cross. 

Grass Clump Habit.—In the F, generation it was early noticed that a number 
of the segregates were dwarfed, resembling clumps of grass. These are illustrated 
in Plate xxxii. Counts of these have been made in all available F, generations of 
this cross. The results to date show a total ratio of 1,220 normal : 281 grass clump 
plants, a very close approach to the 1,219 normals : 282 grass clumps which would 
be expected on a 13: 3 basis. A series of F; counts further confirmed this result. 
Clearly then, an inhibiting factor operates. Further evidence will be presented to 
show that it is carried by “Thew’”’. 

These four characters were found to be inherited independently of each other, 
and also independently of the rust resistance or susceptibility. 


Further Work Bearing upon the “Canberra” x “‘Thew”’ Cross. 


Further work was carried out to test the hypothesis that the resistance of 
“Canberra” and “‘Thew” to Forms 43 and 46 respectively was due in each case 
to one dominant factor. Each of these wheats was crossed with “Federation”, a 
variety very susceptible to all known rust forms, and the resultant material studied 
in the F,, F, and F, generations. 


“Federation” x “Canberra”. 

The F, grain was in part sown in pots, tested in the seedling stage, and after- 
wards transplanted to open ground where it was grown to maturity. Other grains 
were sown at Cowra by Mr. J. T. Pridham to provide a large yield. In the seedling 
tests with Form 43, the F, plants gave a “1” reaction, whilst ‘Federation’ and 
“Canberra” seedlings under the same conditions gave respectively “4’ and “1” 
reactions. Clearly resistance was dominant. 

F, tests were made by sowing grain in boxes and inoculating with Form: 43. 
After note-taking, one series of more than 200 seedlings was sorted into groups 
on the basis of the reaction shown, and grown to maturity in open beds in order 
that F, material of known phenotype might be available. In other cases F, grain 
was sown without any tests, and at maturity, complete single plants were harvested 
separately. 

The results of testing the F, seedlings showed that 477 gave reactions varying 
from “0;” to “XX”, and 158 gave “3” and “4” reactions. 

“Federation” and “Canberra” seedlings tested at the same time gave respec- 
tively reactions varying from ‘3+” to “4—’, and from “0;” to “2”. Summarizing 
the F, results, it will be seen that there were 477 resistant. and 158 susceptible 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 619 


plants, which is a close approximation to the expectancy of 476 resistant : 159 


D. 1 
susceptible plants on a single factor hypothesis. ——— = —— = 0-14 
ays 7:36 


F, tests were made with a small series of families taken at random from F, 
material which had been grown without test. Of 64 families tested, 11 were 
homozygous for resistance. They comprised 199 individuals, thus averaging 18 
plants per pot. There were 32 families heterozygous for resistance. These 
comprised 625 individuals, an average of 19 per pot. Of them, 446 were resistant 
and 179 susceptible. On a single factor hypothesis the expectancy would be 


D. 23 
469 : 156. —— = —— = 3:15. The remaining 21 families were homozygous for 
P.H. leo 


susceptibility. They comprised 342 plants, an average of 16 plants per pot. 


The results of these tests can be taken as pointing to a single dominant factor 
determining resistance to Form 43 in this cross. 


Inheritance of Morphological Characters. 


“Federation” and “Canberra” differ mainly in respect of the tip beard which 
is present in the latter variety. In chaff colour and grain colour, differences are 
not apparent. 

Tip Beard.—In the F, an intermediate condition occurs. 

An F, generation was analysed, being sorted into classes similar to the two 
parents and to the intermediate hybrid. There were 44 beardless: 90 inter- 
mediate : 59 tip bearded. The expectancy is 48 : 97: 48. Although the numbers are 
small, the result clearly indicates that a single factor determines the production 
of the tip beard in this cross. 

The inheritance of tip beard was found to be independent of inheritance of 
resistance to Form 43. & 

Grass Clumps.—In no case did examination of an F, generation reveal the 
presence of any but normal plants. 


“Federation” x “Thew’’. 


An examination of this cross was also made for confirmatory evidence 
regarding the factorial basis for resistance in the “Canberra” x ‘“Thew”’ cross. 


F, seedlings were tested with Form 46 and afterwards grown to maturity, 
and in other cases the grain was grown at Cowra. The reaction to Form 46 was 
“2+’’, and under the same conditions “Federation” and “‘Thew” gave respectively 
“4” and “2”. Resistance is dominant in the F,. 


A series of F, seedling tests showed that there were 468 giving reactions 
varying from “0;” to “X”, and 186 giving “3” and ‘4’ reactions. 

Simultaneously pots of “Federation” and “Thew” were tested. “Federation” 
gave “3” and “Thew” gave ‘1’, “2”, and “X” reactions. It has already been 
pointed out that a number of varieties of wheat have shown that, whereas 
inoculations under winter conditions gave strongly resistant reactions, a repetition 
of the experiment in the summer gave susceptible reactions. In this instance the 
test was made in August under rather warm conditions. 


Summarizing the result, it is seen that regarding the “X” reaction as indicating 
resistance, there were 468 resistant and 186 susceptible plants. The expectancy 


620 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


on a_ single factor hypothesis is 490 resistant: 164 susceptible plants. 
D. 22 

—— = —— = 2°9. 

Te, ((227/ 

A series of F; families was tested. These were obtained from the plants which 
had been tested as F, seedlings, sorted on the basis of their F. reaction, and 
planted out into open beds. The occurrence of “grass clumps” accounted for the 
loss of some plants, and in other cases the yield of grain was so low (fewer than 
20 grains) that the results were rejected. 

In all, 101 F, families were tested with Form 46. There were 22 which were 
homozygous for resistance; they averaged 31 plants per pot in the test. Of 
families homozygous for susceptibility, there were 30, averaging 29 plants per pot. 
There were 50 families heterozygous for resistance, and they averaged 24 plants 
per pot. Summarizing the results in the heterozygous families, there were 925 
resistant : 304 susceptible plants. This gives a very close approach to a 3:1 ratio 
and confirms the opinion that the resistance of ‘“‘Thew” is due to a single dominant 
factor. 

Resistance to P. triticina. 

It has already been pointed out that-“Thew” is resistant to one Australian 
form of P. triticina. An examination of the mode of inheritance of this character 
was made in this cross. 

In the F,, a group of six seedlings was tested and found to give flecks, whilst 
at the same time “Federation” and ‘‘Thew” respectively gave “4” and “0;” 
reactions. 

In the F.,, the same series of seedlings which had been tested with Form 
46 was pruned, and later tested with the form of P. triticina designated Aust. 1. 
The result was as follows: 


Reactions .. OG.» Sy ous ORS Nh Og Pd “ge 


Frequency .. br te 166 239 154 


That is to say there were 405 resistant : 154 susceptible plants. On the basis 
of a single factor difference the expectancy is 419 resistant : 140 susceptible plants. 
D. 14 


P.H. 6:91 

The relation between the resistance to P. graminis tritici 46 and to the form 
Aust. 1 of P. triticina on a phenotypic basis was examined. If “B” represents a 
factor for resistance to Form 46, and “b” its allelomorph which determines sus- 
ceptibility, and “C” and “c’’ respectively the factors for resistance and susceptibility 
to the Form Aust. 1 of P. triticina, the results were as follows: 


BC Be bc be 


Observed Oo bio 249 81 94 21 


Expected Ree ae 245 82 82 27 


/ 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 621 


It will be seen that there is a fairly close agreement between the frequency and 
the expectancy if free assortment took place. The two factors for resistance are 
inherited independently. : 

In the F, tests, the same series of 101 families used in the Form 46 tests 
was pruned, and later tested with the leaf-rust. The number of seedlings used 
has already been set out. Owing to damage by Helminthosporium sp. and 
accident, ten of the families were lost. Of the remaining 91, it was found that 
23 were homozygous resistant, 17 homozygous susceptible, and 51 heterozygous. 
Of the latter, 1,350 were resistant and 474 susceptible. The expectancy on a single 


D. 
factor hypothesis is 1,368 resistant : 456 susceptible, and —— = 1-44. 
P. 
Here again the question of correlation between. resistance to Form 46 


and Aust. 1 of P. triticina was considered. The genotypes of the 91 families were 
summarized with the following result: 


BBCC BbCC BBCc BbCc BBceec Bbce bbCC bbCc bbee 
Observed 4 13 15 23 3 7 6 8} 7 
Expected Dells 11-4 11-4 22-6 Bo 11-4 5:7 11-4 50177 


There is a fairly close agreement with the expectancy, confirming the result 
that the resistance to Form 46 is independent of resistance to P. triticina. 


Results of Back-Crosses. 

Emasculated heads of “Federation” were pollinated with pollen from FP, 
plants of the cross “Federation” x ‘“Thew”. Thirty-eight grains were produced. 
The seedlings were tested with Aust. Form 1 of P. triticina, with the result 
that of the 32 obtained, 17 were susceptible and 15 resistant. The plants were 
grown to maturity and harvested separately. Hach family was tested with P. 
graminis tritici 46 and with the Aust. Form 1 of P. triticina. 


In the tests with P. graminis tritici 46, there were 14 families homozygous 
for susceptibility. They comprised 328 plants, or an average of more than 23 
per family. The remaining 18 families were heterozygous, comprising 385 plants 
or an average of more than 21 per family. Of them, 283 were resistant and 102 
susceptible. On a single factor basis the expectancy is a ratio of 289: 96 plants. 


This is a close approximation to the expected result. 


In the tests with the Aust. Form 1 of P. triticina, there were 17 families 
homozygous for susceptibility, comprising 363 plants or an average of more than 
21 per family. The remaining 15 families were heterozygous. They comprised 
359 plants or an average of 24 per family. Of them, 277 were resistant and 82 


622 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


susceptible. The expectancy on a single factor basis is a ratio of 269: 90 plants. 
D. 8 


P.E. 5-53 

Here again there is a close approximation to the expected result. 

Using now the factorial symbols already suggested, viz., ‘“B’’ representing 
resistance and ‘“b” susceptibility to P. graminis tritici 46, and “C” representing 
resistance and ‘c” susceptibility to Aust. Form 1 of P. triticina, “Federation” 
becomes bbce and the F, parent is BbCc. Summating the genotypes obtained, 
the result was as follows: 


TABLE 17. 


Results of testing 32 families of a back-cross between ‘“‘ Federation ” and 
the F, of ‘‘ Federation ’’ x ‘* Thew’’. 


Number of Families. 


Genotype. : 

Observed. Expected. 
BbCc ne oe Bs 5 an my oe 8 8 
Bbee ie ae a an ae ves a 10 8 
bbCc ds she Bre ae ts ve ss 7 8 
bbee se a ss si ies oe 0 8 


It is seen that there is further confirmation of the assumption that a single 
dominant factor underlies resistance to each of the rusts used. These factors are 
independent in their inheritance. 


Resistance to Hrysiphe graminis. 

It has been found in the plant-house work that at least two forms of the 
powdery mildew occur. Inoculation tests have shown that “Thew” is resistant to 
one form and susceptible to another. ‘Federation’ is completely susceptible to 
both. 

Using the first form, inoculations of six F, seedlings showed that they were _ 
resistant. In the F., a series of 212 seedlings gave 161 resistant : 51 susceptible, 
a near approach to a 3:1 ratio. These F, and F, tests were made simultaneously 
with tests of “Federation” and “Thew” as controls. 

A series of F, tests was made, using the same seedlings which had been 
tested first with Form 46 and later with P. triticina. After taking notes on the 
latter results, the plants were pruned, and then atomized with an abundant 
suspension of conidia in water. Notes were taken on homozygosity for resistance 
and susceptibility and on heterozygosity. It was found that the results agreed 
with those for leaf-rust. In the series tested, there was linkage between resistance 
to leaf-rust and resistance to powdery mildew. Further extensive tests are needed 
for a determination of crossing-over if this occurs. It may be mentioned that 
nine other varieties of wheat have been found which behave in this same way, 
showing resistance to P. triticina 1 and to the form of HE. graminis made use of 
in this work. 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 623 


Inheritance of Morphological Characters. 

“Federation” differs from “Thew” in having bronze chaff and white grain, 
whilst ‘‘Thew” has white (golden) chaff and somewhat reddish grain. 

The F, is intermediate in character. 

A small F, generation was analysed. 

Chaff Colour—The material was sorted by direct comparison with the parental 
types, no attempt being made to sort the coloured types further. There were 
72 coloured : 23 white chaffed plants, indicating a single factor difference. 

Grain Colour.—In this case again the F, grain was compared directly with 
the parental types and sorted into three classes. The result was 26 coloured : 47 
intermediate : 22 white grained plants. This again points to a single factor 
difference. 

Grass Clumps.—Counts in F., generations showed a total ratio of 468 normals : 
119 grass clumps. The expectancy on a 13:83 basis is 477 normals: 110 grass 
clumps, showing the presence of an inhibiting factor. That this is present in 
“Thew” is now evident. 

These characters were inherited independently of each other and apparently 
were also inherited independently of resistance to Form 46 and the form of 
P. triticina called Aust. 1. 


“Riverina” x “Thew’’. 

An examination of the inheritance of resistance to Form 1 of P. triticina 
was carried out in this cross, which was made in the first instance because of the 
reciprocal reactions of the parents to Forms 43 and 46 of P. graminis tritici. 

In the F,, six seedlings were tested and gave “0;’, when “Riverina” and 
“Thew” gave respectively “4” and “0;”’. 


In the F, the results were as follows: 


Reactions .. 5S ae nO} "? FEI ig RY SAGs 
Observed ae aes aus 108 247 99 
Expected .. aie ate 113-5 227 113°5 
D. 14:5 
That is, there were 355 resistant : 99 susceptible plants. —— = —— = 2:33 
P.EK. 6-22 


The F, families were tested in the usual way, with the result that there were 
34 homozygous resistant, comprising an average of more than 21 plants each, 37 
homozygous susceptible families each comprising more than 23 plants, and 91 
heterozygous families which comprised 1,756 resistant : 547 susceptible plants. - 
This is in close agreement with the expectancy on a single factor hypothesis, 


D. 
which is 1,727 resistant : 576 susceptible plants, and —— = 2-06. 
12144 


In 1925 a back-cross was made. Pollen from an F, plant was used to pollinate 
emasculated “Riverina” flowers. A poor setting of grain occurred, only 13 grains 
being obtained. These were sown and tested in the seedling stage prior to being 


624 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


planted out. Hight gave “4” reactions, the remaining five gave flecks. The’ 
progeny of each plant was saved separately and tested. The eight susceptible 
plants yielded a progeny of 433 plants, all of which gave ‘4’ reactions. The five 
resistants were each heterozygous, producing a total of 183 resistant to 74 
susceptible plants. The expectancy on a single factor hypothesis is 193 : 64. 

» 1D), 10 

— = —— = 2:13 

P.E. 4:68 


Here again is good evidence of a single factor determining the resistance of 
“Thew’’ to the Aust. 1 form of P. triticina. 


“Gluyas” x “Thew”’. 


This cross was primarily made for resistance to Forms 43 and 46 of P. graminis 
tritici. Resistance to P. triticina also received some attention. 


In the F,, four seedlings tested each gave “0; reactions, whilst the parents 
gave respectively ‘4’ and “0;”’. 


An F, test, gave 165 resistant : 60 susceptible plants. The expectancy on the 
basis of a single factor difference is 169 : 56. 


A small number of F, families taken at random was tested. They gave 19 
families which were homozygous resistant, 12 families homozygous susceptible, 
and 27 families heterozygous. The latter comprised 292 resistant : 87 susceptible. 
The expectancy on a single factor basis is 284 : 95. 


In this cross also the evidence points to the resistance of “Thew” to leaf-rust 
being dependent upon a single dominant factor. 


“Federation” x “Japanese Bearded’. 


The variety known as “Japanese Bearded’, received from Mr. F. T. Brooks 
of Cambridge, was found to show strong resistance to P. triticina, Aust. Form 1. 
In 1924 it was crossed with “Federation” for study of the inheritance of this 
character. 


Inheritance of Resistance to Leaf-Rust. 


In the F,, ten seedlings showed a “2” reaction under conditions such that 
“Federation” and “Japanese Bearded” gave respectively ‘4’ and “2=” reactions. 


In the F, a series of tests was made with the following result, at a time when 
control tests gave ‘4’ and “0;” reactions with “Federation” and “Japanese 
Bearded” respectively. 


Reactions .. Pe ne a)? “1 & Q” “ge 


Observed Ro oe oie 169 281 156 


Expected .. 26 58 151°5 303 151°5 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 625 


Summating the resistant types, it is seen that there were 450 resistant and 
D. 5:5 
156 susceptible plants. ——— = ——= 0:77 
P.E. 7-19 


In the F; tests, there were 45 families which were homozygous for resistance. 
These comprised 1,249 individuals, or an average of more than 27 plants per pot. 
Fifty-two families were homozygous for susceptibility, comprising 1,627 plants or 
an average of more than 31 plants per pot. There were 98 heterozygous families 
comprising 2,809 plants, an average of more than 28 plants per pot. Taking the 
number of families occurring in these three classes, the ratio is 45 homozygous 
resistant : 98 heterozygous resistant : 52 homozygous susceptible families, which 
is a close approximation to a 1: 2:1 ratio. In the heterozygous families there 
were 2,138 resistant : 671 susceptible plants. The expectancy on a 3:1 basis is 


2,107 : 702, and Me = 2°0: 
P.E. 

Further confirmation of this analysis was forthcoming. After taking notes 
on one of the batches of F, seedlings, these were sorted into the “0;”, “2”, and “4” 
classes, and transplanted into°an open bed under this classification. The plants 
were harvested separately and kept in these groups to provide the grain actually 
used in the F,; tests recorded above. The homozygous susceptible F, families came 
in all cases from plants which were susceptible in the F,. The homozygous 
resistant F, families did not show the same accurate result. Of the F, plants 
classified as ‘“0;’’, all proved to be homozygous for resistance in the F,, with the 
exception of five which produced heterozygous families. Similarly those classed as 
“2” in the F, gave heterozygous F, families, with the exception of ten which 
proved to be homozygous resistants. An error of this magnitude could easily be 
induced by improved and by worse environmental conditions for the rust develop- 
ment during the F, analysis. 

It is clear that, as in “Thew’’, there is a single dominant factor in “Japanese 
Bearded” for resistance to the form Aust. 1 of P. triticina. 


Inheritance of Morphological Characters. 

An attempt was made to determine association of resistance to leaf-rust with 
certain morphological characters. 

Beard.—‘‘¥Federation” is a bald wheat and “Japanese Bearded” fully bearded. 
The F, plants were intermediate in character. In the F, 450 plants were examined. 
Of them, 29 were fully bearded. This indicates a two-factor difference, since the 
expectancy on this basis is 28 plants. Several attempts were made to devise a 
scheme for classifying the other groups. .A satisfactory fit was not obtained, the 
nearest result being 


Bald. Awnletted. Tip bearded. | Half bearded. | Full bearded. 
Observed... Ne ae 66 161 146 48 29 
Expected. . a se 28 112 168 112 28 


Grain Colour.—‘Federation” has white grain, “Japanese Bearded’ has red. 
The F, plants produced an intermediate red grain. In the F., 450 plants were 


626 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


sorted into two classes, one containing coloured grain and one containing white 
grain. In the former class, marked differences were noted in the degree of 
colour, but they were not finally classified. The total was 442 coloured : 8 white 
grained, indicating a three-factor difference for this character, since the expectancy 
on this basis is 7 white-grained individuals. 

Coleoptile Colour.—In very young seedlings there are marked differences 
between the colour of the coleoptile in “Federation” and “Japanese Bearded.” In 
the former, the colour is white, in the latter, brown. The F, showed an inter- 
mediate amount of colour. In the F,, 212 individuals were examined, giving a 
ratio of 50 white: 96 intermediate: 66 dark. This is an approximation to a 
1:2:1 ratio. In the F,, a group of 132 families was examined. There were 34 
families homozygous for light coleoptile. They comprised 865 individuals, or an 
average of 25 plants in each family. Also there were 34 families homozygous for 
dark coleoptile. These comprised 921 individuals, or an average of 27 plants per 
family. The heterozygous families numbered 64, comprising 1,855 individuals or 
29 per family. Totalling the classes in these heterozygous families, it was found 
that there were 450 dark : 971 intermediate : 434 light, which again approximates 
to a 1:2:1 ratio. Assuming dominance of colour, the ratio becomes 1,421 : 434, 


D. 
as compared with an expectancy of 1,391 : 464, and —— = 2°38. 


Rust Resistance and Coleoptile Colour. 


It was considered that there might perhaps be some correlation between the 
pigmentation and resistance. The F, families which were classified according to 
colour production were allocated their genotype on a resistance basis. 

Assuming that “A’’ represents the factor for resistance to Aust. Form 1, and 
“a” its allelomorph for susceptibility, whilst “B” represents the factor for coloured 
coleoptile and ‘“‘b’’ the allelomorphic factor for white coleoptile, then the con- 
stitution of “Federation”? would be aabb, and of “Japanese Bearded” AABB. In 
the F, the following are the results:— 


Genotypes | AABB AABDb AaBB AaBb AAbb Aabb aaBB aaBb aabb 


Observed 6 15 18 PBA 5 18 9 19 8 


Expected 8 16°5 16:5 33 8 16-5 8 16-5 8 


Although the number of families etamined was small, it is clear that the two 
characters are inherited independently. 

Grain Colour.—Of the families examined, only three had white grain colour. 
On the genotypic basis just postulated, these three families had respectively the 
genotypes Aabb, AaBB and AaBb. This indicates the probability of no associa- 
tion between these three characters. 


Further Crossing Work. 

It is not intended at this juncture to describe in detail other breeding results, 
but simply to indicate in general terms what has been found. A number of 
crosses have been examined, following the same general procedure outlined in 
connection with the “Canberra” x “Thew” cross. As in that case, the crosses 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 627 


before 1926 were made for resistance to the two groups of forms which were then 
present in Australia. Many of the crosses were made between varieties which 
showed reciprocal reactions to these two groups of forms with a view to combining 
this double resistance. Others had as one parent a wheat like ‘““Kanred” or “Kota” 
which showed the double resistance, the other parents being commercial wheats 
like ‘Federation’, “Hard Federation’, ‘“Canberra’’, etc. In yet other cases the 
erosses involved “Federation” and one other of the varieties showing the single 
resistance, as had been done in the “Canberra” x ‘“Thew” cross. A number of the 
actual parents are set out in Tables 2, 3, and 4 and will not be repeated here. 


Since 1926, the crosses made have involved resistance to Form 24. ‘“‘Webster’”’ 
and “Hope” have been mainly used to contribute this. 


F, Results —In the stem-rust work, to date F, plants from 286 wheat crosses 
have been tested with Form 43 to represent the first group of forms, and with 
Form 46 to represent the second group. In all cases there has been dominance 
of resistance. The tests have been made in the autumn in order that the seed- 
lings, after being tested, might be transplanted to open beds and grown to 
maturity. Pots of the parental varieties have been tested under the same con- 
ditions for comparative purposes. Almost complete dominance of resistance to 
Forms 43 and 46 has been shown. A number of barley crosses have shown similar 
results. 

When the first of the F, tests was made with Form 34 in 1927, it was very 
surprising to find almost complete dominance of susceptibility to this form. To 
date F, seedlings from 76 wheat crosses have given this result. There has been 
no departure from it. In a number of cases, as, for example, the cross “Federa- 
tion” x “Webster”, the F, grain of a cross has been divided into three groups. One 
batch has been inoculated with Forms 34, 43, and 46 in that order, Form 43 being 
used for inoculation after note taking and removal of the leaves which gave the 
Form 34 reaction, and Form 46 being used after removal of the leaves giving the 
Form 43 reaction. The other two groups of seedlings have been inoculated with 
these same cultures used in different chronological order. The result has been the 
same. There is dominance of resistance to Forms 43 and 46, and dominance of 
susceptibility to Form 34. Similar dominance of susceptibility has been shown 
in a number of barley crosses. 

In the leaf-rust tests of F, seedlings from 17 crosses, there has been dominance 
of resistance similar to that described in the crosses of ‘“Thew” with ‘Canberra”’ 
and other susceptible wheats. 


F, Results—In the stem-rust work, a number of the crosses have been tested 
in the seedling stage with Forms 43 and 46, or with one or other of these two, 
depending upon the parents. The rule has been to find segregation on a single 
factor basis. One of the interesting cases was in crosses of “Kota” with 
“Federation”, “Hard Federation”, and ““Canberra’’, where there were, on an average, 
3 resistant :1 susceptible plant. Clark (1925) made an extensive study of a 
“Kota” x “Hard Federation” cross and found segregation on the basis of 15 
susceptible : 1 resistant. The form or forms of stem-rust present are not indicated. 
An exception to the general happening has been in a “Federation” x “‘Webster” 
cross. In some of the tests, Form 43 has been used to inoculate the first seedling 
leaf, and Form 46 to inoculate a later leaf after note-taking and removal of the 
leaf infected with Form 48. In other tests the order in which the forms have been 
used has been reversed. The result has been the same. There has been a ratio 


K 


628 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


of 15 resistant : 1 susceptible plant. Furthermore, the plants susceptible to Form 
43 are also susceptible to Form 46. This indicates that in “Webster” there are 
two dominant factors for resistance to Form 43 and 46 which are cumulative 
in their effects. The same cross tested with Form 34 gives a result in which the 
dominance of susceptibility is outstanding, with an approximation to a ratio of 
3 susceptible : 1 resistant. This is merely a tentative suggestion, since a series 
of F, tests that are in progress seems to point to a 13: 3 ratio. A comprehensive 
series of crosses and back-crosses under study will give further light on the point. 
In the F, work it was found that the segregates which were susceptible to Forms 
43 and 46 were not necessarily susceptible to Form 34. The inheritance of 
resistance to Form 34 is independent of resistance to Forms 43 and 46. The same 
F, plants used in these tests were also inoculated with the form of P. triticina 
known as Aust. 1. Segregation on the basis of 3 resistant: 1 susceptible plant 
occurred. 

‘This again was independent of the inheritance of resistance to the three 
forms of stem-rust. 

Some of the morphological characters which are exhibited have been studied 
in certain of the crosses, with the following general results: 


TABLE 18. 


Summary of results of counts in F, generations of certain wheat crosses, showing ratios found in the 
inheritance of some morphological characters. 


Parents of Cross. Chatf Colour. Full Beard. Grain Colour. 
Canberra x Kanred 3:1 BS Il iss 8 7 
Federation x Kanred.. 3:1 iss I 63:1 
Canberra <x Kota aoa a3 il 63:1 
Hard Federation x Kota ou aya dl 15:1 
Federation x Kota ue ag ao ois 3:1 168 al 15:1 
Federation x Webster. . Bie a ois ae == iGy3 al 16) 8.7 
Tip Beard. 
Gullen x Thew.. ag al Gye at ag IL 
Gluyas x Thew 331 155-8 al Be 7 


F, Results —Tests of F, families of several crosses for resistance to Forms 43 
and 46 have been made. These include “Canberra” x “Kanred’, “Canberra” x 
“Kota’, “Hard Federation” x “Kota”, “Federation” x “Kota”, “Gullen” x “Thew”, 
“Canberra” x “Bobs”, “Firbank” x ‘“Wandilla”’, “Canberra” x “Clarendon”, and 
“Bena” x “Clarendon”. The results confirm the F, hypothesis that one main 
dominant factor for resistance operates in these crosses. Evidence was obtained 
of modifying factors operating in some cases. 

It has already been stated that a series of F, families of the “Federation” 
x “Webster” cross are under study, mainly in regard to the inheritance of resist- 
ance to Form 34. It is early to attempt to draw final conclusions from this 
work. The dominance of susceptibility has been very clear. It has meant that 
an abundance of inoculum of this form has been available in the plant house in 
which the tests have been made. In all other cross-bred tests, a sufficiency of 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 629 


the inoculum has only been ensured by frequent inoculations of an appropriate 
susceptible host variety. Several families have been found which are homozygous 
in the seedling stage for resistance to Form 34, in addition to having shown 
satisfactory agronomic characteristics as F, individuals. A result in the 
flag-smut work which is in progress promises to have an important bearing 
on these F, family tests. In pot tests carried out in 1928 and 1929, the strain 
of ‘Webster’ used in the crosses for rust resistance has remained quite free of 
flag-smut, alongside fully susceptible plants of “Federation” and “Waratah” 
derived from grain which was heavily smutted with flag-smut spores as was the 
“Webster” grain. 


Results in Later Generations —In some of the crosses, notably those 
enumerated under the heading “F, Results’, selections have been made in each 
generation up to F,, helped largely by Mr. J. T. Pridham at Cowra. Plant-house 
tests have been made before deciding upon the progeny for the next sowing. 
Certain of these types give considerable promise agronomically. The occurrence 
of Form 34 has greatly complicated matters, but crosses between a number of the 
best of these types and “Webster” and “Hope” are now in the F. stage, and are 
expected to give fully resistant types of agronomic value. 


Occurrence of Grass Clumps in Wheat Crosses. 


Attention has already been called to the occurrence of grass clumps in the 
F, generations of the crosses “Canberra” x ‘“Thew” and “Federation” x “Thew”. 
The same condition has been found in a number of other crosses that have been 
made. It has indeed been a limiting factor in some of the crosses which were 
made to give rust resistance, completely preventing any progress being made. 


Grass clumps have occurred in the F, of a number of crosses. Notice was 
drawn to this happening by Mr. G. S. Gordon, of Werribee, in 1922. He had found 
that from crosses of “Indian F” with “Jonathan”, only grass clumps resulted. 
He kindly made further crosses between these two varieties and forwarded the 
crossed grain for testing purposes. All the grains produced grass clumps, and 
although these were grown under the best garden conditions and watered when 
necessary, they could not be brought beyond this stage. They died without 
flowering. 


The crosses which have been made and which show the same occurrence are 
as follows: 


Hard Federation x Cedar; Federation x Cedar; Canberra x Cedar; Gluyas 
x Cedar; Wandilla x Cedar; Yandilla King x Cedar; Indian F x Cedar; 
Cedar x Indian F; Indian F x Jonathan; Federation x Jonathan; Jonathan x 
Canberra; Federation x Warren; Hard Federation x Warren; Canberra x Warren; 
“Sun x Dawson” x Federation; Yandilla x Bobin; Bobin x Ford; Bobin x Florence; 
Florence x Bobin; Bobin x Thew; Federation x Bombard; Federation x Mediter- 
ranean C.I. 3332-3; Federation x Italian Spring C. 4413; Persian Black x Federa- 
tion; Alberta Red x Persian Black; Federation x Iumillo; T. sphaerococcum B.L. 
x Federation. 


Grass clumps in the segregating generations have been noted by many 
workers. In the work under review, the occurrence of grass clumps in the F, 


generation has been observed in the crosses which are set out in the following 
table: 


GUS 
carn oe 


t: 


NSE is 


Ae 


630 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


TABLE 19. 


Occurrence of grass clumps in F, generations of certain wheat crosses, compared with 


the expectancy on a 13:3 basis. 


ae 
1, 
fs 


‘ 


© 
1 


Bindi on) 


Observed. Expected. 
Parents of Cross. D. 
Totals. | Normal.| Grass | Normal.| Grass P.E. 
Tufts. Tufts. 

SNES x Thew 560 463 97 455 105 spa 
“/Thew x Wandilla 710 581 129 577 133 45 =0°6 
Thew x Gullen 585 | 485 | 100 375 | 0 | oo =1-6 
Thew x Indian F 217 170 47 176 41 pagn ls 
“thew x Riverina 101 78 23 82 19 sgl 
Thew x Federation 296 232 64 240 56 pagn1'8 
Thew x Barooga 40 32 8 32°5 ae oo =0°3 
Thew x Duri .. 105 81 24 85 20 sepals 
Bena x Thew.. 120 95 25 97 23 sao? 

Yandilla King .x Thew 335 272 63 272 63 pn 0 

Thew x Roseworthy .. 102 83 19 83 19 smn? 
Thew X Marshall’s No. 3 98 84 14 80 18 sans 
Marshall’s No. 3 x Thew 150 116 34 122 28 pop=9 
Hard Federation x Florence 386 320 66 314 72 ee: 
Florence x Hard Federation igs) © 158 41 162 37 te. 
Federation x Florence 145 128 17 118 27 ppo8l 
Florence x Federation 193 153 40 157 | 36 sapc hl 
Canberra x Florence .. 351 293 58 285 66 pols 
Florence x Gullen 366 292 74 297 69 ay=10 

Gullen x Florence 505 410 95 410 95 <0 
Florence x Wandilla.. 752 626 126 611 141 e281 
Florence x Yandilla King 100 80 20 81 19 ee 
Canberra x Clarendon: 548 461 87 445 103 p= 26 
Clarendon x Waratah 166 137 29 135 31 say=0'6 
Clarendon x Bena 172 142 30 140 32 sa5=0°8 
Bena x Clarendon 184 159 25 150 34 papas 
Canberra x Bomen 469 387 82 371 88 mrt} 

Gluyas x Bomen 501 407° 94 407 94 yn 0 
Yandilla King x Bomen 297 250 47 241 56 pan? 0 
Canberra x Rieti 488 407 81 397 91 aepoht 
Ridit x Federation 196 170 26 159 37 sap 30 
Chinese White x Canberra .. 176 142 34 143 33 703 
T. sphaerococeum 8.B. x Federation 286 242 44 232 54 pen? 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 631 


It will be seen that in some of the crosses the numbers of individuals available 
are small. The figures are given just as they were taken in the field. 

In addition to these cases in which there has been the 13: 3 ratio typical of 
the action of inhibitory factors, there have been three in which a 15:1 ratio 
occurred. 

They are as follows: 


TABLE 20. 


Occurrence of grass clumps in F, generations of certain wheat crosses, compared with 
the expectancy on a 15:1 basis. 


Observed. Expected. 
- D- 
Parents of Cross. Grass Grass P.E. 
Totals. | Normal. | Clumps. | Normal. | Clumps. 
Exquisite x Thew .. ae o0 Se 161 149 12 151 10 Pe 1:0 
Bomen X Warden .. a0 30 Bae 319 298 21 299 20 xe =(0!-3 
Firbank x Wandilla .. Ws Pe eh 258 243 15 242 16 spot 


There have been occurrences of similar grass clumps in some of the barley, 
rye and oat work. Further studies involving numerous crosses are in progress 
dealing with these and the wheat grass clumps. Pending the completion of 
these, no attempt is made at this stage to discuss the mode of inheritance of 
this character. 


Resistance to Puccinia graminis avenae. 


Unexpected difficulties have been met with in this work. There have been 
numerous attempts to make crosses between varieties of oats at the Sydney 
University which have resulted in a very poor setting of grain. Mr. J. T. Pridham 
of Cowra has kindly supplied some crossed grain and a few results have been 
obtained. Losses from attack by grain moth have greatly hampered work. 


The crosses available have been: 1, ‘““Belar” (susceptible) « “Reid” (resistant) ; 
2, “Ruakura”’ (susceptible) x “Richland” (resistant); 3, “Algerian” (susceptible) 
x “White Tartar” (resistant); 4, ‘“Algerian’’ (susceptible) x ‘‘Joanette’”’ (resistant). 


The only rust used so far is P. graminis avenae 1. The reactions indicated 
have to do with this physiologic form. 


In the F, seedling tests, there was a close approach to complete dominance of 
resistance. Thus in the first cross, the F, reaction was “2+” while the resistant 
“Reid” gave “2”. In the second cross, the F,, reaction was “0;’ similar to that 
given by “Richland”. In the third, the F, showed “2’’, similar to that given by 
“White Tartar’. In the fourth cross, the F, reaction was “2’’, whilst “Joanette” 
showed “1’’. 


632 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


“Belar” x “Reid”. 

Only in the case of the first cross have F. results of value been obtained. In 
the other cases, loss of grain by attack of army worm in the field or by grain 
moth in the laboratory after harvest has reduced the numbers available too greatly 
for the figures to have a real significance. But F, studies are planned which may 
give information regarding the genetics of resistance. In the cross “Belar” x 
“Reid”, the same culture of P. graminis avenae 1 which had been used in the 
F, tests was used to inoculate a group of F, seedlings. There were 177 resistant : 
58 susceptible plants, a close approach to a 3:1 ratio. 

As regards resistance to P. graminis avenae 1, in the cross “Belar” x “Reid” 
there appears therefore to be a single dominant factor which determines resistance. 


“Algerian” x “Joanette’’. 


In this cross, owing to ravages of grain moth, only 16 viable grains were 
available for the F, test. Of the 16 seedlings tested at a time when “Joanette’’ 
gave resistant reactions, 10 were resistant and 6 were susceptible. These were 
planted out after test and grown to maturity with the exception of one plant 
which failed. 

In the F,, the six susceptible F. plants were each homozygous for suscep- 
tibility. There were 272 seedlings in this test, an average of more than 45 for 
each family. Three of the families were homozygous for resistance. They com- 
prised 142 seedlings, or an average of more than 47 per family. The remaining 
six families were heterozygous. They comprised 286 seedlings, an average of 
more than 47 per family. Of them, 214 were classed as resistant and 72 as 
susceptible. This is a very close approximation to the ratio of 214-5 resistant : 
71:5 susceptible plants which is the expectancy on a single factor basis. 

There appears, therefore, to be again a single dominant factor determining 
resistance to P. graminis avenae 1 in this cross. 


SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS. 


The initial results obtained during several years of work devoted to breeding 
varieties of wheat and oats for rust resistance are given. 

Investigations of the technique of crossing showed that under existing con- 
ditions the method gave 75%. of successful crossing in wheat. It was found that 
viable crossed grain could be obtained from heads on severed stalks kept in vessels 
of water in the plant house after pollination. 

A determination was made of the effect which the stage of development of 
the grain has upon germination. Grain harvested only 17 days after pollination 
gave full germinations and practically normal seedlings. Grain only six days old 
gave nearly 40% germination with production of very spindly seedlings. 

Numerous wide crosses were attempted. Utter failure was met with in all 
efforts to cross wheat and barley, and complete sterility was found in a cross 
between wheat and rye. 

Many unsuccessful efforts were made to cross “Khapli” emmer with varieties 
of vulgare wheat. Attempts are being made by indirect methods to incorporate 
the “Khapli” resistance in vulgare wheats. A first examination of crosses between 
certain durum and vulgare wheats indicates that a single dominant factor for 
resistance to P. graminis tritici 43 is present in these durum varieties. 

Crosses were made between “Canberra” and “Thew” to give resistance to the 
six forms of P. graminis tritici present in Australia prior to 1926. These parents 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 633 


behave reciprocally in regard to their resistance and susceptibility to the two 
groups, each of three physiologic forms. The results of work with the F,, F., and 
F, generations indicate the presence in each parent of a single dominant factor for 
resistance. Tests of later generations are given, leading to the development from 
this cross of the variety “Huston”. Observations were made on the advent of 
Form 34 of P. graminis tritici in the breeding plot, and on the superseding of the 
other forms by Form 34. 

In the “Canberra” x “‘Thew” cross, the inheritance of resistance to Australian 
Form 1 of P. triticina was traced, and shown to be due to the operation of a 
single dominant factor for resistance. This is inherited independently of the factor 
for resistance to P. graminis tritici 46. Certain morphological characters in which 
the two varieties differ were also followed in their inheritance. 


To link up with the “Canberra” x ‘“‘Thew” cross, studies were made of crosses 
between ‘“‘Canberra”’ and ‘Federation’, and between ‘‘Thew” and ‘Federation”’. 
Confirmatory evidence was obtained showing that resistance in “Canberra” and in 
“Thew” depends in each case upon a single dominant factor. In the variety 
“Thew”, an additional independent dominant factor for resistance to Australian 
Form 1 of P. triticina is present, and is linked with a factor for resistance to 
one form of Hrysiphe graminis. 

The crosses “Riverina” x “Thew” and “Gluyas” x ‘‘Thew” also give evidence 
of the operation of a single dominant factor in “Thew” for leaf-rust resistance. 

Examination of the cross “Federation” x ‘Japanese Bearded” shows that in 
“Japanese Bearded” there is also present a single dominant factor for resistance 
to leaf-rust. 

The general results of studies of other wheat crosses show that in all cases 
examined, the inheritance of resistance to Forms 43 and 46 of P. graminis tritici 
is due to a single dominant factor for resistance. On the other hand, the 
inheritance of resistance to Form 34 is due to one factor (or more) with clear 
dominance of susceptibility. 

In many of the wheat crosses, the inheritance of the ‘grass clump” habit has 
been recorded. Grass clumps may occur in the F, and lead to sterility of the 
plant. In other crosses, counts in the F, show a ratio of 13 normals: 3 grass 
clumps, or of 15 normals: 1 grass clump. 

A small amount of work dealing with inheritance of resistance to P. graminis 
avenae 1 points to the operation of a single dominant factor for resistance. 


Despite the complexities inherent to the work, there would seem to be no 
valid reason why success should not be obtained in breeding fully resistant 
varieties which are also agronomically desirable. In this work controlled plant- 
house studies can be of the utmost assistance to the breeder. 


Bibliography. 
AAMopT, O. S., 1922.—The Inheritance of Resistance to Several Biologic forms of 
Puccinia graminis tritici in a cross between Kanred and Marquis. Phytopathology, 

UY, 5 Bee 

, 1922.—Correlated Inheritance in Wheat of Winter-Spring Habit of Growth 
and Rust Resistance. (Abstract.) Phytopathology, 12, pp. 32-38. 

, 1923.—The Inheritance of Growth Habit and Resistance to Stem Rust in a 
cross between two varieties of Common Wheat. Journ. Agr. Research, 24, pp. 
457-470. 

ARMSTRONG, S. F., 1922.—The Mendelian Inheritance of Susceptibility and Resistance to 


Yellow Rust (Puccinia glumarum E. & H.) in Wheat. Journ. Agr. Sci., 12, pp. 57-96. GY) Sas v4 
fD7%o° 1g Ff 


fat | Pore 

“2, \ ABs } ol 

\e pt a SB CY, 
e ey ie 4 
WY ge 


634 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii, 


BIFFEN, R. H., 1905.—Mendel’s Law of Inheritance and Wheat Breeding. Journ. Agr. 
Sci., 1, pp: 4-48), Pl. i. 

, 1907.—Studies in the Inheritance of Disease Resistance. Journ. Agr. Sci., 
2, pp. 109-128. 

—————, 1912.—-Studies in the Inheritance of Disease Resistance. Journ. Agr. S¢i., 
4, pp. 421-429. 

,1916.—The Suppression of Characters in Crossing. Journ. Genetics, 5, pp. 
225-228. 

, 1917.—Systematised Plant Breeding. Seward’s “Science and the Nation’’, pp. 
146-175, University Press, Cambridge, England. 

CuarRK, J. A., 1925.—Segregation and Correlated Inheritance in Crosses between Kota and 
Hard Federation Wheats for Rust and Drought Resistance. Journ. Agr. Res., 29, 
pp. 1-47. ; 

,and SmirH, R. W., 1928.—Inheritance in Nodak and Kahla Durum Wheat 
Crosses for Rust Resistance, Yield and Quality at Dickinson, North Dakota. ° Journ. 
Amer. Soc. Agron., 20, 12, pp. 1297-1304. 

Davies, D. W., and Jonss, HE. T., 1926.—Studies in the Inheritance of Resistance and 
Susceptibility to Crown Rust (Puwecinia coronata Cda.) in a Cross between Selections 
of Red Rust Proof (Avena sterilis L.) and Scotch Potato (Avena sativa IL.). 
Welsh Journ. Agr., 2, pp. 212-221, 4 pl. 

Dintz, S. M., 1925.—The Inheritance of Resistance to Puccinia graminis avenae. 
(Abstract.) Phytopathology, 15, p. 54. 

, 1928.—Inheritance of Resistance in Oats to Puccinia graminis avenae. Journ. 
Agr. Res., 37, 1, pp. 1-238, 5 fig. 

Evans, I. B. Poug, 1911.—South African Cereal Rusts, with Observations on the Problem 
of Breeding Rust Resistant Wheats. Journ. Agr. Sci., 4, pp. 95-104. 

Farrer, W., 1898.—The Making and Improvement of Wheats for Australian Conditions. 
Agr, Gaz. N.S.W., 9, pp. 131-168, 241-250. 

FLORELL, V. H., 1924.—Studies on the Inheritance of Harliness in Wheat. Journ. Agr. 
Res., 19, pp. 333-347. 

FREEMAN, G. F., 1919.—Heredity of Quantitative Characters in Wheat. Genetics, 4, 
pp. 1-93. 

GAINES, E. F., 1917.—Inheritance in Wheat, Barley and Oat Hybrids. Wash. Agr. Exp. 
Sta., Bull. 135, pp. 61, 9 fig. 

GARBER, R. J., 1921.—A Preliminary Note on the Inheritance of Rust Resistance in Oats. 
Journ. Amer. Soc. Agron., 13, pp. 41-43, 1 fig. 

, 1922.—Inheritance and Yield with Particular Reference to Rust Resistance 
and Panicle Type in Oats. Minn. Agr. Exp. Sta. Tech. Bull. 7, p. 62, illus. 

GOULDEN, C. H., 1926.—A Genetic and Cytological Study of Dwarfing in Wheat and 
Oats. Minn. Agr. Exp. Sta., Tech. Bull. 33, p. 37, illus. 

, Neatsy, K. W., and WetsH, J. N., 1928.—The Inheritance of Resistance 
to Puccinia graminis tritici in a cross between two varieties of Triticum vulgare. 
Phytopathology, 18, pp. 631-658, illus. 

GRIFFEE, F., 1922.—Breeding Oats Resistant to Stem Rust. Journ. Heredity, 13, pp. 
187-190, 3 fig. 

HARRINGTON, J. B., 1925.—The Inheritance of Resistance to Puccinia graminis in Crosses 
between Varieties of Durum Wheat. Se. Agr., 5, pp. 265-288. 

,and Aamopt, O. S., 1923.—Mode of Inheritance of Resistance to Puccinia 
graminis with Relation to Seed Colour in Crosses between Varieties of Durum Wheat. 
Journ. Agr. Res., 24, pp. 979-996, 4 pl. 

Hayes, H. K., 1918.—Natural Cross-pollination in Wheat. Journ. Amer. Soc. Agron., 10, 
pp. 120-122. 

, 1929.—Breeding Disease Resistant Varieties of Crop Plants. Proc. Internat. 
Congr. of Pl. Sciences, 1, pp. 137-148. 

,and Aamopt, O. S., 1923.—A Study of Rust Resistance in a Cross Between 
Marquis and Kota Wheats. Journ. Agr. Res., 24, pp. 997-1012, 3 pl. 

,and STAKMAN, EH. C., 1922.—Wheat Stem Rust from the Standpoint of Plant 
Breeding. Proc. Second Ann. Mtg. Canad. Soc. Agron., 1921, pp. 22-35, 4 fig. 

—_———_—, GRIFFEE, F.., STEVENSON, F. J., and LUNDEN, A. P., 1928.—Correlated Studies in 
Oats of the Inheritance of Reaction to Stem Rust and Smuts and of other Differential 
Characters. Journ. Agr. Res., 36, pp. 437-457. 

, PARKER, J. H., and Kurrzweit, C., 1920.—Genetics of Rust Resistance in 
Crosses of Varieties of Triticum vulgare with varieties of T. durum and T. dicoccum. 
Journ. Agr. Res. 19, pp. 523-542, Pl. 97-102. 


BY W. L. WATERHOUSE. 635 


Hayes, H. K., STtakmMAN, BH. C., and AAMoptT, O. S., 1925.—Inheritance in Wheat of 
Resistance to Black Stem Rust. Phytopathology, 15, pp. 371-387, 1 pl. 
Howarp, A., and Howarpb, G. L. C., 1912.—On the Inheritance of Some Characters in 
Wheat. Mem. Dept. Agr. Ind., Bot. Ser. 5, pp. 1-47, 3 pl. 
Hynes, H. J., 1928.—Stem Rust of Wheat. The Isolation of Resistant Types from a 
Federation x Khapli Cross. Agr. Gaz. N.S.W., 39, pp. 871-880. 
, 1926.—Studies of the Reaction to Stem Rust in a Cross between Federation 
Wheat and Khapli Emmer, with Notes on the Fertility of the Hybrid Types. Phyto- 
pathology, 16, pp. 809-827, 4 pl. 
JOHNSTON, C. O., and MerucHers, L. E., 1929.—Greenhouse Studies on the Relation of 
ge of Wheat Plants to Infection by Puccinia triticina. Journ. Agr. Res., 38, pp. 
Aoi, API 3s 
MAINS, E. B., LeigHty, C. H., and JOHNSTON, C. O., 1926.—Inheritance of Resistance to 
Leaf Rust, Puccinia triticina, Hrikss. in Crosses of Common Wheat, Triticum vulgare, 
Villa ounn. Agr ess. s2app. Dol-9t2, Pls ib: 
MepDLEY, R. N., 1929.—Field Experiments with Cereal Crops—Cowra. Agr. Gaz. N.S.W., 
40, pp. 346-352. 
MeucHERS, L. E., and Parker, J. H., 1922.—Inheritance of Resistance to Black Stem 
Rust in Crosses Between Varieties of Common Wheat. (Abstract.) Phytopathology, 
12, pp. 31-32. 
McFApDDEN, E. S., 1925.—‘Synthetic’’ Rust Proof Bread Wheats. Dakota Farmer, 45, 
p. 102. 
NILSSON-HHLE, H., 1908.—Hinige ergebnisse von Kreuzungen bei Hafer und Weizen. 
Botan. Notisn. Lund’s, pp. 257-298. 
, 1911.—Kreuzungsuntersuchungen an Hafer und Weizen, ii. Lund’s Univ. 
Arsskr., n.F. Afd. 2, Bd. 7, No. 6, p. 82. 
Parker, J. H., 1920.—A Preliminary Study of the Inheritance of Rust Resistance in 
Oats. Journ. Amer. Soc. Agron., 12, pp. 23-38. 
Puttick, G. F., 1921.—The Reaction of the F, Generation of a Cross Between a Common 
and a Durum Wheat to two Biologic Forms of Puccinia graminis. Phytopathology, 
11, pp. 205-2138. 
STEWART, G., 1928.—Origin of a Segregate Resistant to Black Stem Rust in a Cross 
Between Two Susceptible Parents. Amer. Naturalist, 62, pp. 188-192. 
WALDRON, L. R., 1921.—Inheritance of Rust Resistance in a Family Derived from a 
Cross Between Durum and Common: Wheat. N. Dakota Agr. Eap. Sta. Bull. 147, 
p. 24, illus. 
, 1924.—A Study of Dwarfness in Wheat Accompanied by Unexpected Ratios. 
Genetics, 9, pp. 212-246. 
WATERHOUSE, W. L., 1929.—Australian Rust Studies, I. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 54, 
Pt. 5, pp. 615-680, 4 pl. 
, 1930.—Australian Rust Studies, II. Biometrical Studies of the Morphology of 
Spore Forms. Proc. LINN. Soc. N.S.W., 55, Pt. 2, pp. 159-178, 1 pl. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES XXXII-XXXIV. 


Plate xxxii. 
Wheat plants. 


(a), (b), and (ec) illustrate the ‘Federation’ seedlings derived from grain of 
different ages, sown the same day and photographed the same day. 

(a) Seedlings from grain 6 days old, “very spindly’.—(b) Seedlings from grain 10 
days old, “spindly’”’.—(c) Seedlings from grain 20 days old, ‘‘normal’.—(d) Part of an 
F, generation of the cross “Canberra” x ‘“‘Thew’’, showing the occurrence of ‘grass 
clumps” amongst the normal plants. 


Plate xxxiii. 
Crosses between vulgare wheats and ‘‘Khapli’’ emmer. 

(a) Grain of “Federation’.—(b) Grain of ‘Khapli’.—(e) Grain produced as a 
result of crossing “Federation” and “Khapli’’. Very shrivelled grain was obtained in 
all these crosses.—(d) Seedling leaves of the F, plants of “Federation” x “Khapli’’, 
showing the “‘X”’ reaction produced by P. graminis tritici 34.—(e) The F, plants of crosses 
between vulgare wheats and “Khapli’” made in 1927, growing in the open after having 
been tested in pots and transplanted. There are marked differences in the degrees of 


growth made by the plants, depending upon the particular vulgare variety used as the 
parent. 


L 


636 AUSTRALIAN RUST STUDIES, iii. 


Plate xxxiv. 
Crosses between vulgare wheats and ‘‘Khapli’’ emmer. 
The same batch of F, plants illustrated in (d) of the preceding plate are here 
The normal growth and heading of 


They were photographed the same day. 
wheat plants of other crosses which had been treated in exactly the same fashion are 


shown. 


seen in the row at the left. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XXXII. 


PLATE XXXTII. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


ake : 
Sue 


PLATE XXXIV. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


THE GEOLOGY OF THE SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES. 
Part iii. Tae MoNnzoniric COMPLEX OF THE MouUNT DROMEDARY DISTRICT. 
By Ipa A. Brown, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology. 

(Plates xxxv-xxxix; three Text-figures.) © 


[Read 26th November, 1930.] 


Introduction and Previous Records. 

General Geology and Physiography. 

The Sedimentary Series. 

The Igneous Series: 
(i) Occurrence and Field Relations; (ii) Structures; (iii) Petrology of the 
Plutonic Rocks; (iv) Petrology of the Hypabyssal Rocks; (v) Petrogenesis ; 
(vi) Age of the Igneous Rocks. 

Comparison with similar Occurrences in other Parts of the World. 

Summary. 


Introduction and Previous Records. 


Mount Dromedary is an imposing mountain, more than 2,600 feet in height, 
situated a few miles inland, on the South Coast of New South Wales, about two 
hundred and fifty miles south of Sydney. The main coast road, or Prince’s 
Highway, between Sydney and Melbourne passes along the eastern foothills of the 
Mountain, through the two villages of Central Tilba and Tilba Tilba, which are 
the centres of the dairy-farming district situated on the fertile foothills of the 
Mountain. 

The Mountain was named by Captain Cook on Saturday, 21st April, 1770, two 
days after the discovery of the east coast of Australia. In his Journal, a photostat 
copy of which is in the Mitchell Library, Sydney, he states: “at 6 o’clock we were 
abreast of a pretty high mountain laying near the shore which on account of its 
figure I named Mount Dromedary Latde 36° 18’ s Longde 209° 55’ w/the shore 
under the foot of this mountain forms a point which I have named Cape Dromedary 
over which is a peaked hillick”’. 

The late Mr. R. H. Cambage (1915) was of the opinion that Cook “regarded 
Montague Island as a part of the mainland extending easterly from the Mount and 
he called it Cape Dromedary”, but Cook’s “peaked hillick’’ undoubtedly refers to 
the Little Dromedary, a hill about 700 feet high, situated between the main 
mountain and the sea, forming a conspicuous feature of the coastal scenery when 
viewed from the ocean; and therefore it seems to the writer that the point 
named by Cook is probably the headland now known as Cape Dromedary. 

Previous description of the geological nature of the area under consideration 
is confined to portion of the paper by W. Anderson (1892) “On the General 
‘Geology of the South Coast’, which includes a sketch-map showing approximately 
the outer boundaries of the igneous rocks, without recognition of the position or 
extent of the various included rock-types. 


638 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, ili, 


The specimens and microsections described in Anderson’s paper are now in 
the Mining Museum, Sydney, and were made available to the writer for examina- 
tion by the courtesy of Mr. G. W. Card, late Curator of the Museum. Anderson’s 
description of “augite granite” from Mount Dromedary is noted by Harker (1923, 
p. 37) in his “Petrology for Students’. Brief reference has been made by 
H. I. Jensen (1912) to certain rock-types occurring at the foot of Mount Dromedary, 
and also (1910, 1914) to the soils that have been derived from them. 


Reports on the goldfield of Mount Dromedary have been made by officers of 
the Department of Mines, New South Wales, and brief reference to the petrology 
has been made by Dr. W. R. Browne (1929) and the writer (1929). 


GENERAL GEOLOGY AND PHYSIOGRAPHY. 


Mount Dromedary consists of igneous rocks which have been intruded into a 
highly folded series of early Palaeozoic metamorphic rocks of sedimentary origin. 
A geological sketch-map of the district is given in Plate xxxvy. Near the Coast, 
several patches of Tertiary sediments overlie the Palaeozoic series with a marked 
unconformity, while more recent sands’ and alluvium occur as raised beaches 
round the coastal lagoons and swamps of the district, and are to be described in a 
separate communication. 

The Mountain rises to a height of 2,613 feet above sea-level, and consists 
entirely of igneous rocks (Plate xxxvi); the surrounding slates, quartz-schists, and 
related rocks rarely rise to 200 feet above sea-level. Differential erosion of the 
igneous and metamorphic rocks has produced characteristic topography, gently 
undulating country about the lower slopes of the mountain consisting of monzonite 
(Plate xxxvi), and relatively deeply dissected country in the slate area. These 
effects of differential erosion have an important bearing on the conservation and 
utilization of the soil. 

The drainage has a radial arrangement with respect to the Mountain, which 
gives rise to many permanent streams: some of these may be harnessed for power 
in the future, although at present only one has been utilized as a permanent water- 
supply for the farms about the village of Tilba Tilba. 

Tributaries of Dignam’s Creek and Karea (Courier) Creek drain the southern 
slopes of the Mountain, flowing into Wallaga Lake and entering the sea north of 
Bermagui; the waters of the eastern slope fall into Tilba Tilba swamp, on the 
south side of the Little Dromedary, or else into tributaries of Victoria Creek, which 
enters Tilba Tilba Lake; the creeks on the northern slopes, Dromedary and 
Punkally Creeks, retain their meridional trend until they meet the drowned valley 
of the Wagonga River, entering the sea at Narooma. The north-western slopes 
of Mount Dromedary are unexplored, but evidently form the watershed of Reedy 
Creek, which crosses the Dignam’s Creek road to EKurobodalla as a strong stream 
flowing to the north-north-west into Tuross River, and entering the sea through 
Lake Tuross. 

The influence of the intrusion is not confined to the production of land forms; 
the soils developed as a result of weathering have characters quite distinct from 
those of the adjacent slates and quartzites. The igneous rocks of the Dromedary 
foothills are intermediate and basic types whose decomposition products are rich 
in plant foods, and include notable amounts of phosphoric acid. As a rule these 
soils are comparable with those of the Milton district and have been described: 
by H. I. Jensen (1910, 1914). Unfortunately these soils have a limited distribution, 
the whole area of which is under cultivation for dairy-farming purposes. 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 639 


The natural vegetation bears evidence of the rich character of the soil; the 
writer is not competent to give an adequate description of the indigenous flora, 
which alone would be an interesting ecological study. It is evidently a remnant 
of a sub-tropical flora which formerly existed much to the south of its present 
limits. 


THE SEDIMENTARY SERIES. 


The principal sedimentary rocks of the district are those of early Palaeozoic 
age, which have been considerably altered to quartzites, quartz-schists, knotted 
schists and phyllites. They are portion of the older Palaeozoic series already 
described by the writer (1930), and appear te be quite unfossiliferous. They are 
of argillaceous and arenaceous character; so far as is known at present there 
are no traces of calcareous sediments. 

Although the normal trend of the strike directions for the series is north and 
south, in the vicinity of Mt. Dromedary there is considerable variation, evidently 
due to the thrust exerted by the igneous intrusion. This is clearly indicated on the 
map (Plate xxxv). 


THE IGNEOUS SERIES. 
(i) Occurrence and Field Relations. 


The igneous rocks outcrop over an oval-shaped area of approximately twenty- 
five square miles, comprising the whole mass of Mt. Dromedary and extending 
in an easterly direction to the coast, five and a half miles distant from the 
Trigonometrical Station of Mt. Dromedary. 

Montague Island, lying off the coast near Narooma, twelve miles in a direct 
line from the Dromedary Trigonometrical Station, consists of igneous rocks which 
have their exact counterparts on the mainland about Mt. Dromedary. Small 
outcrops of related types are known to occur near the township of Narooma, and 
probably others may be found when the dense coastal brush is further cleared. 

On his map of the igneous rocks of the mainland, W. Anderson (1892) 
distinguished three chief types, “Granite’’, “Andesite and Propylite’ and “Augite- 
felspar-mica-rock”. This mapping has been modified by the writer as a result of 
field-work, particularly in the eastern and southern portions of the area, but the 
north-western portion has not yet been mapped in detail. This part of the area 
consists of the steep, almost inaccessible, slopes of the mountain, which are covered 
with a dense growth of timber, undergrowth and vines. 

Within the area shown on the map (Plate xxxv) there outcrops one of the 
most interesting series of plutonic rocks yet known to occur in New South Wales. 
The plutonic complex includes a series of monzonitic rocks ranging from ultra- 
basic to sub-acid types, a related series of nepheline-bearing monzonitic rocks, and 
a garnet-bearing series, all of which are probably consanguineous, an interesting 
assemblage of calcic, monzonitic and alkaline rocks. 

Associated with the plutonic rocks are some hypabyssal types of monzonitic 
character, which are comagmatic with the plutonic series. These rocks outcrop 
at or near the borders of the main intrusion, usually between the plutonic mass 
and the adjacent sediments. 

The relations between the plutonic and hypabyssal types are best revealed on 
Montague Island (Text-figure 1). The Island consists of two rocky masses united 
by a narrow strip of sand, only a few feet above sea-level. The southern “Island” 
consists of coarsely crystalline, porphyritic syenite or banatite, similar to one 


640 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


of the types outcropping on the slopes of Mt. Dromedary, and the north “Island” 
is composed chiefly of hypabyssal types similar to those occurring on the main- 
land. The junction of the two rocks obviously formed a surface of weakness along 
which erosion has taken place; but fortunately a small remnant of the syenite 
still survives in the south-eastern portion of the north Island, and its contact with 
the hypabyssal types is well exposed in the cliff-sections. 


SKETCH-MAP 


OF 
MONTAGUE 
ISLAND 


“JTunction of lamprophyre 
and ponphyritic hanatite 


3 vy 


AG Ss as ES => W. WA 
Se . Sis \ 


¢ . 
ant O. 4 \PRY. 
Seen Troe Bs ' 5 


a BOA : Sy 
Git 7 tN Ga ox 
We 


SSS 


2 
ar) 
c 
y rea) Ey 
aoa Sy wip : 
10 eer BO ean cS) 
Wi 2 Ss The Two Brot ifs ate S 
Ae ee / be mee see 
MECH whe WWD yg 
a She Zi ©) 
i) Eas 


\ 
e Dykes V5) Joints SK 
Recent Sand 


ZG ¢@ @ aq } 
CN ARN 
p! = 

; 38 
Tertiary Sandstone SZ 


HAN, Bok MOREY 
we: LA poe ; 


Lamprophyric Rocks VEZ 


Porphyritic Banatite “4 
«) 200 600 800 YARDS 


0 , MILES 
1.A.B. delt. ‘ 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 641 


The writer is indebted to the Commonwealth Navigation Department for 
permission to visit Montague Island, and to Mr. and Mrs. McCarthy for hospitality 
during the visit. 


The “syenite’ on Montague Island was quarried for the construction of the 
Lighthouse and the lightkeeper’s residence on the Island, and the bases of six of 
the columns of the Pitt Street frontage of the General Post Office, Sydney, consist 
of stone from the Island. R. T. Baker (1909, Pl. vi) gives a coloured illustration 
of this building stone under the name of Montague Island granite. 


(ii) Structures. 

Jointing is a conspicuous structure in the igneous rocks wherever they are 
well-exposed and free of overlying soil. In the fine-grained banatite forming the 
upper portions of Mt. Dromedary, widely spaced master-jointing occurs, but it is 
better developed and more conspicuous in the porphyritic monzonite forming the 
top of the Little Dromedary, where the sheer western face of cliffs, a hundred or 
more feet in height, is due to the development of strong vertical jointing in a 
direction N. 30° E., with less pronounced jointing at right angles. 

On Montague Island the structure is even more pronounced, and has been 
responsible for the initial development of the large tors, up to 25 or 30 feet in 
height, which are characteristic of the South “Island”. Along the eastern coast 
of the South “Island”, the joints running in a direction west of north are 
crowded together as shown in the photograph (Plate xxxvii). Towards the 
junction of the porphyritic monzonite of the South “Island” and the hypabyssal 
rocks of the North “Island’’, the two sets of joints at right angles to this direction 
have been planes of weakness along which the hypabyssal rocks have been 
intruded in dyke-like and sill-like fashion. 

The hypabyssal rocks themselves are jointed in the same directions indicating 
that similar stresses operated on both series of igneous rocks. 

Jointing is not so noticeable in the normal monzonites, as, on the whole, 
these have formed soils which are under cultivation; nevertheless, it may be 
seen in the road-cuttings and quarry near Central Tilba. 

In the pyroxenite forming the rock platform at Poole’s Point, north of the 
mouth of Tilba Tilba Lake, jointing occurs in two chief directions, N. 50° W. and 
W. 10° S. 

The directions of the dykes through the igneous rocks and the adjacent 
sediments do not seem to conform to any simple arrangement; some of these 
dykes are indicated on the map (Plate xxxv); the majority of those which 
outcrop along the coast and on Montague Island strike north of east, others 
run east and west, and at right angles to this direction. The andesitic dykes on 
the top of Mount Dromedary, which are responsible for some of the auriferous 
deposits there, strike north of west. 

There is a slight tendency towards a radial arrangement of the dykes about 
the Mountain, but many irregularities occur. 


(iii) Petrology of the Plutonic Rocks. 

Most of the specimens on which the following descriptions are based were 
collected by the writer, and are in the Museum of the Department of Geology, 
Sydney University, numbered M.401, etc., but reference is also made to the 
specimens collected and described by W. Anderson, 1892, which are in the 
Mining Museum, George Street North, Sydney. 


642 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


Chemical analyses of the chief rock-types have been carried out by the 
writer in the laboratory of the Geological Department of the University of 
Sydney. 


Monzonitic Series. 


1. Banatite (Syenite). . 

The most acid members of the plutonic series outcrop on the upper slopes 
of the Dromedary Mountain, from the summit (2,613 feet) down to about 550 
feet above sea-level, where the rock grades into a coarsely porphyritic type, 
comparable with that occurring on Montague Island. 

A series of specimens collected along the track from Tilba Tilba township 
to the top of Mt. Dromedary shows a progressive variation in the character of 
the rock. The upper portion of the Mountain consists of rather fine-grained 
syenitic rock, which may be called banatite. It is pinkish-grey in colour and 
consists essentially of felspathic minerals, with a small amount of finely divided 
ferromagnesian mineral; scattered phenocrysts of felspar increase in size and 
abundance on the lower slopes of the Mountain, until the rock apparently merges 
into a coarsely porphyritic type of monzonite. Quartz is inconspicuous in the 
handspecimen, but the rock is rarely free from at least traces of iron ores, both 
oxides and sulphide. Near the top of the Mountain narrow auriferous veins of 
pyrites occasionally occur through the banatite, these being probably of magmatic 
origin, while the effects of deuteric processes are evident throughout the finely- 
grained phases of the banatite. Thus it is difficult to obtain specimens of banatite 
which appear to be absolutely fresh. 


Under the microscope the rock (Pl. xxxviii, fig. 1) appears to be hypidio- 
morphic granular with a strong tendency to monzonitic fabric; the average grain- 
size is from 1 to 2 millimetres. The minerals present are orthoclase (anortho- 
clase), plagioclase, quartz and hornblende, with smaller amounts of biotite, augite, 
sphene, apatite, iron ore, and alteration and deuteric minerals including chlorite, 
epidote, calcite, kaolin and secondary felspar (albite). Some specimens contain 
traces of fluorspar (M.404) and others have analcite and zeolite (M.453, M.465), 
which are probably of deuteric origin. 

Orthoclase occurs as subidiomorphic crystals and as irregular plates enclosing 
other minerals. Frequently there is a parallel intergrowth with plagioclase of 
the composition Ab, AN, Which appears to be primary and which is distinct from 
the subsequent deuteric alteration to albite, kaolin and carbonate material. 

Plagioclase as subidiomorphic crystals 1 to 2 millimetres in length, and as 
somewhat larger phenocrysts, constitutes almost one-half of the volume of this 
rock. The mineral is slightly zoned, with well-developed twinning after albite 
and Carlsbad laws; the composition appears to be between Ab w»ANsy and Ab, ANg, 
for the banatite series. 

Quartz, although inconspicuous in the handspecimen, appears under the 
microscope to form an important part of the rock; the grains are always small, 
and usually take an interstitial réle with respect to the more idiomorphic 
felspars. In the norm it is present to the extent of 16 per cent. of the rock. 

Hornblende is sparsely distributed throughout, and is similar in character to 
the variety commonly occurring in syenites. It is subidiomorphic, the grains being 
usually less than 2 millimetres in length; it is greenish-brown in colour, with 
rather weak pleochroism, and well-developed cleavage. This mineral seems to 
have been particularly susceptible to alteration, magmatic or otherwise, and is 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 643 


now partly replaced by carbonate (probably calcite), vivid green chloritic 
material and epidote. In some specimens the alteration products include small 
amounts of a violet isotropic mineral, apparently fluorspar, whose presence 
indicates alteration of the original hornblende during the later phases of con- 
solidation of the magma, rather than merely superficial weathering. 


In addition to its occurrence as an alteration product of hornblende, calcite 
occurs in the interstices between idiomorphic felspars as a product of primary 
erystallization. Grains of sphene and iron oxides have formed centres for the 
erystallization of the ferromagnesian mineral, hornblende. Some small irregular 
grains of biotite are included in larger plates of felspar, and several grains of 
colourless pyroxene are scattered through the rock. 


A chemical analysis of the freshest available specimen of this type is given 
in Column I, Table 1, where it is compared with analyses of several similar rocks. 

The silica percentage is lower than that of a truly acid rock, while the 
relatively high alkali percentage shows the relationship of this rock to the 
monzonitic or alkaline series; nevertheless, there is a striking general resemblance 
to the analysis, quoted in Column V, of the Moruya granodiorite, which is a 
member of a typical subalkaline or calcic series, outcropping about 30 miles 
north of Mt. Dromedary. 

The silica, alumina and total iron oxide percentages are very similar in the 
two rocks, the chief difference being that total lime and magnesia are about 
2 per cent. less and the total alkalis 34 per cent. greater in the banatite than in 


TABLE 1. 

I Ta II III IV W 
SiO, . 64-49 1-075 65°54 64°64 63-86 65:72 
Al,O; . 17-48 0-172 17°81 16:27 17-87 17-63 
Fe.0; . 1-64 0-010 0-74 2-42 Wo reag of 0:42 
FeO 1-69 0-024 1-15 1-58 Sf ay 2-80 
MgO 0-66 0-016 0-98 ee 0-99 1-73 
CaO 3-28 0-059 1-92 2-65 3°33 4-36 
Na,O 4-16 0-067 555 4-39 4-10 3-14 
K,0 4-79 0-051 5-58 4-98 3°56 2-12 
H,0+ 0-52 - ne Henn { 0:27 a een Jf 1-03 
H.,0— 0-18 — Jf 0-09 Sf AL 0:06 
TiO, 0-46 0-006 0-11 0-51 0-41 
P20; 0-22 0-001 tr 0-37 0-19 
MnO 0-11 0-001 tr. tr: 0-08 
ZrO, — 0-19 
SrO 0-08 tr 
BaO .. 20 G0 ? 0-18 abs 
COMES: a 5 0-71 0-016 tr. 0-37 
SO; 3 a5 i tr 
S a ee ae 0-06 0-002 0-13 
Cr.O; .. Se nes abs. abs. 
NiO, CoO pr. tr 
Ce) tees 0-05 
Total .. a .. | 100-45 99-92 100-12 100-01 
Sp. Gr. ag # 2-653 2-729 


644 ' GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


TABLE la. 

I II Til IV Vv 
Quartz... Se i mes Ae 15°78 6:18 13-68 25:92 
Orthoclase .. Sie Se os 28°36 32-80 29-47 12-23 
Albite .. 5 Me ahs Bo 35-11 47-16 37:20 26°72 
Anorthite Bis si se ar 11-12 1 0283 10-01 20°85 
Corundum ae A aa Je 1:43 = - 2-55 
Zircon .. AS ae a as — _ — 0-37 
Diopside 0 es otG b6 1-79 0-22 = 
Hypersthene .. 2-66 2-96 Bop} 8-26 
Magnetite ie We ake 2°32 1:16 3:48 0-70 
Ilmenite hs aye ae a6 0-91 0-15 0-91 0-76 
Apatite 0-34 0°34 
Calcite . . 1-60 = 
Pyrite .. 0:12 0:24 


I. Banatite (Toscanose, I, 4”, 2, 3). Mt. Dromedary, N.S.W., 1,175 feet above sea- 
level, track from Tilba Tilba to Summit. Anal. I.A.B. 


Ia. Molecular numbers for I. 


II. ‘Syenite [Pulaskose, I, “5, (1)2, 3(4)]. Top of Highwood Peak, Highwood 
Mountains, Montana. L. V. Pirsson and W. L. Mitchell, anal. U.S.G.S. Bull. No. 237, 
1905, p. 63. Norm in Washington’s Tables (1916), p. 287. 


III. Syenite [Toscanose, I”, 4(5), 2, 8”’]. Wright and Edward’s Mine, Barker, 
Little Belt Mountains, Montana. W. F. Hillebrand, analyst. Ann. Rept. U.S.G.S., 20, 
1900, p. 466. Norm in W.T. (1916), p. 177. 


IV. Banatite. Oberwald b. Steinau, Odenwald. Dr. Sonne (Lepsius). Quoted from 
W. C. Brégger, Die Eruptiv-gesteine des Kristianiagebietes, II, 1895, p. 62. 


V. Granodiorite (Yellowstonose, I(1II), 4, 3, 4). Dorman, Long and Coy.’s Quarry, 
Moruya, N.S.W. Anal. I.A.B. These PROCEEDINGS, liii, 1928, p. 162. 


the granodiorite, due to the somewhat greater abundance of felspar and corres- 
ponding scarcity of ferromagnesian constituents in the banatite, a mineralogical 
variation which is reflected in the slight difference in the specific gravity values 
of the two rocks. 


The analyses quoted in Columns II and III not only represent individual 
rocks which are similar in composition to the banatite of Mount Dromedary, but 
are corresponding members of two igneous series in the Highwood Mountains and 
the Little Belt Mountains of Montana, which in many ways are analogous to the 
series at Mt. Dromedary. 


These Montana rocks are described as syenites, although Pirsson (1895, 
p. 467) recognized the Barker syenite as ‘verging toward the monzonitic group of 
Brégger”, and (1905, p.. 65) that the Highwood Peak syenite belonged to “the 
alkaline series of syenites’’. 


Brégger (1895, p. 63) applied the term “banatite’” to the series of rocks inter- 
mediate between the monzonites and the adamellites, with a silica percentage 
between 62 and 66, a typical example of which is quoted in Column IV. On 
account of the similarity of the Mount Dromedary rock and Brggger’s type, the 
term banatite has been applied to the Mount Dromedary rock, although syenite 
might be permissible and useful as a field name. 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 645 


2. Porphyritic Monzonite. 

Towards the lower slopes of Mount Dromedary the somewhat finely-crystalline 
banatite grades into a more coarsely-crystalline phase in which large felspar 
crystals constitute about one-half the volume of the roek, and the groundmass 
itself is coarse grained. This phase has been traced along the eastern and north- 
eastern flanks of the mountain, between the banatite previously described and a 
coarse even-grained monzonite to be described later. 

The upper portion of the Little Dromedary, R.9, Parish of Narooma, higher 
than about 500 feet above sea-level, consists of similar rock, and another weathered 
outcrop occurs north of this in portions 219, 69, and 328, Parish of Narooma. 


The southern “Island’” of Montague Island consists of rock which cannot be 
distinguished from this coarsely porphyritic monzonite. The rock has weathered 
to give huge, bare and rounded rock-masses on the slopes of the main Mountain 
and the Little Dromedary, and the large tors of Montague Island (Plate xxxvii). 


The field relations are not very clear; it appears to grade into the banatite, 
but sometimes shows sharp boundaries against the monzonite exposed in the 
south-western part of Portion 220, Parish of Narooma. On Montague Island it is 
in sharp contact with members of the hypabyssal series, by which it is intruded 
along joint planes. 

Individual specimens show slight variations, but all are characterized by 
large tabular phenocrysts of felspar, set in a coarsely-crystalline groundmass. 
The phenocrysts may be four or five centimetres in length, and consist of glassy- 
grey, simply-twinned crystals of orthoclase (not labradorite, as stated by Baker, 
1909), with a sporadic distribution of smaller phenocrysts of plagioclase. Both 
plagioclase and orthoclase may be recognized in the groundmass, and the ferro- 
magnesian minerals appear to be hornblende and biotite; no quartz has been 
detected in the handspecimen. 

The rock outcropping near the track from Tilba Tilba up Mount Dromedary, 
at a height of about 500 feet above sea-level, is representative of this type, a 
specimen of which was chosen for chemical analysis. 

Under the microscope, the rock shows monzonitic fabric, and the grainsize 
of the groundmass is coarse, 2 to 5 millimetres. The idiomorphic orthoclase 
phenocrysts show Carlsbad twinning and well-developed cleavage. They are partly 
kaolinized. Small regularly-arranged inclusions of apatite, biotite, and augite 
are probably the cause of the opalescence evident in some of the phenocrysts; 
occasionally there is a parallel .intergrowth with included plagioclase crystals, 
up to one millimetre in length. 

The groundmass contains orthoclase, plagioclase, quartz, augite, hornblende, 
biotite, apatite, sphene, iron ore, and alteration products, including chlorite, 
epidote, kaolin, sericite, calcite, and albite. 

The orthoclase of the groundmass is allotriomorphic and encloses crystals 
of the other minerals; it appears to have suffered some albitization; some of the 
' felspar included here is really myrmekite-perthite. 

Plagioclase is idiomorphic, and is slightly zoned. It is commonly twinned 
after Carlsbad, albite and pericline laws, and one section (M.518) shows crossed 
Baveno twinning, making a fourling (cf. Iddings, 1916, p. 209). The mineral 
is andesine of composition Ab,;An,, to Ab,,AND3;. 

Quartz is present in small quantity as interstitial grains. 

Occasionally small grains of colourless pyroxene, partly altered to and 
surrounded by greenish amphibole, indicate that although the augite evidently 


646 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


crystallized first, magmatic conditions later favoured the production of horn- 
blende and biotite. 

The hornblende is subidiomorphic, and has a greenish-brown colour, with 
strong pleochroism; it occurs in close association with brown, pleochroic biotite, 
and both minerals have suffered alteration to chloritic and carbonate material, 
probably calcite. 


Iron ore is relatively abundant as small irregular grains, and apatite appears 
as acicular needles and larger crystals. 


The rock outcropping on the upper portions of the Little Dromedary resembles, 
in general, the type described above, but the material available is not so fresh 
and unaltered. The general mineral assemblage is similar, although there is 
evidently a deficiency in silica as compared with the Mountain type, which is 
indicated by the absence of quartz and the occasional presence of a small amount 
of allotriomorphic nepheline between the larger crystals of felspar. There is some 
alteration of the nepheline to cancrinite (M.464). 


At the western end of the Little Dromedary a similar coarse-grained variety 
contains rather less ferromagnesian mineral. The microslide shows the presence 
of albitized orthoclase, anorthoclase, and plagioclase; quartz is absent. Small 
amounts of hornblende, biotite, sphene, iron ore and apatite are present. 


One specimen shows a vein containing radiating zeolite, and drusy cavities 
lined with idiomorphic felspar crystals. 


Galena has been reported from this locality and probably occurs in small 
quantity in these drusy cavities as last products of consolidation of the magma. 


The outcrop of porphyritic monzonite in portions 219, 69 and 328, north of 
the Little Dromedary, is in most places so weathered that it has been quarried 
as “Granite Gravel’ for road-making purposes. The solid rock shows pheno- 
erysts of orthoclase, two centimetres in length, and not quite so abundant as in 
the Mountain monzonite. These are set in a fine-grained, light-coloured ground- 
mass of aplitic appearance, and consisting of quartz, orthoclase, plagioclase, and 
chloritic material, the latter evidently being the remains of ferromagnesian 
minerals. It is probable that this rock was originally a more acid type than the 
other porphyritic varieties. 


The Montague Island syenite is almost indistinguishable from the porphyritic 
monzonite outcropping on Mount Dromedary. Close examination shows that 
deuteric processes have been more active, resulting in the alteration of some of 
the essential minerals and in the production of certain accessory minerals. This 
is indicated in the handspecimen by the dull greenish-grey colour of the horn- 
blende. Monzonitic fabric with lustre-mottling is well developed. As in the 
related types on the mainland, the large phenocrysts consist of simply twinned 
crystals of orthoclase; smaller crystals of oligoclase-andesine, of composition 
Ab,,An,, included in the orthoclase produce monzonitic fabric in the rock. Colour- 
less pyroxene, brown biotite, sphene, apatite and iron ore occur as inclusions in the 
orthoclase. The interstitial material of the groundmass includes a.fibrous variety 
of green hornblende developed from colourless augite, and the hornblende in turn 
alters to green epidote. In some instances the interstices between the felspar- 
erystals are filled or partly filled by calcite, with small acicular crystals of 
epidote, set in a final residuum of quartz or calcite. The orthoclase contains a 
fair proportion of myrmekite-perthite (Sederholm, 1916, p. 134) and is partly 
replaced by calcite. 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 647 


TABLE 2. 
I la II III 
SiO, 59-44 0 991 61-65 54°90 
Al,O3 19-58 0-192 15-07 17-44 
Fe,03 0-31 0-002 2:03 } RoR 
FeO 3°91 0-054 Zer2d 
MgO ier77/ 0-032 3°67 3°26 
CaO 3°95 0-070 4-61 6:96 
Na,O Bpral 0-052 4°35 3°50 
K,0 6:60 0-070 4-50 Sos: 
H.O+ 0:88 0:41 alt es 
H,O— 0:12 0:26 Jf 
TiO, 0:54 0-007 0:56 0-71 
BOF 0:07 0-001 0°33 0-51 
MnO 0:07 0-001 0:09 0:46 
srO = 0-10 
BaO ... ae a5 ans Me ans 28 — 0:27 
Co, 56 eo Sits woke oid oe he ata 0-49 0-011 
Cr,0; — r 
Li,O = tr 
Total 100-44 100-15 
Sp. Gr. . 2-679 
TABLE 2a. 
I II 
Quartz .. = ae a she ue 55 wie a ais ae 4-74 6-60 
Orthoclase ate ns sire AG as a5 an aie ah ae 38-92 26-69 
Albite  .. Ae 2a my 3 ae ae Ae Ars 5 si 27-25 36°68 
Anorthite ais i one os ae ae ane os ae ae 15-57 8-34 
Corundum Sis a re we ee See aes Me re oes 1:43 
Diopside . . — 10-10 
Hypersthene 9-27 6-02 
Magnetite ifs ae ee is oa ae aye ae ae 0:46 3:02 
Ilmenite .. at a 5 ae o'G oS See a ce awe 1-06 1:06 
Apatite 0:34 0:67 
Calcite 0-10 


I. Porphyritic Monzonite [Pulaskose, (Monzonose) I(II), 5, 2, 3]. M.517. Hastern 
slope of Mount Dromedary, N.S.W., Tilba Tilba Track, 500 feet above sea-level. Analyst, 
LA.B. 

Ia. Molecular numbers for I. 

II. Syenite [Monzonose, II, “5, 2, 3%]. Yogo Peak, Little Belt Mountains, Montana. 
Anal. W. EF. Hillebrand. Ann. Rept. U.S.G.S., No. xx, 1900, L. V. Pirsson, p. 473. 
Norm in Washington’s Tables, p. 433. 

Ill. Average Monzonite. W.C. Brégger. Die Hruptivgesteine des Kristianiagebietes, 
IM, 395 lo 


The analysis given in Column I of Table 2 is that of the coarse porphyritic 
monzonite on the eastern slope of Mount Dromedary. On account of the presence 


648 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


of numerous large phenocrysts of orthoclase, a specimen weighing 600 grammes 
was sampled as in ore treatment, and divided several times before final grinding, 
in order to obtain as accurately as possible the average composition of this rock- 
type. It is considered that the phenocrysts form an essential part of the rock 
and are not of intratelluric origin, so no attempt was made to separate them 
from the groundmass. 

The analysis is that of a monzonitic rock, with a silica percentage less than 
that required for banatite, and therefore an acid monzonite. Comparison with the 
analysis of Brégger’s average monzonite shows that the Mount Dromedary rock 
is a more acid type, which has lower percentages of iron, magnesia, and lime, 
and higher percentages of alkalis, evidently corresponding to less ferromagnesian 
and greater felspathic content in the rock compared with the average type. The 
higher potash percentage may be correlated with the phenocrysts of orthoclase. 
In the norm there is nearly 40 per cent. of orthoclase and even more plagioclase: 
in the mode there appears to be rather less plagioclase, its place being taken by 
pyroxene, containing lime, alkalis and alumina. 


According to the C.I.P.W. classification the rock falls into the subrang 
Pulaskose, I(II), 5, 2, 3, being slightly more salic than Monzonose, II, 5, 2, 3. 


The analysis quoted in Column II is that of another of the rocks from Yogo 
Peak, whose field relations to other members of that series, granite-porphyry 
and monzonite, are similar to those of the Tilba rock, and whose composition 
is close to that of the porphyritic monzonite. 


3. Coarse even-grained Monzonite. 

Outerops of this type occur round the flanks of the main Mountain and are 
particularly well exposed in the quarry near the A.B.C. Factory at Central Tilba, 
on the road to Wagonga, and in the cuttings for the main road between Central 
Tilba and Tilba Tilba villages. It also occurs in the low headland on the western 
side of Tilba Tilba Lake, Portion 39, Parish of Narooma. Naturally there are 
variations in the rock, both in grainsize and in the body-colour, depending on 
the field-relationships and mineral associations of the rock. Thus it is usually 
more finely-crystalline near the margin of the intrusion, where in some places it 
is actually in contact with the invaded sediments. There are two principal 
varieties of the coarse, even-grained monzonite, known locally and commercially 
as “grey granite’ and “black granite’. The field relations between these two 
varieties are obscure, and under the microscope there is little by which to 
distinguish them. Both types have been quarried as ornamental building-stones. 

The “grey granite’ in the handspecimen has a mottled black and white 
appearance, the light and dark coloured minerals being present in approximately 
equal proportions. The grainsize is even, the general effect being that of a rock 
whose absolute grainsize is about 3 to 4 millimetres. The minerals noticeable are 
plates of black biotite, between 1 and 2 centimetres in diameter, and crystals of 
felspar 2 or more centimetres in length, with smaller grains of dull, black ferro- 
magnesian mineral; no quartz is visible. The large plates of biotite and felspar 
show a peculiar lustre-mottling on the cleavage surfaces, due to poikilitic inclusions 
of each other and of the other constituents, which accounts for the deceptive 
appearance of smaller absolute grainsize than is actually the case. 

The “black granite’ differs from the “grey granite’ chiefly in the general 
body-colour of the rock; the same minerals are present, the grainsize may be 
slightly greater, but the felspars have a dark appearance, an optical effect possibly 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 649 


due to the mutual arrangement of the constituent minerals. A specimen in the 
Museum of the Geology Department of the University of Sydney, in the Osann 
Collection, of monzonite from Mt. Mulatto, Tyrol, is of similar texture, but the 
absolute grainsize is less. 

Under the microscope the grey monzonite shows typical monzonitic fabric, 
large plates of orthoclase enclosing optically independent grains of plagioclase and 
other minerals (Plate xxxviii, fig. 3). 

The minerals present include orthoclase, plagioclase, biotite, augite, horn- 
blende, apatite, sphene, and iron ore, with some decomposition products. 

The orthoclase occurs as large plates which are allotriomorphic, and enclose 
all the other minerals, thus appearing to have been the last mineral to have 
erystallized out. Twinning on the Carlsbad law sometimes takes place, and there 
may be marginal kaolinization. From one-third to one-half of the orthoclase 
occurs in myrmekite-like intergrowth with rods of a colourless mineral; these 
rods are so extremely fine that it is difficult to determine the exact character 
of the mineral. The refractive index is slightly greater than that of orthoclase, 
and the double refraction is weak: in a few instances larger sections of the rods 
show multiple twinning like plagioclase, but no more exact determination seems 
possible. A similar intergrowth appears in sections of the monzonite from Monte 
Mulatto, Tyrol, and in both cases a peculiar blue opalescence of the felspars in 
the handspecimens is intimately related to the occurrence of this intergrowth. 

The intergrowth (Pl. xxxviii, fig. 2) is not typical myrmekite, which, according 
to Sederholm’s definition (1916, p. 134), “is an intergrowth of plagioclase and 
vermicular quartz’. The appearance is similar to his figure 41, Plate vii, a 
photograph of a quartz-gabbro from Neder-Tornea, Finland, showing ‘“potash- 
felspar containing vermicular plagioclase and small drop-like inclusions of the 
same mineral” described by him (pp. 126 and 134) as myrmekite-perthite. 


In the Mount Dromedary rock there seems no reason for supposing that 
the intergrowth is other than a primary structure, “formed in continuation of the 
crystallisation processes of the original magma of the rock’ (Sederholm, p. 127), 
and in this case it is not a subsequent effect of contact metamorphism, which 
may be the cause in other instances, of myrmekitic structures. 


Furthermore, there is no evidence of a replacement of plagioclase by the 
myrmekite-perthite, which occurs in rounded and irregular grains in exactly the 
same way as orthoclase, while the plagioclase retains its idiomorphic boundaries 
towards the potash felspars (Pl. xxxviii, fig. 3). 

Plagioclase is present as idiomorphic crystals varying in length from 1 to 5 
millimetres, and is included in both potash-felspar and biotite. The refractive 
index is greater than that of Canada Balsam. Twinning occurs after albite, 
Carlsbad and pericline laws, occasionally with interpenetration twinning. Zoning 
is only slightly developed. It is andesine of composition Ab,An, to Ab,,An,;. 

No quartz has been noticed in the ‘grey granite’. 

Biotite occurs as large tabular flakes, yellowish-brown in thin section, and 
strongly pleochroic. It has inclusions of iron ore, apatite, augite, green horn- 
blende, and plagioclase. 

The monoclinic pyroxene, while appearing as a dull-black mineral in the hand- 
specimen, has only a pale greenish-grey colour in thin section. It occurs as idio-, 
morphic to subidiomorphic crystals about one millimetre or less in length, with 
well-developed cleavage, and sometimes shows simple twinning. In many instances 
it shows marginal alteration to green hornblende, which has continued crystal- 


650 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


lizing after the augite and produced also independent idiomorphic crystals. This 
hornblende has a bright-green colour in thin section and is pleochroic from green 
to yellowish-green, the variety common in syenites. 


Sphene is scarce, but occurs as small irregular grains. 
ilmenite, and apatite are present as small grains. 


Iron ore, chiefly 


The dark variety of the coarse even-grained monzonite, known commercially 
as “black granite” shows greater differences from the ‘grey granite’ in the hand- 
specimen than it does in thin section. 


It shows similar monzonitic fabric and contains all the minerals previously 
described as occurring in the grey variety. Determinations of the composition 
of the plagioclase show that it is consistently more basic than in the lighter 
coloured rock, ranging from labradorite Ab,,An,, to andesine, Ab,AN,y. In addition, 
a small quantity of quartz is usually present. 


The chemical analysis of the light-coloured monzonite is stated in Column I 
of Table 3. In all respects it is that of a typical monzonite, and is closely com- 
parable with the monzonite of Monzoni, Tyrol, whose analysis, as given by 
Brégger, is quoted in Column II. 


TABLE 3. 

I Ta II Til IV Vv 
SiO, 51-09 0-851 54-20 53-90 54-42 51-00 
Al,O; .. 16°11 0-158 15-73 Is 9832) 14-28 WGforail 
HesOxee 3:11 0-019 3°67 3°60 3°32 2-41 
FeO 6°58 0-092 5-40 Heats 4-13 4-23 
MgO 4-69 0-117 3°40 2-41 6°12 6-19 
CaO 9-10 0:163 8-50 7-30 U2 9-15 
Na,O .. 3°29 0-053 3:07 3307/33 3°44 2-88 
K,0 3°94 0-042 4-42 3°44 4-22 4-93 
H,O+.. 0-66 ie 0:97 0:22 : 
Heo =e 0-10 } EN { 0-74 0-38 O63 
TiO, 1:02 0-013 0-40 2°86 0-80 0-13 
P,0; 0:77 0-006 0-50 0:55 0-59 0:33 
MnO 0-18 0-003 0:70 0-36 0-10 tr. 
ZrO, abs. 
sro tr. 0-138 0-14 
BaO abs. 0:06 0:32 0:34 
co, abs. 0-03 
So, abs. Q 0-03 
rs) re abs. 
OHO oc abs. 
NiO, CoO 0:02 
Cl 0:02 cre tr: 
FE abs. 
Li,O pr. tr. 
V2.0; 0-02 
CuO 0-01 
Total .. 100°64 100-49 100-47 100-19 99-60 
Sp. Gr. 2-871 2-779 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 651 


TABLE 3a, 

I II Til IV Vv 
Quartz. . 20 3c SC 310 im 4-44 | 
Orthoclase .. 43 ae dB 23°35 26-1 20-02 25-02 | 28-91 
Albite .. 5.0 ai ays oe 20-44 26°2 31:44 28°82 9-96 
Anorthite ae Ue us 17-51 15-8 15:01 11:12 19°46 
Nepheline a6 Sis ae ics 3°98 — — — 7°95 
Diopside Oe As ‘eg ie 18-18 18-4 14:09 18-81 19-40 
Hypersthene .. whe ne ee - 3°3 1-50 1:80 — 
Olivine. . : Pa ahs Ms 8-12 2°8 — 5:98 | 8-29 
Magnetite a re ie ms 4-41 5:3 5-34 4-87 3:48 
Ilmenite 1-98 0:8 5:47 1:52 0-15 
Apatite 2-02 1108} 1:34 1:34 0:67 
Remainder 0-2 1:14 


I. Coarse Monzonite (‘‘Grey Granite’). [Shoshonose (Monzonose) II(III), 5, 
(2)3, 3]. Quarry, Central Tilba, N.S.W. Anal. I.A.B. 

Ia. Molecular numbers for lI. 

II. Monzonite (Monzonose II’, 5, 2’, 3). Monzoni, Tyrol. Anal. V. Schmelk. W. C. 
Brégger, Die Eruptivgesteine des Kristianiagebietes, II, 1895, p. 24. Norm from Iddings, 
TOO. Wok 3B 595 WE ; 

III. Monzonite-porphyry [Shoshonose. II, “5, (2)3, 3(4)]. 2% miles north of 
Milton, N.S.W. Anal. H. P. White. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., VIII, 1905, 85. Norm 
insite, Ds 4109. 

IV. Monzonite (Yogoite) [Monzonose, II(III), 5, 2, 3]. Yogo Peak, Little Belt 
Mountains, Montana. Anal. W. F. Hillebrand. Ann. Rept. U.S.G.S., xx, 1900, p. 478. 
Also in W.T., p. 4338. 

V. Monzonite (Shoshonose, II, 5, 3, 3). Highwood Peak, Montana. Anal. E. B. 
Hurlburt. U.S.G.S. Bull. No. 237, 1905, pp. 79, 81. 


The occurrence of hypabyssal monzonitic rocks at Milton, about 100 miles 
north of Mount Dromedary, has been described by G. W. Card (1905, 1915) and 
the writer (1925). These rocks have a chemical composition remarkably close 
to that of the Mt. Dromedary monzonite, and for comparison the analysis of one 
of the Milton rocks is given in Column III. It is probable that the analysis in 
Column I represents approximately the average composition of the magma from 
which the variety of rock-types in the Mt. Dromedary intrusion was derived. It 
ig of special interest that this rock is chemically similar, not only to the Milton 
series, but also to the series of flows interbedded in the Permo-Carboniferous 
sediments of the Illawarra District, a fact which is surely more than a coincidence, 
and which will be discussed in more detail later. 


The analyses quoted in columns IV and V are of similar rocks in the two 
series in Montana, which in general may be compared with the Mt. Dromedary 
series. 


The norms of both the Tilba and Highwood Peak rocks contain nepheline and 
olivine, indicating undersaturation in silica, although these normative minerals 
do not occur in the mode in either case. The “Yogoite”’ contains some normative 
olivine, and normative quartz occurs in the Milton rock. 


Finer-grained monzonites of the same general character occur near the margin 
of the intrusion surrounding the main Mountain, and are represented by specimens 


M 


652 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


from the north-eastern, southern and western flanks of the Mountain: to the east 
there is a series of specially differentiated types. 

These monzonites differ chiefly in the fineness of their grainsize, which 
averages less than one millimetre. The monzonitic fabric is generally not so 
conspicuous as in the coarser types, although the same minerals are present in 
similar proportions. Usually there is a small amount of quartz present. 


A peculiar variation of the rock is developed at Grassy Knob, on the main 
road between Tilba Tilba and Cobargo, 5 miles from the village of Tilba Tilba. The 
outcrop is shown on Anderson’s map (1892) as an apophysis from the Mt. 
Dromedary intrusion. On account of the rough nature of the country and the 
dense vegetation here the writer has been unable to confirm the continuity of this 
outcrop with the main intrusion. The rock is unlike any other in the district, 
although doubtless it is related petrologically to the monzonitic series. It has a 
dioritic appearance in the handspecimen, being holocrystalline and fine-grained; 
the average grainsize is less than one millimetre. It appears to contain equal 
proportions of light and dark constituents, the latter being black biotite and dark- 
green glassy pyroxene crystals, about 5 mm. in length. 

Under the microscope the rock is seen to be somewhat altered; it is holo- 
crystalline, with variable grainsize and monzonitic fabric. It consists of ortho- 
clase, plagioclase, augite, biotite, apatite, sphene, and iron ore. Secondary products 
include kaolin, epidote, chlorite, and interstitial calcite. Unlike all other types 
of this series, the rock contains only a very small amount of hornblende. 

The orthoclase occurs as small plates enclosing idiomorphic plagioclase 
crystals, and is usually covered with kaolin. The plagioclase is labradorite of 
the composition AD,AN,g. 

The pyroxene occurs as idiomorphic crystals and irregular grains, almost 
colourless in the centre of a large crystal, and darker greenish-grey near the 
margin; it frequently shows multiple twinning and alteration to greenish chloritic 
material, or more rarely to greenish hornblende. 

Biotite occurs as ragged flakes, containing poikilitic inclusions of all the 
other minerals. It is yellowish-brown in thin section, appearing somewhat 
bleached, and showing anomalous interference colours. Alteration to epidote 
occurs in lenticular areas along the cleavage surfaces. Apatite, sphene, and 
iron ore occur as small irregular grains. 


4. Olivine-Monzonite. 


Another marginal phase of the Dromedary mass outcrops two and a half 
miles from Tilba Tilba on the road to Cobargo, as a typical olivine-monzonite. 

The rock is remarkably fresh. In the handspecimen it has a doleritic appear- 
ance, the dark minerals predominating. The average grainsize is a little more 
than one millimetre. The minerals visible macroscopically are prismatic augite, 
felspar and biotite. 

Under the microscope (PI. xxxviii, fig. 4) the rock is seen to be holocrystalline, 
the grainsize slightly variable, the average being about one millimetre, and the 
fabric is monzonitic. The minerals include both plagioclase and orthoclase, augite, 
olivine, biotite, sphene, apatite, and iron ore. 

The plagioclase occurs as abundant idiomorphic, prismatic crystals, which 
show slight zoning, and twinning after Carlsbad, albite and pericline laws. They 
consist of andesine of the composition Ab,;;An,, and are set in a monzonitic 
fashion in allotriomorphic plates of orthoclase several millimetres in diameter. 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 653 


The augite occurs as idiomorphic crystals up to 4 or 5 millimetres in length, 
thus appearing as small phenocrysts in thin section, or as groups of crystals 
producing local glomeroporphyritic texture. It is pale-green or greenish-grey in 
colour, sometimes showing slight colour-zoning, with well-developed prismatic 


TABLE 4. 

I Ta II Til 
SiOz) ae ss ats ao: ay ble 51-14 0-852 50-35 52-09 
Al,O; 16-91 0-166 15-76 11-93 
Fe,0; 1-34 0-008 Q32, 1-84 
FeO hot 0-101 7:30 oul 
MgO 5°88 0-147 7:40 12-48 
CaO 9-68 0:173 10-12 7:84 
Na,;0 1-92 0-031 2°75 2-04 
KOR eae 3°32 0-035 3°89 3:01 

H,O+ .. 0:54 — : , 
H,O- .. 0:20 — } re Oo 
TiO, 0:92 0-011 0:30 0-73 
P20; 0-53 0-004 0:39 0°34 
MnO 0-14 0-002 0:35 0-15 
Cr.03 0-10 
NiO, CoO 0:07 
Cl tr 
Total .. ae Po Pc ae om oh 99-79 101-38 100-24 
Sp. Gr. .. ae ae Be 32 is 2 3-017 2-94 

TABLE 4a. 

I II Til 
Orthoclase x on Se ee Be se as ae 19-46 22-8 17-79 
Albite .. is Bo ok He ae ae ae Ks 16-24 11-0 17-29 
Anorthite tp a ys a ae ais ae Ba 27-80 18-3 14-46 
Nepheline a a whe aa ie as oy ne =_ 6:5 - 
Diopside. . A Bs oes et eS ie ae a 13-66 23-6 18-04 
Hypersthene .. 6 ae oe Sie ae ids AN 11-28 — 12-04 
Olivine .. a igs ot ie tos ee ss ats 5-70 13-1 15-14 
Magnetite ae ae re ae ws a a 1-86 3°5 2-78 
Iimenite. . af ao Be Be a 5 oe ee 1-67 0:6 1:37 
Apatite .. 1:34 1:0 0-67 


I. Olivine-Monzonite [Shoshonose, (Kentallenose) II(III), 5, 3(4), 3]. Two and a 
half miles from Tilba Tilba towards Cobargo, N.S.W. Anal. I.A.B. 

Ia. Molecular numbers for I. 

II. Olivine-Monzonite (? Kentallenose, ‘III, 5’, 3, 3). Smalingen, Sweden. Anal. V. 
Schmelck. W. C. Brggger, Die Eruptivgesteine des Kristianiagebietes, II, 1895, pp. 46, 
50. Norm quoted from Iddings, Vol. ii, p. 221. Also in W.T., p. 1003. 

III. Kentallenite (Kentallenose, III, 5, 3, 8). Glen Shira, Argyllshire, Scotland. 
W. Pollard, Anal. Hill and Kynaston, Q.J.G.S., Vol. 56, 1900, p. 537. In W.T., p. 603. 


654 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


cleavage and high extinction angle. Occasionally there is extremely weak pleo- 
chroism, but the extinction is always oblique, so that no rhombic pyroxene appears 
to be present. -Twinning is common. The mineral is remarkably fresh, and shows 
no trace of alteration to amphibole, such as is frequent in other members of the 
series. ‘ 

Olivine is fairly abundant as subidiomorphic grains up to one and a half 
millimetres in length, often quite unaltered; it may show irregular cracks along 
which alteration is taking place to green serpentinous material. 

Biotite is not very conspicuous in thin section, as it contains numerous 
poikilitic inclusions, and appears as irregular interstitial grains, which are 
optically continuous over areas of several square millimetres. Sphene is scarce, 
apatite occurs aS numerous small crystals, often acicular and included in plagio- 
clase; iron ore is present as rounded grains and as a secondary product of olivine. 

The order of consolidation appears to be approximately as follows: the minor 
constituents, apatite, sphene, and iron ore first, followed by the erystallization of 
olivine, augite, and plagioclase, then biotite and orthoclase forming a final 
mesostasis. 

A chemical analysis of this rock given in Column I of Table 4 shows that 
it is a typical olivine-monzonite according to the definition of Brégger, who 
gives the analysis, quoted in Column II, of an olivine-monzonite from Sweden; 
the latter is not a first class analysis, the figures for the alkalis apparently being 
accepted from a previous analysis (Brggger, II, p. 63), and appearing to be some- 
what high. 

The analysis of a distinct, although related type, the kentallenite of Argyll- 
shire, is quoted in Column III. : 

The three analyses are comparable so far as silica and alkalis are concerned, 
but differ in the relative proportions of alumina, magnesia and lime: the olivine- 
monzonites from Tilba and Sweden are very similar, but contain about 5 per cent. 
more alumina and a correspondingly smaller amount of magnesia than the kental- 
lenite. This difference of chemical composition is expressed mineralogically by a 
greater proportion of felspar in the olivine-monzonite and an increase of olivine 
and augite in the kentallenite. 

Thus the two rock types are not identical, as is sometimes erroneously stated 
(Hatch, p. 206), although they are related to one another and also to the 
shonkinite group, as pointed out by Hill and Kynaston (1900). 


5. Olivine-Shonkinite. 


Another interesting differentiation product of the Dromedary magma forms 
a small hill on which the village of Tilba Tilba is situated, in the “saddle’’ between 
Mount Dromedary and the Little Dromedary. It covers less than 40 acres in 
area, and is bounded on the west and north by medium-grained monzonites, on 
the south by a lamprophyric member of the complex, and on the east by the 
Tilba Tilba Swamp; unfortunately alluvium and soil totally obscure its contact 
with these rocks. 

The rock is black, holocrystalline, medium-grained and rather heavy; some 
variation in the composition of the rock evidently occurs, but is difficult to 
observe in the handspecimen, which appears to consist of pyroxene, some black 
mica showing lustre-mottling, and a felspar sometimes exhibiting blue opalescence. 

Under the microscope (Plate xxxviii, fig. 5) the rock is holocrystalline, with 
gabbroic fabric; the average grainsize is 1 to 2 millimetres. Different thin 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 655 


sections, even of the same handspecimen, show slight mineralogical variations, 
but the rock appears to consist essentially of about equal proportions of augite 
and orthoclase, with small quantities of biotite and olivine, and accessory apatite 
and iron ore. Some sections show, in addition, one or more of the following 
minerals: nepheline, anorthoclase, microcline, and plagioclase, which, however, 
are not present in sufficient quantity seriously to affect the composition of the 
rock. 

The pyroxene is a greenish-grey variety of diopside, whose form is idio- 
morphic to subidiomorphic, the crystals being from 1 to 3 millimetres in length. It 
frequently shows simple twinning and basal salite striation is particularly well 
developed. The pyroxene constitutes about 40 per cent. of the rock. 

Olivine is fairly abundant as crystals up to a millimetre in length. It is clear 
and colourless, and shows characteristic decomposition along cracks; it has 
crystallized before the pyroxene. 

Brown mica occurs as irregular grains which are optically continuous over 
distances of about 3 centimetres, but which enclose grains of olivine, diopside, and 
the minor accessory minerals in a poikilitic fashion. It is a brown, strongly 
pleochroic variety, possibly lepidomelane. 


The orthoclase is the most important light mineral present, and occurs as 
allotriomorphic grains which enclose all the other minerals. In reflected light it 
may show blue opalescence, in grains which are quite clear and transparent in 
transmitted light: the effect is possibly due to ultramicroscopic inclusions. From 
the chemical analysis of the rock it seems probable that the soda-molecule is 
present to some extent in the orthoclase, and in one rock section typical anortho- 
clase has been identified. A few grains of microcline also occur and plagioclase 
may be present in some instances; it is labradorite at least as basic as Ab,;An;;, 
and shows albite, Carlsbad and pericline twinning, and may also show zoning. A 
small amount of nepheline has also been detected. 

Apatite occurs as well-formed crystals somewhat larger than usual, and iron 
ore as irregular grains. 

The chemical analysis of a specimen of shonkinite from Tilba Tilba village is 
given in Column I of Table 5. 

The analysis is peculiar, but remarkably like that of the average shonkinite 
as given by L. V. Pirsson (1900), which is quoted for comparison in Column II. 
Combined with a low silica percentage the alkalis, particularly potash, are high; 
lime, magnesia and iron are also high, while alumina is low. The norm 
indicates less orthoclase than is present in the mode, where probably the soda 
molecule combines to form soda-orthoclase; there is less plagioclase actually 
present than shown in the norm, so that probably the pyroxene contains some 
alumina, as does also the mica, lepidomelane, the presence of which may account 
for the high percentage of ferric oxide. 

By comparison with the analyses quoted in the other columns, it is apparent 
that the Tilba rock is a typical shonkinite, a somewhat rare type, and one which 
is found only in association with monzonitic or alkaline rocks. It occurs in the 
Montana region (L. V. Pirsson, 1900-1905), in the Bearpaw, Highwood, Little Belt 
and Crazy Mountains; in Celebes and Borneo (Iddings, 1915), and in a few 
other localities. 

According to the C.1.P.W. classification the Tilba Tilba rock falls into the 
subrang Kentallenose, and its relation to the olivine-monzonite and kentallenite 
may be seen by reference to thee analyses in Table 4. in the shonkinite the 


656 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


TABLE 5. 

I Ta II Ill IV 
SiO, 48-34 0-806 48-90 46°73 43-98 
Al,O; 11:79 0-116 11:07 10-05 12-28 
Fe.0; PACE L 0-014 aseer4 Byaty) 3°49 
FeO 1 o'ef 0-107 6:33 8-20 7-70 
MgO 9-59 0-240 9-06 9-27 8-00 
CaO 12:76 0-228 11-59 13-22 11-19 
Na,O 1:60 0-026 2°15 iLogsyh 1193383 
K,0 Bo Il7/ 0-034 4-55 3:76 5:06 
H,O+.. 0-68 _ 1-61 
H,0-.. 0-04 — i. ius eS { 0-12 
TiO, 0-88 0-011 0:98 0-78 2-24 
P.O; 0:87 0-006 1:10 fobs 1-81 
MnO 0:15 0-002 0:28 0-51 
srO ? 0-12 
BaO .. ae Bie see Se % 0-16 
CO. Bes sé we ae pr. 
s 0:10 
Cl 0-18 0-12 
F 0-15 
Totaly ote ae ae ae 99-90 100:18 100-56 99-97 
SpsGrsa- ue eh cfs Be 3-085 

TABLE 5a. 
I II III IV 

Orthoclase an ae Ab as is fe 18-90 22-24 23-63 
Albite .. i ae aS as a ae 6-29 1:05 - 
Anorthite ae oes fe a ee Ne 15-57 8-06 icin 
Leucite.. a ane is ae is ie — — 5:01 
Nepheline ae ae de te te ae 3:98 7:95 5:96 
Diopside Be bes Bes te ae se 34:08 38-19 25:05 
Olivine . . Ate Ao aks ai ar ve 13:48 11°54 11:82 
Magnetite ate oe aes is as ox 3°25 5:10 5-10 
Ilmenite 1:67 1-67 4-26 
Apatite. . 2-02 3°70 4-37 


I. Shonkinite [Kentallenose, III, 5(6), 3, 3]. Tilba Tilba village, N.S.W. Anal. 
I.A.B. 

Ia. Molecular numbers for I. 

II. Typical Shonkinite. Average of three analyses of shonkinites from Montana, 
L. V. Pirsson, Petrography of the Little Belt Mountains, Montana. Ann. Rept. U.S.G.S., 
xx, 1900, p. 484. 

III. Shonkinite [Shonkinose, III(IV), 6, 2, ”3]. Square Butte, Highwood Mountains, 
Montana. L. V. Pirsson Anal. Bull. U.S.G.S., No. 237, 1905, p. 102. Norm in W.T., 
p. 671. 

IV. Marosite (Shonkinite) [Ottajanose, III, 6, (2)3, 2]. Celebes, Anal. E. W. 
Morley. Iddings and Morley, Journ. Geol., xxiii, 1915, p. 240. Norm in W.T., p. 677. 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 657 


percentage of lime is greater than that of magnesia, whereas in the kentallenite 
the magnesia is less than the lime; both differ from the olivine-monzonite in 
containing about 5 per cent. less alumina, with a corresponding increase in the 
total magnesia and lime. These relations are expressed mineralogically by the 
greater relative proportion of felspars over ferromagnesian minerals in the olivine- 
monzonite; of ferromagnesian over felspar in the kentallenite; and of orthoclase 
over plagioclase in the shonkinite. 


6. Nepheline-Monzonite and Shonkinite. 


Below the porphyritic monzonite outcropping on the top of the Little 
Dromedary, there occurs a most interesting series of nepheline-bearing rocks, 
related mineralogically to the monzonite, shonkinite and ijolite on the one hand, 
and to the garnet-bearing pyroxenite and jacupirangite on the other. 


They include the rocks described by Anderson (1892, p. 148) as ‘“augite 
granite’, and quoted as such by Harker (1923, p. 37), but their true mineralogical 
and chemical composition places them quite outside the granite family. These 
rocks are light-grey in colour, and as they apparently consist of about equal 
proportions of white and black minerals, they might be called mesocratic; they 
are usually more finely crystalline than the normal monzonites, the grainsize is 
even, the absolute value always being less than 5 millimetres. 


The minerals macroscopically visible include felspars, both orthoclase and 
plagioclase, nepheline and pyroxene. In general the lighter-coloured rocks con- 
taining most abundant orthoclase occur at higher levels on the hill-slope than 
the more melanocratic phases containing a greater relative proportion of fels- 
pathoid. In view of the fact that the specific gravity of nepheline (average 2-6) 
is somewhat greater than that of orthoclase (2:55), and that the relative propor- 
tion of pyroxene also increases downwards, the distribution of these minerals 
suggests gravity differentiation in place. 

Under the microscope the rocks are seen to be holocrystalline, even-grained, 
the average being from 1 to 4 or 5 millimetres in different specimens. The texture 
is hypidiomorphic granular, with a strong tendency to poikilitic or monzonitic 
fabric. 

The minerals include orthoclase, plagioclase and nepheline in varying pro- 
portions; colourless and green pyroxene and a much smaller amount of greenish- 
brown amphibole; olivine and biotite are typically absent, but appear in a few 
abnormal types. Accessory minerals which may be present include sphene, 
apatite, iron ore, garnet (melanite), sodalite, analcite (?), cancrinite, calcite, and 
zeolite; some kaolin also occurs as an alteration product of orthoclase. 


Variation in the proportions of felsic and mafic minerals, and of felspars 
and felspathoid, has produced a rock series ranging from nepheline-syenite or 
monzonite to a variety of nepheline-shonkinite, corresponding to Washington’s 
(1901) “covite” or basic foyaite (Pl. xxxviii, fig. 6). Intermediate varieties show 
affinities to theralite (Monte Mulatto), essexite (Salem) and similar types. 


Orthoclase is present throughout the whole series, and is usually more 
abundant in the rocks outcropping on the upper slopes of the Little Dromedary. 
It occurs in allotriomorphiec grains, 2 or 3 mm. in diameter, and encloses previously 
formed minerals in a poikilitic or monzonitic manner; it comprises about 20 per 
cent. of the rock as a rule, and on the whole is remarkably free from alteration; 
in some cases deuteric albitization has taken place. 


658 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


Plagioclase is generally subordinate in amount to the orthoclase, forming 
subidiomorphic crystals less than 1 mm. in length. It is andesine of composition 
Ab,;An,z; to ADgoAD4. 

Nepheline resembles orthoclase in its general mode of occurrence as large 
allotriomorphic plates enclosing other minerals. Usually it has been the last of 
the essential minerals to crystallize, but may occur in graphic intergrowth with 
orthoclase, from which it may be distinguished by its refractive index and double 
refraction. In ordinary light, owing to slight decomposition, it shows a dusty 
appearance in streaks parallel to the direction of cleavage, and has straight 
extinction. It is uniaxial and negative in convergent light. Occasionally there 
is slight alteration to cancrinite, with its bright interference colours and uniaxial 
negative interference figure, and less frequently to a colourless or yellow radiating 
zeolite, resembling hydronephelite. 

Two distinct varieties of pyroxene are present, both monoclinic, and differing 
chiefly in colour. The variety which evidently crystallized first is colourless or 
greenish-grey in thin section, and forms the cores of larger subidiomorphic 
crystals, which are from 2 to 5 millimetres in diameter. This pale-coloured 
variety merges into a darker green variety at the borders of the larger crystals, 
and the latter variety, which is probably sodic, also forms abundant individual 
crystals. The effect of the obvious change of chemical composition is shown 
not only by colour zoning, but also by a variation in the value of the extinction 
angle. Numerous tiny inclusions may occur in the outer zone of the green 
pyroxene. Simple twinning is well-developed. 


Frequently the pyroxene is surrounded by a rim of greenish-brown horn- 
blende, in crystallographic continuity with the enclosed pyroxene. It is difficult 
to determine whether or not the small patches of amphibole apparently included 
in the pyroxene are due merely to sections along an irregular surface of the 
ferromagnesian mineral; there is always a close association of the various ferro-- 
magnesian minerals, and rarely does the amphibole form entire individual crystals, 
although it constitutes up to 10 per cent. of the rock. The amphibole is strongly 
pleochroic, and the typical cleavage is well developed. One section includes a 
bluish-green amphibole, probably a sodic variety. 


Small amounts of colourless olivine occur in a couple of sections. It is biaxial 
and negative, with reddish decomposition product, and is probably fayalite, or an 
iron-rich variety of olivine that is not uncommon in nepheline-syenites. 

In both the rocks containing fayalite there is a development of reddish-brown 
mica, which is not typical of the normal nepheline-monzonite. The mica is 
probably lepidomelane. 

Of the minerals termed accessory, none appears to play an important part 
in the rock, and the total amount in any specimen rarely exceeds about five 
per cent. 

Small amounts of a pale-coloured variety of sphene occur as irregular grains; 
apatite is not conspicuous, and there is little iron ore. 

The most constant accessory minerals, partly secondary, are those usually 
associated with nepheline. Cancrinite occurs not only ds flecks through nepheline, 
but also as definite plates up to a millimetre or more in diameter: these are allotrio- 
morphic and interstitial with respect to the felspars and nepheline, and have the 
appearance of a mineral of late primary or deuteric crystallization. In thin section 
it is colourless, with low refractive index and medium double refraction; it is 
uniaxial negative. 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 659 


Zeolite is of fairly common occurrence; sometimes it is interstitial but more 
frequently it is a replacement of nepheline. It is probable that at least two 
varieties of zeolite are present, the interstitial variety having the properties of 


TABLE 6, 
I Ta II Til IV Vv 
SiO; .. a ae 46-04 0:767 49-70 46:47 46-99 46-50 
INGO oo Bie ne 19-46 0-191 18-45 18:77 17-94 16-48 
Fe.03 .. a3 sus 3°80 0-024 3°39 Seo) 2-56 3°80 
FeO 6:20 0-086 4-32 4-83 7:56 7:47 
MgO 3°74 0-093 2232 3:90 Bape 3°46 
CaO .. He ak 9-72 0-173 7:91 7:28 7-85 6-14 
Na,O .. Se a5 3°49 0-056 5°33 R783 6-35 4-19 
K,O 4-91 0-052 4:95 4-65 2-62 4-54 
H.O+.. 0-69 : 1:09 4-93 0:65 3°57 
H,O-.. ae a 0:31 0:25 — - 0-21 
COs: ar oe abs. — 0:34 0:28 
BMOs -o0 ob OG 0:92 0-011 1-33 1-21 2:92 2-40 
AO; Gu ye Ne 0-84 0-006 0:40 0-14 0-94 1:13 
MnO .. Se aC 0-23 0-003 tr sp. tr. 0-15 
Bao .. nee ar abs. 0:08 
Total .. =e a 100-35 99-44 99-80 99-60 100-40 
Sp. Gr. sd ats 2-912 2-919 2-765 
TABLE 6a. 
I II IIL IV V 
Orthoclase 28-91 29-47 15:57 26:7 
Albite .. 1:05 11-00 18:86 18-3 
Anorthite 23-07 11-68 12-79 12-8 
Nepheline 15-34 18-46 18-74 9-4 
Diopside 15:95 17:98 16-24 8-8 
Olivine. . Bin 6-29 _ Host 7:0 
Wollastonite .. =_ 1-04 = = 
Magnetite Bopsy7/ 4:87 3°71 6-0 
Ilmenite 1:67 2°58 OBA 4°5 
Apatite 2-02 1:01 2°35 PROS 


I. Covite (Nepheline-shonkinite), (cf. Borolanose, II”, 6, “3, 3). Hast of the Little 
Dromedary, near Central Tilba, N.S.W., Por. 185, Parish of Narooma. Anal. I.A.B. 

Ia. Molecular numbers for I. 

II. Covite (Shonkinite), [Borolanose, II, 6, 2, 3(4)]. Schoolhouse, Magnet Cove, 
Arkansas. Anal. H. S. Washington. Journ. Geol., ix, 1901, p. 612. In W.T., p. 565. 

III. Theralite. Val dei Coccoletti, Monte Mulatto, Predazzo. Anal. M. Dittrich. 
J. Romberg, Sitz. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, i, 1902, p. 748. In W.T., p. 910. Altered rock, 
xo norm allotted. 

IV. Essexite (Essexose, II”, 6, 2, 4). Salem Neck, Essex County, Mass. Anal. 
H. 8. Washington. Journ. Geol., vii, 1899, p. 57. In W.T., p. 567. 

V. Lamprophyre (————— TI], 6, 3, 3). 7 miles SH. of Robertson, N.S.W. Anal. 
H. P. White. Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Geol. 7, p. 338. 


660 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iil, 


thomsonite, and the commoner variety, replacing nepheline in scaly aggregates, 
being hydronephelite. 


Associated with the zeolites and cancrinite is a colourless, isotropic mineral, 
which microchemical tests show to be sodalite. 

The specimen selected for chemical analysis is representative of the type in 
which nepheline is relatively abundant, and plagioclase is least evident; it is 
from the eastern slope of the Little Dromedary, portion 185, parish of Narooma. 
Although this rock shows certain mineralogical resemblances to the type described 
above as shonkinite from the village of Tilba Tilba, in the handspecimen it is 
mesocratic, whereas the shonkinite is decidedly melanocratic. 


Nepheline partly takes the place of the orthoclase of the shonkinite, and the 
principal pyroxene is the green sodic variety, instead of the colourless diopside 
of the shonkinite. 

These mineralogical differences are expressed chemically, as may be seen 
by a comparison of the statement of the analysis given in Column I, Table 6, 
with those of the Tilba Tilba and other typical shonkinites given in Table 5. 
The rocks contain similar percentages of silica and iron oxides, but the shonkinite 
has higher lime and magnesia, with lower percentages of alumina and alkalis than 
the rocks under consideration. These facts show that the rocks are distinct types, 
although mineralogically they may both be considered as varieties of shonkinite. 

At Magnet Cove, Arkansas, there is a rock which is remarkably similar to 
that of the Mount Dromedary District. It was first described by J. F. Williams 
as a “fine-grained nepheline-syenite’, and afterwards analysed by Washington 
(1900, p. 339). This analysis is quoted in Column II. The rock was then referred 
to the shonkinite group on account of its general likeness to the rocks so named 
by Pirsson (1895), but at the same time certain differences were noted. Later, 
Washington (1901, p. 614) reconsidered the name of the rock, and stated: “For this 
leucratic, holocrystalline combination of orthoclase (alkali-felspar) ... and 
less nephelite, with hornblende and aegyrite-augite, of granitic structure, and 
with the composition like that given in the analysis above, I would propose the 
name Covite.” 

Comparison of handspecimens and microsections of this rock and that at 
Mt. Dromedary, as well as of their chemical analyses, show rocks so similar that 
the adoption of Washington’s name covite is considered to be quite justified. It 
will be shown later that the covite bears a relationship to the main monzonitic 
series at Mt. Dromedary similar to that found by Washington to occur between 
the covite and the foyaite-ijolite series at Magnet Cove. 

The norms of the two rocks, although differing from their modes, show an 
extraordinary similarity; it is to be remembered that normative nepheline is 
assumed to contain soda but no potash, whereas in nature this is not the case; 
this fact explains the smaller amount of normative nepheline than is present in 
the mode. 

The differences in the lime percentages place the two rocks in adjacent rangs 
according to the C.I.P.W. classification. The Tilba rock falls into a subrang with 
a melanite-syenite from Assynt, and with two rocks from Mt. Mouriah, Java, both 
from alkaline provinces. 

It has already been stated that some varieties of the nepheline-bearing rocks 
of the Little Dromedary may be referred to nepheline-monzonites, and others show 
affinities to specialized alkaline rock-types; therefore it is not surprising to find 
that the chemical analysis, even of the covite, should show resemblance to such 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 661 


rocks described as theralite and essexite, whose analyses are quoted in Columns III 
and IV. The analysis of the theralite is very close to that of both the covites, and 
its occurrence in the classic region of monzonitic rocks is of more than passing 
interest. The analysis is taken from Brenner’s paper on the Kola Peninsula (1920), 
but no detailed descriptions of the other characters of the rock are available to 
the writer. A 

The typical essexite from Salem neck, Hssex County, Mass., was described by 
Sears (1891) and later by H. S. Washington (1899, p. 53), whose analysis is quoted 
in Column IV. It shows a strong general resemblance to the other analyses, the 
chief difference being in the distribution of the alkalis; as Washington states 
(p. 57), “The low silica and high lime and alkalis will be noticed, showing the 
basic monzonitic character of the rock.” 

He has already noted of the covite (1901, p. 613), “it cannot be put with the 
essexites or theralites (although chemically closely resembling these) on account 
of the lack of plagioclase’. In the Little Dromedary occurrence some plagioclase- 
bearing types are associated with the covite, and certain individual specimens 
might be referred to these groups. Unfortunately considerable confusion exists 
in petrographic literature with regard to the definition of the names theralite and 
essexite, the terms frequently being interchanged. The nomenclature has been 
discussed by several writers, including Iddings (19138, Vol. ii, pp. 231, 246) and 
Shand (1927, pp. 287-291). 

The analysis quoted in Column V is that of a lamprophyre intruding the 
Hawkesbury Sandstone (Triassic) near Robertson, N.S.W. It is chemically 
similar to the covite, and falls into the same subrang, but differs in its minera- 
logical constitution and mode of occurrence. 


Gabbro Series. 


Dark gabbroic rocks form the coastal platform known locally as Poole’s 
Point, Portion 72, Parish of Narooma, about a mile north of the mouth of Tilba 
Tilba Lake. Their field-relations to other rocks are partly obscured by sand- 
dunes, beach-deposits and soil formation. On the northern side they are apparently 
intrusive into quartz-schists and slates. There are no rock exposures between 
the coastal cliffs and the Lagoon (see map, Plate xxxv), but a somewhat similar 
rock outcrops on the western side of Tilba Tilba Lake, in Portion 39, where it is 
associated with a marginal phase of the coarse-grained monzonite, which is 
intrusive into slates. 

The types considered here are those called by Anderson (1892, p. 158) ‘‘augite- 
felspar-mica rock’. He mentions their occurrence on the coast and also in 
Portion 375, Parish of Wandellow, near Dignam’s Creek, on the western side 
of Mount Dromedary. At the latter locality these basic rocks occur only as 
inclusions in a mass of lamprophyric rock, which contains also fragments of 
other members of the monzonitic series. On the southern and particularly the 
western slopes of the Little Dromedary, Portion 32, Parish of Narooma, fragments 
of pyroxenite are sometimes included in the nepheline-monzonite. The best 
exposure is in Portion 32, in a timbered paddock at the head of a small creek 
running into Tilba Tilba Swamp, where the shattered fragments of pyroxenite 
appear to be cemented together by the fine-grained monzonite. Boulders several 
feet in diameter occur on the northern side of Tilba Tilba Swamp. 

Macroscopically the rocks are black, heavy, coarsely-grained and gabbroic, 
and consist essentially of pyroxene; some varieties contain plates of black mica, 


662 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


which show lustre-mottling, others contain a small amount of felspathic material. 
These variations are most clearly seen in thin section. 

Three chief varieties may be distinguished: 1, Olivine-gabbro or pyroxene- 
granulite; 2, Biotite-gabbro or essexite; 8, Pyroxenite or jacupirangite. 


1. Olivine-gabbro or Pyroxene-granulite. 


The handspecimen shows a black, holocrystalline rock, flecked with 5 to 10 
per cent. of white felspathic crystals, which are individually less than 1 milli- 
metre in diameter: the rock appears to consist chiefly of pyroxene crystals up 
to 5 millimetres in length set in a finer-grained groundmass of pyroxene and 
felspar. j 

Under the microscope the mafic minerals predominate only slightly over the 
felsic; the rock (Pl. xxxix, fig. 1) is holocrystalline, with slightly variable grain- 
size; the augite crystals are from 0-5 to 5:0 millimetres in diameter and the 
felspars rarely exceed 0:5 millimetre in length; thus the fabric tends to become 
granulitic, with subidiomorphic augite crystals set in a plexus of relatively small 
subidiomorphic felspar grains. In addition to augite and plagioclase, there are 
present olivine, iron ore, apatite and sometimes traces of biotite. 

The pyroxene is a colourless or greenish-grey variety of augite, with well- 
developed cleavage, and sometimes salite striation. It is usually free from altera- 
tion products. 

The olivine occurs as small rounded grains and as larger idiomorphic crystals; 
it is colourless, shows characteristic cracking, with only slight alteration along 
the cracks, and has a biaxial negative interference figure in convergent light, 
which is characteristic of fayalite or olivine rich in FeO. 

The plagioclase is labradorite of the composition Ab,AN », and shows twin- 
ning after albite, Carlsbad and pericline laws. 

Iron ore includes both oxides and sulphide, and is present to the extent of 
about 10 per cent. of the rock. 


2. HEssexite or Biotite-gabbro. 


A related type occurs on the northern side of Tilba Tilba Swamp, south-west 
of the Little Dromedary (M667), and as inclusions in the lamprophyric rock 
exposed in Portion 375, Parish of Wandellow, on the western side of Mount 
Dromedary. 

The rock (Pl. xxxix, fig. 2) has usually a granitic texture, but in one case 
ophitic fabric is developed. Olivine is not so abundant as in the olivine-gabbro, 
but its place is taken by strongly pleochroic mica, probably lepidomelane, which 
makes about 15 to 20 per cent. of the rock, together with traces of orthoclase. 

The pyroxene has a slightly darker colour than that of the olivine-gabbro, 
and resembles that of the olivine-shonkinite and olivine-monzonite previously 
described. Indeed the essexite and the shonkinite bear a kind of complementary 
relationship to the olivine-monzonite, in that, although the pyroxenes are similar 
in all three types, the monzonite contains about equal proportions of labradorite 
and orthoclase, while orthoclase is the principal felspar in the shonkinite, and 
plagioclase is the chief felspar in the essexite. 

No chemical analysis of the rock is available. 

The essexite appears to be similar to the fine-grained varieties of Brégger’s 
(1894) “olivine-gabbro-diabase” of the Christiania district, specimens of which 
are in the University Collection. In Norway, as at Tilba, “there is not the 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 662 


slightest trace of the ordinary changes met with in regionally metamorphosed 
gabbro”’. Rosenbusch (1906, p. 404) has classified these rocks as “essexite’, and 
this nomenclature is adopted in the case of the Mount Dromedary rocks. 


At Brandberget, in the Gran District, Norway, the olivine-gabbro-diabases pass 
through a basic phase into pyroxenite, and a similar rock-association is developed 
at Tilba. 


3. Pyroxenite or Jacupirangite. 


Ultrabasic pyroxenites containing little or no felspar form the rock-platform 
at Poole’s Point, and occur elsewhere as inclusions in the monzonitic series. 


The rocks are black, heavy, and usually coarsely crystalline. They consist 
essentially of pyroxene with small amounts of biotite and felspar. Thin sections 
(Pl. xxxix, fig. 3) show the rocks to be holocrystalline; the grainsize is even and 
medium. The texture is hypidiomorphic granular. Augite constitutes almost 90 
per cent. of the rock; small amounts of olivine and reddish-brown mica are usually 
present, and iron ore and apatite occur as accessories; a greenish-brown variety of 
hornblende may be present to the extent of about 5 per cent., and plagioclase may 
occur in like quantity. 


The pyroxene is a monoclinic variety, and is of a greenish-grey colour, with 
slight pleochroism. Cleavage is well developed, salite striation is present and 
simple twinning also occurs. 


The hornblende, if present, may form individual crystals, interstitial with 
respect to the augite, or may occur as spots scattered through the augite, when 
it appears to be due to a paramorphic change of the pyroxene. The mineral is 
greenish-brown in colour and appears somewhat bleached; the plecchroism is 
marked, but not so strongly as usual. Its maximum extinction angle is 27°. 
Where it is primary it has crystallized after iron ore, olivine, augite, and biotite. 


Olivine occurs as rounded grains up to 1 millimetre in diameter, is colourless 
in thin section, and shows characteristic cracking and slight alteration to green 
serpentine. It is biaxial negative, and thus is probably fayalite. 


Mica occurs as ragged flakes about 1 millimetre in diameter, and has been 
the last mineral to crystallize. In some specimens the inclusion of grains of 
minerals of earlier crystallization has produced an effect of lustre-mottling on the 
cleavage surfaces. The colour in thin section is reddish-brown, and the pleo- 
chroism is very strong, from pale lemon-yellow to deep reddish-brown. It is 
probably lepidomelane. 

Plagioclase plays quite a minor part in the majority of specimens and exists 
only as interstitial grains. Albite and pericline twinning are particularly well- 
developed; Carlsbad twins are more uncommon. It is labradorite-bytownite of 
composition Ab,,Anj. 

Apatite crystals, and iron ore, including magnetite and pyrites, occur as 
small grains through the rock. 

There is some variation in the fabric of the rock. 

The analysis of a typical specimen of pyroxenite from Poole’s Point (M.476) 
is stated in Column I of Table 7: it shows an ultrabasic rock rich in lime, 
magnesia, and iron oxides, with correspondingly low alumina. The norm contains 
small percentages of orthoclase and felspathoids which have not been detected 
in the mode. The higher percentage of normative plagioclase indicates that the 
modal pyroxene contains some alumina. According to the C.I.P.W. classification 


664 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


TABLE 7. 

I la II 1000 IV V 
SiO; 43°63 0-727 45-05 38°39 38-38 43°53 
Al,Os . 7°52 0-074 6-50 7:05 6-15 7-24 
Fe.0; . 6:45 0:040 3°83 9-07 11-70 11-10 
FeO 8:57 0-119 7:69 6-17 8-14 8-70 
MgO 13-67 0-342 12-07 11-58 11-47 11-51 
CaO . 17-12 0-305 18-82 19:01 18-60 10-19 
Na.O . 0-36 0-006 0:94 0:74 0-78 2-88 
Ke Ole 0:50 0-005 0:78 0-75 0-13 1:39 
H.O+.. bes 0:46 0:33 0-54 1-34 
H.O-.. ea oe ae 0:25 2-40 0-14 0-18 0-43 
TiO, 1°24 0-015 2-65 4-54 4-32 1:90 
P.O; 0-10 0-001 0-15 0:82 0:17 tr 
MnO 0-20 0-003 0-32 0-16 — 
x 0-24 
BaO tra 
Ss Ona? 
CO, abs 0-32 abs abs 
Total .. 4 xe 99-97 100-88 99-89 100-72 100-21 
Sp. Gr. 3:393 

TABLE 7a. 
I II Til IV V 

Orthoclase ae Aye si ae 1:67 = — 8-34 
Albite .. ne on Fs ae _ _ — 13-62 
Anorthite os ae a ay 17-51 11-12 13-62 12-79 3°06 
Nepheline ae oe fs be 1:70 4-26 3:41 3°69 5:96 
Leucite 53 te sd a 0:87 3°92 3°49 0-44 
Diopside se as ay as 52-87 62-19 44-50 50-33 37°42 
Olivine. . ai ag ae Na 12-80 5:32 5:88 3°78 10-57 
Ca.orthosil. .. AG rs ire _ 0-95 5:50 \ 4-30 
Magnetite 5 eal a3 ae 9:28 Holes 7:89 14:15 16-01 
Ilmenite a Be Ae eo 2-28 5:02 8-66 8-21 3°65 
Haematite ens Ais ae ath — 3°68 1-92 
Apatite x ae ate mit 0:34 0-34 2:02 0-34 


I. Pyroxenite [Montrealose IV, (1)2,,, 2’, 2]. Poole’s Point, north of the mouth of 
Tilba Tilba Lake. Anal. I.A.B. 
Ia. Molecular numbers for I. 


II. Pyroxenite [Brandbergose, IV, (1)2. , “8, 2]. Brandberget, Gran, Norway. 
1/7 


Anal. i WV. Schmelk, “We Cl Bréseers OlIRGeS-op loo 4,) 0D: col.) lmy Wet myn aleoe 

III. Jacupirangite (Paulose, IV, 2.,, ”3, 2). Magnet Cove, Arkansas. Anal. Jet, 
Washington. Journ. Geol., ix, 1901, p. 620. In W.T., p. 720. ; 

IV. Jacupirangite [Paulose, “IV, 2(1)2, ”3, 2]. Jacupiranga, San Paulo, Brazil. 
Anal. H. S. Washington. Journ. Geol., ix, 1901, p. 620. 

V. Davainite (Hornblendite), (Montrealose, “IV, 2., 2, 2). Garabal Hill, Loch 
Lomond, Scotland. Wyllie and Scott, Geol. Mag., (v)x, 1913, p. 502. In W.T., p. 719. 


22) 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 665 


the analysis falls into the subrang Montrealose, containing gabbros, essexites and 
felspathoidal basalts. 

Probably the analysis of the pyroxenite from Brandberget, Norway, described 
by Brggger (1894, p. 34) and quoted in Column II, approximates more closely 
to that of the Tilba rock than that of any other yet recorded. This is of special 
interest on account of the association, at Brandberget and elsewhere in the Gran 
district, of this pyroxenite and the olivine-gabbro-diabase or essexite, which has 
already been compared with a similar type at Tilba. The Brandberget pyroxenite 
carries a higher percentage of titania, evidently contained in the pyroxene, which 
shows typical violet colour in thin section (Slide 1515). 


A specimen of pyroxenite from Randvikholmen Island, Christiania Fjord, 
collected by Dr. C. E. Tilley and now in the Sydney University Geological Museum, 
shows, in thin section, a rock having a close mineralogical and textural resemblance 
to the Tilba rock. 

Rocks of similar chemical composition are the jacupirangites. The analysis 
of the type specimen from Jacupiranga, Brazil, is quoted in Column IV, and that 
of a jacupirangite from Magnet Cove, Arkansas, in Column II. The silica per- 
centages are slightly lower than in the pyroxenites, although this difference is 
lessened if it is considered that the TiO, partly replaces the SiO,. 


Washington (1901) has discussed the significance of the term jacupirangite 
applied by Derby (1891) to types at Jacupiranga, Brazil, and states (p. 621), 
“From the microscopical examination of specimens which Professor Derby sent 
me, it is evident that the ‘Jacupirangites’ of Brazil vary from rocks rich in 
nephelite and which are true ijolites closely analogous to those of Magnet Cove 
and Finland, through rocks composed predominantly of pyroxene, with small and 
varying amounts of magnetite and nephelite, to types extremely rich in magnetite 
and with no nephelite, or only traces of this mineral. Accepting then the name 
jacupirangite for the medium type, the application of this name to the Magnet 
Cove rock is abundantly justified, since the only difference is the comparatively 
unimportant one of size of grain, both being holocrystalline.” The American 
rocks contain violet-brown titaniferous augite. Washington states that the 
“closest known analogue of these rocks is probably the pyroxenite of Brandberget”, 
and notes that the chief differences are in SiO, and Fe.0,. These are also the 
chief differences between the American and Tilba rocks. 


Direct comparison of the Tilba Tilba rock and a thin section of a chip of 
the specimen of jacupirangite from Magnet Cove analysed by Washington, shows 
the similarity of these rocks to one another. 


The jacupirangite from Ilado, Aln6o, is finer-grained than the Tilba rock and 
contains more apatite and calcite. 


It therefore seems evident that the known varieties of the Tilba Tilba 
pyroxenite closely approach the type known as jacupirangite, although the silica 
percentage is just sufficiently high to prevent the crystallization of nepheline, an 
essential constituent of true jacupirangite. 


H. Rosenbusch (1906, p. 222), W. H. Twelvetrees (1902), and F. P. Paul 
(1906, p. 15) have described jacupirangite from Port Cygnet, Tasmania, which 
occurs in association with nepheline-syenite at Regatta Point, but unfortunately 
no chemical analysis is available. 

The analysis quoted in Column V is that of the Davainite from Garabal Hill, 
described by Wyllie and Scott (1913). It is really an altered pyroxenite, and 


666 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


shows affinities to the pyroxenites and jacupirangites also quoted. It is quite 
comparable with the Tilba pyroxenite, the chief difference being in its higher 
percentage of Fe,0,, and correspondingly lower CaO percentage. 


Melanite Series. 


Intimately associated with the principal monzonitic and nepheline-bearing 
series is a group of rocks which are characterized by the presence of green 
pyroxene, with varying amounts of melanite (garnet). These rocks occur chiefly 
to the east and south-east of Central Tilba, approximately between the coarser 
monzonites of the Mt. Dromedary foothills and the finer nepheline-monzonites of 
the Little Dromedary area; a related type outcrops near the Cobargo Road, two 
and a half miles from Tilba Tilba. On the whole the field-relationships of these 
rocks with respect to the main series are not well defined, on account of cultiva- 
tion. The outcrop on the Cobargo Road occurs between the olivine-monzonite and 
the invaded sediments, and this phase contains small inclusions of the country 
rock. On the south-western end of the Little Dromedary a narrow dyke of this 
series intrudes the coarse-grained porphyritic monzonite, and on the north- 
western slopes of the Little Dromedary the garnet-bearing rock is apparently 
intrusive into the nepheline-monzonite. The specimen described by Anderson 
(1892) as containing garnet, comes from the north-eastern slope of the Little 
Dromedary. 


Iolite: 


Probably the least basic member of this series is the ijolite outcropping on 
the Cobargo Road, between the olivine-monzonite and the quartz-schists. It is 
slightly porphyritic in augite phenocrysts about 5 millimetres in length, set in a 
dioritic groundmass whose average grainsize is about one millimetre. There is 
a slight development of lustre-mottling on the cleavage faces of the white 
constituent. 

Under the microscope the rock (Pl. xxxix, fig. 4) appears holocrystalline, with 
variable grainsize and poikilitic fabric. The minerals present are chiefly pyroxene, 
nepheline, and melanite, with some orthoclase, plagioclase, olivine, sphene, apatite, 
sodalite, and iron ore. 

The pyroxene occurs both as idiomorphic phenocrysts and as an important 
constituent cf the groundmass. The central portion of the phenocrysts consists 
of almost colourless pyroxene, surrounded by an outer zone of green pyroxene, 
which also forms small idiomorphic crystals. The olivine occurs only as small 
rounded grains in the colourless pyroxene of the phenocrysts. The pale pyroxene 
has the characters of normal. diopside, but the green variety is decidedly pleo- 
chroic, with prismatic cleavages at right angles and high extinction angle. Colour- 
zoning is marked and the interference colours are masked by the strong natural 
colour of the mineral. Simple twinning occurs. 

The chief light-coloured constituent is nepheline, which occurs as large allo- 
triomorphic plates enclosing the green diopside and other minerals in a poikilitic 
manner. Traces of the basal cleavage are visible, and extinction is parallel to this 
direction. The refractive index is less than that of Canada Balsam, and the 
mineral is uniaxial and negative. It shows alteration to a colourless, isotropic 
mineral with a low refractive index, probably sodalite. 

A small amount of orthoclase also is present, distinguishable from the 
nepheline by the refractive index and its biaxial figure in convergent light. 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 667 


Plagioclase is quite accessory, and occurs as idiomorphic laths less than one 
millimetre in length. The composition is that of Labradorite, Ab,,An.;. 

A variety of light-brown garnet, probably melanite, occurs in noticeable 
quantity in association with green pyroxene as allotriomorphic grains; it has the 
appearance of a primary mineral on normal crystallization. Sphene, apatite, and 
iron ore occur as small grains. 

No chemical analysis of this rock is available. The rock appears to corres- 
pond, at least mineralogically, with the type known as ijolite, and particularly with 
that occurrence at Magnet Cove, Arkansas, described by Washington (1900, p. 400; 
1901, p. 618) and previously called “Ridge type of eleolite-garnet-syenite” by 
Williams (1890). 

Actual comparison with a chip and microsection of the specimen analysed by 
Washington, from near Dr. Thornton’s, Magnet Cove, shows some differences of 
texture, due partly to the fact that the Tilba rock shows greater idiomorphism 
of the pyroxene, while the garnet of the Magnet Cove rock is more abundant 
and of a darker colour than that of the Tilba specimen. 

Although the rock belongs essentially to the green pyroxene-melanite series, 
the presence of nepheline relates it to the covite and nepheline-monzonites of the 
Little Dromedary, while the presence of plagioclase, orthoclase, and normal 
diopside with inclusions of olivine shows its affinity to the olivine-monzonite. 


2. (?) Kedabekite—Melanite-melteigite-jacupirangite. 

East and south-east of Central Tilba, chiefly in Portions 41, 71 and 218, there 
outcrops a continuous series containing green pyroxene and melanite, similar 
to that of the ijolite. These rocks differ from the ijolite in that nepheline is 
accessory or absent, and its place is taken largely by the basic plagioclase, 
anorthite. 

The proportion of melanite varies from a few per cent. to approximately 
50 or 60 per cent. of the rock. Usually the rock is massive, but in one instance 
(M.489) there is distinct banding, due to the parallel arrangement of alternate 
layers of pyroxene and anorthite. The garnet-rich varieties weather in a charac- 
teristic fashion, so that the apparently idiomorphic garnet crystals, about 4 milli- 
metres in diameter, form a resistant crust over the rock surface, after the other 
constituents have weathered away. 


Under the microscope a series of sections of 16 specimens show a progres- 
sive variation in the content of garnet with antipathetic variation in that of the 
other constituents, especially green pyroxene. The texture is holocrystalline and the 
grainsize is relatively even and medium; the fabric is hypidiomorphic granular. 
The minerals present are green pyroxene and garnet, anorthite, nepheline, ortho- 
clase, sphene, apatite, iron ore, and alteration products, kaolin, cancrinite or 
secapolite, and finely-divided zeolites. (See Plate xxxix, figs. 5, 6.) 

The green pyroxene is the most important mineral, occurring as idiomorphic 
to subidiomorphic crystals from one to two millimetres in length. The colour is 
usually yellowish-green to grass-green, but the intensity varies slightly in different 
specimens; occasionally the cores of the larger crystals are almost colourless. 
Pleochroism is strong, yellow, yellowish-green and green, and prismatic cleavage 
in two directions at right angles is well developed. The extinction angle on 
sections parallel to (010) is 45 degrees (i.e, ZAC = 45°). The mineral has 
crystallized after the minor accessory minerals and partly during the early stages 
of crystallization of the melanite. There is no doubt that the mineral is a mono- 


N 


668 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


clinic pyroxene in spite of its unusual colour and strong pleochroism. No chemical 
analysis of the separated mineral has been made, but a consideration of the 
composition of the rock, given in Column I of Table 8, indicates that it is 
probably low in alumina and alkalis, and rich in lime, magnesia, and iron oxide, 
closely approximating the composition of diopside-hedenbergite. In the Fen 
District, Norway, a similar pyroxene occurs in rocks of the ijolite-melteigite 
series, which closely resembles the rock-series under consideration. W. C. Brggger 
(1920, p. 60) gives the calculated average composition of the green pyroxene of 
the melteigite-jacupirangite, whose complete analysis is quoted in Column III of 
Table 8, as 


SiO, .. ae if ot ie Be ae Re Ris 50:29 
Al,O;3.. 4-49 
Fe,0;.. 3:74 
FeO .. 288 ty ae as Ae We Be Ve 7-60 
MnO .. by st ue ae af es B.S ae 0-30 
MgO .. os LNs We ots a Ae a =e 8-83 
CaO .. an Be sie sh a ane ee wa DIB SODAT/. 
Na,O.. 1L9837/ 
TKO) 54 0-11 

100-00 


This composition is close to that of the average for the Melteig series, as well 
as that of Alné, and may represent the variety present in the Tilba rock. 

O. A. Derby (1891, p. 319) describes a rock of the jacupirangite series at 
Ipanema, Brazil, containing green pyroxene, which he refers to acmite. 

The green pyroxene of the ijolite series at Magnet Cove probably contains 
a large percentage of the aegyrine molecule, on account of the high alkali content 
of the rock, as given by Washington (1901, p. 618). There are slight differences 
in the colours of these pyroxenes in thin section, the shade of colour evidently 
being a function of the presence of either iron or soda. 

Other somewhat similar rocks containing green pyroxene include kKedabekite 
(Federof, 1901), stated by Iddings (19138, Vol. II, p. 170) to consist of anorthite, 
hedenbergite and garnet. 

Garnet is present in almost every member of this rock-series, appearing in 
the handspecimen as a black mineral with a submetallic lustre. In thin section 
it is yellowish to light-brown in colour, translucent and completely isotropic. 
When present in small quantity it appears only as an interstitial mineral; as the 
proportion increases it assumes the form of irregular allotriomorphic grains, or of 
idiomorphic crystals 4 or 5 millimetres in diameter. It occurs in close association 
with green pyroxene, either as irregular patches through and around the pyroxene, 
or as cores in the garnet crystals (Plate xxxix, fig. 6). 

In the malignites of the Kruger alkaline body associated with the Okanagan 
composite batholith, described by Daly (1906, 1912) there appear to be some- 
what similar relations between the garnet and pyroxene. Daly states, however 
(1906, p. 350), “Microscopic study shows that much of the melanite in the Kruger 
rocks is of magmatic origin, but that perhaps much more of it has replaced the 
pyroxene during dynamic metamorphism.” 

In the Ontario malignites described by A. C. Lawson (1896) the garnet is 
considered to be primary. There is no doubt of the primary origin of the garnet 
in the melteigite-jacupirangite series of Brégger (1920) and in the ijolite of 
Magnet Cove, Arkansas, and elsewhere, as at The Kola Peninsula and Aln6. 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 669 


Among the granite-gneisses of the Southern Eyre Peninsula, South Australia, 
Dr. C. E. Tilley (1921, pp. 121, 123) has found garnet and secondary pyroxenes 
developing from original augite as a result of metamorphism, reactions which 
may be expressed in terms of chemical equations. The illustrations in his paper 
clearly show a reaction zone between the original pyroxene and the garnet, a 
feature which is entirely absent from the garnet-bearing rocks of the Mount 
Dromedary district. There seems no reason for believing that the garnet here 
is other than a normal product of crystallization from a magma of somewhat 
unusual character. Its relation to the pyroxene is similar to that which com- 
monly occurs between olivine or rhombic pyroxene and a monoclinic pyroxene of 
later crystallization. 

Sir T. H. Holland (1896, p. 22) has described the production of garnet from 
pyroxene as a result of the dynamic metamorphism of two series of rocks, the 
Charnockite series of the Madras Presidency, Southern India, and a group of rocks 
in Bengal, which he believes to have been originally pyroxene-plagioclase rocks. 
In these rocks definite reaction borders occur ‘between the garnet and the ferro- 
magnesian silicate”. Similar occurrences in other parts of the world are cited by 
Sederholm (1916). He states, “The garnet seems often to have been formed 
towards the end of crystallisation processes, either during the waning phases of 
the solidification of a magma or during a later period of metamorphism, and is 
often, if not always, a crystalloblastic mineral which has replaced constituents of 
earlier date.” 

L. L. Fermor (1913) came to the conclusion that the presence of garnet in 
the kodurite rocks of Madras, India, indicates conditions of high pressure during 
the formation of this rock series, the garnet thus acting as a “geological 
barometer”. 

No separate chemical analysis of the garnet of Mt. Dromedary has been made, 
but the analysis of a rock containing a large percentage of garnet is given in 
Column II of Table 8. 

The high percentages of lime and ferric oxide are undoubtedly related to the 
garnet content, and are reflected in the norm by high proportions of wollastonite 
and haematite. These may be considered to combine in the mode according to 
the equation 

3 (CaO. SiO.) + Fe,0O, = 38Ca0. Fe.0;. 3Si0,. 
Wollastonite Haematite Garnet (Melanite) 


It is evident that the garnet is the variety melanite (andradite); the rela- 
tively high titania percentage in the rock may indicate its presence in the 
melanite, but there is insufficient to form true schorlomite, as at Magnet Cove, or 
jivaarite, as in the ijolite at livaara, Finland, a fact which is confirmed by the 
microscopic examination. 

The light-coloured constituents include anorthite, nepheline, orthoclase and 
their alteration products. These frequently occur in such a finely divided condition 
that their real identity is difficult to determine. 

Fresh plagioclase forms idiomorphic to subidiomorphic crystals about one 
millimetre in diameter. The content varies from 10 or 15 per cent. to more thai 
half of the rock, the average being about 20 or 25 per cent. The extinction angle 
indicates anorthite; in some sections the felspar is partially replaced by a finely- 
divided aggregate of a more highly doubly-refracting mineral whose refractive 
index is about 1-60. This is probably a _ scapolite, whose composition 
(4 CaO. 3 Al,O,. 6 SiO.) resembles that of anorthite (CaO. Al,0;. 2 SiO.). 


670 


GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


A few odd grains of nepheline and orthoclase have been detected in some slides, 
but neither mineral appears to play an important part in the constitution of the 
rock. A light coloured variety of sphene occurs sparingly as irregular grains in 


most sections, and small crystals of apatite are also present. 


sulphide of iron are present in small quantity. 


Both oxide and 


TABLE 8. 

I la Il Ila III Illa IV \y 
SiO, 44-28 0-738 40:26 0-671 43-58 0-726 48-05 52EIbS) 
Al,O, 10:13 0-099 10-95 0-107 7-80 0-076 IIs) O8%5) 19-05 
Fe,O; 4-04 0-025 12:16 0:076 4-23 0-026 1:86 4-77 
FeO 6:21 0-086 3°38 0-047 6-09 0-085 1001583 2-10 
MgO 8-42 0-210 2°16 0-054 6:46 0-161 12-53 1:99 
CaO 21:86 0-390 26-30 0-470 21:93 0-391 11-02 5:75 
Na,O 0:31 0-005 0:44 0-007 1-10 0-018 1:26 4-03 
K,O 0-69 0-007 1:33 0-014 1:33 0-014 0:19 7:30 
H,O+ 1-29 — 0:64 Ie Re/ 0:45 1-49 
H,O— 0:29 — 0-28 0:07 0-15 0:13 
TiO, 1-28 0-016 1:68 0-021 251! 0-081 0:49 0:07 
P20; 1:35 0-009 0-89 0-006 2-58 0-018 — 0-28 
MnO 0-23 0-003 _ _ 0-22 0-008 0:28 0-138 
co; abs. = abs. = 0:10 0-002 | 0-44 0:27 
ZrO, 0:04 
Cr.0O5 : i Opal 
(Co, Ni)O.. @erdt 
CuO 0:05 
Sie 0-21 0-006 0:20 
SrO 0-19 
BaO 0:02 0:09 
C1 0:02 
It) 0-24 0-006 
Total 100:38 100-47 99-80 100-10 100-17 
Sp. Gr. BI V73i/ 3°425 2-95 2-719 

TABLE 8a. 
I II Til IV Vv 

Orthoclase _ 3°06 7:78 iLeatal 43-37 
Albite .. = _ 5:76 10-48 eas} 
Anorthite 24-74 23:91 1223 35°58 12-23 
Nepheline 1-24 1:99 1:99 _ 12-21 
Leucite 3°05 Boral _— — = 
Diopside as 57-27 11:66 41-72 15:17 10-86 
Hypersthene .. — = = 23°47 — 
Olivine. . ae = = = 8:95 _ 
Wollastonite .. 0:58 35°96 11:14 _ 0:23 
Ca. Orthosil. .. 0:86 — — — — 
Magnetite 5-80 6:03 6:03 2:78 6:96 
Haematite - 8-00 — — — 
Ilmenite 2-43 3°19 4-71 0:91 0-15 
Apatite 3°02 2-02 6-05 — 0:67 
Calcite .. = 7 0-20 _ = 
Pyrites. . = = 0:36 _ — 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 671 


I. (?) Kedabekite (cf. Brandbergose, IV, 1-2,, 3, 2). Portion 41, Parish of Narooma, 
4 mile east of Central Tilba, N.S.W. Analyst, I.A.B. 

Ia. Molecular numbers for I. 

II. Melanite Melteigite (cf. Brandbergose, IV, 2,, 3-4, 2). Portion 71, Parish of 
Narooma, 4 mile south-east of Central Tilba, N.S.W. Analyst, I.A.B. 

Ila. Molecular numbers for II. 

Ill. Melteigite-jacupirangite [Brandbergose, IV, ”2,, 3, 2(3)]. Melteig, Fen District, 
Norway. Anal. A. Rédland. W. C. Brggger, Die Eruptivgesteine des Kristianiagebietes, 
iv, 1920, p. 18. 

Illa. Molecular numbers for III. 

IV. Eucrite [Auvergnose, III, 5, 4(5), ”“5]. North-east of Allival Rum, Scotland. 
Anal. W. Pollard, Summ. Prog. Geol. Surv., 1903, p. 56. Quoted from A. Harker, Geology 
of the Small Isles of Inverness-shire, Mem. Geol. Surv. Scotland, 1908, p. 98. Norm in 
Wea 9 o4:9 

V. Biotite-melanite-nephelite-syenite or Malignite [Borolanose, II, (5)6, 2, 3]. 
Kruger Mt., Okanagan Range, British Columbia. Anal. Prof. Dittrich. R. A. Daly, 
North American Cordillera, 49th Parallel, Part I, pp. 451-2. Mem. Geol. Surv. Canada, 
38(1), 1912. Norm in W.T., p. 565. 


Chemical analyses of two members of the garnet-bearing series were carried 
out, one (M.499) containing practically no garnet, and the other containing about 
50 per cent. of melanite. : 

As the silica percentage of each rock is less than 45, they must be classed as 
ultrabasic. Their other characters are somewhat unusual; the alumina and alkali 
percentages are low, while iron oxides and particularly lime are high. The norm 
of M.499 agrees closely with the mode, containing diopside-hedenbergite 
approximately of the composition (5 CaO. 4 MgO. FeO. 10 SiO,). In the other rock 
the felspathic content is similar to that of M.499, but the place of the normative 
minerals wollastonite and haematite is taken by melanite, according to the 
chemical equations given above. According to the C.I.P.W. classification both 
rocks fall near the subrang Brandbergose, in which four analyses are quoted in 
Washington’s tables, page 717. These include a cromaltite from the alkaline 
province of Assynt, Scotland, described by Shand (1910), and pyroxenites from 
Gran, Norway, and from Predazzo, Tyrol, both of which occur in association 
with monzonitie or alkaline rocks, although these particular rocks are basic and 
low in alkalis. 

The analyses of the Tilba rocks resemble some of the jacupirangites already 
quoted in Table 7, except for the higher magnesia percentages of the latter. 


In Column III is quoted the analysis of a melteigite-jacupirangite from the 
Fen Region, Christiania, one of a series described by W. C. Brggger (1920, p. 18). 
It shows a very close similarity with that given in Column I, and according to the 
C.I.P.W. classification would fall into the same subrang, Brandbergose. The 
slightly higher alkali percentages of the Norwegian rock are mainly responsible 
for the differences in the norms, although the total amount of felspar approximates 
that of the Tilba rock. Specimens of the chief types described by Professor 
Brggger and collected by Dr. C. E. Tilley from the Fen District are in the 
Geological Museum of the University of Sydney, and are available for direct 
comparison with the rocks under consideration. Among these is a specimen of 
melanite-melteigite, which has striking resemblances, both in the handspecimen 
and in thin section, to the garnet rock at Tilba. This type is not described in 
detail by Brgégger, but is evidently the variety mentioned by him (pp. 52, 58) as 
borolanite-melteigite. from 100 metres SSW. of Melteig. 


The proportions of the several minerals in the two rocks are similar. The 
green pyroxene in the Norwegian rock differs slightly in habit from the Tilba 


672 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


rock, and the garnet is a darker colour. Apatite is more abundant, but the sphene 
and felspars are similar in the two rocks. 


The eucrites of Rum, Scotland, described by A. Harker (1908, p. 97), consist 
essentially of basic plagioclase and pyroxene, both rhombic and monoclinic. For 
comparison the analysis of one of these eucrites is quoted in Column IV of Table 7. 
Higher silica, alumina, and magnesia, and lower iron oxide and lime percentages 
indicate a rock fundamentally different from the Tilba rocks, although both consist 
of basic plagioclase and pyroxene. They are quite unlike one another in thin 
section. 

Kedabekite from Elizabethpol, Russia, is another type apparently somewhat 
like that at Tilba; according to Iddings (p. 170) it consists of “anorthite, heden- 
bergite and garnet”. It was so named by H. C. Federof (1901) in a publication 
which is not available in Australia. In its chemical composition as given in 
Washington’s Tables (p. 767) it differs chiefly by its higher content of alumina 
(19-38%) and correspondingly low magnesia (2°90). The other oxide percentages 
are close to those of the Tilba rocks. (Si0O,= 44-11, Fe,0,=5-:17, FeO =5-44, 
CaO = 21:98, Na,O = 0-50, K,0 = 0-13.) 

The garnet-bearing types of borolanite described: by Shand (1909, 1910, 1927) 
show mineralogical and textural differences from the Tilba rocks, and the analyses 
contain more than 10 per cent. of alkalis. The series includes a melanite-pyroxenite 
containing 22 per cent. of lime. 

The malignites, so named by A. C. Lawson (1896), are defined by him as 
“basic, holocrystalline, plutonic rocks, rich in alkalies and lime’. Orthoclase is a 
prominent mineral throughout the family, often as porphyritic crystals, and in 
one variety melanite is also essential. Although the lime percentages are high 
(10 to 14 per cent.), they are only about half those in the Tilba and Melteig rocks, 
whereas the total alkalis in the malignites are more than 10 per cent. as compared 
with 1 or 2 per cent. in the other rocks. It is evident therefore that the Tilba 
and Melteig rocks are not malignites. For comparison, the analysis of a typical 
malignite from the Kruger Mountain, Okanagan Range, is quoted in Column V 
of Table 8. 

Other garnet-bearing rocks, which may have some resemblance to those of 
the Tilba district, are the skarn-rocks of the Fennoscandinavian geologists. V. M. 
Goldschmidt (1911, p. 213) describes these as a product of pneumatolytic meta- 
morphism of limestone. P. Hskola (1914, p. 225) gives petrographic descriptions 
of tremolite-skarn, hornblende-skarn, pyroxene-skarn and andradite-skarn, the last 
two varieties apparently being comparable with the Tilba rocks, inasmuch as they 
consist essentially of dark-green hedenbergite and andradite (melanite). 
Unfortunately no chemical analyses of skarn-rocks are available, although the 
individual minerals have been separated and analysed. 


Skarn-rocks of this nature have been developed in the Tallong district, New 
South Wales, by the intrusion of granodiorite into limestone, the occurrence of 
which has been described by W. G. Woolnough (1910, pp. 799-806). About 30 feet 
from the contact the limestone has been recrystallized into rather pure marble; 
nearer the contact silication has taken place, and iron, alumina, magnesia and 
other constituents evidently introduced from the granodioritic magma have pro- 
duced a number of lime-silicate contact-minerals. In thin section, some varieties 
of the altered limestone show features almost identical with those of the inter- 
mediate varieties of the Tilba garnet-bearing series; green, pleochroic pyroxene, 
allotriomorphic melanite and small amounts of almost indeterminate felspathic 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 673 


material: in addition there is a small amount of calcite, which has not been 
detected in the Tilba rock. 


(iv) Petrography of the Hypabyssal Rocks. 


The hypabyssal rocks which are associated with the plutonic complex at 
Mount Dromedary occur as (1) segregation veins and patches in the plutonic 
series, (2) irregular intrusions, and (3) dykes through various phases of the 
whole igneous complex and the adjacent sediments. 


Nearly one hundred microsections of these rocks have been examined. 


(1) Segregation Veins. 

These are not of common occurrence, but have been noticed in the coarse- 
grained monzonite near Central Tilba, in the nepheline-monzonites of the Little 
Dromedary area, and in the olivine-monzonite outcropping two and a half miles 
from Tilba Tilba, on the road to Cobargo. Probably some of the aplitic dykes 
described later are of the nature of segregation veins. 

The “grey” monzonite occurring in the quarry opposite the A.B.C. Factory, 
Central Tilba, contains an interesting segregation vein, about six inches in width, 
on each side of which the monzonite gradually becomes darker in colour, thus 
resembling the “black” variety of monzonite. Orthoclase crystals, three centi- 
metres in length, and showing simple twinning, are arranged with their long 
axes at right angles to the direction of the vein, and show lustre-mottling due 
to the poikilitic arrangement of the inclusions of augite and biotite. In thin 
section, this border phase of the vein shows perfect monzonitic fabric, the large 
plates of orthoclase forming a matrix in which all the other minerals are set. 
The minerals include idiomorphic basic oligoclase (Ab,An,,), colourless or pale 
greenish-grey augite, biotite, and iron ore; apatite is present to the extent of 
nearly 10 per cent. of the rock. Much of the orthoclase shows intergrowth with 
another felspar, as myrmekite-perthite. The centre of the vein is a pegmatitic 
phase, consisting chiefly of orthoclase crystals 2 or 3 centimetres in length, amongst 
which idiomorphic, hexagonal plates of biotite and prismatic crystals of augite 
are scattered. The microscope again shows the presence of a considerable amount 
of myrmekite-perthite and apatite, and a little interstitial quartz. 

There is perfect gradation between the various types described, and there is 
little doubt that this vein formed as a result of contraction during the crystalliza- 
tion of the normal monzonite. 

Small patches and veins of a similar character occur in the fine-grained 
nepheline-monzonites of the Little Dromedary. These are always more coarsely 
crystalline than the enclosing rock, and also more felspathic. One specimen 
(M.453) shows irregular patches of white plagioclase, pink orthoclase and 
elongated crystals of black pyroxene. 

Similar veins through the olivine-monzonite on the Cobargo Road consist 
almost entirely of felspars, which have been altered to a large extent to a mass 
of finely-divided, colourless, highly doubly-refracting minerals. 


(2) Irregular Intrusions. 


The hypabyssal rocks occurring as irregular intrusions are the most important 
group in this series, and include the types described by Anderson (1892) as 
varieties of andesite. 


674 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 

The aplitic granite outcropping near the mouth of Tilba Tilba Lake probably 
belongs to this group, its injection having taken place after that of the more 
basic types. This may account for Anderson’s observation (1892, p. 150) that the 
“sranite’” has intruded the andesites. Beach-sand and soil have obscured the 
contact, described by Anderson, on each of four occasions when the writer has 
visited the locality. The “granite” is not comparable with the plutonic rocks 
forming Mount Dromedary, and therefore its relation to the andesitic series has 
no bearing on the relative ages of the main plutonic and hypabyssal series. 


The basic hypabyssal rocks outcrop in three principal areas on the mainland, 
and appear in association with porphyritic monzonite on Montague Island. These 
outcrops are indicated on the geological sketch-maps of the mainland (Plate xxxvy) 
and Montague Island (Text-figure 1), being situated south and west of Tilba 
Tilba Lake, south of Tilba Tilba village, west of Mount Dromedary, and on the 
north “Island” of Montague Island. 


In the two first-mentioned occurrences the rocks outcrop between the plutonic 
series and the invaded sedimentary rocks; the third intrudes only the slate series 
at the surface, but contains fragments of the plutonic series, which evidently 
occurs below the surface; and on Montague Island the lamprophyres have intruded 
the porphyritic monzonite. i 

The rocks occurring south and west of Tilba Tilba Lake are black or bluish-grey 
in colour, and contain small phenocrysts of hornblende, augite, plagioclase, and 
occasionally biotite, set in an aphanitic groundmass. It is difficult to apply correct 
names to the varieties of these rocks in the absence of chemical analyses; the 
terms hornblende-andesite and augite-andesite used by Anderson, or lamprophyre, 
are satisfactory field-names. 

Including the specimens collected by Anderson, twenty micro-sections of the 
rocks from this locality are available. A number of the Mines Department speci- 
mens show a brecciated structure in thin section; augite and sometimes plagio- 
clase occur as phenocrysts in a hypohyaline groundmass, which may show signs of 
flow-structure. On the whole these rocks may be described as lamprophyres and 
andesitic breccias. 

Other specimens having a more uniform and less altered appearance may show 
phenocrysts of plagioclase, surrounded by a narrow zone of orthoclase, similar to 
that of the banakites of the monzonitic province at Milton. In addition, pheno- 
crysts of yellowish-green hornblende, with.a narrow black border probably con- 
sisting of finely-divided iron ore, appear to be pseudomorphs after colourless 
augite, -which also occurs as small phenocrysts. Less frequently porphyritic 
biotite may appear. Sometimes the groundmass is holocrystalline, at other times 
eryptocrystalline or hypohyaline. 

West of Tilba Tilba Lake the hypabyssal rocks show much less brecciation in 
the hand-specimen than those forming the Head south of the entrance to the Lake, 
although traces of the structure are still evident in thin section. There is some 
variation in the relative proportion of ferromagnesian phenocrysts and aphanitic 
groundmass, which is cryptocrystalline or hypohyaline in thin section. 

The chemical analysis by Mr. J. C. H. Mingaye, of a specimen of hornblende- 
andesite from a mile west of the entrance to Tilba Tilba Lake is quoted in 
Column I of Table 9, from Anderson’s paper (1892). 

Comparison with the analyses of the monzonite-porphyry from Milton, and 
the latitic Bumbo flow of the Illawarra District, quoted in Columns II and III, 
shows the chemical composition of the three rocks to be remarkably similar. The 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 675 


TABLE 9. 
I Ta Il III 
SiO, p22 0-869 53-90 52-42 
Al,O3 18:47 0-181 1532 18-05 
Fe,0;5 3:40 0-021 3:60 4-30 
FeO 4°77 0-067 bel'3 3°60 
MgO Boni 0-128 2-41 3:60 
CaO 8-71 0-155 7:30 6-14 
Na,O 3-07 0-050 3°73 37/5) 
K.,O d 3°29 0-035 3°44 4-14 
H,0+ SW meng tl 0-97 1-07 
H,0— Sasi ny 0-74 1-47 
P.O; : 0:25 0-002 0-55 0:34 
MnO tr 0-36 0-28 
TiO, tr 2-86 1-16 
SO, tr abs. 
Co, 0-038 0:04 
Cl 0:02 tr. 
Ni, CoO.. 0:02 0:03 
BaO 0-06 0-11 
V0; 0-02 0:05 
CuO 0-01 0:05 
Total .. anes i Be: a fe 2h 99-65 100:47 100-60 
Sp. Gr. .. 3 iF Hie ae ks ae 2-779 2°722 
TABLE 9a. 
I II III 
Quartz .. a6 Sie ais oe me a ie Sus = 4-44 _ 
Orthoclase oe sf ive oN as Mo ate aus 19-46 20:02 24-46 
Albite .. od 0 ats b0 oD a6 60 ate 25°15 31:44 31:44 
Anorthite an of Re a ye By ie 43 26-69 15-01 20-29 
Diopside. . a aC ee Ne if ae ae oy 11-68 14-09 6-39 
Hypersthene .. Bu aie an ats th i as 0-43 1-50 1-96 
Olivine .. ne as ae 2 oe bed ais ais 9-25 — = 
Magnetite Be a Be Ae ie Mie We ae 4:87 5-34 3°97 
Ilmenite. . es Be ue on a at Sed His 5:47 2°28 
Apatite .. Aes as aes ah Re He ao aes 0-67 1:34 0:67 


I. Hornblende-andesite (Shoshonose, II, 5, 3, 3”). Tilba Tilba Lake, one mile west 
of the entrance. Anal. J. C. H. Mingaye. W. Anderson, 1892. Norm in W.T., p. 479. 

Ia. Molecular numbers for I. 

Il. Monzonite Porphyry [Shoshonose, II, “5, (2)3, 3(4)]. Two and a half miles 
north of Milton, N.S.W. Anal. H. P. White. Norm in W.T., 479. 

1II. Bumbo Flow (Shoshonose, II, 5, “3, 3”). Average of several specimens from 
Bumbo Quarry, Kiama, N.S.W. Anal. H. P. White. In W.T., 479. 


rocks are typically monzonitic, containing a relatively high percentage of alkalis 
for a medium percentage of silica. The analyses are also close to that of the 
monzonite from the Central Tilba quarry, given in Column I of Table 3, and 


676 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, ili, 


indeed the four analyses belong to the same subrang, Shoshonose, of the C.I.P.W. 
classification. The affinities of this group have been discussed (Brown, 1925) in 
reference to the Milton occurrence. 


The norm shows approximately 20 per cent. of orthoclase; under the micro- 
scope a small amount may be seen surrounding the plagioclase phenocrysts, but 
evidently more is included in the groundmass or is occult. 


The chemical analysis shows that the rocks are not really normal andesites 
or lamprophyres, but are hypabyssal equivalents of the monzonitic series, which 
may be called latites, thus indicating their magmatic consanguinity with the 
plutonic monzonitic series. 

South of Tilba Tilba village the main road or Prince’s Highway runs through 
a cutting in fine-grained lamprophyric rocks, which outcrop only on the surrounding 
hill. The rocks usually have a lighter colour than those west of Tilba Tilba Lake, 
and contain numerous fragments of igneous and sedimentary rocks. Phenocrysts 
of a ferromagnesian mineral are set in a fine-grained holocrystalline groundmass. 


Under the microscope colourless augite crystals several millimetres in length 
are set in a groundmass consisting of plagioclase, orthoclase, biotite, apatite, and 
iron ore, which closely resembles some of the medium-grained phases of the 
Milton monzonite-porphyry. 


West of Mount Dromedary a small outcrop of igneous rocks occurs in portions 
151 and 375, Parish of Wandellow. The mode of occurrence appears to be that 
of a volcanic neck or plug. Some phases of the matrix are similar to the 
brecciated andesitic rocks forming the headland south of Tilba Tilba Lake, others 
resemble the rocks south-west of Tilba Tilba village and Milton. The latter rocks 
are porphyritic or glomeroporphyritic in idiomorphic augite crystals up to 4 milli- 
metres in length, set in a holocrystalline groundmass of plagioclase surrounded by 
a rim of orthoclase, with biotite, augite, and iron ore. 


In this occurrence the fragmental inclusions consist of amphibolized 
pyroxenites, essexite, and recrystallized monzonites, which may constitute nearly 
half the volume of the rock. 

The hypabyssal rocks on Montague Island are lamprophyric types, which 
contain phenocrysts of colourless augite in a cryptocrystalline or hypohyaline 
groundmass, sometimes impregnated with iron ore. Local brecciation also occurs. 
The rocks resemble those outcropping near Tilba Tilba Lake. 


(3) Dykes through the igneous series and adjacent sediments. 


Dykes are fairly numerous but rarely exceed a few feet in width, and their 
outcrops usually cannot be traced very far. They are either aplitic or lampro- 
phyric in character. 


(a) Aplitic_—Narrow acid dykes occur through the lamprophyre and monzonite 
on Montague Island. In thin section they show an aplitic, even-grained rock, 
consisting of subidiomorphic orthoclase with interstitial quartz and a small amount 
of bleached biotite. 


On the northern foothills of the Little Dromedary an aplitic dyke about 12 
feet in width may be traced in an east and west direction for about half a mile 
through nepheline-monzonites. The handspecimen appears to consist of white 
and grey felspar, which, in thin section, is seen to be orthoclase. It occurs as large 
phenocrysts and smaller grains, between which some interstitial quartz is present. 

Specimens of another aplitic dyke east of Central Tilba show replacement of 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 677 


the original felspar phenocrysts by radiating zeolite. The groundmass is felspathic, 
and shows orthophyric fabric. 

It is significant that these final phases of differentiation are not specially acid, 
but show a concentration of alkalis by the abundance of alkaline felspars. 

(b) Lamprophyric—Some andesitic and lamprophyric dykes also occur, but 
they are not conspicuous. In thin section they appear to be similar to the rocks 
occurring as irregular intrusions. No chemical analyses of the dyke rocks have 
been made, so that it is not possible to determine whether the aplitic and lampro- 
phyric types are complementary. Field evidence alone suggests that the aplitic 
dykes are more likely to be final products of consolidation of the monzonitic 
plutonic series, and that the more basic types are offshoots of the newer latitic 
series. 


(v.) Petrogenesis of the Igneous Rocks. 
(a) Genetic Relationships. 


(i) Field Evidence.—The occurrence of an outcrop of igneous rocks such as 
that of the Mount Dromedary District, isolated from similar formations by out- 
crops of sedimentary rocks over large areas, naturally suggests a certain unity of 
origin and perhaps of character. 

Closer observation in this area, however, reveals such a bewildering variety 
of rock-types, that more definite proof is demanded to show the genetic relation- 
ships of these igneous rocks. The field evidence consists of the association of two 
main groups of rocks, one consisting of holocrystalline types, the other of more 
finely crystalline or aphanitic types; this association appears to be more than 
accidental, as it is repeated several times, the relationships being similar in each 
case, namely, that the aphanitic types are arranged at or near the border of the 
outcrop of the holocrystalline rocks. 


The latter form a series ranging from sub-acid to ultrabasic types, and have a 
definite arrangement in space, sometimes showing a gradual transition from one 
type to another, at other times showing abrupt changes in lithology, yet all occur- 
ring together in a limited area. 

(ii) Mineralogical Evidence.—The study of the plutonic types under the micro- 
scope in a large measure confirms the supposition of their comagmatic origin, but 
suggests that, although magmatic differentiation has produced a main series or 
suite, apparently secondary differentiation has also taken place, and at least two 
smaller series with unusual characters have been formed. 

The table (p. 678) shows in a qualitative fashion the mineralogical constitu- 
tion of the chief plutonic types which have been described in more detail in the 
foregoing text. The table clearly indicates the existence of a principal monzonitic 
series, with two related but distinct series, one characterized by the presence of 
nepheline, the other by the presence of melanite. 

In the monzonitic series the chief ferromagnesian mineral is a colourless 
pyroxene, which increases in importance from the acid to the ultrabasic end of 
the series; in addition a greenish-brown amphibole occurs in the more acid 
members of the series, while olivine is found in the remaining more basic 
members: the last two minerals rarely occur together. Biotite is present to some 
extent throughout the monzonitic series, but is characteristically absent from the 
subsidiary series. 

As usual in such series, the composition of the plagioclases forms a general 
index of the basicity of the rock, showing a fairly regular gradation from andesine 


678 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


of composition Ab,An,, in the banatite to bytownite of composition Ab,,An,. in the 
pyroxenite (jacupirangite). 5 

Orthoclase is present to some extent in all except the pyroxenite, increasing 
in importance towards the acid end of the series. The other felspathic minerals, 
anorthoclase, microcline, and myrmekite-perthite, have a limited and sporadic 
distribution. There are merely traces of nepheline in any of the monzonitic rocks 
of the main series. 

Quartz takes a minor part in a few of the more acid types. 


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3) alta) |) ata) 1) 218} az || TIS |} TR 
Tron Ore .. ae oh x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x< x 
Olivine .. af on Sx x % x x x x 
Melanite .. x x x 
Colourless Pyroxene .. x x s< x x < x x < x x SS x x 
Green Pyroxene.. a x * x x x 
Hornblende Me sé x x < x 3 xf x x 
Biotite .. “ ae x >< mx x x x x 2 ? x x 
Anorthite ae ays x x 
Bytownite (Ab) oe x 
Labradorite (Abyo—45) .. x x x x x 
Andesine. . x x x x x * x < 
Albite << 
Orthoclase x xe x x x x x < x x x x ? ? 
Anorthoclase ? ? ? x 
Microcline 2 xe ? ? 
Myrmekite-perthite he x x x 
Nepheline : ? x ? x x x ? ? 
Quartz .. ne ae x x 2 
Apatite a x x x x x x x x x x x x< x x x 
Sphene .. ai aus x x x S< x x x x x x x x 
Sodalite .. Bh ? x x x 
Fluorite .. aed ins ? 
Calcite es aA ? 
Analcite .. ts aa ? % ? 
Cancrinite x x < 
Chlorite .. 8 
Scapolite.. ave at x 


(1) Banatite (Syenite). (2) Porphyritic Monzonite. (3) Porphyritic Nepheline- 
Monzonite. (4) Coarse Grey Monzonite. (5) Coarse Black Monzonite. (6) Monzonite 
(Grassy Knob). (7) Olivine-Monzonite. (8) Olivine-Shonkinite. (9) Nepheline- 
Monzonite. (10) Nepheline-Shonkinite (Covite). (11) Pyroxene-Granulite or Olivine- 
Gabbro. (12) Biotite-Gabbro or Hssexite. (13) Pyroxenite or Jacupirangite. (14) 
Ijolite. (15) Pyroxenite (Kedabekite). (16) Melanite-Pyroxenite or Melteigite- 
Jacupirangite. 


The minor accessory minerals, iron ore, apatite and sphene, are present in 
small amounts throughout the entire series; in the acid members of the monzonitic 
series there are traces of minerals characteristic of late primary or deuteric 
crystallization, including calcite, fluorspar, chlorite, fibrous green amphibole, and 
deuteric albite. 

The series containing nepheline shows its connection with the monzonitic 
series mineralogically by the presence of orthoclase with varying amounts of 
intermediate or basic plagioclase. It contains some colourless pyroxene, thus 
resembling the main series, but is distinguished by the additional presence of 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 679 


alkaline green pyroxene, which is developed to the exclusion of the alkali-bearing 
ferromagnesian mineral, biotite, of the monzonitic series. 

Although obviously undersaturated in silica, it is noteworthy that olivine is 
seldom developed in the nepheline-bearing series; when it has been observed, 
it appears to be the somewhat rare, optically negative iron-olivine, fayalite. This 
may be due to the low magnesia content of the rock. 

The presence of greenish-brown amphibole in both series is possibly controlled 
by physical rather than purely chemical conditions during the consolidation of 
the rock. 

In addition to small quantities of iron ore, apatite, and sphene, there are 
also small amounts of cancrinite, sodalite, calcite and perhaps analcite, which may 
be partly primary, and which often accompany the felspathoids. 

The consanguinity of the monzonitic and garnet-bearing rocks is less apparent. 
The latter appear ‘to be more basic than the main series; the plagioclase is 
anorthite, and usually there are only traces of orthoclase and nepheline; the 
ferromagnesian mineral is a green pyroxene, which is somewhat similar to that 
in the nepheline series, thus showing an indirect relationship to the main series. 
The ijolite appears to be a connecting link between the two: here the plagioclase 
is not quite so basic as in the garnet series, the rock contains both colourless and 
green pyroxene, with fairly abundant nepheline, and melanite is also present in 
this rock as well as in a few members of the nepheline-bearing series. 

The trend of the mineralogical evidence therefore indicates magmatic con- 
sanguinity of the garnet-bearing and monzonitic series. 

The magmatic relations between the plutonic and hypabyssal or volcanic 
series of andesitic and lamprophyric rocks are shown more clearly by the 
chemical than by the mineralogical evidence. Nevertheless, there are some 
mineralogical characters that suggest a comagmatic origin: the plagioclase pheno- 
cerysts frequently show a narrow outer zone of orthoclase, a common feature of 
the volcanic monzonitic rocks banakite and absarokite, and one which is charac- 
teristic of the monzonitic series at Milton, eighty miles to the north of Mt. 
Dromedary. 

(iii) Chemical Hvidence.—The chemical evidence establishes the consanguinity 
of the rocks under consideration even more definitely than the mineralogical 
evidence. A table of the chemical analyses of typical specimens from Mt. 
Dromedary is given below, the analyses being arranged in order of decreasing 
basicity: these include (1) principal types of the monzonitic series, (2) the covite, 
representing the nepheline-bearing group, (3) a. typical member of the latite 
group, and (4) the two end-members of the garnet-bearing series. 

The analyses show the rocks to be relatively low in silica; with a decrease 
in alumina and alkalis there is an increase in lime, iron and magnesia corres- 
ponding approximately to the relative proportions of alkali felspars and ferro- 
mMmagnesian minerals. The total amount of alkalis lies between 5 and 10 per cent., 
that of potash always being greater than soda. 

The chemical character of the series is also reflected in the table of norms, 
in which the rocks are arranged in the same order as before. The low silica 
content is expressed in the absence of quartz, except in the two most acid rocks 
of the series, while, with one exception, olivine and felspathoids appear in the 
norms of all the other rocks. Orthoclase is generally dominant over combined 
albite and nepheline, anorthite is consistently high throughout, a reflection of the 
high alumina and lime content. Diopside, hypersthene and olivine show an 
increase from the acid to the basic end of the series as demanded by the increasing 


680 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


percentages of iron, lime and magnesia, and iron oxides and apatite are relatively 
high. 


I II IIl IV V VI VII VIII Ix x 
SiO, 43-63 46-04 48-34 51-14 51-09 52-12 59-44 64:49 44-28 40-26 
Al,O; Uotsy? 19-46 11-79 16:91 Geral 18:47 19-58 17:48 10°13 10-95 
Fe,0; 6-45 3°80 2-31 1-34 3-11 3°40 Osi 1-64 4-04 12-16 
FeO 8:57 6:20 7-72 oN, 6-58 4°77 3°91 1-69 6:21 3°38 
MgO 13°67 3°74 9:59 5:88 4-69 yo atal 127, 0-66 8-42 2-16 
CaO aaa 9-72 12-76 9-68 9-10 8:71 3:95 3°28 21-86 26-30 
Na,O 0-36 3°49 1-60 1-92 3°29 3°07 Boral 4-16 0:31 0-44 
K,0O 0-50 4-91 “Beal? Boy4 3°94 3°29 6-60 4-79 0-69 1-33 
H.O+ 0:46 0-69 0:68 0-54 0:66 tena 0:88 0-52 1-29 0-64 
H.0 — 0:25 0:31 0-04 0:20 0-10 Jf 0:12 0:18 0:29 0:28 
TiO, 1-24 0:92 0:88 0-92 1:02 tr. 0-54 0:46 1-28 1:68 
1210) tr. 0-84 0-87 0:53 0:77 0:25 0:07 0-22 1-35 0-89 
MnO ae 0-20 0:23 0:15 0-14 0-18 tr 0:07 0-11 0-23 abs. 
CO, a abs. pres. abs. 0:49 0-71 abs abs 
Ses 0:06 
BaQ tr. 
Motalliguese 99-97 | 100-35 99:90 99-79 | 100-64 99-65 | 100-44 | 100-45 | 100-38 | 100-47 
SpaGrenes 3°393 2°912 3°085 3:017 2-871 — 2-679 2-653 BoeBy/ 3°425 


I. Pyroxenite. II. Covite. III. Shonkinite. IV. Olivine-Monzonite. V. Coarse 
Monzonite. VI. Andesite (Latite). VII. Porphyritic Monzonite. VIII. Banatite. IX. 
Pyroxenite (Kedabekite). X. Melanite-Pyroxenite or Melteigite-Jacupirangite. 


I II Til IV Vv VI VII VIII IX x 
Quartz dub a6 4-74 | 15-78 _- 
Orthoclase .. ae 1-67 | 28-91 | 18-90 | 19:46 | 23-35 | 19-46 | 38-92 | 28°36 _ 3-06 
Albite.. at Bic — 1-05 6:29 | 16:24 | 20-44 | 25-15 | 27-25 | 35:11 — 
Anorthite ... .. | 17°51 | 28-07 | 15:57 | 27-80 |. 17-51 | 26-69 | 15:57 | 11-12 | 24:74 | 23-91 
Nepheline .. ae 1-70 | 15:34 3:98 3°98 — a 1:24 1-99 
Leucite ate oe 0-87 = — 3:05 Boil 
Corundum .. Ans 1:43 1:43 — 
Diopside ae .. | 52°87 | 15-95 | 34:08 | 13-66 | 18-18 | 11:68 = - 57-27 | 11-66 
Hypersthene.. ai 11-28 0:43 9-27 2°66 — 
Olivine a een el 280) 6:29 | 138-48 5:70 8-12 9-25 _ — — 
Wollastonite . . x) i — = 0°58 | 35-96 
Ca. Orthosil. .. ie _ _ 0-86 
Magnetite .. of 9-28 yo bye 3°25 1-86 4-4) 4-87 0-46 232 5-80 6-03 
Haematite .. bs _ - -— 8-00 
Ilmenite AAs a 2-28 1-67 1:67 1:67 1:98 1-06 0:91 2°43 3-19 
Apatite Re a 0:34 2:02 2°02 1:34 2-02 0-67 | 0:84 0:34 3:02 2:02 
Pyrite. . ie Me 0-12 
Calcite te ue : 1:10 1:60 
Class .. ae a IV II’ TIL | IL (11D) | II (111) II I (II) I IV IV 
Order .. ae 56 |) (a) eS 6 5 (6) 5 5 5 5 4” 1-2, 21 
Rang .. pe oF np’ "3 3 3(4) | (2)3 3 2 2 3 3-4 
Subrang Ake A 2 3 3 3 3 on 3 8 2 2 
o — — 
S e ae) & | ae a a) 8 3 q S| 
Ss o i (e} iS} le} yi q st 3 
B B S Ss Ee! se c ae s a qi 
tw 5 I 5 S| Bee ar | Se & a 
= = S id A aS a | ae & i, 5 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 681 


The variation in. chemical constitution is shown more clearly when the 
analytical results are plotted on a form of variation-diagram, such as the type used 
by Harker (1909, p. 129), where the silica percentages are used as abscissae and 
the other oxides are plotted as ordinates. In this diagram (Text-figure 2) the 
garnet-bearing and nepheline-bearing rocks are considered independently of the 
monzonitic series, which makes it possible to draw relatively even curves through 


the mean positions of the points plotted to represent the various oxides in the 
monzonitic series. 


7 
He 


| 


g 
z 
8 
1g 2 38 2 Son 2 
2k § =3 = gS = te 2 
B: 223 og = ue S 28 3 
= S 5 $ Se 5 
S ei 8 a zs % cr ea 
i {a h ) 1 \ 
“4 Eo | it ! 
i I 
' | he H f ALO, . i 
1 | d i 4 
w Par ' q ' ' 
mal ' H | 
: aE ! 7 
1 H ' ' 7 
7 t TASTER aD pT a 
1 \ ' 1 
++ ' lt > 
ESC 
' ie 
1 
p 1 
i) 
1 


[ 


t OQ i i 
[1 <o | | 
Nu | 
2 i z ——l! += 
ik op 
wale oe fe bats ES ate 
: | ie 
+ Trac user | lena | Re 1 
* ' % ! 
1 1 : us 
ane | i 0 | 
' i" H ; ae 
' ft h ale - ! 
ie 4 Sool | ape 
' n I" 
MgO} aaa iy i + i 
Heal Na,o 1 e lo x ¢ 
1 Ml 1 
a | | NagO SS 
ull Ht £0 
Ti s ; ; 
i ‘ Tio 1 
= 
aa t 0 P.O, r i t a 44 
oe 1 in 
wo 
~M 3 OS S 8 BS 5 rs [8 Ss 


(1). The range of silica percentage in the latter group is about 21 per cent., 
from ultrabasic with 43-63 per cent. to subacid with 64:49 per cent. of silica. The 
form of the curves is distinctive, and may be compared particularly with that 
figured by Harker (1909, p. 182) as a “Generalised Variation-Diagram for the 
Plutonic Complex of Magnet Cove, Arkansas, from Analyses given by Washington 
(1901)”. In this case the range of silica (about 15 per cent.) is not so great 


682 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


as that at Mt. Dromedary, although the shapes of the curves for the individual 
oxides are closely comparable: thus the alumina curve rises sharply from the 
basic end of the series until about 50 per cent. of silica is present, then continues 
as a flat, slightly convex curve; total iron oxides decrease from the basic to the 
acid end as a slightly concave curve; the curves for lime and magnesia show 
marked sympathy, both descending from the basic to the acid end as approximately 
parallel curves, that of lime being higher than magnesia in both the Magnet Cove 
and Mt. Dromedary series. The curves for potash and soda rise from the basic 
to the acid end; for the Mt. Dromedary series these two curves do not intersect as 
they do in the Magnet Cove series. Phosphorus and titania show flat curves, 
almost straight lines, falling slightly towards the acid end. 


Two of the rocks in the series show slight variations from the normal curves. 
In the shonkinite the percentage of magnesia is greater than, and the percentage of 
iron is less than that required by the normal curves: this must be due to some 
difference in the composition of the dominant ferromagnesian mineral, augite. 


It may be noticed also that two of the rocks, the olivine-monzonite and the 
coarse-grained monzonite, possess about the same amount of silica, but show 
slight, although distinct, differences in the percentages of the other oxides. On 
the whole the olivine-monzonite appears to conform with the normal, while the 
coarse-grained monzonite has lower percentages of alumina, lime and magnesia, 
and correspondingly higher percentages of iron and total alkalis than the olivine- 
monzonite. The olivine-monzonite is a relatively fine-grained marginal phase of 
the intrusion. 


The diagram thus shows not only the variation within the Mt. Dromedary 
series, but also confirms the mineralogical evidence of the similarity of this and 
the Magnet Cove series. 


Another interesting point is that in both series there has been developed a 
type of nepheline-shonkinite, covite, which is not a direct product of serial differen- 
tiation. Plotted according to the percentage of silica in the Mt. Dromedary covite, 
the positions for the abscissal points for iron, lime and magnesia fall much below, 
and those for alumina and alkalis much above, the curves for the respective oxides 
in the monzonitic series. 


In his treatment of the magmatic differentiation at Magnet Cove, Arkansas, 
Washington (1901) has used a modification of a type of variation-diagram used by 
Pirsson (1900) for the Yogo Peak rocks in the Little Belt Mountains of Montana, 
in which the relative distances from the petrographic centre of the igneous mass 
are represented by the abscissal distances, and the molecular proportions of all 
the oxides (including silica) are used as ordinates. For the Yogo Peak series of 
four chemical analyses the curves are practically linear; for the Magnet Cove 
rocks (four analyses) they are distinctly flat curves. 


By choosing a point about 1,000 feet below the Mount Dromedary Trigono- 
metrical Station as the probable petrographical centre, and making allowance for 
the vertical as well as for the horizontal distribution of the rock-types, a diagram 
very similar to that of Magnet Cove was obtained for the six analyses of the 
Mt. Dromedary monzonitic series. (Text-figure 3.) 

The accompanying table shows the molecular proportions on which the 
diagram is based. 

Total iron is calculated as FeO, and the curves F and M have the same signifi- 
cance as that assigned by Washington, F representing the sum of the ascending 


800 


700 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 683 


curves, alumina and alkalis, and M the sum of the descending curves of the mafic 
constituents, lime, magnesia, and total iron as ferrous oxide. 

The diagram shows remarkable regularity of the curves, which, however, are 
not straight lines, although over the basic end of the series they are approximately 
linear, as at Yogo Peak; as the series is traced towards the acid end, the curves 
simulate those obtained by Washington for the Magnet Cove Series, where that of 
silica becomes concave (upwards) while the others remain linear. 

The Mt. Dromedary curves go beyond this stage, and with increasing silica 
the curves for alumina and alkalis become convex (upwards). The remarkable 
regularity of the curves suggests that where this type of diagram can be obtained 
for a given series, it represents the simplest and perhaps the best picture of the 
differentiation of the series. 

As Washington states (1901, p. 657), “As all the curves are so smooth and 
well defined, it seems highly probable that equations for them could be found 
and that their properties as such could be discussed. In this way we could get 


| 


---4a--4---p === 


corsa ole es 


I tessy ea bee S 


ele a ay 


Text-fig. 3. 


684 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


Table of Molecular Numbers. 


I II Til IV V VI VII VIII IX XG 

SiO, 0-727 0:767 0-806 0-852 0-851 0-869 0-991 1:075 0-738 0-671 
Al,O; 0-074 0-191 0-116 0-166 0-158 0-181 0-192 0-172 0-099 0-107 
Fe,0; 0-040 0-024 0-014 0:008 0-019 0-021 0-002 0-010 0-025 0-076 
FeO 0-119 0-086 0-107 0-101 0-092 0-067 0-054 0-024 0-086 0-047 
Total FeO 0-200 0:133 0:1386 0-118 0-131 0-109 0-058 0-044 0-137 0-199 
MgO 0-342 0-093 0-240 0-147 0-117 0:128 0-032 0-016 0-210 0-054 
CaO 0-305 0-173 0-228 0-173 0-163 0:155 0-070 0-059 0-390 0-470 
Na,O 0-006 0-056 0:026 0-031 0-053 0-050 0-052 0-067 0-005 0-007 
K,0 0-005 0-052 0-034 0-035 0-042 0-035 0-070 0-051 0-007 0-014 
TiO, 0-015 0-011 0-011 0-011 0-013 0-007 0-006 0-016 0-021 
P.O; 0-001 0-006 0-006 0-004 0-006 0:002 0-001 0-001 0-009 0-006 
MnO 0-003 0-003 0-002 0-002 0-003 0-001 0-001 0-003 
co, 0-011 0-016 
156 0-085 0-299 0-176 0-232 0-253 0-265 0-314 0-290 0-111 0-128 
M 0-847 0-399 0-596 0-438 0-411 0-392 0-160 0-119 0:737 0-723 

I. Pyroxenite. II. Covite. III. Shonkinite. IV. Olivine-Monzonite. V. Coarse 


Monzonite. VI. Andesite (Latite). VII. Porphyritic Monzonite. VIII. Banatite. IX. 
Pyroxenite (Kedabekite). X. Melanite-Pyroxenite or Melteigite-Jacupirangite. 


an exact knowledge of the law of differentiation, in this particular case (Magnet 
Cove) at least.” 

To find an equation for a given curve is one of the most difficult problems 
of mathematics. The curves for the Mt. Dromedary series clearly indicate that 
the variation in the oxides cannot be represented by straight lines, a method 
which frequently has been adopted in petrological literature. A little considera- 
tion suggests that even if magmatic differentiation proceeded to its ultimate limit, 
the mathematical equations represented by the curves are probably bounded 
functions, for silica cannot increase without limit in an enclosed magma-chamber. 
Again, since the curves for the molecular proportions show such regularity, it 
seems probable that they all may be governed by the same underlying law, and may 
represent functions of the same mathematical form. 


The curves for the function Sinh nx, for various values of n, have a general 
similarity to those given in the diagram, over a limited distance for f (x). This is 
a bounded infinite series, which, if applicable to the rock series under considera- 
tion, will allow SiO, to have a definite maximum value, after which the curve 
will fall rapidly: since the other curves shown in the diagram, except CQ., are 
falling in the same direction, it is obvious that some additional constituents will 
come into the series. This is approaching the limit of differentiation, when the 
volatile constituents are accumulating in the top of the magma-chamber, unless 
they have some means of escape into the country rock. This concentration of 
volatile constituents is a well-recognized final phase of differentiation, and at Mt. 
Dromedary is indicated. by an appreciable amount of magmatic CO. in the two 
most acid of the analysed rocks, while traces of fluorine are known to occur in 
other specimens. 

Under normal conditions these gases are free to escape, thus changing the 
conditions in the magma-chamber, and necessitating a recalculation of the relative 
percentages of the remaining constituents. It is conceivable that in some cases 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 685 


the composition of the original magma might be such that in the final stages of 
consolidation, with release of the volatile constituents, the relative proportions 
of the oxides, particularly those of alumina and alkalis to silica, might increase 
sufficiently to produce alkali-rich rocks like nepheline-syenites and aplites, while 
in other cases where there was a good excess of silica in the original magma, the 
final phases of consolidation would consist of quartz-veins. 


That the curves shown in the accompanying diagram might be represented by 
a function such as Sinh nx is merely put forward as a suggestion perhaps worthy 
of testing on a series which has differentiated in a confined magma-chamber under 
quiet conditions, where gravity has been able to exert its full influence. 


The curve, y =Sinh nx, is the differential of the curve for Cosh nx, which is the 
catenary, the form assumed by a heavy chain of uniform density hanging freely 
under gravity, and thus might represent the concentration of various constituents 
at a particular level in the magma. In the ideal case, the upward forces in the 
magma, molecular attraction and viscosity of the magma, acting against the force 
of gravity, might be analogous to the upward pressure at the points of attach- 
ment at the ends of the heavy chain. 

(2). The position of the covite in this series is a matter of some doubt. In 
the field it occurs under the porphyritic banatite, so if it be assigned a position 
such as that shown in the diagram at II (Text-figure 3), silica, alumina, and 
total alkalis are more or less below the normal curves; and lime, iron and 
magnesia are all above them, the rock thus bearing exactly the same relation to 
the monzonitic series, as Washington found the covite to bear to the ijolite-jacupi- 
rapgite series of Magnet Cove. 

Washington has discussed in detail the apparent abnormality of the covite, 
and arrives at the conclusion that it is not a primary differentiation product, but 
the result of secondary or complementary differentiation of some portion of the 
main series. He concludes (p. 669) that since “the crystallisation of minerals 
from a molten magma is an exothermic change’. . . “It is therefore conceivable 
that the solidification of a laccolithic mass may give rise to sufficient heat to 
remelt portions of it, which might easily remain liquid long enough for secondary 
differentiation to take place.” 

(3). The only analysis representing the composition of the latite group out- 
cropping near Tilba Tilba Lake available at the present time is that made by 
J. C. H. Mingaye in the chemical laboratory of the Department of Mines, N.S.W., 
in connection with Anderson’s work in 1892. 

This analysis is quoted in the table above. It has already been pointed out 
that it closely resembles the analyses of the coarse-grained monzonite from the 
Central Tilba Quarries, the monzonite-porphyry of Milton, and the Bumbo flow of 
latite or orthoclase-basalt of the Illawarra District. Naturally the norms of these 
rocks are very similar, and all fall into the same sub-rang, Shoshonose, according 
to the C.I.P.W. classification. Those of the analyses which have been published 
already are included in Washington’s Tables, where they are grouped with 
monzonites and their hypabyssal equivalents. 

When Mingaye’s analysis is plotted on the variation-diagram for the mon- 
zonitic series at Mt. Dromedary (Text-figure 2) the points lie within one per cent. 
of the theoretical values required by the curves for the same silica percentage. It 
is considered that this not only shows undoubtedly the consanguinity of the 
monzonite and latite series at Mt. Dromedary, but also indicates that the com- 
position of the magma from which the plutonic series was differentiated was 


686 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


approximately that of the latite, and suggests that the origin of the magma is 
ultimately related to those of the Milton and Illawarra occurrences. 

(4). The analyses and plots (Text-figure 2) of two end-members of the 
melanite series do not show any direct chemical relationship to the monzonitic 
series, although it is considered that the mineralogical evidence previously 
described shows their indirect relationship through the nepheline-bearing series. 
The individual chemical characters have been considered under the petrographical 
descriptions. 

Compared with the basic end of the monzonitic series they are low in 
magnesia and iron oxides, with higher lime, alumina, and alkalis. 


Summarizing, the trend of all the available evidence, field, mineralogical and 
chemical, indicates fairly clearly that the rocks of the four groups which have 
been considered, the monzonitic, the nepheline-bearing, the latitic, and the 
melanite-bearing, show varying degrees of magmatic relationship, and that 
probably they have all been derived from the same original magma. 


(0). The Nature of the Intrusion. 


Reference to the geological sketch-map of the Mt. Dromedary District shows 
a somewhat irregular, oval-shaped outcrop of igneous rocks surrounded by altered 
sedimentary rocks. Few vertical sections of the folded sedimentary series are 
available except along the sea-coast (Plate xxxvii, fig. 3), but the general trends 
or strike-directions have been determined in many places, and are indicated on 
the map. A study of these directions shows that the igneous mass has forced 
its way into the old sediments, either cutting them off abruptly, as on the south- 
eastern slope of Mt. Dromedary, or else bowing the beds round the igneous mass 
and changing the strike-directions by as much as 45 degrees from the normal, 
clear evidence of the intrusive nature of the igneous mass. 

As the intrusion was able to exert such lateral force, it is probable that 
considerable vertical force was exerted also, and that the cover was lifted as a 
dome over the top, although only a few remnants survive. A small outcrop of 
slaty rock forms a capping on the hill above the olivine-monzonite on the road 
from Tilba Tilba to Cobargo, and the general field-relations of the slates and 
monzonites about a mile east and north-east of Central Tilba suggest that the 
slates here are portions of the original sedimentary cover. 


Further evidence of the intrusive nature of the occurrence is afforded by the 
slight contact metamorphic effects superimposed on the more widely-spread regional 
metamorphism of the series. Thus on the south-eastern slopes of Mt. Dromedary 
the sandy quartz-schists have been hardened for a distance of 15 or 20 feet 
from the contact, and similar effects occur elsewhere. Near the Tilba Tilba 
Cemetery and south-east of Tilba Tilba Swamp, some of the softer, more aluminous 
bands of the country rock have been converted into spotted and knotted schists, 
containing incipient crystals of andalusite. 

Although there can be no doubt of the intrusive nature of the igneous rock, 
the form of the intrusion is not so apparent. The size and shape of the intrusion, 
and the general internal arrangement of the rock-types, so far as is revealed, 
suggest that it is in the form of either a laccolith or a stock. 

The longest diameter of the outcrop of the igneous types is between eight 
and nine miles in length, in an east-west direction through the Dromedary Trigono- 
metrical Station, the direction of the hypothetical section shown on Plate xxxv. 

The plutonic rocks occur from below sea-level to the top of the mountain 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 687 


(2,613 feet) so that the central portion of the mass has a minimum thickness of 
the order of 2,700 to 3,000 feet, or approximately half a mile. 

In plan, the disposition of the monzonitic types is normal, in that the more 
basic phases are arranged peripherally with respect to the more acid, while there 
seems good reason for believing that the same orderly arrangement prevails in 
vertical section, and that the more basic phases occur successively beneath the 
more acid. Thus the upper portion of the Mountain consists of fine-grained 
banatite, which in its upper portion has been affected by pneumatolytic and 
deuteric agencies, and which gradually passes into a porphyritic phase at its 
lower boundary (see Plate xxxvi). An “outlier” of the porphyritic monzonite 
occurs on the top of the Little Dromedary. 


Typical monzonite outcrops on the lower slopes surrounding the Mountair 
and, on the whole, this phase is in contact with the intruded sediments, which 
here may be considered as portions of the roof of the intrusion. The more basic 
pyroxenite or jacupirangite occurs at a lower level, and outcrops naturally only 
along the sea-shore near Poole’s Point. Indirect evidence of its probable occur- 
rence below the monzonite further inland is afforded by the occurrence of related 
types, essexite and shonkinite, at low altitudes, and the presence of inclusions 
of pyroxenite and related types in the fine-grained monzonites on the western and 
southern slopes of the Little Dromedary, as well as in the small latitic neck in 
the Parish of Wandellow, west of Mt. Dromedary. : 

The evidence so far strongly suggests a laccolithic character for the intrusion. 

On the other hand the nature of the invaded sediments does not seem favour- 
able for the development of this type of intrusion: usually laccolithic intrusions 
are concordant, occurring in horizontally-bedded strata, or along a surface of 
weakness such as an unconformity. Here the rocks are thin-bedded, highly-folded 
sediments, which are much jointed, and no definite evidence of unconformity at 
Mount Dromedary has been recognized up to the present time. Nevertheless, it is 
known that in this region, igneous injection has taken place between sediments 
of Ordovician and Devonian ages, either along an unconformity or else along a 
faulted junction. One such occurrence is near Cobargo, within 10 miles of Mt. 
Dromedary, so that the possibility of intrusion here under similar circumstances 
should not be overlooked. 


In the Little Belt Mountains of Montana, at Yogo Peak and its easterly 
extension, there is a somewhat similar series of igneous rocks, which was 
described by Weed-and Pirsson (1895, p. 467), and later by Pirsson (1900, p. 564). 
The principal rock-types are granite-porphyry, banatite, monzonite, and shon- 
kinite, a series comparable with that at Mt. Dromedary. The intrusion is “from 
half a mile to a mile in width and several miles in length’, with the more basic 
portions at each end. Pirsson is of the opinion that the ‘“Yogo Peak intrusion is 
of the nature of a stock, in which differentiation took place in sitw’” (1900, p. 564), 
or alternatively that laccolithic differentiation took place below, “followed by a 
later upward movement of the mass”. 

_ In the Highwood Mountains of Montana there are several volcanic stocks 
which have been described by Pirsson (1905), and which show an irregular arrange- 
ment of the included rock-types. Associated with these stocks are three other 
occurrences containing rocks of the same series, syenite and shonkinite, at 
Shonkin Sag, Palisade Butte and Square Butte. Pirsson was at first of the 
opinion that Square Butte was of the nature of a stock, but after the study of 
the Shonkin Sag occurrence he considered that the three intrusions are laccoliths, 


688 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


“in different stages of dissection”, and accordingly he modified his section through 
Square Butte. 

Again, at Loch Borolan in north-west Scotland a similar sequence of granite, 
syenite, melanite-syenite, melanite-nepheline-syenite and melanite-pyroxenite occurs 
as a laccolith, according to the interpretation of Shand (1909-10, 1927). 

R. Balk (1925, p. 685) gives a section through the granite at Bethel, Vermont, 
in which the igneous rock assumes a laccolithic form, although the country-rock 
is a “finely plicated, very fine grained quartz-muscovite-biotite schist”. (T. N. 
Dale, 1923, p. 84). 

A consideration of all the known facts therefore gives support to the idea 
that the form of the intrusion at Mount Dromedary is really laccolithic; also 
there is a possibility that it may have been an interformational intrusion, whose 
cover has been completely eroded. 


(c) History of the Intrusion. 


The history of the intrusion appears to have been a complicated one; as a 
whole the igneous rocks are intrusive into altered sediments, and the intrusion 
_probably assumes a laccolithic form. 

The magma which produced the principal monzonitic series was injected first, 
and the nepheline-bearing series was probably derived from some phase of the 
monzonitic complex by secondary differentiation. The relation of the melanite- 
bearing series is less evident, but the series may be intrusive into the monzonitic. 
The latitic rocks have intruded the plutonic series, and a number of aplitic and 
lamprophyric dykes are at least partially later than all other rocks of the complex, 
having been injected along joint planes and potential fissures in both the 
monzonitic and latitic series. The closing phase of igneous activity was accom- 
panied by metalliferous deposition on a small scale; the veins of auriferous 
pyrites associated with the dykes on the top of Mt. Dromedary are to be referred 
to this phase. 

The field, mineralogical, and chemical evidence indicates that the rocks pre- 
viously described have a common origin, although the degree of consanguinity 
varies. Probably a volume of magma of the composition of the latite was injected 
into the position now occupied by the Mt. Dromedary complex. This mass has an 
area of 25 to 30 square miles and a thickness of about 3,000 feet in its central 
portion, thinning out towards the margins. The simplest explanation of the field- 
association of the members of the monzonitic series is that differentiation took 
place in situ by means of fractional crystallization and the sinking of crystals 
under gravity, as postulated by Bowen (1915, 1919), Harker (1909, p. 317, 1913) 
and others. This idea of the differentiation is represented diagrammatically in 
the section on Plate xxxv. . 

This type of laccolithic differentiation is well recognized in occurrences such 
as at Shonkin Sag (Pirsson, 1905), Loch Borolan (Shand, 1909-10, 1927), and the 
laccolites of Duluth (Van: Hise and Leith, 1911, and others), Sudbury (Coleman, 
1907, Coleman and others, 1929) and Bushveld (Brouwer, 1917, Daly and 
Molengraaf, 1924). 


If the differentiation did not take place in situ, a similar process must have 
occurred at a lower depth, with successive injections of the various phases into 
positions similar to those required under the former hypothesis. The gradual 
transition of the fine-grained banatite into the porphyritic monzonite indicates 
that these two phases at least belong to the same period of intrusion: the actual 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 689 


junction between the porphyritic monzonite and the coarse-grained monzonite is 
rarely exposed, although in general the former outcrops at higher levels than the 
latter. In some of the smooth rock-exposures on the mountain slopes west of 
Tilba Public School, the two distinct types come into sharp contact with one 
another, with no apparent contact-metamorphic effects in either rock. South-west 
of Tilba Tilba village a dyke-like mass of porphyritic-monzonite, about two feet 
in width, apparently intrudes the monzonite. Hvidently some movement took 
place during the consolidation of the banatite, with partial injection of the 
banatite into the partially consolidated monzonite, a process not altogether incom- 
patible with the idea of gravitative differentiation in place, and one which is 
recognized by Coleman (1907), Daly (1914), Bowen (1915) and others. 


The coarse monzonite and the pyroxenite are not exposed in sharp contact, 
but the low headland on the western side of Tilba Tilba Lake exposes a basic 
phase of the monzonite which, with its low felspar content, approaches the com- 
position of the typical pyroxenite occurring on the opposite side of the Lake. 

The bulk of the evidence is thus in favour of laccolithic differentiation in 
place. 

The nepheline-bearing series presents some puzzling features. These rocks 
appear to underlie the porphyritic monzonite of the top of the Little Dromedary, 
and within themselves show a variation in mineral constitution and specific gravity 
suggestive of gravitative differentiation and also of lateral segregation of alkalis 
away from the main monzonitic intrusion, which is reminiscent of Harker’s 
descriptions (1917) of the Mull District, where the alkaline facies occurs about 
the borders of the more ecalcic, indicating lateral creep of alkaline magma. Bowen 
(1915) recognizes a similar arrangement of the alkaline and subalkaline rocks 
on a large scale. 

The chemical composition of the nepheline-shonkinite or covite, low in silica, 
iron, lime and magnesia, and high in alkalis and alumina, is one which might 
be produced by the squeezing out of residual liquid from a partially crystallized 
magma of monzonitic composition. 


The physico-chemical conditions of the crystallization of magma are so im- 
perfectly known that one hesitates to express an opinion as to the stage at which 
particular members of an igneous series are completely crystallized. If the magma 
had reached the stage when the pyroxenite was potentially solid, and the overlying 
monzonite was largely crystalline, with a strong crystal mesh, and the banatite 
had differentiated sufficiently to form a lower porphyritic phase, it is conceivable 
that physical disturbance of the laccolith at this stage might produce apparent 
intrusive relationships of the porphyritic banatite with respect to the monzonite, 
and that the altered physical conditions within the monzonite might result in 
the squeezing out of the still-liquid alkaline portion to form the nepheline- 
monzonites, with possible recrystallization of the solid phase. 


That some such disturbance took place is suggested not only by the facts 
mentioned previously, but also because the olivine-monzonite, a marginal phase 
of the monzonitic stage, appears to be the normal product of differentiation 
according to the variation-diagram (Text-figure 2), whereas the coarse-grained 
grey monzonite (analysed) varies distinctly from this normal, and the black 
monzonite (not analysed) is a quartz-bearing type, which is intimately related 
to the grey variety in the field. 

It is therefore suggested that the magma which produced the nepheline rocks 
of the Little Dromedary was derived from the more normal phase of the im- 


690 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, ili, 


perfectly crystallized monzonitic magma, by the squeezing out of liquid magma 
during a physical disturbance of the laccolithic mass. 

This is a spccial application of the principles of crystallization-differentiation 
such as postulated by Bowen (1915), combined with the views of Harker (1917) 
regarding the manifestation of alkaline rocks as a result of earth movement. The 
subsequent crystallization of the alkaline magma evidently was effected more 
rapidly than that of the normal monzonite, for more finely-crystalline rocks were 
produced, although gravitative differentiation took place to some extent. 

The origin of the melanite-bearing series or melteigite-jacupirangites is much 
more obscure. The rocks apparently intrude the nepheline-monzonites in some 
places, while in other places there seems to be a gradual transition from the one 
series to the other, as though the garnet were partly of pneumatolytic origin, or 
at least had been formed during the final phases of consolidation of the rock. 


The available evidence is insufficient to show conclusively the origin of this 
interesting series. Mineralogically it appears to be indirectly related to the 
nepheline-bearing and monzonitic series. The chemical composition of the series 
as a whole is distinctive, although the least basic member somewhat resembles the 
pyroxenite-jacupirangite in composition, suggesting that it may be a product of 
secondary differentiation of this basic phase of the more normal monzonitic magma. 
The series is peculiar in containing high percentages of lime, combined with low 
amounts of iron and magnesia, thus resembling the melteigites described by 
Brégger (1920) from the Fen Region, Christiania, which also occur in association 
with rocks of definitely alkaline facies. 

At Loch Borolan, Scotland (Shand, 1909, 1910, 1927), at the Kruger Mountain, 
British Columbia (Daly, 1912), and in the Rainy River District, Ontario (Lawson, 
1896), garnet-bearing rocks again occur in association with alkaline types. 

It would thus appear that the origin of the garnet-bearing rocks is related 
to that of the alkaline rocks with which they are usually associated. 

Theories to account for the distribution and origin of alkaline rocks include 
those of A. Harker (1909, 1917), N. L. Bowen (1915, 1919), R. A. Daly (1910, 1914), 
H. I. Jensen (1908), C. H. Smyth (19138, 1927), S. J. Shand (1927), and others, 
who emphasize different factors which lead to the manifestation of alkaline rocks 
at the surface of the earth. 

A study of the geographical distribution of the alkaline rocks shows that 
they frequently occur as marginal facies of granodioritic batholiths, or as separate 
intrusions some distance in advance of the batholiths which have been injected 
into the growing continental mass, thus occurring in a zone of fracture between 
the continent and the adjacent area of marine sedimentation. This zone is often 
a region of former shallow-water sedimentation, in which the formation of 
caleareous organic deposits is not unlikely, and may be a natural reason for 
the frequent association of alkaline igneous and calcareous sedimentary rocks. 


Unless the magma possessed some initial peculiarity such as that postulated 
by Jensen (1908), the real cause of the formation of alkaline rocks seems to be a 
relative desilication of more normal magma, which may be brought about either 
by a process of differentiation in the magma itself, or else by assimilation or partial 
assimilation of foreign material, particularly limestone, with subsequent differentia- 
tion. The former hypothesis is that supported by Bowen, while the latter theory 
is held by Daly and Shand. 

The occurrence of lime-garnet-bearing rocks in association with monzonitic or 
alkaline rocks, such as those at Mount Dromedary, might then be the result of 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 691 


either (i) pure magmatic differentiation, (ii) assimilation of limestone by the 
magma, with subsequent differentiation, or (iii) contact metamorphism of lime- 
stone beds, with the introduction of silica, iron, magnesia and alumina from the 
magma. 


Consideration of the chemical composition of the garnet-bearing series with 
reference to the normal monzonitic series, shown graphically in the variation- 
diagram (Text-figure 2), indicates that it is not a product of serial differentiation 
of the monzonitic magma; if the series be the result of complementary or secondary 
differentiation of a magma, say, of the composition of the pyroxenite-jacupirangite, 
no similar case is known to the writer, and it is difficult to account for the 
unusually high percentages of lime and other peculiarities. It is, therefore, 
considered improbable that the garnet-bearing rocks are due entirely to magmatic 
differentiation. 


On the other hand, their close similarity to silicated limestones or skarn- 
rocks, such as those developed at Tallong, which are undoubtedly due to contact 
metamorphism of limestone, certainly indicates that the possibility of contamina- 
tion by limestone should not be overlooked. 


No caleareous rocks are Known to outcrop within 50 miles of the Mount 
Dromedary igneous complex and there seems no evidence for supposing that any 
exist beneath the older Palaeozoic schists, phyllites and quartzites of the region; 
certainly none occurs close to the intrusion and the positions of the outcrops of 
the garnet-bearing rocks are such as to preclude the possibility that they are due 
to simple contact metamorphism. If, however, bands of limestone, so far undis- 
covered, are intercalated in the older Palaeozoic schist series, it is conceivable 
‘that during injection through the sedimentary series the magma may have incor- 
porated masses of limestone, completely dissolving the rock, and allowing the 
carbon-dioxide to escape, with the subsequent formation of lime-rich rocks, such 
as those under consideration. 


Similar conditions evidently prevail in the Fen District, Norway, where the 
nearest limestone outcrop is 40 to 60 kilometres distant from the Melteig series. 
In accepting Daly’s hypothesis and applying it to the Fen series of melteigites, 
Brégger (1920, p. 357) supposes the existence of older limestone beneath the Pre- 
Cambrian granite of the district. 


If such has been the origin of these rocks, then the meliteigites of Mount 
Dromedary and Melteig may be regarded as special developments of skarn-rocks, 
not in the country rock, but within the igneous mass itself. 


The production of nepheline-bearing rocks would be a natural corollary of the 
limestone-assimilation hypothesis of Daly, which recently has been supported by 
the field evidence of C. E. Tilley (1929). This may be the explanation of their 
occurrence in the Mount Dromedary district. In the absence of definite field- 
evidence the solution of the problem of the origin of both series must await 
future investigation. 


(vi) The Age of the Igneous Rocks. 


Although some references have been made concerning the field-relations of 
the various members of the igneous complex, their relative ages have not been 
expressly stated. 

As a whole the plutonic series is considered to be older than the hypabyssal 
latites on account of the intrusive relationship of the latter towards the porphyritic 


692 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


monzonite on Montague Island, and also because of the inclusion of plutonic types 
in the latitic neck, west of Mount Dromedary. 

This is in agreement with O. von Huber’s determination of the order of 
eruption of similar series in the classic region of Monzoni, Tyrol (see Daly, 1914, 
p. 482), but both W. C. Brggger (1895, p. 114) and W. Penck (1911, p. 341) main- 
tain that the reverse order of intrusion took place for the series at Monzoni and 
Predazzo. 

The plutonic series is believed to be the result of differentiation, in place, of 
a magma intruded during a single period, the order of consolidation of the rock- 
types being normal, that is, from the ultra-basic pyroxenite to the acid banatite. 
The nepheline-bearing and melanite-bearing rocks may be due to secondary 
differentiation within the laccolite, although they sometimes appear to show 
intrusive relationships towards the monzonitic rocks. 

The hypabyssal dyke-rocks appear to be of slightly later date, the aplitic 
phases being the youngest of the complex. 

Of the absolute age of the intrusion there is little definite field-evidence, 
beyond the fact that it is intrusive into older Palaeozoic sediments, and is there- 
fore of Post-Silurian age. 

Consideration of the chemical composition of the series as a whole shows its 
remarkable similarity to that of the Milton and Illawarra monzonitic occurrences, 
which are of Permo-Carboniferous age, and suggests that the three occurrences 
may have been approximately contemporaneous, the South Coast being a monzonitic 
petrographical province during late Permo-Carboniferous time. 

The only other published description of monzonite in this State is that of the 
Kiandra olivine-bearing quartz-monzonite (Browne and Greig, 1922, p. 260) but 
no evidence of its age is recorded. 


The subalkaline granodioritic intrusions of south-eastern New South Wales 
are of late Devonian or post-Devonian age; the lamprophyric and monchiquitic 
dykes and sills of the Illawarra District (Harper, 1915) have distinctly alkaline 
affinities, and probably belong to the post-Cretaceous or early Tertiary period of 
igneous activity in New South Wales. Between these intrusions, both in geological 
time and in composition of the magma, are the monzonitic intrusions and 
extrusions of the South Coast, indicating a progressive variation in the alkalinity 
of the injected magma throughout geological time. The somewhat less alkaline 
analcite-bearing basalts of late Tertiary age are associated with different types — 
of earth movement, and possibly have a different origin. 


In the absence of more definite evidence it therefore seems highly probable 
that the intrusion at Mount Dromedary took place in late Palaeozoic, Permo- 
Carboniferous time. 


COMPARISON WITH SIMILAR OCCURRENCES IN OTHER PARTS OF THE WORLD. 


The variety of co-magmatic rock-types occurring in the Mount Dromedary 
complex makes it one of more than ordinary interest from a petrographic point 
of view. Many of the rock-types are of rare occurrence and some are described 
for the first time in Australia. Except for the quartz-monzonite at Kiandra 
(Browne and Greig, 1922) no truly plutonic monzonitic series has been recorded 
from this State; the nepheline-bearing monzonites and shonkinites, and the 
melanite-bearing ijolite and pyroxenites are the first of their kind known to 
occur in Australia. 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 693 


The Mount Dromedary series as a whole shows many of the characteristics 
of Harker’s (1909, p. 91) Atlantic branch, although none of these features is 
very pronounced, as the rocks are mostly monzonitic, or intermediate between his 
Atlantic and Pacific types. 


The writer knows of no single province in which all the types occurring at 
Mount Dromedary are represented: throughout the descriptive portion of the paper 
comparative references have been made to a number of isolated occurrences of 
similar rock-types, and repeated references to some of these indicate a few series 
which show remarkable resemblances to portions of the Mount Dromedary complex. 


The most important of these are the monzonitic series of the Highwood 
Mountains, Montana, and the Little Belt Mountains, Montana; the _ ijolite- 
jacupirangite series of Magnet Cove, Arkansas; the melteigite series of the Fen 
District, Norway; and in some respects the series of Loch Borolan, Scotland. 


Of the Highwood Mountains, Montana, Pirsson (1905, p. 20) states, “the 
general geology .. . is that of a group of extinct or greatly eroded volcanoes. 
On the south-east of the mountains, and scarcely separated from them, is 

a restricted area of intruded sheets and laccoliths”’. 


The plutonic rocks include a syenite (pulaskose) and monzonite (shoshonose) 
from Highwood Peak stock, which are chemically similar to the banatite and 
monzonites of Mount Dromedary, whose analyses are given in Tables 1, 3 and 4; 
while the laccoliths of Shonkin Sag, Palisade Butte and Square Butte consist of 
syenite and shonkinite, rocks very similar to those occurring at Mount Dromedary 
whose analyses are quoted in Table 5. The ultrabasic types are not developed in 
the Highwood Mountains. 


_ In the Little Belt Mountains a somewhat similar sequence occurs. The most 
important intrusion is that of Yogo Peak and its north-easterly extension, the 
petrography of which was described by Pirsson (1900). Here the chief plutonic 
types are granite-porphyry, syenite (banatite), monzonite and shonkinite, whose 
analyses, quoted in Tables 1, 2 and 5, are also comparable with the Mount 
Dromedary types. The intrusion is considered to be in the form of a broad thick 
dyke (p. 564), between half a mile and a mile in width, and several miles in length. 
The arrangement of the various types is analogous to that at Mount Dromedary: 
in plan, the granite-porphyry occupies the central portion of the outcrop; this 
grades into banatite (syenite) followed by monzonite, with shonkinite at each 
end of the intrusion. 


Reference has been made several times in this paper to the foyaite-ijolite 
series of Magnet Cove, Arkansas, described by Williams (1890) and Washington 
(1900, 1901). The series as a whole is less acid than that at Mount Dromedary, 
although a parallel series of differentiated rock-types has been produced. Those 
showing close resemblance to the Mount Dromedary types include the ijolite, 
covite and jacupirangite, the analyses of the last two being quoted in Tables 6 
and 7 respectively. According to Washington the spacial arrangement of the 
various members of the series is anomalous, in that the more basic types occupy 
the central portion of the occurrence. Harker (1902), in reviewing Washington’s 
papers, suggests that the central exposure of more basic rock may be the uplifted 
base of the lower of two laccoliths, the form possibly assumed by the intrusion. 


The garnet-bearing rocks of Loch Borolan (Shand, 1909, 1910), and the Fen 
District, Norway (Brégger, 1920), are somewhat like the melanite rocks of the 
Tilba District, and reference has been made to them above in this connection. 


694 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


SUMMARY. 

The paper includes a geological sketch-inap and description of a complicated 
series of igneous rocks outcropping in the Mount Dromedary District and on 
Montague Island, on the South Coast of New South Wales. 

The igneous complex is intrusive into metamorphosed sediments of early 
Palaeozoic age. The main intrusion outcrops over an oval-shaped area of about 
twenty-five square miles, and probably assumes a laccolithic form, having a thick- 
ness of about 3,000 feet in the centre, and thinning out towards the margin. 
Several smaller intrusions occur at or near the border of the main laccolith. 

The igneous complex consists of plutonic and hypabyssal types. The plutonic 
series contains three main groups: (i) a normal monzonitic series consisting of 
banatite, porphyritic monzonite, quartz-monzonite, olivine-monzonite, shonkinite 
and pyroxenite (jacupirangite), (ii) a nepheline-bearing series, including ijolite, 
nepheline-monzonite and nepheline-shonkinite (covite) and (iii) a melanite- 
bearing series of pyroxenites, comparable with the melteigites and melteigite- 
jacupirangites of the Fen District, Norway. Fragments of essexite and olivine- 
gabbro or pyroxene-granulite occur as inclusions in the hypabyssal intrusions. 


The hypabyssal rocks include andesitic and lamprophyric types, which are 
really latites, or fine-grained equivalents of the monzonites, and which resemble 
some of the varieties outcropping at Milton, north of Mount Dromedary; also a 
series of aplitic and lamprophyric dyke-rocks and segregation veins. 

A study of the field-occurrence and associations of these igneous rocks, and 
of their mineralogical and chemical compositions shows that probably they are all 
comagmatic, but that the degrees of consanguinity of the different groups vary. 
It is considered that the main monzonitic series composing the laccolith has been 
produced as a result of the differentiation of a monzonitic magma in place, by 
means of fractional crystallization and the sinking of crystals, and that the 
nepheline-bearing series may have been derived from some phase of the normal 
monzonitic magma as a result of secondary differentiation. 

The origin of the garnet-bearing series is more obscure; it may be due to 
secondary differentiation of a basic phase of the magma, or it may be the result 
of assimilation of limestone by the monzonitic magma, with subsequent differentia- 
tion. At present no limestone is known to outcrop within 50 miles, so that the 
solution of the problem of the origin of the garnet-bearing rocks must await 
future investigation. 

Direct evidence of the age of the intrusion is scanty, but the chemical 
similarity of the series as a whole to the monzonitic rocks of Milton and the 
latitic flows of the Illawarra District, indicates a probable late-Palaeozoic, Permo- 
Carboniferous age for the intrusion. 


Acknowledgments. 


In conclusion, the writer wishes te thank those who have assisted in the 
preparation of this paper, especially Professor L. A. Cotton, M.A., D.Sc., in whose 
Department the laboratory work was carried out; Assistant-Professor W. R. 
Browne, D.Sc., for friendly interest in, and helpful discussion of, the work; 
and Mr. H. G. Gooch for the preparation of rock-sections and assistance in micro- 
photography. 

To Mr. G. W. Card, A.R.S.M., F.G.S., late Curator of the Mining Museum, 
Sydney, the writer is indebted for the use of micro-sections of specimens collected 
by W. Anderson from the Mount Dromedary district. 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 695 


For comparative purposes free use has been made of rock collections in the 
Geological Museum, Sydney University, of material from various parts of Norway; 
from the Monzoni district, Tyrol; from the Assynt district, and the Isle of Rum, 
Scotland; from the Highwood Mountains, Montana, and Magnet Cove, Arkansas; 
and elsewhere. 


The writer also wishes to express appreciation of the kindness and hospitality 
of Mr. and Mrs. J. F. Anderson and family of Tilba Tilba during the course of 
field-work in the district. 


To the authorities of the Mitchell Library, Sydney, the writer is indebted for 
permission to consult the photostat copy of Cook’s Journal. 


List of References. 


ANDERSON, W., 1890.—Ann. Rept. Dept. Mines N.S.W., 1890, pp. 264-5. 
, 1892.—On the General Geology of the South Coast, ete. Rec. Geol. Surv. 
N.S.W., ii, Pt. 4, pp. 146-9, 158-9. 
Baker, R. T., 1909.—Building and Ornamental Stones of New South Wales. 
Bauk, R., 1925.—Primary Structure of Granite Massives. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., xxxvi, 
1925, p. 685. 
Bowen, N. L., 1915.—Later Stages in the Evolution of Igneous Rocks. Journ. Geol., 
xii Os Suppt: 
, 1919.—Crystallisation Differentiation in Magmas. Journ. Geol., xxvii, 1919, 
p. 414. 
BRENNER, TH., 1920.—Uber Theralite und Ijolit von Umptek, auf der Haibinsel Kola. 
Bull. Comm. Geol. Finlande, No. 52. 
BroeccErR, W. C., 1894.—The Basic Eruptive Rocks of Gran. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., 
1, 1894, p. 18. 
, 1895.—Die Eruptivgesteine des Kristianiagebietes, II. Vid. Selsk. Skrifter, 
I. Math.-Nat. K1., No. 7, 1895, pp. 1-183. 
,1920.—Die Eruptivgesteine des Kristianiagebietes, IV. Das Fengebiet in 
Telemark, Norwegen. Vid. Selsk. Skrifter, I. Math.-Nat. K1., No. 9, 1920, pp. 1-408. 
Brouwer, H. A., 1917.—On the Geology of the Alkali Rocks of the Transvaal. Journ. 
Geol., xxv, pp. 741-778. . 
Brown, I. A., 1925.—The Geology of the Milton District. These ProcrerpinGs, 1, 1925, 
pp. 448-465. 
———, 1928.—The Geology of the South Coast of N.S.W., Pt. i. The Palaeozoic 
Geology of the Moruya District. These PROCEEDINGS, liii, 1928, pp. 151-192. 
, 1929.—Preliminary Note on Monzonitic and Nepheline-bearing Rocks of Mt. 
Dromedary, N.S.W. These PROCEEDINGS, liv, 1929, pp. 89-90. 
———,, 1930.—Geology of the South Coast of New South Wales, Pt. ii. Devonian and 
Older Palaeozoic Rocks. These PROCEEDINGS, lv, 1930, pp. 145-158. 
BROWNE, W. R., 1929.—Presidential Address: An Outline of the History of Igneous 
Action in New South Wales till the Close of the Palaeozoic Era. These PROCEEDINGS, 
Ib, IP I, ies Ib oS-abi<, ne 
BROWNE, W. R., and Greic, W. A., 1922.—On an Olivine-bearing Quartz-Monzonite from 
Kiandra, N.S.W. Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., lvi, 1922, p. 260. 
CAMBAGE, R. H., 1915.—Cook’s Pigeon House and Early South Coast Exploration. The 
Surveyor, xxviii, 1915, p. 186. 
Carp, G. W., 1905.—The Petrology of the Milton District. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., 
viii, pt. ii, pp. 81-9. 
, 1915.—Petrology. Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Geol. No. 7, 1915. 
CoLEMAN, A. P., 1907.—The Sudbury Laccolithic Sheet. Journ. Geol., xv, 1907, pp. 759- 


792. 
COLEMAN, A. P., Moorn, E. S., and WaAukKeEr, T. L., 1929.—The Sudbury Nickel Intrusive. 
Contributions to Canadian Mineralogy, 1929. University of Toronto Studies, 


Geological Series, No. 28. 

Cook, CAPTAIN J., 1770.—Journal, 2. Photostat Copy in Mitchell Library, Sydney, 
N.S.W., p. 65. 

Dax, T. N., 1923.—Bull. U.S. Geol. Surv., No. 738, p. 84. 

Daty, R. A., 1906.—The Okanagan Composite Batholith of the Cascade Mountain 
System. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., xvii, 1906, p. 350. 


696 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


Daty, R. A., 1910.—The Origin of the Alkaline Rocks. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., xxi, 1910, 
pp. 87-118. 
,1912.—The North American Cordillera, 49th Parallel. Geol. Surv. Canada, 
Mem. 38, 1912, p. 448. j 
, 1914.—Igneous Rocks and their Origin. 1914. 
Dauy, R. A., and MoLENGRAAFF, G. A. F., 1924.—The Bushveld Igneous Complex. 
Journ. Geol., xxxii, 1924, pp. 1-35. 
Derpy, O. A., 1891.—Magnetite Ore Deposits of Jacupiranga and Ipanema, San Paulo, 
Brazil. Amer. Journ. Sci., xli, 1891, pp. 311-321. 
ESsKo.ua, P., 1914.—Buwll. Comm. Geol. Finlande, No. 40, p. 225. 
FEDEROF, HK. C., 1901.—Moscow Sel’sko-khoziaistoennya Institut (Institut agronomique), 
vii, 1901. 
Frermor, L. L., 1913.—Preliminary Note on Garnet as a Geological Barometer. Reece. 
Geol. Surv. India, xliii, Pt. i, pp. 41-47. . 
GoLpscHmiptT, V. M., 1911.—Die Kontaktmetamorphose im Kristianiagebiet. Videnskap. 
Siraj ls MEd acINene 1s<ii54 LG all, IN@, Il, io, Ail, 
Harker, A., 1902.—Reviews on Papers on Magnet Cove, Arkansas. Geol. Mag., ix, 1902, 
pp. 177-180. 
, 1908.—The Geology of the Small Isles of Inverness-shire. Mem. Geol. Surv. 
Scotland, 1908, p. 56. 
,1809.—The Natural History of Igneous Rocks. 
—,1913.—Congrés Géologique International, Canada, 1913. 
, 1917.—Presidential Address: Some Aspects of Igneous Action in Britain. 
Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., xxiii, 1917, pp. Ixvii-xciv. 
, 1923.—Petrology for Students. 
Harper, L. F., 1915.—Geology and Mineral Resources of the Southern Coalfield. Mem. 
Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Geol. No. 7, 1915. 
HatcH, F. H., 1914.—The Petrology of the Igneous Rocks. 


Hitt, J. B., and KyNAstTon, H., 1900.—On Kentallenite and its Relations to other 
Igneous Rocks of Argyllshire. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., lvi, 1900, p. 531. 
HOLLAND, T. H., 1896.—On the Origin and Growth of Garnets, ete. Rec. Geol. Surv. 
India, xxix, pp. 20-30. 
IppINGS, J. P., 1913.—Igneous Rocks, Volumes I and II. 
, 1916.—Rock Minerals. 
Ippines, J. P., and Moruny, EH. W., 1915.—The Petrology of Java and Celebes. Journ. 
Geol., xxiii, 1915, pp. 231-245. 
JENSEN, H. I., 1908.—The Alkaline Petrographical Province of Hastern Australia. These 
PROCEEDINGS, Xxxiii, 1908, pp. 589-602. 
———, 1908.—The Distribution, Origin and Relationships of Alkaline Rocks. These 
PROCEEDINGS, XxXxili, 1908, pp. 491-588. 
,1910.—Soils of New South Wales, Part i. Agric. Gazette N.S.W., xxi, 1910, 
pp. 95-114. 
,1912.—Report of the Alkaline Rocks Research Committee. Report Aust. 
Assoc, Adv. Sci., xiii, 1911 (Gi912)) pe £918): 
,1914.—The Soils of New South Wales. Dept. Agric. N.S.W., 1914. 
Lawson, A. C., 1896.—On Malignites, A Family of. Basic Plutonic Orthoclase Rocks, 
Rich in Alkalies and Lime. Bull. Dept. Geol. Univ. California, i, 1896, pp. 337-362. 
Pauu, F. P., 1906.—Beitrage zur petrographischen Kenntnis einiger foyaitisch- 
theralithischer Gesteine aus Tasmanien. 7.M.P.M., xxv, 1906, p. 269, ete. 
PENCK, W., 1911.—Newes Jahrb. f. Min., B.B. xxxii, 1911, 341. 
Pirsson, L. V., 1893.—Square Butte, Highwood Mountains. Amer. Journ. Sci., xlv, 18938, 
To, PB, | 
——+_——_, 1900.—Petrography. of the Igneous Rocks of the Little Belt Mountains, Montana. 
Ann. Rept. U.S. Geol. Surv., xx, 1900. 
,1905.—Petrography and Geology of the Igneous Rocks of the Highwood 
Mountains, Montana. Bull. U.S. Geol. Surv., No. 237, 1905. 
RomMpBeErRG, J., 1902.—Site. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, i, 1902, p. 748. 
ROSENBUSCH, H., 1906.—Mikroskopische Physiographie, Vol. ii, p. 395, ete. 
Sears, J. F., 1891.—The Essexite of Salem Neck. Bull. Hssex Instit., Vol. xxiii. 
SEDERHOLM, J. J., 1916.—On Synantetic Minerals and Related Phenomena. Bull. Comm. 
Geol. Finlande, No. 48, 1916, p. 58, ete. 
SHAND, S. J., 1909.—On Borolanite and its Associates in Assynt. Trans. Geol. Soc. 
Edinburgh, ix, 1909, pp. 202-215. 


BY IDA A. BROWN. 697 


SHAND, S. J., 1910.—On Borolanite. Trans. Geol. Soc. Edinburgh, ix, 1910, pp. 376-419. 
———,, 1927.—Eruptive Rocks. 
SmytTH, C. H., 1913.—The Chemical Composition of the Alkaline Rocks and its Signifi- 
cance as to their Origin. Amer. Journ. Sci., xxxvi, 19138, pp. 33-46. 
, 1927.—The Genesis of Alkaline Rocks. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., lxvi, pp. 535-580. 
TintHy, C. E., 1921.—The Granite Gneisses of the Southern Hyre Peninsula. Quart. 
Journ. Geol. Soc., Ixxvii, pt. 2, p. 121. 
, 1921.—Review of Brggger’s work on Die Eruptivgesteine des Kristianiagebietes, 
IV. Geol. Mag., 1921, pp. 549-554. 
, 1929.—On Melilite as a Product of Interaction of Limestone and Basaltic Liquid. 
Geol. Mag., Ixvi, 1929, p. 3538. 
TWELVETREES, W. H., 1902.—A Geological Excursion to Port Cygnet in Connection with 
the A.A.A.S., 1902. Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1902. 
, 1902.—Jacupirangite in Tasmania. Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1902. 
TYRRELL, G. W., 1916.—The Picrite-Teschenite Sill of Lugar (Ayrshire). Quart. Journ. 
Geol. Soc., Ixxii, 1916, pp. 84-131. 
, 1926.—The Principles of Petrology. 
VAN Hise, C. R., and LeirH, C. K., 1911.—U.S. Geol. Surv., Monograph 52, 1911, 372-3. 
WASHINGTON, H. S., 1899.—The Petrographic Province of Essex County, Mass. Journ. 
Geol., vii, 1899, p. 53. 
, 1900.—The Igneous Complex of Magnet Cove, Arkansas. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer., 
xi, 1900, pp. 389-416. 
————, 1901.—The Foyaite-Ijolite Series of Magnet Cove, A Study in Differentiation. 
Journ. Geol., ix, 1901, pp. 607-670. 
————., 1916.—-Chemical Analyses of Igneous Rocks. U.S. Geol. Surv., Prof. Paper 99. 
WEED, W. H., and Prrsson, L. V., 1895.—Igneous Rocks of Yogo Peak, Montana. 
Amer. Journ. Sci., cl, 1895, pp. 467-479. 
, 1901.—Shonkin Sag. Amer. Journ. Sci., (4) ii, 1901. 
WILLIAMS, J. F., 1890.—The Igneous Rocks of Arkansas. Ann. Rept. Geol. Surv. 
Arkansas for 1890. 
WooLNouGH, W. G., 1910.—The General Geology of Marulan and Tallong. These 
PROCEEDINGS, XxxXiv, 1909, pp. 782-808. . 
Wyruuiz, B. K. N., and Scorr, A., 1913.—The Plutonic Rocks of Garabal Hill. Geol. 
MiGGas (GVO) xs LOM sar py OO: 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES XXXV-XXXIX. 
Plate xxxv. 
Geological Sketch-map of the Mount Dromedary District; and generalized Section 


(natural scale) in an east-west direction through Mount Dromedary Trigonometrical ° 
Station and the village of Central Tilba. 


Plate xxxvi. 


1. Panoramic view from a hill south-west of Tilba Tilba village looking to the 
north-east, showing the foothills of Mount Dromedary, the Little Dromedary and Tilba 
Tilba Swamp. 


2. Panoramic view from the top of the Little Dromedary looking westwards to 
Mount Dromedary, showing the villages of Tilba Tilba and Central Tilba, on the Main 
Southern Road or Prince’s Highway. 


Transparencies (Plate xxxvia) indicate the outcrops of some of the principal rock- 
types described in the paper. 


‘Plate XXXVii. 
1. Large tors of porphyritic monzonite on Montague Island. One in the central 
upper portion of the photograph was quarried for the construction of the Lighthouse. 
2. View of the eastern coast of Montague Island, showing strong jointing of the 
porphyritic monzonite, and its intrusion by dyke-like masses of lamprophyre. 


3. Coastal cliff-section near Mount Dromedary, showing folded and faulted quartzites 
of lower Palaeozoic age. 


698 GEOLOGY OF SOUTH COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES, iii, 


Plate xxxviii. 

1. Banatite (M.402). Track from Tilba Tilba up Mt. Dromedary. Typical section. 
Crossed Nicolls. x 17. 

2. Myrmekite-perthite in segregation vein in monzonite (M.439). Central Tilba 
Quarry. Plates of orthoclase intergrown with vermicular plagioclase of higher refractive 
index. Plane polarized light. x 13. 

3. Coarse Monzonite (M.440). Central Tilba Quarry. Showing monzonitic fabric. 
Crossed Nicols. x 13. 

4. Olivine-Monzonite (M.564). Cobargo Road, 24 miles from Tilba Tilba. Showing 
fine monzonitic fabric. Crossed Nicols. x 17. 

5. Olivine-Shonkinite (M.450). Tilba Tilba. Showing augite and orthoclase. Crossed 
INGO, — S< Ile 

6. Covite (Olivine-Shonkinite) (M.458). Eastern Slope of Little Dromedary. 
Showing large plate of nepheline with inclusion of other minerals. Crossed Nicols. x 17. 


Plate xxxix. 

1. Olivine-gabbro (Pyroxene-granulite) (M.663). Inclusion in latitic neck, west of 
Mt. Dromedary. Crossed Nicols. x 17. 

2. Hssexite (M.667). South-west of the Little Dromedary. Crossed Nicols. x 17. 

3. Pyroxenite (Jacupirangite) (M.476). Poole’s Point, north of Tilba Tilba Lake. 
Showing cleavages in augite. Plane polarized light. x 17. 

4. Tjolite (M.553). Cobargo Road, 2% miles from Tilba Tilba. Showing colour- 
zoned pyroxene, melanite and nepheline. Plane polarized light. x 17. 

5. Melanite-melteigite (M.492). East of Central Tilba. Showing melanite in close 
association with green pyroxene. Plane polarized light. x 17. 

6. Melanite-melteigite-jacupirangite (M.497). South-east of Central Tilba. Showing 
large colour-zoned crystal of melanite, with a core of green pyroxene. Plane polarized 
eon, © «a7 


i, GEOLOGICAL SKETCH- MAP | 
OF THE | 


\ 


MOUNT DROMEDARY ~< 
DISTRICT 


d 
im 5 
PCN OLN | 
<3) 


any 
oe 
VV Niort 
of 6 os 
a eee 
eo oF 
es 8 
Ww & oe 
oe 64° 
% 8 Sel 


AWA 


, 


eee ds 
WW, 
>> 
ww 


oe fae 


es & 8 Be 
$ee86 of 
YO * 
RS A 
Os 
N 
NII 


A F 8 
AN 


CLAPP AP 2 p~ 00 FO oe 


LEGEND 


Io OG 
SNS 

, ely, 

fount Dremedarsy 


38) Banatite 


‘ 


Porphyritic Banatite 


WANDELLOW||\\"Yfi I 
Del ileeied 


* Adan’ 


Coarse Monzonite 


Fine Monzonite 


ef OL LSS oe 
\ 


Olivine Monzonite 
Shonkinite 
Pyroxenite 

Ijolite 


Nepheline Monzonite 
VEtegere se / 
Vist VOTE ¢ at nd hg mre and Shonkinite 
NOG there \ 4 y 
yu ‘ 
\ Ph)! 1 1 U } 

Vv i! yy ti Garnet Rock 

MY ! Lamprophyre, 


Andesite & Latite 
BARISH Aplitic Granite 
Swamp 
POST TERTIARY Alluvium 


Sand 


OF 


Nal N S TERTIARY Sandstone 
PARISH GF ORDOVICIAN Slates and Quartz Schists 
OF A Dykes 5 Faults fr Strike Direction 
1, A.B. delt A BERMAGUEE I Boundaries Parish —-— Geological - 


z 
iy 
: ve 
3 3¢ > 
es i>) Ss 
iy a ia g R 3 
= & g = 3 = 
3 § Uso ore --=---- ee 8 5 r $ 
> 2 eee Ta ee ee | 3 = 2 
gS Re 25 BOA OE IODC CAD SS = 
eles AT IT Fase Perphyritic, Monzoniter > >, SS a ~ ~~ 3 5 2° 
RS =n Tz “t @ os Lpielevovereee ee a Oe Mee OARS. a = = pe = x § 
— = 2 ca :? - 
Es eoaneanpearg tpg batnsocudnalgaecba bia adaniiagIndodaletabotedploietvialilodct SESE Tides 
SS Wi een ‘Bm Ghee ity ira x RCL TURE MEO % wen Spee: SATs . 
i «ane (Quartz Schists. 1 1) ,/,.6 1,4, OG VS : 
a = SS Se ae ee 


Generalized section in an east-west direction through Mount Dromedary Trigonometrical Station and the village of Central Tilba, (Natural scale.) 


RS em A ATEN I NE I IN ON IER OE OT EOE IE EE 


See 


My 


Little a 
Dromedary\ 


Main Road_____ 2B 


Central Tiloa__ 


PEATE XXXVEAs, 


b) 
= 


RS 
a 8 


2035S ae 
Spyteiy ee 4 
fe gtes 


06@L .W.A2U .00e@ wunnl oad 


AIVXXK ATAID 


% ze E 3 ae 
° Poo — n os 
2 oR r) 2 E= 
‘a Do = = o 
° -2 23 (S| a= 
rad a z= go 
2 S ry f= ly: 
=~ 9IIN0SNoM 4 i = 
————— Se a 
Se. eee ee x 4 stitsasg 
STinosnoM-snilsdgsy oc Sdinosnoif TE 
_——_—— te 
swe adil ag); | a ee re, 
oN 3vA ov » 
m 
Ns eager . 
, ' oe, \ stinosnoM ger80)9 
lated % 
SS 
—— 


eteidnoe strauD 


__.--bs0f nisM 
__sdliT [svinsd 


_ \. __Joodae aus 


~=—— co ™. 
Seas Paes 


PSS — 


2 = - ad Spe tsee 
a ee 


gtinosnoM 9ersad SS ora 


stinosnoM snilsdaqov = qmsawe sdlit sdlit 


PLATE XXXVI. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


~ 


ae 


2 
t 
; 
? 
x 
‘ 
3 
i 
= 
oo 
4 7 
Stes 
1 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XXXVI. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XXXVIIT. 


Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1930. PLATE XXXIX. 


qr byt 
ne. 


NOTES ON A CELLULOSE-DECOMPOSING SOIL FUNGUS OF AN 
UNUSUAL CHARACTER. 


By H. L. JENSEN. 
Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. 


(Plate xl.) 
[Read 26th November, 1930.] 


During the course of a study of the microbial decomposition of farmyard 
manure in soil (the results of which will be published elsewhere), the writer 
isolated a fungus of somewhat unusual properties. It was first found when 
platings were made on cellulose-agar from a neutral clay soil with addition of well- 
decomposed manure, for possible isolation of cellulose-decomposing bacteria. On 
most of the plates only actinomycetes developed, but in one instance there appeared 
a peculiar fungal growth which rapidly cleared the medium and transformed the 
fragments of cellulose into dark granules. On another occasion the same easily 
recognizable fungus was obtained by inoculating plates of cellulose-agar directly 
with half-decomposed bits of straw from the same soil with addition of manure + 
ground straw. The fungus could easily be obtained in pure culture from the 
 cellulose-agar because of its rapidly spreading growth and the selective character 
of the medium. In plate cultures for counting the numbers of filamentous fungi 
in the soil (glycerin-sodium asparaginate-agar, see Brierley et al., 1928) it was 
not observed. A cursory morphological examination showed it to belong to the 
Hyphomyeetes, probably to the genus Botryosporium. In physiological respect it 
showed a marked sensitiveness to acid reaction, and in neutral or alkaline media 
it decomposed cellulose (pure cellulose in filter-paper as well as natural, lignified 
cellulose of straw) more actively than any of the microorganisms with which it 
was compared (Penicillium sp., Aspergillus sp., Trichoderma sp., Mycogone sp., 
Stachybotrys sp., various cellulose-decomposing bacteria). Owing to the pressure 
of other work at the time, a closer study of this interesting organism could not 
be undertaken, but when an old agar culture was found still alive in May, 1930, 
it was thought desirable to re-examine the fungus. 


Morphological and Cultural Characters. 

On cellulose-agar (NaNO, 2:0 gm.; K.HPO, 0:5 gm.; MgSO, 0:5 gm.; precipitated 
cellulose, prepared by the method of Scales (1916), 5-0 gm.; agar 15:0 gm.; tap 
water 1,000 c.c.; pH 7-:2-7:-4) very characteristic growth. In Petri dish cultures at 
32° C. a thin colourless veil of cobweb-like mycelium is, after 2 days, seen creeping 
over the whole plate, and a few delicate filaments rise into the air. After 4-5 days 
a formation of small, dark, first greyish, later jet-black granules, each representing 
a fragment of cellulose, begins along the edge of the plate and proceeds centri- 
petally. At the same time the thin aerial growth, which is most conspicuous on 
the central portion of the plate, becomes covered with small ash-grey tufts of spore- 
bearing hyphae. 

P 


700 ON A CELLULOSE—DECOMPOSING SOIL FUNGUS, 


The morphology of the fungus is conveniently studied on this medium. The 
vegetative mycelium consists in quite young cultures (2-3 days) of hyaline, 
septate hyphae of variable thickness, from 2:5-3:0 up to 8-9 w. Clamp connections 
have not been’ observed, but anastomoses, giving rise to H-shaped figures, are 
frequently seen (Pl. xl, fig. e). The dark granules present in 4-5 days old 
cultures consist of clusters of chlamydospore-like cells with a coarsely granular 
content and thick, rough, dark-coloured cell walls. These cells vary in shape from 
globular to barrel-shaped, up to 138-16 mw in diameter and 30-35 uw in length 
(Pl. xl, fig. f). Besides these, there is a number of more or less swollen and 
darkened cells with granular content, representing all stages of transition down 
to the slender, hyaline cells with homogeneous content, which occur in young 
hyphae (Pl. xl, fig. f). These latter seem gradually to change into the dark, thick- 
walled, sclerotial cells which predominate in old cultures. When the dark 
granules are crushed under a coverslip and examined microscopically, the cells 
show an arrangement in long, parallel strands, apparently representing the hyphae 
from which the granules are formed, and in fairly young cultures (5 days at 
30-32° C.) a most characteristic phenomenon is seen: the central cavities of the 
cellulose fibres are filled with these strands of dark, swollen cells, which are left. 
behind as the cellulose fibres gradually disintegrate. This arrangement gives rise 
to the apparent transformation of the fibres into small sclerotia-like bodies which 
give the plate culture its characteristic spotted appearance. 


The aerial growth is represented by conidiophores, consisting of richly 
branched hyphae, 2:8-3:3 mu thick, hyaline or slightly brownish. The terminal 
branches carry numerous laterally situated, roughly globular conidial heads, 8-11 
“ in diameter (PI. xl, figs. a, c). The arrangement of the conidia is only seen by 
direct examination under the microscope; when the material is mounted in water, 
the conidia fall off very easily, and the end branches of the conidiophores appear 
as irregularly bent, rather closely septate hyphae, each cell of which bears usually 
one wart-like projection, to which the conidia have been attached (PI. xl, fig. d). 
The conidia are almost spherical to ovoid or slightly triangular, measuring 2-1— 
2-8 u, sometimes only 1-8 u broad, hyaline, with homogeneous content (PI. xl, fig. b). 


On filter-paper strip in test-tube, with mineral nutrient solution (Same as in 
cellulose agar), there is, after 2 days at 32° C. or 1 day at 38° C., a loose, colourless 
mycelium floating on the solution and attached to the paper. During the next few 
days this mycelium spreads, and hyphae begin to creep over the exposed part of 
the paper, on which a dark colour appears just above the level of solution. This 
dark zone becomes, in 14-16 days, 1-2 cm. broad and completely black, and the 
paper in it seems almost to have disappeared and to be replaced by mycelium. In 
the same solution, with (NH,).SO, instead of NaNO,, there is, after 7 days at 
32° C., only a secant growth, consisting of loose, colourless flakes of mycelium in 
the liquid, but the paper appears quite strongly attacked, and breaks easily at the 
level of solution, when the tube is shaken. Addition of sterile CaCO, to the 
solution gives rise to a very abundant growth and a very strong decomposition 
of the paper which nearly disappears after 2-3 weeks at 32° C. The formation 
of dark mycelium is little pronounced here. 


As to the identity of the fungus, the arrangement of the conidia in laterally- 
borne heads attached to wart-like spines would suggest the genus Botryosporium, 
as was first thought; on the other hand, the profuse branching of the conidiophores 
and the formation of sclerotia-like bodies seem to point to the genus Botrytis; 


BY H. L. JENSEN. 701 


within this genus, the somewhat comb-like appearance of the end branches of the 
conidiophores might suggest the section Cristularia (Lindau, 1900). The genus 
Botrytis, however, is said never to form definite heads of conidia. 


Physiological Characters. 

Utilization of various sources of carbon was tested by culture in the above- 
mentioned mineral nutrient solution with 0:2% NaNO, + 1:0% carbon compound. 
Duplicate test-tube cultures were incubated for 12 days at 32° C. Dextrose, 
levulose, maltose, and starch, besides cellulose, proved to be good or excellent 
sources of carbon. A fair growth was also obtained with sodium acetate, galactose, 
lactose, inulin, and aesculin, while sodium malate and citrate, glycerin, mannite, 
dulcite, arabinose, xylose, saccharose, raffinose, tannic acid, and crude lignic acid 
were nearly or wholly unavailable. No acid was formed from any of the 
compounds, and the nitrate was not reduced to nitrite. 


Utilization of various nitrogen compounds was tested by culture on filter- 
paper strips in test-tubes with mineral nutrient solution containing 0:-2% of the 
compound to be tested. Besides with NaNO, and (NH,),;SO,, as mentioned above, 
a good to excellent growth and destruction of paper was obtained with glycocol, 
asparagin, gelatin, uric acid, and especially peptone which seemed to be the most 
favourable source of nitrogen. Urea gave only a moderate growth and destruction, 
and in N-free solution there was only a very scant growth and no visible 
destruction of the paper. 


Temperature relationships—The optimum temperature seems to be 35-40° C.; 
at 18-20° C. the growth is still active, but much retarded. At 54° C. no growth 
takes place. The fungus is thus not termophilic. 


Resistance to acidity—The poor growth of the fungus in acid agar media, 
as well as the marked stimulation of the growth in (NH,).SO,-solution by addition 
of CaCO;, suggested a marked sensitiveness to acid reaction—a property which, as 
is well known, is not common among the fungi. In order to get a more precise idea 
of this, the fungus was grown in the following solution: dextrose 10-0 gm.; 
peptone 5:0 gm.; K.HPO, 5:0 gm.; MgSO, 0°5 gm.; NaCl 0:5 gm.; H.O 1,000 c.c. 
The reaction was adjusted to pH values between 4:2 and 7:4 by means of hydro- 
chloric acid. Duplicate cultures, on 100 c.c. solution in 300 c.c. Erlenmeyer flasks, 
were incubated for 14 days at 38° C. in a second series with only 3 pH values for 
22 days at 32° C., after which time the mats of mycelium were filtered off, dried 
and weighed. 


The results (see Table 1) are somewhat irregular, owing to difficulty of 
securing a uniform growth in the parallel flasks, but they still show that pH 4-5 
is very nearly the most acid reaction at which the organism is capable of inducing 
growth, and a good growth does only oecur at pH values above 6. As a further 
test the fungus was grown on a physiologically acid solution of the following 
composition: dextrose 20:0 gm.;>NH,Cl 5:0 gm.; K,HPO, 0:2 gm.; MgSO, 0:5 gm.; 
NaCl 0:5 gm.; H.O 1,000 c.c. Two sets of cultures were grown at 32° C.: 

a.—Test-tube cultures, 10 ¢.c. of solution, for 5 and 10 days. 


b.—Erlenmeyer flask cultures (100 ec.c. flasks with 50 e.c. of solution), 
with and without CaCO,, for 20 days. 


At the end of the experiment determinations were made of pH values, and of 
weights of mycelium in the Erlenmeyer flask cultures. 


702 ON A CELLULOSE-DECOMPOSING SOIL FUNGUS, 


TABLE 1. 


Growth of the Fungus in Dextrose Peptone Solution of Varying Hydrogen-Ion Concentration. 


ra Weight of 
Initial pH. Dry Mycelium, Final pH. 
gm. 
4-2 No growth = 
0-001 4-5 
4-5 
0-001 4-5 


0-014 5-3 
5-3 
0-013 5-3 
0-004 6-2 
T 6-1 
0-007 6-2 
0334 7-3 
6:6 
0-345 71 
0-283 6-8 
i 7-0 
| 0-097 7-1 
| 7:4 | 0-318 7-3 
: { 0-040 ) 
8 —= 
0-028 f 
0-038 7 
II 6-2 je _ 
0-046 
0-120 
6-6 { i i 
0-087 J 


According to the results in Table 2, a pH value of 3-4-3-5 is the limit of 
acidity produced by the fungus. This is a somewhat higher acidity than that 
which inhibits the starting of the growth (Table 1); the explanation is probably 
that the mycelium, which has been formed before the solution becomes too 
strongly acid, has to some extent gradually adapted itself to a more acid reaction 
in the surrounding medium. The weights of the mycelia, however, show that the 
growth under these conditions is very poor in comparison with that at 
approximately neutral reaction. 


The influence of reaction on the cellulose decomposing activity was tested 
by growing the fungus on cellulose in test-tubes with 10 cc. of the following 


BY H. L, JENSEN. 703 


solution: (NH,).SO, 5:0 gm.; K,HPO, 0-5 gm.; MgSO, 0:5 gm.; NaCl 0:5 gm.; 
H.O 1,000 c.c. Cellulose was supplied as weighed strips of filter paper (0-15-0-2 
gm.), Whatman’s No. 41, in which the dry matter is represented by nearly pure 
cellulose. Some of the tubes received an addition of about 0-3 gm. of sterile CaCO, 
after sterilization. They were then inoculated and incubated for 20 days at 32° C. 
After incubation, the contents of the tubes were filtered through hardened filter 
paper, the residues were washed, first with dilute HCl, then with ammonia-free 


TABLE 2. 


Degree of Acidity and Amount of Myceliwm Produced by the Fungus in a Physiologically Acid Medium 
with and without CaCO;. 


Series I. Test-tube cultures. 


Time. Growth. pH. 
At start = 6:6 
(a) 3°8 
5 days 
(b) 3:7 


rr Scant, consisting of loose granules floating on the surface 


(a) 3-4 
10 days 
(b) 3°5 
Series II. Erlenmeyer Flask cultures. (20 days 32°C.) 
Weight of Character 
Mycelium, of Final pH. 
gmt Growth. 
(a) 0:026 ) B3PP/ 
—CaCO; if Loose granules on bottom of flasks 
(b) 0-012 3°8 
(a) 0:156 6:6 
+CaCO3 Dark, coherent mat on surface 
(6) 0-171 6°5 


water, and NH,-N was determined in the combined filtrates and washings by 
distillation with MgO. The residues (paper + mycelium) could quite easily be 
removed from the filters, even in the case of strong decomposition, because in this 
case the mycelium keeps the remains of paper together in an easily handled 
lump. The residues were then dried, and treated overnight with 80 cc. of 
Schweitzer’s solution (Cu(OH), in cone. ammonia). The solutions were then 
filtered through glass wool in order to remove the flakes of mycelium, and the 
extracted cellulose was precipitated by means of HCl, filtered off on a dried and 
weighed filter, and determined by weighing, after washing and drying at 98° C. 
The results in Table 3 show that the cellulose decomposition has been roughly 
10 times stronger in solution with CaCO, than in the unbuffered solution (60-84% 
of the added cellulose against 6-8%). The ratio of decomposed cellulose to 
assimilated N (43-57: 1 in the tubes with CaCO,; in the others the amounts 


704 ON A CELLULOSE—DECOMPOSING SOIL FUNGUS, 


TABLE 3. 


Cellulose Decomposition by the Fungus in a Physiologically Acid Medium with and without CaCO,. 


NH,—N Ratio of 
Cellulose Cellulose Cellulose at end NH,—N decomposed 
supplied, recovered, decomposed, of assimilated, cellulose to 
gm. gm. gm. experiment, . mgm. assimilated 
mgm. 
(a) 0-161 0-152 } 0-009 9-1 0-6 (15 : 1) 
—CaCO, '(b) 0:188 0-168 : 0-015 9-5 0-2 (7/5y 3 1) 
L} (ce) 0-158 0-145 0-013 9-4 0:3 (43: 1) 
(a) 0-185 0-031 0-154 7:0 2270 57:1 
+CaCO; (b) 0-168 0-068 0-100 774 2°3 43:1 
(c) 0-182 0-039 0-143 Wold 2°6 95'S il 
(a) 0-149 0-146 — 9-7 — — 
Control 
(b) 0-138 0-138 — 9-7 — = 


concerned are so near to the analytical error that this ratio cannot be calculated 
with any accuracy) is substantially wider than that given by Waksman and 
Heukelekian (1926) for a number of other cellulose decomposing soil fungi, viz., 
31-34 :1 for species of Trichoderma, Penicillium, Citromyces, Aspergillus, and 
Fusarium. 


Comparison with other fungi—Table 4 contains a compilation of the results 
of studies on tolerance of hydrogen-ion concentration shown by various fungi, so 
far as the author has been able to trace the literature. In cases where several 
media have been tested with different results, only those results which show the 
greatest tolerance to acidity have been reproduced here. We see that practically 
all fungi studied in this respect are able to grow at pH values lower than 4:0, 
and a large majority will tolerate a hydrogen-ion concentration of pH 3-0, or 
still more. So far our fungus seems unique*, but this should not be taken for 
granted. It is worth recalling, in: this connection, that Brierley and co-workers 
(1928), in their experiments on standardization of the technique of counting soil 
fungi, obtained the maximum numbers of fungus colonies on agar of pH 56. This 
renders it quite probable that the soil may harbour a number of acid-sensitive 
fungi which are not easily detected on neutral agar media owing to the competition 
of bacteria and actinomycetesy. Their importance in microbial soil processes, 
considerable though it may be, can, of course, never be detected by the use of 
culture media such as that suggested by Waksman (1922) or that used by the 
author in another contribution (see above), in which the acid reaction acts as 
selective factor. In the present particular instance, where even agar of pH 4:8 
was of no service, the use of cellulose agar proved helpful. This is an application 
of the principle suggested by Winogradsky (1929) for studying cellulose- 
decomposing soil-organisms, which can probably be extended to fungi as well as 


* With the possible exception of a Torula studied by Pistor (1930), whose result, 
however, seems somewhat open to criticism. 
7 Cf. Pistor (1930). 


BY 


H. L. 


JENSEN. 


TABLE 4, 
Limits of Acidity for Growth of Various Fungi. 


705 


Organism. 


pH Range or 
pH Value at 


which growth stops. 


Author. 


Phycomycetes. 
Mucor plumbeus .. 
Mucor flavus 
Mucor glomerula . . 
Mucor Ramannianus 
Zygorhynchus Vwilleminii 
Absidia cylindrospora 
Sterile Phycomycetous Mycelium 
Mortierella sp. Ae ae 
Fungi Imperfecti. 
Coccospora agricola (2?) .. 
Oospora Citri-aurantii 
Trichoderma Koningi 


Trichoderma sp. cs 
Aspergillus sass 


Aspergillus 
Aspergillus 
Aspergillus 
Aspergillus 
Penicillium 
Penicillium 
Penicillium 
Penicillium 


niger . 
Space 
terricola 
oryzae 
italicum 
variabile 
digitatum 
stoloniferum. . 


Penicillium s 
Penicillium 
Penicillium sp. 
Citromyces sp. 
Penicillium sp. 
Acaulium nigrum 
Eidamia catenulata 
Eidamia viridescens 
Botrytis cinerea 
Humicola sp. 
Mycogone nigra .. 
Alternaria citri 
Alternaria sp. 
Fusarium bullatum 


Fusarium 


” 
Fusarium 
Fusarium 
Fusarium 
Fusarium 
Fusarium 
Fusarium 
Fusarium 
Fusarium 
Fusarium 


-oxysporium (syn. orthoceras) 


be) 
sp. ( falcatum ?) 
coeruleum 
moniliforme 
vasinfectum 
avenacearum .. 
culmorum 
herbarum 
sp. 
sp. 


Phoma sp... 

Phomopsis citri . 

Diaporthe Sojae .. 
Ascomycetes. 

Saccharomyces cerevisiae. . 

Endothia parasitica 

Sclerotinia Libertiana 

Gibberella saubinetii 

Ophiobolus cariceti 

Daldinia concentrica 

Daldinia vernicosa 

Daldinia sp. 

Unidentified ascomycete from dermatomycosis 
Basidiomycetes. 

Merulius lacrymans 

Coniophora cerebella 

Fomes roseus 

Lenzites sepiaria .. 


” ” oo ee 
Schizophyllum commune. . 
Pholiota adiposa .. 
Daedalia confragosa 
Pleurotus ostreatus 
Armillaria mellea.. 
Polyporus adustus 
Polyporus versicolor 
Polyporus radiciperda 

Sterile Mycelia. 
Rhizoctonia Solani 
Rhizoctonia silvestris 
Mycelium radicis atrovirens 


below 3:2 
below 4: 0 
3°2-3- 


Leal 


SRST PETE eel 


o 
So 
= 


1--| 
Sg oleae FA bor Co DOD He 


pibeds 


(or 
2 
iS) 
= 
bo 
bo 


[eel 


One 
COnoK: 


a 
PNNWNDNRPREE OWE RENNO NRE RRO PNR NNWNow 


g 
L 4 ] 


tt 
SCWONNWHWWHED BN wDp 


DO POWOME ROL 
: | 
HE rprmonmHroapese » 


ion 
Oy 
ge 


Zs 

Oo 

= 

©) 

=a 
nmw 
ao 


bo bo eo bo 
DNR DWP hb 
RonF 


° 

f= 

Gro | =| 
(.PWwWwr on wwwwor~rIs 


~) 
wWwnne 
| 


Ze Dearne 


tere 
Oo 
22 
iS) 

= 
Roe 
oo 


4 


we 


Er 


NNWNWwWNhPpwr 
? Se CO ea eee bo 
< CUONNFFPWWwWWATINIAINI 


CHANWWONS 


Be ‘0 
below 374 
below 3-4 


Pistor (1930) 


Johnson (1923) 
* Jensen 


Pistor (1930) 


* Jensen 
Camp (1923) 
* Jensen 
Dubos (1928) 
* Jensen 


Currie (1917) 
Camp (1923) 
Johnson (1923) 


” 


” 


” 
Camp 


” 


Dubos (1928) 
* Jensen 


Pistor (1930) 
Horne and Williamson (1923) 


(1923) 


Boyle (1924) 
Dubos (1928) 
* Jensen 

Camp (1923) 


Johnson (1923) 
* Jensen 


Moore (1924) 
Kirby (1922) 

Neal (1927) 
Lundegardh (1923) 


” 


MacInnes (1922) 
Boyle (1924) 

* Jensen 

Camp (1923) 
Lehman (1923) 


Kuler and Heintze (1919) 
Brightman et al. (1920) 
Camp (1923) 

Hopkins (1922) 

Kirby (1922) 

Child (1929) 


Biltris (1929) 
Meacham (1918) 


” 


” 


Wolpert, (1924) 


” 


Weis and Nielsen (1927) 


Matsumoto (1921) 
Melin (1924) 


” 


* Data from an unpublished paper, to appear shortly in Soil Science. 


706 ON A CELLULOSE-DECOMPOSING SOIL FUNGUS, 


to bacteria. At any rate, the possibility of the presence of organisms of the type 
here dealt with should be given full attention in discussing the importance of 
fungi versus bacteria in biological processes of decomposition in the soil. 


Summary. 


A fungus, probably belonging to the genus Botryosporium, was isolated from 
an English field soil with addition of manure. This organism proved very 
sensitive to acid reaction, pH 4:5 being very near the limit of acidity at which 
growth could be induced; a good growth would only take place at pH values 
above 6:0, and an optimum zone seemed to stretch from pH 6-6 to pH 7:4 and 
possibly higher. In neutral or alkaline solution the fungus exerted a very strong 
cellulose decomposing activity, in unbuffered physiologically acid solution almost 
none. Its sensitiveness to acidity is greater than that of any fungus hitherto 
studied in this respect. 


References. 


BIuTris, R., 1929.—Sur la variabilité des caractéres de l’espéce chez les dermatophytes. 
Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 43, 1929, 281-358. 

Boyueg, C., 1924.—Studies on the Physiology of Parasitism. x. The Growth Reaction of 
Certain Fungi in Relation to their Staling Products. Ann. Bot., 38, 1924, 113-135. 

BRIERLEY, W. B., JEWSON, S. T., and BRIERLEY, M., 1928.—The Quantitative Study of 
Soil Fungi. Proc. First Intern. Congr. Soil Sci., Washington, 1927, vol. iii, 1928. 

BRIGHTMAN, C. L., MeAcHAM, M. R., and Acres, S. F., 1920.—A Spectrophotometric 
Study of the “Salt Effect” of Phosphates (etc.). Journ. Bact., 5, 1920, 169-180. 

Camp, A. F., 1923.—Citric Acid as a Source of Carbon for Certain Citrus Fruit Destroying 
Fungi. Ann. Miss. Bot. Garden, 10, 19238, 213-298. 

CHILD, M., 1929.—Preliminary Studies in the Genus Daldinia. Ann. Miss. Bot. Garden, 
16, 1929, 411-486. . 

CurRIE, J. N., 1917.—The Citric Acid Fermentation of Aspergillus niger. Journ. Biol. 
Chem., 31, 1917, 15-37. 

DugBos, R. J., 1928.—The Decomposition of Cellulose by Aerobic Bacteria. Journ. Bact., 
15, 1928, 223-234. 

EuLser, H. von, and HEINTZE, S., 1919.—Uber die ph-Empfindlichkeit der G&rung einer 
Oberhefe. Zeitschr. physiol. Chem., 108, 1919, 165-186. 

HopkKINsS, E. F., 1921.—Growth and Germination of Gibberella saubinetii at Varying 
Hydrogen Ion Concentrations.—Phytopathology, 11, 1921, 36. 

Horne, A. S., and WILLIAMSON, H. S., 1923.—The Morphology and Physiology of the 
Genus Hidamia. Ann. Bot., 37, 1923, 393-431. 

JOHNSON, H. W., 1923.—Relationships between Hydrogen Ion, Hydroxyl Ion, and Salt 
Concentrations and the Growth of Seven Soil Molds. Iowa State Coll. Agr., Soil 
Sect., Tech. Bull. 76, 1923. 

Kirpy, R. S., 1922.—The Take-All Disease of Cereals and Grasses. Phytopathology, 12, 
1922, 66-88. 9 

LEHMAN, S. G., 1923.—Pod and Stem Blight of Soy Bean. Ann. Miss. Bot. Garden, 10, 
1923, 111-169. 

LINnbDAv, G., 1900.—Hyphomycetes (in Engler-Prantl’s Die natiirlichen Pflanzenfamilien). 

LUNDEGARDH, H., 1923.—Die Bedeutung des Kohlenséuregehaltes und der Wasserstoffionen- 
konzentration des Bodens fiir die Entstehung der Fusariosen.—Bot. Notiser f. 
1923, 25. 

MAcINNES, J., 1922.—The Growth of the Wheat Scab Organism in Relation to Hydrogen 
Ion Concentration. Phytopathology, 12, 1922, 290-295. 

Matsumoto, T., 1921.—Studies in the Physiology of the Fungi. xii. Physiological — 
Specialization in Rhizoctonia Solani Kiihn. Ann. Miss. Bot. Garden, 8, 1921, 1-62. 

MracHam, M. R., 1918.—Note upon the Hydrogen Ion Concentration Necessary to 
Inhibit the Growth of Four Wood-Destroying Fungi. Science, 48, 1918, 499-500. 

MELIN, E., 1924.—ijber den Einfluss der Wasserstoffionenkonzentration auf die Virulenz 
der Wurzelpilze von Kiefer und Fichte. Bot. Notiser f. 1924, 38-42. 

Moore, E. S., 1924.—The Physiology of Fusariwm coerulewm. Ann. Bot., 38, 1924, 137-161. 


PLATE XL. 


Soc. N.S.W., 1930. 


LINN. 


PROC. 


Loesene == 


BY H. L. JENSEN. T07 


NBAL, J., 1927.—Cotton Wilt: A Pathological and Physiological Investigation. Ann. Miss. 
Bot. Garden, 14, 1927, 359-424. 

Pistor, R., 1930.—Beitrage zur Kenntnis der biologischen Tatigkeit von Pilzen in 
Waldboéden. Cent. f. Bakt. ii, 80, 1930, 169-200. ; 

Scautes, F. M., 1916.—A New Method for Precipitating Cellulose for Cellulose Agar. 
Cent. f. Bakt. ii, 44, 1916, 661-668. 

WAKSMAN, S. A., 1922.—A Method of Counting the Numbers of Fungi in the Soil. 
Journ. Bact., 7, 1922, 339-341. 

WAKSMAN, S. A., and H®BUKELEKIAN, O., 1926.—Cellulose Decomposition by Various 
Groups of Soil Microorganisms. Actes iv. Conf. Intern. de Pedol. en Rome, 1924, 
3, 1926, 216-228. 

Wouis, FrR., and NIELSEN, N., 1927.—Nogle Undersggelser over Rodfordwrversvampen 
(Polyporus radiciperda). Medd. Dansk Skovforen., 5, 1927, 235-246. 

WINOGRADSKY, S., 1929.—Etudes sur la microbiologie du sol. Sur la dégradation de la 
cellulose dans le sol. Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 43, 1929, 549-633. 

WoLPERT, F., 1924.—Studies in the Physiology of the Fungi. xvii. The Growth of 
Certain Wood-Destroying Fungi in Relation to the’ H-Ion Concentration of the 
Media. Ann. Miss. Bot. Garden, 11, 1924, 43-97. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XL. 
a and ec, conidiophores with spore-heads; b, conidia; d, end branches of conidiophores 


(cellulose agar, 5 days, 32° C.); e, vegetative hyphae (cellulose agar, 2 days, 22° C.); 
f, chlamydospore-like cells in vegetative mycelium (cellulose agar, 7 days, 32° C.); 
g, cellulose fibre containing dark cells (cellulose agar, 5 days, 32° C.). Magnifications: 


a, b, d, e and f, approx. x 540; c and g, approx. x 225. 


THE LEAF-BUDS OF SOME WOODY PERENNIALS IN THE NEW SOUTH 
WALES FLORA. 


By Guapys Cargy, B.Sc., 
Demonstrator in Botany, University of Sydney. 


(Seventy-five Text-figures. ) 


[Read 26th November, 1930. ] 


Part i. 
Introduction. 
Types of Leaf-Buds. 
1. Scaly Buds: A, Laminar type; B, Stipular type; C, Epacridaceous type. 
2. Intermediate Buds: A, Transition to normal leaves abrupt; B, Transition 
to normal leaves gradual; C, Type akin to a naked bud; D, Microscopic 


type. 

3. Naked Buds: A, Protection by hairs; B, Protection by stipules, with or 
without hairs; C, Special cases of stipular protection; D, Microscopic 
buds. 

4. Mixed Buds. 

Variability. 
Summary. 
Part ii. 


Brief descriptions of the buds of selected species. 


Part I. 
Introduction. 


Leaf-buds have been studied in detail by morphologists in the Northern 
Hemisphere* so that our knowledge of the structure of the leaf-buds of the 
plants growing in those regions is extensive. As the trees and shrubs concerned 
are mainly deciduous, the scaly type of bud is characteristic of those cold 
temperate latitudes. Such a bud may be defined as one in which the young 
leaf rudiments are enveloped by a varying number of scales or cataphylls, these 
scales representing the modified parts of leaves, i.e., laminae, leaf-bases or stipules 
(e.g., Peach, Aesculus, Fagus). 

As “it is only in exceptional plants that the uppermost axillary buds of the 
main shoot normally expand during the period of their formation without develop- 
ing bud scales” (Foster, 1928), little attention has hitherto been paid to buds 
which are devoid of scales and are termed “naked”’’. 

In New South Wales, where the climate is fairly equable and the winters 
mild and short, there is no marked resting period in plant activity and such 
buds are very characteristic. A study of a representative number of them has 
revealed some interesting facts. 


* Foster, A. S. (Salient features of the problem of bud scale morphology. Biol. Rev., 
iii, 1928, 123) discusses the matter at length with full bibliography. 


BY GLADYS CAREY. 709 


In the course of this study the morphology of the buds was examined by 
means of hand sections and dissection, combined with observation of the expanding 
buds and their resultant shoots. The features exhibited by expanding buds are 
highly characteristic and a bud cannot readily be classified under the following 
system unless the emerging shoot is also examined. 

In the following paper a‘ detailed account is given of the buds of certain 
selected species together with a brief discussion of the features that they show. 
This general account is followed by a second part in which brief descriptions are 
given of the buds of 140 species of New South Wales plants that have been 
examined in the course of the work. 

The writer wishes to thank Professor Osborn for suggesting the problem 
in the first instance, and for his continuous interest and help throughout 
the course of the work. 


Types OF LEAF-BuDs. 

It is possible to divide the leaf-buds of woody perennials in New South Wales 
into four main classes. These classes are undoubtedly exceedingly artificial, for 
there is no sharply defined boundary between one class and another, and types 
can always be found which grade one into the other. The classes are as follows: 
(1) scaly buds, (2) intermediate buds, (3) naked buds, (4) mixed buds. 

(1) A scaly bud is one in which the leaf-rudiments are enveloped by scales. 
As such a bud expands and lengthens into a young shoot the amount of growth 
shown by the successive foliar organs becomes progressively greater. The outer- 
most organs or scales exhibit little or no growth; these are followed on the 
shoot by a series of foliar organs in which the form of the scale gradually 
or fairly abruptly gives place to that of the foliage leaf. At the same time 
the internodes, which do not elongate between the scales, become progressively 
longer between each succeeding node until the foliage leaf is reached. Those organs 
which lie on the shoot between the scales and the foliage leaves will be termed 
“transitional forms’. This term was applied by Foster (1929) to essentially 
scale-like organs formed between the bud-scales proper and the leaves in the 
sealy bud of the Horsechestnut. In this paper the term will be extended to 
include all organs other than true bud-scales, whether they be scale-like or not, 
developed on the expanding shoot below the normal foliage leaves. 

(2) An intermediate bud when dormant cannot be distinguished from a naked 
bud. On expansion, the outer organs show various degrees of development, but 
never as much as the normal foliage leaves. These organs, therefore, correspond 
to the transitional forms in a scaly bud. 

(3) A naked bud is one whose foliar rudiments all develop fully when the 
bud expands into a shoot. 

(4) A mixed bud is one which on expansion produces both flowers and 
leaves. Some species possess both leaf-buds and mixed buds, e.g., Pittosporum 
undulatum. However, in this paper, only those species in which all the growth 
is by potentially mixed buds have been described in detail. 

Examples of all four classes occur on both shrubs and trees of all sizes; 
moreover, the bud types occur together in various habitats. So far as the present 
studies have gone it is not possible to associate types of bud structure with 
ecological conditions. On the other hand, whilst a bud type may be characteristic 
in certain families, in other families, or even genera, considerable variation in 
bud type may occur (see account of Variability below, page 726). 


710 LEAF—BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


1. Scaly Buds. 

Representatives of the class of scaly buds are not common in our flora, but 
they have been found in the Myrtaceae, Proteaceae, Pittosporaceae, Oleaceae, 
Lauraceae, Cupuliferae, and Epacridaceae. In some of the families mentioned, 
however, the scaly bud is characteristic of a few genera only (e.g., Myrtaceae, 
Proteaceae). Mesophytic-leaved genera, such as Pittosporum undulatum, and 
hardier types, such as Hakea pubescens, both envelop their leaf-rudiments in scales. 


The scales may be fleshy (Pittosporum undulatum) or membranous (Hakea 
pubescens, Leptospermum flavescens), glabrous (Hakea pubescens) or hairy 
(Leptospermum lanigerum), and vary greatly in number from two (Notelaea 
longifolia) to as many as eighteen (Callistemon lanceolatus). 

As in the Northern Hemisphere type, these scales represent parts of foliage 
leaves. Stipular scales occur in Fagus Moorei. Laminar scales, however, appear 
to be of most frequent occurrence (e.g., in Leptospermum flavescens, Hakea 
pubescens, Pittosporum undulatum, Syncarpia laurifolia). But as yet no example 
of leaf-base scales has been observed. 


A. Laminar Type. 


(i) Hakea pubescens Schrad.—The terminal bud is approximately 3 mm. in 
length and shows little dominance over the upper axillary buds (Text-fig. 1), many 
of which develop into vigorous shoots at the time of bud expansion. Hach bud is 
covered by brown membranous scales, representing laminae, which by a series of 
forms (as shown in Text-fig. 2) pass into the characteristic leaves. There are 
approximately fourteen foliar organs developed before the leaves: the first two 
are as wide as they are long (Text-fig. 2, a); the next two show some increase 
in width (Text-fig. 2, 6), but a more pronounced development in length. Each 
succeeding organ then shows a progressive increase in length (Text-fig. 2, c, d) 
combined with (after about the eighth) a decrease in width (Text-fig. 2, e, f, g). 
In these distal forms a central thicker region is developed and the membranous 
tissue becomes confined to the edges of the apical portion of each transitional 
form. Hairs are developed at the apex of the scales and become increasingly 
evident on the distal transitional forms. In the leaf, hairs are scattered over 
the whole surface (Text-fig. 2, h). However, the difference between the distal 
transitional form and the first leaf is soon well marked as the bud expands and 
the transitional forms fall away (Text-fig. 3). In addition, it is noted that, in 
this type, buds never occur in the axils of the transitional forms, between 
which the internodes are very short, almost negligible. The absence of buds in the 
axils of transitional forms has been observed by Marshall Ward in connection 
with all the developing shoots of English perennials with scaly buds. In Hakea 
pubescens and Hakea pugioniformis, all the leaves formed in the shoot are not 
initiated in the bud. In addition, if the growth is vigorous, shoots may develop 
without bud formation in the axils of the maturing leaves of the shoot arising 
from the bud. 

(ii) Pittosporum undulatum Andr.—The terminal bud (Text-fig. 4) may or 
may not show a marked difference in size from that of the uppermost axillary 
buds situated just beneath it. Each bears laminar scales, usually ten in number. 
These organs are not membranous and bear an investment of both T-shaped and 
glandular hairs. One or two of the distal transitional forms (Text-fig. 5), which 
differ from the leaves only in size, bear minute buds in their axils. The latter 


BY GLADYS CAREY. qalal 


may be induced to develop by pruning the shoot back to these organs. Unlike 
Hakea pubescens, the transitional forms (usually four in number) develop 
chlorophyll as the bud expands, and the inner scales also become green. In 


Text-figs. 1-8. 


1.—Twig of Hakea pubescens showing axillary and terminal buds. (x 1.) 

2 (a-h).—Series of forms occurring in the transition from scale to leaf in Hakea 
pubescens. (x 5.) 

3.—Expanding bud of Hakea pubescens showing the inner scales and transitional 
forms) (Oye) 

4.—Dormant terminal bud of Pittosporwm undulatum. (x 3:5.) 

5.—Developing shoot of Pittesporum undulatwum showing distal scales (s) and 
transitional forms (t). (x 0-7.) 

6.—Dormant terminal bud of Syncarpia laurifolia. (x 2.) 

7.—Expanding terminal bud of Syncarpia lawrifolia. (s) scale, (t) transitional 
form, (c) axillary shoot. (x 0-8.) 

8.—Developing shoot of Syncarpia laurifolia. (t) transitional form, (c) axillary 
shoot. (x 0:8.) 


712 LEAF—BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


addition, a limited number of leaves only is formed on the expansion of each 
shoot. Under normal circumstances the rudiments of all these are present in 
the unexpanded bud. 

(iii) Syncarpia laurifolia Ten.—The terminal bud (Text-fig. 6) is almost 
hemispherical and is partly protected by the petioles of the two uppermost leaves. 
The axillary buds next below the terminal are microscopic, those further away are 
a little larger, but do not usually expand. In each bud there are as a rule 
only four scales (two pairs) covered with unicellular woolly hairs, although one 
or even two additional pairs have been known to occur. As the bud expands, two 
or three pairs of transitional forms develop (Text-fig. 7). Although these 
transitional forms enlarge, and the distal ones show long internodes between 
them, they do not become green. They wither and fall away early, but in the 
axils of each of them, excepting occasionally the outermost pair, a vigorous 
shoot covered by a dense tomentum of hairs develops immediately, without going 
through a resting stage (Text-fig. 8). This strong development of axillary shoots 
from buds in the axils of transitional forms is unusual. It is seen in Xylomelum 
pyriforme (intermediate bud) and Ricinocarpus pinifolius (mixed bud). 


B. Stipular Type. 

Platylobium formosum Sm.—In this genus the main growth is by axillary 
buds, more than one occurring in the axil of each leaf (Text-fig. 9). As the 
bud expands, each leaf-rudiment is seen to possess a pair of striated stipules 
which it pushes apart as it develops. Between the first leaf and the base of the 


Text-figs. 9-14. 


9.—Expanding axillary buds of Platylobiuwm formosum. (x 3.) 

10.—Developing shoot of Platylobium formosum. (s) scale, (t) transitional form, (x 2.) 
11.—A transitional form of Platylobiwm formosum. (x 11.) 

12.—Expanding bud of Styphelia triflora. (x 3-5.) 

13.—Expanding bud of Trochocarpa laurina. (x 5:5.) 

14.—Developing shoot of Styphelia triflora. (x 1.) 


BY GLADYS CAREY. its 


shoot a number of structures occur (Text-fig. 10) which in appearance resemble 
membranous laterally-joined stipules (Text-fig. 11). There may be six such 
forms, which occur alternately, although the foliage leaves are opposite. The 
two proximal structures do not increase in size as the shoot expands, and there 
is no internodal elongation. They are therefore true scales. The other four 
have well-marked internodes and axillary flower buds, so may be termed 
transitional forms. Sometimes these organs are fewer in number and there are 
then no true scales. 


C. Epacridaceous Type. 


Buds of this type have laminar scales, but the expanding shoot is so 
characteristic that it merits special attention. 

This bud type is confined to the Epacridaceae (Text-fig. 12). It differs from 
other laminar scaly buds in that there is a perfect series of transitional forms 
grading from the scale to the leaf. The true scales are small and few in number. 
In some instances, e.g., Woollsia pungens, the buds are minute. They are largest 
in types such as Trochocarpa laurina where they may be 2 mm. in length. 


In all cases, however, the structure is essentially the same. Each successive 
foliar organ developed along the shoot is slightly larger and more like the mature 
leaf than the one initiated before it. At the same time there is a gradual progres- 
sive increase in internodal length, so that in an expanding shoot of Trochocarpa 
laurina (Text-fig. 13) or of Styphelia triflora 7 cm. in length (Text-fig. 14), the 
transition is so perfect that it is impossible to draw a line of demarcation between 
the first leaf proper and the last transitional form or between the first transitional 
form and the last-formed scale. Later, the scales and most of the transitional 
forms drop off. 


Early in the growth of the shoot the transitional forms may be induced to 
develop axillary shoots by pruning or injury, although buds are not evident in 
their axils. An injured shoot (26 cm. long) of Styphelia lanceolata has been 
known to show buds developing in the axils of the scales as well as in the axils 
of the transitional forms. 


2. Intermediate Buds. 


A bud of this type, when closed, has the appearance of a naked bud in that 
the foliar organs are protected by hairs, secretions or stipules and not by bud- 
scales, but, as the bud expands into a shoot, the outer organs are seen to belong 
to the same category as the transitional forms in a scaly bud such as that of 
Pittosporum undulatum. 

Though leaf-buds of this class are characteristic of many New South Wales 
perennials, only one reference has been found to a bud of this type in Northern 
Hemisphere plants. Groom (Trees and their Life History) describes the bud of 
Holly as a naked one, but states that the outer organs do not fully develop. 


A. Transition to normal leaves abrupt. 


(i) Petrophila pulchella R.Br. is typical of the members of the class nearest 
to the scaly-bud type. The terminal bud (Text-fig. 15) may or may not be an 
inflorescence and the axillary buds are small (Text-fig. 16), bearing a few scattered 
hairs. As the bud expands a variable number of transitional forms occurs (some- 
times as many as ten) which differ in size (Text-fig. 17). 


714 LEAF—-BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


ee 


Text-figs. 15-22. 
15.—Terminal bud of Petrophila pulchella. (x 1:3.) 
16.—Axillary bud of Petrophila pulchella. (x 3-4.) 
17.—Base of a terminal shoot of Petrophila pulchella showing transitional forms. 

(x 0-9.) (t) transitional form, (1) normal] leaf. 
18.—Axillary bud of Banksia serrata showing the two early-formed leaves. (x 0-7.) 
19.—Base of an axillary shoot of Banksia serrata showing transitional forms. (x 0:7.) 
20.—Conospermum longifolium showing axillary inflorescence axis (1), 
scale-like organ (s) visible at the base. (x 0:9.) 
21.—Leaf-bud lying in the axil of the scale-like organ (s) of Text-figure 20, of 
Conospermum longifolium. (x 3.) 
22.—Dying inflorescence axis (r) and vigorous lateral shoot arising from it, 


Conospermum longifolium. One transitional form (t) visible, 
(x 0:9.) 


with one 


in 
(s) scale. 


BY GLADYS CAREY. 715 


The change from transitional forms, in which the lamina is apparently 
undeveloped, to the leaf is abrupt in most cases, but individuals do occur in which 
several transitional forms like poorly-dissected miniature leaves are found. The 
degree of elongation of the internodes varies also; sometimes it is only very 
slight between the proximal organs. When this is so the transitional organs 
might almost approach true bud-scales. 

(ii) In Banksia serrata L. the buds are larger and the organs composing them 
are covered by a dense tomentum of rust-coloured unicellular hairs. The terminal 
bud often contains an inflorescence, in which case growth is continued by the 
numerous axillary buds. Sometimes, as an axillary bud is formed, the two outer 
rudimentary organs develop immediately during the same growing season into 
small-sized but otherwise normal foliage leaves, while the rest of the bud remains 
dormant (Text-fig. 18). When such a bud expands during the next growing 
season the first-formed structures are transitional forms, the laminae of which 
are suppressed (Text-fig. 19). 

(iii) Conospermum longifolium Sm.—The terminal bud is a leaf-bud, the 
young rudiments enveloped by hairs, but it usually fails to expand. The main 
growth is from axillary shoots. In the axil of each leaf an inflorescence-bud 
occurs. This develops the characteristic long naked axis with a crowded terminal 
spike of flowers, but there are also two small scale-like organs developed close to 
base (Text-fig. 20). These latter hide small leaf-buds (Text-fig. 21). As the 
flowers die away, one of these buds develops to form a vigorous shoot, at the 
base of which are from 2 to 4 transitional forms (Text-fig. 22). This shoot 
soon becomes stouter than the inflorescence-axis which eventually dies away. 

(iv) Pultenaea daphnoides Wendl.—In this species stipules are the protective 
feature. The terminal bud, which is a conspicuous feature of the shoot, produces 
the inflorescence. Vegetative growth is continued by axillary buds lying beneath 
the terminal. These buds are almost microscopic and are hidden between the 
stipules of the subtending leaf and the stem (Text-fig. 23). In the bud, each 
leaf-rudiment has a pair of stipules joined laterally by a band of membranous 
tissue thus forming a concave depression into which the leaf-rudiment fits. At 
the same time the later-formed leaf-rudiments inside the bud are protected by 
this double stipular structure. A transverse section of the growing apex of 
P. ellipticum (Text-fig. 24) indicates the relation of the stipular pairs to the 
leaf. As a result of this: structure the first, i.e., proximal, leaves are exposed on 
their outer surfaces from their initiation. They possess a light covering of hairs 
and are afforded protection by the stipules of the leaf in whose axil they lie. 
The first leaves never develop fully. Generally the lamina of these transitional 
forms is quite rudimentary (Text-fig. 25) and the internodal elongation is reduced 
(Text-fig. 26). In one case, however, the first-formed leaves are only slightly 
smaller than the characteristic foliage leaves of the plant (Text-fig. 27). 


B. Transition to normal leaves gradual. 


(i) Persoonia salicina Pers—In the following types the outer organs may 
show greater development and the change from transitional form to leaf is less 
abrupt. In Persoonia salicina, the terminal bud is approximately hemispherical 
and the axillary buds are flattened against the stem thus protected by the expanded 
bases of the petioles (Text-fig. 28). As in Banksia serrata the leaves of the bud 
are rather loosely arranged, the interstices between the rudiments being occupied 


by unicellular hairs which, on the outer leaves, develop a brown pigment. On aGICAD 


8 GN 

Jo 908 4H 

| (ag) oe 

thot { Ld 2 ARY 
\Z\ =e 

ae P 

\Oq- Mash 

Oe O48) . 


716 


LEAF—BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 
Text-figs. 23-28. 
23.—Stipules of a leaf of Pultenaea daphnoides concealing an axillary bud. (x 10.) 
24.—Diagram of a transverse section of the apex of a developing terminal shoot of 


Pultenaea ellipticum. 

25.—The base of an axillary shoot of Pultenaea daphnoides showing transitional 
forms; (s) stipule, (1) undeveloped leaf. (x 9:5.) 

26.—The base of an older shoot of Pultenaea daphnoides of the type indicated in 
Text-fig. 25. (x 0°8.) 

27.—An axillary shoot of Pultenaea daphnoides showing two transitional forms (¢). 
(G< Wr%(5) 

28.—Persoonia salicina showing terminal and axillary buds. (x 0:8.) 


expansion, three to six transitional forms occur. The proximal one appears as a 
rudimentary lamina and, passing outward along the shoot, greater development 
of the lamina is exhibited by each succeeding form (Text-fig. 29). Well developed 


BY GLADYS CAREY. (Ale 


buds occur in the axils of all these transitional forms, however small they may 


be. 


These buds may be foliar or flower buds. 


Text-figs. 29-36. 


29.—Developing axillary shoot of Persoonia salicina showing transitional forms (t). 
(X% 027.) 

30.—Expanding axillary bud of Tristania laurina. (x 3.) 

31.—Tristania lawrina showing expanding terminal and dormant axillary buds, also 
the transitional forms (t) of the terminal shoot of the previous growth 
period. (x 1.) 

32.—a. Diagram of a transverse section of a bud of Rapanea variabilis. 6. Glandular 
hairs which cover the leaf surfaces. 

33.—An axillary bud of Rapanea variabilis. (x 8.) 

34.—A developing axillary shoot of Rapanea variabilis showing transitional forms 
(GE) ae CGO) 

35.—A transitional form of Banksia ericifolia. (x 4.) 

36.—An axillary bud of Bawera rubioides. (x 6-7.) 


718 LEAF-BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


(ii) Tristania laurina R.Br. shows similar features. The terminal bud is an 
elongated one in which the leaves overlap one another. They are invested by 
long unicellular hairs in which a brown pigment is developed. The dormant 
and expanding axillary buds (Text-fig. 30) show similar features to those of the 
terminal. As indicated in Text-fig. 31, a number of transitional forms occur at 
the base of the shoot. The proximal one or two may be even more rudimentary 
than the figure shows, giving no indication of a leaf base. 


C. Type akin to a naked bud. 


Other types belonging to this class such as Rapanea variabilis and Banksia 
ericifolia more closely approach naked buds, showing on the expanded shoot no 
difference in shape and only a slight difference in size between transitional forms 
and the leaves. In these, as in the other species, variability is shown so that 
sometimes all the organs develop into full-sized foliage leaves in which case the 
bud might be deemed naked. So that, if a bud, on expansion, usually shows a 
few smaller leaves at the base of the shoot, it has been classed as intermediate, 
while, on the other hand, if all the leaves usually develop to the full size, the bud 
has been placed among the naked ones. 


(i) Rapanea variabilis has an intermediate pud. It is covered with multi- 
cellular glandular hairs (Text-fig. 32, a, 6) which are lost as the shoot matures. 
The terminal bud is about 3 mm. long (Text-fig. 33) and has the same morphology 
as the slightly smaller axillary buds. Usually the two outermost leaves do not 
attain the size of the later formed leaves (Text-fig. 34), and are termed transitional 
forms. } 


(ii) In Banksia ericifolia L. the terminal bud is usually an inflorescence, so 
the growth is continued in most cases by the small axillary buds close to the 
terminal. Buds are not evident in the axils of leaves lower on the shoot. The 
rudiments in the bud are covered with hairs as in Banksia serrata. As the bud 
_ expands, a variable number of the outermost leaves may not attain full size (Text- 
fig. 35), but in this species shoots showing full development of all foliar organs 
may be found on the same shrub as those which do not. 


D. Microscopic buds. 


Many plants belonging to microphyllous types possess no obvious bud structure 
in the axils of their leaves. The young leaves appear to differentiate and develop 
at a fairly rapid rate, without undergoing a resting period within any bud structure 
visible to the naked eye. However, examination with a binocular microscope 
reveals the fact that there is a papilla of tissue in the axil of each leaf, which may 
or may not show early stages of differentiation. This “bud” is usually well pro- 
tected by or even hidden by the leaf-bases. The apical growing-point is usually 
surrounded by a tuft of leaves, as in Bauera rubioides. 


It does not necessarily follow that, because a plant has such a “bud,” all the 
leaves of the resultant shoot will be fully developed. 


(i) Bauera rubioides Andr. has a compound leaf of three sessile leaflets. There 
is a tuft of white hairs in the axil of the leaf, which covers a short primordium 
on which the first leaflets may already have begun to differentiate (Text-fig. 36). 
Development of the shoot shows the first three or four leaves reduced in size. 
At the apex of each branch is a crown of leaves protecting the apical growing 
point. ; 


BY GLADYS CAREY. 719 


Text-figs. 87-48. 

37.—Developing axillary bud of Angophora lanceolata. (x 10.) 

38.—A diagram of a transverse section of a developing bud of Angophora cordifolia. 

39.—a. Terminal and axillary buds of Lomatia longifolia. (x 2:5.) 0b. Type of 
clothing hair found on the leaf rudiments. 

40.—A terminal bud of Grevillea linearis. (x 7.) 

41.—An axillary bud of Lasiopetalum ferrugineum. (x 7.) 

42.—An axillary bud of Dodonaea triquetra. (x 4:7.) 

43.—An expanding axillary bud of Dodonaea triquetra. (x 17:5.) 

44.—a. A diagram of a transverse section of a bud of Myoporum tenwifolium. 
b. Type of glandular hair found on young leaves. 

45.—A terminal bud of Avicennia officinalis. (x 0-7.) 

46.—A diagram of a vertical section of a terminal bud of Avicennia officinalis 
showing glandular (b) and clothing (a) hairs. 

47.—An expanding terminal bud of Oxylobium trilobatum. (x 4.) 

48.—a. A diagram of a transverse section of a bud of Oxylobium trilobatum. b. Type 
of clothing hair. 


720 LEAF-BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


(ii) Angophora lanceolata Cav. shows only an ill-defined axillary swelling 
corresponding to the papilla characteristic of many microphyllous. types, but 
during the actual growing season a bud structure is produced (Text-fig. 37), which 
proceeds immediately to expand, giving rise to a shoot on which the proximal 
organs do not develop fully. This, occurs in spite of the fact that the foliar rudi- 
ments are coated with a characteristic rubbery secretion produced by papillate 
epidermal cells. This secretion, which is of the nature of caoutchouc, has been 
described by Welch (1923). In A. cordifolia Cav., the young leaf rudiments (Text- 
fig. 38) are covered by interlocking hairs and emergences. 


3. Naked Buds. 

As the classification of such buds depends upon one’s conception of the meaning 
of the term “naked”, it will be necessary to define a naked bud as one in which 
all the foliar organs forming it exhibit perfect development, i.e., there are no 
scales or transitional forms. The first leaf-rudiments may be visible on the out- 
side of the naked bud or they may be hidden by their own stipules. 

These buds form a large class in the New South Wales flora, and many and 
varied modes of protection of the young leaves are found, i.e., clothing or glandular 
hairs, secretions or stipules may occur, or even any combination of these protective 
features. Nevertheless, the bud is “naked” in that the leaves from the basal 
node itself are fully formed. 


A. Protection by hairs. 


In the Proteaceae, Monimiaceae, Sterculiaceae and Rutaceae buds are found in 
which the protection of the leaf-rudiments is effected by a dense tomentum of 
clothing hairs. These hairs more often than not hold brown or red pigments in 
their cell cavities, which are frequently reduced while the cell walls may be 
undulating or nodular. 

(i) In Lomatia longifolia R.Br. (Text-fig. 39, a) the terminal and axillary 
buds are similar, the latter being closely appressed to the stem. In each the 
clothing hairs (Text-fig. 39, 0B) are directed vertically, forming a dense canopy 
over the leaf-rudiments and filling up the spaces between them. Brown pigment 
is developed to the greatest extent in those hairs which occur on the outer leaf- 
rudiments. This canopy of hairs is completely lost as the leaves mature. 

(ii) Grevillea linearis R.Br. (Text-fig. 40)—In this case the leaves of the bud 
are loosely folded around one another, the interstices being occupied by T-shaped 
hairs, the head cells of which hold red pigment. At maturity hairs are found 
only on the lower surface of the leaves. 

(iii) Lasiopetalum ferrugineum Sm. (Text-fig. 41).—In this genus the over- 
lapping leaves bear on their lower surfaces a tomentum of stellate hairs which is 
never completely lost even at maturity. 

Glandular hairs may occur instead of or in conjunction with clothing hairs 
as in Dodonaea triquetra, Myoporum tenuifolium and Avicennia officinalis. 

(iv) Dodonaea triquetra Wendl.—F lowers are produced terminally. After the 
formation of the fruits, a bud lying in the axil of the uppermost leaf of the shoot 
begins to expand. Its strong growth soon places it in a terminal position. At the 
same time an accessory axillary bud lying in the axil of the same leaf may give 
rise to a normal axillary shoot. Many axillary buds develop. Each is a compact 
resinous mass lying in the leaf axil (Text-fig. 43). As the bud expands it becomes 
cylindrical (Text-fig. 43). Hach leaf of the bud bears numerous multicellular 


BY GLADYS CAREY. 721 


glandular hairs which secrete a resin, thus cementing the leaves of the bud 
together. These hairs, which are most closely set on the inner leaves, have been 
described in detail for another species of this genus, by Miss Collins (1920). 

(v) Myoporum tenuifolium Forst. shows a tapering bud in which the over- 
lapping leaves have both surfaces densely covered with multicellular glandular 
hairs which secrete a protective resin (Text-fig. 44, a, 6). The hairs of this genus 
also have been studied by Miss Collins (1920). It has been noted that sometimes 
the first-formed leaves are not quite as large as those initiated later, a suggestion 
of the intermediate bud type. 

(vi) Avicennia officinalis L. also exhibits glandular hairs. Each lateral bud 
is protected by the base of the leaf in whose axil it lies, while the terminal bud is 
half hidden between the leaf-bases and the uppermost pair of leaves (Text-fig. 45). 
The outer leaf-rudiments of the bud bear T-shaped hairs on those parts of the 
abaxial surfaces which are exposed. On the adaxial surfaces of these outer leaves 
and on both faces of the inner ones there are glandular hairs (Text-fig. 46). In 
this genus also the first few leaves of the shoot are sometimes slightly smaller 
than the others. 


B. Protection by stipules with or without hairs. 


In many cases the young leaves may be protected by stipules which may or 
may not be supplemented by hairs as in Oxylobium trilobatum, Acacia elata, 
Elaeocarpus reticulatus, etc. 

(i) Ozylobium trilobatum Benth. is a typical example (Text-fig. 47). In both 
the terminal and axillary buds the leaves are folded inwards and their apices 
early become hard and glabrous. The stipules, a pair belonging to each leaf, fill 
up the spaces between the leaves and make the bud compact (Text-fig. 48, a). The 
leaves and the outer surfaces of the stipules are covered with a dense tomentum of 
hairs. These clothing hairs have one or two basal cells and a long tapering thick- 
walled terminal cell (Text-fig. 48). As the bud expands, the hairs are lost and 
the stipules, though persistent, have little function, unless it be to afford some 
degree of protection to the axillary buds. 

(ii) In true-leaved Acacias, e.g., A. elata (Text-fig. 49), the organs of the bud 
are composed of rudimentary leaves and stipules (Text-fig. 50, a@). These are 
enveloped by a resin secreted by multicellular glandular hairs which have been 
described by Miss Collins (1920). 

These glandular hairs (Text-fig. 50, c) vary in number in the various species. 
They occur most abundantly on the inner surfaces of the leaves, while in 
addition the leaves bear short pilose hairs (Text-fig. 50, 6) which act as “pegs” 
on which to hang the secretion. 

(iii) Hlaeocarpus reticulatus Sm. (Text-fig. 51)—In both the terminal and 
axillary buds the rudimentary leaves are enveloped by long clothing hairs and are 
covered by a resinous secretion excreted from the epithelia which line the stipules 
(Text-fig. 52). As the bud expands, the stipules, their function being over, fall 
off. Occasionally the first two leaves of a shoot are smaller than those formed 
later. 

In the cases just cited the stipules have not formed a marked major feature 
of protection, but in some buds they may do so, as in Breynia oblongifolia, Vitis 
Baudiniana and Ceratopetalum apetalum. These buds differ from true scaly buds 
of the stipular type in that a leaf expands from the node at which each pair of 
stipules is borne. 


122 LEAF-BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


(iv) Breynia oblongifolia Muel.—Many axillary buds develop into vigorous 
shoots. Each bud occurring on the main branches lies in the axil of a reduced 
leaf and is protected by the pair of stipules belonging to that leaf (Text-fig. 53). 


Text-figs. 49-54. 


49.—An axillary bud of Acacia elata. (x 4.) 

50.—a. A diagram of a transverse section of a bud of Acacia elata. b. Type of 
clothing hair. ec. Type of glandular hair. 

51.—An expanding bud of Hlaeocarpus reticulatus. (x 15.) 

52.—A diagram of a transverse section of a bud of Hlaeocarpus reticulatus; (e) 
epithelium. 

53.—An axillary bud of Breynia oblongifolia. (x 11.) : 

54.—A diagram of a transverse section of a bud of Breynia oblongifolia. 


The leaf-rudiments in the bud are glabrous and protected by stipules, two 
occurring with each leaf, their edges just touching behind it, so hiding the 
leaf from view (Text-fig. 54). Hxamined externally, it may be mistaken for a 
true scaly bud, from which it differs by the fact that there are no intermediate 
forms; every node has a fully developed foliage leaf. 


(v) Vitis Baudiniana F.v.M.—The terminal and axillary buds are alike flat 
and narrow, only the tomentose stipules being plainly visible. Hach leaf has two 
stipules which stand erect, face to face, and are joined medianly by a narrow 
band of tissue at right angles to the stipules (Text-fig. 55). Thus the stipules 
are held close together, forming two chambers, into one of which fits the leaf 
belonging to these stipules, while the other chamber partly encloses the rest of 
the bud. Hach leaf is not quite completely enveloped by its own stipules and on 
the exposed median abaxial part of the unfolded leaf the hairs, which occur else- 
where on the leaves, are densest. The stipules themselves bear on their outer 
surfaces numbers of hairs with short stalks and T-shaped heads, one of the arms 
of each terminal cell being greatly elongated and directed towards the apex of 
the bud. In an axillary shoot the first leaf is rudimentary. The rudiments of 
the tendrils may also be seen, each one densely covered with hairs and lying close 
to the base of the leaf initiated after it. Their growth in the bud is slower than 
that of the leaves. 


BY GLADYS CAREY. 723 


C. Special cases of stipular protection. 

(i) Ceratopetalum apetalum Don.—In the terminal bud the leaves are not 
visible. This is due to the fact that the stipules belonging to the terminal pair 
of leaves of the previous year’s shoot hide them (Text-fig. 56). The stipules of 
Ceratopetalum are complex, being formed by the lateral fusion of one stipule 
from each of the opposite leaves. They are green and stand erect. Those of the 
terminal pair of leaves partly enclose the rudiments of the following year’s growth, 
while each pair of leaves in the bud is also partly enveloped by its own stipules 
(Text-fig. 57). The whole structure is covered by a resinous secretion produced 
by the epithelia which line the fluted inner surfaces of the stipules. The axillary 
buds, on the other hand, receive no protection from the stipules of the leaves in 


IO ROM ee. 
OOF 


> oc 
Sa 


Text-figs. 55-61. 


55.—A diagram of a transverse section of a bud of Vitis Baudiniana. 

56.—Terminal and axillary buds of Ceratopetalum apetalum. (x 0:75.) 

57.—A diagram of a transverse section of a bud of Ceratopetalum apetalum; (s) 
stipules, (e) epithelium. 

58.—The base of an axillary shoot of Ceratopetalum apetalum showing the rudi- 
mentary leaf (a) and stipules (s). (x 1.) 

59.—A terminal bud of Callicoma_ serratifolia. The outer stipules have been 
removed; (s) stipules, (1) leaf. (x 4.) 

60.—A shoot of Ficus rubiginosa showing a terminal and axillary bud. (x 0-5.) 

61.—A diagram of a transverse section of a terminal bud of Ficus rubiginosa. 


724 LEAF—-BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


whose axils they lie, so that the first pair of leaves on a lateral shoot usually 
remains rudimentary. There is, however, always a distinct bud in the axil of each 
of the rudimentary Ieaves of the proximal pair. There may only be a very slight 
elongation of the internode between this pair and the base of the shoot (Text- 
fig. 58). 

(ii) Callicoma serratifolia (Text-fig. 59) exhibits a similar bud structure to 
that of Ceratopetaium, the only difference being that in place of the secretion the 
leaves and outer surfaces of the stipules are densely clothed with unicellular 
rusty hairs. These hairs are densest where the leaves are not covered by their 
stipules. The axillary bud is protected by the leaf-base and petiole of the mature 
leaf in whose axil it lies. Also, it is noted that all the leaves of a lateral shoot 
develop fully. 

(iii) Ficus rubiginosa Desf. (Text-fig. 60) also belongs to this class. Most of 
the growth of a shoot is carried on by the terminal bud. Each leaf has two over- 
lapping stipules lying inside it, so in this bud the first leaf is enveloped by the 
stipules belonging to the last leaf of the previous growth period (Text-fig. 61). A 
leaf develops for each pair of stipules and the latter are covered on their outer 
surfaces by unicellular hairs and the leaves may also bear a few. 

The axillary buds do not often form, but if they do leaf-rudiments are absent 
within the first pair or two pairs of stipules, between which, however, a jong 
internode appears as the shoot develops. 


D. Microscopic Buds. 


Microscopic buds are found in the class of naked buds, as they are in the 
class of intermediate buds, the only difference being that all the leaves show full 
development, the criterion of a naked bud. 

(i) Darwinia fascicularis Rudge.—An inflorescence is terminal and the axillary 
buds are represented by papillae of tissue completely hidden between the leaf-bases 
and the stem (Text-fig. 62). Sometimes they are undifferentiated; at other times 
they may show the early development of the first two leaf-rudiments and, because 
of their protected position, they need and bear no protective organs (Text-fig. 63). 

(ii) Boronia pinnata Sm.—The axillary buds are similar to those of Darwinia 
fascicularis, and the terminal is completely hidden between the bases of the upper- 
most pair of leaves. 

(iii) Westringia rosmariniformis Sm.—The apical growing-point is protected 
by the surrounding leaves. The tuft of erect stiff white hairs which clothes each 
axillary papilla may be visible with the aid of a hand lens (Text-fig. 64). 

(iv) Many Eucalypts such as Hucalyptus corymbosa, like Angophora lanceo- 
latus, show only an ill-defined swelling in each leaf-axil. But during the growing 
season a bud structure is developed (Text-figs. 65, 66, 67) which preceeds 
immediately to expand, giving rise to young leaves. The buds in the axils of 
these in their turn may produce axillary shoots without a resting period. Terminal 
and many axillary shoots develop each growing season. The young leaves are 
protected by a secretion which has also been described by Welch (1923). 


4. Mixed Buds. 

Mixed buds are those from which both leaves and flowers may develop. Such 
buds, as the only means of shoot extension, are of rare occurrence in our Flora. 
Some phyllodineous Acacias such as Acacia longifolia and A. myrtifolia and also 
a member of the Euphorbiaceae, Ricinocarpus pinifolius, have mixed buds. 


BY GLADYS CAREY. 125 


Text-figs. 62-75. 

62.—Developing axillary shoot of Darwinia fascicularis showing closely set leaf- 
DASESHa nl OxGurone) 

63.—Axillary bud of Darwinia fascicularis. (x 30.) 

64.—Diagram of a vertical section of a bud of Westringia rosmariniformis. 

65.—Hucalyptus cerymbosa showing initiation of bud structures during the growing 
season. (x 0:7.) 

66.—Expanding bud of Hucalyptus corynvbosa. (x 4.) 

67.—Diagram of a transverse section of an expanding bud of Hucalyptus corymbosa. 

68.—Axillary compound bud of Acacia longifolia. (x T.) 

69.—Vertical section of a compound bud of Acacia longifolia. (x 7.) 

70.—Developing axillary shoot of Acacia longifolia showing inflorescences (i) at the 

base. (x 1.) 

.—Dormant bud of Acacia myrtifolia. (x T.) 

—Developing axillary shoot of Acacia myrtifolia; (s) scale-like organ. (x 5:5.) 

.—Older axillary shoot of Acacia myrtifolia. (x 1-5.) 

.—Developing shoots of Ricinocarpus pinifolius; (f) flower, (1) undeveloped leaf. 

(< il) 

75.—Older shoots of Ricinocarpus pinifolius showing the development of shoots 

(s) in the axils of the undeveloped leaves (1). (x 1.) 


a 3-41 
H © BO F* 


726 LEAF—-BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


(i) Acacia longifolia Willd.—In each leaf-axil the rudimentary shoot has, on 
one side or either side, a young inflorescence, the whole being enveloped by the 
two scale-like organs (Text-figs. 68, 69). As the shoot emerges. from the bud the 
first phyllode may not develop. However, there is a long internode on the shoot 
between the axil of the phyllode in which the shoot is developing and the stipules 
which mark the position of the undeveloped phyilode. The inflorescences of the 
buds do not always mature. 

(ii) Acacia myrtifolia Willd. has a mixed bud (Text-fig. 71). Flowers are 
produced terminally and the apical growth is then continued by an axillary bud. 
In the axil of each leaf are two or sometimes three buds. One of these is a pure 
inflorescence bud, the other two are potentially mixed buds. 

Hach bud is covered by scale-like organs. There may be one true scale at 
the base of the shoot followed by three scale-like organs, between which are 
distinct internodes (Text-fig. 72). In their axils inflorescences may, but do not 
always, appear. These are followed by the phyllodes (Text-fig. 73). 

(iii) Ricinocarpus pinifolius Desf. (Text-fig. 74)—The main growth is by 
the terminal bud, the axillary buds are microscopic and hidden by the leaf- 
bases. As each expands, two to four foliar structures are first produced; the 
proximal one or two sometimes develop fully into normal leaves, the others do 
not. They are followed by several other undeveloped leaves in whose axils flowers 
arise. Flowers are also produced terminally. As the flowers mature, shoots 


develop rapidly in the axils of the first incomplete leaves which are then shed 
(Text-fig. 75). 


Variability. 

Variability exhibited by leaf-buds is in many cases very marked. Families 
such as the Proteaceae and Myrtaceae show great diversity of bud structure, 
including examples of all three classes, others are remarkably true to one type, 
e.g., Epacridaceae, Cunoniaceae. Yet again a genus may include species exhibiting 
different bud morphology. This is well illustrated in the genus Hakea for Hakea 
pubescens has a scaly bud, Hakea eriantha has an intermediate one, while Hakea 
saligna has a bud which may sometimes be intermediate and at other times scaly 
according to whether internodes elongate between the proximal organs or fail 
to do so. 

Variability of bud type is shown within a single species, i.e., the degree of 
development of the outer organs often varies greatly, e.g., Pultenaea daphnoides, 
in which the first leaves sometimes do not develop after initiation and at other 
times are clearly recognizable (Text-figs. 30, 31), or Petrophila pulchella in which 
the number of transitional forms and their degree of development are variable. 

This variability may even extend to the different branches of the one plant, 
for the number of scales and transitional forms is rarely constant and the degree 
of development exhibited by the transitional forms is extremely variable. 

Foster (1929) suggests that bud structure and development may be controlled 
by the physiology of the shoot. The variability exhibited among species of the 
same family and even shown upon branches on the one plant seems to support 
this suggestion. Foster indicates that the formation of the “upper” transitional 
forms as well as that of the lower transitional forms of Aesculus Hippocastanum 
may be due to a change in physiological activity. The upper transitional forms 
are found on the shoot between the leaves and the bud-scales proper. The lower 
transitional forms occur between the bud-scales proper and the leaves, as has 


BY GLADYS CAREY. 727 


already been mentioned. Organs indicating similar conditions are found in 
Isopogon anemonifolius, which has a bud like that of Petrophila pulchella. In 
this plant the leaves just beneath the terminal bud are smaller than those 
lower down on the shoot, indicating a slowing down of the metabolic rate. As 
the terminal bud expands, these small leaves are followed by transitional forms, 
each succeeding structure along the shoot showing slightly more development 
than the one preceding it as the metabolic rate approaches its optimum. 


Again in Petrophila pulchella sometimes among the first transitional forms 
an odd one appears that is much more fully developed. Such a development 
indicates a temporary acceleration in the metabolic rate. 


SUMMARY. 


1. Leaf-buds in New South Wales can be divided into three classes: fa) 
sealy; (0) intermediate; (c) naked. 


2. Sealy buds are poorly represented in the flora. Each bud consists of scales 
(representing laminae, or stipules) and transitional forms enclosing rudimentary 
leaves. The transitional forms are defined as those organs which lie on the 
shoot between the scales and the leaves proper. 


3. Hakea pubescens has a typical scaly bud with laminar scales and 
transitional forms devoid of axillary buds. Pittosporum undulatum has laminar 
scales and the two distal transitional forms usually have minute axillary buds. 
In the Epacridaceae scales are few and there is a perfect series of forms from 
scale to leaf in the axils of any of which buds may be induced to grow by injury 
of the shoot. 


4. Intermediate buds which, when closed, resemble naked buds, have outer 
foliar organs corresponding to the transitional forms of the scaly bud. There 
may be a marked difference between the latter and the mature leaves of the 
shoot as in Petrophila pulchella, or the change may be gradual as in Persoonia 
salicina, or yet again all the transitional forms may differ only in size, being 
slightly smaller than the leaves, e.g., Rapanea variabilis. 


5. Many small-leaved types, e.g., Bawera rubioides, and a few large-leaved 
types, e.g., Angophora lanceolata, have microscopic bud structures. The growing 
apex in such cases is usually enveloped by a crown of mature leaves. 

6. A naked bud is one in which, be the bud protection what it may, all the 
foliar organs of the expanded bud show perfect and full development. Such buds 
have the young leaf rudiments protected by hairs (e.g., Lomatia, Grevillea), 
secretion (e.g., Myoporum) or stipules (e.g., Breynia), or some combination of 
these protective features. In those types in which stipules form the main protective 
feature the young leaf rudiments are not visible. 

7. Microscopic buds occur in this class just as frequently as among the inter- 
mediate buds, e.g., Darwinia fascicularis, Eucalyptus corymbosa. 

8. Great variability of bud types is instanced among the genera of families, 
such as the Proteaceae and Myrtaceae, and among species of a genus, such as 
Hakea. Variability of development of a particular bud type is shown among the 
individual plants of a species, such as Pultenaea daphnoides or Petrophila pulchella, 
and, finally, may be shown among the buds on the one plant as Banksia ericijolium. 

9. The evidence points to the fact that bud structure and development are 
influenced by the physiology of the shoot, as has already been pointed out by 
other writers. 


728 LEAF-BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


PART lie 
Brief descriptions of the buds of selected species. 

The approximate length of each bud is given in millimetres. 

Fagaceae. 

Fagus Moorei ¥.v.M.—Scaly bud. Terminal (3 mm.) and axillary (1 mm.) 
alike. Bud roughly four-sided, its leaf rudiments covered by reddish-brown 
stipular scales. Hrect glandular and a few simple hairs occur on scales, young 
stem and leaves. Stipules early deciduous. Mature stem has sparse covering of 
hairs, leaves glabrous. 

Moraceae. 

Ficus rubiginosa Desf.—Naked bud. See Part i. 

Ficus stephanocarpa Warb.—Naked bud. Terminal (3 mm.) and axillary 
(1 mm.) alike. Bud morphology similar to that of Ficus rubiginosa. Leaves and 
lower part of stipules bear simple erect hairs. Axillary buds in this species are 
found in the axils of all leaves. A leaf rudiment occurs with the second pair of 
stipules on the shoot. 

Proteaceae. 

Banksia ericifolia L—Intermediate bud. See Part i. 

Banksia integrifolia L.—Intermediate bud. Terminal often an inflorescence. 
Axillary (1 mm.) like B. serrata. Bud is rusty tomentose and on expansion about 
six transitional forms occur On the shoot. 

Banksia marginata Cav.—Intermediate bud. Terminal usually an inflorescence. 
Axillary buds (1 mm.) develop beneath the terminal. Organs of bud loosely 
compact, protected by pigmented woolly hairs. As bud expands a varying number 
of tomentose transitional forms occur which may,be rather better developed than 
in Banksia serrata. 

Banksia serrata L.—Intermediate type. See Part i. 


Banksia spinulosa Sm.—Intermediate type. Terminal usually an inflorescence. 
Axillary buds (1 mm.) like Banksia serrata. Approximately 12 transitional forms 
shown in developing shoot. Lamina quite suppressed in proximal ones, but may 
be evident in distal ones. 

Conospermum longifolium Sm.—Intermediate bud. See Part i. 


Grevillea acanthifolia Cunn.—Naked bud. Terminal an inflorescence. Axillary 
buds (1-2 mm.) partly hidden in axils of leaves, only densely hairy apex showing. 
Silvery T-shaped hairs lost as foliage matures. 


Grevillea buxifolia R.Br—Naked bud. Flowers borne terminally, so shoots 
arise in axils of leaves just beneath them. Bud (1 mm.) like Grevillea linearis, 
foliar organs having dense canopy of T-shaped hairs. Occasionally some of the 
outer leaves do not develop fully. 


Grevillea linearis R.Br.—Naked bud. See Part i. 


Grevillea mucronulata R.Br.—Naked bud. Terminal (1-2 mm.) and axillary 
(1 mm.) like Grevillea linearis. Heads of hairs elongated, arms being reflexed. 


Grevillea oleoides Sieb—Naked bud. Terminal (3 mm.) and axillary (1-2 
mm.) like Grevillea linearis. Tomentum exceptionally thick. 

Grevillea robusta Cunn.—Naked bud. Terminal (4 mm.) and axillary (2-3 
mm.) alike. Leaf rudiments densely covered with dark-brown T-shaped hairs. 
First two or three leaves on shoot usually fall away early, leaving well developed 
axillary buds. 


BY GLADYS CAREY. 729 


Grevillea spachelata R.Br.—Naked bud. Terminal (2 mm.) and axillary (0-5 
mm.) like Grevillea linearis. Sometimes a tendency towards the intermediate 
type. 

Hakea dactyloides Cavy.—Scaly bud: Flower buds also scaly. Terminal (2-3 
mm.) and axillary (2 mm.) like those found in H. pubescens, except that 
transitional forms. bear minute buds in their axils and internodal elongation is 
more pronounced. Leaves covered with T-shaped hairs which are lost as leaves 
mature. 

Hakea eriantha R.Br.—Intermediate bud. Terminal and axillary (2 mm.) 
alike. Organs of bud covered by T-shaped hairs. On expansion, 5-6 transitional 
forms occur on axillary shoot, distal ones having appearance of small leaves. 


Hakea pubescens Schrad.—Scaly bud. See Part i. 


Hakea pugioniformis Cay.—Scaly bud. Terminal (2-3 mm.) and axillary 
(2-3 mm.) like Hakea pubescens. Scales are dark reddish-brown; flower buds 
sealy also. 


Hakea saligna R.Br.—Intermediate bud. Terminal (2 mm.) and axillary 
(1 mm.) alike, covered with pigmented T-shaped hairs. Development of bud 
variable, proximal organs remain rudimentary and are followed on the shoot by 
transitional forms. Proximal organs have no axillary buds. Frequently the axis 
may elongate between them, when they may be termed transitional forms, or 
occasionally may not do so, when they may be called scales. 


Isopogon anemonifolius R.Br.—Intermediate bud. Terminal may be an 
inflorescence. Axillary (2 mm.) always a leaf-bud. Bud like Petrophila pulchella. 
Foliar organs are sparsely covered with hairs and on bud expansion a variable 
number of transitional forms are seen. 


Lambertia formosa Sm.—Intermediate bud. lLeaf-bud (2-3 mm.) or flower- 
bud terminal. Axillary buds (1 mm.) similar to the terminal leaf-buds in develop- 
ment. Outer organs of leaf-bud (6-8 in number) are rather scale-like in appearance. 
These transitional forms seem to represent leaf-bases and petioles, laminae being 
suppressed, and occur in whorls of three, as leaves do. Internodes between them 
distinct. Transition to young leaves, which are densely clothed with unicellular 
hairs, is markedly abrupt. ; 

Lomatia Fraseri R.Br.—Naked bud. Terminal (4 mm.) and axillary (2 mm.) 
like Lomatia longifolia. Buds occur in axils of all leaves. Leaf rudiments covered 
by reddish-brown hairs and may show a tendency towards intermediate type. 

Lomatia longifolia R.Br—Naked bud. See Part i. 

Lomatia silaifolia R.Br.—Naked bud. Terminal (3 mm.) and axillary (2 mm.) 
like Lomatia longifolia. Base of latter hidden by leaf-base. 

Petrophila pulchella R.Br.—Intermediate bud. See Part i. 

Petrophila sessilis Sieb—Intermediate bud. Terminal (3-4 mm.) like P. 
pulchella, except that no trace of lamina was apparent in the transitional forms 
of the specimens examined. 

Persoonia lanceolata Andr.—Intermediate bud. Terminal (2 mm.) and 
axillary (1 mm.) like Persoonia salicina. Cell cavities in hairs reduced to a 
minimum. 


Persoonia linearis Andr:—Naked bud. Terminal (3 mm.). Leaf rudiments 
overlapping, their apices sometimes twisted a little. They are densely covered 
by unicellular hairs. Axillary buds have only been observed close to the terminal 
and are just visible to the naked eye. 


730 LEAF—BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


Persoonia nutans R.Br.—Naked bud. Terminal (1 mm.) protected by the 
bases of the surrounding leaves. It is like Persoonia linearis, only smaller and 
not so densely covered by hairs. Axillary buds microscopic, each protected by a 
tuft of hairs at the base of the leaf in whose axil it lies. 


Persoonia pinifolius R.Br.—Naked bud. Terminal (2-3 mm.) like Persoonia 
linearis. Axillary buds microscopic. 


Persoonia salicina Pers.—Intermediate bud. See Part i. 


Xylomelum pyriforme Sm.—Intermediate bud. Terminal (4-5 mm.) and 
axillary minute. Former almost hidden between the bases of the uppermost pair 
of leaves. Exposed apex densely covered by unicellular rusty hairs directed 
vertically. Mature leaves glabrous. As the bud expands, from 2 to 6 transitional 
forms are revealed, in which the leaf-bases and petioles develop fully but the 
laminae (those tomentose portions of the bud) show no further growth. Vigorous 
shoots develop in the axils of all the transitional forms but the two proximal ones, 
although they may have axillary buds. 


Santalaceae. 


Exocarpus sp.—Naked bud. Growing apex protected by two overlapping 
reduced leaves. Axillary buds microscopic. Both shoot and flower bud may occur 
in one axil. There are no protective organs. 

Olacaceae. 

Olax stricta R.Br.—Intermediate bud. At apex of shoot the leaves are folded 
around one another without any protective covering. Axillary buds microscopic, 
showing initial differentiation of two leaves. When bud expands, the first two 
or three foliar organs do not attain the size of the characteristic leaves of the 
plant. 

Aizoaceae. 

Mesembrianthemum aequilaterale Haw.—Naked bud. The terminal is pro- 
tected by the uppermost pair of mature leaves. In the growth season, in each leaf 
axil two succulent glabrous leaf rudiments arise. As the bud opens, these 
elongate with their surfaces closely appressed, for a time protecting the rudiments 
of the next pair of leaves initiated inside. Many axillary shoots develop. The 
terminal bud is similar to the axillary in form and development. 

Monimiaceae. 

Doryphora sassafras Endl—Naked bud. Terminal (4 mm.) and axillary 
(2 mm.) alike. Young leaf rudiments folded inwards, their outer surfaces covered 
by short unicellular hairs. Oil is developed in the leaves. 


Hedycarya angustifolia Cunn.—Intermediate bud. Terminal (2 mm.) and 
axillary (1-5 mm.) alike. Two buds in the axil of each leaf, upper one may 
produce an inflorescence. Organs of bud are protected by unicellular silvery hairs, 
lost as the leaves mature. First two foliar organs smaller than the characteristic 
leaf as in Rapanea variabilis type. 

Lauraceae. 

Cryptocarya obovata R.Br.—Intermediate bud. Terminal (3-4 mm.) and 
axillary (2-3 mm.) alike. Leaf rudiments covered by pilose unicellular hairs. 
Developing shoot of Rapanea variabilis type. 

Cryptocarya patentinervis (?) F.v.M.—Intermediate bud. Terminal (3-4 mm.) 
and axillary (2 mm.) alike. Organs of bud covered by a tomentum of rust-coloured 
hairs. Oil present in the leaves. As the bud expands 2 or 3 of the leaves first 
formed do not fully develop, as in Rapanea varidabilis. 


BY GLADYS CAREY. (ail 


Litsea dealbata Nees.—Scaly bud. Terminal (4 mm.) and axillary (2 mm.) 
alike. Leaf rudiments are covered by scales bearing brown unicellular hairs. 
About five or six transitional forms occur, between which there are well marked 
internodes, but the first may show as little development as the last-formed and 
so there may be a very abrupt change to the normal leaf. Each transitional form 
has an axillary bud. 

Saxifragaceae. 

Bauera rubioides Andr.—Intermediate bud. See Part i. 

Pittosporaceae. 

Billardiera scandens Sm.—Scaly bud. Terminal and axillary (1 mm.) buds 
alike. Flowers may be terminal. The bud has four membranous laminar scales 
“bearing a sprinkling of hairs. Scales linked to leaves by a few transitional forms 
which, together with leaves, are covered with long silky hairs. Change from 
transitional form to leaf not abrupt. 

Bursaria spinosa Cavy.—Naked bud. Hach branch terminates in a thorn, apex 
of which is covered by two microscopic laminae. At the base of the thorn are two 
leaves with axillary buds. Minute leaves occur alternately along the thorn. 
Each covers a small swelling which later produces a young shoot of the nature 
of a thorn. At the same time the minute leaf in whose axil the thorn is developing, 
enlarges and photosynthesizes. 

Pittosporum revolutum Ait.—Scaly bud. Flower buds may develop terminally 
or in the leaf axils. Buds (3 mm.) like those of Pittosporum undulatum. Laminar 
scales densely clothed by rusty T-shaped hairs, together with a few glandular hairs. 
Transitional forms not well developed and do not photosynthesize as in P. undu- 
latum. Transition to leaves abrupt. 

Pittosporum undulatum Andr.—Scaly bud. See Part i. 

Cunoniaceae. 

Ackama Muetleri Benth.—Naked bud. Terminal (3 mm.) and axillary (1-2 
mm.) alike. Structure like that of Ceratopetalum apetalum, except that the 
secretion is absent. It is replaced by hairs occurring on the leaves and outer 
surfaces of the deciduous stipules. Also the first pair of leaves of each axillary 
shoot show full development. 

Callicoma serratifolia Andr.—Naked bud. Terminal (5 mm.) and axillary 
(2 mm.)-. See Part i. 

Ceratopetalum apetalum Don.—Naked bud. See Part i. 

Ceratopetalum gummiferum Sm.—Naked bud. Terminal (2 mm.); axillary 
(1 mm. or less). Bud structure as in C. apetalum. 

Weinmannia rubifolia Benth—Naked bud. Like Ackama Muelleri; tomentum 
dense. : 

Leguminosae. 

Acacia decurrens Willd.—Naked bud. Terminal (3-4 mm.) and axillary 
(2 mm.) alike. Arrangement of the organs in the bud as in Acacia elata (see 
Part i), except that glandular hairs are more numerous. 


Acacia decurrens var. mollis Lindl—Naked bud. ‘Terminal (2 mm.) and 
axillary (1 mm.) alike. Axillary bud protected by the base of compound leaf. 
Bud structure like Acacia decurrens, except that clothing hairs are very abundant 
and secretion seems to be absent. 

Acacia discolor Willd.—Naked bud. Terminal (3 mm.) and axillary (2 mm.) 


alike. Bud like Acacia elata and Acacia decurrens, except that glandular hairs 
are more numerous. 


732 LEAF-BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


Acacia elata Cunn.—Naked bud. See Part i. 

Acacia juniperina Willd—Naked bud. lLeaf-bud not visible in the axils of 
phyllodes even with binocular microscope. Foliar and flower rudiments may 
arise side by side in the axil of a phyllode. Phyllodes originate in rapid succes- 
sion and grow immediately to maturity. 

Acacia longifolia Willd.—Mixed bud. See Part i. Phyllodes bear clothing 
hairs and a few glandular hairs which are lost as the phyllodes mature. 

Acacia myrtifolia Willd.—Mixed bud. See Part i. 

Bossiaea heterophylla Vent.——Naked bud. The leaf rudiments at the apex 
(1 mm.) are enveloped by small brown stipules. The stipules, two of which occur 
with each leaf, are pushed apart as each leaf appears. The petiole grows obliquely 
to bring the leaf well outside the stipules. Hach leaf is covered by hairs which are 
lost as the leaf matures. The lamina of each leaf remains folded inwards for 
some time as the bud expands to give a measure of protection to the younger 
leaves. Axillary buds are microscopic. 

Bossiaea microphylla Sm.—Naked bud. Like Bossiaea heterophylla. 

Daviesia ulicina Sm.—Intermediate bud. Growth by axillary buds (0-5-1 mm.). 
Young rudiments in the bud have no protective covering. Red pigment is 
developed. On expansion 5-6 of the first initiated organs do not fully develop. 
These transitional forms vary from a scale-like organ to an attenuated form 
similar to very young leaf. A bud occurs in the axil of each. The leaf, unlike 
the transitional form, is very mucronate. Apex of the shoot is usually a spine. 

Dillwynia ericifolia Sm.—Naked bud. Flowers terminal, axillary buds micro- 
scopic. Sometimes on expansion two transitional forms occur bearing a tuft of 
hairs at the apex. 

Hovea linearis R.Br.—Naked bud. Terminal (3 mm.) and axillary (1 mm.) 
alike. The latter lies between two flower-buds which develop first. Young leaves 
enveloped by a dense tomentum of dark rust-coloured hairs and protection also 
afforded by small stipules. Arrangement of stipules and leaves as in OCxylobiuwm 
trilobatum. First one or two leaves are sometimes smailer than those formed 
later. 

Ozylobium trilobaium Benth—Naked bud. See Part i. 

Platylobium formosum Sm.—Scaly bud. See Part i. 

Phyllota phylicoides Benth.—Intermediate bud. Mature leaves protect the 
terminal growing point. Axillary buds, by which the main growth takes place, are 
microscopic. Each consists of 3 to 4 leaf-rudiments densely clothed with hairs 
and protected by the leaf-base. The number of transitional forms varies, as does 
also their degree of development. 

Mirbelia grandiflora Ait.—Naked bud. Flowers terminal and axillary. Shoot 
growth by axillary buds (2 mm.) which may arise between the flower-buds and 
the leaf-base. Leaf-rudiments protected by a dense tomentum of hairs. 


Mirbelia reticulata Sm.—Intermediate bud. Growth by axillary buds (1 mm.). 
Leaves of the bud protected by a tomentum of hairs. Varying degrees of develop- 
ment shown by the first few organs, which may be quite rudimentary or only a 
little smaller than leaves. 

Pultenaea daphnoides Wendl.—Intermediate bud. See Part i. 

Pultenaea elliptica Sm.—Intermediate bud. Growth by both terminal and 
axillary buds. Terminal growing-point enveloped by stipules which are large in 
comparison with the size of leaf and joined laterally. Stipules are fully developed 
when the leaves are only rudimentary and so effectively protect the latter. 


BY GLADYS CAREY. 733 


Axillary bud minute and completely hidden by the stipules of leaf in whose axil it 
lies. Developing shoot of Banksia ericifolia type. 

Pultenaea retusa Sm.—tIntermediate bud. Terminal an inflorescence. Micro- 
scopic axillary buds just beneath terminal develop. Expansion as in Pultenaea 
daphnoides. 

Pultenaea stipularis Sm.—Naked bud. Terminal an inflorescence, though 
leaves may grow out after development of fruits. Each axillary bud microscopic 
and hidden by a pair of large stipules, joined laterally. Outer one or two leaves 
sometimes not quite as large as those formed later. 


Pultenaea villosa Willd.—Naked bud. Terminal (1-2 mm.) and axillary 
microscopic. In structure like Pultenaea elliptica. Stipules membranous and 
leaves villous. 

Rutaceae. 

Boronia pinnata Sm.—Naked bud. Terminal lies hidden between the bases 
of the uppermost pair of leaves of the previous growth period. Axillary micro- 
scopic and concealed by the subtending leaf-base. Leaf rudiments develop without 
any protective covering. Oil glands in leaves. 


Boronia microphylla Sieb.—Naked bud as Boronia pinnata. 


Correa alba Andr.—Naked bud. Terminal (3-4 mm.) and axillary (1-2 mm.) 
‘alike. Each leaf folded inward along the midrib, so protecting the younger 
leaves inside. Dense tomentum of stellate hairs on leaves. Sometimes a tendency 
towards the intermediate type. 


Correa speciosa Andr.—Naked bud. Terminal (2 mm.) and axillary (1 mm.) 
like C. alba. The first two leaves of the bud are much further developed than the 
next two and they overlap one another. 


Eriostemon crowei F.v.M.—Naked bud. Terminal (2 mm.) and axillary (0:5 
mm.) alike, covered by a tomentum of sessile stellate hairs. Leaves of the bud 
loosely overlap one another. Sometimes a tendency towards intermediate type. 


Zieria Smithii Andr.—Naked bud. Terminal (2 mm.). In the axil of each 
leaf are two buds; both may be flower-buds or one may later form an axillary 
shoot. The rudimentary leaves of the bud bear a few sessile stellate hairs and 
a thin coating of a secretion formed by multicellular glandular hairs which are 
few in number. 

Tremandraceae. 


Tetratheca ericifolia Sm.—Intermediate bud. Terminal (1 mm.) protected by 
the surrounding leaves. Axillary microscopic. On expansion the first two leaves 
do not develop fully as in Rapanea variabilis type. Flower and leaf bud may arise 
side by side. 

EHuphorbiaceae. 

Breynia oblongifolia Muell.—Naked bud. See Part i. 


Glochidion Ferdinandi Muell.—Naked bud. Terminal bud (2 mm.). The 
axillary bud (0-5 mm.) is completely hidden by the stipules of the leaf in whose 
axil it lies. Bud similar to that of Breynia oblongifolia; the stipules, however, 
overlap behind each leaf. There is a tendency for the elongation of the cells 
lining the inner surfaces of the stipules, although no secretion has been detected. 
Sometimes the first few leaves of the shoot are smaller as in the intermediate 
type. 

Ricinocarpus pinifolius Desf.—Mixed bud. See Part i. 


734 LEAF—-BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


Meliaceae. 

Synoum glandulosum Juss.—Naked bud. Terminal (3 mm.) and axillary 
(2 mm.) alike. Young leaf rudiments protected by a tomentum of unicellular 
hairs. 

Celastraceae. 


Elaeodendron australe Vent.—Naked bud. Terminal (3 mm.) and axillary 
(1 mm.) alike. The latter are partly protected by the persistent stipules of leaves 
in whose axils they lie. Bud compact, each leaf having a pair of small stipules 
lined by epithelia. The secretion thus formed protects the glabrous leaf rudiments. 

Sapindaceae. 

Dodonaea triquetra Wendl.—Naked bud. See Part i. 

Rhamnaceae. 

Pomaderris elliptica Labill—tIntermediate type. Flowers terminal. Axillary 
bud (2 mm.). Each leaf in the bud has a pair of stipules which overlap one 
another. The leaves and stipules bear long unicellular hairs and a few shortly 
stalked stellate hairs. As the shoot develops the proximal leaves remain slightly 
smaller than those formed later. 


Pomaderris lanigera Sims.—Intermediate type. Axillary bud (2 mm.). The 
leaves of the bud are covered on their lower surfaces by a very dense tomentum 
of rust-coloured hairs. Each leaf has two thin membranous slightly hairy stipules 
which overlap one another on the inner side of the leaf and are very deciduous. 
Each pair is pushed off by the growth of the leaf inside it in the bud. Mature leaf 
slightly pubescent above, rusty tomentose below. The first two leaves are smaller 
than those formed later. 


Pomaderris phillyraeoides Sieb.—Naked bud. Flowers terminal. Axillary bud 
(1 mm.) like Pomaderris lanigera, only smaller. Stipules not so deciduous and 
often, but not in every case, all leaves develop fully. 

Vitaceae. 

Vitis Baudiniana F.v.M.—Naked bud. See Part i. 

Vitis hypoglauca F.v.M.—Naked bud. Terminal (5 mm.) and axillary (3 mm.) 
similar in structure. Like Vitis Bawdiniana except that the edges of stipules 
overlap, completely enclosing the leaves in the bud. The first leaf of axillary bud 
does not develop. 

Elaeocarpaceae. 

Flaeocarpus reticulatus Sm.—Naked bud. See Part i. 

Elaeocarpus holopetalus F.v.M.—Naked bud. Terminal (2 mm.) and axillary 
(1 mm.) like FH. reticulatus, except that the unicellular hairy covering of the 
leaves is denser. 

Sterculiaceae. 


Lasiopetalum ferrugineum Sm.—Naked bud. See Part i. Terminal (3 mm.), 
axillary (1-2 mm.). 


Lasiopetalum rufum R.Br.—Naked bud. Terminal (2 mm.), axillary (1 mm.) ; 
like Lasiopetalum ferrugineum. 

Brachychiton populneus R.Br.—Intermediate bud. Terminal (1 mm.) and 
axillary (0-5 mm.) alike. Each leaf rudiment is protected by a pair of stipules, 
both stipules and leaves bearing stellate and glandular hairs. As the shoot 
develops the first two or three foliar organs, transitional forms, drop off and their 
axillary buds give rise to vigorous shoots. The stipules are very deciduous and 
the hairs are lost as the leaves mature. 


BY GLADYS CAREY. 735 


Myrtaceae. 

Angophora cordifolia Cav.—Intermediate bud. As in A. lanceolata, buds are 
represented by swellings which in the growing season produce bud structures in 
which the leaves, loosely folded, are held together by the interlocking of the 
shaggy hairs and emergences which occur on their surfaces. The first six may 
be transitional forms, the proximal one being quite rudimentary. 

Angophora lanceolata Cav.—Intermediate bud. See Part i. 

Backhousia myrtifolia Hook. and Hary.—Intermediate bud. Terminal (2 mm.) 
and axillary (1-2 mm.) alike. The leaf rudiments overlap one another and are 
covered by silvery unicellular hairs. Fewer hairs occur on the proximal 2 or 3 
pairs which are transitional forms. The proximal pair usually remains quite 
rudimentary. 

Baeckea brevifolia DC.—Naked bud. Terminal growing-point protected by 
mature leaves, axillary buds microscopic and completely hidden in the leaf axils. 


Baeckea linifolia Rudg—Naked bud. Terminal growing-point protected 
between the leaf-bases of the two uppermost leaves. Axillary buds microscopic 
and hidden in the leaf-axils. The first-formed leaves of the axillary shoots are 
occasionally smaller than those formed later. 


Callistemon lanceolatus DC.—Scaly bud. Terminal (4 mm.) and axillary 
(2 mm.) alike. Former roughly hemispherical and may be a flower-bud. The 
formation of a spike of flowers does not terminate the growth, which is continued 
by a long shoot. The axillary buds are usually pure leaf-buds. Reddish-brown 
laminar scales are numerous (12-18) and are followed by transitional forms 
(16-12) which gradually become longer and narrower (as in Hakea pubescens), 
more closely approximating to the leaf. The young leaves bear a dense tomentum 
of silky hairs. 

Darwinia fascicularis Rudge.—Naked bud. See Part i. 

Hucalyptus corymbosa Sm.—Naked bud. See Part i. 

Eucalyptus paniculata Sm.—Naked bud. Like H. corymbosa. 

Kunzea corifolia Reichb.—Scaly bud. Terminal (1 mm.) like Leptospermum 
flavescens, only the scales are fewer in number and minute. The laminar scales 
soon fall and are followed on the shoot by a few transitional forms. Scars left by 
scales are indistinct, or even obliterated. Axillary bud, when it occurs, is minute. 

Leptospermum attenuatum Sm.—Secaly bud. Terminal (2 mm.) and axillary 
(1 mm.) covered by laminar scales which, by a series of forms, grade into the 
leaves. Scales are brown and membranous. The internodes between the 
transitional forms are almost negligible, as in Hakea pubescens. 

Leptospermum flavescens Sm.—Scaly bud. Terminal (2 mm.) and axillary 
(2 mm.) alike. From 8 to 14 foliar organs before the leaves, like Leptospermum 
attenuatum. Leaves covered by silky hairs. 

Leptospermum lanigerum Sm.—Scaly bud. Terminal (8 mm.) and axillary 
(3 mm.) alike. From 14 to 18 laminar protective organs (scales and transitional 
forms) which are covered on their outer surfaces by woolly hairs. Axis also 
hairy, so when scales and transitional forms drop off scars are hidden. Sequence 
as in Leptospermum flavescens. 

Leptospermum parvifolium Sm.—Scaly bud. Terminal (1 mm.) and axillary 
(1 mm.) with morphology like that of Leptospermum attenuatum. 

Leptospermum stellatum Cay.—Scaly bud. Terminal (2 mm.) and axillary 
alike. Laminar scales brown, membranous and slightly hairy. About 8 foliar 
organs (scales and transitional forms) developed between the silvery tomentose 
leaves and the base of the shoot. Like Leptospermuwin attenuaium. 


736 LEAF-BUDS OF WOODY PERENNIALS IN NEW SOUTH WALES FLORA, 


Melaleuca ericifolia Sm.—Scaly bud. Flowers are terminal. After flowering, 
one or two shoots may continue the terminal growth. Axillary bud (1 mm.) has 
from 6 to § laminar scales and from 6 to 10 transitional forms. 


Melaleuca nodosa Sm.—Scaly bud. Flowers are terminal. After fiowering, two 
shoots may continue terminal growth. Axillary buds (1 mm.) protected by the 
leaf-bases. Scales and transitional forms fewer than in Melaleuca ericifolia. 
Young leaves sparsely covered with long white hairs. 

Melaleuca thymifolia Sm.—Scaly bud. Terminal sometimes a leaf-bud, but 
more often a flower-bud. After flowering, a shoot may continue the terminal 
growth. Axillary buds (1 mm.). Two or four laminar scales followed by two 
transitional forms which often closely approximate to leaves and bear buds in 
their axils. 

Rhodamnia trinervia Blume. Intermediate bud. Terminal (2-3 mm.) and 
axillary (2 mm.). Organs of bud bear dense tomentum of brown hairs and on 
expansion first four do not fully develop. The first pair is rudimentary, but each 
transitional form has an axillary bud, second pair is only little smaller than the 
normal leaves. Many axillary shoots develop. 

Syncarpia laurifolia Ten.—Scaly bud. See Part i. 

Tristania laurina R.Br.—Intermediate bud. See Part i. 

Hricaceae. : 

Gaultheria hispida R.Br.—Scaly bud. The terminal and upper axillary buds 
are flower-buds. Shoot growth is continued by the lower axillary buds (2 mm.). 
The laminar scales, 4-6 in number, are brown and membranous. They grade into 
transitional forms, of which there are 8-10. Inner ones are like small leaves and 
bear buds in their axils. 

Epacridaceae. 

Acrotriche aggregata R.Br.—Scaly bud. Buds (1-2 mm.) typical of 
Epacridaceae. Many axillary shoots develop. 

Hpacris microphylla R.Br.—Scaly bud. Typical bud of the Epacridaceae (as 
described in Part i), only minute. 

Hpacris pulchella Cav.—Scaly bud. Axillary buds barely visible to the naked 
eye and of type found in Sityphelia triflora, only the number of transitional forms 
is far fewer. 

Styphelia humifusa Pers.—Scaly bud. Terminal (1 mm.) surrounded by 
mature leaves. Axillary buds are developed in the axils of the upper leaves only. 
Bud a typical one of the Epacridaceae. The organs of the bud are mucronate. 
The transitional forms develop a tendency towards serration which is charac- 
teristic of the normal leaf. 

Styphelia lanceolata Sm.—Scaly bud. Bud of Epacridaceous type. Axillary 
(1 mm.) almost hidden by the hairs of the stem and protected by the subtending 
leaf-base. Transitional forms few in number. They develop the ciliate hairs 
characteristic of the leaves. 

Styphelia richei Labill—Scaly bud. Bud is very small; the transition from 
scale to leaf is not as perfect as it is in many members of the Epacridaceae. There 
are fewer forms, so the change is more abrupt. 

Styphelia triflora Andr.—Scaly bud. See Part i. 

Styphelia tubiflora Sm.—Scaly bud. Small buds with a morphology like that 
of Styphelia triflora. 

Styphelia viridis Andr.—Scaly bud. Bud like Styphetlia triflora, except that 
fewer forms are developed before the normal leaves. 


BY GLADYS CAREY. 737 


Trochocarpa laurina R.Br.—Scaly bud. Terminal (2 mm.) and axillary 
(1-2 mm.) alike. Typical bud of Epacridaceae. 

Woollsia pungens F.v.M.—Scaly bud. Typical bud of family, but very small 
and only a few transitional forms between scales and leaves. 

Myrsinaceae. 

Rapanea variabilis Mez.—Intermediate bud. See Part i. Terminal (3 mm.), 
axillary (2 mm.). 

Oleaceae. 

Notelaea longifolia Vent—Scaly bud. Terminal (3 mm.) and axillary (1-2 
mm.). Two buds in the axil of each leaf. Both may be flower-buds or one a leaf- 
bud. Hach bud has two brown scales covered with pilose hairs. There are two 
transitional forms slightly smaller than leaves. Leaf rudiments also hairy. 

- Verbenaceae. 

Avicennia officinalis L.—Naked bud. ~See Part i. 

Clerodendron tomentosum R.Br.—Naked bud. Terminal (2-3 mm.) and axillary 
(1-2 mm.) alike. Leaf-rudiments clothed by multicellular uniseriate hairs. 

Labiatae. 

Prostanthera marifolia R.Br.—Naked bud. Apical growing-point protected 
by surrounding leaves. At the base of each leaf is a tiny papilla of tissue protected 
by long 2-celled hairs. 

Westringia rosmariniformis Sm.—Naked bud. See Part i. 

Solanaceae. 

Solanum sodomaeum L.—Naked bud. Terminal (2 mm.) and axillary (1 mm.); 
.young leaves covered by stellate and glandular hairs. Prickles develop !ater. 

Solanum xanthocarpum Schrad.—Naked bud. Like Solanum sodomaeum. 


Myoporaceae. 

Myoporum tenuifolium Forst.—Naked bud. See Part i. 

Compositae. : 

Helichrysum diosmifoliun. Don.—Intermediate bud. Flowers terminal. 


Growing-point enveloped by leaves. Axillary buds microscopic and, on expansion, 
the first two leaves are smaller than those formed later. 


Literature Cited. 

CoLuLIns, MARJORIE I., 1920.—The structure of resin-secreting glands in some Australian 
plants. Proc. Linn. Soc. (N-SiW., xlv,-1920, 329-336. 

Foster, A., 1928.—Precociously expandivi¢ buds and their relation to the problem of bud 
scale morphology. Naturalist, March, 1928. 

, 1929.—Investigations on the morphology and comparative history of the develop- 
ment of foliar organs. The foliage leaves and cataphyllary structures in the 
Horsechestnut (Aesculus Hippocastanum). Parts I and II. Amer. Journ. Bot., xvi, 
1929, 466-474 and 489-492. 

Groom, P., 1907.—Trees and their life history. London. 

MAIDEN, J. H., and BercHs, E., 1916.—Census of N.S.W. plants. Sydney, 1916. 

SoLEREDER, H., 1908.—Systematic Anatomy of the Dicotyledons. Trans. (Boodle and 
Fritsch), Oxford, 1908. 

Warp, H. M., 1904.—Trees. Vol. i. Buds. Cambridge, 1904. 

WetcH, M. B., 1923.—Secretory epidermal cells of certain Eucalypts and Angophoras. 
Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., lvii, 1923, 218-226. 


FLETCHER MEMORIAL LECTURE, 1930. 
JOSEPH JAMES FLETCHER, AN IDEALIST SECRETARY. 
By A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sc. 

[Delivered 15th September, 1930.] 


In July, 1926, the Council of the Linnean Society of New South Wales decided 
as the best means of perpetuating the memory of its late Secretary and President, 
Mr. J. J. Fletcher, to establish an Annual Fletcher Memorial Lecture, to be 
delivered in Sydney upon some branch of Natural History. This resolution was 
arrived at four years ago, and Sir Baldwin Spencer, F.R.S., was invited to be 
the first lecturer. It was hoped that the lecture would be delivered in 1927, but 
the long postponement has been caused first by Sir Baldwin’s prolonged absence 
from Australia, and then by his lamented death in Patagonia. Thus deprived by 
Fate of the distinguished services of that eminent and brilliant investigator, the 
Council has invited me, as for long a close friend of Mr. Fletcher, to give the 
first lecture. Naturally I do so with fear and trembling. 


Sir Baldwin was also a close friend of mine from the time he arrived in 
Australia to occupy the Chair of Biology in the Melbourne University. I was 
intimately associated with him both at the University and in the Royal Society 
of Victoria, and I may say that it was entirely owing to his urge that I wrote 
books on Botany and Zoology. Though diffident enough of my own powers, I 
cannot but feel that it is in some degree appropriate that one who was intimate 
with both Mr. Fletcher and. Professor Spencer should endeavour to set forth the 
life and work of the one in the spirit of the other. For it seems right that the 
First Fletcher Memorial Lecture should have as its subject the Life and Work of 
J. J. Fletcher. 

Joseph James Fletcher was born in Auckland, New Zealand, in 1850. He was 
a son of the manse, for his father was the Rev. Joseph Horner Fletcher, a Methodist 
clergyman, at that time Headmaster of .the Auckland College. In March last, 
under the title “A Man of Ideals,’ the Sydney Morning Herald published a full 
and appreciative account of his life and work, forty years after his death. He was 
a man of culture and was for twenty-two years President of Newington College. 
He was prominent in his Church, having charge of the Theological Institute, and 
being elected President of the General Methodist Conference of Australia. To 
him, doubtless, his son owed much of his serious outlook on life and duty, his 
terse language, and perhaps some of his whimsical humour. 


His school days were spent first at the Ipswich Grammar School and then at 
Old Newington on the Parramatta River, where his father was the President. 
The school building ‘was the old homestead of the Blaxland family, a large two- 
storied house facing the river. The playground was the fine estate of the 
Blaxlands, comprising acres of gigantic trees, acres of scrub and acres of marshes. 
There was no science taught in schools in those days, but Old Newington taught 


BY A. H. S. LUCAS. 739 


its own science. Wild birds were in abundance, wild duck frequented the marshes 
and wild life in general was in profusion. There was variety in plant life, too. 
The boys amused themselves with bird-nesting, catching opossums, rambling 
around and bathing in the creek. It was a happy, healthy life, and we may think 
of him, as of Agassiz— 


And he wandered away and away 
With Nature the dear old Nurse, 

Who sang to him night and day 
The rhymes of the universe. 


He passed from Newington College to the Sydney University where he read 
for the Arts course, taking his B.A. in 1870. Under the tuition of the famous 
Dr. Badham, he gained a well-grounded knowledge of Latin and Greek. Dr. 
Badham must have been considerably impressed by his aptitude for the tongues 
for, when, on the occasion of the visit to Sydney of H.R.H. the Duke of Edinburgh, 
the University decided to give a representation of the Phormio of Terence in the 
Latin, he selected Fletcher to play the important part of Nausistrata: 

The Sydney Morning Herald says of him: “This gentleman’s impersonation 
of the angry and jealous wife excited much merriment.’ Dr. Badham, too, 
complimented him on his rendering and elocution. His compeers on the stage 
became afterwards famous, Sir Pope Cooper as Chief Justice of Queensland and 
Sir Edmund Barton as the first Prime Minister of Australia. But it was not as 
an actor or as a lawyer, still less as a politician, that Fletcher was to win his 
bays. 

After taking his degree, he decided to devote himself to teaching, and for 
several years, first at Wesley College, Melbourne, and, with a break, later on at 
his old school, Newington College, he was a practical schoolmaster in full work. 
At Wesley he had for his chief Martin Howy Irving, the son of Carlyle’s great 
friend, Edward Irving. The son had resigned his position as Professor of Classics 
in the Melbourne University to take the head-mastership of Wesley. I have often 
heard Fletcher speak of his firm discipline and stimulating teaching. He gave 
wise counsels to the young master. Some of his fellow masters survived to my 
time at Wesley and they spoke of Fletcher as a good and kindly, if somewhat 
eccentric, colleague, who had ways of his own in the classroom. While at Wesley 
he read for his M.A. degree; which be obtained in 1876. The teaching of elementary 
chemistry was in those days an extra, like drawing and music, and Irving 
entrusted it to Fletcher. Whether from this accident or not, he was now strongly 
attracted to natural science so that, after taking his higher degree, he resigned 
his post at Wesley and betook him to London to enter on a science course. 

He had chosen just the right time. The School of Cuvier and Owen had 
done its work and passed. Biology was being studied and taught by new methods. 
At Oxford Rolleston had introduced into his laboratory the dissection of a 
graduated series of animal types, from the lower to the highest, and Huxley at 
South Kensington adopted and improved on his methods. Work with the micro- 
scope had become prominent in the laboratories, where the introduction of 
microtomes and of a whole battery of differentiating reagents extended the scope 
of biological research. The views of evolution of Darwin and Wallace, whole- 
heartedly adopted by Huxley and Joseph Hooker, had won a general acceptance 
in the scientific world and provided fresh avenues of research. The deep-sea 
investigations of Wyville Thomson and the “Challenger” had made known the 
existence of a world of new and strange forms of life. The importance of the 


Ss 


740 FLETCHER MEMORIAL LECTURE, 1930. 


study of the development of living animals as bearing on the theory of evolution 
became evident, and at Cambridge, Francis Maitland Balfour, brother of Earl 
Balfour, devoted himself and attracted his students to work out the details of 
embryology in the different groups. The whole biological world was fermenting 
in an unprecedented spirit of enthusiasm. 


Fletcher joined Huxley’s classes at South Kensington, where, as Spencer says 
in his memoir, “it was possible for a student to listen to the leading exponent 
and protagonist of the evolution theory, and at the same time gain by practical 
experience a first hand knowledge of plant and animal morphology”. He also 
in London had the good fortune to meet Professor Balfour, who was so struck 
by Fletcher’s keenness and capacity that he invited him to visit Cambridge as 
his own guest, and Fletcher spent three months in the University. In both 
London and Cambridge he worked with many who afterwards occupied Chairs of 
Zoology or Biology in British universities at home and in the Dominions—his 
great friend G. B. Howes, Jeffrey Parker, Milnes Marshall, Haddon, S. F. Harmer, 
J. J. Lister, Adam Sedgwick and others, all well-known names in biological 
science. It seems as if he, too, might have looked forward to the congenial life 
of a Professor of Biology in some British university. But it was not to be, and 
the Linnean Society was to be the richer. He remained in England for five years, 
working hard all the time and obtaining the degree of B.Sc. in the London 
University. 

Before leaving England he published his first paper in conjunction with 
J. J. Lister, who was then a demonstrator in the Cambridge Laboratory. It 
appeared in the Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, and dealt with 
some features of the genital organs of the macropodidae. He had felt that the 
first duty of an Australian biologist was to attempt to solve some of the problems 
presented by the Australian fauna and flora. He would gladly have given his 
life to the study of these problems, but unfortunately no opening offered for a 
life exclusively devoted to research. It was not till later that chairs of biology 
were founded in the universities of Australia and New Zealand and there were 
no research fellowships available. Accordingly, when he returned to Australia in 
1881, he had again to betake him to teaching. 

He joined the staff at Newington College, of which his father was President. 
We know more of his Newington than of his Wesley career. Though his scientific 
aspirations were unsatisfied, he faced his work with determination and energy. At 
first as Acting Headmaster and then as one of the senior men he earned a 
reputation for thoroughness. “It’s dogged as does it’, had said Darwin, and 
Fletcher accepted the motto and lived up to it. One old pupil, a professor of 
philosophy, speaks of “the well-known austerity of his rule’. Another says, “He 
made his class work hard but he worked hard himself’, and again, “Chronic 
shirkers had a,pretty rough time with him. He told them in so many words, 
and not once only, that they were robbers; if they didn’t work, they were robbing 
their parents’. Hence his class, a large one, became known in the school as “The 
Forty Thieves’, a title in which they rather gloried as boys, and over which they 
often chuckled when they were men. He would open proceedings by some such 
address as “This is the time for work, so put away all story books, playthings, 
kickshaws, gewgaws, jimjams, sampans, catamarans, anything else irrelevant .. .” 
(He had a quaint vocabulary but one can imagine that the boys were listening.) 
He made it his rule never to tell his pupils anything which they could find out 
for themselves. He believed in starting research early. But in the case of triers 


BY A. H. 8. LUCAS. 741 


his help and advice were always available. His discipline was inflexible, and 
occasionally in grim humour he “made the punishment fit the crime’. Naturally 
he was not popular at the time, but when he left Newington the Sixth and Fifth 
Forms made him a spontaneous presentation and expressed to him their sincere 
gratitude and affectionate esteem, and in later years when his old pupils still 
more realized all that he had done for them, they spoke of him in terms of 
respect and affection. 

He was not forgetful of the claims of biology and introduced into his class- 
work an elementary course of anatomy and physiology. Later on, after his happy 
marriage, he would invite older boys to tea, and after tea would show them some 
of the wonders and uses of the microscope. A large number of these—seven of 
the very “Forty Thieves’—became doctors, some of them foremost in their 
profession. Thus Sir Herbert Maitland told Mr. Horner Fletcher, J. J.’s elder 
brother, that he put down his effective career to the inspiring influence—and the 
hard discipline—of his old master. Not all of the seed sown in this way by 
Fletcher fructified, for some fell on stony ground, to wit, of boys destined to be 
lawyers. Still one even of these is well known as a lover of our native birds and 
is an authority on their habits. 

As a schoolmaster Fletcher might have gone far, but presently an opportunity 
offered for returning to his true love. He was at Newington from 1881 to 1885. 
While there he joined the Linnean Society, then in its early days, and Sir William 
Macleay soon recognized his quality and accordingly offered him the position of 
Director and Librarian of the Society. So Fletcher took leave of Newington and 
schoolmastering, and entered on his duties under Sir William on 1st January, 1886. 
He had found his métier. He felt that the Society could carry out Macleay’s aims, 
and they coincided with his own, for active research on the Australian fauna and 
flora, much more effectively and on a much larger scale than any single-handed 
investigator could hope to do. Sir William all his life gave him his confidence and 
his friendship. And never was a man more loyal to his work and to his friends 
than was Fletcher. As Spencer writes, ‘““No task, however great or however small, 
that he thought touched on the honour of the Macleays or the welfare of the 
Society was left undone, no matter what it cost him in time and thought.’ He 
served the Linnean for 33 years, for seven as Director and Librarian and for 26 
as Secretary, but whatever was the designation of his office he was always the 
hub of the Society. 

As Secretary he carried on the business of the Society with minute care. 
There were intricate legal negotiations in connection with the inauguration of the 
Macleay Bacteriologist and the establishment of the Macleay Research Fellowships, 
and he ever kept a jealous eye on the exact execution of the terms of Sir William’s 
bequests. All meetings, council, ordinary, annual, committee, came on as by 
clockwork. I cannot recall a single occasion on which his minutes were challenged. 


As Librarian he watched lovingly over the rare and valuable books presented 
by Macleay and kept the many and ever accumulating periodical journals all in 
order and place so that members could readily consult them. And he noted their 
contents and kept them in mind for use by himself and others. In 1884 he had 
published a catalogue of papers and works relating to the mammalian orders 
Marsupialia and Monotremata. But his bibliographical work was on a much wider 
scale. In a huge folio office-book he kept account of books and articles on all 
natural history topics which might be of interest to Australian workers, and thus 
it happened that, whatever branch a man was studying, an appeal to Fletcher 


Ty 


742 FLETCHER MEMORIAL LECTURE, 1930, 


seldom failed to bring out something of value, which had escaped the investigator. 
He was often appealed to by workers in other States. 

As Editor of the PROCEEDINGS he did an immense amount of work, correcting 
with particularity the MSS. submitted, verifying references, and making it clear 
to authors that nothing doubtful or slipshod would be admitted. (Perhaps there 
was just a touch of the schoolmaster here.) Dr. W. G. Woolnough, in his 
Presidential Address to the Royal Society of New South Wales, said of him, “Many 
of us gained our first experience in publishing the results of scientific investiga- 
tions under his guidance and if we sometimes resented his insistence upon what 
at the time appeared to us to be trivial details, we have lived to be thankful for 
the lessons so given us.” J. H. Maiden once said laughingly to me, “He rules us 
with a rod of iron”. But he could surprise an author in quite another way. When 
he sent me the proofs of my list of Australian marine algae, I found that he had 
compiled a complete index of the genera, and added it to the paper. How many 
editors would have taken the trouble? 

He protected the finances of the Society with a meticulous, even Aberdonian 
carefulness. He would make out his indexes on any old scrap of paper. He 
again and again declined the well-meant offers of the Council to provide him with 
effective assistance in the office. He would only accept the services of a succes- 
sion of boys, whom he painfully trained in the art of addressing envelopes 
decently and whom he saw depart almost as soon as they had been licked into 
shape and become really useful. More than once the Council pressed upon him 
an increase of salary but he refused it point blank, and there was no turning 
him. Surely a most unusual and most disinterested officer. 


While still at Newington he had published three more papers on the urogenital 
organs of certain species of kangaroos. He obtained most of his material in the 
neighbourhood of Bathurst, assisted by his sporting friends, Capt. F. Morley and 
the Webbs. But to continue this work satisfactorily he had need of the use of a 
laboratory with its appliances, and this was not available. He therefore turned 
his attention to research among the more accessible land forms which he saw 
were being continually ousted by the opening up of the country and the incoming 
of exotic forms. He used to say “Marine things will be little disturbed and can 
wait’. He began with the earthworms. Spencer, who also worked on the earth- 
worms, says: “From 1886-1894 he published six papers in which he showed the 
unexpected richness of Australia in this group. He described some seventy new 
species, belonging to nine genera, five of which, as determined by him, were new 
and confined to Australia. His work was not simply systematic, but included 
careful field observations in regard to habits and distribution, and the results of 
anatomical investigation.’”’ His note-books still survive and we can see how he had 
collected far and wide, and had found helpers and correspondents—A. G. Hamilton, 
T. G. Sloane, Professors Tate and Stirling—who supplied material from distant 
localities; how closely he observed, comparing many specimens of the same kind, 
measuring, counting setae, dissecting hundreds of individuals; and how he Kept 
himself acquainted with the world’s literature of the subject. 

Those earlier years at the Linnean comprised the period of his most active 
research work. In 1887, beside two papers on the earthworms, he published two 
on planarians. Darwin and Moseley had aroused his interest in this group. 
Fletcher came across an exotic species, Bipalium kewense, which had been intro- 
duced into Sydney gardens, and his first paper was on this species. But presently 
it became evident that these handsome worms, often brilliantly coloured, blue, 


BY A. H. S. LUCAS. 743 
/ 

yellow, olive-green or rubicund, with prominent longitudinal stripes of deeper 
tints, existed in Australia in great plenty, both of individuals and species. They 
occur on damp ground, as under logs and stones in shaded gullies, and form 
conspicuous members of what Dendy termed the Cryptozoic Fauna. His second 
paper was written in conjunction with A. G. Hamilton, and in it were described 
eight new species of Geoplana and six of Rhynchodemus, a genus not before known 
in Australia. 

Let us glance into his notebook of the time. 

Jan. 5, 1888.—‘‘In the paddock at Burrawong under a log I found what looked like a 
Planarian cocoon and I took it as such. This afternoon it hatched out and turns out 
to be G. rubicunda. The cocoon is about 6 x 4 mm., and is certainly a large one. Six 
young ones are visible; about 8 x 1 mm. contracted, 10 to 14 mm. long when crawling. 
They lie coiled in a circle with the head resting on and above the tail. . . I looked 
at this one in glycerine to see the eyes. Four may be said to be on the anterior 
extremity and a little further apart than those succeeding them. I can count over 80 


on one side only. In order to see the eyes in this specimen it has to be looked at from 
below.” 


Feb. 2, 1888.—“<G. caerulea. The blue colour of the under surface is not somewhat— 
as Moseley says—but decidedly lighter in colour. The blue of the dorsal surface is so 
dark as frequently to look almost black. [Indigo above and Prussian below would be - 
more like it.] 


“G. coxii. Brought home one of many specimens seen, but it escaped yesterday.”’ 


And the saddest entry of all— 


Nov. 138, 1888.—‘‘Planarians are cannibals. A G. purpwrascens has just done for a 
G. variegata (from Field of Mars put in for comparison) and swallowed more than 
half of him. The latter was a vigorous specimen, and was crawling about until I 
noticed the G.p. enwrapping him, and, on stirring up, he crawled off; but the G.v. was 
disintegrated and the greater part of him wanting. When the G.p. crawled away it 
took with him a piece of the G.v. in its concave under surface and I saw this piece 
actually being sucked into the pharynx and swallowed. The difference in the G.p. is 
noticeable externally.’’ 


Peripatus was another Cryptozoan very popular at the time. Adam Sedgwick, 
one of Fletcher’s fellow students under Balfour, had published a beautifully illus- 
trated monograph in the Quarterly Journal of the Microscopical Society, and 
Moseley had also written on it. Fletcher obtained and wrote on a species from 
New South Wales and Dendy recorded observations on a species from Victoria. 
Both assumed that the species was P. leuckartit Sanger. But their observations 
on the method of reproduction were contradictory. Fletcher saw young larvae 
in company with their parent and no eggs, and concluded that P. leuckartii was 
viviparous; Dendy found eggs in the oviducts, and free eggs apart from the 
parent, which eggs developed later into undoubted Peripatus larvae, and concluded 
that P. leuckartii was oviparous. It was clearly unlikely that the same animal 
should be both viviparous and oviparous. A rather unfortunate controversy 
followed in which Fletcher showed some heat. At length, however, Fletcher and 
Dendy met, and talked the matter over, and in 1895 they published a combined 
paper in which Fletcher described three forms of P. lewckartii and proved that it 
was viviparous, as were all the other species whose reproduction was known; and 
Dendy described the eggs and development of his species, which both agreed must 
be new and distinct, and he called it P. oviparus, remarking that the sculpture of 
the egg shell showed an important affinity to the Insecta. Thus all ended in a 
graceful agreement. 

Fletcher’s studies on the frogs probably show him at his best in zoologic 
work. After his death Nature said of him, “His knowledge of the Australian 
Amphibia was unsurpassed.’”’ He published his first paper “On the Oviposition and 


744 FLETCHER MEMORIAL LECTURE, 1980, 


Habits of Certain Australian Batrachia’’. Later he wrote three papers describing 
new species, and five others on the geographical distribution. I happened to be 
working up the Victorian frogs and toads dbout the same time as his first paper 
appeared, and I can remember how charmed I was with it and how I marvelled 
at the wealth of observations. It was, as Spencer suggests, like reading extracts 
from an Australian Gilbert White. 

In England there is but one indigenous frog and there are only two kinds of 
toad. In Australia 50 species of Batrachians had been recognized before Fletcher 
began to study the group. So that a wide field lay before him. The species 
already known had been described from spirit material sent home, and ludicrous 
mistakes were made by the museum naturalists. Thus our common large green 
Hyla, as green as young grass or “the green mantle of the standing pool’, was 
christened H. caerulea, for the green had turned blue in the spirit. Fletcher him- 
self described three new species, and G. A. Boulenger, of the British Museum, 
described two others forwarded to him by Fletcher. One of these he named 
Phanerotis fletcheri, making a new genus for the purpose. 

Fletcher by no means confined himself to the morphology and taxonomy of 
the species and genera, but closely studied the habits and the voices, hibernation 
and aestivation, the latter much more marked in our climate, the phenomena of 
spawning and development, the burrowing habits of Chiroleptes, the water-holding 
frog, and Heleioporus, and the acrid excretions and warning colours of Notaden, 
the Catholic Toad, as well as the distribution of the Amphibia all over Australia. 
Nearly all his observations were new. 

What had been written before was often very wide of the mark. Thus a 
highly distinguished professor of natural history had said: “With the exception 
of the common green frog (Ranhyla aurea) they are rarely seen or heard—the 
true tree-frogs (Hyla) inhabiting the lofty gum-trees and the Limnodynastes 
tasmaniensis, L. dorsalis and L. affinis burrowing in the sand during the day.” 
Fletcher falls upon him. The Hylas never climb to the tops of the trees, though 
H. ewingii may shelter under the lower bark. H. caerulea and H. ewingii are 
often found on the ground among damp herbage. Limnodynastes tasmaniensis 
does not burrow, but is met with on the edges of pools or under stones. H. aurea 
often leaps from overhanging low boughs of trees and shrubs as you move along 
the banks of a creek and disturb it. ‘As for hearing the frogs, in the evenings 
in October, and later after rain, in the western suburbs of Sydney, wherever there 
are paddocks and waterholes, one may hear the croaking of individuals belonging 
to at least half a dozen species in the course of as many minutes.” He could 
recognize most of the common species by their distinctive notes. 

His notes on spawning are very full and informative. From what he saw in 
the years 1885-1886 he states: “Some frog spawn was met with in every month of 
the calendar.” “In whatever month the frogs spawn they do so as soon as the 
weather clears up after rain.” He says, “My most instructive round in one of 
the suburbs of Sydney included a visit to an old quarry, a brickyard, a deserted 
tanyard and three waterholes in paddocks used for watering cattle; these five 
(? six) spots were frequented during some period of the year by at least eleven 
species of frogs.” “If in the whole ofthese I found from 100 to 200 patches of 
spawn I considered it to be a brisk season.” 

“All the spawn observed by me has been 

(1) White frothy looking more or less circular floating patches larger or 
smaller according to the species, deposited in water, 


BY A. H. S. LUCAS. 745 


or (2) Small submerged bunches of ova enclosed in clear transparent jelly, 
attached to blades of grass, or reeds, or twigs of dead branches, 

or (3) Numerous separate ova, not laid in the water, but under stones or 
débris in reed or grass tussocks on the edges of pools.” 


To the last class belong the ova of the little toads, Pseudophryne. They are 
larger and fewer than the aqueous ova. Fletcher notes the difference in habit 
between the two County Cumberland species, P. australis lively and perky, P. 
bibronii dull and sluggish. P. australis spawns in summer, P. bibronii in autumn. 
In both the embryo leaves the egg in the perfect air-breathing form. 

A last note: “Limnodynastes dorsalis, judging by the number of croakers, 
must be one of our most abundant Sydney frogs, yet it is precisely one of the 
species of which under ordinary circumstances it is most difficult to procure 
specimens, a condition which is probably due to its nocturnal and burrowing 
habits. Once, and once only, I found a specimen under a stone; the only other 
way in which I have obtained specimens about Sydney is by going into the 
water after them when breeding, as at such times they often allow themselves to 
be caught without much difficulty.” 

You will remember Izaak Walton’s cruel treatment of his frog as bait and his 
exhortation to “use him as if you loved him, that he may live the longer”. Fletcher 
had no such mocking love for his frogs. He may have dissected some but only 
after putting them peacefully to death with chloroform, but he sympathized with 
the difficulties of their lives and lent them a helping hand where he could. 

One extremely hot summer’s day, in company with W. W. Froggatt and 
F. A. Skuse, he made an investigating and collecting trip. They walked from 
Waterfall to Sutherland, a ten miles tramp. They came to a pool of shallow 
water, a hundred yards or so from the river, and when they halted they found 
that the pool was swarming with gasping tadpoles. From the heat of the weather 
it was plain to Fletcher that the pool would soon dry up and the poor tadpoles 
perish. His heart was touched, and, anxious to show mercy and to preserve the 
species for the State, he prevailed on his friends to join him in ladling out the 
tadpoles with the billy and conveying the lot to the river, so that, set free in the 
stream, they might have a chance of attaining to the full fruition of frog life. 

He showed his affection for his less-gifted fellow mortals, too, in the case 
of some ring-tailed opossums which made their nest in the roof of his home in 
Hunter’s Hill. Undisturbed by their racket, he and Mrs. Fletcher used to carry 
food to them in the roof, climbing up and down a ladder to do so. The pretty 
animals became very familiar with him, would come along and take bread from 
his hand, and when the young were big enough the female would bring them 
with her on her back to show him. They bred in the roof for several seasons. 

In January, 1900, he was the President of the Biology Section of the Aus- 
tralasian Association for the Advancement of Science. He chose for the subject 
of his address “The Rise and Early Progress of our Knowledge of the Australian 
Fauna’. He devoted to its preparation all his spare time of the preceding eighteen 
months, describing himself in a letter to Spencer as “one President with his coat 
and weskit off and his pantaloons tied round with string just below his knees, 
mentally perspiring—I hope to some purpose—if there were not about 1,500 books 
that I want to see and don’t know how to find”. However, the result, as Spencer 
says, was “the compilation of a record of great value to all students interested in 
the historic aspect of Natural History in Australia”. He used to lament the neglect 
shown by British zoologists to the valuable collections submitted to them in the 


746 FLETCHER MEMORIAL LECTURE, 19380, 


early days and to mourn over the failure of Robert Brown and his companion 
naturalists to describe the life and customs of the Tasmanian blacks, so soon 
to perish from the face of the earth. 

The Address appeared in 1901 and was his last publication on zoological 
subjects. After this he turned his more intensive attention to the plants. He 
already possessed an intimate knowledge of the flora of New South Wales, obtained 
by many excursions and expeditions to different parts of the State, alone or in 
company with his botanical friends, Betche, Maiden, Deane, Musson, Hamilton 
and others. He left taxonomic work to them, and occupied himself with 
peculiarities of growth and more general relationships. He published little, three 
papers in all during his lifetime: (i) On Polycotyledony in Persoonia, 1909; 
(ii) On certain shoot-bearing Tumours of Eucalyptus and Angophora, 1918; (iii) On 
the correct interpretation of the so-called Phyllodes of the Australian Phyllodineous 
Acacias, Presidential Address, 1920. A fourth paper “On a case of Natural 
Hybridism in the genus Grevillea’ was completed and published after the death 
of Fletcher, by his friend and fellow-worker, C. T. Musson. 


He was greatly interested in the Loranths and their parasitism, and piled up 
in his home literally stacks of gum boughs carrying Loranths, but he unfor- 
tunately never published his projected paper on ‘“Hucalypts and Loranths in the 
relations of Host and Parasite” (Title read, 1896). 


Polycotyledony is abnormal on the face of it, and is extremely rare, in the 
great class of Dicotyledons, so that any occurrence of more than two cotyledons in 
a Phanerogam is striking. Botanists, from Baron von Mueller back to Robert 
Brown himself, had noticed this peculiarity in some of the species of Persoonia. 
Fletcher set himself the task of investigating these forms with his usual pains- 
taking thoroughness. He studied hundreds of embryos and young seedlings, of 
10 species, and his conclusion was “that polycotyledony in Persoonia represents a 
departure from the normal—that it is an acquired and not a primitive character— 
and that it has been derived from a dicotylous ancestor by the splitting of the two 
seed-leaves’”. He points out that the Proteaceae are a group of considerable 
antiquity, and that “it is remarkable that out of an Order comprising about 49 
genera and 950 species, only what promises to be the majority of a solitary genus 
should furnish the sole exception to the statement that dicotylous embryos are 
characteristic of the Order’. : 

In their paper on the Tumours, Fletcher and Musson showed that the tumour 
originated in the axil of the cotyledons, or in a few pairs of leaf axils just above 
them, from proliferating cambium cells, and was due to infection by some 
parasitic soil organism. They conclude: ‘the so-called ‘mallee root’ is not a root, 
but, in its extreme form, a great tumour, from which apparently, though in reality 
only enclosed by it, stems and roots arise.” 

The term Phyllode has been long applied to the vertical apparent leaves of 
those Australian Acacias which do not, when mature, produce bipinnate leaves. 
The botanical text-books define a phyllode as the petiole of a leaf of which the 
lamina or blade never develops, the petiole itself expanding into an apparent or 
pseudo lamina. Thus Kerner and Oliver “In many of the vetches of the Southern 
European flora (Lathyrus, Nissolia, Ochrus), but especially in a large number of 
Australian shrubs and trees, principally Acacias (Acacia longifolia, myrtifolia, 
melanorylon, etc.) it is the leaf-stalks which are extended like leaves placed 
vertically, and then the development of the leaf-lamina is either entirely arrested, 
or has the appearance of an appendage at the apex of the flat green leaf-stalk or 


BY A. H. S. LUCAS. 747 


phyllode, as it is called.” After laboriously studying many Wattles in all stages, 
especially hosts of seedlings, and availing himself of Cambage’s detailed study 
of Acacia seedlings of many species, Fletcher came to the conclusion that the text- 
book view was incorrect, that it was not the petiole or leaf-stalk merely, but the 
whole rachis or leaf-axis, of a pinnate leaf, which had become vertically flattened 
and had lost or never developed its pinnae. He says: “I propose to call them” 
(these organs or members) “Euphyllodia or Euphyllodes in the sense that they are 
something more than is implied in the accepted definition of phyllodes’’. 

It happens but rarely that an unquestionable natural hybrid is met with in 
the bush. Fletcher claimed that Grevillea gaudichaudii of Robert Brown was such 
a hybrid, between G. acanthifolia of Cunningham and G. laurifolia of Sieber. 
Both G. acanthifolia and G. laurifolia are common in the higher parts of the Blue 
Mountains, the former in the swamps and the latter on the dry plateau. Where 
these approach one another G. gaudichaudii appears between them, with characters 
palpably combining those of the two parents. It is curious that Robert Brown 
does not seem to have seen either of the parent plants, though he described the 
hybrid, and curious, too, that Cunningham and Sieber do not appear to have 
recognized the hybrid as such. Musson, speaking of Fletcher’s work on this 
Grevillea, says “The amount of detail he got together was remarkable. He 
covered 50 or 60 quarto sheets with detail, hundreds of figures merely dealing with 
lobing of the leaves’. 

In a paper read at the last meeting of the Linnean Society, Dr. McLuckie 
gave a first instalment of the results he has obtained in an independent investiga- 
tion of the subject. He accepts Fletcher’s conclusion that G. gaudichaudii consists 
of hybrids between G. lauwrifolia and G. acanthifolia. He succeeded in dividing 
the hybrids into two classes, which he considers to represent the progeny of 
laurifolia ovules fertilized by acanthifolia pollen, and vice versa. He confirms his 
contention by numerous comparative measurements of all parts of the hybrids 
and their parents. And to verify the ample circumstantial evidence, he has been 
able to produce artificially seedlings which agree in characters with one of the 
groups of natural hybrids, by using the pollen of acanthifolia applied to the stigma 
of laurifolia. Thus the fact of hybridization detected by Fletcher seems to be 
proved up to the hilt. 

Any portraiture of Fletcher would be very incomplete if it did not include 
some reference to his literary side. We have seen that he had a classical up- 
bringing and literature, especially poetry, strongly appealed to him. I remember 
his delight when Francis Thompson first swam into his ken. He recognized the 
Shelleyan pinions of that impassioned poet. He would transfer to his note-book 
poems that touched him, which he found as he browsed on the higher class 
magazines, Contemporary, Blackwood, Scribner, Century, especially poems dealing 
with beautiful aspects of Nature, drawing from them Wordsworthian lessons of 
philosophy and hope. 

Thus we find a translation from the Century of a poem by old Walther 
von der Vogelweide: 


I heard a fountain brimming, 

And saw the fishes swimming. 

And marked what in the world did pass: 
Forest and field, rush, leaf, and grass; 
All things that fly and creep, 

And beasts that run and leap; 

And saw that of all forms of life 

Not one there is lives free from strife: 


748 FLETCHER MEMORIAL LECTURE, 1930, 


Wild beasts and creeping things 
Have all their quarrelings; 

The birds, too, fight right angrily, 
Yet in one thing they all agree: 
That none would live content 
Had they no government. 


And, on a higher plane, Blanco White’s sonnet on Night: 


Who could have thought such darkness lay concealed 
Within thy beams, O Sun! or who could find 

Whilst flow’r and leaf and insect stood revealed, 
That to such countless orbs thou mad’st us blind? 

Why do we then shun Death with anxious strife? 

If Light can thus deceive, wherefore not Life? 


He preserved the gargoyles as well as the arches of his cathedrals. Like 
Browning, it pleased him to treasure the odd and the grotesque. : 

Once he showed me with great glee an amusing macaronic poem composed by 
Robert Lowe, while an undergraduate at Oxford, on the occasion of a visit to the 
University by the Duchess of Kent and the young Princess Victoria in 1833. It is 
entitled ‘“‘Poema Canino-Anglico-Latinum’’, and is a clever compost of Virgilian 
idioms and frank British fun, done into rolling hexameters. As 


Rainy dies aderat; decimam strikantibus horam 

Jam clockis, portae panduntur—then O what a rush was Musa velim memores— 
Et quam shoutarunt Undergraduates atque Magistri,- 

Et quantum dederit Vice-Chancellor ipse refreshment. 


I imagine that he had found the copy of verses amongst Macleay’s papers, 
which passed into his custody. Macleay was Lowe’s most intimate friend while 
the latter was living in Sydney in the ’Forties. 

He gave me a copy of Rev. W. B. Clarke’s rhymes on Ceratodus forsteri, 
which I will pass on to you from Fletcher. The great geologist writes, in the style 
of John Gilpin: 


Just seven and twenty years ago 
Did naturalists discuss 

The finding of some horny teeth 
Thence called Ceratodus. 


No bones (if fish true bones possess) 
Of head, or tail, or sides— 

No scales or vertebrae had they 
To be their certain guides. 


All that they learn’d was that the teeth 
In middle life-time grew, 

Yet fourteen species were assigned— 
To what they hardly knew. 


Of these the generous Agassiz 
A dozen gave to Trias 

(With one reserved to Stonesfield Slate) ; 
All borrowed from the Lias. 


But never since that period, 
As all the books avow, 

Did scientific eyes behold 
Ceratodus till now. 


Lucullus ate Muraena rare, 
In Rome the daintiest dish, 
And squatters.on the Burnett dined 
On geologic fish. 


BY A. H. S. LUCAS. 749 


But all the while no savant knew 
More than the squatter guessed, 
Who ordered a Ceratodus 
To be for salmon dressed. 


So things went on till Forster’s act 
No further question left, 

By sending down the fish itself 
To be described by KREFFT. 


Thus, in Australia we behold 
Another instance found 

How in the far Antipodes 
Science completes her round. 


The long-continued strain of his close application to work told at last. Towards 
the end of 1918 we find him writing to Spencer: “I have not had a holiday since 
Haster, 1915, and my eyes and brain are very tired, and I am retiring from the 
Linnean on 31st March, 1919. . . I began to realize that thirty-three years was 
going to be about as much as was good for me. So I decided to give notice of 
my retirement.” Accordingly at the Annual General Meeting in March, 1919, he 
performed his last task as Secretary. His old colleagues combined to bear their 
testimony to his long and invaluable services to the Society, and to voice the 
strong sense of loss which they experienced at the conclusion of his labours as 
Secretary. Enthusiastic appreciation and deep gratitude were the notes of the 
occasion. His portrait was hung in the Hall and he was presented with a hand- 
some chair and desk. 


At the same meeting he was elected President of the Society and he occupied 
the Chair during the years 1919-20 and 1920-21. In his first Presidential Address 
he spoke of the climatic problems which confront the Australian agriculturist and 
suggested the preparation and dissemination of a manual which should give 
scientific methods of grappling with the droughts. 


At a Special General Meeting held in June, 1920, to commemorate the centenary 
of the birth of Sir William Macleay, he delivered an address on “The Society’s 
Heritage from the Macleays’”. It was a long address, filling 68 pages of the 
PROCEEDINGS, but this only dealt with the lives and the public and scientific services 
of the three elder Macleays. The second part, dealing with Sir William’s life 
and benefactions, was published after Fletcher’s death by his successor, Dr. A. B. 
Walkom, who faithfully and laboriously compiled it from the multitude of notes 
which Fletcher had collected for the completion of his history. 

His Presidential Address in 1921 was devoted to a strongly argued protest 
against the abuse by the University authorities of their trust in regard to the 
Macleay Museum, so that ‘one of his great enterprizes, potentially so fructifying, 
if properly managed, has become bankrupt’. Thus to the last he was loyal to 
the: memory of the man to whom he felt Australia owed so much. 

In 1921 the Royal Society of N.S.W. awarded him the Clarke Memorial Medal, 
a graceful recognition of his work. But now the shadows were beginning to close 
around him. Owing to an accident he was forced to abstain from anything like 
strenuous exertion, but he kept up his association with the Linnean and his 
intimacy with his friends and acted as a Trustee of the Australian Museum. He 
was still able to take delight in the natural beauty of his surroundings at Lane 
Cove. Characteristically, he was thinking of how best he might distribute his 
books and collections so that they should be of most service after he was gone, and 


750 FLETCHER MEMORIAL LECTURE, 1930. 


he took measures accordingly. To the Australian Museum he gave “A very large 
and valuable collection of Frogs’, 1923; “An interesting collection of Marsupial 
Skulls and Foetal Material”, 1926; and we find a grateful acknowledgment, signed 
by nine members of the scientific staff, of a valuable series of scientific papers, 
1924. To the Mitchell Library he gave 361 books and pamphlets, 1924, and a 
large number of more general works to the library of Wesley College, within the 
University of Sydney. Thus engaged, and happily spared a lingering or painful 
illness or a protracted period of helplessness, the end came suddenly on 15th May, 
1926. He would have said with Mrs. Barbauld the poet: 


Life! I know not what thou art, 
But know that thou and I must part; 


Then steal away, give little warning, 
Choose thine own time; 
Say not Good Night—but in some brighter clime 
Bid me Good Morning. 
I have tried to bring the man and the nature of his work before you. The 
man has passed, but so long as the Linnean Society endures the names and the 
work of William Macleay and Joseph James Fletcher will never pass away. 


oc=> 


Do Lv. a a No. 227. 
Part 1. 2 


ye THE 


f |" PROCEEDINGS 
S| LINNEAN SOCIETY 


New SoutH WALES 


1930. 


Part I (Pages i-vrviii). 


CONTAINING THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ANNUAL MEETING. 


SYDNEY: 
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY 


THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING CO., LD, 
Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, 


and 


SOLD BY THE SOCIETY, 
- Macleay House, 16 College Street, Sydney. . 


1930. 
PRICE 2/. - 


Agent in Hurope: 
Messrs. Duztau & Co., 32 Old Bond Street, London, W.1. 


The Linnean Socen of New South Wales 


LIST OF OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1930-31. 


President: 
EH. Cheel. 


Vice-Presidents (4) and Hon. Treasurer to be elected at Council Meeting, 
23rd April, 1930. 
Secretary: A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. 


: Council: 
Cc. Anderson, M.A., D.Sc. W. W. Froggatt, F.L.S. 


HE. C. Andrews, B.A., F.G.S. G. M. Goldfinch. 
W. R. Browne, D.Sc. A. G. Hamilton. 


Professor A. N. Burkitt, M.B., B.Sc. A. F. Basset Hull. 
HJ. Canter: Be Ashes: A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sc. ; 
E. Cheel. Professor T. G. B. Osborn, D.Sc. 
Professor W. J. Dakin, D.Sc. A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. 
Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, K.B.E., H. S. H. Wardlaw, D.Sc: 

C.M.G., D.S.O., M.A., D.Se., F.R.S. G. A. Waterhouse, D.Sc., B.E., F.E.S. 
T. Storie Dixson, M.B., Ch.M. 


Auditor: F. H. Rayment, H.C.P.A. 


NOTICE. 


THE Parts of the PROCEEDINGS are issued peeibea ly to Societies and Institutions 


on this Society’s exchange list, and application for the replacement of any Part not. 
received in due course should be made without delay. No such application for — 


replacement will be considered unless it is received by the Secretary within twelve 
months of the date of publication of the Part concerned. 


With the exception of Volume II, Part 4, Volume V, Part 2, and Volume VI, 
Part 4 of the First Series, the Publications of the Linnean Society of New South 


Wales may be obtained from the Society, Macleay House, 16 College Street, Sydney, _ 


or from Dulau and Co., 32, Old Bond Street, London, W.1. The stock of copies of 
First Series, Volumes I to VI is limited. 


FIRST SERIES. 


Proceedings for 1875-76, Vol. I—Part 1, 3s.; Part 2, 3s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, 7s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1877, Vol. II.—Part 1, 4s.; Part 2, 4s. Part 3, 4s. 

Proceedings for 1878, Vol. IIJ.—Part 1, 5s.; Part 2, 5s.; Part 3, 6s.; Part 4, 7s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1879, Vol. I1V.—Part 1, 6s.; Part 2, 6s.; Part 3, 8s.; Part 4, 6s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1880, Vol. V.—Part 1, 6s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 7s. 6d. ts 
Proceedings for 1881, Vol. VI.—Part 1, 6s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 10s. 


Proceedings for 1882, Vol. VII.—Part 1, 7s. 6d.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, 10s. . 


Proceedings for 1883, Vol. VIII.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 5s.; Part 3, 7s.; Part 4, 8s. 

Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, £1 5s.; Part 4, £1 5s. 

Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.—Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 8, 15s.; Part 4. 
17s. 6d. : Ni : 

5 SECOND SERIES. 

Proceedings for 1886, Vol. I.—Part 1, 10s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 13s.; Part 4, 
12s. 6d. 

Proceedings for 1887, Vol. II.—Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4, £1 7s. 

Proceedings for 1888, Vol. IIJ.—Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, £1 4s.; Part 3, £1; Part 4, 18s. 

Proceedings for 1889, Vol. IV.—Part 1, 1ls.; Part 2, 16s.; Part 3, 19s.; Part 4, 11s. 

Proceedings for 1890, Vol. V.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 9s. 

Proceedings for 1891, Vol. VI.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 1%s.; Part 4, 
7s. 6d. : 


Proceedings for 1892, Vol. VII.—Part 1, 6s. 6d.; Part 2, 4s. 6d.; Part 3, 8s.; Part 4, 8s. _ 


Proceedings for 1893, Vol. VIII.—Part 1, 5s.; Part 2, lls.; Part 3, 6s.; Part 4, 9s. 
Proceedings for 1894, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 13s.; Part 4, 8s. 


a. 


Proceedings for 1895, Vol. X.—Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s.; Supplement, 
1s. 6d.; Part 4, 12s. 
Proceedings for 1896.—Part 1, 
Part 4, £1 7s. 6d. 


for 
for 
for 
for 


Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Part 4, 1ds. 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Part 4, with 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
- Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Part 5, 2s. 
Proceedings for 
Part), 02S 
Proceedings for 
Part 5, 2s. 
Proceedings for 
; Part 5, 2s. 
Proceedings for 
Partly, 22s. 
Proceedings for 
Part 5, 2s. 
Proceedings for 


1, 
1, 
iy, 
1, 
1, 
is 


1, 
af 
1, 


9s.; Supplement, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 6s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; 


10s.;. Part 2, 8s. 6d.;.Part 3; 9s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 

3s.; Part 2, 6s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4, 14s. 

12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 10s. 6d. 
8s.; Part 2, 10s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s. 6d.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. 
10s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. 

7s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Supplement, 3s.; 


9s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 15s. 
10s.; Part 2, 7S. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 10s. 
with Supplement, 7s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; 


Supplement, 10s. 6d. 


1897.—Part 
1898.—Part 
1899.—Part 
1900.—Part 
1901.—Part 
1902.—Part 
1903.—Part 
1904.—Part 
1905.—Part 
1906.—Part 
1907.—Part 
1908.—Part 
1909.—Part 
1910.—Part 
1911.—Part 
1912.—Part 
1913.—Part 
1914.—Part 
1915.—Part 
1916.—Part 
1917.— Part 
1918.—Part 
1919.—Part 
1920.—Part 
1921.—Part 
1922.—Part 
1923.—Part 
1924.—Part 
1925.—Part 
1926.—Part 
1927.—Part 
1928.—Part 


Part 5, 9s.; Part 6, 2s. 


' Proceedings for 1929.—Part 1, 2s.; 


12s. 6d.; Part 6, 2s. 


Proceedings for 


dS. 


The MAcCLEAY MEMORIAL VOLUME [issued October 13th, 1893]. 


1930.—Part 


1, 
1, 
1, 
it 
1, 
aL 
ily 
1, 
1, 


1,_17s.; Part 2, 


12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. 
8s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 18s. 

ts.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 

12s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. 

1is.; Part 2, 11s.; Part 3, 7s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 

9s. 6d.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s. 

8s. 6d.; Part 2, 25s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. 
14s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 6s.; Part 4, 13s. 

13s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 25s.; Part 4, 19s. 

12s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 11s. 


1,,10s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part. 3, 15s.; Part~4, 19s. 

1, 14s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. 

1, 20s.; Part 2, 14s.; Part 3, 21s.; Part 4, 19s. 

1, 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 11s. 6d.; Part 3, 17s. 6d.;' Part 4, 13s. 

1, 10s. 9d.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 11s. 

1, 9s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 9s. 6d. 

Meas .o0.;erart, 2); 13se6des Partas.) bis) Part) 45 .h3s)- 
Les 60.:: Part 2.) 12S Part. a> l6s:: Part 4, 13s. 6d.; 
1, 2s.; Part 2, 13s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s.; 
pcs skate 2, bos; Part 3, 8s..9d0.; “Part. 4, 14s, 6d5; 
1, 2s; Part 2, 13s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s.; 
1, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 10s. 6d.; Part 8, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 34; 
1, 2s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 8s. 9d.; Part 4, 10s.; 


ue 


Part 2, 6s. 3d.; Part 3, 8s. 6d.; Part 4, iis.; IPelieie By, 


2s. 


INDEX TO VOLUMES I-L OF THE PROCEEDINGS [Issued 15th February, 1929]. pp. 108. 


Royal 4to. Li. and 308 


pages, with portrait, and forty-two plates. Price £2 2s. 


DESCRIPTIVE CATALOGUE OF AUSTRALIAN FISHES. 
A few copies only. 


Price £1 net. 


By William Macleay, F.L.S. [1881]. 


The TRANSACTIONS OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SociETY or NEw SouTH WALES, 2 vols., 8vo. 
[Vol. I (complete in five parts, 1863-66), price 70s. net, Parts 2-5 10s. each; Vol. II 
(complete in five parts, 1869-73), price 30s. net, or single Parts, 7s. 6d. each.] 


\ 


PROCEEDINGS, 1930, PART 1. 


CONTENTS. 
Pages. 
Presidential Address, delivered at the Fifty-fifth Annual Meeting, 
26th March, 1930, by H. S. Halcro Wardlaw, D.Sc... .. .. ... i-XxVv 
Elections BS ORNL, lias Suid Oca A neler ESA ON A XKV 


Balance-sheets for the year ended 31st December, 1929 .. .. ..  .. &xXvVi-xxvViii 


| J - Vol. 0 Gieg gee No. 228. 
ale. Part 2:7 


THE 


PROCEEDINGS 


OF THE 


LINNEAN SOCIETY 


OF 


New SouTtH WALES 


FOR THE YEAR 


1930. 


Part II (Pages 1-190.) 


CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN MARCH-APRIL. 
With four plates. 
[Plates j-iv. ] 


SYDNEY: 


PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY 


THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL- PUBLISHING CO., LTD, 
Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney,’ 


and 


SOLD BY THE SOCIETY, 
Macleay House, 16 College Street, Sydney. 


: 1930. 
PRICE 10/-. 


Agent in Hurope: 
Messrs. DuLavu & Co., 32 Old Bond Street, London, W.1. 


Plate 


Mii ioe _ President: AL ch : TA 
: E. Cheel. ; ; ce eg 


Rea Vice-Presidents: Peake 
W. R. Browne, D.Sc. gages A. F. Basset Hull. © Pe ie erm ane 
H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. ; : H. S. H. Wardlaw, D. Se. ae 


Hon. Treasurer: G. A. Waterhouse, D.Se., B.E., F.E.S. : Hl a2 es 
' Secretary: A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. : ‘ ; cine Z 


‘ Council: 
Cc. Anderson, M.A., D.Se. d W. W. Froggatt, F:L.S. 
_E. C. Andrews, B.A., F.G.S. ° G. M. Goldfinch. 4 
W. R. Browne, D.Sc. A. G. Hamilton. ij 
Professor A. N. Burkitt, M.B., B.Sc. A. F. Basset Hull. 
H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. A. H. S. Lucas, , M.A., B.Se. 
E. Cheel. . Professor T. G. B. Osborn, D.Se. 
Professor W. J. Dakin, D.Sc. A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. : Betee is, 
Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, K.B.E., H. S. H. Wardlaw, D.Se.. “Sah sete 

CMUIGRDIS:O2 MEAL DD: Sees HMRH Ss! G. A. Waterhouse, D.Se., B.E., RES. 3 

a Storie Dixson, M.B., Ch.M. “Ww. L. Waterhouse, D.Se. PAST 


Auditor: F. H. Rayment, F.C.P.A. 


NOTICE. 


Tue Parts of the PROCEEDINGS are issued regularly to Chwen and Institutions — 
‘on this Society’s exchange list, and application for the replacement of any Part not | 
received in due course should be made without delay. No such application for 
replacement will be considered Hiiless it is received by the Secretary within twelve 
months of the date of publication of the Part concerned. id 


With the exception of Volume II, Part A, Volume V, Part 2, and Volume bi 
Part 4 of the First Series, the Publications of the Linnean Society of New South 
Wales may be obtained from the Society, Macleay House, 16 College Street, Sydney, — 
or from Dulau and Co., 32, Old Bond Street, London, W.1. The stock of. coe . 
First Series, Volumes I to VI is limited. oe 


; . FIRST SERIES. 
Proceedings for 1875-76, Vol. I—Part 1, 3s.; Part 2, 3s.; Part 3, ‘5BS.3 ; Part 4, Ts. 6a. 
Proceedings for 1877, Vol. I1.—Part ab As.; Part 2, 4s. Part 3, 4s. 
Proceedings for 1878, Vol. It bage eos: 5 Party 2,) DS. shalt de lOSss ni abbots 7s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1879, Vol. IV.—Part 1, 6s.; Part 2, 6s.; Part 3, 8s.; Part 4, 6s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1880, Vol. V.—Part 1, 6s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 7s. ues 
Proceedings for 1881, Vol. VI.—Part 1, 6s.; Part 2, LOSs3) Part 3, 20s. 
Proceedings for 1882, Vol.. VII.—Part 1, 7s: 6d.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, 105. 
Proceedings for 1883, Vol. VIII. —Part 1; 10s.; Part 2, 5s,; Part 3, 7s.; ‘Part 4, 8s. ae 
Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, £1 Bult ; Part 4, vas 5s. 


Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.—Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 7s.,6d.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4. ype 


17s. 6d. . 
SECOND SHERIES.., fie oe eo 
Proceedings for 1886, Vol. I.—Part 1, 10s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 13s.; Part 4, 
12s. 64. 
Proceedings for 1887, Vol. II. —Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4, £1 7s. 
Proceedings for 1888, Vol. III.—Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, £1 4s.; Part 3, £1; Part 4, 18s. 
Proceedings for 1889, Vol. IV.—FPart 1, 11s.; Part 2, 16s,; Part 3, 19s.; Part 4, 11s. 
Proceedings for 1890, Vol. V.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 9s. 
Proceedings for 1891, Vol. VI.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 17s.; Part - 4, 
7s. 6d. « 
Proceedings for 1892, Vol. VII.—Part 1, 6s. 6d.; Part 2, 4s. 6d.; Part 3, 8s.; Part A, 8s. 
Proceedings for 1893, Vol. VIII.—Part 1, ds.; Part 2, 11s.; Part 3, 6s.; art 4, 9s. 
Proceedings for 1894, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3. 13s.; Part 4, 8s. 


ty 


Proceedings, for 1895, Vol. X.—Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s.; Supplement, 
1s. 6d.; Part 4, 12s. ; 

Proceedings for 1896.—Part 1, 9s.; Supplement, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 6s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; 
Part 4, £1 7s. 6d. 

Proceedings for 1897.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 

Proceedings for 1898.—Part 1, 3s.; Part 2, 6s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4, 14s. 

Proceedings for 1899.—Part 1, 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 10s. 6d. 

Proceedings for 1900.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 10s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s. 6d.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. 

Proceedings for 1901.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. 

Proceedings for 1902.—Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Supplement, 3s.; 
Part 4, 15s. 


Proceedings for 1903.—Part 1, 9s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, las. 


: 1 
‘Proceedings for 1904.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 10s. 
1 


Proceedings for 1905.—Part 1, with Supplement, 7s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; 
Part 4, with Supplement, 10s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1906.—Part 1, 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. 
Proceedings for 1907.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 18s. 
Proceedings for 1908.—Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1909.—Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1910.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 11s.; Part 3, 7s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1911.—Part 1, 9s. 6d.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s. 
Proceedings for 1912.—Part 1, 8s. 6d.; Part 2, 25s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. 
Proceedings for 1913.—Part 1, 14s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 6s.; Part 4, 13s. 
Proceedings for 1914.—Part 1, 18s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 25s.; Part 4, 19s. 
Proceedings for 1915:—Part 1, 17s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 11s. 
Proceedings for 1916.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 19s. 
Proceedings for 1917.—Part 1, 14s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1918.—Part 1, 20s.; Part 2, 14s.; Part 3,; 21s.; Part 4, 19s. 
Proceedings for 1919.—Part 1, 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 11s. 6d.; Part 3, 17s. 6d.; Part 4, 13s, 
Proceedings for 1920.—Part 1, 10s. 9d.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 11s. 
Proceedings for 1921.—Part 1, 9s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 9s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1922.—Part 1, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 13s. 6d.; Part 3, 1l1s.; Part 4, 13s.; 


Party; 28: : ; 

“Proceedings for 1923.—Partid; 2s> 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3; 16s.; Part 4; 13s. 6d.; 
Part 5, 2s. ‘ 

Proceedings for 1924.——Part 1, 2s.; Part 2, 18s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s.; 
Part 5, 2s. 

Proceedings for 1925.— Part 452s:; Part 2;°12s.; Part 3,°8s.*9d.5 Part 4; 14s: 6d.; 
Part 5, 2s. \ 

Proceedings for 1926.—Part 1, 2s.; Part 2, 13s. 6d.; Part 3; 9s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s.; 
Part 5,° 258: 

Proceedings for 1927.—Part 1, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 10s. 6d.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 3d.; 
IPB oma eS 


Proceedings for 1928.—Part 1, 2s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 8s. 9d.; Part 4, 10s.; 
Pao 5,7 9S; Part 6.25) 


Proceedings for 1929.—Part 1,_2s.; Part 2, 6s. 3d.; Part 3, 8s. 6d.; Part 4, 11s.; Part 5, 
12s. 6d.; Part 6, 2s. = 


Proceedings for 1930.—Part 1, 2s.; Part 2, 10s. 


. 


INDEX TO VOLUMES I-L OF THE PROCEEDINGS [Issued 15th February, 1929]. pp. 108. 


The MacLEAY MEMORIAL VOLUME [issued October 138th, 1893]. Royal 4to. ti. and 308 
pages, with portrait, and forty-two plates. Price £2 2s. 


DESCRIPTIVE CATALOGUE OF AUSTRALIAN FISHES. By William Macleay, F.L.S. [1881]. 
A few copies only. Price £1 net. 


The TRANSACTIONS OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL Society or New SouTH WALES, 2 vols., 8vo. 
[Vol. I (complete in five parts, 1863-66), price 70s. net, Parts 2-5 10s. each; Vol. II 
(complete in five parts. 1869-73), price 30s. net, or single Parts, 7s. 6d. each.] 


PROCEEDINGS, 1930, PART 2. 


CONTENTS. Eten 
nF‘ 2 f Mess ; a f h 
foe 


Revision of Australian Oergchornidee DE GO TED), Liye AU efferis — 
Turner, M.D., F.E.S. a Sieh 2 eed ea ae 


A Revision of the Australian Teleasinae (Hymenoptera: Proctotrypoidea). 
ub yristan OPV eGdd iki: sip Sane neceree etic h Es se 


y 


Notes on Australian Diptera. — xxiii. By J. R. ‘Malloch. (Communicated — 


by I. M. Mackerras.) (Thirty Text-figures. jn ne pee evs: 


Notes on the Genus Apistomyia (Diptera) and Description of a New 
Species. By A. L. Tonnoir. (Communicated by I. M. Mackerras.) 


N 


(Fourteen Text-figures.) _ a ee egies ae ev a ti gel eg 


‘The Geology of the South Coast. & New South Wee Part ii. ‘Devonian 


and Older Palaeozoic Rocks. . By’ Ida I Brown, B.Sec., Linnean 
Macleay Fellow of the Society in Gevlogy. ( Palaeontological Notes 
by W. S. Dun.) (Plates int and two Text-figures. ) Jaca 


Australian Rust Studies. ii. Biometrical Studies of the Maemiplor 7 of 


Spore Forms. . By: W. L. Waterhouse, D. sy Agr. (Plate iii.) 


Australian Coleoptera. Notes ‘and New eneeies, vii. By H. J. Carter, 


BAL URES. | (Platewiy and“one Next teure:) 5000... us aise Manca es 


i 
Conntonnume. 


Pages 137 to 139, foe Apistomyia indica read A. trilineata. 


159-17 


Be 


8 


(Issued loth July, 1930.) 


I va ww 
PROCEEDINGS 
LINNEAN SOCIETY 


New SoutH WALES 


FOR THE YEAR jo 4 
[> A e 
1930. fan {> 2m | 

i it L 

galt io 
Part III (Pages 191-3538.) WAG k 
NW eat 

CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN MAY-JUNE. No H 4g % 


With five plates. 
[Plates v-ix. | 


SYDNEY: 
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY 


THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING Co., LYD,, 
Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, 


and 


\ SOLD BY THE SOCIETY, 
Macleay House, 16 College Street, Sydney. 


] 


1930. 
PRICE 8/9. 


Agent in Europe: 
“4 Messrs. Dutau & Co., 32 Old Bond Street, London, W.1. ; } 


‘The Linnean Society of New South Wale 


LIST OF OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1930-31. 


President: 
EB). Cheel. : ; F 


$ Vice-Presidents: 
W. R.. Browne, D.Se. A. EF. Basset Hull. 
Ed Carter SAME Bis Se H. S. H. Wardlaw, D.Se: 


Hon. Treasurer: G. A. Waterhouse, D.Sc., B.E., F.E.S. 
Secretary: A. B. Walkom, DSc. 


Couneil: 


Cc. Anderson, M.A., D.Sc. - W. W. Froggatt, F.L.S. 

EH. C. Andrews, B.A., .G.S: G. M. Goldfinch. 

W. R. Browne, D.Sc. A. G@: Hamilton. 

Professor A. N. Burkitt, M.B., B.Sc. A. F. Basset Hull. 

ES J. Carter; ie re BLE. S. A. H. 8. Lucas, M.A., B.Se. 

BE. Cheel: > - Professor T. G. B. Osborn, D.Sc. 

Professor W. J. Dakin, D.Se. - A. B. Walkom, D.Se. 

Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, K.B.E., H. S. A. Wardlaw, D.Sc. ‘ 
C.M.G., D.S.0O., M.A., DiSe., F.R.S. G. A. Waterhouse, D.Sc. B.H., F.E.S. 

T. Storie Dixson, M.B., Ch.M. W. L. Waterhouse, D.Se. Agr. 


Auditor: Fk. H. Rayment, F.C.P.A. 


NOTICE. oe 


THE Parts of the PROCEEDINGS are issued regularly to Societies and Institutions 
on this Society’s exchange list, and application for the replacement of any Part not 
received in due course should be made without delay. No such application for 
replacement will be considered unless it is received by the Secr etary within twelve 
months of the date of publication of the Part concerned. 


With the exception of Volume II, Part 4, Volume V, Part 2, and Volume VI, 
Part 4 of the First Series, the Publications of the Linnean Society of New South 
Wales may be obtained from the Society, Macleay House, 16 College Street, Sydney, 
or from Dulau and Co., 32, Old Bond Street, London, W.1. The stock of copies of 
First Series, Volumes I to VI is limited. 


FIRST SHRIES. 


Proceedings for #875-76, Vol. I—Part 1, 3s.; Part 2, 3s.; Part 8, 5s.; Part 4, 7s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1877, Vol. JI.—Part 1, 4s.; Part 2, 4s. Part 3, 4s. 
Proceedings for 1878, Vol. IIlI.—Part 1, 5s.; Part 2, 5S.5 Part 3;-6s.Part 4. 7s: 6d. 
* Proceedings for 1879, Vol. IV:—Part 1, 68.; Part 2, 6s.; Part 8, 8s.; Part 4, 6s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1880, Vol. V.—Part 1, 6s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 7s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1881, Vol. VI.—Part 1, 6s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 10s. 
Proceedings for 1882, Vol. VII.—Part 1, 7s. 6d.; Part 2, 10s.: Part 3, 58.3; Part 4, 10s. 
Proceedings for 1883, Vol. VIII.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 5s.; Part 3, 7s.; Part 4, 8s. 
Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, £1 5s.; Part 4, £1 5s. 
Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.—Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4. 
17s. 6d. . f : é i 
SECOND SERIES. 


Proceedings for 1886, Vol. I.—Part 1, 10s. 6d.; Part 2,.12s.; Part ae Lis eoePart au 


12s. 6d. i 3 . 
Proceedings for 1887, Vol. II.—Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4, £1 7s. © 


a, Proceedings for 1888, Vol. I1I.—Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, £1 4s.; Part 3 fh Part, 4aulesm 


' Proceedings for 1889, Vol. IV.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 16s.; Part 3, 19s.; Part 4, 11s. 

Proceedings for 1890, Vol. V.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2,,9s.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 9s. 

Proceedings for 1891, Vol. VI.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 9s. 6d:; Part 3, 17s.; Part 4, 
7s. 6d. ; 

Proceedings for 1892, Vol. VII.—Part 1, 6s. 6d.; Part 2, 4s. 6d.; Part 3, 8s.; Part 4, 8s. 

. Proceedings for 1893, Vol. VIII.—Part 1, ds.; Part 2, 11s.; Part 3, 6s.;. Part 4, 9s. 

Proceedings for 1894, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 18s.; Part 4, 8s. 


OT aD a w Pik seal yh ae oy ath 


oo 


ls. 6d.; Part 4, 12s. 


_ Proceedings for 


1896.—Part 


Part 4, £1 7s. 6d. 


Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 

Part 4, 15s. 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 
Proceedings for 

Part 4, with 


The MACLEAY MEMORIAL VOLUME [issued October 13th, 1893]. 
pages, with TOL and forty-two plates. 


Dagon CATALOGUE oF AUSTRALIAN FISHES. 
A few copies only. Price £1 net. 


The TRANSACTIONS OF THE EINTOMOLOGICAL Society or NEW SourH WALES. 


1897.—Part 
1898.—Part 
1899.—Part 
1900.—Part 
1901.—Part 
1902.—Part 
1903.—Part 
1904,—Part 
1905.—Part 


poeecaimes for 1895, Vol. X.—Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s.; 


itp 
Al 
1 
1, 
1 
1 
al 


1, 
il 
1, 


lO S a Paritecy OSs OGhs many to, OSs 


Supplement, 
9s.; Supplement, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 6s. 6d.; Part 3,78. 6d.; 


Part 4, 12s. 6d. 


PecSus ante 25 OS. ant on esa bart. 45° LAS, 


12s; 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 10s. 6d. 


PUOSia se aAkieasel OS Oda; artaad tO Sods bart. 40leiso od. 
4) USES erie POMS Bele hay Bin) Byes 
PS aAen ay slSesO Gas baby oy iss Ode. 


Part 4, 17s. 6d. 
Supplement, 38s.; 


9s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, los. 
LOSS ee aE bas) tse OGry ation nO Seem aiatre 410s: 
with ‘Supplement, aes WieaLte 2. LOSS Bart, id) l2se.6da: 


Supplement, 10s. 6d. 


Proceedings for 1906.—Part 1, 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. 
Proceedings for 1907.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 18s. 
Proceedings for 1908.—Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1909.—Part 1, 128.: Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1910.—Part 1, lis.; Part 2, tls.; Part 3, 7s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1911.—Part 1, 9s. éd.: Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s. 
Proceedings for 1912.—Part 1, 8s. 6d.; Part 2, 25s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. 
Proceedings for 1913.—Part ee a Seabee SOO Ccs arias lose sam ted elas. 
Proceedings for 1914.—Part 1, 13s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 8, 25s.; Part 4, 19s. 
Proceedings for 1915.—Part 1, 17s.; Part, 2) 12s. 6d:; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 11s. 
Proceedings for 1916.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 8, 15s.; Part 4, 19s. 
Proceedings ‘for 1917.—Part 1, 14s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1918.—Part 1, 20s:; Part 2, 148.; Sieehor si Pyles Part 419s; 
Proceedings for 1919.—Part 1, 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 11s. 6d.; Part 8, Lis. 6di; Part 4, 13s. 
Proceedings for 1920.—Part 1, 10s. 9d.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, Y1s. 
Proceedings for 1921.—Part 1, 9s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 9s. 64. 
Proceedings for 1922.—Part 1, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 13s. 6d.; Part 3, lis.; Part 4, 13s; 
acts. BMS, Bees , ; 
Proceedings for 1923.—Part 1, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 16s.; Part 4, 13s. 6d; 
Part Fipe PASE 
Proceedings for 1924-—Part 1, 2s; Part 2, 13s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s.; 
Pant <d, 28: 3 ‘ 
Proceedings for 1925.—Part 1, 2s\; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 8s. 9d.; Part 4, 14s. 6d.; 
Part 5, 2s. 
Proceedings for 1926.—Part 1, 2s.; Part 2, 13s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.: Part 4, 15s.; 
Parte), 2S), : ; ‘ : 
Proceedings for 1927.—Part 1, as. 6d.; Part 2, 10s. 6d); 2Part 8, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 3d.; 
; Part 5, 2s. : ; : 
Proceedings for 1928—Part 1, 2s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 8, 8s. 9d.; Part 4, 10s.; 
Part) 5,0S-2)eart) 6.28: } 
Proceedings for 1929.—Part i, 2s.; Part 2, 6s. 3G); Part o.6os.-OG..) matted. thse: Panta 5, 
(12s. 6d.; Part 6, 2s. 
Proceedings for 1930.—Part 1, 2s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 8s. 9d; 
_ INDEX TO VOLUMES I-L OF THE PROCEEDINGS [Issued 15th February, 1929]. pp. 108. 


Royal 4to. ui. and 308 
Price £2 2s. 


By William Macleay, F.L.S. [1881]. 


2. vols., 8vo. 


[Vol. I (complete in five parts, 1863-66), price 70s. net, Parts 2-5 10s. Layne Vol. II 


Komplete in five parts, 1869-73), unice 30s. net, or single Parts, Ts. 6d: each.] 


PROCEEDINGS, 1930, PART 3. 


CONTENTS. 


Revision of pee as Oenochromidae (Lepidoptera). iii. By.A. Jefferis : ue 
Turner, M.D., F.ES. oe ON 


ee ee o. ee woe say CiLCrCR yes) ro 


Uae: sl j 
Observations on the Dipterous Family Tanyderidae. By Charles P. ra 
Alexander. (Communicated by Tf. M. Mackerras.) (Plates v—vi, one 
Text-figure.) EAT SS eran a 3 (ch TUG igh 


o- Shee) ee oe -- oe oa oan 


The Genus Wicronono cuore Draken. a “little known Group of Soil Micro- 


organisms. By H: L. Jensen, BEKO 2) ee eee to the Society. 
(Plate vii.) PUNE sy BARATE MEN CCIM Ar Calvin) tir Wl Sic t lira ER aan eS asics) aoe Ste 
Fifth Contrpution towards a new “Classification of Australian Asilidae. 
ByiGs ByiHardy eer. i Sse 


oe se se oe oe oe =. ohie em. 


‘ 


The Mosses of Fiji. By H. N. Bee, MA, F.LS., and William 
Greenwood, F.L.S. (Plates viii- ix.) ‘ 


oe ee oe SHO os .s 


Notes on Australian ‘Diptera. ‘xxiv. By i R. Malloch. (Communicated aps 
by I. M. Mackerras.) (Forty-four Wext-figures!). 4. 0.5 


Parut 


PROCEEDINGS : 


OF THE j 


_INNEAN SOCIETY 


-~ 


New SoutH WALES 


of 1930. 


Part Iv ei: 30 5-492). 


CONTAINING: PAPERS READ IN JULY-SEPTEMBER, 
With pag plates, ‘one portrait and coloured supplement. 
[Plates x-xvii] 


SYDNEY: 
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY 


‘THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING Co., LD 
Seamer ‘Street, Glebe, Sydney, — 


; Pes and : 

_ SOLD BY THE SOCIETY, 
Macleay: tee 16 College Street, pence: 
a8 et eee ase 1930 
RES yh 4 Pe ee eR CE” “8/6. 


; 


Registered. ae the General Post Office, Sydney, for transmission 
r De post as a periodical. 


* 


oe. - ~ Agent in Hurope: 
2 Messrs. DuLau & Co., 32 Old Bond Street, London, W.1. 


ee 


PROCEEDINGS, 1930, PART 4. 


\ 
CONTENTS. SHO oe 
Pages. 

Joseph Henry Maiden. (Memorial Series, No. 3.) (With Portrait.) .. 355-370 ~ 


The Origin of Endemism in the Angiosperm Flora of Australia. By the. 
late Professor A. Anstruther Lawson, D.Sc., F. R.S.E. (Communicated — Mie a 
by Dr. J. McLuckie.) (Plates 7 ae i en MME Cnn sc SMa eRe GSE Ct) 


\ 


Goulburn—a Vital Point on the New South Wales Highlands. ‘By B.A. 
Craft, B. Se., Linnean Macleay Fellow of fine Society in Geography. ae 
CLiwor (Pext- Heung.) cis te Vien aeaeec tiie toed aha tere pases sled eee 381-385 


On Grevillea Gaudichaudii R. Br., a Supposed Natural Hybrid between if 
Grevillea laurifolia Sieb. and G. acanthifolia A.C. Part i. Analysis 
of the Hybrid... By J. McLuckie, Dise:, M.A. (Plates xii-xv; and 


ninékeenVext fe ures.) Mo ete eri oa eG ee Le Sy dines Wad A tes Gees 386-412 


“ 


Notes on the Autumn Orchids of the South Maitland Coalfields, N.S.W., 
with Description of a New Species of Pterostylis. By the Rev. 
H: MR. Rupp)’ B.A” (Three Wext-figures.)\)/.. 308, ae aia lige 


The Topography and Water Supply of Cox’s River, N.S.W. By F. A. ee 
Craft, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the ae in Geography. — vee 
(Bour.Pext-igures: ))7 Sh cre rae ie ace oe SN eh gig tare Usa Aelia 


Notes on Australian Diptera. De Gia Baie bal Be Malloch. (Communicated by 
Dr. G. A. Waterhouse.) (Highteen Text-figures.) .. +. .. .. .. 429-450 


Descriptions of New Species of Australian poueenteha: xxi. By Arthur. 
1 OS BYP: eres ca DC are Mme nraGes fC NE GS) nee Mia Meee eas amine STIL G7 


\ ¥ y he i ahs ra 
=a 
t 


Notes on Gall-making Goccide with Descriptions of New Species. ii. By 10 el aaa 
Walter. W. Froggatt, (P.U.8. (Plates (xvi-xvil.) (2.0600). ie it AOS Ae ae 


An Abnormal Xanthium Burr. By J. Calvert, M.Sc., F.L.8.. (Communi- +> girs ie 
cated by Dr. B. TY, Dickson.) (One Text-figure.) .. °.. aN Se steaciane 475-476 rare 


Trichopterygidae of Australia ‘nd Tasmania. Descriptions of Six. New 
Genera and Eleven New Species. By Cedric Deane, A.M.1.E. Aust. eae 
(Twenty-two Text feunes: ideo eee cen Baise ave aie ee Rory) ha eA Ug eT 


Notes on Australian Diptera: xxvi. By J. R. Malloch. (Communicated 4 § 
by Dr..G./A. Waterhouse.) (Three: Text-fizures,) 0.0 320... Se 488 AO 


BY J. R. MALLOCH. ’ 491 


Genus OcHTHIPHILA Fallen. 
This genus is almost as widely distributed as Leucopis, but it is unknown to 
me from Australia and its life-history details have not been clearly established. 


» 


‘ Genus CHAMAEMYIA Panzer. 
This genus occurs in the old world and I have taken it in the United States. 
[It was for many years considered as a synonym of Ochthiphila, but it is quite 
distinct. 


J 


Family ORTALIDAE. 
ae Genus RIvELIIA Robineau-Desvoidy. 
Up to the present time I have seen three species of this genus from Australia. 
They may be distinguished from each other as in the key presented below. 


Key to the Species. 

1. Wing without black fasciae, with only the following black marks: Along costa to 
slightly beyond humeral cross-vein, in the entire subcostal cell, and a _ spot 
on tip of third vein touching costa which extends from about midway between 
apices of second and third veins to a little below apex of latter, but never to 
HOME Wels (Pex b atl pus ar cen eee Tee eis Sue En sc RMN Ue Ne connata Thomson. 

Wing with more extensive black markings, the basal and apical marks much larger, 
and two complete, or almost complete, fasciae centrally, one over inner cross- 
VET the sOUNE JO VERROULEr CROSSSVELN. co shies hyenas eee Pata tiene te fin ileus Bao 2 


2. Apical dark’ mark on wing never encroaching on tip of marginal cell, though there 
may be an isolated: dark spot there, and not extending more than midway 
across first posterior cell near its apex, costal cell almost uniformly dark; 

femora and) tibiae black, knees yellow (Text-fig. 2) .......... isolata, n. sp. 
Apical dark mark on wing more elongate, always encroaching upon apex of marginal 
cell and extending over entire apex of first posterior cell to apex of fourth 
vein, apical half or more of costal cell hyaline (Text-fig. 3); legs generally 
SVIOTONWe Leth nee wi aca Ra Hn A A eae HUT MIA PASI Aiea aN ANT a crt i virgo Hendel 


Text-fig. 1.—Wing of Rivellia connata. 
Text-fig. 2.—Wing of Rivellia isolata. 
Text-fig. 3.—Wing of Rivellia virgo. 


RIVELLIA CONNATA Thomson. 
IT have already recorded this species from Australia. It occurs in the Samoan 
and Fiji Islands. 


ne i . 3 ed 


492 NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA, XXvVi- 


pee virgo Hendel. eee 


given under the description of the latter and in the foregoing LN Wing as 
figure 3. 5 

Locality: Vovberion N “Qld, jee 1911, 3,700 feet (Deddy. oa Lichtwar 
collection, Deutsches Entomologisches. Museum, Pex Dalle nay 


SH hy.7 ? 


RIVELLIA asbuar, n. Sp. 


darkened apially: aristae black; palpi aos: paler at apices. oe. = r 
metallic- pine) slightly, obscured by grey-dusting. ee concolorous 


covered with decumbent black hairs. Legs black, apices ‘of coxae and femora, a 
all tarsi except their apices, fulvous yellow. Wings hyaline, with black mar g 
as in Tox tbere 2. Calyptrae Wels: pels paeine in type wee 


the mouth- -margin. Thorax an on face abned humeral bristle, one ee (0) 
prescutellar acrostichal and dorsocentral bristles, and four strong ae HS 
seutellars. Legs normal, mid femur of male with a series of pale, bristly ai 
on the posteroventral surface. 
Length, 4-45 mm. De Seana ; 
Type, (ee Illawarra, N.S.W.; allotype, Botany sae N. Ra (HL Petersor 


ie as 


lacks a well aaned hoe dot at apex of the eer cell, but possibl 


character is variable and not a sexual one. Seg 


a 


(Issued 15th December, 1930.) 


| Vol. LV. | : No. 231. 
PROCEEDINGS 
> LINNEAN SOCIETY 


New SoutH WALES 


FOR THE YEAR 


-1930. 


Part V (Pages 493-750.) 


CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN OCTOBER-NOVEMBER. 
With twenty-four plates. 
[Plates xviii-xl.] 


SYDNEY: 
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY 


THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING Co., LID, 
Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, . 


and 


SOLD BY THE SOCIETY, 
Macleay House, 16 College Street, Sydney. 


“ 1930. 
PRICE 16/3. 


Registered at the General Post Office, Sydney, for transmission 
: by post as a periodical. 


s ; Agent in Europe: 
Messrs. DuLAu & Co., 32 Old Bond Street, London, W.1. 


Part 4 of the First Series, the Publications of the Linnean Society of ‘New South | 


LIST OF OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1930-31. 


President: 
E. Cheel. ‘ ; A i 
‘ Vice-Presidents: d : 3 
W. R. Browne, D.Sc. A. F. Basset ‘Hull. ie 
H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. H. S. H. Wardlaw, D.Sc. 


Hon. Treasurer: G. A. Waterhouse, D.Sc., B.E., F.E.S. oe ee 
Secretary: A. B. Walkom, D. Se. ee a 4 Ge 


: Council: 

Cc. Anderson, M.A., D.Sc. W. W. Froggatt, PLS. 
E. GC. Andrews, B.A., F.G.S. G. M. Goldfinch. ig 
W. R. Browne, D.Se. — A. G. Hamilton. ie ig ee 
Professor A. N. Burkitt, M.B., B.Sc. A. F. Basset Hull. ; Peeve 20! 
H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sc. - 
HE. Cheel. Professor T. G. B. Osborn, D.Sc. 
Professor W. J. Dakin, D.Sc. A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. 2 f 
Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, K.B.E.,  H.S. H. Wardlaw, D.Sc. _ a: ae 

C.M.G., D.S.O., M.A., D.Sc., ERS. - G. A. Waterhouse, D-Sc., B.E., F.E.S. ee 
T. Storie ELE M.B., Ch.M. WwW. L. Waterhouse, D.Sc. Ager. Koa oe 


Auditor: F. H. Rayment, F.C.P.A. 


NOTICE. ee : ee 


Tue Parts of the PROCEEDINGS are issued regularly to Societies and Institutions | 
on this Society’s exchange list, and application for the replacement of any Part. not aie 
received in due course should be made without delay. No such application for 
replacement will be considered unless it is received by the Secretary within twelve Ks 
months of the date of publication of the Part concerned. ee, 


With the exception of Volume II, Part 4, Volume V, Part 2, and Volume VL e 


Wales may be obtained from the Society, Macleay House, 16 College Street, Sydney, 
or from Dulau and Co., 32, Old Bond Street, London, W.1. ihe stock of copies ie 
First Series, Volumes I to VI is limited. ‘ wae aie 


af 


_ FIRST SHRIES. (3 
Proceedings for 1875-76, Vol. I—Part 1, 3s.; Part 2, 3s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, Me 6a. ee 

Proceedings for 1877, Vol. II.—Part 1, 4s.; Part 2, 4s. Part 3, 4s. Aaa 
Proceedings for 1878, Vol. IIl—Part 1, 5s.; Part 2, 5s.; Part 38, 6s.; $ “Part 4, Ts. Ga : 
Proceedings for 1879, Vol. PV:.—Part 1, 6s!;\ Part 2, 6s:; ‘Part 8, 8s.; Part 4, 6s, 6d. 
Proceedings for 1880, Vol. V.—Part 1, 6s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 7s. 6d. : 
Proceedings for 1881, Vol. VI.—Part 1, 6s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 10s. 5 
Proceedings for 1882, Vol. VII.—Part ae 7s..6d.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, Ose 

‘Proceedings for 1883, Vol. VIII.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 5s.; Part 3, 7s.; Part 4, 8s. ; 
Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, £1 5s.; Part 4, £1) DSieee 
Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.—Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 15s.; Part we 


17s. 6d. pate 
SHCOND SERIES. ts e roast 
Proceedings for 1886, Vol. I.—Part 1, 10s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 38, 18s.; Part 4 — 
12s. 6d. Sa +N; 


Proceedings for 1887, Vol. II.—Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4, Ele ise 
Proceedings for 1888, Vol. III.—Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, £1 4s.; Part 3, £1; Part 4, 18s. 
Proceedings for 1889, Vol. IV.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 16s.; Part 3, 19s.; Part 4, 11s. 
Proceedings for 1890, Vol. V.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 9s. hee 
Proceedings for 1891, Vol. VI.—Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 17s.; Part 4, 2; Oe 
7s. 6d. ' ; 
Proceedings for 1892, Vol. VII.—Part 1, 6s. 6d.; Part 2, 4s. 6d.; Part 3, 8s.; Part 4, ‘Qs. 
Proceedings for 1893, Vol. VIII.—Part 1, 5s,: Part 2, 11s.; Part 3, 6s.; Part 4, My fatie 
Proceedings for 1894, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 13s.; Part 4, 8s. 


Proceedings for 1895, Vol. X.—Part 1, 16s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.;.Part 3, 10s.; Supplement, 
1s. 6d.; Part 4, 12s. 
Proceedings for 1896.—Part 

Part 4, £1 7s. 6d. 


Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 


for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 


Part 4, 15s. 


Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 


for 
for 
for 


Part 4, with 


Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 


for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 


Part 5, 2s. 


Proceedings 


for 


Part 5, 2s. 


Proceedings 


for 


Part 5, 2s. 
Proceedings for 
Part 5, 2s. 
Proceedings for 
Part 5, 2s. 
Proceedings for 
Paitin 5, se 
Proceedings for 
Part ibs 9S. ant) Os92S. 
Proceedings for 1929.—Part 
“12s. 6d.; Part 6, 2s. 
Proceedings for 1930.—Part ‘11, 


16s. 3d. 


os. 


The MactEay MemorIAL VOLUME [issued October 13th, 1893]. 
pages, with portrait, and forty-two plates. 


f DESCRIPTIVE CATALOGUE OF AUSTRALIAN FISHES. 
A few copies only. Price £1 net. 


1897.—Part 
1898.—Part 
1899,.—Part 
1900.—Part 
1901.—Part 
1902.—Part 
1903.—Part ~ 
1904.—Part 
1905.—Part 


1, 


1, 


9s.; Supplement, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 6s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; 


10s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 

$s.; Part 2, 6s.; Part 3, 12s:; Part 4, 14s. 

12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 10s. 6d. 
8s.; Part 2, 10s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s. 6d.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. 
10s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. 

is.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Supplement, 3s., 


9s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 15s. 
10s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d:; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 10s. 
with Supplement, 7s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 


12s. 6d.,; 


Supplement, 10s. 6d. 


1906.—Part 
1907.—Part 
1908.—Part 
1909.—Part 
1910.—Part 
1911.—Part 
1912.—Part 
1913.—Part 
1914.—Part 
1915.—Part 
1916.—Part 
1917.—Part 
1918.—Part 
1919.—Part 
1920.—Part 
1921.—Part 
1922.—Part 
1923.—Part 
1924.—Part 
1925.—Part 
1926.—Part 
1927.—Part 
1928.—Part 


ils 
a1 
a 
1, 
a 
1, 
ile 
ats 
1, 
i; 
1, 
1, 
Up 
1, 
its 
1, 
1, 


12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. 
8s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 18s. 

Ws.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 
12s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 8, 14s.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. 
1is.; Part 2, 11s.; Part 3, 7s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 

9s. 6d.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s. 
8s. 6d.; Part 2, 25s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. 
14s): Part, 2; %s-6d.; Part 3,,6s.;) Part 4, i3s.: 
LoS Part ye, Lisi: Partes, cuss bare 4,.19s: 

17%s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 11s. 
1OSerPart.c) less “Partio, fos. ark 4) los, 

14s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. 
20s.; Part 2, 14s.; Part 3, 2is.; Part 4, 19s. 


12s. 6d.; Part 2, 11s. 6d.; Part 3, 17s. 6d.; Part 4, las. 

10s. 9d.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 11s. 

9s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 9s. 6d. 

2S OG. sear 2) LosHvod..) Pare von Lis: Party 4), las), 

2s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 16s.; Part 4, 13s. 6d; 

QslParthes diss 6G dear ton tos: Odsemiante at LOSh: 

CSawirbanee. es jbeart lon Ss: /9Gis, bart 44s.) 6d); 
[SSka6dsh Parte ios OSmrodent ental DSc 


28.; Part 2, 
2s. Bue Part 2, 10s. 6d.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 3d.; 
2s.; Part 2, 8s. 6a: Part 3, 8s. 9d.; Part 4, 10s.; 
2s.; Part 2, 6s. 3d.; Part 3, 8s. 6d.; Part 4, 11s.; Part 5, 


2s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 8s. 9d.; Part 4, 8s. 6d.; Part 5, 


INDEX TO VoLUMES I-L OF THE PROCEEDINGS [Issued 15th February, 1929]. pp. 108. 


Royal 4to. ui. and 308 
Price £2 2s. 4 


By William Macleay, F.L.S. [1881]. 


The TRANSACTIONS OF THE HNTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF New SouTH WALBS, 2 vols., 8vo. 
[Vol. I (complete in five parts, 1863-66), price 70s. net, Parts 2-5 10s. each; Vol. II 
(complete in five parts, 1869-73), price 30s. net, or single Parts, 7s. 6d. each.] 


PROCEEDINGS, 1930, PART 5. 


CONTENTS. 


_ Notes on the Australian Species of the Genus Atriplex. By R. H. 
Anderson, B.Sc.(Agr:). (Plate xviii.) p ; : 


The Uterine Cycle of Pregnancy. and Pseudo-Pregnancy as it is in the 
Diprotodont Marsupial Bettongia cuniculus, with Notes on other 
Reproductive Phenomena in this Marsupial. By T. Thomson Flynn, 
D.Sc. (Plates xix-xxi and three Text-figures.) 


' New Guinea and Australian Coleoptera. Notes and New Species. By 
H. J. Carter, B.A., F.H.S. (Thirteen Text-figures.) 


On Placentation in Reptiles. ii. By H. Claire Wee D.Sc. (Plates 


XX1I-XXVili and ten Text-figures.) Bie 


Xerophytes and Xerophily, with Special Reference to Protead Distribu- 
tion. By Oswald H. Sargent. (Communicated by A. G. Hamilton.) 


Additions to the Flora of New England, N.S.W. By W. F. Blakely and. 
Rev. E. N. McKie, B.A. (Plates xxix—xxx.) 


Another New Species of Bucalyptus from New England. By Ww. EF 
Blakely. (Plate xxxi.) 


Australian Rust Studies. iii. Initial Results of Breeding for Rust 
Resistance. By W. lL. Waterhouse, D.Sc.(Agr.). (Plates xxxii—- 
- XxXxiv.) 


The Geology of the South Coast of New South Wales. Part iii. The 
Monzonitic Complex of the Mount Dromedary District. By Ida A. 
Brown, B.Sc., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Geology. 
(Plates xxxv-xxxix and three Text- figures. ) 


Notes on a Cellulose-decomposing Soil Fungus of an unusual Character. 
By H. L. Jensen, Macleay Hence to the Society. (elate x1.) 


The Leaf-buds of some Woody Boron: in the New South Wales Flora. 
By Gladys Carey, B:Se. (Seventy-five Text-figures. ) 


Fletcher Memorial Lecture, 1930. Joseph James Fletcher, an Idealist 
secretary. By A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Se. 


Corrigendum. 
Page 499, line 24, for Atriplex acutivaluum read Atriplex acutibractum. 


J 


Pages. . 


493-505 


” t 


506-531 


532-549 


550-576 


7 


577-586 
587-598 


594-595 


596-636 


637-698 


708-737. 


738-750 


699-707 


(Issued 16th February, 1931.) 


oc=> : —lo 


I Vol. LV. : No. 232. ] 
Part 6. 


PROCEEDINGS ~— [°' 
3 (on ree i? 
LINNEAN SOCIETY 


New SoutH WALES 


FOR THE YEAR 


toe Ss : 1930. 


Part VI (Pages xxix-lzrr). 


ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES, 
: LIST OF MEMBERS, AND INDEX. 


SYDNEY: 
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY 


THE AUSTRALASIAN MEDICAL PUBLISHING Cco., LTD, 
Seamer Street, Glebe, Sydney, 


and 


SOLD BY THE SOCIETY, 
Science House, Gloucester and Essex Streets, Sydney. 


1931. 
PRICE 2/-, 


Registered at the General Post Office, Sydney, for transmission 
i : by post as a periodical. 


= Agent in Hurope: 
i Messrs. Dutav & Co., 32 Old Bond Street, London, W.1. 


THE : 7 


¢ Xx 
% at € 
Ra 
‘f 
~*~ 
’ F 
. ae Jy 
7 f 
ye 
5 = 
ee 


LIST OF OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1930-31. 8 


President: : 
’ EB. Cheel. : 
: - WViece-Presidents: ; hs 3 
W. R. Browne, D.Sc. ; AR Bassete EMail. yaa ae eee. 
H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S- : H.-S. H. Wardlaw, D.Se. aaa 
Hon. Treasurer: G. A. Waterhouse, D.Sc., B.E., F.E.S. a eae ee 
Secretary: A. B. Walkom, D-Se. : Ce iepe 
: Council: i PoE ERs Sa 
Cc. Anderson, M.A., D.Sc. - W. W. Froggatt, PLS. re 2 
EH. C. Andrews, B.A., F.G.S. = G. M. Goldfinch. % Ee 
‘W. R. Browne, D.Sc. , A. G Hamilton. 
Professor A. N. Burkitt, M.B., B.Sc. _ A. F. Basset Hull. % 
HS. Carter; BAG; (EVES > A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sc. tec pee 
BE. Cheel. \ Professor T. G. B. Osborn, D.Se, on ae ea 
Professor W. J. Dakin, D. Se. A. B. Walkom, D.Sc. ah Seeley teases | 3 
Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, K.B.E., H. S. H. Wardlaw, D.Sc. ; te 
C.M.G., D.S.0., M.A., D.Se.,, F.R.S. — -G. A. Waterhouse, D.Sc., B.E., FES. 
T. Storie Dixson, M.B., Ch.M.  . W. L. Waterhouse, D.Se.Agr. 


Auditor: F. H. Rayment, F.C.P.A. Seer Be a 


NOTICE. 


WirH the exception of ues I-VI of the Is QeDeL ae moe the Society’ 


Linnean sues of N.S.W. may De epomee from the Society, Suigee. House, 
Gloucester and Essex Streets, Sydney, or from Dulau & Co., 32 Old Bond Street, 
London, W.1., at the following prices :— 


With the exception of Volume II, Part 4, Volume V, ‘Part 2, and Volume Vv 
Part 4 of the First Series, the Publications of the Linnean Society of New South © 
Wales may be obtained from the Society, Macleay House, 16 College Street, Sydne 
or from Dulau.and Co., 32, Old Bond Street, London, W.1. The stock of copies of 
First Series, Volumes I to VI is limited. eae eer 


FIRST SERIES. ‘ : Bese 


Proceedings for 1875-76, Vol. I—Part 1, 3s.; Part 2, 3s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, 7s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1877, Vol. II.—Part 1, 4s.; Part 2, 4s.. Part 3, 4s. ei eee 
Proceedings for 1878, Vol. III.—Part 1, 5s.; Part 2, 5s.; Part 3, 6s.; Part 4, 7s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1879, Vol. IV.—Part i, 6s.; Part 2, 6s.; Part 3, 8s.; Part 4, 6s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1880, Vol. V.—Part 1, 6s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 7s. 6d: — 

Proceedings for 1881, Vol. VI.—Part 1, 6s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 10s. 
Proceedings for 1882, Vol. VII.—Part 1, 7s. 6d.; Part 2, 10s.; Part-3, 5s.; Part 4, i0s. 
Proceedings for 1883, Vol. VIII.—Part i, 10s.; Part 2, 5s.; Part 3, 7s.; Part 4, 8s. : 
Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, £1 5s.; Part 4, £1 5s. 
Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.—Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4. 
17s. 6d. ; A ee ae 
SECOND SERIES. 


Proceedings for 1886, Vol. I.—Part 1, 10s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 13s.; Baxt: c 
12s. 6d. 
Proceedings for 1887, Vol. II.—Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4, £1 Is. - 
Proceedings for 1888, Vol. III.—Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, £1 4s.; Part 3, £1; Part 4, 18s. 
Proceedings for 1889, Vol. IV.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 16s.; Part 3, 19s.; Part 4, 11s. 
Proceedings for 1890, Vol. V.—Part 1, 11s.; Part 2, 9s.; Dart 3, 93.; ; Part 4, 9s. 
Proceedings for 1891, Vol. Vo 1, 10s.; Part’ 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 178.; g Part Aye 
7s. 6d. a 
Proceedings for 1892, Vol. VII.—Part 1, 65. 6d.; Part 2, 4s. 6d.; Part 3, ae Part 4 es, 
Proceedings for 1893, Vol. VIII—Part 1, 5s.: Part 2, 11s.; Part 3, 6s.; Part 4, 9s. 
Proceedings for 1894, Vol. IX.—Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 13s.; Part 4, 8s. 


Proceedings for 1895, Vol. X.—Part 1, 16s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s.; Supplement, 
1s. 6d.; Part 4, 12s. 
Proceedings for 1896.—Part 1, 
Part 4, £1 7s. 6d. 


Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 


for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 


Part 4, 15s. 


Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 


for 
for 
for 


Part 4, with 


Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
“Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 
Proceedings 


for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 
for 


Part 5, 2s. 


Proceedings 


for 


Part 5, 2s. 


Proceedings 


for 


Part 5, 2s. 
Proceedings for 
Part 5, 2s. 
Proceedings for 
Part 5, 2s. 
Proceedings for 
Part 5, 2s. 
Proceedings for 
Part 5, 9s.; Part 6, 2s. 
Proceedings for 1929.—Part 
Miss6de; Part 6.25) 
Proceedings for 1930.—Part 
LGStcoth< ue are- 6.205. 


5s. 


1897.—Part 
1898.—Part 
1899.—Part 
1900.—Part 
1901.—Part 
1902.—Part 
1903.—Part 
1904.—Part 
1905.—Part 


1, 
1, 
1, 
1, 
E; 
1, 


1, 


1, 


i 


9s.; Supplement, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 6s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; 


10s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 

3s.; Part 2, 6s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4, 14s. 

12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, 10s. 6d. 
8s.; Part 2, 10s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s. 6d.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. 
10s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, 17s. 6d. 

7s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Supplement, 3s.; 


9s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 15s. 
10s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 10s. 
with Supplement, 7s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; 


Supplement, 10s. 6d. 


1906.—Part 
1907.—Part 
1908.—Part 
1909.—Part 
1910.—Part 
1911.—Part 
1912.—Part 
1913.—Part 
1914.—Part 
1915.— Part 
1916.—Part 
1917.—Part 
1918.—Part 
1919.—Part 
1920.—Part 
1921.—Part 
1922.—Part 
1923.—Part 
1924.—Part 
1925.—Part _ 
1926.—Part 
1927.—Part 


1928.—Part 


5 
1, 
1, 
1, 
al 
1, 
ie 
1, 
1, 
afr 
1, 
1, 
LF 
1, 
a3 
1, 
16, 


1, 2s. 6d.; Part 2, 10s. 6d.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 3d.; 


1, 


12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s. 6d.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. 
8s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 18s. 

Ws.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 

12s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. 

lls.; Part 2, 11s.; Part 3, 7s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d. 

9s. 6d.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s. 

8s. 6d.; Part 2, 25s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s. 
14s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 6s.; Part 4, 13s. 

13s.s Part 2.1 %ss Part.3:-25s;; Part 4; 19s; 

hiss Parteo tes: 6G.c7 bart o,,10s.;ePart 4, Lis: 

10s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 19s. 

14s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. 6d. 
20s.; Part 2, 14s.; Part 3, 21s.; Part 4, 19s. 

12s. 6d.; Part 2, 11s. 6d.; Part 3, 17s. 6d.; Part 4, 13s. 
10s. 9d.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 11s. 

9s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 7s. 6d.; Part 4, 9s. 6d. 

2s. 6d.; Part 2, 13s. 6d.; Part 3, 1lis.; Part 4, 13s.; 


2s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 16s.; Part 4, 13s. 6d.; 
2s.; Part 2, 18s. 6d.;_ Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 10s.; 
28.3; Part 2) L2s:; “Part 3,..8s. 9d.; Part. 4,- 14s. 6d.; 


2S Panieees do S.100 obarty oc. 0S.  OGr. Part. 4,--10Sr 


2s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 8s. 94.; Part 4, 10s.; 


12S cePark 2160S. oO bart, o,.os. 0d tant 4s Part .5, 


1, 2s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 8s. 9d.; Part 4, 8s. 6d.; Part 5, 


INDEX TO VOLUMES I-L OF THE PROCEEDINGS [Issued 15th February, 1929]. pp. 108. 


The MacLEAY MmmMoriIAL VOLUME [issued October 13th, 1893]. Royal 4to. ur. and 308 
pages, with portrait, and forty-two plates. Price £2 2s. 


DESCRIPTIVE CATALOGUE OF AUSTRALIAN FISHES. By William Macleay, F.L.S. [1881]. 


A few copies only. Price £1 net. 


The TRANSACTIONS OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SocieTY or NEw SouTH WALBHS, 2 vols., 8vo. 
{Vol. I (complete in five parts, 1863-66), price 70s. net, Parts 2-5 10s. each; Vol. II 
(complete in five parts, 1869-73), price 30s. net, or single Parts, 7s. 6d. each.] 


Abstract of Proceedings — 
Donations and Exchanges 
List of Members .. .. 


Index Leh Pek OSs 


——- PROCEI 


J 


DINGS, 19: 


CONTENTS. 


oe ee oe oe ee 
ee ee oe ee oe 
oe ee oe ee ee 
oe ee oe oe sie) 
t 
‘ 
» | + 
. 
2, ' 


ii 


——— a) 
— <— 


T 


i 


er’ 


orn eee! 
ere 
me 


Ton 
in 
aH 


OCS % 


bebe ert tle 
pease 
Oe Oe ad 


erent 


hear? 


Heda begste 


i 
weir 


= 


SS 


iad 


ity 
‘ 


i ota. 
Slee 


\. Tea 
i 
cba 


a 4 
fie 


eat 


< Sarees 
Ce eee 


rey 


See eeg ae Serees 


Seance 
Se Sent See, 
eee